JP2024071668A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: There is provided displacement means displaceable to a first position in which game balls can enter second ball entry means and a second position in which game balls cannot easily enter the second ball entry means. The displacement means is displaced from the second position to the first position on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined condition in a specific game state occurring on the basis that a result of determination by determination means is a specific determination result, and the displacement means is displaced from the first position to the second position on the basis of satisfaction of a second condition in a situation in which the displacement means is positioned in the first position by first displacement control. When game balls enter first ball entry means, a predetermined game value is granted to a player. A first mode based on execution of determination, a second mode based on occurrence of a specific game state, and a third mode based on predetermined entry of game balls into the second ball entry means may at least occur. Accordingly, an interest in a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the player's interest in the game by suggesting to the player that they have won a lottery depending on the content of the variable presentation that is being executed.

JP 2006-345901 A

In gaming machines like the one above, there is a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a first ball entry means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be established based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means is established, a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is established, and a specific discrimination means is provided based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. The ball-entry device has a means capable of generating a game state, a second ball-entry means that is different from the first ball-entry means and into which the ball-entry means launched by the launch means can enter, a displacement means that can displace the ball to a first position where the ball-entry means can enter the second ball-entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the second ball-entry means than the first position, and a displacement control means that can at least perform a first displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the second position to the first position, and a second displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the first position to the second position.

The displacement control means is configured to execute the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation in which the displacement means is located at the first position due to the first displacement control.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured so that when a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, a predetermined value is awarded to the player, and is configured so that at least a first mode based on the determination made by the determination means can occur.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured to be capable of at least generating a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a third mode based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there is provided a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a first ball entry means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be established based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means is established, a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is established, and a specific gaming state is determined based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. a means for generating a ball that can enter the ball; a second ball entry means that is different from the first ball entry means and into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter; a displacement means that can displace the ball to a first position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the first position; and a displacement control means that can at least perform a first displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the second position to the first position and a second displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the first position to the second position.

The displacement control means is configured to execute the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation in which the displacement means is located at the first position by the first displacement control.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured so that when a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, a predetermined value is awarded to the player, and is configured so that at least a first mode based on the determination made by the determination means can occur.

This makes it possible to generate the first mode.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured so that at least a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state can occur.
This allows the second mode to occur.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured so that at least a third mode can occur based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means.

This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board and the operating unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the window movable unit taken along line XX in FIG. 2. 4A is a rear view of the window movable unit, and FIG. 4B is a front view of the window movable unit. 4A is a rear view of the window movable unit, and FIG. 4B is a front view of the window movable unit. FIG. 1 is an exploded front oblique view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-shaped member. 1 is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-shaped member. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of a first operating unit, and FIG. 1B is a front perspective view of a feather-shaped member and an auxiliary member showing the meshing state of the feather-shaped member and the auxiliary member. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a first operating unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit; FIG. 2 is a top view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. 13 is a rear view of the support plate portion, the vane-shaped member, the auxiliary member, and the fixed transmission plate. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the support plate portion, the vane-shaped member, the auxiliary member, and the fixed transmission plate. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the support plate portion, the vane-shaped member, the auxiliary member, and the fixed transmission plate. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the support plate portion, the vane-shaped member, the auxiliary member, and the fixed transmission plate. FIG. 6A to 6C are schematic diagrams illustrating the displacement relationship of a first operating unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a second operating unit. FIG. 13 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a second operating unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a second operating unit; FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of a hollow member 740. 48(a) to 48(c) are cross-sectional views of the light-guiding member, the plate-shaped displacement member, and the hollow member taken along the line XLIX-XLIX in FIG. 47. FIG. 4A and 4B are front views of the drive unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of a second operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of a second operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of a second operating unit. 54A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LVa-LVa in FIG. 53, and FIG. 54B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LVb-LVb in FIG. 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing an example of a change in conduction of left and right electromagnetic solenoids over time and a change in the posture of a plate-shaped displacement member. 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing an example of a change in conduction of left and right electromagnetic solenoids over time and a change in the posture of a plate-shaped displacement member. FIG. 13 is a top view of the second operating unit. A partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LIX-LIX in Figure 58. A partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LIX-LIX in Figure 58. A partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LIX-LIX in Figure 58. A partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LIX-LIX in Figure 58. A partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXIII-LXIII in Figure 58. A partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXIII-LXIII in Figure 58. A partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXIII-LXIII in Figure 58. A partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXIII-LXIII in Figure 58. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the rotational displacement of a large receiving portion. FIG. A partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in Figure 58. A partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in Figure 58. A partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in Figure 58. A partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in Figure 58. A cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXXII-LXXII in Figure 58. 13A and 13B are rear views of a window movable unit according to a second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a front view of a first operating unit in the third embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. 6A to 6C are schematic diagrams illustrating the displacement relationship of a first operating unit. 13A and 13B are front views of a drive unit of a second operating unit in a fourth embodiment. 54(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second operating unit of the fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 53. A front view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. An exploded oblique front view of the base plate, prize opening unit, and ball throwing unit. 1A is a front view of the winning port unit, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the winning port unit. 1A is a perspective front view of the winning port unit, and FIG. 1B is a perspective rear view of the winning port unit. An exploded oblique front view of the prize slot unit. An exploded oblique rear view of the prize slot unit. 1A is a front view of the front unit, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the front unit. FIG. FIG. 1A is a front view of a displacement member, FIG. 1B is a side view of the displacement member, and FIG. 1C is a perspective front view of the displacement member. A rear view of the prize opening unit and displacement member in range XCI of Figure 87 (b). A rear view of the prize opening unit and displacement member in range XCI of Figure 87 (b). 4A is a side view of the drive unit, FIG. 4B is a top view of the drive unit, and FIG. 4C is a perspective front view of the drive unit. FIG. FIG. 93(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit taken along line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 93(b). A cross-sectional view of the prize slot unit taken along line XCVII-XCVII in Figure 83. 97(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit taken along line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 97. 1A is a front view of a specific winning port unit, FIG. 1B is a rear view of the specific winning port unit, and FIG. 1C is a top view of the specific winning port unit. An exploded oblique front view of a specific winning port unit. An exploded oblique rear view of the specific winning port unit 950. 99(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a specific winning port unit taken along line CII-CII in FIG. 99(c). 13A and 13B are oblique front views of a specific winning port unit. 104(a) is a front view of a specific winning port unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning port unit taken along line CIVb-CIVb in FIG. 104(a). 1A is a top view of a specific winning port unit and a drive unit, and FIG. 1B is a side view of the specific winning port unit and a drive unit. 106(a) is a cross-sectional view of a specific winning port unit and a drive unit taken along line CVIa-CVIa in FIG. 105(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a specific winning port unit and a drive unit taken along line CVIb-CVIb in FIG. 106(a). 1A is a front view of the throwing unit, and FIG. 1B is a side view of the throwing unit. 1A is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit. 4A is a front view of the sorting unit, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the sorting unit. FIG. FIG. 112(a) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109(a), and FIG. 112(b) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). 112(a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the distribution unit in the range CXIII of FIG. 112(b). 4A is a front view of the passage unit, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the passage unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. 4A is a front view of the replacement unit, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the replacement unit. 118(a) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit taken along line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 117(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit taken along line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 118(a). A cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa in Figure 81. 120(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of Figure 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the line CXXb-CXXb of Figure 120(a). 120(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of Figure 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the line CXXb-CXXb of Figure 120(a). FIG. 23 is a rear view of the front unit and the displacement member in the seventh embodiment. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of a drive unit and a drive shaft according to an eighth embodiment. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of a drive unit and a displacement member according to a ninth embodiment. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base and the displacement member in the tenth embodiment. 13A and 13B are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base and the displacement member in the eleventh embodiment. 13A and 13B are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. 129(a) is a rear view of the front unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit along line CXXIXb-CXXIXb in FIG. 129(a). 130(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit taken along line CXXXb-CXXXb in FIG. 130(a). 131(a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize opening unit taken along line CXXXIb-CXXXIb in FIG. 131(a). 23A is a side view of the drive unit in the fourteenth embodiment, FIG. 23B is a top view of the drive unit, and FIG. 23C is a perspective front view of the drive unit. FIG. 133(a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board, and FIG. 133(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 133(a). 15A is a cross-sectional view of a game board according to a fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 15B is a cross-sectional view of a game board according to a sixteenth embodiment. 135(a) is a schematic diagram of the winning port unit in the 17th embodiment viewed from the rear, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional diagram of the winning port unit taken along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in Figure 135(a). FIG. 136(a) is a schematic diagram of the winning port unit viewed from behind, and FIG. 136(b) is a schematic cross-sectional diagram of the winning port unit 930 taken along line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb in FIG. 136(a). 137(a) is a schematic diagram of the winning port unit viewed from the rear, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional diagram of the winning port unit 930 taken along line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137(a). 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the operation device. 143(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb in FIG. 143(a). 144(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 144(a). 144 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 143. 145 is a front perspective view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 144 . FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the operation device. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. FIG. 151(a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in Figure 151(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device along line XIVc-XIVc in Figure 151(a). FIG. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. 154(a) is a front view of the drive unit, and (b) is a side view of the drive unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 154(a). FIG. FIG. 155A is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXa in FIG. 155 , and FIG. 155B is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXb in FIG. 155 . 4A and 4B are front views of the release member and the rotating claw member. A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in Figure 143. A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). 13A is a side view of a slide claw member in the second embodiment, FIG. 13B is a side view of a rotating plate member, and FIG. 13C is a side view of a release member. 4A and 4B are side views of the release member, the rotating plate member, and the slide claw member. A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). FIG. 13 is a side view of the tilting device according to the third embodiment. 1A and 1B are side views of the operation device. 1A and 1B are side views of the operation device. FIG. 13 is a side view of the tilting device according to the fourth embodiment. 1A and 1B are side views of the operation device. 1A and 1B are side views of the operation device. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of an operating device according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front oblique view of the lower frame member and the vibration device. 196(a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 196(a), and (c) is a partial top view of the lower frame member taken in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 196(a). 196(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device taken along line LXa-LXa in FIG. 196(a). 196(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a transmission device 5410 and a housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 196(a). FIG. 4A is a front perspective view of a right disc cam, and FIG. 4B is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. FIG. 202(a) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 199, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. 202(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 202(a). 203(a) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 199, and FIG. 203(b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 203(a). 204(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143(a), and FIG. 204(b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 204(a). 205(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143(a), and FIG. 205(b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 205(a). FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member, and a second transmission member of the left disk cam. A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). 13A is a front view of a right disc cam in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a rear view of the right disc cam. 211(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 211(a), and FIG. 211(b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam taken in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 211(a). 213(a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 213(a). 214(a) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 214(a). 215(a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in Figure 215(a), (c) is a front view of the right disc cam, (d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in Figure 215(c), (e) is a front view of the right disc cam, and (f) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in Figure 215(e). 144(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143. 144(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143. A partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143. 144(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143. 144(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143. A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143. A cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143. FIG. 23 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an eighth embodiment. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the inner frame opened (deployed) relative to the outer frame. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the state (deployed) in which the inner frame is open relative to the outer frame and the back pack is open relative to the inner frame. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the inner frame closed against the outer frame and the front frame open (deployed). This is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. 1 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, showing components arranged below the window portion of the front frame in exploded view; FIG. 1 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame, showing the components arranged below the window portion of the front frame in an exploded view; FIG. 1A is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and FIG. 1B is a front perspective view of the binding movable member, showing the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member side by side. 231(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 231(a). 232(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 232(a). (a) is a schematic rear view showing the binding movable member and harness, (b) is a schematic top view of Figure 233(a), (c) is a schematic rear view showing the binding movable member and harness, and (d) is a schematic top view of Figure 233(c). 13A and 13B are schematic top views of the front frame, inner frame, binding movable member and harness, which diagrammatically illustrate the binding movable member and harness. FIG. FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region. FIG. This is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 249(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 249(a). 250(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 250(a). 1A is a side view of the right panel unit, FIG. 1B is a rear view of the right panel unit, and FIG. 1C is a side view of the right panel unit. 252(a) is a schematic side view of the light-guiding member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light-guiding member taken along line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 252(a). FIG. 4 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. 1A is a rear view of the front assembly, and FIG. 1B is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in Figure 261(a), (c) is a top view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in Figure 261(a), and (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in Figure 261(a). (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, rear assembly, upper frame member, main body frame and upper edge plate member taken along line CXXVa-CXXVa in Figure 261(a), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, rear assembly, upper frame member, main body frame and upper edge plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb in Figure 124(a). FIG. 2 is an exploded front oblique view of the game board and inner frame. (a) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. 264(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 264(b). 1A and 1B are side views of a board support device and a game board, each of which is a schematic diagram showing the board support device and the game board. 4A is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and FIG. 4B is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. 4A is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and FIG. 4B is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. FIG. FIG. 4A and 4B are side views of the board surface support device. 4A and 4B are side views of the board surface support device. This is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 223. This is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 223. This is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 223. This is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 223. FIG. FIG. 1A is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and FIG. 1B is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. 1A and 1B are exploded front perspective views of a ball launching unit. 1A to 1C are front views of the ball launching unit showing the ball delivery status by the ball delivery device in chronological order. FIG. (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in Figure 283 (a). 284(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front oblique view of the cutting metal member, showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state shown in FIG. 284(a). A partial front view of the ball launching unit, inner rail and outer rail after the ball is launched. FIG. This is an exploded front oblique view of the performance operation unit. This is an exploded front oblique view of the performance operation unit. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the performance operation unit. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the petal movement device taken along line CLIV-CLIV in Figure 290. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal movement device. FIG. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member, and the slide member, and FIG. 1B is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member, and the slide member. FIG. FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. 4A and 4B are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a central shaft rotation device and a loose fitting device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotation device and the loose fitting device. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device, the driving arm member, and the driven arm member. FIG. An exploded front oblique view of the back panel, side base material, and second performance member. An exploded front oblique view of the drive side arm member, slide plate, and second performance member. 1 is a front view of the petal movement device, the forward and backward movement unit, and the back panel. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the petal operating device and the forward/backward operating unit. FIG. 1 is a front view of the petal movement device, the forward and backward movement unit, and the back panel. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the petal operating device and the forward/backward operating unit. FIG. 1 is a front view of the petal movement device, the forward and backward movement unit, and the back panel. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the petal operating device and the forward/backward operating unit. FIG. (a) is a front oblique view of the petal movement device, (b) is a front view of the petal movement device, (c) is a front view showing the petal movement device in a transparent manner with the central shaft rotation device omitted, and (d) is a front view of the slit member and rotating plate. (a) is a front view of the rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal movement device, (c) is a rear view of the petals and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear oblique view of the petal movement device. (a) is a front oblique view of the petal movement device, (b) is a front view of the petal movement device, (c) is a front view showing the petal movement device in a transparent manner with the central shaft rotation device omitted, and (d) is a front view of the slit member and rotating plate. (a) is a front view of the rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal movement device, (c) is a rear view of the petals and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear oblique view of the petal movement device. (a) is a front oblique view of the petal movement device, (b) is a front view of the petal movement device, (c) is a front view showing the petal movement device in a transparent manner with the central shaft rotation device omitted, and (d) is a front view of the slit member and rotating plate. (a) is a front view of the rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal movement device, (c) is a rear view of the petals and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear oblique view of the petal movement device. FIG. 13 is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit in a ninth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit. FIG. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit. FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit according to a tenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. A front view of the inner frame and dish passage forming member in the 11th embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13A and 13B are partial enlarged front views of the foul ball passage. A partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage. FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device according to the twelfth embodiment. 1A and 1B are front views of a petal movement device. 4A and 4B are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. FIG. 1A and 1B are front views of a petal movement device. FIG. FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in a modification of the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. FIG. 23 is a front oblique view of the operating device according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the operation device. 1A and 1B are front perspective views of an operating device. (a) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in Figure 340(a), (c) is a bottom view of the operating device, (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line CCIIId-CCIIId in Figure 340(a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in Figure 340(a). 227(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 223. 15A is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 15B and 15C are rear views of the fraud detection device. 343(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, (b) is a partial enlarged oblique view of the light-guiding member, which is a schematic representation of an upwardly facing concave portion recessed in the light-guiding member in the region CCVIb of Figure 343(a), (c) is a partial enlarged oblique view of the light-guiding member, which is a schematic representation of a downwardly facing concave portion recessed in the light-guiding member in the region CCVIc of Figure 343(a), (d) is a partial enlarged oblique view of the light-guiding member, which is a schematic representation of a downwardly facing concave portion recessed in the light-guiding member in the region CCVId of Figure 343(a), and (e) is a partial enlarged oblique view of the light-guiding member, which is a schematic representation of an upwardly facing concave portion recessed in the light-guiding member in the region CCVIe of Figure 343(a). A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings on a display screen, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in which three reserved balls are set while the third pattern is changing, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in which four reserved balls are set while the third pattern is changing and character J0 appears from display area C. (a) is a diagram showing the display state when four reserved balls are set during the fluctuation of the third pattern and the no-empty recommended value does not increase, and (b) is a diagram showing the display state when the number of reserved balls increases further from the state in (a) and exceeds the recommended value. (a) is a diagram showing the display state when the number of reserved balls increases in a short period of time, and (b) is a diagram showing the display state when character J0 in display area C indicates the optimal number of reserved balls according to the situation. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when character J1 is displayed in display area C while the third pattern is changing, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when there is a change in the reserved ball while the third pattern is changing and character J2 is displayed in display area C. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum number, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode in which the character displayed in the display area C changes when an over-winning event occurs. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the player is allowed to accumulate the number of reserved balls up to six during a reach, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when the number of reserved balls has accumulated to six and the pattern arrangement has changed. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode of the lucky display for the previous jackpot pending, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when the player presses the button after the number of pending balls has accumulated to six. 13A is a diagram showing the display mode of the performance during the long opening, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the display mode of the variable performance when the long opening is won. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the special pattern jackpot random number table in the first control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variable pattern selection table in the first control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the normal jackpot random number table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the first control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table in the first control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a normal variation pattern selection table, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. A schematic diagram showing an example of a time-saving fluctuation pattern selection table, which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first control example. A schematic diagram showing a winning command table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a hold change selection table in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a hold presentation mode selection table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserved lid range selection table in the first control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the normal reserved lid range selection table in the first control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the predicted A mode reserved lid range selection table in the first control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the predicted B mode reserved lid range selection table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a reserve lid range selection table at the time of short-term winning in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a reserve lid range selection table during a reach performance in the first control example. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a reserved lid command selection table in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a reserved lid color change selection table in the first control example. A schematic diagram showing a lucky reserved command table in the first control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing a background mode selection table in the first control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a reserved character selection table in the first control example. A schematic diagram showing a reserved character change table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the speech bubble selection table in the first control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the normal speech bubble selection table in the first control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the preview A speech bubble selection table in the first control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the preview B speech bubble selection table in the first control example. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a speech bubble table at the time of short-term winning in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a speech bubble table during reach performance in the first control example. A schematic diagram showing a lucky reserved bubble selection table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a reach-in-progress performance lottery table in the first control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a reach start time calculation table in the first control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing a lucky hold lottery table in the first control example. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display data table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the special pattern 1 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern 2 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the normal pattern change start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. A flowchart showing the variation pattern reception processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a lucky display determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. A flowchart showing the reach-in-hold performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the reservation lid setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the reserved character setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the bubble lid setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the winning command receiving processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the short-term winning determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the lucky hold storage process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the short-term winning management processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the reach-in-hold performance management processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the sensor input processing executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the preview display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the mode switching processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the reserved lid command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the reserved character display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a balloon display process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a second control example. A schematic diagram showing the flow of special pattern changes and continuous performances in the second control example. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between continuous performance and background display in the second control example. 13A is a display mode showing the display screen during a continuous performance in the second control example, and FIG. 13B is a display mode showing the display screen during a special performance in the second control example. A display mode showing background changes during continuous performance in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. This is a flowchart showing the special pattern change start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. This is a flowchart showing the start winning processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a second read-ahead process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 11 is a flowchart showing command determination process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing the winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the stop command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing variable display setting process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing the performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the continuous performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the special effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the performance return processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing the performance setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing the continuous performance return processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing special effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. FIG. 13 is a front view of a pachinko machine in a fourth control example. 13A is a diagram showing the display screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the customer waiting screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example. 13A is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen after power is turned on in the fourth control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a variable game screen for the first spin after power is turned on in the fourth control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a volume table in a fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing start-up process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the initial volume setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. A flowchart showing the volume setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the stop command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing volume-related processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. 13A is a diagram showing a storage error A screen when the power is turned on in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a storage error B screen during game operation in the fifth control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. 13 is a timing chart showing a retry operation in the tilting device. 13 is a timing chart showing a case where a touch sensor is detected in the tilting device. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing an operation performance selection table in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a tilting action scenario table in the fifth control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing a tilting operation scenario A table in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a tilting operation scenario B table in the fifth control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the origin detection operation table A in the fifth control example, FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the origin detection operation table B in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram showing the tilt initial operation table in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the start-up processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing sensor input processing 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a retry process during touch input executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a tilt device control process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. A flowchart showing the operation performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the tilt initial operation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the processing during operation performance executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the performance return operation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the retry operation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. 483(a) is a diagram showing the display mode when the reserved balls change to jackpot A and the third pattern is changing, and FIG. 483(b) is a diagram showing the display mode when one more reserved ball is consumed from the state of FIG. 483(a) to become jackpot A. 483(b) is a diagram showing the display state during super time when one more reserved ball is consumed from the state of FIG. 483(b), and FIG. 484(b) is a diagram showing the display state when one more reserved ball is consumed from the state of FIG. 484(a) and a jackpot is obtained with this change. 1A is a diagram showing the display mode during a chance period, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the display mode during a chance period. 13A is a diagram showing the display mode when a big win starts, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the display mode of the presentation of the first round of the big win. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when notifying the player that there is a button effect during a jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when notifying the player that a special bonus has been awarded by pressing the button from the state shown in Figure 487(a). 13A is a diagram showing the display state when the jackpot ends, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the display state when the jackpot ends and a probability mode is entered. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the promotion lottery table in the sixth control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing command judgment processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the variation pattern reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the stopped pattern switching process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the winning command receiving processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the stopped pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related command reception processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the opening processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the big prize ball winning processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the round processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the ending processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring/performance process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the stopping pattern replacement process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the game status setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the big prize processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (a) is a figure showing the display mode during the performance when a long opening is won in the seventh control example, and (b) is a figure showing the display mode during the long opening performance in the seventh control example. A figure showing the display mode during long opening effect restriction in the seventh control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example. A flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. A flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a seventh control example. A flowchart showing the long opening performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 3 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing long release related processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the seventh control example. FIG. 23 is a front view of a pachinko machine in an eighth control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the eighth control example. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen in an eighth control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of the display screen and BGM when the power is turned off in the eighth control example. 13A is a diagram showing the display mode when the power is turned on, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the return fluctuation after the initial setting is completed. This is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of background change according to the timing of the background change operation during special chart change. (a) is a diagram showing the display mode when a background change operation is performed during the slow fluctuation of the third pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the next changing screen after a background change operation is performed during the slow fluctuation. A timing chart showing the changing state of the third pattern, the effective period of the touch sensor, and the flow of operation in the eighth control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a touch effect is executed during high-speed fluctuation, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after a touch operation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when an 8-item reserved effect is executed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode for the first change after an 8-item reserved effect is executed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a new winning occurs after the eight-piece reserved presentation is executed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode for the first change after the eight-piece reserved presentation is executed and the new winning occurs. A figure showing an example of the display mode for the end of the 8-item reserved presentation. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a touch operation is performed during a touch performance, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a special operation is performed during a touch performance. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special effect selection table in the eighth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the vibration pattern data in the eighth control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the 8-item reserve lottery table in the eighth control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device in the eighth control example. A schematic diagram showing an eight-stage performance scenario selection table in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a startup process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the start-up processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing main processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the variation pattern reception process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the fluctuation stop processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the pending number control process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the fluctuation recovery processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the display start-up processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the pending number display update process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the left and right button input processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the SW performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the background change processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the sensor input processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing a mode identification process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in an eighth control example. A flowchart showing the lamp setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the counter update processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 8 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an eight-item display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the hold display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process 8 executed by an MPU in a display control device in an eighth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing a background preview selection table in the 9th control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a silhouette effect is executed in sea mode, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a silhouette effect is executed in mountain mode. A flowchart showing main processing 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. A flowchart showing command determination processing 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing background change processing 9 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a ninth control example. A flowchart showing the fluctuation stop processing 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. A flowchart showing a customer waiting setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a ninth control example. A flowchart showing customer waiting performance processing 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. A timing chart showing the flow of crack presentation in the ninth control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the crack effect starts, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a button is operated during the first period of the crack effect. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode at the end of the second period of the crack effect, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when no button is operated during the first period of the crack effect. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. A schematic diagram showing a crack effect selection table in the tenth control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 10 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a tenth control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. A flowchart showing the crack effect end processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. A flowchart showing the SW performance processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process 10 executed by an MPU in a display control device in a tenth control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of operation presentation pattern 1 during the special prize during the jackpot game period in the 11th control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of operation presentation pattern 2 during the special prize during the jackpot game period in the 11th control example. 11(a) is a diagram showing an example of a presentation screen during a jackpot in the 11th control example, and FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a PUSH presentation screen during a jackpot in the 11th control example. A figure showing an example of the display mode of a successful PUSH performance during a jackpot in the 11th control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a screen during the ending performance in the 11th control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a display screen indicating the success of the ending performance in the 11th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 11th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 11th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the operation performance selection table during the special prize in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the tilting action scenario table during the special prize in the 11th control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario C table in the 11th control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ending scenario table in the 11th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the operation performance execution timing selection table in the 11th control example. This is a flowchart showing the operation performance processing 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th control example. A flowchart showing the ending processing performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th control example. A flowchart showing the opening process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th control example. A flowchart showing round processing 11 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in an eleventh control example. A flowchart showing the ending process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a twelfth control example. A timing chart showing the operation of the reels, the LCD display, and the flow of pseudo sound when there is a final performance during the jackpot game period in the 12th control example. A timing chart showing the operation of the reels, the LCD display, and the flow of pseudo sound when there is no final performance during the jackpot game period in the 12th control example. This is a timing chart showing the operation of the reels, the LCD display, and the flow of pseudo sound when the reels control device is driven during the round performance of the jackpot game period in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing round processing 12 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a twelfth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 12 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the twelfth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the final round processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twelfth control example. 12(a) is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 12th control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 12th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in a twelfth control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the reel control device in the 12th control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the reel control device in the 12th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in a twelfth control example. (a) and (b) are figures showing the correspondence between the background music and the display content of the third pattern display device when the power is cut off during the special pattern change in the 13th control example, and the special pattern change resumes when the power is turned on. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the silhouette preview selection table specified in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the fluctuation stop processing 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the fluctuation recovery process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the display start-up process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the pseudo-variation start processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the variable pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the background change process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the counter update process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the pseudo-variation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. 16A and 16B are figures showing an example of the display form of the mode promotion effect in the 14th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when three identical numbers are lined up vertically in the mode promotion effect in the 14th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode after the background mode is promoted by the mode promotion effect in the 14th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the mode promotion performance selection table specified in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the winning table that constitutes the mode promotion performance selection table in the 14th control example. A schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the loss table that constitutes the mode promotion performance selection table in the 14th control example. A schematic diagram showing an example of the specified contents of the number of rounds display data table in the fourteenth control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example. A flowchart showing the mode promotion performance lottery processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a display setting process 14 executed by an MPU in a display control device in a fourteenth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a drawing content acquisition process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a fourteenth control example.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, FIG. 1 to FIG.
4, as a first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine").
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Fig. 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, an outer shell of which is formed by combining wooden frames into a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side as viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12.
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be able to be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side on which the opening and closing is provided as an axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a number of nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc., is detachably attached from the back side to the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is equipped with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls to the front area of the game board 13, a launching rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided.
(See Figure 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the top and bottom of the left side, and the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are installed as the axis of opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top that protrudes to the front side, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward incline to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and this incline guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is, for example, connected to a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
It is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the screen (see page 13) or changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-3 with built-in light-emitting means such as LEDs.
In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or reach performance is reached, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 lights up or flashes by lighting or flashing the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying the player that a big win is occurring or that the player is in a reach just before the big win.
(See reference) At the upper left, there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which incorporates a light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination unit 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination units 29 to 33 to create a more brilliant appearance.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window portion 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43.
When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of ball lending unit 40, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the degree display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., a so-called cash machine, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to commonize a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top on the left side thereof for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17.
On the right side of the ball 0, there is provided an operating handle 51 which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball while the touch sensor 51a is being pressed.
The handle 51 is fitted with a touch sensor 51a and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") that receives the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is provided with a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding the ball, it is made up of rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like. The base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 is connected to the inner frame 12 through a window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
The structure of the game board 13 will be described below with reference mainly to FIG.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arcuate shape.
is installed in the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 made of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is installed inside the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played according to the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where winning slots and the like are located,
The area into which the launched ball flows.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13.
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the top of the outer rail 62 (upper left of FIG. 2 ) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 2 ) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a force greater than a predetermined force hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area as viewed from the front (lower left side of Fig. 2), first symbol display devices 37A, 37B equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a seven-segment display are disposed. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B display information according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B display information whether a ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 65.
The system is configured to be used in a different way depending on whether a prize is won at the prize slot 140.
When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated.
When the ball enters the second winning port 140, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to be activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors.
The ED is configured so that each LED has a different light emission color (e.g., red, green, blue), and by combining these light emission colors, it is possible to indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 using a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first prize slot 64 and the second prize slot 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it judges there is a jackpot, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be judged here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B have
Not only will the stopping pattern after the change indicate whether the lottery result is a jackpot or not,
In the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is displayed.

Here, a "15R chance jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R chance jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. Also, a "15R normal jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15,
This is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state and also results in a time-saving state for a specified number of fluctuations (e.g., 100 fluctuations).

Moreover, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (during the probability change), in other words, a game state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. The high probability state (during the probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of a hit of the second symbol described below is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than in the probability change. Furthermore, the time-saving state (during the time-saving state) in the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, only the probability of a hit of the second symbol is increased, and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140. On the other hand, the normal state of the pachinko machine 10 refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability change state nor a time-saving state (
Neither the probability of winning the jackpot nor the probability of winning the second symbol has increased.

During the probability of winning or the time limit, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the second winning slot 14
The time for which the feather member 945 (electric device) associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and is set to a longer time than during normal times. When the feather member 945 is in an open state (open state), the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 than when the feather member 945 is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the probability change or time reduction, the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability variation or time reduction, instead of changing the opening time of the feather member 945 associated with the second winning port 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the feather member 945 opens per win may be increased compared to normal times.
During the probability variation or time reduction, the probability of winning the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time during which the feather member 945 associated with the second winning port 140 is opened and the number of times the feather member 945 is opened in one win may be changed. Also, during the probability variation or time reduction, the time during which the feather member 945 associated with the second winning port 140 is opened and the number of times the feather member 945 is opened in one win may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed to be higher than during normal play.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, into which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by winning the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 (initial winning), and displays the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B.
The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 made up of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs a variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the through gate 67, and a second pattern display device (not shown) made up of an LED that displays a variable display of the second pattern using the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. In addition, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, three symbol rows, upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that, instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" symbol and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the changing display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a ``circle'' pattern), the feather member 945 attached to the second winning port 140 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability variable or time-saving mode than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability variable or time-saving mode, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during the normal game state.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, and the player is given more chances to open the wing member 945 of the second winning port 140. Therefore, during the probability variation and the time reduction, the ball can be easily entered into the second winning port 140.

In addition, if the state is made such that the ball is likely to enter the second winning port 140 during the probability variation or time-saving period by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the feather member 945 for one win, etc., the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner may be made constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is set shorter during the probability variation or time-saving period than during normal play, the probability of winning may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the feather member 945 for one win may be set to 100%.
The opening time and the number of times the ball is opened may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display unit 80, and are configured to allow a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gates 67, a lottery for a second symbol is held. After the lottery for a second symbol is held, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery for a second symbol is a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery for a second symbol is a miss, a "×" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that the balls pass through the through gate 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is also displayed by turning on the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). Four second symbol reserved lamps are provided, the maximum number of reserved balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, or by the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used.
The lighting of the symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times).
The number of the first pattern display device 37A is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. The position where the through gate 67 is attached is not limited to the left or right of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example.
Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by 37B, the second symbol reserved lamp does not need to be lit.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can win is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball wins into this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a big win is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 140 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the first winning hole 64 as viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a big win is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). A display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first winning hole 140.
Shown by the pattern display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole.
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140; however, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be five.

A feather member 945 is attached to the second winning opening 140. This feather member 945 is configured to be openable and closable, and is usually in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the feather member 945 is in an open state (expanded state), making it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As mentioned above, during the special and time-limited modes, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal modes.
In addition, the time it takes for the second pattern to change is short, so the second pattern will change to "○".
The pattern becomes easier to be displayed, and the number of times that the feather member 945 is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability variation and the time reduction, the time that the feather member 945 is open becomes longer than during the normal period. Therefore, during the probability variation and the time reduction, a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 than during the normal period can be created.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have a feather member like the second winning slot 140, and is always in a state where a ball can enter.

Therefore, during normal times, the feather member associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140, so the ball is directed toward the first winning opening 64, which does not have a feather member.
The ball is shot so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (a so-called "left hit");
It is advantageous for a player to aim for a big win by winning the first winning slot 64, thereby obtaining more opportunities for the big win lottery.

On the other hand, during the probability variation or time reduction, the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the second winning port 14
Since the feather member 945 attached to 0 is likely to be in an open state, making it easy to win at the second winning port 140, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the through gate 67 to open the feather member, and aiming for a 15R special jackpot by winning at the second winning port 140.

In addition, since the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "hitting from the right" and for the second winning hole 140 by "hitting from the left". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment does not require the player to change the way of shooting the ball between "hitting from the left" and "hitting from the right" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way of shooting the ball.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is disposed below the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is disposed in the approximate center of the variable winning device 65.
If the jackpot lottery held due to winning in the 4th or second winning slot 140 results in a jackpot,
After a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on to show a jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning hole 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when an LED corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. Also, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

An attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the stamps, etc. affixed to the attachment space K1 can be viewed through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 71. The outlets 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning hole 65a.

A large number of nails are set on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

As shown in Fig. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92 forming the protective cover and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively.
The box base 4 includes a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house the control devices and the boards.

Furthermore, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and it is difficult to peel off the sealing seal in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102,
If an attempt is made to forcibly open the board box 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover side will be cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11
A variable resistor control knob 121 is provided on the power supply unit 115, and a RAM erase switch 122 is provided on the power supply unit 115. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed.
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the big win lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
It executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting the display on 7A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing various areas, counters, flags, and the like, as well as the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (
In addition, even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and retains data (backup).
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage, the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power supply is turned on (including the time of the power supply being turned on due to the power outage being resolved, the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power supply was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed in the start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, an NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus.
The payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern hold lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close to the front side using the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the wing member are connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
15, a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and the R
Various processes are executed based on the AM cancellation signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives a payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is the same as the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a process to be performed in the event of a power failure.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111.
11 but is not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
Under the condition that the control handle 51 is not being operated (i.e., the control handle 51 is not being operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the control handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114, which controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the display control device 114, which controls the display of variable effects (variable display) and advance notice effects.
The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 that is composed of an address bus and a data bus.
The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the other devices 2.
Reference numeral 28 includes a drive motor MT1 and electromagnetic solenoids SOL1 and SOL2.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 can display a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, sound corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice and lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the third pattern display device 81 based on a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113.
The display control device 11 controls the display of the third symbol variation effect in the game.
4 transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display command, thereby
1 can be coordinated with the audio output from the audio output device 226.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown).
A voltage of 4 volts is input to the various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
The inverter generates a 12-volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc., with these 12-volt voltage, 5-volt voltage, and backup voltage.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the power failure of the MPU of the main control device 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 and the power failure monitoring circuit 252. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts of DC stabilization, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts,
The power supply unit 251 determines that a power outage (power failure, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 detect the occurrence of an NMI
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and transmits a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the structure of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 will be described. Fig. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300, and Fig. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300. In addition, Fig. 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Fig. 5 and Fig. 6. Also, in Fig. 6, the third symbol display device 81 is omitted from the illustration.

As described above, the game board 13 is provided with a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is provided with a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a windmill (not shown), as well as rails 61, 62 and a general winning hole 6.
3. It is constructed by assembling together a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140, a through gate 67, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, a pair of left and right window movable units 150, a ball flow-down unit 290 configured to allow balls discharged from the playing area to flow down, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

As described above, the base plate 60 is formed from plywood made by overlapping plywood sheets, and is formed so that the base plate 60 can shield various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 so that the player cannot see them from the front side.

As shown in Figure 6, the base plate 60 has, in addition to a through hole drilled at approximately the center position to allow the variable display unit 80 to be arranged, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) small through holes 60a drilled to pass electrical wiring connected to the through gate 67, a plurality of (three in this embodiment) mating recesses 60b recessed to allow for concave-convex engagement with the front end of the operating unit 300, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) light-transmitting holes 60c drilled in the front-to-rear direction at the lower left and right sides.

The light transmitting hole 60c is formed at a position where light irradiated from the operation unit 300 side can pass through, and from the viewpoint of light emission presentation, it is intended to improve the presentation effect of the game board 13. This will be described in detail.

A flow-down surface component 91 made of a light-transmitting resin material is provided on the front side of the light-transmitting hole 60c.
, 92 are arranged, and the outer parts 94 of the flow-down surface components 91, 92 are formed in the light passing holes 60c.
The flow down surface constituent members 91, 92 are fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 in a manner covering the above.

The left and right flow-down surface constituent members 91, 92 are covered with a covering plate FB on the front side of the right flow-down surface constituent member 92.
The left side flow surface component 91 is disposed on the left side of the flow passage 91.
will be described in detail, and the description of the right-side flow-down surface component 92 will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 5, the flow down surface component 91 is configured so that the play area is divided by a plate-shaped portion arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60, a band-shaped portion 93 formed in a band of the same width as the inner rail 61, and includes the band-shaped portion 93, an outer portion 94 which is the outer portion (outer portion when viewed from the front) of the play area divided by the band-shaped portion 93, and an inner portion 95 which is the inner portion (inner portion when viewed from the front) of the play area divided by the band-shaped portion 93.

As described above, the outer portion 94 is located outside the play area and is therefore configured as a portion that is unlikely to affect the flow of the ball downstream. Therefore, since there is no need to consider the effect on the ball caused by the displacement of the outer plate portion 94, the thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin.

Furthermore, even if the thickness of the inner part 95 becomes thin as a result of designing the outer part 94 to be thin, since the thick part of the base plate 60 is disposed on the back side of the inner part 95, it is possible to suppress the displacement in the front-rear direction (deformation in the thickness direction) of the inner part 95 by utilizing the rigidity of the base plate 60. Furthermore, by designing the thickness of the outer part 94 and the inner part 95 to be thin, it is possible to ensure a sufficient front-rear width of the play area.

In this way, the thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin without compromising the functionality required of the inner portion 95, and as a result, the light irradiated from the operating unit 300 side and passing through the light transmitting hole 60c can be easily seen by the player through the outer portion 94.

In this embodiment, since the base plate 60 is formed from a wooden plate member, it is difficult for the player to see the light irradiated from the back side through the thickness of the base plate 60. On the other hand, by forming a light transmission hole 60c (see FIG. 6) as in this embodiment and arranging a light emitting means on the back side thereof, it is possible to easily change the brightness seen through the base plate 60 while constructing the base plate 60 from a wooden plate member.

For example, when forming a decorative pattern that appears to be continuously connected between the outer portion 94 and other portions when viewed from the front, the appearance of the same decorative pattern can be changed into multiple types by changing the light emission mode of the light-emitting means 778 arranged on the illumination board 777 located on the back side of the outer portion 94 into multiple types and thereby changing the brightness of the outer portion 94.

Also, for example, a decorative member that changes a visible pattern depending on the light emission mode of the light emitting means 778 may be attached to the outer portion 94. In this case, the appearance (image) of the game board 13 can be significantly changed depending on the light emission mode of the light emitting means 778.

The form of the decorative member that changes the visible pattern depending on the light emission form is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a member designed to make different patterns visible depending on the angle at which light is applied, such as an illumination plate. Also, for example, it may be a member designed to change the visible pattern by changing the light emission color, assuming that a pattern is drawn in multiple colors and multiple colors of light are prepared for irradiation.

As described above, the inner portion 95 is disposed inside the play area.
However, in this embodiment, the base plate 60 is configured so that the flesh of the base plate 60 is disposed on the back side of the inner portion 95 (the light transmission hole 60c is configured to be located on the outer portion 94 side with respect to the band-shaped portion 93 when viewed from the front).
The rigidity of the base plate 60 can be utilized to prevent displacement (deformation) of the inner portion 95 .
This allows the ball to flow more steadily.

A general winning opening 63 is arranged in the inner portion 95, and this general winning opening 63 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the flow down surface component 91 is fixed to the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 is connected to the inner frame 12 through a window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
The structure of the game board 13 will be described below with reference mainly to FIG.

As described above, the variable display device unit 80 has a center frame 86 arranged to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81, and a window movable unit 150 is arranged at the upper left and right corners of the center frame 86.

Fig. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. Note that in Fig. 7, the lower part of the game board 13 is omitted, and the auxiliary device 160 is exploded and shown in a front perspective view.

The window movable unit 150 is equipped with a displacement member 151 which is rotatably displaceable and configured to be visible to the player at the window inside the center frame 86, and an auxiliary device 160 which is disposed on the rear side of the displacement member 151 and which generates a driving force to drive the displacement member 151 and which shines light toward the displacement member 151.

The displacement member 151 is formed in a bifurcated shape when viewed in the front-to-rear direction and includes a bifurcated portion 152 that is supported at a base end portion near the bent portion, a tip portion 153 that is disposed at both ends of the bifurcated portion 152 and is formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape) with an open back side, and a protrusion portion 154 that protrudes radially from the base end portion of the bifurcated portion 152.

The tip portion 153 is equipped with a presentation portion 153a which is formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape) with the bottom side facing the front and is arranged so that it can be seen by the player, and a ring-shaped portion 153b which is fastened and fixed to the open side of the presentation portion 153a and has a shape which is narrower on the opposite side of the presentation portion 153a than on the side of the presentation portion 153a.

The performance section 153a has a light-diffusing shape (jagged shape) formed on its inner surface, which is capable of diffusing the light that is irradiated from the rear side to the inside of the open section. Therefore, even if the light that is actually irradiated is only over a narrow range, a player viewing the performance section 153a from the front side can see that the entire performance section 153a is glowing (faintly).

The projection 154 has a displaceable range in both rotational directions defined by a pair of claws 86a protruding from the center frame 86. That is, the displacement member 151 is configured to be rotatably displaceable within an angle (an angle less than 360 degrees) defined by the arrangement of the claws 86a and the relationship with the projection 154.

8 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary device 160, and Fig. 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary device 160. The auxiliary device 160 includes a contact member 161 arranged at a position where it can contact the displacement member 151 (see Fig. 7), a metal (brass in this embodiment) transmission shaft rod portion 162 having one end (front end) connected to the contact member 161 so as not to rotate relative to the contact member 161, and a transmission shaft rod portion 162.
The driven member 163 is connected to the other end (rear end) of the transmission shaft portion 162 so as not to rotate relative to the driven member 163.
The transmission shaft rod portion 162 is configured to be supported by a support case 170 having a case-like configuration as a whole. An electric illumination board 180 is disposed inside the support case 170.

The transmission shaft rod portion 162 is a cylindrical member whose central portion has a perfect circular external shape when viewed in the axial direction (front-rear direction), and both ends are cut in a planar shape from a predetermined radial direction to form a substantially D-shaped cross section. These both end portions fit into the through hole 161b of the abutting member 161 and the through hole 163b of the driven member 163, thereby forming a substantially D-shaped cross section.
2 and the driven member 163 are connected together so as to be non-rotatable relative to each other (integrally).

The abutting member 161 is made of a resin material and has a base end 161a having a through hole 161b having a D-shaped cross section, through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted.
The arm portion 161 extends outward from the base end portion 161a and is generally U-shaped when viewed from the front.
c.

The driven member 163 is made of a resin material, and has a base end 163a in which a through hole 163b having a D-shaped cross section is drilled as a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and an arm portion 163b extending straight outward from the base end 161a and formed in a substantially flat plate shape.
63c.

A metal plate member MB1 made of metal (magnetic material) is disposed on the upper surface of the driven member 163. In this embodiment, the metal plate member MB1 is fixed to the driven member 163 by engagement with the elastic claws 163d.

More specifically, rails are provided at both radial ends of the arm 163c to guide the metal plate member MB1 in sliding forward and backward, and the rails are formed so that the metal plate member MB1 can be guided only from the front side (only the front side is fully open). When the metal plate member MB1 is slid along the rails, the elastic claws 163d are pressed down by the metal plate member MB1, and when the metal plate member MB1 is slid in this state, the metal plate member MB1 hits the rear side wall of the rails to restrict the sliding, and at this position, the pressing down of the elastic claws 163d by the metal plate member MB1 is released (it has risen to a position facing the side of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claws 163d engage to restrict the retraction of the metal plate member MB1 to the front side.

The method of fixing the metal plate member MB1 to the driven member 163 is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB1 may be fastened to the driven member 163, may be tied with a cable tie, or may be attached with adhesive tape or the like.

The support case 170 is made up of a rear member 170B, an inner member 170M disposed on the front side of the rear member 170B and having a support hole 174 through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and the inner member 170M.
The front member 170F is disposed on the front side of the base 170M and has a decorative shape (wave pattern) formed on the front side. A number of these (three in this embodiment) plate-shaped members are stacked front to back and fastened together.

The illuminated board 180 is formed in a plate shape that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the front to match the shape of the front member 170F, and is equipped with a light-emitting means 181 consisting of a plurality of LEDs etc. that are arranged in a position designed with consideration for the presentation, a connector 182 that is arranged as a part to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of through holes 183 that are drilled in the illuminated board 180 for assembly.

The light emitting means 181 includes a strong light emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmitting hole 177 when viewed from the front, and a weak light emitting means 181b arranged outside the light transmitting hole 177 (arranged opposite the rear plate surface of the front member 170F).

The through hole 183 is formed in an elliptical shape that is long along the inclined direction.
This makes it easy to assemble the through hole 183 into the protruding columnar portion 172 whose outer shape is formed in a perfect circular shape when viewed from the front.

That is, while the posture of the illumination board 180 is inclined (see Figure 10), the protruding direction of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 is not inclined (it is in the front-to-back direction), so that assembly problems (failure to assemble or loosening) are more likely to occur compared to when assembling in the same direction; however, in this embodiment, the through hole 183 is formed in a long oval shape along the direction in which the posture of the illumination board 180 is inclined, so that the margin of the through hole 183 along the inclination direction can be made larger, making it easier to assemble the through hole 183 to the protruding cylindrical portion 172.

The illumination board 180 is housed between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M.
The illumination board 180 is oriented so that the front surface of the board faces diagonally downward (the normal line of the board is inclined downward toward the front side). This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Figure 10 is a cross-sectional view of the window movable unit 150 taken along line X-X in Figure 2. For ease of understanding, the rear member 170B is omitted from the illustration, and the outline of the displacement member 151 is shown by imaginary lines. Line X-X is positioned so as to pass through the center of the upper protruding columnar portion 172. In the following description, Figures 8 and 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

The form of the wall portion on the front side of the middle member 170M is different between an upper wall portion 170MU and a lower wall portion 170MD. That is, the upper wall portion 170MU is configured as a non-inclined wall portion (with a normal line facing horizontally), and the lower wall portion 170MD is configured as an inclined wall portion (with a normal line facing downward toward the front side).

In this way, the back surface of the illumination board 180 is the lower wall portion 170, which is different from the wall portion having the different normal lines.
It is supported so as to be in a position along the MD (a position in which the normal line is inclined downward toward the front side). That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the direction of the optical axis of the light irradiated from the light emitting means 181 of the illumination board 180 is inclined downward toward the front side.

The central member 170M includes a protruding frame portion 171 that protrudes toward the front side in a frame shape, a plurality of protruding cylindrical portions 172 that protrude toward the front side inside the protruding frame portion in a thin cylindrical shape, and left and right outer portions (
Left side) A wiring hole 173 that is drilled in the front-rear direction in a position surrounding the connector 182 at the corner
It is equipped with.

The protruding frame portion 171 abuts against the outer frame portion of the front member 170F at the front and rear, thereby forming the illumination board 180
This seals the entire periphery of the illumination board 180 between the front member 170F and the middle member 170F.
It is possible to prevent the light from being seen from between 0M and the target position, and also to prevent light leakage from a similar position.

The protruding cylindrical portion 172 has a large diameter seat portion and a small diameter insertion portion that protrudes further from the seat portion. By assembling the insertion portion so that it fits into the through hole 183 of the illuminated board 180, the back surface of the plate of the illuminated board 180 is supported by the seat portion, and the position of the illuminated board 180 can be stabilized.

Here, the seat of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 disposed on the upper wall portion 170MU is higher than the seat of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 disposed on the lower wall portion 170MD. This allows the illumination board 180 assembled in the above-mentioned inclined position to be stably supported, and also allows a gap to be secured between the upper wall portion 170MU and the illumination board 180.

The protruding tip of the seat of the protruding columnar portion 172 is formed as an inclined surface (an inclined surface configured so that the protruding length becomes shorter as it goes downward) that matches the posture of the illumination board 180. This allows the protruding columnar portion 172 to be given not only the function of stabilizing the arrangement of the illumination board 180, but also the function of stabilizing the posture of the illumination board 180.

The wiring hole 173 is a through hole for passing an electrical wiring connected to the connector 182 of the illumination board 180. The load applied to the illumination board 180 through this electrical wiring can maintain the posture of the illumination board 180, so that the illumination board 180 can be maintained in a desired position without fastening the illumination board 180.
The posture of the illumination board 180 can be stably supported.

The front member 170F is made of a colored (white in this embodiment) light-transmitting resin material and has a shape in which the rear surface is a surface that is approximately parallel to the lower wall portion 170MD. The front member 170F has a plurality of light-transmitting holes 177 that are drilled in a circular shape in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of protruding cylindrical portions 178 that are protruded in a thin cylindrical shape toward the rear side.
and an L-shaped support portion 1 that is L-shaped when viewed from the left and right and connects between the back surface of the plate and the frame portion that forms the outer periphery.
79.

The light transmitting hole 177 is formed so as to surround, in a front view, any of the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 181. As a result, the light emitting means 181 disposed on the rear side of the light transmitting hole 177 and the other light emitting means 181 are visually recognized in different ways from the front side of the front member 170F.
That is, the inside of the light transmitting hole 177 can be visually perceived as emitting stronger light than the other areas.

The protruding cylindrical portions 178 are formed with a substantially equal protruding length. This makes it possible to make the distance between the main plate portion of the front member 170F and the illumination board 180 uniform over the entire range in which the illumination board 180 is disposed, while surface-supporting the illumination board 180 in an inclined position at a plurality of positions. This allows the illumination board 180 to be supported on the surface at a plurality of positions while maintaining the degree of freedom in disposing the light-emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light-emitting mode.
The stability of the support of 0 can be improved.

That is, since the illumination board 180 is inclined with the front surface facing downward toward the front side, it is preferable to support it from the front side in order to maintain that position. However, if a large support part is provided in one place to support the illumination board 180, the area in which the light emitting means 181 can be arranged on the front side of the illumination board 180 tends to be limited. If the area of the support part is reduced in order to prioritize the area in which the light emitting means 181 can be arranged, the position of the illumination board 180 will be lost and the front member 170F will be damaged.
The distance between the main body plate portion and the illumination board 180 is likely to vary within the range in which the illumination board 180 is arranged, which may result in unevenness in the light emission pattern.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a plurality of protruding cylindrical portions 178 having a similar protruding height and a small diameter are provided,
Since the front plate of the illumination board 180 can be supported at multiple points at the same time, multiple protruding cylindrical sections 178 that support the illumination board 180 can be disposed in multiple small gaps between adjacent light emitting means 181. This allows the stability of the support of the illumination board 180 to be improved while maintaining the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emission mode.

The L-shaped support portion 179 is disposed opposite the upper surface and the front surface of the illumination board 180 in the assembled state, and functions to suppress the displacement of the illumination board 180. In other words, the lower portion of the L-shaped support portion 179 disposed opposite the front surface of the illumination board 180 supports the illumination board 180 from falling forward due to its own weight, thereby preventing the illumination board 180 from falling forward due to its own weight.

In addition, the rear part of the L-shaped support part 179 arranged opposite the upper surface of the illumination board 180 and the illumination board 1
80 are usually arranged with a gap therebetween, thereby loosely supporting the illumination board 180 while minimizing the vertical displacement of the illumination board 180.

In addition, a support part having the same shape as the L-shaped support part 179 is provided on the lower wall part 170M of the inner member 170M.
D (formed at two positions on the left and right), and are arranged opposite the lower and rear surfaces of the illumination board 180 to function to suppress displacement of the illumination board 180. That is, in this embodiment, the L-shaped support parts arranged above and below the illumination board 180 are configured to suppress displacement of the illumination board 180 in the front-rear and up-down directions.

Thus, in this embodiment, the illumination board 180 is not directly fastened, but is supported stably by being sandwiched and supported from the front and rear between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M. This is a measure to take into consideration the possibility that the illumination board 180 may vibrate due to the influence of vibrations generated in the middle member 170M, for example, if the middle member 170M and the illumination board 180 are fastened and fixed to each other to form a single rigid body.

In other words, according to this embodiment, since the illuminated board 180 is not fastened to either the middle member 170M or the front member 170F, even if vibration occurs in the middle member 170M or the front member 170F, it is easy to maintain the position of the illuminated board 180 independently of the vibration.

Here, it is thought that the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 arranged on the back side of the inner member 170M is the most likely cause of vibration of the inner member 170M, but in this embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is arranged on the opposite side (back side) of the illumination board 180, sandwiched between a gap that occurs on the front side of the upper wall-shaped portion 170MU.

With this configuration, the vibration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is transmitted to the illumination board 180 via the thin-diameter protruding cylindrical portion 172, so that the vibration of the vibration solenoid SOL1 can be mitigated by the deformation of the protruding cylindrical portion 172, and the transmission of the vibration to the illumination board 180 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the direct transmission of the vibration from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 as a vibration source to the illumination board 180.

The intermediate member 170M has a support hole 174 that is drilled in the front-rear direction and has a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the transmission shaft rod portion 162 and is configured to be able to rotatably support the transmission shaft rod portion 162, and an electromagnetic solenoid S
The electromagnetic solenoid OL1 has a lower restricting portion 175 disposed below the electromagnetic solenoid OL1, and an upper restricting portion 176 disposed on the opposite side of the support hole 174 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

The driven member 163 is normally tilted by its own weight (see FIG. 11A), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and the metal plate member MB1 is attracted by the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) and displaced upward.
The abutting member 161 and the driven member 163 undergo a rotational displacement as the driven member 163 moves between a raised position where the driven member 163 is raised by the electromagnetic force and a lowered position where the driven member 163 descends by its own weight after the electromagnetic force is eliminated. Hereinafter, the rotational displacement will be described with reference to Figs. 11 and 12.

Fig. 11(a) is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and Fig. 11(b) is a front view of the window movable unit 150. Fig. 12(a) is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and Fig. 12(b) is a front view of the window movable unit 150.

In addition, Figures 11(a) and 11(b) show a state in which no electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the driven member 163 is tilted by its own weight (downward position), while Figures 12(a) and 12(b) show a state in which electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the metal plate member MB1 and the driven member 163 are raised by the generated electromagnetic force (upward position).

In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, in FIG. 11(a) and FIG. 12(a), the rear member 170B
11B and 12B, the outer shape of the displacement member 151 and the shape of the opening on the rear side are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 11A and 12A, in the lowered position, the driven member 163 abuts against a cushion portion 175a attached to the upper surface of the lower restricting portion 175, and is restricted from being displaced downward. In the raised position, the driven member 163 abuts against a cushion portion 175a attached to the lower surface of the upper restricting portion 176.
6a and its upward displacement is restricted.

The material of the cushion portions 175a and 176a is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a general-purpose plastic such as polypropylene or polystyrene, an engineering plastic such as polycarbonate, a thermosetting resin such as melamine resin, polyurethane, or epoxy resin, or a rubber material.
The material of 176a may be the same or different.

Here, the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 are configured to have different positions (distance from the transmission shaft rod portion 162) based on the transmission shaft rod portion 162, and the effects resulting from this will be explained.

First, the load applied to the lower restricting portion 175 via the driven member 163 is mainly a load caused by the weight of the driven member 163 itself, so that the driven member 163 can be stably supported by supporting the center of gravity of the driven member 163. For this reason, the lower restricting portion 175 is
It is disposed at the center of gravity of the driven member 163 (approximately the center position of the arm length).

In contrast, the load applied to the upper regulating portion 176 via the driven member 163 is mainly a load due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.
In this embodiment, the upper regulating member 176 is disposed opposite the rotation tip of the driven member 163, so that the driven member 163
This reduces the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 via the upper regulating member 176 .

In other words, when a force moment of the same magnitude is generated, the load transmitted through the driven member 163 is smaller at a position away from the rotation axis of the driven member 163 (a position where the arm related to the moment is longer), and therefore the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 can be reduced.

In this way, since it is desirable that the load be transmitted to the upper restricting member 176 at the rotation tip of the driven member 163, in this embodiment, the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion portion 176a is made short (shorter than the width dimension of the cushion portion 175a). This makes it possible to avoid the load being transmitted at the middle portion of the driven member 163 and to stably transmit the load at the rotation tip.

Furthermore, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is continuously generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 at the raised position, it is unlikely that the driven member 163 will bounce back after colliding with the cushion portion 176a.

On the other hand, by making the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion portion 175a of the lower restricting portion 175 longer (longer than the width dimension of the cushion portion 176a), the area of the surface that receives the load can be increased, and the pressure (
This can reduce the stress caused by the driven member 163 colliding with the cushion portion 175a.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted to the cushion portions 175a, 176a via the driven member 163 during displacement in both the up and down directions, while suppressing the rebound of the driven member 163.

A protruding portion 176b protruding in a curved shape from the back surface side of the middle member 170M is formed below the upper restricting portion 176. The protruding portion 176b is disposed opposite the rotation tip end portion of the driven member 163, and guides the rotation of the driven member 163 while keeping contact with the driven member 163 to a small area when the driven member 163 is displaced toward the front surface side.

11(b) and 12(b), the tip 153 of the displacement member 151 is disposed on the front side of the strong light emitting means 181a that is disposed inside the light transmitting hole 177 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the light emitted from the strong light emitting means 181a is visually recognized by the player through the tip 153.

As described above, the internal shape of the presentation unit 153a makes it appear as if the entire presentation unit 153a is glowing (faintly) to a player viewing the presentation unit 153a from the front, so that even in a situation where the actual position of the strong light-emitting means 181a does not change but the displacement member 151 is displaced, changes in the light-emitting mode of the presentation unit 153a can be suppressed.

In other words, the light viewed through the performance unit 153a can be perceived by the player as displacing in sync with the displacement of the performance unit 153a, creating the illusion that an LED or other light-emitting means is arranged inside the performance unit 153a and displacing in sync with the displacement of the performance unit 153a.

On the other hand, since the weak light emitting means 181b can be made to appear to emit light at a fixed position, while a fixedly positioned illumination board 180 is adopted, the weak light emitting means 181b arranged on the illumination board 180 can be made to appear to emit light at a fixed position, and the strong light emitting means 181a also arranged on the illumination board 180 can be made to appear to emit light while displacing.

This allows the use of a single, fixed-position illumination board to achieve a lighting effect that would normally be achieved by using multiple illumination boards, with the first board in a fixed position and the second board in a displaceable position. As a result, the number of illumination boards can be reduced while still achieving the same performance effect.

Returning to Fig. 5, the operation unit 300 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed therein.

13 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 300. The operating unit 300 includes a bottom wall portion 311, an outer wall portion 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311, and a rear case 310 formed in a box shape with the front side open from the bottom wall portion 311.

The rear case 310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed to a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (i.e., capable of dividing the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front).

The operating unit 300 is configured as one unit by housing a first operating unit 400 in the internal space of the rear case 310, in which a movable device is arranged so as to be displaceable along a path that includes the upper side of the opening 311a, left and right performance units 600 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 311a for performing light-emitting performances, etc., and a second operating unit 700 arranged below the opening 311a.

Specifically, the first operating unit 400 is disposed above the opening 311a, and the second operating unit 700 is disposed below the opening 311a, on the bottom wall 311 of the rear case 310. Note that FIG. 5 illustrates a state in which the first operating unit 400 and the second operating unit 700 are attached to the rear case 310.

The rear case 310 is arranged so that the front end of the outer wall portion 312 is aligned with the rear surface of the game board 13 (for example,
The support plate portion 313 is provided as a flat plate (arranged parallel to the support plate 312) and supports the surface of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The support plate portion 313 has a positioning protrusion 313a that protrudes toward the front side and has a shape that can fit into a fitting recess 60b formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a plurality of insertion holes 313b that are drilled to allow the insertion of fastening screws that are fastened to the base plate 60.

The rear case 310 is positioned relative to the base plate 60 by engaging the positioning protrusion 313a with the mating recess 60b (see Figure 6), and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 313b and screwed into the base plate 60, thereby fixing the game board 13 and the operating unit 300 together, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operating unit 300.

The shape of the positioning protrusion 313a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a protrusion with an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the fitting recess 60b (circular or elliptical in this embodiment), or it may be a protrusion with a shape (even smaller outer shape) that increases the fitting gap in consideration of workability during assembly. Furthermore, if the inner shape of the fitting recess 60b is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 313a will also be rectangular correspondingly.

As shown in Figures 5 and 13, in this embodiment, many support plate portions 313 are densely arranged on the left and upper sides of the rear case 310, and fewer support plate portions 313 are formed on the right and lower sides. This is the result of a design that takes into consideration the balance between improving the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and operating unit 300 and space efficiency.

In other words, when the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed from plywood made by overlapping plywood as in this embodiment, the movable members arranged on the back side of the game board 13 cannot be seen through the flesh of the base plate 60, so the entire back side of the area where an opening can be formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13 (a recess formed from the side) becomes effective as an area for displaying the movable members in a visible manner.

In contrast, in the location where support plate portion 313 is formed, the internal space of rear case 310 is encroached inward by the area of support plate portion 313 in a front view, and the area in which the movable member can be disposed is narrowed by that amount. Therefore, if the strength problem can be solved and maintained even if support plate portion 313 is omitted, omitting support plate portion 313 can avoid limiting the range in which the movable member can be disposed.

In this embodiment, the reason why many support plate parts 313 are arranged on the left side and upper side of the rear case 310 is related to the range of the area where a player can see a ball shot into a play area, etc. In other words, the support plate parts 313 are formed in places other than the range where the shot ball can be seen.

To explain in more detail, in this embodiment, the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (FIG. 4) is introduced into the play area by passing between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and passing through the return ball prevention member 68, and thereafter flows down the play area. In a pinball game, the place that is thought to attract the most attention is the place where the ball passes, and other outer areas (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 across the outer rail 62 and inner rail 61) usually attract less attention.

Therefore, it is thought that players will pay less attention to the lower left and upper left areas based on the left-convex arc formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right areas based on the upward-convex arc, which are areas that the ball cannot reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned outer edge member 73 and the block-shaped member 74, which is arranged on the front side of the game board 13 and whose surfaces facing the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left parts of the outer rail 62 are formed into a shape that follows the outer rail 62, are formed from a light-opaque resin material, and in addition to the game board 13 being made of plywood, which is difficult to transmit light through, the game board 13 is configured so that the back side of the game board 13 cannot be seen from the front side of the game board 13 through the outer edge member 73 or the block-shaped member 74.

In this embodiment, the support plate portions 313 are preferentially disposed in locations where attention is low or where the support plate portions 313 are not visible. Even in the left side and upper side portions where many support plate portions 313 are formed, the support plate portions 313 are formed near the corners of the rear case 310, avoiding the center portion as the protruding end portion of the outer rail 62.

In other words, the location where the space is encroached upon by forming the support plate portion 313 is selected from the locations with low visibility (low performance).
This has the effect of ensuring the rigidity of the entire game board 13, while also ensuring a high degree of freedom in designing the area within the field of vision of the player who is paying attention to the ball.

From this perspective, since there is a common configuration in pachinko machines in which the ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a is rolled along the outer rail 62 and introduced into the playing area, areas where the balls do not flow down can be easily arranged in the lower left, upper left, and upper right.

A notch 312a is provided in the lower half of the right outer wall 312. The notch 312a is cut out toward the rear side. When viewed from the front, the notch 312a is cut out below the band-shaped portion 93 (see FIG. 5) of the game board 13, and forms a gap between the game board 13 and the band-shaped portion 93 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

Forming the cutout 312a in this manner can provide the following effects. For example, the gap formed by the cutout 312a can function as a wiring passage through which the electrical wiring connected to the variable winning device 65 passes to the outside of the rear case 310. This can reduce the possibility of the electrical wiring interfering with other components, compared to when the wiring is routed up and down.

Furthermore, the gap formed by the cutout portion 312a can be used as a space for arranging components required for the variable winning device 65. Examples of components required for the variable winning device 65 include a solenoid that generates a driving force, a flow path for flowing balls, a board for light emission, a detection sensor that detects balls, and other structures.

Furthermore, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED near the cutout portion 312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be more easily recognized by the player as light with a blurred outline.
In other words, compared to a case where the entire circumference of the rear case 310 is connected to the game board 13 (a case where the boundary of the light irradiated from the rear side of the game board 13 is formed along the shape of the rear case 310), it is possible to make the boundary of the light visible through the game board 13 vague. This makes it possible to prevent the boundary of the light visible through the game board 13 from depending on the shape of the rear case 310, and improves the degree of freedom of the light-emitting performance.

Furthermore, compared to a case in which the electrical wiring connected to a light-emitting means such as an LED is arranged to exit the operating unit 300 along the back surface of the game board 13, a configuration such as that of this embodiment in which the electrical wiring is exited to the outside of the operating unit 300 through the cutout portion 312a reduces the possibility of the electrical wiring blocking the light emitted from the LED.

That is, by configuring the electrical wiring so that it can be brought out of the operating unit 300 without wrapping it around the front side of the LED, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electrical wiring will block the light emitted from the LED. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the presentation using the light emitted from the light-emitting means such as the LED.

The length (vertical length) of the cutout portion 312 a is not limited in any way. For example, the cutout portion 312 a may be formed over the entire region (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions 313.

As described above, in this embodiment, fastening and fixing to the game board 13 is omitted on the right side of the rear case 310, so when considering the rigidity of the right side of the game board 13, it is not possible to rely on the rigidity of the operating unit 300.

To address this issue, in this embodiment, a metal plate member 75 made of metal is disposed on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end of the game board 13. The metal plate member 75 will be described below.

FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73, and the metal plate-like member 75.
Fig. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73, and the metal plate-like member 75. In Figs. 14 and 15, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is illustrated as a single unit, and other members disposed on the game board 13 are omitted from the illustration.

The outer edge member 73 is made of a resin material and includes an arc wall portion 73a constituting the upper portion and having an arc-shaped inner surface, a vertical wall portion 73b extending downward from the lower end of the arc wall portion 73a in a thin wall shape, and an inclined wall portion 73c formed with an upper surface that inclines downward to the left from the lower end of the vertical wall portion 73b. By forming the outer edge member 73 from a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction in this way, the number of steps required to assemble the outer edge member 73 to the game board 13 can be reduced compared to when the outer edge member 73 is formed from multiple members that are separated into upper and lower parts.

The vertical wall portion 73b has a plurality of plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1 protruding in a plate shape toward the rear side along the right surface portion.
The right wall portion 73a is provided with a plurality of bent portions 73b2 bent in a U-shape when viewed in the vertical direction from the front edge portion of the right wall portion, a cylindrical protrusion portion 73b3 that protrudes cylindrically toward the rear side at the joint between the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c, and a fastening portion 73b4 that is provided adjacent to the cylindrical protrusion portion 73b3 and formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed in.

The bent portion 73b2 is disposed at the middle of the intervals between the plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1. This makes it possible to improve the holding force of the metal plate-shaped member 75 relative to the vertical wall portion 73b while suppressing the number of seam-penetrating portions 75c formed in the metal plate-shaped member 75, which will be described later.

In other words, compared to the case where only the three plate-shaped protrusions 73b1 resist the bending of the metal plate member 75, the plate-shaped protrusions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 can generate resistance to the bending of the metal plate member 75, thereby reducing the load generated at one location. In addition, since the plate-shaped protrusions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 are disposed at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed.
This makes it possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to any one location.

The metal plate-like member 75 comprises a main body plate portion 75a which is folded over multiple times in the short direction but is formed without any creases in the long direction, a folded portion 75b which is folded to the left at the rear side edge of the main body plate portion 75a, a plurality of joint penetration portions 75c which are formed to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction at the joint between the main body plate portion 75a and the folded portion 75b, through holes 75d which are formed to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the folded portion 75b, and an insertion hole 75e which is drilled in the plate portion where the through holes 75d are formed and which is stepped toward the front side so that a fastening screw can be inserted.

The metal plate member 75 generates particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portions 75b are formed in the vertical direction in addition to the manner in which the folds are formed in the main body plate portion 75a. Therefore, by arranging the metal plate member 75 integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, which is easily bent in the longitudinal direction, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced.

The joint penetrating portion 75c is formed to have a size that allows the plate-shaped protruding portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b to be inserted therethrough. In this embodiment, the joint penetrating portion 75c is formed so that the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-shaped protruding portion 73b1 through the joint penetrating portion 75c.

When the metal plate member 75 is assembled to the vertical wall portion 73b so as to be integrated therewith, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and the cylindrical protrusion portion 73b3
is inserted into the through hole 75d. In this manner, the metal plate member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned relative to each other at a plurality of points in the up-down direction. In this state, the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e is screwed into the fastening portion 73b4, whereby the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed together.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the metal plate member 75 is disposed above and below the vertical wall portion 73b, so that the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-shaped protruding portion 73b1 and the cylindrical protruding portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate the metal plate member 75 and extend to the back side, and their tips engage with the game board 13. The engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board 13 will be described below.

The game board 13 has a plurality of recessed portions 13e recessed into the right edge of the front surface so as to be capable of receiving the plate-shaped protrusion portion 73b1, and a plurality of positioning holes 13f recessed above and below the recessed portions 13e as depressions capable of receiving the cylindrical protrusion portion 73b3.

When the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate-like member 75 are assembled to the game board 13 in an integrated state, the plate-like protrusion 73b1 is received in the recess 13e, and the circular protrusion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f, respectively, and the positioning is performed.
3 is used not only for positioning with the metal plate member 75 but also for positioning with the game board 13. This makes it possible to reduce the number of positioning pieces.

In this embodiment, as described above, the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the curvature of the vertical wall portion 73b, so there is no need to impart sufficient rigidity to the vertical wall portion 73b alone, and the vertical wall portion 73b can be formed thin enough that it will easily curve in the left-right direction on its own.

Furthermore, the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 can suppress deformation of the game board 13 (improve rigidity), so that even if a gap occurs between the game board 13 and the rear case 310, the shape of the game board 13 can be maintained.

Returning to Fig. 5 and Fig. 13, the explanation will be given. The first operation unit 400 is disposed above the third symbol display device 81 of the operation unit 300. The first operation unit 400 is equipped with a light-emitting performance device LA1 that can be displaced from the state shown in Fig. 5 and Fig. 13 to a position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and is a device that visually entertains the player by controlling the displacement in synchronization with the display of the third symbol display device 81 or in synchronization with the operation of the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. The details of the first operation unit 400 will be described below.

16 and 17 are partial front views of the operation unit 300. In Fig. 16, the retracted state in which each component of the first operation unit 400 retracts to the upper side of the third pattern display device 81 is illustrated, and in Fig. 17, the protruding state in which each component of the first operation unit 400 protrudes (lowers) toward the third pattern display device 81 side from the retracted state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the internal shape of the rear case 310 is not symmetrical. In particular, the upper wall (ceiling surface) is made to match the shape of the tank 130 of the dispensing unit 93 (
3), the right side as viewed from the front is lower than the left side as viewed from the front. That is, the tank 130 is disposed on the upper right side of the operating unit 300, and in order to secure an area for disposing the tank 130, the upper wall of the rear case 310 is disposed at a position lower on the right side than on the left side (along the wall schematic line UL).

As such, since it is easier to secure a larger area on the left side inside the rear case 310 compared to the right side (there is more room in the ceiling height), in this embodiment, auxiliary devices such as the drive motor MT1 and coil spring SP1 that do not directly affect the appearance of the presentation (are not intended to be visible to the player) are arranged on the left side.

As a result, the recess (gap portion) caused by the asymmetric shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310
The drive motor MT1 and coil spring SP1 can be arranged by effectively utilizing this, and the lower edge of the first operating unit 400 can be moved as far upward as possible while having a left-right symmetrical shape, making it easier to ensure a large vertical dimension of the viewing area of the display of the third pattern display device 81.

In this embodiment, the shape of the feather-shaped member 460 (see FIG. 16 ) of the first operating unit 400 is changed to match the asymmetric shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310.
The shape of the side that faces the upper wall of the rear case 310 in the retracted state of 0 is designed.
The left wing member 460 is designed to project toward the upper wall of the rear case 310 more than the right wing member 460 .

Furthermore, the feather-shaped members 460 are configured to combine and be visible as a single unit when the first operating unit 400 changes from its retracted state to its extended state, and are designed to have a left-right symmetrical shape in this state, making it difficult for a player to notice that the left and right feather-shaped members 460 are configured in an asymmetrical shape.

In this embodiment, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, the asymmetrical portion of the feather-shaped member 460 (the upper side that comes into contact when combined) is hidden by the game board 13 (see FIG. 2 ).
This makes it difficult for players to notice that the left and right feather-shaped members 460 are configured in an asymmetrical shape.

18 and 19 are front perspective views of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS.
Fig. 18 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 400. Figures 18 and 20 show the first operation unit 400 in a retracted state, and Figures 19 and 21 show the first operation unit 400 in an extended state.

In the first operating unit 400, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven, the arm member 414 rotates via a plurality of gears interposed therebetween, and the lift plate 430 moves up and down in synchronization with the rotation.

The lift plate 430 is disposed at approximately the center in the left-right direction and is supported by a metal rail 405 made of metal and configured to be vertically extendable and retractable, and by auxiliary arm members 444 disposed on the left-right opposite sides of the arm member 414 .

A relative displacement member 442 is arranged on the lifting plate 430, which is relatively displaced in the vertical direction in synchronization with the change in posture of the auxiliary arm member 444, and a plurality of feather-shaped members 460, which are rotationally displaced symmetrically in left and right, are displaced in synchronization with the displacement of this relative displacement member 442.

Therefore, the components of the first operating unit 400 are displaced between the retracted state and the extended state in a displacement manner that combines lifting and rotation in accordance with the driving of the drive motor MT1. As a result, even though only a single drive motor MT1 is used, the components can be displaced in multiple directions, improving the presentation effect.

As shown in FIG. 20, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retreated state, the auxiliary arm member 4
The upper end position of the arc-shaped gear portion 444b of 44 is configured to protrude upward from the upper edge of the lifting plate 430. When the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, the upper edge of the lifting plate 430 is shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and is difficult to see, so that it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice that the arc-shaped gear portion 444b protrudes from the upper edge of the lifting plate 430.

On the other hand, the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates in conjunction with the downward displacement of the lift plate 430 from the retracted state to the extended state of the first operating unit 400, so that the arc-shaped gear portion 444b that protrudes above the upper edge of the lift plate 430 in the retracted state (see FIG. 27 )
As the lift plate 430 is lowered, the lift plate 430 is displaced downward and is hidden below the upper edge of the lift plate 430 (see FIG. 28).

In this manner, the arc-shaped gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is allowed to protrude (stick out) from the lift plate 430 at a location that is shielded by the base plate 60 due to the arrangement.
By displacing the auxiliary arm member 444 so that the protruding portion is hidden by the rear side of the lift plate 430 until the lift plate 430 is displaced to a position where it is not blocked by the base plate 60,
In comparison with a configuration in which the auxiliary arm member 444 is hidden on the rear side of the lift plate 430, the design freedom of the auxiliary arm member 444 and the lift plate 430 can be improved.

For example, the upper edge of the lift plate 430 can be positioned further down, so that the lift plate 430
This makes it easier to avoid interference between the upper edge of the housing and the upper outer wall 312 of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 16).

In addition, by configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be rotatably displaced, the third pattern display device 81
This makes it possible to ensure a sufficient extension length of the lifting plate 430 toward the third pattern display device 81 while avoiding a situation in which the rack gear-shaped portion (the portion having gear teeth formed along a straight line) is maintained protruding toward the side.

That is, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped part is formed on the lift plate 430 side of the main plate 401 and configured to mesh with the rotating gear 441, the relative displacement member 442 can be displaced up and down relative to the lift plate 430 in accordance with the up and down displacement of the lift plate 430, but in this case, it is necessary to always arrange the fixed rack gear-shaped part along the position where the lift plate 430 is arranged. Therefore, if the configuration in which the majority of the lift plate 430 protrudes downward from the lower edge of the main plate 401 as in the lift plate 430 of this embodiment is reused, it was necessary to form the fixed rack gear-shaped part protruding from the lower edge of the main plate 401 toward the third pattern display device 81 side.

Therefore, there is a risk that problems such as the visibility of the third pattern display device 81 being reduced due to the third pattern display device 81 being obstructed by the fixed rack-gear-shaped part, or that the design freedom of the lifting plate 430 being reduced in order to hide the rack-gear-shaped part with the lifting plate 430 when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, a variable auxiliary arm member 444 is used instead of a fixed rack gear-like part, so that the rear side of the lift plate 430 (
The auxiliary arm member 444 can be arranged so as to hide the rack gear-shaped portion from the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the projection length (displacement amount) of the lift plate 430 toward the third pattern display device 81 can be sufficiently secured while avoiding the situation in which the rack gear-shaped portion is maintained projecting toward the third pattern display device 81.

22(a) and 23 are exploded front perspective views of the first operating unit 400.
23B is a front perspective view of the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 showing the meshing state of the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470, and FIGS. 24 and 25 are exploded rear perspective views of the first operating unit 400. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 22( a ), 23 , 24 , and 25 , the first operation unit 400 includes:
The bottom wall 3 of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 16) is made of a resin material and is formed in a long plate shape.
11, a transmission unit 410 composed of a plurality of members rotatably supported by the main body plate portion 401, and an arm member 41
A rear arrangement plate 420 is composed of a plurality of plate-shaped parts arranged on the same plane, including a connecting plate part 421 connected to the tip of the rear arrangement plate 4.
The lift plate 430 is fastened to the rear arrangement plate 420, and the synchronous operation unit 440 is supported between the lift plate 430 and the accommodation plate portion 425 of the rear arrangement plate 420 (see FIGS. 23 and 25).
.

In addition, the first operating unit 400 includes a plate-shaped support plate portion 4
The synchronous operation unit 440 includes a pair of left and right vane-shaped members 460 that are rotatably supported by a support plate portion 450 and that are rotationally displaced by a load applied by the displacement of a fixed transmission plate 490 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the synchronous operation unit 440, and an auxiliary member 470 that rotates synchronously with the vane-shaped members 460 (see FIG. 2).
2(a), 22(b) and 24).

The main body plate portion 401 comprises an axial support portion 402 that supports the transmission gear 412, an end support portion 403 that is located at the lower right thereof and supports the end gear 413, an arm support portion 404 which is a columnar portion that supports the arm member 414, a metal rail 405 that is located in the center left and right and has a rear side fixed thereto so that the front side can be displaced up and down, a long hole portion 406 that is drilled as a long opening extending left and right to the right of the metal rail 405, a cover portion 407 that is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material and covers the area where the long hole portion 406 is formed from the rear side, and a detection sensor SC1 for detecting the state.

The end support portion 403 includes a shaft support portion 403a formed in the same shape as the shaft support portion 402, an annular protrusion 403b protruding along a circle centered on the shaft support portion 403a, and a stopper portion 403c protruding in a fan shape toward the front side at a position between the annular protrusion 403b and the shaft support portion 403a. The stopper portion 403c is formed by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the protrusion is formed as a recessed portion.

The lid 407 closes the area where the long hole 406 is formed. In this embodiment, as described later, the electric wiring DH1 that passes through the wiring through hole 401a formed through the main plate 401 from the front side of the main plate 401 and reaches the rear side of the long hole 406 is guided to the front side through the long hole 406. Therefore, in a situation where the lid 407 is not present and the rear side is open, the electric wiring DH1 protrudes to the rear side, and there is a risk that the electric wiring DH1 will be pinched between the bottom wall 311 (see FIG. 13 ) of the rear case 310 and the main plate 401 during assembly work. In contrast, in this embodiment, the area where the electric wiring DH1 is arranged is partitioned by the lid 407, so that the electric wiring DH1 can be prevented from being pinched between the bottom wall 311 and the main plate 401.

This allows the first operating unit 400 to be attached to the rear case 310 without checking the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1, thereby improving the efficiency of the assembly work.

The transmission unit 410 includes a drive gear 411 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor MT1 so as not to rotate relative to the drive motor MT1, a transmission gear 412 meshed with the drive gear 411 and rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 402, an end gear 413 meshed with the transmission gear 412 and rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 403a, and an arm support portion 404 whose posture can be changed with the rotation of the end gear 413.
and an arm member 414 pivotally supported by the arm member 414.

The terminal gear 413 includes an annular protrusion 413a having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 403b and protruding toward the rear side, a stoppered portion 413b protruding in a fan shape similar to the stopper portion 403c with a gap between the inner surface of the annular protrusion 413a and the stoppered portion 413b, and a shaft support portion 40
A cylindrical protruding portion 413c protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the front side at an eccentric position away from the gear portion 3a, and a detection target portion 41 is provided extending in a fan shape in the outer diameter direction from a flange portion formed in a flange shape on the front side of the gear portion.
It is equipped with 3d.

The annular protrusion 413a is disposed such that the side surface on the shaft side faces the annular protrusion 403b.
The annular projection 403b is sandwiched between the stoppered portion 413b. That is, the annular projection 403b serves as a guide rail that guides the rotation of the end gear 413.

The stoppered portion 413b is formed by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion.
In other words, in this embodiment, the rotation angle of the end gear 413 is set to the angle of the stopper portion 4
In other words, the end gear 413 is rotationally displaced by an angle of less than 360 degrees.

When designing the shapes of the stopper portion 403c and the stopped portion 413b, the rotation angle required for the end gear 413 is calculated, and the remaining angle (the rotation angle of the end gear 413 is 36
The stopper portion 403c and the stopped portion 41 are arranged at an angle obtained by dividing the angle by two (the angle subtracted from 0 degrees).
In this way, it is possible to prevent either one of the stopper portion 403c or the stopped portion 413b from becoming weak in strength, and therefore the service life of the first operating unit 400 can be extended.

The cylindrical protrusion 413c is a brass metal rod, and is fitted and fixed to the resin terminal gear 413. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are disposed at the tip of the protrusion, and the arm member 414 is connected and supported by the cylindrical protrusion 413c so as not to fall off.

The detection target portion 413d is formed with a thickness that allows it to pass through the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1. When the detection target portion 413d is detected by the detection sensor SC1,
The MPU 221 of No. 13 can determine that the first operating unit 400 is in the retreat state.

The arm member 414 includes an annular portion 414a rotatably supported by the arm support portion 404, and
A plate-shaped portion 414b extends radially from the front side of the annular portion 414a in a plate-like shape, an intermediate plate portion 414c is arranged parallel to the rear side of the plate-shaped portion 414b and is connected to the extended end of the plate-shaped portion 414b, and a long hole portion 414d is formed in the intermediate plate portion 414c in a long hole shape.
It also has a tip plate portion 414e that is arranged parallel to the rear side of the intermediate plate portion 414c and is connected to the extended end portion of the intermediate plate portion 414c, and a cylindrical extension portion 414f that extends cylindrically from the extended end of the tip plate portion 414e to the front side.

The long hole portion 414d is formed with a size that allows the cylindrical protrusion portion 413c of the end gear 413 to be inserted therethrough, and the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via this long hole portion 414d.

The cylindrical projection 414f is a brass metal rod, and is fitted and fixed to the resin tip plate 414e. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are disposed at the tip of the cylindrical projection 414f, and the connecting plate 421 of the rear mounting plate 420 is connected and supported by the cylindrical projection 414f so as not to fall off.

FIG. 26 is a top view of the first operating unit 400. In FIG.
00, and for ease of understanding, the coil spring SP
1. The fixed pulley on which the coil spring SP1 is guided, the drive motor MT1, and the base plate to which the drive motor MT1 is fastened are not shown in the figure.

26, in this embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is designed so that a large area can be secured on the front side of the arm member 414.
By forming the member in a shape that is bent forward and backward, it is possible to functionally avoid interference with other members. This will be described below.

The plate-shaped portion 414b is disposed in front of the detection sensor SC1 to avoid interference with the detection sensor SC1. That is, since the restriction on the front-rear position of the plate-shaped portion 414b is due to its relationship with the detection sensor SC1, the front-rear position can be designed arbitrarily in a portion not related to the detection sensor SC1 (a portion on the opposite side of the rotation axis (arm support portion 404) with the detection sensor SC1 as a reference).

In this embodiment, the intermediate plate portion 414c, which is disposed on the opposite side of the rotation axis (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1, is disposed on the rear side compared to the plate-shaped portion 414b. This makes it possible to narrow the front-to-rear distance between the plate front surface of the terminal gear 413 and the arm member 414, and allows the load to be transmitted to the arm member 414 at the base side of the cylindrical protrusion portion 413c, thereby preventing a decrease in the transmission efficiency of the load due to deformation of the cylindrical protrusion portion 413c when the load is transmitted.

Furthermore, since this is due to the relationship between the end gear 413 and the front and rear positions of the intermediate plate portion 414c, the rotation axis (the arm support portion 404) is not related to the end gear 413.
) on the opposite side of the front and rear positions can be designed as desired.

In this embodiment, the tip plate portion 414e, which is disposed on the opposite side of the rotation axis (arm support portion 404) with respect to the terminal gear 413 as a reference, is disposed on the rear side compared to the intermediate plate portion 414c. This allows a large space to be secured on the front side of the tip plate portion 414e, making it easier to secure the front-to-rear dimensions of components such as the rear arrangement plate 420 and the synchronous operation unit 440, which are disposed at a position on the front side of the tip plate portion 414e and on the rear side of the lift plate 430.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is set to avoid interference with other members, but there are other structural effects as well. For example, by forming the arm member 414 to bend in stages, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the arm member 414 from concentrating locally (at one point) (it is possible to alleviate stress concentration), and the durability of the arm member 414 can be improved.

Furthermore, by providing the minimum necessary gap to avoid interference with other components, a large gap can be provided on the opposite side of the arm member 414 from the other components that secure that gap; this gap can then be used to run electrical wiring (electrical wiring different from electrical wiring DH1) or to install additional performance components (such as an illumination board).

26, in this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 arranged so as to reach the light emitting performance device LA1 from the main body plate portion 401 side is configured to be prevented from being unintentionally pinched by the vane-shaped member 460 or caught in the gear teeth of the rotating gear 441 or the relative displacement member 442. This will be described below. In this description, FIG. 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

The electrical wiring DH1 first passes through the long hole 406 from the main body plate portion 401 side and then is connected to the auxiliary arm member 44
At this time, the electrical wiring DH1 is inserted into the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448 and passed through the inside of the extension portion 444c.

Inside the extension portion 444c, the electrical wiring DH1 is guided to the base end side portion 444a while being prevented from falling off by the retaining portion 444c1.
4 a to the rear side of the accommodating plate portion 425 , passes through an L-shaped area partitioned by a frame portion protruding toward the rear side of the accommodating plate portion 425 and a blocking plate 428 , and reaches the through hole 427 .

The frame portion protruding from the rear side of the accommodating plate portion 425 includes an omitted portion 425b in which the protrusion is omitted over approximately half the circumference centered on the insertion hole 425a.
The angle at which the electric wiring DH1 is guided to the front side of the closure plate 428 can be set to 180 degrees. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 will be bent near the insertion hole 425a when the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates.

The electrical wiring DH1 is passed through the through hole 427 to the front side, and then guided through a cylindrical portion 433 formed at a position overlapping the through hole 427 at the front and rear to the front side of the lifting plate 430, where it is temporarily fastened to the fastening portion 451 of the support plate portion 450 with a cable tie or the like and connected to a connector arranged on the electric lighting board of the light-emitting performance device LA1.

In this way, the electrical wiring DH1 is connected to the component (auxiliary arm member 444) for most of its path.
Since the electrical wiring DH1 is disposed on the inside of the movable plate 410 and the rear mounting plate 420, the possibility that the electrical wiring DH1 will collide with other movable parts and be subjected to a load can be reduced, compared to the case where the electrical wiring is exposed over most of the path as in conventional pachinko machines.

In this embodiment, the guide path of the electric wiring DH1 is separated from the slidingly displaced relative displacement member 442. That is, deformation such as bending or curving can occur in the electric wiring DH1 only when the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotated (rotated with the sliding displacement of the rotation shaft).

As a result, even if the vertical displacement speed of the lift plate 430 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 are configured to be significantly different, the deformation of the electrical wiring DH1 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442
By breaking the relationship with the displacement speed, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the electric wiring DH1 from becoming large.

22(a), 23, 24 and 25 will be described. The rear arrangement plate 420 is made up of a plate-shaped connecting plate portion 421 which is connected to the cylindrical protruding portion 414f of the arm member 414 and fastened to the lift plate 430, a storage plate portion 425 which is disposed on the right side of the connecting plate portion 421 and fastened to the lift plate 430 and to which a front side member of the metal rail 405 is fastened and fixed, and a storage plate portion 425 which is fastened to the lift plate 430 and to which a front side member of the metal rail 405 is fastened and fixed.
and an L-shaped closing plate 428 that is fastened and fixed to the receiving plate 425 and partially closes the rear side of the receiving plate 425.

The connecting plate portion 421 is formed on the main body plate portion in the shape of a long hole extending in the left-right direction.
and a support box portion 423 formed in a box shape below the insertion slot 422 with the front side and the top side open.

Since the support box portion 423 is formed long downward with respect to the insertion slot 422, the rigidity of the accommodating plate portion 425 can be reinforced by using the support box portion 423.
3 is disposed opposite the support wall portion 426 on the left and right, and when the support wall portion 426 is significantly deflected and deformed to the left and comes into contact with the support box portion 423, the deformation can be suppressed by the rigidity of the support box portion 423.

The accommodating plate portion 425 includes a support wall portion 426 that protrudes toward the front side from the left edge of the main body plate portion in the form of a straight plate extending in the vertical direction, and a through hole 427 that is drilled on the front side of the closing plate 428.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 is inserted into the through hole 427. That is, the through hole 427 is formed with an inner diameter that allows a connector disposed at the end of the electrical wiring DH1 to be inserted therethrough.

The blocking plate 428 is formed so that the front surface of the plate abuts against a frame portion that protrudes in a frame shape from the rear side of the accommodating plate portion 425, and is configured to separate the area between the accommodating plate portion 425 and the blocking plate 428. In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 is configured to be arranged only inside the frame portion of the accommodating plate portion 425 (the front side of the blocking plate 428). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring DH1 from entering the metal rail 405 side (to the left of the frame portion).

A specially shaped hole 428a is formed through the closure plate 428 so that a temporary fastening portion 425c, which is a portion that protrudes in a U-shape toward the rear side at a position closer to the through hole 427 side than the omitted portion 425b, can be seen when viewed from the rear.

The irregularly shaped hole 428a is formed from a horizontally elongated portion whose left-right width is slightly longer than the width of the temporary fastening portion 425c, and a vertically elongated portion that intersects with the horizontally elongated portion to ensure an area through which a cable tie can be passed.

The temporary fastening portion 425c serves as a fastening portion for the cable tie.
By temporarily fastening H1, the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1 can be stabilized.
By tightening the cable tie, the path of the electrical wiring DH1 guided from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the blocking plate 428 can be shifted toward the blocking plate 428, so that a gap can be provided between the edge of the semicircular plate portion centered on the insertion hole 425a of the accommodation plate portion 425 and the electrical wiring DH1 (see FIGS. 25 and 26).
Since it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DH1 from rubbing against the edge portion of the electric wiring DH1, the service life of the electric wiring DH1 can be extended.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the cable tie that temporarily fastens the electrical wiring DH1 (see Figure 26) guided between the omitted portions 425b can be exposed from the irregular hole 428a of the blocking plate 428, so that the cable tie can be replaced or assembled without removing the blocking plate 428.

As a result, the temporary fastening position of the electrical wiring DH1 is a position between the receiving plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428, which is a position where the position of the electrical wiring DH1 relative to the components of the first operating unit 400 is fixed (i.e., the position of the electrical wiring DH1 from the light-emitting performance device LA1 to which one end of the electrical wiring DH1 is connected).
When the electric wiring DH1 travels along the path of FIG. 1, the cable tie can be replaced without removing the closure plate 428 while the electric wiring DH1 is temporarily fastened at a position overlapping with the path to the base end side portion 444a of the auxiliary arm member 444, which is the first portion where the electric wiring DH1 is displaced relative to the lift plate 430. Therefore, the service life of the electric wiring DH1 can be improved, and the maintainability of the cable tie associated with the electric wiring DH1 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 is laid along the front side of the blocking plate 428 in accordance with the shape of the blocking plate 428. However, since the blocking plate 428 is L-shaped when viewed from the rear, the electrical wiring DH1
is curved along a first plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction on the front side of the blocking plate 428, while being curved along a second plane perpendicular to the left-right direction (a plane perpendicular to the first plane) near the through hole 427. This can improve the holding force that holds the electrical wiring DH1 to the blocking plate 428 and the housing plate 425, and can stabilize the position of the electrical wiring DH1.

The lift plate 430 includes a fastening portion 431 having a plurality of portions for fastening and fixing the rear arrangement plate 420, and a support portion 432 having a plurality of portions for supporting the synchronous operation unit 440.
It comprises a tubular portion 433 formed to allow the electrical wiring DH1 to be inserted therethrough, a fastening portion 434 composed of a plurality of portions for fastening and fixing the support plate portion 450, a plurality of countermeasure portions 435 formed on the main plate portion to avoid interference between the components, and a decorative portion 436 having a pattern of an approximately symmetrical shape applied to the front of the plate.

The fastening portion 431 is at least disposed at the lower end of the lift plate 430 and is connected to a relative displacement member 442 (
The pair of gourd-shaped protrusions 431a support the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 (slide rack). The gourd-shaped protrusions 431a support the relative displacement member 442, but have a female screw shape formed at the tip, into which a fastening screw is screwed to fasten the accommodation plate 425 to the lifting plate 430. In other words, the gourd-shaped protrusions 431a serve both as a part for fastening the rear arrangement plate 420 and as a part for supporting the synchronous operation unit 440.

The cylindrical portion 433 extends toward the rear side through a gap between the components of the synchronous operation unit 440, and its rear end abuts against the front surface of the accommodating plate portion 425. In this abutting state, the through hole 427 and the inside of the cylindrical portion 433 are continuously connected.
1 is inserted from front to back.

The countermeasure portion 435 may be, for example, a notch portion 435a that is cut upward from the lower edge of the main body plate portion in order to avoid interference with the connecting portion between the fixed transmission plate 490 and the relative displacement member 442 (in this embodiment, the raising fastening portion that is arranged vertically in a row).
An example of such a recess is recessed portion 435b formed in a wall portion that is formed in a wall shape to protect the axial upper portion of arc-shaped gear portion 444b and is formed to avoid interference with arc-shaped gear portion 444b.

The decorative portion 436 is disposed on the rear side of the feather-shaped member 460 and is configured to cooperate with the feather-shaped member 460 to allow a series of patterns to be visually recognized as the feather-shaped member 460 is displaced, as will be described in more detail below.

The synchronous operation unit 440 includes a pair of rotating gears 441 that mesh with each other and the rotating gears 441.
The rotating gear 441 includes a relative displacement member 442 which is formed to mesh with one of the rotating gears 441 and be displaceable in the vertical direction, a pair of long holes 443 which are drilled in the relative displacement member 442 in the shape of long holes, an auxiliary arm member 444 which has rotating gear teeth which mesh with the other of the rotating gears 441, and an end side plate 448 which is fastened and fixed to the rotating tip of the auxiliary arm member 444 from the rear side.

The gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is inserted into the long hole 443.
3 is disposed so that the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 442 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 442, thereby stabilizing the posture of the relative displacement member 442.

In addition, since the area of contact with the long hole 443 can be made smaller compared to when the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is formed in an oval shape, the frictional resistance generated between the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a and the relative displacement member 442 can be reduced.

The auxiliary arm member 444 includes a ring-shaped base end side portion 444a that is pivotally supported by the large diameter protrusion 432a of the support portion 432, an arc gear portion 444b in which gear teeth are formed concentrically with the ring shape of the base end side portion 444a, and an extension portion 444b that extends radially from the base end side portion 444a.
The extension portion 444c includes a cylindrical member 444d which is a substantially semi-cylindrical portion disposed at the extended tip of the extension portion 444c and is configured so that an opening on the inner side of the cylinder is continuously connected to the opening of the extension portion 444c.

When the base end side portion 444a is inserted into the large diameter protrusion 432a, the movement of the base end side portion 444a toward the rear side is restricted by the accommodation plate portion 425 having an insertion hole 425a through which a fastening screw is inserted to be screwed into a female screw portion formed at the tip of the large diameter protrusion 432a.
The receiving plate portion 425 is pivotally supported in a manner opposing the receiving plate portion 425 from the front and rear so as not to fall off.

The extension portion 444c is formed in a box shape with an open back side, and is provided with a retaining portion 444c1 that is extended from one side in the short side direction to the other side at the back side and is formed with a gap between the other side that is slightly longer than the short side dimension (width dimension) of the electric wiring DH1. This retaining portion 444c1 has the role of preventing the electric wiring DH1, which is disposed inside the extension portion 444c, from falling off after the electric wiring DH1 is passed between the extension portion 444c and the other side in the short side direction.

The form of the retaining portion 444c1 is not limited to this.
The gap between 44c and the retaining portion 444c1 is the short-side dimension (width dimension) of the electrical wiring DH1.
In this case, when assembling (inserting) the electric wiring DH1 into the gap between the extension portion 444c and the retaining portion 444c1, it is necessary to flex the retaining portion 444c1 to widen the gap, but this can improve the effect of preventing the electric wiring DH1 from falling off after assembly.

As long as the electrical wiring DH1 is arranged inside the extension portion 444c, the expansion and contraction of the electrical wiring DH1 due to the raising and lowering displacement of the first operating unit 400 can be kept to a minimum, but details will be described later with reference to Figures 27 to 30.

The outer diameter of the tubular member 444d is designed to be slightly shorter than the short dimension of the long hole portion 406, and when inserted into the long hole portion 406, it enables the auxiliary arm member 444 to slide along the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the long hole portion 406 and to rotate the auxiliary arm member 444.

The end side plate 448 is provided with a through hole 448a through which the electrical wiring DH1 can be inserted.
The electrical wiring DH1 inserted through the through hole 448a is connected to the cylindrical portion 4
44d, passes inside the extension portion 444c, is guided to the back side of the base end portion 444a, and enters between the closure plate 428 and the accommodation plate portion 425. Then, it passes through the through hole 427 and the cylindrical portion 433 and is guided to the front side.

In this way, since the electrical wiring DH1 is passed through the through hole 448a, the inner shape of the through hole 448a is the same as that of the electrical wiring DH1.
The through hole 448 is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the connector to be connected to the end of the through hole 448.
The portion a is formed to have a size that allows the connector to be inserted therethrough.

The through hole 448a is formed in an irregular shape including an eccentric region radially outward, not only in the center of the end side plate 448, and is particularly formed with a large opening on the extension portion 444c side. Therefore, regardless of the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444, the electrical wiring DH1 can be moved toward the extension portion 444c, and therefore it is possible to prevent the position of the electrical wiring DH1 relative to the auxiliary arm member 444 from changing significantly (moving wildly) as the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes.

In addition, the through hole 448a is extended counterclockwise in rear view from the extension portion 444c side at the outer diameter side portion of the end side plate 448. This extension allows the opening range of the through hole 448a in the retracted state of the first operating unit 400 to be expanded to the right, thereby reducing the left-right displacement width required for the electrical wiring DH1.

In this case, even in the configuration of this embodiment in which the end side plate 448 is displaced left and right when the lift plate 430 is lifted and lowered, changing the direction of the through hole 448a can function to mitigate the left and right displacement of the end side plate 448. Therefore, the displacement width required for the electrical wiring DH1 can be made shorter than the displacement width of the end side plate 448, so that the excess length of the wiring set in consideration of the displacement of the electrical wiring DH1 can be shortened, and the end side plate 44
The load applied from the power supply 8 to the electric wiring DH1 can be reduced.

A fixed transmission plate 490 is fastened to the front side of the relative displacement member 442.
Similarly to the relative displacement between the lift plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442, the support plate portion 450 fastened and fixed to the lift plate 430 and the fixed transmission plate 490 fastened and fixed to the relative displacement member 442 are displaced relative to each other.

The support plate portion 450 is a light-emitting device LA formed in a disk shape and having a light-emitting substrate disposed on the rear side.
1 is a plate-shaped member fastened to the front side, and includes a plurality of fastening portions 451 into which fastening screws are screwed to be inserted into the lift plate 430, and a blade-shaped member 460 is fitted into a cylindrical portion 461 of the blade-shaped member 460 to fix the lift plate 43
A pair of left and right fastening shaft support parts 452 into which fastening screws are inserted to be inserted into the light emitting device LA1, a pair of left and right through holes 453 formed below the fastening shaft support parts 452, and
and a support portion 454 that hooks and supports the upper protrusion LA1b.

The light emitting performance device LA1 has a pair of fastening parts LA1a at the bottom into which fastening screws are screwed to be inserted into the support plate part 450, and a pair of protruding pieces LA1b at the top that are protruding so as to be insertable into the support part 454. In this way, the lower part of the light emitting performance device LA1 is supported by fastening and fixing,
By supporting the upper part through engagement, it is possible to ensure sufficient support strength while avoiding the shadow of the fastening screws appearing on the upper back side of the illuminated board.

A three-dimensional or two-dimensional decorative pattern that is visible to the player is applied to the front of the light-emitting performance device LA1. This decorative pattern is configured so that it can be seen as a decoration integrated with the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 when it is visible without being hidden by the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 (see FIG. 34).

In this embodiment, the shapes of the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 are modeled after shells (e.g., scallop shells), and the light-emitting performance device LA1 placed between them is formed into a generally circular shape seen from the front that can be visually recognized as a pearl. That is, by making the light-emitting performance member LA1, feather-shaped member 460, and auxiliary member 470 visible as a single unit, it is possible to configure an appearance that recalls the series of concepts of "a pearl placed inside an open shell."

The feather-shaped member 460 is composed of a plurality of members supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452, and includes a cylindrical portion 461 rotatably supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452, an arc-shaped gear 462 formed in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical portion 461 and meshing with each other, an extension portion 463 extending in a plate shape from the cylindrical portion 461 to the opposite side of the arc-shaped gear 462, and a forming portion 464L formed on the extension end side of the extension portion 463 and having a plate front portion coated with plating so as to be able to strongly reflect light.
, 464R, a downstream gear 465 formed along an arc having a smaller diameter than the arc-shaped gear 462 and closer to the front than the arc-shaped gear 462, a flange portion 466 formed in a flange shape covering the rear side of the arc-shaped gear 462, and a cylindrical protrusion portion 467 protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the rear side from an extension end portion of the flange portion 466 extended in the outer direction.

The arc-shaped gear 462 is formed as gear teeth formed on an arc of the same diameter that meshes with the intermediate position of the pair of cylindrical portions 461. That is, the rotation angles of the multiple (left and right) feather-shaped members 460 that rotate due to the meshing of the arc-shaped gear 462 are the same (symmetrical).

The extension portion 463 includes a recessed portion 463a formed only on the right side.
Reference numeral 63a denotes a shaped portion for easily avoiding interference with the electrical wiring that passes through the cylindrical portion 433 and is guided to the front side of the lift plate 430, and details thereof will be described later.

The forming portions 464L, 464R are combined together in the extended state of the first operating unit 400 and are configured as a series of approximately semicircular (approximately semi-elliptical) decorative bodies (see FIG. 17).
In the retracted state of the operational units 400, the operational units 400 are arranged separately on the left and right, and their sizes are asymmetrical (see FIG. 16).

More specifically, the lower side is formed symmetrically, while the upper side that comes into contact when combined has a left forming portion 464L that is larger than the right forming portion 464R by being formed to protrude in the rotational direction. In other words, when the first operating unit 400 is in the protruding state, the contact surface S1 of the forming portions 464L and 464R is disposed toward the right side (see FIG. 17).
reference).

The shapes of the upper ends of the feather-shaped members 464L and 464R that are arranged opposite each other are as follows:
The distance from the cylindrical portion 461 is different. That is, the side closer to the cylindrical portion 461 (the side closer to the rotation axis, the inner diameter side) has interference portions 464L and 464R that are misaligned in the direction of the rotation axis of the vane-shaped members 464L and 464R so that the vane-shaped members 464L and 464R can overlap each other in a front view when they are closest to each other.
64a is provided.

In this embodiment, the side closer to the cylindrical portion 461 corresponds to a portion where a decorative pattern is formed that is visually recognized as a continuous pattern when the feather-shaped members 464L, 464R are closest to each other.
Since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of discontinuities in the contact surface S1 of 464R, the decorative pattern can be visually recognized by the player without any sense of incongruity.

On the other hand, on the side farther from the cylindrical portion 461 (the side farther from the rotation axis, the outer diameter side), the feather-shaped member 464L
, 464R can be stopped by contact with the blade-shaped members 464L, 464R.
The contact surfaces are shaped so as to be disposed at positions that coincide with each other in the direction of the rotation axis of R.

The portion where the load generated by contact when the wing-shaped members 464L and 464R are stopped is provided at the outermost diameter portion where the arm length is the longest in the calculation of the moment of force.
The load on the 4L and 464R can be minimized.

In this way, by changing the shape of the feather-shaped members 464L, 464R depending on the distance from the cylindrical portion 461, the player can view the series of decorative patterns formed when the feather-shaped members 464L, 464R are closest to each other without feeling uncomfortable, and the load that may be generated on the feather-shaped members 464L, 464R when they are closest to each other can be minimized.

The flange portion 466 serves both to suppress misalignment of the arc-shaped gear 462 in the front-rear direction and to separate the arc-shaped gear 462 from the fixed transmission plate 490. This makes it possible to optimize the meshing state of the arc-shaped gear 462 and to prevent the arc-shaped gear 462 from coming into contact with and getting caught on the fixed transmission plate 490, thereby preventing excessive resistance from occurring.

The cylindrical projection 467 is inserted into the long hole 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, and a ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction is inserted into the projection tip. In addition, a female thread is formed at the projection tip, and a fastening screw is inserted into the collar C1 and has a head portion larger than the inner diameter of the collar C1. This connects the fixed transmission plate 490 to the cylindrical projection 467 so that it cannot fall off.

The auxiliary member 470 is composed of a pair of left and right plate-like members that are rotatably supported, and includes a supported portion 471 formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape, a metal insertion bar 472 made of metal that is passed through the through hole 453 and inserted into the supported portion 471 and non-rotatably fitted thereto, and a gear portion 473 that is non-rotatably fitted to the end of the inserting metal bar 472 and has gear teeth formed on an arc centered on the inserting metal bar 472.
It is equipped with.

A female screw is formed in the radial direction on the front side of the insertion metal rod 472.
At the corresponding positions, through holes are formed through which the threaded portions of the fastening screws that are screwed into the female threads can be inserted. After the metal rod 472 is inserted into the supported portion 471, the fastening screw is screwed into the female thread through the through holes, thereby preventing the metal rod 472 from falling off the supported portion 471.

The gear portion 473 is supported by the through hole 453 as the inserted metal rod 472 is supported by the through hole 453.
The gear portion 473 is rotatably supported around the downstream gear 465 (
22(b)), it rotates in synchronization with the rotation angle of the feather-shaped member 460.

The fixed transmission plate 490 comprises a plate-shaped portion which is fastened to the front side of the relative displacement member 442, a long hole portion 491 which is drilled as a curved long hole in the plate-shaped portion, a metal rod 492 which is a metal rod-shaped member supported non-rotatably at the lower end of the plate-shaped portion and which protrudes toward the front side, and a decorative portion 493 which is fixed non-rotatably to the protruding tip of the metal rod 492.

The long hole portion 491 is made up of a vertical portion 491 a formed along the vertical direction and a vertical portion 49
The long hole 491 is provided with a curved portion 491b formed by being bent in the left-right direction more than the long hole 491a. By dividing the long hole 491 into sections in this manner, the vertical displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 and the associated rotational displacement of the feather-shaped member 460 can be shifted in synchronization rather than being completely synchronized, as will be described in detail later.

The metal rod 492 and the decorative portion 493 are connected and fixed by the above-mentioned inserted metal rod 472 and the supported portion 47
This is the same as the manner in which the metal rod 492 is connected to the decorative portion 493.

Next, the operation of the first operation unit 400 will be described.
9 and 30 are rear views of the first operating unit 400. In Fig. 27 to Fig. 30, the manner in which each component member is displaced with the rotation of the drive motor MT1 is illustrated. In Fig. 27, the first operating unit 400 is in a retracted state, and in Fig. 28, the first operating unit 400 is in a retracted state with the lift plate 430 lowered by a distance slightly longer than the vertical deviation dimension of the wall schematic line UL (see Fig. 16).
29 illustrates a second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400 in which the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary arm member 444 faces the left-right direction, and FIG. 30 illustrates the extended state of the first operating unit 400.

27, in the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, the detected portion 413d enters the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1, thereby determining the posture of the terminal gear 413. In this embodiment, the state detected by the detection sensor SC1 is only the retracted state, and the other states (first intermediate state, second intermediate state, extended state) are states after being displaced by a preset displacement amount from the retracted state, and are not detected by the detection sensor SC1.

27, in the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical protrusion 413c is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the long hole 414d of the arm member 414 (the radial direction of the rotation of the arm member 414). As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminal gear 413 occurs along a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413. Therefore, even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off, the load of the arm member 414 is generated along the straight line passing through the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413.
This allows the user to maintain a stable posture (utilizing the dead point).

The tip plate portion 414e of the arm member 414 is disposed outside a circular arc MXS that circumscribes the disk portion of the terminal gear 413 with the rotation axis of the arm member 414 as the center. This makes it possible to avoid interference between the tip plate portion 414e and the terminal gear 413 during the rotational displacement of the arm member 414.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side of the lift plate 430 from descending. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported so as to be slidable in the long hole portion 406,
It is not a resistance-free structure, but rather generates motion resistance due to contact friction between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the long hole portion 406. That is, the right side of the lifting/lowering portion 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the action of this motion resistance.

As shown in FIG. 28, the arm member 414 is rotated and displaced, whereby the lift plate 430 is displaced downward. In response to this, the rotary gear 441 which meshes with the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotated,
The relative displacement member 442 is displaced downward by an amount exceeding the amount of displacement of the lift plate 430 .

Although it has a complex shape, the driving force is transmitted from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the relative displacement member 442 by gear meshing, so that the amount of displacement of the relative displacement member 442 relative to the lift plate 430 and the rotation angle of the auxiliary arm member 444 correspond one-to-one.

As shown in FIG. 28, while the arm member 414, auxiliary arm member 444, lift plate 430 and relative displacement member 442 are displaced as described above, the feather-shaped member 460 maintains the same position as in the retracted state.

That is, according to this embodiment, a time lag occurs between the timing at which the lift plate 430 starts to descend from the retracted state of the first operating unit 400 and the timing at which the vane-shaped member 460 starts to rotate. The cause of this time lag will be described later.

In this embodiment, the lifting plate 430 descends by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL (see Figure 16) before the feather-shaped member 460 starts to rotate, which makes it easier to prevent the feather-shaped member 460 from colliding with the upper wall portion of the rear case 310 when it is rotated and displaced.

In other words, the displacement mode in which the feather-shaped member 460 rotates after descending by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL is the same as the displacement mode (conventional displacement mode) in which the feather-shaped member 460 rotates simultaneously with the descent of the lift plate 430 when the upper wall portion of the rear case 310 is formed so that there is no height difference between the left and right. Therefore, the operation of the first operating unit 400 of this embodiment can be realized by utilizing the operating conditions (parameters such as gear ratio and displacement amount) of the conventional displacement mode. This can reduce the cost required for design.

As shown in FIG. 27, the arm member 4, which is hidden behind the lift plate 430 in the retracted state,
28, as the lift plate 430 descends, the support 14 is displaced so as to protrude above the lift plate 430.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the feather-shaped member 460 is configured to be displaceable relative to the lifting plate 430 so as to hide the arm member 414 (see FIG. 29). In other words, the feather-shaped member 460 not only serves as an effect means for making the player visually recognize the decorative pattern formed on the front side to enhance the game, but also functions as a shielding means for hiding the arm member 414 for drive transmission together with the lifting plate 430.

In particular, in this embodiment, the formation portion 464L of the feather-shaped member 460 on the side where the arm member 414 having the function of transmitting driving force is arranged is made larger in shape compared to the formation portion 464R of the feather-shaped member 460 on the opposite side, making it easier to hide the arm member 414 from the player's view.

Similarly, the forming portion 464R is configured to hide the auxiliary arm member 444 (see FIG. 30). In this embodiment, due to the configuration, the arm member 444 is hidden in the second intermediate state.
14 protrudes above the lift plate 430, while the auxiliary arm member 444 is still hidden on the rear side of the lift plate 430. That is, the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to protrude above the lift plate 430 after the arm member 414 protrudes above the lift plate 430 (see FIG. 30).

Therefore, even when using forming portion 464R, which has a smaller shape than forming portion 464L (the amount of upward protrusion of lift plate 430 at the same point in time is smaller than forming portion 464L), the auxiliary arm member 444 can be hidden from the player's view without any problems.

29, the auxiliary arm member 444 assumes a position in which its longitudinal direction faces the left-right direction when the cylindrical projection 414f is slightly farther leftward from the rotation axis of the arm member 414. When the cylindrical projection 414f is farthest leftward from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the rightward load applied from the arm member 414 to the lift plate 430 tends to be large.
Conversely, if the auxiliary arm member 444 applies a load to the lift plate 430 in the left direction at the same time, the displacement resistance of the lift plate 430 will increase.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the attitude of the auxiliary arm member 444 is tilted when the cylindrical protruding portion 414f is slightly past the position where it is furthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, and the cylindrical portion 44
25) is disposed at the right end of the long hole portion 406, so that a load in the left direction can be applied to the lift plate 430 via the auxiliary arm member 444. This allows the lift plate 430 to move in the left-right direction with the load applied to the lift plate 430 while suppressing the displacement resistance of the lift plate 430.
This makes it possible to suppress the displacement of the support 30 in the left-right direction.

In the state shown in Figure 29, the cylindrical protrusion 413c of the terminal gear 413 is positioned outside the arc MXS, but since the tip plate portion 414e has already gone too far below the cylindrical protrusion portion 413c, interference between the tip plate portion 414e and the terminal gear 413 can be avoided.

That is, the arc MXS is merely defined as a guide position, and the end gear 41
The design of the end gear 413 and the arm member 414 is carried out by dynamically examining whether or not interference will occur when the end gear 413 and the arm member 414 are actually linked together.

30, in the extended state of the first operating unit 400, the end gear 413 rotates from a position where the stoppered portion 413b of the end gear 413 abuts against the stopper portion 403c of the main body plate portion 401 as an end point.
The drive motor M is rotated so that the end gear 413 stops at a position slightly before the position where it abuts against the end gear 413.
T1 is driven. As a result, the stopped portion 413b and the stopper portion 40
This makes it possible to structurally prevent the end gear 413 from over-rotating while avoiding early damage to the gear 3c.

30, in the extended state of the first operating unit 400, a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical extension portion 413c is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 414d of the arm member 414 (the radial direction of the rotation of the arm member 414). As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminal gear 413 occurs along a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413, so that the load of the arm member 414 can be applied to the terminal gear 413 even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off.
This allows the user to maintain a stable posture (utilizing the dead point).

The posture is maintained in both directions along the rotation direction of the arm member 414. That is, not only is it possible to prevent displacement in the direction of gravity, but it is also possible to prevent the first operating unit 400 from being displaced upward from the extended state to the retracted state.

This makes it possible to prevent the lift plate 430 connected to the arm member 414 from bouncing upward after reaching the extended state, and therefore prevents the members downstream of the lift plate 430 (synchronous operation unit 440, feather-shaped member 460, auxiliary member 470, etc.) in the drive force transmission path from being displaced. This makes it easier to maintain the contact state of the feather-shaped member 460.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side of the lift plate 430 from rising. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported so as to be slidable in the long hole portion 406,
It is not a resistance-free structure, but rather generates motion resistance due to contact friction between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the long hole portion 406. That is, the right side of the lifting/lowering portion 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the action of this motion resistance.

In addition, the auxiliary arm member 444 suspends and supports the lift plate 430. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 are distributed to one side (the left or right side).
Although this configuration occurs only on the left side of the metal rail 405, it is possible to prevent the posture of the lift plate 430 from becoming unstable on the left and right sides of the metal rail 405.

Here, as described above, as long as the electrical wiring DH1 is arranged inside the extension portion 444c, it is possible to minimize the expansion and contraction of the electrical wiring DH1 when the lift plate 430 of the first operating unit 400 is lifted and displaced.

When the path of the electrical wiring DH1 is traced from the light emitting device LA1 side, the auxiliary arm member 444
The path is fixed to the lift plate 430 until it reaches the lift plate 430, and the path becomes variable only when the auxiliary arm member 444 is provided. On the other hand, the extension portion 444c in which the electrical wiring DH1 is disposed has a fixed shape even while the lift plate 430 is displaced up and down, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility of the electrical wiring DH1 being displaced by expansion or contraction.

At the position where the electric wiring DH1 is extended from the through hole 448a to the rear side, the electric wiring DH1 is connected to the end side plate 44
In this way, the electric wiring DH1
Since the displacement that may cause expansion and contraction is limited to that caused by the displacement of the end side plate 448,
In this embodiment, the left-right displacement of the end side plate 448 is measured, and the necessary extra length is calculated.
This extra length is added to the electrical wiring DH1 in the path from the fixing position of the electrical wiring DH1 to the end side plate 448 (in a state in which the electrical wiring DH1 is loosened), and then the electrical wiring DH1 is fixed to the main body plate portion 401.

In other words, the locations where expansion and contraction of the electrical wiring DH1 due to the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 may occur can be limited to the vicinity of the end side plate 448, and in addition, the amount of displacement that causes expansion and contraction can be kept to less than half the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430.

Furthermore, as described above, the shape of the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448
Since the displacement width of the electric wiring DH1 can be reduced compared to the displacement width of the electric wiring D
The excess length of H1 can be shortened.

31, 32, 33, and 34 are front views of the first operating unit 400.
31 to 34 show the state in which each component member is displaced with the rotation of the drive motor MT1. FIG. 31 shows the retreated state of the first operating unit 400, FIG. 32 shows the first intermediate state of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 33 shows the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400.
In FIG. 34, the extended states of the first operating unit 400 are illustrated.

31, the lower edge of the feather-shaped member 460 is formed symmetrically. Therefore, when the first operation unit 400 is in the retracted state, the first operation unit 400 that enters the field of view of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player as a movable member having a symmetrical shape.

As shown in Fig. 32, when the lift plate 430 is slightly displaced downward, the attitude of the feather-shaped member 460 is maintained. Therefore, even in the state shown in Fig. 32, the first operation unit 400, which enters the field of view in which the third symbol display device 81 is viewed, can be visually recognized by the player as a movable member having a symmetrical shape.

In the first intermediate state shown in Figure 32, the posture of the feather-shaped member 460 does not change compared to the retracted state shown in Figure 31, but as the lifting plate 430 descends, the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 are displaced downward by the same amount, and the decorative part 493 is displaced downward by an amount that exceeds this amount of downward displacement.

Therefore, when the first operating unit 400 is changed from the retracted state to the first intermediate state, a player viewing the lift plate 430 can see not only the up and down displacement of the lift plate 430 alone, but also the up and down displacement of the decorative part 493, which displaces by an amount different from the up and down displacement of the lift plate 430, thereby improving the presentation effect.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the second intermediate state, the difference between the amount of displacement of the lifting plate 430 and the amount of displacement of the decorative portion 493 increases compared to the first intermediate state, and in addition, the postures of the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 change.

In FIG. 34, the feather members 460 are shown in opposing positions abutting against each other.
0 is viewed as if it were a single decorative component having an approximately semicircular (semi-elliptical) shape due to the combination of a pair of left and right components, and its abutment surface S1 is formed in a position shifted to the right from the center position on the left and right where the metal rail 405 is arranged.

In this embodiment, the upper edge side of forming portion 464L is configured to be extra on the forming portion 464R side compared to the upper edge side of forming portion 464R, so that the abutment surface S1 in the protruding state is offset from the left-right center.

The upper edge portions of the forming portions 464L and 464R are disposed in a position that is shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 when the first operating unit 400 is in the retreated state (see FIG. 2).
It is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice that the formation portions 464L and 464R are configured to have an asymmetric shape, thereby making it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the asymmetric shape of the formation portions 464L and 464R.

Furthermore, since the abutment surface S1 is offset from the metal rail 405 when viewed from the front, even if the feather-shaped member 460 bounces back due to the impact at the time of abutment and a gap is created again, it is possible to prevent the rail member 405 from being seen through the gap, and it is possible to ensure that the decorative shape formed on the front surface of the main body plate portion 401 is visible.

This makes it possible to prevent a reduction in the presentation effect compared to when the inorganic metal rail 405 (in other words, a component that is essential for realizing the displacement of the movable props and is not intended for decoration) is visible through the gap.

In addition, the contact surface S1 is disposed at a position shifted from the left-right center position that a player would generally expect as the gap between a pair of movable members that contact and separate on the left and right. In other words, by preventing a gap from being generated at the position (left-right center position) that a player would visually recognize while expecting a gap to be generated, and by disposing the contact surface S1 where a gap may be generated at a position shifted from that position, even if a gap is generated, the gap can be made less noticeable.

31 to 34, the visibility of the decorative part 436 changes depending on the arrangement of the feather-shaped members 460. That is, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 31) to the second intermediate state (see FIG. 33), the outer shape of the decorative part 436 is shielded by the feather-shaped members 460, making it difficult for the player to grasp the entire picture.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 400 is in the extended state (see Figure 34), the outer shape of the decorative part 436 arranged on the underside of the feather-shaped member 460 is visible, and the outer shape is formed so as to be continuous with the outer shape of the feather-shaped member 460 when viewed from the front.

That is, the decorative portion 436 is formed so that the series of decorative shapes (in this embodiment, a "shell" shape) that are visible when the pair of feather-shaped members 460 are in the extended state of the first operating unit 400 extends further downward from the lower edge. Therefore, a series of decorative shapes larger than the series of decorative shapes formed by combining the pair of feather-shaped members 460 (see FIG. 38) can be formed,
It can be visually recognized by the player.

In this manner, in this embodiment, there is not just one process of displacement until a series of decorative shapes are formed by the displacement of the feather-shaped members 460. That is, as a first displacement process, a process in which a pair of feather-shaped members 460 as one component of a series of decorative shapes are displaced in a manner approaching each other and united to form a series of decorative shapes can be mentioned.

On the other hand, the second displacement process is a process in which the feather-shaped member 460 and the decorative part 436, as one component of a series of decorative shapes, overlap front to back when viewed from the front when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, and as the first operating unit 400 approaches the extended state, the feather-shaped member 460 displaces in a direction in which the overlap becomes smaller (the direction in which the feather-shaped member 460 moves away from the decorative part 436), thereby forming a series of decorative shapes.

By using these different processes, the displacement of the feather-shaped member 460 itself is a simple displacement mode of adjacent displacement, while the shapes can be connected at both ends along the displacement direction of the feather-shaped member 460, and a series of decorative shapes can be formed.
While keeping the shape of the first operational unit 400 small, the series of decorative shapes that are formed by combining together when the first operational unit 400 is in the extended state can be made large in comparison to the size of the first operational unit 400 .

35, 36, 37 and 38 show the support plate portion 450, the feather-shaped member 460, the auxiliary member 4
35 to 38 show how each component is displaced with the rotation of the drive motor MT1, with Fig. 35 showing the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, Fig. 36 showing the first intermediate state of the first operating unit 400, Fig. 37 showing the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400, and Fig. 38 showing the extended state of the first operating unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of through holes LA1c are formed on the back side of the light-emitting performance device LA1 and are arranged in a circular arc shape, and light is leaked out to the back side through the through holes LA1c.
Since the feather-shaped member 460 is disposed so as to cover the back side of the through-hole LA1c, the light leaking from the through-hole LA1c can be reflected by the forming portions 464L and 464R of the feather-shaped member 460 towards the front side.

The rotational displacement of the feather member 460 will be described with reference to Figures 35 to 38.
The rotational displacement of 60 occurs due to the relationship between the cylindrical projection 467 and the long hole 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, so this portion will be described in particular in detail.

From the retracted state shown in FIG. 35 to the first intermediate state shown in FIG. 36, the vertical direction of the elongated hole 491 through which the cylindrical protrusion 467 is inserted is changed in a direction in which the vertical direction portion 491a of the elongated hole 491 is opened (vertical direction).
and the displacement direction of the fixed transmission plate 490 are the same, it is possible to prevent the vane-shaped member 460 from being rotated and displaced by the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 467 .

In this embodiment, there is no separate member for biasing the feather-shaped member 460 toward the retracted state, but due to the shape of the formation portions 464L, 464R, the center of gravity is positioned to the left and right of the rotation axis, and the retracted position is maintained by its own weight.

In the second intermediate state shown in FIG. 37, the cylindrical projection 467 enters the curved portion 491b, so that a load is applied to the cylindrical projection 467 in the left-right direction, and the blade-shaped member 460 starts to rotate. From the viewpoint of the transmission path of the driving force, the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is transmitted through the fixed transmission plate 4
90 to the left feather member 460 via the cylindrical projection 467, and then to the right feather member 460.
The position 0 is on the upstream side in the transmission path of the driving force.

In this embodiment, the forming portion 464L of the left vane-shaped member 460, which is located upstream in the path of transmission of the driving force, is formed slightly larger (heavier) than the forming portion 464R, so that the movable members can be arranged so that they become lighter in sequence toward the downstream side in the path of transmission of the driving force. This allows for good transmission of the driving force and prevents each component from bouncing back after it has been displaced to its terminal position.

One of the reasons for arranging the cylindrical portion 433 as a guide path for the electric wiring DH1 on the forming portion 464R side is the difference in weight between the forming portions 464L and 464R. In more detail, the positions of the forming portions 464L and 464R after displacement are determined by the meshing of the arc-shaped gear 462 and the abutment of the opposing surfaces of the forming portions 464L and 464R.
The elongated hole 491 that determines the rotation angle of the blade-shaped member 460 may deform over time, causing the formation portion 46
It is possible that the positions of 4L and 464R after displacement may change slightly.

In this case, the change in position after the displacement largely depends on the weight balance of the forming portions 464L and 464R. That is, there is a high possibility that the forming portion 464L will be pushed down so that the forming portion 464L rests on the forming portion 464R.

Taking this into consideration, in this embodiment, the extension portion 463 of the feather-shaped member 460 is disposed below the cylindrical portion 433 through which the electrical wiring DH1 passes. In addition, a recessed portion 463a is provided to reduce overlap between the cylindrical portion 433 and the extension portion 463. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of interference between the electrical wiring DH1 and the formation portion 464L even if the formation portion 464L is unintentionally pushed down and displaced.

In addition, since it is possible to predict the side on which the deformation of the forming portion 464L is likely to occur, the cylindrical portion 4
33 and the recessed portion 463 can be designed at a position where they partially interfere with each other (see FIG. 38).
This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

In this embodiment, the formation range of the recessed portion 463a is set to a range that can particularly open the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 433. This makes it possible to minimize the difference in shape between the pair of left and right extension portions 463 while avoiding contact between the electrical wiring DH1, which is likely to sag due to its own weight inside the cylindrical portion 433, and the extension portion 463.

In other words, it is possible to prevent the recessed portion 463 from getting too close to the forming portion 464, so that when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state or the first intermediate state, the recessed portion 463a can be positioned on the rear side of the auxiliary member 470, and the recessed portion 463a can be configured to be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470 (see Figure 31).

This allows the recessed portion 463a to be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470 in any state from the retracted state to the extended state of the first operating unit 400. Therefore, the extension portions 463 and the lower edge portions of the formed portions 464L, 464R of the pair of left and right feather-shaped members 460 can be easily viewed symmetrically, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the asymmetrical configuration of members that displace symmetrically.

The driving force is transmitted from the fixed transmission plate 490 to the cylindrical extension portion 467 by the fixed transmission plate 490 being displaced downwardly away from the tubular portion 461 of the vane-shaped member 460. As the driving force is transmitted, the cylindrical extension portion 467 is pulled by the fixed transmission plate 490 and rotates about the tubular portion 461, but the cylindrical extension portion 467 is configured not to displace at a constant speed (it is configured so that the angular velocity changes) when it is assumed that the fixed transmission plate 490 displaces at a constant speed.

More specifically, since the initial position of the cylindrical projection 467 is set near the left or right of the tubular portion 461 (see FIG. 35), if it is assumed that the curvature change portion 491b is a long hole extending in the horizontal direction (left and right direction), the more the cylindrical projection 467 is displaced downward, the larger the angle of rotational displacement of the cylindrical projection 467 relative to the vertical displacement range becomes. Therefore, when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant speed, the speed (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement of the cylindrical projection 467 gradually increases.

Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the pair of feather-like members 460 decelerate during displacement, it is possible to create a powerful effect in which the feather-like members displace and combine at high speed.

On the other hand, the gradual increase in the angular velocity of the cylindrical protrusion 467 leads to an increase in the speed of the pair of feather-shaped members 460 just before they approach and combine. However, if the speed increases too much, the pair of feather-shaped members 460 may bounce back significantly due to the impact of the combination, which may reduce the presentation effect of this embodiment, which is to combine the pair of feather-shaped members 460 to visually display a series of decorative patterns.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved portion 491b is formed as a long hole that extends in a direction that is inclined upward toward the rotation axis of the feather-shaped member 460 (the left feather-shaped member 460) that has the cylindrical protrusion 467 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction). This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the speed (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 467.

The degree of suppression is determined by the horizontal (left-right) direction at the location where the cylindrical protrusion 467 is disposed.
This corresponds to the upward displacement amount of the curved portion 491b with respect to the long hole parallel to the curved portion 491b (hereinafter, also referred to as the "upward correction amount").

In the present embodiment, when the curved portion 491b is configured as a long hole extending in a direction inclined upward toward the rotation shaft side, the more the cylindrical protruding portion 467 is displaced downward (the more the pair of vane-shaped members 4
60 are combined), the amount of upward correction increases. Therefore, the degree to which the increase in the speed (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 467 is suppressed (the reduction amount) can be gradually increased as the position of the cylindrical protrusion 467 is changed downward.

Therefore, compared to a structure exemplified by a brake structure that maintains the same friction state, the increase in speed can be moderately suppressed. The actual displacement speed of the feather-shaped member 460 will be described later.

39(a) to 39(c) are schematic diagrams illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit 400. In Fig. 39(a) to 39(c), the horizontal axis indicates the rotation angle of the end gear 413, and in Fig. 39(a), the vertical axis indicates the downward displacement amount of the lift plate 430, and in Fig. 39(b), the vertical axis indicates the downward displacement amount of the lift plate 430.
39(b), the vertical axis represents the amount of rotation (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444, and in FIG. 39(c), the vertical axis represents the amount of rotation (angle change) of the feather-shaped member 460. In FIG.

Here, it is assumed that the drive motor MT1 rotates at a constant speed. In this case, the end gear 41
While the lift plate 43 rotates at a constant speed, the arm member 414 does not rotate at a constant speed.
The upward and downward displacement of 30 is also not uniform.

That is, a discrepancy occurs between the control mode of the drive motor MT1 (for example, constant speed rotation) and the control mode of the lift plate 430 (non-uniform speed displacement), and the lift plate 43
Therefore, even if the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant speed, it is difficult to displace the components disposed at the downstream side of the transmission path at a constant speed.

For example, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped portion is formed on the main body plate portion 401 and configured so that this rack gear-shaped portion meshes with the rotating gear 441 of the synchronous operation unit 440, the lifting and lowering displacement of the relative displacement member 442 depends on the lifting and lowering displacement mode of the lifting plate 430, and therefore does not result in a constant speed displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lifting and lowering displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is not determined by a fixed rack gear-like portion, but rather a configuration is adopted in which the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 is converted into the lifting and lowering displacement (vertical displacement) of the relative displacement member 442, similar to how the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 is converted into the lifting and lowering displacement (vertical displacement) of the lifting plate 430.

That is, a predetermined rule for converting the rotational displacement of the terminal gear 413 into the vertical displacement of the lift plate 430 accompanying the vertical displacement of the cylindrical protruding portion 414f of the arm member 414 (for example, FIG. 39(a)) is used.
By applying the conversion equation (which converts the values on the horizontal axis into values on the vertical axis) in reverse to convert the lifting and lowering displacement of the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 accompanying the up and down displacement of the lifting plate 430 into the rotational displacement of the rotating gear 441, the deviation in the displacement pattern can be partially offset and the displacement pattern of the terminal gear 413 and the displacement pattern of the rotating gear 441 can be made to approximate each other.

In other words, the vertical displacement of the lift plate 430 is 1/2 the rotation angle of the end gear 413 being 90 degrees.
A deviation from the displacement mode of the end gear 413 begins to occur from around 40 degrees (see FIG. 39(a)). On the other hand, the rotation angle of the auxiliary arm member 444 becomes larger as the rotation angle of the end gear 413 changes from 30 degrees to 17 degrees.
Deviation from the displacement mode of the end gear 413 is suppressed over the vicinity of 0 degrees (see FIG. 39(b)).

As a result, for example, by rotating the drive motor MT1 and the terminal gear 413 at a constant speed, the auxiliary arm member 444 can be rotated at a constant speed for the most part (see Figure 39 (b)), so that the relative displacement member 442 can be displaced up and down at approximately a constant speed relative to the lifting plate 430.

This makes it easier to link the speed control of the drive motor MT1 with the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442, so that the first operation unit 40 can be used as a drive performance that is visually recognized by the player.
This makes it easy to set the speed of the drive motor MT1 by calculating backwards from the displacement mode to be executed.

In addition, according to the configuration of this embodiment, the configuration that produces advantageous effects only on the drive device side in the transmission path of the driving force can reduce the influence on the tip side of the transmission path.
With respect to the lift plate 430, the drive motor MT1 side is the drive device side of the transmission path, and the opposite side is the tip side of the transmission path.

On the drive device side of the transmission path, the rotation angle of the arm member 414 relative to the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is suppressed when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state or the extended state.
This is preferable from the standpoint of quickly starting and stopping the arm member 414, but there is a problem in that the speed of the arm member 414 at the tip of the transmission path becomes extremely small just before it reaches the retracted or extended state, making the displacement prone to become slow.

From this perspective, in order to configure the displacement pattern at the tip of the transmission path so that it is not affected by the deceleration of the arm member 414, it is possible to deal with this by changing the operating speed of the drive motor MT1 before the arm member 414 reaches the end of its displacement, or by controlling the arm member 414 to stop before deceleration occurs (sufficiently before it reaches the retracted or extended state).

However, the former requires complex control, and the latter has the problem that the rotation angle of the arm member 414 that can be used for displacement at the tip end of the transmission path is small, narrowing the range of displacement patterns.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode at the tip end of the transmission path can be approximated to the displacement mode of the drive motor MT1 and the terminal gear 413, making it easier to reduce the degree to which the relative displacement member 442 of the synchronous operation unit 440 decelerates immediately before reaching the retracted state or the extended state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the displacement of the relative displacement member 442 (and the feather-shaped member 460 and auxiliary member 470 arranged downstream thereof) disposed at the tip end of the transmission path becoming slow, while making maximum use of the rotation angle of the arm member 414.

What is visible to the player is the displacement of the feather-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470.
As shown in c), when the terminal gear 413 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotational angular velocity of the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 tends to increase (at or above a constant speed) until just before they are stopped, and just before they are stopped, they decelerate in accordance with the shape of the curved change portion 491b of the long hole portion 491 described above.

As a result, the displacement of the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be made more rapid and rapid compared to when the displacement mode of the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is determined depending on the displacement mode of the lifting plate 430, so that a powerful displacement can be achieved and the presentation effect can be improved.

On the other hand, by providing a section in which the rotational angular velocity of the feather-shaped members 460 and the auxiliary members 470 is decelerated immediately before the feather-shaped members 460 are combined, it is possible to prevent the feather-shaped members 460 from bouncing and displacing after they are combined, rather than stopping the rotational angular velocity of the feather-shaped members 460 while they are still increasing (combining the feather-shaped members 460).

In this way, according to this embodiment, the displacement mode of the lifting plate 430, which is displaced in series by the driving force of the drive motor MT1, can be made different from the displacement modes of the relative displacement member 442, fixed transmission plate 490, feather-shaped member 460 and auxiliary member 470 of the synchronous operation unit 440, which are displaced downstream thereof.

In particular, the displacement pattern that has changed once can be changed back to the original state while moving downstream along the drive force transmission path, thereby enabling a unique displacement pattern to be configured in a configuration in which multiple members are displaced synchronously.

Although the control mode of the drive motor MT1 has been described in the case where the drive motor MT1 is displaced from the retracted state to the extended state, the control is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive motor MT1 may be controlled so as to reverse its direction at an intermediate position. That is, the drive motor MT1 may be controlled to reverse its rotation direction so that the first operating unit 400 reciprocates (repeatedly reciprocates) between the retracted state and the first intermediate state.

In this case, the lifting plate 430 is raised and returned to the retracted state after it starts to descend and before the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 start to rotate, so that the displacement of the first operating unit 400 visible to the player is limited to vertical displacement and rotational displacement is eliminated.

Furthermore, even when displacing to the first intermediate state, the fixed transmission plate 490 and the decorative portion 493 displace relative to the lift plate 430 in the vertical direction, making it easier to cause changes in the appearance of the first operating unit 400.

FIG. 40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 300.
00, the game board 13 is removed and placed on the front side, and the operation unit 30
40, the transparent cover member 79 is disposed along the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and is made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin.
The outline of the element 0 is shown in phantom lines, and the structure below it is shown visible.

When the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 are fastened and fixed and used for playing, the light guide member 714 and the upper surface of the second operation unit 700 are arranged so as to be visible on the lower front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 through a window defined in the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the light emitted to the front side by the illumination board 777 passes through the light transmission hole 60c, so that it is visible from the front side of the base plate 60.

Fig. 41 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit 700, and Fig. 42 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in Fig. 41 and Fig. 42, the second operating unit 700 includes a plurality of light guide members 714 (eight in this embodiment) arranged in the left-right direction, and an illumination board 777 arranged on the left and right.

Each of the light guide members 714 is configured to be able to guide the irradiation light irradiated from below, and transmits the irradiation light from the upper end. The illumination board 777 is equipped with a light emitting means 778 such as an LED configured to be able to irradiate light to the front side. In this way, the second operating unit 700 can emit light to the upper side through the light guide members 714, and emit light to the front side by the illumination board 777.

Fig. 43 and Fig. 44 are exploded front perspective views of the second operating unit 700, and Fig. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. Fig. 43 shows a view looking down from above, and Fig. 44 and Fig. 45 show a view looking up from below. Fig. 45 also shows an enlarged view of the protruding holding portion 724.

As shown in FIGS. 43, 44, and 45, the second operating unit 700 is
40 (see FIG. 40 ) and a base member 701 fastened to the bottom wall portion 311 of the base member 70
A cover member 720 is placed over the base member 701 and fastened to the base member 701, and the cover member 720 is sandwiched between the base member 701 and the base member 701 so that the base member 701 can be rotated (rotated at a rotation angle of about 6 degrees).
A plate-shaped displacement member 730 pivotally supported by the plate-shaped displacement member 730, a plurality of hollow members 740 (eight in this embodiment) that are placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and are configured to be displaceable at least vertically, and a plurality of variable decorative members 75 (three in this embodiment) that are placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 on the front side of the hollow members 740 and are configured to be displaceable at least vertically.
0, a pair of drive units 760 arranged on the lower left and right sides of the base member 701, each of which has a configuration that is approximately linearly symmetrical with respect to a straight line along the up-down direction and is configured to be able to apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and a transparent cover member 790 (see Figure 40).

The transparent cover member 790 is a colorless, transparent resin member shaped to cover the top and front surfaces of the cover member 720 of the second operating unit 700, and acts to prevent dust and fine particles from reaching the cover member 720, and to prevent collisions between the first operating unit 400 and the cover member 720 and the light-guiding member 714 even if any of the components of the first operating unit 400 malfunctions.

The upper surface of the transparent cover 790 is inclined downward toward the rear side.
This allows a part of the light emitted directly upward from the upper end of the light guide member 714 to be refracted to the rear side. This makes it easier for the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to be reflected by the third symbol display device 81, so even if the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the light guide member 71
This makes it easier to notice changes in the lighting state of 4 (including changes in brightness, vibration of light, and changes based on displacement of hollow member 740).

43, 44, and 45, the transparent cover member 790 is omitted. First, the base member 701 forming the framework of the second moving unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG.

46 is an exploded front perspective view of the base member 701. As shown in FIG.
01 includes a plate-like member 702 formed to have sufficient strength, an illumination board 705 fastened to the upper surface of the plate-like member 702 so as to face the same, a partition member 708 arranged to face the upper surface of the illumination board 705 and fastened to the plate-like member 702, a thin-film cover member 712 formed of a resin in a thin film shape, a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) light-guiding members 714 placed in contact with the thin-film cover member 712, and a plate-like member that covers the light-guiding members 714 from above.
and a displacement restriction member 716 that restricts the upward movement and horizontal displacement of the movable member 14.

The plate-shaped member 702 includes an engaging portion 702a formed to be able to engage with the hook-shaped portion 721c of the cover member 720, a pair of receiving recesses 702b formed on the left and right sides of the plate-shaped member 702 and recessed so as to be able to pivotally support the pivotally supported portion 731 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, a regulating protrusion 702c protruding upward from the front edge and formed so as to be able to regulate the rotation of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, a plurality of fastening portions 703a formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in, a plurality of columnar protrusions 703b protruding upward beyond the fastening portions 703a and formed so that fastening screws can be screwed into the protruding tips, and a plurality of through holes 704 drilled in the vertical direction.

The fastening parts 703a are fastened by fastening screws inserted into the illumination board 705, and are formed at three locations, i.e., the center on the left and right, and on both the left and right ends.
A protruding pin for positioning is provided in the mounting portion.

By positioning the illumination board 705 so that the protruding pin is inserted into a through hole drilled in the illumination board 705 corresponding to the positioning protruding pin, the through hole drilled in the illumination board 705 for inserting the fastening screw and the fastening portion 703a are continuously connected, so that the illumination board 705 can be fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member 702 by passing and screwing the fastening screw through the through hole.

The columnar protrusion 703b is a part of the displacement restricting member 716, the thin film cover member 712, and the partition member 70.
The base end side of the base plate 705 is inclined like a platform, so that the illumination board 705 can be easily positioned in an appropriate position.

The through hole 704 is drilled to a size that allows the passage of a connector (not shown) arranged on the underside of the illumination board 705 and the electrical wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, in this embodiment, the electrical wiring connected to the illumination board 705 is arranged on the underside of the illumination board 705 and does not protrude above the illumination board 705.
The entire upper surface of the illumination board 705 can be utilized as an area in which light emitting means 706 such as LEDs can be disposed.

The illumination board 705 includes a plurality of light emitting means 706 including LEDs and a base member 701.
In the assembled state (see FIG. 43), the columnar protrusion 703b and an opening 707 are formed so as to have a slight gap therebetween.

The light emitting means 706 is a plurality of light emitting elements (eight in this embodiment) arranged along a straight line facing the left and right direction.
The light source 702 includes individual light-emitting means 706a (pieces) and a plurality of general light-emitting means 706b disposed at positions different from the individual light-emitting means 706a.

The opening 707 is formed at a position corresponding to the columnar protrusion 703b.
The protruding end position of 03b is set to be higher than the position where the illumination board 705 is disposed in the assembled state. Therefore, when the illumination board 705 is displaced downward to the position where it is disposed in the assembled state, the opening portion 707 advances along the columnar protruding portion 703b.

In this embodiment, the base end side of the columnar protrusion 703b is formed in a circular shape when viewed from above and a trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, which narrows as it approaches the top, so that the side surface of the base end side of the columnar protrusion 703b is inclined in the vertical direction. When the illumination board 705 is displaced downward, if it is significantly misaligned in the front-rear direction from the position in the assembled state, the misalignment of the illumination board 705 can be corrected along the inclination of the side surface of the base end side of the columnar protrusion 703b.
This makes it easier to place the illumination board 705 at the desired position.

The partition member 708 is formed of a colored (black in this embodiment) hard resin material that is difficult to transmit light, and has a plurality of light-transmitting holes 709 formed at positions corresponding to the individual light-emitting means 706 a,
A plurality of through holes 710a are formed with an inner diameter that allows the tip of the columnar protrusion 703b to be inserted therethrough, a plurality of fastening portions 710b are formed so that fastening screws to be inserted into the displacement restriction member 716 can be screwed in, and a plurality of receiving portions 710 are recessed (or drilled) so as to be able to receive protruding pins 716b protruding from the underside of the displacement restriction member 716 at positions shifted in the front-rear direction from the fastening portions 710b.
c.

The light transmitting holes 709 are formed with a long crystal-shaped (approximately elliptical or tortoiseshell) cross section in the front-rear direction, and the long dimension direction faces different directions depending on the position from the left-right center. That is, the light transmitting holes 709 closer to the center have a smaller deviation between the long dimension direction and the front-rear direction (in this embodiment,
The longer side of the sheet is inclined toward the center toward the front as it approaches the left and right ends.

That is, the longitudinal direction of the light transmitting hole 709 is set in a direction that is inclined toward the left-right center toward the front side, and the angle of inclination is designed to become larger toward the left-right end. In this embodiment, the increment of the inclination angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The thin film cover member 712 is a thin, colorless, transparent resin member with low rigidity, which is formed so that the center is raised and the underside is open.It is equipped with a pair of large through holes 712a drilled vertically at the left and right ends of the upper base, a number of middle through holes 712b drilled vertically left-right inwardly of the outer through holes 712a, and a number of small through holes 712c drilled vertically and offset in the front-to-rear direction from the middle through holes 712b.

The large through hole 712a is formed with a diameter larger than the diameter of a protruding portion 716e (see FIG. 72) that protrudes in a ring shape surrounding the periphery of the insertion hole 716a from the lower surface of the displacement restricting member 716. The protruding portion 716e that protrudes from the lower surface of the displacement restricting member 716 protrudes with a protruding length that exceeds the thickness of the thin film cover member 712, so that it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a load (fastening load) on the edge portion of the large through hole 712a during assembly.

One of the central through holes 712b is disposed at a position corresponding to the columnar protrusion 703b at the center of the front side, and the other is disposed at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b.

The small through hole 712c is arranged in a position shifted in the front-to-rear direction relative to the medium through hole 712b which is arranged at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b, and is formed in a size sufficient to allow the insertion of a protruding pin 716b which protrudes from the underside of the displacement control member 716 and is received in the receiving portion 710c of the partition member 708.

Therefore, the partition member 708 is covered with the thin film cover member 712, and the displacement restriction member 7
After placing the partition member 716 on the plate 711, the fastening screws are screwed into the various locations to fasten and fix the various components. The protruding pin 716b protruding from the bottom surface of the partition member 716 is inserted into the small through hole 712c and the receiving portion 711.
Since the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement control member 716 are inserted through the fastening screw 706, the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement control member 716 can be easily (simultaneously) aligned with the partition member 708 before the fastening screw is screwed in, thereby improving the efficiency of the operation of screwing in the fastening screw thereafter.

The light-guiding member 714 is formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material into a bottomed, cylindrical shape with a bottom at the top, and is equipped with a main body portion 714a whose outer shape when viewed from above is formed in an elongated crystal shape (approximately an oval shape, approximately a tortoiseshell shape) from front to back, a protruding edge portion 714b that protrudes to the left and right and forward from the lower edge of the main body portion 714a, and an inclined surface portion 714c that slopes downward as it approaches the front side at the upper end of the main body portion 714a.

Since the upper outer surface of the main body 714a is textured, the single individual light emitting means 7
When the light emitted from 06a travels through the inside of the light-guiding member 714 and reaches the upper end, the light is perceived by the player as if it is being emitted from a surface rather than as a point emission.

On the other hand, the main body 714a is not textured in any part (such as the middle part) other than the upper outer surface, and has a smooth surface. This can prevent diffuse reflection when light traveling inside the light guide member 714 is incident on the inner wall surface of the main body 714a, and can easily direct the light toward the upper end of the main body 714a by total reflection on the smooth surface, thereby reducing the energy loss of light at an intermediate position in the main body 714a.

The longitudinal direction of the main body 714a of each light guiding member 714 in a top view follows the setting of the longitudinal direction of the above-mentioned light-transmitting hole 709. That is, the closer to the center the light guiding member 714 is, the smaller the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-rear direction is (in this embodiment, they are the same), and the closer to the left or right end, the more the longitudinal direction is inclined toward the front and toward the left-right center.

That is, the longitudinal direction of the light guiding member 714 is set in a direction inclined toward the left-right center toward the front side, and the angle of inclination is designed to become larger toward the left-right end. In this embodiment, the increment of the inclination angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

With this configuration, the front end portion (
The portion that irradiates light toward the player (the portion closest to the player) can be made to face the player side (the center of the front side) compared to the center position in the longitudinal direction.
This allows the player to feel as if the light irradiated from 4 toward the player is gathering toward him.

The protruding edge portion 714b is formed with a constant thickness from top to bottom and functions as a part for stabilizing the position and posture of the light-guiding member 714, and the inclined surface portion 714c functions to emit light that enters from below the light-guiding member 714 toward the front side, as will be described in more detail below.

The displacement regulating member 716 is formed from a colored (black in this embodiment) hard resin material that is difficult for light to transmit, and is equipped with a plurality of insertion holes 716a drilled to allow fastening screws to be inserted therethrough, a plurality of protruding pins 716b protruding from the underside, a plurality of receiving tube portions 716c formed in a cylindrical shape that penetrates vertically at positions corresponding to the light-guiding member 714, and a plurality of recessed portions 716d that are recessed with a step to enlarge the inner shape of the lower edge portion of the receiving tube portions 716c and are configured in a shape that can receive the protruding edge portion 714b of the light-guiding member 714.

The receiving tube portion 716c has an inner shape that is substantially the same as the inner shape of the light transmitting hole 709 when viewed from above, and the light guide member 714 is inserted inside the receiving tube portion 716c.
Since the thickness dimension of the protruding edge portion 714b of the second operating unit 70 is equal to the thickness dimension of the protruding edge portion 714b of the second operating unit 70,
In the assembled state of 0 (see FIG. 40), the upper surface of the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement restriction member 71
6 (the lower surface of recess 716d) and the protruding edge portion 714b are sandwiched between the protruding edge portion 714b and the lower surface of recess 716d so as to provide stable surface support.

The protruding edge portion 714b is formed to protrude on the left and right sides and the front side, and is not formed on the rear side. Correspondingly, the recessed portion 716d of the displacement restriction member 716 is also recessed on the left and right sides and the front side, and is not formed on the rear side. This makes it possible to prevent the light guide member 714 from being assembled in the front-reverse direction.

In other words, even if the light guide member 714 is arranged in the front-rear direction and the displacement restriction member 716 is attached, the recessed portion 716d and the protruding edge portion 714b are misaligned, so the protruding edge portion 714b cannot be inserted into the recessed portion 716d, and the protruding edge portion 714b protrudes from the lower surface of the displacement restriction member 716.
and the displacement control member 716, making it difficult to fasten and fix the light-guiding member 714, it is possible to make an assembly worker (or an automated assembly machine) aware that the light-guiding member 714 is facing backwards.

In the assembled state of the base member 701 (see FIG. 43), the recessed portion 716d and the thin film cover member 71
2, the protruding edge portion 714b is sandwiched in the vertical direction between the light guide member 714 and the light guide member 714, whereby the position and posture of the light guide member 714 are stably fixed.

The procedure for assembling the base member 701 will be described. First, the illumination board 705 is passed through the columnar protrusion 703b, placed in the fastening position, and fastened to the plate-like member 702.
05, the respective components are arranged in this order: a partition member 708, a thin film cover member 712, a light guiding member 714, and a displacement regulating member 716.

At this time, the partition member 708 is positioned on the plate-like member 702 by passing the tip of the columnar protrusion 703b through the through hole 710a of the partition member 708, and the receiving portion 710c and the small through hole 712
By passing the protruding pin 716b through the receiving tube portion 716c, the displacement restriction member 716 and the thin film cover member 712 are positioned in the partition member 708. Furthermore, by passing the main body portion 714a through the receiving tube portion 716c, the light guiding member 714 is positioned in the displacement restriction member 716. In this manner, the respective components are positioned relative to one another before the fastening screws are screwed in, so that the efficiency of the operation of screwing in the fastening screws can be improved.

Finally, a fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 716a to fasten the fastening portion 710b and the columnar protrusion portion 703b
By screwing the screws into the board 705, each component can be fastened and fixed. According to this embodiment, after each component placed above the illumination board 705 is placed in an appropriate position, multiple fastening screws can be screwed in all at once, so the work process can be simplified. In addition, the process of screwing in the fastening screws can be automated (using an automatic screwdriver).

In this embodiment, the partition member 708 cannot be removed at the stage where the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the columnar protrusion portion 703b, but by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 716a into the fastening portion 710b, the partition member 708 can be brought closer to the displacement control member 716.

As a result, although the light-guiding member 714 is placed on the thin film cover member 712, this can be essentially regarded as being equivalent to a configuration in which the light-guiding member 714 is placed on the partition member 708, and the rigidity of the partition member 708 supports the light-guiding member 714 from below, thereby stabilizing the support of the light-guiding member 714.

In addition, by sandwiching the thin film cover member 712, the vertical separation dimension between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708 can be reduced, thereby preventing light leakage from between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708.

43, 44, and 45 will be described. The cover member 720 is made of a colored (blue in this embodiment) light-transmitting resin material, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base member 701. The cover member 720 has a plurality of connecting portions 72 that are disposed on the periphery when viewed from the bottom and are used for connecting to the base member 701.
1, a plurality of rear through holes 722 drilled in a shape larger than the light-guiding member 714 in correspondence with the position of the light-guiding member 714 of the base member 701, a plurality of front through holes 723 drilled in a plurality of locations (three locations in this embodiment) as a left and right pair of through holes on the front side of the rear through holes 722, and a plurality of protruding retaining portions 724 protruding downward from the left and right outer portions of the rear side and the left and right inner portions of the front side of the rear through holes 722.

The coupling portion 721 has a plurality of insertion holes 721a through which fastening screws can be inserted from above.
It has a plurality of fastening portions 721b into which fastening screws are inserted from below into the base member 701, and a plurality of hook-shaped portions 721c formed in a hook shape on the left and right outer back portions and engaged with the base member 701.

The rear through-holes 722 are formed so that the lower edge portions are located at four positions closer to the center and four positions closer to the left and right. In this embodiment, the lower edge portions are formed higher at the positions closer to the center. This is because the cover member 7
This is due to the design of the top surface shape of cover member 720. That is, in order to give a three-dimensional effect to the top surface shape of cover member 720, the portion near the center is curved upward so as to appear raised, and accordingly, the vertical position of the lower edge of rear through-hole 722 is adjusted.

The protruding length of the protruding retainer 724 is adjusted so as to partially offset the difference in the vertical position of the lower edge of the rear through-hole 722. In other words, the protruding length of the protruding retainer 724 disposed closer to the center is made longer, thereby adjusting the vertical displacement range of the hollow member 740 to be equal on the left and right.
Since the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is disposed at a position overlapping the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 when viewed in the up-down direction, even if the posture of the hollow member 740 is lost, the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 will not move toward the plate-shaped displacement member 7
This can prevent the cartridge 30 from falling off the small receiving portion 735 .

In this embodiment, the lower end of the protruding retainer 724 on the rear side is positioned lower than the lower end of the protruding retainer 724 on the front side. This allows the hollow member 740 to lean backward even when the hollow member 740 abuts against the protruding retainer 724. This makes it easier for a player looking down from the front side at the hollow member 740 to see the shape and pattern on the front side of the cylindrical main body 741 of the hollow member 740.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 is made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and is rotatably supported by a pair of receiving recesses 702b formed on the left and right sides of the plate-shaped member 702 and by the underside of the cover member 720. The plate-shaped displacement member 730 comprises a pair of supported shaft portions 731 that protrude coaxially with a circular cross section from both the left and right ends, light-transmitting holes 732 that are drilled in the vertical direction at multiple locations, and a pair of loaded portions 733 that are extended in a plate-like manner toward the front side beyond the supported shaft portions 731 and that receive a pushing-up load from below.
The base member 701 includes a plurality of light-guiding insertion holes 734 drilled in the vertical direction with a size large enough to insert the light-guiding members 714 therethrough, a plurality of small receiving portions 735 arranged in pairs diagonally across the light-guiding insertion holes 734 and protruding in a ring shape when viewed from above, and a plurality of large receiving portions 736 positioned in the center of the front through hole 723 of the cover member 720 when viewed from above and protruding in a ring shape when viewed from above.

47 is a top view of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The loaded parts 733 are disposed on the front side of the rotation axis passing through the center of the supported part 731, and separate drive units 760 correspond to the left and right parts, respectively, and a load is applied from below.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 rotates and displaces around the axially supported portion 731 in different manners depending on the type of load applied to the loaded portion 733 (for example, whether the load is applied to only one side or both sides, whether the load is applied for a short time interval or a continuous load, etc.), but details will be described later.

47, the shape of the light guiding hole 734 is formed following the shape of the above-mentioned light transmitting hole 709. That is, the light guiding hole 734 is drilled in a long crystal shape (approximately oval shape, approximately tortoise shell shape) from front to back, and the long direction faces different directions depending on the position from the center of the left and right.

In other words, the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-to-rear direction is smaller for the light guide insertion holes 734 closer to the center (in this embodiment, they are aligned), and the longitudinal direction is inclined toward the front and toward the center toward the left and right ends.

That is, the longitudinal direction of the light guiding insertion hole 734 is set in a direction that inclines toward the left-right center toward the front side, and the angle of inclination is designed to become larger toward the left and right ends.
In this embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The small receiving portions 735 are parts that support the hollow member 740 while allowing for rattling, and are arranged symmetrically about a center line CL1 that passes through the left-right center position of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that their relationship in the longitudinal direction of the light-guiding insertion hole 734 (the spacing between the pair of small receiving portions 735, and the angle between the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 and the longitudinal direction of the light-guiding insertion hole 734) is maintained.

This allows the multiple hollow members 740 arranged on one side of the center line CL1 to have the same shape (while being symmetrical in shape to the hollow members 740 arranged on the other side), while the posture of the hollow members 740 in the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see Figure 40) can be made different.

That is, similar to the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734, the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-to-rear direction is smaller the closer to the center of the hollow member 740 is, and the closer to the left or right end, the more the longitudinal direction is inclined toward the front and toward the center of the left and right.

That is, the longitudinal direction of the hollow member 740 is set in a direction that is inclined toward the left-right center toward the front side, and the angle of inclination is designed to become larger toward the left-right end. In this embodiment, the increment of the inclination angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The pair of small receiving portions 735 include a front small receiving portion 735a arranged on the front side of the reference O1 and formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom and a circular cross section, and a rear small receiving portion 735b arranged on the back side of the reference O1 and formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom and a circular cross section.

In this embodiment, the diameter of the inner cylinder of the rear small receiving portion 735b is designed to be longer than the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving portion 735a.
The diameter of the cross section of the front small receiving portion 735a is designed to be 4.8 mm.
The diameter of the inner cylinder of the rear small receiving portion 735b is designed to be 5.0 [mm].

That is, the gap dimension between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743 in the opposing direction is larger between the front small receiving portion 735a and the protruding columnar portion 743 than between the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743.
43.

This allows for order in the displacement of the hollow member 740, which is supported while allowing for rattling. That is, in this embodiment, rotational displacement about the front small receiving portion 735a as an axis can be made to occur more easily than rotational displacement about the rear small receiving portion 735b as an axis.

In other words, the arrangement of the hollow member 740 can be easily maintained near the front small receiving portion 735a, while the arrangement of the hollow member 740 can be easily displaced near the rear small receiving portion 735b.
The direction of the displacement of 40 can be adjusted to the direction spreading outward to the left and right toward the rear side.

The large receiving portion 736 is a portion that supports the variable decorative member 750 while allowing for rattling.
Compared to the large receiving portion 736 arranged on the center line CL1, the large receiving portions 736 arranged on both the left and right sides are spaced longer from the rotation axis passing through the center of the supported portion 731 and are also formed at different vertical positions, but details will be described later.

43, 44, and 45. The hollow members 740 are configured in a symmetrical shape with four identically shaped members arranged side by side on the left side and four identically shaped members arranged side by side on the right side, so the hollow member 740 arranged on the right side will be described in detail, and a description of the hollow member 740 arranged on the left side will be omitted.

48 is a front perspective view of the hollow member 740. As shown in FIG. 48, the hollow member 740 is disposed so as to surround the front, rear, left and right of the light guiding member 714, thereby blocking the light leaking from the front, rear, left and right of the light guiding member 714 so that it is not (is difficult for) the player to see, and the light guiding member 714 is easily visible.
4 is a component configured to draw the player's attention to the upper tip thereof, and comprises a cylindrical main body 741 formed in a cylindrical shape that is open at the top and bottom and has an outer frame designed in a long crystal shape (approximately oval or tortoise shell shape) from the front to the back, a flat extension portion 742 extending in a flat plate shape in the front to back and left to right directions from the lower edge of the cylindrical main body 741, and a pair of protruding columnar portions 743 protruding in a columnar shape downward from the underside of the flat extension portion 742.

The outer shape of the cylindrical main body 741 in a top view is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the rear through hole 722 of the cover member 720 in a top view, while the outer shape of the flat plate extension 742 in a top view is formed to be larger than the inner shape of the rear through hole 722 of the cover member 720 in a top view.
In the assembled state of the operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the hollow member 740 is inserted into the rear through-hole 722 and is vertically displaceable, but is restricted from being pulled out upward from the cover member 720 .

The upper edge of the cylindrical main body 741 is lowered toward the front side. This allows the light that reaches the upper end of the light guide member 714 to be emitted in a concentrated manner toward the upper front side.
Most of the light traveling upward on the rear side is blocked by the cylindrical main body 741. Therefore, the light that reaches the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be delivered to the player's eyes well, and the light that reaches the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be prevented from being reflected in a large amount into the third symbol display device 81, thereby preventing the visibility of the display from being deteriorated.

The flat extension 742 also functions as a portion whose upward displacement is restricted by the protruding retainer 724 (see FIG. 45). That is, the protruding retainer 724 is formed at a position corresponding to the protruding columnar portion 743 on the back side, and restricts the hollow member 740 from being displaced upward. In this way, by forming the protruding retainer 724 and the protruding columnar portion 743 at corresponding positions, the hollow member 74
Even if the position of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes, the protruding columnar portion 743 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730
Since the hollow member 740 can be prevented from slipping out of the support 35, the hollow member 740 can be stably supported.

The protruding columnar portion 743 has a hemispherical protruding tip and is arranged to match the arrangement spacing of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see Figure 43), and is received in the small receiving portions 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in an assembled state (see Figure 40).

The pair of protruding columnar parts 743 and the cylindrical main body part 741 are configured not to be rotationally symmetrical. This allows the positional relationship with the light guide member 714 to be changed when the light guide member 714 is assembled in the reversed front-rear direction, and prevents incorrect installation.
Since the hollow member 740 is formed to have a symmetrical shape, it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740, which is to be assembled to the left of the left-right center position, from being assembled to the right (mis-installation can be prevented).

Here, the small receiving portion 735 undergoes rotational displacement about a rotation axis facing the left-right direction in the same manner as the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the protruding columnar portion 743 is mainly displaced by vertical displacement permitted by the hollow member 740, and since the protruding tip of the protruding columnar portion 743 is formed in a hemispherical shape, it is possible to displace the hollow member 740 with little resistance. Here, the displacement mode of the hollow member 740 accompanying the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described.

49(a), 49(b), and 49(c) are cross-sectional views of the light-guiding member 714, the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and the hollow member 740 taken along the line XLIX-XLIX in FIG.
49(a) illustrates the lower end position (initial position) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, FIG. 49(b) illustrates the horizontal position of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and FIG. 49(c) illustrates the upper end position of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The horizontal position corresponds to a position in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 has rotated (upwardly displaced) by about 2.1 degrees from the lower end position around the reference O1, and the upper end position corresponds to a position in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 has rotated (upwardly displaced) by about 2.1 degrees from the lower end position.
The plate-shaped displacement member 730 rotates about 4 degrees around the reference O1 from the horizontal position (upward displacement).
This corresponds to the posture.

As shown in FIG. 49A, when the drive unit 760 is not operating, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stably supported in a posture (lower end posture (initial posture)) in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is tilted forward by approximately 2.1 degrees from the horizontal posture. In this embodiment, the rear small receiving portion 735b is recessed deeper than the front small receiving portion 735a, so that the support position (bottom) of the front small receiving portion 735a and the support position (
This prevents the bottom from shifting vertically.

As a result, the hollow member 74 supported by the plate-like displacement member 730 in the lower end position (initial position)
In addition, since the surfaces of the support positions (bottoms) of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are configured to be inclined downward toward the front side similar to the inclination of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, even if the hollow member 740 is displaced toward the rear side, the inclination of the support positions (bottoms) can be utilized to slide the hollow member 740, thereby allowing the hollow member 740 to return to the front side.

Therefore, for example, even if the hollow member 740 becomes misaligned due to the load generated when opening and closing the front frame 14, the position of the hollow member 740 can be stably maintained at a position closer to the front (initial position) even before the drive unit 760 is operated.

As shown in FIG. 49( b ), when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a horizontal position, a sufficient gap can be secured between the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 and the small receiving portion 735 on both the front and rear sides.
Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 vibrates slightly in a position near the horizontal position, there is no significant difference in the vibration pattern inside the small receiving portion 735 of the protruding columnar portion 743 between the front and rear protruding columnar portions 743, and the hollow member 740 is prone to disorderly displacement in the front-back and left-right directions.

As shown in FIG. 49C, in the process of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 being displaced to the upper end position, the front protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 abuts against the front small receiving portion 735a and is pushed toward the rear side.

Therefore, for example, when the plate-like displacement member 730 vibrates slightly with the upper end position as a reference (near the upper end position), the hollow member 740 is likely to rotate and displace around the protruding columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a. In other words, the hollow member 740 is configured to be able to change the displacement mode that is likely to occur in accordance with the position of the plate-like displacement member 730 that is the reference for the small vibration.

In the hollow member 740, the light guide member 714 is inserted into the inside of the cylindrical main body 741, and the pair of protruding columnar portions 743 are received in the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, thereby supporting the hollow member 740. Therefore, the displacement of the hollow member 740 corresponds to the displacement of the small receiving portions 735, and therefore, first, the displacement mode of the small receiving portions 735 will be described.

Since the small receiving portion 735 is a part of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, it is displaced following the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Since the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced around a reference O1, which is a straight line (a straight line facing in the left-right direction) connecting the supported shaft portions 731, the small receiving portion 735 is displaced in the reference O1 direction (
The light guide member 714 is not displaced in the left-right direction, but is displaced on a plane perpendicular to the reference O1. Accordingly, the degree of inclination of the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 changes. Therefore, the hollow member 740 is also prompted to change its degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1.

The hollow member 740 supported by a pair of small receiving portions 735 is allowed to undergo not only displacement on a plane perpendicular to the reference O1, but also displacement and posture changes in the front-back and left-right directions (horizontal direction) as the degree of inclination changes as described above.

Since the arrangement of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1, the change in the degree of inclination described above is also symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1, so that the displacement or posture change of the hollow member 740 in the front-back and left-right directions (horizontal direction) can be caused to occur symmetrically.

In addition, since the change in the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1 corresponds to the arrangement of the pair of small receiving portions 735 in the state before the change, the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the side closer to the center line CL1 (the center side)
35 and the pair of small receiving portions 7 on the far side (left and right outer sides) from the center line CL1.
In this embodiment, since the displacement in the direction parallel to the center line CL1 is maintained, the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the left and right outer sides, which have a larger inclination angle with respect to the center line CL1 in the state before the change, is greater than the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the central side (see FIG. 47).
It can be changed depending on whether it is closer to L1 or farther away.

The relationship between the hollow member 740 and the light guiding member 714 when displacement occurs will be described.
The arrangement of the small receiving portion 735, the shape of the hollow member 740, and the shape of the light guiding member 714 are designed so as to have a dimensional relationship that creates a gap between the outer surface of the small receiving portion 735 and the outer surface of the light guiding member 714.

Here, the designed gap is different between the longitudinal direction of the light guiding member 714 in the top view and the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. That is, the gap in the longitudinal direction is larger than the gap in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, the greater the inclination angle of the light-guiding member 714 relative to the center line CL1 in the longitudinal direction when viewed from above (the further outward it is disposed to the left or right), the narrower the front-to-rear gap between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light-guiding member 714.

Therefore, if the hollow members 740 are displaced in the front-rear direction by the same amount in accordance with the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow members 740 disposed on the left and right outer sides will be pressed against the light guiding member 714, causing friction or being easily subjected to a large load, which may result in damage. On the other hand, if a countermeasure is taken by setting a large gap in the front-rear direction between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guiding member 714 in advance, the light guiding member 714 and the hollow member 740 will be too far apart, which will weaken the effect of blocking all parts of the light guiding member 714 except for its tip by the hollow member 740 and drawing the player's gaze to the tip of the light guiding member 714.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the amount of forward/backward displacement of the hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right outer sides is configured to be smaller than the amount of forward/backward displacement of the hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right central sides.

That is, in this embodiment, in a configuration in which multiple small receiving portions 735 are arranged on the same plane parallel to the reference O1, the small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right outer sides are arranged so that the front-to-back distance between the front small receiving portion 735 and the reference O1 is shorter than the small receiving portion 735 arranged on the left and right central sides.

As a result, when the front small receiving portion 735 is displaced rearward in accordance with the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the amount of front-to-rear displacement of the hollow member 740 which is pushed forward and displaced rearward can be geometrically defined so that the amount of front-to-rear displacement is slightly smaller for the members arranged on the outer left and right sides compared to the members arranged in the center on the left and right sides.

In the initial position of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is configured to be approximately equal in the front, back, left and right directions, and is arranged to such an extent that the gap between the light-guiding member 714 and the hollow member 740 is not filled even if the hollow member 740 moves parallel to the horizontal direction.

Therefore, in a state where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the initial position (the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is in a non-excited state), even if an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10, such as when a player strikes or tries to shake the pachinko machine 10, causing the hollow member 740 to be displaced, the displacement is kept below the dimension of the gap between the light-guiding member 714 and the hollow member 740. Therefore, the load transmitted between the light-guiding member 714 and the hollow member 740 can be reduced.

As the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced, the distance between a pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right sides of the light-guiding hole 734 changes when viewed from above, so it is unlikely that the hollow member 740 will be displaced in the forward/backward direction while the centers of the small receiving portions 735 and the protruding columnar portions 743 of the hollow member 740 remain aligned.

At least in the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743,
Since the arrangement of the protruding columnar portion 743 with respect to the surface of the hollow member 740 changes, this change may cause the hollow member 740 to be displaced in the left-right direction or to change in its posture.

A mode of pushing and advancing the hollow member 740 will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, during the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the front small receiving portion 735a (the small receiving portion 735 on the side where the displacement in the front-rear direction is large)
) begins to come into contact with the front side of the protruding columnar portion 743 and is pushed toward the rear side.

At this time, due to the above-mentioned dimensional relationship, the front part of the inner surface of the rear small receiving part 735b and the protruding columnar part 743
A gap is maintained between the front surface of the small receiving portion 735 and the front surface of the small receiving portion 735. Therefore, rattling in the rotation direction about the protruding columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a is permitted. The structure is such that the displacement utilizing this rattling can accommodate changes in the distance between the small receiving portions 735 in a top view.

In this way, the small receiving portion 735 is configured to displace the hollow member 740 toward the rear side, and is configured to provide a play between the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743 that allows rotational displacement about the axis of the front protruding columnar portion 743. Therefore, even if the hollow member 740 and the light guiding member 714 collide during displacement of the hollow member 740 based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 driven by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the load generated between the hollow member 740 and the light guiding member 714 can be kept small, and therefore it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 or the light guiding member 714 from cracking or chipping.

43, 44 and 45. The variable decorative member 750 is a cover member 72.
A bifurcated support member 751 supported between the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730,
51 and a decorative member 756 disposed on the upper side of the cover member 720.

The bifurcated support member 751 comprises a columnar protrusion 752 that protrudes downward in a columnar shape from the underside of the central part of the plate-like main body, which is formed in a long plate shape on both sides, a pair of cylindrical protrusions 753 (of different lengths) that protrude upward in a cylindrical shape from both the left and right ends of the plate-like main body, and a plate-like extension portion 754 that extends in a plate shape from the central part of the plate-like main body toward the back side.

The protruding tip of the columnar protrusion 752 is formed in a semi-spherical shape and is received in the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The front through-hole 723 allows the bifurcated support member 751 to be displaced up and down, while the large receiving portion 736 is displaceable in rotation about an axis passing through the center of the supported portion 731 .
Therefore, although the directions of displacement are different, the protruding tip of the columnar protrusion 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape, so that the variable decorative member 750 can be displaced with little resistance in conjunction with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

The plate-shaped extension 754 acts to position the center of gravity of the variable decorative member 750 on the rear side of the center of the columnar protrusion 752. That is, the position in which the variable decorative member 750 is stabilized by its own weight can be set to a backward tilted position. This allows the abutment position between the columnar protrusion 752 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in its initial position to be closer to the front side than when the variable decorative member 750 stands upright without tilting, so that the amount of displacement of the variable decorative member 750 near the start of the position change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be increased.

The decorative member 756 has a pair of protruding legs 75 that protrude downward in correspondence with the cylindrical protruding portion 753.
A female screw is formed at the tip of the protruding leg portion 757. The protruding leg portion 757 is inserted into the inside of the cylindrical protruding portion 753.

The plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 is formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted along the center position of the cylindrical protruding portion 753. The fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole and screwed into the female screw at the tip of the protruding leg portion 757, thereby connecting the bifurcated support member 751 and the decorative member 75
7 are fastened and fixed.

The assembly process of the second operating unit 700 will be described. First, the variable decorative member 750 is assembled to the cover member 720. That is, the cylindrical protrusion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is passed through the front through-hole 723 of the cover member 720 from below, the protruding leg 757 of the decorative member 756 is inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 753, and a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread at the tip of the protruding leg 757.

Next, the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow member 740, and the cover member 720 are placed on the base member 701 in this order, and the cover member 720 is fastened and fixed to the base member 701.
When assembling the cover member 720 to the base member 701, the hook-shaped portion 721c is engaged with the engaging portion 702a formed on the back side of the plate-shaped member 702, a fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 721a from above to fasten and fix the cover member 720 to the base member 701, and then the cover member 720 is turned upside down and the fastening portion 721 is inserted into the insertion hole 721a.
The fastening screw is screwed into b.

This allows multiple components to be arranged unfixed between base member 701 and cover member 720, and fastening screws to be screwed into multiple locations from the underside, while preventing each component from falling out from between base member 701 and cover member 720 during assembly.

Finally, the drive unit 760 is placed below the base member 701, and fastened and fixed by screwing in a fastening screw from below. In the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the direction of travel of the fastening screw screwed in from below interferes with the outer wall portion 312 of the rear case 310, so it is difficult to remove the fastening screw while the second operating unit 700 is housed in the rear case 310. Therefore, if the front side of the operating unit 300 is illegally opened, it is possible to prevent the drive unit 760 from being independently removed from the rear case 310.

Further, on the rear side of the drive unit 760, a fastening portion 766 is formed to fasten a fastening screw inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310. Therefore, if the second operating unit 700 is assembled to the rear case 310 without the drive unit 760 being assembled, there will be a portion where the fastening screw cannot be fastened at the stage of inserting the fastening screw into the bottom wall portion 311 to fasten the second operating unit 700, so that the worker can be made aware that the drive unit 760 is insufficient. This makes it possible to prevent forgetting to assemble the drive unit 760.

Fig. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 760. Fig. 50 illustrates the drive unit 760 disposed on the right side as viewed from the front. Although the drive units 760 have slightly different appearances, the components are symmetrical, so the right drive unit 760 will be described in detail.
A description of the left drive unit 760 will be omitted.

The drive unit 760 is a load member 7 that is configured to apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
61, a metal (brass in this embodiment) cylindrical shaft rod portion 762 that rotatably supports the base end side of the load member 761, a support case 763 to which the shaft rod portion 762 is fixed and which is configured as a case as a whole, an electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 disposed inside the support case 763, a front cover member 770 disposed on the front side of the support case 763 and fastened to the support case 763, and an illumination board 777 fastened to the front side of the front cover member 770.
It is equipped with:

The load member 761 is formed from a resin material, and includes a base end 761a having a through hole through which the shaft rod portion 762 is inserted, a rod-shaped extension portion 761b extending outward from the base end 761a and bent in a generally dogleg shape, a vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c bent upward from the extension tip of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b toward the front side, and a rod-shaped extension portion 761b.
A protruding portion 761d protrudes from the extending tip of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b along the extending direction of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b, and an opposing curved portion 761e is formed in an arc shape centered on the shaft rod portion 762 at the boundary between the protruding portion 761d and the rod-shaped extending portion 761b and is disposed opposite the curved protruding portion 774 of the front cover member 770.
It is equipped with.

A metal plate member MB2 made of metal (magnetic material) is disposed on the upper surface of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b.
In this embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is fixed to the rod-shaped extension portion 761b by engagement with the elastic claws, similar to the above-mentioned metal plate member MB1.

More specifically, rail portions for guiding the forward and backward sliding of the metal plate member MB2 are provided on both sides of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b in the longitudinal direction, and these rail portions are formed so as to be able to guide the metal plate member MB2 only from the rear side (only the rear side is fully open). When the metal plate member MB2 is slid along the rail portions, the elastic claws are pressed down by the metal plate member MB2, and when the metal plate member MB2 is slid in this state, the metal plate member MB2 hits the front side wall of the rail portions, restricting the sliding, and at this position, the metal plate member MB2
The downward pressing of the elastic claw by the metal plate member MB2 is released (it has risen to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw engages with the metal plate member MB2 so as to restrict the retraction to the rear surface side.

The method of fixing the metal plate member MB2 to the rod-shaped extension portion 761b is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB2 may be fastened to the rod-shaped extension portion 761b.
You can tie it down with a cable tie or stick it on with adhesive tape.

The front cover member 770 includes a protruding frame portion 771 that protrudes in a frame shape toward the front side, a plurality of protruding cylindrical portions 772 that protrude in a thin cylindrical shape toward the front side inside the protruding frame portion 771, a wiring recess 773 that is recessed at the lower edge so that an electric wiring connected to an illumination board 777 or a connector connected to an end of the electric wiring can be passed through, and an axial rod portion 76 that extends from the rear surface of the plate.
and a curved protruding portion 774 that protrudes in a curved plate shape along an arc shape centered at 2.

The protruding frame portion 771 is formed so as to be disposed opposite the periphery of the illumination board 777, and is a portion that prevents loads from being applied to the illumination board 777 in the up, down, left and right directions.

The protruding columnar portion 772 has a gourd-shaped seat portion when viewed from the front and a small-diameter insertion portion that protrudes further from the seat portion, and by assembling it so that the insertion portion fits into the through-hole 779 of the illumination board 777, the back surface of the plate of the illumination board 777 is supported by the seat portion, thereby stabilizing the position of the illumination board 777. The seat portion has a female threaded portion adjacent to the insertion portion into which a fastening screw can be screwed, and the illumination board 777 is fastened and fixed to the front cover member 770 by the fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion.

The illumination board 777 includes a light emitting means 778 composed of a plurality of LEDs or the like arranged at positions designed in consideration of the performance, and a plurality of through holes 77 formed in the illumination board 777 for assembly.
9.

The through holes 779 are formed at a plurality of locations (two locations in this embodiment) such that a pair of circular through holes corresponds to the insertion portion and the female screw portion of the protruding cylindrical portion 772 .

In this embodiment, the illumination board 777 is directly fastened to the front cover member 770.
This corresponds to the case where the front cover member 770 and the illumination board 777 arranged in close proximity to the front side of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are configured as a single rigid body.
The vibration generated by excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 can make the illumination board 777 more likely to vibrate, and the vibration generated by excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be configured to vibrate the optical axis of the light irradiated from the light emitting means 778.

In this embodiment, a curved protrusion 774 is disposed between the load member 761, which is displaced by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the plate rear surface of the front cover member 770. That is, the load member 761 as the vibration source and the front cover member 770 are separated by at least the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774, so that excessive transmission of vibrations can be prevented.

The width of the curved protruding portion 774 can be set arbitrarily.
The width of the curved protrusion 774 can be changed depending on whether it is desired to vibrate the optical axis of the light emitted from the light source 8 or to keep it from vibrating. In the former case, the width can be made shorter, and in the latter case, the width can be made longer.

The support case 763 includes a lower restricting portion 764 disposed below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and an upper restricting portion 765 disposed on the opposite side of the shaft rod portion 762 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.
and a fastening portion 766 (see FIG. 45) into which a fastening screw is screwed, the fastening screw being inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 310.

The load member 761 is normally tilted due to its own weight (see Figure 51 (a)), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) and displaced upward.

That is, in this embodiment, as the metal plate member MB2 is displaced between a raised position where it is located as a result of being raised by the electromagnetic force and a lowered position where it is located as a result of the electromagnetic force disappearing and it being lowered by its own weight, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43 ) that receives the load from the load member 761 moves in the axially supported portion 7
The rotational displacement is described below with reference to FIG.

51(a) and 51(b) are front views of the drive unit 760.
In FIG. 51(a) and FIG. 51(b), the front cover member 770 and the illumination board 77 are shown except for the curved protruding portion 774.
7 is omitted from the illustration, and the outline of the curved protruding portion 774 is shown by imaginary lines.

In FIG. 51(a), no current flows through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the load member 7
In FIG. 51B, the load member 76 is in a lowered position due to its own weight, and in FIG. 51B, the metal plate member MB2 is attracted to the load member 76 by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.
1 is shown in a raised position.

As shown in Figures 51(a) and 51(b), in the lowered position, the load member 761 abuts against a lower regulating portion 764 and is restricted from downward displacement, and in the raised position, the load member 761 abuts against an upper regulating portion 765 and is restricted from upward displacement.

Here, the lower regulating portion 764 and the upper regulating portion 765 are disposed with respect to the shaft rod portion 762 (
The effect of the different distances from the shaft rod portion 762 will be described.

First, the load applied to the lower regulating portion 764 via the load member 761 is mainly the load member 7
Since the load is generated by the weight of the load member 761 itself, the load member 761 can be stably supported by supporting the center of gravity of the load member 761. For this reason, the lower restriction portion 764 is disposed at the center of gravity of the load member 761.

In the above description of the window movable unit 150, the driven member 163 is formed in a straight rod shape, so the center of gravity is located at the approximate center of the member.
In the case of 1, since the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c and the protruding portion 761d extend in two directions from the extended tip side of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, the center of gravity is located on the extended tip side rather than approximately the center position of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b.

Taking this into consideration, in this embodiment, the lower restriction portion 764 is disposed at a position corresponding to the center of gravity of the load member 761, closer to the extended tip side than the approximate center position of the rod-shaped extended portion 761b.

In contrast, the load applied to the upper regulating portion 765 via the load member 761 is mainly a load due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, so there is little advantage to locating the upper regulating portion 765 in relation to the center of gravity of the load member 761. In this embodiment, the upper regulating portion 765 is located opposite the rotation tip of the load member 761, thereby reducing the load transmitted to the upper regulating portion 765 via the load member 761.

In other words, when a force moment of the same magnitude is generated, the load transmitted via the load member 761 is smaller at a position away from the rotation axis of the load member 761 (a position where the arm related to the moment is longer), and therefore the load transmitted to the upper regulating portion 765 can be reduced.

In this way, since it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulating member 765 occurs at the rotation tip of the load member 761, in this embodiment, the protruding portion 761d further protrudes from the extended tip of the rod-shaped extended portion 761b toward the outer diameter side of the circle centered on the shaft portion 762, and the protruding portion 761d
is configured to come into contact with the upper restricting member 765. This makes it possible to avoid load transmission at the middle portion of the load member 761 and to stably transmit the load at the rotation tip side.

In this embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is configured to pull up the load member 761 by an attractive force rather than pushing the load member 761. That is, the magnetic force generated in the iron core disposed in the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 attracts the metal plate member MB2, thereby pulling up the load member 761.

According to this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the load member 761 is pushed forward by a member that moves by electromagnetic force, even if the load member 761 is displaced by a load applied to the load member 761, an overload (local load) is unlikely to occur, making it easier to avoid damage to the configuration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. As a result, even in a configuration in which the load member 761 is subjected to a fluctuating load, as in this embodiment, the useful life of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be extended.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the load member 761 is in a state (raised position) receiving an adhesive force from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the upper surface of the metal plate member MB2 is in surface contact (contacting the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 at multiple points on a predetermined plane), while a gap is provided between the metal plate member MB2 and the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (the part that incorporates the coil), and the upper regulating portion 765 and the protrusion portion 761d are configured to abut on a surface parallel to the above-mentioned surface of surface contact.

This prevents the load member 761 from colliding with the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, thereby preventing the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 from being overloaded, while dispersing and receiving the load generated by the electromagnetic force at the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the lower surface (contact surface) of the upper restricting portion 765. This makes it possible to prevent a large load from being generated locally.

In addition, when the load member 761 is in the raised position, a gap is provided not only between the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2, but also between the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2.
In this case, the physical load transmission between the load member 761 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be cut off, so that the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be configured to receive the load only by the load member 761.
The durability of L2 can be improved.

In this case, since the load is likely to be concentrated on the protruding portion 761d of the load member 761, the protruding portion 761d is preferentially damaged (broken).
Even if this occurs, the metal plate member MB2 is configured to abut against the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 at multiple points on a specified plane, so it is possible to avoid the load being concentrated at one point.

Furthermore, in this case, when the protrusion 761d is damaged (broken), the metal plate member MB2 abuts against the lower edge of the metal case at multiple points, and by separately configuring a detection sensor to detect this abutment, it is possible to easily determine whether the protrusion 761d has been damaged (broken).

In addition, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 continues to be generated at the raised position, it is unlikely that the load member 761 will bounce back after colliding with the upper regulating portion 765. Therefore, the upper regulating portion 765 is set to a position where the load member 761 is prevented from bouncing back after colliding with the upper regulating portion 765.
The arrangement and orientation of the upper and lower restricting portions 762 and 763 can be designed (the straight line passing through the center of the shaft portion 762 and the upper restricting portion 763 can be designed).
5 along the width direction can be designed to be small).

On the other hand, since the straight line along the width direction of the lower restricting portion 764 is inclined with respect to the straight line rL1 that passes through the lower restricting portion 764 and the center of the shaft rod portion 762, the direction in which the repulsive force is generated can be dispersed (force resolution) compared to when the straight line along the width direction of the lower restricting portion 764 and the straight line rL1 are parallel or collinear. This makes it possible to suppress the rebound (bound) of the load member 761 after colliding with the lower restricting portion 764.

Furthermore, since the lower regulating portion 764 is formed with a longer width dimension (width along the radial direction), a larger surface area can be secured for receiving the load, and the pressure (stress) generated in the lower regulating portion 764 due to the load caused by the weight of the load member 761 can be reduced.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, the load transmitted to the lower regulating portion 764 and the upper regulating portion 765 via the load member 761 during displacement in both the up and down directions is reduced, and the load member 761
This can suppress the rebound (bounce) of the ball.

The materials of the upper and lower restricting portions 765 and 764 are not limited in any way.
For example, the upper regulating portion 765 may be made of general-purpose plastics such as polypropylene and polystyrene, engineering plastics such as polycarbonate, thermosetting resins such as melamine resin, polyurethane, and epoxy resin, or rubber materials.
The lower restricting portion 762 and the lower restricting portion 764 may be made of the same material or different materials.

For example, if the upper regulating portion 765 is to have the function of suppressing the forward/rearward positional shift that may occur in the load member 761 due to the load that the load member 761 may receive from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 when in the raised position, the upper regulating portion 765 may be made of a material or structure that has excellent frictional resistance in addition to damping properties.

In this case, the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761 causes the load member 7
This can easily prevent displacement of the upper restrictor 761 in the front-rear direction (axial direction), particularly when the protruding portion 761d and the upper restrictor 765 are in contact with each other.

When the load member 761 is displaced, the opposing curved portion 761e displaces the rear side of the curved protrusion 774. Since the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved protrusion 774 are both formed in an arc shape centered on the shaft portion 762, even if the load member 761 is misaligned toward the front side and the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved protrusion 774 are in contact with each other, the opposing curved portion 761e will not move forward.
Since the curved protrusion 774 and the curved projection 1e only slide along the rotational direction, the resistance to rotational displacement can be reduced.

Furthermore, by forming the opposing curved portion 761e at the lower end of the load member 761, a sufficient space can be secured above it. In this embodiment, the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c is disposed in this secured space.

The vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c extends above the opposing curved portion 761e, but unlike the opposing curved portion 761e which is curved, it extends straight when viewed from the front.
When the lever is disposed in the raised position, it is formed in a rod shape extending in the vertical direction when viewed from the front.

This makes it possible to prevent the load member 761 from being bent and deformed to the left and right due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that even in a configuration in which the tip of the load member 761 is displaced upward while being slightly misaligned to the left and right as in this embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stably pushed up. The load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the supporting mode will be described later.

In addition, the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c is formed as a rod that extends straight in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, but is bent (at an obtuse angle) at a midpoint (to the left of the axial rod portion 762) so that the upper end is positioned closer to the front than the lower end when viewed from the side.

This allows the area occupied by the load member 761 below the axial rod portion 762 to be moved toward the rear side, and the area for the members arranged on the front side can be secured. That is, since the arrangement position of the illumination board 777 can be moved toward the rear side, the light irradiated from the light emitting means 778 and viewed through the flow-down surface components 91, 92 can be easily viewed as a spreading light by increasing the distance between the game board 13 (see FIG. 40) and the illumination board 777. In other words, it is possible to easily view the light as a surface emission in which the light reaches in a circular shape centered on the optical axis and shines in a surface shape, rather than a point emission viewed as a size of the outer shape of the LED.

Furthermore, since the load member 761 can be easily deformed forward and backward due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, even if an overload occurs locally when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by a single load member 761, the load member 761 can be deformed backward and forward to release the load. This improves the durability of the load member 761.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, by making the flexibility of the load member 761 different in the front, back, left and right directions, it is possible to achieve the effect of improving the stability of the pushing up of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the durability of the load member 761.

When the load member 761 is in the raised position, it is stably supported by the upward electromagnetic force generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the downward load generated between the axial rod portion 762 and the upper regulating portion 765 at both the left and right ends of the load member 761.

Therefore, as described below, even when a load is applied to the load member 761 from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the area from the base end 761a to the protruding portion 761d remains stably supported, so that the range in which deflection occurs due to the load can be limited to the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c.

This prevents the load member 761 from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and coming into contact with the support case 763 or the front cover member 770. In other words, the load member 761 is prevented from rubbing against other members, causing damage to the members,
It is possible to prevent an extra driving force from being required for driving the load member 761 .

<Function of the second operation unit 700>
The operation of the second operation unit 700 will be described.
Since the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs in response to the drive mode of the drive units 760 disposed on the left and right, the displacement of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 supported on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 also differs accordingly. Below, the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will first be explained, and then the displacement modes of the variable decorative member 750 and the hollow member 740 will be explained.

52, 53 and 54 are front views of the second operating unit 700.
The load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are both shown in a lowered position, with Figure 53 showing only the load member 761 of the left drive unit 760 in a lowered position and the load member 761 of the right drive unit 760 displaced upward from the lowered position to the raised position, and Figure 54 showing the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 in a raised position.

The state shown in Figure 52 corresponds to a state in which no current flows through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see Figure 50) of the left and right drive units 760 (non-excited state). In this state, the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the load member 761 are not in contact with each other, and the plate-shaped displacement member 730
This posture is the lower end posture (initial posture) that is maintained by contact with the base member 701.

The state shown in FIG. 53 is that the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (
This corresponds to a state in which current is controlled to flow through one side of the magnet (see FIG. 50) (one-side excitation state).
In this state, the load member 761 on the right side pushes up the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, causing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to change its posture in the rising direction and assume the intermediate posture. In this embodiment, in the intermediate posture, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced by approximately 1.3 degrees from the horizontal posture.

53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and variable decorative member 750 placed on it is concentrated on the right-side load member 761. In this embodiment, the load member 761 is formed in a thin rod shape and is bent in the front-to-rear direction, so that it is easily flexible in the short direction (front-to-rear direction), and is formed with a strength (rigidity) that allows it to bend and deform due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and variable decorative member 750 placed on it.

In this embodiment, since the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and variable decorative member 750 placed thereon is applied in a direction including a front-to-rear component at the contact position with the load member 761 (see FIG. 55), the load member 761 is configured to be easily deformed, and this deformation can release the load. In other words, the state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to the state in which the load member 761 is deformed.

The plate-shaped displacement member 7 in the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 described below will be described in detail.
The difference in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the rising direction can be explained as being due to the degree of bending of the load member 761. That is, by appropriately setting the elastic modulus of the load member 761, it is possible to design the difference in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The elastic modulus of the load member 761 may be designed to be equal on the left and right sides, or may be designed to be different.

In this embodiment, the shapes of the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are symmetrical. Therefore, even if a current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left drive unit 760 and no current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the right drive unit 760 in the reversed state to the state shown in FIG. 53, the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be the same as that shown in FIG.
53 is referred to as a one-sided excitation state, and a description of the state in which the excitation relationship of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is symmetrical will be omitted.

54, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by both the left and right drive units 760. Therefore, the load of the plate-shaped displacement member 730's own weight applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is reduced by half, so that the deflection displacement of the load member 761 can be reduced.

That is, in the state shown in Figure 54, compared to the state shown in Figure 53, in addition to the fact that the load member 761 on the left side is positioned in a raised position, the degree of deflection of the load member 761 due to the load applied via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is approximately half.

55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along line LVa-LVa in FIG. 53, and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along line LVb-LVb in FIG.

As shown in Figure 55 (b), when a pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in an excited state, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is divided into two, so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be displaced and raised up with little bending deformation of the load member 761 (bending deformation is approximately half).

55A, when one side of the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 is in an excited state, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is concentrated on one side of the load member 761. Since this load increases the bending deformation caused in the load member 761, even if the rotation angle of the load member 761 is the same, the amount of upward displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is suppressed by the amount of the bending deformation.

In this embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is configured to rotate and displace around a reference point O1. When the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by the restricting protrusion 702c (initial position, FIG. 5),
5(a) is shown by an imaginary line, the contact surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730
The load member 761 of the drive unit 760 is abutted against the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 in a state where the normal extending from the load member 761 extends downward in the rear direction.

That is, the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733 occurs along the extending direction of the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c, so that the bending deformation occurring in the load member 761 is suppressed to a small value. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted via the load member 761 is mainly used for the rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

On the other hand, in the intermediate posture (see Figure 55 (a)), the plate-shaped displacement member 730 abuts against the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 below the reference O1 in the front direction, with the normal extending from the abutment surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 extending downward in the front direction.

That is, near the intermediate position (see FIG. 55(a)) where the displacement of the load member 761 becomes large and the amount of bending deformation of the load member 761 tends to become large, the load applied to the load member 761 via the lower surface of the loaded portion 733 has a front component and a downward component. In this embodiment, since the load member 761 is formed in a rod shape that extends in a direction that inclines upward as it approaches the front, the load having a front component and a downward component acts as a load that causes bending deformation of the load member 761. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted via the load member 761 is used not only for the rising displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730 but also for the bending deformation of the load member 761 (the proportion used for the bending deformation of the load member 761 gradually increases).
.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, the ease with which the load member 761 is deflected by the load applied to the load member 761 changes with the change in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730.
) a rear load is generated in a direction in which the load member 761 is less likely to undergo flexural deformation, and from the horizontal position, a load is generated in a direction in which the load member 761 is more likely to undergo flexural deformation than in the direction of the rear load (a downward load or a front load).

As a result, even if the arrangement of the drive unit 760, the displacement width of the load member 761, and the generated force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are the same, the timing at which the load member 761 is likely to bend (the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730) and the amount of bending deformation can be adjusted depending on the shape of the load member 761 (particularly the shape of the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c) and the design of the loaded portion 733.
The operating manner of the second operating unit 700 when the driving unit 760 is driven can be designed to be different.

In this embodiment, since the vertical rod-shaped extension 761c is shaped to extend upward while projecting toward the front side, it is possible to cause bending deformation of the vertical rod-shaped extension 761c at an early stage. That is, even when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a horizontal position and a vertically downward load is applied to the load member 761, the vertical rod-shaped extension 761c can be bent (deformed in a forward tilting direction) by the load. In other words, the load of the weight transmitted via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be used for bending deformation of the load member 761 from a stage before the plate-shaped displacement member 730 reaches the horizontal position.

In this way, by configuring the use of the driving force transmitted to the plate-shaped displacement member 730 via the load member 761 to be balanced between the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the deformation of the load member 761, even if the load member 761 is displaced excessively or insufficiently, the plate-shaped displacement member 73
This can reduce fluctuations in the attitude of 0.

For example, when the load member 761 hardly undergoes bending deformation, differences in the amount of displacement of the load member 761 and differences in the height of the upper end of the load member 761 directly affect the change in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and therefore, unless a precise design is made so that there is no deviation in the amount of displacement of the load member 761 or the height of the upper end of the load member 761, it is not possible to stabilize the change in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In this case, high precision is required both in the manufacturing stage and in the assembly stage of the members, which increases the manufacturing costs.

On the other hand, when the load member 761 flexes and deforms, even if there is a slight difference in the amount of displacement of the load member 761 or in the height of the upper end of the load member 761, it is possible to stabilize the change in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 by designing it so that the flexural deformation of the load member 761 offsets this. Therefore, the precision required in the manufacturing and assembly stages for stabilizing the change in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be kept low, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

This applies not only to the load member 761 alone, but also to the combined displacement of the left and right load members 761. That is, in the case where the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are configured to have symmetrical shapes as in this embodiment, even if there is a slight difference in the amount of displacement of the load members 761 or the height of the upper ends of the load members 761 between the left and right drive units 760, the difference can be used for the flexural deformation of the load members 761.

As a result, regardless of which of the left and right drive units 760 is driven to cause the one-sided excitation state, the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the one-sided excitation state can be stabilized in an intermediate posture.

In addition, the load applied to the load member 761 through the loaded portion 733 causes the load member 761
The direction of the deflection occurring in the rod-shaped extension portion 761 can be limited to the front side.
b, the direction of the longitudinal positional deviation set for the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c coincides with the direction of the longitudinal positional deviation set for the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c.
This allows the load that causes bending deformation of the load member 761 to be directed in a direction away from the rod-shaped extension portion 761b.

Therefore, most of the load applied from the loaded portion 733 toward the load member 761 can be absorbed by the bending deformation of the load member 761, and the effect of the load applied from the loaded portion 733 on the rod-shaped extension portion 761b can be reduced.
Therefore, the influence of the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c can be suppressed to the vicinity of the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c.

That is, it is possible to suppress rubbing and deformation occurring in other contact portions of the load member 761 (for example, between the base end portion 761a and the shaft rod portion 762, between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, between the curved protrusion portion 774 and the opposing curved portion 761e, etc.). This makes it easier to predict the manner in which the load member 761 will bend and deform, and therefore makes it easier to design the structure of the load member 761 and the displacement manner of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 on the premise that the load member 761 will bend and deform.

In addition, the direction of the deflection occurring in the load member 761 can be limited to the front side (it is possible to prevent the same portion from deflecting both to the front side and to the rear side depending on the situation), so that a one-to-one relationship can be established between the position of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the amount of deflection of the load member 761.
The durability of the material can be improved.

In Figures 55(a) and 55(b), the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes depending on the degree of deformation of the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c, and both load members 761 are in the raised position (see Figure 51(b)).

Therefore, as described above, the load member 761
The forward/rearward displacement of the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 can be suppressed by the friction generated between the overhang portion 761d and the upper restriction portion 765.

Therefore, even when the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c is controlled to repeatedly bend and release (for example, a control mode in which one electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is maintained in an excited state and the other electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is repeatedly switched between an excited state and a non-excited state), it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from being displaced in the forward/backward direction overall.

This is because the load member 761 is not only connected to the shaft rod portion 762 as in the present embodiment, but also connected to the shaft rod portion 7
62 and the upper regulating portion 765. More specifically, this can be achieved well because the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is received in a state where the load member 761 is fixed at the elevated position, rather than in a state where the load member 761 receives the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a state where the load member 761 is disposed between the lowered position and the elevated position.

That is, when the load member 761 is supported only by the shaft rod portion 762, the shaft rod portion 762, which is the base end portion 761a and the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, is supported by the front-rear direction component of the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
However, if the rod-shaped extension portion 761b is twisted or shifted in position in the front-to-rear direction due to the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, a gap may occur between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

If the gap between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 exceeds the distance at which an electromagnetic force is effectively generated, the electromagnetic force is rapidly weakened, making it difficult to maintain the load member 761 in the raised position.
However, in the former case, the load member 761 becomes heavy, which leads to an increase in the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.
This is not preferable because it requires an excessively large driving force to rotate the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, which leads to an increase in size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c is deflected, the load member 761 is stably supported not only by the axial rod portion 762 but also by both the axial rod portion 762 and the upper restricting portion 765, both of which are at both the left and right ends. This not only makes it possible to suppress torsional deformation of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b compared to when the load member 761 is supported on only the left or right side, but also makes it possible to suppress axial displacement of the load member 761 by frictional resistance generated between the rod-shaped extension portion 761b and the upper restricting portion 765.

Therefore, when the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c is controlled to repeatedly bend and release, it is possible to suppress the overall displacement of the load member 761 in the forward/rearward direction without increasing the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

In this embodiment, due to the support mode of the metal plate member MB2, the metal plate member MB2 functions as a reinforcing material for the rod-shaped extension portion 761b (see FIG. 51). That is, the rigidity of the metal plate member MB2 can prevent torsional deformation of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b.

Returning to Fig. 54, the state shown in Fig. 54 corresponds to a state in which current flows through the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see Fig. 50) of the left and right drive units 760 (excited state). In this state, the load members 761 on both the left and right sides are applied to the loaded portions 73 on both the left and right sides of the plate-like displacement member 730.
3 is pushed up, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is changed in position in the rising direction and assumes the upper end position.
is rotationally displaced by about 2.7 degrees from the midpoint posture (about 6.1 degrees from the lower terminal posture, and about 4 degrees from the horizontal posture).

In the state shown in Figure 54, compared to the state shown in Figure 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and variable decorative member 750 placed on it is divided between the load members 761 on both the left and right sides, thereby mitigating the deflection occurring in the load members 761.

54, for the sake of convenience, the left and right load members 761 are illustrated as being so small that the deflection is not distinguishable. That is, the load members 761 are illustrated as having the same shape as that of the load members 761 illustrated in FIG.

As shown in Figures 52 to 54, in this embodiment, the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be switched between multiple positions (at least three positions) by switching the electrical conduction state of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see Figure 50).

In order to switch the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 from Figure 53 to Figure 54, it is sufficient to excite the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the left-side drive unit 760 while maintaining the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see Figure 50) of the right-side drive unit 760, so that the posture can be easily and smoothly switched.

56(a), 56(b), 57(a) and 57(b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the change over time in the conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 and the change in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In Fig. 56(a), 56(b), 57(a) and 57(b), the upper timing chart shows the conduction state of the left electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the middle timing chart shows the conduction state of the right electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the lower timing chart shows the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

Due to the configuration, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not displace simultaneously with the timing at which electricity is turned on to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (there is a slight time lag), but for the sake of ease of understanding, Figures 56 and 57 show the plate-shaped displacement member 730 as if it were displaced simultaneously with the turning on of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

The conduction state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56(a) is different from the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG.
The conduction state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56(b) is the same as the state in which the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched. The conduction state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57(a) is the same as the state in which the state shown in FIG. 5
2 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched.

The conduction state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57(b) is different from the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG.
52 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched over in a repeated manner.

In this way, the state switching patterns described above in FIG. 52 to FIG. 54 are not limited to one, but can be achieved in a number of different ways by varying the combination of the conduction modes of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2.

Therefore, since the plate-like displacement member 730 can change its posture in a number of different patterns, the hollow member 740 placed on the plate-like displacement member 730 and the variable decorative member 750 (see FIG. 43) can be used as the plate-like displacement member 730.
The displacement pattern of the slit 11 (see FIG. 1) can be configured in a number of ways, as will be described in detail later.

In addition, in Figs. 56(a), 56(b), 57(a) and 57(b), for convenience,
Although the short-time conduction length and conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are illustrated as being constant, this is merely an example. For example, the short-time conduction interval may be set to be different, or may be configured to gradually become longer or shorter, and may be set arbitrarily.

In addition, by shortening the short-time conduction length of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the plate-shaped displacement member 7
On the other hand, by increasing the conduction length, the posture change can be maintained for a sufficient length of time.
By shortening the conduction interval of L2, it is possible to change the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 as if it were vibrating.

Fig. 58 is a top view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in Fig. 58, the second operating unit 700 is formed in a generally bilaterally symmetrical shape when viewed from above. In the following, the part on the right side of the axis of symmetry will be described in detail, and the description of the part on the left side will be omitted.

Figures 59, 60, 61 and 62 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LIX-LIX in Figure 58. In Figures 59, 60, 61 and 62, the displacement of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in time series, with Figure 59 illustrating a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a lower end position (initial position), Figure 60 illustrating a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a horizontal position, Figure 61 illustrating a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in an intermediate position, and Figure 62 illustrating a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in an upper end position.

In Figures 59 to 62, a straight line connecting the centers of a pair of pivotally supported parts 731 (see Figure 43) is illustrated as a reference O1, which serves as the rotation axis of the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730. The reference O1 is illustrated in the same manner in the subsequent drawings. In Figures 59 to 62, a cross section at the center in the left-right direction of the center variable decorative member 750 is illustrated.

The variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is allowed to move up and down through the front through hole 723 (see Figure 43), and movement in the front, back, left and right directions is allowed by the gap between the front through hole 723 and the tubular protrusion 753.It is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and displaces as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to changes in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

The following describes the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction) that accompanies the change in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. For ease of understanding, the change in posture of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted in the illustration.

59, 60, and 61, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 has not been displaced (retracted) to a position where it abuts against the side surface of the columnar protrusion portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. In other words, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to displacement in the up and down directions.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is in contact with the variable decorative member 75.
0, the variable decorative member 750 is displaced (retracted) to a position where it abuts against the front side surface of the columnar protrusion 752, causing a load to be transmitted in the front-rear direction. That is, the variable decorative member 750 is displaced not only in the up-down direction, but also in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the variable decorative member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction) changes in accordance with the change in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The displacement is composed of a first stage occurring mainly in the vertical direction (a stage where the change in posture from the initial posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is small, see Figs. 59, 60, and 61), and a second stage occurring in a direction that is a combination of the vertical direction and the front-rear direction (a stage where the change in posture from the initial posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is large, see Figs. 61 and 62). This makes it possible to increase the variation in the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 (in the center in the horizontal direction).

Here, the state shown in Figure 61 corresponds to the one-sided excitation state, and the state shown in Figure 62 corresponds to the excitation state, so that by switching the driving mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 (in the center in the left-right direction) can be switched between multiple variations.

62, a gap is maintained between the upper surface of the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 and the lower end of the tubular portion that constitutes the front through-hole 723. As a result, the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are not in a position to sandwich the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, so the generation of load is suppressed and the position of the variable decorative member 750 can be maintained in an unstable state.

63, 64, 65, and 66 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LXIII-LXIII in Fig. 58. In Fig. 63, 64, 65, and 66, the displacement of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in time series.
64 shows the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end position (initial position).
63 to 66 show a cross section of the right-side variable decorative member 750 at the center in the left-right direction.

The variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are allowed to move up and down through the front through hole 723 (see Figure 43), and movement forward, backward, left and right is allowed by the gap between the front through hole 723 and the cylindrical protrusion 753.They are supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and displace as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to changes in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

The large receiving portions 736 on the left and right sides are disposed closer to the reference O1 in the up-down direction and farther from the reference O1 in the front-rear direction than the large receiving portion 736a in the center of the left and right.

In the following, the variable decorative members 75 (on both the left and right sides) associated with the change in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described.
In order to facilitate understanding, the change in posture of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted in the illustration.

63, 64, and 65, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 has not been displaced (retracted) to a position where it abuts against the side surface of the columnar protrusion portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. In other words, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to displacement in the up and down directions.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is in contact with the variable decorative member 75.
0, the front side of the columnar protrusion 752 is displaced (retracted),
There is no relationship that pushes forward any further, so the transmission of load in the front-to-rear direction is suppressed.

In other words, the load applied to the variable decorative member 750 by the large receiving portion 736 is mainly composed of loads in the vertical direction only, and when only the vertical components of the displacement are compared, the amount of displacement of the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the horizontal direction is greater than the amount of displacement of the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the horizontal direction.

In this way, the variable decorative member 7 (at the center in the left-right direction) changes in accordance with the change in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the left and right direction are mainly displaced in the up and down direction.
Depending on the degree of change in posture of 30, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the left-right direction and the variable decorative members 750 on both left-right sides can be made to differ.

As described above, large vertical displacement of the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides is ensured, so that, as shown in Figure 66, the gap between the upper surface of the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 and the lower end of the tubular portion that constitutes the front through hole 723 that existed when focusing on the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the left and right direction disappears, and in the same front-to-rear position, the dimensional relationship is such that the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 fits into the tubular portion that constitutes the front through hole 723.

Figure 66 shows the state after the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 abuts against the lower end of the tubular portion that constitutes the front through hole 723 and moves parallel to the rear side, assuming that the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 is not deformed.

Therefore, the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 sandwich the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, so that a load in the vertical compression direction is applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730. This increases the force with which the variable decorative member 750 maintains its position, making it possible to stabilize the position of the variable decorative member 750.

Therefore, when the drive units 760 on both the left and right sides are in an excited state and the plate-shaped displacement members 730 are in their upper end positions, the variable decorative members 750 in the center on the left and right are supported in an unstable state (see FIG. 62), while the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are supported stably.
The appearance of the multiple variable decorative members 750 after the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is brought into the upper end position can be made different.

In other words, the variable decorative members 750 in the center on the left and right are configured (loosely supported) to allow slight displacement as a remnant of the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are configured (firmly supported) to suppress displacement, thereby drawing the player's attention to the variable decorative members 750 in the center on the left and right.

As described above, the vertical displacement caused by the change in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is greater for the variable decorative members 750 on the left and right sides compared to the variable decorative members 750 in the center of the left and right. Therefore, in terms of vertical displacement, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the variable decorative members 750 on the left and right sides.
When the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is maintained in the upper end position, it is possible to easily draw the player's attention to the variable decorative members 750 at the center of the left and right.

Therefore, when the drive state of the drive unit 760 is set so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not reach the upper end position or so that it repeatedly changes position so as not to be held (stop) in the upper end position, the player's attention can be more easily drawn to the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides, and when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is set so as to be slightly held in the upper end position, the player's attention can be more easily drawn to the variable decorative members 750 in the center on the left and right.

As a result, among the plurality of light guiding members 714, a specific light guiding member 714 that is to be particularly focused on by the player can be selected.
When there is a variable decorative member 750 near the light-guiding member 714, the drive unit 760 is controlled to drive in a manner that easily draws the player's gaze to the variable decorative member 750 near that light-guiding member 714 (by controlling the light emission mode of the light-guiding member 714 and the drive mode of the drive unit 760 in relation to each other), so that the player's gaze can be drawn to a specific light-guiding member 714.

Fig. 67 is a schematic diagram showing the rotational displacement of the large receiving portion 736. Fig. 67 shows a view from the direction of the reference O1, and shows the arrangement of the central large receiving portion 736a and the left and right outer left large receiving portions 736b in the horizontal position and the upper end position of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

Since the central large receiving portion 736a is disposed above the front side of the reference O1, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotated and displaced by a small angle (about 4 degrees), the displacement in the front-rear direction is greater than the displacement in the up-down direction.

Since the left and right large receiving parts 736b are farther away from the reference O1 than the central large receiving part 736a, the displacement caused by the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is larger than that of the central large receiving part 736a. On the other hand, since the left and right large receiving parts 736b are disposed directly in front of the reference O1 (ie, disposed on a horizontal line), the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotated by a small angle (approximately 4 degrees)
In this case, the vertical displacement is greater than the forward/backward displacement.

In this manner, according to this embodiment, by rotating and displacing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 around the reference O1, the displacement mode of the central large receiving portion 736a can be made different from the displacement mode of the left and right large receiving portions 736b. Therefore, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 displaceably supported by the large receiving portion 736 can be made different between the member located in the left and right center and the member located on the left and right outer sides.

Figures 68, 69, 70 and 71 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in Figure 58. Figures 68, 69, 70 and 71 show the displacement of the second operating unit 700 in chronological order, with Figure 68 showing a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end position (initial position) and Figure 69 showing a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end position (initial position).
30 is shown in a horizontal position, FIG. 70 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in an intermediate position, and FIG. 71 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in an upper end position.

68 to 71 show a cross section at the center in the left-right direction of the light guide member 714. As described above, the front small receiving portion 735a
There is no contact between the front portion of the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the front side portion of the protruding columnar portion 743, and the displacement of the hollow member 740 is mainly in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, the front small receiving portion 735a is provided between the intermediate position and the upper end position of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The front portion of the inner surface of the hollow member 740 comes into contact with the front side portion of the protruding columnar portion 743.
is pushed toward the rear side in accordance with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
It is possible to provide a time difference between the start timing of the vertical displacement of the hollow member 740 caused by being pushed forward in accordance with the displacement of 0 and the start timing of the horizontal displacement.

The effect of the change in width of the light refracted through the upper end of the light guide member 714 in accordance with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 as shown in FIGS. 68 and 71 will be described.

When the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end position (initial position), the width of the light radiated from the light guiding member 714 to the player side is width LH1a, whereas when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper end position, the width of the light radiated from the light guiding member 714 to the player side is width LH
1b (LH1a>LH1b).

On the other hand, even if the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced, the width of the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the third symbol display device 81 side (back side) is maintained at the width LH2. Therefore, with the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the balance between the amount of light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the player side and the amount of light emitted to the back side can be changed.

That is, by driving the drive unit 760 and changing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper end position, the light directed to the player is weaker than when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end position (initial position), making it easier to look directly at the light-guiding member 714 (easier to see), and by the same comparison, the light directed to the third symbol display device 81 is stronger, so that the light-guiding member 714 can be more easily seen.
14 can be easily reflected by the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the player's line of sight is guided to the light guide member 714.
can be drawn to.

Fig. 72 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along line LXXII-LXXII in Fig. 58. As described above, a gap is formed between the partition member 708 and the illumination board 705, but in this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 72, the light emitted from the light emitting means 706 is prevented from leaking through the gap.

That is, in this embodiment, there is a slight gap between the partition member 708 and the illuminated board 705, and the dimension of this gap is shorter than the height dimension of the emission surface (upper end surface) of the LED that constitutes the light-emitting means 706 of the illuminated board 705, so that the light irradiated from the individual light-emitting means 706a in particular can be directed toward the light-guiding member 714 with almost no leakage (see enlarged view in Figure 72).

Furthermore, the light emitted from each individual light-emitting means 706a is directed toward a different light-guiding member 714, but is configured to be prevented from traveling toward other light-guiding members 714 (when focusing on one individual light-emitting means 706a, light-guiding members 714 other than the light-guiding member 714 arranged directly above it). That is, the light-guiding members 714 are separated from each other on the base end side by the displacement restriction member 716, so that it is possible to prevent the light from traveling through the inside of the light-guiding member 714 toward the other light-guiding members 714 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 72).

In addition, the light-guiding members 714 are configured to be indirectly connected to each other via the thin film cover members 712. Since the thin film cover members 712 are configured to be thin along the optical axis direction (up and down direction) of the individual light-emitting means 706a, it is possible to prevent the light irradiated from the individual light-emitting means 706a from reaching other light-guiding members 714.

Therefore, when performing an effect in which the color or intensity of the light irradiated from each individual light-emitting means 706a is made different, it is possible to prevent the light from reaching other light-guiding members 714 and affecting the visibility of the other light-guiding members 714. In other words, it is possible to prevent an unintended light-guiding member 714 from emitting light, or to prevent light irradiated from separate individual light-emitting means 706a from being mixed and being viewed through the light-guiding member 714.

Furthermore, if the light emitted from the individual light-emitting means 706a leaks out from the gap between the illumination board 705 and the partition member 708, the light can be mixed with the light from the overall light-emitting means 706b and made visible to the player.

As described above, the second operating unit 700 is displaced in different manners by changing the drive manner (see FIGS. 56 and 57) of the drive units 760 disposed respectively below the left and right of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

For example, in the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is repeatedly displaced, as a first displacement mode, one of the drive units 760 is repeatedly operated to displace the plate-shaped displacement member 730 back and forth between a lower end position and a mid-position. As a second displacement mode, one of the drive units 760 is maintained in an excited state, and the other drive unit 760 is repeatedly operated to displace the plate-shaped displacement member 730 back and forth between a mid-position and an upper end position.

Also, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stopped in a posture different from the lower end posture (initial posture), as a first stopping mode, one of the drive units 760 is maintained in an excited state, so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stopped in an intermediate posture.
By maintaining the magnet in an excited state, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stopped at the upper end position.

In particular, in this embodiment, rather than providing structural differences between the left and right drive units 760, the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is adjusted by the influence of the deflection that occurs in the load member 761 due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761 when only one of the drive units 760 is in an excited state (see Figure 55 (a)).

Therefore, in the above-mentioned first displacement mode (stopped mode) or second displacement mode (stopped mode), one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are not fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760, but can be swapped depending on the situation.

Therefore, unlike the case where one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 that is maintained in an excited state is
By alternately switching between the drive unit 60 and the drive unit 760 that is repeatedly operated depending on the number of operations or switching between them for each period, it is possible to match (adjust) the degree of fatigue of the constituent materials of the pair of left and right drive units 760.
Since the replacement timings of the second operating unit 700 and the second operating unit 700 can be synchronized, the service life of the second operating unit 700 can be maintained for a long period of time.

In addition, the degree of deflection generated in the load member 761 is merely an example and can be set arbitrarily, and it is sufficient that the deflection occurs regardless of the magnitude of the deflection. In other words, it is sufficient as long as the configuration can produce even a slight difference between driving and controlling one of the drive units 760 or both of them.

The second operation unit 700 is arranged so as to be visible from the player's line of sight at a position between the third symbol display device 81 and the first winning opening 64 through a window section defined by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). The control mode of the second operation unit 700 is set arbitrarily, but for example, it may be controlled so as to correspond the entry of game balls into the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65a to the control mode of the drive unit 760 and the control mode of the lighting state of the light emitting means 706 of the illumination board 705.

For example, in order to correspond to the control mode of the lighting state, when multiple game balls enter the first winning opening 64, the individual light-emitting means 706a located on the left side may be controlled to light up in accordance with the number of balls reserved for fluctuation, and when multiple game balls enter the second winning opening 140, the individual light-emitting means 706a located on the right side may be controlled to light up in accordance with the number of balls reserved for fluctuation.

In this case, the player can be configured to know the number of reserved balls by checking the light emission state of the light guiding member 714. In addition, by associating the entrance of the game ball with the control state of the drive unit 760, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second light guiding member operation unit 700.

For example, when a game ball enters the first winning port 64, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the first displacement mode described above, while when the game ball enters the second winning port 140, which is often more advantageous for the player than a ball entering the first winning port 64, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the second displacement mode described above.This allows the player to easily determine whether the game ball has entered the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 from the difference in the displacement mode of the second operating unit 700.

As another example of associating the entry of a game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 may be controlled in relation to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls. That is, for example, if a game ball enters the first winning opening 64 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is at the upper limit, the player can obtain a prize ball, but the player will not have an opportunity for fluctuation, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is close to the upper limit, it is desirable to notify the player of this.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 of the second operation unit 700 can be displaced by controlling the drive unit 760, and the appearance of the second operation unit 700 can be changed, so that the player's attention can be attracted. Therefore, by controlling the drive unit 760 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning port 64 is close to the upper limit (or is the upper limit), the player can easily notice that the number of reserved balls is close to the upper limit (or is the upper limit).

In addition, the control state of the driving unit 760 and the light emitting means 70 of the illumination board 705 are
As another example of associating the control mode of the lighting state of 6 with the entry of a game ball into a specific winning hole 65a.

In this case, for example, it may correspond to a game ball entering a specific winning port 65a, or it may correspond to a number of game balls exceeding the number of balls expected to enter the specific winning port 65a when the specific winning port 65a is opened (the maximum count number per jackpot round) entering the specific winning port 65a (a so-called over-entry).

This allows the player to visually confirm the state of the second operating unit 700, thereby enabling the player to understand that a game ball has entered a specific winning port 65a, or that a greater number of game balls than expected have entered the specific winning port 65a.

The second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 73. In the first embodiment, the magnetic force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 acts in the vertical direction, but the magnetic solenoid SOL1 of the window movable unit 2150 in the second embodiment is configured so that the magnetic force acts in the horizontal direction. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

73(a) and 73(b) are rear views of the window movable unit 2150 in the second embodiment. Fig. 73(a) illustrates a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is energized to generate electromagnetic force, and Fig. 73(b) illustrates a state in which the solenoid is de-energized to eliminate the electromagnetic force.

The window movable unit 2150 includes a contact member 2190 that is supported coaxially with the auxiliary device 160 and is disposed so as to be able to contact the driven member 163 in the rotational direction, and a biasing spring SP21 that biases the contact member 2190.

A weight portion W21 for adjusting the center of gravity position is formed at the upper end of the arm portion 163c of the driven member 163, and the driven member 163 is configured to rotate and displace under its own weight when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is in a non-excited state (see Figure 73 (b)).

The contact member 2190 is a cushion portion 175a that is arranged so as to be able to contact the driven member 163.
and a rotating member 2191 that supports the cushion portion 175a.

The rotating member 2191 is disposed opposite to the biasing spring SP21, and the biasing force of the biasing spring SP21 is generated in a direction that pushes the rotating member 2191 back toward the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

A description will now be given of the manner in which the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 are displaced. When the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is in an excited state, the driven member 163 is maintained in a state in which it is attracted by the electromagnetic force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is in a non-excited state, the driven member 163 is rotationally displaced by its own weight, and passes through the state shown in Fig. 73(b), causing the rotating member 2191 to rotationally displace against the biasing force of the biasing spring SP21. That is, the driven member 163 is displaced independently up to the state shown in Fig. 73(b), and from the state shown in Fig. 73(b), the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 are displaced integrally. That is, the displacement speed of the driven member 163 can be changed at the boundary of the state shown in Fig. 73(b).

73B, the driven member 163 can be vibrated and displaced by the varying biasing force. This makes it possible to increase the variation in the displacement of the driven member 163.

The third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 74 to Fig. 78. In the first embodiment, the lift plate 430 is vertically displaced in conjunction with the rotational displacement of the arm member 414. However, the first operating unit 3400 of the third embodiment includes a transmission means 3410 (for example, a transmission mechanism using a rack and pinion, not shown) that transmits a driving force so that the lift plate 430 is vertically displaced at a constant speed. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

74 to 77 are front views of the first operation unit 3400 in the third embodiment. In Fig. 74 to Fig. 77, the downward displacement of the lift plate 430 is illustrated in time series.

78(a) to 78(c) are schematic diagrams illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit 3400. In Fig. 78(a) to 78(c), the horizontal axis indicates the rotation angle of the end gear 413, the vertical axis indicates the downward displacement amount of the lift plate 430 in Fig. 78(a), and the vertical axis indicates the downward displacement amount of the lift plate 430 in Fig. 78(b).
78(b), the vertical axis represents the amount of rotation (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444, and in FIG. 78(c), the vertical axis represents the amount of displacement of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the lift plate 430.

The first operating unit 3400 has an L-shaped (integrated rectangle with long sides perpendicular to each other) long hole 3406 formed through the main body plate 401. The long hole 3406 is formed with an opening of a size that allows the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 to be displaced in the up, down, left and right directions.

In Fig. 74, the cylindrical portion 444d is disposed at the upper end position of the vertically long opening of the long hole portion 3406, and the vertically long opening is displaced downward by the displacement to Fig. 75. That is, in the displacement from Fig. 74 to Fig. 75, the left and right position of the cylindrical portion 444d does not change, so no rotation occurs in the auxiliary arm member 444.

75 to 77, the auxiliary arm member 444 undergoes rotational displacement in conjunction with the downward displacement of the lift plate 430. That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible to configure a section in which the auxiliary arm member 444 undergoes rotational displacement in conjunction with the vertical displacement of the lift plate 430, and a section in which the attitude of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the lift plate 430 undergoes vertical displacement.

By configuring a section in which the attitude of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the lift plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction, it is possible to block the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the driving force transmission with the auxiliary arm member 444 as the reference, and this role is similar to that of the vertical portion 491a of the fixed transmission plate 490 described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35 ). According to this embodiment, the vertical portion 491a can be omitted from the fixed transmission plate 490, so the vertical dimension of the fixed transmission plate 490 can be reduced (the design freedom of the fixed transmission plate 490 can be improved).

Therefore, the effect of being able to stagger the timing at which the lift plate 430 and the blade member 460 start moving can be maintained, while the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the transmission means 3410 makes it easy to displace the lifting plate 430 up and down with constant velocity linear motion (see Figure 78 (a)). In this case, if the configuration of the synchronous operation unit 440 described above in the first embodiment is used as is, the speed of rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 will change significantly during the displacement.

In detail, the angular velocity of the rotational displacement of the first operating unit 3400 near the retracted state or near the extended state is slower (the amount of angular change relative to the amount of displacement of the base end side portion 444a is smaller).

Therefore, it becomes impossible to displace the relative displacement member 442 at a substantially constant speed with respect to the lift plate 430. In response to this, in this embodiment, as a substitute for the lower left rotating gear 441, an arm-equipped rotating gear 3441 is provided which has a gear having the same gear ratio as the arc-shaped gear portion 444d, meshes with the upper right rotating gear 441, and has an extension portion connected to the relative displacement member 442. This makes it possible to partially offset the change in angular velocity of the auxiliary arm member 444 and eliminate the difference in the displacement mode between the lift plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442.

In other words, unlike the configuration of the first embodiment in which the relative displacement member 442 is displaced up and down in response (proportional) to the amount of angular change with respect to the amount of vertical displacement of the base end side portion 444a, the amount of angular change with respect to the amount of vertical displacement of the base end side portion 444a is converted again into the amount of vertical displacement of the arm tip of the arm-equipped rotating gear 3441, and the relative displacement member 442 is displaced up and down in response to the amount of vertical displacement of the arm tip, thereby partially eliminating (offsetting) the difference in displacement mode between the lifting plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442.

Therefore, the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the lift plate 430 can be made similar to the displacement mode of the lift plate 430 .

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 passes through the rotation shaft of the arm-equipped rotating gear 3441,
The electrical wiring DH1 may be configured to be guided by the relative displacement member 442.
The auxiliary arm member 444, the lift plate 430, the arm-attached rotating gear 3441, and the relative displacement member 4
42 in succession, the electrical wiring D
It is possible to avoid large variations in the path length of H1.

In this case, the electrical wiring DH1 can be easily connected to the decorative part 493, so that an electric lighting board can be arranged on the decorative part 493, making it easy to create light-emitting effects using light-emitting means such as LEDs.

The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 79. In the first embodiment, a case where a detection sensor for detecting the state of the second operating unit 700 is not provided has been described, but the second operating unit 4700 of the fourth embodiment includes a detection device 4780 for detecting the state of the drive unit 4760. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

79(a) and 79(b) are front views of the drive unit 4760 of the second operating unit 4700 in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in Fig. 79(a) and Fig. 79(b), the illustration of the front cover member 770 and the illumination board 777 is omitted except for the curved protrusion 774, and the outline of the curved protrusion 774 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 79(a), no current flows through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the load member 4
In FIG. 79(b), the load member 4 is attracted to the metal plate member MB2 by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.
761 is shown in a raised position.

As shown in FIGS. 79( a ) and 79 ( b ), in the lowered position, the load member 4761 abuts against the lower regulating portion 764 and is regulated from being displaced downward, and in the raised position, the load member 4761 abuts against the upper regulating portion 765 and is regulated from being displaced downward.
When it comes into contact with the wall, the upward displacement is restricted.

The load member 4761 has the same configuration as the load member 761 described in the first embodiment, except that the protruding portion 761d is changed to a thick protruding portion 4761f and a thin protruding portion 4761g.

The thick-walled protrusion 4761f is a portion that protrudes from the extended tip of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b along the extension direction of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b with a thickness (front-to-back width) equivalent to that of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, and corresponds to the portion that abuts against the upper regulating portion 765 and receives the load when the load member 4761 is positioned in the raised position.

The thin protruding portion 4761g is a protruding tip of the thick protruding portion 476
The thin-walled protruding portion 4761g is a plate-like portion that is thinner (shorter in front-to-back width) than the thick-walled protruding portion 4761f and protrudes along the extension direction of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. The upper and lower surfaces of the thin-walled protruding portion 4761g (the upper and lower surfaces parallel to the protruding direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick-walled protruding portion 4761f (the upper and lower surfaces parallel to the protruding direction) are formed flush with each other.

The thin-walled protrusion 4761g is configured to abut against the upper regulating portion 765, similar to the thick-walled protrusion 4761f, when the load member 4761 is positioned in the raised position. However, since it is thinner than the thick-walled protrusion 4761f, it is more likely to break than the thick-walled protrusion 4761f due to the accumulation of fatigue caused by repeatedly exciting the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

From this viewpoint, it is not necessary that the upper and lower surfaces of the thin-walled protruding portion 4761g (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the protruding direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick-walled protruding portion 4761f (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the protruding direction) are flush with each other; it is sufficient that at least the upper surfaces are flush with each other, and the position of the lower surface can be set arbitrarily. For example, by making the vertical width of the thin-walled protruding portion 4761g shorter than the vertical width of the thick-walled protruding portion 4761f, the electromagnetic solenoid SO
By reducing the number of repeated excitations of L2, the period until the thin protruding portion 4761g is broken can be adjusted.

The drive unit 4760 includes a detection device 4780. The detection device 4780 includes a printed circuit board 4781 fixed to the lower part of the support case 763, and a detection sensor 4782 arranged on the printed circuit board 4781 so that the thin-walled protruding portion 4761g can be inserted and removed from the detection groove.
It is equipped with.

The detection sensor 4782 is a photocoupler type detection device, and when the load member 4761 is in the lowered position, the thin protruding portion 4761g blocks the detection light (see FIG. 79(a)).
At the first raised position, the thin protruding portion 4761g is positioned upward so as not to block the detection light (see FIG. 79(b)).

The function of the detection sensor 4782 will now be described. Normally, the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 corresponds to the position of the load member 4761, so it is possible to check whether the load member 4761 is operating properly based on the detection result of the detection sensor 4782. This check is carried out by the MPU 22.
1 (see FIG. 4), and if it determines that a malfunction has occurred, it can generate an alarm or show an error on the display device, making it easier for players and hall staff to notice the malfunction of the second operating unit 4700.

In addition, if the thin-walled protruding portion 4761g is damaged (broken) and falls,
Since the load member 4761 and the load member 4761 will no longer operate synchronously, the position change of the load member 4761 will no longer correspond to the detection result of the detection sensor 4782. When the position change of the load member 4761 and the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 no longer correspond to each other, an alarm can be generated in the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) or an error message can be displayed on the display device, making it easier for players and hall staff to notice that the thin-walled protruding portion 4761g has been damaged (broken).

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 4782 can be used both as a position detection means for detecting the position of the load member 4761 and as a damage detection means for detecting damage (breakage) of the load member 4761 .

According to this embodiment, even if the thin protruding portion 4761g is damaged, the thick protruding portion 4761f abuts against the upper regulating portion 765, thereby stopping the load member 4761 at the raised position, and the load member 4761 can be displaced in the same manner as before the thin protruding portion 4761g was damaged. Therefore, even if the thin protruding portion 4761g is damaged, it is not necessary to immediately stop playing and put the device into a maintenance state, and playing can be continued for a while, thereby preventing the player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

In this way, among the portions that come into contact with the upper regulating portion 765, a portion that is preferentially broken (fractured) is provided, and the breakage (fracture) is detected by the detection sensor 4782, thereby
The load member can be replaced before fatigue accumulates to such an extent that 1f breaks (fractures).

The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 80. In the first embodiment, the case where the bending deformation occurs in relation to the rigidity of the vertical rod-shaped extension 761c itself has been described, but the second operating unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment includes a bending adjustment device 5780 that applies a load to the vertical rod-shaped extension 761c to adjust the bending deformation. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figures 80(a) and 80(b) are cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line LVa-LVa in Figure 53. The deflection adjustment device 5780 includes a box-shaped base member 5781 having a built-in metallic coil, and an adjustment member 5782 which is an iron bar supported by the base member 5781 so as to be movable back and forth in the vertical direction and which is disposed protruding above the base member 5781.

80B, even if the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in a one-sided excited state, the deflection adjustment device 5780 is driven to change the state to a state in which the deflection deformation of the load member 761 is small (a state in which the deflection deformation is about half). In other words, the deflection adjustment device 5780 is adopted as an alternative to the configuration in the first embodiment in which the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (both) are excited to change the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper end position.

That is, while the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is kept in a one-side excited state (see FIG. 80(a)), a metal coil (not shown) built into the base member 5781 of the deflection adjustment device 5780 is arranged so as to be wound around the adjustment member 5782, and electricity is passed through the metal coil to form an electromagnet, and the adjustment member 5782 is driven upward, whereby a load in a direction to return (restore) the deflection of the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c can be applied to the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c (see FIG. 80(b)).
)reference).

Thus, according to this embodiment, by cooperatively driving the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 on either the left or right side of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the adjustment device 5780 arranged on the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 side, it is possible to maintain the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the lower end position (initial position), the intermediate position, and the upper end position.

This allows the layout of the drive means to be more compact than when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is required to be disposed in a pair on the left and right. For example, the layout of the electrical wiring connected to each device of the drive means can be more compact, so that the areas required as paths for wiring can be reduced in various places (for example,
This can prevent the electric current from dispersing to the left and right.

Next, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 81 to 121. In the sixth embodiment, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65a are formed in a winning hole unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following, as in the first embodiment, the up-down direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in Figure 1 will be referred to as the direction of gravity, the left-right and rear sides of the pachinko machine 1 shown in Figure 1 will be referred to as the left-right direction, the front side of the paper of the pachinko machine 10 shown in Figure 1 will be referred to as the front side (or front), and the rear side of the paper of the pachinko machine 10 shown in Figure 1 will be referred to as the back side (or rear).

First, with reference to Figures 81 and 82, a winning hole unit 930 and a ball sending unit 970 disposed on the base plate of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described.
82 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. Fig. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. Note that in Fig. 82, units other than the winning port unit 930 and the ball sending unit 970 arranged on the base plate 60 (for example, the center frame 86 (see Fig. 81) and the like) are omitted from the illustration.

As shown in Figure 82, a through hole 60a that penetrates the thickness direction of the base plate 60 is formed by router processing on the lower side (lower side in Figure 82) of the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see Figure 81) is attached in the direction of gravity.

The through hole 60a is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940, described later, when viewed from the front, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning port unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

On the base plate 60, a winning port unit 930 is disposed from the play area (front side), and a ball throwing unit 970 is disposed from the opposite side (rear side) of the play area, and each is fastened and fixed by tapping screws, etc. The detailed configurations of the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning port unit 930 will be described with reference to Fig. 83 to Fig. 86. Fig. 83(a) is a front view of the winning port unit 930, and Fig. 83(b) is a rear view of the winning port unit 930. Fig. 84(a) is a perspective front view of the winning port unit 930, and Fig. 84(b) is a perspective rear view of the winning port unit 930. Fig. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning port unit 930, and Fig. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning port unit 930.

As shown in Figures 83 to 86, the prize winning port unit 930 is formed mainly by comprising a front unit 940, a specific prize winning port unit 950 arranged on the rear side of the front unit 940 (the front side of the page in Figure 83 (b)), a drive unit 960 arranged on the rear side of the specific prize winning port unit 950 (the front side of the page in Figure 83 (b)), and a displacement member 966 arranged between the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940.

As described above, the front unit 940 has an outer shape in a front view that is formed by fitting the through hole 6
0a. Therefore, by disposing the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be blocked.
It is possible to prevent game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 from passing through the through hole 60a from spaces other than the game ball passage paths (first winning hole 64, second winning hole 140 and specific winning hole 65a) formed in the front unit 940 described later.

The specific winning hole unit 950 is partially inserted into the inside of the specific winning hole 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball is thrown to the specific winning hole unit 95 through the specific winning hole 65a.
The specific winning hole unit 950 will be described in detail later.

The drive unit 960 is disposed on the rear side of the specific winning port unit 950, and a part of it (the insertion part 965e of the transmission member 965) is connected to the feather member 945 disposed in the front unit via a displacement member 966. This allows the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 to be operated to rotate and displace the feather member 945. The operation of the feather member 945 will be described in detail later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 87 to 89.
FIG. 87(a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87(b) is a front view of the front unit 940.
87(a) and 87(b) are rear views of the front unit 940. Fig. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and Fig. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940.
The outline of the wing member 945 is shown by a dashed line.

As shown in Figures 87 to 89, the front unit 940 is mainly formed by comprising a rear base 941 fastened to the base plate 60, a front base 943 arranged on the rear base 941 at a distance greater than the diameter of a game ball, and two (a pair) of wing members 945 arranged in a rotatable state between the opposing rear base 941 and the front base 943.

The rear base 941 is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness and an outer shape that is approximately a T-shape facing upside down when viewed from the front. The rear base 941 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and when the winning port unit 930 (front unit 940) is disposed on the base plate 60, the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 passes through the rear base 941.
You can see inside.

The rear base 941 is provided with a first outlet 71 formed by cutting out the side where the game ball flows down (the lower side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 87(b))), a specific winning opening 65a formed by penetrating the first outlet 71 in the shape of a long rectangle in the horizontal direction (the upper side in FIG. 87(b)), and a specific winning opening 65b formed by cutting out the specific winning opening 65.
a) and a first winning opening 64) cut out into the edge portion opposite the first outlet 71.

The rear base 941 also has a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the plate thickness direction at the outer edge portion. The through holes 941a are formed of a first through hole 941a1 whose diameter decreases from the front side (near side of the paper in FIG. 87(a)) to the rear side (near side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)), and a second through hole 941a2 whose diameter decreases from the rear side to the front side.

The first through hole 941a1 connects the rear base 941 (the prize-winning port unit 930) to the base plate 60.
The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening the device to the mounting member 941 is inserted, and the inner diameter of the first through hole 941a1 is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the portion of the tapping screw that is screwed in.
Since the diameter of the base 941 is reduced from the front side to the rear side, the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, the head of the tapping screw can be prevented from protruding into the play area. Furthermore, a positioning protrusion 942a protruding in a cylindrical shape from the rear side of the rear base 941 is formed near the first through hole 941a1.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and is formed with an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. This allows the rear base 941 (prize winning port unit 930) to be positioned relative to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the rear base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the rear base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the screw-in portion. That is, the front base 943 is fastened with a screw from the rear side of the rear base 941. In this case, the operation of removing the front base 943 from the rear base 941 must be performed in a state in which the winning port unit 930 has been removed from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from cheating and removing only the front base 943 from the front side (play area side) of the game board 13.

As described above, the second through hole 941a2 is formed with a smaller diameter from the rear side to the front side, so that the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter part on the rear side. Therefore, the head of the screw can be prevented from protruding on the rear side of the rear base 941. As a result, when the specific winning hole unit 950 described later is disposed on the rear side of the rear base 941, the head of the screw can be prevented from abutting against the specific winning hole unit 950.

The outer shape of the lower end in the direction of gravity (lower side in Figure 87 (b)) of the rear base 941 is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see Figure 81) of the game board 13. The first outlet 71 is formed with a dimension such that the edge of the cutout bottom (the edge on the upper side in the direction of gravity) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of a game ball. This allows game balls that flow down the game area formed on the front of the game board 13 (base plate 60) and do not flow into any of the first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, specific winning opening 65a, or general winning opening 63 () to flow out of the game board 13 via the first outlet 71.
The ball can be thrown to the rear side of 3 (the opposite side of the playing area (the front side of the page in Figure 87 (b))).

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out a semicircular shape at the end on the upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) opposite the first outlet 71. The first winning opening 64 is also formed so that the dimension of its inner edge is greater than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball that flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 941g (described later) to be guided through the first winning opening 64 to the back side (the opposite side of the game area (FIG. 87(b))
The ball can be thrown to the front of the page.

The edge of the first winning opening 64 is formed with a first receiving portion 941g that protrudes toward the playing area (the front side of the paper in Figure 87 (a)) and is formed in a cup shape, and a first ball throwing portion 942g that protrudes with a U-shaped cross section on the opposite side to the playing area (the front side of the paper in Figure 87 (b)).

The first receiving portion 941g is formed to have a size capable of receiving one game ball inside. This allows the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side of the first receiving portion 941g (first winning port 64) in the gravity direction to flow into the inside of the first receiving portion 941g.

The first receiving portion 941g has a bottom surface that slopes downward toward the rear side (the opposite side of the game area (the front side of the page in FIG. 87(b))). This allows the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 941g to be sent to the rear side (the first ball sending portion 942g side) through the first winning port 64 from below.

Furthermore, the first receiving portion 941g includes guide portions 941g1 that are inclined outward in the short side direction of the base plate 60 from the upper ends of both ends of the short side direction (left and right direction in FIG. 87) of the base plate 60 toward the second winning port side (the lower side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 87(a))). The guide portions 941g1 are formed into a plate-like body with a predetermined thickness, and the side surface opposite the play area (the rear side) is connected to the front side of the rear base 941. This makes it possible to increase the rigidity of the first receiving portion 941g, and the game balls flowing down the flow-down area collide with the first receiving portion 941g, and the first receiving portion 941g
This can prevent the damage to the wiring.

Furthermore, if the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65 are integrally formed on the back base 941, the arrangement of the game nails that change the game ball flowing down the play area will be insufficient, making it difficult to change the flow direction of the game ball. Therefore, there is a risk that the interest of the player will be lost, but by having the game ball collide with the guide portion 941g1, the flow direction of the game ball can be changed, and the loss of interest of the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the guide portion 941g1 is formed inclined toward the outside in the short direction of the base plate 60 (both left and right sides in FIG. 87(a)) toward the second winning opening 140 side, so that the game ball that hits the guide portion 941g1 can be guided to the horizontal outside of the rear base 941.
This allows the ball to collide again with a nail (not shown) arranged in the vicinity of the ball, which makes it easier to change the direction of the ball flowing down. This prevents the player's interest from being spoiled.

The first ball sending section 942g is formed in a U-shape that is open upward in the direction of gravity, and the distance between the opposing inner edges is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.
The bottom surface is formed with a downward incline toward the rear side (the opposite side to the play area (the front side of the page in FIG. 87(b))), and the protruding tip side abuts against the edge of the inlet 982d of the ball throwing unit 970 described below. This allows the game ball sent from the inside of the first receiving portion 941g through the first winning port 64 to the first ball throwing portion 942g to roll toward the rear side, and be sent to the ball throwing unit 970.

The first ball throwing section 942g has a first recess 942g1 that is cut into a rectangular shape in a side view at the upper end of the protruding tip. The first recess 942g1 is a notch on which a second protrusion 982d1 of a ball throwing unit 970 described later is placed, and is recessed to a size approximately the same as the shape of the second protrusion 982d1 in a side view. The arrangement of the first ball throwing section 942g and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described in detail later.

The second winning hole 140 is formed in a substantially D-shape with a curved upper portion when viewed from the front, and the inner edge is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball sent between the opposing vane members 945 described later is delivered to the back side (the opposite side of the game area (FIG. 87)) through the second winning hole 140.
(b) The ball can be thrown to the front of the page.

The second winning port 140 has a front side (the game area side (the front side of the page in FIG. 87(a)) on its edge.
) and a second ball throwing portion 942c protruding on the rear side (the side opposite the playing area (the front side of the paper in Figure 87 (b))).

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the short direction of the base plate 60. The front side wall portion 941b is set to a size such that its protruding tip surface abuts against a ball throwing guide portion 943d of the front base 943 described later.

The second ball sending section 942c is formed at both ends of the lower edge of the second winning opening 140, and is bent in a generally L-shape when viewed from the rear. The dimension of the second ball sending section 942c in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 87(b)) is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the front base 94
This can prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 943a from falling off the top surface of the rolling portion 943a.

The pair of second ball sending sections 942c are set such that the distance between them in the short side direction of base plate 60 (left and right direction in FIG. 87(b)) is set to be approximately the same as the length dimension of rolling section 943a of front base 943 described later in the short side direction of base plate 60 (left and right direction in FIG. 87(b)).
43a is provided. In addition, the second ball sending portion 942c has a second recess 942c1 cut out on the other side of the protruding tip in the direction of gravity (the upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 87(b))). The second recess 942c1 is a portion on which a protrusion 981b1 of a passage unit (described later) is placed on the inside, and a detailed description thereof will be given later.

The rear base 941 is formed with: first axis holes 941d recessed in a circular shape at two locations on the other side in the direction of gravity near the second winning opening 140 (the side of the first winning opening 64 (upper side of Figure 87 (b))) from the playing area side of the rear base 941 toward the opposite side of the playing area; two first openings 941e curved around the axis of the first axis holes 941d and formed through the rear base 941; a first guide wall 942b located outside the opposing direction of the two first openings 941e and protruding toward the rear side; and a protrusion 941c protruding between the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140.

The first shaft hole 941d is capable of supporting a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the blade member 945 described later, and is formed with an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a, so that one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e is formed in an arc shape with the center of the first shaft hole 941d as its axis.
The first opening 941e allows the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 to be inserted therethrough, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the feather member 945. This makes it possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from contacting the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the feather member 945 rotates.

The protruding portion 941c is formed in an isosceles triangular shape in front view, and the corners of the isosceles connecting portion are positioned on approximately the same plane as the center position between the opposing feather members 945 described later. In addition, the unequal sides of the protruding portion 941c are formed extending parallel to the opposing direction of the feather members 945, and the length dimension is set to be slightly larger than the opposing dimension of the feather members 945 in the closed state. Furthermore, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest separation distance from the feather members 945 in the closed state is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This makes it possible to suppress the game ball from being sent to the second winning hole 140 (between the opposing pair of feather members 945) when the feather members 945 are in the closed state. A detailed explanation of the closed state of the feather members 945 will be given later.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966 described later is displaced, and the distance dimension between the pair of opposing first guide walls 942b is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension in the short direction of the displacement member 966.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are formed in a generally L-shape when viewed from the rear, and the bent portions extend in a direction approaching each other.
The displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be restricted by abutting against the bent portion of the displacement member 966b.

The specific winning opening 65a is formed as a long rectangular opening in the opposing direction of the pair of blade members 945 (left and right direction in FIG. 87(b)), and a plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950 described later can be inserted inside the opening. This allows a game ball flowing down the game area to be sent to the inside of the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the rear base 941 has an upright portion 942f that surrounds the specific winning opening 65a and is erected on the rear side (opposite the playing area), and a recess 941h that is recessed from the rear side at both longitudinal ends of the specific winning opening 65a.

The shape of the inner edge of the standing portion 942f is set to be substantially the same as the shape of the specific winning hole unit 950 when viewed from the front, which will be described later.
This makes it easier to position and install.

The recess 941h is formed at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the rod member 952 serving as the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted when the specific winning opening unit 950 is disposed on the rear base 941.
When the rod member 952 is displaced in a direction to come out of the plate member 951, the end face of the rod member 952 can be brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h, thereby preventing the rod member 952 from coming out of the plate member 951.

Furthermore, the front base 942 includes a bulging portion 942h that bulges out between the opposing standing portion 942f and the second ball sending portion 942c, and a bulging portion 942b that bulges out from the outer circumferential surface of the standing portion 942f toward the first guide wall 942b (see FIG. 87(
and a second guide wall 942d protruding upward.

The bulging portion 942h bulges out toward the rear side of the rear base 941 and is connected to the standing portion 942f and the second ball sending portion 942c. As a result, the displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90) described later is
When the displacement member 9
A predetermined gap can be formed between the displacement member 966 and the rear surface of the rear surface base 941.
When the displacement member 966 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be reduced.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of a lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance between the opposing second guide walls 942d is set to be slightly larger than the distance in the short side direction of the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the opposing pair of second guide walls 942d, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the short side direction of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

The rear base 941 is provided with a second outlet 941f formed by cutting out a semicircular shape toward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) at the edge on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of both ends of the specific winning port 65a in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 87(b)). The second outlet 941f is a cutout for sending the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving portion 944a formed in the front base 943 to the rear side of the base plate 60 (opposite the game area), and is formed in a shape larger than the diameter of the game ball.

In addition, a third ball throwing section 942e that is formed in a substantially U-shape in rear view and protrudes to the rear side is formed on the edge of the second outlet 941f. This allows the game ball that is thrown to the rear side via the inside of the second outlet 941f to be thrown to the inside of the third ball throwing section 942e.

The third ball throwing section 942e is formed such that the curved portion (lower portion) of the U-shape when viewed from the rear is inclined downward in the direction of gravity as it protrudes toward the rear side, and the game ball thrown from the second outlet 941f can roll toward the rear side. A detailed explanation of the game ball rolling on the inner surface of the third ball throwing section 942e will be given later.

The front base 943 is formed in a generally upside-down T-shape, with an outer shape smaller than that of the rear base when viewed from the front. The front base 943 is also formed from a colorless and transparent plate-like body. This allows the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the opposing front base 943 and rear base 941.

The front base 943 includes a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a, which are protruding from the rear base 941 at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second outlet 941f, respectively.
It is formed primarily with this in mind.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear, and is provided with a rear base 94
The second winning hole 140 of the first receiving portion 943c is disposed on the open side of the second receiving portion 943c (the open side of the U-shape).
A pair of wing members 945, which will be described later, are disposed on the second receiving portion 943c. Furthermore, the protruding distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the rear base 941 side is set to be greater than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can be sent between the opposing rear base 941 and the front base 943, and the game ball can be prevented from flowing into the second winning hole 140 from outside the opposing gap between the pair of wing members 945, which will be described later.

The second receiving portion 943c has a ball guide portion 943d protruding inward from its inner edge,
A first recess 94 is formed in a circular shape from the rear base 941 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)).
3ca, and a rolling portion 943a protruding from the inside of the curved portion toward the rear base side.

The ball throwing guide portion 943d is formed as a pair on the lower side (lower side in FIG. 87(b)) of the pair of wing members 945 in the direction of gravity. The pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portion 941b of the rear base 941, respectively.
When the pair of blade members 945 and 946 are assembled, their end faces come into contact with each other.
The game ball that flows between the opposing ball guide portions 943a and 943b can be sent to the opposing ball sending guide portions 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) between the pair of opposing ball throwing guide portions 943d, and the end surface 943a1 on the upper side in the direction of gravity is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the rear base 941 side.
87B)。 When the front base 943 is fastened (combined) with the recess 941j, the front base 943 is fastened (combined) with the recess 941j, and the tip is on the rear side of the rear base 941 (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87B).
It is projected to be.

This allows the game ball sent between the pair of opposing ball sending guide portions 943d to be sent to the end face 943a1 of the rolling portion, and the game ball can be rolled around the upper part of the end face 943a1 and sent to the rear side of the rear base 941.

The front base 943 is provided with a ring-shaped protrusion 943b on the opening side (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the second receiving portion 943c, which protrudes in a ring shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the rear base 941. The ring-shaped protrusion 943b is provided with a second shaft hole 943b1 on its inner edge.
The other end of the shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the blade member 945 described later can be inserted inside b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the rear base 941. Thus, the shaft member 945a can be supported by being sandwiched between the opposing rear base 941 and front base 943.

The third receiving portion 944a is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear, and the second outlet 941f of the rear base 941 is disposed inside the third receiving portion 944a. This allows game balls flowing down the play area of the game board 13 to flow into the inside of the third receiving portion 944a, and the game balls that have flowed into the third receiving portion 944a can be sent to the rear side (the side opposite the play area) via the second outlet 941f.

Further, the second receiving portion 943c and the third receiving portion 944a have a first recess 943ca and a second recess 944a1 recessed in a circular shape from the rear base 941 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)). The first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are fastened portions into which the screw inserted into the above-mentioned second through hole 941a2 is screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the rear base 941. This allows the rear base 941 and the front base 943 to be fastened together.

The feather members 945 are arranged in a pair, sandwiching the second winning hole 140 formed in the rear base 941, when viewed from the front. The feather members 945 are formed from a colored translucent material, and are visible to the player through the front base 943.

The wing member 945 is formed in a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to a thickness smaller than the distance between the opposing rear base 941 and front base 943. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c formed penetrating in the thickness direction (from the rear base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a protrusion 945b protruding from the surface on the rear base 941 side (rear face).

The insertion hole 945c is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the opposing rear base 941 and the front base 943. Therefore, when fastening (assembling) the rear base 941 and the front base 943, the shaft member 945a is inserted into the insertion hole 945c, so that the wing member 945 can be rotatably disposed between the opposing rear base 941 and the front base 943. This allows the wing member 945 to be displaced between a closed state in which the opposing side surfaces are parallel to the direction of gravity, and an open state in which one side of the side surfaces is displaced outward in the opposing direction.

The protrusion 945b is a transmission part that is connected to a displacement member 966 described later and transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the blade member 945. The tip of the protrusion 945b is a first opening 941e of the rear base 941.
The projection 945b is set to a dimension such that the projection 945b protrudes to the rear side (the opposite side to the play area) of the rear base 941 on which the displacement member 966 is disposed via the projection 945b. A detailed description of the connection state between the projection 945b and the displacement member 966 will be given later.

Next, the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
90(b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90(c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 is formed of a plate-like body having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a second opening 966c is formed at a substantially central position when viewed from the front in the plate thickness direction (left and right direction in FIG. 90(b)).
66c is formed such that the shape of the inner edge in a front view is larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is disposed inside. As a result, the game ball sent to the opposite side of the game area through the second winning opening 140 is prevented from being thrown by the displacement member 96
6.

The displacement member 966 includes a protruding portion 966a protruding in the short direction (left and right direction in FIG. 90(a)) from one end side (upper side in FIG. 90(a)) in the longitudinal direction (upper direction in FIG. 90(a)), and a bulging portion 966b bulging from the other end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 90(b)) toward the rear side (toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85)).
66b.

The protrusion 966a has a sliding groove 966a2 formed penetrating the displacement member 966 in the plate thickness direction.
and abutment portions 96 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 966 in the short direction and extending in the longitudinal direction.
6a1.

The sliding groove 966a2 is an elongated hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed as an elongated hole that is long in the short direction of the displacement member 966.
The width dimension is set to be larger than the width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the feather member 945. This makes it possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from abutting against both inner surfaces of the sliding groove 966a2 that face each other in the width direction when the feather member 945 rotates, thereby preventing the movement of the feather member 945 from being restricted.

The contact portion 966a1 is formed to bulge out toward the front side (the front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the rear side (the rear base 941 side). This makes it possible to reduce the area of contact between the displacement member 966 and the front base 943 and the drive unit 960 (described later). As a result,
The resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

The bulging portion 966b is formed to bulge out toward the rear side (the rear base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion in a rear view.
This is an opening into which a tip (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of a drive unit 960 described later is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965.
The connected state between the connecting hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be described in detail later.

The connecting hole 966b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is elongated in the short direction of the displacement member 966, and is provided with a one-side abutment portion 966b2 of the inner surface on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in Figure 90(a))) and an other-side abutment portion 966b3 of the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in Figure 90(a))).

The one-side contact portion 966b2 is a bulging portion 965 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965 to be described later.
The displacement member 966 has a bulging portion 965 at one side contact portion 966b2.
When e1 comes into contact with and is slidably displaced, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state (see FIG. 92).

The other-side contact portion 966b3 is a bulging portion 965 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965 to be described later.
The displacement member 966 is displaced by sliding when the side surface opposite the bulging portion 965e1 comes into contact with the other-side contacted portion 966b3.
5 can be displaced to a closed state (see FIG. 91).

Next, the connection state between the displacement member 966 and the feather member 945 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 91 and 92. Figures 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning port unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in range XCI of Figure 87(b). In Figures 91 and 92, the outline of the feather member 945 is illustrated by a chain line. In Figure 91, the closed state of the feather member 945 is illustrated, and in Figure 92, the open state of the feather member 945 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in a rear view, and has a first surface 945b1 formed parallel to the opposing surfaces of the pair of feather members 945 in the closed state, a third surface 945b3 connected to the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the direction of gravity (the specific winning opening 65a side), and a first surface 945b1 and a third surface 945b2.
3 and a second surface 945b2 continuing therefrom.

The sliding groove 966a2 is provided with a lower inner surface 966a4 that is located on one side in the gravity direction (the connecting hole 966b1 side) and abuts against the protrusion 945b to displace the wing member 945 to the open state, and a lower inner surface 966b5 that abuts against the protrusion 945b.
a4 and abuts against the protrusion 945b to displace the wing member 945 to the closed state; and a lower inner surface 966a3 extending from the outside in the short direction (left-right direction in FIG. 91 ) of the displacement member 966.
and an inclined surface 966a5 inclined inward in the short side direction of the displacement member 966 toward the 6a4 side.

The displacement member 966 is disposed so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 91 ) with respect to the rear base 941 by a transmission member 965 described later.
When the displacement member 966 is displaced towards the specific winning opening 65a (lower side in Figure 91), it is in a closed state, and when the displacement member 966 is displaced towards the second winning opening 140 (upper side in Figure 91), it is in an open state.

Next, a description will be given of the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is connected to the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966.
66a2.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the protrusion 945b fits into the sliding groove 96.
6a2 (outside the short side of the displacement member 966). When the displacement member 966 is displaced from this state toward the second winning opening 140 (the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the third surface 945b3 of the protrusion 945b, displacing the protrusion 945b. This allows the feather member 945 to be rotationally displaced.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes an entrance opening formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening and open or close the entrance opening, a driving means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a protruding portion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of wing members. In detail, one end side of the rotating member is formed with opposing portions that face each other at a predetermined interval above and below, and the protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the opposing opposing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the opposing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the gap between the opposing parts and the protruding parts must be set large, which causes a problem that the opening and closing operation of the feather member is unstable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated to open and close the feather member, the attitude of the opposing parts is tilted relative to the protruding parts. If the opposing distance between the opposing parts is equal to the outer shape of the protruding parts, the protruding parts will interfere with the opposing distance between the opposing parts, preventing the rotation of the rotating member. Therefore, it is necessary to set the opposing distance between the opposing parts to a size that does not cause the protruding parts to interfere, and the gap between the opposing parts and the protruding parts will be large accordingly. As a result, the feather member is prone to rattling, which causes the opening and closing operation of the feather member to be unstable.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the transmission mechanism includes a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means (drive unit 960) and a displacement member 966 that is slidably displaced in accordance with the rotation of the transmission member 965. Since protrusions 945b are provided protruding from the pair of wing members 945 and a sliding groove 966a2 into which the protrusions 945b are slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be restricted.
The displacement is a sliding displacement, and the attitude of the sliding groove 966a2 is not inclined with respect to the protrusion 945b, so there is no need to avoid interference with the protruding portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be made to approximate the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, the rattle of the feather member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operation of the feather member 945 can be stabilized. In addition, since the direction of displacement of the displacement member 966 is a direction approximately perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of feather members 945, the displacement member 966 can be disposed approximately parallel to the feather member 945. As a result, the space required for disposing the feather member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and the space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the displacement member 966 does not displace in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945, and therefore it is possible to reduce the space required for arranging the displacement member in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945. As a result, it is possible to ensure space for arranging other members.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which a rotating member is directly connected to a pair of wing members, in the present invention, a displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is operated in a direction to slide and displace the displacement member 966 upward in the direction of gravity (the other side in the direction of gravity), the displacement member 966
The inertial force increases by the weight of the rotor 942, and the driving force required for the driving means (solenoid 610 described later) increases. This makes it difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member 945 from a stopped state and displacing it to the open state or the closed state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state,
The protrusion 945b is positioned on the lower side (one side in the direction of gravity) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts to slide and displace toward the upper side in the direction of gravity (the other side in the direction of gravity), the position of the protrusion 945b is set to the lower side along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member 945. As a result, the protrusion 945b is pushed up against the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2.
The displacement component of the displacement member 966 can be increased in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the direction of gravity (downward direction in FIG. 91).
By starting the drive of the wing members 945 in the closed state, the initial operation of opening or closing can be smoothly performed.

In addition, the center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the protrusion 945b across the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c). As a result, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the weight of the wing member 945 can be used to displace the wing member 945 to the open state. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts to slide toward the upper side in the direction of gravity (one side in the direction of gravity), the wing member 945 is rotated in the direction to be opened, so that the wing member 945 can be rotated by its weight (its own weight). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the drive of the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) can be started, and the initial operation when opening can be performed smoothly.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned inclined surface 966a5 is formed on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 91 )) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, even if the position of the protrusion 945b is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member 945, the protrusion 945b can be guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5, and the sliding displacement of the displacement member 966 toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) can be smoothly started.

In addition, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only can the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b be reduced accordingly, but also, when the protrusion 945b abuts against the inclined surface 966a5, the protrusion 945b is displaced in the direction of gravity,
The horizontal displacement can also be restricted.
In other words, even when the blade members 945 are affected by vibrations caused by the game balls flowing downstream, the blade members 945 can be easily maintained in the open position or the closed position.

As shown in Fig. 92, when the vane member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 is displaced from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in Fig. 92)).
The protrusion 945b comes into contact with the first surface 945b1 of the blade member 945b, and the protrusion 945b is displaced.
can be rotationally displaced.

In addition, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side is set to the direction of gravity (downward in FIG. 92). This allows the feather member 945 to be displaced by utilizing the weight of the displacement member 966 when closing the feather member 945. As a result, the feather member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the drive unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 93 to 95. Figure 93(a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, Figure 93(b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and Figure 93(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960.
FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 is formed in a box shape and includes a first storage section 962 and a second storage section 963 that are arranged opposite to each other, and a first storage section 962 and a second storage section 963 that are arranged opposite to each other.
A solenoid 610 is disposed in the space between the first receiving portion 962 and the second receiving portion 963, a connecting member 964 is connected to the solenoid 610, and a connecting member 964 is supported by the first receiving portion 962 and the second receiving portion 963.
64 and a transmission member 965 connected thereto.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering portion 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (upper side in Figure 93 (a)), and a guide portion 962b that protrudes from the covering portion 962a toward the rear base 941 (see Figure 85).

The covering portion 962a is formed in a generally box shape with the solenoid 610 side (lower side in FIG. 93(a)) and the guide portion 962b side open. The covering portion 962a also includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the opposing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d protruding in a direction facing the outside of the opposing wall surface.

The engaged portion 962c is a notch that engages with an engaging portion 963c of the second accommodating portion 963 described below, and is cut out to have a larger outer shape than the engaging portion 963c in a side view.
As a result, before the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are fastened to each other, the engaged portion 962c
Since the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the first receiving portion 962 and the second receiving portion 96
This improves the workability of fastening to 3.

The fastening portion 962d is fixed to the second housing portion 962 when the drive unit 960 is assembled.
63, and is formed at a position opposite to the fastening hole 963b1 on the second receiving portion 963 side (FIG. 93
(a) It has a through hole 962da that penetrates toward the lower side.

The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) that is screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 is inserted. The through hole 962da is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1.
3b1. As a result, the first storage portion 962 and the second storage portion 96
3 can be fastened and fixed.

The guide portion 962b is formed with a pair of arms 962e that are connected to the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a and are formed in an approximately L-shape when viewed from the side, a wall portion 962f that is connected to the pair of arms 962e and is formed in a gate shape when viewed from the front, and a protrusion portion 962g that protrudes from the wall portion 962f on the side opposite the covering portion 962a (the rear base 941 side (see Figure 85)).

The arm portion 962e extends from each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a to the rear base 941 side (
85) and the protruding tip side is bent to the other side in the gravity direction (the side opposite to the solenoid 610 side), forming a generally L-shape in a side view. The dimension between the pair of arms 962e is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between both ends in the horizontal direction of a side wall portion 981b (see FIG. 109(a)) of a sorting unit 980 described later, and the side wall portion 981b is inserted between them.

The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the side surfaces at the tip side (bent side) of the arm portion 962e described above, and its shape in front view is formed to be larger than the shape in front view of the displacement member 966 described above. Furthermore, the wall portion 962f has an outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93(b)) in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) set to be substantially the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91) in the facing direction of the pair of first guide walls 942b of the rear base 941 described above (L3=L4). Furthermore, the wall portion 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93(a)) in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(a)) set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 91) from the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the rear base 941 to the outer surface of the standing portion 942f (
L5=L6). As a result, the displacement member 962f is disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941.
66 can be disposed between the first guide walls 942b, and the displacement member 966 can be housed between the opposing first guide walls 942b. Furthermore, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 disposed between the opposing wall portion 962f and the rear base 941 can be disposed in the opposing space.

The protruding portion 962g is formed to protrude from the outer side of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f in the opposing direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93B) to the opposite side of the arm portions 962e, and the protruding dimension is set to be approximately the same as the protruding dimension of the first guide wall 942b of the rear base 941.
An inner dimension L7 in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) is set to be slightly larger than an outer dimension L8 (see FIG. 91) in the opposing direction of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the rear base 941. Furthermore, the dimension of the protruding portion 962g in the gravity direction is set to be substantially the same as the dimension between the opposing first guide wall 942b and the standing portion 942f.

As a result, when the drive unit 960 in the assembled state is arranged on the rear base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the opposing protrusion portions 962g, and the protrusion portion 962g is inserted between the opposing first guide wall 942b and the standing portion 942f, so that the drive unit 960 can be positioned and arranged relative to the rear base 941.

The second housing portion 963 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed into a box-like body that covers the other side (the lower side in FIG. 93(a)) of the solenoid 610. The second housing portion 963 is formed into a rectangular shape that is long in the drive direction of the solenoid 610 (the left-right direction in FIG. 93(b)) when viewed from above.
The second accommodating portion 963 includes recessed portions 963e recessed at multiple locations on both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction, engaging portions 963c protruding toward the first accommodating portion 962 side from between the recessed portions 963e at multiple locations, and protruding portions 963b protruding in the short direction from both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction.
The bearing portion 963d is recessed into the wall portion on one side (the rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)) extending in the short side direction.

The protruding portion 963b is formed to protrude in a semicircular arc shape on the outer side in the short side direction of the second accommodating portion 963,
The first housing portion 962 has a through hole 962da and a fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da.
The first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be fastened together by inserting a screw through the through hole 962da side of the first accommodating portion 962 and screwing it into the fastening hole 963b1.

The recessed portion 963e is an opening that allows air to circulate in the space formed between the opposing first storage portion 962 and the second storage portion 963. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e,
The solenoid 610 disposed between the opposing housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 can be cooled.

The engaging portion 963c protrudes toward the first accommodating portion 962 from between the multiple juxtaposed recessed portions 963e, and its tip is formed into a hook shape that is bent inward in the short direction of the second accommodating portion 963. As described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first accommodating portion 962, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, the engaging portion 963c is disposed inside the engaged portion 962c, and the bent portion of the engaging portion 963c engages with one side end face of the first accommodating portion 962.

In addition, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the recessed portions 963e, the distance from the base end to the tip end of the engaging portion 963c can be increased. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is disposed in the first accommodating portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily deflected, and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodating portion 962.

The bearing portion 963d is a recess that accommodates a rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 965, which will be described later.
The bearing portion 963d is recessed into a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c. In addition, the end face of the bearing portion 963d on the first accommodating portion 962 side is covered by a side face of the first accommodating portion 962 on one side in the gravity direction, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, the rotating shaft 965c accommodated in the bearing portion 963d can be prevented from coming off to the outside of the bearing portion 963d.

The solenoid 610 includes a main body 961a formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, a shaft 961b inserted inside the main body 961a and movable relative to the main body 961a, and a shaft 961b.
1b, and a coil spring SP1 disposed between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a.

The main body portion 961a is a coil portion that generates magnetism when power is applied (supplied) to it, and the magnetism allows the shaft portion 961b, which is inserted into the main body portion 961a, to be pulled inward and inserted.

The shaft portion 961b is made of a magnetic metal material and is formed into a cylindrical shape.
The shaft portion 961b is disposed such that its axial direction faces the rear surface base 941 side, and a portion of the shaft portion 961b on the rear surface base 941 side protrudes from the main body portion 961a.

The annular portion 961c is disposed at the end of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 961c. In this way, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced relative to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964.
, and the connecting member 964 can be displaced.

The coil spring SP1 is a spring member wound in a spiral shape. The coil spring SP1 is disposed around the shaft portion 961b and disposed between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a in a slightly compressed state. This allows the annular portion 961c to be biased in a direction away from the main body portion 961a. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c can be maintained in a state separated from the main body portion 961a. Furthermore, after power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a, when the application (supply) of power is cut off, the annular portion 961c can be quickly separated from the main body portion 961a.

The connecting member 964 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 is a base portion 96 formed in a plate shape parallel to a plane perpendicular to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.
4a, and an erected portion 964b bent from the other side of the base portion 964a in the direction of gravity towards the rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85).

The base portion 964a is a portion that is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is provided with a first recessed portion 964c that is recessed from the end face on one side in the direction of gravity (the rear side of the paper in Figure 93 (b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c, and a second recessed portion 964d that is located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and is recessed with a dimension larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the direction of gravity in a cross-sectional view. The groove width of the first recessed portion 964c is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c.
The annular portion 961c can be inserted into the groove 961c.

The second recessed portion 964d is a notch that prevents interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is disposed inside the first recessed portion 964c as described above. The second recessed portion 964d is formed in a substantially U-shape that is open on the lower side in rear view, and is formed in a substantially U-shape that is open on the lower side when viewed from behind.
The solenoid 610 is formed so as to open from the side toward the solenoid 610 .

The erected portion 964b has an insertion hole 964e penetrating in the direction of gravity, and a protrusion 965d of a transmission member 965 described later is inserted into the insertion hole 964e.
When the solenoid 610 is displaced, the protrusion 96 contacts the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e.
5d comes into contact with the transmission member 965, displacing the transmission member 965. The displacement of the transmission member 965 will be described in detail later.

The transmission member 965 is bent in a side view and is connected to the shaft portion 961 of the solenoid 610.
and a rotating portion 965b which is continuous with the tip portion 965a and extends toward the connecting member 964.

The width of the rotating portion 965b in the short-side direction of the second housing portion 963 (the vertical direction in FIG. 93B ) is smaller than the distance between the opposing bearing portions 963d formed in the second housing portion 963.
FIG. 93(b) Vertical direction) A cylindrical rotating shaft 965c protruding from both sides, and the rotating shaft 965c
and a protruding portion 965d protruding in the radial direction toward one end in the direction of gravity.

As described above, the rotating shaft 965c is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d. In addition, the distance between the protruding tips of the pair of rotating shafts 965c is set to be larger than the distance dimension between the opposing bearing portions 963d formed in the pair of second accommodating portions 963. This allows the pair of rotating shafts 965c to be inserted and disposed inside the bearing portions 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shafts 965c into the bearing portions 963d and fastening the second accommodating portion 963 and the first accommodating portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a state in which it can rotate around the rotating shafts 965c.

As described above, the protrusion 965d is a protrusion that is inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set to be smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e when viewed from above.
In the state before power is applied (supplied) to the solenoid 610, the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610
The width of the shaft portion 961 in the displacement direction is set to be sufficiently larger than the width of the insertion hole 964e (in this embodiment, the width of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width of the protrusion 965d).
This can prevent the projections 965d on both end faces in the displacement direction of b from coming into contact with the insertion holes 964e, thereby preventing the rotation of the transmission member 965 from being restricted.

The tip portion 965a is formed so that its width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as it becomes farther away from the solenoid 610. The tip portion 965a is also formed to include an insertion portion 965e at its tip, which is inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above, and an erected portion 965f which protrudes from the connecting side with the rotating portion 965b toward one side in the direction of gravity.

The insertion portion 965e is formed such that its outer shape in a front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and is disposed by being inserted into the inside of the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e comes into contact with the connecting hole 966b1, displacing the displacement member 966. Note that the displacement of the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail later.

Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG.
96(a) and 96(b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 taken along line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 93(b). Note that FIG. 96(a) illustrates the state before the solenoid 610 is operated, and FIG. 96(b) illustrates the state after the solenoid 610 is operated.
6(a) and 96(b), the outer shape of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.
In the unfastened state, the annular portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 disposed between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c, and thus the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is pushed out in the direction away from the main body portion 961a (to the left in FIG. 96(a)).

When the connecting member 964 is pushed in a direction away from the main body portion 961a, the transmitting member 965
The surface of the protrusion 965d on the solenoid 610 side (right side in FIG. 96(a)) comes into contact with the inner surface of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 on the solenoid 610 side. As a result, the tip 965a of the transmitting member 965 is pressed down to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 96(a)) around the rotation shaft 965c. Furthermore, the displacement of the tip 965a of the transmitting member 965 to one side in the direction of gravity is regulated by the abutment portion 965g coming into contact with the second housing portion 963.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.
In this state, the shaft portion 961b is rotated by the magnetic force generated in the main body portion 961a.
96A , the annular portion 961c is drawn into the inside of the annular portion 961c, and the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer to each other (than in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in a direction approaching the main body portion 961a (to the right in FIG. 96A ).

When the connecting member 964 is displaced in a direction approaching the main body portion 961a, the surface of the protruding portion 965d of the transmission member 965 opposite to the solenoid 610 (the left side in FIG. 96B ) and the connecting member 964
The inner surface of the insertion hole 964e of the transmission member 965 on the opposite side to the solenoid 610 side (the left side in FIG. 96(b)) is brought into contact with the inner surface of the insertion hole 964e. As a result, the tip 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up to the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in FIG. 96(b)) around the rotation shaft 965c.
Displacement of the tip 965 a of the transmission member 965 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted when the connecting portion between the tip 965 a of the transmission member 965 and the rotating portion 965 b abuts against the first accommodation portion 962 .

Therefore, when the tip 965 a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to either the other side in the direction of gravity or one side in the direction of gravity, the transmission member 965 is inserted into the first storage portion 962 or the second storage portion 963 .
This can prevent players from committing fraudulent acts.

For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first storage section 962 or the second storage section 963 from the player side (play area side) to the solenoid 610, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced by the thickness of the piano wire. Therefore, an abnormality occurs in the displacement operation of the feather member 945 displaced by the transmission member 965, making it easier for the store manager to discover the fraud.

As described above, the transmission member 965 includes a tip portion 965a and a rotating portion 965b extending from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the displacement member 966, and a protrusion 965d extending from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the solenoid 610. The tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed by bending in an approximately L-shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be reduced while ensuring the displacement amount of the displacement member 966.

That is, when the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is set to be approximately equal to the combined distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b in this embodiment, the sliding displacement amount of the displacement member 966 can be made equal to that of this embodiment.
The distance between the sensor 66 increases, and the overall size increases.

On the other hand, if the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed in a straight line when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension from the insertion portion 965e to the rotating shaft 965c in this embodiment (the distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be made the same as in this embodiment, but the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 will be smaller.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are connected to the rotating shaft 96
96(a) )。 As a result, the transmission member 965 can be made smaller by effectively utilizing the space created by bending the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b. In other words, the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (the throwing unit 97 described later) can be formed in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the axial direction of the ball throwing unit 97, and the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be reduced while ensuring the amount of sliding displacement of the displacement member 966. Also, the protrusion 965d is formed on the rear side (right side of FIG. 96(a)) of the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b, which is opposite the displacement member 966.
0) and the passage member 955 of the specific winning port unit 950, a transmission member 965
By efficiently arranging the components, the overall size can be reduced.

Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 97 and 98. Figure 97 is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 930 taken along line XCVII-XCVII in Figure 83. Figures 98(a) and 98(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 930 taken along line XCVII-XCVII in Figure 97.
98(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 930 taken along line I-XCVIII.
98(b) shows the state before the solenoid 610 is actuated, and FIG.
The state after operation 0 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in a state where the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, a tip end 965a of the transmission member 965 is inserted into a connecting hole 966b of the displacement member 966.
It is inserted into 1.

Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the tip 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity (upward in FIG. 98(a)),
8(a) and 98(b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e comes into contact with the abutted portion 966b2 on one side of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, causing the displacement member 966 to slide and be displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid toward the other side in the direction of gravity (the second winning port 140 side), the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced, and the feather member 945 is opened. That is, by applying electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the feather member 945 is opened.

On the other hand, when the application (supply) of power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610 is interrupted, the transmission member 96
98(a) , the tip end 965a of the displacement member 966 is displaced to one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in FIG. 98(a)).
When the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the other contacted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966, the displacement member 966 is displaced and slid in one direction in the direction of gravity.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid toward one side in the direction of gravity (the side toward the specific winning port 65a), the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced, and the feather member 945 is closed. That is, the application (supply) of power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, and the feather member 945 is closed.

In this case, the feather member 945 can be in a closed state when the power supply to the main body 961a is cut off. Therefore, if the wiring of the main body 961a is broken or if the wiring of the main body 961a is cut due to a player's fraudulent behavior, the feather member 945 is in an open state and the second winning port 1
This can prevent game balls from easily flowing into 40.

In addition, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 through a connection hole 966b1 formed at approximately the middle position in the short side direction of the displacement member 966.
This makes it easier to allow a change in the position of the displacement member between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly displaced by sliding in accordance with the rotation of the transmission member. As a result, the wing members 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when a load from a game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members 945 during the operation of slidingly displacing the displacement member 966 and opening or closing the pair of wing members 945 in accordance with the rotation of the transmission member 965, the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed.
When the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two points and also to the transmission member 965 at two points, it is difficult to allow a change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, and resistance is generated when sliding the displacement member 966 (i.e., when the transmission member 965 is rotated), which prevents the wing members from opening or closing.
In contrast, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of feather members 945 at two points and to the transmission member 965 at one point, so that even if a load from the game ball acts on only one of the pair of feather members 945, it is possible to easily tolerate a change in posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965.

Furthermore, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98(a)) of the contact surface of the insertion portion 965e with the one-side contacted portion 966b2 and the other-side contacted portion 966b3 is smaller than the maximum outer dimension D2 (see FIG. 98(b)) of the projection 945b.
This makes it easier to allow the displacement member 966 to change its position between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965.
If the width dimension D1 of the protrusion 945b is set large, when the position of the displacement member 966 changes between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 are more likely to come into contact with each other, restricting the position change of the displacement member 966. However, by setting the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum outer dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b, it is possible to prevent the position change of the displacement member 966 from being restricted. As a result, it is possible to more easily permit the position change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965.

It is preferable that the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set to be smaller than twice the maximum outer dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. This makes it easier to prevent the insertion portion 965e from coming into contact with the connecting hole 966b1 when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes. As a result, it is easier to allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965.

Next, the specific winning port unit 950 will be described with reference to Figures 99 to 101.
Fig. 99(a) is a front view of the specific winning port unit 950, Fig. 99(b) is a rear view of the specific winning port unit 950, and Fig. 99(c) is a top view of the specific winning port unit 950. Fig. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning port unit 950, and Fig. 101 is a perspective view of the specific winning port unit 950.
An exploded oblique rear view of the specific winning port unit 950.

As shown in Figures 99 to 101, the specific winning port unit 950 is formed with a ball entry member 953 formed in a box-like shape that opens toward the player's side (the front side of the paper in Figure 99), a plate member 951 arranged to cover the open portion of the ball entry member 953, a passage member 955 arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 951 across the ball entry member 953, and a drive unit 957 that operates the plate member 951.

The plate member 951 is formed from a colored translucent resin material, and allows the player to see the game ball flowing down the ball entry member 953 side through the plate member 951. The plate member 951 is formed with a main body portion 951a formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, an axis hole 951b recessed cylindrically on both outer longitudinal sides of the main body portion 951a, a protrusion 951c protruding from one longitudinal end of the main body portion 951a toward the ball entry member 953 side, and an engagement portion 951d protruding from the other longitudinal end of the main body portion 951a toward the ball entry member 953 side.

The main body portion 951a is formed to be large enough to cover the open side of the ball entry member 953 described later when viewed from the front, and is shaped to be slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above.

The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side of the main body 951a in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity), and both ends in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. The shaft hole 951b is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 952 described later, so that the rod member 952 can be inserted inside. Therefore, by supporting the rod member 952 on the ball-entering member 953 while the rod member 952 is inserted into the shaft hole 951b, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported relative to the ball-entering member 953.

The protrusion 951c is formed to protrude from one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotated about the shaft hole 951b by the drive unit 957 described later and the other side of the plate member 951 in the direction of gravity is inclined toward the play area, the game balls that have flowed down to the main body 951a can be prevented from falling from one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 951a.

The engaging portion 951d has a recessed portion 951d1 that is partially recessed at the protruding tip. A tip portion 958c of a transmission member 958 (described later) is connected to the inside of the recessed portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted to the recessed portion 951d.
When the main body 951 is rotated around the axis b, a part of the main body 951 protrudes toward the flow-down area.
This can prevent the game balls that have flowed down to a from falling from the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a.

The ball-entering member 953 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball-entering member 953 includes a main body 953a formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, an erected wall 953b erected on the surface opposite the open side of the main body 953a, an engagement portion 953f protruding from the surface opposite the open side of the main body 953a, an annular protrusion 953c protruding in an annular shape on the surface opposite the open side of the main body 953a, a wall portion 953d protruding from both outer longitudinal sides of the edge of the open side of the main body 953a toward the plate member 951, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other longitudinal side of the main body 953a, protruding portions 953g protruding from both longitudinal ends of the main body 953a, and protrusions 953c protruding from the open side edge of the main body 953a toward the plate member 951.
53h, and two inlets 953j formed through the bottom surface of the main body portion 953a.

The main body 953a is formed in a size that allows the game ball to be inserted into the inner part of the box shape, and is formed with an opening 953a1 that opens to the plate member 951 side, and a rolling surface 953a2 that rolls the game ball flowing in from the opening 953a1. In addition, the outer shape of the main body 953a when viewed from the front is formed slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the standing part 942f of the front unit 940 described above. This allows the main body 953a (ball entry member 953) to be inserted inside the standing part 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. A detailed explanation of the inner shape of the main body 953a will be given later.

In addition, the longitudinal dimension of the main body 953a is set to be greater than the outer separation distance in the opposing direction of the pair of wing members 945. This allows the game ball flowing down the game area to flow into the main body 953a through the specific winning port 65a even if the game ball collides with the outer peripheral surface of the pair of wing members 945.

The opening 953a1 is formed so that the inner edge shape is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the plate member 9
When 51 is in the open state, game balls can flow into the inside of the main body portion 953a through the opening 953a1.

The rolling surface 953a2 is an inner edge of the main body 953a on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. Also, the dimension in the direction (short side direction) from the rear side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed to be larger than the diameter of a game ball.
The game ball sent from 53a1 to the inside of the main body portion 953a can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

The upright wall 953b is a wall that holds the detection device SE1 arranged on the side opposite the open side of the main body portion 953a, and is formed to a size sufficient to surround the outer peripheral surfaces on three sides of the detection device SE1, which is formed in a roughly horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from behind.

The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer circumferential surface of the detection device SE1 except for the three directions surrounded by the standing wall 953b.
The engaging portion 953f can be disposed inside the portion surrounded by the wall 953a. The tip portion of the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the standing wall 953b at a distance equal to the thickness of the detecting device SE1 from the base end side. Therefore, the detecting device SE1 and the engaging portion 953f are engaged with each other, and the detecting device SE1 disposed in the main body portion 953a can be disposed inside the wall 953a.
It is possible to prevent the adhesive from falling off.

The detection device SE1 is a device for detecting the passage of a game ball, and has a detection hole SE1a with an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball formed therethrough in the thickness direction. The detection hole SE1a is formed biased to one side or the other of the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE1, which is arranged in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is arranged on the other side or one side of the longitudinal direction where the detection hole SE1a is not formed. The detection hole SE1a is,
It is disposed at a position corresponding to the inlet 953j described later, and allows game balls flowing into the inlet 953j to pass through.

The circular protrusion 953c is formed in a circular shape protruding from multiple points on the side opposite the open side of the main body 953a, and a screw that fastens the passage member 955 and the ball insertion member 953 is screwed into its inner edge portion.

The wall portions 953d are formed as a pair on both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a, and the distance between the opposing walls is formed to be shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the plate member 951.
The plate member 951 can be disposed between the pair of opposing wall portions 953d.

Further, a shaft hole 953d1 is formed in the wall portion 953d so as to penetrate in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a (the left-right direction in FIG. 99(a)).
Therefore, after the plate member 951 is disposed between the pair of opposing wall portions 953d, the rod member 952 is inserted into the shaft hole 95 from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951.
By inserting the plate member 951 into 3d1 and the axial hole 951b, the plate member 951 can be axially supported by the ball receiving member 953.

Furthermore, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a protruding dimension smaller than the recessed distance of the recess 941h formed in the rear base 941 of the front unit 940 described above.
By combining the specific winning port unit 950 and the winning slot unit 941, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the recess 941h. This makes it possible to prevent the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from slipping out.

The insertion hole 953e is a hole that allows a part of a transmission member 965 arranged in a passage member 955 described later to be inserted into the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955.

The protrusion 953 g is formed to protrude onto the axis of the connecting protrusion 942 j of the front unit 940 .
In addition, when the front unit 940 and the specific winning port unit 950 are combined, an insertion hole 953g is formed through the inner circle 942j1 of the connecting protrusion 942j and the protruding portion 953g.
1 are arranged coaxially, and the protruding portion 953g and the connecting protrusion 942j are brought into contact with each other.
As a result, by inserting a screw through the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning opening unit 950 side and screwing it into the inner circle 942j1, the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened together.

The protrusion 953h is formed to protrude towards the plate member 951. This makes it possible to prevent a game ball from being caught between the plate member 951 and the edge of the main body 953a when the plate member 951 is displaced by a drive unit 957 described later.

The protrusion 953h is connected to the protrusion 951c of the plate member 951 and the engagement portion 951d of the plate member 95
953h are formed at approximately the same position in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (left and right direction in FIG. 99(a)). This makes it difficult for the game ball to roll to the protruding side of the protrusion 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, it is difficult for the game ball to be caught between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

The inlet 953j is formed to open in an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of a game ball from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side. The inlet 953j is a hole that sends the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body portion 953a to the passage member 955, and is formed in a pair in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes an entrance opening formed so that gaming balls can enter, an opening/closing member that opens/closes the entrance opening, and a passage member that forms a passage for the gaming balls that have entered the entrance opening. The entrance opening is formed to a size that allows multiple gaming balls to enter at the same time, and the gaming balls that have entered the entrance opening are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and flow into the passage member one by one. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the entrance opening is made larger, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the gaming ball from the end of the entrance opening to the passage member becomes longer accordingly. Therefore, it takes time for the gaming ball to arrive at the passage member, and there is a problem that over-entry is likely to occur because another gaming ball enters from the entrance opening before the entrance opening is closed by the opening/closing member.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the inflow ports 953j are formed as a pair (at two locations) at a predetermined interval. Therefore, even if the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a is enlarged, the inflow port 953j can be kept large.
The rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball up to 53j can be shortened.
The time required for the ball to reach the inflow port 953j is shortened, and the ball can flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the inflow port 953j before the plate member 951 closes the opening 953a1, and thus to prevent over-entry.

Furthermore, the detection device SE1 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the ball entry member 953 is an inflow port 953.
j and a recessed portion 955a of a passage member 955, which will be described later.
The game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a can be detected in a shorter time.
The plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the slot before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby preventing over-entry.

In addition, the inlet 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity when the front unit 940 and the specific winning port unit 950 are fastened together. That is, the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state are disposed between the pair of inlets 953j.

Here, as described above, the specific winning port unit 950 is disposed below the second winning port 140 (the pair of wing members 945) in the direction of gravity. In addition, since the pair of wing members 945 are disposed in the game area, it is difficult for the game balls flowing down the game area to flow down the pair of wing members 945 in the direction of gravity. Therefore, a bias occurs in the inflow position of the game balls flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning port unit 950. In this embodiment, as described above, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, so that the inflow port 953j can be brought closer to a position where a large number of game balls flow into the ball entry member 953. This allows the game balls flowing into the ball entry member 953 to flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, over-entry of game balls into the ball entry member 953 can be suppressed.

The passage member 955 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, and its outer shape in a front view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape in a front view of the above-mentioned ball-entering member 953. The passage member 955 further comprises a pair of recessed portions 955a recessed at positions facing the detection holes SE1a of each detection device SE1, a second opening 955b located on the other side in the longitudinal direction and formed penetrating from the drive unit 957 side to the ball-entering member 953 side, a pair of third openings 955c formed penetrating from the drive unit 957 side to the ball-entering member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, a rolling portion 955d recessed on the other side of the third opening 955c in the direction of gravity, and a rolling portion 955c located between the pair of recessed portions 955a and the driving unit 9
57 and a second recessed portion 955f recessed from the side of the recess 955.

The recessed portion 955a is a passage that guides the game ball that passes through the detection hole SE1a, and the recessed dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recessed dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The second opening 955b is provided for connecting a connecting member 957c and a transmission member 957b of the drive unit 957, which will be described later.
58 is disposed in the space. Further, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) that protrudes cylindrically in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed on the inner circumferential surface of the second opening 955b. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be journaled by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 into the shaft hole 958b.

The third opening 955c is a space for disposing the detection device SE2 in which the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, and is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE2 when viewed from the front. This allows the detection device SE2 to be disposed inside the third opening 955c.
In addition, when the detection device SE2 is disposed inside the third opening 955c,
E1 protrudes toward the ball entrance member 953 side.

Further, an engagement portion 955e protrudes toward the drive unit 957 at the edge of the third opening 955c. The protruding tip of the engagement portion 955e is bent toward the inside of the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is disposed in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engagement portion 955e contacts the detection device SE2.
This makes it possible to prevent the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c from slipping out toward the drive unit 957.

The rolling portion 955d is curved in an arc shape. In addition, the rolling portion 955d is formed by rolling the plate member 95 in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning port unit 950 are combined.
The end of the ball on the first side is connected to the third ball sending section 942e of the front unit 940. As a result, the game ball flowing into the second outlet 941f of the front unit 940 is sent to the specific winning port unit 950.
The ball can be thrown to the rolling portion 955d.

The other end of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 disposed in the third opening 955c in the direction of gravity. This allows the game balls rolling on the rolling portion 955d to fall from the other end and pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. This allows the number of game balls that have flowed into the second outlet 941f to be counted by the detection device SE2.

The second recessed portion 955f is formed between the pair of recessed portions 955a which serve as the passage for the game balls as described above. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the drive unit 960 described above is disposed, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 (left-right direction in FIG. 99(c)) is set to be larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the second storage portion 963 of the drive unit 960 described above (up-down direction in FIG. 93(b)).

The second recessed portion 955f is formed with an insertion hole 955h formed at a longitudinal intermediate position of the passage member 955 and a protrusion 955g protruding toward the drive unit 957.
5h is a hole through which the screw that fastens the ball insertion member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The protrusion 955g is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a fastening hole 955g1 is provided in the center in a circular recess. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole into which a screw is screwed to fasten the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (the specific winning port unit 950).
3. As a result, the drive unit 9
60 and the passage member 955 (specific prize opening unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

The drive unit 957 is formed to include a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b that covers the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c that is disposed at a displacement portion of the solenoid 957a.

The solenoid 957a includes a main body 957a1 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape and a
a shaft portion 957a2 that is inserted into the inside of the shaft portion 957a1 and is displaceable relative to the main body portion 957a1; and a ring portion 957a3 that is disposed at an end of the shaft portion 957a2 opposite to the main body portion 957a1.
The coil spring SP2 is disposed between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1.

The main body 957a1 is a coil portion that generates magnetism when power is applied (supplied) to the main body 957a1. The magnetism causes the shaft 957a2 inserted into the main body 957a1 to rotate.
1 and can be inserted.

The shaft portion 957a2 is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed into a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged such that the axial direction of the shaft portion 957a2 faces the passage member 955, and a part of the shaft portion 957a2 on the rear base 941 side protrudes from the main body portion 957a1.

The annular portion 957a3 is disposed at an end of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the main body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 957a3. As a result, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced relative to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, thereby displacing the connecting member 957c.

The coil spring SP2 is a spring member wound in a spiral shape. The coil spring SP2 is disposed around the shaft portion 957a2 and disposed between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1 in a slightly compressed state.
1. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained in a state separated from the main body portion 957a1. Furthermore, when power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1 and then the application (supply) of power is cut off, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body portion 957a1.

The case member 957b is formed in a box shape that covers the main body 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one side on the side where the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is open.
The shaft portion 957a2 is formed with an insertion hole 957b1 penetrating in the axial direction thereof, and an opening 957b2 formed penetrating the shaft portion 957a2 on the side opposite the open side.

The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw that fastens the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the tip of the screw.
In addition, the screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2.
The wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to a1 through an opening 957b2.

The connecting member 957c is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane perpendicular to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c has a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from an end face on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in FIG. 99(b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and a second recessed portion 957c1 located on the solenoid 957a side of the first recessed portion 957c1 with a dimension larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 957a2.
It has a recessed portion 957c2 and an engagement portion 957c3 that protrudes toward the ball entrance member 953 side.

The first recess 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the direction of gravity in a cross-sectional view.
7c1 has a groove width set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3.
The annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that prevents interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is arranged inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above, and is formed in a roughly U-shape with one side open in the direction of gravity when viewed from behind, and is formed so as to open from the first recessed portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

The engaging portion 957c3 is bent into a generally L-shape in side view. A connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958 (described later) is disposed on the inside of the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is displaced. The displacement of the transmission member 958 will be described in detail later.

The transmission member 958 is formed in a plate-like body having a generally triangular shape in a side view, and is provided with an axial hole 958b penetrating in a circular shape in the plate thickness direction, a connecting portion 958a protruding in a cylindrical shape in the plate thickness direction from an end portion on the connecting member 957c side, and a tip portion 958c protruding toward the plate member 951 side.

As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) is inserted. The shaft hole 958b is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. This allows the transmission member 958 to be rotatably supported by the passage member 955.

As described above, the connecting portion 958a is disposed on the inside of the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. With this, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

The tip portion 958c is inserted into the recessed portion 951d1 of the plate member 951.
When the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the tip portion 958c is displaced, so that the engagement portion 951d can be pushed up.
This allows the plate member 951 to rotate.

Next, the displacement of the plate member 951 will be described with reference to Figures 102 and 103. Figures 102(a) and 102(b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning port unit 950 taken along line CII-CII in Figure 99(c). Figures 103(a) and 103(b) are oblique front views of the specific winning port unit 950.

In addition, in FIG. 102(a) and FIG. 103(a), the plate member 951 is shown in a closed state.
103(a) and 103(b) show the plate member 951 in an open state.
The closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a covers the opening portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball-entering member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a is separated from the opening of the main body portion 953a of the ball-entering member 953.

As shown in FIG. 102(a) and FIG. 103(a), a main body 957 of a solenoid 957a
When the application (supply) of power to a1 is cut off, the urging force of the coil spring SP2 causes the shaft portion 957a2 to protrude toward the plate member 951 (left side of FIG. 102(a)). As a result, the connecting member 957c disposed on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is also disposed on the plate member 951 side spaced away from the main body portion 957a1.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c.
51 side. As a result, the tip portion 958c of the transmission member 958 is inserted into the shaft hole 958
The force is transmitted in a direction rotating around b toward one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 102(a)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed down to one side in the gravity direction, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d
1 comes into contact with the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a of the ball entrance member 953, and the main body 951a of the plate member 951 rotates in a direction approaching the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a of the ball entrance member 953. This makes it possible to maintain the plate member 951 in the closed state.

Furthermore, when the plate member 951 is in the closed state, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. As a result, when a player forcibly opens the plate member 951 side by performing tampering, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side can be pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side, so that it is possible to prevent the force of tampering from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 102(b) and FIG. 103(b), the main body 957 of the solenoid 957a
When power is applied (supplied) to the annular portion 957a1, the shaft portion 957a2 is pulled (attracted) into the inside of the main body portion 957a1.
Similarly, the connecting member 957c disposed in 3) is disposed on the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connection member 957c, and is therefore displaced toward the main body portion 958a1 (right side in FIG. 102(b)) in accordance with the displacement of the connection member 957c. As a result, a force is transmitted to the transmission member 965 in a direction that rotates the tip portion 958c around the shaft hole 958b toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 102(b)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed up in the other direction of gravity, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951
d1, the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 contacts the main body portion 953a of the ball entrance member 953.
9. In this way, the plate member 951 can be put into an open state.

Furthermore, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction by utilizing its own weight, so that it is possible to prevent a force from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

Next, the inner part of the main body 953a of the ball entry member 953 will be described with reference to Fig. 104. Fig. 104(a) is a front view of the specific winning hole unit 950, and Fig. 104(b) is a front view of the specific winning hole unit 950.
FIG. 104(a) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning port unit 950 taken along the line CIVb-CIVb in FIG. 104(a). Note that FIG. 104(a) illustrates a state in which the plate member 951 has been removed.
104(b) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is attached.
104(b) and 104(c) show the plate member 951 in a closed state.

As shown in FIG. 104, the inside of the main body portion 953a is provided with a
04(a) Left-right direction) An inclined surface 954 that inclines from the middle position outward toward one side in the direction of gravity
a, a recess 954b recessed into the end of the inclined surface 954a, a protruding portion 954c protruding from the connecting portion between the inclined surface 954a and the recess 954b, and a standing wall 954d standing and connected to each face at both ends in the longitudinal direction and to the face on the passage member 955 side.

The inclined surface 954a guides the game balls flowing between the pair of opposing inlets 953j to the inlets 953j.
The rolling surface of the game ball that rolls toward the inlet 953j side is formed with a downward incline toward the inlet 953j side. This allows the game ball that flows between the inlets 953j to roll toward the inlet 953j.

The recess 954b is located in front of the inlet 953j (below in FIG. 104(b)) and is recessed toward one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity). The recess 954b is formed so that the recessed tip surface is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j, and can receive game balls rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body 953a and guide them to the inlet 953j (recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955). Therefore, the game balls that enter through the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a can flow into the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, the plate member 951
This prevents another game ball from entering the jackpot before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby preventing over-entry.

The recess 954b extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (FIG. 104(b)
) in the vertical direction).
The game ball rolling in the longitudinal direction of a2 (left and right direction in FIG. 104(b)) can be easily received in the recess 954b, and the received game ball can be quickly guided (made to flow) into the passage member 955. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the passage member 955 before the plate member 951 closes the opening 953a1, thereby preventing over-entry.

Furthermore, the recess 954b has a width dimension L9 (FIG. 104) in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2.
(b)) is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game balls to be quickly flown into the passage member 955 in an aligned state when multiple game balls are received in the recess 954b. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the passage member 955 before the plate member 951 closes the opening 953a1, thereby preventing over-entry.

In addition, the width dimension of the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). This allows the game ball to flow more easily toward the passage member 955 side when the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the recess 954b. As a result, the plate member 951
By preventing another game ball from entering the hole before the opening 953a1 is closed by means of 51, over-entry can be prevented.

The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 954a with the recess 954b interposed therebetween in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and is also formed on the inlet 953j (passage member 955)
The second inclined surface 954e is formed with a downward inclination toward the inlet 953j. This allows the game ball that has entered the second inclined surface 954e side to roll toward the inlet 953j by utilizing the downward inclination of the second inclined surface 954e, and to quickly roll toward the passage member 955. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the inlet 953j before the plate member 951 closes the opening 953a1, and thus to prevent over-entry.

The standing wall 954d is formed at a position spaced a predetermined distance from the second inclined surface 954e, and is configured to change the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the second inclined surface 954e to the inflow port 953j (passage member 955).
A second guide surface 954d1 is provided on the side.

The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is formed inclined from the opening 953a1 side toward the inlet 953j side toward the recess 954b side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is formed so as to be inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955 so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2, and is also formed so as to be inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955 so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2.
3a2 and the passage member 955. As a result, the opening 953a
The game ball flowing into the main body 953a from the longitudinal end of the plate member 951 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the opening 953a1 until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby preventing over-entry.

The protruding portions 954c are formed at both ends of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction, and protrude toward the other side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction).
The rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the outside of the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 104(b)) can be decelerated in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased up to the recess 954b, while the rolling speed of the game ball is decelerated in front of (just before) the recess 954b, so that the game ball can be prevented from rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b to the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the opening 953a1 until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby preventing over-entry.

The protruding portion 954c is formed in a generally triangular shape when viewed from above, with one surface connected to the surface opposite the opening 953a1, and one of the remaining two surfaces is formed with a side edge portion 954c3 on the recess 954b side connected to the side surface of the recess 954b, and the guide surface 954c1 of the remaining surface is formed inclined toward the opening 953a1 toward the rolling direction of the game ball on the inclined surface 954a (the longitudinal outward direction of the rolling surface 953a2).
The speed can be reduced just before b (passage member 955).

That is, the rolling speed of the game ball in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is increased up to the recess 954b, and the rolling speed of the game ball in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is decelerated just before the recess 954b.
54e. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the passage member 955 until the opening 953a1 is closed, and over-entry can be prevented.

As described above, the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends of the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a in the short direction, so that when the plate member 951 is in an open state, the end of the plate member 951 can be positioned on the one end side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction) of the rolling surface 953a2. This makes it possible to prevent the game balls that have flown inside the main body 951a from flying out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body 951a when the plate member 951 is in an open state.

Furthermore, the game ball guided to the opening 953a1 side by the guide surface 954c1 is guided to the plate member 95
Since the inclined surface 954a can be brought into contact with the rolling surface 953a2, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be decelerated in front of the recessed portion 954b (passage member 955).
The rolling of the game ball can be prevented from passing through the recess 954b from the inclined surface 954a to the second inclined surface 954e by decelerating the rolling of the game ball at the time (just before the inclination of the game ball) and the recess 954b. Therefore, the game ball can be caused to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent the game ball from rolling through the opening 95
By preventing another game ball from entering the hole before 3a1 is closed, over-entry can be prevented.

In addition, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from the connecting portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inlet 953j toward the side edge portion 954c2 of the connecting portion with the inclined surface 954a.
This allows the game ball to flow into the inlet 953j (passage member 955) in a short period of time while preventing the game ball from flying out.

That is, among the game balls that roll along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 on the inclined surface 954a toward the passage member 955, the opening 933
a1 to the outside, so that the guide surface 954c1 is brought into contact with the opening 953a
By guiding the material toward the first side, the material passes through the recess 954b from the inclined surface 954a to the second inclined surface 954e.
The ball is prevented from rolling to the opening 953a1, and can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. On the other hand, for a game ball with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, the ball can be guided over the guide surface 954c1 to the standing wall 954d formed on the second inclined surface 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by the ball going over the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the standing wall 954d, and the ball can be decelerated reliably. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be quickly flown into the inlet 953j (passage member 955) while being prevented from jumping out of the opening 953a1. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the opening 953a1 until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby preventing over-entry.

In addition, the protruding portion 954c has a side edge portion 954c3 on the end surface opposite the standing wall 954d, which extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2.
The second side edge 954d2 of the end surface facing the rolling surface 953a2 extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2.
3a2. In this way, the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 is guided to the second side edge portion 954d of the standing wall 954d.
2, the ball can be decelerated reliably and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member 955. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly.
The plate member 951 prevents another game ball from entering the slot before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby preventing over-entry.

Furthermore, the vertical wall 954d has a distance L32 (see FIG. 104(a)) between the middle position in the thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e set to be approximately the same as the radius of the game ball. This allows the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 to abut against the second side edge 954d2 of the vertical wall 954d, ensuring deceleration. This allows the game ball to flow quickly into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 prevents another game ball from entering the passage before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby preventing over-entry.

The protruding portion 954c is positioned on an extension line of the inclination direction of the second guide surface 954d1 of the erected wall 954d, and even if the rolling speed of the game ball guided by the second guide surface 954d1 toward the recessed portion 954b (passage member 955) is relatively high (low), the game ball is guided through the protruding portion 954c.
54c, the game ball can be decelerated. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the passage member 955 before the opening 953a1 is closed, and over-entry can be prevented.

The protruding portion 954c has a distance dimension L33 (see FIG. 10) from the recessed surface of the recess 954b to the protruding tip.
4(a)) is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As described above, the protruding portion 954c is formed to be continuous with the side surface of the recessed portion 954b, so that even if the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the erected wall 954d has a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the protruding portion 954c. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated and can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time.
As a result, the plate member 951 prevents another game ball from entering the slot before the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby preventing over-entry.

Next, the assembly state of the specific winning port unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to Figures 105 and 106.
105(b) is a top view of the specific winning port unit 950 and the drive unit 960. FIG.
106(a) is a side view of the CVI 960 and the drive unit 960.
FIG. 106(b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and drive unit 960 taken along line CVIb-CVIb in FIG. 106(a).

In addition, in FIG. 105(a) and FIG. 105(b), the solenoid 9 that operates the plate member 951 is not shown.
57a and a part of a wire HS2 connected to a solenoid 610 that operates a pair of blade members (see FIG. 83(a)).
In b), a portion of the wiring HS3 connected to a detection device SE1 that detects the number of game balls that have flowed into a specific winning opening 65a is in the illustrated state.

As shown in FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the vane member 945 (FIG. 83 (
The drive unit 960 that drives the specific winning port unit 95 (see a)) is
0 and a part of the second winning hole 140 (a pair of the blade members 9
A space can be formed on the opposite side (rear side) of the play area of 45).

Here, conventionally, the second winning opening 140, a pair of blade members 945 for opening or closing the second winning opening 140, a first drive means for driving the pair of blade members 945, a specific winning opening 65a, a plate member 951 for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a, and the plate member 95
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the first drive means and the second drive means each include a pair of vane members 945 and
Because they are arranged on the rear side of the plate member 951, it is difficult to arrange other members or devices on the rear side of the pair of blade members 945 and the plate member 951, making it difficult to make effective use of the space.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of blade members 945 is
Since the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of blade members and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are disposed on the rear side of the plate member 951, a space can be formed on the rear side of the pair of blade members 945 (see FIG. 97). In other words, by consolidating the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of blade members and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 on the rear side of the plate member 951 (specific winning port 65a), a space for arranging other members and devices can be provided on the rear side of the pair of blade members 945.
This can be secured behind the second winning port 140, allowing the space to be utilized more effectively.

In addition, by arranging the operating means (drive unit 960) of the feather member 945, which is arranged near the central opening (where the center frame 86 is arranged) formed in the base plate 60 (see Figure 82), on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning port unit 950) arranged away from the central opening, the movable body of the operating unit, which is visible to the player through the inside of the central opening (center frame 86), can be retracted to the back side of the base plate 60 (the opposite side to the playing area), making it difficult for the player to see.

That is, the movable body of the operation unit is disposed on the rear side of the base plate 60 during normal (retracted) operation,
The blade member 945 is difficult to see from the player, and when movable (extending), it is easily seen by the player by protruding inside the central opening (center frame 86) of the base plate 60. The operating means (drive unit 960) of the blade member 945 disposed near the central opening is disposed at a position that overlaps horizontally with the specific winning opening unit 950 located far from the central opening.
During evacuation, the movable body can be easily positioned away from the central opening.
When the movable body of the operating unit is in the extended state, it is difficult for the player to see the movable body of the operating unit. As a result, when the movable body is operated to be in the extended state, it is easy to provide the player with an interesting experience.

In addition, the projection area of the plate member 951 in a front view is set to be larger than the projection area of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, the dead space on the back side of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.
In the game board 13 equipped with the displacement members 945 and 946, the drive means (drive unit 957 and drive unit 960) are arranged on the back surface of the side having the larger projected area when viewed from the front (the plate member 951 side), so that the drive means can be easily arranged on the back surface of one of the displacement members (plate member 951) and space can be formed on the back surface of the other displacement members (a pair of wing members 945).

Furthermore, the plate member 951 is formed so that its projected area when viewed from the front is larger than the projected area when viewed from the front of the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of blade members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951, so that the dead space on the back side of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

As shown in FIG. 105( a ), a drive unit 96 for driving a pair of blade members 945
The driving unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (FIG. 10
5(a) in the left-right direction). Therefore, the dead space on the back side of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific winning port unit 950) is disposed at a position farther away from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 81) than the pair of feather members 945, and is disposed with its longitudinal direction perpendicular to the direction of the distance. This makes it easier to secure space on the rear side of the pair of feather members 945. As a result, the space on the rear side of the pair of feather members 945 can be effectively utilized.

As described above, the rolling portion 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, and the rolling portion 943a is disposed through the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941. The drive unit 960 is connected to the rear base 941.
1 is fastened and fixed, and at the same time, the drive unit 960 is held by the front base 943 (
This allows the front unit 94 to be mounted on the base plate 60 (the game board 13).
When installing the ball throwing unit 970 and the drive unit 960, it is possible to prevent forgetting to install the drive unit 960.

A solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and a solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960
The ends of the specific winning port unit 950 on the side opposite the plate member 951 (the rear side) are set at substantially the same position, and the wiring HS1 and wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are connected from the ends of the specific winning port unit 950 on the side opposite the plate member 951 (the rear side). This makes it easier to bundle the wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610. As a result, the game board 1
The wiring on the opposite side (back side) of the game area 3 can be prevented from becoming loose, and the wiring HS1 and HS
This can prevent interference with other devices or accessories.

That is, the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 that drives the blade member 945 and the plate member 95
The solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 that drives the drive shaft 961b and the shaft 957
The axial directions of the main body 961a and the shaft 9
The wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (drawn out) to the side opposite to the shaft portions 961b and 957a2 of the drive unit 960.
7 and the wiring HS2 can be easily bundled together.

The drive unit 960 for driving the pair of blade members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are disposed in positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush with each other. This provides a partition member (not shown) that partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and limits the flow of an electromagnetic field in the area where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are disposed.
The shape can be simplified.

That is, a main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and a main body portion 957a of the drive unit 957
When one side is formed to be a different size, or when both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 in the direction of gravity are positioned at different positions in the direction of gravity, a step is formed between both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 in the direction of gravity, and therefore it becomes necessary to form a partition member to match the step, and the shape of such a partition member becomes complex.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are disposed at a position where both side surfaces of the main body 961a and the main body 957a1 in the gravity direction are substantially flush with each other, and no step is formed between the outer surfaces, so that the partition member can be made flat. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

The partition member is a conductive barrier that separates the area in which the drive units 960 and 957 are installed from other areas, thereby restricting the flow of electromagnetic waves between the two areas, and is formed from a metal plate.

The transmission member 965 is disposed between the passage member 955 of the specific winning port unit 950 and the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97).
5e) is provided with a displacement member 966 that slides and displaces with the rotation of the transmission member 965 to open and close the pair of wing members 945, so that compared to a conventional product in which the pair of wing members 945 are opened and closed only by a rotating member, space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the rolling portion 943a on the rear side of the second winning opening 140. Also, since there is no need to bend the ball sending path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 toward the specific winning opening unit 950 in order to avoid interference with the rotating member as in the conventional product, the second winning opening 140 can be brought closer to the specific winning opening 65a.

106(a) and 106(b), the drive unit 960 is disposed in a position overlapping with the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 that is disposed in a pair with the specific winning opening unit 950 in a front view. That is, the detection device SE2 is disposed between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. As a result, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and fraud is committed on the drive unit 960 through the specific winning opening 65a, the detection board SE of the detection device SE1
1b allows the drive unit 960 to be hidden, making such fraudulent acts more difficult to carry out.

Here, as described above, when the drive means (drive unit 960) for driving the feather member 945 is disposed on the rear side of the specific winning port unit 950, if a hole is formed in the ball entry member 953 from the playing area side through to the drive unit 960 with a drill or the like, with the aim of inserting a piano wire or the like through a gap in the pachinko machine 10 to illicitly operate the gaming machine, there is a risk that it may be difficult for a store clerk to discover such illicit activity.

That is, since the plate member 951 is disposed on the playing area (player) side of the ball entry member 953,
The ball entry member 953 is hidden by the board member 951, making it difficult for a store clerk to discover any tampering with the ball entry member 953.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the first drive means, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE1 can be destroyed, so that fraudulent activity can be discovered by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in this embodiment, even if fraud is committed on the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a by opening the plate member 951, the drive unit 960 can be prevented from opening the plate member 951 by closing the plate member 951.
Since the area where the tampering has occurred is blocked by the detector SE1 and cannot be seen, it is particularly effective to detect tampering by monitoring the state of the detector SE1.

In addition, since the detection device SE1 is a reused product (off-the-shelf product) that is the same as the detection devices that detect other game balls (for example, the detection devices SE2 and SE3), the degree of freedom in the size of its external shape cannot be ensured. Therefore, a gap is formed between the opposing detection devices SE1. Therefore, if a player aims for the gap and uses a drill or the like to make a hole in the ball entry member 953, there is a risk that the player's fraudulent behavior cannot be notified to the store clerk.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to the opposing sides of the pair of detection devices SE1. This allows the wiring HS3 to be arranged in the gap formed between the opposing pair of detection devices SE1. Therefore, when a player aims a drill or the like at the gap between the opposing pair of detection devices SE1, the wiring HS3 can be broken by the drill. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to recognize a detection failure, and the pachinko machine 10 can report an error, making it easier for the store clerk to discover fraud.

That is, the wiring is relatively easy to damage. Therefore, when a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole in order to secure a path from the specific winning hole 65a to the drive unit, the wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (broken) by the fraudulent act. Alternatively, the fraudulent act can be recognized as difficult to carry out without damaging (breaking) the wiring HS3.
This can make it easier to deter fraudulent activity.

In addition, between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1, a circular protrusion 953c is formed into which a screw that fastens the ball entrance member 953 and the passage member 955 is screwed. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and a fraudulent act is performed on the drive unit 960 from the open side (the lower side of E10(a)) of the ball entrance member 953, the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the screw screwed into the circular protrusion 953c, making such a fraudulent act more difficult to perform. That is, as described above, it is difficult to cover the front of the front of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is likely to be formed between the opposing pair of detection devices SE1, so by setting such a gap as the fastening position of the screw, the uncovered area on the front of the drive unit 960 can be supplemented by the screw, making it more difficult to perform a fraudulent act.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 106(b), the wiring HS3 is connected to the annular protrusion 953 of the ball receiving member 953.
This allows the wiring HS3 to be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1. In other words, a wider range of the front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, the plate member 951 can be opened, and the drive unit 960 can be inserted from the open side of the ball entrance member 953.
This can make it more difficult to commit fraud when committing fraud on 0. Alternatively, it can be made easier to recognize that it is difficult to commit fraud without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, making it easier to deter fraud.

Therefore, when a player aims a drill or the like at the gap between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1, the wire HS3 can be easily disconnected by the drill.
Since the system can recognize the detection failure, the pachinko machine 10 can notify the error, making it easier for the store clerk to discover fraud.

Furthermore, the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c. This makes it difficult for a shearing force to act on the connection between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS.
When the wire HS3 is not wound around the annular projection 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning opening unit 950, the wire HS3 is pulled in the discharge direction by the specific winning opening unit 950, and a shearing force acts on the connection between the detection device SE1 and the wire HS.
The connection between the wiring HS3 and the wiring HS4 is formed by an insertion type connector, and is therefore easily cut by a force in the shearing direction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the wire HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c, so that when the wire HS3 is pulled in the ejection direction of the specific winning port unit 950, the direction of the force acting on the connection portion with the detection device SE1 can be made to act in the direction in which the wire HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wire HS3 from being cut at the connection portion with the detection device SE1.

In addition, the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detectors SE1 is
The wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is formed at a position biased toward the end opposite the discharge side of the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1. Therefore, since the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the side opposite the screw-threading position (annular protrusion 953c), the wiring HS3 can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the drive unit 960. In other words, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the screws and wiring. Therefore, for example, the plate member 951 can be opened to expose the specific winning opening 65.
This makes it more difficult to commit tampering with the drive unit 960 from a.

Next, with reference to Figures 107 and 108, the overall configuration of the ball throwing unit 970 will be described. Figure 107(a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and Figure 107(b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. Figure 108(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and Figure 108(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIG. 107 and FIG. 108, the ball throwing unit 970 is located on the player side (the playing area side).
The ball bearing portion is formed by including a distribution unit 980 disposed on the side opposite the play area of the distribution unit 980 and having a space therein through which game balls can be inserted, and a passage unit 990 disposed on the side opposite the play area of the distribution unit 980.

The distribution unit 980 has an opening (inlet 982d and side wall 981b) connected to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 of the above-mentioned winning opening unit 930, and can receive game balls sent from the opening (inlet 982d and side wall 981b) to the opposite side of the game area via the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. The distribution unit 980 will be described in detail later.

The passage unit 990 is disposed on the other end side (lower side in the direction of gravity) of the distribution unit 980 in the direction of gravity. The passage unit 990 has a surface facing the distribution unit 980 with a plurality of openings (first
The passage unit 990 is provided with a through hole 991a to a second through hole 991d, and can receive, from the openings, game balls sent inside the distribution unit 980. The passage unit 990 will be described in detail later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 109 to Fig. 112. Fig. 109(a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and Fig. 109(b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980.
110 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 980.
2(a) is a distribution unit 980 on the line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG.
112(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a).

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112 , the distribution unit 980 includes a rear base 985 and
A front base 981 is disposed on the player side of the rear base 985, and the front base 98
A distribution unit 983 rotatably disposed between the rear base 98 and the rear base 98
5, and is mainly provided with a distribution section 983 and a cover member 987 disposed at a position corresponding to the distribution section 983.

The rear base 985 is formed from a colored translucent resin material (in this embodiment, blue).
A base portion 985a formed on a plate-like body, a plurality of openings (openings 985b to 985g) penetrating the base portion 985a in the thickness direction, a recess 985h recessed on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the plurality of openings in the gravity direction, and a storage portion 986b protruding from the opposite surface of the recess 985h.
and a protruding portion 986e.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and is formed with a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d that penetrate the outer edge in a circular shape, and an inclined surface 986a that inclines toward one side in the direction of gravity on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. The fastening holes 986c are holes into which screws that are inserted through the front base 981 described later are screwed. This allows the front base 981 and the rear base 985 to be fastened and fixed. The fastening holes 986d are holes into which screws that are inserted through the passage unit 990 described later are screwed. This allows the rear base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 to be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping with a part of the other side of the openings 985b to 985f in the direction of gravity, which will be described later. The inclined surface 986a is also formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. This makes it possible to guide the flow direction of the game balls flowing down in the direction of gravity toward the openings 985b to 985f. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game balls to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recess 985h is recessed toward the side opposite the front base 981 (the front side of the paper in FIG. 109(b)), and is formed at approximately the center in the short direction of the base portion 985a (the left-right direction in FIG. 109(b)). The recess 985h is formed with a size capable of accommodating a part of the distribution portion 983 (described later) on the inside, and is provided with a bearing portion 985j that protrudes in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of a shaft member 988a that axially supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the short side direction, and the dimension of the inner edge is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.
The openings 985b and 985c are formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward as it approaches the side opposite the front base 981. This allows the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side to roll to the side opposite the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at approximately the center of the base portion 985a in the short-side direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 109(b)), and is set at approximately the same position as the openings 985b and 985c in the gravity direction (the up-down direction in FIG. 109(b)).
Like 85c, the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is formed to be inclined downward toward the side opposite the front base 981. This allows the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side to roll toward the side opposite the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the opening 985b and the opening 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the opening 985c and the opening 985d.
The space is mainly formed with discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 opening to the opposite side, and intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 extending in the gravity direction and connecting the inlet passages 985e1, 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3, 985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1, 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed to a size that allows game balls to pass through. This allows game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage to flow into the inflow passages 985e1, 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 are formed by extending in the direction of gravity, and the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) is connected to the inflow passages 985e1, 985f1 and is formed to a size that allows the game balls to pass through. This allows the game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1, 985f1 to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2.

Further, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed with recessed portions 985f4 recessed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball (the direction of gravity). The recessed portions 985f4 are cutouts for disposing a detection device SE3 described later on the inside thereof, and the detection device SE3 is formed in the rear view.
3. This allows the detection device SE3 to be inserted from the rear side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).

In addition, the detection device SE3 has an axial direction of the detection hole SE1a, which is parallel to the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.
and the inner space of the detection hole SE1a and the intermediate passage 985e2
, 985f2 are disposed at a position substantially coinciding with the space between the intermediate passage 9
When the ball flows down from the other side of the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of 85e2, 985f2 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. This makes it possible to detect the game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

In addition, the detection device SE3 has the detection hole SE1a whose axial direction is parallel to the direction of gravity, so that the weight of the game ball can be easily utilized when the game ball is sent to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, the game ball can be prevented from getting caught in the connection between the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a. The detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The recessed portions 985e4, 985f4 are connected to the inlet passages 985e1, 985f1 and the outlet passage 98
That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f are formed in communication with the spaces of the intermediate passages 985e3 and 985f3.
2 is formed by utilizing the detection device SE3.
As a result, the length dimension of the rear base 985 in the direction of gravity can be prevented from increasing.
It is possible to suppress the size from increasing in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 are connected to one side of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) and are formed to a size that allows the game balls to pass through.
The discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 are formed by connecting a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991b of the passage unit 990 (to be described later) when the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined.
This allows the game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 to flow into the discharge passages 985e3, 985f3, and can also be sent to the passage unit 990 by passing through the space.

The opening 985g is formed on one side in the gravity direction of the opening 985d (the lower side in the gravity direction).
The opening 985g, like the opening 985d, is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the side opposite the front base 981. This allows the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side to roll toward the side opposite the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1, 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed to a size that allows game balls to pass through. This allows game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 to flow into the inflow passages 985e1, 985f1.

The accommodation portion 986b is formed of a pair of semicircular rings. The accommodation portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b (described later) inside, and the inner diameter of the accommodation portion 986b is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed into a cylindrical body.
The axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b is set to be larger than that of the magnetic body 988a. This allows the magnetic body 988b to be accommodated inside the accommodation portion 986b. In addition, since the accommodation portion 986b is formed of a pair of semicircular rings,
Even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed to be slightly larger due to manufacturing errors, the magnetic body 988b can be disposed by elastically deforming the pair of semicircular rings.

The protruding portion 986e is cylindrically protruding from a position on the opposite side of the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a. The protruding portion 986e also has a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape on its axis. The fastening hole is a hole into which the tip of a screw that passes through a cover member 987 (described later) is screwed, and the cover member 987 can be fastened and fixed to the rear base 985 by screwing the screw with the cover member 987 in contact with the rear base 985.

The magnetic body 988b is made of a magnet, and by being disposed in the housing portion 986b, it is possible to generate a magnetic field on the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a. This makes it possible to repel the magnetic body 988c disposed in the distribution portion 983 described later, making it easier to displace the distribution portion 983.

The front base 981 is made of a colored translucent resin material (blue in this embodiment). The front base 981 is formed in a generally rectangular shape larger than the rear base 985 when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 982 that bulges out from the base plate 981a toward the player side (the side opposite the rear base 986).

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g penetrating in the plate thickness direction on the outer periphery thereof, a first guide wall 981f and a second guide wall 981d protruding toward the rear base 985 side, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 98
1d, and a through hole 981c that penetrates in the plate thickness direction on one side in the gravity direction of the bulging portion 982 (the lower side in the gravity direction).

The insertion hole 981g is used to connect the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82).
The hole is for inserting a screw (not shown) to be fastened to the casing, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular ring shape and has a bulging portion 982 (described later).
The first guide wall 981f is formed in a pair in the short side direction with the first guide wall 981f sandwiched therebetween. The first guide wall 981f is formed such that the semicircular open portion faces approximately the center of the base plate 981a in the short side direction.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the short side direction of the base plate 981a. The second guide wall 981d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of a bulging portion 982 described later, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two locations.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d have an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the periphery of the fastening hole 986c of the rear base 985. As a result, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d are
The wall portion around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted into the inside of the guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981
f and the second guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed between the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981
The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the front base 981 and the rear base 985.
When the front base 986 is assembled, the fastening hole 986c is formed coaxially with the front base 986.
The front base 981 and the rear base 985 can be fastened together by inserting a screw from the side 81 and screwing it into the fastening hole 986d.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape with one side greater than the diameter of the game ball.
The through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected along its edge on the opposite side to the rear base 985 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 109(a)). The through hole 981c is a portion that communicates with the second winning hole 140 of the winning hole unit 930 described above, and when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball sending unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the second winning hole 140 communicates with the winning hole unit 930.
It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball that flows into 40.

The side wall portion 981b is formed with a dimension such that the erected tip surface abuts against the second ball throwing portion 942c of the winning opening unit 930 when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. Moreover, the side wall portion 981b is formed such that a rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is positioned closer to the other end side in the gravity direction than the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and is inclined downward toward the rear base 985 side.

Furthermore, the side wall portion 981b has a protrusion 981b1 protruding from the upright end surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position radially spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 in the gravity direction. As a result, the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a is in contact with the rolling surface 981c of the through hole 981c.
When a game ball is sent to the ball receiving portion 943, the game ball is less likely to be caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c.
A detailed explanation of the case where a game ball is sent to 81c1 will be given later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape bulging from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to pass inside, and is formed with a ball sending passage TR0 through which the game ball flowing in from the inlet 982d passes, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching off from the ball sending passage TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with an inlet 982d formed by cutting out an upper end in the direction of gravity, an erected wall 982a that is bent toward the rear base 985 side and erected at a substantially middle position when viewed from the front, and recesses 982e to 982j that are recessed at multiple locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inlet 982d is formed by cutting out a generally U-shape when viewed from the front.
When the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the inner edge portion is formed in a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball that flows into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930.

The inlet 982d also has a second protrusion 982d1 at the edge on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) that protrudes toward the opposite side to the rear base 985. The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the inner edge shape of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are disposed on the base plate 60, the first recessed portion 942g
The second projection 982d1 abuts against the inner edge of the first projection 982d1.

The distance dimension L34 (see FIG. 109A) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end face of the inlet 982d on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) is
The distance L35 (see FIG. 87B) is set to be greater than the distance L35 to the inner edge of the ball throwing section 942g on one side in the gravity direction.
When the game ball sent to the ball receiving portion 982g flows into the inflow port 982d, the ball
82) and first ball throwing section 942g.

The erected wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view at a predetermined interval from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982. The erected wall 982a is formed on the lower side of the inlet 982d in the direction of gravity, and is provided with an abutment portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape in the erected direction on the upper side in the direction of gravity.

The vertical wall 982a is spaced from the inner edge of the outer periphery of the bulging portion 982 by a horizontal distance L36.
(See FIG. 112(b)) is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed between them as spaces through which the game ball can pass.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed downstream of a distribution section 983 described later, and game balls passing through the distribution section 983 are sent to one of them. The distribution section 983 is set so that game balls flowing into the inlet 982d can be sent alternately to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. This makes it possible to prevent the sending of game balls flowing into the first winning port 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

A bearing portion 982c is formed on the other side of the vertical wall 982a in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) so as to protrude in an annular shape from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 toward the rear base 985. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end of a shaft member 988a that axially supports a distribution portion 983 (described later), and has an inner diameter set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.
By inserting it into the shaft member 988a, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

As described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is connected to the bearing portion 985 of the rear base 985.
j, so that when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into bearing portion 985j and the other end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into bearing portion 982c, thereby allowing the shaft member 988a to be supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on a rotation trajectory of the allocating portion 983 described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the allocating portion 983 is restricted by the contact of the action portion 983a of the allocating portion 983. The contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the allocating portion 983 will be described in detail later.

The recesses 982e and 982f are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extension direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.
Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 is formed as a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2.

The first branch passage BK1 is connected to an opening 985b of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, and is also able to allow the received game balls to flow into the opening 985b of the rear base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 is connected to an opening 985c of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the second passage TR2, and is also able to allow the received game balls to flow into the opening 985c of the rear base 985.

The recesses 982h and 982j are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) in the extension direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.
The second passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are extended to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the recesses 982h and 982j.

The first passage TR1 is connected to an opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first passage TR1 receives the game balls that have flowed into the inlet 982d and transports the game balls to the rear base 981.
The liquid can flow into the opening 985e of No. 5.

The second passage TR2 is connected to an opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first passage TR1 receives the game balls that have flowed into the inlet 982d and transports the game balls to the rear base 981.
The liquid can flow into the opening 985e of No. 5.

The recess 982g is formed between the recess 982h and the recess 982j, and the recess direction is set parallel to the extension direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.
A third branch passage BK3 is formed inside the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.
is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, so that the distribution unit 980
It is possible to reduce the size of the device.

The third branch passage BK3 is connected to an opening 985d of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are assembled together.
It is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the passage or the second passage, and is also capable of allowing the received game balls to flow into the opening 985d of the rear base 985.

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the gravity direction of the bulging portion 982 (the lower side in the gravity direction) and extends inclined toward the rear base 985 side toward the one side in the gravity direction.
2b, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, the opening 98
5b at a position facing the opening 985f.
The game balls flowing down the passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 are caused to abut against the inclined portion 982b, so that the game balls flowing down the passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 are guided to the openings 985b to 985c.
f side to facilitate flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 are recessed portions 982h and recessed portions 982
j and the inclined portion 982b, and the erected tip surface is connected to the rear base 985 side (FIG. 109
As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 come into contact with the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the erected tip surfaces of the guide portion 982j1, and are guided to the openings 985e and 985f, so that the game balls can easily flow into the openings 985e and 985f.

In addition, the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b. This allows the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 to come into contact with the inclined portion 982b and be guided toward the rear base 985 side while colliding with the guide portions 982h1, 982j1, making it easier for the game balls to flow into the openings 985e and 985f.
Since the erection distance of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 can be reduced by the amount of the inclination of b, the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 can be increased, thereby improving the durability.

As described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball sending unit 970) is visible to the player through the front unit 940 (winning hole unit 930) disposed on the player side.
The game balls flowing down the opening 985e and the opening 98
When the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are erected on the front side of the guide portion 982h1 and
There was a problem in that the thickness of 982j1 made it difficult for the player to see the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b, so that the erected dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced.
The game balls (game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) sent to the openings 985e and 985f can be easily seen even through the front unit 940. That is, in this embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be positioned closer to the rear base 985 as it moves in the direction in which the game ball flows down, thereby making it possible to ensure rigidity and guide the game ball while reducing the thickness of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 in the front-rear direction, and therefore ensuring visibility of the game ball.

The distribution portion 983 is set to a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the opposing front base 981 and the rear base 985, and is formed in a generally T-shape when viewed from the front. The distribution portion 983 includes an action portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from a generally central position in the extension direction of the action portion 983a, a through hole 983c penetrating the connection portion between the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and a contact portion 983d bulging out in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c.
The wall portion 98 is formed by connecting the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the rear base 985 side.
3e.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.
In this way, when assembling the front base 981 and the rear base 985, the shaft member 988
By inserting a into the through hole 983c of the distribution section 983, the distribution section 983 is disposed between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985 in a rotatable state.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed to extend radially outward from the through hole 983c, and when the displacement of the distribution part 983 is restricted by rotating in one direction or the other, the distance L37 (see FIG. 112(b)) from the tip of the intermediate plate 983b to the inside of the intermediate plate 983b is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
The intermediate plate 983b is regulated to either one of R2.
3 is rotated about the through hole 983c, thereby switching from a state in which the throw of the game ball is restricted to one side of the first passage TR1 to a state in which the throw of the game ball is restricted to the other side of the second passage TR2.

The action portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b in a front view.
The ball is set on the other end side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) than the connecting position of the contact portion 983d of the action portion 983b.
As a result, the distribution portion 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and has a through hole 98
The wall portion 983e is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c.
The wall 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the distribution unit 980, and the thickness dimension is set to be smaller than the recessed dimension of the recess 985h of the rear base 985 described above. Therefore, when the distribution portion 983 is disposed between the opposing rear base 985 and the front base 981, the wall 983e can be disposed inside the recess 985h. This allows the game balls sent from the inlet 982d to the inside of the distribution unit 980 to flow through the recess 985h.
By getting caught inside 85h, the flow of the game ball can be prevented from being obstructed.

The wall portion 983e includes a housing portion 983e1 on the rear side of the intermediate plate 983b, recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b at the radially outer end from the through hole 983c. The housing portion 983e1 is a portion that houses the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape with an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. The housing portion 983e1 is recessed from the rear base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is housed inside from the rear base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet and is disposed on the rear base 985.
As a result, the magnetic body 988c of the distribution unit 983 is subjected to a magnetic force from the magnetic body 988b arranged on the back base 985, and the distribution unit 983 can rotate about the through hole 983c as an axis, so that the extending direction of the action unit 983a can be tilted to one side or the other.

In addition, the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a state where they are repelled by each other, and the housing portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side.
In other words, since there is no need for a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing portion 983e1, the structure of the sorting portion 983 can be simplified and the magnetic body 988c can be easily disposed in the sorting portion 983.

The magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball.
88b and the magnetic body 988c, the magnetic material 988c is magnetically attracted to the magnetic material 888b, and thus, the magnetic material 988c is prevented from stagnation inside the sorting unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is disposed in the recess 9
85h on the side opposite to the front base 981. The cover member 987 is formed with two recesses, a first recess 987a and a second recess 987b, which are recessed side by side in the direction of gravity and have a circular shape when viewed from the front.

The first recess 987a is a portion that accommodates the above-mentioned accommodation portion 986b of the rear base 985 inside, and is set to have an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the accommodation portion 986b. Therefore, when the magnetic body 988b is accommodated inside the accommodation portion 986b as described above, the accommodation portion 986b is inserted into the first recess 987a.
By storing the tip of 86b, the magnetic body 988b stored inside the storage portion 986b can be prevented from slipping out of the storage portion 986b.

The second recess 987b has a through hole 987b for fastening to the rear base 985 at its bottom surface.
The second recess 987b is formed so that the inner diameter of the recessed portion is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the back base 985.
The second recess 987b of the rear base 985 can be received in the protruding portion 986e of the rear base 985 to position and dispose the screw, and in the positioned state, the screw can be fastened to the fastening hole of the protruding portion 986e via the through hole 987b1.

Next, referring to FIG. 113, the operation of the distribution section 983 when game balls flow into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d will be described.
112(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 980 in the range CXIII of Fig. 112(b). In the following, only the case where the action part 983a of the distribution part 983 is displaced from a state where the action part 983a of the distribution part 983 restricts the throwing of the game ball to one side of the first passage TR1 to a state where the action part 983a restricts the throwing of the game ball to the other side of the second passage TR2 will be described, and the case where the action part 983a restricts the throwing of the game ball to one side of the first passage TR1 from a state where the action part 983a restricts the throwing of the game ball to the other side of the second passage TR2 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 113(a) and FIG. 113(b), before the game ball is sent to the distribution section 983 (before the game ball abuts against the action section 983a), as described above, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution section 983 repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), so that the through hole 9
The intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the front base 981 is inclined toward the second passage TR2. The action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side abuts against the abutment portion 982a1 of the front base 981, thereby restricting the amount of rotation (see FIG. 113(a)).

In this state, when the game ball is sent to the distribution portion 983, the game ball is sent between the intermediate plate 983b and the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above,
Since the connection position with the abutment portion 983d is set further toward the other end in the direction of gravity (lower in the direction of gravity) than the connection position with the abutment portion 983d of the intermediate plate 983b, the load of the game ball can be applied to the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 113(b), the distribution portion 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b on the radially outer side of the through hole 983c is inclined toward the first passage TR1. Note that the amount of rotation is restricted by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side abutting against the abutment portion 982a1 of the front base 981. In this case, the magnetic body 9
The repulsion direction of the 88c passes through the through hole 983c through the intermediate plate 983b on the radially outer side in the second passage TR2.
The pressure is switched from a state acting toward the first passage TR1 side to a state acting toward the first passage TR2 side.

Therefore, the distribution unit 983 uses the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c to
The through hole 983c can be rotated around the axis. In addition, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the rotating state of the distribution unit 983 can be maintained. Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can change the tilt direction of the intermediate plate 983b every time a game ball is sent, and send the game balls one by one to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to Figures 114 to 116. Figure 114(a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and Figure 114(b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. Figure 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and Figure 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIG. 114 to FIG. 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings that open on the distribution unit 980 side, a second passage member 992 that is disposed in the first passage member 991 and sends game balls that pass through the first passage member 991, and a third passage member 993 that is disposed in the second passage member 992 and sends game balls that have passed through the second passage member 992.
and a detection device SE4 disposed between the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. The first passage member 991 also has a first insertion hole 991a formed therethrough on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) on the sorting unit 980 side, and the first insertion hole 991b is formed in the first passage member 991.
A second insertion hole 991b is formed penetrating one side (lower side) of the casing 991a in the gravity direction, a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d are formed penetrating adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b in the horizontal direction, and a plurality of through holes 991a are formed in a circular shape around the outer periphery in a front view.
91f.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square shape with one side greater than the diameter of a game ball when viewed from the front. The first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the internal space is connected to the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. This allows the game ball that flows down inside the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d to be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

The first insertion hole 991a has an inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) that is in contact with the second passage member 9
92. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a can be made to roll toward the second passage member 992.

Furthermore, the first insertion hole 991a is formed with an annular projection 991g connected to an outer periphery, the projection 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw that passes through the second passage member 992 is screwed. This allows the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 to be fastened and fixed together.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.
When the passage unit 990 is assembled, the opening 9
85g and the internal space. This allows the game ball that flows down inside the sorting unit 980 and passes through the opening 985g to be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

The second insertion hole 991b has an inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) that is in contact with the second passage member 9
92. This allows the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b to roll toward the second passage member 992.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.
When the passage unit 990 is assembled, the opening 9
85b are formed at a position where the internal spaces of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are connected to each other. This allows the game balls that flow down the inside of the sorting unit 980 (the first passage TR1) and pass through the opening 985e to be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

The third insertion hole 991c also has recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portions 991c1 are portions that accommodate the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980, and are formed to have approximately the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. This allows the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 to be protected by the recessed portions 991c1, and also allows the detection device SE3 to be inserted into the sorting unit 980.
When the passage unit 80 and the passage unit 990 are combined, unauthorized manipulation from outside can be prevented.

Furthermore, when combining the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 can be positioned. This prevents a part of the detection device SE3 from protruding outward, and the ball throwing unit 970 can be made smaller overall.

The third through hole 991c has a protruding portion 991c2 protruding from the second through hole 991b side on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the horizontally adjacent second through hole 991b. This allows the game ball that has flowed into the third through hole 991c to collide with the protruding portion 991c2 and to roll in a direction away from the second through hole 991b (leftward in FIG. 114(a)).

The fourth through hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.
When the passage unit 990 is assembled, the opening 9
85b are formed at a position where the internal spaces of the first and second passages TR1 and TR2 are connected to each other. This allows the game balls that flow down the inside of the sorting unit 980 (the second passage TR2) and pass through the opening 985f to be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

The fourth insertion hole 991d also has recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portions 991d1 are portions that accommodate the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980, and are formed to have approximately the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. This allows the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 to be protected by the recessed portions 991d1, and also allows the detection device SE3 to be inserted into the sorting unit 980.
When the passage unit 80 and the passage unit 990 are combined, unauthorized manipulation from outside can be prevented.

Furthermore, the fourth through hole 991d has a protruding portion 991c2 protruding from the second through hole 991b side on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the horizontally adjacent second through hole 991b. This allows the game ball that has flowed into the fourth through hole 991d to collide with the protruding portion 991d2 and to roll in a direction away from the second through hole 991b (to the right in FIG. 114(a)).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a generally T-shaped plate shape that is upside down when viewed from the front, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 that penetrates to the other side in the gravity direction (upward in the gravity direction).
The fifth insertion hole 922 is mainly formed with a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating to one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) of the fifth insertion hole 922, and a standing wall 992a standing on the inner circumferential edge of the fifth insertion hole 922.

The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of a game ball.
The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed at a position where the internal spaces of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 are connected to each other. As a result, a game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

The erected wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993. The erected wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993. This allows the game ball sent to the fifth insertion hole 922 to roll toward the third passage member 993 (the right side in FIG. 114(b)).

The vertical wall 992a has an outer peripheral surface provided with an engagement portion 992d that projects in the horizontal direction and a first passage member 9
The engaging portion 99 is formed with a protruding wall 992e that protrudes horizontally from the end portion on the side of the engaging portion 99.
The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L-shape so as to protrude in the horizontal direction and have a tip bent toward the third passage member 993. The engaging portion 992d is provided with a detection device SE4 (to be described later) between the opposing side of the erected wall 992a.
The wiring of the detection device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980 is inserted. This allows the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 to be locked, so that the detection device SE
3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from slipping out of the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The protruding walls 992e are formed to protrude in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front on both sides of the standing wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and have a through hole 992e1 that penetrates the axis of the semicircle.
The through hole 992e1 is formed at a position facing the circular protrusion 991g of the fastening hole 9
91g1. As a result, the through hole 992e is positioned coaxially with the second passage member 992.
By inserting a screw through the fastening hole 991g1 and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed together.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square shape with one side greater than the diameter of a game ball when viewed from the front. The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where its internal space communicates with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. This allows the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 to communicate with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991.
A game ball passing through b can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, a guide wall 992c1 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c, and is erected toward the third passage member 993. The guide wall 992c1 is formed of a first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) of the sixth insertion hole 992c, and a second wall portion 992c3 connected to an end portion in the extension direction of the first wall portion 992c2 and extending in the gravity direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces that serve to position the detection device SE4, and the dimension between the opposing upright wall 993e formed in the third passage member 993 and the engagement portion 993d is set to be approximately the same as the dimension between the opposing detection device SE4.

In addition, the detection device SE4 is disposed at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a and is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

The second passage member 992 is provided with a ring-shaped protrusion 992f that protrudes toward the third passage member 993 at a position spaced apart from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 114(a)). The ring-shaped protrusion 992f is provided with a fastening hole 992f1 that is a circular hole on its axis.
f1 is a hole into which a screw inserted through the third passage member 993 is screwed, and this allows the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 to be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square shape with one side greater than the diameter of a game ball when viewed from the front. The first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the internal space is connected to the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. This allows the game ball that flows down inside the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d to be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

The first insertion hole 991a has an inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) that is in contact with the second passage member 9
92. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a can be made to roll toward the second passage member 992.

Furthermore, the first insertion hole 991a is formed with an annular projection 991g connected to an outer periphery, the projection 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw that passes through the second passage member 992 is screwed. This allows the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 to be fastened and fixed together.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.
When the passage unit 990 is assembled, the opening 9
85g and the internal space. This allows the game ball that flows down inside the sorting unit 980 and passes through the opening 985g to be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

The second insertion hole 991b has an inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) that is in contact with the second passage member 9
92. This allows the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b to roll toward the second passage member 992.

The third passage member 993 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front.
A seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b is erected from an edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, a standing wall 993e is erected from an edge on the other side in the gravity direction toward the second passage member 992, an engagement portion 993d is protruding in the longitudinal direction, and
The recess 993c is formed on the second side surface of the housing 993.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape with one side longer than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position communicating with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. This allows the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 to be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide walls 993b are erected from the edges of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction) toward the opposite side to the second passage member 992.
The inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 (
The seventh passage member 992 is formed with a downward inclination toward the opposite side to the second passage member 992.
The game ball sent to the insertion hole 992g can be made to roll in the direction opposite to the second passage member 992 (the right side in Figure 114 (b)).

As shown in Fig. 114(b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in Fig. 114(b)) of the erected wall 992a of the second passage member 992. As described above, the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in Fig. 114(b)).
The third passage member 993 can be disposed close to the erected wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 can be disposed close to each other, and the outer dimensions of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the gravity direction can be reduced in size.

In a state in which the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the erected wall 993e and the first wall portion 992c2 of the second passage member 992 is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the short side in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. This makes it possible to position the detection device SE4 in the gravity direction.

In addition, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the gravity direction is formed on the upstream side (the second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is sent.
This makes it easier for a game ball passing through 92c to be inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball in order to prevent cheating by the player, so that the game ball cannot be inserted into the detection hole SE1a due to a slight positional deviation in the height of the rolling surface of the game ball. In this embodiment, however, a first wall portion 992c for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the gravity direction is provided on the upstream side (the second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is sent.
Since the sixth insertion hole 992c and the detection hole SE1a are formed, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the height of the rolling surface from the sixth insertion hole 992c and the detection hole SE1a.
This makes it easier to insert the

The engagement portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 at its protruding tip that is bent toward the second passage member 992.
1, in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined,
The distance dimension between the passage member 992 and the second wall portion 992c3 is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. This allows the detection device SE4 to be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are assembled, and is formed with an inner edge shape larger than the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 992f.
Thus, the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and a screw is inserted through the through hole 993c1 from the third passage member 993 side to fasten the fastening hole 993c1.
By screwing into 92f1, the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the ball throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the ball throwing unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the first winning opening 64
Since the ball throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) is disposed on the rear side (opposite the playing area) of the front unit 940 which is equipped with the second winning port 140, by replacing the ball throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and disposing another unit, a different playing form can be achieved without affecting the flow of the game balls down the playing area.

With reference to Fig. 117 and Fig. 118, another unit (replacement unit 1980) of the sorting unit 980 will be described. Fig. 117(a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and Fig. 117(b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. Fig. 118(a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and Fig. 118(b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980.
117(a) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit 1980 taken along line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 117(a), and FIG. 118(b) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit 1980 taken along line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 118(a). Note that the same reference numerals are used to designate the same parts as those in the distribution unit 980 described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 117 and 118, the replacement unit 1980 is mainly formed with a front base 1981 arranged on the playing area side, and a rear base 1985 arranged on the side opposite the playing area side of the front base 1981.

The front base 1981 is made of a colored translucent resin material.
The front base 1981 is formed so that its external shape when viewed from the front is substantially the same as that of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980. The front base 1981 is formed mainly by including a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges out from the base plate 981a toward the player side (the side opposite to the rear base 1985).

In addition, the front base 1981 is formed from a material whose color (yellow in this embodiment) is different from the color of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980. This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 is provided on the game board 13.

In other words, when a game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with a specification having a distribution unit 980 and a game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with a replacement unit 1980 are installed in the same store, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which specification it is because the shape of the play area (the front of the game board 13) is the same for both specifications, as described below. However, by making the color scheme of the distribution unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980 different, it becomes easier for the player to recognize which specification the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) is.

The base plate 1981a has an outer shape similar to that of the base plate 981 of the distribution unit 980 when viewed from the front.
Therefore, the outer shape of the switching unit 980 is set to be substantially the same as that of the switching unit 198a.
1 (change in specifications), the front base 1981 (replacement unit 1980) can be disposed on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Therefore, when the specification is changed by replacing the sorting unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980,
There is no need to change the shape of the base plate 60, and the manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape bulging from the base plate 1981a and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted inside. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front and is provided with an inlet 982d formed by cutting out the upper end portion in the gravity direction.

The horizontal width dimension of the bulge 1982 is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the game ball flowing in from the inlet 982d can pass through the inside of the bulge and flow down. Also, the inner surface of one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) of the bulge 1982 is set at a position in the direction of gravity that is approximately the same as the inner surface of one side in the direction of gravity of the opening 985d formed in the rear base 1985. This allows the game balls that flow into the replacement unit 1980 from the inlet 982d to be sent to the opening 985d in the order in which they flow into the inlet 982d.

The rear base 1985 has an outer shape similar to that of the rear base 98 of the distribution unit 980 when viewed from the front.
5 and an opening 98 communicating with the internal space of the bulging portion 1982.
5d and an opening 985g communicating with the internal space of the through hole 981c.

According to the replacement unit 1980 configured as above, as described above, the base plate 1
Since the external shape of the replacement unit 981a in a front view is substantially the same as that of the base plate 981a of the sorting unit 980, the sorting unit 980 can be easily replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (change of specifications).

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a ball entry unit having a ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter and a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. According to such a gaming machine, the specifications of the gaming machine can be changed while reusing (combining) the game board by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (e.g., one with a different number of passages). However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged in front of the game board, it is necessary to reserve a space in front of the game board in advance according to the maximum number of passages, for example. Therefore, when a ball entry unit with a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the sorting unit 980 (ball entry unit) has an inlet 982d and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 connected to the inlet 982d, and is provided with a winning hole unit 930 disposed on the front side of the game board 13, and a through hole 60a of the base plate 60 disposed on the rear side of the winning hole unit 930, and a first passage TR2.
Since the game board 13 is provided with a passage unit 990 connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the winning port unit 930 in front of the game board 13, and it is not necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the exchange unit 1980, the game board 13 (base plate 60 and front unit 940) can be reused (combined), and when changing the specifications of the game board 13,
The space in front of 3 can be utilized effectively.

As described above, the front unit 940 is made of a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting) resin material, and the allocation unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the winning slot unit and is disposed in a position overlapping the front unit 940 when viewed from the front. This allows the player to see the allocation unit 980 through the front unit 940, which enhances the enjoyment of the game.
In order to make the player be able to see the replacement unit 1980 or the replacement unit 1980, it is not essential that the base plate 60 be made of a light-transmitting material, and for example, the base plate 60 may be made of a plywood board or a sticker may be attached to the base plate 60. Alternatively, it is permissible to paint the base plate 60, which increases the degree of freedom in design.

Furthermore, since the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 is made of a colored translucent (light-transmitting) resin material, the sorting unit 980 can be inserted through the front unit 940.
Alternatively, the player can see the game balls flowing down the inside (passage) of the replacement unit 1980, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, and the allocation unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 is formed from a colored and translucent (light-transmitting material) resin material, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the positional relationship in the front-to-back direction (overlapping direction) with the allocation unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 through the front unit 940.
In other words, the player can easily visually see how the game ball changes position in the forward and backward directions as it flows down, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The ball passage of the distribution unit 980 is formed with a ball sending passage TR0 connected to the inlet 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branched off from the ball sending passage TR0.
Therefore, when manufacturing a gaming machine of different specifications by changing from the sorting unit 980, which has many paths for the gaming balls, to the replacement unit 1980, which has fewer paths for the gaming balls, it is possible to prevent an operator from making a mistake in the number of the detection devices SE3.

That is, in a structure in which the detection device SE3 is disposed in the passage unit 990 disposed downstream of the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980, the detection devices SE3 can be disposed for the number of passages of the sorting unit 980, but when changing from the sorting unit 980, which has two downstream passages, to the replacement unit 1980, which has one downstream passage, it is possible that the detection devices SE3 are disposed for the number of downstream passages of the sorting unit 980, even though it would be sufficient to dispose one detection sensor in the passage unit 990. On the other hand, in a structure in which the detection device SE3 is disposed in a passage branching off from the ball throwing passage TR0, the sorting unit 980 is separated from the replacement unit 1980 by one detection sensor.
When changing to 980, the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is to be arranged, so that it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

On the other hand, as described above, the detection device SE4 that detects the inflow of game balls into the second winning port 140 is disposed in the passage unit 990. Therefore, the detection devices disposed in the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in arranging the passages can be increased accordingly.

In addition, the replacement unit 1980 has a second winning port 1 at the same position as the allocation unit 980.
40. Therefore, like the distribution unit 980, the exchange unit 1980 is connected to the front unit 940 (the winning hole unit 93
When the replacement unit 1980 is disposed in the replacement unit 1980, the replacement unit 1980 can be positioned by utilizing the side wall portion 981b. That is, regardless of the form of the replacement unit 1980, the position where the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b are connected is the same, so that the side wall portion 981b can be positioned relative to the rolling portion 943a.
By positioning the replacement unit 1980, it is possible to position the replacement unit 1980 relative to the front unit 940.

Furthermore, the positioning of the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is performed in the same manner as the sorting unit 980, in that there is no positional deviation (step) at the connecting portion between the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b.
Since the object of the present invention is to prevent the occurrence of misalignment (steps), the target portion can be positioned, and thus the occurrence of misalignment (steps) can be effectively prevented compared to the case where other portions are positioned. As a result, the game balls can flow down smoothly.

Next, the arrangement of the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to Figure 119. Figure 119 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa in Figure 81.

As shown in Figure 119, the connection of each passage of the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 is in a state of abutment in the front-to-back direction (left-to-right direction in Figure 119), and the convex portion formed on the throwing unit 970 is inserted into the protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

More specifically, the first ball sending portion 942g and the inlet 982d are connected to each other by a second protrusion 982d formed in the inlet 982d on the inner side of a first recess 942g1 formed in the first ball sending portion 942g.
1 is disposed. The second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b are
A protrusion 981b formed on the side wall portion 981b is formed on the inside of the second recessed portion 942c1 formed on the side wall portion 981b.
1 is placed.

In addition, the second ball sending section 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall section 98 of the sorting unit 980
1b is disposed in an internal space surrounded by an arm portion 962e and a wall portion 962f formed on the drive unit 960.

Here, a gaming machine has been known that includes a gaming board, a first member disposed on the front side of the gaming board and having a first passage through which a gaming ball passes, and a second member disposed on the rear side of the gaming board and having a second passage connected to the first passage of the first member. A gaming ball flows down the front side of the gaming board and flows into the first passage of the first member, passes through the first passage, then flows into the second passage of the second member, and passes through the second passage at the rear side of the gaming board. This changes the passage path of the gaming ball in the front-rear direction, providing an interest to the player.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) at the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so it is required to ensure the positional accuracy of the second member relative to the first member. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to position the second member relative to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front side of the gaming board, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can be formed in the process of forming a positioning hole for positioning each of these members on the gaming board, while a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back side of the gaming board requires a separate process of turning the gaming board over and forming a positioning hole only for the second member, which is not realistic.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the front unit 940 includes the drive unit 9
When the ball throwing unit 970 is disposed on the front unit 940, a pair of second guide walls 942d of the front unit 940 is inserted between the opposing protruding portions 962g of the drive unit 960. When the ball throwing unit 970 is disposed on the front unit 940, a side wall portion 981b of the sorting unit 970 is inserted between the opposing arm portions 962e from which the protruding portions 962g protrude.

That is, the drive unit 960 includes a protrusion 962g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. This allows the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 to be positioned using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is connected to the pair of second ball sending portions 942c of the front unit 940.
As a result, the arm 962e of the guide portion 962b has the protrusion 962g engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm 962e engaged with the side wall 981b of the ball throwing unit 970, so that the positioning of the ball throwing unit 970 relative to the front unit 940 can be effectively performed. That is, the positioning of the ball throwing unit 970 relative to the front unit 940 is performed with the objective of preventing misalignment (step) from occurring at the connecting portion between the second ball throwing portion 942c and the side wall 981b. The target portion (the connecting portion between the second ball throwing portion 942c and the side wall 981b) is positioned on the outside of the guide portion 962b (arm 9
62e), the occurrence of positional deviation (step) can be effectively suppressed compared to the case where other parts are positioned by the guide portion 962b.

In addition, the drive unit 960 having the guide portion 962b is disposed in the internal space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 in a state where it is disposed in the front unit 940. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a separate opening portion for disposing the drive unit 960.
Since the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second ball sending portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b can also be used as an arrangement space, the number of processing steps can be reduced, and the production costs can be reduced.

As described above, the drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is
Since the drive unit 960 is disposed (formed to be able to be held) in the front unit 940 having the ball throwing unit 970, when the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the front and back of the game board 13, respectively, there is no need to attach the drive unit 960 separately, and the drive unit 960 can be attached at the same time by attaching the front unit 940. Therefore, the workability of the attachment can be improved accordingly.

In addition, in a state where the drive unit 960 is disposed in the front unit 940,
The protrusion 962g and the arm 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball sending portion 942c, respectively.
After attaching the ball-throwing device 40 and the drive unit 960, there is no need to perform a separate operation of engaging the protruding portion 962g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball-throwing portion 942c, respectively. Therefore, the ease of attachment can be improved accordingly.

Furthermore, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the arm 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed so as to be able to engage with the ball throwing unit 970 from the side opposite the front unit 940, so that by attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 to the base plate 60 at the same time, and then attaching the drive unit 960 to the back surface of the base plate 60, the arm 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the ball throwing unit 970 at the same time as this attachment operation. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of opposing arm portions 962e, and when the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are combined, the arm portions 962e
The above-mentioned displacement member 966 is disposed between the opposing wall portion 962f and the rear base 941 of the front unit 940. This eliminates the need to provide a separate member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. This allows the structure of the front unit 940 to be simplified accordingly, and allows for reduction in production costs.

In this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is aligned with the protrusions 94 of the pair of blade members 945.
5b is inserted into the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 is inserted into the sliding groove 966a2 by the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960.
By blocking the opening of 66a2 from the outside, it is possible to prevent dust or foreign matter from entering the sliding groove 966a2. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2 from interfering with the sliding of the protruding portion 966a, and it is possible to stably open or close the pair of blade members.

Next, with reference to Figures 120 and 121, the connection state between the second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b will be described as a representative example.
Fig. 120(b) and Fig. 121(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the range CXXa of Fig. 119, and Fig. 120(b) and Fig. 121(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the line CXXb-CXXb of Fig. 120(a). Fig. 121(a) and Fig. 121(b) show a state in which the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are spaced a predetermined distance from the positions shown in Fig. 120(a) and Fig. 120(b).

As shown in Figures 120 and 121, the projection 981b1 and the second recess 942c1 have a separation distance L38 from the rolling surface 981c1 that is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the game ball.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a first passage member through which game balls pass, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which game balls flowing down from the first passage member pass. However, in such a structure that connects the first passage member and the second passage member, a positional deviation between the two is unavoidable, and therefore a step is formed at the connecting portion between the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member, which may hinder the smooth flow down of the game balls.

As described above, the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 6.
120(a) and 120(b). Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (if the thickness is increased), the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 may be separated in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (left and right direction in FIG. 120(a)). In that case, a gap may be formed between the second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game balls.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end of the protrusion 981b1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom surface side can be made different from the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface side. This prevents the game ball from being simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side, and distributes the effects of these steps, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) more smoothly.

That is, as shown in FIG. 121, the gap K1 of the space formed between the ball rolling portion 943a of the second ball sending portion 942c and the ball rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b, and the gap K2 of the space formed between the second concave portion 942c1 of the second ball sending portion 942c and the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b are formed at different positions in the rolling direction of the ball (left-right direction in FIG. 121(a)). This makes it possible to prevent the ball rolling from the second ball sending portion 942c to the side wall portion 981b from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the gap formed at the connecting portion of the second ball sending portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b can reduce the maximum value of the resistance received by the ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from stopping in the gap between the second ball sending portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b.

Next, a displacement member 8966 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 122. In the sixth embodiment, the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a straight line. However, the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 of the seventh embodiment is formed as a recess 8966 that is recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in the direction of gravity (upward in Fig. 122)) on both outer sides in the short side direction of the displacement member 8966.
a6, and is formed in a substantially L-shape in rear view. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment. Fig. 122 corresponds to Fig. 91. As shown in Fig. 122, the displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and a second opening 966c is formed penetrating in the plate thickness direction at approximately the center when viewed from the front. The second opening 966c is formed so that the shape of the inner edge when viewed from the front is larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941,
When the displacement member 8966 is disposed in the front unit 940, the second winning port 1 is disposed inside the displacement member 8966.
40 is placed.

The displacement member 8966 has a protruding portion 966a protruding in the short direction (left and right direction in FIG. 122) from one end side (upper side in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122) and a protruding portion 966b protruding in the short direction (left and right direction in FIG. 122) from the other end side in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122).
122). The lower side of the cover 966 is formed with a bulging portion 966b bulging out from the lower side of the cover 966 to the rear side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 122).

The protrusion 966a is a slide groove 8966 formed to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the plate thickness direction.
a2, and abutment portions 966 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the short direction and extending in the longitudinal direction.
a1.

The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is inserted, and is extended in the short direction of the displacement member 966, with a recess 8966a6 being recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in Figure 122)) on the outer side in the short direction.

The width dimension of the recess 8966a6 in the short side direction is set to be larger than the maximum dimension between the opposing outer circumferential surfaces of the protrusions 945b. In addition, the side surface on the moving side of the protrusions 945b extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the moving direction of the protrusions 945b (the left-right direction in FIG. 122).
It is parallel to the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state.

Therefore, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the protrusion 94 is disposed on the inside of the recess 8966a6.
5b can be housed therein, and when the blade member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the recess 8966a6 to restrict the displacement of the protrusion 945b.

On the other hand, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slidably displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity (upward in the direction of gravity), so that the wing member 945
This allows the protrusion 945b to be pulled out from the inside of the recess 8966a6. This allows the protrusion 945b to come into contact with the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2, thereby displacing the protrusion 945b.

That is, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945, the drive can be restricted from being transmitted to the transmission member 965, and when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965, the engagement between the protrusion 945b and the recess 8966a6 can be released to allow the protrusion 945b to be displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

Furthermore, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the displacement member 8966 is slidably displaced to one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity). Also, the recess 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upward in the direction of gravity), so that the protrusion 945b can be received in association with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 8966. Therefore, the weight (own weight) of the displacement member 8966 can be utilized to easily maintain the state in which the protrusion 945b is received in the recess 8966a6.

Next, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 123. In the sixth embodiment, the tip of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is disposed inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966. However, in the eighth embodiment, the tip of the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 protrudes from the connecting hole 966b1. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

123(a) and 123(b) are cross-sectional views of a drive unit 8960 and a displacement member 966 in the eighth embodiment.
123(a) illustrates the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 123(b) illustrates an engagement state in the middle of changing from the closed state to the open state due to an unauthorized operation (forced opening) by a player of the closed wing member 945.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment is bent in a side view and has a tip portion 996 extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610.
5a, and a rotating portion 965a connected to the tip end 9965a and extending to the connecting member 964 side.
5b.

As in the sixth embodiment, the width dimension of the tip portion 9965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as the tip portion 9965a moves away from the solenoid 610. In addition, the tip portion 9965a has an insertion portion 9965e at its tip, which is inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and a connecting hole 966b2 of the rotating shaft 96
5c and a standing portion 965f protruding from the connecting side to one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity).

The insertion portion 9965e is formed such that its outer shape in a front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and is disposed by being inserted into the inside of the connection hole 966b1, with its tip end protruding from the connection hole 966b1.
The engaging portion 9965e3 protrudes from the engaging portion 9965e1 toward one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity) and a bulging portion 965e1 bulges from the other side in the direction of gravity (upward in the direction of gravity) toward the inner surface of the connecting hole 966b1.

The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed to protrude in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and the abutment surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotating shaft 965c side is formed at a position where there is a slight gap between the front surface of the displacement member 966.
When the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y (the other side of the direction of gravity), the front surface of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the contact surface 9965e4, thereby restricting the displacement of the transmission member 9965.

More specifically, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y, the connecting hole 966b1
The abutment portion 966b2 on one side of the transmission member 9965 abuts against the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, causing the transmission member 9965 to be rotationally displaced. In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y by the rotational displacement, and is also displaced toward the rotation shaft 965c. Therefore, the displacement of the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotation shaft 965c causes the abutment surface 9965e4 to contact the displacement member 966
This restricts the displacement of the transmission member 9965, and therefore the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of the arrow Y is also restricted.

On the other hand, when the driving force is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the connecting member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 rotates before the displacement member 966, so that the insertion portion 965
It is possible to prevent the transmission member 965 from coming into contact with the displacement member 966. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be displaced by rotationally displacing the transmission member 965.

As described above, the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are connected to the displacement member 966. Therefore, when a drive force is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9
965e4 come into contact with the transmission member 9965 to restrict the rotation of the transmission member 9965. Therefore, the blade member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment has an insertion portion 9965e and the insertion portion 99
When the wing member 945 is closed, the displacement member 966 is displaced to engage the insertion portion 9965e3 with the other side abutment portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966.
When one side of the blade member 945 is abutted against the blade member 945, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the blade member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 96
6 can be engaged with each other. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

Next, a description will be given of a transmission member 10965 and a displacement member 10966 in the ninth embodiment with reference to FIG.
In the above description, the tip of the insertion portion 10965e of the transmission member 10965 is disposed only inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966. However, in the ninth embodiment, the tip of the insertion portion 10965e of the transmission member 10965 is disposed inside the connecting hole 109
66b. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 124(a) and FIG. 124(b) show a drive unit 10960 according to the ninth embodiment.
124(a) corresponds to FIG. 96(a), and FIG. 124(b) corresponds to FIG. 96(b). In FIG. 124(a), the wing member 9
124(b) shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment is bent in a side view and has a tip portion 10 extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610.
965a and a rotating portion that is connected to the tip end 10965a and extends toward the connecting member 964.

As in the sixth embodiment, the width of the tip portion 10965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as the tip portion 10965a moves away from the solenoid 610.
The tip of the insertion portion 109 is inserted into a connection hole 10966b of a displacement member 10966 described later.
65e, and a standing portion 965f that projects from the connection side with the rotation shaft 965c toward one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity).

The insertion portion 10965e has an outer shape in a front view that is the same as the connecting hole 10966 of the displacement member 10966.
The insertion portion 10965e is formed to be smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b and is disposed by being inserted into the inside of the connecting hole 966b. The insertion portion 10965e is formed to include an engagement portion 10965e3 protruding from one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) and a bulging portion 964d1 bulging from the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction) toward the inner surface of the connecting hole 966b1.

The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed in a plate shape curved around the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, and is disposed inside a recess 10966d of a displacement member 10966 described later when the wing member 945 is in a closed state. The displacement member 10966 also has an abutment surface 10965e4 on the side (inner surface) on the rotating shaft 965c side. The abutment surface 10966d4 is disposed opposite an abutment surface 10966dc of the displacement member 10966 described later across a predetermined gap when the wing member 945 is in a closed state.

The displacement member 10966 is formed of a plate-like body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a second opening 966c is formed at a substantially central position when viewed from the front in a plate thickness direction (left and right direction in FIG. 124( a )).
The opening 966c is formed such that the shape of the inner edge in a front view is larger than the second winning opening 140 and the second ball sending section 942c (see FIG. 88) of the rear base 941, and is disposed with the second ball sending section 942c inserted inside. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball sent to the opposite side of the game area through the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 10966 has a protruding portion 966a protruding in the short direction from one end in the longitudinal direction.
The cover 966 mainly comprises a bulging portion 966b that bulges out from the other longitudinal end side toward the rear side, and a recess 10966d that is recessed into the surface opposite the bulging portion 966b.

The recess 10966d is recessed to be connected to the other abutment portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1, and includes an abutment surface 10966d1 on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side.
66d1 is curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above when the wing member 945 is closed, and the abutment surface 10965e of the transmission member 10965
4 with a small gap therebetween. The abutment surface 10966d1 also has an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end portion that connects to the connecting hole 966b1.

The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed to be inclined toward the rear surface side toward the one-side contact portion 966b2 side.
It is formed radially inward of 6d1.

In the ninth embodiment, the distance between the other-side contacted portion 966b3 and the one-side contacted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 is set to be larger than the width L39 (see FIG. 124(a)) in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 10965e when viewed from the front with the wing member 945 closed.
By displacing the abutment surface 10965e4 toward the rear surface side, it is possible to prevent the abutment surface 10965e4 and the abutted surface 10966d1 from abutting against each other, thereby preventing the rotation of the transmission member 10965 from being restricted.

According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as above, when the solenoid 610 is driven to displace the wing member 945 to the open state, the drive is transmitted from the connecting member 964 to the transmission member 10965.
As described above, the contact surface 1 of the transmission member 10965 is rotated about the rotation shaft 965c.
Since the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated around the rotation shaft 965c, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced while maintaining a slight gap between the contact surface 10966d1 and the contact surface 10966d1. In other words, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 are displaced without interfering with each other.

As described above, the other-side abutment portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 is abutted on one side of the connecting hole 966b1.
Since the distance dimension between the opposing ends of the recess 1096 of the displacement member 10966 and the recess 1096 of the displacement member 10966 is formed to be larger than the width dimension L36 of the transmission member 10965, by rotating the transmission member 10965,
The insertion portion 10965e disposed on the inside of the recess 10966d can be brought out of the recess 10966d. This allows the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 to abut against the other-side abutted portion 10966b3, thereby sliding and displacing the displacement member 10966. Therefore, the pair of wing members 945 can be displaced to the open state.

In addition, when the pair of wing members 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the transmission member 1
By sliding the tip of the engagement portion 10965e3 of 0965 along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the abutment surface 10966d1, the displacement member 10966 can be displaced to one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity) while displacing the engagement portion 10965e3 toward the inside of the recess 10966d.

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state, when the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slidably displaced with the engagement portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 disposed inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Therefore, the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced in conjunction with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 10966, and the engagement portion 10965e3 is displaced toward the rear side due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, the engagement portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is slidably displaced with the engagement portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 disposed inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966.
An abutting surface 10965e4 of 965e3 abuts against a contacted surface 10966d1 of the recess 10966d, thereby restricting the rotational displacement of the transmitting member 10965. As a result, it is possible to suppress the forcible opening of the blade member 945 from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engagement portion 10965e3 that protrudes from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e, and when the wing member 945 is in a closed state, one side of the insertion portion 10965e in the direction of gravity abuts against the one-side abutment portion 966b2, the engagement portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and when the transmission member 10965 is rotated toward the other side in the direction of gravity to a position where the other side in the direction of gravity of the insertion portion 10965e (the bulging portion 965e1) abuts against the other-side abutment portion 966b3, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released, so that the sliding displacement of the displacement member 10966 toward the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted without rotating the transmission member 10965.
5. It will be possible to prevent external coercion by the Japan Coast Guard.

On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated to a position where the engagement portion 10965e3 comes out from the inside to the outside of the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released. Therefore, by further rotating the transmission member 10965 in the other direction in the direction of gravity, the displacement member 10966 is slid and displaced in the other direction in the direction of gravity, and the wing member 94
5 can be released.

Next, referring to FIG. 125 and FIG. 126, a displacement member 1196 in the tenth embodiment will be described.
In the sixth embodiment, the displacement member 966 is not disposed on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140. In the tenth embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140.
The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment. Fig. 126(a) and Fig. 126(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. Note that Fig. 126(a) illustrates the closed state of the wing member 945, and Fig. 126(b) illustrates the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the front unit 940 in the tenth embodiment has:
A pair of second guide walls 11942b are provided on both horizontal outer sides of the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity.
The tip position of 43a is set to be approximately the same as the protruding tip position of second ball sending portion 942c.

The pair of second guide walls 11942b have the first tooth surface 1194 of the gear tooth surface on their opposing side surfaces.
The pair of second guide walls 11942b are set such that the distance between them is greater than the width dimension in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126( a )) of a displacement member 11966, which will be described later, and the displacement member 11966 is disposed between them.

The first tooth surface 11942b1 is a first gear GY1 which is supported by a displacement member 11966 described later.
As a result, by sliding and displacing the displacement member 11966, the first gear GY1 meshing with the first tooth surface 11942b1 can be rotated.

The displacement member 11966 includes a first member 11967 formed as a plate-like body having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front,
It is formed with a second member 11968 that is displaceably disposed on the first member 11967, and a first gear GY1 that is journalled on the first member 11967 and meshes with the second member 11968.

The first member 11967 has a second opening 966c formed at a substantially central position in a front view, penetrating the first member 11967 in the plate thickness direction.
A pair of slide grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966, and a second
The opening 966c is formed with a support portion 11966d and a sliding protrusion 11966e that protrude in an annular shape on both sides in the short direction of the opening 966c.

The support portion 11966d is provided to protrude toward the first member 11967 and has a tip end that is in contact with the first gear G.
This allows the first gear GY1 to be rotatably supported by the first member 11967.

The sliding protrusion 11966e is provided to protrude toward the first member 11967, and the tip end is inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968.
can be disposed on the first member 11967.

The second member 11968 is formed from a metal material into a plate-like body that is roughly gate-shaped when viewed from the front, and is provided with a second tooth surface 11968a1 of a gear tooth surface on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in Figure 126 (a)), a sliding groove 11968b formed in the shape of a long hole that penetrates in the plate thickness direction along the extension direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1 (up-down direction in Figure 126 (a)), and a blade portion 11968c that is inclined in the plate thickness direction on the end surface that extends horizontally of the inner edge formed in the gate shape.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are each meshed with the first gear GY1, so that the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both horizontal side surfaces of the second member 11968 on which the second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are formed.

As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extension direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding protrusion 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 11968b. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slidably displaced relative to the first member 11967 by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding protrusion 11966e.

Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 are rotationally displaced by the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is transmitted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 119
68, and the second member 11968 is displaced in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1.

The blade portion 11968c is formed with a downward incline toward the first member 11967, and its lower end is positioned on the other end side in the direction of gravity than the inner surface on the other end side in the direction of gravity of the second ball sending portion 942c when the feather member 945 is in a closed state. This allows the tip of the blade portion 11968c to be positioned on the other end side in the direction of gravity than the rolling surface of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140.

The protruding distance of the second ball throwing section 942c is set to a length that allows it to abut against the rear side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling section 943a arranged between the opposing second ball throwing sections 942c is set to a position that is substantially the same as the tip position of the second ball throwing section 942c. This allows the edge of the rolling surface that flows in from the second winning opening 140 to be in contact with the blade 1196.
8c can be used to cut off foreign objects inserted into the inside of the second winning opening 140.

According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, when the feather member 945 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), the blade portion 11968c of the second member 11968 can be positioned lower in the direction of gravity than the tip of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball sending portion 942c.Therefore, when no drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960, and the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is cut off by tampering and the protrusion 945b is forcibly opened, the flow down of the game ball entering through the second winning port 140 can be restricted by the displacement member 11966.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, the first member 11 of the displacement member 11966
967 is displaced upward by the transmission member 965, and the second member 11968 is displaced. The displacement amount of the first member 11967 is set to be greater than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the second member 11968 is set to a displacement amount twice as large as that of the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941 as described above, so that the second member 11968 can be separated from the rolling portion 943a, which is the rolling surface of the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140, by a distance greater than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the feather member 945 is in the open state, the flow down of the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140 can be permitted.

In other words, the second member 11968 has a blade portion that crosses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 11966 is slid from a position that opens the feather member 945 to a position that closes it, and rubs against the edge of the path (the end of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball sending portion 942c), so that it is possible to cut off any illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140.

For example, a detection device SE4 (FIG. 1) may be used to detect the passage of a game ball by attaching a tip of a string to the game ball and causing the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140 and pass through the rolling portion 943a.
In one fraudulent act, when the gaming ball reaches the first end of the string (see FIG. 14), the other end of the string is operated (reeled out and reeled in) to move the gaming ball back and forth, causing the detection device SE4 to detect it multiple times. In response to such a fraudulent act, according to the tenth embodiment, even if the gaming ball enters the game while the feather member 945 is open, the displacement member 11966 (second member 11968) is slid and displaced from the position that opens the feather member 945 to the position that closes it, and the blade portion 11968c moves toward the rolling portion 9
When the ball crosses the passage of the ball throwing section 943a and the second ball throwing section 942c, the middle part of the thread, the tip of which is attached to the game ball, is displaced together with the blade portion 11968c and pressed against the edge of the rolling section 943a or the second ball throwing section 942c, and when the blade portion 11968c rubs against the edge of the rolling section 943a or the second ball throwing section 942c, the thread can be cut between the blade portion 11968c and the edge of the rolling section 943a or the second ball throwing section 942c. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 127 and FIG. 128, a displacement member 1296 in the eleventh embodiment will be described.
In the sixth embodiment, the displacement member 966 is not disposed on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140. In the eleventh embodiment, the displacement member 12966 is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140.
The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment. Fig. 128(a) and Fig. 128(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. Note that Fig. 128(a) illustrates the closed state of the wing member 945, and Fig. 128(b) illustrates the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the front unit 940 in the eleventh embodiment has:
A pair of second guide walls 12942b are provided extending in the direction of gravity on both horizontal outer sides of second winning opening 140. In the eleventh embodiment, the protruding distances of second ball sending portion 942c and rolling portion 943a are set short, and the protruding tip surfaces are set to positions where they come into contact with the front surface of a first member 12967 of a displacement member 12966 described later.

In addition, on both horizontal outer sides of the second winning hole 140 of the front unit 940, there are displacement members 129
The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are respectively connected to the first gear GY
The shafts of the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2 are inserted through the shaft hub 14 to support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

The pair of second guide walls 12942b have contact portions 12942b2 protruding in the opposing direction from one end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opposing side surfaces. The distance between the pair of opposing contact portions 12942b2 is set to be slightly larger than the width dimension in the short direction of the first member 12967 described below. This allows the first member 12967 to be disposed between the opposing pair of contact portions 12942b2, and allows the sliding displacement of the first member 12967 to be guided.

The displacement member 12966 is mainly formed by a first member 12967 formed from a vertically elongated rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, a second member 12968 arranged in a displaceable state on the first member 12967, a first gear GY1 journaled on the rear base 941 and meshed with the first member 12967, and a second gear GY2 journaled on the rear base 941 and meshed with the second member 12968.

The first gear GY1 is a gear having teeth on its outer circumferential surface, and is attached to the back base 94 as described above.
The first gear 12967 is journalled to the first support portion 12942k1 of the first gear 12942, and its tooth surface is meshed with the first member 12967 and the second gear GY2.

The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear consisting of two stages of gears with different sizes, and is formed with a small diameter gear GY2a on the small diameter side and a large diameter gear GY2b on the large diameter side. As described above, the second gear GY2 is journaled on the second support portion 12942k2 of the rear base 941, and the teeth surface of the small diameter gear GY2a meshes with the first gear GY1, and the large diameter gear GY
The tooth surface of 2b is meshed with the second member 12968.

The first member 12967 is made of a metal material, and a second opening 12966c is formed in the thickness direction of the first member 12967 at a substantially central position in a front view.
A pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the short side direction of the first member 12967 on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 12966c, a pair of sliding protrusions 12966e protruding in an annular shape on both sides in the short side direction sandwiching the second opening 12966c, and a third gear tooth surface on both sides extending in the longitudinal direction.
The tooth surface 12966f is formed with a tooth surface 12966f.

The second opening 12966c has an inner edge shape in a front view that is larger than the inner edge shape of the second winning hole 140 of the rear base 941 described above.
A second blade portion 12966c2 is provided on the inner surface on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity).

The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed to be inclined downward from the rear base 941 side toward the second member 12968 side described later. When the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140, and when the pair of wing members 945 is opened, the second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.
c2 is positioned outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning port 140.

The sliding protrusion 12966e is provided to protrude toward the second member 12968, and the tip end is inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 12968b of the second member 12968.
can be disposed on the first member 12967.

The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are meshed with the first gear GY1.
The first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 is slidably displaced in accordance with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965, so that the first gear GY1 can be rotated.
The gear GY1 is meshed with the small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2.
Gear GY2 can be rotated.

The second member 12968 is formed of a metal material into a plate-like body that is generally H-shaped when viewed from the front, and is disposed with a pair of extended portions facing the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 128( a)). The second member 12968 is also formed with a second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface on the outer side of the opposing direction of the pair of extended portions, a sliding groove 12968b formed in the shape of an elongated hole penetrating in the plate thickness direction along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a (the vertical direction in FIG. 128( a)), and a blade portion 6683 on the end surface on the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in the direction of gravity) of the connecting portion that connects the pair of extended portions.

As described above, the sliding groove 12968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extension direction of the second tooth surface 12968a, and the sliding protrusion 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 12968b. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be slid and displaced in the direction of gravity relative to the first member 12967 by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding protrusion 12966e.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 12968a are meshed with the large diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2. Thus, when the second gear GY2 is rotated, the second member 12968 is slidably displaced. As described above, the second gear GY2 is rotated by the transmission member 965 through the first member 129.
67 is slidably displaced and rotated.
It can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of member 12967.

In addition, the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 are set to have opposite sliding displacement directions, and the amount of displacement of the second member 12968 is greater than that of the second gear GY2 having a smaller diameter.
is set large.

The blade portion 6683 is formed with an upward inclination toward the first member 12967 side, and its upper end portion is disposed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the inner surface of the second ball sending portion 942c on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) when the blade member 945 is in a closed state.
2968 is positioned at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps with the first member 12967 when viewed from the front with the wing member 945 in the closed state.

Therefore, when the pair of blade members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683, which cross the rolling path of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball sending portion 942c and rub against each other at their edges, are moved by the first member 12967 and the second
Since the member 12968 (displacement member 12966) is provided, it is possible to cut off any illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the second winning opening 140.

For example, there is a fraudulent act of gluing the tip of a thread to a game ball, causing the game ball to enter through the second winning opening 140 and pass through the game ball rolling path of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection device SE4, operating (releasing and retracting) the other end of the thread to move the game ball back and forth, thereby causing the detection device SE4 to detect it multiple times.
83 and then cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, the second member 12968 has a blade portion 6683
is disposed on the other side in the direction of gravity than the rolling surface (rolling portion 943a) of the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140. As described above, when the vane member 945 is in the open state, the first member 12967
The second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning port 140. Therefore, when the pair of vane members 945 is in an open state, the game ball flowing into the second winning port 140 can pass between the blade portion 6683 and the second blade portion 966c2.

In the eleventh embodiment, the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 form a second
Since the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the winning port 140 can be blocked, the second member 12968
The displacement distance of the second member 11968 in the tenth embodiment can be made smaller than that of the second member 11968 in the tenth embodiment. As a result, the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning port 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game ball flowing in at the timing when the pair of wing members 945 are closed can be prevented from flowing into the rolling passage.

Next, a drive unit 13960 in a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 129. In the sixth embodiment, the transmission of drive from the solenoid 610 to the blade member 945 is performed via three members, namely, the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965, and the displacement member 966. However, in the twelfth embodiment, the transmission of drive from the solenoid 610 to the blade member 945 is performed via one member. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 129(a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 in the twelfth embodiment.
129(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 930 taken along the line CXXIXb-CXXIXb in FIG. 129(a). In FIG. 129(b), only the outline of the specific winning port unit 950 is shown by a chain line for ease of understanding.
When the shaft portion 961b is retracted into the main body portion 961a, the pair of wing members 945 is in a closed state, and when the shaft portion 961b is extended from the main body portion 961a, the pair of wing members 945 is in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 in the twelfth embodiment is disposed on the rear side (the right side in FIG. 129(b)) of the specific winning port unit 950, and is connected to the solenoid 61
The solenoid 610 is disposed with the axis of the shaft portion 961b of No. 0 facing in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 129(b)). Further, a transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

The transmission member 13965 includes a base 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side, and a blade member 94 extending from the end of the base 7658 on the front unit 940 side.
5 and an engagement portion 13965j extending upright toward the protrusion 945b side.

The annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is coupled to the end portion on the opposite side to the engaging portion 13965j side of the base portion 7658. This allows the transmission member 13965 to be slidably displaced by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in its axial direction.

The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position overlapping the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 129(a)) in a rear view (or a front view).
3965j is set such that its erect dimension exceeds the length of the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945,
It is arranged to overlap with the protrusion 945b when viewed from the front.

The engaging portion 13965j has a support portion 13965j that is substantially C-shaped when viewed from the side at its upright tip.
The support portion 13965j1 is set so that the dimension between the opposing sides of the opening inside is larger than the maximum dimension of the outer shape of the protrusion 945b.
The width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in the left-right direction of FIG. 29(a) is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b.
can be provided.

Therefore, as described above, when the connecting portion 10965h is slidably displaced in the direction of gravity, the engaging portion 9965j is slidably displaced in the direction of gravity, and the protrusion 945b is displaced in accordance with the displacement. By displacing the protrusion 945b, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state.

According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 for driving the pair of blade members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951
51, a space can be formed on the rear side of the pair of vane members 945 (second winning hole 140).
By concentrating the installation space on the back side of the pair of feather members 945, space for installing other components and devices can be secured on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 (second winning port 140), allowing the space to be utilized more effectively.

Next, referring to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, a displacement member 1496 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described.
In the sixth embodiment, the inner edge shape of the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 in a front view.
In the following, the inner edge shape of the transmission member 965 is sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 130(a) and FIG. 131(a) show the winning port unit 930 in the thirteenth embodiment.
FIG. 130(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 930 taken along the line CXXXb-CXXXb in FIG. 130(a), and FIG. 131(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 930 taken along the line CXXXb-CXXXb in FIG.
A cross-sectional view of the prize opening unit 930 along line Ib-CXXXIb.

In addition, in Fig. 130(a) and Fig. 131(a), the outer shape of the pair of wing members 945 is illustrated by a chain line. In Fig. 130(a) and Fig. 130(b), the pair of wing members 945 is illustrated in a closed state, and in Fig. 131(a) and Fig. 131(b), the protrusions 94 of the pair of wing members 945 are illustrated in a closed state.
5b is cut off, the pair of vane members 945 are opened. Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the specific winning hole 65a is formed at a position farther away from the second winning hole 140 than in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 130(a) and FIG. 130(b), the displacement member 1 in the thirteenth embodiment
The second opening 9 is formed in a substantially central position in a front view.
66c is formed penetrating in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 130(b)).

The displacement member 14966 is disposed on one end side ( FIG. 130( a )) of the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction of FIG. 130( a )).
The protrusion 966a protrudes from the other end of the longitudinal direction (the upper side) in the short direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 130(a)), and the bulging portion 14966b bulges from the other end of the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 130(b)) toward the rear side (the rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The bulging portion 14966b is formed to bulge out toward the rear side (the rear base 941 side).
A horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed on the inner side in rear view.
66b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of a drive unit 960 described later is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965.

The shape of the inner edge of the connecting hole 14966b1 in a front view is set to be substantially square,
The one-side contact portion 966b of the inner circumferential surface on the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction (the upper side in FIG. 130(a))
2, and the other-side abutment portion 96 of the inner circumferential surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction (the lower side in FIG. 90(a))
6b3.

The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed so that the separation distance L40 between the opposing portions in the direction of gravity (from the other-side abutted portion 966b3 to the one-side abutted portion 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the direction of gravity of the insertion portion 965e, and when the pair of wing members 945 are in a closed state, the insertion portion 965e abuts against the other-side abutted portion 966b3.

In addition, the connecting hole 14966b1 is formed by dividing the width dimension L4 of the insertion portion 965e in the direction of gravity by the distance L40 between the opposing portions in the direction of gravity (from the other-side contacted portion 966b3 to the one-side contacted portion 14966b2).
The dimension obtained by subtracting 1 from the diameter of the game ball is set to be larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the distance L42 between the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a and the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 (L40-L41)>(L42-diameter of the game ball).
When the second movable member 1496 is dropped to one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity), the second movable member 1496 is moved by the edge of the movable member 1496
The rolling path of the game balls flowing in from the winning opening 140 can be blocked.

Next, referring to FIG. 131(a) and FIG. 131(b), the protrusions 9 of the pair of wing members 945 are
As described above, the separation distance L40 of the connecting hole 14966b1 is formed sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction, and when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the insertion portion 965e is inserted into the other abutment portion 966b3.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 131( a ) and FIG. 131 ( b ), a pair of wing members 94
When the fifth protrusion 945b is cut off, the displacement member 14966 falls freely to one side in the direction of gravity by the gap between the one-side contact portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

As described above, the dimension of the connecting hole 14966b1 obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is set to be larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L4
Since 0-L41)>(L42-diameter of the game ball), when the displacement member 14966 falls freely, the edge of the displacement member 14966 can block the rolling path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140.

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, the pair of wing members 945 are fitted into the sliding grooves 966 of the displacement member 14966.
When it is not connected to a2 (the state shown in Figures 131 (a) and 131 (b)), a part of the displacement member 14966 is positioned in the passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning port 140. Therefore, even if, for example, the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is cut and the feather member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the flow down of the game ball that has entered from the second winning port 140 can be restricted by the displacement member 14966.

Next, referring to FIG. 132 and FIG. 133, a drive unit 15 according to a fourteenth embodiment will be described.
In the sixth embodiment, the arm 962e of the drive unit 960 is positioned on the outside of the side wall 981b of the sorting unit 980, but in the fourteenth embodiment, the second arm 15962j is positioned on the inside of the side wall 981b. The same reference numerals are used to designate the same parts as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 132( a ) is a side view of a drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment;
Fig. 132(b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and Fig. 132(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. Fig. 133(a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13.
Figure 133(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in Figure 133(a). Note that Figure 133(a) corresponds to Figure 120(a).

First, a drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 132. As shown in Fig. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment includes:
A first storage section 15962 and a second storage section 963 formed in a box shape and arranged opposite each other;
A solenoid 610 disposed in the space between the first accommodation portion 15962 and the second accommodation portion 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a connecting member 964 connecting the first accommodation portion 15962 and the second accommodation portion 963 to the solenoid 610.
The housing portion 963 is pivotally supported by the transmission member 965 , and the transmission member 965 is connected to the connection member 964 .

The first housing portion 15962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering portion 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. 132( a )) and a back base 9
41 (see FIG. 85).

The drive unit 15960 includes a first storage portion 962 and a second storage portion 963 that are formed in a box shape and arranged opposite to each other, a solenoid 610 that is arranged in the space between the first storage portion 962 and the second storage portion 963, a connecting member 964 that is connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 964 that is journaled by the first storage portion 962 and the second storage portion 963 and is connected to the connecting member 964.
It is mainly formed with 65.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material and includes a covering portion 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (upper side in Figure 93 (a)), and a guide portion 15962b that protrudes from the covering portion 962a toward the rear base 941 side (see Figure 85).

The guide portion 15962b includes a pair of arms 15962e formed in a generally L-shape in side view, a wall portion 962f connected to the pair of arms 15962e and formed in a gate shape in front view, and a side of the wall portion 962f opposite the covering portion 962a (the rear base 941 side (see FIG. 125 )).
A second arm 15962j is located on the other side of the pair of arms 15962e in the gravity direction and protrudes from the wall 962f.
62j and a third arm portion 15962h protruding from the opposite side of the third arm portion 15962h.

The arm portion 15962e is connected to each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a and the rear base 941.
85) and the protruding tip side is bent to the other side in the gravity direction (the side opposite to the solenoid 610 side), forming a generally L-shape in a side view. In addition, the protruding position of the arm portion 15962e in the gravity direction is set below the side wall portion 981b of the sorting unit 980 when the drive unit 15960 and the sorting unit 970 are combined.

The second arm 15962j is connected to the inner edge of the wall 962f, and the distance L43 between the pair of opposing arms is set to be smaller than the width between the pair of opposing arms 962e and larger than the diameter of the game ball.
j is set so that the distance dimension in the gravity direction is smaller than the dimension between the opposing side wall portions 981b of the sorting unit 980 in the gravity direction, and
When these are assembled together, they are inserted into the inside of the side wall portion 981b.

In addition, the pair of second arms 15962j are set such that the distance dimension on the outer side in the opposing direction is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the opposing side walls 981b in the horizontal direction.
The positioning can be achieved by disposing the second arm portion 15962j inside the second arm portion 15962j.

The distance dimension between the opposing third arm portions 15962h is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the opposing arms 15962e.
A protrusion 15962h1 is formed which is connected to the end of 5962j on the rear base 941 side.

The protruding portion 15962h1 is connected to the end of the second arm portion 15962j and the rear base 941 (FIG. 85
The protruding distance to the front unit 940 (see FIG. 15) is set to be substantially the same as the recessed dimension of the second recess 942c1. In addition, the protruding portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recess 942c1 when the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined.
It is placed inside 2c1.

Therefore, the upstream end of the protrusion 15962h1 and the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b,
Since the step is formed at a different position in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom side can be made different from the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side side.
The game ball is prevented from being simultaneously affected by the steps on the bottom surface side and the side surface side, and the effects of both are dispersed, so that the game ball can flow down (pass through) more smoothly.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can serve both to position the front unit 940 and the distribution unit 980, and also serves as a part of the passage path of the game balls flowing in from the second winning port 140. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can also more easily tolerate dimensional effects or installation crossovers.

Next, referring to Figure 134 (a), the side wall 16981b of the sorting unit 980 and the second ball throwing section 16942c of the winning port unit 930 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall 981b is disposed inside the second recess 942c1 of the second ball throwing section 942c. In the fifteenth embodiment, the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball throwing section 16942c is disposed inside the recess 1698 of the side wall 16981b.
The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals,
The explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 134(a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment.
134(a) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(a), the side wall portion 16981b of the sorting unit 980 in the fifteenth embodiment has a vertical tip surface that faces the winning opening unit 930 and the ball sending unit 970 when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball sending unit 970 are attached to the base plate.
It is formed with dimensions such that it abuts against the tip of second ball sending portion 16942c of .0.

In addition, the side wall portion 16981b has a recessed portion 16981 formed on the upright tip surface on the upright base end side.
The recess 16981b2 is formed at a position radially spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 in the direction of gravity, and the shape of the recess in a side view is set to be substantially the same as the shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball sending section 16942c described later.

This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c when the game ball is sent from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981 of the through hole 981c.
A detailed explanation of the case where the game ball is thrown to c1 will be given later.

The recessed portion 16981b2 is recessed into a substantially trapezoidal shape in a side view, and the side wall portion 16
The inner surface of the upright base end side of 981b is formed with a downward inclination along the rolling direction of the game ball. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball that collides with the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 can be pressed against the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface).
The recessed tip surface of 1b2 can prevent the game ball from bouncing up, which makes it easier for the game ball to pass (flow down) smoothly.

The protrusion 16942c2 is formed to protrude from the protruding tip surface of the second ball sending portion 16942c, and its outer shape in a side view is set to be approximately the same as the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 from being caught inside the recessed portion 16981b2 of the sorting unit 980 when the game ball is sent to the rolling surface 981c1 of the sorting unit 980. As a result, when the game ball is sent from the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 to the rolling surface 981c1 of the sorting unit 980, the game ball is prevented from being caught inside the recessed portion 16981b2 of the sorting unit 980.
This makes it easier for the game ball to pass (flow down) smoothly to 1c1.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the recess 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b and the rolling surface 9
Since the upstream end of 81c1 is formed at a different position in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom side can be made different from the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side side. This prevents the game ball from being simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side, and distributes the effects, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) more smoothly.

Furthermore, according to the fifteenth embodiment, a recess 16981b2 is provided downstream in the rolling direction of the game ball.
Since a protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side, the downstream end of the side surface of the second ball sending portion 942c and the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a can be brought close to the upstream end of the side surface of the side wall portion 16981b and the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b.
When the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball sending part 942c is formed at a different position from the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall part 16981b in the downstream side of the passing direction of the game ball, the game ball can be guided by the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball sending part 942c until the game ball reaches the upstream end of the side surface of the side wall part 16981b. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has a relatively low rigidity and may be broken.
According to the embodiment, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side of the ball passage direction, even if the protrusion 16942c2 breaks, the bottom upstream end and the side upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b can be maintained in different positions in the ball passage direction, and the timing at which the ball passes through the step on the bottom side can be made different from the timing at which the ball passes through the step on the side side. This prevents the ball from being simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side, and disperses the effects of the two, allowing the ball to flow down (pass) smoothly.
It can be done.

In addition, the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the winning port unit 930 side, and the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed on the sorting unit 980 side.
1b2 contacts the side surface of the side wall 16981b, the distribution unit 980 can be prevented from shifting upward in the direction of gravity relative to the rolling portion 943a. That is, in a step where the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall 16981b is higher than the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a, the game ball is likely to bounce up when it runs up. Compared to the opposite step, it is more likely to hinder the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, being able to prevent the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall 16981b from shifting upward in the direction of gravity relative to the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a is particularly effective in preventing the smooth flow of the game ball.

Next, referring to Fig. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the sorting unit 980 and the second ball sending portion 17942c of the winning port unit 930 in the 16th embodiment will be described. In the above-mentioned 6th embodiment, the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b and the end of the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second ball sending portion 942c are formed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the rolling direction of the game ball in a side view, but in the 16th embodiment, the end of the second ball sending portion 17942c and the end of the side wall portion 17981b are formed at an incline in a side view. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same symbols, and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 134(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the sixteenth embodiment.
134(b) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(b), the side wall portion 17981b of the sorting unit 980 in the sixteenth embodiment has a tip surface 1798
In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed with an upward inclination along the rolling direction of the game ball on the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

On the other hand, the second ball sending portion 17942c of the winning port unit 930 has a tip end surface 1
7942c3 is formed with an upward incline along the rolling direction of the game ball in the rolling portion 943a.
In addition, when the prize winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second ball throwing portion 17942c is arranged approximately parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the above-mentioned side wall portion 17981b.

Therefore, the upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game ball (sixth embodiment).
The game ball that hits the upper end surface of the side surface of 1b can slide along the slope and is less likely to be bounced back. As a result, the game ball can be made to pass (flow down) smoothly.

In addition, since the entire upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed to be inclined, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of stress concentration and ensure the durability of the side wall portion 17981b, compared to the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed to have a shape having a recessed portion 16981b2 as in the fifteenth embodiment, for example. In addition, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, it is possible to make the shape of the cavity (hollow portion) of the injection molding die change gradually, so that it is possible to suppress air bubble trapping (air entrapment) and filling defects and improve moldability.

Next, referring to FIG. 135 to FIG. 137, a displacement member 1896 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described.
In the sixth embodiment, the displacement member 966 is not disposed on the rolling path of the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140, but the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

135(a), 136(a) and 137(a) are schematic diagrams of the winning port unit 930 in the seventeenth embodiment as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 135(b) is a schematic diagram of the winning port unit 930 in the seventeenth embodiment as viewed from the rear.
This is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 930 taken along the line XXVb-CXXXVb.
FIG. 137(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb in FIG. 136(a).
This is a schematic cross-sectional diagram of the prize opening unit 930 taken along line XXXVIIb.

135 illustrates a pair of wing members 945 in a closed state, FIG. 136 illustrates a pair of wing members 945 in an open state, and FIG. 137 illustrates a pair of wing members 945 in a forcibly opened state.
135(b), 136(b), and 137(b), only the pair of blade members 945, the rear base 941, the front base 943, the displacement member 18966, the transmission member 19958, and the solenoid 961 are illustrated in a schematic manner.

135, the displacement member 18966 in the seventeenth embodiment is formed to have an outer shape larger in the direction of gravity (the vertical direction in FIG. 135(a)) than the displacement member 966 in the sixth embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 is formed in a shape that is bent into a substantially L-shape in rear view, and the non-transmission portion 18966a6 extends in the direction of gravity, and the non-transmission portion 18966a6 extends in the direction of gravity.
The transmission portion 18 is bent and extended from the lower end of the 8966a6 in the direction of gravity toward the center in the left-right direction.
966a7.

In addition, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 is disposed lower in the direction of gravity than the second winning opening 140. As a result, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 is moved toward the rolling portion 94.
This can restrict the ball from flowing from ball holder 981b into through hole 981c of throwing unit 970.

Furthermore, the displacement member 18966 is provided with a blade 1896g that is inclined toward the front side as it goes downward on the inner periphery of the upper side of the gravity direction of the through hole 966c1. The front side of the blade 1896g abuts against the protruding tip of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip of the second ball throwing portion 942c. That is,
When viewed from the rear, when the pair of blade members 945 are in a closed state, the blade portion 1896g is positioned so as to overlap with the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c.

In addition, the transmission member 18958 in the seventeenth embodiment is set to have a larger rotation range on the tip end portion 965a side when the solenoid 961 is driven, compared to the first embodiment.
The displacement dimension in the direction of gravity on the tip end 965a side is set to be large, and this displacement dimension is set to be larger than the opening dimension in the direction of gravity of the second winning opening 140.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade 1896
g can be positioned above the second winning opening 140, and the opening of the second winning opening 140 can be positioned inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 when viewed from behind.

Furthermore, when the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, the protrusion 945b slides inside the sliding groove 18966a. The protrusion 945b slides inside the sliding groove 18966a first inside the non-transmitting portion 18966a6, and then inside the transmitting portion 18966a7. In this case, the non-transmitting portion 18966
Since the extension direction of the projection 945b and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same,
When sliding on the non-transmitting portion 18966a6, the protrusion 945b slides on the inside of the non-transmitting portion 18966a6 without changing its position relative to the rear surface base 942. On the other hand, when sliding on the transmitting portion 18966a7, the protrusion 945b is pushed out by the inner peripheral edge of the transmitting portion 18966a7 and displaced (rotated). As a result, the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state.

Therefore, when the pair of wing members are in the open state, a game ball passing through the second winning port 140 can be allowed to flow from the rolling portion 943a into the through hole 981c of the ball throwing unit 970.

On the other hand, when the pair of feather members 945 are changed from the open state to the closed state, the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, thereby rotating the feather member 945. In this case, as described above, the displacement member 18966 rotates the blade portion 18966g of the second winning opening 140.
and the front side of the blade 18966g is in contact with the protruding tip of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip of the second ball throwing portion 942c. Therefore, as the blade 18966g is displaced downward in the direction of gravity,
The biasing member inserted on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning port 140 can be cut.

That is, when the displacement member 18966 is slid from the position where the pair of wing members 945 are opened to the position where the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the displacement member 18966 crosses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 and contacts the edge of the path (the rolling portion 943a and the second ball sending portion 942).
Since it is equipped with a blade portion 18966g that comes into frictional contact with the end of the blade portion 18966c, it is possible to cut off a force applying object that has been illegally inserted from the second winning port 140 into the passage through which the game ball passes.

For example, there is a fraudulent act of gluing the tip of a thread to a gaming ball, causing the gaming ball to enter through the second winning opening 140, passing the gaming ball through the rolling part 943a, and when the gaming ball reaches the detection device SE4 (see FIG. 114) that detects the passage of the gaming ball, operating (paying out and pulling in) the other end of the thread to move the gaming ball back and forth, thereby causing the detection device SE4 to detect it multiple times. In response to such a fraudulent act, according to the seventeenth embodiment, even if the gaming ball described above enters with the feather member 945 open, the displacement member 18966 slides and displaces from the position that opens the feather member 945 to the position that closes it, and when the blade portion 18966g crosses the passage of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, the blade portion 18966g slides and displaces the middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the gaming ball, causing the blade portion 18966g to slide and displace ...
166g is displaced and pressed against the edge of the rolling portion 943a or the second ball throwing portion 942c, and when 18966g is rubbed against the edge of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c,
The thread can be cut between the edge of the second ball throwing portion 942c or the rolling portion 943a. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 137, when the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut (broken) by a player's fraudulent act, the displacement member 18966 is displaced from the second winning hole 140.
The through holes 966c1 of the pair of wing members 966c1 are disposed on the lower side in the direction of gravity.
When the opening 45 is forcibly opened, the flow of the game ball entering through the second winning port 140 can be restricted by the displacement member 18966.

In this case, the transmission member 18965 is a coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 9) connected to the solenoid 961.
4), the tip end 18965a side is biased in a direction of displacement downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is biased in a direction of blocking the second winning opening 140. Therefore, even if the pair of feather members 945 are forcibly opened due to a player's fraudulent behavior, the displacement member 18966 can be prevented from being forcibly opened in the same manner. As a result, the player's fraudulent behavior can be prevented.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above form in any way, and it can be easily inferred that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope that does not deviate from the spirit of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or substituted for a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above first embodiment, the case has been described in which the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 are arranged to face each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 may be configured to face each other in the radial direction of the rotational displacement of the driven member 163, or may be configured to face each other in the rotational axis direction (a direction intersecting with the plane on which the driven member 163 is displaced).
In this case, a frictional force is generated between the driven member 163 and the driven member 164.
63 can be slowed down.

In the above-described first embodiment, the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 are always disposed opposite to each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 may be disposed opposite to the driven member 163.
The driven member 163 may be configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the driven member 163, and may be disposed opposite the driven member 163 in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 at a timing when it is desired to decelerate the driven member 163, and may be configured to be retracted outside the displacement locus of the driven member 163 at other timings. This allows the driven member 163 to be configured to have a plurality of displacement modes.

In the above-described first embodiment, an example of the arrangement of the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 may be arranged in a position where they overlap when viewed in the displacement direction of the driven member 163, or the upper regulating portion 176 may be arranged closer to the rotation axis of the driven member 163 than the lower regulating portion 175.

In addition, the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 are not limited to being arranged on either the left or right side of the rotation axis of the driven member 163, and one of the lower regulating portion 175 and the upper regulating portion 176 may be arranged on the left side and the other on the right side.

In the above first embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 applies an electromagnetic force in a direction to pull up the driven member 163, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 may be disposed below the driven member 163 to generate an upward electromagnetic force. Also, instead of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a rotary motor may be used to drive the driven member 163.

In the first embodiment, the light emitting means 181 is configured with an LED, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a miniature light bulb, a laser, an illumination plate, or a small liquid crystal display screen.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which a gap is formed between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination board 180 to suppress the transmission of vibration to the illumination board 180, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of filling the gap, a highly damping resin member may be filled in the area between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination board 180. In this case, the arrangement space of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination board 180 can be narrowed while suppressing the transmission of vibration.

Conversely, the gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination board 180 may be filled with resin material, and filling of the resin material may be omitted. In this case, since the transmission of vibration to the illumination board 180 when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is driven can be promoted, the illumination board 180 can be made to vibrate in accordance with the vibration, thereby producing an effect in which the light irradiated from the light emitting means 181 fluctuates.

In the above-described first embodiment, the light transmitting hole 60c is configured as one large opening, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of through holes, such as punching metal, may be used.

In the first embodiment, the outer portion 94 is configured as a thin plate, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening may be formed partially. In this case, by forming an opening at a position that matches the arrangement of the light emitting means 181 in a front view, it is possible to prevent the plate portion of the illumination board 180 from being visible while exposing the light emitting means 181 in a front view.

In the above-described first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted to the lift plate 430 by the arm member 414, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driving force may be transmitted by an endless gear belt or a cam mechanism.

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotation angle range of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to be symmetrical above and below the horizontal, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be asymmetrical above and below, or may have a rotation angle range only above or below the horizontal.

In the first embodiment, the long hole portion 406 is a long hole that is long in the horizontal direction.
However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a long hole that extends at an angle to the horizontal direction, a long hole that has a curved shape, or a long hole that has a portion that extends in the vertical direction. This allows for greater freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444.

In the above first embodiment, a pair of feather-shaped members 460 abut against each other to form a symmetrical shape has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a slight gap may be provided from the design stage. This can reduce fatigue that accumulates in the feather-shaped members 460 due to abutment, compared to when the feather-shaped members 460 abut against each other, and therefore the feather-shaped members 460 can be easily arranged in a symmetrical shape.
It is possible to increase the durability of 60. Note that the gap may be configured so that a player can see a pattern formed on the rear side of the gap or light emitted from the light emitting means through the gap.

In the first embodiment, the pair of vane-shaped members 460 have the same displacement amount and displacement speed. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size of the arc-shaped gears 462 of the vane-shaped members 460 may be made different on the left and right to adjust the gear ratio.
The amount of displacement or the speed of displacement of the pair of vane members 460 may be different.
Even when the shapes of the sides that come into contact with each other are symmetrical, the contact surface S1 can be shifted from the left-right center position.

In the above first embodiment, the feather-shaped member 460 is visually recognized as having a symmetrical shape when in contact, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, most of the feather-shaped member 460 may be configured to be symmetrical while being partially different. For example, the feather-shaped member 460 may be configured to have a partially asymmetrical shape, a pattern drawn on the front side may be asymmetrical, or the colors may be asymmetrical. Even in this case, since most of the feather-shaped member 460 is symmetrical, the player can be made to think that the feather-shaped member 460 has a symmetrical shape.

In the first embodiment, the case where the abutting feather-shaped members 460 are rotated and displaced is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pair of feather-shaped members 460 may be configured to move in parallel in the left-right direction to abut against each other. In this case, in comparison with the shape of the rear case 310, the left feather-shaped member 460 can be formed with a larger area than the right feather-shaped member 460.

In the first embodiment, the vane-shaped members 460 supported and displaced by the lift plate 430 form a continuous shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vane-shaped members 460 and a fixed member (for example, the center frame 86 of the game board 13) may be combined to form a symmetrical shape when viewed from the front.
Since the player can visually distinguish between a shape that is completed only with 60 and a shape that is completed with other specified members and the feather-shaped member 460, the presentation effect of the feather-shaped member 460 can be improved.

In the above first embodiment, the light-emitting performance member LA1, the feather-shaped member 460, and the auxiliary member 470 are used to evoke the concept of "shells and pearls," but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light-emitting performance member LA1 may be provided with a decorative pattern representing a bullet hole in a wall, and the feather-shaped member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 may be configured with a shape representing the momentum of a bullet. In this case, the shape of the feather-shaped member 460 may be reused, and the light-emitting performance member LA1 and the auxiliary member 470 may be configured with different members with different decorations or shapes. In other words, a new operating unit can be configured by reusing some of the members, thereby reducing development costs.

In the first embodiment, the lift plate 430 is slidably displaced in a linear direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the cylindrical portion 444 of the auxiliary arm member 444 may be
Alternatively, the lift plate 430 may be configured to be displaceable in an arcuate trajectory centered on the axis d.

Furthermore, in the case where the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to be pivotally supported in a fixed position, the lift plate 430 may still be configured to be displaced in one direction. In this case, the relative displacement member 442 may also be configured to be slidable in the left-right direction so that the left-right displacement of the arc-shaped gear portion 444b can be absorbed by the relative displacement member 442. For example, by providing a biasing means or an electromagnetic solenoid that biases the relative displacement member 442 toward the arc-shaped gear portion 444b in the left-right direction, the meshing between the arc-shaped gear portion 444b and the relative displacement member 442 can be stabilized.

The arc-shaped gear portion 444b may be made of a flexible resin material used for gear belts, etc., instead of a highly rigid resin material. In this case, the deformation of the material can absorb the left-right displacement of the arc-shaped gear portion 444b.

In the above first embodiment, the window section defined in the center of the game board 13 by the center frame 86 is configured in a substantially symmetrical shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inner shape of the center frame 86 may be asymmetrical depending on the size of the vane-shaped members 460. This provides the game board 13 with a function of concealing the back side by shielding and a function of improving the freedom of the shape of the game area.

In the first embodiment, the illumination board 777 is disposed on the rear side of the light-transmitting hole 60c, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination board 777 may be disposed inside the light-transmitting hole 60c. In this case, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the outer part 94 of the flow-down surface component 91 can be brought close to each other, so that the outer part 94 can be formed thin to vibrate (wave) the outer part 94 in response to the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

In other words, the part that is displaced by the activation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the second operating unit 700 and is visible to the player can be positioned not only inside the window portion defined by the center frame 86, but also outside the window portion.

In the above first embodiment, the recessed portion of the base plate 60 arranged on the front side of the illumination board 777 is arranged on the left and right lower sides of the game area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86, below the outer rail 62, or inside the opening of the specific winning hole 65a, as long as it does not affect the flow of the game balls.

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the partition member 708 is formed from a resin material with little deflection (high rigidity resin material), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 708 may be formed from a rubber-like resin material. In this case, the partition member 708 can be elastically deformed to adhere to the illumination board 705 and the thin film cover member 712, thereby preventing light leakage.

In the above-described first embodiment, the distance between the reference O1 and the positions where the left and right load members 761 abut against the plate-like displacement member 730 is the same, and the left and right load members 761 are disposed in front of the reference O1. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
The distance between the position where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 contacts the reference O1 may be different.
The left and right load members 761 may be arranged differently with respect to the reference O1.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which the forward inclined portion of the load member 761 is configured not to collide with the front cover member 770, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the load member 761 may be configured in a positional relationship in which the upper wall of the front cover member 770 and the front surface of the load member 761 abut against each other as the load member 761 is displaced toward the front side. In this case, even if the load member 761 is displaced toward the front side by the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the load applied from the front cover member 770 can return the arrangement of the load member 761 to the rear side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the left and right drive units 760 are generally symmetrical, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flexibility of the load members 761 may be changed by (locally) changing the density, thickness, or material of the vertical rod-shaped extensions 761c of the left and right load members 761.
When the driving unit 760 is driven at the left or right side, the position at which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 stops can be changed depending on whether the driving unit 760 is driven at the left or right side.
It is possible to increase the number of positions in which 30 can be stopped.

Furthermore, even if the left and right drive units 760 remain configured approximately symmetrically on the left and right, the same effect can be achieved by making the shape of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 asymmetrical (for example, by providing extra thickness on the lower base side of the loaded portion 733 on one side).

In the above first embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to be displaced up and down while maintaining its posture, while the load member 761 may be configured to change its posture. This allows the load member 761 to be configured in a state (posture) in which it is easy to bend and in a state (posture) in which it is difficult to bend, even when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not change its posture.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the overhanging portion 761d is integrally formed with the load member 761 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the overhanging portion 761d and the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c may be formed separately by configuring the overhanging portion 761d to be able to be assembled to the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c in an assembly manner such as fastening, engaging, fitting, fitting, or clamping. In this case, even if the overhanging portion 761d is damaged, the load member 761 up to the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c can be reused, and only the overhanging portion 761d needs to be replaced, so that the size of the maintenance member can be reduced compared to the case where the entire load member 761 is replaced.

In the first embodiment, the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are disposed on the plate-shaped displacement member 7
In the above description, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is misaligned in the direction of the rotation axis, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the centers of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b may be arranged at positions overlapping with the same plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In this case, the direction of change in the distance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be made perpendicular to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
This can be utilized to change the holding force of the hollow member 740, rather than the posture change.

That is, the increase in the inclination angle of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 mechanically narrows the gap between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b, and this can be utilized to sandwich from the front and rear the pair of front and rear protruding columnar portions 743 of the hollow member 740. Therefore, as the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes, the holding mode (ease of vibration) of the hollow member 740 can be changed.

In this case, the clearance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the protruding columnar portion 743 may be configured to be equal to the clearance between the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743. In this case, the holding force of the front and rear protruding columnar portions 743 increases similarly, so that it is easier to suppress changes in the posture of the hollow member 740 compared to a case in which the side with the larger clearance is allowed to rotate around the side with the smaller clearance as an axis.

In the first embodiment, the small receiving portions 735 supporting the pair of protruding columnar portions 743 of the hollow member 740 are separately disposed in front of and behind the reference O1 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
For example, a pair of the reference points O1 may be arranged together in front of or behind the reference point O1.

In the first embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is described as being rotatably displaced, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to slide in the left-right direction, and the small receiving portion 735 may be configured as a long groove that is long in a direction inclined with respect to the sliding direction. In this case, the inclination of the front small receiving portion 735a and the inclination of the rear small receiving portion 735b are provided on opposite sides with respect to the sliding direction, so that the clearance between the protruding columnar portion 743 and the small receiving portion 735 can be changed with the sliding displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. This allows the holding mode (ease of vibration) of the hollow member 740 to be changed.

In the above-described first embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported on a left-right axis and displaced, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be supported in a manner that allows it to rotate on a front-rear axis (for example, a manner in which it is supported by a ball joint).

In addition, the plate body (
The long board extending in the left and right direction may be supported as a separate body. In this case,
Depending on the driving mode of the drive unit 760, the plate body of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be caused to undergo a combination of rotation about a left-right axis and rotation about a front-rear axis.

In addition, the support portion may be configured to have a vertically long hole shape, so that the support portion 731 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be displaced in the vertical direction.
0 rotational movement, but also a change in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 caused by one of the left and right axially supported portions 731 being displaced up and down compared to the other (corresponding to a rotational displacement about an axis in the front-rear direction).
This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 are displaced in accordance with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 .

In the first embodiment, the deflection of the load member 761 is caused by a change in the load direction based on a change in the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a core extending along the displacement direction of the load member 761 may be configured to pass through the load member 761, and the length of the core entering the load member 761 may change with the displacement of the load member 761 (the core may be configured to slip out). In this case, the rigidity of the load member 761 changes based on the presence or absence of the core, and the deflection of the load member 761 may be caused with this change in rigidity.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which one of the parts that decelerates the driven member 163 is configured to be displaceable, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
In this case, both of the deceleration portions (lower restricting portion 175 and upper restricting portion 176) may be made of the same material.

In the above-described second embodiment, the biasing spring SP21 does not directly contact the driven member 163, but applies a biasing force via the contact member 2190, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the biasing spring SP21 may be configured to directly contact the driven member 163.

In this case, the arrangement (contact point) of the biasing spring SP21 with respect to the driven member 163 can be set arbitrarily. For example, a plurality of contact points may be provided between the (single or multiple) biasing spring SP21 and the driven member 163, and the contact points may be divided between the rotating shaft side and the rotating tip side with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 in between.

In the above third embodiment, the shape of the long hole portion 3406 is extended in the displacement direction of the lift plate 430 to form a section in which the attitude of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even during the displacement of the lift plate 430, thereby blocking the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 in that section, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a slipping portion (an angular region in which the gear teeth are not engaged) may be provided between the arc-shaped gear portion 444b and the rotating gear 441 to form a section in which the rotating gear 441 does not rotate even when the arc-shaped gear portion 444b rotates, thereby blocking the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444.

In the above third embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement width of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the lift plate 430 corresponds to the vertical position of the arm tip of the arm-equipped rotating gear 3441, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arm-equipped rotating gear 3441 may not be a gear with gear teeth formed all around, but may be configured to have a protruding portion partially formed so as to function as a cam, and the protruding portion may apply a load to the relative displacement member 442 to displace the relative displacement member 442. In this case, the displacement mode (displacement speed, displacement width) of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the lift plate 430 can be designed as desired depending on the design of the protruding portion of the arm-equipped rotating gear 3441 and the relative displacement member 442.

In the fourth embodiment, the detection sensor 4782 is configured to detect the thin protruding portion 4761g which is part of the load member 4761 and is easily damaged, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection sensor 4782 may be configured to detect the thick protruding portion 4761f.

In the above fifth embodiment, the adjustment member 5782 protrudes upward from the lower side of the load member 761 and presses the front side surface of the load member 761, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the adjustment member 5782 may be configured to protrude forward from the rear side of the load member 761.

In addition, for example, an opening is formed on the inner side of the load member 761, and the adjustment member 578 is inserted into the opening.
In this case, the ease of bending of the load member 761 can be changed by the degree of insertion of the adjustment member 5782.

In the first and fifth embodiments, the load member 761 is the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2
In the above description, the load member 761 is driven by a DC motor, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the drive device for driving the load member 761 may be configured by a motor such as a DC motor. This allows the load member 761 to be driven without being limited to a momentary drive mode.

In the sixth embodiment, the protrusion 945b is formed in a generally triangular shape in rear view, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed in a circular shape in rear view. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during opening and closing operations of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operations of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in a different shape when viewed from the rear side or the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a curved shape, the protrusion 945b slides along the sliding groove 966a2, and the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b changes.
5b is made larger, the projections 945b become more likely to move by that amount, and the vane members 945 become more likely to rattle.

In contrast, the protrusion 945b is formed in a circular shape when viewed from behind, and the sliding groove 966a2 is provided to extend linearly in the displacement member 966, so that the sliding groove 966a
Therefore, the gap between the inner wall of the blade member 945 and the protrusion 945b can be kept constant. Therefore, the rattling of the blade member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operation of the blade member 945 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, since the sliding groove 966a2 extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the extension length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, the amount of weight reduction required for forming the sliding groove 966a2 can be reduced, and the rigidity of the displacement member 966 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detectors SE1 is
In the above description, the screw is for fastening the ball entrance member 953 and the passage member 955 together, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the screw may be for fastening the specific winning port unit 950 and the front unit 940 together.

In the sixth embodiment, the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific winning port unit 950 is formed to protrude in an annular shape.
For example, the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1 may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as it moves away from the ball receiving member 953 toward the passage member 955.

In this case, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling or the like to secure a path from the specific winning port 65a to the drive unit 960, the direction of the drill's progress can be shifted (slid sideways) laterally (in the direction moving radially outward from the axis of the circular protrusion 953c) on the outer surface of the circular protrusion 953c (the outer surface of the enlarged portion), making it easier to damage (sever) the wiring HS3.

In the sixth embodiment, the play area (front) of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980
Although the above description is given of a case where the side is visible to the player, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
A sticker displaying information in the form of letters or figures may be attached to the play area (front) side of the sorting unit 980.

In this case, the ball sending passage TR0, the first passage TR1, and the second passage TR
Since information consisting of letters or figures is displayed on the playing area (front) side of 2, even when the sorting unit 980 is viewed through the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930), the display can be used as a landmark (reference position) to allow the player to easily recognize the position of the sorting unit 980. Note that the form of information display is not limited to the attachment of a sticker, and may be ink printing or two-color formation.

In the tenth embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is disposed between the first member 11967 and the second member 11968.
In the above description, the displacement member 11966 is formed from two members, 11967 and 11968, and the blade portion 11968c is formed on the second member 11968, which has a larger displacement amount than the first member 11967. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
6) The amount of displacement by the transmission member 965 may be increased, and a blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of one member.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the pair of blade members 945 are in the closed state, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is in a state of being protruded from the main body portion 961a by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
When the pair of blade members 945 are in the closed state, power may be applied to the main body portion 961a so that the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is retracted into the inside of the main body portion.

In this case, the displacement members 11966 and 12966 are provided with a drive unit 960 (solenoid 6) that controls the cutting of the illegal object (string) inserted into the inside of the rolling path of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c by the blade parts 11968c and 6683 and the second blade part 12966c2.
10) can be used to perform the cutting operation. That is, the blades 11968c, 6683 and the second blade 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (clamping direction) by using electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be made large. This makes it easier for the blades 11968c, 6683 and the second blade 12966c2 to cut illicit objects.

In the eleventh embodiment, the main body 961 a of the drive unit 960 and the annular portion 961
In the above description, the coil spring SP1 is disposed in a compressed state between the main body 961a and the annular portion 961c, and when power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a, the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body 961a (the shaft 961b is pulled into the inside of the main body 961a), but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a spring in a stretched state may be disposed between the main body 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960, and when power is applied to the main body 961a, the annular portion 961c may be displaced in a direction away from the main body 961a.

In this case, as in the above, the blades 11968c, 6683 and the second blade 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (clamping direction) using electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased, making it easier for the blades 11968c, 6683 and the second blade 12966c2 to cut illicit objects.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiments. For example,
It may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which, once a jackpot is hit, the expected jackpot value is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times), including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and in which the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as a pachinko machine with a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and in which the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area.
It may also be implemented as various gaming machines, such as a gaming machine that combines a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after a coin is inserted and a symbol pay line is determined, a control lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device which variably displays a string of identification information consisting of a number of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information as a final display, and the variable display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a control lever), and is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button), or
A slot machine in which, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the varying display of identifying information stops and is displayed as a fixed value, and if the combination of identifying information at the time of the stop is a specific one, a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player is generated. In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

A specific example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that changes and displays a series of symbols, and then determines and displays the symbols, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a certain amount of balls are inserted based on a certain operation (button operation), the symbols start to change due to the operation of an operating lever, for example.
For example, when a stop button is operated or a certain time has passed, the variation of the symbols is stopped, and if the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, a special game is started in which a certain amount of game value is awarded to the player, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the game value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the game value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 138 to 181, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as an 18th embodiment. Fig. 138 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th embodiment, Fig. 139 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 140 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 138, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 138), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 139) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be detached from the back side. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 141) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 138) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top and extends to the front side, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 138), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 141). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 139) or when changing the content of the super reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks by lighting or blinking the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 138), is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed on the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 139) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 on the pachinko machine 10.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window portion 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43.
When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of ball lending unit 40, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the degree display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., a so-called cash machine, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to commonize a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top on the left side thereof for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17.
On the right side of the ball 10, there are provided an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 which are operated by a player to hit a ball into the front of the game board 13. The operating device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball while the touch sensor 51a is being pressed.
The handle 51 is fitted with a touch sensor 51a and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") that receives the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 139, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) and a windmill (not shown) for guiding balls, as well as rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 138). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 138) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 139.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 138) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where the shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 141) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of FIG. 139) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 139) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 139), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 141), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole 640, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors.
The ED is configured so that each LED has a different light emission color (e.g., red, green, blue), and by combining these light emission colors, it is possible to indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 using a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first prize slot 64 and the second prize slot 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it judges there is a jackpot, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be judged here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B have
Not only will the stopping pattern after the change indicate whether the lottery result is a jackpot or not,
In the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is displayed.

Here, a "15R chance jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R chance jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. Also, a "15R normal jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15,
This is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state and also results in a time-saving state for a specified number of fluctuations (e.g., 100 fluctuations).

Moreover, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (during the probability change), in other words, a game state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. The high probability state (during the probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of a hit of the second symbol described later is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than in the probability change. Furthermore, the time-saving state (during the time-saving state) in the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, only the probability of a hit of the second symbol is increased, and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. On the other hand, the normal state of the pachinko machine 10 refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability change state nor a time-saving state (
Neither the probability of winning the jackpot nor the probability of winning the second symbol has increased.

During the probability of winning or the time limit, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the second winning slot 64
The time for which the electric role 640a associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and is set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric role 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 than when the electric role 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the probability change or time reduction, the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big win lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability variation or time reduction, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second winning port 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times that the electric role 640a opens per win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability variation or time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the second winning port 640
At least one of the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric role 640a is opened per one win may be changed. Also, during the probability variation or the time reduction, the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric role 640a is opened per one win may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second pattern may be changed to be higher than during the normal period.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, into which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by winning the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 (initial winning), and displays the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B.
The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 made up of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs a variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the through gate 67, and a second pattern display device (not shown) made up of an LED that displays a variable display of the second pattern using the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. In addition, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 141), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 141) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" symbol and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

When the variable display in the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of "○"), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric device 640a attached to the second winning hole 640.
is configured to be in an activated state (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability variable or time-saving mode than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability variable or time-saving mode, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during the normal game state.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, and the player is given more chances to open the electric device 640a of the second winning port 640. Therefore, during the probability variation and the time reduction, the ball can be easily entered into the second winning port 640.

In addition, if the state is made such that the ball is likely to enter the second winning slot 640 during the probability variation or time reduction by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric device 640a for one win, etc., the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed is set shorter during the probability variation or time reduction than during normal play, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of openings of the electric device 640a for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display unit 80, and are configured to allow a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gates 67, a lottery for a second symbol is held. After the lottery for a second symbol is held, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery for a second symbol is a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery for a second symbol is a miss, a "×" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that the balls pass through the through gate 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is also displayed by turning on the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). Four second symbol reserved lamps are provided, the maximum number of reserved balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, or by the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used.
The lighting of the symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times).
The number of the first pattern display device 37A is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. The position where the through gate 67 is attached is not limited to the left or right of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example.
Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by 37B, the second symbol reserved lamp does not need to be lit.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 141), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 640 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 141), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole.
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640; however, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be five.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and is usually in a closed state (reduced state) so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol display device displays a "○" symbol as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 640a is in an open state (expanded state) so that the ball cannot enter the second winning opening 640.
This makes it easier to get into the 40.

As mentioned above, during the special and time-limited modes, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal modes.
In addition, the time it takes for the second pattern to change is short, so the second pattern will change to "○".
The pattern becomes easier to be displayed, and the number of times that the electric role 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability variation and time reduction, the time that the electric role 640a is open becomes longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability variation and time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 than during normal times.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 640, and the ball is always in a state where it can win a jackpot.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric device associated with the second winning port 640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning port 640. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the first winning port 64, which does not have an electric device, so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot").
) It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by winning through the first winning slot 64, thereby gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery.

On the other hand, during the probability variation or time reduction, the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the second winning port 64
Since the electric device 640a associated with number 0 is likely to be in an open state and it is easy to win at the second winning port 640, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aim for the ball to win at the second winning port 640, resulting in a 15R guaranteed jackpot.

In addition, since the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "hitting from the right" and for the second winning hole 640 by "hitting from the left". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment does not require the player to change the way of shooting the ball between "hitting from the left" and "hitting from the right" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way of shooting the ball.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 148) is provided below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning hole 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when an LED corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. Also, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

An attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the stamps, etc. affixed to the attachment space K1 can be viewed through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 71. The outlets 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning hole 65a.

A large number of nails are set on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

As shown in FIG. 140, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92 forming the protective cover and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively.
The box base 4 includes a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house the control devices and the boards.

Furthermore, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and it is difficult to peel off the sealing seal in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102,
If an attempt is made to forcibly open the board box 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover side will be cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 141). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11
A variable resistor control knob 121 is provided on the power supply unit 115, and a RAM erase switch 122 is provided on the power supply unit 115. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed.
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the big win lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
It executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting the display on 7A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing various areas, counters, flags, and the like, as well as the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (
In addition, even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and retains data (backup).
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage, the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power supply is turned on (including the time of the power supply being turned on due to the power outage being resolved, the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power supply was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (Fig. 392) when the power supply is cut off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up processing (Fig. 391) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (Fig. 390) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus.
The payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern hold lamp, a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close to the front side using the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric gimmick are connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
15, a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and the R
Various processes are executed based on the AM cancellation signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives a payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a process to be performed in the event of a power failure.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111.
11 but is not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
Under the condition that the control handle 51 is not being operated (i.e., the control handle 51 is not being operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the control handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114, which controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the display control device 114, which controls the display of variable effects (variable display) and advance notice effects.
The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 that is composed of an address bus and a data bus.
The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the other devices 2.
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352 .

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 can display a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, sound corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice and lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the third pattern display device 81 based on a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113.
The display control device 11 controls the display of the third symbol variation effect in the game.
4 transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display command, thereby
1 can be coordinated with the audio output from the audio output device 226.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 140). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the power failure of the MPU of the main control device 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 and the power failure monitoring circuit 252. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts of DC stabilization, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts,
The power supply unit 251 determines that a power outage (power failure, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 detect the occurrence of an NMI
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 140) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Figure 142 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in Figure 142, the operation device 300 is disposed in the left-right center of the inner frame 12 when viewed from the front (i.e., the left-right center of the pachinko machine 10).

The operating device 300 is equipped with a tilting device 310 that can be tilted by being pushed in by the player, and is disposed in an area defined by a storage recess 17a that is recessed in the front-to-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 138).

A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the storage recess 17a that is at least large enough for the player's fingers to fit comfortably in. This allows the player to prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by placing their fingertips on the rear side of the top surface of the tilting device 310 (see Figure 144).

In addition, since the player holds the operating handle 51 with his/her right hand, the tilt device 310 is often operated with his/her left hand. Therefore, the following explanation will be given on the assumption that the player operates the tilt device 310 with his/her left hand.

Figure 143(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, Figure 143(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIb-VIb in Figure 143(a), Figure 144(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 144(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb in Figure 144(a).

In Fig. 143 and Fig. 144, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that Fig. 143 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in a first state (initial state in this embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces up and down, and Fig. 144 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in a second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and backward by rising from the first state around the axis portion 314. Note that Fig. 144 illustrates an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 with an imaginary line.

The tilt device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The tilting device 310 is operated by the player, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display saying "Press the button") appears on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 139).

Here, for example, when the tilt device 310 is pressed by dropping the hand forcefully downward, as in the case of pressing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 shifts toward the front depending on the degree of tilt, and the palm of the hand and the operation surface 312a1 are likely to rub against each other. This gives the player a sense of discomfort, and makes it possible to inhibit the player from performing the pressing operation by dropping the hand forcefully downward.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 144, by placing the fingertips near the shaft 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm of the hand downward using the fingertips as a fulcrum, the user can comfortably press and operate the tilting device 310 while keeping the palm integrated with the operating surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to operate the device by lowering the palm downward using the fingertips as a fulcrum, rather than dropping the hand forcefully downward. This reduces the degree of impact applied to the tilt device 310 by the player's operation, and reduces the possibility of damaging the tilt device 310.

With reference to Figures 145 and 146, differences in how the tilt device 310 appears from the player's viewpoint will be described. Figure 145 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in Figure 143, and Figure 146 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in Figure 144. Note that in Figures 145 and 146, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. Also, in Figure 146, an example of a player's hand pressing in to operate the tilt device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in Figures 145 and 146, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible from the player's viewpoint in the first state, but in the second state, its area is reduced to the point where it is not visible (the operation surface 312a1 is directed outward from the player's viewpoint). This allows the tilting device 310 to look significantly different between the first and second states.

In this embodiment, the protective lens member 311i is configured so that its area gradually increases in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, and accordingly, the amount of light from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 149) arranged inside the operating device 300 is gradually perceived as increasing, so that the difference in the amount of light (degree of brightness) that is visible to the player between the first state and the second state increases, and the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first state and the second state.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, by placing the outer side of the little finger near the axis 314 (see FIG. 144) of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward with the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating the wrist around the axis), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pressed and operated while keeping the palm integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward using the outer side part of the little finger as a fulcrum, rather than dropping the hand downward with force.
This reduces the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation, and reduces the possibility of the tilting device 310 being damaged.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to Figs. 147 and 148. Fig. 147 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and Fig. 148 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in Fig. 147, the operation device 300 is supported so that the tilting device 310 can rotate around the shaft portion 314 disposed at the rear end.

Also, as shown in FIG. 148, a voice coil motor 352 that applies a straight impact to the tilting device 310 and detection sensors 324L, 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state are arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds the tilting device 310 from below.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that provides the driving force, etc., on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the tilting device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320 by using a large area inside the lower frame member 320. This makes it possible to ensure a large amount of movement of the tilting device 310.

149 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 150 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 149 and FIG. 150, the operating device 300 is a tilting device 310 having ring members BR1 arranged at the left and right ends at the rear end (the end at the back of the paper in FIG. 149), a lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from below and that determines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a member that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above, has a recessed portion that is arranged opposite the lower frame member 320, and has a large opening in the center, It mainly comprises an upper frame member 330 that is fastened to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is positioned between the upper frame member 330 and the lower frame member 320, and determines the position of the tilting device 310 in the second state; a drive unit 340 that is fastened to the underside of the lower frame member 320 and transmits a driving force to the tilting device 310 via an arm member 345 that constitutes a link mechanism with the tilting device 310; and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened to the drive unit 340 and protects the drive unit 340 by covering it from three sides: left and right and rear.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member with the left and right portions of the bottom surface sloping downwards as they approach the front, and is mainly composed of a bottom plate portion 321 that slopes downwards as it approaches the front, a horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-like member arranged horizontally at the upper end of the back side of the bottom plate portion 321, a lower bearing portion 323 that is a semicircular receiving portion that opens upward near the rear end of the horizontal portion 322 and receives the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 from below, a left detection sensor 324L and a right detection sensor 324R that are arranged in a pair on the left and right sides below the bottom plate portion 321, and an opening portion 325 that is an opening that is opened by cutting the portion located below the horizontal portion 322 at the center position of the bottom plate portion 321 in the left-right direction.

The bottom plate portion 321 determines the end of movement of the tilting device 310 by abutting against the tilting device 310, and has multiple openings through which parts of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321.

The bottom plate portion 321 mainly comprises a transmission hole 321a drilled in the center of the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and insertion holes 321c drilled symmetrically on the left and right of the opening 325.

The transmission hole 321a is positioned in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed with a size that allows the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 with the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 protruding below the bottom plate portion 321, a linear driving force can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole configured to allow the detection pieces 311gL, 311gR protruding from the underside of the tilting device 310 to pass through. The detection pieces 311gL, 311gR protruding from the detection hole 321b are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L, 324R, making it possible to detect the attitude of the tilting device 310.

The insertion hole 321c is configured to a size that allows the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted therethrough, and the through hole is formed to a position that avoids interference with the arm member 345 when the driving device 340 is operated.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a plane that fastens the lower frame member 320 and the drive unit 340, and is provided with a locking portion 322a that extends upward from its upper surface and has a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so that it does not move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction that moves the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are positioned so that the distance (position of the detection groove) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 is equal on the left and right.

A photocoupler type sensor refers to a sensor that has a light-projecting part that projects light and a light-receiving part that receives the light from the light-projecting part, and is arranged in an approximately U-shape with a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the part to be detected can be inserted.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotating claw members 347, and the like to enter into the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width of the opening 325 is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotating claw members 347.

On the other hand, in terms of the vertical width, the drive unit 340 is configured to position the LED unit 341f so that it protrudes upward (see FIG. 154(b)), so that the LED unit 341f can be positioned above the opening 325 by pushing the drive unit 340 upward after the LED unit 341f passes through the opening 325, and the vertical width of the opening 325 can be made shorter than the vertical width including the distance from the LED unit 341f to the rotating claw member 347.

The upper frame member 330 mainly comprises an opening 331 which is an opening large enough to catch the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and an upper bearing portion 332 which is arranged opposite the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320, is configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom, and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 mainly comprises a main body cover 351 which is configured to be separable in the vertical direction so as to cover three directions except the front side and which is fastened and fixed to the lower end of the drive device 340, a voice coil motor 352 which is supported on the bottom plate of the main body cover 351 and is arranged on the front side with its vibration surface facing diagonally upward toward the front, and a left side detection sensor 353L and a right side detection sensor 353R which are detection sensors having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351.

In addition, FIG. 149 shows the main body cover 351 partially torn to make the right detection sensor 353R, which is located on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L from the center, visible.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 147), the voice coil motor 352 is disposed in such a position that the vibration surface is approximately parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320. This allows the driving force to be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 extends downward through the transmission hole 321a via the protruding protrusion portion 311j.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340.
44R is disposed inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
The detection holes 344eL, 344eR of the disc cams 344L, 344R are connected to the detection sensors 353L, 353R.
It is possible to detect whether the disc cams 344L and 344R are disposed in a specific phase by detecting whether the disc cams 344L and 344R are disposed in the detection grooves of the detection grooves 53R or not.

In this embodiment, the left and right disc cams 344L, 344R of the drive unit 340 have the detection holes 344eL, 344eR at different phases.
There are two types of specific phases that can be detected by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to Figures 151 to 153. Figure 151(a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, Figure 151(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in Figure 151(a), and Figure 151(c) is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device 310 taken along line XIVc-XIVc in Figure 151(a). Figure 152 is an exploded front perspective view of the tilting device 310, and Figure 153 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in Figures 151 to 153, the tilting device 310 mainly comprises a case body 311 consisting of a box-shaped body with fan-shaped sides and openings at the top and bottom, a lid 312 fastened to the case body 311 in a manner that covers the upper opening of the case body 311, a spherical lens member 313 fastened to the front end of the lid 312 and hanging down, an axis portion 314 arranged in a manner that it is sandwiched between the rear end portions of the case body 311 and the lid 312, a torsion spring 315 wound around the axis portion 314, and a ring-shaped ring member BR1 that inseparably fastens the case body 311 and the lid 312 at the rear end portions of the case body 311 and the lid 312.

The case body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a that is inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening portion 311b that is opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, a cylindrical shaft portion 311c that extends from flanges that protrude downward along the left and right edges of the opening portion 311b to the left and right center side, a recessed portion 311d that is a recess with a semicircular cross section that supports the shaft portion 314 at the rear end, an insertion groove 311e that is a groove that is positioned so that both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped groove that supports the torsion spring 315. It mainly comprises a hook-shaped portion 311f that engages the center portion 315b of the base plate portion 311a, a pair of left and right detection pieces 311gL and 311gR (see FIG. 152) extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a, an extension portion 311h that extends a predetermined distance forward from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a, a protective lens member 311i that is disposed above the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a and is shaped along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 and is made of a light-transmitting material, and a protruding protrusion portion 311j that protrudes downward from the center in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by a player, the bottom plate portion 311a is pushed by the lower frame member 3
This is the portion that comes into surface contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the housing 20 .

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 154(b)) of the driving device 340, and serves as a part that transmits the driving force between the driving device 340 and the shaft portion 311c.

The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 152) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left detection piece 311gL has a longer protruding length than the right detection piece 311gR.

In this embodiment, the left detection piece 311gL is protruded compared to the right detection piece 311gR so that the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL, centered on the shaft 314, is approximately 3° (the rotation angle by which the tilting device 310 rotates from the first state (see FIG. 159) to the end of the push-in position (see FIG. 160)).

The extension portion 311h is a portion that protrudes from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i toward the front side, and is configured in such a manner that, in the assembled state (see FIG. 147), it protrudes to a position where it is engaged with the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330.

The protective lens member 311i is configured to have a curved shape when viewed from above (see FIG. 151(a)) and also when viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 151(c)), so it is configured to easily release (dissipate) the load when the player presses the tilting device 310. This can improve the durability of the tilting device 310.

The protruding protrusion 311j protrudes at a right angle from the underside of the bottom plate 311a and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. When the player pushes in the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 166), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321a and its tip protrudes below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 153, the cover 312 mainly comprises a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened to the underside of the top plate member 312a, and a cylindrical member 312c that fixes the intermediate plate member 312b to the top plate member 312a and has a cylindrical shape large enough to surround the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 143).

The cylindrical member 312c is arranged in such a way that, while improving the strength of the lid 312 by providing axial rigidity, in the first state (see FIG. 143), the positional relationship of the cylindrical member 312c keeps the light irradiated from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 inside the cylindrical member 312c, while in the second state (see FIG. 144), such limitation is lifted, allowing the light from the LED device 341f to be irradiated over a wide area.

The lens member 313 is formed from a light-transmitting material, with the upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange-like shape, the extended ends being configured in a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i, and having a spherical shell portion 313a formed in the center in a spherical shell shape.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft 314 with a pair of left and right torsional portions, and includes two arms 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the torsional portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of torsional portions.

Next, the drive unit 340 will be described with reference to Figures 154 and 155. Figure 154(a) is a front view of the drive unit 340, Figure 154(b) is a side view of the drive unit 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in Figure 154(a), and Figure 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 340.

As shown in Figures 154 and 155, the drive unit 340 comprises a main body member 341 that forms a framework by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, a drive motor 342 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 342, a pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam 344R) fixed non-rotatably to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343, an arm member 345 that is journaled on a connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and an arm member 345 that is journaled on a shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341. It mainly comprises a release member 346 that is supported on the same axis as the release member 346 and abuts against the first protrusion 344c1 and the second protrusion 344c3 of the disc cam 344 in the rotational direction, a rotating claw member 347 that is supported coaxially with the release member 346 and moves relative to it as the release member 346 rotates, a first spring SP1 that is a coil spring-like spring member that generates a biasing force in a direction that causes the rotating claw member 347 to fall downward, and a second spring SP2 that is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates a biasing force between the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 in a direction that causes them to move away from each other.

The main body member 341 is bent backwards at the left and right sides to form a motor housing portion 3 having a U-shape when viewed from above.
41a, a shaft support hole 341b that is drilled at the same position of the plate portion that is arranged opposite to the motor housing portion 341a and that supports the disk cam 344, a shaft portion 341c that is protruding in the left-right direction at a position shifted toward the front side from the shaft support hole 341b in a manner that the shaft portion 341c has an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b, an extension portion 341d that is extended from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, and a lighting support portion 341 that is extended in the front upper direction from the motor housing portion 341a.
and an LED device 341f that is disposed on the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and has an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on its upper surface that refracts light (
This allows the light from the LED device 341f to be emitted evenly both upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 is disposed inside the motor housing portion 341 a in the U-shape.
1a。 1a is fastened to a fixing member 342a.

The fixed member 342a axially supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342, and also supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 mainly comprises a support hole 345a that is bored in a circular shape at one end and is supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344, and a guide hole 345b that is bored in a rectangular shape at the other end and through which the shaft 311c (see Figure 152) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end opposite the shaft support hole 345a abuts against the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end is formed at a position sufficient to allow the disc cam 344 to rotate one or more revolutions.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to Figure 156. Figure 156 is an exploded front perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 mainly comprises a cylindrical member 343a to which disc cams 344 (see Figure 155) are fixed at both ends, a transmission gear 343b that is supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotating gear of the drive motor 342, a movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction, and a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b.

The cylindrical member 343a has fixing portions 3 having a D-shaped cross section, which fix the disk cam 344 to both ends.
The right fixed portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixed portion 343a1.
The length of the spring 43c is such that it can move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when it moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b has a circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted,
and a clutch portion 343b2 in which unevenness is formed along the axial direction at circumferential positions about the axial center from a surface arranged opposite the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (freely rotate) relative to the cylindrical member 343a.

The movable clutch 343c is provided with an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
and a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2 and that has projections and recesses along the axial direction at circumferential positions about the axial center from a surface that is disposed opposite the transmission gear 343b.

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have a top angle of about 100.
It is composed of a mountain-shaped convex portion and a concave portion of 90°.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a. Therefore, the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b engages with the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c, and the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. This makes it possible to rotate the disc cam 344 (see FIG. 155) by rotating the drive motor 342.

The movable clutch 343c is normally biased by the force of the coil spring 343d.
On the other hand, when an axial load is applied to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed part 343b is engaged with the movable clutch 343b2.
43a2 and is configured to be movable away from the transmission gear 343b along the axis 43a2.

The disc cam 344 will be described with reference to Figure 157. Note that the left disc cam 344L and the right disc cam 344R are roughly mirror images of each other, and the only difference is the position of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR. Therefore, only the left disc cam 344L will be described, and the description of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

Figure 157(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXa in Figure 155, and Figure 157(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXb in Figure 155. Note that Figures 157(a) and 157(b) show the state in which the drive unit 340 is in the first initial state as shown in Figure 155.

As shown in Figures 157(a) and 157(b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having portions projecting from both sides of a circular disk, and mainly comprises a central shaft portion 344a projecting inward in a cylindrical shape at the center of the disk, a circular rib 344b projecting inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, an engagement rib 344c projecting inward as a rib of lower height than the circular rib 344b on the outside of the circular rib 344b and having portions projecting outward in the radial direction at two locations, a connecting pin 344d projecting outward in a cylindrical shape between the circular rib 344b and the engagement rib 344c and connected to the arm member 345 (see Figure 155), and a detection hole 344eL drilled near the outer periphery.

The right disc cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is disposed at a position that forms an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and otherwise has a shape that is a mirror image of the left disc cam 344L.

The central shaft portion 344a has an inner periphery with a D-shaped cross section that engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 156), and an outer periphery that is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 155). In other words, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is provided in a protruding position so that it can abut against the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 155) when the disc cam 344 is journaled in the journal hole 341b. This makes it possible to prevent the disc cam 344 from becoming misaligned.

In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c mainly comprises a first protruding portion 344c1 that protrudes radially outward at a position shifted 80° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 157(a)) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed, a first retracting portion 344c2 that retracts radially inward at a position shifted by angle θ1 (angle θ1 = 50° in this embodiment) from the first protruding portion 344c1, a second protruding portion 344c3 that protrudes radially outward again at a position shifted by angle θ2 (angle θ2 = 150° in this embodiment) from the first protruding portion 344c1, and a second retracting portion 344c4 that retracts radially inward at a position shifted by angle θ3 (angle θ3 = 20° in this embodiment) from the second protruding portion 344c3.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is positioned at a position with the greatest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 159). In other words, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the central shaft portion 344a to the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state.

The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 will be described with reference to Figure 158. Note that the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, and since their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one will be described.

Figures 158(a) and 158(b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. Note that Figure 158(a) illustrates a large angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the end position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 relative to the release member 346, and Figure 158(b) illustrates a small angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 relative to the release member 346.

The state in which the release member 346 rotates upon contact with the disc cam 344 is between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is positioned at the middle position of the long guide hole 347b) (see Figure 172).

As shown in Figures 158(a) and 158(b), the release member 346 is formed from a roughly rectangular plate member, and mainly comprises an axle support hole 346a that is supported by the axle portion 341c (see Figure 155), a protruding pin 346b that is protruding in the plate thickness direction in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the axle support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and an engagement portion 346d that is configured as a portion that protrudes with the maximum diameter from the axle support hole 346a.

The engagement portion 346d is configured to be able to come into contact with the engagement rib 344c (see FIG. 157) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 147). In this embodiment, the outer periphery of the engagement portion 346d is curved, allowing for smooth contact with the engagement rib 344.

The rotating claw member 347 is formed from a roughly rectangular plate member, and mainly comprises a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 155), a guide elongated hole 347b that is drilled along an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a so as to be able to guide the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346 (drilled with a size that includes the movement trajectory of the protruding pin 346b on the inside), an insertion hole 347c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, a hook-shaped portion 347d that is protruding downward in a hook-like shape at the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 347a, and a pull-down hole 347e that is drilled so as to be able to insert the end of the first spring (see FIG. 155).

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 158(a), the release member 346 is positioned at the end position in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 158(a)) relative to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, in the large angle state, when a load is applied in the downward direction to the engaging portion 346d, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate together in the backward rotation direction, whereas in the large angle state, when a load is applied in the upward direction to the engaging portion 346d, only the release member 346 rotates, and the position of the rotating claw member 347 can be maintained until the small angle state shown in FIG. 158(b) is reached.

Next, an example of the operation of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to Figs. 159 to 161, an example of the operation will be described in which a player performs a pushing operation when the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state. Note that in the following explanation of the example of the operation, the illustration of the lid 312 will be simplified to make it easier to understand.

Figures 159 to 161 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). Note that Figure 159 shows the state in which the tilt device 310 is in the first state, Figure 160 shows the state in which the player has pushed the tilt device 310 from the state shown in Figure 159 to its final position, and Figure 161 shows the state after the tilt device 310 has returned from the state shown in Figure 160 to the first state. Also, Figures 159 to 161 show an example of the player's hand repeatedly operating the tilt device 310.

As shown in FIG. 159, the tilting device 310 receives a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 159) from the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked onto the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347. This maintains the tilting device 310 in the first state. That is, in the first state, a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 159) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 159, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is positioned in front of the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (OFF state, see FIG. 148).

As shown in FIG. 160, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3° in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 160). In this state, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection state of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 310 has been pushed in from the first state by the player.

When the tilting device 310 is operated by tapping repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 159 and the state shown in FIG. 160 are repeated alternately. However, depending on the time interval between taps by the player, the torsion spring 315 may not be able to return the tilting device 310 in time, and the tilting device 310 may end up being pushed in at an intermediate position, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this could be addressed by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in this embodiment, increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 requires increasing the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155), which pushes down the tilting device 310 against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and this necessitates an increase in the size of the drive motor 342. This causes problems such as increased product costs and an inability to save space.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 is pressed in, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing effects through vibration motion is disposed in a position facing the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 161, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 160, the return operation of the tilting device 310 can be performed quickly without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315.

Here, if the voice coil motor 352 were to always be driven when the tilting device 310 was pressed, for example, when a player pressed and held down the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 would be driven, placing an unnecessary burden on the player, which could make the player feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times that the right detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and when that number is equal to or greater than a threshold value, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, thereby improving the load for returning the tilt device 310 only when the player performs a continuous tap operation.
The player can operate the tilt device 310 comfortably.

Next, with reference to Fig. 162 to Fig. 167, a case where the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating motion (tilting motion) up and down from the first state (first operation mode) will be described. Fig. 162 to Fig. 167 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in Fig. 143(a).

162 shows the state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 163 shows the state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated in the forward direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 162 and the posture of the rotating claw member 347 has changed, FIG. 164 shows the state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated in the forward direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 163 and the posture of the rotating claw member 347 has returned to its original state, FIG. 165 shows the state in which the tilting device 310 rotates back and forth, FIG. 166 shows the state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state shown in FIG. 165, and FIG. 167 shows the state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated in the forward direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 166 and has reached the second initial state in which the second protrusion portion 344c3 of the engagement rib 344c abuts against the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346. In addition, in Figure 165, the position of the tilt device 310 in the state of Figure 164 is shown by imaginary lines, and in Figure 166, an example of a player's hand pressing and operating the tilt device 310 is shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 162, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is limited by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction can be ensured. This provides the effect of the cylindrical member 312c improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312, and the effect of adjusting the irradiation intensity of the light of the LED device 341f when the tilting device 310 is in the first state.

As shown in FIG. 163, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 163) from the state shown in FIG. 162 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, the first protrusion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 pushes down the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, causing the release member 346 to rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 163), and accordingly the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where it is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310.

The change in the position of the release member 346 is caused by the first retraction portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 34
6d. During this time, the tilting device 310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 (rotating clockwise in FIG. 163).

At this time, in the state shown in Figures 162 and 163, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is positioned at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position farther from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344), and the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is regulated by the arm member 345, so that the upward movement of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 164, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 164) and the first retraction portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 164) due to the biasing force of the first spring SP1, and the rotating claw member 347 returns to a state in which it can engage with the tilting device 310 (the state shown in FIG. 162). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction to increase the angle between the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 164), so the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 163 (large angle state).

In this state, the cover 312 retracts above the LED device 341f, and the area of the protective lens member 311i that is visible from the player's viewpoint increases compared to the tilt device 310 in the first state, so that the light from the LED device 341f can also be emitted in the forward direction (toward the player). Therefore, by changing the attitude of the tilt device 310, the direction of travel of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, improving the light presentation effect.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, making it possible to detect the starting point of the up and down reciprocating movement.

As shown in FIG. 165, by repeatedly rotating the disc cam 344 a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 165) from the state shown in FIG. 164, and then rotating the disc cam 344 the same amount in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 165), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. 165. This can change the way the tilting device 310 appears to the player, and can increase the player's attention to the operating device 300.

Also, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that protrudes above the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the repeated up and down movement of the tilting device 310 within the range of angle D1. Therefore, the amount of light that can be seen through the protective lens member 313 out of the light irradiated from the LED device 341f can be changed in response to the movement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 165, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is disposed on the front side of the LED device 341f (left side of FIG. 165), so the range of light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-back and up-down directions, but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 165).

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c (see FIG. 162). In contrast, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is widened by the lens member 313.

In other words, according to this embodiment, not only can the light irradiation direction be changed in accordance with the change in the posture of the tilting device 310, but the light irradiation range can also be changed at the same time. This can increase the attention given to the tilting device 310.

As shown in Figure 166, when the tilting device 310 is moving up and down as in Figure 165, the player can push in and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of Figure 165, the load applied to the tilting device 310 by the arm member 345 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c simply moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when a player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 165, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the player due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155). At this time, the player is only subjected to the load from the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. This prevents a large load from being applied to the player when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, allowing the player to operate the operating device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 165 to the end of its pushing, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 166), and then the tilting device 310 is pushed in so that the bottom plate portion 311a passes the hook portion 347d, and the rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, after the player presses down on the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 moves up and down as shown in FIG. 165, if the player releases his/her hand, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state.

In the state shown in FIG. 166, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (repeats movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). This allows an effect in which vibration is transmitted to the player who continues to place their hand on the tilt device 310 after pushing the tilt device 310 all the way to the end.

In other words, the voice coil motor 352 can be used to generate a driving force that assists in lifting the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 161) and to create a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 that is positioned at the end of the push-in position.

As shown in FIG. 167, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 sinks into the underside of the lower frame member 320, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is only effective when the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end.

Therefore, in comparison with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilt device 310 is pressed, whether or not vibration is generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of the pressing is determined.
Only the player who pressed the tilt device 310 can be made aware of this.

Here, whether or not the lottery results in a big win does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, in which case the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means is reduced.

In contrast to this, this embodiment is configured in such a way that the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only by pushing in the tilting device 310 .

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when a jackpot is confirmed, the sense of anticipation when the player presses the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the value of the tilting device 310 as a means of reading ahead can be improved.
This makes it easier for the player to operate the tilt device 310, thereby increasing the value of the tilt device 310 as an operating means.

As shown in FIG. 167, the drive unit 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating the disc cam 344 a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 166) from the state shown in FIG. 166 until the second protrusion 344c1 abuts against the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346.

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 abut in the rotational direction, similarly to the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first protrusion 344c1 abuts against the engagement rib 344c, whereas in the second initial state, the second protrusion 344c3 abuts against the engagement rib 344c.

The driving device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 166 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 162 by rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 166) from the state shown in FIG. 166 until the first protrusion 344c1 of the engagement rib 344c passes the engagement portion 346d, and then rotating it in the reverse direction. In this case, a load is applied to the release member 346 in a direction that pushes up the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 166) while maintaining the position of the rotating claw member 347.

Next, referring to Figs. 168 to 171, a case (second operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting operation) from a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the second initial state will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (tilting operation) up and down via the second state.

Figures 168 to 171 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). Figure 168 shows the state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in Figure 168) from the state shown in Figure 167, and the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated backward (clockwise in Figure 168). Figure 169 shows the state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated a predetermined amount from the state shown in Figure 168 and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state. Figure 170 shows the state in which the disc cam 344 rotates back and forth from the state shown in Figure 169. Figure 171 shows the state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state shown in Figure 170. In addition, in Figure 170, the position of the tilt device 310 in the state of Figure 169 is shown by imaginary lines, and in Figure 171, an example of a player's hand pressing and operating the tilt device 310 is shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 168, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 168) from the state shown in FIG. 167, the engagement between the rotating claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting device 310 moves in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 is not pulled by the disc cam 344 via the arm member 345, and the tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short period of time.

As shown in FIG. 169, by rotating the disc cam 344 by approximately 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 168 (a state in which the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 are disengaged), the attitude of the disc cam 344 can be set to an attitude in which the tilting device 310 can be placed in the second state (an attitude in which the disc cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. 167 in a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the disc cam 344 from interfering with the state change (the disc cam 344 rotates slowly by a specified angle, and it takes a long time for the tilting device 310 to reach the second state).

As shown in FIG. 170, by repeatedly rotating the disc cam 344 a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 169) from the state shown in FIG. 169, and then rotating the disc cam 344 the same amount in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 169), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 170. This can change the way the tilting device 310 appears to the player, and can increase the player's attention to the operating device 300.

Furthermore, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that protrudes above the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the repeated up and down movement of the tilting device 310 within the range of angle D2. Therefore, the amount of light that can be seen through the protective lens member 313 out of the light irradiated from the LED device 341f can be changed in response to the movement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 170, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is disposed on the front side of the LED device 341f (left side of FIG. 170), so the range of light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-back and up-down directions, but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 170).

In other words, according to this embodiment, not only can the light irradiation direction be changed in accordance with the change in the posture of the tilting device 310, but the light irradiation range can also be changed at the same time. This can increase the attention given to the tilting device 310.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 170 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. 165. That is, in this embodiment, as the manner of up-down movement of the tilting device 310, two types of up-down movement (tilting movement) of the up-down movement shown in FIG. 165 and the up-down movement shown in FIG. 170 can be performed immediately after the restriction on the upward movement of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, two types of manners can be created in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342.

This allows the operating member 310 to have a different meaning (e.g., a different sense of anticipation of a big win) in its operating mode compared to when the operating member 310 performs the same action every time, and can increase the player's attention to the tilting device 310.

As shown in Figure 170, when the tilting device 310 is moving up and down as in Figure 169, the player can push in and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of Figure 170, the load applied to the tilting device 310 from the arm member 345 is only a load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated that lifts the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when a player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the state shown in FIG. 170, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the player due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155). At this time, the player is only subjected to the load from the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. This prevents a large load from being applied to the player when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, allowing the player to operate the operating device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 to the pushed-in state, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 171), and then the tilting device 310 is pushed in so that the bottom plate portion 311a passes the hook portion 347d. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, after the player presses down on the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 170 in which the tilting device 310 moves up and down (see FIG. 171), if the player releases his/her hand, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state.

Next, referring to Figures 172 to 174, we will explain the operation of returning the disk cam 344 to the second initial state after the player performs the pushing operation without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347. This method makes it possible to alternate between the two types of up and down movements (tilting movements) of the tilting device 310, or to perform one of them continuously.

Figures 172 to 174 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). Figure 172 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in Figure 172) from the state shown in Figure 171 and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in Figure 172), Figure 173 shows a state in which the rotating cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in Figure 172) beyond the state shown in Figure 172 and then rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in Figure 172) to a position where the disc cam 344 abuts against the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, and Figure 174 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in Figure 173) from the state shown in Figure 173 and the left detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 is turned on. In addition, in Figures 172 to 174, an example of a player's hand swinging from above onto the tilting device 310 is shown in imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 171) from the state shown in FIG. 171, the second retraction portion 344c4 of the engagement rib 344c comes into contact with the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346, changing the position of the release member 346, but the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346 only moves in the space of the guide elongated hole 347b of the rotating claw member 347, and the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in the position shown in FIG. 172.

In other words, by further rotating the disc cam 344 in the rearward direction (clockwise in FIG. 172) from the state shown in FIG. 172, the restriction of the lift of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 can be maintained in the process of releasing the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346.

From the state shown in FIG. 172, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 172), and then the rotating cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 172), thereby bringing the drive unit 340 into the second initial state as shown in FIG. 173.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor to detect the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disc cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 173, but it is possible to go through the second initial state shown in FIG. 173. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 173, it is possible to perform up and down movement (tilting movement) from the second initial state within the range of angle D2, as described above.

Here, a player who presses the tilting device 310 may keep his/her hand on the tilting device 310 after performing the pressing operation, even if there is no special display such as "long press."

This is an action that occurs, for example, when a person is so focused on the performance that they forget to release the hand that has been pressing down on the tilting device 310. In this case, the tilting device 310 does not rise even when the restriction by the rotating claw member 347 is released, so the position of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating motion (forward/reverse switching motion) to move the tilting device 310 up and down (tilting motion) within the range of angle D2. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if this rotation could be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 could be extended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 173) from the state shown in FIG. 173, while the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 152) of the lower frame member 320 maintains the ON state (while the tilting device 310 is tilted to the first state or below), the disc cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and is controlled in such a manner that the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the left side detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 151) of the protective cover device 350 is in the ON state, as shown in FIG. 174.

In the state shown in Figures 173 and 174, the tilt device 310 does not rise because the player's hand is placed above the tilt device 310. In this case, the change from the state shown in Figure 173 to the state shown in Figure 174 occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

As a result, as shown in Figures 172 to 174, it is possible to avoid having the drive motor 342 move back and forth (switch between forward and reverse) when the player's hand remains on the upper side of the tilt device 310 and the tilt device 310 cannot be moved up or down, thereby reducing the burden on the drive motor 342 and extending the motor's lifespan.

When the disc cam 344 is rotated a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 168) from the state shown in FIG. 173, if the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 152) remains ON, the disc cam 344 may not be rotated as is, but may be controlled to immediately rotate in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. 173. This allows the drive unit 340 to be quickly returned to the second initial state, and unnecessary load is not placed on the drive unit 340, thereby extending the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155).

With reference to Figures 175 and 176, we will explain the measures taken to prevent damage to the drive device 340. Figure 175 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a), and Figure 176 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in Figure 175. Note that in Figure 175, the player's hands are shown in imaginary lines grabbing and fixing the tilt device 310 when it is in the second state, and in Figure 176, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is omitted from the illustration.

As shown in Figure 175, when a player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the position shown in Figure 175. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see Figure 176) starts to rotate, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see Figure 155) may break down.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate freely relative to the transmission shaft rod 343a that fixes the disc cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from breaking down.

That is, as shown in FIG. 176, when the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disc cam 344 fixed, the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that power is transmitted via the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. This disengages the transmission gear 343b from the movable clutch 343c, allowing the transmission gear 343b to spin freely. This makes it possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

In addition, when the player is not holding the tilt device 310, the tilt device 310 passes through the first state when the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lower frame member 3
If the left side detection sensor 324L of 20 does not become ON (if the tilting device 310 does not become the first state), it is determined that the player is intentionally performing the unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while a message is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to notify the player to stop the gripping action, for example.

This makes it possible to select the case where the player is intentionally performing an erroneous operation, and only at that time, to notify the player to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the drive motor 342 early,
Failures can be prevented.

In addition, when the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor is shifted from the initial phase of the disk cam 344, which has the same phase as the movable clutch 343c. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled (by the number of steps, etc.) continuously from the state before the phase shift occurred, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is ON.
By detecting this state, it is possible to identify that the drive device 340 has entered the first initial state, and by resuming control of the drive motor 352 with that state as the initial position (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342), control can be performed in a state in which the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are once again aligned, even after a phase shift has occurred between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c.

In this way, when the tilt device 310 is operated to perform a performance, the drive motor 342
This prevents a discrepancy between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 through the rotation control and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be operated appropriately to perform a performance.

As shown in FIG. 176, the movable clutch 343c is configured to rotate freely relative to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the direction of rotation of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity for this will be explained below.

Figures 177, 178, 179, and 180 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). Note that Figure 177 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (in the direction of the arrow CCW) from the state shown in Figure 175, and Figure 178 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 has further rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW from the state shown in Figure 177. Also, Figure 179 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (in the direction of the arrow CW) from the state shown in Figure 175, and Figure 180 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 has further rotated in the direction of the arrow CW from the state shown in Figure 179.

As shown in FIG. 178, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves up through the first state shown in FIG. 177 toward the second state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to remain in the first state shown in FIG. 179 and maintain that state.

This is not only because the engagement rib 344c operates in a manner that moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 179 to the state shown in FIG. 180, but also because when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is not released even if the engagement rib 344c abuts against the release member 346. In other words, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c abuts against the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted up by the engagement rib 344c, and no load is generated in the direction pushing up the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

When the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's perspective, the operations from FIG. 175 to the first state shown in FIG. 177 and FIG. 179 appear to be the same, but the movement from the first state onwards becomes a different operation as shown in either FIG. 178 or FIG. 180.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be caused by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 176); however, the difference in the change in drive sound caused by the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may make the player aware of the type of control being performed, allowing the player to understand the performance that is about to be performed, which may dampen the player's interest. Also, if the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the burden placed on the drive motor 342 becomes large, and there is a risk that the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 175 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is changed, only the direction of rotation of the drive motor 342 changes, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of rotation from the drive mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the expectation of the performance changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in expectation while the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state. This can improve attention to the operation of the tilting device 310.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 rotates further, the player can grasp the change in the expectation of the presentation by checking whether the tilting device 310 rises up or remains in the first state, so the player can be encouraged to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 when it reaches the second state (see FIG. 175) and is moved by the drive motor 342 toward the first state.

In other words, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, the player can be prevented from gripping the tilting device 310, thereby preventing the tilting device 310 and the drive device 340 from being overloaded due to the player operating the drive motor 342 incorrectly when the drive motor 342 is being driven.

In addition, since there is no need to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 176) in order to produce the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, it is possible to eliminate the burden placed on the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped, thereby improving the durability of the drive motor 342.

Next, referring to Figure 181, we will explain a case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player presses down on the tilting device 310 (third operating mode).

Figure 181 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). Figure 181 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in Figure 181) from the first initial state of the drive device 340 (see Figure 162), and also illustrates with imaginary lines the outline of the tilt device 310 after the disc cam 344 has been rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in Figure 181) at an angle such that the first protrusion 344c1 does not pass through the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346.

As shown in FIG. 181, when the release member 346 is pressed down by the first protrusion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the disc cam 344 is rotated back and forth while maintaining a positional relationship in which the first protrusion 344c1 and the first retraction portion 344c2 do not pass through the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, thereby allowing the tilting device 310 to reciprocate up and down while maintaining the position of the release member 346.

In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in a rotated backward direction (clockwise in Figure 181) in accordance with the change in posture of the release member 346, so when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the manner shown in Figure 181, even if the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 do not engage, and when the player releases his or her hand, the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state (the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotating claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continues to move up and down.

Therefore, for example, by providing a difference in presentation between the first and second operation modes described above and the third operation mode shown in FIG. 181 as the operation modes of the tilt device 310, it is possible to give a different meaning to the operation of the operating device 300 than in the past. That is, according to this embodiment, the player presses in the tilt device 310 and then releases the tilt device 310, and only then can the player know whether the tilt device 310 was moving up and down in the first or second operation mode, or in the third operation mode.

As a difference in presentation, if a difference is provided in which the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first or second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pressed down and then released, and the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state) than when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even after the tilting device 310 is pressed down and then released), the player can have the opportunity to recognize the expectation of whether or not a jackpot will occur not only when pressing the tilting device 310, but also when releasing the hand from the tilting device 310, so that more opportunities can be provided for the player to pay attention to the operation device 300. This can increase the attention paid to the operation device 300.

Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 182 to 186. In the 18th embodiment, the state of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up. However, the operating device 2300 in the 19th embodiment is configured such that the drive unit 2340 includes a sliding claw member 2348, and the sliding claw member 2348 slides when the release member 2346 is pushed up. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted. First, the differences from the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 182 and 183.

Figure 182(a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the 19th embodiment, Figure 182(b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and Figure 182(c) is a side view of the release member 2346.

Figures 183(a) and 183(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the sliding claw member 2348, showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the sliding claw member 2348.

Figure 183(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 has rotated to the end position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 relative to the release member 2346, and Figure 183(b) shows a small angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 has rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 relative to the release member 2346. Note that the state in which the release member 2346 rotates by contacting the disc cam 344 is between the large angle state and the small angle state (the state in which the protruding pin 346b is positioned at the middle position of the long guide hole 347b) (see Figure 185).

As shown in Figures 182 and 183, the driving device 2340 (see Figure 184) mainly includes a release member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a sliding claw member 2348 that is disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 across the rotating plate member 2347 and is configured to be able to slide along an arcuate path centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see Figure 184) as functional members that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see Figure 184). Note that in the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the sliding claw member 2348, components that have the same functions as those in the 18th embodiment are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 182(a), the sliding claw member 2348 mainly comprises a curved portion 2348a formed from a curved shape in such a manner that it is slidably fitted into the rail portion 2347f, a hook-shaped portion 2348b that protrudes forward (to the left in FIG. 182) in a hook-like shape from the upper end of the curved portion 2348a, a reinforcing portion 2348c that is arranged in a layered manner in the thickness direction of the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 184(a)) and is formed from a curved plate shape that is wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a protruding pin 2348d that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c toward the release member 2346.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f.
When fitted inside 347f, it is configured to be slidable relative to the rotating plate member 2347.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has a shape similar to that of the hook-shaped portion 347d of the 18th embodiment, and a magnetic material is disposed on its underside. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that attracts the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion that faces the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 opposite the surface that faces the sliding claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 183), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a, thereby reinforcing the sliding claw member 2348.

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is configured by a metal rod that is inserted into and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e.
6 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348d is inserted into the functional slot 23
The slide claw member 2348 slides when pressed by the side surface of 46e.

The rotating plate member 2347 has a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, and an insertion hole 347c.
In addition to the pulling down hole 347e, it is provided with a rail portion 2347f that guides the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348, and a support elongated hole 2347g through which the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted.

The rail portion 2347f is formed from a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end of the rotating plate member 2347, and the opposing side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions are formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see Figure 184) when the rotating plate member 2347 is positioned at the end position in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in Figure 183).

The support elongated hole 2347g, like the rail portion 2347f, is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 184). When the sliding claw member 2348 is slid with the protruding pin 2348d inserted into the support elongated hole 2347g, the sliding claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the sliding claw member 2348 can be prevented from wobbling.

The release member 2346 includes a shaft support hole 346a, a protruding pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, an engagement portion 346d, and in addition, a functional elongated hole 2346e which is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction.

The functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and mainly comprises a first long hole portion 2346e1 configured as a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a, and a second long hole portion 2346e2 extending from one end of the first long hole portion 2346e in a direction inclined toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 183, when the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347 and changes state between the large angle state and the small angle state, the sliding claw member 2348 slides along the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f.

The functional slot 2346e is configured as a slot that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, so there is no time delay with respect to the movement of the release member 2346, and the movement speed of the release member 2346 is directly reflected in the movement speed of the protruding pin 2348d.

In other words, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the sliding claw member 2348 will slide quickly, whereas if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed down, the operating speed of the sliding claw member 2348 will also be slowed down.

As shown in FIG. 183(a), in the large angle state, even if the sliding claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along an arc centered on the pivot hole 346a, so the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional long hole 2346e is directed in a linear direction passing through the pivot hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding.

That is, in this embodiment, although the sliding claw member 2347 may slide when the release member 2346 rotates, the sliding claw member 2347 will not slide when pulled in the large angle state. Therefore, as in the 18th embodiment, by engaging the sliding claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310 when the tilting device 2310 is placed in the first state, the lifting of the tilting device 2310 can be restricted.

Figures 184 to 186 are drawings illustrating the change in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). Note that Figure 184 illustrates a state in which the second retraction portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is disposed below the engagement portion 346d of the release member 2346, Figure 185 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in Figure 184) from the state shown in Figure 184, and the engagement portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up, and Figure 186 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in Figure 185) from the state shown in Figure 185, and the release member 2346 is returned by the biasing force of the second spring SP2.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 is fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and is equipped with a magnet portion 2311a1 made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 184, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook portion 2348b are attracted to each other by magnetic force. When the player pushes in the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 2310 changes its position, causing the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook portion 2348b to release their attraction, so no large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the sliding claw member 2348.

As shown in FIG. 185, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the sliding claw member 2348 slides upward in conjunction with the movement. At this time, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook portion 2348b are attracted to each other by magnetic force, so when the release member 2346 moves quickly, the tilting device 2310 also moves quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the sliding claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, the sliding claw member 2348 can be rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in Figure 185) to move the tilting device 2310 upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the restriction on the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is released (fourth operating mode). In other words, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the upward direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 186, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 185) due to the biasing force of the second spring SP2. This causes the slide claw member 2348 to return to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in Figs. 184 to 186, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes, in addition to the first to third operation modes described in the eighteenth embodiment. The more operation modes there are, the easier it becomes for a player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of predicting the outcome by associating the operation mode with the expectation of a big win, and the more attention the operation device 2300 will attract from the player.

In addition, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 185, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by the lifting of the sliding claw member 2348, the tilting device 2310 is lifted by magnetic attraction between the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the sliding claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310. Therefore, by ensuring a large magnetic force, the load applied to the tilting device 2310 can be increased compared to when the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315.

In other words, normally, when a player places his/her hand on the top of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the sliding claw member 2348 is released, the weight of the hand prevents the tilting device 2310 from rising, but if the magnetic force is strong enough to lift the weight of the hand, the tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner that lifts the player's hand in the state shown in FIG. 185.

This allows for a difference in the load in the upward direction (the force that tries to maintain the position of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load) when the tilting device 2310 is raised. Therefore, a player who places his/her hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expectation of a jackpot, players can more easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of predicting what will happen next, thereby increasing the attention the operation device 2300 commands from players.

Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 187 to 189. In the 18th embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R are capable of detecting whether the tilt device 310 is in the first state or in a state pressed down by the player. However, the operation device 3300 in the twentieth embodiment is configured in such a way that the detection sensors 324L and 324R are capable of detecting whether the tilt device 3310 is in an intermediate state between the first state and a state pressed down by the player, or in a state pressed down by the player. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 187 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the 20th embodiment. As shown in Figure 187, the tilting device 3310 includes a right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311, and a left detection piece 3311gL extending at the same position as the left detection piece 311gL in the 18th embodiment (a position opposite the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 3310 and located at the center position in the rotation axis direction). The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR, and a shorter extension length than the left detection piece 311gL in the 18th embodiment.

188(a) and 188(b) are side views of the operating device 3300. In FIG. 188(a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 188(b), the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed in. In FIG. 188(a) and 188(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown with imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown with solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are shown diagrammatically.

As shown in FIG. 188(a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 188(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the end of the push-in operation, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, while the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

By detecting the change in state of each of these detection sensors 324L, 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and a state where it is pushed to the end of its pushing, it can be detected whether it is in the middle of being pushed in or in the middle of returning.

That is, if the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in an intermediate state between the first state and the state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing.
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it is possible to determine that the tilt device 3310 is in the middle of a pressing operation.

189(a) and 189(b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 189(a) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed in to the end of the push-in, and FIG. 189(b) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is moving from the end of the push-in to the first state. Also, in FIG. 188(a) and 188(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated with solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are illustrated diagrammatically.

As shown in FIG. 189(a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed in to the end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in FIG. 189(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state where it is positioned at the end of the push-in, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, while the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

If the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and a state where it is pushed to the end of its thrust. However, by detecting that the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R has changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway back to the first state.

Here, when transmitting the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 3310 to provide an auxiliary load for lifting the tilting device 3310, it is possible to provide a load for lifting the tilting device 3310 more effectively by colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is ascending, rather than colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is descending.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 189(b), the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each detection sensor 324L, 324R, and the voice coil motor 352 is driven when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of rising and has not yet reached the first state, thereby effectively transmitting the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 3310 and improving the rising speed of the tilting device 3310.

Here, if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is reduced to reduce the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155), the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed in from the first state will be slowed down. In this case, even if the player operates the tilting device 3310 by tapping repeatedly, the lifting action of the tilting device 3310 will not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the player will not be able to perform the repeated tapping operation comfortably.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the speed at which the tilting device 3310 rises can be improved compared to when the tilting device 3310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, so that repeated tapping of the tilting device 3310 can be performed comfortably.

Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 190 to 192. In the 18th embodiment, the detection sensors 324L, 324R can detect whether the tilt device 310 is in the first state or in a state pressed by the player. However, the operation device 4300 in the 21st embodiment detects the operating speed of the tilt device 4310 during the change from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 based on the detection result. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 190 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 in the 21st embodiment. As shown in Figure 190, the tilting device 4310 has a front detection piece 4311k that is provided in a plate-like protrusion from the front side of the protruding protrusion portion 311j of the case main body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 191) arranged on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of each detection sensor 4321d, 4321e.

191(a) and 191(b) are side views of the operating device 4300 illustrating the time series of the pushing operation of the operating device 4300. In FIG. 191(a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 191(b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 191(a) and the front detection piece 4311k passes the lower detection sensor 4321e downward. In addition, in FIG. 191(a) and FIG. 191(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated with imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e, and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated with solid lines.

As shown in Figures 191(a) and 191(b), the lower frame member 4320 is provided with an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged in a position in which the detection groove faces in a direction that allows the front detection piece 4311k to pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at 20° intervals on an arc orbit centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player pushes in the tilt device 4310 from the state shown in FIG. 191(a) to the state shown in FIG. 191(b), the front detection piece 4311k passes through the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e in order. By detecting the interval between the timing of these passes, it is possible to determine the speed of operation of the tilt device 4310, and based on this determination, it is selected whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352.

Here, when the tilt device 4310 is pressed from the second position, the pressing length is longer (the period during which acceleration can be applied is longer), and therefore the upper limit of the operating speed of the tilt device 4310 is higher compared to an operating button that is pressed for a shorter length. Therefore, if there is no means of deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilt device 4310 sturdy as a safety measure for when the player presses it with all their strength, which creates the problem that the tilt device 4310 tends to be heavy.

In addition, an elastic spring can be built in to apply a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is positioned near the end of the push-in period, and the biasing force of the elastic spring can be used to decelerate the tilting device 4310. However, in this case, for players with weak strength or players who choose to push the device gently, the constant large reaction force near the push-in position can be a burden to the push-in operation, making them more likely to feel tired, and there is a risk that they will not be able to push the tilting device 4310 comfortably.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 based on the timing interval at which the ON and OFF states are switched between, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, if the timing interval between when the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is not driven, whereas if the timing interval is shorter than the predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is driven.

As a result, when the operating speed of pushing the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily pushed in and operated even with a weak force.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the tilt device 4310 is fast, the tilt device 4310
As a reaction force against the tilt device 4310, not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 can be applied at the end of the pushing. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilt device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 191(b), the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 protrudes downward from the lower frame member 4320, and the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is pushed out in advance toward the side close to the tilting device 4310.

As a result, the tilting device 4310
In comparison with the case where the tilting device 4310 collides with the voice coil motor 352 , the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

192(a) and 192(b) are side views of the operating device 4300. Note that FIG. 192(a) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the end of the push-in, and FIG. 192(b) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 has reached the end of the push-in.

In addition, in Figures 192(a) and 192(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown with imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e, and the voice coil motor 352 are shown with solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 192(a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the voice coil motor 352 while the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of reaching the end of the push-in from the first state.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the protruding protruding portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so the force of the pushing operation can be consumed in moving the voice coil motor 352 in the contraction direction. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 can be applied by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 is not structured to apply a load by friction like a disc brake, but is structured to apply a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to components is suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 192(a), the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact, so by gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the state shown in FIG. 192(a) (the left detection sensor 324L is ON), the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, the reaction force felt by the player at the time when the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the voice coil motor 352 can be suppressed, while the deceleration effect of the tilting device 4310 as it moves from the first state toward the end of the push-in can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 192(b), when the tilting device 4310 is positioned at the end of the push-in position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned ON. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts against the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 192(b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (repeats movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). This allows an effect in which vibration is transmitted to the player who keeps his/her hand on the tilt device 4310 after pushing the tilt device 4310 to its end.

In other words, the voice coil motor 352 can be used to reduce the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and to create a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 located at the end of the pushing operation.

Next, the operation device 5300 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 193 to 205.

In the 18th embodiment, the case was described where the voice coil motor 352 was vibrated to transmit vibrations to the player who pushes in and operates the tilting device 310, but the operating device 5300 in the 22nd embodiment is configured in such a way that the lower frame member 5320 is provided with a drive motor 5411 that rotates a weight member 5412 that is arranged at an eccentric position of the center of gravity, and vibrations are transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted. First, the differences in configuration from the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 193 and 194.

Figure 193 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 in the 22nd embodiment, and Figure 194 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in Figures 193 and 194, in the operating device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is replaced with a lower frame member 5320, the drive unit 340 is replaced with a drive unit 5340, and the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350, as compared to the operating device 300 in the 18th embodiment. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 are configured in the same manner as in the 18th embodiment.

A vibration device 5400 equipped with a drive motor 5411 is disposed on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 that is fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch is disposed on the drive device 5340. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to Figures 195 to 198, and then the disk cam 5344 will be described.

Figure 195 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in Figure 195, the vibration device 5400 mainly includes a transmission device 5410 that rotates the fan-shaped weight member 5412, a flexible member 5420 that houses the transmission device 5410 and the drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410 and is made of a flexible material, and a housing member 5430 that is formed in a bottomed dish shape with an open top, houses the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 in separate compartments, and is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320.

The transmission device 5410 mainly comprises a drive motor 5411 formed from a rotary-driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and a portion corresponding to the axis of the fan supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 .

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of fixing parts 5411a arranged on the left and right sides on the side from which the shaft projects and formed from a metal material in a flange shape.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra, and is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is driven to rotate, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 fluctuates, and the weight member 5412 is configured in such a manner that the entire drive motor 5411 can vibrate.

The flexible member 5420 includes a main body 5421 into which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and which is formed in the shape of a cylindrical container having a bottom on the side opposite to the side into which the drive motor 5411 is inserted, rib-like leg portions 5422 which, in an assembled state, are provided on the left and right radially outward and downward sides of the main body 5421 in a pair of rib-like protruding configurations, and a posture maintaining portion 5423 which connects between the rib-like leg portions 5422 which are provided on the left and right radially outward and downward sides of the open portion side of the main body 5421 and into which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded.
and a pair of columnar protruding leg portions 5424 protruding upward from the top surface of the main body portion 5421.

The depth of the container shape of the main body 5421 is configured to be the same as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the main body 5421, the end face on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end face on the opening side of the main body 5421 are formed on the same plane. In this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-like legs 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body 5421, but since the posture maintaining portions 5423 are arranged on the left and right sides, the rib-like legs 5422 on the left and right sides have a greater resistance to deformation than the rib-like legs 5422 on the lower side.

Since the protruding leg portion 5424 is provided in a protruding column shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load at one point when the flexible member 5420 comes into contact with the tilting device 310 described later.
The resolution of the deformation degree 20 can be finer.

The housing member 5430 includes a first housing portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are housed, and a second housing portion 5432 adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 and which houses the weight member 5434.
The second storage section 5432 in which the first storage section 5431 and the second storage section 5432 are stored.
and a groove 5433 recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of the connector 432.

The depth of the first storage section 5431 is set so that the lower rib-like leg section 5422 touches the bottom of the flexible member 54
20 is inserted and the load applied during insertion is released (assembly load released state), the depth at which the protruding leg portion 5424 projects from the top surface is determined.

The depth of the second storage section 5432 is such that it is recessed further outward than the rotational trajectory of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load-released state, while it is deep enough to interfere with the rotational trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the player applies load to the protruding leg section 5424 and the flexible member 5420 is deformed (assembly load state).

The groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly wider than the diameter of the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension extending slightly downward beyond the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled loaded state.

196(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 196(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 196(a), and FIG. 196(c) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 taken in the direction of the arrow LIXc in FIG. 196(a). Note that in FIG. 196(a), the portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially cross-sectionally shown. Also, in FIG. 196(a), the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the terminal region S52, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed in three degrees by the player from the first state and placed at the end position of the push, are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 196(a), the protruding leg portion 5424 is protruding in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the axis of rotation. This makes it possible to maximize the amount of deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 in response to changes in the angle of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 193).

As shown in FIG. 196(b), in the assembly load-released state where no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424, the weight member 5412 is separated from the second housing portion 5432.

As shown in FIG. 196(c), the protruding legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left-right center line of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the extension direction. Therefore, the protruding legs 5424 can be pushed in evenly on the left and right sides by the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, which prevents the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right when pushed in (tilting left and right on the paper surface of FIG. 196(b)), and the protruding legs 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture of FIG. 196(b).

As shown in FIG. 196(c), the bottom plate 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a pair of through holes 5321d drilled therein so that the protruding legs 5424 can be inserted therein. The through holes 5321d have a width dimension in the left-right direction that is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the protruding legs 5424, so that when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by a player and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is pressed against the protruding legs 5424, deformation of the protruding legs 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. This suppresses deformation of the shape of the protruding legs 5424, and makes it easier to translate the main body 5421 together with the protruding legs 5424 downward (downward in FIG. 196(b)).

Figures 197(a) and 197(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along line LXa-LXa in Figure 196(a). Note that Figure 197(a) illustrates the assembly load-released state, and Figure 197(b) illustrates the assembly load state after the protruding leg portion 5424 has been pushed into the first storage portion 5431 with the tilting device 310 occupying the terminal region S52 (see Figure 196(a)). Note that the outlines of the second storage portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in Figures 197(a) and 197(b), when a load is applied to the vibration device 5400 from the assembly load-free state to the assembly load state, the protruding leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 are deformed, and the drive motor 5411 and weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 197(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force to push back the tilting device 310, and this force becomes stronger as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420, so that it is possible to mitigate the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 194) when the tilting device 310 is pushed into the end position. In addition, because the load is caused by the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is reduced to reduce the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 194), the rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in from the first state (a state in which the tilting device 310 is positioned at the raised end, see FIG. 175) will slow down. In this case, even if the player operates the tilting device 310 repeatedly, the rising movement of the tilting device 310 will not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the player will not be able to perform the repeated operation comfortably.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the speed at which the tilting device 310 rises can be improved compared to when the tilting device 310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, thereby making it possible to perform repeated tapping operations of the tilting device 310 more comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 197(a), in the assembly load-released state, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second storage section 5432, regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 starts to drive in the assembly load-released state, vibrations due to the weight member 5412 coming into contact with the second storage section 5432 do not occur.

In addition, vibrations of the drive motor 5411 itself and micro-vibrations caused in the drive motor 5411 by the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 and are prevented from being transmitted to the housing member 5430. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the drive motor 5411 starts to drive.

As shown in FIG. 197(b), in the assembled load state, the main body 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is configured in such a way that the upper protruding leg 5424 and the lower rib-like leg 5422 are deformed, allowing vertical displacement.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the ribbed legs 5422 arranged on the underside of the main body 5421 changes to a state in which they are more compressed vertically, and the ribbed legs 5422 harden slightly. This weakens the vibration damping effect of the ribbed legs 5422, making it easier to transmit the vibrations generated by the vibration device 5400 to the player.

In addition, the main body 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like legs 5422 extend along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body 5421 and are arranged in a pair on the left and right at uniform intervals from the central axis, so that when the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the radially outer ends of the rib-like legs 5422 are deformed in a manner of moving outward to the left and right (towards the direction of smaller resistance at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-like legs 5422) (see FIG. 197(b)). In this case, the protruding direction of the rib-like legs 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body 5421 has a left-right component, so that the elastic force of the rib-like legs 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. Therefore, in the assembled load state, the left-right load that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second housing portion 5432 collide can be partially absorbed by the elastic force of the rib-like legs 5422 on the lower side of the main body 5421. This makes it possible to suppress misalignment of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction.

Figures 198(a) and 198(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in Figure 196(a).

198(a) and 198(b) show the assembled load state, with 198(a) showing the state where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and 198(b) showing the state where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located below the rotation axis. 198(a) and 198(b) show the state of the vibration device 5400 when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by the player and occupies the terminal area S52.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in this embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located on the upper side in an assembled loaded state, the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 is located at a position where the distance from the lower bottom of the second housing portion 5432 is a distance Q1. Note that in this embodiment, the distance Q1 is set to a distance equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412 comes into contact with the second receiving portion 543.
2. Therefore, compared to the assembled load-released state, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes, and a different type of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

When the weight member 5412 and the second storage section 5432 come into contact with each other, a repulsive force is generated that moves the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 198(b)). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second storage section 5432 approach and move away from each other along the movement direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194), the direction of the repulsive force can be easily directed along the movement direction of the tilting device 310 (upward). This repulsive force causes the flexible member 5420 to move upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412, reinforcing the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194) upward (in the direction along the movement direction of the tilting device 310).

In this way, the force pushing the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194) upward can be adjusted by combining two separately generated forces: the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second storage section 5432.

That is, from when the tilting device 310 starts to contact the protruding leg portion 5424 until it moves toward the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 196 (a)), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is generated as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and after the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the repulsive force of the weight member 5412 and the second storage portion 5432 is added to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased near the terminal region S52, so that the tilting device 310 can be easily operated and the impact during the pushing operation can be well mitigated. This adjustment can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, complex control is not required.

In this embodiment, as in the 18th embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL is different from the length of the right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 194), and the difference in detection timing is used to determine whether the operating speed of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194) is greater than a specific speed (e.g., 40 km/h), and the position of the weight member 5412 is changed depending on this determined operating speed.

For example, if it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is greater than a specific speed, it is desirable to increase the load that the flexible member 5420 applies to the tilting device 310 in order to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. Therefore, in this embodiment, if it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is greater than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance to assume a downward position (see FIG. 198(b)).

This allows the end of the downward movement of the drive motor 5411 to be raised to a position where its rotation axis is raised by a radius Ra upward from the lower end of the inner wall of the second storage section 5432. This allows the movable area of the flexible member 5420 above the drive motor 5411 to be narrowed in the vertical direction compared to when the weight member 5432 is positioned facing upward (see FIG. 198(a)) (when it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 198(a)).

That is, it is possible to increase the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 that is above the drive motor 5411 when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pressed down by the same amount by the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to increase the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310, and to increase the load for braking the tilting device 310.

Although not described in this embodiment, by leaving the drive motor 5411 stopped facing upward (see FIG. 198(a)), the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, and no force is generated due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second storage section 5432.

Here, the contact of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the player's hand who presses the tilting device 310, and to widen the transmission range of the vibration. In other words, it is possible to transmit the vibration to a part other than the part touching the tilting device 310, for example, a part touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the vibrations can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, and the vibrations can be transmitted to the player via the palm of the hand or a part of the side of the hand that is placed as a fulcrum for pushing on the lower frame member 5320. This makes it possible to avoid a situation where the vibrations are not transmitted to the player.

As shown in Figures 198(a) and 198(b), the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 come into contact and vibration occurs only when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 (see Figure 193) and the vibration device 5400 forms an assembled load state.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is already in a rotating state, the timing at which vibrations are transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pressed, making it easier to transmit vibrations to the player compared to when vibrations are generated after the player's pressing operation is detected.

In other words, when a player presses the tilting device 310 and then immediately releases it (pulsating the tilting device 310), if vibrations were generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pressed, it may not be possible to generate vibrations before the player releases their hand (vibrations may not start in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effects of the vibrations. In contrast, in this embodiment, the drive motor 5411 is rotating and ready to generate vibrations before the tilting device 310 is pressed, so vibrations can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pressed. This allows the player to experience the effects of the vibrations.

In addition, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent vibrations from the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first storage section 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent vibrations from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Therefore, the state in which vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be achieved by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Next, the drive unit 5340 will be described. The difference between the drive unit 5340 and the drive unit 340 in the 18th embodiment is the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343. As the rest is the same as the drive unit 340 in the 18th embodiment, the same reference numerals are used and the description will be omitted.

Figure 199 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 5340. As shown in Figure 199, a long hole recess C1 is formed in the center of a pair of disc cams 5344 consisting of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

Figure 200(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and Figure 200(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Note that since the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 5344L are configured to have symmetrical shapes, only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and a description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The right disc cam 5344R differs from the right disc cam 344R in the 18th embodiment in that a pair of clamping arms A1 that clamp the transmission shaft rod 5343 is disposed at the connection portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R is provided with a circular rib 344 extending from the disk portion at its center position.
The support tube portion P1 mainly comprises a support tube portion P1 extending cylindrically toward the side where b is arranged, a long hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion in an axially symmetrical long hole shape along the axial direction of the support tube portion P1 to a position approximately half the extension distance, and a pair of clamping arms A1 extending from the axial end of the support tube portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1 along the axial direction toward the disk portion.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by having an inner diameter that is equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that has the same axial arrangement as the region recessed into the elongated hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed into the elongated hole recess C1.

The deformation portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged on either side of the long hole recess C1, and is configured as a portion that elastically deforms when the right disc cam 5344R undergoes axial tilt deformation relative to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 199).

The elongated recess C1 is formed such that the cross-sectional shape of the recess is slightly longer than the width of the clamping arm A1. Therefore, the clamping arm A1 is axially inclined in the direction perpendicular to the width direction of the cross-sectional shape of the elongated recess C1 (
The movable member is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction).

In addition, the opposing surface of the long hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape that follows the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a.
343 a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344 .

The clamping arm A1 is formed in a pair of arms, and the arms are arranged such that, from the surface facing the other arm,
The engaging protrusion A1a is provided so as to protrude in a direction approaching the arm of the other side.
When connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343 , this engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343 a and prevents the cylindrical member 5343 a from coming off the disc cam 5344 .

The tip shape of the engaging protrusion A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 201). This ensures a longer radial overlap length (left-right length in FIG. 202(b)) when the engaging protrusion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4, compared to when the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface.

The engaging protrusion A1a is positioned in the axial direction at a position where the side surface adjacent to the connecting pin 344d is flush with the side surface of the right disc cam 5344R and the recessed surface portion C2 (the side surface on the opening side of the long hole recess C1) which is recessed along the axis near the axis.

This allows the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engaging protrusion A1a to be completed on the support cylinder P1 side (lower side in FIG. 200(b)) rather than the recessed surface C2 (see FIG. 202(b)). Therefore, compared to a case where an e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a on the outside of the recessed surface C2 (upper side in FIG. 200(b)), the length by which the cylindrical member 5343a protrudes from the recessed surface C2 can be shortened by the thickness of the e-ring (see FIG. 202(b)).

In addition, since there is no need to secure space for fitting the e-ring (space required for the e-ring to slide against a surface) in the extension direction of the right disc cam 5344R (direction parallel to the surface), the recessed width (radial width) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be made smaller. This improves the design freedom of the shape of the right disc cam 5344R.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to Figure 201. Figure 201 is an exploded front perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the 18th embodiment is the cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has fixing portions 5343a1 formed at both ends and having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 5344. The fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side as viewed from the front forms a fitting groove 5343a3.
The clutch operating portion 5343a2 has a D-shaped cross section and is formed with the same cross section as the fixed portion 5343a1. The clutch operating portion 5343a2 has a groove for fitting an e-ring and is connected to the disk cam 534
The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and in the assembled state, causes the movable clutch 343c to slide due to the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

A mechanism is adopted in which an e-ring is later fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a portion of the cylindrical member 5343a where the diameter is partially larger, so that the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a can be made uniform before the e-ring is fitted.

With this diameter being uniform, the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted a specified amount into the shaft support hole 341b (see Figure 199) and then the e-ring is fitted in, so that the e-ring prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from shifting axially relative to the shaft support hole 341b, and the e-ring also prevents the disc cam 5344 from shifting axially.

The above-mentioned configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 allows the disc cam 5344 to be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with a single touch. That is, when assembling the disc cam 5344 to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted from the end of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344, the end opposite the side where the engaging protrusion A1a is arranged, until the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engaging protrusion A1a is inserted into the engaging groove 5343a4, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engaging protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engaging protrusions A1a are pushed apart, and the clamping arm A1 is elastically deformed. After that, when the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a passes over the engaging protrusion A1a, the engaging protrusion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged opposite each other, and as the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4, the clamping arm A1 elastically recovers, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 202 (b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 not only allows for one-touch assembly, but also functions as a structure to prevent breakage in this embodiment. This will be explained with reference to Figures 202 and 203.

Figure 202(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in Figure 199, Figure 202(b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVb-LXVb in Figure 202(a), and Figure 202(c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in Figure 202(a). Also, Figure 203(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in Figure 199, and Figure 203(b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in Figure 203(a).

In addition, Figure 203 shows the right disc cam 5344R after deformation when the player applies an overload to the right disc cam 5344R in the unloaded state shown in Figure 202.

As shown in Figures 202 and 203, in this embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended tip side portion of the support tube portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and near the disk portion, the engagement protrusion A1a only engages with the engagement groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is in a state in which it can tilt about its axis, with the extended tip portion of the support tube portion P1 as its axis.

As shown in FIG. 202(b), in the direction in which the pair of clamping arms A1 face each other, the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged, so the resistance to the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a is small. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 202(c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected, the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disc cam 5344R come into contact along the axial direction of the right disc cam 5344R, so the resistance to the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a is large.

Therefore, if an overload is applied to the right disc cam 5344R (for example, if a player forcibly holds down (pulls up) the tilting device 310) (if a load that restricts the displacement of the connecting pin 344d is applied via the arm member 345 (see Figure 199)), the direction in which the right disc cam 5344R deforms relative to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

In other words, the right disc cam 5344R deforms in the direction of less resistance, so as shown in Figures 203(a) and 203(b), when an overload is applied to the right disc cam 5344R, the disc portion deforms by axial tilting around the support axis r1 that connects the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disc portion. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R compared to the position shown in Figure 202(a).

204(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143(a), and FIG. 204(b) is a partial rear view of the operating device 5300 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 204(a). Note that in FIG. 204(b), the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. Also, in FIG. 204(a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R when inserted perpendicularly into the transmission shaft rod 5343 and fixed is shown in solid lines, and the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R when an overload is applied and the shaft is tilted is shown in imaginary lines.

In Figure 204(a), the second state of the tilt device 310 is illustrated, along with the player's hand holding the tilt device 310 and an enlarged view of the area near the connecting pin 344d.

When the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 199) starts to operate in the state shown in FIG. 204(a), the left disc cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the player restricts the displacement of the tilting device 310, so a load is generated between the arm member 345, which tries to remain in place, and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L, which tries to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R is capable of undergoing the axial tilt deformation described above, so the load can be alleviated.

In Figure 204 (a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after the axial tilt deformation is shown in phantom lines. The change in the connection state with the arm member 345 due to the axial tilt deformation will be explained with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 204(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 199) starts to operate and the outer periphery of the right disc cam 5344R rotates clockwise by dimension Rd, the shaft support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connecting pin 344d are misaligned by this dimension Rd, and to absorb this, the right disc cam 5344R undergoes axial tilt deformation.

Due to the axial tilt deformation, the connecting pin 344d tilts in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in FIG. 204(a), so the center Pb of the base side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt of the protruding tip side are misaligned along the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R. This misalignment can partially absorb the misalignment between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 caused by the rotation of the right disc cam 5344R through the dimension Rd, so that when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 199) is driven while the tilting device 310 is being gripped, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 204(b), the disk cam 5344 is deformed by tilting its axis, so that the disk cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other on their faces. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so that when a player drives the drive motor 342 while holding and fixing the tilt device 310, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilt device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 204(a), when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but the elastic force of the second spring SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 in a repulsive direction. In this case, the rotating claw member 347 is prevented from moving by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW, see Figure 205), the release member 346 is pushed downward by frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 acts on the disc cam 5344 in a repulsive direction via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. In this case, the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, so the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact and the release member 346 operates along the operating direction of the disc cam 5344, the elastic force of either the first spring SP1 or the second spring SP2 acting on the disc cam 5344 in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344 can be increased, regardless of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344. This makes it possible to increase the load that the release member 346 imparts to the disc cam 5344 and increase the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342, thereby making it possible to reduce the load applied to the arm member 345 regardless of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344.

In this embodiment, the right disc cam 5344R is formed in a shape that is linearly symmetrical with respect to a line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the long hole recess C1 extends in a direction perpendicular to the line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point), so regardless of the rotation direction of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the direction of positional deviation of the connecting pin 344d relative to the arm member 345), the right disc cam 5344R can be deformed in an axial tilt direction with similar deformation resistance.

205(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 143(a), and FIG. 205(b) is a partial rear view of the operating device 5300 taken in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 205(a). Note that the protective cover device 350 is omitted from FIG. 205(b). Also, in FIG. 205(a), to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R when vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown in solid lines, and the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R when an overload is applied and the shaft is tilted is shown in imaginary lines.

Figure 205 (a) shows the tilting device 310 being driven by the drive motor 342 (see Figure 199) from the second state and tilted downward by an angle D2, and also shows the player's hand holding the tilting device 310 while the drive motor 342 is moving.

As shown in FIG. 205(a), when a player grips the tilting device 310 while it is operating, regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not, the axial tilt of the right disc cam 5344R can cause the tip of the connecting pin 344d to be displaced circumferentially around the right disc cam 5344R. This reduces the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R, and therefore reduces the load on the drive motor 342.

It should be noted that the matters described with respect to the right disc cam 5344R also apply to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in Figures 204(b) and 205(b), in this embodiment, when the drive motor 342 (see Figure 199) operates while the player is holding the tilting device 310, and an overload occurs, the right disc cam 5344R will tilt in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting in the axial direction, it is possible to detect the occurrence of an overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the 18th embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period of time that the right disc cam 344R rotates once, the detection hole 344eR of the right disc cam 344R passes through the right detection sensor 353R. However, if the player is holding the tilt device 310, the right disc cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated. Therefore, the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right detection sensor 353R, and the input to the right detection sensor 353R does not change, so it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, the right disc cam 3 is rotated in a state where no overload occurs until the occurrence of the overload is detected.
However, since a period of time is required for rotating 44R by a predetermined angle, there is a problem in that the detection of an overload is delayed.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, when an overload occurs in the right disc cam 5344R and the right disc cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 203(b)), the occurrence of the overload can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of the overload can be detected early. As a detection method, for example, a method using an alarm device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support tube portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c (shown by phantom lines in FIG. 203(a)) is exemplified.

The alarm device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input part, and is arranged in a pair at the position where the straight line connecting the pair of clamping arms A1 intersects with the engagement rib 344c, with the input part protruding towards the support tube part P1. In the unloaded state, the alarm device E1 and the support tube part P1 are separated (see FIG. 202(b)), and in the overloaded state, the alarm device E1 and the support tube part P1 are in contact (see FIG. 203(b)). This makes it possible to quickly determine whether an overload has occurred in the disc cam 5344 by judging the output from the alarm device E1.

Next, the operation device 6300 in the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 206 to 210.

In the 18th embodiment, the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed. However, in the operating device 6300 in the 23rd embodiment, the disc cam 344 and the engagement rib 344c are separate members that are rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the differences in configuration from the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 206 and 207.

Figure 206 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 6340 in the 23rd embodiment, and Figure 207 is an exploded front perspective view of the disc member 6344L1, ring member 6344L2, and second transmission member 6348 of the left disc cam 6344L. The right disc cam 6344R also differs from the configuration in the 18th embodiment, but since the right disc cam 6344R is configured in a mirror image shape of the left disc cam 6344L, only the left disc cam 6344L will be described and the description of the right disc cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 206, this embodiment differs from the 18th embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixed member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L is provided with a circular rib 344b, a connecting pin 344d, and a detection hole 344eL, as in the 18th embodiment, and includes a disc member 6344L1 journaled on a cylindrical member 343a, and a ring member 6344L2 journaled coaxially with the disc member 6344L1 and rotating relative to the disc member 6344L1.

The disk member 6344L1 has a central shaft portion 344a of the 18th embodiment disposed at the center of the disk portion, and is provided with a circular rib 6344f that is shaped like a ring and protrudes in the axial direction at a position spaced radially outward from the outer periphery of the circular rib 344b.

The ring member 6344L2 includes a ring body 6344g having an outer diameter equal to that of the engagement rib 344c in the 18th embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the circular rib 344b, a cover plate portion 6344h disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covering the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and a receiving gear tooth 6344i disposed radially outward in the thickened portion, the cover plate portion 6344h being formed with an increased thickness on the opposite side of the ring body 6344g.

The inner diameter of the circular ring body 6344g is formed larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b, so that in the assembled state, the circular ring body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, thereby supporting the ring member 6344L2 so as to be capable of relative rotation around the central shaft portion 344a.

In addition, the end surface of the annular body 6344g on the side of the disk member 6344L1 in the axial direction is the annular rib 63
As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the surface of the disk member 634
In comparison with the case where the disk member 6344L1 comes into contact with the ring member 6344L2, the contact area can be reduced, and frictional resistance can be reduced, thereby allowing smooth relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2.

The receiving gear teeth 6344i are meshed with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. Note that, in this embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is equal to the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1.
(The number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times that of the disk member 63
The numbers of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i are set so that the rotor 44L1 rotates once.

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a in parallel with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary column member 6348 that is arranged in a position parallel to the cylindrical member 343a.
a, and a second gear 6348 fixed to the auxiliary column member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b is fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and is a ring member 63
and a reduction transmission gear 6348c that meshes with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of 44L2.

With reference to Figures 208 to 210, it will be explained that the tilting device 310 can be raised in multiple ways after it is released from the first state by the rotating claw member 347.

Figures 208, 209, and 210 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143(a). Note that Figure 208 illustrates a state similar to that shown in Figure 173, and Figure 209 illustrates a state in which the ring member 6344R2 has rotated one revolution in the backward direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in Figure 208 (or more accurately, a state in which it has rotated in the reverse direction by the amount of rotation after rotating more than one revolution), and the disk member 6344R1 has rotated 1/3 revolutions in the backward direction (arrow CW direction). Also, Figure 210 illustrates a state in which the ring member 6344L2 has rotated a predetermined angle in the forward direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in Figure 209, and the tilting device 310 has been raised.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) from the state shown in FIG. 208 to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 instantly rises due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 and reaches the second state (see FIG. 171).

In the operating device 300 of the 18th embodiment, when the tilting device 310 is lifted instantaneously (without waiting for the disc cam 344 to rotate) after the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is released, the position reached is limited to the position in the second state (see FIG. 171).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, so the relative relationship between the connecting pin 344d, which is the support part of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engagement rib 344c can be changed, and the number of positions that the tilting device 310 can reach can be increased.

That is, when the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 209, the tilting device 310 rises instantly due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state tilted downward by angle D6 from the second state (see FIG. 210). In this way, when the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 208 and when the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 209, the tilting device 310 rises instantly (without waiting for the disc cam 344 to rotate), and the position it reaches can be changed.

This makes it possible to improve the attention-grabbing power of the tilting device 310, for example, when a gaming machine is configured in such a manner that the degree of expectation of the presentation is changed depending on the difference in the height to which the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state. In this case, it is not limited whether the degree of expectation is increased when the tilting device 310 rises higher or when the degree of expectation is increased when the tilting device 310 reaches a lower rising position.

However, by keeping the elevated position of the normal tilt device 310 low (see FIG. 210) and making it reach the second state (see FIG. 171) when the degree of expectation is at its maximum, it is possible to associate the degree of expectation with the amount of displacement caused by the player pushing in the tilt device 310, making it easier for the player to understand the difference in degree of expectation caused by the displacement of the tilt device 310.

In this case, the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilting device 310 will rise, and can be made to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the timing of operating the tilting device 310. Therefore, a gaming method of operating the tilting device 310 in a disorderly manner regardless of the presentation mode of the tilting device 310 can be suppressed.

Next, the operation device 7300 in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 211 to 222.

In the 18th embodiment, the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed. However, in the operating device 7300 in the 24th embodiment, the disc cam 7344 is configured such that the disc member 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are disposed on separate members, and these separate members are configured to be capable of forming a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other, and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted. First, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the plate cam 344 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 211 and 212.

Figure 211(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the 24th embodiment, Figure 211(b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, Figure 212(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in Figure 211(a), and Figure 212(b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in Figure 211(a). Note that the right disc cam 7344L is constructed from a mirror image of the right disc cam 7344R, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 211 and 212, the right disc cam 7344R mainly comprises a disc member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a through which the cylindrical member 343a (see Figure 199) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state, a ring member 7344R2 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1, and an engagement member 7344R3 which is immovable in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1 in the assembled state and has an engagement portion 7630 which fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2.

The disk member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center.
A detection hole 344eR is provided in a portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup in a flange shape.
and the engaging rib 344c is partially omitted (the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first
The portion between the retracted portion 344c1 and the retracted portion 344c2 is omitted.

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 with a surface thereof when assembled, and has a first circular recess 7344R which is a circular recess having a center on the central shaft portion 344a.
410, a second circular recess 7420 which is a circular recess smaller in diameter and deeper in the axial direction than the first circular recess 7410, an L-shaped insertion hole 7430 drilled radially between the first protrusion 344c1 and the first retraction 344c2, and a fixing protrusion 7440 protruding radially outward from the back side surface of the second circular recess 7420 (the outer circumferential side of the disc member 7344R1) near the insertion hole 7430.

The insertion hole 7430 is formed from a middle position between the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first recessed portion 344c2.
A first long hole 7431 is a rectangular long hole portion that is elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a shifted position, and a second long hole 7432 is a rectangular long hole portion that extends from the end of the first long hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1 along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1.
32 and the second long hole 7432 is supported by the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
and a return portion 7433 extending out toward the side 32.

The dimension in the width direction (short side direction) of the second elongated hole 7432 is smaller than the dimension in the width direction (short side direction) of the first elongated hole 7431, and the dimension in the width direction (
The dimension in the short direction is made smaller than that.

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 212(b)) of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum. This elastic deformation allows the return portion 7433 to be movable outward from the second long hole 7432.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a protruding height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to Figure 213. Figure 213(a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, Figure 213(b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and Figure 213(c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc in Figure 213(a).

As shown in Figures 213(a) to 213(c), the ring member 7344R2 mainly comprises a ring-shaped plate portion 7510 on which the connecting pin 344d is protruded, and a thick portion 7520 that extends in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and has a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equivalent to the recess depth of the first circular recess portion 7410, and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recess portion 7410. This makes it possible to prevent the resistance to relative rotation from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state.

The thick portion 7520 extends from the side of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 to a length that does not interfere with (approach) the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 212(a)), and the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This makes it possible to prevent excessive resistance to the relative rotation between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 while allowing the engaging member 7344R3 to move in the radial direction (up and down direction in FIG. 212(a)) in the assembled state.

The thick portion 7520 mainly comprises an irregular through hole 7521 drilled along the axial direction, and equal recess portions 7522 recessed radially outwardly into the irregular through hole 7521 at equal circumferential intervals (in this embodiment, five equal parts).

The irregular through hole 7521 has an inner circumferential shape that is positioned radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pressed radially inward of the disk member 7344R1.

Figure 214(a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and Figure 214(b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb in Figure 214(a).

As shown in Figures 214(a) and 214(b), in the assembled state (see Figure 211(b)), the engaging member 7344R3 mainly comprises an arc-shaped plate portion 7610 arranged radially outward of the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the rear end portion (right end portion in Figure 214(b)) of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610, an engaging portion 7630 extending in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in Figure 214(b)) from the extending tip of the extension portion 7620, and a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring arranged on the side of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 facing the engaging portion 7630.

The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 has a spring fixing protrusion 7611, which is a protrusion into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the tip of the engagement portion 7630 on the inner circumferential side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in an assembled state,
When pressed radially inward against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip is configured with an extension length that protrudes inward beyond the inner circumferential surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engagement portion 7630 has a width dimension that is slightly shorter than the width dimension of the first long hole 7431, and is extended to a length that passes through the irregular through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state (see FIG. 212(a)).

As described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function of being displaced by receiving a load from the releasing member 346 and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 relative to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced.

The assembly method of the right disc cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, FIG. 215(b) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 215(a), FIG. 215(c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, FIG. 215(d) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 215(c), FIG. 215(e) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 215(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 215(e).

Note that Fig. 215(a), Fig. 215(b), Fig. 215(c) and Fig. 215(d) show a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1, and Fig. 215(e) and Fig. 215(f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1. Also, for ease of understanding, Fig. 215(b), Fig. 215(d) and Fig. 215(f) omit the illustration of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1.

The right disc cam 7344R is assembled by first inserting the engagement portion 7630 of the engagement member 7344R3 into the first long hole 7431 (see Figures 215(a) and 215(b)). As described above, the width dimension of the second long hole 7432 is shorter than the width dimension of the engagement portion 7630, so it is possible to prevent the engagement portion 7630 from being erroneously inserted into the second long hole 7432. This makes it possible to prevent assembly errors.

Next, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid along the extension direction of the second long hole 7432 in the depth direction of FIG. 215(d) until the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 are aligned.

In this position after movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, preventing the engaging member 7344R3 from shifting in the circumferential direction of the disc member 7344R1 (left-right direction in FIG. 215(d)) and holding the engaging member 7344R3 immovable in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1.

The engaging member 7344R3 is restricted in its circumferential movement by the return portion 7433. This will be explained. First, when the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first long hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is pushed outward from the second long hole 7432 (see FIG. 215(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extension direction of the second long hole 7432, the vertical abutment between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 moves inward from the second long hole 7432 due to elastic recovery force (see FIG. 215(d)).

When inserted into the second long hole 7432, the tip of the return portion 7433 abuts against the extension portion 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, but since the abutment direction is configured to be along the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the direction in which the deformation resistance is large) (see FIG. 215(d)), movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 215(f)) is suppressed. This makes it possible to limit the circumferential movement of the engagement member 7344R3, thereby preventing the position of the engagement member 7344R3 from shifting during operation.

After the engaging member 7344R3 is held by the disc member 7344R1, the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward into the disc member 7344R1, and the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 causes the engaging portion 7630 to move along the radially outward direction D7. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disc member 7344R1.

The above-mentioned steps allow the right disc cam 7344R to be easily assembled. The right disc cam 7344L has a mirror symmetrical shape to the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same steps as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to Figures 216 to 218, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction will be described. Figures 216(a), 216(b), 217(a), 217(b) and 218 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143. Note that in Figures 216(a), 216(b), 217(a), 217(b) and 218, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347 and the disc cam 7344 are illustrated as the focus, and other unnecessary parts are omitted from the illustration.

The rotating claw member 7347 in this embodiment differs from the 18th embodiment in the length of the guide slot 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 217(a), the protruding pin 346b is configured as the end of movement at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes through.

The release member 7346 differs from the 18th embodiment in that the upper rear portion of the main body (upper right portion in FIG. 217(a)) is cut at an angle to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

Figures 216(a), 216(b), 217(a), 217(b) and 218 show the time series of the disk cam 744 rotating in the backward direction (clockwise direction in Figure 216(a)).

216(a) shows the state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R abuts against the release member 7346 and the release member 7346 begins to rotate, FIG. 216(b) shows the state in which the right disc cam 7344R has rotated further from the state shown in FIG. 216(a), FIG. 217(a) shows the state in which the engaging member 7344R3 has been pushed into the disc member 7344R1 to its end, M6-2(b) shows the state in which the disc member 7344R1 has rotated further in the rearward direction from the state shown in FIG. 217(a), and FIG. 218 shows the state after the right disc cam 7344R has rotated in the rearward direction from the state shown in FIG. 217(b) and the engaging member 7344R3 has moved away from the release member 7346. Note that Figures 216(a), 216(b), 217(a) and 217(b) show the state in which the release member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which it can rotate relative to the rotating claw member 7347 (small angle state).

As shown in FIG. 216(a), immediately after the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 start to come into contact, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be greater than the elastic force of the second spring SP2, so the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward and remains protruding outward.

As shown in FIG. 216(b), when the engaging portion 346d of the release member 7346 abuts against the outermost diameter side of the engagement member 7344R3, the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in a small angle state.

In this embodiment, when the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form a small angle state, the disc cam 7344 is positioned in such a position that the outer circumferential surface of the engagement member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 with the inner circumferential surface of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 abutting against the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c (see FIG. 217(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 217(a), when the rotation of the disc cam 7344 rotates the release member 7346 toward the small angle state and it becomes unable to rotate any further (small angle state), a load is applied from the release member 7346 to the engagement member 7344R3, pushing the engagement member 7344R3 radially inward of the disc cam 7344.

As shown in FIG. 216(b), when the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, it cannot continue to rotate in the reverse direction, so the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward based on the rotation of the disc cam 7344 (see FIG. 217(a)). In this pushed-in state, the engaging portion 7630 is positioned radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the irregular through hole 7521.

As a result, circumferential load is no longer transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engagement portion 7630, so as shown in FIG. 217(b), even if the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 217(a), the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its position.

Due to this difference in the amount of rotation, the engagement portion 7630 moves from one of the equal recesses 7522 in which it was originally located to another different equal recess 7522, so that the phase between the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotates relative to each other by the amount of one recess (72 degrees).

After that, as shown in FIG. 218, when the right disc cam 7344R further rotates, the engagement member 7344R3 is released from contact with the release member 7346, so that the engagement member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward and the engagement portion 7630 is once again accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522. During this process, the equally divided recessed portion 7522 in which the engagement portion 7630 is accommodated shifts by one.

In other words, by going through the process shown in Figure 216 (a) to Figure 218, the arrangement of the engagement rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 can be shifted relatively by the arrangement interval of the recessed portions of the equally divided recessed portion 7522 (72 degrees).

With reference to Figure 219, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. Figures 219(a), 219(b), 220(a) and 220(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143. Note that in Figure 219, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347 and the disc cam 7344 are illustrated as the focus, and other unnecessary parts are omitted from the illustration.

219(a) to 220(b) show the rotation of the disc cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 219(a)) in chronological order. FIG. 219(a) shows the state immediately before the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R come into contact, FIG. 219(b) shows the state in which the engagement member 7344R3 comes into contact with the release member 7346 from above and starts to descend, FIG. 220(a) shows the state in which the disc cam 7344 has further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 219(b), and FIG. 220(b) shows the state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R have separated.

As shown in Figures 219(a) and 220(b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward direction, causing the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 to rotate in the backward direction (clockwise direction in Figure 219(a)), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are only loaded in the forward direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1.

Therefore, no load is generated that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 radially inward, and the engaging member 7344R3 maintains a state in which it protrudes radially outward from the time it contacts the release member 7346 until it separates. Therefore, when the disc cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented from rotating relative to each other.

With these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disc cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether or not the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in a rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see Figures 219 and 220), it is possible to repeatedly perform the performance of tilting the tilting device 310 by the same tilt width, as in the 18th embodiment, while in a rotation direction in which relative rotation occurs (see Figures 216, 217, and 218), it is possible to change the tilt width of the tilting device 310, unlike the 18th embodiment.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotation direction of the disc member 7344R1, which rotates the disc member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 relative to each other, coincides with the opposite direction (direction that does not release the lock) to the direction in which the lock by the rotating claw member 7347 is released, so that the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be rotated relative to each other while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 221) (the posture is maintained constant).

This allows the state where the player does not notice (the state where the tilting device 310 is stopped) to be
This can be utilized as a state for changing the relative position between the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 without being seen by the player.

221 and 222, it will be described how, according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes for lifting the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. Figures 221 and 222 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 143. In addition, FIG. 221 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that allows the tilting device 310 to be instantly displaced (without rotating the disk cam 7344) from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 144(b) by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, and FIG. 222 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 has rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by one of the equal recesses 7522 from the state shown in FIG. 221 through the process described in FIG. 216, and both FIG. 221 and FIG. 222 show a state in which the second protrusion 344c3 abuts against the engagement portion 346d.

As shown in Figures 221 and 222, according to this embodiment, the range of movement of the tilting device 310 can be changed instantly (without rotating the disc cam 7344R2) by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state.

In other words, when the rotation claw member 347 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 221 to release the lock, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the top end of its range of movement).

On the other hand, when the rotation claw member 347 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 222 to release the lock, the position of the connecting pin 344d shifts rearward and downward from the position shown in FIG. 221, and therefore moves to a state where it is lower than the second state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 3 can be moved from the first state to the second state.
It is possible to change the position that the tilt device 310 reaches instantly (without rotation of the disk cam 7344) by the upward movement. This makes it possible to increase the variety of effects that can be produced by the operation of the tilt device 310, and to improve the attention-grabbing effect of the operation device 7300 as an effect device.

Next, with reference to Figures 223 to 316, we will explain the pachinko machine 8010 in the 25th embodiment.

In the 18th embodiment, the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed. However, the pachinko machine 8010 in the 25th embodiment is provided with a cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (rear) side for the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 223. Also, in the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 223, the top side will be referred to as the upper (upper) side, the bottom side as the lower (lower) side, the right side as the right (right) side, and the left side as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see FIG. 223, for example) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. The definitions of these directions are also the same in explanations that refer to drawings prior to FIG. 223.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to Figs. 223 to 227. Fig. 223 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 in the 25th embodiment, Fig. 224 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing the state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) relative to the outer frame 11, Fig. 225 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing the state in which the back pack 92 is opened (deployed) relative to the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 open relative to the outer frame 11, Fig. 226 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing the state in which the inner frame 12 is closed relative to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed), and Fig. 227 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 with the front frame 14 removed. Note that in Fig. 227, for convenience, the reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape with four fixed sides, with wooden boards at the top and bottom and aluminum boards at the left and right. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game center by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 8010, and the game center may be configured so that the outer frame 11 or a member having the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 and having a support structure (hinges 18, etc.) and a locking structure for the inner frame 12 of the outer frame 11 is installed therein.

As shown in FIG. 226, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip end side (opening/closing tip end side) so that it can rotate forward.

As shown in FIG. 225, the rear pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip end side (opening/closing tip end side) so that it can be rotated rearward.

As shown in FIG. 224, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, which has the function of locking the inner frame 12 and front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened, and the function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that they cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK, which is exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010 as shown in FIG. 223, and performing the unlocking operation.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 223, front door mounting brackets 57, 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and these front door mounting brackets 57, 58 (bracket 57 is a cylindrical portion, and bracket 58 is a metal plate with an axial hole) engage with the inner frame 12, thereby supporting the front frame 14 rotatably relative to the inner frame 12.

In detail, the front door mounting bracket 57 is journaled on a journal plate 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 263) that extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side below the upper hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 and is recessed from the tip to the rear side with a size that allows the front door mounting bracket 57 to be inserted therein. Also, the front door mounting bracket 58 is journaled by being externally fitted onto a support pin 19a that is in the shape of a stepped cylinder (a shape in which cylinders of different diameters are connected vertically) that protrudes upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12, and has a smaller diameter than the upper cylinder).

As shown in FIG. 226, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape with approximately the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 has a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape from a metal plate. The front frame 14 is formed by fastening and fixing various members (illumination parts 8029-8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front and back sides of the main body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c that is smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer periphery of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 223). This window portion 14c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, so that the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226).

As shown in FIG. 226, the glass unit 16 comprises a pair of transparent glass panels 16a, 16b, which are larger in outer shape than the window portion 14c and have transparency, and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates the transparent glass panels 16a, 16b. The fixed frame is made of synthetic resin and has a ring shape that is one size larger than the transparent glass panels 16a, 16b, and the outer peripheries of the transparent glass panels 16a, 16b are bonded to the fixed frame, making the glass unit 16 into an integrated double-glazed glass.

The glass unit 16 is formed colorless and transparent using transparent glass 16a, 16b, but is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent using synthetic resin, and may be formed colored and transparent rather than colorless and transparent as long as the playing area can be seen through the glass unit 16 from the front of the pachinko machine 8010.

As shown in FIG. 223, multiple illumination units 8029-8033 with built-in light-emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window unit 14c in the front frame 14. These illumination units 8029-8033 light up or blink in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified reach is reached. In addition, the illumination unit 8030 on the upper side of the window unit 14c has built-in light-emitting means that light up when a specified error occurs, such as a shortage of payout balls, and light-emitting means that light up while prize balls are being paid out.

In addition, on the upper right and upper left sides of the window portion 14c, speaker covers 27 (thin plate members made of punching metal) are provided to cover the speaker assembly 450, which outputs sound effects according to the game status. Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 223, the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 are arranged side by side, bulging out toward the front.

The upper tray 17 has the function of temporarily storing the game balls dispensed by the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 224) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a while aligning them in a row. The lower tray 50 also has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17. A ball guide opening 53 is formed on the rear side of the lower tray 50, which opens in the front-to-rear direction and guides the balls to the lower tray 50.

Furthermore, there is no need to provide multiple locations on the upper tray 17 and lower tray 50 for storing game balls; it is also possible to eliminate the lower tray 50 and have only one storage area consisting of the upper tray 17.

An operation device 300 that is manually operated by the player is provided in front of the upper tray 17 (the storage area for game balls). The operation device 300 is an operation device that is used when a performance corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This operation device 300 may be provided in another location, such as around the lower tray 50, other than the upper tray 17, or
The input device may be provided in a plurality of locations, and the operation method may be a push button switch, or the information may be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

As shown in FIG. 226, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage section 141 that leads to the upper tray 17, a front door side lower tray passage section 142 that leads to the lower tray 50, and a foul ball passage section 145 (see FIG. 229).

A ball receiving portion 143 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner toward the base end of the rotation of the front frame 14), and this ball receiving portion 143 is divided into left and right parts by a partition wall 144 to form a passage entrance to the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 and a passage entrance to the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, respectively.

The foul ball passage section 145 (see FIG. 229) is a section that forms a passage through which game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a that do not reach the play area are discharged as foul balls into the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 226, the foul ball passage 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving port 146 that is open upward. A foul ball received in this foul ball receiving port 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage 145 (see FIG. 229) and is then discharged into the lower tray 50. Note that the foul ball passage 145 may be connected to the upper tray 17 instead of the lower tray 50, and the foul ball may be discharged into the upper tray 17.

The foul ball passage section 145 is formed to merge with the ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 229), which is a passage through which unshot balls flowing down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 are guided when the player performs the ball removal operation.

Multifunctional cover members 171, 172, which are resin cover members fastened to the upper left and right corners and bulge out toward the rear side, are attached to the rear side of the front frame 14. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171, 172, connectors for wiring that conduct electricity to the illumination unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and electronic boards to which one end of a connector that is connected to the internal board of the illumination units 8031, 8032 along the front frame 14 is connected are arranged, and these electronic boards and connectors are covered by the multifunctional cover members 171, 172.

The areas covered by the multi-function cover members 171, 172 of the front frame 14 are formed with wiring grooves 14h that communicate with the left and right illuminated sections 8031, 8032, and an electronic board 14i to which the wiring that passes through the wiring grooves 14h and is pulled out from the illuminated sections 8031, 8032 is connected (see Figure 240), and the terminals of each wiring are pulled out to the rear through these wiring grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side.

Therefore, when the multi-function cover members 171, 172 are removed (see Figure 240), the connectors of the wiring that conducts electricity to the illumination unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the connectors whose one ends are connected to the internal boards of the illumination units 8031, 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic board 14i from the rear side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in Figure 226).

The multi-function cover member 171 attached to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged in a pair above and below the rotating tip side of the inner frame 12, and is a board surface support device 60 that grips the base plate 60 of the game board 13.
263, and they can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but details will be described later.

A long cover member 173 is attached from the rear side to the rear side of the front frame 14. The long cover member 173 is a container-shaped member made of a resin material with an open front side, and is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at a lower corner and accommodates wiring in a space formed between the front frame 14. The long cover member 173 is configured so that its cross-sectional area decreases as it moves from the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 to the rotation base end side, and a lower wall portion 173a that constitutes the lower side of the space that accommodates the wiring is disposed parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, and an upper wall portion 173b that is disposed opposite the upper part of the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space that accommodates the wiring is configured in a shape that matches the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 in surface agreement.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged in contact with the front frame 14, similar to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and has an upwardly extending wall portion 173c that extends upwardly from the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14.

The upward extension wall portion 173c has an end portion connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b that is curved in a semicircular shape protruding toward the pivot base end side of the front frame 14, and is configured so that space is secured from the upper end of the curved portion to be further bent into a semicircular shape in the opposite direction, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

That is, the wiring housed in the upward extension wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (a wave shape corresponding to one period of a sine wave) and projects from the upper end position of the upward extension wall portion 173c toward the pivot base end side of the front frame 14. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, the position change of the wiring that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed (see FIG. 233) can be absorbed, so that the wiring can be prevented from expanding and contracting and generating a load, and the risk of the wiring being broken can be reduced.

The front frame 14 has an upper extended wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (
An inverted cup portion 178, which is a portion made of a resin material and has an inverted cup shape that opens downward, is disposed between the front frame 14 (the portion closest to the base end of the rotation of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14a that is a long plate portion extending vertically on the base end side of the rotation of the front frame 14.

The inverted cup portion 178 is a portion that acts as a countermeasure against fraudulent acts, such as, for example, illegally pushing apart the base end side of the rotation of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire near the lower hinge 18, and letting it enter the play area. That is, even if a piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 near the lower hinge 18, if the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below, the progress of the piano wire can be impeded, and therefore the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the play area.

In addition, since the inverted cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are made of a resin material,
This can be used as a countermeasure against fraudulent acts by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire with a heated tip is inserted and pressed against the inverted cup portion 178, the heat of the wire causes the inverted cup portion 178 to break.
The long cover member 173 can be melted and pass through the inverted cup portion 178.
In addition, when the heated end of the piano wire passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring housed in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burned off, and by detecting that the wiring has been broken, it becomes easier to discover fraudulent activity.

In particular, in this embodiment, wall 178a of inverted cup portion 178 on the long cover 173 side is configured to have a shape that matches the shape of long cover member 173, and they abut (are close to each other) with their faces. Also, since the normal line of the lower surface of inverted cup portion 178 at wall 178a is shaped to face downward, when a piano wire enters inverted cup portion 178 from below, it is possible to increase the possibility that it will be pressed against the lower surface of wall 178a, and if inverted cup portion 178 is melted, there is a high probability that long cover 173 will also be melted, making it easier to discover fraudulent activity.

When the tip of the piano wire is not heated, the wall 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction. In other words, when the piano wire is inserted through a gap forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 and reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is inserted further, its tip will be pressed against the wall 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a is shaped to match the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a and is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is inserted further, the tip of the piano wire advances in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip of the front frame 14 (
In this way, the piano wire is prevented from reaching the play area.

Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the play area while preventing the reaction force applied to a cheater via the piano wire from becoming too large, for example, by placing a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below lower wall portion 173a, it is possible to discover the cheating before the cheater escapes, making it easier to apprehend the cheater.

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person committing the fraudulent act cannot tell this, and will assume that the piano wire is on its way to the play area.
This allows the cheater to naturally (without making the cheater suspect that the wire was not inserted properly) insert the wire deeper (until the tip of the wire is visible from the front side through the wire) and thus increases the time it takes for the cheater to realize that his cheating has been discovered and to try to escape.

The detection device may be a device formed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. The location of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various locations are allowed. For example, the detection device may be disposed in the locking mechanism 20RK or on the rear side of the operating handle 51. If the detection device is disposed in the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally disposed in the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine the entry of a piano wire.

As shown in FIG. 226, the ball launching unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right part of the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 227, this ball launching unit 112a is equipped with an electromagnetic launch solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, a launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so that the game ball launched by the launch solenoid 701 is launched toward the area between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeder 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 226) one by one onto the launch rail 730. In this case, the supplied game balls are placed on the protruding path of the plunger 702 provided as a launching section in the launch solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electrical signal to the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the launch rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the play area. Note that the electric actuator of the ball launch unit 112a is not limited to the launch solenoid 701, and a launch motor or the like may be used. Note that the detailed configuration of the ball launch unit 112a will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 227, a board 167 is provided on the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, which includes a plate passage forming member 160 and a number of connectors CN1-CN3 to which the harnesses HN1-HN3 are connected. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that passes through the area where the plate passage forming member 160 is provided in the front-rear direction, and the plate passage forming member 160 is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 so as to cover this through hole from the front side.

As shown in FIG. 227, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage section 161 and a main body side lower dish passage section 162. The main body side upper dish passage section 161 and the main body side lower dish passage section 162 form a curved passage in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees inside (changing from the front-to-back direction to the up-to-down direction) so that one end opens toward the rear side so as to be able to communicate with the through hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-to-back direction, and the other end opens toward the bottom. In this configuration, the balls dispensed from the dispensing device 133 pass through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enter the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and are discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the ball receiving port 143 (see FIG. 226) of the passage forming unit 140 provided on the front frame 14 fits into the lower part of the tray passage forming member 160. The front door side upper tray passage 141 is disposed below the main body side upper tray passage 161, and the front door side lower tray passage 142 is disposed below the main body side lower tray passage 162.

As shown in FIG. 227, a shutter 163 is provided at the lower portion of the tray passage forming member 160 to restrict the outflow of game balls from the upper tray passage portion 161 on the main body side and the lower tray passage portion 162 on the main body side. The shutter 163 is provided so that it can be switched between a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to block the outflow of game balls, and a permitting position that allows the outflow of game balls.

In addition, a biasing member (such as a coil spring) that biases the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the shutter 163 remains in the blocking position due to the biasing force of the biasing member when the front frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 12. This prevents the stored balls from spilling out when the front frame 14 is opened while game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 or the main body side lower tray passage portion 162.

In contrast, when the front frame 14 is closed relative to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is pushed back to the allowable position against the above-mentioned biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving port 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 and the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicate with each other, allowing the game balls to flow down.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. Note that the board 167 includes a portion where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided and a portion where the connector CN3 is provided, which are separate boards. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided on the main control device 1.
10, while connector CN3 is used for transmission with voice lamp control device 113. Since the transmission targets are different, the purpose of using separate boards is to prevent malfunctions in advance.

The portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to Figures 228 and 229. Figure 228 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the components disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded, and Figure 229 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the components disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded.

As shown in Figures 228 and 229, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main frame 14c, the operating device 300 is disposed on the front side of the upper tray 17, diagonally above and to the right of the lower tray 50, and in the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and a covering cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the operating device 300.

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operating device 300 from the front side, and is configured with a left-right width that is approximately the same as the left-right width of the front frame 14. In other words, the left and right ends of the covering cover 370 are disposed vertically below the illumination parts 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least on the left and right ends, and is configured in a curved shape with the left and right central portion projecting toward the front side, hanging portions 372 that extend downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at a midpoint between the left and right central portion and the left and right ends of the main body curved portion 371 toward the sides that are close to each other in the width direction and join at the extended lower ends to form a V shape when viewed from the front, and hanging portions 372 that are fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at at least the left and right ends.
72, a light-transmitting portion 373 which is formed from a light-transmitting resin material and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body curved portion 371 or the hanging portion 372, a left side planar support portion 374 which is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, a right side planar support portion 375 which is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and a support groove 376 which is recessed from the rear side in the right side planar support portion 375 and has a width which increases as it approaches the rear side (tapered).

The curved main body portion 371 has a front edge formed in a rounded curved shape, and a rear edge portion mainly includes a rear left edge portion 371a shaped to match the front edge of the upper tray 17 and abutting the front edge of the upper tray 17 in the front-to-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 223), a rear middle edge portion 371b connected to the rear left edge portion 371a and shaped to match the front edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operating device 300 and abutting the upper frame member 330 in the front-to-rear direction in the assembled state, and a rear right edge portion 371c connected to the rear middle edge portion 371b on the opposite side of the rear left edge portion 371a and shaped to match the front edge of the ball lending operation unit 40 and abutting the ball lending operation unit 40 in the front-to-rear direction in the assembled state.

The hanging portion 372, together with the curved main body portion 371, covers the operating device 300 from the front side, and is a plate portion on which the operating handle 51 is supported, and is disposed at the right corner of the front frame 14.
The hanging portion 372 is shaped so as not to create a gap between the right corner cover 380 and the operating device 300 (so that the contact position with the right corner cover 380 coincides with each other), thereby preventing access to the operating device 300 from the front side.
A screw is inserted from below into the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed, whereby the bottom plate is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed.

The light-transmitting section 373 is a section that allows light irradiated from the operating device 300 to pass through to the front side, enabling the creation of optical effects. It is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operating device 300, and is positioned adjacent to the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223).

In the 18th embodiment, a case was described in which the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward (see FIG. 169). The arrangement of the LED device is an item that can be determined arbitrarily, and in this embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, six LEDs that irradiate light upward (arranged on the upper surface of the lighting support part 341e) and two LEDs that irradiate light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the lighting support part 341e) are arranged.

Of the LED devices 341f, the light emitted from the LEDs that emit light downward passes through a different number of components depending on the state of the operating device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 159), the light emitted from the LEDs that emit light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the light-transmitting section 373. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 169), the light emitted from the LEDs that emit light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310, passes through the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the light-transmitting section 373.

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light irradiated from the LED that irradiates light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the light-transmitting portion 373 is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state than when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which the amount of light visible through the light-transmitting portion 373 is changed in accordance with the change in the state of the tilting device 310, while eliminating the need to change the amount of light irradiated from the LED that irradiates light downward (while reducing the control burden by omitting the control for changing the amount of light).

As another method of controlling the performance, it is also possible to control the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in accordance with the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, by controlling the amount of light to be changed more strongly (in stages) as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 169) to the first state (see FIG. 159), and to be changed less strongly (in stages) as the tilting device 310 changes from the first state to the second state, it is possible to reduce (or eliminate, depending on the settings) the degree of change in the amount of light visible through the light-transmitting section 373 that accompanies the change in the state of the tilting device 310.

In the assembled state (Figure 223), the left side flat support portion 374 abuts against the lower end of the decorative illumination portion 8031 at the top and bottom. That is, when a downward load is applied to the decorative illumination portion 8031 and the decorative illumination portion 8031 shifts downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left side flat support portion 374 toward the decorative illumination portion 8031. This makes it possible to prevent the decorative illumination portion 8031 from shifting downward.

In the assembled state (Figure 223), the right side flat support part 375 abuts against the lower end of the decorative illumination part 8032 at the top and bottom. In other words, when a downward load is applied to the decorative illumination part 8032 and the decorative illumination part 8032 shifts downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side flat support part 375 toward the decorative illumination part 8032. This makes it possible to prevent the decorative illumination part 8032 from shifting downward.

Although details will be described later, the illumination unit 8031 and the illumination unit 8032 are provided on the upper panel unit 40.
When the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illumination unit 803
An upward reaction force is generated from the 1,8032 toward the upper panel unit 400.
According to this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide area by the illuminated parts 8031, 8032 and covering cover 370 which are fastened and fixed to the main frame 14a, so that the force required to support the upper panel unit 400 can be distributed over a wide area.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that receives the lower end of the illumination part 8032 entering from the back side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the illumination part 8032 is inserted to the innermost part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the position of the front lower corner end of the illumination part 8032 and the front side end of the right flat support part 375 are aligned.

The details of the engagement between the support groove 376 and the illumination part 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 can be fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a to form an assembled state, and a separate fastening part for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (or by sandwiching the main body frame 14a between a separate member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17)) on the back side of the main body frame 14a, and the passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a or plate member 14d on the back side of the plate member 14d (or by sandwiching the main body frame 14a between a separate member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17)), and a metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a or plate member 14d (or by sandwiching the main body frame 14a between a separate member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17)) in a manner covering the passage forming unit 140 from the back side.

The sheet metal member 150 functions as an intrusion prevention member that makes it impossible to intrude from the front side of the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 side, even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, if a wire with a heated tip or a piano wire is pressed against it and melts). In other words, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal will not be penetrated even if a wire with a heated tip is pressed against it, and can prevent the example wire from intruding into the back side of the front frame 14.

The sheet metal member 150 is formed in a manner that covers the top, bottom, left and right of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145 on the left side when viewed from the front, and mainly comprises a fitting box section 151 whose open front side is fitted into the passage forming unit 140, and a flat plate-like section 152 which covers the back surface of the lower part of the foul ball passage section 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

The fitting box portion 151 covers the top, bottom, left and right of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145, and therefore is not limited to the case where the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-to-rear direction at the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145.
Even if the wire is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the wire shown in the example is a passage forming unit 1
It is possible to prevent entry beyond 40.

Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the rear surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, even if a wire as exemplified in the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower tray 50 to open a through hole, it is possible to prevent an illegal member from entering the rear side of the passage forming unit 140. An example of a case in which such a situation occurs is when the operating device 300 is removed and the exemplified wire is pressed against a portion where the front and rear thickness has become thinner as a result (a portion diagonally above and behind the recessed portion 15a) to open a through hole through which the exemplified wire can enter.

Furthermore, the front frame 14 is provided with an operating part back member 155 that is fastened from the back side to the left end of the passage forming unit 140, and the operating part back member 155 is fastened and fixed to the main frame 14a at a position above or below the position where the cylinder lock 20 is positioned in the assembled state (see Figure 223).

As shown in Figures 226 and 228, the operating unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase its dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge of a left-right long plate member, and mainly comprises a through hole 156 drilled in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can pass through, a pair of insertion holes 157 drilled above and below the through hole 156 and through which screws are inserted to fasten the operating unit back member 155 to the main body frame 14a, a pair of connecting insertion holes 158 drilled side by side above and below in the portion (left end) that overlaps the back side of the passage forming unit 140, and an opening/closing restricting portion 159 that protrudes toward the back side on the rotation base end side of the through hole 156.

The connecting insertion hole 158 is formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140.
Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that coincides with the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
58 and a screw-in portion 148b that is drilled at a position that coincides with the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the fore-and-aft direction as a hole into which a screw can be screwed in.

With this configuration, when the operation unit rear member 155 is stacked on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operation unit rear member 155 are aligned by passing the protruding portion 148a through the upper connecting insertion hole 158, and then the screw that has passed through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 is screwed into the screw-in portion 148b, so that the operation unit rear member 155 can be easily assembled.
55 can be fastened to the passage forming unit 140.

The left edge of the left end of the operating unit back member 155, in which the connecting insertion hole 158 is drilled, and the lower edge are formed at a right angle to form an L-shaped wall 158a. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 has an extended wall 148c that extends from the plate that forms the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side to partition the area, and the extended wall 148c is formed in an L shape that can come into surface contact with the wall 158a in the vertical and horizontal directions when assembled (see FIG. 226).

Therefore, in order to align the operating unit back member 155 when assembling it to the passage formation unit 140, in addition to passing the protrusion portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is brought into surface contact with the extended wall portion 148c from above, below, left and right, thereby enabling the position and attitude of the operating unit back member 155 relative to the passage formation unit 140 to be quickly and easily adjusted.

The opening/closing restricting section 159 is a part that, in the assembled state (see FIG. 223), is arranged facing the front and rear of the board support device 600 (see FIG. 227) that is disposed in the inner frame 12, and although details will be described later, under certain conditions, it has the effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being in a closed state by abutting against the board support device 600 or the game board 13.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is extended toward the rear side of the operation unit rear member 155 and is formed from synthetic resin, and is formed with a U-shaped cross section as viewed in the extending direction in order to ensure rigidity. Therefore, it is less likely to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and the amount of material required can be reduced while ensuring rigidity compared to when it is extended in a block shape that fills the U-shaped open portion. Therefore, by being formed with the same plate thickness as the thickness of other portions of the operation unit rear member 155 (for example, the plate thickness of a portion that does not matter if its strength is low because the strength can be relied on the main body frame 14a and is formed as thin as possible), the strength of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving moldability.

The cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not limited to a U-shape as long as it can secure rigidity and maintain the shape. For example, compared to a flat plate-like cross section, the cross section may be curved (wave-shaped), stepped, rectangular wave-shaped, or cylindrical.

In addition, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 may be formed not as part of the operating portion rear member 155, but as a metal portion that is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the rear side, or that is extended to the rear side from a separate member fixed to the rear side of the main body frame 14a. However, forming the opening/closing restricting portion 159 from synthetic resin, as in this embodiment, can prevent the board support device 600 from chipping or denting when it comes into contact with the board support device 600 (see FIG. 227) made of a metal member. This reduces the risk of injury to an operator who changes the state of the board support device 600 to attach or detach the game board 13 by touching a chip or dent in the board support device 600.

Here, since the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is disposed closer to the base end of the rotation of the front frame 14 than the through-hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is disposed, it is possible to ensure a longer distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at the location of the cylinder lock 20 disposed on the tip end side of the rotation. Therefore, when the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 or the locking mechanism 20RK disposed on the tip end side of the rotation will be erroneously locked.

One possible route for a foreign object such as a wire to enter is, for example, through a gap in the operation device 300. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 228 and 229, the operation device 300 is configured so that it can be completely detached to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, even if a foreign object follows a gap in the operation device 300, it is configured so that it is difficult for the object to enter the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 233) that supplies power to the operating device 300 is inserted into a wiring hole 14a1 (see FIG. 240) drilled in the front-rear direction of the main frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173, and the harness HN3 is connected to the operating device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 194).

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operating device 300 through a gap in the operating device 300, it is difficult for the wire to reach the harness HN3 that is connected to the outside of the operating device 300, which is configured in a roughly case-like shape, making it easier to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

Note that liquids may be considered as foreign objects that may enter the operation device 300. For example, a player who is upset with the results of a game may splash drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. In such a case, the operation device 300, which is conveniently located, is likely to become a target for splashing drinking water. If no measures are taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155) or the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 150) may break down.

Furthermore, if liquid such as drinking water penetrates to the rear of the main body frame 14a, it may cause damage to electronic boards, etc., but as described above, in this embodiment, the operating device 300 is configured to be detachable and independent on the front side of the main body frame 14a, so that liquid such as drinking water sprayed on the operating device 300 can be prevented from penetrating to the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

The upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operating device 300) has a recess 15a recessed in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recess 15a is configured as a deep recess. It is not a complete case, and there are gaps formed here and there (for example, see FIG. 150, where the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to gaps). The recess 15a serves to temporarily store liquid that passes through the inside of the operating device 300 and falls below the operating device 300.

In the operating device 300, the drive motor 342 is positioned toward the rear of the opening 325, so that the tilting device 310 acts as an umbrella (see Figures 150 and 154(b)). Furthermore, the connection part with the wiring is positioned below the horizontal plate part that is located between the motor housing part 341e and the lighting support part 341e (see Figures 154(b) and 155), so that liquids such as drinking water can be prevented from being directly poured onto the drive motor 342, which could cause it to break down.

In addition, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a risk of liquids such as drinking water getting on it, but since the other parts are covered by the bottom plate part 321, liquids such as drinking water only adhere to the vibration surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows down the front side due to the inclination of the vibration surface of the voice coil motor 352 itself (see Figures 150 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from breaking down.

With the above-mentioned configuration, even if a player splashes liquid such as drinking water on himself as he is leaving, the next player can play as normal as long as he wipes the top surface of the operation device 300 that he touches, thus preventing the maintenance time for the operation device 300 from affecting business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, at the pivot base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to Figures 230 to 233. Note that Figures 230 to 233 show a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 have been removed from the front frame 14, similar to Figure 228.

Figure 230(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and Figure 230(b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180, in which the released and fixed states of the binding movable member 180 are illustrated side by side. Note that in Figure 230(b), the binding movable member 180 in the released state is illustrated on the top, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is illustrated on the bottom.

The binding movable member 180 is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 223) and binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are extended leftward from the upper end of the upward extension wall portion 173c.

In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 229) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball dispensing operating unit 40 (see FIG. 229) are each guided to the bundling movable member 180 without an intermediate board, and are each bundling to the bundling movable member 180.

On the other hand, the harnesses connected to each of the illumination units 8029-8033, the operating device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 223) are first connected (gathered) to a relay board arranged in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173, and a bundle of extension harnesses HN3 is directed from the relay board to the bundling movable member 180, and the extension harnesses HN3 are bound to the bundling movable member 180 (see FIG. 233).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed from a synthetic resin material, and mainly comprises a main body portion 181 fastened to the plate member 14d from the back side, a movable arm portion 182 rotatably supported by a screw fastened to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction, a pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotation direction (the side surface opposite the side facing the main body portion 181 in Figure 230 (a)) along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182, a pair of locking portions 184 which are U-shaped when viewed from above and are arranged on the other side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotation direction (the side surface facing the main body portion 181 in Figure 230 (a)) and are capable of locking the binding arm portion 183, and a temporary fastening portion 185 which extends downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 at a position (intermediate position) between the pair of binding arms 183 and has an opening.

In addition, the binding movable member 180 is formed such that the binding arm portion 183 has high flexibility, while the other portions are formed to have at least lower flexibility (higher rigidity) than the binding arm portion 183 .

The main body 181 includes a fixed portion 181a having a cross section with an upper side formed in a substantially horseshoe shape and a through hole in the center for passing a screw through, a pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b respectively protruding from the left and right lower corners of the fixed portion 181a toward the plate member 14d, an intermediate stopper 181c extending downward from the lower edge of the front end of the fixed portion 181a and having its extending tip curved close to the plate member 14d, and a plate-shaped support plate 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a.
(See FIG. 233(a)) and a cylindrical fastening portion 181e which is disposed on the upper part of the support plate portion 181d and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

The plate member 14d has a hole group 14d1 at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, the hole group 14d1 being composed of through holes arranged in the same manner as the fixed portion 181a and the pair of anti-rotation portions 181b.

When the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened to the corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b fit into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1, thereby preventing the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a during fastening.
The attitude with respect to d can be determined.

The intermediate retaining portion 181c maintains each of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between itself and the plate member 14d.
In this embodiment, by narrowing the gap between the extended end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping down, and by using a shape curved along a circle whose center is located on the plate member 14d side, it is possible to suppress stress concentration due to deformation while accommodating the harnesses HN1 to HN3 in the area (between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 18).
1c) can have a large cross-sectional area.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181
The outer circumferential surface of e is fitted into the base end portion of the movable arm 182 and supports the movable arm 182 (see Figure 233).

The movable arm 182 mainly comprises a base end 182a which is shaped to smoothly connect to a plane OS1 offset from the support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the base end being the portion which is externally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, and a thin plate portion 182b having a long, thin plate shape which is connected to the opposite side of the support position of the base end 182a.

The base end 182a has side walls extending in the direction of rotation from the inner left and right ends (parts where the straight line connecting the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the rear end (part closest to the plane OS1) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape with the center of the radius of curvature located on the same side, and the distance between them gradually decreases as they approach the plane OS1, and becomes equal to the thickness of the thin plate portion 182b when they reach the plane OS1.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains a higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on the situation.

The pair of binding arms 183 are configured with the same shape, so one will be described and the other will be omitted. The binding arm 183 has narrow sections 183a formed with a width equal to that of the base near the tip and wide sections 183b formed wider than the narrow sections 183a, which are alternately formed at equal intervals. In the fixed state, the binding arm 183 is inserted from below into a through hole formed between the locking section 184 and the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 230(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer periphery side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 230(b)), so that space can be secured on the inner periphery side of the binding arm 183.

The locking portion 184 has a large opening 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening 1
and a small opening 184b which is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 with the large opening 184a in between and has a smaller opening width than the large opening 184a (see FIG. 233).

The large opening 184a is sized to allow the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b is sized to allow the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through, but not the large width portion 183b to pass through (become locked).

According to this embodiment, when it is desired to move the binding arm portion 183 relative to the locking portion 184, the binding arm portion 183 is disposed on the large opening portion 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 is smaller).
When it is desired to engage binding arm portion 183 with engaging portion 184, by arranging binding arm portion 183 on the side of small opening 184b, the size of the inner area surrounded by binding arm portion 183 (degree of tightness) can be easily adjusted.

The temporary fastening portion 185 has a through hole in the center thereof through which a cable tie can be inserted. Even if the binding arm portion 183 breaks due to long-term use and it becomes impossible to bind the harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to bind the harnesses HN1 to HN3 by inserting a commercially available cable tie into the through hole of the temporary fastening portion 185 and fixing it.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. Figure 231(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, Figure 231(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame 14 taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in Figure 231(a), Figure 232(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and Figure 232(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame 14 taken along line XCVb-XCVb in Figure 232(a).

Note that Figures 231(a) and 231(b) show the state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one of the limit states of the movable range), and Figures 232(a) and 232(b) show the state in which the movable arm 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and abuts against a vertically long metal portion that constitutes the left portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range).

As shown in Figures 231 and 232, the movable arm 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees around an axis (axis facing up and down) parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14. This angle is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing during normal use, considering the installation conditions of the pachinko machines 8010 in game parlors (a situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side on the left and right and rotating by more than 90 degrees may cause a collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010).

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not exceed the range in which it can rotate relative to the main body 181 without elastic deformation (the range between the state shown in FIG. 231 and the state shown in FIG. 232), reducing the risk of the movable arm 182 deteriorating and breaking due to elastic deformation.

Next, the support mode of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. The arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is determined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, so that it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from accidentally being caught between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12, causing a break in the wires, for example.

Figure 233(a) is a schematic rear view showing the bundling movable member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, Figure 233(b) is a schematic top view of Figure 233(a), Figure 233(c) is a schematic rear view showing the bundling movable member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, and Figure 233(d) is a schematic top view of Figure 233(c).

Note that Figures 233(a) and 233(b) show one limit state of the bundling movable member 180, and Figures 233(c) and 233(d) show the other limit state of the bundling movable member 180.

As shown in FIG. 233, the intermediate stopper 181c is positioned toward the pivot base end of the front frame 14 from the opening that opens to the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. In other words, the intermediate stopper 181c and the opening that opens to the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c are on the same horizontal line, so the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are extended from the upwardly extending wall portion 173c can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stopper 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm 182, the upper extended wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stopper 181c
The shape of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side of the movable arm 18 of the binding movable member 180 is
2. This allows the shape of the casing 2 to be made to conform to that of FIG. 233(b) and FIG.
As shown in (d), the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have a curved shape, which makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of extreme bending deformation.

In addition, by disposing the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
The area surrounded by the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 14d across the movable arm portion 182. Therefore, particularly when the front frame 14 is closed relative to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 233(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. This makes it possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being broken due to bending.

Figures 234(a) and 234(b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, inner frame 12, binding movable member 180, and harnesses HN1-HN3, which diagrammatically illustrate the binding movable member 180 and harnesses HN1-HN3. Note that Figure 234(a) illustrates one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and Figure 234(b) illustrates the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

234(a) and 234(b) also show a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 223), the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are shown typically in imaginary lines, and members fixed to the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12, respectively, and supported at the rotation center point P57 are shown typically in solid lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates with respect to the inner frame 12 around the rotation center point P57, just like the front frame 14.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 234(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 234(b), the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 rotates around the cylindrical fastening portion 181e to open and close the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14, so that a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (see also FIG. 233(b) and FIG. 233(d)).

As shown in Figures 234(a) and 234(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are routed along a path that passes near the vertically long metal portion that constitutes the left side of the main body frame 14a of the front frame 14 (the portion that the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 abuts in Figure 233(d)), regardless of whether the harnesses are open or closed relative to the inner frame 12 of the front frame 14. In other words, by forcibly routing the harnesses HN1 to HN3 in a detour, the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented from moving toward the rotating tip of the front frame 14.

This prevents the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the worker's work when opening and closing the front frame 14, and improves the fit of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 when the front frame 14 is closed (they are bent only once at the base end of the rotation) (see Figures 233(b) and 234(a)).

In this embodiment, the intermediate stopper 181c is positioned vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 228). The intermediate stopper 181c, positioned vertically above the inverted cup portion 178, supports the harnesses HN1-HN3 in such a way that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts, such as, for example, heating the tip of a wire or piano wire to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the inverted cup portion 178, thereby allowing the wire to enter between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when the wire is pressed against the underside of the inverted cup portion 178, melted, and penetrated, and then advanced toward the play area, as the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the inverted cup portion 178, the tip of the wire, which has been heated to a high temperature, is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stopper portion 181c. As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned off, and electrical continuity is disabled.

When the electrical continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, an error signal is output and an alarm is sounded (an error screen is displayed), so that fraud can be quickly discovered. This makes it possible to prevent fraudsters from obtaining illegal benefits.

In more detail, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 229) as described above, if the harness HN1 burns out, the ball cannot be launched even by rotating the operating handle 51. This makes it possible to shorten the time from when a cheating act is committed until the cheating act is discovered (it makes it possible to discover the cheating act early).

In this case, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraudulent acts of obtaining a prize ball by inserting a wire into the play area, tampering with the play area (for example, bending the nails to make it easier to win a prize illegally), and then causing the ball to enter the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 139) or the like, thereby making it impossible to launch balls, thereby preventing the granting of an illegal advantage. In other words, it is possible to make it impossible to perform certain fraudulent acts.

In addition, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 229) as described above, if the harness HN2 burns out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 226) and the return button 43 (see FIG. 226) cannot be operated. Therefore, a person committing fraudulent acts may be in danger of being unable to retrieve the bills inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) or the remaining amount of balls on the card, thereby acting as a deterrent to fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, when committing fraudulent acts to eliminate the risk of not being able to collect the bills inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) or the balls equivalent to the card balance, the player commits fraudulent acts without leaving his/her seat even though the balance of the card unit (ball lending unit) is 0 yen, making it easy for the gaming machine store to notice the fraudulent acts.

In the first place, if the harness HN2 is disconnected, a disconnection error (CR error) in the card unit (ball dispensing unit) (not shown) is output, and the gaming machine store can easily identify the possibility of fraudulent activity by checking the disconnection error (CR error).

Figure 235 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In Figure 235, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the sphere guide opening 53 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 235, the ball guide opening 53 is located at the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145. In this embodiment, the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 142 occupies an area of approximately 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 to the left of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145 is separated by a partition plate section 53a so as to occupy the remaining area (approximately 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) to the right of the ball guide opening 53.

The front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 are passages that extend from the payout ball receiving section 143 and the foul ball receiving section 146, respectively, to allow balls to flow down toward the lower tray 50, and each has an S-shaped path SL1, SL2 that extends (switches) at least once to the left and right.

The S-shaped path SL1 allows the length of the flow path of the front door side lower tray path section 142 to be increased while keeping the vertical dimension of the path forming unit 140 short, so that the number of balls that can be retained inside the front door side lower tray path section 142 can be increased. This allows the number of balls that can be retained upstream of the lower tray 50 to be increased while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window section 14c (see FIG. 223), so that the vertical dimensions of the play area and performance area can be large, and by increasing the number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the lower tray 50 (and its upstream side), a pachinko machine 8010 can be constructed that can reduce the stress of ball refilling on the player (such as the stress caused by being required to refill balls from the 1000-ryo box when 50 balls in the lower tray are used up).

The front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 each have bending areas NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2, which are areas where the extension direction is bent in the up-down direction and the left-right direction, and they have a common feature. That is, the front door side lower tray passage section 142 has a first bending area NEa1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending area NEa2 arranged upstream of the first bending area NEa1 with the left and right of the characteristic part reversed.

The foul ball passage 145 also includes a first bending area NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending area NEb2 arranged upstream of the first bending area NEb1 with the left and right of the characteristic portion reversed. Note that in describing the characteristic portion, the characteristics of the first bending area NEa1 will be described, and descriptions of the other bending areas NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

236 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 236, the first bending region NEa1 mainly includes a side wall Na arranged on the opposite side of the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower tray passage section 142, a ceiling wall Nb arranged above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extension direction of the side wall Na, and a proximity wall Nc extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and approaching the side wall Na toward the extension end, and each of these walls Na, Nb, and Nc extends from the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The surface Nc1 of the proximity wall Nc opposite the ceiling wall Nb is curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface for the ball. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 opposite the surface Nc1 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) functions as a surface that regulates the direction of travel of the improperly inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as a wire or piano wire), as will be described in detail later. The gap Nin between the proximity wall Nc and the side wall Na at the lower end of the extension is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in Figure 236, the shape of the first bending area NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from penetrating deeper. That is, as shown in Figure 236, one possible route for the illegally inserted wire HM is to use the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance and proceed upstream of the front door side lower tray passage section 142. In this case, the person committing the fraudulent act will advance the wire HM while pressing it against the side wall of the front door side lower tray passage section 142.

When a fraudster presses the wire HM against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but even if the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1, the wire HM will move to the right due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower tray passage section 142, and will be pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enter the gap Nin. In other words, by arranging the pair of bending areas NEa1, NEa2 in a mirror image, the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without fail.

An example of the path of travel of the wire HM when it enters the gap Nin is shown in Figure 236. The tip position of the wire HM at each timing is indicated by a black circle, and the direction of travel of the wire HM at that time is indicated by an arrow. As shown in Figure 236, the wire HM that enters the gap Nin enters the tapered dead-end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM gets caught (pinched) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from traveling any further, and also to prevent the wire HM from being held, allowing fraudulent activity to be discovered quickly.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM does not get caught and continues to move forward, when the wire HM protrudes from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM protrudes with its tip facing downward, so even if the wire HM is advanced further, the tip of the wire HM will continue to move downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 located upstream of the payout ball receiving portion 143 or the game area located upstream of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

This prevents fraudsters from obtaining illegal benefits by making the wire HM reach the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and causing the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining illegally paid-out balls, or by making the wire HM reach the game area and forcibly opening movable devices such as the electric role 640a (see FIG. 139), making it easier to win illegally, thereby obtaining illegally paid-out balls.

Returning to FIG. 235, the foul ball passage 145 is formed with a vertical width of about twice the diameter of the ball (more than twice in this embodiment) downstream from the merging area CE where it merges with the ball removal passage 147. This makes it possible to extremely reduce the possibility that the balls will be sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and interlock with each other when the balls flowing down the foul ball passage 145 enter the merging flow path CE (the two balls enter the merging area CE at the same time) when the balls flowing down the ball removal passage 147 are placed in the merging area CE, even if the two balls are lined up vertically. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the balls from being impeded downstream from the merging area CE.

The foul ball passage 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage 145a that vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The width of the passage 145a is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, and the rear side bottom plate of the passage forming unit 140 is formed to protrude toward the front side as it moves downward.

In the area upstream of the passage section 145a, the rear bottom plate of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end of the passage section 145a, and in the area downstream of the passage section 145a, the rear bottom plate of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the downstream end of the passage section 145a.

That is, the foul ball passage 145 is set so that the area upstream of the passage 145a has a larger front-to-rear width than the area downstream of the passage 145a. In this embodiment, the foul ball passage 145 is set so that the front-to-rear width downstream of the passage 145a is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the foul ball passage 145 is set so that the front-to-rear width upstream of the passage 145a is slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when a ball is retained in the foul ball passage 145, multiple balls can be positioned with their positions shifted forward and backward upstream of the passage 145, increasing the number of balls that can be retained, and preventing the centers of the balls from lining up in the front-to-back direction (they will be slightly shifted left and right and up and down), preventing two balls from entering the passage 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage 145a can be restricted to one at a time. This prevents the foul balls from reaching the junction area CE at the same time, even if two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage 145 in succession, reducing the possibility of the balls getting caught between the upper and lower walls in the junction area CE.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 is provided as a plate extending from the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, and is connected at its left end to the left wall portion. It mainly comprises an inclined plate portion 146a whose downflow surface of the ball slopes downward as it moves to the right, a blocking portion 146b that blocks the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and a curved guide plate portion 146c that is provided as a plate extending from the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a to the rear side, and curves in such a way that its extension direction points upward as it moves toward the rear side.

While the ball is guided along the top surface of the curved guide plate 146c toward the foul ball passage 145 (front side), the inclined plate 146a and blocking portion 146b act to move the ball's passage position toward the front side of the foul ball receiving portion 146 toward the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. In other words, the ball rolling down the top surface of the inclined plate 146a can be directed to the right, and the blocking portion 146b can prevent the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for a ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 to reach the S-shaped path SL2. In other words, because the ball can finish bouncing up and down before it reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (the variation in the ball's up and down position can be reduced), the width of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the S-shaped path SL2 can be set small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball) while allowing the ball to flow down smoothly.

The foul ball passage 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball) in the area that forms the S-shaped path SL2 (e.g., passage 145a), so that illegal tools with a larger outer shape can be prevented from passing through the foul ball passage 145.

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. Figure 237 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and Figure 238 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that Figures 237 and 238 show the components of the upper panel unit 400 that make up the illumination section 8030 disassembled from the main frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed long on the left and right, and the left and right ends are supported from below by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the illumination unit 8031 and the illumination unit 8032. In this support structure, a tapered supported groove 417 (see FIG. 255) is formed at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similar to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, which is recessed from the back side to the front side, and the left and right claws that constitute the supported groove 417 are fitted into the fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see FIG. 245 and FIG. 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500, thereby connecting the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500.

This eliminates the need to fasten the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 directly, and allows them to be connected and fixed to each other by fastening them to the main body frame 14a. Due to the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a is regulated so that the right panel unit 500 is fastened and then the upper panel unit 400 is fastened. Details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 are configured to sandwich and engage with the engagement grooves 522b, 562b (see Figures 245 and 246) provided on the overlapping plate units 500R, 500L of the right panel unit 500, which is divided into left and right halves, thereby preventing the overlapping plate units 500R, 500L from moving apart to the left and right. Therefore, the right panel unit 500 can be prevented from being disassembled in the assembled state (engaged state, see Figure 223).

Figure 239 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and Figure 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. Figures 239 and 240 show the upper edge plate member 14e, which is sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see Figure 226) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multi-function cover members 171 and 172 disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between itself and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 238).
1 and FIG. 259).

The fastening portion 14e1 has a through hole through which a screw is inserted from its rear side, and is a part for fastening and fixing the upper frame member 410 and the upper edge plate member 14e by fastening the screw that passes through the through hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see Figure 238) of the upper frame member 410.

FIG. 241 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIG. 241, the main body frame 14a
The right panel unit 500 is shown disassembled from the main frame 14a. The right panel unit 500 is fastened to the main frame 14a by screws that are inserted from the rear side into insertion holes drilled in the right panel unit 500. The upper panel unit 400, upper edge plate member 14e, and multi-function cover members 171, 172 are not shown, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

In actual assembly, the panel unit 500 is first assembled to the main body frame 14a, and then the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. The right panel unit 500 has a right side wall portion that forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223).

FIG. 242 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 244 is a front view of the support plate portion 510.
245 and 246 are exploded front perspective views of the weight plate units 500L and 500R. Note that Fig. 245 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and Fig. 246 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIG. 242 to FIG. 246, the right panel unit 500 includes a left stacking board unit 500L and a right stacking board unit 500R that are stacked in the left-right direction, and the stacking board units 50
and a vertically long plate-like support plate portion 510 to which the 0L and 500R are fastened and which is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 241).

The weight plate unit 500 is secured to the support plate portion 510 by a screw inserted from the rear side to the front side.
The L and R are fastened to the support plate portion 510, and in this state, the support plate portion 510 is
4a is fastened to a main body frame 14a (see FIG. 241) by a screw inserted from the rear side to the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed with an L-shaped cross section by extending an extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side in a plate-like shape, and mainly comprises a fixed plate 511 whose inner wall (left wall) of the extension portion 511a abuts against the outer surface of the main body frame 14a in the assembled state (see FIG. 223), a base member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511, a plurality of cover side through holes 513 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the base member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the base member 512, and a pin support hole 515 drilled in the fixed plate 511 to the right of the lens side through holes 514.

The fixing plate 511 has a base portion 511b that overlaps with the base member 512 when viewed from the front, and the portion of the fixing plate 511 facing the base member 512 protrudes toward the front in a platform shape, and the base member 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 in a state where it is in face-to-face contact with the front of the base portion 511b.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the base portion 511b can abut against the weight plate units 500L, 500R in the width direction (see FIG. 252(b)), preventing the weight plate units 500L, 500R from tipping over in the left-right direction. In other words, it is easier to maintain the position of the weight plate units 500L, 500R relative to the support plate portion 510.

In this embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extension portion 511a is shifted to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560 relative to the base portion 511b, so that the outer cover member 560 abuts against the support plate portion 510 in the front-to-rear direction on the front side of the extension portion 511a, while on the left side surface of the fixed plate 511, the side surface of the base portion 511b is formed as a surface almost flush with the rear end, so that the rear end of the inner cover member 520 can be positioned at the surface of the rear end of the support plate portion 510, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the inner surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 abuts against the left side surface 511c of the support plate portion 510.

The substrate member 512 is an electronic substrate (printed substrate) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a curved row that matches the curved shape of the light-guiding member 540, with a predetermined interval (11 mm interval in this embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape of the light-guiding member 540 projected from the front, and irradiate light from directly behind the light-guiding member 540 toward the light-guiding member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other (see FIG. 244).

The width of the end face of light-guiding member 540 facing LED 512a is made longer than the width of LED 512a (the left-right width of the light-emitting portion) (see imaginary line in Figure 244), so that the light irradiated from LED 512a enters light-guiding member 540 without any leakage and exits from either side of light-guiding member 540; the entry and exit of light and the path of that light will be described later.

The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the rear fastening portion 527 disposed on the inner cover member 520, and through which a screw to be fastened to the rear fastening portion 527 is inserted from the rear side.
Fixed to 0.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning a rear fastening portion 556 disposed on the outer lens member 550, and through which a screw to be fastened to the rear fastening portion 556 is inserted from the rear side.
Fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin support hole 515 has a left-right width set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, while the vertical width is set to be approximately twice the length of the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, while strictly defining the left-right position of the outer cover member 560, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed.

That is, in a fastening preparation state in which the stacking plate units 500L, 500R abut against the support plate portion 510 from the front side, even if the plate units 500L, 500R are slightly misaligned vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (if they are misaligned vertically by approximately the diameter of the protrusion 566), the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515.
After inserting the pin support hole 515, the weight plate unit 500L,
By moving 500R up and down by the amount of misalignment, the misalignment can be eliminated and fastening can be easily performed.

As shown in Figures 245 and 246, the left stacking plate unit 500L includes an inner cover member 520 that forms the right edge of the window portion 14c (see Figure 223) and is made of a light-non-transparent resin material, and an inner lens member 530 that is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is made of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right stacking plate unit 500R includes a light guide member 540 disposed opposite the left stacking plate unit 500L.
An outer lens member 550 is disposed on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and is made of a light-opaque resin material. The outer lens member 550 is disposed on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and is made of a light-opaque resin material. The outer lens member 550 faces the light-guiding member 540 in the left-right direction and has a front end portion facing the front-rear direction.
0 and an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, the details of each member will be described.
247 is an exploded front perspective view of the load plate units 500L and 500R. Note that Fig. 247 is an exploded front perspective view of the load plate units 500L and 500R, and Fig. 248 is an exploded front perspective view of the load plate units 500L and 500R, respectively.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape and an upper fastening portion 52 disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened to the outer cover member 560.
2, a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and an inner lens member 5
30, and a plurality of short fastening portions 525 into which screws are screwed to fix the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520; and a cylindrical portion formed longer than the short fastening portions 525 and inserted into the inner lens member 530, and a cylindrical portion formed longer than the short fastening portions 525 and inserted into the inner lens member 530, and
and a plurality of rear fastening portions 527 protruding from the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 from the rear side are screwed.
And, mainly prepare.

The main body plate portion 521 has a front end portion 521a formed in a wave shape, and includes a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front end portion 521a and the rear base portion 521b at a short width portion (portion closer to the rear side) of the wave shape.

The rear base 521b has an inner surface 521b1 that comes into contact (matches in shape) with the left side surface of the base 511b of the support plate 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion that is disposed in an attitude that inclines more leftward as it approaches the rear surface side, and an opening portion 524 is defined by this connecting plate portion 521c.

In this embodiment, the connecting plate parts 521c are not arranged at equal intervals up and down, but are arranged so that the intervals become wider from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 251). As a result, the opening widths of the multiple openings 524 are made different, and the lighting effect is enhanced by the openings 524.
It can be different for each.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which screws for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 are screwed, and includes a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged side by side in the front-to-rear direction, and an engaging groove 522b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 (see Figure 255) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b which is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by inserting screws at two points at the upper end and one point at the lower end.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 229) fit.

The openings 524 are arranged in four positions above and below, and are arranged in the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state.
Each of the outer peripheries of the openings 524 is formed in a curved shape that protrudes to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as its end (left end). That is, each of the openings 524 is disposed recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 251).

The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at the boundary between the rear base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 247).
The surface (left side surface) of the rear base portion 52 corresponds to the portion that protrudes to the left (see FIG. 248).
The surface of 1b is curved concavely to the right between the above-mentioned boundary portions in a design manner.
That is, the surface of the rear base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates from side to side as it progresses in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is disposed on the back side of the portion that protrudes toward the front side in the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, the back side of the protruding portion in the design has a recess that is likely to become dead space. In contrast, in this embodiment, the short fastening portion 525 is disposed in the recess of the inner cover member 520, so that the dead space can be effectively utilized and the space efficiency of the back side of the inner cover member 520 (the inner lens member 530 side) can be improved.

The inner lens member 530 is formed such that the front and rear end shapes are similar to the front and rear end shapes of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 is formed in a vertically long plate shape by the main body plate portion 5
A front end 531 a of the inner cover member 520 is formed into a wave shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end 521 a of the inner cover member 520 .

The front end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front edge of the main plate portion 531, and at a position where the curve constituting the wave shape changes in the front-rear direction, a support hole 531 is formed in the front-rear direction and through which a protruding portion 551b (see FIG. 246) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531c.

The support hole 531b is formed in the front part of the wave-shaped front end 531a, and a through hole 531b1 is formed on the rear side thereof, through which a screw passes to fasten the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520. That is, since the screw is fastened behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b is
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of 31b, the support hole 531b can be prevented from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in a rear portion of the wave-shaped front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 is disposed on the rear side thereof, which extends to a position where the support hole 531c can come into contact with the light guide member 540. That is, the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, so that the support hole 531c can be supported by the inclined rib portion 532.
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of support hole 531c, deformation or displacement of support hole 531c can be prevented.

The main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d drilled in the left-right direction at a position between the support holes 531b and 531c in the up-down direction and large enough to insert the long fastening portion 526. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is disposed between the pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 that connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction.
b.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended to fill the gap between the light guide member 540. That is,
Like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes to the left as it approaches the rear side, and therefore has a shape that becomes longer in left-right width as it approaches the rear side (a triangle shape with the front end at its tip when viewed from above).

Inner lens member 530 has protruding portion 533 formed protruding leftward from main body plate portion 531 in a manner passing through opening 524. Protruding portion 533 has light scattering portion 533a, on the side opposite to the protruding side, which is provided in a wavy convex shape and has a wavy curved surface that scatters light.

The light guide member 540 is a so-called light guide plate made of thermoplastic resin, and has concave portions formed on both left and right sides as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a lattice pattern, which redirect the traveling direction of light irradiated from the LEDs 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right directions. That is, at least a part of the light irradiated from the LEDs 512a to the back side end of the light guide member 540 is redirected to the left and right directions via the light guide member 540, and is irradiated to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. The light guide member 540 is heat-bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see Figures 242 and 244), and is formed into a shape in which the width dimension in the thickness direction gradually tapers from the end face on the back side (the LEDs 512a side) to the end face on the front side.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a
The concave portion is a notched recess recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a to the light guide member 5
The light is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of 40.

In this embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is formed by pressing (thermally pressing) a template having a pattern in which cone-shaped portions with an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of about 1 mm at the bottom circle are distributed in a lattice shape at intervals of about 3 mm against the thermoplastic resin. Of the light irradiated from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted in a substantially perpendicular direction from the left and right side surfaces of the light-guiding member 540.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but is preferably transparent, and examples thereof include acrylic resins (methacrylic resins), polycarbonate resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, amorphous polyester resins, amorphous olefin resins, polystyrene resins, and AS resins (
Among these, by using an acrylic resin in particular, the light guide member 540 has a high average luminance and a small decrease in the luminance distribution.
can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the thickness of the light guide member 540 at the LED 512a side end is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness to 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, and the shape retention after the thermal bending process is improved, so that practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the light guide member 540 has a wave shape in which the front end is slightly shifted toward the rear side from the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530, and also has a wave shape that undulates left and right.

The left and right wave shapes are not strictly defined in the present invention.
There are no particular restrictions, but the radius of curvature (R) of the curved surface is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less.
By setting the radius of curvature (R) in this range, it is possible to provide a design that has little distortion after hot bending, maintains good practical mechanical properties, and allows for three-dimensional freedom.

The details of the wavy shape will be described later (see FIG. 251 ).
The corrugated shape is located to the left at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the connecting plate 521a and located to the right (located away from the inner cover member 520) between the positions corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portions 521c.

The corrugated shape in the left-right direction is formed by hot bending the base material having the concave portions formed therein, as described above. The hot bending method of the present invention is to form a curved concave surface (female mold) and a curved convex surface (female mold) in a state where the base material is heated to a heating temperature of the deflection temperature under load of the thermoplastic resin of the base material + 10 to 40°C.
The substrate is pressed against a mold having a male mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin is mainly composed of an acrylic resin, the heating temperature can be 110° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower. More specifically, the heating temperature is preferably 130° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower.

The heating temperature of the substrate at this time is set to the melting point of the thermoplastic resin or lower. By setting the temperature of the substrate during heating to the load deflection temperature + 40°C or lower and the melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the substrate is not destroyed, and the reflection angle of the light from the light source before and after the thermal bending process can be suppressed from fluctuating. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in brightness in the light guide plate and unevenness in the brightness distribution. In addition, by setting such heating temperature conditions, distortion of the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved main body plate portion 541 that constitutes a light guide plate, and the main body plate portion 5
and fastening portions 542 extending in the vertical direction from the upper and lower ends of the outer cover member 560 and through which screws are inserted to fasten the outer cover member 560.

The light guide member 540 has a fastening portion 542 and a recess 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526.
In other positions, light guiding member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction. That is, light guiding member 540 is composed of a single plate without holes at least inside the projection surface onto which opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, so that the presentation effect of the light passing through opening 524 can be improved. The rear end of light guiding member 540 is positioned approximately flush with the rear end of inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and inner fitting portions 551 disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 and into which fastening portions 542 of the light guide member 540 are fitted and supported.
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, a protrusion portion 554 that protrudes to the right in the area surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 and is visible through the outer cover member, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portions 526 of the inner cover member 520 are inserted, and a plurality of rear fastening portions 556 that protrude from the rear side of the main body plate portion 551 and into which screws that fix the support plate portion 510 from the rear side are screwed in.

The outer lens member 550 is formed such that the shapes of the front and rear end portions follow the shapes of the front and rear end portions of the light guiding member 540. That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end portion 551a extending leftward from the front edge of the main body plate portion 551 and constituting a curved surface, which is wavy in shape substantially matching the shape of the front end portion of the light guiding member 540, and is disposed slightly shifted toward the front side with respect to the front end portion of the light guiding member 540. In this embodiment, the front end portion of the light guiding member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed such that they are disposed at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the up-down direction.

The front end 551a is provided with a plurality of protruding portions 551b that protrude toward the front side at the transition position of the curves that make up the wave shape in the forward and backward directions and are fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 223).

The surface of the front end 551 a opposite to the surface facing the light guide member 540 is provided with the following:
Countless bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 252(a) ) that bulge out in a semicircular shape when viewed from the side are formed vertically. These bulging portions 551a1 function to scatter the light emitted from the front end face of the light-guiding member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at a predetermined interval, the light emitted from the front end face of the light-guiding member 540 can be in a vertically continuous band-like light emission mode.

The insertion hole 553 is disposed in a deep recess having a shape recessed inward (inner of the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the protruding portion 554. This makes it possible to firmly fasten the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560, and prevents the outer lens member 550 from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right weight plate unit 500R, the rear fastening portion 556 into which the screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is disposed on the outer lens member 550, but not on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be disposed as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (regardless of the screw diameter or screw arrangement). This allows the area disposed facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) to be expanded.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 facing the light-guiding member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light-guiding member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the light-guiding member 540 and the main body plate portion 551 abut on each other (see FIG. 251(b)).

This makes it possible to prevent the light guiding member 540 from being misaligned in the direction in which it is disposed opposite the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guiding member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, the LED 512a is disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510,
This makes it possible to prevent misalignment with the light-guiding member 540, and allows light to be incident from the LEDs 512a to the light-guiding member 540 with high precision.

The outer cover member 560 has a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561, which has a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520, the upper fastened portion 562 having an elongated hole portion having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and having a plurality of screw receiving portions 562a through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and a receiving surface at the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561 which is capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520,
The lower fastening portion 563 has a screw receiving portion 563a formed in a long hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side.
26, and mainly comprises a plurality of screw receiving portions 564 formed in the shape of a long hole with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, an opening 565 formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the protrusion portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a plurality of protrusions 566 protruding from the main body plate portion 561 toward the back side.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 255) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed in the covering cover 3.
The left and right claw portions constituting the support groove 376 of the support member 70 (see FIG. 229) are formed as grooves into which they fit.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting with the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b, 563b. Here, the right panel unit 500 abuts the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 on their surfaces in the vertical direction (see FIG. 223), so that the covering cover 370 can stably support the right panel unit 500 even if it has a shape that protrudes toward the front side, and the stably supported right panel unit 500 can support the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the protruding portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (
(The opening 565 is formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion 554.) Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the protruding portion 554 can be narrowed, so that the fraudulent act of peeling off the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

249 and 250, the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500
We will now explain the assembly method of R. Figure 249(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, Figure 249(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in Figure 249(a), Figure 250(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and Figure 250(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in Figure 250(a).

249(a) and 249(b) show a state in which the protruding portion 551b is disposed on the rear side of the support hole 531b, and in FIG. 250(a) and FIG. 250(b), the protruding portion 55
1b is shown inserted into the support hole 531b.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled by abutting the main body plate portion 531 of the left stacking plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front end portion 551a of the right stacking plate unit 500R in the left-right direction (FIG. 11).
2(b)), the left stacking plate unit 500L is brought close to the front side of the right stacking plate unit 500R and the protruding portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this manner, the protruding portions 551b, 551c are provided at the front end of the right panel unit 500.
By adopting a configuration in which the left stacking board unit 500L and the right stacking board unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting c into the support hole 531b, the design freedom of the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in this embodiment, as a result of adopting the above-mentioned configuration, the front end portion of the right panel unit (
The number of screws that are located (located closer to the front side of the light-guiding member 540) and fasten the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500R can be reduced, thereby reducing the area where light is blocked by the screws, making it easier to view the light emitted from the front end face of the light-guiding member 540 in a band-like shape extending in the vertical direction.

In addition, for example, in this embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) that fasten the left stacking board unit 500L and the right stacking board unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that a load may be applied to the light guide member 540 by mistake during fastening.
Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded up to the vicinity of the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). This makes it possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being visually interrupted near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

In addition, when the left stacking plate unit 500L is brought close to the right stacking plate unit 500R from the front side and the protruding portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left stacking plate unit 500L and the light guide member 540 of the right stacking plate unit 500R are
The inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 are in contact with each other. That is, the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 are in contact with each other.
This functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving the right weight plate unit 500R in the forward/backward direction, making it easy to assemble the right panel unit 500.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, the right panel unit 500 is made by mounting the left stacking plate unit 5
The right and left weight plate units 500L and 500R are assembled by fastening, and there are at least two possible assembly procedures.

The first procedure is a method in which the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500R are fastened to each other and then fastened to the support plate portion 510. The second procedure is a method in which the right stacking plate unit 500R is fastened to the support plate portion 510 alone, and then the left stacking plate unit 500L is brought closer to the right stacking plate unit 500R, and the protruding portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b,
These are methods for fastening and fixing the left stacking plate unit 500L to the right stacking plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510. These two procedures can also be used when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

In this way, since the right panel unit 50 can be assembled and disassembled in two different procedures, a worker performing maintenance or the like can select which procedure to use depending on the part that needs to be replaced.
It is possible to select whether to disassemble or assemble the 0, thereby shortening the work time.

Regardless of which procedure is used for disassembly, in order to disassemble the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500R,
The protrusions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b must slide relative to each other in the planar direction.
In order to slide the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500R relative to each other in the planar direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

In this way, the configuration in which the protrusions 551b, 551c fit into the support hole 531b helps to prevent fraudulent activity in which the right panel unit 500 is pried open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see Figure 223) and someone enters the interior of the pachinko machine 8010 by climbing inside the right panel unit 500.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and fraudulent acts can be easily performed. On the other hand, when the left stacking board unit 5
The left and right weight plate units 500L and 500R are fastened to the support plate unit 510 with screws inserted from the rear side of the support plate unit 510, and the left and right weight plate units 500L and 500R are configured to be difficult to disassemble unless the screws are removed from the rear side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 241), making it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activity of entering the interior of the pachinko machine 8010 by climbing inside the right panel unit 500.

The shape of the light-guiding member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and its effect on the presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 251. Fig. 251(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, Fig. 251(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and Fig. 251(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. Note that in Figs. 251(a) to 251(c),
The support plate portion 510 is omitted in the illustration.

Light emitted from LEDs 512a (see FIG. 242) of the support plate portion 510 is irradiated onto the light-guiding member 540 from the rear side, and the light incident on the light-guiding member 540 is redirected to the left and right by the action of the light-guiding member 540. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light-guiding member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 is curved and wavy in the left-right direction (see FIG. 251(b)), the light is concentrated on the side forming the concave shape and diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the multiple openings 524, the light guide member 540 is concave on the opening 524 side (left side) with a curvature radius R1, so that the light emitted from the light guide member 540 to the opening 524 side can be concentrated to produce an effect. This can improve the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) is made convex, the light emitted from the light-guiding member 540 toward the outer lens member 550 can be diffused at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the multiple openings 524 and used for presentation purposes.

In this manner, in this embodiment, even if the top and bottom positions are the same, it is possible to create a difference in the manner in which the light is produced (whether the light is concentrated or diffused) on the left and right sides of the light-guiding member 540, thereby improving the production effect.

The difference in the manner of light presentation is not only caused by the curved shape of the light-guiding member 540, but various other manners are exemplified. For example, the manner of light presentation on both the left and right sides can be made different by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut into the light-guiding member 540 into different regions or by dividing the thickness of the light-guiding member 540 into different regions.

The light guide member 540 is always formed with a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, for the top three openings 524, the vertical width increases as the opening 524 approaches the upper side, and accordingly, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 at a position corresponding to the second opening 524 from the top is set shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
>R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at a position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is made shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1 >R2 >R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit light to be concentrated for each opening 524 is different, so that the amount of light visually recognized through the openings 524 can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to this embodiment, the amount of light visually recognized can be made greater for the upper openings 524 than for the lower openings 524.

In addition, the radius of curvature R4 at the bottom opening 524, i.e., the position corresponding to the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4 ≒ R1), and the normal line from the center of the concave surface is shaped to face slightly diagonally upward. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the openings 524 at the top and bottom ends can be intensified, the light presentation can be made more vivid, and the light emitted through the bottom opening 524 can be emitted upward toward the player's line of sight.

251(c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as the length connecting the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of opening 524 in a side view. The width of opening 524 arranged opposite the portion with radius of curvature R1 is vertical width W1, the width of opening 524 arranged opposite the portion with radius of curvature R2 is vertical width W2, the width of opening 524 arranged opposite the portion with radius of curvature R3 is vertical width W3, and the width of opening 524 arranged opposite the portion with radius of curvature R4 is vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, the openings 524 are formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 of the openings 524 are smaller toward the bottom (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portions of the radii of curvature R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship of the radii of curvature R1 to R3 is related to the magnitude relationship of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the openings 524. This allows the light to be focused more easily in the portions where the degree of light concentration is weak (for example, the portions of the radii of curvature R
In a portion where the degree of light concentration is high (e.g., a portion of radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to prevent too much light from being incident on the opening 524. Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode of each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center points of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 251(b) correspond to the focal points of the light emitted to the left of the light-guiding member 540, and are located at approximately the middle positions of the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction.

The light guide member 540 has a leftward convex shape in an area KE at the boundary of the opening 524. Here, the area KE is defined as a strip-shaped area extending in the front-rear direction, and the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 251(c), the area K
The upper end of the region E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent thereto above, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent thereto below.
The light irradiated from a in the front-rear direction is the light irradiated from the right panel unit 500 as viewed from the left side (FIG. 251(c)
521c) proceeds while being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is reflected by the inner cover member 520.
Since the light is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c, even if the light collecting effect is reduced, the difference in the amount of light visible to the player is small.

On the other hand, by making the region KE not flat but convex to the left, the light guide member 54
Since the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed in a curved shape without corners and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

In addition, by forming the region KE in a convex shape toward the left side, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is concentrated can be formed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. This can improve the effect of the light presentation visually recognized through the opening 565.

In other words, depending on whether or not light is incident on area KE from LED 512a, it is possible to suppress any change in the light viewed through opening 524 while causing a change in the light viewed through opening 565.

For example, the LED 512a that emits light into the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5
By turning on 12a, it is also possible to irradiate light without gaps to the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565. At this time, by making the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the area KE have a concave shape, the light emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the area KE intersects with the right side of the outer cover member 560, so that it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being visually perceived as dark in the area KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is concentrated and emitted in an edge shape, and the amount of light visible to the player at the edge can be increased.
This can add some contrast to the lighting pattern of the LED (see reference).

The light-guiding member 540 may be configured to have a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the corresponding area (the area corresponding to the area KE) of the protruding portion 554 (see FIG. 243) can be made to emit light in a band shape.

The area KE is shorter in the front-to-rear width of the right panel unit 500 (the distance from the LED 512a is shorter) than the areas above and below it. Therefore, even if the light incident on the area KE is weak, it is likely to reach the front end. The light that reaches the front end may be used to create a visual effect.

That is, although it cannot be seen through the connecting plate portion 521c, the front end portion 5
By providing a light effect that can be seen through 31a (see FIG. 242) (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) and setting the probability of a big win for that effect high, the position of the player's eyes can be shifted away from the game board 13 from the front end of the right panel unit 500. This reduces the degree to which the player's eyes get tired, allowing the player to play for long periods of time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is visible to the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 243). Therefore, a notification can be given by light that is not visible to the player sitting to the left of the right panel unit 500 and playing the pachinko machine 8010, but is visible to the store clerk viewing the right panel unit 500 from the right side.

This allows an error notification to be executed that is not noticed by the player committing fraud but can be easily noticed by a store clerk, thereby preventing the player committing fraud from trying to escape.

Furthermore, by inverting the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effects in area KE may be visible only to the player and not to store clerks.

FIG. 252( a ) is a schematic side view of the light-guiding member 540 , and FIG. 252 ( b ) is a schematic side view of the light-guiding member 540 .
5A is a cross-sectional view of the light-guiding member 540 taken along line CXVb-CXVb in FIG.

The light guide member 540 is gradually tapered from the end face (thickness: about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side.
The width of the inner wall 14 at the portion furthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm in order to maintain mechanical strength, and the width of the inner wall 14 at the portion furthest from a) is reduced at the same gradient over the entire area in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion arranged to face the support hole 531b (see FIG. 248) of the inner lens member 530 is larger than the end surface of the portion arranged to face the support hole 531c (see FIG. 248) of the LED 5
Since the distance from the end face on the 12a side becomes longer, the taper becomes even thinner and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thinner. This makes it possible to reduce the difference between the light emission pattern seen near the support hole 531b and the light emission pattern seen near the support hole 531c.

In this embodiment, the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the upper and lower parts and disposed at a recessed position on the rear side.
Due to the shadow cast by the surrounding areas, the area near the support hole 531c tends to be visually perceived as darker than the area near the support hole 531b.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the portion of the light guide member 54 that faces the support hole 531b
Since the end face of the light-guiding member 540 located opposite the support hole 531c is formed with a larger width dimension (thickness) than the end face of the light-guiding member 540 located opposite the support hole 531c, a larger area of the surface that receives and emits light from the light irradiated from the LED 512a can be ensured.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from each of the LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c is different from the amount of light visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.
The amount of light that is visible in the area near the front end 531 of the inner lens member 530 can be increased, and the degree of darkness due to differences in distance in the front-rear direction and shadows can be mitigated.
With a being the foremost surface, the degree of light emission visible at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be made uniform across the top and bottom (the difference in intensity can be made smaller).

Fig. 253 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. Note that in Fig. 253, the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guiding member 540 is visible. Also, in Fig. 253, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guiding member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 253, light emitted from light-guiding member 540 toward inner lens member 530 is concentrated as a result of light-guiding member 540 being curved, and is slightly diffused as it passes through inner lens member 530 before proceeding to the outside.

On the other hand, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused due to the effect of the light guide member 540 being curved.
While the arrangement of the LEDs 521a is constant, the light emission pattern (denseness, brightness) can be made different on both sides of the light-guiding member 540. In other words, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize light in a light emission pattern different from the light emission pattern expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

In addition, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (the player side) is
0 is curved as shown in FIG. 252(b), so that it is bent toward the player instead of straight to the side (see the imaginary arrow in FIG. 252(b). The imaginary arrow in FIG. 252(b) indicates that
(An example of the direction of travel of light passing through the light-guiding member 540 is shown.) This makes it easier for the player to see the light, and improves the effect of the light-emitting presentation.

Returning to FIG. 237 and FIG. 238, the upper panel unit 400 is made of an upper side plate member 14
e, and the right panel unit 500 is fastened to the main body frame 14a through the fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see Figures 245 and 246) disposed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof.
It is a unit that is fitted into and supported from below, and is disposed at the upper end of the front frame 14.

Fig. 254 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and Fig. 255 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in Figs. 254 and 255, the upper panel unit 400 includes an upper frame member 410 (see Fig. 237) fastened to the upper edge plate member 14e with a speaker assembly 450 sandwiched therebetween, an illumination unit 401 disposed on the front side of the upper frame member 410 and fastened to the upper frame member 410, a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the rear side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper edge plate member 14e,
254 and 255, the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 237 and 238).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit that displays the model name, etc. on the front side.
The LEDs emit light, and the LEDs emit light.
The show will be performed using light.

The illuminated unit 401 mainly comprises a main body 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a corrugated wall portion 403 formed in a corrugated shape on the rear outer wall portion of the main body 402, a plate-like portion 404 extending in a horizontally elongated plate shape from the lower edge of the corrugated wall portion 403 to the rear side, a tubular portion 405 above the plate-like portion 404 which protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the corrugated wall portion 403 to the rear side and has a cylindrical inner shape formed by penetrating the corrugated wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 arranged on the rear side of the main body 402 and into which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened.

The main body 402 is formed in a box shape with the open sides of the front and rear dish-shaped members overlapping each other, forming a space inside. The LEDs contained therein are mounted on an electronic board.
The electronic board is fixed to the main body 402 .

The corrugated wall portion 403 is engaged with a corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, so that the installation position in the left-right direction can be easily determined, and the illumination unit 4 is easily attached to the upper frame member 410.
This part improves the workability of assembling 01.

The plate-like portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the corrugated wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical positional deviation of the illumination unit 401 relative to the upper frame member 410. Note that a horizontally elongated groove shape is recessed and formed in the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to sandwich the plate-like portion 404 from above and below.

The cylindrical portion 405 functions as a through hole for passing wiring from an electronic board on which the LEDs contained in the main body portion 402 are arranged to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to the multiple fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened to the upper edge plate member 14e (see FIG. 237), a closed space that contains the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper frame member 410 and the upper edge plate member 14e, and is formed so that access to the inside is difficult. In other words, the upper frame member 410 is fastened to the upper edge plate member 14e and the main frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened.

FIG. 256 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG.
256 and 257, the upper frame member 410 is
The illumination unit 8033 mainly comprises a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened, a lower edge plate member 420 which is formed in a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411 and which is fastened from the rear side along the lower edge of the main body member 411, a right corner support member 430R which is fastened to the main body member 411 from the rear side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, a left corner support member 430L which is fastened to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and a lens member 440 which is fitted into the main body member 411 from the rear side to a position where it protrudes from the opening 414 to the front side and is pressed from the rear side by the right corner support member 430R to prevent it from falling off to the rear side and which constitutes the illumination section 8033.

The main body member 411 is a long member on both sides, with openings formed on both the left and right sides to allow the vibration waves (sound) generated by the speaker assembly 450 to pass through, and with the speaker cover 27 disposed to cover the openings. On the front side, the main body member 411 has a wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and a support through hole 413 formed in a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 that faces the cylindrical portion 405 of the illumination unit 401, the support through hole 413 having an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical portion 405,
and an opening 414 formed in the upper right corner and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wave shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. This makes it easy to align the illumination unit 401 in the left-right direction when fitting it into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the cylindrical portion 405 is inserted through the support through-hole 413. This allows the wiring extending through the cylindrical portion 405 to be passed through the support through-hole 413 to the rear side of the main body member 411. Therefore, one end of the wiring is connected to an electronic board contained in the illumination unit 401, and the other end can be connected to a terminal on the rear side of the main body member 411, preventing the other end of the wiring from being detached when the front frame 14 is closed.

The support through-hole 413 determines the position of the cylindrical portion 405 when the cylindrical portion 405 is inserted therethrough.
This allows the support through-holes 413 to be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 relative to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be seen in a front view. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237) has an LED 14 at a position that coincides with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
The light emitted from the LED 14 e 2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414 .

The main body member 411 mainly comprises, on the rear side, a wavy edge portion 416 which is formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 which is recessed from the rear side at the lower end face of the right corner, a supported groove 418 which is recessed from the rear side at the lower end face of the left corner, fastening portions 419 which are arranged at symmetrical positions near the upper end and are formed so that a screw can be screwed in, and second fastening portions 419b which are formed at positions closer to the top and bottom so that a screw can be screwed in.

The wavy side portion 416 is shaped to match the shape of the opposing portion of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the lower front end portion). This makes it easy to position the lower edge plate member 420 in the left-right direction when fastening it to the main body member 411.

The supported groove 417 is shaped so that the left and right claw portions can fit into the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see Figures 242 and 243) of the right panel unit 500, and in this fitted state (see Figure 223), the load (weight, etc.) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 is shaped so that it can be fitted into the upper end of the electric decoration part 8031, and in this fitted state (see FIG. 223), it is configured so that a load (weight, etc.) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the electric decoration part 8031 via the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed.

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where the screws inserted through the through holes 463a, 483a (see FIG. 259) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is provided with an enlarged rib 419a that protrudes in a rib-like manner from the base to a position that does not reach the tip.

As described below, the expanded rib 419a is a part that clamps the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper edge plate member 14e between the main body frame 14a and the expanded rib 419a by screws inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a being fastened to the fastening portion 419 (see Figure 262 (a)), and details will be described later.

In this embodiment, the expanded ribs 419 a are arranged in three locations around the fastening portion 419 at intervals of 120° in the direction in which the screws are fastened to the fastening portion 419 . The expanded ribs 419 a have the same shape.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 255) is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 237) of the upper side plate member 14e at a lower position of the main body member 411 and to the recessed portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450.
2, 482 (see FIG. 259), and are formed at an upper position of the main body member 411 at positions that coincide with the recessed portions 462, 482 (see FIG. 259) of the speaker assembly 450, but will be described in detail later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by curving a long plate, a corrugated wall portion 422 formed in a corrugated shape in a bottom view at the lower front side edge of the main body member 421, and a cross-sectional L
The main components include an L-shaped extension portion 423 formed in an L-shape, and an opening 424 arranged at an equal distance to the left and right from the left-right center position of the main body plate portion 421 (the upper end position of the curved shape) and composed of multiple small-diameter through holes that penetrate in the vertical direction.

When the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy edge portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other at the front and rear, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 abuts against the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy edge portion 416 on its back surface, and a part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-to-rear direction.

Therefore, the effective plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the point where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut from above and below can be increased, thereby improving the strength.

The opening 424 is provided for the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 260).
The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L have circular openings 430R1, 430L1 that are circular openings that pass vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450.

The right corner support member 430R has a horizontally elongated rectangular through hole 430R2 formed in a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction.
The light irradiated onto the lens member 440 through the opening 414 is visible to the player.

Fig. 258 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and Fig. 259 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. Note that in Figs. 258 and 259, speaker connection wires 453 are shown by imaginary lines for ease of understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 237) by screws inserted through connecting holes 469, and are fastened and fixed to the upper plate member 14e at the left and right ends and the lower end.
0L, so we will first explain speaker assembly 450R and then speaker assembly 4
The explanation of 50L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R is formed of a speaker (cone-type speaker) 451, which is an acoustic device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave and makes the sound audible, a front assembly 460 in which the speaker 451 is inserted into a through hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 is fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front.
The rear assembly 48 forms a space between itself and the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 237).
It mainly comprises 0.

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to cover the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and emits effects sounds related to the game. One end of a speaker connection wire 453 (e.g., an electric wire consisting of a copper wire and a coating that covers the copper wire) is connected to the speaker 451 and extends through a through hole drilled in the upper edge plate member 14e (see Figure 239), and the terminal connector of the speaker connection wire 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (see Figure 239), thereby being connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see Figure 141).

The front part of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass through. The speaker 451 covered with this protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 with the front part aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 223).

As a result, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 223), and the sound reproduced from the speaker 451 can be reproduced and output with high quality without being muffled. In addition, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front part of the speaker 451 without causing a deterioration in sound quality.

The front assembly 460 is a body portion 46 formed in a cup shape that is long from side to side and open on the rear side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width, and an extension plate 463 extending from the rear side edge of a recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 toward the outside of the vertical width to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 in a plate-like shape,
the rear assembly 480 is fastened to the upper edge plate member 14e (see FIG. 237 ); and a front recess 471 recessed from the rear end to the front side at the lower end of the tip side main body portion 461T from the rear side to the front side.

The main body portion 461 is divided into regions in the left-right direction into a base end side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a base end side main body portion 461B disposed on the left-right central side of the base end side main body portion 461B (see FIG. 12 ).
258)と前端侧体461T连安装在後组件480中。 [0223] The rear assembly 480 is provided with a space between the intermediate body 461M and the rear assembly 480. The intermediate body 461M is connected to the rear assembly 480. The rear assembly 480 is connected to the intermediate body 461M. The rear assembly 480 is connected to the intermediate body 461M. The rear assembly 480 is connected to the rear assembly 480. The rear assembly 480 is connected to the intermediate body 461M ...

The main body 461 includes a rear wall 461H formed as a wall surrounding almost the entire periphery of the main body 461 in a front view. The rear wall 461H includes an edge portion that is not turned up on the inside (an edge portion that does not have a flange or the like formed on the inside).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see Figures 237 and 238) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with respect to the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 463 has a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the rear side.
The screw inserted into the upper plate member 14a is inserted into the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper plate member 14b from the rear side of the main body frame 14a.
4e through the through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480.
It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 257) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted through the through hole 463a through the upper edge plate member 14e from the rear side of the main body frame 14a and screwed into the main body member 411, and as the screw is tightened, the extension plate 463 is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to the main body frame 14a, the upper edge plate member 14e, and the main body member 411 by being tightened together.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with a resin material sandwiched therebetween), thereby improving the acoustic effect of the speaker 451.

The wire passing recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recess width of the wire passing recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covering of the speaker connection wire 453. This applies pressure to the covering of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wire passing recess 464, and prevents a gap from being generated between the wire passing recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453. This prevents the occurrence of a problem in which sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection wire 453 passes reduces the acoustic effect. Note that in FIGS. 258 and 259, the rear side wall 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wire passing recess 464 is illustrated so as to be visible.

In this embodiment, since the wire passing recess 464 is formed in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is attached, rather than in the rear assembly 480, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the speaker connection wire 453 to be connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wire passing recess 464. This can improve the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450.

The light passing through hole 465 is provided for the LED 14e disposed in the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 237).
2 toward the lens member 440.

The passage forming rib 467 abuts against the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap at the front and rear, and forms a bent passage (
260). This curved passage is a passage through which vibration waves (audio) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass. The front end of the passage-forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from occurring on the front side of the passage-forming rib 467.

The front recess 471 is formed to a size that surrounds (extends slightly outward from) the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 257).

The rear assembly 480 includes a main body 48 formed in a cup shape that is long from side to side and open on the front side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width, and an extension plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the rear side edge of a recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 toward the outside of the vertical width to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481,
a wiring pressing protrusion 484 protruding toward the front side of the main body 481; a light passing through hole 485 formed in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body 481; a plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib-like manner from the cup-shaped bottom plate (rear side plate) of the main body 481 toward the front side;
The front assembly 460 mainly comprises a plurality of through holes 488 formed as through holes through which screws can be inserted at positions corresponding to the front-to-rear direction of the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460, and a rear recessed portion 491 recessed from the front side to the rear side at a position corresponding to the front-to-rear direction of the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460.

The main body 481 is provided in a plate-like shape extending to the front side in a manner surrounding the outer periphery of the main body 481 at a position shifted inward by the plate thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate, and the front side wall 48 is formed from a shape that is fitted into the inner surface of the rear side wall 461H of the front assembly 460.
Equipped with 1H.

The speaker assembly 450R has a double wall portion in which the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H are fitted together around the entire outer periphery, so that air leakage from the outer periphery can be prevented. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the outer periphery.

The front side wall portion 481H is provided with a pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha that protrude beyond the wire pressing protrusion 484 toward the front side at a position that sandwiches the wire pressing protrusion 484 on the left and right with a gap that allows the speaker connection wire 453 to pass through.

The auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are a pair of protrusions that prevent the speaker connection wires 453 temporarily fixed in the wire passing recesses 464 from shifting position when the rear assembly 480 is attached to the front assembly 460. That is, the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are tapered so as to widen left and right as they approach the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 261(c)).
Even if the wire passing recess 464 comes off from the wire passing recess 464 and begins to shift to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha.

This allows the speaker connection wire 453 to be returned to the wiring passing recess 464 during the assembly process, and in the assembled state (see Figure 237), the speaker connection wire 453 can be easily accommodated in the opening formed by the wiring passing recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484.

The recessed portion 482 is configured with an outer shape that is the same as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper edge plate member 14e (see Figures 237 and 238) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 has a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the rear side.
The screw inserted into the upper plate member 14a is inserted into the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper plate member 14b from the rear side of the main frame 14a.
4e through the through hole 483a and the front assembly 46
238. The screw passes through the through hole 463a of the screw 463 and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 238).

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted through the through hole 483a through the upper edge plate member 14e from the rear side of the main body frame 14a and screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411, and as the screw is tightened, the extension plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper edge plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing protrusion 484 is protruding along the upper edge of the rear side panel of the main body 481, and is formed with a width that fits into the wiring passing recess 464, and is protruding with a protruding length that is shorter than the recessed depth of the wiring passing recess 464 and slightly shorter than the outer circumferential diameter of the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453.

That is, the speaker connection wire 4 is inserted into the opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passing recess 464.
By passing the wire 453 through the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passing recess 464, the covering of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the speaker connection wire 453 and the opening formed by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passing recess 464.
This can suppress the occurrence of a problem in which sound leakage from the openings through which sound passes reduces the acoustic effect.

The light passing through hole 485 is provided for the LED 14e disposed in the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 237).
2 toward the lens member 440. The light passing through hole 485 is formed as a circular opening that is large enough to surround one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed as a tapered shape whose cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 237 ), the light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming rib 487 is a rib that is formed at the same position as the passage forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 in a front view, abuts against each other front and rear with no gap between them, and forms a curved passage (see FIG. 260) that bends multiple times in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. This curved passage is a passage through which vibration waves (audio) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H.
That is, the rear end of the passage forming rib 487 is formed at the same plane as the front and rear ends of the main body 48.
This prevents a gap from being generated on the rear side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the front end of the passage forming rib 487 abuts against the passage forming rib 467, and is designed with dimensions that generate a compressive force in the front-rear direction at that time.
67, 487 elastically deform in the front-rear direction to close the gap between them (FIG. 261(b)
reference).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is weak and it may bend left-right, the compression force may not work well and the gap may not be closed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, so the rigidity in the left-right direction can be strengthened by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (and further by the strength reinforced by the rear side wall portion 461H that is overlapped in the assembled state (see FIG. 237 )). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened and the passage forming rib 487 can be prevented from bending left-right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 467 and the passage forming rib 487 can be well closed.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed from a shape that is inverted from the front recessed portion 471, and forms an opening together with the front recessed portion 471. The opening is formed to a size that surrounds (protrudes slightly outward from) the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 257), and is disposed at a position that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

FIG. 260(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 260(b) is a rear view of the rear assembly 48.
260(a) and 260(b) are front views of the .
The speaker connection wire 453 is shown by an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 arranged opposite each other are shown in a state in which their opposing surfaces are unfolded toward the front side of the paper. That is, by folding Fig. 260(a) and Fig. 260(b) about a vertical line (not shown) drawn in the center of the paper from left to right, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be aligned. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e can be brought into contact with the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e in the front-rear direction, respectively.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 237), the base end side main body portion 46 of the front assembly 460 is provided inside the speaker assembly 450.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the rear side of the speaker 451. An acoustic passage as a passage for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is extended from the acoustic chamber to the tip side main body 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467, 487.

As shown in FIG. 260(a) and FIG. 260(b), the passage forming rib 467 is formed on the inner side (left side) of the wire passing recess 464 through which the wire passes, and has rib portions 467a, 467b arranged at a plurality of positions (five positions in this embodiment) alternately arranged up and down toward the left side.
, 467c, 467d, and 467e.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wire passing recess 464 through which the wires pass.
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, and the rib portions 487a,
It is possible to prevent the wiring from being pinched between 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body portion 461 and the rear side wall portion 461H.
, 467e can enhance the rigidity of the main body portion 461.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e, in cooperation with the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480, form a curved passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, if the passage forming rib 467 is not provided and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451
While vibration waves generated from the passage forming rib 467 travel in a straight line, in this embodiment, the vibration waves Ws travel while avoiding the passage forming rib 467.

That is, as shown as an example of a propagation path in Figure 260 (a), when a rib portion (e.g., rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is positioned on the upper side and then the rib portion (e.g., rib portion 467b) located to the left of it (on the side of arrow L) and closest in the left-right direction is positioned on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws propagates in the upper left direction (in the direction of arrows L and U) between the ribs.

On the other hand, when a rib portion (e.g., rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is positioned on the lower side and then the rib portion (e.g., rib portion 467c) located to the left of it (on the side of arrow L) and closest in the left-right direction is positioned on the upper side, the vibration wave Ws travels in a downward and leftward direction (in the direction of arrows L and D).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d,
When 67e are arranged alternately up and down, the propagation path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path that curves up and down, and the propagation path length of the vibration wave Ws can be ensured to be longer than the left and right width of the space.

This makes it easy to adjust the length of the path that the vibration wave Ws takes to pass through the opening formed by the pair of recesses 471, 491, and makes it possible to suppress the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws.

In this embodiment, the recessed portions 462, 463b have the same function as the passage forming rib 467.
That is, the vibration wave Ws can be caused to travel in an upper left direction (the direction of the arrows L and U) between the recessed portion 462 disposed immediately adjacent to the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b disposed above and to the right (the side of the arrow R).

Therefore, the recesses 462, 463b have an effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect achieved during assembly.

As shown in FIG. 260(b), the passage forming rib 487 is a wire pressing protrusion 4 that presses the wire.
The rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d are formed on the inner side (left side) of the rib portion 484 in the left-right direction and are arranged in a plurality of positions (five positions in this embodiment) in a staggered manner up and down toward the left side.
87d, 487e.

The ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are connected to the main body 481 and the front side wall 481H.
, 487e can enhance the rigidity of the main body portion 481.

Here, the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are
The ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of the bracket 60 are formed to have shapes that match each other in the front-rear direction, and are disposed opposite each other in the front-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 237).

The functions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the functions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, and therefore will not be described.

In this embodiment, the recessed portions 482, 483b have the same function as the passage forming rib 487.
That is, the vibration wave Ws can be caused to travel in the upper left direction (the direction of the arrows L and U) between the recess 482 disposed immediately adjacent to the rear recess 491 and the recess 483b disposed above it on the right side (the side of the arrow R).
In addition to the effect achieved during assembly, 2,483b also achieves the effect of defining the propagation direction of the vibration wave Ws.

Here, the space formed inside speaker assembly 450R has a vertical width that decreases the further away from speaker 451, and is once narrowed at a position where recesses 462, 482 and recesses 463b, 483b are vertically aligned, and then the vertical width suddenly expands at a position further away from speaker 451, and then communicates with the opening formed by recesses 471, 491. This can improve the acoustic effect.

In this embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side main body part 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, so the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 travels to the tip side main body part 461T side, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, in search of an outlet. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that reaches the tip side main body part 461T passes through the opening formed by the front recessed part 471 and the rear recessed part 491, and the opening part 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 257), in that order, and is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the rear part of the speaker 451 has an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, a recessed part 47
Since the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside through the opening formed by 1, 491 and opening 424 (see Figure 257), the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 can be reproduced and output with high sound quality without being muffled.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and can emit the sound in phase with the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 from the opening formed by the recessed portions 471, 491. In other words, the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 allows the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 450 and the sound output from the front side to be superimposed in phase with each other and emphasized, rather than being cancelled out due to being in opposite phase. In other words, it becomes possible to amplify deep bass sounds. This allows
The pachinko machine 8010 according to this embodiment is capable of producing realistic effects,
This can increase the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is positioned on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 228), so that the low-pitched sounds output from the rear side of the speaker 451 are emitted to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 237) using the internal space of the speaker assembly 450 as an enclosure (emitted downward from the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 223)). This allows the performance of the game by the low-pitched sounds emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side to be appropriately provided to a player playing on the front side of the front frame 14.

The sound of the vibration wave Ws (audio) is tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450,
For example, in this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws can be generated by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws.
The path of the vibration wave Ws is defined as a path that avoids the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, and 46
By individually setting the arrangement and vertical extension length of each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e, 467d, 467e, the sound of the vibration wave Ws (audio) can be tuned.

In this embodiment, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d of the front assembly 460 are
67d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487e of the rear assembly 480.
In addition to the above-mentioned purposes, the flanges 487d and 487e are disposed in portions to which load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, thereby reinforcing the speaker assembly 450.

For example, by being positioned near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d can reinforce the areas near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, thereby preventing the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged due to the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when a screw is screwed into the fastening portion 468.

In addition, when the extension plates 463 and 483 are assembled, they are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 262(a)).
The extension plates 463, 483 are disposed closer to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 463, 48
When a screw is screwed into the fastening portion 419 inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a of the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main frame 14a are fastened and fixed, each of the rib portions 467c, 4
87c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other, so that the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
That is, the deformation of each of the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 48
7d allows the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 to be reinforced.

Also, for example, the rib portions 467b, 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462, 482. Here, the recessed portions 462, 482 are portions to which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 239 and 262) of the upper side plate member 14e is aligned in an assembled state.
The recessed portions 462 and 482 of the fastening portion 14e1 are placed on the fastening portion 14e1.
, 482 receive an upward load from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462, 482 would be easily damaged, but in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467b, 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462, 482, so that the fastening portion 14e1 can reinforce the recessed portions 462, 482 against the load applied thereto, thereby improving the durability of the recessed portions 462, 482.

The opening 424 (see FIG. 257) formed from a plurality of small diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large diameter through hole, it is easier to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting wire, piano wire, etc. into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424.

In this type of fraudulent act, wire, piano wire, etc. are illegally inserted into the play area to deform nails, etc., but in this embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is formed in a box shape that is sealed except for the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passing recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484, and the gap of the opening formed by the wiring passing recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484 is blocked by the speaker connection wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, piano wire, etc. is inserted into the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, it is difficult for the tip of the wire, piano wire, etc. to reach the play area through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453.

In addition, the through hole formed in the upper edge plate member 14e as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 is positioned near the left and right ends of the upper edge plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speaker 451, thereby making it possible to increase the distance between the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, which are the points where wire, piano wire, etc. are inserted into the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be reduced, making it easier to prevent the generation of fraudulent benefits.

261(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 261(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124(a), FIG. 261(c) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R taken in the direction of the arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 261(a), and FIG. 261(d) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG.
261(a) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the Vd direction.
261(c), the speaker connection wire 453 is shown by an imaginary line for ease of understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 261(c), the speaker connection wire 453 is omitted.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 261(b), an inner surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 261(b)) of a rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 is tapered inwardly as it approaches the rear side, and an outer surface 481Ho (lower surface in FIG. 261(b)) of a front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 is tapered inwardly as it approaches the rear side.
The upper surface (461H) is tapered inwardly toward the rear surface side, and the inner surface (461H) is
i in an assembled state. This improves the efficiency of the operation of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460.

In Fig. 261(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. The restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes a compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c, 487c can be filled. Note that each of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship such that a compressive load is generated between the abutting rib portions.

As shown in FIG. 261C, the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter front-rear dimension than the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T.
In comparison with 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (narrowed) in the intermediate main body portion 461M, thereby improving the acoustic effect.

As shown in Fig. 261(d), the internal space of the tip side main body 461T arranged above the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491 is secured to be larger than the internal space of the intermediate main body 461M in a manner that bulges out in the front-rear direction. This allows the vibration waves Ws that reach the tip side main body 461T to be temporarily retained in the tip side main body 461T and released at a low speed. This allows the vibration waves Ws to make it easier to hear deep bass sounds, thereby improving the acoustic effect.

FIG. 262(a) shows the front assembly 46 taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 261(a).
FIG. 262(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper edge plate member 14e taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb in FIG. 261(a).

As shown in FIG. 262(a), the expanded rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has a through hole 463a,
The screw inserted through the fastening portion 483a is fastened to the fastening portion 419, so that the front assembly 460
This is the part that sandwiches the rear assembly 480 and the upper edge plate member 14e between the main body frame 14a.
In other words, by positioning the expansion rib 419a at the front surface position of the extension plate 463, the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480 and the upper edge plate member 14e can be prevented from shifting position in the front-to-rear direction, and the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper edge plate member 14e and the metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in Figure 262 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper edge plate member 14e at a lower position on the upper frame member 410, and is formed at an upper position on the upper frame member 410 at a position that coincides with the recessed portions 462, 482 of the speaker assembly 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (they pass through the recessed portions 462, 482 without coming into contact with them in the fastening direction).
It is configured as a part that fastens and fixes the upper frame member 410 and the upper edge plate member 14 e without using the rear assembly 480 .

In addition, the main body frame 14a and the upper edge plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b located at an upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper edge plate member 14e is fastened and fixed to the second fastening portion 419b located at a lower position of the main body member 411, while the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

In addition, at an upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 255) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (the portion extending toward the rear side is disposed inside), while at a lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 237) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482.
482 (the portion extending to the front side is disposed on the inside).

In this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are disposed in the independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively.
This avoids interference with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 disposed in 450L, and allows the reproduced sound to be reproduced with high quality as a transparent sound without being muffled.

In this embodiment, at the top of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper plate member 14e abut on their faces (see FIG. 262(a)), while at the bottom of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper plate member 14e are spaced apart, and the front portion of the upper plate member 14e protrudes towards the front side at the portion positioned opposite the lower end of the rear assembly 480, and this protruding portion abuts against the lower end of the rear assembly 480 in the front-to-rear direction.
The speaker assembly 450 is not configured to abut (stick) over the entire surface of the upper plate member 14e, but rather to make line contact, particularly at the lower end.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper edge plate member 14e and abuts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, thereby improving the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper plate member 14e and abuts against the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper plate member 14e (made of synthetic resin).
However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be arranged between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper edge plate member 14e, a member made of ebony may be arranged, a glass member may be arranged, a concrete member may be arranged, a soft resin material may be arranged, or other commercially available members may be arranged.

In particular, when metal members are used, it is preferable to use materials with a high specific gravity. For example, it is preferable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, etc. By using these metals, it is possible to give depth to the sound.

In addition, it is preferable that the material has high hardness, such as cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics, etc. Using these materials can improve the sound rise performance.

In addition, with regard to the shape, the upper plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 may be protruding in a long plate shape, a spike shape, or a dotted shape with rounded tips. The upper plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 may not only be fixed to each other, but may also be connected in a floating manner.

The above-mentioned portions that function as insulators are arranged in the speaker assembly 45.
For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450, or the rear surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.
It can also be the side or front of 50.

For example, when disposed on the back surface of the upper end portion, the member functioning as an insulator may be cylindrical and disposed between the rear assembly 480 and the upper edge plate member 14e, and positioned by inserting a screw into the through hole 483a. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator is not required, and the tightness of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a allows adjustment of the contact between the rear assembly 480, the upper edge plate member 14e, and the member functioning as an insulator (the load applied to each other) and adjustment of the acoustic effect.

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is in a state where the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 260(a)) and the connecting hole 469 are loosened.
Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened to the upper edge plate member 14e by screws inserted into through holes of the same shape and arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction, or through holes arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right positions where the through holes are located, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from coming off the upper edge plate member 14e.

Regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e,
0 is a screw inserted through the through hole 483a, and a fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (FIG. 1
262(b)). As described above, the fastening of fastening portion 14e1 to fastening portion 419 is configured so that no load is applied to speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening fastening portion 14e1 to fastening portion 419, it is possible to prevent upper frame member 410 from coming off upper edge plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into through hole 483a (while adjusting the degree of fastening).

The same relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper plate member 14e as described above is true for the following reasons:
The same can be said about the relationship with the main body frame 14a that is connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

Fig. 263 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, Fig. 264(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and Fig. 264(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12.
4B shows the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a,
As shown in Figure 263, a left end front support portion 12a and a left end rear support portion 12b are disposed at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, spaced apart from each other in the front and rear direction, for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13.

The left-end front support portion 12a has an inclined surface 12a1 that slopes rearward as it moves leftward from the right end of the rear end surface that faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 226), and a flat surface 12a2 that extends left and right from the left end of the inclined surface to the left. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 come into contact with each other.

The left-end rear support portion 12b has an outer shape formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a cup shape with an open center and a front end face formed on one surface so as to be able to abut against the rear surface of the game board 13. The left-end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside the left-end rear support portion 12b and a portion protruding from the front end face of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is disposed in such a manner that, in its natural length, it protrudes more toward the front side as it moves to the left. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1, together with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a,
A tapered shape is formed that expands in the left-right direction toward the side (right side) where the game board 13 is placed. This improves the workability when an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to Figures 265 and 266.

Figures 265(a) and 265(b) show CXXVIIIa-CXXV in Figure 264(b).
265(a) and 266(b) are side views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13, which are schematic views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13. In addition, in Fig. 265 and Fig. 266, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in chronological order, Fig. 265(a) illustrates the game board 13 with its left end beginning to be pushed into the inner frame 12, Fig. 265(b) and Fig. 266(a) illustrates the game board 13 just before it is completely assembled to the inner frame 12, and Fig. 266(b) illustrates the game board 13 after it is completely assembled to the inner frame 12. In Fig. 265 and Z39, for ease of understanding,
Some of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted in the illustration.

When the worker assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the worker first temporarily places the game board 13 on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160, adjusts the vertical position of the game board 13 to a certain extent, and then places the game board 13 on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160.
At this time, the game board 13 is slid in a position rotated about an axis facing up and down with respect to the inner frame 12 as shown in FIG. 265(a), so there is a possibility that the left end front support part 12b on the near side and the game board 13 may interfere with each other. However, in this embodiment, the inclined surface 12 is provided on the left end front support part 12a.
a1 is formed, the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other
This can reduce the number of steps required, thereby improving workability.

Next, as shown in FIG. 265(b), the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the inclined surface 12a
The game board 13 is rotated around the axis of the contact point between the rear edge of the inner frame 12 and the front surface of the game board 13 so as to approach the inner frame 12. During this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is placed opposite the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is,
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. This allows the game board 13 to be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

During the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom 12c is a plate-shaped portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction with an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and in the assembled state (see Figure 227), it supports the game board 13 from below and has multiple guide ribs 12c1 with their front upper ends cut into inclined surfaces along the left-right direction.

265(a) to 265(b), the game board 13 climbs up onto the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 every time the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in top view, so that the game board 13 can be made to climb up onto the guide rib 12c1 starting from the left side, allowing the game board 13 to rotate smoothly. Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15°, which is an angle larger than the backward inclination (about 10°) of the pachinko machine 8010 when installed in the game parlor. This makes it possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-to-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 when installed.
This improves workability when assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 regardless of the rear inclination of 013.

In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed to be the same as the rear inclination angle when the game board 13 is installed in the game arcade.
The inclined surface of 2c1 can be horizontal.

In the state shown in Figure 265 (b), as shown in Figure 266 (a), the game board 13 is clamped between the board support device 600 which is arranged vertically and in the released state described below, and the rear surface of the game board 13 abuts against the front surface of the claw member 640 after rotation.

Here, in the release state, the board surface support device 600 is in such a state that the front rotation claw member 620 and the front restriction claw member 630 (portions disposed on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) are in contact with the game board 13.
Since the game board 13 is configured to retreat from the entrance path, the workability of assembling the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 266(b), by pushing the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the rear side, a load is applied to the rotational claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 60
0 changes to a fixed state, which will be described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12.
When the upper and lower panel surface support devices 600 are fixed, the states of the upper and lower panel surface support devices 600 change almost simultaneously.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c and its vertical position is regulated.
266(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the up-down position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, as the board support device 600 is changed between the released state and the fixed state, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached.

Here, when the right end portion of the game board 13 is pushed toward the rear side, the game board 13 rotates with the left end portion as a fulcrum. Therefore, due to the principle of leverage, the claw member 64 is pushed toward the rear side of the game board 13 after the rotation.
The force required to apply a load to the inner frame 12 can be weakened by the long width of the game board 13, and even a worker with little strength can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported at two points, top and bottom, by the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b (see Figure 263). Therefore, for example, even if the right end of the game board 13 is not sufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed), the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced even if the front frame 14 (see Figure 226) is closed against the inner frame 12.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 271(a)), the degree to which the game board 13 tilts forward or backward due to the reaction force of pushing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) against the inner frame 12 to close it can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (reduce the possibility of) the state of the board support device 600 changing due to the reaction force of pushing the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 to close it.

When the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by a support portion 12a.
, 12b, the right end portion is fixed by a panel surface support device 600, and the lower end portion has its vertical position regulated by the support bottom portion 12c.

When the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see Figure 266 (b)), the floating connector 13a, which is located at the lower end of the back side of the game board 13 and is connected to wiring connected to various components and devices arranged on the game board 13 and is supported on the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13, is connected in the rotational direction of the game board 13 to the receiving connector 12d, which is located on the inner frame 12 near the lower board surface support device 600 and to which wiring connected to the control board unit 91 (see Figure 140) etc. is connected on the back side.

In order to reduce the resistance of the connection in the rotational direction of the game board 13, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are arranged in an inclined position with the connection direction facing along the rotational direction of the game board 13 (see Figure 263 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 is equipped with a pair of upper and lower board surface support devices 600 arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. Since the pair of upper and lower board surface support devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, only one of the board surface support devices 600 will be described and the description of the other board surface support device 600 will be omitted.

Fig. 267(a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, Fig. 267(b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, Fig. 268(a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and Fig. 268(b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600.
267(a) and 267(b) show a state where the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIG. 268(a) and FIG. 268(b) show a state where the game board 13 is fixed by the board support device 600.
267 and 268, in the board surface support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the front-rotation claw member 620 and the rear-rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

269 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 270 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIG. 269 and FIG. 270,
The rotary motion control device 60 includes a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, a front rotation claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610, a front restriction claw member 630 rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 arranged on the front side of the front rotation claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the front rotation claw member 620, and a rear rotation claw member 630 rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 arranged on the rear side of the front rotation claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the front rotation claw member 620.
40 and mainly comprise.

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle, a pair of support holes 612 formed in a straight line penetrating a pair of plate portions 611a that are part of the main body plate portion 611 and are arranged opposite each other on the left and right, an arc hole 613 drilled in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612, and a circular hole 614 drilled in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612.
11a from below, and a plate portion 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612.
264(b) 。 The main components of the inner frame 12 are a rod-shaped regulating rod 615 that is inserted and fixed to the inner frame 12 in the plate portion 611a, and a pair of fixing plates 616 that extend in a flange-like manner to the left and right from the plate portion 611a and that are fastened to the inner frame 12 by screws inserted into the through holes 616a in the assembled state (see Figure 264 (b)).

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed.
is formed as a cylindrical metal rod member with an expanded diameter at the end on the insertion base end side, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion tip side is pressed to form a support hole 612.
The fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same as those of the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P
When the first shaft member P61 is inserted through the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted through the supported hole 622 of the front rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

The front rotation claw member 620, like the frame member 610, comprises a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a corner of a sheet metal member at a right angle to form a T-shape in a side view, a pair of supported holes 622 formed in a straight line through plate portions 621a which are part of the main body plate portion 621 and are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right, and which are supported by the first shaft member P61, a pair of support holes 623 formed in a straight line through the upper corners of the front side of the plate portion 621a, and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and ... plate portion 621a, and which are supported by the first shaft member P61,
a and a pair of support holes 624 formed in a straight line through the rear side portion of the third shaft member P63 and into which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the front restriction claw member 63
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted through the supported hole 632 of the first shaft member P62, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted through the support hole 624 of the first shaft member P62.
At the same time, when the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 642 of the rotation claw member 640,
is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion disposed opposite to the left and right and has a long length portion 621a1 that is long in the front-rear direction.
A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view by an extension portion 621a2 extending in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1, a connecting plate portion 621b connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, a rear side extension plate 621c extending from the rear side end of the connecting plate portion 621b at an angle of about 45 degrees downward with respect to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b, and
2. The panel 621 mainly comprises a hanging rear plate portion 621d extending perpendicularly to plate portion 621a toward plate portion 621a on the opposite side, and a front side extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of hanging rear plate portion 621d at an angle of approximately 45 degrees toward the front side with respect to the surface of hanging rear plate portion 621d.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b form a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d form a right angle with each other.

The rear extension plate 621c is disposed so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, in the released state, the rear extension plate 621c comes into contact with the torsion spring NBb, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main plate portion 611 (see FIG. 271(a)). Meanwhile, in the process of changing to the fixed state, the torsion spring NBb is retracted upward, so that the torsion spring NBb is retracted from the main plate portion 611.
and begins to come into contact.

This prevents the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb from being generated toward the worker when the worker starts to push the game board 13 into the board support device 600, while allowing the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb to be generated toward the worker just before the game board 13 is completely fixed to the board support device 600. In other words, while reducing the force required when starting to push the game board 13, just before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600, the momentum of the rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that contacts the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 226) and regulates the front-to-rear position of the game board 13. The front extension plate 621e functions as a guide when inserting the game board 13 into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates a biasing force in a direction that brings the front restriction claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates a biasing force in a direction that moves the lower end of the rear rotation claw member 640 away from the back side wall of the main plate portion 611.

The front-regulating claw member 630 mainly comprises a main body plate portion 631 formed in an L-shape when viewed from the side by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at the corner, a pair of supported holes 632 formed in a straight line through plate portions 631a which are part of the main body plate portion 631 and arranged opposite each other on the left and right and which are journaled by the second shaft member P62, an inclined extension plate 633 extending at an angle toward the front side from the lower end of a front connecting plate 631b which connects the plate portions 631a, and a curved surface 634 which is curved and formed as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion disposed opposite to the front frame 14, and is a part of the board surface support device 600.
When the locking member 14 is released, this is the part that is closest to the front frame 14 in the front-to-rear direction.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulating rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 263), thereby regulating the free change in position of the front regulating claw member 630 .

The post-rotation claw member 640 mainly comprises a main body plate portion 641 formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the side by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at the corner, a pair of supported holes 642 formed in a straight line through plate portions 641a which are part of the main body plate portion 641 and arranged opposite each other on the left and right and which are journaled by the third shaft member P63, and an inclined extension plate 643 which extends at an angle toward the rear side from the lower end of a front connecting plate 641b which connects the pair of plate portions 641a.

The front connecting plate 641b is a part that contacts the rear side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see Figure 226) and regulates the front-to-rear position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is the part that receives the load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and is formed at an inclination angle that makes face contact with the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see Figure 266 (a)).

271(a), 271(b), 272(a) and 272(b) are side views of the board surface support device 600. In addition, in Fig. 271(a), 271(b), 272(a) and 272(b), the process in which the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order.
1B, the arrangement of the multi-function cover member 171 arranged adjacent to the board support device 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board support device 600 is shown by imaginary lines.

That is, in FIG. 271(a), the board surface support device 600 is in a released state, and in FIG. 272(b),
The fixed states of the board support device 600 are shown in the figures. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 272(b), the third shaft member P63 is disposed directly behind the first shaft member P61 (horizontally rearward). This makes it possible to prevent the post-rotation claw member 640 from rotating too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third shaft member P63 moving upwards beyond the first shaft member P61) simply by performing the simple task of pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 toward the rearward side via the game board 13. Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to a position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the front restriction claw member 630 is biased by the torsion spring NBa in a direction approaching the hanging back plate portion 621d. Therefore, when no other external force is acting, the front restriction claw member 630 is disposed in proximity to the hanging back plate portion 621d.
The curved surface 634 of the front restriction claw member 630 comes into contact with the restriction rod 615, thereby restricting the change in position of the front restriction claw member 630.

That is, as shown in Figures 271(a), 271(b), 272(a) and 272(b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the front side of the rotating front claw member 620 where the extension portion 621a2 is disposed tilts, while the front side of the restricting front claw member 630 rises up in a manner that moves away from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

In detail, the regulating rod 615 is a front side portion of the curved surface 634, and the second shaft member P
271(a) to 13(c) and the resistor portion 634a that intersects with the circle centered on 62.
5(a)), the front end of the front restriction claw member 630 rises in accordance with the tilting movement of the front rotation claw member 620. In other words, the front restriction claw member 630 moves in the opposite direction to the movement direction of the front rotation claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance portion 634b, which is connected to the back side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is disposed opposite the regulation rod 615.
When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 are no longer in contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising action of the regulating front claw member 630 is released, and the tip end of the regulating front claw member 630 on the side of the inclined extension plate 633 is disposed adjacent to the hanging back plate portion 621d (see FIG. 272(a) to FIG. 272(b)).
(see (b)).

The angle range in which the front restriction claw member 630 rises up (from FIG. 271(a) to FIG. 272(a)) is as follows:
) when a downward load is applied to the regulating front claw member 630 in a direction that tilts the front end of the regulating front claw member 630, the change in posture of the regulating front claw member 630 when it operates due to the downward load is a change in posture in a direction opposite to the downward load (a change in posture in the rising direction), so that the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the change in posture of the regulating front claw member 630 in response to the downward load is regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 abuts against the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the front restriction claw member 630, causing the front rotation claw member 620
Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the regulating front claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting operation of the rotation front claw member 620 can be suppressed. Note that in this embodiment, the shape of the front connecting plate 631b and the length and tilt angle of the tilted extension plate 633 are set so that the multi-function cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the tilted extension plate 633 of the regulating front claw member 630 when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state.

In the state shown in FIG. 271(b), the game board 13 abuts against the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the rear side extension plate 621c
Friction occurs between the game board 13 and the game board 13. As a result, in the state shown in FIG.
Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see Figs. 273 to 276) applies a load to the game board 13,
As a result of this reaction, the upper end portion of the game board 13 can be prevented from moving (tilting) toward the front.

Here, in the case where the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) is closed while the board surface support device 600 is in the released state and the rotation front claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, depending on the manner in which the multi-function cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 abuts against the regulating front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 may either reach a fixed state or not reach a fixed state and become stable at an intermediate angle.

If the board support device 600 were to be stabilized at an incomplete angle and the front frame 14 (see Figure 226) were to be closed in that state, the distance between the back of the glass unit 16 (see Figure 223) and the front of the game board 13 would become too short, which could cause problems during play.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted that prevents the rotation of the front rotating claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226), and prevents the front frame 14 from closing when the multi-function cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the restricting front claw member 630. This makes it possible to make the store clerk who is working to close the front frame 14 aware that the board surface support device 600 is not in a fixed state.

When the store attendant notices this, he or she can push the game board 13 in until the board support device 600 is fixed in place, stabilizing the distance between the rear of the glass unit 16 and the front of the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see Figure 226) is closed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 272(a), just before the front-rotating claw member 620 becomes fixed, depending on the manner of contact between the multi-function cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 and the regulating front claw member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 will reach the fixed state or that the board surface support device 600 will not reach the fixed state and will stabilize at an intermediate angle (the board surface support device 600 will exclusively reach the fixed state).

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multi-function cover member 171 is extended to a position where it can abut against the regulating front claw member 630, and in the state shown in Figure 272 (a), the regulating front claw member 630 is configured so that its posture is not regulated by the regulating rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 272(a), the contact between the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the front rotating claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the front restriction claw member 630 immediately before the front rotation claw member 620 is fixed, the front end of the front rotation claw member 620 is allowed to tilt.

As a result, when the game board 13 is placed in a position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the store clerk does not push the game board 13 with enough force, 9
In this case, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing even when the front frame 14 is stably installed. In this case, the front frame 14 is provided with a multi-function cover member 171 and a board surface support device 600.
When a load is applied to the board surface support device 600, the load can change the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board surface support device 600 abut against each other (see FIG. 1).
34(a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing it to the rear side. That is, the rear-rotation claw member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, which in turn rotates the front-rotation claw member 620, changing the board surface support device 600 to the fixed state. According to this method, since no downward load is applied to the front end of the front-regulating claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 272(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board support device 600 that faces the game board 13 come into contact in the front-rear direction.
When the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing aside the dangling back plate portion 621d, so the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb given to the front-rotation claw member 620 via the rear-rotation claw member 640 acts as a resistance against the game board 13 moving (tilting) toward the front side. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of the game board 13 moving (tilting) toward the front side in the state shown in FIG. 272(a). Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 276), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the reaction force of the load on the game board 13 causes the game board 13 to tilt.
This can prevent the vicinity of the upper end from moving (tilting) toward the front side.

272(a) to 272(b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is disposed opposite the regulation rod 615 (see FIG. 272(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 presses the dangling back plate portion 621d to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620, the non-resistance portion 634b comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the direction along the arc centered on the first shaft member P61, and the resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 to the front side increases accordingly.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 272(a) and the state shown in FIG. 272(b),
This reduces the possibility that the game board 13 will move (tilt) toward the front side. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see Figs. 273 to 276) described later applies a load to the game board 13, it is possible to suppress the upper end portion of the game board 13 from moving (tilting) toward the front side due to the reaction force.

In addition, the non-resisting portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is in the state shown in FIG.
A curved surface is formed in which the radius gradually increases from the portion that abuts against the second shaft member P62 toward the portion that abuts against the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 272(b).

As a result, the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the rear side by the multi-function cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 272(a), and the front-rotation claw member 620 rotates, so that the second shaft member P62
When the restricting bar 615 is displaced, the non-resisting portion 634b and the restricting bar 615 momentarily separate from each other. Therefore, the resistance applied to the restricting bar 630 by the restricting bar 615 is reduced momentarily, and the restricting bar 630 moves vigorously close to the hanging back plate portion 621d by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the state changes to the state shown in FIG.

Therefore, as in this embodiment, even if the multi-function cover member 171 is in a dimensional relationship spaced apart from the regulating front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633 when the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state shown in Figure 272 (b), by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position just before the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state shown in Figure 272 (a), the multi-function cover member 171 can be abutted against the regulating front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633, and then the board surface support device 600 can be set to a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be placed in the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600.
That is, when the rear side surface of the rear extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the rotation front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 can operate while avoiding interference with the multi-function cover member 171 (for example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 271(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a)). Therefore, even when the game board 13 is not placed (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when replacing the board surface), it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14, thereby improving the work efficiency of the worker.

When the board surface support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633
The front end of the restricting bar 615 is pulled upward toward the front side, and the restricting bar 630 is rotated against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the restricting bar 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the restricting bar 615 are in contact with each other in the rotation direction).
15 does not come into contact with each other), the front restriction claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force,
By continuing the rotation in this state, the board surface support device 600 can be put into the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released with the game board 13 fixed, the game board 13 is pushed forward by the displaced post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 271(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to when the front-rear position of the game board 13 does not change when the board support device 600 is released.

Also, as shown in FIG. 266(a) and FIG. 271(a), in the released state, the game board 1
The upper end surface of the rear end plate 621c of the board support device 600 comes into contact with the lower surface of the rear extension plate 621c of the board support device 600. This can eliminate the risk of the game board 13 falling to the front side when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are released.

The upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support devices 600 changes, as in this embodiment, if the board support devices 600 are operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 may differ between the upper and lower, and the load applied to the game board 13 may become excessive.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the operation of the restricting front claw member 630, which is operated when the board surface support device 600 is put into the release state, and the operation of the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 64
In other words, as shown in FIG. 272(a) and FIG. 272(b), the amount of displacement of the front rotation claw member 630 supporting the game board 13 is smaller than the amount of displacement of the front restriction claw member 630.
20 and the amount of displacement of the claw member 640 after rotation is smaller.

Therefore, when the restricting front claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that it does not return to the fixed state (to such an extent that its return is restricted by the restricting rod 615), the amount of displacement of the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 can be suppressed, so that the deviation of the front-to-rear position of the game board 13 at the points supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 can be suppressed. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

The same effect is also achieved by the rear-rotation claw member 640 being rotatably supported by the front-rotation claw member 620. That is, the front-rotation claw member 620 can be moved from the fixed state (see FIG. 272(b)) to the released state (see FIG. 13).
4(a)), the rear rotation claw member 640 is allowed to displace in a direction widening the angle between the front rotation claw member 620 and the rear rotation claw member 640 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb.

Therefore, the amount of displacement of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation claw members 640 can be suppressed compared to the amount of displacement of the pre-rotation claw members 620, so that the deviation of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the points supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 can be suppressed.
The load on 3 can be reduced.

Next, the relationship between the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described with reference to Figures 273 to 276. Figures 273 to 276 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 223. Note that Figures 273 to 139 show the front frame 14 in a simplified form and in a closed state.

In addition, Figure 273 shows the release state of the board support device 600, Figure 274 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, Figure 275 shows the state in which the board support device 600 has rotated a predetermined angle (approximately 25°) from the release state towards the fixed state, and Figure 276 shows the state just before the board support device 600 is fixed, with the thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board support device 600 being shown by imaginary lines.

273 to 276, the relationship between the panel surface support device 600 and the opening/closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described.
The opening/closing restriction portion 159 viewed in cross section at 37 is shown by imaginary lines in Figures 275 and 276.

As shown in Fig. 273, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see Fig. 273), the interference between the opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided, but the game board 13 and the operating portion back member 155 above the opening/closing restricting portion 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13
When the frame 14 is removed, the front frame 14 is permitted to be closed, but when the game board 13 is placed, closing of the front frame 14 is restricted.

As shown in Fig. 274, when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see Fig. 274), interference between the opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. In addition, since the game board 13 is placed on the rear side compared to the position when the board support device 600 is in the released state, interference between the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is avoided. Therefore, when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed regardless of whether the game board 13 is present or not.

As shown in FIG. 275, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is rotated a predetermined angle from the released state toward the fixed state, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 138), the opening/closing restricting portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

In this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the front rotating claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the front rotating claw member 620 (clockwise direction in FIG. 275 ) and the rotation direction of the restricting front claw member 630 (clockwise direction in FIG. 275 ) are mutually exclusive by the action of the restricting rod 615.
As mentioned above, this is difficult to achieve with a normal load because the reaction force becomes excessive when the rotation direction is opposite to the rotation direction (counterclockwise direction) (see Figure 271 (b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in Fig. 275, the front frame 14 is restricted from closing regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is installed, there is a risk that the front lower end of the game board 13 and the rear extension plate 621c may come into contact in the vertical direction (see Fig. 275), so the effect of restricting the closure of the front frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in Figure 276, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see Figure 276), the opening/closing regulating portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

In addition, in this state, when an attempt is made to rotate the front rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the front rotation claw member 620 (clockwise direction in FIG. 275) and the rotation direction of the restriction front claw member 630 (clockwise direction in FIG. 13) are changed by the action of the restriction rod 615.
As described above, the rotation direction of the spring 24 is not reversed from the rotation direction of the spring 24 (counterclockwise direction) and can be easily pushed in with a normal load (see FIG. 272(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 276, by pushing in the front frame 14, the restriction front claw member 630 is pushed in via the opening/closing restriction portion 159, and the board surface support device 600
Since the front frame 14 can be fixed, the front frame 14 can be allowed to be closed.

Fig. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and Fig. 278 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Figs. 277 and 278 show a state in which the ball launching unit 112a and the cover member that closes the rear of the back pack 92 are disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to Figures 279 to 285. Figure 279(a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, and Figure 279(b) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a.
280(a) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. Fig. 280(a) and Fig. 280(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. Note that Fig. 280(a) illustrates the disassembled state after the cover member 721 has been opened, and Fig. 280(b) illustrates the state after the ball receiving member 731 has been disassembled and turned over. That is, in Fig. 280(b),
Only the back side of the ball receiving member 731 is shown.

As shown in Figures 279 and 280, the ball launching unit 112a is configured by a base member 710 made of metal or die casting, and a resin-made foundation member 711 assembled to the base member 710. The ball launching unit 112a can be in a closed state (see Figure 279(a)) in which the front of the base member 710 is partially covered around the right side of the base member 710, and in an open state (see Figure 23(b)) in which the front of the base member 710 is open.
A ball sending device 721 having a cover member 721 rotatably supported between the ball sending device 721 and the ball receiving device 720 (see FIG. 1)
And, mainly prepare.

The base member 710 mainly comprises a base member 711 which is a member supporting the cover member 721 and which is engaged with the base member 710 by a hook or the like which elastically deforms, which is arranged on the front side of the base member 710 and is formed from a synthetic resin or the like, a launch solenoid 701 which is arranged on the front side, a launch rail 730 which guides the ball P8 shot out by the launch solenoid 701 towards the playing area, a fastening portion 716 which is cylindrically protrudes towards the front side at the intermediate position of a bulging portion 716a which bulges in a straight line from the base member 710 towards the front side to regulate the posture of the ball receiving member 731 and into which a screw is screwed to fasten and fix the ball receiving member 731, a plurality of mounting holes 718, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719.

The base member 711 has a pair of receiving portions 712 at the right corners into which the rod-shaped portions 722 are inserted, and a locking portion 713 that is formed on the left-right opposite sides of the receiving portions 712 so as to be able to lock the hook portions 723.
13, a protruding portion 714 protruding on the front side adjacent to the right side of the engaging portion 713, and a malfunction determination protruding portion 715 protruding opposite the adhesive force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see Figure 279 (a)).

The convex portion 714 is a portion which covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see Figure 279 (a)), and mainly comprises an opposing plane 714a which is arranged opposite the left inner surface 724c of the sphere passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state and which is formed as a plane parallel to the left inner surface 724c, and an inclined surface 714b which is the surface opposite to the opposing plane 714a on the left and right sides and which inclines to the right as it approaches the rear side.

The malfunction determination convex portion 715 does not come into contact with the adhesive force generating solenoid 741 when the adhesive force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, but does come into contact when the adhesive force generating solenoid 741 is loosened (floating from the cover member 721) and is formed with a convex height that regulates the rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening of the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loose, and by creating a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, it is possible to make the store clerk aware that the fastening of the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, repairs can be made (fastening the suction force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) before a malfunction occurs in the ball launching unit 112a.

The ball sending device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported on the base member 711,
The cover member 721 mainly comprises a switching device 740 which is controlled to change between a restricting state in which the ball P8 which has entered inside the cover member 721 is restricted from flowing down, and an allowing state in which the ball P8 (see Figure 144) is allowed to flow down onto the launch rail 730.

The cover member 721 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed in a cup shape with an open rear side (the side facing the page in the position of FIG. 280( a )). The cover member 721 has a pair of rod-shaped parts 722 loosely fitted into receiving parts 712 of the base member 711, hook parts 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite sides of the rod-shaped parts 722, and a ball P
281) can pass through the ball passage opening 724, which is drilled in the front-rear direction, the metal cutting member 725 disposed in a positional relationship such that it protrudes slightly upward from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passage opening 724, and the shaft rod portion 72
It mainly comprises 6.

The switching device 740 is a member made of synthetic resin and includes an attractive force generating solenoid 741 fastened to the cover member 721 and one end of which is loosely fitted into the shaft rod portion 726.
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its position depending on whether magnetic force is generated by the magnetic solenoid 741 or not, a metal plate 743 that is a sheet metal member that is attached to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the attraction force generating solenoid 741, a guide inclined portion 744 that is a part of the ball guide arm member 742 and is disposed below the ball passing opening 724 and inclines downward as it moves away from the ball passing opening 724, and a guide inclined portion 744 that extends upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744 by a distance that is sufficient to accommodate the ball P8, and the extended end is connected to the shaft rod portion 72
6 and a restricting protrusion 745 that protrudes toward the sphere passage opening 724 along a plane perpendicular to the plane of the restricting protrusion 745.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage capable of guiding the ball P8 (see FIG. 281 ), and is a flow-down plate portion 724 that is inclined downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotation radial direction.
a, and a rib portion 724b that is disposed above and opposite the flow-down plate portion 724a and extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib-like manner, and the extended tip surface is inclined downward as it approaches the back side;
The left inner surface 724 is connected to the left end of the flow-down plate portion 724a and has a surface extending in the vertical direction.
With these configurations, the ball P8 that flows into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the rear and to the right.

When the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see FIG. 279(a)), if the ball P8 (see FIG. 281) enters the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b and flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along the inclination of the inclined surface 714b.
Since the metal cutting member 725 flows down in a manner of moving away from the metal cutting member 725 in the left and right directions,
Even when the cutting metal member 725 is disposed so as to protrude inward from the sphere passage opening 724, the sphere P8 and the cutting metal member 725 can be prevented from colliding with each other.

The launch rail 730 is a rail member that extends from the middle position of the base member 710 so as to slope upward toward the left side. Near the bottom end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 is disposed at a distance shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is fixed to the base member 710 and is regulated to a position parallel to the extension direction of the launch rail 730 and the direction of its length. The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is fastened to the base member 710 and is formed as a long hole along the length direction and has a through hole 731a for passing a fastening screw.
and a regulating groove 731b which is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing in the direction of the long hole of the through hole 731a) similar to the bulge portion 716a, and which has a width slightly larger than the width of the bulge portion 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulge height of the bulge portion 716a.

When fastening the ball receiving member 731 to the base member 710, the ball receiving member 731 can be slid along the straight line along which the bulging portion 716a bulges when selecting which position of the through hole 731a to fasten with the fastening portion 716, thereby adjusting the waiting position (the distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the firing strength when the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 223) is rotated the same amount) can be easily adjusted. In addition, since the restricting groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross section by bending a metal plate, and has a rolling plate portion 730a formed into a substantially V-shaped cross section and extending diagonally upward to the left, and attachment plate portions 730b, 730c hanging down from the front and rear sides of the rolling plate portion 730a.
The base member 710 is attached to the base member 710 by screws inserted into a plurality of mounting holes 732 (two in this embodiment) formed in the base member 730b and 730c.

In addition, a rail guard 733 made of synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b, 730c, thereby suppressing noise, vibrations, etc. caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and is supported by a ball P8 (see FIG. 283(b)).
) at two points on the circumferential surface of the ball P8 to guide the ball P8 upward.

Figures 281(a) to 281(c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a, showing the ball sending status by the ball sending device 720 in chronological order.
In (c), in order to facilitate understanding, the cover member 721 is omitted from the illustration.

As shown in Figure 281 (a), when the switching device 740 of the ball feeding device 720 is in the regulating state (the supply of power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity), a regulating protrusion 745 is positioned at a position corresponding to the rear open end of the ball passing opening 724, and abuts against the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, regulating the flow downward from the rear open end.

281(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the permissive state (power is supplied to the adsorptive force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the restricting protrusion 745 retracts above the ball, and the restriction on the flow of ball P8 is released, allowing ball P8 to flow above the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, ball P8 abuts against the front side wall of the base member 711, restricting it from flowing further downward, and it remains on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

281(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the restricted state again, whereby the ball P8 on the inclined guide portion 744 is lowered to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the rear side according to the inclination of the inclined guide portion 744, and is guided to the launch rail 730.

The state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 281(c) is the same as that shown in FIG. 281(a), so even in the state shown in FIG. 281(c), the flow of balls that have entered the ball passage opening 724 is restricted. Therefore, balls can be supplied one by one to the launch rail 730. The ball P8 that enters the ball passage opening 724 is supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 223), and is a ball that has been stored in the upper tray 17.

282 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, a lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially aligned with the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a, and an upper blade portion 725b extending from the same plate as the base end side of the lower blade portion 725b, and a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted.
5c.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed so that its tip is inclined toward the back side more than the lower blade portion 725b, and its lower side projects upward more than the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c inclines downward toward the base end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b inclines upward toward the base end side (left side). In other words, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a string member such as a string fixed to the ball. Next, referring to FIG. 283 and FIG. 284, the ball P
The following describes how the yarn Y8 is treated when it is fixed to the yarn feed roller 8 and enters the yarn feed roller 8.

FIG. 283(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 283(b) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a.
284(a) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit 112a as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 46(a), FIG. 284(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, FIG. 284(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the yarn Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147(a), and FIG. 285 is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a after the launch of the ball P8.
12a is a partial front view of the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62.
In FIG. 7, in order to facilitate understanding, some of the components of the ball launching unit 112a are omitted from the illustration.

As shown in FIG. 283(a) and FIG. 283(b), a ball P is guided to a launch rail 730.
Ball P8 remains in contact with the lower left edge of ball receiving member 731 (see Figure 283 (a)), and from this state, when current is passed through the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 extends forcefully, imparting a launch force to ball P8, causing ball P8 to be launched along the launch rail 730 (see Figure 284 (a)).

Here, a known fraudulent practice is to shoot out ball P8 with one end of a thread Y8 fixed to it, and while ball P8 is in the play area, move the other end of the thread Y8 that has been left at hand, pulling and loosening the thread Y8, thereby causing ball P8 to be repeatedly detected in the winning hole.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut by utilizing the momentum of the launch of the ball P8. In detail, when the ball P8 is placed in the launch standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 is placed on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a position shifted to the right as it approaches the back side (see FIG. 283(b)).

When the ball P8 is shot out in this state, it passes under the flow-down plate portion 724a and enters the launch rail 730.
As the thread Y8 moves, it is pulled by the rolling ball P8, and the middle portion of the thread Y8 moves along the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a, so that the thread Y8 enters the underside of the upper blade portion 725c that protrudes above the flow-down plate portion 724a, and enters the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

The player holds the front end (other end) of the string Y8, and the load caused by the launch of the ball P8 is applied to the end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8, so that a large tensile force is applied to the string Y8. As a result, the string Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 285). This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the winning hole.

If the launch strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a risk that the string Y8 will not be pulled sufficiently and will not be cut. In that case, the ball P8 will not reach the play area, but will flow back between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, pass through the foul ball receiving port 146, flow down the foul ball passage 145 (see FIG. 235), and be discharged into the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 223). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the string Y8, the ball P8 will not pass through the winning hole, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of fraudulent behavior in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected by the winning hole.

Next, the performance operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to Fig. 286 to Fig. 316. Fig. 286 is a front view of the game board 13, Fig. 287 and Fig. 288 are exploded front perspective views of the performance operation unit 1000, and Fig. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the performance operation unit 1000. The game board 13 shown in Fig. 286 is mainly different from the game board 13 shown in Fig. 2 in that the petal operation device 800 is visible from the upper frame part of the center frame 86, and the other configurations are substantially the same.

A performance operation unit 1000 shown in Figures 287 to 289 is disposed on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The performance operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and an advance/retreat operation unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100.

The advance/retract operation unit 900 is composed of a plurality of movable members involved in raising and lowering the petal operation device 800 up and down (advance/retract operation, i.e., operation including at least one of an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and an operation of retreating toward the outside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81) by the driving force of the drive motor 921, and the petal operation device 800 is connected to one end, and the other end is supported by the back plate 1100 and is connected to the arm gear 9
24, a driving side arm member 910 that rotates by transmitting the driving force of a driving motor 921, and a driving motor 92 that generates a driving force for driving the driving side arm member 910.
1, a transmission means 920 consisting of a plurality of gears that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, a thin slide plate 930 that slides left and right in conjunction with the rotational movement of the drive side arm member 910, a thin plate-shaped second performance member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding movement of the slide plate 930, and a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal operation device 800 on the left and right opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910.

Next, the structure of the petal movement device 800 will be described.
Fig. 291 is a cross-sectional view of petal operation device 800 taken along line CLIV-CLIV in Fig. 290. In Fig. 291, support substrate 801 is diagrammatically shown by imaginary lines.

Petal operating device 800 is configured by supporting components such as petals 802 on a supporting base material 801. As shown in Fig. 289, supporting base material 801 is disposed on the rear side of petals 802, etc., and although its overall shape is hidden by other components and not shown in the drawing, it is formed from a resin material and includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the rear side of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side to a position toward the right of the upper end of the central main body of the supporting base 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 protrudes forward through a small gap formed in the supporting base 801, and a first gear 804G (see Figure 293), described below, is fixed to its tip.

An opening 8 is provided at a position slightly below and to the left of the central motor 804 in the central main body of the support base material 801.
01P is drilled, and disposed to the right of the opening 801P, extending rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes,
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed.
A doughnut-shaped recess 801D recessed from the front side to the rear side in a doughnut shape through which 0d can pass.
(See FIG. 289).

The central motor 804 of the support base 801 (see FIG. 289 ) to which the central motor 804 is fixed
An oil damper 805 is fixed to the lower part from the front side (see FIG. 293).

A decorative member 807 is disposed and fixed to the front side of the supporting base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral region from the front while leaving open a vertically long, roughly elliptical region in the center. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper part constituting the upper end region and a roughly U-shaped lower part constituting the region below the upper part.

In this embodiment, the support base 801 has a shape that is somewhat elongated in the vertical direction as a whole, but since the petal operating device 800 is arranged to be movable up and down as described later,
The operating space can be reduced when the support base material 801 is formed into a vertically elongated shape rather than a horizontally elongated shape.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively arranged concentrically with the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G so as to overlap the position of the opening 801P as described later.
Since they are linked to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, they can be positioned at any position on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G so long as they do not interfere with each other; however, in this embodiment, they are positioned to the right of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G (see FIG. 293).

As a result, as shown in Fig. 291, by concentrating the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a slightly tilted position toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the opposite left half from sagging downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base material 801 and the driving side arm member 910 (see Fig. 289) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 from widening, and the driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801 via the driving side arm member 910.

Fig. 292 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operation device 800, and Fig. 293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operation device 800. Note that in Fig. 292 and Fig. 293, the illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in Figures 292 and 293, the petals 802 are formed as resin members molded to resemble the shape of one of the five separate petals that as a whole make up a hibiscus flower in a bloomed state, and are provided with a plate-like flat member 803 on the back side.

294(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 294(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820. FIG.

Each of the petals 802 has a front shape of a substantially circular arc extending in the radial direction when arranged, and is curved so as to bulge gently forward from the center to the outer periphery (FIG. 15).
See 4).

The surface of the petal 802 is irregularly uneven, including many wrinkles, and the periphery is also irregularly uneven when viewed from the front. The five petals 802 are not strictly identical to each other, and although there are slight differences in the unevenness, they are molded into roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are nearly transparent, and the outer periphery is colored so that the specific color (red) is darker, without forming any particular boundary between it and the inner region.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S, which extends cylindrically rearward and has a screw hole therein, at two locations on the rear side of each petal 802: near the outer periphery and at the radial center.

The petals 802 are arranged closer to the rear side 802 a than the rear side 802 a arranged on the rounded tip side (counterclockwise in front view, right side of the paper in FIG. 294 ( a )) from the position where they are fastened to the flat plate member 803.
The front portion 802b, which is disposed on the sharp tip side (clockwise side when viewed from the front, left side of the paper in FIG. 294(a)) from the front portion 802a, is disposed on the front side. In other words, the front portion 802b is disposed closer to the rear cover 886 of the loose-fitting device 880 than the rear portion 802a.

The front portion 802b of each petal 802 is overlapped on the front side of the rear portion 802a of the adjacent petal 802, and the rear portion 802a is overlapped on the rear side of the front portion 802b of the other adjacent petal 802, thus arranging the five petals 802 so that their inner tips converge toward the same center.

The petals 802 are shaped such that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are misaligned from each other in the front and rear directions.
b can be positioned so that they overlap front to back, making the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathered position and the fully open position (see Figures 178 and 316) more pronounced.

When arranged, the five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (donut-shaped) rear side with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 292).

As shown in Figs. 292, 293 and 294, the flat plate member 803 is
02, and are separate, long, plate-like resin members fixed to the respective mounting holes 101 and 102.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape that extends from the center to the outer periphery in a generally rectangular shape when arranged, and further has an outer periphery that extends forward.

In addition, the vicinity of the opening S1 on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state (the vicinity of the inner periphery)
A pair of screw-in portions 803S extending cylindrically rearward and having screw holes therein are integrally formed at positions spaced apart in the circumferential direction (the short side direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screw-in portions 803S are formed in an arrangement that is approximately flush with both side walls in the circumferential direction (short direction) of each flat plate member 803, and further, in the portion along both side walls of the flat plate member 803, a slide rib 803a that is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of screw-in portions 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward beyond the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S so as to extend to both sides along a surface direction that circumscribes the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 294(b), the rear side of each flat plate member 803 has two screw insertion holes therein, each of which corresponds to the screw-in portion 802S of the petal 802.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw-insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 is connected to the screw insertion portion 803H of the corresponding petal 802.
02S is abutted from the front and a screw is screwed in from the rear, thereby fixing each flat plate member 803 to the corresponding petal 802.

Fig. 295 is a front view of the slit member 810, and Fig. 296 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In addition, in the explanation of Fig. 295 and Fig. 296, Fig. 292 and Fig. 293 will be referred to as appropriate. As shown in Fig. 292 and Fig. 293, the slit member 810 is disposed on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 295, the slit member 810 is a plate-like member made of resin having a front shape in which five similarly shaped parts are connected in a circular ring shape, with a circular opening 811 formed in the center, and as shown in FIG. 296, a front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 293) that are roughly cylindrical extend in both the front and rear directions from the periphery of the circular opening 811.

Returning to Fig. 293, the explanation will be given. On the rear peripheral wall portion 813, two of the five equally spaced circumferential locations are provided, and one of the three remaining locations is provided in the middle. Each of these locations is provided with a screw-in portion 813S that extends cylindrically in the front-rear direction and has a screw hole therein. Furthermore, the positioning boss 81
The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge outward at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portions 813S and the positioning bosses 813a. One of the purposes of these bulging portions is to reduce sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in Fig. 295, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. The central slit 814 is formed so as to extend linearly from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811 further outward. However, the central slit 814 is formed so as to extend linearly from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811 to a position slightly outside the circular opening 811.
4 extends along a direction D12 inclined at an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in this pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The side slits 815 are formed on both sides of the central slit 814 so as to extend parallel to each other with a slight gap therebetween.

In this way, five sets of three slits, each consisting of the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 on either side of it, are formed at equal intervals (72° apart) in the circumferential direction. Note that each end of the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 may be formed in a round (semicircular) shape when viewed from the front, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In this embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the two side slits 815 located at the outermost position in the set of three slits, i.e., the two corners on the smaller diameter side among the four corners of the three slits, are shaped to extend slightly in a generally rectangular shape (with a rectangular slit) in the extension direction of the two side slits 815. This rectangular extending portion (slit) is for fitting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 into it.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end of a flat plate in which a central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and is provided with an arc plate 816 which is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815, and has an outer diameter formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 are formed.
It is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which the groove 5 is formed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

As described above, the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 as shown in FIG.
The five sets of central slits 814 and side slits 815 extend along a direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. Therefore, the five sets of central slits 814 and side slits 815 are arranged closer to each other inwardly, and are more densely arranged. This also improves the slit member 81
The external shape of the No. 0 has been made compact.

In other words, if five sets of central slits 814 and two side slits 815 are arranged in a circular opening 811,
The five sets of central slits 814 and side slits 815 can be laid out more densely when they are arranged and formed to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above than when they are arranged and formed to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11, and therefore the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293 , a slide member 820 is disposed in the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810.
As shown in FIG. 294, 20 is a resin member having a long, plate-like front shape, and comprises: extension portions which are thin at both ends of the slide member 820 and have a semicircular tip when viewed from the front; a central portion which bulges out to a greater thickness than the performance portion at a position between the extension portions; a screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extension portion; a guide pin 822 which protrudes from the center of the slide member 820 toward the front side and is inserted into a central slit 814 in the assembled state; and a slide pin 823 which is fixed so as to penetrate forward and backward in a manner that protrudes from the center of the slide member 820 toward the rear side.

As shown in Figures 292 and 293, the slide member 820 is positioned so as to span the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in an orientation in which the extension direction of the three slits, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 820, intersects with the longitudinal direction at right angles.

On the other hand, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810 are
The screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted from the front side. When fully fitted, the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes very slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, washer head screws 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is moved to the flat plate member 8 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide ribs 803a of the flat plate member 803 are inserted along the corresponding outer edges of the side slits 815 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 of the slit member 810. At this time, the flat plate member 803 is supported by the guide pins 8
The slide rib 803a restricts the slide movement so that the slide member 803 does not rotate around the center of the slide member 803 but keeps a constant outward facing position.

FIG. 297 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804.
298(a) and 298(b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. Note that in FIG. 298(a), the fourth gear 880G is omitted.
In the explanation of Figures 290 and 298, reference will be made to Figures 292 and 293 as appropriate.

As described above, the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached has a rotating plate 830 disposed thereon from the rear side. The rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center, as shown in Figures 297 and 298.

As shown in FIG. 297, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall that extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830.
The loop is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830 so as to extend in a closed manner along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 in a long and narrow loop shape when viewed from the front.

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap to allow play. The corners at the extension ends of the peripheral walls of the guide rail 832 are formed to be chamfered.

The guide rail 832 extends from a position where it contacts the outer side of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.
It extends in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front along a direction approximately halfway between the tangent and normal to the pivot opening 831, and then curves in an arc further in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front than this midpoint, extending to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 (see Figure 312 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the end of the guide rail 832 on the pivot opening 831 side, i.e., the center side end, which circumscribes the peripheral portion of the pivot opening 831, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831, and its front end protrudes toward the front side beyond the front end of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, so that in total, five guide rails 832 are spaced equally apart and extend outward in a spiral shape from around the pivot opening 831.

298, a second gear 830G having teeth on its outer periphery is integrally formed on the rear side of the rotating plate 830, extending rearward like a peripheral wall from the periphery of the pivot opening 831. The second gear 830G is disposed so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotated by the central motor 804.

As shown in Fig. 291, the rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 fits externally onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832, respectively (see Fig. 311(c)).

As described above, the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 locally bulges at five points, so that it makes linear rather than planar contact with the inner surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830, whereby the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotating plate 830 is pivoted smoothly and freely.

Further, on the rear side of the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG.
A third gear 810 G having a slightly smaller diameter but larger than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically with the oil damper 805 G and arranged to mesh with the damper gear 805 G of the oil damper 805 .

A circular pivot opening 810a is formed in the center of the third gear 810G.
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 810b are drilled at positions corresponding to the three screw-in portions 813S in the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see Figure 293), and positioning holes 810c are drilled at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G that is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810.
The positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 293) is inserted into the positioning hole 810c to perform positioning, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the screw-insertion hole 810b to form a screw-in portion 813S (see FIG. 1).
56) to secure the cam.

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G acts as a stopper to hold the rotating plate 830 against the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as to prevent it from coming off.

292 and 293, a central shaft rotating device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 loosely fitted so as to be rotatable around the central shaft member 851.

FIG. 299 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in Figures 299 and 300, the central shaft member 851 comprises a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape with a portion of the peripheral wall of the cylinder cut away along the axial direction, and a flange 855 formed in a circular plate shape so as to expand in diameter at the front end of the shaft portion 852, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are formed integrally.

The center of the flange 855 is circularly open in communication with the inside of the shaft portion 852, thereby forming an inner cavity 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 from front to back. Around the inner cavity 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, at two locations on the left and right sides of the inner cavity 856, there are integrally formed a front screw-in portion 857 having a screw hole therein, a holding portion 858 having a countersunk shape and drilled toward the back side at a position shifted from the front screw-in portion 857 toward the inner cavity 856 side, and two support protrusions 859 that extend forward in a cylindrical shape and are somewhat short. The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusions 859 have the same extension height.

A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole therein is integrally formed on the inner peripheral surface of the bore portion 856. The rear screw-in portion 853 extends cylindrically along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 in parallel to two opposing positions, extends further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and has a screw hole therein. In addition, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIG. 299 and FIG. 300, an LED board 861 is provided on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
The LED board 861 is a substantially disk-shaped board having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

The LED board 861 has a screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 formed at positions corresponding to the front screw-in portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 to determine its position, and the screw is inserted into the central shaft member 8
The LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 by screwing it into the front screw portion 857 of the central shaft member 851 .

Furthermore, an insertion hole 864 is drilled in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and is large enough to allow the screw-in portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be fitted therein.

As shown in FIG. 299, the front side of the LED board 861 is provided with forward-facing LEDs at one central location and at multiple locations arranged at equal intervals on a concentric circle that extends multiple times (double) around the central location.
D865 are fixed in place and emit light forward.

Horizontal LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at multiple locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction near the outer periphery of the front and rear side surfaces of the LED substrate 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED substrate 861. The horizontal LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. A connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed facing rearward on the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861.

A central decorative member 868 is disposed in front of the LED board 861.
is formed from a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but which is nearly transparent, extends cylindrically from a long plate-shaped base toward the rear side, and has a pair of screw-in portions 869 in the center of which is a screw hole into which a screw can be screwed.

The screw-in portion 869 is disposed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861.
The D board 861 is sandwiched between the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 and the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861.
The screw-in portion 869 that has passed through the flange 855 comes into contact with the front side, and a screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 869 from the rear side of the flange 855, thereby fastening and fixing the central decorative member 868 to the flange 855. In this way, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED board 861.

The loose fitting device 880 mainly comprises a small diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner circumferential surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer circumferential diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, a large diameter cylindrical member 882 arranged coaxially with the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and formed from a flanged cylindrical shape having an outer circumferential surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and a main cylindrical member 883 which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter cylindrical member 882 and is loosely fitted with the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter cylindrical member 882 so as to be rotatable relative to each other.

The main cylindrical member 883 has four locations equally spaced circumferentially around the cylindrical portion, and at two locations every other one, a screw-in portion 883S extending cylindrically in the front-to-rear direction and having a screw hole therein is integrally formed, and a positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the location at which the screw-in portion 883S is not formed among the four locations.

The main cylindrical member 8 is screwed into the screw hole 883S at four positions corresponding to the screw-in portions 883S and the positioning bosses 883a.
In addition, the main cylindrical member 883 is provided with a sliding rib 88 that protrudes in the outer diameter direction and extends in the axial direction at the midpoint of the four corresponding circumferential positions and has the same protruding length as the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a.
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the main cylindrical member 883 is provided with a decorative member 884 which is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861 and which covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see Figure 286), and a rear cover 886 which is fastened and fixed to the decorative member 884 near the outer diameter and forms a bottomless cup shape with the outer periphery side rising toward the front side from the fastening part, and which abuts against the flange portion of the main cylindrical member 883 from the back side and is fastened and fixed.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in the present pachinko machine 8010) on both sides, which makes the sides mirror-like. Therefore, for example, the light from the horizontally oriented LEDs 866 arranged on the back side of the LED board 861 can be reflected near the outer periphery to produce a light-emitting effect.

The decorative member 884 is a component that creates an illumination effect when light is irradiated from LEDs 865, 866 arranged on the LED board 861, and comprises a front side panel portion that is formed in the shape of a hibiscus flower and is made of a light-transmitting resin material of a specific color (red), and a rear side panel portion that is formed in a circular plate shape on the rear side with a peripheral wall rising towards the rear side and is made of a colorless light-transmitting resin material, and an opening 885 is drilled in the central portion large enough to allow the central decorative member 868 to be inserted therethrough.

The main cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fit device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G disposed rearward of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 293).

As shown in FIG. 298(a), a fourth gear 880G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is concentrically disposed and fixed to the rear side of the third gear 810G.
The support base 801 is rotatably supported by the shaft and meshes with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that mesh with each other.

One of the intermediate gears 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other of the intermediate gears meshes with the fourth gear 880G.
08, it rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

A circular pivot opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G.
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 880b are drilled at positions corresponding to the two screw-in portions 883S of the main cylindrical member 883, and positioning holes 880c are drilled at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a.

The fourth gear 880G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G that is fitted onto the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850. The fourth gear 880G is positioned relative to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 by inserting a positioning boss 883a (see FIG. 300) into a positioning hole 880c. A screw (not shown) is inserted into a screw-in portion 883S (see FIG. 16) through a screw insertion hole 880b.
The screw is then screwed into the corresponding hole in the mounting hole (see FIG. 3).

As a result, the loose-fitting device 880 is interlockingly connected (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, while the fourth gear 880G acts as a stopper, holding the slit member 810 in place so that it does not come off the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d that is provided on the outer circumferential side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c and extends toward the rear side in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis. The detection arc plate 880d is a plate of the same shape that is arranged at five positions at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d is in the assembled state (see FIG. 291 ) with the doughnut-shaped recessed portion 80
289) and is detected by a photocoupler type detection sensor 801C arranged to be capable of detecting a member passing through the doughnut-shaped recessed portion 801D. That is, in this embodiment, regardless of the position from which the fourth gear 880G starts to rotate, the detection arc plate 88
It is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (central angle 72°) (minimum angle 7
2° can be detected, and rotation of 72° or more can be ensured by detection).

The assembly of the central shaft rotation device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, on which the LED board 861 is arranged and fixed, and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 are inserted from the front side into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their respective rear ends protrude slightly rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 protruding further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is attached to the support base material 801.
The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the supporting base 801 by inserting it into a positioning notch (not shown) in the supporting base 801 (see Figure 289) to position it, and then inserting the rear screw-in portion 853, which similarly protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, into the insertion hole of the screw insertion portion 801S in the supporting base 801 and screwing it in place.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connection portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the inner cavity portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base material 801 (not shown).

With the above-described mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 so as to protrude forward, and as shown in FIG. 291, the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 is
The rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted onto the large-diameter cylindrical member 882, and the front peripheral wall portion 8
12 is attached so as to fit over the outside.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main cylindrical member 883 has eight screw-in portions 883S,
Since it is locally bulged by the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b, it makes linear rather than planar contact with the inner surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, whereby the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted onto the main cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is pivotally supported so as to rotate smoothly and freely.

FIG. 301 shows the petal operation device 800, the driving side arm member 910 and the driven side arm member 95.
301 is a rear perspective view of the rear plate 1100, and FIG. 302 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. The petal operating device 800 moves up and down (moves forward and backward) by being given a load in the vertical direction from the driving side arm member 910. Note that in the explanation of FIG. 301 and subsequent figures, reference will be made to FIG. 287 to FIG. 15.
Please refer to 2 as appropriate.

The back panel 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member that is fastened to the innermost part of the back case 200 (see Figure 225) that is fastened to the back of the game board 13, and mainly comprises a support pillar 1110 that protrudes cylindrically toward the front side at the lower left corner when viewed from the front, a gear storage section 1120 that is recessed above the support pillar 1110 so that multiple gears can be stored from the front side, a rail fixing section 1130 that is arranged in a straight line in the vertical direction at the center position from the left to the right, and a support long hole 1140 that is drilled as a long hole that slopes downward as it approaches the rail fixing section 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support pillar 1110 across the rail fixing section 1130.

The support pillar 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the driving side arm member 910.
Near the outer periphery at the front end portion, it has a pair of left and right holes 1111 that are formed to allow screws to be screwed in, and a pair of positioning bosses 1112 that extend toward the front side on the same plane as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111, one above the other.

As shown in Figure 301, the driving side arm member 910 is composed of a long, rod-shaped main body member bent in an L-shape when viewed from the rear, and mainly comprises a pivot hole 911 that is circularly drilled in the front-to-rear direction at one end and is rotatably supported on a support column 1110, a connecting protrusion 912 that is stepped and cylindrically protrudes on the front side at a position near one end of the long main body member, a transmission long hole 913 that is drilled in a linear long hole shape from the bending point of the long main body member toward the pivot hole 911, and a support portion 914 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end of the long main body member.

The driving side arm member 910 rotates around the support pillar 1110 in conjunction with the rotation of an arm gear 924 which has an internal fitting protrusion 925 which is fitted into the transmission long hole 913 and a flange portion 926 which extends radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses that are connected to each other while slightly intersecting each other. The first accommodating portion 1121 is disposed on the left end side and accommodates the motor gear 922, and the second accommodating portion 1122 is connected to the first accommodating portion 1121.
22 and a third housing portion 1123 which is disposed opposite the first housing portion 1121 with the second housing portion 1122 therebetween and which houses an arm gear 924 which is engaged with the driving side arm member 910.
It mainly comprises 3.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a part that supports an operating rail 1000R (see Figure 287, not shown in Figure 302) which is made of multiple metal plates stacked front to back and supported so that it can slide up and down, and is equipped with insertion holes 1131 through which screws can be inserted to fasten the operating rail 1000R to the back panel 1100, and positioning bosses 1132 that fit into the operating rail 1000R and position the operating rail 1000R, and these are arranged in a straight line from top to bottom.
The rigidity of the movement rail 1000R keeps the posture of the petal movement device 800 constant.

The support long hole 1140 is a long hole that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of approximately 50° when viewed from the front, and is provided with an extension wall 1141 that extends from near the outer periphery toward the front side.

As shown in Figure 301, the driven arm member 950 is composed of a long, rod-shaped main body member that is formed in an approximately straight line when viewed from the rear, and mainly comprises a supported convex portion 951 that is cylindrically protruded toward the rear side at one end and is slidably supported in the support long hole 1140 of the rear panel 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operation device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted into the supported protrusion 951, and with the collar fitted inside the support elongated hole 1140, a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported protrusion 951, whereby the driven arm member 950 is supported slidably on the back plate 1100. In other words, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported protrusion 951, and the outer diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the support elongated hole 1140.
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

Figure 303 is an exploded front oblique view of the back panel 1100, side base material 1000S and second performance member 940, and Figure 304 is an exploded front oblique view of the drive side arm member 910, slide plate 930 and second performance member 940.

The slide plate 930 is supported on the lateral base material 1000S so as to be able to slide left and right by multiple (three in this embodiment) supported long holes 931 drilled in the front-to-back direction in the shape of long holes extending left and right, and is connected to the connecting protrusion 912 of the driving side arm member 910 by a base end long hole 932 drilled in the front-to-back direction in the shape of a long hole extending up and down and arranged on the left end side, and is connected to the second performance member 940 by a tip end insertion hole 933 arranged on the right end side and drilled in the front-to-back direction.

The base end long hole 932 mainly comprises a retaining portion 932a at the upper end formed along the trajectory of the connecting protrusion 912 rotating around the support column 1110, and a displacement portion 932b extending vertically downward from the lower end of the retaining portion 932a.

As shown in FIG. 303, the side base material 1000S is a plate-like member fastened to a support column portion 1150 having a screw-in portion 1151 at the tip into which a screw can be screwed, and is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column portion 1150 and has an insertion hole into which a screw can be inserted, and the positional relationship between the fastening plate portion 1001S and the supported long hole 931 of the slide plate 930 is determined. A support protrusion 1002S is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the rear side in a positional relationship (three places) corresponding to the engagement, a shaft support hole 1003S is provided in a circular shape in the front-rear direction in the right corner when viewed from the front and supports the second performance member 940 in a rotatable manner, an arc recess 1004S is provided in an arc shape concentric with the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a protruding rib portion 1005S is provided in a protruding manner on the front side along an arc shape concentric with the center of the shaft support hole 1003S.
And, mainly prepare.

The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar is attached to the tip of the support protrusion 1002S.
and the supported long hole 931, and in this state a screw for preventing it from coming off is screwed into the tip of the supporting protrusion 1002S, thereby forming a part that supports the sliding plate 930 so that it can slide.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second performance member 940, and the arc recess 1004S and the convex rib portion 1005S are portions that are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second performance member 940. Note that the convex rib portion 1005S is formed with a convex height that does not come into contact when the second performance member 940 is in the normal position, but can come into contact when the second performance member 940 is displaced or bent from the normal position.

The second performance member 940 has a main body portion whose lower end is formed in two and whose upper end is formed in a circle centered on the shaft support portion 941, and the shaft support portion 941 is cylindrically protruding toward the rear side at the right corner when viewed from the front and is supported by a collar in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary protrusion 942 is disposed adjacent to the shaft support portion 941 and protrudes toward the rear side in a cylindrical shape.
Provide for the Lord.

The shaft support portion 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar, which is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and has a screw-in portion 941a at its tip into which a screw is screwed (see FIG. 289).
With the cover member 945 having a disk shape and an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S disposed at the tip of the shaft support hole 1003S, a screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 941a, whereby the cover member 94
5 serves as a retainer. In this way, the second performance member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is inserted into the tip-side through-hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 306 ), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the tip, thereby preventing the auxiliary protrusion 942 from coming off the slide plate 930. That is, the connection between the auxiliary protrusion 942 and the tip-side through-hole 933 links the slide plate 930 and the second performance member 940.

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is a protrusion that displaces the vicinity of the center of the width of the arc recess 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc recess 1004S. As a result, even if the second performance member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary protrusion 942 abuts against the arc recess 1004S and generates resistance, thereby suppressing bending deformation.

The description will be given with reference to FIG. 302. The rear plate 1100 has three screw-in portions 1161 that are configured to allow screws to be screwed in when fastening the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921, and
A detection sensor 1162 detects a flange portion 926 that protrudes radially outward from the arm gear 924 within a range of a predetermined angle, a shaft support 1163 on which a collar that guides a coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in a direction to lift the petal operating device 800 is rotatably supported, a cover support portion 1164 that is arranged in a triangular shape in a front view at the lower right of the support long hole 1140 so as to be able to support the board cover 1000C, and a cover support portion 1164 that is arranged adjacent to the cover support portion 1164 and supports the board cover 1000C.
The main components are a wiring stopper 1165 that is hidden by the board cover 1000C in a front view, and a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw that fastens the board cover 1000C is screwed in.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S has threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the board cover 1000C are threaded. The threaded portion 1006S is disposed at a slight distance from the second performance member 940 disposed at the end of the movement in the direction of movement of the second performance member 940 (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary protrusion 942 may break due to long-term use,
Even if the portion that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second performance member 940 in a front view is chipped,
The screw-in portion 1006S can regulate the displacement of the second performance member 940.

In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened to each of the side substrate 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are stacked in front and behind and fastened to each other.
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. As a result, even when the petal operating device 800, which is a heavy device, is raised and lowered by rotating the driving side arm member 910, it is possible to easily suppress vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S.

Next, referring to Figs. 305 to 310, the raising and lowering operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advancing and retreating operation unit 900 will be described. Figs. 305, 307 and 309 are front views of the petal operation device 800, the advancing and retreating operation unit 900 and the back plate 1100. Figs.
71 and 310 are rear views of the petal operating device 800 and the forward/backward operating unit 900.

305 and 306 show a state in which the driving side arm member 910 is disposed at the upper end side of the moving range, while FIGS. 307 and 308 show a state in which the connecting protrusion 912 (see FIG. 301) of the driving side arm member 910 is disposed at a connecting position between the retaining portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side long hole 932, and FIGS. 309 and 310 show a state in which the driving side arm member 910 is disposed at the connecting position between the retaining portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side long hole 932, while FIGS.
is shown disposed at the lower end of its range of movement.

306 and 310, when the driving arm member 910 is located at the end of its range of movement, the transmission slot 913 of the driving arm member 910 extends in the tangent direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924, with the internal fitting protrusion 925 (see FIG. 288) of the arm gear 924 as the base point.
Since only the spring 25 is displaced and the driving side arm member 910 maintains its position within a range (a range in which the driving motor 921 rotates freely), the resistance at the time of starting the driving motor 921 can be reduced.

307 and 308, the petal operation device 800 is slightly lowered compared to the state shown in Fig. 305 and 306, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second performance member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second performance member 940.

In the range from Figures 307 and 308 to Figures 309 and 310, the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are linked together, making it possible to visually view the petal operation device 800 and the second performance member 940 as being linked together.

Here, the second performance member 940 moves toward the original position of the petal movement device 800 in a protruding manner, as if the second performance member 940 were the petal movement device 800.
It can be visually recognized as operating in accordance with 00.

Next, we will explain the gathering and dispersing rotation operation of the petal operation device 800. Fig. 311 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device 800, Fig. 311 (b) is a front view of the petal operation device 800, Fig. 311 (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device 800 in a see-through manner with the central shaft rotation device 850 omitted, and Fig. 311 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

FIG. 312(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 312(b) is a front view of the petal operation device 8
312(a) is a rear view of petal 802 and flat plate member 803, and FIG. 312(b) is a rear perspective view of petal operation device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 313(a) is a front perspective view of the petal movement device 800, and FIG.
FIG. 313(b) is a front view of the petal movement device 800, FIG. 313(c) is a transparent front view of the petal movement device 800 with the central shaft rotation device 850 omitted, and FIG. 313(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

FIG. 314(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 314(b) is a front view of the petal operation device 8
314(a) is a rear view of petal 802 and flat plate member 803, and FIG. 314(b) is a rear perspective view of petal operation device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 315(a) is a front perspective view of the petal movement device 800, and FIG.
FIG. 315(b) is a front view of the petal movement device 800, FIG. 315(c) is a transparent front view of the petal movement device 800 with the central shaft rotation device 850 omitted, and FIG. 315(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

FIG. 316(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 316(b) is a front view of the petal operation device 8
316(a) is a rear view of petal 802 and flat plate member 803, and FIG. 316(b) is a rear perspective view of petal operation device 800. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 309, when the petal operation device 800 is lowered by the lifting operation to the lowest position, the petal operation device 800 moves from the initial position (assembled position) shown in FIG. 311 and FIG. 312 to the position shown in FIG. 313 and FIG. 314.
After passing through the mid-open position shown in FIG. 313, an opening operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIG. 315 and FIG. 316, and then a rotation operation (second operation) is performed at the fully open position, and then a reassembly operation (third operation) is performed to return to the initial position (reassembly position).

In the initial position (assembled position), as shown in FIG. 311(d), the slide member 820
(see FIG. 294) slide pin 823 is inserted into the central slit 81 of the slit member 810.
311 and 312, the five petals 802 are in the most concentrated position toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, and are gathered together to form a blooming hibiscus flower as a whole.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (assembled position) as described above, the central motor 804 first
When the gear 804G is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 312(c), the second gear 830G (see FIG. 312(d)) is interlocked with the rotation of the rotating plate 83
0 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the rear as indicated by an arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is fitted around the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance, so that it can easily rotate around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted around the large diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose-fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G as described above, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a small torque that can initially move the rotating plate 830.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, the rotating plate 8
Only the slit member 30 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held stationary (see Figures 313 and 314).

When the rotating plate 830 is rotated as described above, as shown in FIG. 312( a ), the guide rail 832 on the front side rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front as indicated by the arrow A11.
Accordingly, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 294 ) in a direction in which the slide pin 823 is pushed outward along the radial direction while being guided by the guide rail 832 .

At this time, the movement of the slide pin 823 is the same as that of the slit member 81 as shown in FIG.
Since the slide pin 823 is restricted by the central slit 814 of 0, the slide pin 823 is guided linearly along the central slit 814 from the inner end to the outer side.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that some torque is also applied to the slit member 810. However, the braking force of the oil damper 805 is greater than this torque. Therefore, the slide pin 823 moves in the center slit 810 as the rotating plate 830 rotates, while the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state.
14 in a linear outward motion.

As a result, as shown in Figures 313 and 314, the five sets of petals 802 start to spread radially outward from the assembled position.
As described above, the central slit 814 of 10 extends along a direction D12 that is inclined at an angle θ11 counterclockwise when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. 314. As a result, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward. However, due to this inclination, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 becomes relatively fast.

In other words, by tilting the central slit 814 counterclockwise when viewed from the front in this manner, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin 823 can be moved a predetermined distance with a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotating plate 830, thereby making it possible to more efficiently spread out the petals 802.

Here, for example, if we assume that there was no inclination and the central slit 814 extended radially along the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 would be relatively small compared to the above-mentioned case, while the moving speed of the slide pin 823 would be relatively slow. Furthermore, if we assume that the central slit 814 was inclined clockwise when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11, the reduction in the load on the slide pin 823 and the decrease in the moving speed would both be even more significant.

Also, at this time, as described above, the guide rails 832 extend from the center end portion in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front along a direction D15 midway between the tangent and normal to the pivot opening 831, as shown in FIG. 314, and then extend outward in an arc-like curve further in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front than the direction D15, so that the five guide rails 832 as a whole extend in a spiral shape spreading outward.

The more the guide rail 832 is inclined clockwise as viewed from the front, the more the slide pin 82
The load on the guide rail 832 becomes smaller and the moving speed becomes slower.
The more the slide pin 823 is curved in an arc shape toward the clockwise side in the front view from the direction D15, the
The reduction in load on the body and the reduction in movement speed are both more pronounced.

In other words, in the case of the above-mentioned central slit 814, by tilting it in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively fast, whereas in the case of the guide rail 832, by tilting it in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front and further curving it into an arc, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, a groove is formed by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted into it from the front side, so if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, there is a risk that the slide pin 823 will deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. For this reason, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is sacrificed and reduced, and the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, the slide pin 823 is designed to pass through, so there is little risk of deviation. For this reason, the slide pin 823 is configured to increase its movement speed while increasing the load on the slide pin 823.

In this way, the guide rail 832 reduces the load on the slide pin 823, thereby preventing problems such as deviation and ensuring the reliability of power transmission.
14 increases the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

After that, as shown in FIG. 315 and FIG. 316, the slide pin 823 is inserted into the central slit 81.
When the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement at No. 4, is reached (see FIG. 315(d)), the five sets of petals 802 spread radially to the fully open position, and the spreading operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in Figures 315 and 316, the five petals 802 move radially and discretely, so that the petals 802 are positioned so that they can be seen continuously outward from the decorative member 884 when viewed from the front. As a result, the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 are seen as a unified whole, like a slightly larger hibiscus flower (see Figure 315(b)), compared to when only the decorative member 884 is visible (see Figure 311(b)).

In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and cannot move outward any further, the slide pin 823
is engaged with the outer end of the central slit 814, so that a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805 cannot cause the rotating plate 830 to rotate any further in the same direction as before.
Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully open state after the widening operation is completed can be maintained.

After the above-mentioned spreading operation is completed, the central motor 804 transmits the rotational power in the same direction as before to the rotating plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking force of the oil damper 805 and starts to rotate together with the rotating plate 830 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, as shown by the arrow A12 in Fig. 315(d) . Thus, after the spreading operation, the petals 802 rotate in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front in the fully open state, as shown by the arrow A13 in Fig. 315(b) .

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the opening operation but continues to apply rotational power to the rotating plate 830, it is possible to immediately transition from the opening operation to the rotation operation without any gap.

When the petal 802 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front in a fully open state as shown by the arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise as viewed from the front) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG.
Since the amount of movement (relative amount of movement) of one petal 802 based on a predetermined position 84 becomes large, the rotation speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

The above rotation operation is ended, and the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the opposite direction to the above.
When rotated in a clockwise direction as viewed from behind as shown by arrow A15 in Figure 316 (b), the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, while first only the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate in a clockwise direction as viewed from behind as shown by arrow A15 in Figure 316 (b), thereby performing a gathering operation in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned spreading operation.

In other words, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, to the inner end, which is the inner movement limit, and at the same time, the five sets of petals 802 gather from the fully open position toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, returning to the gathering position (initial position) shown in Figures 311 and 312, returning to the gathered state, and the gathering operation is completed.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or the central motor 804 may be stopped and then operated again, and the central motor 804 may further rotate the first gear 804.
When G is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG.
However, as shown by arrow A16 in FIG. 311(b), in the assembled state, they rotate in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front.

When the petals 802 rotate in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front in the assembled state as shown by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise as viewed from the front) as shown by the arrow A17 in FIG.
Since the amount of movement (relative amount of movement) of one petal 802 based on a predetermined position 84 becomes large, the rotation speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

The central motor 804 is controlled as described above to change from the assembly operation to the rotation operation.
It is possible to have a pause and a transition after a delay, or to have an immediate transition without a pause.

In this embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 290). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 141) can determine whether the petal operating device 800 is performing a rotational operation by determining the output of the detection sensor 801c without controlling the rotation angle of the central motor 804.

Next, the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 317 to 320. In the 25th embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage 145 closed on all sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. However, the passage forming unit 9140 in the 26th embodiment is configured such that a notch 9145b is formed in the wall portion that forms the foul ball passage 9145, and the sheet metal member 9150 protrudes along the notch 9145b. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted. The differences from the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 317 to 320.

Figure 317 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the 26th embodiment, Figure 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and Figures 319 and 320 are front views of the ball launching unit 112a. As shown in Figures 317 and 318, the passage forming unit 9140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the 25th embodiment in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage section 9145, the vertical positional relationship between the lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 and the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142, the shape of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate section 53a.

That is, firstly, the foul ball passage portion 9145 has a notch 9145b recessed from the front end portion toward the rear side of the passage forming unit 9140 in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. Then, the sheet metal member 9150 has a thin plate-like thin plate blade portion 9153 formed by bending a portion extending from the top of the plate-like portion 152 toward the front side in a manner that covers the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a range including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is approximately equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 abuts against the lower surface of the upper stopper protrusion (not shown) that protrudes from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 228) toward the rear side, and is configured to withstand the upward load generated from inside the foul ball passage portion 9145.

This thin blade portion 9153 is a measure against fraudulent practices in which a thread Y8 is threaded through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and the thread Y8 is pulled or loosened to manipulate the balls inside the play area and obtain an unfair advantage, and is disposed for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 threaded through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, possible fraudulent practices will be described.

Returning to FIG. 285, as described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the 25th embodiment is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 attached to the ball. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that uses the momentum of the ball's launch to cut the thread Y8 attached to the ball, but if the momentum of the launch is weak, the ball may be launched without cutting the thread Y8.

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the play area, but flows down to the foul ball receiving port 146, passes through the foul ball passage 145, and is discharged to the lower tray 50. Therefore, there is no risk of this ball directly entering the play area.

On the other hand, if we consider a case where balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises.
8 is weakly shot, and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146.
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the thread Y8 is guided to the launch rail 730, the thread Y8 is positioned on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (the launch solenoid 701 side), so that even if the ball P9 is shot out with force, the thread Y8 will not be cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 320, if the ball P9 is shot with force, it will reach the play area without cutting the string Y8. The ball P8 that was shot in advance passes through the foul ball passage 145, is discharged in front of the player, and is stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 223).

Therefore, a person committing fraud can grab ball P8 stored in lower tray 50 and move ball P8 to pull or loosen thread Y8, thereby enabling ball P9 to be repeatedly passed through winning hole 63 (see Figure 139) or the like, thereby obtaining fraudulent benefits.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when a cheating act is committed using a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, a thin plate blade portion 9153 is disposed in the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes, so that the thread Y8 can be cut early.

That is, when a fraudster pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, damaging the thread Y8 and enabling the thread Y8 to be cut early (see FIG. 317).
By forming notch 9145b closer to the front side, i.e., on the side to which thread Y8 is gathered when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, thread Y8 can be positioned inside notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled, and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

As described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase its resistance to an upward load by abutting against the plate member 14d (see FIG. 228) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. This can prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 when the thread Y8 is pulled. Therefore, most of the load applied from the thread Y8 toward the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the thread Y8.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is set to approximately the radius Ra of the ball P8, so that the ball P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b, and at the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. This makes it possible to prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to a collision with the ball P8, and therefore makes it possible to improve the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 is positioned lower than the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142. In detail, it is positioned with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the ball. This makes it easier for the paid-out ball to damage the thread Y8. That is, since a person committing a fraudulent act is afraid of being discovered, after grabbing the ball P8, in order to prevent the store clerk from suspecting it, it is easy to commit a fraudulent act by keeping the ball P8 close to the body (for example, in a trouser pocket) and pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the thread Y8 is maintained in a state of extending toward the player side along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (in contact with the upper surface). At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched through a position about the diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 223).

In this state, when the prize ball is dispensed, the lower tray 5 is inserted from the lower end of the lower tray passage 9142 on the front door side.
When the ball discharged to the lower tray 50 hits the lower tray 50 and bounces around, it runs over or hits the string Y8 located on the front side of the ball guide opening 53, flows down the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 138) to the right, and flows down through the bottom opening located behind the ball removal lever 52. In other words, by positioning the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 higher than the lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 (by raising the upper limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 is
This can increase the possibility that the balls discharged from 142 to the lower plate 50 will come into contact with the yarn Y8 and cause damage to the yarn Y8, thereby causing the yarn Y8 to be cut early.

And thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a that slopes downward as it approaches the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it easier to give a rightward velocity to the ball that is discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 via the front door side lower tray passage section 9142.

As a result, the ball Y8 is discharged to the lower tray 50 before its momentum (kinetic energy) weakens.
That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly give a velocity component to the right (towards the foul ball passage portion 9145) to the ball discharged along the front-to-rear direction to the lower tray 50, so that the ratio of balls that step on or hit the string Y8 among the balls that are discharged can be increased.

In addition, fourthly, in this embodiment, the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is a ball guide opening 5
On the left side of ball guide opening 53, the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies an area approximately 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53, and on the right side of the ball guide opening 53, the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area (approximately 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53), and at the boundary between the two, a riding-up regulating step portion 9053a is formed.

As shown in Figure 317, the climbing restriction step 9053a is configured as a flat portion extending vertically and connecting the right end portion (right edge) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 and the left end portion (left edge) of the lower bottom portion near the outlet of the foul ball passage portion 9145 arranged to the right of that.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 is connected to the front door side lower tray passage portion 91.
42 is connected to the foul ball passage 9145. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage 9142 can flow down to the right along the space V9 before passing through the ball guide opening 53. This makes it easier for the ball to approach the string Y8.

The vertical width of the climb-up restriction step 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.
This prevents the ball that rolls in the foul ball passage 9145 and comes into contact with the climb-up prevention step 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a. In other words, the climb-up prevention step 9053a functions as a one-way valve that allows the ball to pass left and right in space V9 in one direction (from left to right) and prevents the ball from passing left and right in the other direction (from right to left).

Next, the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 321 to 323. In the 25th embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage 145 closed on all sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. However, the passage forming unit 10140 in the 27th embodiment is configured in such a way that a notch 10145c is formed in the wall portion that forms the foul ball passage 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 protrudes along the notch 10145c. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted. The differences from the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 321 to 323.

Figures 321 to 323 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the 27th embodiment. Figure 321 illustrates the passage forming unit 10140 as viewed from diagonally above right, Figure 322 illustrates the passage forming unit 10140 as viewed from diagonally above left, and Figure 323 illustrates the passage forming unit 10140 as viewed from diagonally below left.

As shown in Figures 321 to 323, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the 25th embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is formed by a notch 10145 recessed from the front end of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the rear end in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2.
The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 that are provided to extend toward the front side in a manner to cover the lower portion of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is approximately equal to twice the radius Ra (diameter) of the ball (see FIG. 317). In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole drilled in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d through which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a, and the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted into the through hole from the back side.

In this embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 228) is provided with an auxiliary protrusion 14d2 that is disposed inside the cutout 10145c and that protrudes from the side surface on the rear side of the plate member 14d toward the rear side with the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the cutout 10145 is formed. The auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is shown by imaginary lines in FIG. 321 and FIG. 322, and is omitted in FIG. 323.

The auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius Ra of the ball (see FIG. 317)), so that the length in the front-rear direction where the thin plate blades 10153 and 10154 are exposed is approximately the radius Ra of the ball P8.
Since it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down 45 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153, 10154, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portions 10153, 10154 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, and it is possible to improve the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153, 10154.

The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the back side as it approaches the foul ball receiving port 146 (to the right). Therefore, the width (front-to-back width) of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 in the cutout 10145c is
5a. As a result, the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is slidably guided by the thin plate blade portion 1
This makes it easier for the nozzle 14d to fit into the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, which is the gap in which the nozzle 14d1 and the nozzle 14d2 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion that protrudes from the rear side edge of the cutout 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a portion that forms a bifurcated blade portion together with the first thin plate blade portion 10153 on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153.
The first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 are provided at the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, and extend leftward in a slightly upwardly inclined manner.
5 is formed.

The thin plate blades 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, similar to the thin plate blade 9153 in the 26th embodiment.

The acute-angled recess 10155 is disposed on the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the rear edge of the notch 10145c. In this way, when the yarn Y8 enters the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2, the yarn Y8 is caused to enter the acute-angled recess 10155, and the yarn Y8 is prevented from entering the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3.
This can make the device more susceptible to damage.

Furthermore, since the second thin plate blade portion 10154, which is arranged on the front side, is positioned higher than the first thin plate blade portion 10153, it is possible for the thread Y8, which is pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person committing fraud, to more easily penetrate deep into the acute-angled recess 10155.

The plate-shaped portion connected to the right of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate portion 10145d.
and is configured to withstand upward loads arising from inside the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extended end of the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end face of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 are arranged to face left and right opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in left and right opposite directions. That is, at these two points, the string Y8 is pulled in left and right opposite directions.

For example, there may be a case in which a person committing a cheating act tries to avoid detection of the cheating act by letting go of the ball P8 that has come to his/her hand and allowing the ball P8 to flow back through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and be discharged through the playing area. However, according to this embodiment, a load is applied in opposite directions to the left and right to the thread Y8 or the ball P8 at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary protrusion portion 14d2, making it easier for the reverse flowing ball P8 to get caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary protrusion portion 14d2 and become stuck there.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are retained inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the thread Y
By prolonging the time that the 8 is exposed to the play area, fraudulent activity can be discovered more quickly.

In addition, a sticky material (glue, glue, etc.) may be provided deep in the acute-angled recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 attached to the ball P8 that has come into the hand of a cheater is cut, the thread is adhered to the sticky material provided in the acute-angled recess 10155, and the ball P9 is not ejected from the play area but is maintained there, so that cheating using the thread Y8 can be discovered sooner.

Next, the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 324 to 327. In the 8th embodiment, a ball (foul ball) that was launched with a weak strength and did not reach the play area is discharged to the lower tray 50, but the tray passage forming member 2160 in the 28th embodiment is equipped with a foul ball receiving port 2164 that receives foul balls. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 324 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the 28th embodiment, and Figure 325 is a partially enlarged front oblique view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in Figures 324 and 325, the outer rail 2062 is arranged in the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is formed from a resin material so as to have an arc shape on the game area side similar to that of the outer rail 62 in the 25th embodiment, and is equipped with a tip member 2062a arranged close to the ball launching unit 112a, and a guide member 2062b formed up to near the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship with the tip member 2062a, with a gap V11 of a width allowing the ball to flow down.

Downstream of the gap V11, a foul ball passage 2062c is formed, which is connected to a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the upper tray passage portion 161 on the main body side.
062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width that allows one ball to pass through, and a spare return ball prevention member 68 is placed above it.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper tray passage section 161 has been moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower tray passage section 162 was arranged in the above embodiment, and the formation of the main body side lower tray passage section 162 has been omitted. In other words, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see Figure 224) arranged on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied to the upper tray 17 exclusively via the main body side upper tray passage section 161. Then, when the balls on the upper tray 17 exceed the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown) arranged downstream of the payout device 133 and protruding inside the ball flow path is turned ON by the load of balls, and the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped.

That is, in this embodiment, both balls that have passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) are supplied to the upper tray 17. Therefore, when considering the fraudulent act of gluing balls to both ends of the thread Y8 and passing one ball through the foul ball passage 2062c to cause the thread Y8 to enter the play area along the foul ball passage 2062c, as described above, it is possible to damage the thread Y8 by hitting the payout ball against it, regardless of the amount of balls accumulated on the upper tray 17. This makes it easier to cut the thread Y8 early.

Figure 326 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In Figure 326, a spare return ball prevention member 68 disposed at the upper part of the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and arranged side by side as a rear perspective view. In addition, in the explanation of Figure 326, Figure 325 will be referred to as appropriate.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 by a long metal screw B11 in a position in which the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is positioned on the front side.

In detail, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back side of the ball return prevention member 68. In the hollow, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed, which is cylindrically protrudes from the back side of the guide member 2062b toward the front side and has an inner wall formed with a screw groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is in face contact with the tip of the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is placed in front of the closing plate 2062b4.
With b1 in contact, a long screw B11 is inserted through a through hole that has been pre-drilled in the base member 68b1 as an attachment hole and through a through hole 2062b5 that has been drilled in the closure plate 2062b4 so as to match the position of the through hole, and in this state the long screw B11 is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, thereby fastening and fixing the return ball prevention member 68 to the guide member 2062b.

The upper and left surfaces of the closing plate 2062b4, which are in contact with the guide member 2062b, are formed to match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface is recessed to a degree that avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side of FIG. 326) is formed to be in contact with the guide member 2062b.
The gradient increasing portion 2062d of the groove 62b is formed as an inclined surface having a gradient similar to that of the inclined portion 2062d of the groove 62b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that gradually decreases toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface that constitutes the outer frame of the play area of the guide member 2062b.
A straight line L11 extended along the surface 2d toward the tip member 2062a intersects with the tip member 2062a below the upper end of the surface (top surface) that constitutes the outer frame of the play area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, about 1/3 below the diameter of the ball).

By configuring in this way, when a ball is shot toward the play area, the gradient increasing unit 20
62d is withdrawn from the path of the ball, and it is possible to prevent the lower tip of the gradient increasing section 2062d from colliding with the ball. On the other hand, when a ball that did not reach the play area flows back, the upper end of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling in the gradient increasing section 2062d, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will pass through the gap V11 to the left and right, pass over the tip member 2062a, and return to the ball launching unit 112a side.

Between the side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d and the closing plate 2062b4,
The slit 206 has a width smaller than the diameter of the ball and allows the thread to enter (about 2 mm in this embodiment).
The notch 2062b1 is formed at a location where the path of the ball hit into the play area intersects with the foul ball passage 2062c at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side as viewed from the front has a side surface 2062d1 on the front side.
A semicircular cutout 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This cutout 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 that is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side as viewed from the front is exposed in the front and rear positions where the notch 2062b1 is formed, so that in the same manner as described above in the 9th or 27th embodiment, when a foul play is committed by passing a thread Y8 with balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8 can rub against the long screw B11.

That is, due to the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, when the thread Y8 receives a load pulling both ends, it is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged deep in the notch 2062b1 (FIG. 327 (
In this state, the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, causing friction with the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be cut early.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is disposed on the front side of the position through which the center of the ball passes. This makes it possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being disposed at a position (vertically below the center of the ball) where the launched ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062, and therefore makes it possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from colliding with the launched ball and affecting the direction of the ball, etc.

Also, a player committing a fraudulent act by threading a thread Y8 with balls P8 and P9 attached to both ends through the foul ball passage 2062c pulls the end of the thread Y8 that projects toward the player (the end to which ball P8 is attached, see FIG. 319) toward the player to adjust the position of ball P9 within the play area, so that the thread Y8 moves closer to the front in the vicinity of gap V11 close to the player. Therefore, by positioning the cut 2062c closer to the front, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the cut 2062c compared to when the cut 2062c is positioned closer to the back.

A button switch SW11 having a detector protruding downward is disposed in a hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b. The button switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with a load that is much weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2. This reduces the possibility that the button switch SW11 will interfere with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button switch SW11 is for detecting the position of the gate member 68a, and when the position of the gate member 68a changes, the switch SW11 is turned on.
The switch is arranged to be switchable between N and OFF.

327(a) and 327(b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 327(a), the weight portion 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is
190(b), the weight of the ball 2 causes the weight portion 68a2 to tilt toward the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190(b), the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the gate member 68a
In the figure, the opening/closing portion 68a1 is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c.
In Figure 327(a), the path of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is shown for reference and the button switch SW11 is shown to be turned ON, while in Figure 327(b), the button switch SW11 is shown to be turned OFF.

As shown in Fig. 327(b), the return ball prevention member 68 only provides a slight resistance to the ball passing through, and does not provide enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. This is because the ball flows away under its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening and closing part 68a1 as shown in Fig. 327(b), once the ball flows away, it immediately returns to the state shown in Fig. 327(a).
This is because the state shown in Figure 327 (a) can be restored by the time the ball is guided to 62c (0.6 seconds later at the earliest).

On the other hand, for objects that do not flow away like a ball, for example, objects that fill the passage as they move forward like an endoscope, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance. This structure is a measure against fraudulent activities.

For example, possible fraudulent acts include moving the tip of an endoscope-like device through the foul ball passage 2062c in the opposite direction to the flow of the ball, reaching the inside of the play area and attempting to interfere with the inside of the play area (for example, bending a nail (not shown) set into the play board 13, grasping the ball and putting it in a winning hole, using the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning hole, or emitting a laser from the tip to cut the nail).

Fig. 328 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that in Fig. 328, the outline of a device such as an endoscope that may be used for illegal entry is shown by imaginary lines.

In this embodiment, when the tip of an endoscope or other device is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in the opposite direction to the flow direction of the ball, the tip is advanced while excluding the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68. Here, when moving from the state shown in Fig. 328 (where the weight portion 68a2 is excluding by the tip of the endoscope) to the state shown in Fig. 327(a), the insertion portion (long soft portion) connected to the tip of the endoscope is still positioned below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a
2 is maintained in the pushed-up state. Therefore, it is difficult to expel the opening/closing portion 68a1, and the distal end of the endoscope can be prevented from advancing any further.

If the endoscope is forcibly advanced and the gate member 68a is broken to enter the inside, it is not possible to prevent unauthorized access. In this case, the button switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state.
By controlling the alarm to sound if switch 1 is kept OFF for a predetermined period of time, fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

In addition, when the button switch SW11 is in the OFF state, the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) may be controlled to stop paying out balls. Even in this case, in normal use, the button switch SW11 is turned OFF only when a foul ball passes (see FIG. 327(b)), and the button switch SW11 is immediately turned ON (see FIG. 327(a)). This makes it possible to minimize the period during which the payout device 133 stops paying out balls, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, the state in which the payout device 133 stops paying out balls can be maintained.

The member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member.
By disposing the return ball prevention member 68 on the side of the game board 13, if the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be replaced early. This has the effect of preventing fraudulent acts from being played even before replacement, compared to the case where a replacement part for the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, and the effect of saving the trouble of searching for the return ball prevention member 68 if the user forgets where it is stored. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the entire configuration of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, a configuration in which the gate member 68a is supported by a fixed shaft rod may be used (the support member 68b may not be provided).

In addition, if the return ball prevention member 68 is broken or bent and needs to be replaced, whether or not it will have the effect of preventing the above-mentioned fraudulent acts will depend on the extent of the damage to the return ball prevention member 68. However, it is difficult for a person committing a fraudulent act to know whether or not the member has been replaced.
Even if the item has been replaced, the extent of the damage cannot be known, thereby still serving as a deterrent to fraudulent activity.

Next, the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 329 to 334. In the 8th embodiment, the petal operation device 800 rotates only in the assembled position or the fully open position, but the petal operation device 2800 in the 29th embodiment is configured in such a way that it can rotate even in the open position. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 329 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the 29th embodiment. As shown in Figure 329, the rear cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880, in comparison with the configuration of the rear cover 886 in the 25th embodiment, is provided with a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end, and a restricting portion 2888 protruding from the extended tip of the flange portion 2887 toward the rear side. The loose fitting device 2880 in this embodiment differs from the loose fitting device 880 in the 25th embodiment only in the rear cover 2886, and is provided with the same parts as the loose fitting device 880 in other parts.

The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a case is described in which a single flange portion 2887 and a single restricting portion 2888 are disposed, but these may be disposed at multiple locations on the rear cover 2886 .
Next, the functions of the flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 will be described with reference to Figures 330 and 331.

330(a) and 330(b) are front views of the petal movement device 2800, and are similar to those of FIG.
330(a) and 331(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. In addition, in Fig. 330 and Fig. 331, an example of the operation of the petal operation device 2800 is illustrated in time series, and Fig. 330(a) and Fig. 331(a), Fig. 330(b) and Fig. 331(b)
) show the states at the same time.

In addition, in FIG. 331(a) and FIG. 331(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for the sake of convenience, and in the same cross section, a pair of screw-in portions 2803 of a flat plate member 2803 are shown.
330, the petals 802 that change position due to the action of the restricting portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 332 and 333).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 331(a), a pair of screw-insertion portions 2803S arranged inside the two side slits 815 have inclined surfaces 2803T on the surfaces facing each other, which are inclined in a manner such that they incline away from the opposing screw-insertion portion 2803S with the screw insertion portion 803H as the center.

The inclined surface 2803T is inclined at an angle of about 30° with respect to the direction in which the sliding member 2820 slides.
The action of the restricting portion 2888 on the petals 802 will now be described.

As shown in Figures 330(a) and 330(b), when the petal 802 is slid (the rotating plate 830 (see Figure 292) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front) in a position in which the regulating portion 2888 is positioned radially outward in the direction in which the front portion 802b of the petal 802 moves, the regulating portion 2888 comes into contact with the front portion 802b of the petal 802, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

When the petal 802 is receiving a load from the regulating portion 2888, if the petal 802 is further slid (the rotating plate 830 (see Figure 292) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 changes its posture to deflect the load.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is changed from the normal position shown in FIG. 331(a) (the longitudinal direction is oriented in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815) to the normal position shown in FIG. 331(b) .
The petals 8 can be tilted toward the slits 815 on both sides.
In 02, posture changes occur whenever possible.

In this way, the sliding member 2820 and the petal 802 change their positions, and the restricting portion 28
While the load from 88 is borne, the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal position shown in FIG. 331(a), the slide member 2820 only has the narrow slide rib 803a in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that frictional resistance is suppressed.
The slide member 2820 is capable of moving smoothly in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815 .

In contrast, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 331(b), the slide member 2820 is in contact with the outer inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides, and the inclined surface 280 is in contact with the inner inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides.
3T are abutted against (pressed against) each other, the frictional resistance increases. In addition, the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed larger than that of the slide rib 803a, so the increase in frictional resistance becomes significant. Note that the inclined surface 2803T is abutted against the inner walls of the both side slits 815 from both directions in the short direction of the both side slits 815, so the increase in frictional resistance occurs regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830.

Therefore, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 331(b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 in the longitudinal direction, the resistance to the movement of the slide member 28
20 reaches the ends of the slits 814 and 815, the slide pin 823
Therefore, the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 293) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 293) (the braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a value between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the normal posture and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the inclined posture).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking force of the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 292). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 330(b),
The petal 802 starts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. This direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 moves away from the restricting portion 2888, so that the load applied to the petal 802 from the restricting portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 332 is a front view of the petal operation device 2800.
293B) shows the state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 293) has continued to rotate in the same direction from the state shown in FIG.

As shown in Fig. 332, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated in the spreading position. At this time, the rear cover 2886 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front) to the rotation direction of the rotation plate 830 (see Fig. 292). In the state shown in Fig. 332, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotation plate 830 (see Fig. 293) is transmitted to the oil damper 805 (
293) and therefore the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the open position.

Fig. 333(a), Fig. 333(b) and Fig. 334 are front views of the petal operation device 2800. Fig. 333(a), Fig. 333(b) and Fig. 334 show the movement of the petals 802 from the spreading position to the gathered position in time series.

In Fig. 333(a), the rotating plate 830 (see Fig. 293) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in Fig. 332 when viewed from the front, and the front portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the restricting portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated in the same direction from this state, as shown in Fig. 333(b),
The restricting portion 2888 pushes the front portion 802b, and the petals 802 and the sliding member 2820 are returned to their normal positions.

Furthermore, when the rotating plate 830 (see Figure 293) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see Figure 293) is greater than the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 by the slide pin 823, so the rotation of the petals 802 stops and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the petals 802 can be rotated in the expanded position and then automatically returned to the assembled position.

Although the case has been described where the petal 802 opens at a position where the front portion 802b of the petal abuts the regulating portion 2888, by rotating the petal 802 by a slight angle (by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise when viewed from the front), it is possible to avoid contact between the front portion 802b and the regulating portion 2888, and therefore it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate it at the fully open position.

The arrangement of the restricting portion 2888 is such that it does not come into contact with the petals 802 at the assembled position or the fully open position, or that it does not come into contact with the petals 802 rotating at the fully open position.
By slightly changing its posture, it is possible for the restricting portion 2888 to slip past the restricting portion 2888 and to be in a position where it can deflect the load, thereby preventing the restricting portion 2888 from interfering with the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

In addition, as shown in this embodiment, by disposing the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by disposing a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802
When the petals 802 open, they can serve as guides for indicating whether they will pass through a position close to the star-shaped pattern or a position farther away, and the difference in perspective can make the difference between whether the petals 802 open to their fullest extent and perform a rotating motion, or only open halfway and perform a rotating motion.

For example, by performing an effect in which the probability of winning varies depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star pattern and the petals 802 can be increased, so that the star pattern can function as a performance part. This allows the regulating unit 2888 to be used as a part of the performance device.

The restricting portion 2888 may be disposed at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 in a front view. In this case, it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the standpoint of design, and therefore the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

In the fully open position, the petals 802 may come into contact with the restricting portion 2888 and change their position slightly, which may be used as a presentation effect (for example, a presentation suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win). In this case, the meaning conveyed to the player can be changed depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating or whether they come into contact with the restricting portion 2888 and rotate while changing their position slightly (fluttering).

In this embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts against the restricting portion 2888 is the tip position.
If the contact position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of spreading when the petals 802 change position changes. Therefore, even if the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the rear cover 2886, the degree of spreading when the petals 802 change position can be changed in multiple ways.

Next, referring to Figures 335 and 336, another example of the 29th embodiment will be described. In the 29th embodiment, a case was described in which the slit member 810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the direction of rotation of the rotating plate 830 in the mid-opening position. However, the slit member 3810 of the petal operation device 3800 in another example of the 29th embodiment is configured to be able to switch between a case in which the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and a case in which the rotating plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the direction of rotation of the rotating plate 830. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

335(a), 335(b), 336(a) and 336(b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. In Fig. 335 and Fig. 336, an example of the operation of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in Fig. 335(a) is illustrated in time series. Also,
In Fig. 335(a), Fig. 335(b), Fig. 336(a) and Fig. 336(b), the rotating plate 83
The arrangement and shape of guide rails 832 of 0 are shown in phantom lines.

When the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 335(a), the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 exceeds the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 by the oil damper 805, and the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate together, as in the 29th embodiment, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted here.

335 and 336, for the sake of convenience, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section, and in the same cross section, a pair of screw-in portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed in cross section.

Here, when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the slide member 2820, which receives a load from the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832, is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 335(a) in accordance with the displacement of the guide rail 832 (see FIG. 335(b)). In this embodiment, additional recesses 3814a, 3815a, 3815b are provided on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that, among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814, the wall portion on the clockwise side as viewed from the front is provided with the central slit 814.
a central recess 3814a recessed in a manner to widen the width of the central slit 814; a clockwise-side recess 3815a recessed in a manner to widen the width of the both-side slits 815 in the short direction of the central slit 814; and a clockwise-side recess 3815b recessed in a manner to widen the width of the both-side slits 815 in the short direction of the central slit 814;
and a counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b recessed in a manner to widen the width of the short side of the pin 5.

In the state shown in FIG. 335(a), the clockwise recessed portion 3815a is
3 and is disposed opposite to slide rib 803a of the third embodiment.

The central recess 3814a is disposed in the state shown in FIG.
From the position where the guide pin 822 is opposed to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (FIG. 19
8(a) below).

The central recess 3814a is deeper than the clockwise recess 3815a and has a longer radial length than the clockwise recess 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 335(a), the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is
From the position where the inclined surface 2803T of the slit member 3810 is opposed to the inclined surface 2803T of the
335(a) (lower side).

The counterclockwise side recess 3815b is deeper than the clockwise side recess 3815a and has a longer radial length than the central recess 3814a.

The operation of the petal operation device 3800 configured as described above when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described.
starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat member 2803 move in the lower right direction of Figure 198 (a) (in the direction in which the right end slide rib 803a enters the clockwise side recess 3815a) (see Figure 335 (b)).

As a result, the contact between the wall portions of the both side slits 815 on the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front and the flat plate member 2803 is released, and the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front, with the abutting portion between the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the portion that first abuts between the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810) as a fulcrum (FIG. 336(a) and FIG. 336(b)).
)reference).

In addition, since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b are deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a, the above-mentioned slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 28
During rotation of the guide pin 822 and the central recessed portion 3814a, and the screw-in portion 280
Contact between 3S and the counterclockwise side recess 3815b is avoided.

Furthermore, during the above-mentioned rotation, the slide member 2820 and the flat member 2803 are recessed in a clockwise side recess 3815a with a recess depth sufficient to prevent the rotating tip portion (the left side portion in Figures 335 and 336) from abutting against the central slit 814 and both side slits 815.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 falls below the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 no longer rotate together.

As shown in Fig. 336(b), in the process of reaching a position where the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 is perpendicular to the direction connecting the pair of screw-in portions 2803S (the longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803), the slide rib 803a on the radial center side housed in the clockwise side slits 815 as viewed from the front abuts against the wall of the both side slits 815, causing the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front with the abutting portion as a fulcrum.
However, it moves counterclockwise in a front view from the recessed base end of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (FIG. 331
Therefore, by continuing to rotate the rotating plate 830 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, it is possible to move the slide member 2820 and the flat member 2803 toward the center in the radial direction.

Therefore, according to another example of the 29th embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 335(a) is reached, by changing the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830, it is possible to switch between a case in which the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830, and a case in which the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the position of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

This allows the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 (see FIG. 330(a)) fastened to the flat plate member 2803 to perform operations that were not possible in the 29th embodiment.

In other words, in the 29th embodiment, after the posture of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 changes during the opening operation caused by rotating the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 331(b)), a rotational movement (a rotational movement that rotates together with the slit member 3810) of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 330(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 occurs during the restoration of the changed posture (see FIG. 332, FIG. 333(a) and FIG. 333(b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the 29th embodiment, after the posture of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 changes during the spreading operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 335(a)), the posture of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned to their original position by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 336(b)). In other words, the rotational movement of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 330(a)) (the rotational movement that rotates together with the slit member 3810) until the changed posture is restored can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the 29th embodiment, after the posture of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 changes during the opening operation caused by rotating the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see Figure 335 (a)), the rotating plate 830 can be rotated clockwise as viewed from the front from any state (phase or posture), so that the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can start moving from the position of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 that matches the any state (phase or posture) toward the assembly position. This allows the arrangement of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened to the flat plate member 2803 to be diversified when they rotate (see FIG. 332) while spreading out (see FIG. 335(a)) and then assemble toward the assembly position (see FIG. 334), thereby diversifying the operation of the petal operation device 3800.

Next, the 30th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 337 to 340. In the first embodiment, the curved surface constituting the front side of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate without any openings. However, the operating device 8300 in the 30th embodiment is configured in such a manner that a plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 337, 338, 339(a) and 339(b) are front perspective views of the operating device 8300 in the 30th embodiment. Note that Figures 337 and 339(a) show the second state of the tilting device 310, Figure 338 shows the first state of the tilting device 310, and Figure 339(b) shows the state in which the tilting device 310 is in the process of changing from the first state to the second state.

As shown in Figures 337 and 338, in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-mentioned embodiments, the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 of the operation device 8300 in this embodiment has not been explained, but the other configurations have been almost entirely explained in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-mentioned embodiments. Therefore, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be explained below, and only a brief supplementary explanation will be given of the other configurations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion arranged opposite the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-to-rear direction, and mainly comprises a first through hole 8326a drilled in an approximately egg-shaped shape at the central position on the left and right, a pair of second through holes 8326b drilled on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, which are perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and have a horizontally elongated rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and which connect the upper surface and lower side of the bottom plate portion 321 at the surface position, and a pair of third through holes 8326c drilled at the left and right corners, which have a vertically elongated rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front.

Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c has the purpose of facilitating the passage of liquids such as the drinking water downward and facilitating the removal of a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. A coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted, for example, by a player who finds the operation of the tilting device 300 to be a nuisance in order to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or by a curious player who purposelessly inserts the coin-shaped foreign object between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 33.
0.

Here, since the operating device 8300 is equipped with a tilting device 310 that is configured to be operable, slight gaps V13, V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310.
By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smoother, but the gap V13
, there is a high possibility that a foreign object will be inserted into V14.

In particular, in this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 151(b)) located at the rear end; in other words, the position where it is supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end, so the longer the front-to-rear length of the tilting device 310 is, the more likely it is to shift (deform) left and right near the front end. Note that this shift (deformation) includes, for example, shifts that take advantage of the rattle that occurs when design errors built into components from the design stage are added together, and shifts (deformations) that occur when each component is slightly deformed.

Therefore, during normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides is
However, even if the gap V13 is designed not to be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (e.g., a 1 yen coin), when the tilting device 310 is displaced to one side (e.g., the left side), the gap V13 that is generated on the other side (e.g., the right side) is larger than the gap V13 generated by the tilting device 310 during normal use.
The gap V1 is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 and the left and right sides of the
3, which may be large enough to allow a coin-shaped foreign object to be inserted.

In other words, if the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides during normal use is not set to less than half the thickness of a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1 yen coin), a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted if the tilting device 310 is misaligned to the left or right.

In addition, the gap V14 in the front-to-rear direction between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 can be easily enlarged by applying a load toward the rear side of the tilting device 310, causing it to shift (deform), by utilizing the play near the ring member BR1 (see Figure 151 (b)) of the tilting device 310. This allows a coin-shaped foreign object to be inserted into this gap V14 as well.

In this embodiment, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is
Alternatively, if a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted in the front-to-rear gap V14 and the tilting device 310 performs a tilting operation, the coin-shaped foreign object may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in Figures 339(a) and 339(b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured in a shape that narrows inwardly to the left and right toward the top and bottom center, it fits the player's fingers more easily and creates a good feel for operation, while in the second state (see Figure 339(a)), a coin-shaped foreign object stuck in the gap V13 in the second state (see Figure 339(a)) is subjected to a downward load from the part of the case main body 311 that protrudes outward from above the narrowing, making it more likely to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause problems in driving the tilting device 310. In addition, friction between the coin-shaped foreign object and the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate the translucency of the protective lens member 311i, which may cause problems in the light emission performance.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, it becomes impossible to execute the intended performance with the operation device 8300.
If it is discovered that a coin-shaped foreign object has been inserted into V14, it is desirable to remove it immediately, but if no through hole is formed in the lower frame member 320, it was necessary to disassemble the operating device 300 to remove the coin-shaped foreign object.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, since through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove coin-shaped foreign objects through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shapes and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described below.

FIG. 340(a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 340(b) is a front view of the operation device 8300 shown in FIG.
3(a) is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG.
FIG. 340(c) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 340(d) is a bottom view of FIG.
8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 taken along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG.
Figure 340(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 taken along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in Figure 340(a).

The first through hole 8326a has the same left-right center as the left-right center of the vibration device 5400, and is drilled with a left-right width greater than the left-right width of the vibration device 5400 (first storage section 5431 of the vibration device 5400, see FIG. 195). Therefore, even if liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left-right center position of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibration device 5400, so that the liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is positioned below the upper surface of the extension portion 311h (see FIG. 149) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, if a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gap V14 is placed on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h, the coin-shaped foreign object can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a along the slope of the upper surface of the extension portion 311h (slope D81 that slopes downward toward the center in the first state of the tilting device 310 due to the fact that it is curved toward the left and right when viewed in the up-down direction in the second state, and slope D82 that slopes downward toward the front side due to the tilting device 310 being tilted, see FIG. 338).

This makes it easy to remove coin-shaped foreign objects while keeping the size of the first through-hole 8326a to a minimum, thereby maintaining the design freedom of the lower frame member 8320. For example, compared to a case where the first through-hole 8326a needs to be greatly expanded in both the left and right directions, it is easier to ensure the strength of the lower frame member 8320.

In this embodiment, the size of the first through-hole 8326a is set so that the portion above the top surface of the extension portion 311h (see FIG. 149) of the tilting device 310 in the first state is equal to or larger than the size of an object assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object. That is, in this embodiment, the portion above the top surface of the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a left-right width and a top-down width of approximately 30 mm.

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 152) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In this embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 that are connected to the left and right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished (mirror-finished members are fixed) in this embodiment, thereby reflecting light that has passed through the spherical shell portion 313.

This arrangement allows the first through-hole 8326a to be used to create a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see Figure 152) and is visible to the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and in particular, the first through-hole 8326a allows the central portion in the left-right direction to be viewed brightly by removing the resin member that weakens the amount of light.

When the coin-shaped foreign object is positioned so as to partially block the first through-hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 152) and is visible to the player is weaker than when there is no coin-shaped foreign object (the coin-shaped foreign object casts a shadow). In other words, the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign object can be used as clues to make it easier to notice that a coin-shaped foreign object remains in the lower frame member 8320, so the coin-shaped foreign object can be easily seen by the player without being noticed.
This effect can be achieved by reducing the possibility that the voltage Vcc remains at 0.
This is not limited to the case where the image is viewed through 6a, but also applies when viewed through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is a hole for allowing a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen onto the bottom plate portion 321 to pass through the bottom plate portion 32
Therefore, in this embodiment, the second through hole 8326 is formed to have a width of about 30 mm in the left-right direction and a width of about 2 mm in the normal direction of the bottom plate portion 321 so that the largest possible coin-shaped foreign object (e.g., a 500 yen coin) can be discharged.

Since the second through hole 8326b is positioned near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, the coin-shaped foreign object can be easily removed even after it has slid downward along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, the second through hole 8326b can be used, for example, to discharge liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 to the outside before it reaches the vibration device 5400.

The third through-hole 8326c has a central axis disposed along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (FIG. 20
3(a)), the coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 is formed as a through hole through which the coin-shaped foreign object can be removed while remaining in an upright position (attitude).

In other words, the longitudinal length of the third through hole 8326c needs to be formed to a size that allows coin-shaped foreign objects to be expelled when viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321.In this embodiment, the longitudinal length of the third through hole 8326c is approximately 30 mm when viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the left-right width is approximately 2 mm.

When removing a coin-shaped foreign object, the worker can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the covering cover 370 and exposing the operating device 8300 in a front view (see FIG. 229). The covering cover 370 is fastened to the front frame 14 by a screw inserted in the front-rear direction at the fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 228) of the curved main body portion 371, and fastened to the bottom plate in which the recessed portion 15a is formed by a screw inserted in the up-down direction at the hanging portion 372. Therefore, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screw with the front frame 14 open (see FIG. 226). This allows the work time to be kept short.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, coin-shaped foreign objects that have entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operating device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that opens outward to the right at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 340(b)). In each of the embodiments described above, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operating device 8300 to transmit and receive signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 141).

Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the coin-shaped foreign object cannot be removed, the operation device 8300 can be easily removed from the front frame 14 by removing the screws fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. Therefore, if a replacement operation device 8300 that is normal is prepared, the operation device 8300 with the coin-shaped foreign object caught therein can be quickly replaced with the normal operation device 8300.

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object becomes lodged in the operating device 8300, preventing normal operation and causing the operation of the pachinko machine 10 to be stopped, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly resumed.

Next, the 31st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 341. In the 25th embodiment, a case was described in which the board surface support device 600 does not receive load from the front frame 14 when it is in a fixed state, but the board surface support device 600 in the 31st embodiment is arranged in such a way that, in a fixed state, it receives load from the front frame 14 via a front-rear displacement member 2652 that is arranged so as to be able to abut against the front frame 14. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 341(a) and 341(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the 31st embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 223. Note that Figure 341(a) illustrates a state in which the front frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and Figure 341(b) illustrates a state in which the front frame 14 is closed relative to the inner frame 12. Also, the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified and shown by imaginary lines in Figure 341(a), and the shapes of the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 are simplified and shown by imaginary lines in Figure 341(b).

341(a) and 341(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment is different from the eighth embodiment in that it includes a load transmission device 2650. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is arranged to be vertically displaceable on the front side of a plate portion (a plate portion arranged on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12, and a vertical displacement member 2651
and a locking portion 2653 that protrudes downward from the front-rear displacement member 2652.
a support portion 2654 fixed to the plate portion 611 a, which is a portion that sandwiches the front and rear displacement member 52 from above and below so as to be displaceable at two positions, the front and rear, and a biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that abuts against the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653 and applies a biasing force to the front-rear displacement member 2652 toward the front side;
Equipped with.

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state of contact with the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state of separation. That is, in the lower position shown in Fig. 341 (a), it is retracted from the torsion spring NBb, and in the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in Fig. 341 (b), it is in contact with the torsion spring NBb, deforming the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 341 (a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is set at a position where there is a slight gap between the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb in the lower position.

The front-to-rear displacement member 2652 is configured to be displaceable between a forward position (see FIG. 341 (a)) in which it is pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655, and a rear position (see FIG. 341 (b)) in which it is pushed rearward by the front frame 14.

Here, an inclined surface 2652a that is inclined downwards toward the tip side is formed on the rear tip of the front-rear displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a is inclined downwards from a vertically lower position of the up-down displacement member 2651 when the front-rear displacement member 2652 is disposed at the front position.
52 is disposed at the rear position, the inclined surface is continuously connected to a position vertically below the vertical displacement member 2651.

The inclined surface 2652a is disposed at the front position of the front-rear displacement member 2652.
The inclination angle and the formation range are set so that at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652, the up-down displacement member 2651 is in the upper position.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the up-down displacement member 2651 is positioned in an upper position, and the torsion spring NBb can be deformed to the side where the load is increased by an amount equivalent to its front-to-rear thickness.

This allows the load applied from the rear side of the game board 13 by the rear-rotation claw member 640 to be increased, making it easier to maintain the game board 13 in contact with the hanging rear plate portion 621d of the front-rotation claw member 620, and making it easier to determine the distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the rear of the front frame 14 (the rear of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14).
It is possible to easily define the thickness of the play area, and to stabilize the flow of the balls.

The specifications required for the board support device 600 in the 25th embodiment and the board support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, and are to fix the game board 13. When fixing the game board 13, the board support device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side with the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and fixes it by pressing it against the hanging back panel portion 621d.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, so a spring with a lower elastic modulus can be used for the torsion spring NBb compared to the spring used in the 25th embodiment.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the worker from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, and the force required to fix the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, so that the worker's freedom of choice and
Workability can be improved.

Next, the 32nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 342. In the 25th embodiment, in order to prevent fraudulent activity from penetrating the inside of the device by melting the inverted cup portion 178 with a heated piano wire, harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid above the inverted cup portion 178, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are detected as being burned by the heated piano wire, thereby achieving early detection of fraud. However, the fraud detection device 2280 in the 32nd embodiment is configured to detect the heat when the inverted cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire, and to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being burned.

Fig. 342(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the 32nd embodiment, and Fig. 342(b) and Fig. 342(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that Fig. 342(b) illustrates a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a contracted shape, and Fig. 205(c) illustrates a state in which it has returned to a tensile shape (memorized shape) by application of heat. Also, Fig. 342(b) and Fig. 342(c) show a cross-sectional view of the fraud detection device 2280 at the midpoint between the front and rear of the main body box portion 2281.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape with an opening on the back side and the bottom side, and has an inverted cup part 2
178, and a rear cover member 2282 attached from the rear side so as to cover the rear opening of the main body box portion 2281.
A space is formed between the rear cover member 2282 and the rear cover member 2282 .

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, and an inverted cup portion 217 is provided extending from the lower right corner.
a narrowed portion 2284 extending from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner; a protruding portion 2285 protruding upward from the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowed portion 2284; a first conductive portion 2286 accommodated in a recess recessed from the rear side in the left wall portion of the main body box portion 2281, one end protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281;
a second conductive portion 2287 which is accommodated in a recess formed in a right side wall portion of the housing 1 from the rear side, has one end protruding to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and is formed with a length capable of contacting an upper surface of the first conductive portion 2286; and a torsion spring SP15 which generates a biasing force pressing the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286.
The shape memory spring 2288 is disposed on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284 , supported by the protruding portion 2285 , and below the second conductive portion 2287 .

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. The first conductive part 2286 and the second conductive part 2287 are connected by a method such as soldering to the part protruding outward from the main body box part 2281, and the other end of the wiring is connected to the main control device 110 (see FIG. 141). The first conductive part 2286 and the second conductive part 2287 are in contact and conductive (see FIG. 342(b)), and when the contact between the first conductive part 2286 and the second conductive part 2287 is released (see FIG. 342(c)), the continuity is interrupted, and the device is controlled to output an error signal using the interruption of continuity as an input.

When an error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see Figure 257) and the payout device 133 (see Figure 224) is stopped from paying out balls, making it impossible to continue playing the game.

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will now be described. As shown in Fig. 342(a) to Fig. 342(c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left and upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in this embodiment, the formation location of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left compared to the 25th embodiment, and a gap capable of accommodating the extension portion 2283 is generated between the long cover member 173.

By having the extension portion 2283 fill the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of a heated piano wire, the piano wire can be prevented from penetrating through the long cover 173.

According to this configuration, the piano wire enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and continues onward, being guided to the narrowed portion 2284 and then to the shape memory spring 2288 that is arranged in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284.

The shape memory spring 2288 is made of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining a deformed shape at low temperatures and returning to a previously memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher.
The transformation temperature is set to a temperature (approximately 80°) that is approximately the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see Figure 342 (c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, pushing up the second conductive part 2287, disconnecting the first conductive part 2286 from the second conductive part 2287, and outputting an error signal. Therefore, early detection of fraudulent activity is possible.

The extension part 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a that is vertically elongated and drilled in the front-rear direction in the rear cover member 2282, and protrudes to the front side. When the shape memory spring 2288 is in a tensioned state and returns to a low temperature state, the operator can deform the shape memory spring 2288 by pushing the extension part 2288a downward, and return it to the contracted state (see FIG. 342(b)). In other words, even after fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be used repeatedly to facilitate early detection of fraudulent activity.

Next, the 33rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 343. In the 25th embodiment, the light guide member 540 has a uniform shape in the recessed portion, but the light guide member 540 is curved to cause a difference in the direction of travel of light emitted to both sides. However, the right panel unit 2500 in the 33rd embodiment has recessed portions with different shapes in each region. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 343(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the 33rd embodiment, Figure 343(b) is a partial enlarged perspective view of the light guiding member 2540, which shows a schematic representation of the upward recessed portion 2543b recessed in the light guiding member 2540 in the region CCVIb in Figure 343(a), and Figure 343(c) is a schematic representation of the downward recessed portion 2543c recessed in the light guiding member 2540 in the region CCVIc in Figure 343(a). FIG. 343(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guiding member 2540, which is a schematic representation of the downward recessed portion 2543d recessed in the light guiding member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 343(a), and FIG. 343(e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guiding member 2540, which is a schematic representation of the upward recessed portion 2543e recessed in the light guiding member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 343(a). Note that the support plate portion 510 is omitted from FIG. 343(a).

As shown in FIG. 343(a), the light-guiding member 2540 is formed in a plate shape that extends straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically in a straight line to match the shape of the light-guiding member 2540.

Concave portions are formed on both sides of the light-guiding member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the 25th embodiment, but in this embodiment, the shape of the concave portions 2543 is changed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530.

That is, with the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, there is a region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, and a region CCVI arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side.
The shape of concave portion 2543 is different between region CCVId arranged below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in Fig. 343(b), in the region CCVIb, an upwardly facing concave portion 2543b is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into eighths. The upwardly facing concave portion 2543b has flat surfaces on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see Fig. 244) is arranged) and curved surfaces on the upper side and the back side, forming the convex portion used for hot pressing.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the light incident on the upward concave portion 2 is unlikely to be reflected in the left-right direction.
543b refracts light mainly at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

As shown in Fig. 343(c), in the region CCVIc, a downwardly facing concave portion 2543c is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into eighths. The downwardly facing concave portion 2543c has flat surfaces on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see Fig. 244) is arranged) and curved surfaces on the lower side and the back side, and the convex portion used for hot pressing is formed in such an orientation.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
The light incident on the downward concave portion 2 is unlikely to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position.
543c refracts light mainly at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

As shown in Fig. 343(d) , in the region CCVId, a downwardly facing concave portion 2543d is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into eighths. The downwardly facing concave portion 2543d is formed in such a manner that flat surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see Fig. 244) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side, and the convex portion used for hot pressing is formed in this position.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
The light incident on the downward concave portion 2 is unlikely to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position.
543d refracts light mainly at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

As shown in Fig. 343(e) , in the region CCVIe, an upwardly facing concave portion 2543e is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into eighths. The upwardly facing concave portion 2543e is formed in such a manner that flat surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see Fig. 244) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side, and the convex portion used for hot pressing is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the light incident on the upward concave portion 2 is unlikely to be reflected in the left-right direction.
543e refracts light mainly at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

The concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the area facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 are formed in the same shape as in the 25th embodiment (a cone shape with an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of approximately 1 mm). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is only weakly refracted vertically and travels in an almost horizontal direction.

According to this embodiment, the above-mentioned configuration allows light to travel in a direction that converges it toward the inner lens member 530 side, and in a direction that diverges it toward the outer lens member 550 side, as shown in Fig. 343(a). That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in a flat plate shape, it is possible to provide a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540.
The effect of the light emission can be improved while suppressing the left and right width of 0.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above form in any way, and it can be easily inferred that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope that does not deviate from the spirit of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or substituted for a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above 18th embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tilting device 310 may be in the initial position in a state where it hangs down downward, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force that returns the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, making the torsion spring 315 unnecessary.

In the above 18th embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilt device 310 has moved to the end of its depression, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilt device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to press the tilt device 310 from the first state can be increased, and this change in load can be used for effects (for example, an effect of a "button that cannot be pressed" can be produced).

In this case, it is preferable to arrange the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320 in such a dimensional relationship that a slight gap is created between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320 even when the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of its motion (end of the extending motion). This makes it possible to suppress the impact sound of the voice coil motor 352 colliding with the lower frame member 320 during operation of the voice coil motor 352. This makes it possible to prevent the player from realizing that the voice coil motor 352 has already extended out, and makes it possible for the player to realize that the button is in the "button cannot be pressed in" state only after the tilting device 310 is pressed in.

In the above 18th embodiment, the engaging rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are fixed relative to each other, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be made of a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connecting pin 344d when the first protrusion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact can be changed, so that the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed immediately after the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state to change the attitude of the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, more operating states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 can be formed than in the 18th embodiment.

In addition, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be switched sequentially (the ascent end can be switched sequentially) by the driving mode that continues to rotate the disk cam 344 in the forward rotation direction. This makes it possible to perform a complex operation mode in which the ascent position of the tilting device 310 is switched sequentially while suppressing deterioration of the drive motor 342 by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

In the above twentieth embodiment, the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operating speed and the direction of the tilting device 310, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotates and drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed and the direction of the tilting device 310. For example, the drive motor 5411 may be fixed in a position in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (while the tilting device 310 is moving downward), and the rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started just before the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end and starts moving upward. In this case, the repulsive force that pushes back the tilting device 310 can be reduced during pushing when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, while the repulsive force that pushes back the tilting device 310 can be increased at the start of the upward movement of the tilting device 310.

In the above 22nd embodiment, the case where the storage member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibration device 5400 may be operated inside it. When the storage member 5430 is fixed to the tilting device 310, for example, the protruding leg portion 5424 may be arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321, and when the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower end of the push-in, the protruding leg portion 5424 may be pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, thereby changing the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400 and switching whether or not the weight member 5412 can abut against the storage member 5430.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the storage member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, a change in shape of the flexible member 5420 occurs. Since the degree of change in shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 can be increased by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher, and a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts against the storage member 5430 can be formed. In other words, the player can feel vibration not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in to the end but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, so that the variety of effects for making the player operate the tilting device 310 can be increased.

For example, when the player is to operate the tilting device 310, the third symbol display device 81 displays "Press the button.", but by adding a display such as "Press the button. Press it quickly, and if you feel a vibration, it's your big chance," it is possible to specify how the player should press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in the specified way is set as the condition for transmitting vibration to the player.
This can increase the player's motivation to operate the button (tilt device 310) in the specified pressing manner, and can prevent the operation of the button (tilt device 310) from becoming monotonous.

The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be inverse to the magnitude relationship with the degree of the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. In other words, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the containing member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, a slow pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be set as a condition for transmitting vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 to the player, and the player can be recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310.
This makes it possible to restrain the player from operating the tilting device 310 by pushing it with excessive force, and to prevent malfunctions caused by pushing the tilting device 310 with excessive force.

In the above 22nd embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilt device 310 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the weight member 5412 of the vibration device 5400 may be arranged so that it can abut against the storage member 5430 when the tilt device 310 is not pushed in, while the weight member 5412 may be arranged so that it cannot abut against the storage member 5430 on the condition that the tilt device 310 is pushed to the end of its movement. In this case, the vibration can be transmitted to the player when the tilt device 310 is not being operated, making the performance lively, while the vibration can be stopped when the tilt device 310 is pushed in, making it difficult for others to notice, allowing the player to recognize the change in the performance mode (difference in expectation), so that a sense of premium can be created in which only the player playing this machine can feel the change in the performance mode, except for players around him/her.

As a variation of the presentation, the player may push the tilting device 310 to place the weight member 5412 and the storage member 5430 in a position where they cannot come into contact with each other, or the weight member 5412 may be placed in a position where they cannot come into contact with each other.
It is desirable to generate both a case where the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are in a position where they can be in continuous contact with each other, and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, the two different cases can be generated by changing the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the above 22nd embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is deformed by axial inclination, and the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other to generate frictional force has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is drilled may be configured to partially protrude in a direction approaching the disc cam 5344, and to come into contact when the disc cam 5344 is deformed by axial inclination. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a moving part, it is possible to ensure a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344, compared to the case where the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 come into contact with each other. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the above 25th embodiment, a case was described in which both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut against the front frame 14, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one of the top and bottom board surface support devices 600 may be configured to be able to abut against the front frame 14. For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multi-function cover member 171 that interferes with the board surface support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not abut against the board surface support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the above 25th embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom 12c supporting the lower end surface of the game board 13 may be configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side, and the front end may be configured to be positioned lower than the upper surface of the back side extension plate 621c of the board support device 600 in the released state. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and from there, in the process of fixing the board support device 600, the game board 13 can be made to ride up onto the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed, so that the efficiency of the work of fixing the game board 13 can be improved.

In the above 25th embodiment, the foul ball passage 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent forward and backward, or a combination of forward, backward, left and right bends. In this case, it is preferable to form a long path in the front and back directions directly behind the ball guide opening 53, as this allows the ball to be discharged smoothly. In addition, by making the path bend forward and backward, the range of the foul ball passage 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, making it easier to prevent interference between the launch path and the foul ball passage 145.

In the above 25th embodiment, a case was described in which the light-guiding member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 is concave, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be convex. In this case, the light that reaches the player through the opening 524 is perceived as faint. In addition, the light-guiding member 540 does not need to be curved from top to bottom; for example, curved parts and straight parts may be mixed at the top and bottom.

In the above 25th embodiment, the passage forming ribs 467, 487 are used to form a path that bends up and down, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the path may bend left and right, or a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the above twenty-fifth embodiment, the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts against the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi may be configured to be spaced apart by approximately the diameter of the speaker connection wire 453 in the thickness direction of the rear sidewall portion 461H. In this case, the speaker connection wire 453 can be sandwiched and held between the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi, and the resistance of this clamping can prevent the speaker connection wire 453 from coming off the speaker 451 even if a load is applied to the speaker connection wire 453 in a direction that pulls it outward from the speaker assembly 450.

Also, the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha may be configured so that, within a range of protruding length corresponding to the recess depth of the wiring passing recess 464, it abuts against the inner surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the rear side wall 461H, while within a range of protruding length greater than this, it has a step midway so as to be separated from the inner surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the rear side wall 461H by approximately the diameter of the speaker connection wire 453. In this case, a sufficient range is secured in which the rear side wall 461H and the front side wall 481H form a double wall, and the speaker connection wire 453 can be clamped while suppressing sound leakage.

In the above 25th embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is described as constituting a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T correspond to a speaker room, and the middle body portion 461M corresponds to a duct, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front-to-rear width of the middle body portion 461M may be expanded to be the same as that of the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T, so that the base end side body portion 461B, the middle body portion 461M, and the tip end side body portion 461T together form a large speaker room.

In addition, while the base end main body portion 461B has been described as having a larger volume than the tip end main body portion 461T, the size relationship may be reversed, or they may be configured with similar volumes. The placement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left or right end, but may be in the center in the left-right direction, or in a position between the left or right end and the center in the left-right direction.

In the above-mentioned 25th embodiment, the case where the adjacent rib portions 467a to 467e, 487a to 487e constituting the passage-forming ribs 467, 487 do not overlap when viewed in the left-right direction (the direction connecting the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip side main body portion 461T, the direction intersecting the opening direction of the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491) is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the adjacent rib portions (for example, the rib portion 467d and the rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze-like shape, for example, it is difficult to insert a thin metal wire such as a piano wire through the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 and have the tip of the wire invade the play area, and the time required for the fraudulent act is extended, thereby suppressing the fraudulent act. In addition, examples of preventing fraudulent activities include preventing the fraudulent activities themselves and preventing fraudulent gains (successful fraud).

In the above 25th embodiment, the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is linked to the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotating plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be linked, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operation device 800, but also during the spreading operation and the gathering operation. This allows the radial sliding operation of the petals 802 and the rotation operation of the decorative member 884 to be performed simultaneously, improving the presentation effect.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the loose fitting device 880 may be configured to expand and contract with the rotation of the rotating plate 830, or may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the axis of rotation of the rotating plate 830.

In the above 25th embodiment, the second performance member 940 operates by transmitting a driving force via the slide plate 930 that slides due to the operation of the drive side arm member 910, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper part of the support base material 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip of the second performance member 940 may be connected so that the second performance member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the above 25th embodiment, when the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening and closing restricting portion 159. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 may be configured to abut in the front-rear direction above the opening and closing restricting portion 159. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (the right side of the game board 13 is tilted to the front side), and the part of the game board 13 arranged opposite the operation unit back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 can interfere with each other. This makes it possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed against the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed in the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device 600 arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 is fixed.
Whether or not the board support device 600 is in a fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155, which is arranged opposite the lower board support device 600, and the game board 13, and if the board support device 600 arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 is not in a fixed state, the front frame 14 can be restricted from closing against the inner frame 12. This allows the function of determining the state of the board support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 to be removed from the multi-function cover member 171, thereby improving the design freedom of the multi-function cover member 171. For example, the multi-function cover member 171 can be recessed to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600 (
In this case, the multi-function cover member 171 made of synthetic resin may collide with the metallic board surface support device 600, so that the multi-function cover member 171
Since the risk of damage to the multi-functional cover member 171 can be reduced, the multi-functional cover member 171 can be used for other purposes (for example, as a wiring cover) for a long period of time.

In the above 25th embodiment, the right panel unit 500, in which the light irradiated to the end face of the light-guiding member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light-guiding member 540, is arranged at the right end of the front frame 14 and on the front side, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, by configuring the right panel unit 500 to be switchable between a state in which one side of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and a state in which the other side is arranged on the front side (for example, by configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate around an axis parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510), the form of light irradiated to the center frame 86 can be switched. In addition, by switching the correspondence between the form of light irradiated to the center frame 86 and the moving prop that protrudes inward from the center frame 86, the performance can be diversified.

That is, for example, it is considered that only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the multiple openings 524 are illuminated, and the right panel unit 500 is switched between a state in which one surface is disposed on the front side and a state in which the other surface is disposed on the front side.
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving props, the moving props arranged opposite the part corresponding to the top opening 524 (the part near the edge) emit light, whereas when the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving props, the moving props arranged opposite over a wide area of the opening 565 (a wider area than the top opening 524) emit light. Therefore, the light-emitting part of the moving props can be switched by switching the position of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to be illuminated.

In this case, for example, the performance effect can be improved by operating the moving prop in accordance with the timing of the change in the light-emitting location. For example, the moving prop may be configured to contract and expand so that it fits into the location corresponding to the top opening 524 when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving prop, while expanding (stretching) in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500 when the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving prop. This makes it possible to change the location of the light-emitting location according to the movement of the moving prop by switching the position of the right panel unit 500 without the need to switch the LED 512a that controls the light emission.

In addition, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is concentrated (brightness is increased, the amount of light is large, and the light is clear), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is diffused (brightness is decreased, the amount of light is small, and the light is faint). Therefore, by switching the position of the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the light-emitting object (liquid crystal or moving object) can be easily changed.
The light emission mode can be changed.

Furthermore, by changing the orientation of the right panel unit 500 so that the front end 551 a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving props or liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is placed in front of the moving props or liquid crystal, the front end 551 a of the outer lens member 550 is placed on the rear side of the support plate portion 510), a beam-like (
While emitting light from a narrow beam (narrow width), it can emit light over a wide area in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving props and liquid crystal. This allows only the details of the moving props and liquid crystal to be illuminated, while illuminating a wide area away from the moving props and liquid crystal.

In the above 26th and 27th embodiments, the case where the string Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150, 10150 arranged in the foul ball passages 9145, 10145 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member may be configured to be weak enough that it partially breaks under the load from the string Y8 and the broken part falls, and a detection sensor may be arranged at a position through which the broken part passes when it falls. In this case, by issuing an alarm and forcibly stopping the shooting of balls due to the detection of the sheet metal member by the detection sensor, it is possible to detect cheating early and minimize the profits gained by the cheater through cheating (losses suffered by the gaming hall).

In the above twenty-ninth embodiment, the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve frictional force may be added. For example, frictional force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or spike-shaped hard members (members harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be arranged to bite into the resin slit member 810, thereby improving the operating resistance.

In addition, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the wall portions of the side slits 815 arranged opposite the inclined surface 2803T are
A recess may be formed to an extent that the inclined surface 2803T can fit in. In this case, the inclined surface 2803T can fit in the recess, thereby improving the operating resistance.

In the above thirty-third embodiment, a case was described in which the shape of the concave portions 2543 formed in each region of the light-guiding member 2540 was changed to change the direction of travel of light to a direction that gathers light or a direction that spreads light, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b, 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the direction of travel of light emitted from both sides of the light-guiding member 2540 is an upwardly inclined direction in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe, making it easier to direct the light toward the eye level of people walking by to choose a machine to play. This can improve the customer attraction effect of the pachinko machine 8010.

In addition, for example, the regions CCVIc and CCVIc are regions that emit light to the inner lens member 530.
A downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in the area CCVIb, CCVId, which is an area for emitting light to the outer lens member 550, and an upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in the area CCVIb, CCVId, which is an area for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko 8010 and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is in a direction that is inclined upward, so that the light can be easily made to travel toward the eye level of a person walking to select a machine to play, while the light traveling toward the player and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is in a direction that is inclined downward, so that, for example, the balls stored in the upper tray 17 can be illuminated with light to make the balls look glittering. Therefore, the interest of the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved while improving the customer attraction effect.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiments. For example,
It may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which, once a jackpot is hit, the expected jackpot value is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times), including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and in which the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as a pachinko machine with a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and in which the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area.
It may also be implemented as various gaming machines, such as a gaming machine that combines a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after a coin is inserted and a symbol pay line is determined, a control lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device which variably displays a string of identification information consisting of a number of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information as a final display, and the variable display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a control lever), and is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button), or
A slot machine in which, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the varying display of identifying information stops and is displayed as a fixed value, and if the combination of identifying information at the time of the stop is a specific one, a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player is generated. In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

A specific example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that changes and displays a series of symbols, and then determines and displays the symbols, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a certain amount of balls are inserted based on a certain operation (button operation), the symbols start to change due to the operation of an operating lever, for example.
For example, when a stop button is operated or a certain time has passed, the variation of the symbols is stopped, and if the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, a special game is started in which a certain amount of game value is awarded to the player, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the game value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the game value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 344 to Fig. 424. Note that the first control example is a control example in which some configurations are changed from the above-mentioned embodiments, and detailed descriptions of the same configurations as the above-mentioned embodiments will be omitted.

Figure 344 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in Figure 344, the game board 13 in the first control example is configured by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general ball entrance 63, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, a sorting device 700, etc., on a base plate 60 cut into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see Figure 138). The base plate 60 is made of wood made of thin boards glued together, and is formed so that the player cannot see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general ball entry port 63, the second ball entry port 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like. In addition, as will be described in detail later, inside the sorting device 700, there is a first ball entry port 64 through which balls can enter, and a right second ball entry port 640r. Balls that enter the opening 710a are sorted by the sorting device 700 to either the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r (see FIG. 345).

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c (see FIG. 138) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 344.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 76 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is set up inside the outer rail 77. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 138) surround the front and back, forming a game area on the front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize openings and the like are arranged and where the shot balls flow down) that is partitioned on the front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 76, 77 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 76, 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 355) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left of FIG. 344) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right of FIG. 344) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of Fig. 344), the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 355), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this first control example, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance 640r. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first pattern display device 37a is activated, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance 640r, the first pattern display device 37b is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37a, 37b also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether the mode is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot (jackpot A, C), a normal jackpot (jackpot B), or a miss, and the number of reserved balls. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a winning ball is entered into any of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery), and if a jackpot has been determined, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that are judged here include a 16R time-saving 100-time jackpot (jackpot A), a 16R odd-numbered jackpot (jackpot B1), a 16R even-numbered jackpot (jackpot B2), and a 2R jackpot (jackpot C). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only show whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as the stop symbol after the change, but also show a symbol according to the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won.

Here, a "16R time-saving 100 times jackpot" (jackpot A) refers to a jackpot in which a jackpot is announced when the third symbol stops and displays the same even number pattern, and then after a maximum of 16 rounds of jackpot play, the state transitions to a low probability state and the time-saving state is in effect for a predetermined number of variations (for example, 100 variations). A "16R guaranteed odd number jackpot" (jackpot B1) refers to a guaranteed odd number jackpot in which a jackpot is announced when the third symbol finally stops and displays the same odd number pattern, and then after a maximum of 16 rounds of jackpot play, the state transitions to a high probability state and the state is in electric support until the next jackpot play is played. A "16R even number jackpot" (jackpot B2) is a jackpot where the third symbol finally stops and displays the same even number pattern, signaling a jackpot, and then after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16, the probability state transitions to a high probability state (until the next jackpot game is played), and the electric support state is set until the next jackpot game is played. A "2R even number jackpot" (jackpot C) is a jackpot where the third symbol finally displays a specific combination of symbols (chance number), and then after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2, the probability state transitions to a high probability state (until the next jackpot game is played). Note that in the case of jackpot C, the electric support state is not set after the jackpot game.

The "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is fluctuating (during a probability change), in other words, a state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. The "electric support state" in the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of drawing the second symbol is set high and the time for the second symbol to fluctuate is set short. The "low probability state" refers to a state when the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability change, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, the probability of a jackpot is lower than when in a probability change. The time-saving state (during time-saving) in the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of a hit with the second symbol is increased, making it easier for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability change or a time-saving state (a state in which neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of a hit with the second symbol is increased).

During the electric support mode (electric support game mode) or time-saving mode in the high probability mode, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric device 640a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than when the electric device 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the high probability mode or time-saving mode, it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the electric support or time-saving period in the high probability period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the high probability period or time-saving period, the hit probability of the second pattern may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may be changed. Also, during the high probability period or time-saving period, the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may not be changed, and only the hit probability of the second pattern may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the play area, there are a number of general ball entrances 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is provided in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays a third pattern in synchronization with the display in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, triggered by a winning (initial winning) in any of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a second pattern in a variable manner, triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67.

The variable display unit 80 also has a center frame 86 disposed around the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 can be seen through an opening in the center of the center frame 86. The center frame 86 also protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third pattern display device 81, preventing the game ball from coming into contact with the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 355), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 375) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time as the display symbol (second symbol (see FIG. 344)) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change and be displayed is set to be shorter during electric support or time-saving during a special probability mode than during normal play. As a result, the second symbol changes and is displayed for a shorter period of time during electric support and time-saving during a special probability mode, so that more winning draws can be held than during normal play. This increases the chances of winning in the winning draw, giving the player more opportunities for the electric device 640a of the second ball entrance 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, during electric support and time-saving during a special probability mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win, or by other methods during the special probability or time-saving period, the time it takes for the second symbol to change and be displayed may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change and be displayed is set shorter during the special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80. The through gates 67 are configured to allow some of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second pattern is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second pattern display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, an "X" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the through gate 67 can be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and is also displayed by the second pattern reserved lamp 84. There are four second pattern reserved lamps 84, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

The second pattern change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this embodiment, or may be performed by using a part of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. The maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, but may be three or more. The assembly position of the through gate is not limited to both the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, the second pattern reserve lamp may not be turned on.

Below the variable display unit 80, a distribution device 700 is provided, through which balls can enter. When a ball enters the distribution device 700 through the opening 710a, the ball is alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 355), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a. Also, when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640, just as in the case of the right second ball entrance 640r, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 375), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37b.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is disposed below the distribution device 700 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is conducted by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 375), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37b. Normally, the left and right wing-shaped electric devices 640a are in an upright position to restrict the game ball from entering the second ball entrance 640, making it difficult for the game ball to enter. When a normal symbol, which will be described later, is hit, the electric devices 640a rotate about 45 degrees outward in a certain operating pattern as an opening operation, forming an inverted eight, guiding the game ball towards the second ball entrance 640 and making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize entrances from which two balls are paid out as prize balls. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r are configured to be different numbers, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r may be configured to be the same number.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be able to open and close, and is usually in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 640a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

As mentioned above, during the electric support and time-saving mode in the special probability mode, the probability of the second symbol hitting is higher than during normal times, and since the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special probability mode or time-saving mode, the time that the electric device 640a is open is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the special probability mode or time-saving mode, it is possible to create an environment in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than during normal times.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second ball entrance 640, so the ball basically enters the opening 710a, and the ball is then sorted to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r, and the big win lottery is executed.

On the other hand, during the electric support or time-saving period in the special probability mode, the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. In addition to the ball entering the opening 710a being distributed to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r, the jackpot lottery associated with the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is also more likely to be held. Therefore, there are more opportunities for a jackpot lottery than during normal play, which is more advantageous for the player than during normal play.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment allows the player to change the way the ball is shot depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in electric support during a special probability mode, in time-saving mode, or in normal mode). This allows the player to vary the way the ball is shot, making the game more enjoyable.

A variable winning device 65 is provided below the distribution device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the variable winning device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning at any of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37a or the first pattern display device 37b is turned on to show a jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening and closing of the opening plate forward around the lower edge of the opening plate. The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easy for balls to win the specific winning hole 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state as a special game state. Also, the number of specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be provided, and the location of the opening is not limited to the lower side when viewed from the front of the distribution device 700, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

In the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13, there is a space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front door 5 (see Figure 138).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the ball entrances 63, 64, 65a, 640, 640r are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The outlet 66 is disposed below the sorting device 700.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 375). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 375). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 355. FIG. 355 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (Fig. 392) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed in the start-up processing (Fig. 391) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (Fig. 390) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a forward around the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the touch sensor 290, the setting switch 291, the RTC 292, the firing sensor 293, the frame button 22, etc.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 375). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs the power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC stabilized falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 345. FIG. 345 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. As shown in FIG. 345, the sorting device 700 is disposed below the variable display unit 80 of the game board 13. A flow path section through which game balls that enter the opening 710a flow down and a flow path section through which game balls that enter the second ball inlet 640 flow down are housed in a through hole formed in the game board 13, and the sorting device 700 is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side by a base member.

The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with the above-mentioned opening 710a located at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric device 640a located below the opening 710a, through holes (not shown) located on both left-right sides of the electric device 640a and formed to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole (not shown) located below the through holes and formed to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction.

The allocating member 760 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape with the front side open. The allocating member 760 is bent at approximately the center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed to incline downward as it moves from the approximately center position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. Furthermore, both ends of the allocating member 760 in the left-right direction are set in positions facing the through holes 731 of the above-mentioned winning member 730.

The distribution member 760 is mainly formed with a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front toward both the left and right, a distribution member 762 that is positioned in the center of the inclined surfaces 761, and a ball throwing port that is formed above the distribution member 762.

The distribution member 762 is formed in a circular ring shape and is provided with three protrusions 762a that protrude outward from its outer edge at 90 degree intervals around the axis, and a shaft portion 762b that is inserted into the inside of the circular ring shape.

The shaft portion 762b is a support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 around its axis, and is formed in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the inner side of the ring of the distribution member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the intermediate member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is arranged to be rotatable around the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusions 762a are protrusions for distributing the balls alternately to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the balls that have passed through the opening 710a are sent, and the balls are sent in the direction opposite to the direction in which the tip of the central protrusion 762a is located. In other words, the central protrusion 762a can send the balls sent from the opening 710a in the left and right directions. The protrusions 762a protruding from both ends are members that regulate the displacement of the distribution member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the central protrusion 762a is located (rotate the distribution member 762) due to the weight applied when the ball passes through, and the rotation of the distribution member 762 is regulated by the contact of the tip surface of the protrusion 762a with the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the ball is guided to the central protrusion 762a, the protrusion 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed downward. This causes the protrusion 762a on the opposite side to be displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a that has been displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface, restricting its displacement.

The inclined surface is the rolling surface of the path (hereinafter referred to as the "third ball sending path KR3") along which the ball sorted to the left and right by the sorting member 762 described above rolls and is sent, and is formed with a downward incline from the center position in the left-right direction of the sorting member 760 toward the outside. As a result, the ball sorted to the left and right by the sorting member 762 of the sorting member 760 rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is sent (rolled) to the downward end of the inclined surface 761.

The downward end of the inclined surface 761 is formed so that the rear side surface becomes thicker toward the front as it approaches the end. This allows a ball that rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is sent to the first ball inlet 64 of the intervening member disposed in front of the sorting member 760, or the right second ball inlet 640r. More specifically, a ball that is sorted by the sorting member 762 to the left side as viewed from the front and rolls on the inclined surface 761 is sent (enters) to the first ball inlet 64. On the other hand, a ball that is sorted by the sorting member 762 to the right side as viewed from the front and rolls on the inclined surface 761 is sent (enters) to the right second ball inlet 640r.

The intermediate member is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with the above-mentioned variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a first ball entry port 64 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction on the left side, and a right second ball entry port 640r that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction on the right side, and these first ball entry ports 64.

The first ball inlet 64 and the right second ball inlet 640r are formed on the front side of both the left and right ends of the distribution member 760, and on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the spaces at both the left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball inlet 64 and the right second ball inlet 640r. Therefore, a path can be formed in which a ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above passes through the first ball inlet 64 and is sent to the through hole of the winning member 730, and a path can be formed in which a ball passes through the right second ball inlet 640r and is sent to the through hole of the winning member 730.

The sorting device 700 configured as described above sends balls as follows. A ball entering from the opening 710a is sent to the sorting member 760 and then sent to the third ball sending path KR3 in either the left or right direction by the sorting member 762 of the sorting member 760. When a ball sent to the third ball sending path KR3 in the left direction reaches the end of the third ball sending path KR3, it is sent to the fourth ball sending path KR4 inside the first ball entrance 64 of the intervening member 750 located on the front side. Here, the game ball that enters the first ball entrance 64 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64.

On the other hand, when a ball is sent on the third ball sending path KR3 to the left, it is sent to the end of the third ball sending path KR3 and then sent to the fourth ball sending path KR4 inside the right second ball entrance 640r of the interposed member 750 arranged on the front side. Here, the game ball that enters the second ball entrance 640 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second ball entrance 640r.

In this way, the game balls that enter the opening 710a are alternately distributed by the distribution member 762 between the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640, so that the game balls can be evenly distributed to the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, and reserved balls can be generated uniformly. This makes it possible to evenly generate reserved balls of the first special pattern and reserved balls of the second special pattern, and the number of reserved balls on one side is set to an upper limit, suppressing overflow where balls are not stored as reserved balls.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to change at the same time, but they may change at the same time. By configuring in this way, more game lotteries can be performed in a short period of time and the judgment results can be displayed, allowing for more time-efficient play.

The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 375), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols line up is performed, and the jackpot occurs after the variable display has ended. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a miss, a variable display in which the same main symbols do not line up is performed.

For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot B1", a variable display is performed in which any of the odd-numbered main symbols "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" are displayed in a sequence. Also, if it is "jackpot A" or "jackpot B2", a variable display is performed in which any of the even-numbered main symbols "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are displayed in a sequence. Also, if it is "jackpot C", a chance symbol consisting of the combination "341" is displayed. Note that this chance symbol combination is not selected if the lottery result is a miss. In this embodiment, the chance symbol is displayed in a specific combination of third symbols, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display one or more combinations of special symbols (for example, goldfish symbols) different from the normal third symbols 0 to 9, or to notify by displaying letters such as "chance".

Next, referring to Fig. 346 to Fig. 354, the display mode of the effect displayed by the third pattern display device 81 in this first control example will be described. As shown in Fig. 346(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two, top and bottom, with the upper 2/3 being the main display area Dm that displays the third pattern in a variable manner, and the remaining lower 1/3 being the sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, number of reserved balls, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, left, center, and right, and three pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. The above-mentioned third pattern is displayed in a specified order in each pattern column Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending numerical order in each pattern column Z1 to Z3, and the display is changed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each pattern column Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of this main display area Dm is set as the pay line L1, and the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the pay line L1 in the order of left pattern column Z1 → right pattern column Z3 → center pattern column Z2 during each game. If the third pattern stops on the pay line L1 and a combination of jackpot patterns (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main patterns) is lined up, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction. Of these, small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which the reserved symbol that will be changed is displayed by moving when the reserved balls reserved in the main display area Dm are displayed in a changing state (dynamic display). The reserved symbol that has been moved to the execution display area is displayed as a larger symbol than the reserved symbol so that it is possible to identify that the corresponding special symbol is being changed. Note that when a change is being executed, the color of the symbol or the pattern of the symbol is changed to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol that is being changed.

Small area Ds2 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not yet been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640, and a preview performance image. In small area Ds2, a character display area C is set up in which a preview performance image of a character is displayed when the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number or more.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 346(b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, in the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after it are displayed visibly, so a total of nine main symbols may be displayed. In the sub-display area Ds, the small area Ds1 displays the execution base symbol m0 indicating that it is an area where the reserved ball corresponding to the active special symbol is moved and displayed, and when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed as shown in FIG. 347(a), a round symbol is displayed. Among the reserved symbols (round symbols) displayed in the small area Ds2, the leftmost round symbol indicating that the most reserved symbol is the first is hidden, and then a round symbol with a diameter larger than the reserved symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1. In this case, the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 are displayed by moving the reserved symbols displayed in a row to the position where the leftmost reserved symbol that was hidden was displayed. When the reserved symbol moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as an active symbol, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol that starts to change and the selected change pattern, etc., and the color and pattern of the active symbol are determined and displayed. By configuring in this way, the active symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 allows the player to quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbol that starts to change and the selected change pattern, thereby improving the interest of the game. Note that the active symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to an effect that changes the color or pattern at the start of the change, but also an effect that changes during the period when the special symbol is changing. For example, it is executed at the timing when the third symbol switches from high-speed change to low-speed change, at the timing when the reach display mode (a display mode in which the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and the same symbol is displayed and the middle symbol is displayed in a scrolling manner), or at the timing when a specific effect (for example, when a specific movie effect is executed, etc.) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 346(b), the small area Ds2 has a first reserved pattern base m1 displayed at the left end, indicating that this is an area in which a reserved pattern indicating that the reserved pattern is the first to change is displayed. To the right of the first reserved pattern base m1, the second reserved pattern base m2 indicating that the reserved pattern is second, the third reserved pattern base m3 indicating that the reserved pattern is third, the fourth reserved pattern base m4 indicating that the reserved pattern is fourth, the fifth reserved pattern base m5 indicating that the reserved pattern is fifth, the sixth reserved pattern base m6 indicating that the reserved pattern is sixth, the seventh reserved pattern base m7 indicating that the reserved pattern is seventh, and the eighth reserved pattern base m8 indicating that the reserved pattern is eighth are displayed even when the reserved patterns are not displayed.

When the reserved number of reserved symbols is not more than the predetermined number, the reserved number indication symbol P is displayed on the top of the fifth reserved symbol base m5 to the eighth reserved symbol base m8. The reserved number indication symbol P is configured as a variable lid shape with the character "5" displayed on the top of the fifth reserved symbol base m5, indicating that the reserved symbol is the fifth. Similarly, the character "6" is displayed on the top of the sixth reserved symbol base m6, the character "7" is displayed on the top of the seventh reserved symbol base m7, indicating that the reserved symbol is the seventh, and the character "8" is displayed on the top of the eighth reserved symbol base m8, indicating that the reserved symbol is the eighth.

As shown in FIG. 346(b), when the reserved number is 0, the reserved number indication symbol P is displayed across the area from the 5th reserved symbol base m5 to the 8th reserved symbol base m8, and the player is configured to recognize that the maximum reserved number is 8, including the first and second special symbols. In this embodiment, a maximum of 4 is set for the first special symbol, and a maximum of 4 is set for the second special symbol. In this control example, a maximum number is set for each of the first and second special symbols, but this is not limiting, and the maximum number may be set to the combined reserved number of the first and second special symbols to prevent overflow.

To the right of the eighth reserved symbol base m8 is a character display base C1, which indicates that this is the area where the preview character will be displayed. By configuring it in this way, even if the preview character is not displayed, the player can check in advance the area where the character will be displayed, making it easy to play.

As shown in FIG. 347(a), when the third pattern (special pattern) is displayed in a variable manner in the main area Dm (when the variable display period of the special pattern is in progress), if a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640, if the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special pattern that entered is less than the maximum value, the reserved pattern is displayed at the top of the pedestal display corresponding to the reserved order. FIG. 347(a) shows the display of the reserved pattern when the number of reserved balls is three.

As shown in FIG. 347(a), when the number of reserved balls is three, the reserved ball number suggestion pattern P is displayed in the display area where the reserved ball numbers from 5 to 8 are displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 347(b), when the number of reserved balls becomes four, the variable lid pattern for the reserved ball number suggestion pattern P, which displays the fifth reserved ball, becomes invisible and is displayed variably. By configuring in this way, when the reserved balls are displayed close to the variable lid pattern, they become invisible, and the problem of the player mistaking the variable lid pattern for the reserved ball number and mistaking the actual number of reserved balls can be suppressed. Also, as shown in FIG. 347(b), when the number of reserved balls becomes four, not only is the variable lid pattern in the display area for the fifth reserved ball hidden, but a girl character pattern is displayed in the character display area C.

The character displayed in the character display area C is configured to display a comment indicating the number of balls remaining until the upper limit of the number of reserved balls in a speech bubble, so that the player can be informed of the number of balls remaining until the maximum number of reserved balls in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls reaches seven, the comment display shows the words "one more", indicating that when one more reserved ball is stored, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls, which is eight, will be stored. This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize the number of reserved balls until the upper limit, and by entering a ball into either the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r (a ball entrance corresponding to a special pattern that is not the upper limit of the number of reserved balls) when the number of reserved balls is at the upper limit, the occurrence of an overflow that is not reserved and stored can be suppressed.

In this control example, when a game ball enters the opening 710a of the distribution device 700, the game ball is alternately distributed by the distribution member 762 of the distribution device 700 to the first ball entrance 64 (corresponding to the first special symbol) and the right second ball entrance 640r (corresponding to the second special symbol). This makes it easier for the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to accumulate alternately and evenly. This allows the player to continue playing by having the game ball enter the opening 710a without worrying about overflow, even if the total number of reserved balls (first special symbol and second special symbol combined) reaches seven.

In addition, when the maximum number of reserved balls is reached, the word "MAX" is displayed to indicate that the maximum number of reserved balls has been stored, preventing a malfunction in which the player continues to fire game balls even when the maximum number of reserved balls has been reached, causing an overflow of reserved balls.

In FIG. 348(a), the fourth reserved ball is stored, and the result of the judgment of whether the reserved ball is a hit or a miss determined by the pre-reading process (Z320: see FIG. 386) in the start winning process (Z105) in FIG. 385 and the information of the type of the variable pattern to be selected are output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning command, and based on that information, for example, if it is judged to be a big hit or a miss super reach, the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the white reserved pattern is changed to red) as a performance that makes the player expect a big hit, and the fifth variable cover pattern of the reserved number suggestion pattern P is displayed as it is without being hidden. Furthermore, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, and the word "as it is" is displayed, and a performance is executed that suggests not to increase the reserved number any more. Here, when the fifth reserved ball is stored, as shown in FIG. 348(b), the word "OVER" is displayed in a speech bubble from the girl in the character display area C, so that even if there is no overflow, it is announced as if there is an overflow. This gives the player hope that the fourth reserved ball will change and prevents the player from wasting more of their balls (game balls) by firing them when a reserved ball with a high probability of winning has been stored.

As shown in FIG. 349(a), when the number of reserved balls from 0 to 4 is stored in a short period (for example, 5 seconds), the fifth and sixth variable lid patterns P of the reserved ball number suggestion pattern P are hidden at the timing when the fourth reserved ball is stored, and a girl is displayed in the character display area C, and the word "fast" is displayed, and a notification is executed to indicate that the reserved ball number suggestion pattern P is displayed in a special variable manner because the reserved ball number period is short. Normally, when the number of reserved balls is 4, the fifth variable lid pattern of the reserved ball number suggestion pattern P is hidden, but since the number of reserved balls from 0 has increased to 4 within 5 seconds, a special display rule is set in which the fifth and sixth variable lid patterns are displayed as hidden. By configuring in this way, the performance to be executed can be changed depending on the period during which the number of reserved balls increases or the interval at which the reserved balls are stored, and the player can easily recognize that the reserved balls have been generated in a short period of time or more. In addition, in this control example, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P is configured to be different from normal, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the display mode of the reserved pattern (for example, the color, pattern, or shape of the reserved pattern) to be variable without changing the display mode of the variable lid pattern P.

Next, referring to FIG. 349(b), an example of variable display of the variable cover pattern P in the time-saving game state will be described. In the time-saving game state (where the probability of determining whether or not a normal pattern is a hit is high), unlike the normal game state (where the probability of determining whether or not a normal pattern is a hit is low), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, the fifth (m5) and sixth (m6) variable cover patterns P are hidden as shown in FIG. 349(b). Then, a girl character is displayed, and a word "insert up to 6" is displayed in a speech bubble to prompt the player to store up to the sixth reserved ball. In the time-saving game state, the probability of determining whether or not a normal pattern is a hit is set to a high probability, and the normal pattern change time is also set to a short time, so that the normal electric role (electric support) 640a is more likely to be set to an open state, and the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. Therefore, since reserved balls are more likely to overflow during time-saving play, unlike normal play, many variable lid symbols P are hidden during time-saving play, and the player is encouraged to play so that the number of reserved balls is six, which is less than the upper limit of eight, thereby preventing the reserved balls from reaching the upper limit and creating a state in which overflow is more likely to occur. Note that in the time-saving play state, when the number of reserved balls reaches the fifth, the seventh variable lid symbol P (m7) is hidden, and when the number of reserved balls reaches the seventh, the eighth variable lid symbol P (m8) is hidden.

In this control example, during time-saving play, when the number of reserved balls reaches five, the seventh variable lid symbol P is hidden, but the invention is not limited to this, and the seventh and eighth variable lid symbols P may be kept displayed until the number of reserved balls reaches six. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent players from playing in an attempt to generate six or more reserved balls.

When the fourth reserved ball is stored, the sixth and seventh variable lid symbols may be hidden depending on the content of the winning command, and the words "Insert up to 6" may be displayed to suggest that the girl encourage the player to increase the number of reserved balls to six. In this way, by informing the player in advance of the type of jackpot game (high probability hit or normal hit) as a special bonus for inserting up to six, the player's motivation to save reserved balls can be increased.

As shown in Fig. 350(a)-(b), the type of girl displayed in the character display area C is configured to vary depending on the result of the pre-reading of the reserved balls stored (information indicated by the winning command). In the example shown in Fig. 351(a), a girl character that is usually displayed when there are four reserved balls is displayed, and in the example shown in Fig. 350(b), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, a special girl character different from the normal state is selected and displayed based on the result of the lottery for the pre-reading result being a specific result. Here, the specific result is the result of winning the lottery that determines the type of girl different from the normal state, and if the pre-reading result is a jackpot or a super reach with a miss, the probability of winning is set high. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the expectation of a jackpot based on the type of girl character displayed to the player, which can increase the interest of the game.

Also, referring to Figures 351(a)-(b), the display mode when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum value and then an over-entry occurs will be described. In Figure 351(a), when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C displays the word "MAX" in a speech bubble comment indicating that the number of reserved balls is the upper limit. If a game ball subsequently enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 and an overflow occurs, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C changes to character J2 and displays the word "Over-entry" indicating that an overflow has occurred. In this way, when an overflow occurs, the player is notified that an overflow has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner, which can prevent overflows from occurring frequently.

In addition, in this control example, the type of character displayed is variable in order to suppress overflow, but if the purpose is to increase the profits of the gaming establishment, an overflow may be generated to notify the player of the result of a win/loss judgment for the variably displayed special pattern, the result of a pre-read of the stored reserved balls (win/loss judgment result, etc.), and the type of the current game state (normal game state or special game state) depending on the type of character displayed and the content of the comment. In this manner, the player can enjoy a variety of effects by playing while generating overflow, and overflow that is disadvantageous to the player can be generated while having fun.

With reference to Figures 352(a)-(b), the display mode when the reach-in-reserve performance is executed will be described. As shown in Figure 352(a), when the variation pattern (various normal reaches, various super reaches) that results in the reach display mode is varied, a predetermined lottery (see Z2324 in Figure 399) is executed, and if it is determined by the lottery that a special reserve performance is to be executed, as shown in Figure 352, the display mode of the reach-in-reserve performance is set when the reach display mode is reached. When the reach-in-reserve performance is executed, the fifth and sixth variable lid patterns P are hidden regardless of the number of reserved balls, a girl character J1 is displayed, and a balloon comment saying "Save up to 6" is displayed, suggesting the player to save six reserved balls during the reach variation.

As shown in FIG. 352(b), when six reserved balls are actually accumulated during the reach display, the even number symbol "6" is changed to an odd number symbol "7", which is an advantageous symbol type for the player, and displayed. Furthermore, the girl character J1 displays the words "Well done" in a speech bubble, and the color of the sixth reserved symbol is changed (for example, from blue to red, etc.). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent players from stopping the release of game balls and playing even during the reach, and it is possible to increase the profits of the gaming facility.

In this control example, the reach symbol is changed when the reserved balls reach the specified number (6 balls). However, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit and the hit type corresponds to an even number symbol, the reach symbol is not changed to an odd number symbol, but rather a school of fish swimming from right to left in the main display area Dm is displayed, and the number and color of the fish indicate the expected probability of a big hit, or a preview such as "Congratulations" is displayed to suggest the result of the hit/miss judgment.

With reference to Fig. 353(a)-(b), the display mode in the lucky reserved performance will be described. When a specific variation (a variation that won the advance lottery for executing the lucky reserved performance) is being performed, if a jackpot was won last time, the number of reserved balls when the reserved balls corresponding to that variation were stored is stored, and the mark pattern n6 as shown in Fig. 353(a) is displayed on the variable cover pattern P corresponding to that number of reserved balls, and a notification is executed from the girl character J1 in the character display area C urging the player to save reserved balls up to the reserved number corresponding to the mark pattern n6, saying "Aim for 6". As shown in Fig. 353(b), when six reserved balls are stored during the lucky reserved performance, the word "Well done" is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22, the word "Confirmed special variation" (advance display mode) is displayed in the main display area Dm, indicating that a special variation jackpot will be awarded in the special variation pattern.

In this way, it is configured to notify the type of jackpot that will occur if a jackpot is hit. In this control example, it is configured to execute this performance if a jackpot is hit, but it is not limited to this. Even if a jackpot is missed, the type of jackpot that will occur if a jackpot is hit can be determined based on the obtained jackpot type determination value, and the type can be notified to raise the expectation of a jackpot.

The lucky reserved effect is configured so that when the reserved balls stored in the variable cover pattern P (5 to 8 reserved balls) become a winning ball, the number of reserved balls is stored and displayed as the lucky reserved number when the next big win variation is executed. By configuring it in this way, the player can be made aware of the number of reserved balls stored when the previous big win occurred, and can be encouraged to play in a state where as many reserved balls as possible are accumulated, making it easier for the lucky reserved effect to be executed.

As shown in Figure 353(a), the reserved pattern is displayed with a number (reserved number at time of winning: the number indicated by i in Figure 353) corresponding to the number of reserved balls at the time of winning (the total number of reserved balls for the first special pattern and the second special pattern). When the reserved pattern is consumed (the special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern has started to change), this reserved number at time of winning is displayed as the same number even if it slides (changes) to the reserved pattern display area that is one step younger in the change order. By configuring it in this way, even when the change has started, the reserved number at the time of winning can be confirmed for that change.

In addition, when a jackpot is hit, the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the jackpot game executed during the jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance, etc.) may be displayed as numbers or patterns to notify the player.

Next, referring to Fig. 354(a)-(b), the display mode of the reserved effect when a long-open effect is executed in a long-time win (a winning game in which the electric device 640a is in an open state for a longer period than during a normal win), which is one of the winning types of normal symbols, will be described. As shown in Fig. 354(a), when a long-time win of a normal symbol is won and a long-time win game is started, a comment "Opening" is displayed in the main display area Dm. This display notifies the player that a long-time win game is being executed, and it is possible to suppress a malfunction in which a game ball is not launched during a long-time win game that is advantageous to the player and an opportunity to make the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r is missed. In addition, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r during this long-time win game, the reserved pattern corresponding to the ball is displayed in black reserved pattern different from the normal time. This configuration makes it possible to distinguish between reserved balls stored during long-term play and reserved balls stored during other periods.

As shown in FIG. 354(b), when the display of the changing special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern stored during long-time winning play begins, a treasure chest pattern is displayed in the main display area Dm in synchronization with the start of the scrolling display of the third pattern, and the words "If the treasure chest opens, it's a big chance!!" are displayed, and the treasure chest is displayed while the third pattern is changing, suggesting to the player that there is a high expectation that the lottery result for the changing special pattern will be a big win.

By configuring it this way, when a long-lasting hit with a normal pattern is executed, the presentation of the reserved ball is changed, and a special presentation is also executed while the special pattern corresponding to that reserved ball is being displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by executing a long-lasting hit, the presentation of the game can be greatly changed, providing a fresh experience.

Returning to FIG. 344, we will continue the explanation. The second symbol display device 83 changes its display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the normal symbol, which is performed as the ball passes through the through gate 67, is in progress by changing its lighting state, and indicates, as the stopping pattern after the change is completed, the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result for the normal symbol by changing its lighting state.

More specifically, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol, "○" and "×", are alternately lit each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. When the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric device 640a is activated (opened) for a predetermined time, and as a result, the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter. The number of times that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also displayed by the second symbol reserved lamp 84. Four second symbol reserved lamps 84 are provided, the number of the maximum reserved numbers, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The normal pattern (second pattern) change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in this control example, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to a maximum number of reserved balls being four times, as in the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern reserve lamp 84 may not be turned on.

The sorting device 700 is disposed below the variable display unit 80, and inside the sorting device 700, the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r are disposed, through which the game balls that enter the opening 710a are alternately sorted by the sorting member 762 and the balls can enter. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, the first ball entrance switch and the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on, and when the first ball entrance switch and the second ball entrance switch are turned on, the main control device 110 draws the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the display according to the lottery result is displayed by the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r are also one of the winning entrances from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls is the same when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but this is not limited to the above and the number of prize balls may be different. For example, the number of prize balls for the right second ball entrance 640r may be set to be greater than the number of prize balls for the first ball entrance 64, so that three prize balls are awarded when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and four prize balls are awarded when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r.

The variable winning device 65 is disposed below the distribution device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main control device 110 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on to show the jackpot stop symbol, and the third symbol stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have been won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated a number of times set for the type of jackpot game being executed (for example, 16 times (16 rounds) for jackpot A). The state in which this opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening and closing of the opening plate forward, with the lower edge of the opening plate as the axis. The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easy for balls to win the specific winning hole 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state that is a special game state.

The left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 are provided with attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 138).

The game board 13 is further provided with an outlet 66. Any balls that do not enter any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with numerous nails to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

As shown in FIG. 2, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each function, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 355). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 355). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 355. Fig. 355 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. Note that in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, referring to FIG. 356, the counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display on the first symbol display device 37, set the display on the second symbol display device 83, and set the display on the third symbol display device 81.

The special winning random number counter C1 used for the drawing of the special symbols and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 uses the special winning random number counter C1 used for drawing the special symbols, the special winning type counter C2 used for selecting the big winning type of the special symbols, the stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbols (reach winning type, non-reach miss (long miss A, short miss A), reach miss type), the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1. In addition, the normal winning random number counter C4 is used for drawing the normal symbols, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 392), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) for storing reserved balls of the first special pattern, and a special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) for storing reserved balls of the second special pattern, and a common special pattern reserved ball execution area for the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided. In each area of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. Similarly, similar values are stored in each area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r.

The RAM 203 also has a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, which consists of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of these areas stores the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 when the ball passes through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The special random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a specified range (e.g., 0 to 957) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 957 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 957). In particular, when the special random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special random number counter C1.

In addition, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special win random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special win random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 957, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 957. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 392).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), for example, and is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 358(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot for the special pattern is determined. In addition, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types: one for when the probability of a special symbol is low (the period when the probability of a special symbol is low) and one for when the probability of a special symbol jackpot is higher than the low probability (the period when the probability of a special symbol is high), and the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is set differently for each type. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot different, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the probability of a special symbol is low and when the probability of a special symbol is high. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for when the probability of a special symbol is high (see FIG. 358(a)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for when the probability of a special symbol is low (see FIG. 358(a)) are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The special win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special win type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r.

Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that results in a big win for the special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that results in a miss for the special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a miss for the special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. In this embodiment, the jackpot type is set to four types, namely, "jackpot A", "jackpot B1", "jackpot B2", and "jackpot C", and the special winning type counter C2 determines one of "jackpot A", "jackpot B1", "jackpot B2", and "jackpot C". Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot pattern.

The special win random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of 0 to 957. In this special win random number counter C1, when the probability of a special symbol is low, there are three random number values that result in a jackpot with a special symbol, and these random number values "0 to 2" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 3 out of a total of 958, so the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is "3/958".

On the other hand, when the probability of a special symbol is high, there are 27 random number values that result in a special symbol jackpot, and these values, "0 to 26," are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 27 out of a total of 958, so the probability of a special symbol jackpot is 27/958.

In this embodiment, the random number value for the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and the random number value for the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability are set so that they do not overlap. If there is a value that is always used as the random number value for the jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that this random number value will be input from outside, making it easier to win a jackpot illegally. In contrast, as in this embodiment, by changing the random number value for the jackpot depending on the state (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state for the special symbol or a low probability state for the special symbol), it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value for the jackpot for the special symbol, thereby preventing fraud.

The value of the special win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. As shown in FIG. 359(a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type has a special win type selection table 202d1 that is referenced in response to the drawing of the first special symbol and a special win type selection table 202d2 that is referenced in response to the drawing of the second special symbol.

When the variation of the first special symbol stops, if the lottery result of the variation is a jackpot, the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 stores a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot type for comparing (judging) with the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

Figure 359 (b) is a data table that shows the contents of this special chart 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, if the random number value in the acquired special jackpot type counter is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "jackpot A". In addition, if the value is "40 to 75", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot B1", if the value is "76 to 79", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot B2", and if the value is "80 to 99", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot C".

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that one of four types of winning types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special winning type counter C2.

In addition, the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 stores a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot type for comparing (judging) the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 set (acquired and stored) in the special pattern reserved ball execution area when the variation of the second special pattern stops and the lottery result in that variation is a jackpot.

Figure 359 (c) is a data table that shows the contents of this special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, if the random number value in the acquired special jackpot type counter is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "jackpot A". In addition, if the value is "40 to 87", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot B1", if the value is "88 to 91", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot B2", and if the value is "92 to 99", the jackpot type is set to "jackpot C".

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to determine four types of winning types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) according to the value of the random number indicated by the special winning type counter C2. In addition, the selection ratio of the jackpot type selected when the judgment result is a jackpot is different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, so that the player can be interested in whether the lottery is executed with the first special pattern or the second special pattern. In addition, the selection ratio of the special jackpot in which the special jackpot is granted for both the first special pattern and the second special pattern is the same (60%), so that the special jackpot ratio differs between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the problem that the special jackpot ratio is not constant as a whole gaming machine can be suppressed. In addition, the selection ratio of the jackpot C for the second special pattern is set low, so the probability of selecting the 16R special jackpot is set higher than that of the first special pattern, and it is configured to be advantageous to the player.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 described above determine the general display mode, such as short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, and super reach. The display mode is determined, specifically, by the change time of the pattern change. Based on the change time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the change type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern change mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 392) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. In addition, a variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 357b) that stores random number values that determine the variation time of the pattern variation from the values (random number values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

As shown in FIG. 358(b), the variation pattern selection table 202b has a normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 used in a game state where the probability of determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit is low (normal game state), and a time-saving variation pattern table 202b2 used in a game state where the probability of determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit is high (high probability game state or time-saving game state). As will be explained in more detail in the explanation of the selection of the variation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113 described later, the main control device 110 determines the rough content of the variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the variation time based on the result of the hit/miss judgment, the number of reserved balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the value of the variation type counter CS1, and sets a variation pattern command indicating the determined content.

Next, referring to Fig. 360 to Fig. 361, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. Fig. 360 is a data table that shows the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the results of the lottery for the special symbols, and the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are assigned to each of the variation patterns. In addition, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, the variation pattern is set in correspondence with the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined by the jackpot type selection table 202d based on the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2). In addition, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, the variation pattern is set for each number of reserved balls at the start of the variation (either 1 to 4 or 5 to 8).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 360, when the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (i.e., regardless of the number of reserved balls), and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 50", then a normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198". When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "51 to 250", then a super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", a super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and a super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198".

When the jackpot type is "jackpot B1" or "jackpot B2", and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (i.e., regardless of the number of reserved balls), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 60", then a normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198". When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "61 to 250", then a super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", a super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and a super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198".

When the jackpot type is "jackpot C," if the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (i.e., regardless of the number of reserved balls), and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250," then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100," a super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected, and for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "101 to 198," a super reach jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

In this way, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, a variation pattern with a long variation time, such as a normal reach or a super reach, is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long variation time, the player can be made to expect that the result of the win/loss judgment will be a jackpot.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is miss, and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 4, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209", then miss length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 239", then normal reach miss A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", then super reach miss A (variation No. 9) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", then super reach miss B (variation No. 10) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198".

In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 5 to 8, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss short A (variation No. 11) is selected; if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 239", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss normal A (variation No. 8) is selected; if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss super A (variation No. 9) is selected; and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss super B (variation No. 10) is selected.

In this way, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, a small number of reserved balls (when there are 1 to 4 balls) and a long fluctuation pattern are likely to be selected, so that by having a game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r during that time, reserved balls are more likely to be generated, and a period in which the fluctuation of the special pattern stops (a period in which lottery play does not take place) occurs, which is configured to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game. Also, by setting the selection rate of normal reach and super reach low when the number of reserved balls is large, the normal reach and super reach fluctuations are executed when there are many reserved balls, allowing the player to hope that the hit/miss judgment result will be a hit.

Next, referring to FIG. 361, a data table is shown which shows the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202b2. In the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202b2, various fluctuation patterns are set in correspondence with the results of the lottery for the special symbols, and the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns. Also, when the result of the hit/miss determination is a hit, a fluctuation pattern is set in correspondence with the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2). Furthermore, when the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, a fluctuation pattern is set for each number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation (either 1 to 2 balls or 3 to 8 balls).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 361, when the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (i.e., regardless of the number of reserved balls), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 90", then a normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198". If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "91 to 250", then a super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", a super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and a super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198".

When the jackpot type is "jackpot B1" or "jackpot B2", and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (i.e., regardless of the number of reserved balls), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 100", then a normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198". When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "101 to 250", then a super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", a super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and a super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198".

When the jackpot type is "jackpot C," if the reserved number is 1 to 8 (i.e., regardless of the number of reserved balls), and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250," then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100," a super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected, and for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "101 to 198," a super reach jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

In this way, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, a variation pattern with a long variation time, such as a normal reach or a super reach, is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long variation time, the player can be made to expect that the result of the win/loss judgment will be a jackpot.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is miss, and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 2, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209", then miss length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 229", then normal reach miss A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", then super reach miss A (variation No. 9) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 250", then super reach miss B (variation No. 10) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198".

In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 3 to 8, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 199", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss short B (variation No. 12) is selected; if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss normal A (variation No. 8) is selected; if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss super A (variation No. 9) is selected; and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", then for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 198", a miss super B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Here, the fluctuation time (fluctuation period) in the fluctuation pattern of Miss Short B is configured to be 2000 ms (2 seconds), which is a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation time that can be selected in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1. As a result, when the win/loss judgment result is a win and the number of reserved balls is three or more, Miss Short B is selected with a high probability, which allows the special pattern to fluctuate many times in a short period of time, making it easier to shorten the period until a jackpot is judged (the period between jackpots), and improving the efficiency of the game.

The normal win random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 239). When the normal win random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process, and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side, and is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 358(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol set by the normal winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In addition, this normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 358(c)) is divided into two types: one for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and one for high probability of a normal symbol winning (period in which the normal symbol is in the time-saving state) when the probability of a normal symbol winning is higher than the low probability, and the number of random numbers that result in a big win included in each is set differently. Furthermore, the type of winning normal symbol is set to normal winning or long-time winning, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, a normal win for a normal pattern is a win in which the operation of the electric device 640a being activated to the open state is executed once with an opening time of 0.2 seconds in the normal game state (low probability game state) and in the jackpot game state. Also, during the time-saving and probability period, it is a win in which the operation of the electric device 640a being activated to the open state is repeated twice with an opening time of 2 seconds. On the other hand, a long-term win is a win in which the operation of the electric device 640a being activated to the open state is repeated twice with an opening time of 2 seconds, regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the opening operation of the electric device 640a executed during the time-saving period in a normal win and the opening operation in the special period are set to be the same as those in a long-time win, but this is not limited to the above, and a different opening operation may be used for a long-time win. Specifically, for example, an operation in the open state may be performed once for three seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the ball enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r more easily during a long-time win, making it easier to execute the variable display of the second special pattern during normal play, and allowing the player to enjoy the changes in the game presentation due to the variable display of the second special pattern that displays a fresh preview display, etc.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 358(c), when the probability of a normal pattern is low, if the value of the acquired normal win random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 6, it is determined to be a normal win of the normal pattern. Also, if it is any one of 7 to 8, it is determined to be a long-time win of the normal pattern. On the other hand, when the probability of a normal pattern is high, if the value of the acquired normal win random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 204, it is determined to be a normal win of the normal pattern. Note that, when the probability of a normal pattern is high, a long-time win of the normal pattern is not set, but when the probability of a normal pattern is high, the opening operation of the electric role 640a is the same as a long-time win, so even a normal win is essentially the same as a long-time win.

In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between when the normal pattern has a low probability and when the normal pattern has a high probability. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric device 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r can be reduced. Therefore, the player's consumption of game balls can be increased, and the profits of the gaming establishment can be increased. On the other hand, during the time-saving period and the probability-change period, when the probability is high, the electric device 640a can be given an opportunity to operate with a probability of "1/1.2", and the opportunity of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r can be increased. Therefore, the consumption of game balls by the player can be suppressed, and a game state advantageous to the player can be set. Therefore, the player can play with the aim of playing with a high probability, and can play for a longer period of time.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for 30 seconds on the second pattern display device 83. If the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 8", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "circle" pattern is displayed as the stop pattern (second pattern). If the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is "5 to 6", it is a normal win, and the electric role 640a is opened (opened) for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if a normal pattern wins, the electric role 640a is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time", but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "0.5 seconds x 2 times". Furthermore, if the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is between "21 and 28," it is considered a long-time win and the right second ball entrance 640r is opened for "2 seconds x 2 times."

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random number values that will result in a normal symbol jackpot, and the range is "5 to 204." These random number values are stored in the normal jackpot random number table 202c for high probability (see Figure 358 (c)). Thus, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that will result in a jackpot is 200 out of a total of 240, so the probability of a special symbol jackpot is "1/1.2."

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal pattern, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for three seconds on the second pattern display device 83. If the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, the "○" pattern is displayed as the stop pattern (second pattern), and the electric role 640a is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, the variable display time is very short (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) compared to when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, and further, the opening period of the right second ball entrance 640r is very long (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 2 seconds x 2 times), so that the ball is easily able to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where there is a high probability of a normal symbol, the right second ball entrance 640r opens for "2 seconds x 2 times" when a normal symbol wins, but the opening time and number of times can be set as desired. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times."

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see Figure 380) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see Figure 392).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control device 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the displays on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to FIG. 355, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 356, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 392) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 391) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 390) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 357(a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 contains the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 358), variable pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 358(b)), normal jackpot random number table 202c (see FIG. 358(c)), jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 359(a)-(c)), and prize command table 202e. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 also stores various data and programs necessary for playing the game in addition to the above.

Figure 362 is a data table that shows the contents of the winning command table 202e. The winning command table 202e is a table for determining the result of judgment such as the variation pattern selected when the stored reserved ball starts to vary in the pre-reading process (Z320: Figure 386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and for determining the winning command corresponding to the judgment result. As shown in Figure 362, if the lottery result in the pre-reading is a jackpot, a winning command corresponding to the determined jackpot type and the selected variation pattern type is determined. As a result, not only the variation pattern type and the hit/miss judgment result but also the jackpot type can be notified by the winning command, and more detailed information can be notified. In addition, if the lottery result is a miss, a winning command corresponding to each variation pattern type is determined. Note that the variation pattern types of miss long A, miss short A, and miss short B are all set as misses in the winning command table 202e, and the same winning command "C100" is set.

As shown in FIG. 357(b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, an opening count counter 203g, a long-time opening flag 203i, a time-saving counter 203j, a fluctuation execution flag 203k, a sure-win flag 203m, a jackpot flag 203n, a fluctuation order storage area 203p, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

More specifically, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (initial entry), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) in order of the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winning events is stored, and the first holding area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning event. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a decision such as the lottery for the special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this embodiment, in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas in which winning data is stored (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4). Also, the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special pattern.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). Each of these areas stores a normal win random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of counter C4 is obtained when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in order of the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, just like the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the order in which the winning balls were won is maintained and data corresponding to the winning balls is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a winning normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the lottery for a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty, so a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number one smaller, just like in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, data shifting is only performed on the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37 based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see Z305 in FIG. 385). On the other hand, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special pattern is executed (see Z206 in FIG. 244).

The value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of reserved ball counts N of the variable display of the special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball count command (see Z207 in FIG. 381 and Z306 in FIG. 385). The reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is changed.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is a counter that counts reserved balls that have entered the right second ball entrance 640r, and other configurations are the same as the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d, so detailed explanations are omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number of the variable display managed by the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a reserved ball number display command to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this reserved ball number display command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of a ball through the through gate 67, up to a maximum of four. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is initially set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see Z504 in FIG. 389). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is executed (see Z406 in FIG. 387).

When a ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (the number of times M of the reserved variable display of the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (Z505 in FIG. 389). On the other hand, when a ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (Z503 in FIG. 389: No).

The opening count counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times the electric role 64c is opened. The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric role 64c.

The long-time opening flag 203i is a flag indicating that a long-time win is in progress. This long-time opening flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of Z429 in the normal pattern change start processing (Z408: Fig. 388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, in the processing of Z403 in the normal pattern change processing (Z106: Fig. 387), it is set to OFF when a new normal pattern change starts (when the next normal pattern change starts after a long-time win game is executed).

The time-saving counter 203j is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols. If the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state for normal symbols. The initial value of this time-saving counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a lottery is performed for a special symbol in the main control device 110 and a jackpot for a special symbol is determined, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. In other words, when a jackpot for a special symbol is reached, a new value corresponding to the type of jackpot is set regardless of the value of the time-saving counter 203j.

The change execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this control example, the change starts according to the order in which the balls entered the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r (the order in which the balls were reserved and stored). Here, when the change of the special symbol stops and the change of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball starts, the change execution determination process (Z204: Fig. 382) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines whether the next stored change corresponds to the reserved data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the reserved memory order data stored in the change order storage area 203p described later, and the corresponding change execution flag 203k is set to ON according to the determination result (Z245, Z247 in Fig. 382).

The probability variable flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current game state is a probability variable game state. This probability variable flag 203m is set to ON when it is determined in the processing of Z1113 in the jackpot control processing (Z1104: Fig. 393) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 that the jackpot game being executed is other than jackpot A (Z1111: No). In addition, in the processing of Z220 in the special pattern variation processing (Z104: Fig. 381) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to OFF when the varying display of the special pattern that will result in a jackpot is stopped.

The jackpot in progress flag 203n is a flag indicating that the game status is a jackpot game. This jackpot in progress flag 203n is set to ON when the start of a jackpot game is set in the processing of Z221 of the special pattern change processing (Z104: Fig. 381) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, in the processing of Z1114 of the jackpot control processing (Z256: Fig. 393) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to OFF when the timing for the end of the jackpot game is reached.

The change order storage area 203p is an area in which the reserved order is stored when game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r and are stored as reserved balls. In this control example, the special symbol changes are configured to be executed in the order in which they are reserved and stored, and one of the special symbols is not executed preferentially. In addition, in this control example, the distribution device 700 is configured to distribute the balls alternately between the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r. By starting the change in the order in which they are reserved and stored, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also executed alternately in the change of the special symbol, and only one of the reserved balls is consumed, which can prevent the reserved balls of that special symbol from overflowing.

Other memory area 203z stores flags, counters, stored data, etc. required for other control processes executed by the MPU of main control unit 110, but details are omitted.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern display device 83, the second pattern reservation lamp 84, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. In addition, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 390) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and continuous preview performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, etc.

The audio and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114, to change the background mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the content of the performance during a super reach.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

As shown in FIG. 363(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a reserved change selection table 222b, a reserved performance mode selection table 222c, a reserved lid range selection table 222d, a reserved lid command selection table 222e, a reserved lid color change selection table 222f, a lucky reserved command table 222g, a background mode selection table 222h, a reserved character selection table 222i, a reserved character change table 222j, a speech bubble selection table 222k, a reach performance lottery table 222m, a reach start time calculation table 222n, and a lucky reserved lottery table 222p.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on a variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. Multiple variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time and variation pattern type that correspond to the variation pattern command, and one variation pattern is determined by obtaining a selection counter value (not shown).

The reserved change selection table 222b is a selection table for determining whether or not to change and display the reserved pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the winning command received, and for obtaining the reserved change value required for the performance to be executed according to the content of the change.

Figure 364 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this reserved change selection table 222b. In the reserved change selection table 222b, the value of the performance counter 223h is assigned to the type of winning command received, and the display mode (see Figure 348 (a)) that changes the reserved pattern in the secondary display area Ds and the reserved change value are set for the value (range) of the performance counter 223h. The details of the acquired reserved change value will be explained in the reserved performance mode selection table 222c described later.

Specifically, when the winning command type is a miss, if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 180", it is determined that the display mode of the reserved pattern will not change from the normal reserved pattern, and the reserved change value is 0. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "181 to 198", it is determined that the display mode of the reserved pattern will change from a white circle pattern (normal display mode of the reserved pattern) to a blue circle pattern (change A), and the reserved change value is 1.

If the winning command type is a normal miss, and the value of the performance counter 223h is between "0" and "50", no change is determined, and the reserved change value is set to 0. If the value is between "51" and "100", change A is determined, and the reserved change value is set to 1. If the value is between "101" and "198", it is determined that the white circle pattern will be changed to a green circle pattern, and the reserved change value is set to 2.

If the winning command type is a super reach miss, if the value of the performance counter 223h is between "0" and "30", no change is determined and the reserved change value is set to 0. If it is between "31" and "90", change A is determined and the reserved change value is set to 1. If it is between "91" and "198", change B is determined and the reserved change value is set to 2.

When the winning command type is a normal reach jackpot, if the value of the performance counter 223h is between "0" and "20", no change is determined and the reserved change value is set to 0. If it is between "21" and "90", change A is determined and the reserved change value is set to 1. If it is between "91" and "198", change B is determined and the reserved change value is set to 2.

When the winning command type is a super reach jackpot, if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-10", no change is determined and the reserved change value is set to 0. If it is any of "11-100", change A is determined and the reserved change value is set to 1. If it is any of "101-189", change B is determined and the reserved change value is set to 2. If it is any of "190-198", it is determined that the white circle pattern will be changed to a red circle pattern and the reserved change value is set to 3.

In this way, by receiving a winning command, the color of the reserved symbol is changed and displayed according to the content, so that it is possible to predict the win/lose judgment result corresponding to the reserved symbol stored in reserve, not only from the special symbol being displayed in a changing state, but also from the displayed reserved symbol. Also, since it is possible to notify the player in advance that the display will be in a reach display mode when it is changed in change B, it is possible to make the player expect that the change will start even before the special symbol changes, if it is stored in reserve, and even if a change of the special symbol that results in a loss is executed during that time, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Furthermore, by setting a reserved change value for each reach type, it is possible to develop the same reserved change into a reach effect via different execution effects, making it possible to attract the player with an unexpected effect.

The hold display mode selection table 222c is a table for selecting from multiple modes prepared according to the hold changes displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Figure 364 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this reserved presentation mode selection table 222c. In the reserved presentation mode selection table 222c, the reserved presentation mode is set according to the reserved change value (range) acquired in the reserved change selection table 222b (see Z2404 in Figure 403). Specifically, when the reserved change value is "0", the reserved presentation mode is determined (selected) to be normal mode. Normal mode is a mode in which the interval between the display range of the reserved pattern and the variable lid pattern P is variable by one when all the displayed reserved patterns have not been changed (state) and the number of reserved balls is four or more (see Figure 347 (b)).

When the reserved change value is either "1" or "2", the reserved presentation mode is determined (selected) to be the preview A mode. Preview A mode is a reserved presentation mode in which there is no gap between the display range of the reserved pattern and the variable lid pattern P when the number of reserved balls is four or more and the reserved pattern is set to any change (any of changes A to C) (see FIG. 348(a)). Note that FIG. 348(a) is not, strictly speaking, a display mode representing the preview A mode, but is an example of a display mode of the reserved presentation mode of the preview B mode described below. In the preview A mode, the content of the comment displayed in the state of FIG. 348(a) is different. In the preview A mode, when a reserved ball is generated and a reserved pattern is displayed after the color-changed reserved pattern, one variable lid pattern P is also hidden accordingly (for example, when one reserved ball increases (generates) from the state of FIG. 348(a), the variable lid pattern P with the number 5 is hidden), and a comment indicating the expectation of a jackpot for the color-changed reserved pattern is displayed in a speech bubble. In this way, the preview A mode is configured to notify the expectation of a jackpot for the changed reserved ball each time a reserved ball is generated, so that the player is played in such a way that a reserved ball is generated after the color of the reserved pattern is changed.

When the reserved change value is "3", the reserved presentation mode is decided to be the notice B mode. Notice B mode is a mode in which, like notice A mode, when there is a change in the reserved pattern being displayed and the number of reserved balls is four or more, if any change (either change A, change B, or change C) is set to the reserved pattern being displayed (state), and when the number of reserved balls is four or more, the reserved pattern and the variable lid pattern P are displayed with no gap between them (see FIG. 348(a)), or the reserved pattern is displayed on the display range of the variable lid pattern P (see FIG. 348(b)).

By configuring it in this way, not only can the color of the reserved pattern be changed, but the display range of the variable lid pattern P can be changed in various ways by increasing or decreasing the number of reserved balls, and depending on the content of the change, the fun of predicting the result of the win/loss judgment is expanded, making it possible to attract players. Also, unlike the preview A mode, this is a reservation presentation that makes the player play so as not to generate any more reserved balls, and it makes the player suspend the game (the operation of firing game balls) and concentrate on the start of the change (dynamic display) of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern whose color has changed, thereby increasing anticipation. This can increase the excitement of the game.

The reserved lid range selection table 222d has multiple data tables set for obtaining reserved lid range values required to set the display range of the variable lid pattern P displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81.

Here we will explain the special effects that take place during normal mode. In normal mode, the special effects include short-term winning effects, hold effects during reach, and lucky hold effects.

The short-term winning effect is an effect that is executed when the time required for the number of reserved balls to go from 0 to 1 reserved ball being stored and then to 4 is less than 5 seconds. In normal mode, the space between the reserved lid pattern P and the reserved pattern is set to the space of one reserved ball (the reserved lid pattern P is displayed variably), but in the short-term winning effect, the number of reserved lid patterns P is displayed variably so that the space between the reserved lid pattern P and the reserved pattern is two balls, as shown in Figure 349 (a), and a girl character J0 is displayed to indicate that this is a short-term winning effect, and the comment "fast" is displayed. In the short-term winning effect, when the game state is normal, no other special effects are being executed (the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of reserved balls changes from 0 to 1 or more, if the number of reserved balls becomes 4 before the short-term winning timer 223q, which measures the elapsed time, has reached 5 seconds, the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 1 (see Z2425 in FIG. 404) and execution begins (see FIG. 349(a)), and when the short-term winning timer 223q has reached 5 seconds, the special effect status memory area is set to 0 (see Z2606 in FIG. 407), and execution ends.

The pending effect during reach is an effect that sets a notice display mode that prompts the player to play to accumulate the number of pending balls to a predetermined number (for example, 6 balls in Fig. 352(a)) during the reach fluctuation. When the fluctuation type is reach, this pending effect during reach is executed by lottery based on the pending effect lottery table 222m described later, and when execution is confirmed, the value of the pending effect start timer 223r, which is set based on the fluctuation type by the reach start time calculation table 222n described later, becomes 0 after a certain time (for example, 10 seconds), and when no other special effects are being executed (the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0) at the timing when the reach effect starts, the special effect status memory area is set to 2 (see Z2327 in Fig. 399) to start execution (see Fig. 352(a)), and ends when the fluctuation ends.

The lucky reserved effect is an effect in which the number of reserved balls (reserved patterns) stored (displayed) is stored, and when a jackpot (specific judgment result) occurs, a predetermined mark pattern (see FIG. 353(a)) is displayed in the reserved pattern display area corresponding to the number of reserved balls stored at the time the jackpot reserved ball entered the ball entrance, and a preview display mode is displayed to encourage the player to play so that the reserved balls reach the mark pattern. When the reserved patterns reach the mark pattern, as shown in FIG. 353(b), pressing the frame button 22 executes an effect that notifies the player of the current game state (either a guaranteed game state (special game state) or a low probability game state (normal game state)). In the lucky hold effect, when no other special effects are being executed (the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0) and the lucky hold memory value 223p is stored, which is stored when the value of the number of reserved balls is 5 or more when a jackpot is determined based on the result of a win/loss judgment from a previous start-up win, a lottery is drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p described below to determine whether or not the effect can be executed, and if execution is allowed, the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 3 (see Z2307 in Figure 398), and execution begins (see Figure 353 (a)), and the effect ends when the next fluctuation begins.

In this way, even during normal mode where there are no changes in reserved balls, various reserved effects related to the reserved ball patterns can be provided depending on the time interval between starting winning, the number of reserved balls during reach fluctuation, the stored contents of the winning/losing judgment results from past starting winning balls, etc., thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Figure 365 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the reserved lid range selection table 222d. The reserved lid range selection table 222d includes a normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1, a predicted A mode reserved lid range selection table 222d2, a predicted B mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3, a reserved lid range selection table 222d4 for short-term winning, a reserved lid range selection table 222d5 during reach performance, and a reserved lid range selection table 222d6 for time reduction.

The normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1 is a table used to obtain the reserved lid range value when the reserved performance mode is normal mode. Figure 365 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1. In the normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1, the reserved lid range value is obtained for the reserved ball number value (range). In addition, the normal mode includes a case where the reserved lid range value is obtained (see Z2354 in Figure 400) when the special performance is not being performed (the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 0) and the game state is a normal state (low probability game state (low probability of jackpot and non-time-saving game state)), and a case where the reserved lid range value is obtained (see Z2346 in Figure 400) when the lucky reserved performance is being performed (the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 3).

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is between 0 and 3, the reserved lid range value is 4. If the number of reserved balls is 4, the reserved lid range value is 3. If the number of reserved balls is 3, the reserved lid range value is 2. If the number of reserved balls is 2, the reserved lid range value is 1. If the number of reserved balls is 1, the reserved lid range value is 0. If the number of reserved balls is 0, the reserved lid range value is 0.

The predicted A mode reserve lid range selection table 222d2 is a table used to obtain the reserve lid range value when the reserve presentation mode is the predicted A mode. Figure 365 (c) shows a schematic of the contents of the predicted A mode reserve lid range selection table 222d2. In the predicted A mode reserve lid range selection table 222d2, the reserve lid range value is obtained (see Z2351 in Figure 400) for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is between "0 and 3", the reserved lid range value obtained is 4. If the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value obtained is 4. If the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved lid range value obtained is 3. If the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved lid range value obtained is 2. If the number of reserved balls is "1", the reserved lid range value obtained is 1. If the number of reserved balls is "0", the reserved lid range value obtained is 0.

The preview B mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3 is a table used to obtain the reserved lid range value when the reserved performance mode is the preview B mode.

Figure 365 (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the B-mode advance notice reserved lid range selection table 222d3. In the B-mode advance notice reserved lid range selection table 222d3, the reserved lid range value is obtained (see Z2349 in Figure 400) for the reserved ball count value (range) and the reserved advance counter value (range).

Specifically, if the reserved ball count is "0-4", and the reserved ball advance notice counter value is "0-4", the reserved ball lid range value is 4. If the reserved ball count is "5-8", and the reserved ball advance notice counter value is "1-4", the reserved ball lid range value is 4, and the reserved ball advance notice counter value is "5", the reserved ball lid range value is 3, and the reserved ball advance notice counter value is "6", the reserved ball lid range value is 2, and the reserved ball advance notice counter value is "7", the reserved ball lid range value is 1, and the reserved ball advance notice counter value is "8", the reserved ball lid range value is 0.

The reserve lid range selection table 222d4 for short-term winning (Figure 366 (a)) is a table used to obtain the reserve lid range value when executing a short-term winning performance. Figure 366 (a) shows a schematic diagram of the contents of the reserve lid range selection table 222d4 for short-term winning. In the reserve lid range selection table 222d4 for short-term winning, the reserve lid range value is obtained (see Z2342 in Figure 400) for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value obtained is 2. If the number of reserved balls is "5", the reserved lid range value obtained is 1. If the number of reserved balls is "6 to 8", the reserved lid range value obtained is 0.

The reserve lid range selection table 222d5 during reach performance is a table used to obtain the reserve lid range value in the case of a reserve performance during reach. Figure 366 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserve lid range selection table 222d5 during reach performance. In the reserve lid range selection table 222d5 during reach performance, the reserve lid range value is obtained (see Z2344 in Figure 400) for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, if the reserved ball count value is "0 to 8", the reserved ball lid range value obtained is 2.

The time-saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6 is a table used to obtain the reserved lid range value when a special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0), the reserved effect mode is normal mode, and the game state is in the time-saving state (the value of the time-saving counter is other than 0).

Figure 366 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6. In the time-saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6, the reserved lid range value is obtained for the reserved ball count value (range) (see Z2353 in Figure 400).

Specifically, if the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 6", the reserved lid range value obtained is 2. If the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the reserved lid range value obtained is 1. If the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the reserved lid range value obtained is 0.

By configuring it in this way, the display range of the variable cover pattern P can be changed in various ways depending on the win/loss judgment at the time of the initial winning and the reserved performance switched according to the type of variation, thereby creating a performance effect that increases the participation of the player.

The reserved lid command selection table 222e is a table used to select a command for setting the display range of the variable lid pattern P displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 from the reserved lid range value obtained in the reserved lid range selection table 222d.

Figure 367 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserved lid command selection table 222e. The reserved lid command selection table 222e sets the reserved lid command to be sent to the display control device for the reserved lid range value (range) obtained by the reserved lid range selection table 222d.

Specifically, when the reserved lid range value is "0", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF00, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is the shortest display (see FIG. 351 (a)). When the reserved lid range value is "1", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF01, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 1 (only the reserved 8 area). When the reserved lid range value is "2", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF02, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 2 (reserved 7 to 8 area (see FIG. 349 (a))). When the reserved lid range value is "3", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF03, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 3 (reserved 6 to 8 area (see FIG. 350 (a))). When the reserved lid range value is "4", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF04, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 4 (reserved 5 to 8 area (see FIG. 348 (a))).

The reserved lid command is set by the reserved lid setting process (Z2229) executed in the winning command receiving process (Z2209) at the start of winning, and by the reserved lid setting process (Z2229) executed in the fluctuation pattern receiving process (Z2202) at the start of fluctuation. Therefore, the display of the variable lid pattern P can be changed by setting the display reserved lid command based on the reserved lid range value (see Z2355 in Figure 400) each time the number of reserved balls changes.

The reserved lid color change selection table 222f is a data table for determining the reserved lid pattern P corresponding to the area in which the reserved pattern is displayed when the reserved balls exceed the specified number (four in the example shown in FIG. 348(a)) when a notice performance is being performed suggesting that the reserved number shown in FIG. 348(a) will not be increased. The reserved lid pattern P determined by the reserved lid color change selection table 222f is displayed in a specific color (with a transparent green interior) different from the normal display mode (normally, a black frame with a transparent white interior and a number indicating the reserved number corresponding to the reserved display area is displayed inside). The reserved lid color change selection table 222f is a table for selecting a command for setting the color change range of the reserved lid pattern P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved notice counter 223g for recognizing the display position of the color-changed reserved pattern described later and the current number of reserved balls.

Figure 367 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the reserved lid color change selection table 222f. When the reserved performance mode is the notice B mode, the reserved lid color change selection table 222f specifies the color change range for the value (range) of the reserved notice counter 223g and the value (range) of the reserved ball count, and sets a reserved lid command (see Z2348 in Figure 400) to change the display range of the variable lid pattern P from the normal white display mode to green (see Figure 348 (b)) according to the change range.

Specifically, when the value of the reserved ball notice counter 223g is "0-4", if the value of the number of reserved balls is "0-4", the reserved ball lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the reserved ball lid command is determined to be BF10, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the reserved ball lid command is determined to be BF11, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 6. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the reserved ball lid command is determined to be BF12, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the reserved ball lid command is determined to be BF13, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 8.

When the value of the reserved ball notice counter 223g is "5", if the value of the reserved ball count is "5", the reserved ball lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the reserved ball count is "5", the reserved ball lid command is determined to be BF20 and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6.

If the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF21, and the color change range is specified as the number of reserved balls in the range from 6 to 7. If the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF22, and the color change range is specified as the number of reserved balls in the range from 6 to 8.

When the value of the reserved ball notice counter 223g is "6", if the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the reserved lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF30 and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF31 and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 7 to 8.

When the value of the reserved ball notice counter 223g is "7", if the value of the reserved ball count is "7", the reserved ball lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the reserved ball count is "8", the reserved ball lid command is determined to be BF40 and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 8.

When the value of the reserved ball notice counter 223g is "8", if the reserved ball count value is "8", the reserved ball lid command is not set and there is no color change range.

In this way, by changing the display mode in an area other than the reserved pattern that is changed depending on the judgment result of the previous winning (prediction judgment), it is possible to attract more attention from the player, and at the same time, by allowing the player to freely decide the degree to which the number of reserved balls should be increased depending on whether or not to stop shooting, it becomes possible to enjoy a wide range of reserved pattern modes and future change notice performances.

The lucky reserved command table 222g is a table for selecting a command that changes the display mode of the variable lid pattern P displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls in question.

Figure 368 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the lucky reserve command table 222g. When the lucky reserve effect is in progress, the lucky reserve command table 222g stores the area of the target reserved ball count as the lucky reserve memory value 223p, and the display reserve lid command is set based on that value (see Z2306 in Figure 398).

Specifically, when the lucky reserved memory value 223p is 5, the reserved lid command FB50 is determined, and the area of the variable lid pattern P number 5 is changed to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky reserved memory value 223p is 6, the reserved lid command FB51 is determined, and the area of the variable lid pattern P number 6 is changed to be surrounded by a circle (see FIG. 353 (a)). When the lucky reserved memory value 223p is 7, the reserved lid command FB52 is determined, and the area of the variable lid pattern P number 7 is changed to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky reserved memory value 223p is 8, the reserved lid command FB53 is determined, and the area of the variable lid pattern P number 8 is changed to be surrounded by a circle.

In this way, by announcing the number of reserved balls that resulted in a jackpot as a result of the previous initial winning, interest in the game is increased, and at the same time, when the number of reserved balls is small (less than 5), it is possible to encourage the player to try to win, resulting in a performance that improves operation.

The background mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the background to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the background mode memory area 223i. Figure 369 (a) shows a schematic diagram of the contents of the background mode selection table 222h. In the background mode selection table 222h, a background mode is selected according to the value of the background mode memory area 223i.

Specifically, when the value of the background mode memory area 223i is 0, background A (ocean background) is determined, when the value of the background mode memory area 223i is 1, background B (mountain background) is determined, when the value of the background mode memory area 223i is 2, background C (river background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode memory area 223i is 3, background D (city background) is determined.

The reserved character selection table 222i is a table for selecting (determining) the content (type) of the reserved character (girl) to be displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 based on the background, reserved performance mode, and performance counter 223h.

Figure 369(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserved character selection table 222i. In the reserved character selection table 222i, the reserved character contents are set (see Z2363 in Figure 401) for the background mode stored in the background mode memory area 223i, the reserved presentation mode stored in the reserved presentation mode memory area 223m, and the value (range) of the presentation counter 223h. In addition, images that are easily identifiable by the player are provided for the reserved characters, such as J0 being a girl with short hair (see Figure 347(b)), J1 being a girl with tied hair (see Figure 350(a)), J2 being a girl with long hair (see Figure 350(b)), and J3 being a girl with long blonde hair (not shown).

Specifically, when the background mode is "Background A" and the reserved performance mode is "Normal mode", if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 150", J0 (see FIG. 347(b)) is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "151 to 189", J1 (see FIG. 350(a)) is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 350(b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the reserved performance mode is "Preview A mode" or "Preview B mode", if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "100 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character.

When the background mode is "Background B", "Background C", or "Background D", and the reserved performance mode is "Normal mode", if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 150", J0 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "151 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character. When the reserved performance mode is "Preview A mode" or "Preview B mode", if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "100 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character.

In this way, by determining the reserved character with high expectations based on the reserved performance mode and background that have changed since the start winning, it is possible to display a reserved performance with high expectations without compromising the atmosphere of the background performance. In addition, by looking at the changes in the reserved pattern and the changes in the reserved character, the player can recognize the high expectations of the announcement.

In addition, historical information such as the number of changes that have been made as the game is played, the number of jackpots, the number of times a super reach has been made, and the number of points obtained by obtaining a symbol or character that is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the game presentation, may be stored, and the character that is selected may be varied taking this historical information into consideration. By configuring in this way, the character that is selected can be changed the more the game is played, preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

The pachinko machine 10 may also be equipped with a real-time clock (RTC) so that the character selected can be varied based on date and time information, etc. By configuring the machine in this way, the character selected can be varied based on the time that has passed since the machine was installed, preventing players from becoming bored with the game.

The reserved character change table 222j is a table for selecting the content of the reserved character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 based on the background, reserved performance mode, current reserved character, and performance counter 223h.

Figure 370 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserved character change table 222j. In the reserved character selection table 222i, the reserved character to be changed is set for the background mode stored in the background mode memory area 223i, the reserved performance mode stored in the reserved performance mode memory area 223m, the current reserved character in the display mode, and the value (range) of the performance counter 223h. The reserved character change is selected when the start winning occurs when the number of reserved balls is at the upper limit value and an over winning occurs (Z2366: Yes), and a display character command is set (see Z2267 in Figure 401). In addition, if the selected character is different from the reserved character currently displayed, the character will be changed (changed), and if the selected character is the same as the currently displayed character, the reserved character will not be changed (changed).

Specifically, when the background mode is "Background A", when the reserved performance mode is "Normal mode", and when the current reserved character is "J0", if the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 180", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "181 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 351 (b)) is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "191 to 189", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the currently reserved character is "J2", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the reserved performance mode is either "Preview A" or "Preview B", and the currently reserved character is "J0", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 80", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "81 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the currently reserved character is "J1", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 90", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "91 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the currently reserved character is "J2", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

When the background mode is "Background B", "Background C", or "Background D", and the reserved character mode is "Normal mode", if the current reserved character is "J0", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-150", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "151-199", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the current reserved character is "J1", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-170", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "171-199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the current reserved character is "J3", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the reserved character is either "Preview A" or "Preview B", if the currently reserved character is "J0", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-50", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "51-189", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the currently reserved character is "J1", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-70", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "71-199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the currently reserved character is "J3", and the value of the performance counter 223h is any of "0-199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

In this way, by changing the reserved character due to an over win, the player has a means of checking the winning or losing result for the current number of reserved balls by the over win, which can increase interest in the game. In addition, the reserved character to be changed is set to a character with higher expectations after the change than before the change, and when the reserved presentation mode is not in normal mode, the rate at which the reserved character is changed is set high, so that when there is a change in the reserved presentation mode, the player has a means of knowing the winning or losing result through a means to intentionally cause an over win, making it possible to provide gameplay that increases operation.

The speech bubble selection table 222k has multiple data tables set for setting the speech bubble (comment) content (see FIG. 348(a)) to be displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81.

Figure 371 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the speech bubble selection table 222k. The speech bubble selection table 222k includes a normal speech bubble selection table 222k1, a notice A speech bubble selection table 222k2, a notice B speech bubble selection table 222k3, a short-term winning speech bubble selection table 222k4, a reach performance speech bubble selection table 222k5, a lucky reserved speech bubble selection table 222k6, and a time-saving speech bubble selection table 222k7. The speech bubble content that is set is the content of the comment display uttered by the reserved character in the character display area C.

The normal speech bubble selection table 222k1 is a table used to obtain the speech bubble content when a special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0), the pending effect mode is normal mode (see FIG. 347(b)), and the game status is normal.

Figure 371 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal speech bubble selection table 222k1. The normal speech bubble selection table 222k1 obtains speech bubble content for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2393 in Figure 402).

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is any value between "0" and "4", no speech bubble content is obtained (see FIG. 347(b)), if the number of reserved balls is "5", the speech bubble content obtained is YES, if the number of reserved balls is "6", two more speech bubble content is obtained, if the number of reserved balls is "7", one more speech bubble content is obtained, and if the number of reserved balls is "8", the speech bubble content obtained is MAX (see FIG. 351(a)).

The notice A speech bubble selection table 222k2 is a table used to obtain speech bubble content when the pending presentation mode is notice A mode (see FIG. 348(a)).

Figure 371 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the notice A speech bubble selection table 222k2. The notice A speech bubble selection table 222k2 obtains speech bubble contents for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the result of the winning information command success/failure determination (see Z2390 in Figure 402).

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is between "0" and "3", no speech bubble content is obtained. If the number of reserved balls is "4", if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, the speech bubble content obtained is "Excited", and if the result is a miss, the speech bubble content obtained is "Excited". If the number of reserved balls is "5", if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, the speech bubble content obtained is "Stay tuned", and if the result is a miss, the speech bubble content obtained is "Stay tuned". If the number of reserved balls is "6", if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, the speech bubble content obtained is "Expectation level 70%?", and if the result is a miss, the speech bubble content obtained is "Expectation level 60%?". If the number of reserved balls is "7", if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, the speech bubble content obtained is "Expectation level 80%?", and if the result is a miss, the speech bubble content obtained is "Expectation level 70%?". If the number of reserved balls is "8", if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, the speech bubble content obtained is "It's super hot!" If it's wrong, the speech bubble will say Something is going to happen!

Although it is configured in this manner, the notice A speech bubble selection table 222k2 can further set speech bubble content by referring to the value (range) of the presentation counter 223h in addition to the value (range) of the reserved ball count and the result of the winning information command hit/fail judgment, to create a presentation that expresses various expectations.

The notice B speech bubble selection table 222k3 is a table used to obtain speech bubble content when the pending presentation mode is notice B mode (see FIG. 348(b)).

Figure 371 (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the notice B speech bubble selection table 222k3. In the notice B speech bubble selection table 222k3, speech bubble contents are obtained (see Z2388 in Figure 402) for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the reserved performance counter.

Specifically, if the reserved ball count is between "0" and "4", the speech bubble content is as is (see FIG. 348(a)); if the reserved ball count is "5", and the reserved performance counter value is between "0" and "4", the speech bubble content is OVER (see FIG. 348(b)); if the reserved performance counter value is "5", the speech bubble content is STOP; if the reserved ball count is "6", and the reserved performance counter value is between "0" and "5", the speech bubble content is OVER; if the reserved performance counter value is "6", the speech bubble content is STOP; if the reserved ball count is "7", and the reserved performance counter value is between "0" and "6", the speech bubble content is OVER; if the reserved performance counter value is "7", the speech bubble content is STOP; if the reserved ball count is "8", the speech bubble content is MAX.

By configuring it in this way, when a highly anticipated change in the reserved pattern occurs, the winning can be recognized from the content of the speech bubble, and the player can be informed of the decision of whether or not to continue shooting balls beyond the current value of the number of reserved balls and increase the number of reserved balls, preventing unnecessary shooting and allowing for efficient gameplay. Also, when a highly anticipated change in the reserved pattern occurs, the content of the speech bubble can be changed to set it so that shooting continues.

The short-term winning speech bubble selection table 222k4 is a table used to obtain speech bubble content when a short-term winning occurs (see FIG. 349(a)).

Figure 372 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the short-term winning speech bubble selection table 222k4. The short-term winning speech bubble selection table 222k4 obtains speech bubble content for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2382 in Figure 402).

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is "4", the speech bubble content is "Fast!" (see FIG. 349(a)), when the number of reserved balls is "5", the speech bubble content is "Very fast!", when the number of reserved balls is "6", the speech bubble content is "Super fast!", when the number of reserved balls is "7", the speech bubble content is "Sound-speed!", and when the number of reserved balls is "8", the speech bubble content is "Fast!".

By configuring it this way, the interval between starting wins is short, and the player can recognize the degree to which the number of reserved balls has increased by a large amount from the speech bubble of the reserved character, enhancing the presentation effect.

The reach effect speech bubble selection table 222k5 is a table used to obtain speech bubble content when a reach effect is in progress (see FIG. 352(a)).

Figure 372 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reach effect speech bubble selection table 222k5. The reach effect speech bubble selection table 222k5 obtains speech bubble contents (Z2384 in Figure 402) for the value (range) of the reserved effect counter and the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, if the reserved effect counter value is "0", and the reserved ball count is any of "0-4", the speech bubble content is "Save up to 6!" (see FIG. 352(a)), if it is "5", the speech bubble content is "One more ball left", if it is "6", the speech bubble content is "OK", if it is any of "7-8", the speech bubble content is "OVER", if the reserved effect counter 223h value is "other than 0", and the reserved ball count is any of "0-4", the speech bubble content is "Save up to 6!", if it is "5", the speech bubble content is "One more ball left", if it is "6", the speech bubble content is "Well done" (see FIG. 352(b)), if it is any of "7-8", the speech bubble content is "OVER".

By configuring it this way, by changing the speech bubble of the reserved character during the reach performance, it is possible to encourage the player to shoot if the number of reserved balls is low, and by changing the speech bubble during the reach performance while the reserved performance is being executed, it is possible to play without getting bored.

The lucky hold speech bubble selection table 222k6 is a table used to obtain speech bubble content when the lucky hold performance is in progress (see FIG. 353(a)).

Figure 373 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the lucky reserved ball bubble selection table 222k6. In the lucky reserved ball bubble selection table 222k6, the bubble contents are obtained (Z2386 in Figure 402) for the value of the lucky reserved memory value 223p, which is set as the lucky reserved ball count (see Z2444 in Z268) to a value corresponding to the reserved ball value when a win/loss judgment result of a previous winning result becomes a jackpot, the value (range) of the reserved ball count, and the value (range) of the reserved change value.

Specifically, if the value of the lucky reserved memory value 223p is "5", if the reserved ball count is "0-4" and the reserved change value is "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Aim for 5", if the reserved ball count is "5" and the reserved change value is "0", the speech bubble content obtained is "OK", if the reserved change value is "1-2", the speech bubble content obtained is "GOOD", if the reserved change value is "3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Well done", and if the reserved ball count is "6-8" and the reserved change value is "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "OVER".

When the value of the lucky reserved memory value 223p is "6", if the reserved ball count is "0-5" and the reserved change value is "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Aim for 6" (see FIG. 353(a)). When the reserved ball count is "6", if the reserved change value is "0", the speech bubble content obtained is "OK". When the reserved change value is "1-2", the speech bubble content obtained is "GOOD". When the reserved change value is "3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Well done". When the reserved ball count is "7-8" and the reserved change value is "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "OVER".

When the value of the lucky reserved memory value 223p is "7", if the reserved ball count value is any of "0-6" and the reserved change value is any of "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Aim for 7", when the reserved ball count value is "7" and the reserved change value is "0", the speech bubble content obtained is "OK", when the reserved change value is any of "1-2", the speech bubble content obtained is "GOOD", when the reserved change value is "3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Well done", and when the reserved ball count value is "8" and the reserved change value is any of "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "OVER".

When the value of the lucky reserved memory value 223p is "8", if the reserved ball count value is any of "0-7" and the reserved change value is any of "0-3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Aim for 8", when the reserved ball count value is "8" and the reserved change value is "0", the speech bubble content obtained is "OK", when the reserved change value is any of "1-2", the speech bubble content obtained is "GOOD", and when the reserved change value is "3", the speech bubble content obtained is "Well done".

In this way, by changing the content of the speech bubble depending on the number of lucky reserved balls, the player can enjoy playing by aiming for the number of reserved balls that should win. If the result of the lottery for the number of reserved balls that was thus started to win is a jackpot within the range of 5 to 8 reserved balls, the display mode of the lucky reserved balls can be updated, allowing the player to continue playing without getting bored.

The time-saving speech bubble selection table 222k6 is a table used to obtain the speech bubble content when a special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0), the pending effect mode is normal mode, and the game state is in the time-saving state (the value of the time-saving counter is other than 0).

Figure 373 (b) is a schematic diagram of the time-saving speech bubble selection table 222k7. The time-saving speech bubble selection table 222k7 obtains speech bubble content (Z2392 in Figure 402) for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls is between "0" and "5", the bubble content will include up to 6 (see FIG. 349 (b)), and if the number of reserved balls is between "6" and "7", the bubble content will read "OK".

By configuring it in this way, the optimal number of reserved balls during the time-saving period can be announced, and the player can understand the transition status of the number of reserved balls from the notification mode. If the optimal number of reserved balls can be maintained, it is possible to avoid situations where the fluctuation stops and a waiting state occurs, which is inefficient in terms of time, or the occurrence of an over-winning that occurs when the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is exceeded and a winning is started, and it can be used as a criterion for efficiently playing with the balls in hand.

The reach-in-progress performance selection table 222m is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the reach-in-progress hold display performance (see FIG. 352(a)) displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Figure 374 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this reach-in-progress performance selection table 222m. The reach-in-progress performance selection table 222m determines whether or not a reach-in-progress reserved performance can be executed based on the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the performance counter 223h. (See Z2324 in Figure 399) Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3," if the value of the performance counter 223h is "0 to 99," the reach-in-progress reserved performance is not displayed, and if it is "100 to 199," the reach-in-progress reserved performance can be displayed. When the value of the reserved balls is "4 to 5," if the value of the performance counter 223h is "0 to 140," the reach-in-progress reserved performance is not displayed, and if it is "141 to 199," the reach-in-progress reserved performance can be displayed. When the number of reserved balls is between "6" and "8", the pending effect during reach will not be displayed if the value of the effect counter 223h is between "0" and "199". In this way, by setting the rate at which the pending effect during reach is displayed high when the number of reserved balls is low, an effect is executed that encourages the player to save reserved balls when there are few balls reserved.

The reach start time calculation table 222n is a data table for determining the start time (start period) at which the pending effect during reach starts in the time (period) during the reach display mode in the variation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the reach display mode to be executed (display mode in which the patterns in the left and right pattern rows are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the same third pattern). The reach start time calculation table 222n selects a pending effect start timer based on the possibility of execution of the pending effect during reach (see FIG. 352(a)) obtained by the reach effect selection table 222m and the variation type.

Figure 374 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this reach start time calculation table 222n. The reach start time calculation table 222n sets the pending effect start timer based on the variation type when it is determined that the pending effect during reach obtained by the reach effect selection table 222m can be executed (see Z2326 in Figure 399).

Specifically, if the fluctuation type is normal reach jackpot A, the reserved performance start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is super reach jackpot A, the reserved performance start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is super reach jackpot B, the reserved performance start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is super reach jackpot C, the reserved performance start timer is determined to be 12,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is super reach jackpot D, If the fluctuation type is a super reach big win E, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is a normal reach miss A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is a normal reach miss B, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms, if the fluctuation type is a normal reach miss C, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10,000 ms.

The lucky reserve selection table 222p obtains whether or not a lucky reserve effect (see FIG. 353(a)) can be executed based on the number of reserved balls and the effect counter 223h. FIG. 374(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this lucky reserve selection table 222p. The lucky reserve selection table 222p obtains whether or not a lucky reserve effect can be executed for the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h (see Z2304 in FIG. 398).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 2", if the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the lucky reserved effect is not executed, and if it is "100 to 199", the lucky reserved effect can be executed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4", if the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 189", the lucky reserved effect is not executed, and if it is "190 to 199", the lucky reserved effect can be executed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5 to 8", if the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 199", the lucky reserved effect is not executed. In this way, by setting the rate at which the lucky reserved effect is executed high when the number of reserved balls is low, an effect is executed that encourages the player to save reserved balls when there are few reserved balls.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 363(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a winning information storage area 223f, a reserved notice counter 223g, a performance counter 223h, a background mode memory area 223i, a SW effective time counter 223k, a reserved performance mode memory area 223m, a special performance status memory area 223n, a lucky reserved memory value 223p, a short-term winning timer 223q, a reserved performance start timer 223r, a sensor effective time counter 223s, a touch counter 223t, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is a display of the first special pattern variation performed by the first pattern display device 37 (and the third pattern display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the first special pattern variation performance reserved in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times for each type of special pattern, and is updated according to the timing of the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, such as when a winning information command or a variation pattern command is received.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b, like the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, is a display of the second special pattern changes performed by the first pattern display device 37 (and the third pattern display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of wait times) for the second special pattern change performance reserved in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times for each type of special pattern, and is updated according to the timing of the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, such as when a winning information command or a change pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls for each type of special pattern using the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b.

Specifically, when the main control unit 110 detects a start winning and adds to the number of reserved balls in the variable display, or when the main control unit 110 executes a variable display for a special pattern and subtracts the number of reserved balls, it sends a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after the addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, and stores it in the counter corresponding to the command, either the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see Z2207 in FIG. 396). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the values can be updated in synchronization with the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, and transmits a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of the image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a changes its value in synchronization with the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b changes its value in synchronization with the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or a second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see Z2221 in FIG. 397), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see Z2502 in FIG. 406). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (Z2102) of the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern is displayed in the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command for a special pattern transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see Z2204 in FIG. 3960), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see Z2506 in FIG. 406). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

The winning information storage area 223f has one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 detects an initial winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the main control device 110 predicts (estimates) various information (whether or not, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern) that will be obtained when a lottery for the special symbol corresponding to the initial winning is performed from the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained in response to the initial winning, and the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the predicted various information by a winning information command.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command, various information notified by the winning information command (win or lose, type of jackpot in case of jackpot, and variation pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the type of ball entry port where the ball was detected (first ball entry port 64 or second ball entry port 640), starting from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winning events is stored, and the first area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning event.

In this first control example, the main control device 110 is configured to set a winning information command based on various information (win or lose, type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery is held for a special pattern corresponding to the start winning, and notify the audio lamp control device 113, but other configurations may be used.

For example, when a start winning occurs, a setting means may be provided that sets a winning information command by adding various information already stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the various information predicted in response to the start winning, and a determination means may be provided that, when a winning information command is received, determines whether the various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f matches the various information (winning information) included in the received winning information command. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f has been stored appropriately.

In addition, in this first control example, a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 when a new start winning occurs, but the timing of notifying the winning information command to the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (the timing when the winning information command is set). For example, a configuration may be used in which a storage means is provided to temporarily store the winning information command, and the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 periodically (for example, every 5 seconds) when the game conditions change (for example, when the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.) in addition to the timing of the start winning, or when the special pattern starts (or stops) changing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately execute a performance (so-called pre-reading performance) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, the setting of the presentation mode, such as changing the display color of the reserved symbols, is executed as a look-ahead presentation based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f. In this way, by executing various presentations (look-ahead presentations) based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can have a sense of anticipation that each reserved ball will be a jackpot even before the variable display begins. It is also possible to execute a long-term presentation using multiple variable display periods.

The reserved ball number value is set (see Z2406 in FIG. 403) when the reserved ball number value acquired from the change type of the received special pattern winning command is other than 0 (Z2405: No) and the reserved pattern has changed (see FIG. 348(a)) in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 403) executed when a change in the reserved color of the reserved pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is executed, even if the number of reserved balls changes (the display position of the reserved pattern whose reserved color has changed as the reserved balls are consumed also changes). The reserved ball number value is set (see Z2406 in FIG. 403) when the reserved ball number value at the time of the start winning is 4 as shown in FIG. 348(a), and the reserved ball number value is set (see Z2406 in FIG. 403). For example, as shown in FIG. 348(a), if the reserved ball number value at the time of the start winning is 4, the reserved ball number value is set to 4. The set hold notification counter 223g is decremented by 1 each time the special pattern starts to change during the change pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) that is executed when the change starts, and if the decremented value is 0 (Z2225: YES), the hold change value is set to 0 and the hold display mode memory area is cleared (Z2226), setting the above-mentioned hold display mode to normal mode.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used to select various effects. Each time the main process is executed, it is repeatedly updated by incrementing by 1 within the range of 0 to 198. Specifically, the selection tables for various effects selected using the effect counter 223h include the reserved character change selection table 222b, the reserved character selection table 222i (reserved characters), the reserved character change table 222j (reserved characters), the in-reach effect selection table 222m (whether or not a reserved effect can be executed during a reach), and the lucky reserved selection table 222p (whether or not a lucky reserved effect can be executed), and various effects are selected depending on the value (range) of the effect counter 223h.

In addition, when making these selections, in order to avoid synchronization between the update cycles of the performance counter 223h and other counters and timer values, the update range is set to a prime number (199), so that the selection results are not biased towards a few selection results.

The background mode memory area 223i is a memory area in which the numerical values required to determine the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored. Regarding the switching of the background display mode, in the frame button input monitoring/performance process (Z2107), it is determined whether the demo screen is displayed in a standby state (Z2801), and if it is determined that the standby state is present (Z2801: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802: Yes), the contents of the background mode memory area 223i are set by adding 1 (Z2804), and a display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2804), and when the display switching command is sent to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. For the background image, different background images that can be recognized by the player are prepared, such as background A being the sea, background B being the mountains, background C being the river, and background D being the city.

The SW valid time counter 223k is a counter for counting the valid time (valid period) during which operation is possible in a performance involving pressing the frame button 22, which is performed during the fluctuation of a special pattern, etc. In the frame button input monitoring/performance process (Z2107), if the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No) and a fluctuation pattern involving pressing the frame button 22 is set (Z2803: Yes), the SW valid time counter 223k is set (Z2804) based on the set fluctuation pattern. If the set SW valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2802); if the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), if the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2806: Yes), and if a preview performance is in progress (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is reset (set to 0), a preview display command for display is set (Z2811), and the specified performance is executed.

The reserved performance mode memory area 223m stores information for distinguishing between multiple reserved notice modes prepared according to reserved changes when performing a notice performance related to the reserved pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 403) executed when a special symbol winning command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, if the pending notification counter 223g is 0 (Z2403: Yes), the pending presentation mode memory area 223m sets (Z2404) the pending presentation mode according to the value (range) of the pending change value acquired for the variation type of the received special symbol winning command. As described above, if the pending change value is "0", the pending presentation mode is set to normal mode, if the pending change value is "1-2", the notification A mode is set, and if the pending change value is "3", the notification B mode is set.

The contents of the pending presentation mode memory area 223m are such that, when the value of the pending notice counter 223g, which is decremented by 1 each time the special pattern starts to change, becomes 0 (Z2225: YES) during the change pattern receiving process (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) executed when the special pattern starts to change, the pending presentation mode memory area 223m changes the pending presentation mode to normal mode by setting the pending change value to 0 and clearing the pending presentation mode memory area 223m (Z2226).

The special effect status memory area 223n stores information for determining the content of the special effect executed when the reserved effect mode is normal mode. As described above, there are short-term winning effects (see FIG. 349(a)), reserved effects during reach (see FIG. 352(a)), and lucky reserved effects (see FIG. 353(a)). Special effects are executed according to changes in the special effect status memory area 223n. The special effect status is a status (state data) for indicating (determining) the type of reserved effect being executed.

In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed upon receiving a winning command, if the game state is normal (Z2421: Yes), the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2422: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is 4 (Z2423: Yes), and the value of the short-term winning timer, which counts the time (5 seconds) that has elapsed since the number of reserved balls of the special pattern was 0, is other than 0 (Z2424: Yes), then 1 is set in the special effect status memory area 223n (Z2425), and the short-term winning effect begins execution. On the other hand, during the short-term winning effect, if the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes) and the short-term winning timer is 0 (Z2605: Yes) in the short-term winning management process (Z2111), the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 0 (Z2606) and the short-term winning effect ends.

In the pending effect during reach setting process (Z2228) executed in the change pattern receiving process (Z2202) executed when the special symbol starts to change, if the type of change of the special symbol is a reach change (Z2321: Yes), the pending effect mode is in normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), it is determined that the effect can be executed by the pending effect selection table 222m. If this is the case (Z2325: Yes), the pending performance start timer 223r is set (Z2326) based on the variation type, and the special performance status memory area 223n is set to 2 (Z2327). Then, over time, in the pending performance management process during reach (Z2112), if the pending performance start timer 223r becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), a notice display command for performing the pending performance during reach is set (Z2706), and the pending performance during reach begins to be executed. When the pending performance during reach is being executed, at the timing when the variation of the special symbol ends (Z2707: Yes), the special performance status memory area 223n is set to 0 (Z2708), and the pending performance during reach ends.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227), if the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), the game is in normal mode (Z2302: Yes), the lucky hold memory value is 0 (Z2303: Yes), and the result of the execution effect drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p is approved (Z2305: Yes), 3 is set in the special effect status memory area 223n (Z2307), and the lucky hold effect begins to be executed. During the execution of the lucky hold effect, if the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227) at the start of the next change after the effect has started, the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 0 (Z2309), and the lucky hold effect ends.

The lucky reserved memory value 223p is a memory area in which the value of the reserved ball number at the time of winning corresponding to the reserved ball determined to be a jackpot is stored when the result of the winning information command output at the timing of the start winning is determined to be a jackpot (pre-reading determination). In the lucky reserved memory process (Z2408) executed in the winning command reception process (Z2209) executed at the time of the start winning, if the lottery result of the winning is a jackpot (Z2442: Yes), and the value of the reserved ball number is 5 or more (Z2443: Yes), the lucky reserved memory value 223p is set to the reserved ball number value (Z2444). Also, as described above, when the reserved performance mode becomes the lucky reserved performance, the display reserved lid command is set (see Z2306 in FIG. 398) based on the lucky reserved memory value 223p, and the lucky reserved performance is displayed (see FIG. 353(a)).

The short-term winning timer 223q is a timer for counting the elapsed time from when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern becomes 0 from 1 or more to when the number becomes 4 or more. When the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds as the timer value, and when it is other than 0 (Z2601: No), the short-term winning timer 223q is decremented by 1 (Z2602) until it becomes 0. As described above, when the reserved presentation mode becomes the short-term winning presentation (see FIG. 349(a)), the short-term winning presentation is displayed until the short-term winning timer 223q becomes 0. In this way, by performing the short-term winning presentation with the remaining time (remaining period) of the short-term winning timer 223q, the shorter (faster) the period until 4 balls are won, the longer the execution period of the short-term winning presentation becomes, and the player can recognize how fast it took to win 4 balls.

The short-term winning effect may be configured to run for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) after four balls have been won. This has the effect of making it easier for the player to recognize that four balls have been won within five seconds.

The hold effect start timer 223r is a timer for counting the timing to execute the hold effect during reach (see FIG. 352(a)), which is an effect related to the hold pattern, during the reach fluctuation of the special pattern.

In the pending effect start timer 223r, when the type of special pattern change is a reach change (Z2321: Yes) in the pending effect setting process during reach (Z2228) executed in the change pattern receiving process (Z2202) executed when the special pattern change starts, the pending effect mode is normal mode (Z2322: Yes), the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), and the possibility of executing the effect obtained from the pending effect selection table 222m is yes (Z2325: Yes), the timer value is set (Z2326) by the reach start time calculation table 222n.

When a timer value is set in the pending performance start timer 223r, if the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is not 2 (Z2701: Yes) and the pending performance start timer 223r is not 0 (Z2702: No), 1 is subtracted until the pending performance in reach is started in the pending performance management process (Z2112). Also, as described above, if the timer value after subtraction becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), no other special performance is being performed, and the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes), a notice display command for performing the pending performance in reach is set (Z2706), and the pending performance in reach starts to be executed.

The sensor effective time counter 223s is a counter that counts the time during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. In the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z2107), if the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No) and a preview performance display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor effective time counter 223s sets the sensor effective time set for the preview performance to the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823). If the set sensor effective time counter 223s is not 0, it is subtracted (Z2824), and during that time the touch sensor detection becomes valid. In addition, if the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes), the touch sensor is turned on (Z2825: Yes), and if the value of the touch counter 223t incremented by 1 (Z2826) reaches the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2809).

The touch counter 223t is a counter for counting the number of times that the touch sensor 290 detection is on during the period in which the touch sensor 290 detection is valid. In the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z2107), if the sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes) and the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: Yes), the touch counter 223t is incremented by 1 (Z2826) and reset (Z2829) if the incremented value is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes).

The other memory area 223z is an area where various data, flags, counters, etc. are set or stored in the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command memory area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command memory area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 396) of the voice lamp control unit 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing corresponding to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variable presentation) of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 375.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 141). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 390) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 140) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 375. FIG. 375 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with different lottery probabilities for a special jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for one special jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command is set in the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As such, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, this may deteriorate the processing performance of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated presentations.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, which are connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The NAND flash memory has the characteristic of being able to obtain a large storage capacity in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads out the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the bad data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the bad data blocks, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address positions of the bad data blocks, which differ in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If the data is not set, the buffer RAM 234c reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily sets it in the buffer RAM 234c. The ROM controller 234b then performs a known error correction process and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, and one page's worth of data from the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page's worth of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 when reading it out.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 executes this boot program first after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND type flash memory 234a) of this boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads out from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, the reason why not all control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but rather a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND type flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the command code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND type flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. And, because of the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, which results in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of commands from the command to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR type ROM 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (command code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the command code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start up the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is programmed to transfer the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., the control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and the fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 in a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Then, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released.

Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the address of the internal bus being specified as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since there is no need to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after the system reset is released, when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed to set the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts at a time. In addition, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) that is executed after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 412) by the boot program is completed is set.

The MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, and all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 379) sent from the MPU 231, and displays the drawn image in one of the first and second frame buffers 236b and 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process for this one frame of an image and the display process for this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 413 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing of the next frame of image and also executes processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing are completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while NAND-type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (start address of the source storage) and the end address (end address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, the destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the end address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

In addition, since the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the lottery results performed by the main control device 110 through a variable presentation when a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see FIG. 411).

The power-on variable image will now be described. Immediately after power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 376) on the third pattern display device 81.

At this time, when the display control device 114 receives a display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start the variation, the display control device 114 alternately displays, on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, a power-on variation image with a "○" pattern in the lower right position facing the screen and a power-on variation image with a "X" pattern in the same position as the "○" pattern, during the variation period. Then, the display control device 114 judges the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "special pattern jackpot", an image indicating this is displayed for a certain period after the variation performance stops, and if it is a "special pattern miss", an image indicating this is displayed for a certain period after the variation performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operational checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of operational checks from deteriorating.

Furthermore, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is constantly resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to display images showing "○" and "×" alternately on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so if a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable performance can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 375, the explanation will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 346) numbered "0" to "9" which are the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which a variable presentation is not immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 even though a variable presentation has already started on the first pattern display device 37 after a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters including "boy" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these are resident in the character design area 235e. When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads the image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character design can be changed instantly even if a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so that even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the type of image data should be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the one frame of image that has been read out on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of DRAM. This work RAM 233 has at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance that is displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance that is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, round presentations, ending presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable performance is an effect that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command that indicates the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating a miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it, so when a normal jackpot occurs and the electric device is opened, making it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the balls held are unlikely to be reduced or are not reduced even when playing, so the player can have a sense of anticipation that a jackpot with a special pattern will be obtained when the balls held are unlikely to be reduced or are not reduced. This increases the player's motivation to participate in the game, and allows the player to continue to be motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not start. The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols numbered "0" to "9", is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round performance, the ending performance, and the demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable performance, will have one table per variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Now, with reference to Figure 377, the display data table will be described in detail. Figure 377 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time, corresponding to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to that magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when a sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through the image. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing information for each sprite is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame, which includes one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. Information about effects and characters is specified as one or more pieces according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for identifying the type of rear image.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, preparation period background, background dedicated to time presentation) should be displayed based on the background type, the MPU 231 determines the background image corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the rear view type is specified as the drawing content of the rear view image in the display data table. Alternatively, the rear view type and position information indicating which range of the rear view image corresponding to that rear view type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear view image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear view image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear view image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, ...), pattern type offset information is recorded as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern. The reason offset information is determined rather than the type of third pattern directly is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a specified time has elapsed records the offset information from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third symbol, and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, so that the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player cannot be aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the beginning of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 377) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and a drawing list (see FIG. 379) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the drawing of the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

If, as in conventional pachinko machines, a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the performance image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing programs that become more complex and expansive as the variety of performance images increases, which may limit the processing power of the display control device 114 and result in a limit to the diversification of controllable performance images. In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, so that a variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The reason why the display data table is prepared in accordance with each performance mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and the drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is because the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table in accordance with each performance mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 378. FIG. 378 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data of sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and describes the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter referred to as the "image data to be transferred") that should start being transferred at the time indicated by that address (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Figure 378 correspond to this). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in the transfer data table in correspondence with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, Null data is specified, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 378).

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

The first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 378) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is contained.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc., and if a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 380) described later is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 380, when pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233f is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data from which transfer should begin, and the transfer data information is not added to the generated drawing list, and the drawing list is transmitted to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in that image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This makes it possible to manage and control the transfer of image data for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address, is specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be specified so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 376. This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 411) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see Z3005 in FIG. 411). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see Z4705 in FIG. 422(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Z3301 in FIG. 413(b)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 413(b)) and a simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 413(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 414 to 419) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 420 to 421(b)) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see Z4601 in FIG. 422(a)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data exists that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 422(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 423) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 379) that describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see FIG. 379) for each frame that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if no null data is written), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a drawing list (see FIG. 379) described below that describes the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. As described above, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specified address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when a specified sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see Z3303 in FIG. 420) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the pointer update process (see Z4305 in FIG. 421(b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 379) described below, and also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. This makes it possible to read images required for display from the character ROM 234 without delay in advance and transfer them to the normal video RAM 236, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Now, referring to FIG. 379, the details of the drawing list will be described. FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 379, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the back image used in one frame's image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information in a manner specified by the information, and then performs various processing on the standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the various video RAMs, and draws the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the backmost side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the frontmost side.

In addition, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area provided in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area of character ROM 234 (area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) provided in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of image are completed, each time the display setting process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413(b)) is executed by the MPU 231, the timing counter 233h is decremented by one (see Z4307 in FIG. 420). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag indicating the storage status, for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, of whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred that corresponds to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 423) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

When the MPU 231 transfers image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and determines whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see Z4809 in FIG. 423). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, it sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see Z4810 in FIG. 423) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"); if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Information on this specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Z4902 in FIG. 424).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is expanded onto the designated drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 executes a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, and transferring the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed (see Z4902 in FIG. 424).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

<Regarding control processing of main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Fig. 380 to Fig. 393. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

Figure 380 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading the various winning switches is executed (Z101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (299, 99, and 239, respectively, in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special pattern change process is executed (Z104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display device 37 and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81, and then a start winning process is executed in response to a win (start winning) in the first ball entry port 64 (Z105). Details of the special pattern change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 381 to 393.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 (Z106), is executed, and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed (Z107). Details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to Figs. 388 and 389. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (Z108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (Z109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 381, the special pattern change processing (Z104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 381 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change processing (Z104). This special pattern change processing (Z104) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 380), and is processing for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37, and the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81, etc.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (Z201). Here, it is determined whether the jackpot in progress flag 203n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that a jackpot is in progress. The period during which a special symbol jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during play in which a special symbol jackpot is in progress) and the period during which a specified time has elapsed since play in which a special symbol jackpot has ended. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is in progress (Z201: Yes), this process is terminated.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202). If the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved variable display times N1 for the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) are obtained (Z203). After obtaining the values of each counter, a variable execution determination process is executed (Z204). The details of the variable execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 382, but in this variable execution determination process (Z204), a process is executed to determine the special symbol that will be the next to change.

Next, it is determined whether the next change order determined in the change execution determination process (Z204) is special pattern 1 (first special pattern) (Z205), and if the change is to be performed with special pattern 1 (first special pattern), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z206), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 201 to be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of Z207, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a for special symbol 1 is shifted (Z208). In the process of Z208, the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the reserved ball storage area 203a for special symbol 1 is shifted to the execution area side in sequence. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from reserved area 1 to execution area, from reserved area 2 to reserved area 1, from reserved area 3 to reserved area 2, and from reserved area 4 to reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the special symbol 1 change start process is executed to start the change display on the first symbol display device (Z209). The special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 383. In the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209), a process such as selection of a change pattern (change period) required to start the change of the first special symbol is executed.

In the process of Z205, if it is determined that the next change order determined in the change execution determination process (Z204) is not a change execution on special pattern 1 (Z205: No), it is determined whether or not a change execution on special pattern 2 (second special pattern) is to be performed (Z210). If the change execution is not a special pattern 2 change execution (Z210: No), that is, since there are no reserved balls stored for either the first or second special pattern, this process ends. On the other hand, if the change execution is a special pattern 2 change execution (Z210: Yes), the same process as the process for the reserved balls of special pattern 1 described above is performed for the reserved balls of special pattern 2.

Specifically, the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (Z211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (Z212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing Z212, the data stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (Z213). In processing Z213, the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from reserved area 1 to execution area, from reserved area 2 to reserved area 1, from reserved area 3 to reserved area 2, and from reserved area 4 to reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the special pattern 2 change start process is executed to start the change display on the first pattern display device (Z214). The special pattern 2 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 384.

In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 has elapsed (Z215). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (Z215: No), the display of the first pattern display device is updated (Z216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z215, if the change time of the executing change display has elapsed (Z215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopping pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (Z217). The setting of the stopping pattern is performed in advance by the special pattern 1 change start process (Z209) described later with reference to FIG. 383 or the special pattern 2 change start process (Z214) described later with reference to FIG. 384. When this special pattern change start process is executed, a lottery for the special pattern is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. More specifically, whether or not there is a jackpot for a special pattern is determined according to the value of the special jackpot random number counter C1, and if there is a jackpot for the first special pattern, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 determines whether it will be a jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, or jackpot C, and if there is a jackpot for the second special pattern, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 determines whether it will be a jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, or jackpot C.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot A occurs, the blue LED in the first pattern display device 37 is turned on, and if a jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. If a jackpot C occurs, the red and blue LEDs are turned on. Also, if a miss occurs, the red and green LEDs are turned on. The LEDs are turned off when the next variation display starts, but may be turned on for only a few seconds after the variation stops.

After the process of Z217 is completed, when the ongoing variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process (the current lottery result) is a jackpot for the special symbol (Z218). If the current lottery result is a jackpot for the special symbol (Z218: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (Z219), the probability variable flag 203m is turned off, and the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set to 0 (Z220). After that, the jackpot flag 203n is set to on (Z221), a stop command is set (Z224), and this process is terminated. In other words, during the jackpot game, a low probability game state is set, and the electric support game state (time-saving game state) is also released and a non-electric support game state is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z218, if the current lottery result is a miss for the special pattern (Z218: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more (Z222), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more (Z222: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is decremented by 1 (Z223), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0 (Z222: No), the processing of Z223 is skipped and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 382, the change execution determination process (Z204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing the change execution determination process (Z204). This change execution determination process (Z204) is a process executed in the special pattern change process (see FIG. 381) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and is a process for determining whether the presentation pattern (change presentation pattern) of the change presentation performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 is to be executed based on the values of various counters stored in either the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In the change execution determination process, first, the change execution flag 203k is set to off (value "0") to perform initialization (Z241), and the data in the change order storage area 203p stored in RAM 203 is obtained (Z242). Next, the data in the change order storage area 203p is shifted (Z243). Next, it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special chart 1 (Z244). If the data in the execution area is special chart 1 (Z244: Yes), the change execution flag 203k is set to change execution in special chart 1 (Z245), and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z244, if the data in the execution area is not a change execution in special chart 1 (Z244: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is a change execution in special chart 2 (Z246), and if it is a change execution in special chart 2 (Z246: Yes), the change execution flag 203k is set to change execution in special chart 2 (Z247), and this process is terminated. Note that, if it is determined in the process of Z246 that the data in the execution area is not a change execution in special chart 2 (Z246: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 383, the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209). This special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 381) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and is a process for drawing a lottery (determining whether or not a lottery result is a hit with a special symbol) or a miss with a special symbol based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and for determining the presentation pattern (changing presentation pattern) of the changing presentation performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

In the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), first, the values of the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are obtained (Z251). Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the high probability period (high probability game state) (Z252). The determination of whether or not it is in the high probability period is performed by determining whether the high probability flag 203m is on. This high probability flag 203m is set on based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B1, jackpot B2, and jackpot C. On the other hand, it is set off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the game is in a special chance mode (Z252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special chance mode, and the process proceeds to Z253. In the process of Z253, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the game is a special chance mode is obtained based on the value of the special chance mode random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z251 and the special chance mode random number table 202a (see FIG. 358(a)). Specifically, the value of the special chance mode random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 958 random number values stored in the special chance mode random number table 202a. As described above, 27 random numbers from "0 to 26" are set as the random number values that result in a special chance mode game (special game mode), and if the value of the special chance mode random number counter C1 matches these random number values that result in a win, it is determined that the game is a special chance mode game. After the result of the lottery for the special chance mode is obtained, the process proceeds to Z255.

On the other hand, if the process of Z252 determines that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state with the special symbol (Z252: No), the process of Z254 is executed. In the process of Z254, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 978 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Three random number values, "0 to 2," are set as the random number values that result in a jackpot with the special symbol in the normal game state (low probability game state), and if the value of the special win random number counter C1 matches these random number values that result in a jackpot, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z255.

In the process of Z255, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special pattern obtained by the process of Z253 or Z254 is a special pattern jackpot (i.e., whether the value of the acquired special jackpot random number counter C1 matches the judgment value set in the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a) (Z255), and if it is determined to be a special pattern jackpot (Z255: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the process of Z251 (Z256). More specifically, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the process of Z251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special jackpot type selection table 202d1, and it is determined which jackpot type is among the four types of special pattern jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). As mentioned above, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined to be a jackpot A (16R jackpot, 100 times time reduction), if it is in the range of "40 to 75", it is determined to be a jackpot B1 (16R odd number jackpot with certainty change), if it is in the range of "76 to 79", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R even number jackpot with certainty change), and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (see Figure 359 (b)).

In the processing of Z256, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined based on the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z257). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z257, the variation time (display time) of the variation performance in the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third pattern until it stops at the big win pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of pattern variation is specified in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, if the type of big win determined this time is big win A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", the variation pattern is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250", the variation pattern is super reach.

In terms of the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third pattern that notifies the win/lose judgment result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content of the variation display mode (variation pattern) to actually be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the win/lose judgment result. Even if the main control device 110 is in a display mode of a miss reach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to a reach display mode or a non-miss display mode as long as the variation time is the same. This allows a variety of display modes to be displayed, diversifying the presentation.

For example, the fluctuation patterns for misses include "Miss (long time)", "Miss (short time)", various "Miss normal reaches", various "Miss super reaches", and various "Miss special reaches". The fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C include various "normal reaches" and various "super reaches".

On the other hand, if the process of Z255 determines that the special symbol is a miss (Z255: No), the display mode at the time of miss is set (Z258). In the process of Z258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the missing symbol, and the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

Next, the variation pattern in the event of a miss is determined (Z259). Here, the display time of the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third pattern until it stops at a miss pattern on the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, similar to the processing of Z258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is checked, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

When processing Z257 or Z259 is completed, next, a variation pattern command is set (Z260) to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in processing Z257 or Z259. Next, a stop type command is set (Z261) to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in processing Z275 or Z259. When processing Z261 is completed, the process returns to the special pattern variation process (Z104).

Next, referring to FIG. 384, the special symbol 2 change start process (Z214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 change start process (Z214). This special symbol 2 change start process (Z214) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 381) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and is a process for drawing a lottery (determining whether or not a "special symbol jackpot" or a "special symbol miss" based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and for determining the presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern) of the variable presentation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In this special pattern 2 variation start process (Z214), similarly to the special pattern 1 variation start process (Z209), first the values of the special win random number counter C1 and the special win type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b obtained by the process of Z271 are obtained (Z271).

Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in a high probability period (high probability game state) (Z272). If it is determined that it is in a high probability period (Z272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability period for the special symbol, so the process proceeds to Z273. In the process of Z273, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z273). Specifically, the value of the special win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 958 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. As described above, 27 random numbers from "0 to 26" are set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, and if the value of the special win random number counter C1 matches these random number values for the jackpot, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After the result of the lottery for the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z275.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z272 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a sure chance state (Z272: No), the process of Z274 is executed. In the process of Z274, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 978 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Three random number values, "0 to 2," are set as the random number values that result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and if the value of the special win random number counter C1 matches these random number values that result in a win, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Once the result of the lottery for the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z275.

In the process of Z275, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of Z273 or Z274 is a special symbol jackpot (Z275), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (Z275: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the process of Z271 (Z276). More specifically, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained by the process of Z271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special jackpot type selection table 202d2, and it is determined which jackpot type is among the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). As mentioned above, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined to be a jackpot A (16R jackpot, 100 times time reduction), if it is in the range of "40 to 87", it is determined to be a jackpot B1 (16R odd number jackpot with certainty change), if it is in the range of "88 to 91", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R even number jackpot with certainty change), and if it is in the range of "92 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (see Figure 359 (c)).

In the processing of Z276, the display mode (illumination state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined based on the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z277). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z277, the variation time (display time) of the variation performance in the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third pattern until it stops at the big win pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of pattern variation is specified in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, if the type of big win determined this time is big win A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", the variation pattern is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250", the variation pattern is super reach.

In terms of the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third pattern that notifies the win/lose judgment result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content of the variation display mode (variation pattern) to actually be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the win/lose judgment result. Even if the main control device 110 is in a display mode of a miss reach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to a reach display mode or a non-miss display mode as long as the variation time is the same. This allows a variety of display modes to be displayed, diversifying the presentation.

For example, the fluctuation patterns for misses include "Miss (long time)", "Miss (short time)", various "Miss normal reaches", various "Miss super reaches", and various "Miss special reaches". The fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C include various "normal reaches" and various "super reaches".

If it is determined in the process of Z275 that the special pattern is a miss (Z275: No), the display mode in the case of a miss is set (Z278). In the process of Z278, the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the missing pattern, and the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

Next, the variation pattern in the event of a miss is determined (Z279). Here, the display time of the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third pattern until it stops at a miss pattern on the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, similar to the processing of Z278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is checked, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

When processing Z277 or Z279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command is set (Z280) to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in processing Z277 or Z279. Next, a stop type command is set (Z281) to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in processing Z277 or Z279. When processing Z281 is completed, the process returns to special pattern variation processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 385, the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (Z105). This start winning process (Z105) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and determines whether or not there has been a win in the first ball entry port 64 (start winning). If there has been a start winning, it is a process for reserving the values indicated by the various random number counters, and for pre-reading the lottery results for the special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters that have been reserved.

When the start winning process (Z105: see FIG. 385) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (start winning) (Z301). Here, the ball entry into the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (Z301: Yes), the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved times N1 of the variable display in the special pattern) is obtained (Z302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z303).

Then, if there is no winning through the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: No), or if there is a winning through the first ball entrance 64 but the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is not less than 4 (Z303: No), an over winning information command is set (Z304) and processing proceeds to Z309. On the other hand, if there is a winning through the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is less than 4 (Z303: Yes), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d is incremented by 1 (Z305). Then, a reserved ball count command for the first special pattern is set (Z306), which indicates the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d changed by the calculation.

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 392) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of Z306, the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 updated by Z103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of RAM 203 (Z307). Note that in the process of Z307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referenced, and if the value is 0, reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, reserved area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, reserved area 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, reserved area 4 is set as the first area. Next, special symbol 1 is set at the bottom of the variable order storage area 203p (Z308), and the look-ahead process (Z320) is executed. The look-ahead process (Z320) will be described later with reference to FIG. 386.

Next, for Z309 to Z316, the processing for Z301 to Z320 described above is the same as that for winning the first ball entrance 64, except that the processing for winning the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 is changed to the processing for winning the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640, and the detailed explanation is omitted. In addition, when a game ball wins the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, the values of the special win random number counter C1 and the special win type counter C2 are obtained and stored in the corresponding empty reserved area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In this way, by obtaining the same values for the special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variable type selection counter CS1 for the second special pattern based on a ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 as for the first special pattern, a lottery can be performed using a common random number for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, making it possible to keep the winning probability constant for both the first and second special patterns.

After executing the process of Z308 or the process of Z316, the look-ahead process (Z320) is executed. Details of the look-ahead process (Z320) are explained in detail with reference to FIG. 386 as described above, but the process executes a process to determine in advance the results of each lottery to be executed at the start of the fluctuation based on the values of various counters obtained for balls entering the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640.

In this embodiment, the counter values are selected based on the ball scoring, but they may be selected when the fluctuation starts. This configuration eliminates the need for storage space to store the values of each counter until the fluctuation starts, reducing the use of storage space in RAM 203. Also, some of the counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be acquired when the fluctuation starts. This configuration allows the counters related to the hit/miss judgment to be acquired when the ball scores, and the counters not related to the hit/miss judgment to be acquired later, reducing the amount of data to be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 386, we will explain the look-ahead process (Z320), which is one process within the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (Z320).

In the pre-reading process (Z320), first, a hit/miss judgment is made at the start of the fluctuation based on the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 (Z351). In this hit/miss judgment, the same processing as the Z255 processing in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 383) and the Z275 processing in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 384) is executed. Note that this hit/miss judgment corresponds to a pre-hit/miss judgment (pre-judgment) executed before the hit/miss judgment (judgment) at the start of the fluctuation (the Z255 processing in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 383) and the Z275 processing in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 384)). Next, it is judged whether the judgment result executed in the Z351 processing is a hit (also called a specific judgment result) (Z352). If the judgment result is a win (Z352: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type is obtained (judged) from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 (Z353). Next, based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type, a win winning information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202e (Z354), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the winning/losing judgment result is determined to be a miss in the process of Z352 (Z352: No), the fluctuation pattern type is obtained from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 (Z355). Next, based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type, a miss winning information command is set from the winning command table 202e (Z356), and this process is terminated.

In this way, the result of the advance win/loss judgment before the fluctuation starts is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a reserved ball is established, so the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the win/loss judgment result and the type of win in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a preview performance that notifies the player of the win/loss judgment result for the reserved ball in advance based on the winning command (for example, changing the color of the reserved pattern to a color that notifies the win/loss judgment result, outputting an alarm sound to notify the win/loss judgment result for the reserved ball, etc.). In addition, since one winning command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 387, the normal pattern change processing (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 387 is a flowchart showing this normal pattern change processing (Z106). This normal pattern change processing (Z106) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 380), and is processing for controlling the change display of the second pattern performed by the second pattern display device 83, the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, etc.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (Z401). The normal symbol (second symbol) is winning when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win and when the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is being controlled to open and close. If the result of the determination is that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (Z401: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (Z401: No), it is determined whether the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (Z402), and if the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is not changing (Z402: No), the long-time release flag 203i is set to OFF (Z403), and the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved times M of the variable display of the normal pattern) is obtained (Z404). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (Z405), and if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (Z405: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (Z405: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (Z406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (Z407). In the process of Z407, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted in sequence to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (Z408).

Next, the normal symbol variation start process is executed (Z409), and this process is terminated. Note that the normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 388, but a win/loss judgment of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed, and based on the win/loss judgment result, the normal symbol variation period (variation time or dynamic display time) is determined. If the win/loss judgment result is a win, a process is executed to set the opening operation of the electric role 640a (operation pattern of the normal symbol winning game) corresponding to the type of win.

In the process of Z402, if the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (Z402: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the changing display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (Z410). Note that the change time here is the time that was previously set by the process of Z437 or Z438 in FIG. 388 before the changing display was started in the second pattern display device 83.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z410, if the change time has not elapsed (Z410: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z410, if the change time of the executed change display has elapsed (Z410: Yes), the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set (Z411). In the processing of Z411, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of Z427 or Z431 in FIG. 388, the "○" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a loser and the display mode is set by the processing of Z435 in FIG. 388, the "X" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83. When the stop display is set by the processing of Z411, when the second pattern display update processing (see Z1007) of the main processing (see FIG. 392) is next executed, the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (illuminated) in the display mode set in the processing of Z427, Z431, or Z435 in FIG. 388 on the second pattern display device 83. Note that in this control example, the "○" pattern is configured to be lit even in the case of a long-time win or a normal win, but it is not limited thereto, and it may be configured to be lit to display a pattern according to the type of win of the normal pattern (for example, "◎" for a long-time win, "○" for a normal win).

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 starts, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variable processing (the current lottery result) is a normal symbol winning (Z412). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol winning (Z412: Yes), the opening and closing control start of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (Z413), and this processing is terminated. When the opening and closing control start of the electric role 640a is set by the processing of Z412, when the electric role opening and closing processing (see Z1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 392) is next executed, the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set by the processing of Z430 or Z434 of FIG. 388 are completed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: see FIG. 388) described later, the opening operation data of the electric role 640a corresponding to the winning type of the normal symbol is set, so in Z413, the opening and closing control corresponding to the winning type of the normal symbol is set. On the other hand, in the process of Z412, if the lottery result this time is a loss of the normal symbol (Z412: No), the process of Z413 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal pattern change start processing (Z408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 388. FIG. 388 is a flowchart showing this normal pattern change start processing (Z408). This normal pattern change start processing (Z408) is processing for executing settings for the start of normal pattern change, which is executed in the normal pattern change processing (see FIG. 388) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 380).

It is determined whether or not a special pattern jackpot is currently in progress (Z421). The period during which a special pattern jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are displaying a special pattern jackpot (including during play of a special pattern jackpot), and the period during a specified time after play of a special pattern jackpot ends. If the result of the determination is that a special pattern jackpot is in progress (Z421: Yes), processing moves to Z424. In processing Z421, if a special pattern jackpot is not in progress (Z421: No), it is determined whether or not a special pattern jackpot is in progress or a time-saving mode is in progress (Z422). If the special pattern jackpot is not in progress or a time-saving mode is in progress (Z422: No), processing moves to Z424.

If the game is in a special bonus or time-saving mode (Z422: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special bonus mode and is in a time-saving mode for normal symbols, so the game obtains the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal symbol is a win (Z423) based on the value of the normal win random number counter C4 obtained in the process of Z407 in FIG. 387 and the normal win random number table 202c (see FIG. 358(c)). Specifically, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal win random number table 202c (see FIG. 358(c)). As described above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal symbol is a win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a miss (see FIG. 358(c)).

In the process of Z424, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot with a special symbol or is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is obtained based on the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 obtained in the process of Z407 in FIG. 387 and the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358(c)). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 358(c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined to be a normal hit with a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239", it is determined to be a miss with a normal symbol (see FIG. 358(c)).

In this embodiment, during a jackpot of a special symbol, the lottery for a normal symbol is less likely to be a winning one. This is because during a jackpot of a special symbol (i.e., during a special game state), the player hits the ball to make it enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened to prevent the ball intended to enter the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second ball entrance 640 as much as possible. Note that since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the second ball entrance 640, even if balls are prevented from entering the second ball entrance 640 during a jackpot of a special symbol, many balls enter the second ball entrance 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal pattern obtained by processing Z423 or Z424 is a normal pattern winning (Z425), and if it is determined that it is a normal pattern winning (Z425: Yes), it is determined whether the type of winning of the normal pattern is a long-term winning (Z426). The winning type of this normal pattern is determined by comparing the value of the normal winning type counter obtained when passing through the through gate 67 (not shown) with a preset judgment value. In this control example, the value of the normal winning type counter is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198 at a timing synchronized with the other special winning type counter C2, and if the value of the obtained normal winning type counter is any of "0 to 3", it is determined to be a long-term winning, and if it is any of "4 to 198", it is determined to be a normal winning.

When the type of normal symbol hit is determined to be a long-time hit (Z426: Yes), the display mode for a long-time hit is set (Z427). In the process of Z427, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as the stopped symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time hit start command is set (Z428), and the long-time release flag 203i is turned on (Z429). Then, the process proceeds to Z430.

When the process of Z426 determines that the type of winning of the normal pattern is a normal winning (Z426: No), the display mode for the normal winning is set (Z431). Next, it is determined whether or not it is in a special winning mode or a time-saving mode (Z432). If it is in a special winning mode or a time-saving mode (Z432: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is currently in a special winning mode (Z433). If the result of the determination is that it is in a special winning mode (Z433: Yes), the process proceeds to Z434. In this embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 as much as possible during a special winning mode, the number of times and the opening time of the electric device 640a are set in the same way as when the normal pattern is missed, even if the winning mode is a normal pattern, during a winning mode of the special pattern.

In the process of Z433, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (Z433: No), the opening period of the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times it is opened is set to 2 (Z430), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the process of Z430, the opening number counter 203g is set to 2, and the opening time counter 203h is set to a value equivalent to 2 seconds.

In the process of Z432, if the machine is not in a special bonus or time-saving mode (Z432: No), the process proceeds to Z434. In the process of Z432, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot with a special symbol or is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the opening period of the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times it is opened is set to 1 (Z434), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the process of Z434, the opening count counter 203g is set to 1, and the opening time counter 203h is set to a value equivalent to 0.2 seconds.

On the other hand, if the process of Z425 determines that the normal pattern is a miss (Z425: No), the display mode in the event of a miss is set (Z435). In this process of Z435, after the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 has ended, the "X" pattern is set to be lit and displayed as the stopping pattern (second pattern). Once the setting of the display mode in the event of a miss has been completed, the process proceeds to Z436.

In the process of Z436, it is determined whether or not the game is in a special probability mode (Z436). If the game is in a special probability mode (Z436: Yes), the time for the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 to fluctuate is set to 3 seconds (Z437), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game is not in a special probability mode (Z436: No), the time for the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 to fluctuate is set to 30 seconds (Z438), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during a jackpot of a special symbol, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, the time for the variable display is very short (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) compared to when the probability of a normal symbol is low, and the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 is very long (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 2 seconds x 2 times), making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In this embodiment, the opening time and number of times of opening for a long-time hit are the same as when a normal pattern is hit in a special state or a time-saving state, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be set to a different opening time and number of times.

Next, referring to FIG. 389, the through gate passing process (Z107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (Z107). This through gate passing process (Z107) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380) and is a process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and, if the ball has passed through, acquiring and reserving the value indicated by the normal win random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501). Here, the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes), the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved normal pattern variable display times M) is obtained (Z502). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z503).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: No), or if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 but the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is not less than 4 (Z503: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is less than 4 (Z503: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is incremented by 1 (Z504). Then, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c of RAM 203 (Z505), and this process is terminated. In addition, in the process of Z505, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area will be the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area.

Figure 390 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information about the power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The MPU 201 then interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the information about the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power outage information (Z801), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 391, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the main control unit 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control units (peripheral control units such as the voice lamp control unit 113 and the dispensing control unit 111) to become operable (Z902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 345) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: Yes), processing proceeds to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), it is further determined whether information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if it is not stored (Z905: No), there is a possibility that processing at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, processing proceeds to Z913.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (Z906). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (Z907: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case too, processing transitions to Z913. Note that, as will be described later in the processing of Z1014 in FIG. 392, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 has been saved correctly.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (Z913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working area) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (Z914, Z915).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of RAM 203 is set (Z915). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to Z911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), power outage information is stored (Z905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (Z907: Yes), a status command is sent based on the long-release flag 203i (Z908). Next, the power outage information is cleared (Z909) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent (Z910) to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of the drive power cutoff, and processing proceeds to Z911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the processing of Z911, a performance permission command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the execution of various performances is permitted for the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Next, an interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 392, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up processing will be described. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, each process from Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodic process with a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update processes of Z1010 and Z1011 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (Z1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of Z101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls obtained is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern variation process (see FIG. 381) or the start winning process (see FIG. 385) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the winning command set in the start winning process or the look-ahead process (see FIG. 386) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, this external output process transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. required for the third pattern display device 81 to display the variation of the third pattern.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, if a special symbol jackpot state is reached, a jackpot control process is executed to execute the jackpot presentation and to open or close the specific winning port (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (Z1004). Details of the jackpot control process (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 393.

Next, an electric reel opening/closing process is executed (Z1005) to control the opening/closing of the electric reel 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640. In the electric reel opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric reel 640a is set by the processing of Z412 in the normal pattern variation process (see FIG. 387), the opening/closing control of the electric reel 640a is started.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display device 37 (Z1006). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the Z257 process or Z259 process of the special pattern 1 change start process (see FIG. 383), or the Z277 process or Z279 process of the special pattern 2 change start process (see FIG. 384), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display device 37. In this embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED of the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37 is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process (Z1006), when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the Z257 process or Z259 process of the special pattern 1 change start process (see FIG. 383), or the Z277 process or Z279 process of the special pattern 2 change start process (see FIG. 384), ends, the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is terminated, and the stopped pattern (first pattern) is displayed as stopped (lit up) on the first pattern display device 37 in the display mode set by the Z256 process or Z258 process of the special pattern 1 change start process (see FIG. 383), or the Z276 process or Z278 process of the special pattern 2 change start process (see FIG. 384).

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device 83 (Z1007). In the second pattern display update process (Z1007), when the second pattern change time is set by the process of Z437 or Z438 of the normal pattern change start process (see FIG. 388), the second pattern display device 83 starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device 83 performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. In addition, in the second pattern display update process, when the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set by the process of Z410 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 387), the change display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) in a stopped state on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of Z427 or Z431 of the normal pattern change start process (see FIG. 388).

After that, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (Z1008), and if information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (Z1008: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of this main process (Z1009), and if the predetermined time has already elapsed (Z1009: Yes), the process proceeds to Z1001, and each process from Z1001 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (Z1009: No), the update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (Z1010, Z1011) until the specified time has elapsed, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing.

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the processing of Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, the execution time of each process Z1001 to Z1007 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the special win random number counter C1, and the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4), and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the processing of Z1008 (Z1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 390 is executed, so the processing at the time of power interruption from Z1012 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (Z1012), and a power off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (Z1013). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (Z1014), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of Z1008 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of processing of Z1010 and Z1011 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of Z1001 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of Z1001, just as in the case where initialization is performed in the start-up processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (Z901), so that the processing of Z1001 can be started. Therefore, the control burden of the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 393, the jackpot control process (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (Z1004). This jackpot control process (Z1004) is executed within the main process (FIG. 392), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening) 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process (Z1104: see FIG. 393), it is first determined whether a jackpot with a special symbol will start (Z1101). The process of Z219 in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 381) is executed to set the start of a jackpot with a special symbol, and if a jackpot with a special symbol will start (Z1101: Yes), an opening command is set (Z1115) and this process ends.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 392) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it sends a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, an opening performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1108, if a special jackpot has not started (Z1101: No), it is determined whether or not a special jackpot is in progress (Z1102). The period during which a special jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are displaying a special jackpot (including during play of a special jackpot), and during a specified time after play of a special jackpot has ended. In the process of Z1102, if a special jackpot is not in progress (Z1102: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1102, if a special symbol is in the jackpot (Z1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (Z1103). If it is time to start a new round (Z1103: Yes), the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is opened (Z1104), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (Z1105). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 392) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, it transmits a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number to the display control device 114. When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1103, if it is not the timing to start a new round (Z1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a has been met (Z1106). Specifically, it is determined that the closing condition has been met if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened, or if a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 10 balls) have won after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened.

If the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are met in the process of Z1106 (Z1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (Z1107) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are not met (Z1106: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending presentation (Z1108). Specifically, it is determined that it is time to start the ending presentation when a special game state (all 16 rounds or 2 rounds) in which a larger number of prize balls are paid out than usual has ended.

In the process of Z1108, if it is the timing to start the ending performance (Z1108: Yes), an ending command is set (Z1109) and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 392) executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it selects the display mode of the ending performance based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of RAM 223. Then, it transmits a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending performance to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1108, if it is not the timing to start the ending (Z1108: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the jackpot (Z1110). The timing to end the jackpot is the timing when a predetermined ending period (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed. If it is determined that it is not the timing to end the jackpot (Z1110: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z1110 that it is the timing for the jackpot to end (Z1110: Yes), in the process of Z1111, it is determined whether the type of the current jackpot is jackpot A (Z1111). If the type of the current jackpot is jackpot A (Z1111: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set to 100 (Z1112). Next, the jackpot flag 203n is set to OFF (Z1114), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot this time is not jackpot A (Z1111: No), the special jackpot flag 203m is set to ON (Z1113), and then the jackpot in progress flag 203n is set to OFF (Z1114), and this process ends.

<Control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, referring to Fig. 394 to Fig. 410, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 394, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (Z2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the execution of the power-off processing of Z2118 (see FIG. 395) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (Z2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 395, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see Z2115 in FIG. 395), it executes the power-off processing of Z2118. Before the execution of such power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of Z2118 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (Z2002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process of Z2118 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in RAM 223 has been corrupted (Z2003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of Z2006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (Z2003: Yes), the process moves to Z2004 and starts initializing RAM 223. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z2003: No), the process moves to processing of Z2008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply has been completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z2003: Yes) and the process moves to Z2004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage has occurred and the execution of the power cut process of Z2118 has been completed, or if the process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z2003: No) and the process moves to Z2208.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (Z2002: Yes), the current startup process occurred after a momentary power outage and was started when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of Z1318 was in progress. In this case, the power-off processing is in progress, so the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process transitions to Z2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the Z2004 process, the entire storage area of RAM223 is checked (Z2004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM223 clears all storage areas of RAM223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of RAM 223 (Z2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (Z2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of RAM 223 (Z2005: No), the abnormality in RAM 223 is notified (Z2007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of Z2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (Z2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Z2118 is executed (see Z2117 in FIG. 395). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Z2118 is executed, so the process of Z2008 is reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of Z2118 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (Z2009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (Z2010), interrupt permission is set (Z2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off, the process reaches Z2008 because, for example, the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process reaches Z2008 via Z2004 to Z2006, or because noise or the like has reset only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: No), Z2009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process moves to Z2010, where the initial value of RAM 223 is set (Z2010), interrupt permission is set (Z2011), and the process moves to the main process. After that, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (Z2012). This status command is a command that indicates whether a long-term win of a normal pattern is occurring based on the long-term release flag 203i in the processing of Z908 in the start-up processing (see FIG. 391) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. If it is determined in the processing of Z2012 that a status command has been received (Z2012: Yes), the long-term release flag 203i is set based on the received status command, and this processing is terminated (Z2013). Here, if the received status command indicates a long-term win, the long-term release flag 203i is set to ON, and if it indicates that a long-term win is not occurring, the long-term release flag 203i is set to OFF.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not a long-term normal win is occurring, allowing the voice and lamp control unit 113 to also determine that state.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of Z2009 is that when processing Z2008 is reached via processing Z2004 to Z2006, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by processing Z2004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, control of voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by storing the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

Next, referring to FIG. 395, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the current processing of Z2101 was executed (Z2101), and if 1 ms or more has not elapsed (Z2101: No), the processing of Z2102 to Z2112 is not executed and the processing proceeds to Z2113. The reason for determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed in the processing of Z2101 is that Z2102 to Z2112 are mainly processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms), whereas it is preferable to execute the command judgment processing of Z2113, the variable display setting processing of Z2114, and the processing of updating various counter values omitted from the figure in a short cycle. By executing the Z2111 process at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the Z2112 process at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z2103 to Z2114 are sent to the display control device 114 (Z2102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the processing of Z2108 described later (Z2103), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (Z2104). The power-on notification processing is a processing for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification processing is not performed and the processing proceeds to Z2105.

In the process of Z2105, a customer waiting performance process is executed, and then a reserved ball number display update process is executed (Z2106). In the customer waiting performance process, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device 114. In the reserved ball number display update process, a process is performed to light up the reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring/presentation process is executed (Z2107). This frame button input monitoring/presentation process monitors whether the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the presentation effect, and sets up a corresponding presentation when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. Details of this frame button input monitoring/presentation process (Z2107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 409.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (Z2108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (Z2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing Z2109, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (Z2110), and processing proceeds to Z2111. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of Z2108 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing/output process of Z2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

When the processing of Z2110 is completed, the short-term winning management processing is executed (Z2111). The details of this short-term winning management processing (Z2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 407, but the processing is executed to measure the period during which a predetermined number of reserved balls are generated, and if it is within the predetermined period, a specific effect (preview effect) is executed.

After executing the short-term winning management process (Z2111), the pending effect management process during reach (Z2112) is executed. The details of this pending effect management process during reach (Z2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 408, but during the period when the variable state of the third pattern (special pattern) is the pending display state, a process is executed to set a specific effect (preview effect) that notifies the player to play in a way that accumulates a predetermined number of reserved balls.

When the processing of Z2112 is completed, a command determination process is executed (Z2113). The command determination process (Z2113) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 396. After the command determination process (Z2113) is executed, a variable display setting process is executed (Z2114). In the variable display setting process, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The variable display setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 406.

When the processing of Z2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z2115). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of Z2115 (Z2115: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (Z2117), and the power outage processing is executed (Z2118). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (Z2119), and the processing then loops infinitely. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power outage information is not stored in the process of Z2115 (Z2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (Z2116). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (Z2116: No), the process returns to the process of Z2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2116: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a store clerk or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 396, the command determination process (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 396), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command memory area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (Z2201). If a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201: Yes), variation pattern reception process is executed (Z2202), and this process is terminated. Details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 397.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern command is not received in the process of Z2201 (Z2201: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received (Z2203). If a stop type command has been received (Z2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in RAM 223 is turned on (Z2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (Z2205), and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z2203, if a stop type command is not received (Z2203: No), it is determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received (Z2206). If a reserved ball number command has been received (Z2206: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special pattern reserved ball number counter (Z2207). This process then ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special pattern is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special pattern is stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

On the other hand, if the reserved ball number command is not received in the process of Z2206 (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not a winning command for a special symbol is received (Z2208). If a winning command for a special symbol is received (Z2208: Yes), the winning command reception process is started (Z2209) and this process is terminated. Details of the winning command reception process (Z2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 403, but based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, a pre-determination is performed to determine the winning/losing judgment result and the variation type of the reserved special symbol, and a setting process is performed to execute each reserved performance that has been determined to be executed based on the pre-determination result. On the other hand, if the winning command for a special symbol is not received in the process of Z2208 (Z2208: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261) and this process is terminated.

Now, referring to FIG. 397, we will explain the details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202), which is one process within the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 396). FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (Z2113), detailed special symbol variation patterns (presentation modes), preview display modes, hold preview display modes, etc. are set based on the received variation pattern command.

In the fluctuation pattern receiving process (Z2202: FIG. 397), first, the fluctuation start flag 223d in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2221), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2222). After that, the display preview command is set to the fluctuation pattern (Z2223), and the value of the pending preview counter 223g in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 (Z2224). Here, the display preview command is a command to instruct the display of various preview effects (for example, a comment preview or a mini character preview that suggests the result of the win/loss judgment) determined based on the fluctuation pattern.

After the processing of Z2224 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the reserved notice counter 223g is 0 or not (Z2225). If it is determined that the value of the reserved notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225), the reserved change value is set to 0 and the reserved performance mode memory area 223m is cleared (Z2226). If the value of the reserved notice counter 223g is 1 or more (Z2225: No), the processing of Z2226 is skipped and the processing of Z2227 is started. Next, the lucky display determination processing (Z2227) is executed. By configuring in this way, as shown in FIG. 350 (b), even if a performance is performed in which the color of the reserved ball is changed based on the result of the pre-reading determination, the display position is changed according to the consumption of the reserved ball according to the value of the reserved notice counter 223g, and after the change of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved ball whose color has been changed starts, the change stops and the display is not displayed, and the reserved change value can be set to the initial value of 0. Therefore, even if the color of the reserved balls changes, the player can be correctly notified of the order in which the display of the reserved balls will begin to change.

Now, referring to FIG. 398, we will explain the lucky display determination process (Z2227) executed within the variable pattern receiving process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing this lucky display determination process (Z2227). This lucky display determination process (Z2227) determines the number of reserved balls at the time of a past jackpot win, and executes a process of displaying and setting a mark pattern (reserved effect) in the display area corresponding to that number of reserved balls.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227: FIG. 398), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 or not (Z2301). In other words, it is determined whether the normal state is present in which no special pending effects are being executed. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), it is determined whether the normal mode is in effect (Z2302). If the normal mode is not in effect (Z2302: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of Z2302 that the normal mode is in effect (Z2302: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the lucky pending memory value 223p provided in the RAM 223 is 0 or not (Z2303). If it is determined that the lucky pending memory value 223p is 0 (Z2303: Yes), this process is terminated. Here, if the value of the lucky reserved memory value 223p is 0, this indicates that the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the special pattern determined to be a jackpot has not been stored.

When it is determined that the value of the lucky reserve memory value 223p is 1 or more (Z2303), the possibility of an effect is obtained based on the lucky reserve selection table 222p (see FIG. 374(c)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2304). Here, the lucky reserve selection table 222p executes a process of obtaining the value of the effect counter 223h, which is set corresponding to the current number of reserved balls, to determine whether or not to execute a lucky reserve effect.

Based on the processing of Z2304, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect (execution effect) can be executed (Z2305). If it is not possible (Z2305: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2305: Yes), a display hold lid command is set from the lucky hold command table 222g (Figure 368) based on the value of the lucky hold memory value 223p (Z2306). Next, the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 3 (Z2307), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2301, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 0 (Z2301: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 3 (Z2308). In other words, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect was executed in the previous change. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes), the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is cleared (set as the initial value 0) (Z2309), and this process is terminated. In addition, in the process of Z2309, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 3 (Z2308: No), this process is terminated as it is. In this way, the lucky hold effect is set at the start of the change, and is terminated by setting the special effect status to the initial value at the start of the next change. In addition, in this control example, the lucky hold effect is an effect that is executed during the period in which the special pattern changes once, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be executed during the period in which multiple changes are executed. The number of times the special symbols will change when the lucky hold effect starts can be determined, and the effect can end when that number of changes has been performed. Alternatively, a lottery can be held to decide whether to end the lucky hold effect with each change, and the effect can end if the ending lottery is won, or if all the reserved balls are used up or a demo display appears.

Returning to FIG. 397, we will continue with the explanation. After executing the lucky display determination process (Z2227), the reach pending effect setting process (Z2228) is executed. In the reach pending effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 399), when a change in a special pattern that becomes a reach display mode is executed, a process is executed to execute a reach pending effect (one of the special pending effects) that allows the player to play in such a way that reserved balls are accumulated during the reach display mode.

Now, referring to FIG. 399, we will explain the on-reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing this on-reach hold effect setting process (Z2228).

In the reach pending performance setting process (Z2228: FIG. 399), first, it is determined whether the reach is changing (Z2321). If it is determined that the reach is not changing (Z2321: No), this process ends. If the reach is changing (Z2321: Yes), it is determined whether the change is in normal mode (Z2322). If it is determined that the normal mode is not being used (Z2322: No), this process ends. If the change is in normal mode (Z2322: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special performance status memory area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2323). In other words, it is determined whether the normal state is in which no special pending performance is being executed. If the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 1 or more (Z2323: No), this process ends. Here, if the special performance status is 1 or more, it means that another special pending performance is being executed, so the determination of Z2323 is executed to prevent further overlapping of pending performances. If the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the possibility of executing an effect is obtained from the reach effect selection table 222m (see FIG. 374(a)) based on the number of reserved balls and the value of the effect counter 223h (Z2324). Here, in the reach effect selection table 222m, a judgment value of the effect counter 223h is set for the current number of reserved balls, and the judgment value is used to determine whether or not the reach reserved effect can be executed.

The process of Z2324 determines whether a pending effect (execution effect) during a reach can be executed (Z2325). If it is determined that an execution effect cannot be executed (Z2325: No), this process ends. If it is determined that an execution effect can be executed (Z2325: Yes), the value of the pending effect start timer 223r is set from the reach start time calculation table 222n (Figure 374 (b)) based on the change pattern type (change type) of the special pattern (Z2326), data indicating special effect status 2 is set in the special effect status memory area 223n (Z2327), and this process ends.

In this way, according to the reach pending effect setting process (Z2228), the change pattern type (dynamic display mode type) that will become the reach display mode is decided, and if no other special hold effects are being executed, a lottery is held to see whether to execute the reach pending effect, and the timing for starting the execution of the reach pending effect is set by winning the lottery, so that when the change of the special pattern that will become the reach display mode starts, the reach pending effect is set to be executed more frequently the fewer the current number of reserved balls, and it is possible to prevent players from stopping firing game balls during a reach, and it is possible to increase the profits of the gaming establishment. It is also possible to improve the efficiency of play.

Next, let us return to Figure 397 to continue the explanation. After executing the pending effect setting process during reach (Z2228), the pending lid setting process (Z2229) is executed. In this pending lid setting process (Z2229), the processes required to display the variable lid pattern P displayed in the secondary display area Ds are executed.

Now, referring to FIG. 400, we will explain the reserved lid setting process (Z2229) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing this reserved lid setting process (Z2229).

In the reserved lid setting process (Z2229: see FIG. 400), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (Z2341). In other words, it is determined whether a short-term winning effect (short-term winning reserved effect), which is one of the special reserved effects, is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 1 (Z2341: Yes), the reserved lid range value is obtained based on the reserved lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 366 (a)) at the time of short-term winning in the reserved lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 365 (a)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2342). The reserved lid command for display is set based on the reserved lid range value obtained in the process of Z2342 (Z2355), and this process is terminated. In this way, when the value of the special effect status is 1 and the execution of the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 349(a)) is set, the display range value (display mode) of the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the current reserved ball is selected and set from the short-term winning reserved lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 366(a)), thereby making it possible to set a display mode of the variable lid pattern P different from the normal mode (a display mode in which the reserved pattern is displayed with a space of two reserved patterns instead of the normal rule of displaying the reserved pattern with a space of one reserved pattern).

As a result, if the time required for one to four reserved balls to be stored is within a predetermined period, the variable lid pattern P is displayed according to rules different from normal times, and the display mode of the variable lid pattern P also makes it possible to recognize that the time required for the reserved balls to be stored is short. This makes it possible to encourage the player to play in a way that will allow the reserved balls to be stored more quickly, improving the efficiency of the game. It also makes the game more interesting.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2341, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 1 (Z2341: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2343). In other words, it is determined whether the execution of the pending effect during reach is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2343: Yes), the reserved lid range value is obtained based on the reserved lid range selection table 222d5 during reach performance (see FIG. 366 (b)) in the reserved lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 365) (Z2344). Based on the reserved lid range value obtained in the processing of Z2344, a reserved lid command for display is set (Z2355), and this processing is terminated. Here, when the display control device 114 receives a display reserve lid command indicating the reserve lid range value obtained from the reach performance reserve lid range selection table 222d5, it receives a notice display command to perform a reach reserve notice performance, indicating that it is time to execute the reach reserve performance, and displays the variable lid pattern P in a display mode corresponding to the display reserve lid command.

In this way, when it has been decided that a pending effect will be executed during a reach, a mode for varying the display of the variable lid pattern P is set, and the variable lid pattern P is displayed variably in a display mode that is set according to the execution timing of the pending effect during a reach, so that it can be determined that a special pending effect that differs from normal times has been executed by the variable lid pattern P.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2343, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 2 (Z2343: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 3 (Z2345). In other words, it is determined whether the execution of the lucky reserved effect, which is one of the special reserved effects, is set. In the process of Z2345, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 3 (Z2345: Yes), the reserved lid range value is obtained based on the normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1 (see FIG. 365(b)) in the reserved lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 365). After that, the process of Z2355 described above is executed, and this process is terminated. In this way, when the execution of the lucky reserved effect (see FIG. 353(a)-(b)) is set, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P similar to the execution of the reserved effect in the normal state (display mode in which the display is performed according to the rule of leaving one reserved pattern from the last reserved pattern displayed) is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2345, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 3 (Z2345: No), it is determined whether the advance notice B mode is active (Z2347). That is, as shown in Figures 348(a)-(b), it is determined whether a reserved effect is being executed that suggests to the player not to enter any more reserved balls when there are four or more reserved balls and the color of the reserved pattern is variable, which suggests to the player not to enter any more reserved balls. If it is advance notice B mode (Z2347: Yes), a display reserved lid command indicating a color change of the variable lid pattern P is set based on the reserved lid color change selection table 222f (see Figure 367(b)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2348). Here, as shown in FIG. 348(b), when a game is being played in the notice B mode (four or more reserved balls) in which the reserved pattern is displayed in a variable color and the player is informed to play in a way that restricts the number of reserved balls from increasing any further, if more reserved balls are stored, a setting is executed in which the display color of the variable lid pattern P at the position where the variable lid pattern P and the displayed reserved pattern overlap is changed to a color different from normal (for example, green, etc.). This allows the player to easily recognize that he or she has played in a manner that goes against the notification mode that informed the player to play in a way that does not allow reserved balls to be stored.

After executing the process of Z2348, the reserved lid range value is obtained (Z2349) based on the predicted B mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 365(d)), the above-mentioned process of Z2355 is executed, and this process is terminated. The predicted B mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 365(d)) can be configured to display the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the position of the fifth reserved ball according to a special rule that would be hidden in the case of a normal mode reserved performance when there are four reserved balls, as shown in FIG. 348(a), but is in a displayed state. As a result, in the predicted B mode, in which a reserved performance instructing not to increase the reserved balls is performed, the variable lid pattern P can be used to make the player think that four reserved balls is the upper limit. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the upper limit of reserved balls is variable depending on the display mode of the variable lid pattern P.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2347 that the mode is not the preview B mode (Z2347: No), it is determined whether the mode is the preview A mode (Z2350). In other words, it is determined whether there are four or more reserved balls, the color of the reserved pattern is set to be variable or has been set, and a reserved performance is being executed in which the variable lid pattern P is displayed without any gap between it and the reserved pattern, which is a rule different from that in the normal mode (normal state).

If it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2351: Yes), the reserved lid range value is obtained based on the notice A mode reserved lid range selection table 222d2 (see FIG. 365(c)) (Z2351). After that, the processing of Z2355 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2350 that the prediction A mode is not in effect (Z2350), it is determined whether or not the time is being reduced (Z2352). Here, whether or not the time is being reduced is determined based on the game state data attached to the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110. In addition to the variation type (reach miss, win) data, the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is also output with data attached to it indicating whether the current game state is a time-reduced game state (electric support game state), a sure-win game state (high-probability game state with electric support), or a normal game state (low-probability game state without electric support).

When it is determined that the game is in the time-saving mode (time-saving game mode or probability-changing game mode is set) (Z2352: Yes), the reserved lid range value is obtained based on the time-saving reserved lid range selection table 222d6 (see FIG. 366 (c)) (Z2353). After that, the above-mentioned Z2355 process is executed, and this process is terminated. Note that during the time-saving mode (when there is electric support), unlike the normal game mode, when there are 0 to 6 reserved balls, the variable lid pattern P is displayed only at the position where the 7th and 8th reserved balls are displayed, and when there are 7 reserved balls, the variable lid pattern P displayed at the position where the 7th reserved pattern is displayed is hidden, and when there are 8 reserved balls, the variable lid pattern P displayed at the position where the 8th reserved pattern is displayed is set to hidden. As a result, during time-saving play with electric support, when the electric device 640a is likely to be in an open state, the variable lid pattern P is configured to be displayed less than in normal game mode, preventing an increase in the load on the display control of the variable lid pattern P when there are many and frequent reserved balls.

On the other hand, if the processing of Z2352 determines that the time-saving mode is not in progress (Z2352: No), i.e., that the normal mode hold performance is in progress, the reserve lid range value is obtained (Z2354) based on the normal reserve lid range selection table 222d1 (see FIG. 365(b)), and the processing of Z2355 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Returning to Figure 397, we will continue with the explanation. After executing the reserved lid setting process (Z2229), the reserved character setting process (Z2230) is executed. In this reserved character setting process (Z2230), processes such as determining the girl character to be displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area Ds are executed.

Now, referring to FIG. 401, we will explain the reserved character setting process (Z2230) executed within the variation pattern receiving process (Z2202; FIG. 397) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 401 is a flowchart showing this reserved character setting process (Z2230).

In the reserved character setting process (Z2230), it is first determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2361). In other words, it is determined whether the reserved effect state is set to normal mode, which is the normal state. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status is not 0 (Z2361: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 0 (Z2361: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362). Here, when the number of reserved balls has changed from three to four, even after one reserved ball has been consumed by the new start of the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls has changed from three (the sum of the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b is 3) to four (the sum of the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b is 4) by the ball entering either the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640, which is the starting point.

If it is determined that the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362: Yes), a reserved character is selected from the reserved character selection table 222i (see FIG. 369 (b)) based on the contents of the background mode memory area 223i provided in the RAM 223, the reserved performance mode that has been set, and the performance counter 223h, and a display character command is set (Z2363), and this process is terminated. In this way, when the reserved balls become 4, the girl's character type is determined by lottery based on the background mode selected in the character display area C and the reserved performance mode that has been set, and the display is set. This allows the characters displayed to differ depending on the background type and the reserved performance mode, and allows the reserved performance to be diversified. In addition to the configuration of this control example, the type of character to be determined may be changed depending on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern during the change and the change pattern type (for example, super reach, etc.). By configuring it in this way, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, the player can recognize that a special pattern that is changing or a reserved ball that has been previously determined to be a hit is stored according to the character type. Also, if a character with a high selection rate is set according to the character type when it is displayed in a super reach, the player can expect early on that the super reach, which is a changing pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, will be executed when that character is displayed.

Also, in this control example, the notice A mode and notice B mode are likely to be set when a variable pattern type (e.g., a super reach type) has a high probability of a jackpot based on a pre-reading judgment, or when a hit/miss judgment result indicates a jackpot, so by displaying the J2 character or J3 character, the player can be made to expect the execution of a super reach type or the hit/miss judgment result to be a jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls has not changed from three to four (Z2362: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than four (Z2364). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than four (Z2364: Yes), a display character command that clears the reserved character is set (Z2365), and this process ends. In this way, the character is set to hidden when the number of reserved balls falls below four, so the reduction in the reserved number can be clearly notified to the player.

In the process of Z2364, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is four or more (Z2364: No), it is determined whether an over-winning state has occurred (Z2366). Here, whether an over-winning state has occurred is determined by determining whether an over-winning information command output when the number of reserved balls exceeds the upper limit value and a start winning occurs from the main control device 110 is received. If it is determined that an over-winning state has occurred (Z2366: Yes), a reserved character to be changed is selected by the reserved character change table 222j based on the contents of the background mode memory area 223i, the reserved performance mode, and the performance counter 223h, and a display character command is set (Z2267), and this process is terminated. Note that, if it is determined that an over-winning state has not occurred in Z2366 (Z2366: No), this process is terminated as it is. Thus, in this control example, when an over-winning state occurs, a change of the character displayed in the character display area C is executed. As is clear from the reserved character change table 222j (see FIG. 370), the character change is configured to be determined based on the currently set character. For example, when the reserved ball pre-judgment results in a hit/miss judgment result of a big hit (hit) or when the expectation of a big hit is high in the variation pattern type, and the prediction A mode or the prediction B mode is determined, and a character J3 that is likely to be determined is selected, a character other than J3 is configured not to be selected. Also, when the J2 character is selected, or when the prediction A mode or the prediction B mode selects a character J0 or J1 that is difficult to select, the J2 or J3 character is configured to be easily selected. In other words, it is configured to be possible to step up to J3, which is set high as the expectation of selecting a big hit or a variation pattern type with a high expectation, and it is configured to allow the player to enjoy the reserved performance by generating an over-winning. Changing this character corresponds to a privilege that is advantageous to the player.

Returning to Figure 397, we will continue with the explanation. After executing the reserved character setting process (Z2230), the speech bubble setting process (Z2231) is executed, and this process ends. In this speech bubble setting process (Z2231), a process is executed to select the content of the comment to be displayed in the speech bubble from the character displayed in the character display area C, etc.

Next, referring to FIG. 402, we will explain the speech bubble setting process (Z2231) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing this speech bubble setting process (Z2231).

In the speech bubble setting process (Z2231), it is first determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 1 (Z2381). In other words, it is determined whether a short-term winning reserved effect is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 1 (Z2381: Yes), the speech bubble content is obtained based on the short-term winning speech bubble selection table 222k4 (see FIG. 372(a)) in the speech bubble selection table 222k (see FIG. 371(a)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2382). After executing the process of Z2382, a display speech bubble command is set based on the obtained speech bubble content (Z2394), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2381, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 1 (Z2381: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2383). In other words, it is determined whether a pending effect during reach is set. If the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2383: Yes), the bubble content is obtained based on the reach effect bubble selection table 222k5 (see Figure 372 (b)) (Z2384), the processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2383 that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 2 (Z2383: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 3 (Z2385). In other words, it is determined whether a lucky hold effect is set. If the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 3 (Z2385: Yes), the bubble content is obtained based on the lucky hold bubble selection table 222k6 (see FIG. 373(a)) (Z2386), the processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this process ends.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2387 that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 3 (Z2385: No), it is determined whether the notice B mode is set (Z2387). If it is determined that the notice B mode is set (Z2387: Yes), the speech bubble content is obtained based on the notice B speech bubble selection table 222k3 (see FIG. 371 (d)) (Z2388), the processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2387 that the notice B mode is not set (Z2387: No), it is determined whether the notice A mode is set (Z2389). If it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2389: Yes), the speech bubble content is obtained based on the notice A speech bubble selection table 222k2 (see FIG. 371 (c)) (Z2390), the processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2389 that the preview A mode is not set (Z2389: No), it is determined whether the time-saving mode (time-saving play state or special chance play state) is set (Z2391). If it is determined that the time-saving mode is set (Z2391), the bubble content is obtained based on the time-saving bubble selection table 222k7 (see FIG. 373(b)) (Z2392), the processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the process of Z2391 that the time-saving setting is not set (Z2391: No), the speech bubble content is obtained based on the normal speech bubble selection table 222k1 (see FIG. 371 (b)) (Z2393), the process of Z2394 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, the system controls the selection of a comment that corresponds to each reserved presentation mode, so that the comment content that matches the reserved presentation mode can be displayed, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 403, we will explain the winning command reception process (Z2209), which is one process within the command determination process (Z2113: see FIG. 396) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing this winning command reception process (Z2209). This winning command reception process (Z2209) is executed within the command determination process (see FIG. 396) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the winning command reception process (Z2209), first, the winning information indicated by the received command is set in the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2401). Next, based on the change type of the received command and the acquired value of the performance counter 223h, the reserved change value is acquired from the reserved change selection table 222b (Fig. 364 (a)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2402).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the reserved notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2403). In other words, it is determined whether the notice A mode or notice B mode, in which the color of the reserved pattern is changed, is set. If the value of the reserved notice counter 223g is not 0 (Z2403: No), the processes Z2404 to Z2406 are skipped and the process Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the reserved notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2403: Yes), the reserved performance mode is set from the reserved performance mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 364 (b)) based on the reserved change value (Z2404). Next, it is determined whether the reserved change value is 0 (Z2405). If it is determined that the reserved change value is 0 (Z2405: Yes), the process Z2406 is skipped and the process Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reserved ball change value is not 0 (Z2405: No), the reserved ball notification counter 223g is set to the current reserved ball value (the sum of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b) (Z2406).

After completing the process of Z2406, the short-term winning determination process is executed (Z2407). Details of the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 404, but it is determined whether it is time to execute the short-term winning reserved performance, and if it is time to execute (if the execution conditions are met), a process for setting the execution of the short-term winning reserved performance is executed. Next, the lucky reserved process is executed (Z2408). Details of the lucky reserved storage process (Z2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 405, but it is determined whether it is time to execute the lucky reserved performance (if the conditions are met), and if it is execution timing, the lucky reserved performance is set to be executed. Next, the above-mentioned reserved lid setting process (Z2409), reserved character setting process (Z2410), and speech bubble setting process (Z2411) are executed, and this process is terminated. Note that the reserved lid setting process (Z2409) is the same as the content already explained with reference to FIG. 400, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Also, the speech bubble setting process (Z2411) is the same as that already explained with reference to FIG. 402, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 404, the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning determination process (Z2407). This short-term winning determination process (Z2407) is executed within the winning command reception process (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the short-term winning judgment process (Z2407), first, it is determined whether the current game state is a high probability game state or a time-limited game state (Z2421). If it is determined that the game state is a high probability game state or a time-limited game state (time-limited) (Z2421: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not a high probability game state or a time-limited game state (Z2421: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2422). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 0 (Z2422: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 0 (Z2422: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 4 (Z2423). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 4 (Z2423: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is four (Z2423: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not zero (Z2424). If it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is zero (Z2424: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not zero (Z2424: Yes), the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is set to 1 (Z2425), and this process is terminated. In this way, if the period required for four reserved balls to be established is less than five seconds, the special performance status 1 is set, which indicates that the execution of the short-term winning reserved performance is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 405, the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing this lucky hold storage process (Z2408). This lucky hold storage process (Z2408) is executed within the winning command reception process (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the lucky reserved memory process (Z2408), first, the lottery result for the winning is obtained from the contents of the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2441). Next, in the process of Z2441, it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot (Z2442). If it is determined that the obtained lottery result is not a jackpot (2442: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the obtained lottery result is determined to be a jackpot (Z2442: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is four or more (Z2443: No). If it is determined that it is four or more (Z2443: Yes), the current number of reserved balls is set to the lucky reserved memory value 223p (Z2444), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current number of reserved balls is four or less (Z2443: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 406, the variable display setting process (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (Z2114). This variable display setting process (Z2114) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 406), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (Z2501). Then, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (Z2501: No), since no variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110, the process proceeds to Z2505. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (Z2501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (Z2502), and the variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command for display is obtained from the RAM 223 (Z2503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (Z2504). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern variation display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Next, although not shown in the figure, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is shifted in sequence to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to Z2505.

In the process of Z2505, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (Z2505). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (i.e., it is off) (Z2505: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (Z2505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (Z2506), and the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (Z2507). Next, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 (Z2508), and the process proceeds to Z2509.

In the process of Z2509, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (Z2509). By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the stop display of the variable performance so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. After the process of Z2509 is executed, this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 407, we will explain the short-term winning management process (Z2111), which is one process within the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning management process (Z2111). This short-term winning management process (Z2111) executes processes such as measuring the period until four reserved balls are generated, which is necessary to determine whether or not to execute a short-term winning reserved performance.

In the short-term winning management process (Z2111), it is first determined whether the current number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (Z2601: No), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is decremented by 1 (Z2602). On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds (Z2603), and processing proceeds to Z2604.

In the processing of Z2604, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 1 (Z2604). In other words, it is determined whether a short-term winning reserved effect has already been set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605: Yes), the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is set to 0 (Z2605), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2604 that the value of the special effect status memory area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), or if it is determined in the processing of Z2605 that the number of reserved balls is greater than 4 (Z2605: No), the processing of Z2606 is skipped and this processing is terminated.

In this way, if the short-term winning reserved effect has already been set, the special effect status is set to 0 and is set to the initial value when the number of reserved balls falls to less than four. However, it is not limited to this, and the special effect status may be configured to be set to 0 when the execution of the short-term winning reserved effect ends (when the number of reserved balls reaches four in less than five seconds and the remaining period has elapsed).

Next, referring to FIG. 408, the reach-in-hold performance management process (Z2112), which is one process within the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing this reach-in-hold performance start process (Z2112). In this reach-in-hold performance management process (Z2112), processing is executed to determine the execution timing of the reach-in-hold performance and set the display mode of the reach-in-hold performance at the execution timing.

In the pending performance management process during reach (Z2112), first, it is determined whether the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2701). In other words, it is determined whether the execution of the pending performance during reach is set. If it is determined that the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is not 2 (Z2701: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2701: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pending performance start timer 223r provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2702). If it is determined that the value of the pending performance start timer 223r is 1 or more (Z2702: No), the value of the pending performance start timer 223r is decremented by 1 (Z2703). Next, it is determined whether the value of the pending performance start timer 223r calculated in the process of Z2703 is 0 (Z2704). If it is determined that the value of the pending performance start timer 223r after the calculation is 1 or more (Z2704: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pending performance start timer 223r after the subtraction is 0 (Z2704: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2705). If it is determined that the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is not 2 (Z2705: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special performance status memory area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes), a notice display command is set indicating that a pending performance during a reach will be executed (Z2706). Then, this process is terminated.

In the process of Z2702, if it is determined that the value of the pending effect start timer 223r is 0 (Z2702: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing when the fluctuation time (fluctuation period) of the special pattern that is fluctuating ends (the timing when the fluctuation period elapses) (Z2707). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the fluctuation (Z2707: Yes), 0 is set to the special effect status memory area 223n (Z2708), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2707, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the fluctuation (Z2707: No), this process ends. In this way, for pending effects during a reach, the special effect status is set to 0 when the fluctuation time of the special pattern that is in a reach fluctuation mode elapses, and the pending effect is initially set to normal mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 409, we will explain the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107), which is one process within the main processing (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107). In the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107), the pressing action of the frame button 22 is determined, and based on the pressing, the execution of a preview performance or the like is set.

In the frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z2107: see FIG. 409), it is first determined whether the SW valid time counter 223k is set to a value greater than 0 as the SW (switch) valid time (valid period) (Z2801). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No), and if it is determined that the SW valid time counter 223k is set to a value greater than 0 (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is updated by subtracting 1 (Z2802). Then, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (Z2805). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is greater than 0 (Z2806). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2806: No), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode memory area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (Z2807). Next, a display switching command to the variable pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the processing of Z2807 is set (Z2808). Next, a sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated. This sensor input process (Z2813) will be described later with reference to FIG. 410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2806 that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is greater than 0 (Z2806: Yes), it is determined whether the preview performance is being executed (preview performance in progress) (Z2809). If it is determined that the preview performance is in progress (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2810), and a display preview command indicating the preview performance determined by lottery is set (Z2811). Next, a sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Now, with reference to FIG. 410, the sensor input process (Z2813) will be described. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing the sensor input process (Z2813), which is one process within the frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z1307: FIG. 409) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this sensor input process (Z2813), the operation (input) state of the touch sensor 290 is determined, and the execution of various performances, etc. is set based on the operation.

In the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 410), first, it is determined whether the sensor effective time counter 223s is set to a value greater than 0 (Z2821). That is, it is determined whether the operation (input) of the touch sensor 290 is in a valid period. If it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No), it is determined whether a preview performance display using the touch sensor 290 is set (Z2822). If it is determined that a preview performance display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor effective time set for the preview performance is set in the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2822 that a preview performance display is not set (Z2822: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2821, if it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223s is greater than 0 (Z2821: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is updated by subtracting the amount of time that has passed (Z2824). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player has operated the touch sensor 290 by bringing his/her hand or the like close to it (Z2825). If it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is updated by adding 1 (Z2826), and a display notice display command corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223t is set (Z2827). It is determined whether the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value set for the selected touch notice performance display (Z2828). If it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is reset to the initial value of 0 (Z2829). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is not the upper limit (Z2828: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 409, the explanation will continue. In the process of Z2801, if the device is not in standby mode (Z2801: No), or if the process of Z2802 determines that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2802: No), it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 1 or greater (Z2805). If the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 1 or greater (Z2805: Yes), the SW valid time counter 223k is decremented (Z2806). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether a preview performance is being executed (preview performance in progress) (Z2808). If it is determined that a preview performance is in progress (Z2808: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2809), and a display preview command indicating the preview performance determined by lottery is set (Z2810). Next, a sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends. Note that the sensor input process (Z2813) has already been described in detail with reference to FIG. 410, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the process of Z2808 that the preview performance is not in progress (Z2808: No), the processes of Z2803 and Z2804 already described are executed, and then this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of Z2807 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2807: No), the processes of Z2808 to Z2810 are skipped, and the sensor input process (Z2813) already described with reference to FIG. 410 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2805 that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2805: No), it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811). If it is determined that a fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811: Yes), the SW effective time is set in the SW effective time counter 223k based on the set fluctuation pattern (Z2812), sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. Note that, if a fluctuation pattern has not been set in the processing of Z2811 (Z2811: No), the processing of Z2812 is skipped, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. Here, there are fluctuation patterns in which a performance using the frame button 22 is set and in which it is not set, and if it is not set, "0" is set in the SW effective time counter 223k.

<Regarding control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Figs. 411 to 424. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 411, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 411 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute the initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following flow. When the power supply unit 115 supplies power to the display control unit 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

If all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 will consume a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This increases the time it takes to start up the MPU 231, resulting in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (Z3001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Now, the boot process (Z3001) will be described with reference to FIG. 412. FIG. 412 is a flowchart showing the boot process (Z3001) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will deteriorate even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, a process is executed in which the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (Z3101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program memory area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the starting address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (Z3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3101.

In addition, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND type flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of Z3102, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a (Z3103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (Z3104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) that should be executed after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 412) is completed (Z3105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (Z3001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, and the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and makes it easy to execute diversified and complex presentations using the auxiliary presentation unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 412, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 are configured to include all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program memory area 234d1, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of Z3102. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of control programs including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of Z3101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated multiple times, including the processes of Z3101 and Z3102, and then execute the processes of Z3103 to Z3105.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program memory area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program memory area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute processes Z3103 to Z3105 without executing processes Z3101 and Z3102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 411. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Z3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and for the I/O devices, etc. Also, processes such as clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 are performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read information from this register or partial area of built-in memory at any time and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3004). This transfer instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of the image data, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (Z3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed in which the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described below (see FIG. 422(a)) (see Z4602 in FIG. 422(a)).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413(b)), the simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 413(b)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 413(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 376 is drawn.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third pattern display device 81, it can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, and so can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the use of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234 prevents the efficiency of operation checks from deteriorating.

In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power is turned on. Therefore, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, i.e., if a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image (not shown) can be instantly displayed during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the transfer takes time, and the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After processing Z3005, interrupt permission is set (Z3006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is cut off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by processing Z3006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 413(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 413(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Z3201), and then the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 413(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 413(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 379) of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first explain the outline of the V interrupt processing flow, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 413(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (Z3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (Z3301: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the power-on image shown in FIG. 376, a command determination process (Z3302) is executed, and then a display setting process (Z3303) is executed.

In the command determination process (Z3302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 414.

In the display setting process (Z3303), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Z3302) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 420 to 421.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (Z3304). In this task processing, based on the contents of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which was specified by the display setting process (Z3303) or the simplified display setting process (Z3309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (Z3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and also when a continuous preview command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 422 and 423.

Next, the drawing process is executed (Z3306). In this drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 379 is generated from the types of various sprites that make up one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (Z3304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (Z3305), and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 424.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (Z3307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of Z3307 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (Z3308) is executed to display the power-on image (Figure 376) on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (Z3309) is executed, and processing proceeds to Z3304.

Next, with reference to Figures 414 to 419, the details of the command determination process (Z3302) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, Figure 414 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (Z3302: Fig. 414), as shown in Fig. 414, first it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z3401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (Z3401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes), a new command flag is set to on (Z3402) to notify the display setting process (Z3303) that a new command has been processed in the on state, and then the type of command is analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (Z3403).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z3404), and if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (Z3404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (Z3405), and processing returns to Z3401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (Z3405) will be described with reference to FIG. 415(a). FIG. 415(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing (Z3405: FIG. 415(a)), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation presentation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z3501).

In this case, the main control unit 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, so two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are never received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display fluctuation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of Z3501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a change presentation having a shorter change time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control device 110 while a change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast to this, as in this embodiment, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, even if the main control unit 110 has actually instructed a change presentation with a longer change time than the set display data table, as described below, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the change presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, so that the player can continue to watch the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Z3501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of Z3501 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other variation display data tables are set off (Z3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the processing of Z3503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (Z3504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3505). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (Z3506), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by processing Z3505, extracts the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by processing Z3501, and identifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the processing of Z3502 extracts the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process, the timing counter 233h, in which the time data is set by the processing of Z3504, is used to time the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table has ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 414. In the processing of Z3404, if it is determined that there is no variation pattern command for display (Z3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a stop type command for display among the unprocessed commands (Z3406), and if there is a variation type command for display (Z3406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (Z3407), and processing returns to Z3401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (Z3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 415(b). FIG. 415(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process (Z3407: Fig. 415 (b)), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (Z3601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter, which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see Fig. 413 (b)) is executed, to finally set the stop pattern after the variable performance to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (Z3602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of Z3602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set to off (Z3603). After that, the process returns to the processing of Z3401 in FIG. 414.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop pattern set by the processing of Z3602 is described as type information for identifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the above-mentioned task processing (Z3304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of Z3602 is identified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by Z3603, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 414, the explanation will continue. In the process of Z3406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (Z3406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display preview display command among the unprocessed commands (Z3408). If it is determined that a display preview display command has been received (Z3408: Yes), a preview performance display process is executed (Z3409). Details of the preview performance display process (Z3409) will be explained with reference to FIG. 416(a), but during the variable display of the special pattern, a preview display mode is set to notify the player of the expectation of a jackpot, a notification that a jackpot has occurred, etc., which are displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, the preview performance display process (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 416(a). FIG. 416(a) is a flowchart showing this preview performance display process (Z3409).

In the preview performance display process (Fig. 416 (a), Z3409), first, a display data table corresponding to the received preview display command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z3701). A transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the preview set to be displayed at a display timing based on the display timing of the preview display indicated by the received preview display command for display is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to on (Z3703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (Z3704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3705).

In this way, the preview display is set based on the display preview command output from the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the specified timing. Therefore, a variety of display modes can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the same variation pattern can be made to appear to the player as if it were a different display mode.

In this embodiment, the content of the preview display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the selection of the preview display may be performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In addition, in this embodiment, a display data table for a notice is set, but this is not limited to this, and a display data table that has already been set may be overwritten with a notice display setting.

Returning to FIG. 414 for further explanation. In the process of Z3408, if it is determined that there is no display preview command (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (Z3410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (Z3410: Yes), mode switching processing is executed (Z3411). Details of this mode switching processing (Z3411) will be explained with reference to FIG. 416 (b), but processing is executed to switch to a display mode corresponding to the background mode based on the operation of the frame button 22.

Now, referring to FIG. 416(b), the mode switching process (Z3411) will be described. FIG. 416(b) is a flowchart showing this mode switching process (Z3411). In the mode switching process (Z3411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode memory area 223i (Z3801). It is determined whether the special pattern is changing (Z3802). If it is determined that the special pattern is changing (Z3802: Yes), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is set to active (Z3803). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special pattern is stopped (Z3802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (Z3804).

In this way, when the special symbol is changing, the display mode of the changing pattern corresponding to the background mode is switched on. On the other hand, when the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display mode in the standby state is set to be displayed with the set background.

The process of changing the background etc. in accordance with the background mode may be configured as follows.

The rear image change flag, which notifies the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the rear image resulting from receiving the rear image change command, is set to ON. Then, of the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (rear image A to C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and the rear image discrimination flags corresponding to the other rear image types are set to OFF, the rear image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag to be set is on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image discrimination flag to be set. Then, if the identified rear image type is rear B or rear C, as described above, since part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is not resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that one of the rear views A to C is to be displayed based on the rear view type of the rear view image specified, the rear view image discrimination flag that has been set is used to identify the rear view image type to be displayed at that time, and furthermore, the range of the rear view image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the rear view image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

In addition, since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands will not be received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. When it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change in the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning to FIG. 414, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z3410, if it is determined that there is no display switch command (Z3410: No), it is determined whether there is a display reserved lid command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a display reserved lid command (Z3412: Yes), reserved lid command processing is executed (Z3413).

Now, referring to FIG. 417, we will explain the reserved lid command processing (Z3413). FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing this reserved lid command processing (Z3413).

In the reserved lid command process (Z3413: Fig. 417), first, a display data table for the reserved lid of the display performance corresponding to the received display reserved lid command is determined, and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer (Z3901). Here, the display data table is added to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d that is currently set as active). The added position is before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for reserved lids set in Z3901 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for reserved lids set by the processing of Z3901 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the display data tables for other reserved lids are set on (Z3903).

Next, based on the change time of the change pattern corresponding to the display data table for the reserved lid set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3901, time data representing that change time is set in the timing counter 233h (Z3904), the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3905), and the process returns to the command determination process.

When a reserved lid command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern to be set corresponding to the added time is identified based on the time data indicated by the reserved lid command and the set variation pattern and background mode, and the display data table is set. By configuring in this way, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in multiple modes, the display mode after the added time can be set to the display mode corresponding to the set background mode, thereby reducing the control load on the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, the data is added to the existing display data table, but it may be configured to set a new display data table.

Returning to FIG. 414, we will continue with the explanation. In the processing of Z3412, if it is determined that there is no reserved lid command for display (Z3412: No), it is determined whether there is a reserved character command for display (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a reserved character command for display (Z3412: Yes), reserved character command processing is executed (Z3413).

Now, referring to FIG. 417(b), we will explain reserved character command processing (Z3415). FIG. 417(b) is a flowchart showing this reserved character command processing (Z3415).

In the reserved character command process (Z3413: Fig. 417), first, a display data table for the reserved character of the display effect corresponding to the received display reserved character command is determined, and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer (Z4001). Here, the display data table is added to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d that is currently set as active). The added position is before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in Z4001 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variable pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set by the processing of Z4001 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the display data tables for the other reserved characters are set to off (Z4003).

Next, based on the change time of the change pattern corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in the display data table buffer 233d by processing Z4001, time data representing that change time is set in the timing counter 233h (Z4004), the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4005), and the process returns to the command determination process.

When a reserved character command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern to be set corresponding to the added time is identified based on the time data indicated by the reserved character command and the set variation pattern and background mode, and the display data table is set. By configuring it in this way, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in multiple modes, the display mode after the added time can be set to the display mode corresponding to the set background mode, thereby reducing the control load on the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, the data is added to the existing display data table, but it may be configured to set a new display data table.

Returning to FIG. 414, we will continue with the explanation. In the processing of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no reserved character command for display (Z3414: No), it is determined whether there is a speech bubble command for display (Z3416). If it is determined that there is a speech bubble command for display (Z3416: Yes), speech bubble command processing is executed (Z3417).

Now, we will explain the speech bubble command processing (Z3417) with reference to FIG. 418. FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing this speech bubble command processing (Z3417).

In the speech bubble command process (Z3417: Fig. 418), first, a display data table for the speech bubble of the display effect corresponding to the received display speech bubble command is determined, and is added to and set in the display data table set in the display data table buffer (Z4101). Here, the display data table is added to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d that is currently set as active). The added position is before the END data.

Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the speech bubble set in Z4101 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variable pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the speech bubble set by the processing of Z4101 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other display data tables for the speech bubble are set off (Z4103).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the speech bubble set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4101, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (Z4104), the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4105), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

When a speech bubble command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern to be set corresponding to the added time is identified based on the time data indicated by the speech bubble command and the set variation pattern and background mode, and the display data table is set. By configuring in this way, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in multiple modes, the display mode after the added time can be set to the display mode corresponding to the set background mode, thereby reducing the control load on the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, the data is added to the existing display data table, but it may be configured to set a new display data table.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 414. If it is determined in the processing of Z3414 that there is no display balloon command (Z3416: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Z3414), and if there is an error command (Z3414: Yes), error command processing is executed (Z3415), and processing returns to Z3415.

Now, with reference to FIG. 419, the error command processing (Z3415) will be described in detail. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing (Z3415: Fig. 419), first, the error occurrence flag, which indicates that an error has occurred when it is in the ON state, is set to ON (Z4201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (Z4202), the error command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by processing Z4201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by processing Z4202, and a processing is performed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the Z4202 process sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. This causes warning images corresponding to all error types to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing players and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence situation.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 414. If it is determined in the processing of Z3414 that there is no error command (Z3414: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (Z3416), and processing returns to Z3401.

In process Z3401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether there are any unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and if there are any unprocessed new commands (Z3401: Yes), processes Z3402 to Z3416 are executed again. Then, processes Z3401 to Z3416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when process Z3416 determines that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (Z3308), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 376, i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 415(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 415(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, while the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to those commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 415(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of Z3501, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of Z3502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, with reference to Figs. 420 and 421, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (Z3303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. Fig. 420 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 420, it is determined whether the new command flag is on or not (Z4301). If the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (Z4301: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, and processes Z4302 to Z4304 are skipped, and processing proceeds to Z4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Z4301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (Z4302), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by processes Z4303 to Z4304.

In the processing of Z4303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on or not (Z4303). If the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303: Yes), the warning image setting processing is executed (Z4304).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 421(a). FIG. 421(a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for expanding image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images of errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is expanded (Z4401).

The task process uses this expanded warning image data to identify the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image, and determines various parameters required for drawing each sprite, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing Z4401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (Z4402) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 420. After the warning image setting process (Z4304), or in the process of Z4303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (Z4303: No), then the process proceeds to Z4305.

In Z4305, pointer update processing is executed (Z4305). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. 421 (b). FIG. 421 (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to pointer 233f (Z4501). That is, in principle, the update process is performed so that pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time V interrupt processing is executed. Also, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is written at address "0000H" and the actual data of each table is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order starting from address "0001H".

After updating the value of pointer 233f by processing Z4501, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (Z4502). If the data is End information (Z4502: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (Z4503), and if it is a demo display data table (Z4503: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (Z4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (Z4505), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 81 can be made to repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z4503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (Z4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (Z4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of Z4502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (Z4502: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 421, the explanation will continue. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4306). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents expanded in the processing of Z4306, together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (Z4307), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (Z4308). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or greater (Z4308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (Z4308: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on (Z4309).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (Z4309: No), the confirmation display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the confirmation display, so first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4310), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (Z4311). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the confirmation display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (Z4312), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4313). Then, after the confirmation display flag, which indicates that the confirmation display is being performed in the on state, is set to on (Z4314), the contents of the stop pattern discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop pattern discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (Z4315), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In this way, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the final display performance of the stopped patterns in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting a separate program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so that various types of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of Z4315 is used to identify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is recorded until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change based on the data table. In the task processing (Z3304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is identified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by Z4315 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4309, if the confirmation display flag is on and not off (Z4309: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on or not (Z4316). If the demo display flag is off (Z4316: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmation display performance, so the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4317), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (Z4318). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (Z4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4320), the demo display flag, which indicates that a demo performance is being performed in the on state, is set to on (Z4321), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt processing.

In the processing of Z4316, if the demo display flag is on (Z4316: Yes), this means that a demo performance is performed after the final display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again, as described above, by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (Z3309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 413 (b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, a processing is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one image (FIG. 376) of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time after the performance time of the variable performance using the power-on variable image has ended.

Next, with reference to Figs. 422 and 423, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (Z3305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, Fig. 422(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (Z4601). Then, if the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (Z4602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 422 (b).

On the other hand, if the result of processing Z4601 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (Z4601: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Z4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that future transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 423.

Next, referring to FIG. 422(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (Z4602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 422(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (Z4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (Z4701), and if a transfer instruction has been sent (Z4701: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (Z4702). In this Z4702 process, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, if it is determined by the process of Z4702 that the transfer process has not been completed (Z4702: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, and therefore the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (Z4702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of Z4703. Also, if the result of processing Z4701 shows that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (Z4701: No), the process proceeds to processing Z4703.

In the process of Z4703, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (Z4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (Z4703: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Z4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If all resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of Z4703 (Z4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (Z4705) and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413(b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 413(b)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 413(b)), the command determination process (see FIG. 414 to FIG. 419) and the display setting process (see FIG. 420 to FIG. 421(b)) are executed, so that the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 423) (see Z4601: No in FIG. 422(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as the back image, the third pattern, the character pattern, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after their display is determined by the main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 423, we will explain the normal image transfer setting process (Z4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (Z4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (Z4305) of the previously executed display setting process (Z3303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4801). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (Z4802). If it is transfer data information (Z4802: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (Z4803). Furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (Z4804), and the process proceeds to Z4805.

In addition, in the processing of Z4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data (Z4802: No), the processing of Z4803 and Z4804 is skipped and processing proceeds to Z4805. In the processing of Z4805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (Z4805), and if a transfer instruction has been set (Z4805: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (Z4806).

In this process of Z4806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if the process of Z4806 determines that the transfer process has not ended (Z4806: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (Z4806: Yes), the process proceeds to process Z4807. Also, if the result of the process of Z4805 indicates that an image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (Z4805: No), the process proceeds to process Z4807.

In the processing of Z4807, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (Z4807). If the transfer start flag is on (Z4807: Yes), image data for which transfer should be started is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (Z4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by processing of Z3603 is set as the image data to be transferred, and processing proceeds to Z4809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Z4807: No), this processing is terminated.

In the process of Z4809, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809). This determination in the process of Z4809 is made by referencing the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of processing Z4809 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing burden on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of Z4809 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (Z4810). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing Z4810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (Z4811), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on," and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. Also, if the rear image is changed based on receipt of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this embodiment, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

In this case, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This makes it possible to manage and control the transfer of image data for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

Next, referring to FIG. 424, we will explain the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (Z3306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list shown in FIG. 379 is generated (Z4901) from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Z3304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instructions set by the transfer setting process (Z3305). That is, in the process of Z4901, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Z3304), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprite to be placed in the back of the image for one frame to the sprite to be placed in the front, and the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite are described as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite in the rearranged sprite order, thereby generating a drawing list. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As mentioned above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are sent to the image controller (Z4902). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is transferred sequentially to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image expanded in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After processing Z4902, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (Z4903). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image are completed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

In addition, in the above control example, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as a single device.

In addition, in the above control example, first, a command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the command to be sent to the display control device 114, and then the command is sent from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In contrast to this, it may be configured so that first, a command is sent from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines the command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and then the display control device 114 sends the command to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 may temporarily store the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 may determine whether the destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused, and if it is unused, transfer the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

In this case, whether the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused may be determined by providing the image controller 237 with a resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (i.e., in use) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (i.e., in use), and the MPU 231 checking the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the MPU 231 may monitor signals transmitted between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and check whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused based on the state of the signals. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing or ends accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 may notify the MPU 231 of this information as needed, and the MPU 231 may determine whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused based on the notification.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third pattern display device 81, the MPU 231 can determine whether the scan is in a blank period by checking the drive status of the image controller 237 or by receiving a notification from the image controller 237, and if the scanning state is in a blank period, it can determine that each video RAM 235, 236 is unused. In this way, the image controller 237 can easily make the determination by checking only the scanning state of the third pattern display device 81 to determine whether it is unused or not.

In this case, when transfer data information other than null data exists at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 may start a process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the specific sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. By transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite according to the display data table or the like, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

The process of reading image data from character ROM 234 and transferring it to normal video RAM 236 may be performed within the display main process or main process loop executed by MPU 231. This allows MPU 231 to execute image data transfer processing by utilizing time when important processes in display control device 114, such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, are not being performed. Furthermore, since command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed with priority over display main processing, MPU 231 can execute image data transfer processing without affecting command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 may not use the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM, but may assign different address areas to each video RAM in an address system commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify to the image controller 237 the video RAM to be accessed (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), but simply specifies an address, and the image controller 237 can determine whether the area specified by the address is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In other words, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of that video RAM to the image controller 237, it is sufficient to simply specify an address set in the common address system, and the configuration of the command for specifying the video RAM can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the information indicating the storage destination of sprite data does not include the storage RAM type, but simply specifies the storage destination address using an address set within a common address system, thereby simplifying the configuration of the drawing list.

In the above control example, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) that connects the MPU 231 and image controller 237, but this is not necessarily limited to the case, and the character ROM 234 may be directly connected to the image controller 237. Also, a bridge circuit that converts the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM may be provided, and the character ROM 234 may be connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or image controller 237 via the bridge circuit.

By providing this bridge circuit, it is possible to connect the character ROM 234, which is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a, by using the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240), which are designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM will be used as the character ROM. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or bridge circuit, it may be configured so that the character ROM 234 can be accessed directly from the MPU 231.

In the above control example, the character ROM 234 is configured as a NAND flash memory 234a, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be configured as a large-capacity, inexpensive non-volatile storage means, such as a hard disk. Such large-capacity, inexpensive storage means generally have a slow read speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above control example, it is possible to display the image at the desired time without any problems.

In the above control example, a NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234, and a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and a first program storage area may be provided in a memory configured with a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored in the first program storage area. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, a Ferroelectric RAM (FeRAM), a Magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), or a Phase change RAM (PRAM) may be provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area may be provided in the first program storage area to store a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in that area. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. A memory made of a non-volatile storage medium that can read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a may be connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), a first program storage area may be provided in that memory, and a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored in that area. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, a Ferroelectric RAM (FeRAM), a Magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), or a Phase change RAM (PRAM) may be provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided therein to store a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b may set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" on the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has already been set in the buffer RAM 234c or is in the process of being set, so that the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary performance section or the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

In addition, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified on the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, it may read data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address directly from the first program storage area 234d1 and output it to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary performance section or the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. This reduces power consumption in the character ROM 234.

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237, but this is not necessarily limited to the above, and the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected. In addition, if the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or image controller 237 via the above bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114 even if the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be able to directly connect the resident video RAM 235.

In the above control example, a case was described in which one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more video RAMs may be provided. Also, multiple resident video RAMs may be provided, each of which stores resident image data corresponding to images according to various modes, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured as a single-port type (single input/output port) DRAM, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and a multi-port type RAM may be used. This allows writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to be performed simultaneously, so that, for example, image data can be read from the normal video RAM 236 to draw an image while image data read from the character ROM 234 is written to the normal video RAM 236 in parallel. This reduces the risk of delays in the drawing process due to the writing of image data.

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured as separate memories, but this is not necessarily limited to this. A single RAM may be divided into a resident area and a normal area, and the same contents as the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When configuring a resident area and a normal area in a single RAM, it is preferable to use a multi-port RAM to prevent the input/output ports of the memory from being occupied by either the resident area or the normal area during read or write processing.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is just one example, and the type may be set appropriately depending on the content of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this case, it is preferable to make at least the image data corresponding to the image to be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 resident in the resident video RAM 235 in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input.

In the above control example, a portion of the image data stored in character ROM 234 is transferred to resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all of the image data stored in character ROM 234 may be transferred to resident video RAM 235. In this case, since the image data stored in non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in resident video RAM 235, normal video RAM 236 may be used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by image controller 237.

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 continues to retain its contents without being overwritten while the power is on, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a specified trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be significantly different based on a command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, a specified transitional image may be displayed as a transition period while the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is being changed. The image data corresponding to the transitional image may be stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and may continue to be retained in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. Also, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 to read the image data that is to be newly resident, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (i.e., while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 may transmit a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for the image data that is to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 may read the image data that is to be resident from the character ROM 234 in accordance with the transfer instruction (transfer data information), and transfer the image data via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (i.e., while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read).

When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 to read the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction from the MPU 231 to transfer the image data to be resident, may access the character ROM 234 to read the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

In the above control example, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is made resident, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power outage is resolved is stored, and during the main display process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power is turned on, the RAM judgment value is checked before starting to transfer the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and if the RAM judgment value is a normal value, this means that the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally, so the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be prevented. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be prevented by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power outage and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally, it is possible to prevent the image data from being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in vain, and the time required for recovery from the power outage can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In contrast, by storing the RAM judgment value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modified example, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power outage or the like, the time required for the transfer of the image data can be shortened, so that the third symbol display device 81 can immediately display a normal performance image. Therefore, the player can immediately start playing. The RAM judgment value may be, for example, a checksum value of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. In addition, instead of using this RAM judgment value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written to a specific area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above control example, the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237, but this is not necessarily limited to the case, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). In addition, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, so that the transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the internal bus (bus line 240) through which a lot of data signals are exchanged.

In the above control example, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is described as one block of the NAND flash memory 234a, but this is not necessarily limited to this and may be set as appropriate. For example, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be set to a data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 during the period (blank period) during which the third pattern display device 81 scans a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. This allows the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period.

In the above control example, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while image data read from character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, image data stored in another buffer RAM may be transferred to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. Also, one buffer RAM may be divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from character ROM 234 is stored in one area, the image data may be transferred from another area in which image data is stored to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of image data read from character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of image data written to the buffer RAM to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 can be processed in parallel, so the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above control example, the case where image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on has been described, but the image data corresponding to the power-on main image may also be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on. This makes it possible to transfer image data to be resident from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on main image using image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in normal video RAM 236. During this time, image data is not read from resident video RAM 235, so image data can be transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to complete the transfer of image data quickly and simplify the process.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. However, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on. This allows the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred while the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image stored in the normal video RAM 236. During this time, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. This allows the image data transfer to be completed quickly and simplifies the process.

In the above control example, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from character ROM 234 via buffer RAM 237a to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 is described. However, since image data is not read from resident video RAM 235 while image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is being transferred, image data corresponding to the main image at power-on may also be transferred directly from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 without going through buffer RAM 237a. Also, in a configuration in which image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on, and the power-on main image is displayed using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in normal video RAM 236, and image data that should be resident is not read from resident video RAM 235 while the image data is being transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, the image data that should be resident may be transferred directly from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 without going through buffer RAM 237a. This allows the transfer of image data to be completed more quickly without going through buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above control example, the case was described where image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from character ROM 234 via buffer RAM 237a to power-on main image area 235a and power-on variable image area 235b of resident video RAM 235, but since image data is not read from resident video RAM 235 while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are being transferred, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image may also be transferred directly from character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variable image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 without going through buffer RAM 237a. In addition, when image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power is turned on, and the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image stored in the normal video RAM 236, and image data that should be resident is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the image data that should be resident may be transferred directly from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. This allows the transfer of image data to be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the presentation mode of the super reach based on the back image change command or the frame button operation command, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 may grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and generate a back image change command or a game state command according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change in the game state. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the presentation mode of the back image or the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. The display control device 114 may also directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the presentation mode of the back image or the super reach according to the game state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a portion of the range of the rear image after the change, or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the changed performance mode, is made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the rear image can be instantly displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

The display control device 114 may also change the rear image in accordance with the specifications of the display data table, transfer data table, additional data table, or composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image may be configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, or display data table. Here, when transferring image data of the rear image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, or display data table, the transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that the new rear image is stored in a sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored, or the transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that the new rear image is stored in an area other than the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored. In the latter case, when returning the rear image to the original rear image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer image data corresponding to the original rear image again, so that an increase in the processing load of the display control device 114 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the output signal from the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is sent to the display control device 114, causing the display control device 114 to immediately display a warning image on the third pattern display device 81. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal from the vibration sensor may be input to the main control device 110, the main control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main control device 110 may send an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 may receive the error command and further send an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the presence or absence of a vibration error may be detected by the display control device 114. If a vibration error is detected, an error occurrence flag may be turned on, and an error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error may be turned on. If the display setting process (see FIG. 420) determines that the error occurrence flag is on, a warning image setting process (see FIG. 421(a)) may be executed, thereby causing a warning image to be displayed immediately on the third pattern display device 81. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive error commands from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and therefore allows the warning image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 more quickly.

In the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back of the game board 13 has been described, but instead of or together with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor may be attached to the back of the game board 13. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting a magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the ball from being intentionally entered into the ball entry hole by changing the flow of the ball with a magnetic field such as a magnet, and the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if the main control device 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, an error command conveying the magnetic field error may be sent from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. In addition, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, when the voice lamp control device 113 judges that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, an error command notifying the magnetic field error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114 may be configured to be resident with image data corresponding to an error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by displaying the third pattern display device 81, and when an error command notifying the magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 may display the warning image on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, when the display control device 114 judges that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 114 may turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on, thereby displaying the warning image on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or detects the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on an output signal from the magnet sensor, it can display an error message image notifying the player of the magnetic field error without delay on the third pattern display device 81 using an error message image that is resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of an error message image by the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can be deterred from engaging in fraudulent behavior.

When the drawing contents required to change the color tone of a part or all of a performance are specified by an additional data table or a display data table, the additional data table or the display data table may correspond to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for which one frame of an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and may specify the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and color information specifying the color tone of the sprite after the change in that time. Then, when the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and color information specifying the color tone of the sprite after the change are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 may replace the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d with the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the display data table to create a drawing list. This allows the image controller 237 to draw the image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the drawing contents required to change and display an image displayed in one performance are specified by a display data table, the display data table may correspond to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit, and may specify the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed at that time. Then, when the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 may include the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite in place of the sprite to be replaced among the various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the image controller 237 to draw an image that includes the new sprite to be displayed.

In the above control example, the display data table includes transfer data information of image data required to draw an image according to the drawing content specified in the display data table. In addition, the display data table may include transfer data information of image data required to draw an image according to the additional drawing content specified in the display data table (additional transfer data information). In this case, the additional transfer data information may be specified together with or separately from the additional drawing content, in association with identification information (such as "additional performance 1", "additional performance 2", etc.) for identifying the additionally displayable performance for each address. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the performance to be additionally displayed, it may be configured to create a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined performance.

In this way, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprites used in drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance according to the drawing list before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the additional effects to be displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Also, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, the necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing contents, so that the drawing of many sprites can be specified according to the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, various types of effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the above control example, in a display table corresponding to a variation pattern that allows the player to select a Super Reach, the drawing content corresponding to all Super Reach that can be selected by the player is specified in the display data table, and only the drawing content corresponding to the Super Reach selected by the player is identified. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected Super Reach may be added to the display data table. This makes it easy to identify the drawing content of the Super Reach selected by the player. Also, because there is no need to specify the drawing content corresponding to all Super Reach in the display data table, it is possible to prevent the data size of the display data table from becoming too large.

In the above control example, the display data table includes the drawing contents and the transfer data information, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The display data table may specify the drawing contents and the transfer data information, and the additional drawing contents of the effect to be added and displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when the effect to be added and displayed is determined, the additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. In addition, the additional data table may specify not only the additional drawing contents, but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required for drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents. This allows the drawing contents of the effect to be added and displayed and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing to be specified using the additional data table, so that the processing load required for the specification can be reduced compared to the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, respectively.

In the above control example, the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a display data table may be prepared for each element of the variation performance, such as "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "preview performance", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the elements required for the variation performance may be identified according to the variation pattern indicated in the display variation pattern command. Then, the display data tables corresponding to the identified papers required for the variation performance may be compiled into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the variation pattern may be generated. In many cases, "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "normal reach", and the like are displayed in common to each variation pattern. Therefore, by breaking down the variation performance into elements in this way and preparing a display data table for each element, the data tables can be efficiently maintained.

In the above control example, a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to identify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f, but a pointer may be prepared for each data table.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of an image at which the drawing process is completed (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example), but the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display one frame of an image. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of an image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so by transmitting a V interrupt signal each time one frame of an image is displayed, the time interval can be accurately maintained without having to be timed.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be displayed based on the drawing target buffer information sent from the MPU 231, and reads out the image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits it to the third pattern display device 81. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. The image controller 237 may alternately select the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be displayed each time it receives a drawing list, and read out the image information previously displayed from a frame buffer other than the selected frame buffer and transmit it to the third pattern display device 81. Also, the image controller 237 may switch the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be displayed and the frame buffer that outputs image information to the third pattern display device 81 each time it transmits one frame of image information to the third pattern display device 81.

In the above control example, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display performance is set in the display data table buffer 233d, if neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display performance ends, the demo display data table corresponding to the demo performance is set in the display data table buffer 233d. However, this may be set again to the display data table buffer 233d. In this case, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display performance may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the confirmed display performance ends until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to continue displaying the confirmed display performance until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above control example, the demo performance changes the back image and displays a frozen third pattern consisting of a main pattern without a number from "0" to "9", but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the demo performance may display a frozen third pattern consisting of a main pattern with a number or a main pattern without a number in a semi-transparent state. It may also change only the back image without displaying the third pattern. It may also display a character or back image that is completely different from the third pattern and back image used in the variable display.

In the above control example, in the display control device 114, after power is turned on, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after power is turned on, only image data corresponding to the power-on main image is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then the image data to be resident, including the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image, is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. This allows the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on, so that players, hall staff, or operational checks at the factory during manufacturing can immediately confirm that the pachinko machine 10 has started operating without any problems after the power is turned on.

In this case, the MPU 231 may also monitor the completion of the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if a display variable pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored in the power-on variable image area 235b, a simplified variable display can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the power-on variable image area 235b based on the display variable pattern command. Note that it is preferable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. This allows the variable display using the power-on variable image to be performed more quickly.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table are described as specifying the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) and the information of the image data to be transferred at that time (transfer data information) in accordance with a time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and any display contents may be specified at a predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81. For example, if the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third pattern display device 81 displays 30 frames of images per second, the third pattern display device 81 displays one frame of image every 1/30 seconds, so the display data table may specify the display contents at every 1/30 second interval.

In addition, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn at each predetermined time interval may be specified as the address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to that sprite type is stored, rather than specifying the sprite type itself. In order to read image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 manages the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of that sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to that sprite type is stored is specified as the display content to be displayed at each predetermined time interval in the display data table, it becomes unnecessary to manage both the information specifying the sprite and the address of the character ROM 234 in association with each sprite type, thereby reducing the processing load.

In the above control example, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Alternatively, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a specific sprite type, the MPU 231 may refer to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 to determine whether or not the specific image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, may set a transfer instruction for the image data of the specific sprite type. In addition, when the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for image data of a specific sprite type, the MPU 231 may store information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and erase information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a in which the image data of the sprite type is stored.

In the above control example, when transferring image data of a specific sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 determines whether the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the image data of the specific sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, the transfer process is not executed. However, this process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i may be prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite may be stored. In addition, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a specific sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 may send transfer data information for that image data to the image controller 237, regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236.

In the above control example, only image data corresponding to "rear A" among multiple rear images is made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, but this is not necessarily limited to the above, and image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of rear images used in some super reaches may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the rear images of super reaches that appear frequently or are expected to appear frequently resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the number of times that the transfer process of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed can be reduced.

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table specifies an image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to transfer the image data specified by the transfer command from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. Information regarding the sprite type required in the display data table may be written at the beginning of the display data table, and the MPU 231 may control the image controller 237 to transfer the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information written at the beginning of the display data table. Alternatively, based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 may determine the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the command, and control the image controller 237 to transfer the image data of that image type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the above control example, a case was described in which the color tone of a portion of the image, rear C, which is the rear image of the "island stage", changes over time, but the color tone of the entire image may also change over time. Furthermore, the rear image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes color over time, and instead of such a rear image, an object (e.g., a person) that appears may move or change over time.

In the above control example, the main control unit 110 includes in the reserved ball count command the information of the various counters (special win random number counter C1, special win type counter C2) acquired at the time of the initial winning, which it notifies to the voice lamp control unit 113. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of the various counters (special win random number counter C1, special win type counter C2) acquired at the time of the initial winning may be notified to the voice lamp control unit 113 by a separate command.

In the above control example, when executing the variable effect, a high-speed change is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 scroll so quickly that the player cannot see them. However, instead of displaying this high-speed change, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they are not visible to the player, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which numerous white dots are displayed randomly.

In the above control example, a case was described in which the game board 13 is provided with one first ball entry port 64, which starts a lottery for a jackpot with a special pattern when a ball enters the game board 13, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the game board 13 may be provided with multiple (e.g., two) first ball entry ports, each of which detects an entry ball independently and starts a lottery for a jackpot. In this case, the reserved ball count command sent by the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 when there is a reservation at each first ball entry port may include information indicating which first ball entry port the reservation is from. In addition, the variation pattern command sent by the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 when starting a variation may also include information indicating which first ball entry port the variation performance is reserved from. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 113, a reserved ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the first ball entrance indicated in the reserved ball number command is set to the reserved ball number, and when a fluctuation pattern command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the first ball entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, allowing the number of reserved balls to be counted for each first ball entrance.

In the above control example, the case where the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively) is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. This can reduce the number of times the main control device 110 sends reserved number commands to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113.

In the above control example, the winning entry into the first ball entrance 64 and the passing through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display based on the winning entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37 to notify the number of reserved balls.

Also, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern moves vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

Here, an overview of the first control example will be described. On the game board 13, the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, and the second ball entrance 640 are arranged as starting holes (ball entrance means, starting means). When a game ball enters one of the starting holes, a lottery (judgment) of a win or a miss is executed with a predetermined lottery probability. If the lottery result (judgment result) is a win (a specific judgment result), a jackpot game (a bonus game that is advantageous to the player) is executed. A plurality of types are set for the jackpot game, and the bonuses granted to the player are set to differ depending on the type. For example, a difference in the number of jackpot rounds, a winning type in which a high probability game state (first special game state) is set after a jackpot game, a winning type in which a time-saving game state (a second special game state in which the player's profit is smaller than that of the first special game state) is set after a jackpot game, and the like are set.

The result of the winning/losing judgment is notified to the player by displaying the third pattern (special pattern (identification information)) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or the first pattern (special pattern (identification information)) displayed on the first pattern display device 37 in a variable display (dynamic display) during a predetermined variable display period (dynamic display period) and then stopping the display in a display mode to show the winning/losing judgment result (judgment result). If a game ball enters the starting hole during the variable display period, the right to be drawn for that ball is stored as a reserved ball. The reserved balls are configured to be stored with an upper limit of up to four balls for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (drawing for the first special pattern), and up to four balls in total for a ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r and the second ball entrance 640 (drawing for the second special pattern).

When the reserved balls are stored, one reserved pattern (identification pattern, identification information) is displayed for each reserved ball. Before the special pattern corresponding to the reserved ball is displayed, a pre-determination is performed to determine the result of the winning/losing determination (determination result) at the start of the variation and the variation display mode (variation pattern type) of the special pattern. If the pre-determination result is a specific determination result (for example, a win or a super reach type is determined), the color of the reserved pattern is displayed in a variable (variable to a specific display mode). If the color of the reserved pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the type of special reserved performance is set by the set color, etc. As one of the special reserved performances, when the color of the reserved pattern is changed, a comment display (pre-notification display mode, suggestion mode) is displayed that suggests the expected winning probability for the changed reserved ball and the type of variation pattern to be executed by generating an overflow winning that generates more reserved balls or enters the starting hole with more than the upper limit number of reserved balls (pre-notification A mode). This allows players to get more game balls into the starting hole, increasing the profits of the gaming establishment. Also, by getting the game ball into the starting hole, a comment display is displayed, and the result of the win/loss judgment and the type of variation can be determined from the content of the comment, so that a bonus (information that serves as a bonus) can be given to the player, increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, as one of the special reserved effects, a reserved effect (notice B mode) is set that executes a game so that reserved balls are not generated when the color of the reserved balls has changed. In this reserved effect, a variable lid pattern P is displayed in the display area where the reserved patterns are displayed, and the variable lid pattern P is displayed in the position of the reserved pattern that will be displayed if a winning combination is made after the reserved pattern whose color has changed, thereby informing the player that the game will be played so that reserved balls are not generated. Furthermore, a comment is displayed that suggests that the reserved balls will not be increased.

In addition, the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is four, and the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is four, for a total of eight reserved patterns, which are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (display area of the display means), and the area in which the reserved patterns are displayed is secured and set in advance. In the area in which the reserved patterns are displayed, a pedestal pattern is displayed at the position where the reserved pattern is displayed, and it is configured so that it is possible to identify that this is an area in which reserved patterns are displayed even when the reserved patterns are not displayed. In the area in which the fifth to eighth reserved patterns are displayed, four variable lid patterns P are displayed in correspondence with the positions where the reserved patterns are displayed, even during normal times, and each variable lid pattern P is displayed with a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved balls can be identified.

In this way, by displaying the variable lid pattern P, it is possible to determine that the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is eight even when the reserved pattern is not displayed based on the numerical information of the variable lid pattern P. Furthermore, when reserved balls are generated and the reserved pattern is displayed, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P is also changed. In the reserved performance that is the normal mode during normal times, when the number of reserved balls becomes three, the variable lid pattern P displayed at the position where the fifth reserved pattern is displayed is changed to non-display, and then, similarly, the variable lid pattern P is changed so that the sixth variable lid pattern P is not displayed when there are four reserved balls, the seventh variable lid pattern P is not displayed when there are five reserved balls, and the eighth variable lid pattern P is not displayed when there are six reserved balls. In other words, the variable lid pattern P is changed and displayed so that there is an empty space for two reserved patterns for three or more reserved balls. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player see that the display area of the reserved patterns changes depending on the number of reserved balls.

It is also configured to execute a special reserved effect in which the variable rules of the variable lid pattern P are changed depending on the period in which reserved balls are generated, and the variable rules are changed depending on the displayed variable type. This configuration allows the player to recognize that a special reserved effect is being executed based on the variable rules of the variable lid pattern P. Furthermore, the special reserved effect is set based on the result of the reserved advance judgment, the variable type, the result of the variable display special pattern hit/miss judgment, and the variable type being executed, so that by changing the variable rules of the variable lid pattern P, it is possible to expect a win or predict the variable type.

In this control example, even if the game ball is launched to the left or right of the third symbol display device 81, the ball will enter the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, and the second ball entrance 640 (the electric device 640a is in the open state) in the same way. However, the arrangement of the nails may be set to form a route that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, or a flow path that makes it easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a performance in which a lottery is held using only the second special symbol, or a game in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the second ball entrance 640. Furthermore, as a performance, a performance can be performed that suggests to the player to enter the ball into the second ball entrance.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to Figures 425 to 461. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the first special symbol and the first special symbol are configured to alternately change, but in the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example, the first special symbol is changed preferentially, and the first special symbol and the first special symbol change in order depending on the game state, which is different from the first control example. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 425, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 425 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example. In the first control example, the first ball inlet 64 and the second ball inlet 640 are installed inside the sorting device 700, and when a ball enters through the opening 710a, the sorting device 700 sorts the ball into the first ball inlet 64 and the second ball inlet 640. However, in this second control example, the sorting device 700 is not installed, and the first ball inlet 64 and the second ball inlet 640 are installed as they are. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 426 to Fig. 430, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device in this second control example will be described. This second control example differs from the above-mentioned first control example in that the performance display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is partially changed, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Other elements are the same, and the same symbols are attached to the same elements and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The display mode of the third pattern display device 81 in this second control example will be described with reference to Figures 426 to 428. In the first control example, the special patterns for which the start of variation is executed are configured to alternate between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, but this second control example differs in that the change is executed with priority from the second special pattern.

Figures 426(a) and 426(b) are diagrams that show the flow of special pattern changes and continuous performance in this second control example. In this second control example, as shown in Figure 428(a), if the special pattern changes and the first special pattern continues to change, the performance display will execute a continuous performance as shown in Figure 428(b). The continuous performance is a period that is set for multiple changes. In addition, this continuous performance can be extended based on winning during the execution of the continuous performance.

Figure 428 (a) is a diagram showing how the third symbol changes during a continuous performance. As shown in Figure 428 (a), in this second control example, the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds provided under the third symbol display device 81 displays the active pedestal symbol m0, and the small area Ds2 displays the pedestal m1 for the first reserved symbol to the pedestal m8 for the eighth reserved symbol and the reserved symbol. In addition, characters G1 to G3 are displayed in the corners of the display area Dm. By executing a performance with a story-like nature using these characters G1 to G3, the player can easily recognize that a continuous performance is being performed. In addition, even during the continuous performance period, the player can change the background mode by operating the frame button 22. A detailed explanation of the background mode change during the continuous performance period will be described later with reference to Figures 427 and 429.

Next, the flow of the presentation when the second special pattern change is executed during a continuous presentation will be explained. Figures 428(c) and (d) are diagrams showing the flow of the presentation when the second special pattern change is executed during a continuous presentation. In this second control example, as shown in Figure 426(c), when the second special pattern change is executed while the first special pattern change is being executed, the continuous presentation period with the first special pattern is interrupted as shown in Figure 426(d), and a special presentation with the second special pattern change is performed during the interruption period. Next, when the special presentation period ends, the continuous presentation period with the first special pattern is resumed.

Figure 428(b) shows the state in which the continuous performance period is interrupted and the third symbol changes during the special performance period. During the special performance period, the reserved ball is displayed by changing to red, as shown in Figure 428(b). Furthermore, shells K1, K2, and K3 are displayed in the display area Dm in a display manner that has a story-like quality. This allows the player to easily recognize that the special performance is in progress. Furthermore, white reserved symbols are displayed on the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5, and when the white reserved symbol on the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 moves to the small area Ds and is displayed as a symbol in progress, the continuous performance period that was interrupted by the special performance period is resumed.

Next, the flow of the performance when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous performance period will be explained with reference to Fig. 426 (c) (d). In this second control example, even if the variation is being executed with the first special symbol, if a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the variation execution with the second special symbol will be executed preferentially. As shown in Fig. 426 (c), if the variation execution with the special symbol 2 occurs while the continuous performance with the first special symbol is being executed, the continuous performance during the variation execution of the first special symbol is interrupted as shown in Fig. 426 (d), and a special performance is executed while the variation execution with the second special symbol is being executed. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 428 (b), when the variation execution with the second special symbol occurs and a special performance is started, the number of reserved balls is configured to change color only during the special performance period. In addition, shell-like characters K1 to K3 are displayed in the corners of the display area Dm, and a performance with a storyline is executed. By configuring in this way, it is easy for the player to understand that the continuous performance period has entered the special performance period, and the interest of the game can be increased. In addition, the continuous performance with the first special symbol that was being executed is interrupted at the same time as the start of the special performance with the second special symbol, and is resumed as soon as the special performance period ends. Specifically, the reserved balls in the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 are waiting to execute the interrupted continuous performance period. The variable execution of the active pedestal pattern m0 to the second reserved symbol pattern m2, which is the special performance period, ends, the reserved ball in the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 moves to the execution pedestal m0, and the continuous performance period that was interrupted by the special performance period is resumed.

The relationship between continuous performance and background display will be explained with reference to Figure 427. Figures 427(a)-(c) are diagrams showing the performance display mode during special pattern variation and the flow of background display at that time. As described above, even during the period of continuous performance, the player can change the background by operating the frame button 22. In this second control example, when changing from the background mode in which the continuous performance is being executed to another background mode, the normal performance for the changed background mode is displayed.

Figure 429 is a diagram showing the display mode when the background is changed during the continuous performance period. As shown in Figure 429, in the display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 during the change of the third pattern, the background mode is set to mountain mode from the sea mode during the continuous performance period. As described above, in the mountain mode, the normal performance of the mountain mode is displayed instead of the continuous performance, but if the player operates the frame button 22 and the background is changed again to the sea mode, the continuous performance for the sea is restored. In this second control example, when the sea mode is in the continuous performance period, the display area Dmb displays "Continuous performance in sea mode!!", so that the player can easily recognize that the sea mode is in the continuous performance period. In addition, the display area Dma displays "The background will change when you push the button", so that the player can easily recognize that the background can be changed even when the third pattern is changing.

<Electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 430. This second control example differs from the above-mentioned first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example have been partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. Other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same elements, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 430(a). FIG. 430(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. This second control example differs from the first control example described above in that a continuous performance execution selection table 222aa has been added.

The consecutive performance execution selection table 222aa is a data table for judging (determining) whether or not consecutive performance (Fig. 428(a)) is to be performed. In the winning information related processing (see Z2255 in Fig. 437), when the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003 in Fig. 437: Yes) and the performance setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off (Z5004 in Fig. 437: No), it is read out (Z5005 in Fig. 437) and used to judge whether or not consecutive performance should be executed (Z5006 in Fig. 233).

This continuous performance execution selection table 222aa specifies whether or not a continuous performance is to be executed in accordance with the value of one performance counter in the performance counter group 223aa, the current number of reserved balls, and the result of the lottery for the special symbol included in the winning information received this time. Specifically, the more balls currently reserved, the easier it is to execute a continuous performance, and it is specified that a continuous performance is more likely to be executed when the lottery result for the special symbol included in the winning information received this time indicates a jackpot than when the lottery result indicates a miss.

This configuration makes it easier to execute consecutive effects with a long execution period (the number of times special symbols change to be executed), and when consecutive effects are executed, it is possible to heighten the player's anticipation of a big win. This allows the player to play for a long period of time with heightened anticipation of a big win, improving the effect of the performance.

In addition, in this control example, when the continuous performance ends, that is, when the variable performance corresponding to the winning information that has been determined to execute the continuous performance ends (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 438), the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is read (Z5104 in FIG. 438), and if it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes in FIG. 438), a determination is made as to whether to execute the continuous performance again, and even in this case, the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa is referenced to determine whether to execute the continuous performance (Z5109 in FIG. 438).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the continuous performance for newly entered game balls while the continuous performance is being executed, thereby increasing the frequency with which the continuous performance is executed. In addition, it is possible to make the period during which the continuous performance is executed longer than the upper limit of reserved numbers (4) for special pattern 1, making it difficult for the player to understand which reserved pattern the continuous performance is being executed for, providing the player with the fun of predicting the game.

In this control example, the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa, which is referenced when determining whether or not to execute a continuous performance, is specified as described above, but other contents may also be specified. For example, a timing means (e.g., a real-time clock (RTC)) that keeps track of the current time may be provided in the audio lamp control device 113, and the rate at which the continuous performance is executed may be changed in accordance with the timing contents of the timing means.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that during a specified period (for example, one hour from 10:00 AM), consecutive performances are executed only if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot. By configuring the system in this way, even if the same consecutive performances are executed, the degree of expectation of a jackpot varies depending on the timing (time) at which the consecutive performances are executed, and it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game too early. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide a guide notification means for notifying the player that consecutive performances will be executed only if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot during the specified period, and a period notification means for notifying the player of the remaining period (or the elapsed period) of the specified period. This allows the player to play while expecting the consecutive performances to be executed.

In addition, a means for determining the operation content of the operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the frame button 22) and a discrimination means for determining the launch status of the game ball (or the ball entry status) may be provided, and the rate at which the continuous performance is executed may be changed in accordance with the discrimination results of these discrimination means. The above-mentioned multiple contents may be appropriately combined or used individually.

In addition, in this control example, the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa, which is referred to when determining whether to execute the continuous performance in the winning information related process (see FIG. 437), is used to determine whether to execute the continuous performance in the stop command process (see FIG. 438). However, the selection table referred to when determining whether to execute the continuous performance in the winning information related process (see FIG. 437) and the stop command process (see FIG. 438) may be different. In this case, for example, the contents of the selection table may be specified so that the selection table referred to in the stop command process (see FIG. 438) has a higher expectation of a jackpot for a special pattern when the continuous performance is executed than the selection table referred to in the winning information related process (see FIG. 437). As a result, the longer the period during which the continuous performance is executed, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, and the more interesting the game becomes.

Next, referring to FIG. 430(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this second control example will be described. FIG. 430(b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this second control example. This second control example differs from the above-mentioned first control example in that a performance counter group 223aa, a continuous performance flag 223ab, a continuous performance in progress flag 223ac, a continuous performance interruption flag 223ad, a continuous performance update area 223ae, a performance count counter 223af, a performance setting prohibition flag 223ag, a setting prohibition release flag 223ah, a time reduction counter 223ai, a fluctuation count counter 223j, an operation invalid flag 223ak, and a status storage area 223az are added.

The performance counter group 223aa is composed of multiple counter means for performance. This performance counter group 223aa is a plurality of counters used for selecting a performance variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol) and selecting various preview performances. Each of the multiple counters in this performance counter group 223aa stores a random number value in the range of 0 to 198 obtained from a random number generating IC (not shown) electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the random number generating IC is an IC that can operate at an operating clock (for example, 1 MHz) that can update each performance counter to a different random number value and perform a judgment.

The values of the multiple counters in the performance counter group 223aa are used when making various judgments performed by the voice lamp control device 113, such as determining the performance change pattern (change pattern of the third symbol), whether or not continuous performances can be performed, and the types of various advance notice performances, and are updated so that the counter values are not synchronized. The multiple counters in the performance counter group 223aa are composed of 1-byte loop counters that are updated in the range from 0 to 149, and an update process is performed so that the values become different each time main process 2 (see FIG. 435) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 ms).

In this control example, when selecting multiple effects based on the value of the effect counter, multiple effect counters with different update values are used. Therefore, even when selecting multiple effects within one main process, the same counter value is referenced, preventing bias in the selected effects. However, for example, if you want to synchronize multiple effect modes selected in different processes within one main process, you can configure it so that the same effect counter is used to select the effect modes.

In addition, in this control example, multiple counters with different counter value update patterns are used, but for example, a random value may be calculated using the update value of one performance counter, and each performance may be selected using the calculated value. By configuring in this way, the number of counters possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, it is advisable to calculate the update values of the performance counters so that each value has no regularity, for example, the last digit value, the last 2 digit value, and the last digit and last 2 digit value of the value obtained by multiplying the first digit value by the second digit value are added together.

The continuous performance flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the conditions for executing the continuous performance are met, and is set to ON when the conditions for executing the continuous performance are met. Specifically, the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5111 in FIG. 437) when it is determined that the continuous performance is to be executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 437) of the voice lamp control device 113 (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 437) or when it is determined that the continuous performance is to be executed in the stop command process (see FIG. 438) of the voice lamp control device 113 (Z5110: Yes in FIG. 438), and is set to OFF (Z5401 in FIG. 442) when the continuous performance setting process (Z5306 in FIG. 442) is executed in the performance setting process (Z5204 in FIG. 441) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440).

In other words, this continuous performance flag 223ab determines whether to execute a continuous performance based on the winning information included in the winning command output from the main control device 110 when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and retains the result of the determination that a continuous performance will be executed until the timing of setting the variable display corresponding to the next variation of special pattern 1.

In this control example, the continuous performance is executed when it is determined in the winning information related process (see FIG. 437) that the continuous performance is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 437: Yes), the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to on (Z5008 in FIG. 437), and the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) is executed. However, other configurations may be used. For example, when the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to on and the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) is executed, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the continuous performance will be started in the current variable display, and the variable display that will start the continuous performance is determined based on the lottery result. By configuring in this way, the timing when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the timing when the continuous performance is started can be made different (the continuous performance is started after the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, with a variable display that does not execute the continuous performance in between), making it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the continuous performance.

In addition, in the winning information related process (see FIG. 437), if it is determined that a continuous performance is to be executed, the performance corresponding to the variable display being executed may be changed to a continuous performance. By configuring in this way, the timing when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the timing when the continuous performance starts can be made closer, so that the player can easily grasp the ball that is the target of the continuous performance. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous performance, the player can be motivated to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 while the special pattern is changing (the variable display is being executed), and the operation of the game can be improved.

When changing the presentation corresponding to the currently running variable display to a continuous presentation, it is advisable to determine the display content or elapsed period of the currently running variable display, and change the presentation corresponding to the currently running variable display to a continuous presentation only when the conditions for changing the presentation are met (for example, the variable display displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is in a display mode that is difficult for the player to see (rapidly changing)). This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming confused by a sudden change in the currently running presentation.

In addition, instead of changing the effect corresponding to the currently executing variable display to a continuous effect, the continuous effect may be added to the effect corresponding to the currently executing variable display and displayed. In this case, it is advisable to provide a display area dedicated to the continuous effect. This can prevent the player from becoming confused even if a continuous effect is suddenly executed.

The continuous performance in progress flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that a continuous performance is being executed, and is set to on when a continuous performance is being executed. Specifically, in the performance setting process (see Z5204 in FIG. 441) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440), when the continuous performance setting process (see Z5306 in FIG. 441) is executed and a continuous performance command for display is set (Z5406 in FIG. 442), the flag is set to on (Z5408 in FIG. 442).

It is then referenced (Z5505 in FIG. 443) in the special effect setting process (Z5311 in FIG. 441) for setting an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern, and is set to off (Z5116 in FIG. 438) when it is determined in the stop command process (see FIG. 438) that the continuous effect will not continue any further (Z5106: No or Z5110: No in FIG. 438).

The continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the continuous performance is interrupted, and is set to ON when the continuous performance is interrupted. Here, a brief explanation will be given of the events that interrupt the continuous performance. In this control example, the continuous performance is configured to be executed based on winning information regarding the first special pattern (special pattern 1), which is a special pattern change that is actually executed when the game state is in a normal state (a state in which the game state is not in a special probability state or a time-saving state). In addition, in this control example, the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is configured to be consumed with priority over the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and the gameability (type of special pattern change executed) is configured to be different between the special probability state and the time-saving state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640a and the normal state.

In addition, in this control example, in order to temporarily make it easier to win the lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2) even when the game state is normal, in some cases where the lottery result for the normal pattern is a winning one, an electric device 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640a and is configured to restrict the game ball from entering the second ball entrance 640a, so that a winning game is executed in which the device is open for a longer period (2 seconds) than usual (0.2 seconds).

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, while a continuous performance was being executed using multiple winning information related to the first special symbol, a game ball could enter the second ball entrance 640a, causing the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol to be executed in preference to the first special symbol. When such a situation occurred, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol was executed even though the continuous performance executed based on the winning information of the first special symbol was being executed, causing a problem that the content of the performance being executed and the lottery result for the special symbol differed, causing a sense of distrust among the player.

Therefore, in this control example, if the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is changed while a continuous performance is being performed, the continuous performance is interrupted, and if the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is changed, the interrupted continuous performance is resumed. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the content of the performance being performed and the lottery result of the special symbol are different, and prevents players from feeling distrustful.

This continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5507 in FIG. 443) when it is determined that the continuous performance in progress flag 223ac is set to on (Z5505: Yes in FIG. 443) in the special performance setting process (see Z5311 in FIG. 441) for setting the performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern. Then, when this continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to on, a display interruption command is set to execute a "waiting" display (see interruption display mode ma in FIG. 428 (b)) to indicate that the continuous performance is interrupted on the third pattern display device 81 (Z5508 in FIG. 443). Then, in the performance setting process (see FIG. 441), if the target special pattern is the first special pattern (special pattern 1) (Z5301: Yes in FIG. 441), it is set to off (Z5304 in FIG. 441).

By configuring it in this way, if the change (lottery) of the second special pattern (special pattern 2), which is given priority over the change (lottery) of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), begins during the execution of a continuous performance set to target the change of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), the continuous performance can be interrupted, and the interrupted continuous performance can be resumed at the timing when the change of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is executed (the timing when the change of special pattern 2 ends), so that the continuous performance can be executed in response to the change of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) regardless of the change status of the second special pattern (special pattern 2).

In addition, if the continuous performance is interrupted based on the change in the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the execution of the continuous performance, the player is notified that the continuous performance has been interrupted. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable as if the continuous performance has suddenly ended, and allows the player to play in the hope that the continuous performance will resume.

The continuous performance update area 223ae is an area for storing data for internally updating the continuous performance when the continuous performance is not displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the continuous performance execution period, i.e., when the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous performance execution period and the background of the display screen is changed from an "ocean background" to another background ("mountain background", "river background"),

As described above with reference to FIG. 224(a), in this control example, the continuous performance is executed only when "ocean background (ocean mode)" is selected as the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The background of this display screen is configured to be variable and settable by the player operating the frame button 22, and is configured so that, for example, when the special pattern change is not being executed (standby state) or immediately after the start of the special pattern change (during high-speed change), the background of the display screen is switched in the order of "ocean background (ocean mode)", "mountain background (mountain mode)" (see FIG. 429), and "river background (river mode)".

Then, as a variation effect corresponding to the set background, a variation effect specific to each background or a variation effect common to multiple backgrounds is executed. By configuring it in this way, the presentation mode of the variation effect for showing the result of the variation (lottery) of the special pattern can be varied based on the display mode (background) that the player can variably set, so a variety of presentations can be provided to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, when the background of the display screen is variably set while a variable performance exclusive to the sea mode (e.g., continuous preview) is being executed while the sea mode is set, a process is executed to rewrite the display data related to the variable performance so that the variable performance corresponding to the background after the variable setting is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Therefore, if a player accidentally operates the frame button 22 while a continuous performance is being performed and switches the background of the display screen from "sea mode" to "mountain mode," the display data related to the continuous performance is erased, and even if the player operates the frame button 22 again to switch the display screen to "sea mode," the continuous performance is not performed, resulting in a problem of reduced performance effect.

To solve this problem, in this control example, a continuous performance update area 223ae is provided, and even if the background of the display screen is switched to something other than "sea mode" while a continuous performance is being executed, the execution data of the continuous performance is temporarily stored in the continuous performance update area 223ae, so that if the background of the display screen is switched to something other than "sea mode" while a continuous performance is being executed, and then the background of the display screen is switched back to "sea mode" again, the remaining continuous performances can be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the continuous performances from disappearing due to incorrect operation by the player.

In the continuous performance setting process (see FIG. 442), after the performance mode of the continuous performance is determined (Z5403, Z5404 in FIG. 442), if it is determined that the background mode is not "sea mode" (Z5405 in FIG. 442: No), display data relating to the determined performance mode is stored in this continuous performance update area 223ae (see Z5409 in FIG. 442).

Then, in the performance return process (see FIG. 445) of the frame button input monitoring/performance process 2 (see FIG. 444), when the background mode is switched to "sea mode" (Z2871 in FIG. 445: Yes), the stored information is referenced and a display performance command corresponding to the stored information is set (Z2874 in FIG. 445). After that, when the continuous performance ends, the information stored in the area (display data indicating the performance mode) is erased (see Z5310 in FIG. 441).

The effect count counter 223af is a counter for indicating the period during which the continuous effect is executed (the number of times the special symbol changes). When it is determined in the winning information related process (see FIG. 437) that a continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 437: Yes), this effect count counter 223af sets the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a corresponding to the received winning command (Z5010 in FIG. 437). Then, when it is determined in the effect setting process (see FIG. 441) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) that the counter value is greater than 0 (Z5305 in FIG. 441: Yes), the continuous effect setting process for setting the continuous effect is executed (Z5306 in FIG. 441).

The value of this performance count counter 223af is decremented by 1 each time the continuous performance setting process (see FIG. 442) is executed (Z5407 in FIG. 442). By configuring it in this way, continuous performance can be executed using the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute continuous performance by the winning information related process (see FIG. 437) is executed, that is, the period from the variable display executed while the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to on to the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute continuous performance.

In this control example, the continuous performance is executed using the above-mentioned period, but other periods may be set as the period for executing the continuous performance. For example, the continuous performance may be started by changing the performance mode of the variable display being executed at the timing when it is determined that the continuous performance is to be executed, or the continuous performance may be executed when the number of times the first special pattern (special pattern 1) changes becomes two when the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to on. In addition, when the display mode of a new variable display is set (when variable display setting process 2 is executed) when the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to on, an execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute the continuous performance may be provided, and the continuous performance may be executed when it is determined by the execution determination means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the continuous performance starts, and to provide a performance that is unexpected.

The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is a flag for preventing a new continuous performance from being set during the execution of the continuous performance, and is set to ON during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed. This effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011 in FIG. 437) when it is determined that a continuous performance is to be executed in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 437) (Z5007 in FIG. 437: Yes). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON, the processing for determining whether or not to execute a continuous performance in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 437) (processing of Z5005 to Z5007 in FIG. 437) is skipped. This makes it possible to prevent a new continuous performance from being set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a new continuous performance from being started while the player is paying close attention to the progress of the continuous performance, which causes the player to feel dissatisfied. Then, in the stop command processing (see FIG. 438), if it is determined that the continuous performance has ended (the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON) (Z5102 in FIG. 438: Yes), it is set to OFF (Z5103 in FIG. 438).

In this control example, the determination as to whether or not to execute a continuous performance is made not only when a new winning command is received, i.e., when the winning information related process (see FIG. 437) is executed, but also when a stop command is received to end the continuous performance, i.e., when it is determined in the stop command process (Z2259 in FIG. 438) that the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to on (Z5102 in FIG. 438: Yes). Therefore, even if it is determined in the stop command process (see FIG. 438) that a continuous performance will be executed, the flag is set to on (Z5111 in FIG. 438).

The time-saving counter 223ai is a counter for grasping the remaining number of times (remaining number of times the special symbol changes) for which the time-saving state is set when the time-saving state is set as the game state. When a state command indicating that the game state has transitioned to the time-saving state is received from the main control device 110, this time-saving counter 223ai is set to a value corresponding to the number of times the time-saving state is set (100 in this control example), and is decremented by 1 each time the time-saving process (see FIG. 439), which is executed when it is determined in the stop command process (see FIG. 438) that the current game state is in the time-saving state (Z5101: Yes in FIG. 438), is executed (see Z5151 in FIG. 439).

Then, during the time-saving process (see FIG. 439), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223ai is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 439), and if it is determined that the value is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 439: Yes), the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is set to 5.

The variation counter 223aj is a counter for grasping the number of variations of the special pattern after the time-saving state ends. In this control example, when the game state is in the normal state, a special performance (see FIG. 428 (b)) is executed when the variation (lottery) of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is executed. This is to give a bonus when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the second special pattern (special pattern 2) changes in the normal state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. However, when the game state is in the time-saving state, that is, when the game ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 (when the electric role 640a is easily opened), the reservation of the special pattern 2 is obtained, and the variation of the second special pattern corresponding to the reservation (special pattern 2 reservation) may be executed in the normal state after the time-saving state ends. Even in such cases, if special effects were executed, they would occur frequently after the time-saving feature had finished, making it difficult to give players a sense of exclusivity from the special effects.

To address the above-mentioned problem, in this control example, the special effects are not executed when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed within a specified period after the time-saving feature has ended. Specifically, a determination process is performed to determine whether the number of times the special symbol changes after the time-saving feature has ended has reached a specified number (five times in this control example), and if it is determined that the specified number (five times) has not been reached, the special effects are not set. This makes it possible to prevent special effects from occurring frequently after the time-saving feature has ended.

In this control example, the number of times the special symbol changes after the time-saving feature ends is set to 5, i.e., a value greater than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is set as the predetermined number of times. Therefore, even if the time-saving feature ends with the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) at the upper limit, the reserved balls for special symbol 2 acquired during the time-saving feature are reliably prevented from executing a special effect. However, conditions other than the above-mentioned control example may be set as conditions for not executing a special effect. For example, a value (e.g., 3) less than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) may be set as the predetermined number of times. By configuring in this way, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 has reached the upper limit at the end of the time-saving feature, the special effect will be executed, so that players can be motivated to save reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, the condition for not setting the special effect is set using the number of times the special symbol changes, but other conditions may be set. For example, a measuring means may be provided that measures the elapsed time since the time-saving state ended, and the condition for not setting the special effect may be set such that the elapsed time measured by the measuring means does not exceed a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds). By setting the condition based on the elapsed time in this way, it is possible to prevent restrictions on the execution of special effects for the next player's game, for example, in cases where the game ends immediately after the time-saving state ends (when the game ends without changing the special symbol after the time-saving state ends and the normal state is restored).

In addition, a game state determination means may be provided to determine the game state at the time when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and if the game state determination means determines that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 during a time-saving state, the system may be configured to restrict (prohibit) the execution of a special effect as a variable display in response to the ball entering.

When the time-saving processing (see FIG. 439) determines that the value of the time-saving counter 223ai is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 439: Yes), the value (5 in this control example) indicating the number of times the special symbol changes, which restricts (prohibits) the execution of the special effect, is set to this counter (Z5153 in FIG. 439), and this value is decremented by 1 each time the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) is executed. Then, in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 443) for setting the special effect, the value of the variable counter 223aj is referenced, and when it is determined that the value is not 0 (Z5502 in FIG. 449: No), the normal effect mode is set without setting the special effect mode (Z5510 in FIG. 449).

The operation invalid flag 223ak is a flag for indicating the period during which the operation of switching the background of the display screen is invalid, and is set to on during the period during which the operation of switching the background of the display screen is invalid. In this control example, as described above, a special effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special pattern, and the background of the display screen cannot be switched during the period during which this special effect is being executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the frame button 22 during the period during which an effect that is difficult to execute (special effect) is being executed, and to prevent the background of the display screen from being switched while the special effect is being executed.

This operation invalid flag 223ak is set on (Z5504 in FIG. 443) when the special effect mode is set in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 443), and is set off (Z5302 in FIG. 441) when the variable effect of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is set in the effect setting process (FIG. 441) (Z5301: Yes in FIG. 441). And while this operation invalid flag 223ak is set on, the process of changing the background of the display screen (processing of Z2803 to Z2852 in FIG. 444) in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 240) is skipped.

The status storage area 223az is an area for storing status information for indicating the current game status based on the status command output from the main control device 110. Specifically, when it is determined in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 436) that a status command has been received (Z2256 in FIG. 436: Yes), the status information is stored (Z2257 in FIG. 436). In this control example, each piece of information stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be erased when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. However, in this pachinko machine 10, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a status command for indicating the current game status. Therefore, even if the power supply is turned off (such as a power outage), the game status can be appropriately determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

<Regarding control process by the main control device in the second control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 431 to Fig. 434, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this second control example will be described. In this second control example, the main difference is that the special symbol variation process (Fig. 381) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (Fig. 431), the special symbol 1 variation start process (Fig. 383) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (Fig. 384) are changed to the special symbol variation start process 2 (Fig. 432), the start winning process (Fig. 385) is changed to the start winning process 2 (Fig. 433), and the look-ahead process (Fig. 386) is changed to the look-ahead process 2 (Fig. 434).

With reference to FIG. 431, the special pattern variation process 2 (Z154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special pattern variation process 2 (Z154). The special pattern variation process 2 (Z256: FIG. 432) in this second control example differs from the special pattern variation process (Z104: FIG. 381) in the first control example in that the processing of Z203 to Z214 has been changed to processing of Z330 to Z340. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

In this special symbol variation process 2 (Z256: Fig. 432), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (Z201). The special symbol jackpot period includes the period when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during special symbol jackpot play) and the period during a specified time after the special symbol jackpot play ends. If the determination results in a special symbol jackpot (Z201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot (Z201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (Z202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e is obtained (Z330).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e obtained is 1 or more (Z331). If it is determined that it is 1 or more (Z331: Yes), the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (Z332), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (Z333). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 201 to be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing Z333, the data stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z265). In processing Z265, the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted in order to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, special pattern change start processing 2 is executed to start the changing display on the first pattern display device (Z340).

On the other hand, in the process of Z331, if it is determined that the acquired value (N2) of the reserved ball count counter 203e for special pattern 2 is 0 (Z331: No), the value (N1) of the reserved ball count counter 203d for special pattern 1 is acquired (Z335).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d obtained is 1 or more (Z336). If it is determined to be 1 or more (Z336: Yes), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (Z337), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z338). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing Z338, the data stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z339). In processing Z339, the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area side in sequence. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from reserved area 1 to execution area, from reserved area 2 to reserved area 1, from reserved area 3 to reserved area 2, and from reserved area 4 to reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, special pattern change start processing 2 is executed to start the change display on the first pattern display device (Z340). The special pattern change start processing 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 432. On the other hand, in processing Z336, if the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter is 0 (Z336: No), this processing is terminated.

Now, referring to FIG. 432, we will explain the special pattern change start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 432) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this second control example. The difference between this and the first control example is that the special pattern change start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 432) in this second control example combines the special pattern 1 change start process (Z209: FIG. 383) and the special pattern 2 change start process (214: FIG. 384). The processing content is the same as in the first control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 433, the start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 433) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this second control example will be described. The start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 433) in this second control example differs from the start winning process (Z105: FIG. 385) in the first control example in that the processes of Z308 and Z316 are not executed, and the process of Z320 is executed together with the process of Z360. The process content is the same as in the first control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 434, we will explain look-ahead process 2 (Z360), which is one process within start winning process 2 (Z155) executed by MPU 201 of main control unit 110 in this second control example. FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing the contents of look-ahead process 2 (Z360).

In the pre-reading process 2 (Z360), first, it is determined whether there is new winning information (Z361). If it is determined that there is no new winning information (Z361: No), this process ends as it is. If it is determined that there is new winning information (Z361: Yes), the values of the special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 corresponding to the current winning are obtained from the special pattern reserved ball storage area (Z362). Next, from among the determination results specified in the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a, the winning determination result corresponding to the obtained value of the special winning random number counter C1 is obtained (Z363). Next, from among the determination results specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d, the winning type determination result corresponding to the obtained value of the special winning type counter C2 is obtained (Z364).

Next, from among the judgment results specified in the stop type selection table, a stop type judgment result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is obtained (Z365). Next, from among the judgment results specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, a fluctuation type judgment result corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is obtained (Z366). Next, a winning information command including hit judgment result information indicating the acquired hit judgment result, hit type information indicating the hit type judgment result, stop type information indicating the stop type judgment result, and fluctuation type information for indicating the fluctuation type judgment result is set (Z367), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding control process by the voice lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 435 to Fig. 445. In this second control example, the main difference from the first control example is that the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107), which is one process in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, has been changed to frame button input monitoring and performance processing 2 (Z2151), the command determination processing (Z2113) has been changed to command determination processing 2 (Z2152), and the variable display setting processing (Z2114) has been changed to variable display setting processing 2 (Z2153).

With reference to FIG. 436, we will explain the command determination process 2 (Z2152) in the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process 2 (Z2152).

In command determination process 2 (Z2152), it is first determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received (Z2201). If it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (Z2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d in RAM 223 is set to on (Z2251), a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2252), and this process ends. Note that the processes Z2203 to Z2207 are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, if it is determined in the processing of Z2206 that the reserved ball count command has not been received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether winning command information has been received (Z2253). If a winning information command has been received (Z2253: Yes), winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2254). Next, winning information related processing (Z2255) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the winning information related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 437.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2253 that a winning information command has not been received (Z2253: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (Z2256). If it is determined that a status command has been received (Z2256: Yes), status information indicating the game status corresponding to the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223az (Z2257), and this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2256 that a status command has not been received (Z2256: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (Z2258). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (Z2258: Yes), stop command processing (Z2259) is executed. Details of stop command processing (Z2259) will be described later with reference to FIG. 438. Next, the stop display of the third pattern is set (Z2260), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2258 that a stop command has not been received (Z2258: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this processing is terminated.

Now, referring to FIG. 437, we will explain the winning information related process (Z2255), which is one process within the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning information related process (Z2255).

The winning information related process (Z2255) first stores the information of the received winning information command in the corresponding winning information storage area 223f (Z5001). Next, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is read (Z5002). Next, it is determined whether the value read from the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is 2 or greater (Z5003). If it is not 2 or greater (Z5003: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of Z5003, if the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a that was read is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes), it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004). If it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is off (Z5004), the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is read (Z5505), and a decision is made as to whether or not to execute the continuous effect (Z5006). Next, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect (Z5007). If the continuous effect is not to be executed (Z5007: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if a continuous performance is to be executed (Z5007: Yes), the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is read (Z5009), and the read counter value is set as the value of the performance count counter 223af (Z5010). Next, the performance setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011), and this process is terminated.

Referring to FIG. 438, we will explain the stop command process (Z2259), which is one process within the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop command process (Z2259).

In the stop command process (Z2259), first, it is determined whether the current game state is in time-saving mode (Z5101). If it is determined that the game state is in time-saving mode (Z5101: Yes), the time-saving mode process (Z5115) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of the time-saving mode process (Z5115) will be described later with reference to FIG. 439. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not in time-saving mode (Z5101: No) in the process of Z5101, it is determined whether the setting prohibition release flag 223ah provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z5102). If the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is off (Z5102: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the effect prohibition release flag ah is on (Z5102: Yes), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag and the setting prohibition release flag ah are set to off (Z5103), and the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5104). Next, it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a that was read is 2 or more (Z5105). If it is determined that it is not 2 or more (Z5105: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5105, if it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a being 2 or more is read from the winning information storage area 223f (Z5106). Next, it is determined whether there is winning information of a jackpot (Z5107). If it is determined that there is no winning jackpot (Z5107: No), the continuous performance in progress flag 223ac is set to off (Z5116), and this process ends. If it is determined that there is winning information of a jackpot (Z5107: Yes), the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa provided in the ROM 222 is read (Z5108), and it is determined whether the continuous performance is to be executed (Z5109). After executing the process of Z5109, it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the continuous performance (Z5110). If it is not the timing to execute the continuous performance (Z5110: No), the process of Z5116 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is time to execute a continuous effect (Z5110: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5111), and the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is read (Z5112). Next, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a corresponding to the big win is set as the value of the effect count counter 223af (Z5113), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5114), and this process ends.

Referring to FIG. 439, we will explain the time-saving processing (Z5115), which is one process within the stop command processing (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time-saving processing (Z5115).

In the time-saving process (Z5115), first, the value of the time-saving counter 223ai provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 (Z5151). Next, it is determined whether the value changed by the calculation is 0 (Z5152). If it is determined that the changed value is 0 (Z5152: Yes), the value of the fluctuation count counter aj is set to 5 (Z5153), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z5152 that the value of the time-saving counter 223ai is greater than 0 (Z5153: No), the process of Z5153 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Referring to Figure 440, we will explain variable display setting process 2 (Z2153), which is one process within main process 2 (Figure 435) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. Figure 440 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). Variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) in this second control example differs from variable display setting process (Z2114) in the first control example in that processes Z5204 to Z5208 have been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The extracted variation pattern is obtained in the processing of Z5202 (Z5203). Next, the performance setting processing (Z5204) is executed. Details of the performance setting processing (Z5204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 441.

Next, a display variation pattern command is set (Z5205), the data in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted (Z5206), and it is determined whether the value of the variation count counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207). If it is determined that the value of the variation count counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207: Yes), the value of the variation count counter 223aj is decremented by 1 (Z5208). In the processing of Z5207, if it is determined that the value of the variation count counter 223aj is 0 (Z5207: No), the processing of Z5208 is skipped and the processing proceeds to Z5209.

Referring to FIG. 441, we will explain the performance setting process (Z5204), which is one process within the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing the contents of this performance setting process (Z5204).

In the effect setting process (Z5204), first, it is determined whether the current change is a change in the first special pattern (Z5301). If it is a change in the first special pattern (Z5301: Yes), the operation invalid flag 223ak provided in the RAM 223 is set to off (Z5302). Next, it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5303). If it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5303: Yes), the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to off (Z5304). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5303 that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to off (Z5303: Yes), the above-mentioned processing of Z5304 is skipped.

After executing the process of Z5304, it is determined whether the value of the performance count counter 223af is greater than 0 (Z5305). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (Z5305: Yes), the continuous performance setting process (Z5306) is executed and this process is terminated. Details of the continuous performance setting process (Z5306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 442.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5305, if the value of the performance count counter 223af is 0 (Z5305: No), a variation pattern that does not involve continuous performance is determined (Z5307). Next, it is determined whether the performance setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on (Z5308). If the performance setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off (Z5308: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the performance setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on (Z5308: Yes), the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to on (Z5309). Next, the information stored in the continuous performance update area 223ae is cleared (Z5310), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z5301, if it is determined that the current variation is not a variation of the first special pattern (Z5301: No), a special performance setting process (Z5311) is executed. Details of the contents of the special performance setting process (Z5311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 443.

Referring to FIG. 442, we will explain the continuous performance setting process (Z5306), which is one process within the performance setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous performance setting process (Z5306).

In the continuous performance setting process (Z5306), first, the continuous performance flag 223ab is set to off (Z5401). Next, it is determined whether the value of the performance count counter 223af is 1 (Z5402). If it is determined that the value of the performance count counter 223af is 1 (Z5402: Yes), the continuous performance final mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern is determined (Z5403). On the other hand, if the value of the performance count counter 223af is other than 1 (Z5402: No), the continuous performance continuation mode is determined (Z5404), and the process of Z5405 is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the current background mode is set to sea mode (Z5405). If it is determined that the setting is sea mode (Z5405: Yes), a display continuous performance command is set to indicate the determined performance mode (Z5406). Next, the value of the performance count counter 223af is decremented by 1 (Z5407), the continuous performance in progress flag 223ac is set to on (Z5408), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the set mode is not sea mode (Z5405: No), the determined performance mode is stored in the continuous performance update area 223ae (Z5409), and a display notification command is set to indicate that continuous performance is waiting (Z5410). Then, the processes Z5407 to Z5408 described above are executed, and this process ends.

Referring to FIG. 443, we will explain the special effect setting process (Z5311), which is one process of the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. FIG. 443 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311).

In the special effect setting process (Z5311), first, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving mode (Z5501). If it is determined that the game is not in the time-saving mode (Z5501: No), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502: Yes), the special effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern is set (Z5503), and the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to on (Z5504).

Next, it is determined whether the continuous performance in progress flag 223ac is set to on (Z5505). If it is set to on (Z5505: Yes), it is then determined whether the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5506). If it is set to off (Z5506: No), the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5507), and a display interruption command is set (Z5508). Next, a display performance command corresponding to the determined performance mode is set (Z5509), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z5501 that the time is being shortened (Z5501: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of Z5502 that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is not 0 (Z5502: No), the normal performance mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern is set (Z5510), the above-mentioned process of Z5509 is executed, and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of Z5505 that the continuous performance in progress flag 223ac is off (Z5505: No), or if it is determined in the process of Z5506 that the continuous performance interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5506: Yes), the above-mentioned processes of Z5507 to Z5508 are skipped, the process of Z5509 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Referring to FIG. 444, the frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 (Z2151) in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 444 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring and performance process 2 (Z2151). This second control example differs from the frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z2107) in the first control example in that the processes Z2851 and Z2852 have been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The process of Z2851 determines whether the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to on (Z2851). If it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is off (Z2851: No), the same process as Z2803 to Z2804 in the first control example is executed, and then the performance return process (Z2852) is executed.

Now, referring to FIG. 445, we will explain the performance return process (Z2852), which is one process within the frame button input monitoring/performance process 2 (Z2151) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. FIG. 445 is a flowchart showing the contents of the performance return process (Z2852).

In the performance return process (Z2852), first, it is determined whether the set background mode is "sea mode" (Z2871). If the background mode is not "sea mode" (Z2871: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the background mode is "sea mode" (Z2871: Yes), the performance mode stored in the continuous performance update area 223ae is read (Z2872). Next, it is determined whether there is stored information (Z2873). If there is no stored information (Z2873: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that there is stored information (Z2873: Yes), a display performance command corresponding to the stored performance mode is set (Z2874), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 444, the explanation will continue. The performance return process (Z2852) is executed, then the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to on (Z2851: Yes), the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends.

<Third control example>
Next, the above-mentioned third control example will be described with reference to Figures 446 to 449. In the above-mentioned third control example, when the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) starts while the continuous performance is being performed, the continuous performance being performed is interrupted, and the continuous performance that was interrupted when the variation of the first special symbol starts after the variation of the special symbol 2 ends is resumed. This allows the continuous performance to be performed in response to the variation of the first special symbol, and the continuous performance can be enjoyed until the end.

However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, if the continuous performance is interrupted, it will always resume after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the special chart 2 has finished changing), so the player cannot be excited about whether the continuous performance will resume or not, and so there was a demand for further enhancing the performance effect. In contrast, in the third control example, a determination is made as to whether or not to resume the interrupted continuous performance based on the game content (the number of times the special chart 2 changes) when the continuous performance is interrupted and the lottery result of the special chart 1 that is the target of the continuous performance, and the continuous performance is resumed based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, when the continuous performance is interrupted, the player can enjoy the special performance executed as the special chart 2 change performance while predicting whether the continuous performance will resume or not, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this third control example, the continuous performance is configured to be easily resumed when the lottery result for the special chart 1 that is the target of the continuous performance is a jackpot. This allows the player to play while hoping that the continuous performance will be resumed. Also, in the third control example, the continuous performance is configured to be more likely to be resumed the fewer the number of special chart 2 changes (number of times special performances are executed) that are executed while the continuous performance is interrupted. This makes it easier for the continuous performance to be resumed when the period between interruption and resumption of the continuous performance is short, and prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, if a long time has passed since the continuous performance was interrupted and the lottery result for the special chart 1 that is the subject of the continuous performance is a miss, the continuous performance is configured to be difficult to resume in order to prevent players from having unnecessary expectations of a jackpot.

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 446. Fig. 446 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modified example. In this third control example, in addition to the RAM 223 of the second control example described above, a special chart 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is added, which is different. The other elements are the same as those in the second control example, and the same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

The special symbol 2 variation counter 223ba is a counter for measuring the number of times the second special symbol varies. When the special effect setting process 2 (Fig. 449) sets the special effect mode, the counter value is incremented by 1 (Z5551 in Fig. 449), and the counter value is referenced in the continuous effect return process (see Fig. 448) in the effect setting process 2 (see Fig. 447) (Z5602 in Fig. 448). In the process of Z5602, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 variation counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602 in Fig. 448: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 variation counter 223ba is set to 0 (Z5603 in Fig. 448). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 variation counter 223ba is 3 or more (Z5602: No in FIG. 448), in other words, if the second special pattern variation is executed three or more times while the continuous performance is interrupted, it is determined whether there is winning information indicating a jackpot among the winning information corresponding to the first special pattern (Z5605 in FIG. 448), and if it is determined that there is not (Z5605 in FIG. 448: Yes), the value of the performance count counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606 in FIG. 448), and the processing of Z5603 described above is executed.

In other words, in the continuous performance return process (see FIG. 448), when the interrupted continuous performance is resumed, if the number of times that the special chart 2 changed during the interruption of the continuous performance is a predetermined number (three times) or more, a decision is made as to whether or not to resume the continuous performance based on the lottery result included in the winning information of the special chart 1 at that time. If the result of the continuous performance is a miss, the player will only be disappointed even if the continuous performance is resumed. Therefore, the value of the performance count counter 223af is set to 0, and the continuous performance is not resumed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from having unnecessary expectations of a jackpot when a long period of time has passed since the interruption of the continuous performance and the lottery result of the special chart 1 that is the target of the continuous performance is a miss, and it is possible to have expectations of a jackpot when the continuous performance is resumed, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

<Regarding control process by the voice lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 447 to Fig. 449, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described. This third control example differs from the second control example mainly in that the content of the performance setting process (Z5204: Fig. 441), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153: Fig. 440), has been partially changed. The other processes are the same, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 447, we will explain performance setting process 3 (Z5204), which is one process of variable display setting executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example. Performance setting process 3 (Z5204: FIG. 447) in this third control example differs from performance setting process (Z5204: FIG. 441) in the second control example in that Z5310 processing is not executed, the processing content of the special performance process (Z5311) has been changed, and continuous performance return processing (Z5351) has been added. The other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The continuous performance return process (Z5351) will be explained with reference to Figure 448. Figure 448 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous performance return process (Z5351).

In the continuous performance return process (Z5351), first, the value of the special chart 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is read (Z5601). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special chart 2 fluctuation counter is less than 3 (Z5602). If it is determined that it is greater than 3 (Z5602: Yes), the value of the special chart 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (Z5603), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special chart 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is less than 3 (Z5602: No), the winning information corresponding to the special chart 1 stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read (Z5604). Next, it is determined whether the winning information read out includes a winning prize (Z5605). If it is determined that there is no winning prize (Z5605: No), the value of the performance count counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606), and then the above-mentioned Z5603 process is executed to terminate this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5605 that a winning prize has been won (Z5605: Yes), the processing of Z5603 is executed and this processing ends.

Referring to FIG. 449, the special effect setting process 2 (Z5320) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described. The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320: FIG. 449) in this third control example differs from the special effect setting process (Z5311) in the second control example in that after executing the process of Z5504, a process of adding 1 to the value of the special chart 2 fluctuation counter 223ba (Z5551) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 450 to Fig. 461. This fourth control example is different from each of the above control examples in that it has an adjustment means that allows the player to adjust the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10.

First, the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 450. FIG. 450 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 450, the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that it is provided with volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume, but the rest of the configuration is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, we will explain the real-time clock (RTC) 292 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. The RTC 292 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and is configured as a real-time clock that can keep track of the current time. This RTC 292 has an input/output port, a device control unit, and a register. In addition, an RTC power supply is connected to the RTC 292. This RTC power supply is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 292 that is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC 292 even in a power-off state in which the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. For example, a button battery is used as the RTC power supply 353, and it is configured to be able to supply power to the RTC 292 for at least three years.

An input/output port and a register are connected to the device control unit of the RTC 292. The input/output port is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 so that they can communicate with each other. The device control unit controls the register to perform various controls such as keeping track of the current time and writing data.

A register is a memory area that can temporarily store data and perform calculations on the stored data. A register has at least a clock register and a time information storage area.

The clock register is a register for measuring the current time, and the register value is updated at predetermined intervals (e.g., every 1/4096 seconds). Based on the timing information measured in this clock register, it is determined whether or not a time performance is in progress.

In this embodiment, the device is configured to determine whether to store the value of the clock register (time information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) or the time information stored in the time information storage area in the power-on time storage area of the RAM 223 based on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on. In other words, if the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed, the device is configured to store the time information stored in the time information storage area in the power-on time storage area. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without the RAM erase switch 122 being pressed, the device is configured to store the value of the clock register (time information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) in the power-on time storage area.

As a result, the hall staff can simultaneously power on all the pachinko machines 10 at opening time, etc., without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, and the time elapsed since power-on can be matched for each pachinko machine 10. This allows the execution period of the time effects to be matched for each pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, when some of the pachinko machines 10 are powered off during the business hours of the hall (for example, to clear an error), when the power is turned on again, the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed and the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, so that the timing information stored in the time information storage area can be stored in the power-on time storage area. This prevents the execution timing of the time effects from differing between the pachinko machine 10 whose power has been cut off and the other pachinko machines 10.

Next, referring to Fig. 451 and X, the display screen related to volume adjustment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. Fig. 451(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, Fig. 451(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the third symbol display device 81 in a standby state in which no game is being played, X(a) is a schematic diagram showing the customer waiting screen in a state in which no special symbol variation has been performed since the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and X(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen during the first special symbol variation since the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 451(a), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the comment "Please wait a moment" as a display mode S1 during recovery to notify the user of the period until the recovery process of the control devices such as the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 is completed, and a volume gauge S2 is displayed to indicate the currently set volume. This volume gauge S2 is formed of a horizontally long gauge that visually displays the current volume, and a setting value display to the right of the gauge that indicates the current volume as a number. In FIG. 451, "1" is displayed as the setting value, and the gauge displays a shaded area corresponding to the setting value "1". Details will be described later, but this control example is configured so that the setting value "1" is set as the initial value of the volume setting value when the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 451(b), when the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b is pressed while the normal customer waiting screen is displayed, a volume gauge S2 and a volume switching display S3 are displayed. The volume switching display S3 is formed of a "switch" display to indicate that the volume can be switched, a volume decrease display mode S3a indicating that the volume will decrease when the left volume button 23a is pressed, and a volume increase display mode S3b indicating that the volume will increase when the right volume button 23b is pressed. With this volume switching display S3 displayed, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by pressing the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b.

Here, in conventional gaming machines, when committing fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, fraudulently manipulating the control contents of the main control device 110 in an attempt to win a jackpot), some players turn off the power to the pachinko machine 10 and then commit the fraudulent act. To make such fraudulent acts easier to detect, some pachinko machines are designed to emit a loud noise when the power is turned on.

However, in recent years, many pachinko machines 10 emit a temporary loud sound as a method of enhancing the presentation effect, and in an arcade where multiple pachinko machines 10 are in operation, there has been a problem in that the loud sound emitted when the power is turned on can be missed by arcade staff. In response to this, in this fourth control example, a sound quieter than the minimum value of the volume setting range that can be variably set by the player is output from the time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the first special pattern variation ends. By configuring it in this way, a gaming machine that emits a loud sound during normal play can create an unnatural state compared to surrounding gaming machines by emitting a quieter sound than necessary, making it easier for arcade staff to find.

In addition, this control example is configured so that the player cannot adjust the volume from when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on until the first special pattern variation ends, which prevents a player who has committed fraud from adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 by operating the volume button 23 after powering on so that the volume is the same as that of surrounding pachinko machines 10.

Specifically, as shown in X(a), the customer waiting screen after power-on is configured to display the same volume gauge S2 as in FIG. 451(b) described above, and not to display the volume switch display S3. In this way, although the volume output is lower than the volume setting value "1" internally, by displaying the volume gauge S2 corresponding to the setting value "1" on the display screen, it is possible to prevent a cheating player from realizing that the pachinko machine 10 has anti-cheating measures in place by looking at the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Similarly, as shown in X(b), even if the volume button 23 is pressed during the special pattern change on the first spin after the power is turned on (when a volume lower than the set value "1" is being output), the volume switch display S3 is not displayed, and the volume setting value cannot be changed by operating the volume button 23.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of this fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 453 to Fig. 455. The same elements as those in the above-mentioned control examples are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the electrical configuration of this pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 453. In the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example. It is the same as the above-mentioned control examples except that it has volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b).

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 454(a). FIG. 454(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this fourth control example is significantly different from the ROMs of the above-mentioned control examples in that a volume table 222ca is provided. All other elements are the same.

The volume table 222ca is a data table that specifies the volume setting values that can be set by operating the volume button 23. The contents of the volume table 222ca will now be described with reference to FIG. 455. FIG. 455 is a schematic diagram that shows the contents of the volume table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 455, in addition to the setting values that can be set by operating the volume button 23 (setting values "1" to "4"), the volume table 222ca also specifies a setting value (setting value "A") that is set when a specified condition is met after power is turned on, and the specified setting value is set depending on the state.

Specifically, the setting value "A" is set until the special pattern variation (special pattern variation) of the first spin after power is turned on is completed. When the setting value "A" is set, a sound of 15 db (decibels) is output. Also, when the setting value "1" is set by operating the volume button 23, a sound of 30 db (decibels) is output, when the setting value "2" is set, a sound of 75 db (decibels) is output, when the setting value "3" is set, a sound of 85 db (decibels) is output, and when the setting value "4" is set, a sound of 95 db (decibels) is output.

In this control example, the setting value "1" is set as the initial value after power is turned on, but the initial volume value may be set in response to various conditions. For example, a flag may be provided that is set to on only when the power is turned on for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, and if the flag is set to on, the setting value "3" may be set as the initial value. Alternatively, the time when the power is turned on may be determined, and a different setting value may be set as the initial value based on the result of the determination.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 454 (b). This third control example differs from the above-described second control example in that a set volume memory area 223ca, a volume operation invalid flag 223cb, and a volume change standby flag 223cc have been added to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted with the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The set volume memory area 223ca is an area for storing (storing) the currently set volume, and stores the setting value set during the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 457) of start-up process 4 (see FIG. 456) (Z6003, Z6004 in FIG. 457). Also, the setting value set during the volume setting process (see FIG. 459) of main process 4 (see FIG. 458) of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored (Z6106 in FIG. 459).

The volume operation invalid flag 223cb is a flag for indicating a period during which the change in volume (change in set value) based on the operation of the volume button 23 is invalid, and is set to ON during the period during which the change in volume (change in set value) based on the operation of the volume button 23 is invalid. This volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON (Z6005 in FIG. 457) when it is determined in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 253) that the RTC time is during business hours (for example, 10:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m.) (Z6002: Yes in FIG. 457), and is referred to in the volume setting process (see FIG. 459) (Z6107 in FIG. 459). If it is determined that the flag is set to ON in the process of Z6107 (see Z6107 in FIG. 459), a display volume command is set (Z6110 in FIG. 459) for displaying only the volume gauge S2 (see FIG. 451(a)) without displaying the volume switching display S3 (see FIG. 451(b)). Then, it is set to OFF in the volume-related process (see FIG. 461) executed in the stop command process 4 (FIG. 460) (Z5122 in FIG. 461). In other words, if the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON when the special pattern variation is stopped, it is set to OFF.

The volume change standby flag 223cc is a flag for indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23, and is set to on when the volume can be adjusted. In this third control example, when adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, it is first necessary to press the volume button 23 to display the volume switching display S3 on the third pattern display device 81. Then, with the volume switching display S3 displayed, the volume is adjusted by operating the volume button 23 (the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the volume of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed if the volume button 23 is pressed by mistake during play.

When the control state of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by executing the power-on operation with the RAM clear switch 122 operated (depressed) at the time of power-on, a sound effect indicating that the RAM has been cleared may be output at the maximum volume set by operation or at a volume higher than the maximum volume set by operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraud such as fraudulently clearing the RAM to target the winning random number value.

In addition, in this control example, the game sound is output at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by operation until one variation at the time of power-on is completed, but it is not limited to this. After power-on, the sound such as BGM and sound effects (sound for performance) when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner may be output at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by operation, and the third symbol display device 81 may display a display indicating the setting state of the volume, and the volume may be maintained and output until the player operates the volume button 23. By configuring in this way, when the game starts at the opening of the game store after power-on, the sound is output according to the previous player's volume setting (the volume setting of the previous day), and the player is surprised by the output at a high volume. Furthermore, by setting the volume lower than the minimum volume, the player can be made aware that the volume is low while preventing harm to the player, and can be made aware that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23. It is also possible to configure the volume to be switched to a volume lower than the minimum by switching to a demo screen regardless of when the power is turned on, and to display the volume setting screen. Furthermore, after the game has started (the special symbols start to change), during the period when the volume button 23 is not operated and the volume setting remains lower than the minimum volume, the display color (volume symbol or volume button (operation to the right increases the volume, operation to the left decreases the volume)) on the volume setting screen may be changed to notify the expectation of a win depending on the winning lottery result of the special symbol that has been changed or the lottery result (pre-read result) of the reserved memory. By configuring it in this way, the game can be enjoyed at a quiet volume until a high expectation change or reserved memory occurs, and the volume can be increased to play at the timing when the expectation becomes high.

<Regarding control process by the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 456 to Z324. In this fourth control example, the main differences from the first control example are that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) has been added to the start-up process, a volume setting process (Z2171) and a sound editing/output process (Z2109) have been added to the main process, and a volume-related process (Z5120) has been added to the stop command process, which is one process in the command determination process.

The startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 456. The startup process in this fourth control example (FIG. 456) differs from the startup process in the first control example (FIG. 412) in that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) has been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 457, we will explain the initial volume setting (Z2051), which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example. FIG. 457 is a flowchart showing the contents of this initial volume setting (Z2051).

When setting the initial volume, first, the RTC calculation time is read (Z6001). Next, it is determined whether the current time is business hours (Z6002). If it is determined that the current time is not business hours (Z6002: No), setting value 2 is read from the volume table 222ca in ROM 222 and stored in the set volume memory area 223ca in RAM 223 (Z6003), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is business hours (Z6004), setting value 1 is read from the volume table 222ca and stored in the set volume memory area 223ca (Z6004), and then the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to on (Z6005), and this process ends.

Referring to FIG. 458, main processing 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 458 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 4. The main processing in this fourth control example (FIG. 458) differs from the main processing in the second control example (FIG. 395) in that a volume setting process (Z2171) has been added. As the other processes are the same as those in the second control example, detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 459, we will explain the volume setting process (Z2171), which is one process of main process 4 (FIG. 458) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example. FIG. 459 is a flowchart showing the contents of this volume setting process (Z2171).

In the volume setting process (Z2171), first, it is determined whether the volume button has been operated (Z6101). If it is determined that the volume button has not been operated (Z6101), this process is terminated. If the volume button has been operated (Z6101: Yes), it is determined whether the volume change standby flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (Z6102). If it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to on (Z6102: Yes), a setting value corresponding to the operation content is read from the volume table 222ca (Z6103). Next, a display volume change command is set to display a volume gauge corresponding to the read setting value (Z6104). Next, an audio setting command is set to indicate the read setting value (Z6105), the read setting value is stored in the set volume memory area 223ca (Z6106), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z6102 that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to off (Z6102: No), it is determined whether the volume operation disabled flag 223cb is set to on (Z6107). If it is determined that the volume operation disabled flag 223cb is set to off (Z6107: No), a display volume change command is set to show the volume gauge and adjustment display (6108). Next, the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to on (Z6109), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z6107 that the volume operation disabled flag 223cb is set to on (Z6107: Yes), a display volume command is set to show the volume gauge (Z6110), and this processing is terminated.

Referring to FIG. 460, the stop command processing 4 (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop command processing 4 (Z2259). Stop command processing 4 (Z2259) in this fourth control example differs from the stop command processing (FIG. 438) in the second control example in that volume-related processing (Z5120) has been added. As the other processing is the same as that in the second control example, detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 461, we will explain the volume-related process (Z5120), which is one process within the stop command process 4 (Z2259) in this fourth control example. FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing the contents of the volume-related process (Z5120).

In the volume-related processing (Z5120), first, it is determined whether the volume operation invalid flag 223cb provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (Z5152). If it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to on (Z5121: Yes), the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to off (Z5122), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5121 that the volume operation invalid flag is off (Z5121: No), the processing of Z5122 is not executed, and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding the fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in this fifth control example will be described with reference to Figs. 462 to 482. In this fifth control example, a control process related to the operation of the tilting device 310 (see Fig. 142) provided in the operation device 300 (see Fig. 142) will be described. Note that only the differences from the first control example will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be omitted.

In this fifth control example, we will mainly explain the initial operation of the tilting device 310 and error handling during the initial operation when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and the control processing and error handling in the operation of the tilting device 310 during normal play.

With reference to Fig. 462(a)-(b), the display mode of the abnormality notification displayed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. Fig. 462(a) is a diagram showing the display mode (error display) of the abnormality notification displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 when the tilting device 310 is not detected at the origin position even when the tilting operation timer 223db described later becomes 0 (the elapsed timing of the initial operation period from the end of the initial operation to the origin position) during the initial operation when the power is turned on (tilt initial operation process (Z2907: Fig. 479) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 110).

As shown in Fig. 462(a), when the operation period during which the initial operation of the tilting device 310 ends has elapsed and the origin sensor of the operating device 300 has not detected that the tilting device 310 has moved to the origin position, the text "Button return error A, please call an attendant" is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to inform hall employees, etc. that an abnormality has occurred due to the initial operation of the tilting device 310. In this control example, during the initial operation, if the tilting device 310 has not been moved to the origin position at the end of the initial operation period, an error message as shown in Fig. 462(a) is displayed. In addition, as will be described in detail later, if a player interferes with the operation of the tilting device 310 by holding it down with their hands or other actions, the normal operation that is predetermined by the presentation may not be performed. During normal play, even if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, an error is not displayed immediately. Instead, an error is notified if an abnormality is detected until a specific predetermined condition is met (for example, the tilting device 310 is operated every three changes in the special pattern and an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 four times in a row), and this is configured to suppress malfunctions that interfere with the progress of the game even though there is no mechanical abnormality.

The error display during initial operation is configured to be identifiable as "Button return error A" as shown in FIG. 462(a), making it easy to determine that the error is a mechanical (including control) abnormality.

As shown in FIG. 462(b), when the tilting device 310 is operated in a normal game (during a game after the initial operation of the tilting device 310 is completed) and then the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position, if the movement to the origin position is not detected by the origin sensor even when the period for the movement to the origin position is completed, an error is not displayed immediately, but the status indicates that an internal abnormality has been detected. After that, the operation to move to the origin position is performed every three changes of the special pattern, and if it is not possible to move to the origin position four times in a row, the words "Button return error B, please call an attendant" are displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and an error display is executed to inform the player and hall staff that an abnormality has occurred in the tilting device 310.

Here, by displaying text different from that displayed during the initial operation, such as "Button Return Error B," it is possible to easily identify that an abnormality has occurred during normal play. In this way, in this control example, during normal play, the error display is executed taking into consideration that the player may be playing in a way that interferes with the tilting motion 310, thereby preventing a malfunction in which the error display is executed frequently. Also, when the error display is executed during normal play and it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the tilting device 310, this means that the player has been playing in a way that interferes with the operation of the tilting device 310 for a long period of time, so that an erroneous operation of the tilting device 310 can be prevented early on by hall employees or the like checking the playing method.

Next, the relationship between the operation of the tilting device 310, the change in the special symbol, and the touch sensor effect will be described with reference to Figures 463 to 465. Figure 463 is a timing chart of an example in which, when the change in the normal reach miss A is executed as the change pattern of the special symbol (third symbol), the operation effect of the tilting device 310 is executed, and even when the period in which the tilting device 310 moves to the origin position (the period in which return to the origin is completed) has come, it is not detected by the origin sensor.

When the normal reach miss A (fluctuation time (fluctuation period) 30,000 ms) fluctuation display is determined, the value of the performance counter 223h is obtained and compared with one of the judgment values "0 to 149" set in the operation performance selection table 222da described later. If it matches the obtained value of the performance counter 223h, the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 (see FIG. 470(a)) described later is determined. In the tilting operation scenario A table 222 (see FIG. 470(a)), after the tilting device 310 rises to the highest position (see FIG. 169), an operation is performed in which the tilting device 310 is lowered to the position shown in FIG. 170 as a tilting operation, and the operation of repeating the position where the tilting device 310 is lowered to the highest position (see FIG. 169) at 0.5 second intervals, and then the operation of descending to the position shown in FIG. 159, which is the origin position, is executed (set).

When normal reach miss A is executed, the third symbol will be in reach display mode (the third symbols in the left and right symbol rows are temporarily stopped (stopped) at the same type of symbol) 18 seconds (T1) after the special symbol starts to change. When the reach display mode is reached, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 20 seconds after the special symbol starts to change, to suggest that the frame button 22 should be pressed. Here, a valid operation period (T5) is set during which the detection is determined to be valid when the tilt operation 320 is pressed and the frame button 22 is detected by the detection sensor 324 described later during the 3.5 seconds from 23.3 seconds (T3) to 26.8 seconds (T4) after the special symbol starts to change.

As shown in Fig. 463 and Fig. 470(a), 18 seconds (18000 ms) after the normal reach release A starts to fluctuate (T1), the drive motor 342 rotates 210 steps in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in Fig. 159), causing the disk cam 344 to rotate 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position in Fig. 159) and move to the cam release position shown in Fig. 167 (operation pointer 1 (see Fig. 470(a))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (3000 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see Fig. 470(a))). After the 3-second stop period, the drive motor 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in Fig. 167), causing the disk cam 344 to rotate 20 degrees counterclockwise and move to the engagement release position (see Fig. 169) (operation pointer 3 (see Fig. 470)(a)).

Here, when moving from the cam release position to the lock release position, as already explained in the 18th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 168, the release member 346 is rotated downward (counterclockwise), causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate clockwise, and the lock (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotating claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. In this case, the voice coil motor 352 is also driven, providing a forward/rearward assist to the tilting device 320, increasing the lifting force and improving the lifting speed. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and a period is waited until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 470(a))). Then, the drive motor 342 is driven 50 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 169), causing the disk cam 344 to rotate 50 degrees counterclockwise and move from the highest position (see FIG. 169) to the tilted down position (see FIG. 170) rotated 50 degrees downward (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 470(a))). Then, 0.5 seconds later, the drive motor 342 is driven 50 steps in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 170) again, causing the disk cam 344 to rotate 50 degrees clockwise, and the tilt device 320 is again moved to the highest position (see FIG. 169) (operation pointer 6 (see FIG. 470(a))).

After that, again after 0.5 seconds, the tilting device 320 is driven from the highest position to the tilt-down position (operation pointer 7 (see FIG. 470(a))), and 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is driven from the tilt-down position to the highest position (operation pointer 8 (see FIG. 470(a))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 1 second (operation pointer 9 (see FIG. 470(a))). When the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is completed, the performance return operation process (Z2911: FIG. 477) is executed, and the drive motor 342 is driven in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 169) based on the origin detection operation A table 222d3 (see FIG. 471(a)) described later, so that the disk cam 344 is rotated counterclockwise, and the driving force is transmitted in the direction in which the tilting device 320 descends to the origin position.

In the example shown in FIG. 463, the tilting device 320 is held and fixed at the highest position so that it cannot be lowered by the player. In such a case, as already explained in the 18th embodiment, the movable clutch 343c is disengaged from the transmission gear 343b, causing the transmission gear 343b to spin freely, so that the disk cam 344 does not rotate even when the drive motor 342 is driven.

Here, if the detection sensor 324 does not detect that the drive motor 342 is at the origin position even after the tilt operation timer 223db (1900 ms) set in the origin detection operation A table 222db3 (see FIG. 471(a)) has elapsed, the tilt operation status is set to "4" as data indicating an internal abnormality of the tilt device 310 (an abnormal state that is not notified to the outside) described below.

In this way, even if there is a risk that the tilt device 320 cannot return from the highest position to the origin position because it is held by the player, the movable clutch 343c allows the drive motor 342 (transmission gear 343b) to spin freely, thereby preventing damage to the drive motor 342, transmission gear 343b, etc. Furthermore, by configuring the tilt operation status to determine if there is an abnormality in the origin return operation, it is possible to identify that an abnormal state exists internally.

Next, referring to FIG. 464, a description will be given of the control that is executed after the tilt operation status is set to "4" when the tilt operation status is set to "4" without the origin sensor turning on even after the origin detection operation period (e.g., 1900 ms) has elapsed when an effect in which the tilt device 310 rises (e.g., the effect shown in FIG. 463) is executed. FIG. 464 is a timing chart for the case in which, when the tilt operation status is set to "4," a retry operation is executed to return the tilt device 310 to the origin position every time three variations of the special pattern (special pattern) are executed.

When the tilt operation status is set to "4", a retry operation is executed in which the drive motor 342 is operated to move the tilt device 310 to the origin position every three changes of the special pattern as shown in FIG. 464. In this case, the tilt operation status value is maintained at "4" until the origin sensor is detected, and if the origin sensor does not turn on in four consecutive retry operations (four retry operations every three changes), the error display shown in FIG. 462(b) is executed.

As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in which the tilting device 310 rises and the tilting device 310 executes an origin detection operation, such as the player holding the tilting device 310 in a way that prevents the device from moving to the origin position, an abnormality is not immediately reported as in the case of an abnormality during the initial operation. Instead, a retry operation is performed every time the special pattern changes a specified number of times (three times), and if it is determined that the device still has not been able to move to the origin position in succession, an error is displayed. This prevents problems such as frequent error displays due to player mischief, which can overwhelm the employees of the game arcade.

Next, referring to FIG. 465, when the tilt operation status is set to "4", when a notice performance using the touch sensor 290 is selected and executed, the control in the case of executing the origin detection operation (retry operation) based on the timing when the touch sensor 290 turns on will be described. FIG. 465 is a timing chart showing the operation of the tilt device 310 executed when a performance using the touch sensor 290 is executed. The fluctuation of the special pattern starts, a notice performance in which the operation of the touch sensor 290 is valid is selected, the effective period of the touch sensor 290 is set, and the player performs an operation such as holding his/her hand over the top of the touch sensor 290, and the touch sensor 290 detects that it is on. At the timing when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 detects that it is on, the drive motor 342 of the tilt device 310 is driven and the origin detection operation is executed. FIG. 465 shows a case where the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped at the timing when the origin sensor is turned on, and the tilt operation status is set to "0". On the other hand, if the origin sensor does not turn on after the origin detection period (e.g., 3600 ms) has elapsed, the drive motor 342 is stopped and the tilt operation status is maintained set to "4." This causes the retry operation to continue to be performed every three fluctuations, and control can be executed to resolve the abnormality in the tilt device 310.

A player usually operates the launch handle with his right hand and operates the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 290 with his left hand. When a player plays while holding the tilt device 310 so that it does not return to the origin position, it is considered that the tilt device 310 is held with the left hand. Therefore, by performing the origin detection operation of the tilt device 310 when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, the origin detection operation is performed with the tilt device 310 released from its holding, and the tilt device 310 can be moved to the origin position. In this control example, the origin detection operation is performed when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, but the origin detection operation may be performed only when the touch sensor 290 is turned on while the touch sensor of the launch handle is on, so that the origin detection operation is more reliably performed with the player's holding released. Also, instead of being limited to the touch sensor 290, a frame button 290 may be used, or a notice to use both hands (for example, text display such as "Raise both hands") may be executed by the third pattern display device 81, or an execution may be executed in which a three-dimensional code or the like is read by a mobile phone or the like, and an origin detection operation may be executed during that period. Naturally, an execution may be an audio notification to use both hands.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 466 to Fig. 471. Fig. 466 is a block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example. In the fifth control example, a tilting device 310, a drive motor 342, a voice coil motor 352, and a detection sensor 324 are added to the first control example. The other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The tilting device 310 has the same detailed configuration as that already explained with reference to Figures 142 to 222, so a detailed explanation of it will be omitted.

The drive motor 342 is composed of a stepping motor, and when the tilting device 310 is at the lowest position, it is driven to release the lock that prevents the tilting device 310 from rising at the lowest position, and when the lock is released, the vibration force in the forward and backward directions of the pachinko machine 10 from the voice coil motor 352 (described later), which is driven in synchronization with the drive motor 342, helps the pachinko machine 10 rise to the highest position by the spring force.

On the other hand, when the tilting member 310 is in the highest position, the drive motor 342 rotates in the opposite direction to when it raises the tilting device 310, moving the tilting device 310 downward to the origin position. When the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position, the bottom plate portion 311a is engaged by the rotating claw member 347 (see FIG. 159), restricting the tilting device 310 from rising.

The detection sensor 324 is a transmission type detection sensor already described with reference to FIG. 150, and is composed of a left detection sensor 324L and a right detection sensor 324R. When the tilt device 310 shown in FIG. 159 is restricted at the lower limit position, the left detection sensor 324L detects the left detection piece 311gL (ON state), and the right detection sensor 324R does not detect the right detection piece 311gR (OFF state), making it possible to detect that the tilt device 310 has been moved to the lower limit position. In addition, when the tilt device 310 is further pressed down by the player at the lower limit position, the right detection sensor 324R detects the right detection piece 311gR (ON state), and both the right detection sensor 324R and the left detection sensor 324L are ON, so that it is possible to determine that the tilt device 310 has been operated at the lower limit position by the player.

As a result, the tilting device 310 can be used in an effect in which the player presses (operates) it not only when it has been moved to the highest position, but also when it is restricted to the lowest position, allowing it to be used in a variety of effects. For example, if the effect in which the tilting device 310 rises and is pressed is set with a high probability of being executed during the fluctuation of a special pattern that results in a win/loss determination, the tilting device 310 can represent the expected degree of the win/loss determination result.

The voice coil motor 352 is located on the rear side of the tilting device 310, and when driven, it repeatedly vibrates the tilting device 310 from the rear side to the front side, vibrating the tilting device 310 to create an effect in which the player can feel the vibration when touching the tilting device 310. Furthermore, when the tilting device 310 rises, it rises due to the spring force against gravity, but the rising force is weakened by the tilting device 310's own weight. However, by driving the voice coil motor 352 when it rises, an upward force is applied by the vibration from the voice coil motor 352, and the problem of the upward force being weakened by its own weight can be suppressed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 467. This fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same elements, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 467(a). FIG. 467(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example. This fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that an operation performance selection table 222da, a tilting action scenario table db, an origin detection action A table 222dcc, an origin detection action B table 222dd, and a tilting initial action table 222de have been added.

The operation performance selection table 222da is a table for selecting operation data (operation contents) for operating the tilting device 310 according to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 469(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the operation performance selection table 222da. In the operation performance selection table 222da, a judgment value of the performance counter 223h is set, which determines whether or not to execute an operation performance using the tilting device 310 with a predetermined probability according to the variation type of the special symbol. The type of tilting operation scenario is set for the judgment value for executing the operation performance. In the tilting operation scenario, the operation performance start time (operation performance start period) which is a timer value that determines the timing at which the operation performance of the tilting device 310 starts as the special pattern variation time passes, the timer value of the tilting operation timer 223db for setting the operation time (operation period) of the tilting device 310, the operation effective start time (operation effective start period) which is a timer value that determines the start time (start period) at which the operation of the tilting device 310 becomes effective, and the operation effective end time (operation effective end period) which is a timer value that determines the end of the period at which the operation of the tilting device 310 becomes effective are set. That is, depending on the operation data selected from the operation performance selection table 222da, the setting of whether or not the performance using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if executed, the setting of the start timing of the operation performance using the tilting device 310 and the effective period (T5) that effectively determines the operation when the player presses the tilting device 310 are set are executed.

Specifically, if the variation pattern of the special symbol is "Normal Reach Big Hit A" or "Normal Reach Miss A", the operation effect selection table 222da obtains the value of the effect counter 223h and determines whether to execute the operation effect. If it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed (if the obtained value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 149"), the tilting operation scenario A table 222bd1 described later is selected as the operation scenario of the tilting device 320, the tilting operation timer 223db (T2) is set to 8800 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 478), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 18000 ms, the effective operation start time (T3) is set to 23300 ms, and the effective operation end time (T4) is set to 26800 ms.

In addition, if the special symbol fluctuation pattern is "Super Reach Big Hit A" or "Super Reach Miss A", the operation effect selection table 222da acquires the value of the effect counter 223h and determines whether to execute the operation effect. If it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed (if the acquired value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 149"), the tilting operation scenario B table 222bd2 described later is selected as the operation scenario of the tilting device, the tilting operation timer 223db (T2) is set to 7900 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 478), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 38000 ms, the operation effective start time (T3) is set to 41500 ms, and the operation effective end time (T4) is set to 45900 ms. In this way, the execution operation of the tilting device 310 and the period during which the operation is effective are preset according to the type of fluctuation of the special symbol, and the operation is performed as time passes.

The tilting operation scenario table 222db contains data tables for setting the type of tilting operation scenario selected in the operation performance selection table 222da and the origin detection operation tables A and B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the tilting operation scenario.

Figure 469 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the tilting operation scenario table 222db. The tilting operation scenario table 222db includes a tilting operation scenario A table 222db1, a tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, an origin detection operation A table 222db3, and an origin detection operation B table 222db4.

The tilt operation scenario A table 222db1 is a table that defines the operation contents in the tilt operation scenario A, and can be selected when the fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach A miss or a normal reach A hit, and stores operation data when the tilt device 310 is movable. As described above, the tilt operation scenario A table 222db1 is set by lottery on the operation presentation selection table 222da when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. Figure 470 (a) is a diagram that shows the contents of the tilt operation scenario A table 222db1. When the operation presentation start time set in the operation presentation selection table 222da is triggered after the special symbol starts to fluctuate, the operation of the tilt operation scenario A table 222db1 starts.

The operation of the tilting action scenario A table 222db1 reads out the action content corresponding to the action pointer (Z2953 in FIG. 480) for the required time corresponding to the passage of time in the tilting action timer 223db, starting from the action pointer "1", and performs the defined action until the action pointer becomes "10" (tilting action timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation performance start time is triggered (18,000 ms) after the special symbol starts to vary, the operation pointer executes operation data of "1" (moves backwards 210 steps for 2,100 ms), and the cam release operation (the release member 346 is rotated clockwise by the second retraction portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344, and the second extension portion 344c3 is moved to the top of the release member 34 (see FIG. 167) (i.e., the second extension portion 344c3 is moved to the top of the release member 34 (see FIG. 167) without operating the rotating claw member 347)) is performed, and the cam release position is reached. Next, the operation pointer executes operation data of "2" (stops for 3,000 ms), and a standby operation is performed. The operation data for the operation pointer "3" (moving 20 steps forward in 200 ms) is executed, and the disengagement operation (the second protrusion 344c3 rotates the release member 346 downward, rotating the rotating claw member 347 to release the engagement with the tilting device 320) moves the disk cam 344 to the disengagement position, and the tilting device 320 begins to rise.

Next, the motion data of the motion pointer "4" (stops for 500 ms) is executed, and the motion pointer waits to rise. The motion data of the motion pointer "5" (moves 50 steps forward for 500 ms) is executed, and the position of FIG. 170 is reached. The motion data of the motion pointer "6" (moves 50 steps backward for 500 ms) is executed, and the tilt motion is reached to the position of FIG. 169. The motion data of the motion pointer "7" (moves 50 steps forward for 500 ms) is executed, and the position of FIG. 170 is reached again. The motion data of the motion pointer "8" (moves 50 steps backward for 500 ms) is executed, and the position of FIG. 170 is reached again. The motion of the motion pointer "4" to "8" is repeated twice as a tilt motion, and the motion data of the motion pointer "9" (stops for 1000 ms) is executed, and the motion stops at the position of FIG. 169, and the motion pointer becomes "10", and the motion is completed.

In this way, the operation of the tilting device 320 executed according to the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is to move the tilting device 320 from the origin position to the highest position, perform a tilting operation at the highest position, and then return to the origin position. Here, as shown in FIG. 463, when the tilting device 320 starts to rise and is pressed down and detected by the detection switch 324 for 3.5 seconds, the detection is determined to be valid, and a specific advance notice performance (for example, a performance that notifies the expectation of a win, etc.) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and sound effects and lamp lighting modes corresponding to the advance notice performance are also displayed on the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 27. After the tilting device 320 starts to rise, if the player presses the tilting device 320 before the 3.5 seconds of the effective operation period (T5) have elapsed, the tilting device 320 will move to the origin position by the pressing operation before the return operation is performed by the origin detection operation A table 222db3, and when the tilting device 320 is locked and held at the origin position by the rotating claw member 347, an operation based on the origin detection operation A table 222db3 will be performed and the disk cam 344 will move to the initial position (origin position).

When the tilt device 320 is held by the player in a raised position, etc., causing the transmission gear 343b to spin freely, the left side detection sensor 353L turns ON, judging that it is in the initial position, and a control operation is executed to return the position of the disk cam 344 to the origin position.

The tilt operation scenario B table 222db2 is a table that defines the operation contents in the tilt operation scenario B, and stores operation data for when the tilt device 310 is movable when the fluctuation pattern type is Super Reach A. As described above, the tilt operation scenario B table 222db2 is set by lottery from the operation performance selection table 222da when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. Figure 470 (b) is a diagram that shows a schematic of the contents of the tilt operation scenario B table 222db2. When the operation performance start time set in the operation performance selection table 222da is triggered after the special symbol starts to fluctuate, the operation of the tilt operation scenario B table 222db2 starts.

The tilt action scenario B table 222db2 reads out the action contents corresponding to the action pointer (Z2953 in FIG. 480) for the required time corresponding to the passage of time on the tilt action timer 223db, starting from the action pointer "1", and performs the defined action until the action pointer becomes "11" (tilt action timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation performance start time is triggered (38,000 ms) after the special symbol starts to change, the action pointer executes the action data of "1" (moves 50 steps forward for 500 ms) and is released, the action pointer executes the action data of "2" (stops for 3,000 ms) and waits, the action pointer executes the action data of "3" (moves 20 steps forward for 200 ms), the action pointer executes the action data of "4" (moves 20 steps backward for 200 ms), the action pointer executes the action data of "5" (moves 20 steps forward for 200 ms), and the action pointer executes the action data of "6". The motion data (moving 20 steps in the backward direction for 200 ms) is executed, the motion data with the motion pointer at "7" (moving 20 steps in the forward direction for 200 ms) is executed, the motion data with the motion pointer at "8" (moving 20 steps in the backward direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the motion data with the motion pointer at "9" (moving 120 steps in the forward direction for 1200 ms) is executed as a tilt motion, with the motion data for the motion pointer at "9" (moving 120 steps in the forward direction for 1200 ms) being executed, and the motion data for the motion pointer at "10" (stopping for 2000 ms) is executed, and the motion stops at the position in FIG. 38, with the motion pointer at "11" and the motion ending.

By configuring it in this way, the tilting device 310 performs a prodding action during the reach performance, encouraging the player to operate the machine, and by changing the prodding action depending on the type of fluctuation and stopping the rising height (length) at different points while the operation performance is being performed, it is possible to generate interest in operating the machine and increase the excitement of the game.

In this control example, the type of tilting action scenario is set to correspond to the type of fluctuation pattern, but it is not limited to this. Alternatively, the selection rate may be set to vary depending on the result of the hit/miss determination by setting tilting action scenarios A and B by allocating the judgment value of the performance counter 223h for hit and miss determination results. By configuring in this way, for example, a tilting action scenario that is set to be selected more likely when the hit/miss determination result is a hit than when it is a miss is executed, which allows the player to hope that the hit/miss determination result will be a hit.

Also, as in the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2, a tilting motion scenario type may be set in which, after a tilting motion is performed at the start of the motion, the ball is moved to the origin position without rising to the highest position. By configuring in this way, for example, tilting motion scenario B is set to be easily selected when the hit/miss determination result is a hit, and a tilting motion scenario with only a tilting motion is set to be easily selected when the hit/miss determination result is a miss, so that the tilting motion can be performed, raising expectations for a jackpot.

The origin detection operation A table 222db3 stores operation data for storing the tilt device 310 in its original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the tilt device 310 performs the operation of tilt operation scenario A.

Figure 471 (a) is a diagram showing the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222db3. As with the operations in the tilt operation scenario table, operations are performed in order starting from the operation data where the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the motion data with the motion pointer at "1" (movement 190 steps in the forward direction in 1900 ms) is executed, and the motion pointer becomes "2" and the motion ends.

When the operation of the tilt operation scenario A table is completed and the player operates the tilt device 310 during the operation valid period and the tilt operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes), or when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2961: No), the origin detection operation A table 222db3 sets the value of the tilt operation timer 223db to 1900 ms based on the origin detection operation A table 222db3 and sets the tilt operation status 223da to 3 (Z2959). In the performance return operation process (Fig. 481, Z2911), the operation content of the origin detection operation A table 222db3 is read (Z2974) until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0, and the origin return operation is performed until the origin is detected (Z2971: Yes) or the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No).

The origin detection operation B table 222db4 stores operation data for storing the tilt device 310 in its original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the tilt device 310 performs the operation of tilt operation scenario B.

Figure 471 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db4. As with the operations in the tilt operation scenario table, operations are performed in order starting from the operation data where the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the motion data with the motion pointer at "1" (movement 190 steps in the forward direction in 1900 ms) is executed, and the motion pointer becomes "2" and the motion ends.

The origin detection operation B table 222db4 is executed when the operation of the tilt operation scenario B table ends, the player operates the tilt device 310 during the operation valid period, and the tilt operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes), or when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2961: No). Based on the origin detection operation B table 222db4, the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set to 1900 ms and the tilt operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959), and the operation content of the origin detection operation B table 222db3 is read (Z2974) in the performance return operation process (Figure 481, Z2911) until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0, and the origin return operation is performed until the origin is detected (Z2971: Yes) or the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No).

The retry operation table 222dc stores operation data for repeating origin detection when the tilt device 310 performs an origin detection operation after performing a tilt operation scenario, but the origin is not detected.

Figure 471 (c) is a diagram showing the contents of the retry operation table 222dc. Similar to the operation of the tilt operation scenario table described above, the retry operation table 222dc performs retry operations in order starting from the operation data where the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0) or the origin is detected (Z2989: Yes).

Specifically, in the above-mentioned origin detection operation, the retry operation table 222dc is terminated when the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), and in the retry operation process (Z2913) executed by setting the tilt operation status 223da to 4 (Z2975), setting the detection change counter 223dc to 3 (Z2976), and setting the detection check counter 223dd to 4 (Z2977), the detection check is performed at the timing when the special pattern changes (Z2981: Yes). If the detection check counter 223dd is 1 or greater (Z2982: Yes), it is decremented by 1 (Z2983). If the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), a retry operation time (900 ms) is set to the tilt operation timer 223db (Z2985) based on the contents of the retry operation table, and the detection check counter 223dd is decremented by 1 (Z2986). If the value after decrement is 1 or greater (Z2987: Yes), the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2988). Then, if the detection sensor 324 is not at the origin position (Z2989: No) and the tilt operation timer 223db is not 0 (Z2990: Yes), the corresponding operation content is read out (Z2991), and the retry operation is performed until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 or the detection sensor 324 becomes the origin position (Z2989: Yes). As shown in FIG. 464, the operation setting is performed once every three times that the special pattern changes, and if origin detection is not performed, it is performed a maximum of four times.

The tilt initial operation table 222dd stores operation data for setting the initial operation of the tilt device 310 when the power is turned on.

Figure 471 (d) is a diagram showing the contents of the tilt initial action table 222dd. Similar to the actions of the tilt action scenario table described above, the tilt initial action table 222dd performs actions starting from the action data with the action pointer set to "1" until the action pointer becomes "2" and the tilt action timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2931: Yes) or the origin is detected (Z2933: Yes).

Specifically, in the start-up process (Fig. 472) executed when the power is turned on, if the contents of the RAM are normal (Z2205: Yes), the operation time (7200 ms) is set in the tilt operation timer 223db (Z2061) based on the tilt initial operation table 222dd, and the tilt operation status is set to 1 (Z2062), thereby starting operation.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 468. FIG. 468 is a schematic diagram showing the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this third control example. This second control example differs from the first control example described above in that a tilt operation status 223da, a tilt operation timer 223db, a detection fluctuation counter 223dc, a detection check counter 223dd, a tilt operation flag 223de, and a press notice valid timer 223df are added.

The tilt operation status 223da stores information for determining the operating state of the tilt device 310. The tilt operation status 223da is set to 1 (Z2062) when the initial operation settings of the tilt device 310 are performed during the start-up process (FIG. 472) executed when the power is turned on, and the initial operating state is reached.

The tilt operation status 223da is determined by the tilt device control process (Z2891) executed in the frame button input monitoring and performance process 3 (Z2161) to determine the process to be executed according to the value of the tilt operation status 223da. Specifically, when the value of the tilt operation status 223d is "0" (Z2904: Yes), the operation performance setting process (Z2905) is executed, and the tilt operation is in a standby state waiting for the operation to start. When the value of the tilt operation status 223d is "1" (Z2906: Yes), the tilt initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and the tilt operation is in the process of executing the initial operation after power-on. When the value of the tilt operation status 223d is "2" (Z2908: Yes), the operation performance process (Z2909) is executed, and the tilt operation is in the state of operation performance during the special pattern change. If the value of the tilt motion status 223d is "3" (Z2910: Yes), the return motion after performance process (Z2911) is executed, and the tilt motion is a return motion after the scenario motion.

If the value of the tilt operation status 223d is "4" (Z2912: Yes), a retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and the tilt operation is currently being retried to detect the origin. If the value of the tilt operation status 223d is anything other than this (Z2912: No), the execution of this process ends when the value of the tilt operation status 223d is "5", but this is an error state when origin detection cannot be performed when performing the initial operation or return operation described above. When an error state occurs, there is no change in the tilt operation until the power is turned on again.

In the operation performance setting process (Z2905: FIG. 478), as described above, when the operation performance start time is triggered after the special symbol starts changing (Z2921: Yes), the tilt action status 223da is set to 2 (Z2922), and the tilt action becomes a state in which the operation performance is in progress during the special symbol changing action.

In the tilt initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 479), if the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2933: Yes), the initial operation is set to 0 if the detection sensor 324 detects the origin (Z2933: Yes), and the tilt operation goes into standby mode, and if the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2933: No), 5 is set and an error state occurs.

During the operation performance processing (Z2909: FIG. 480), if the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No), the tilt operation flag is off (Z2957: No), and the detection sensor 324 detects the origin (Z2961: Yes), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and the tilt operation goes into standby.

In the return motion processing after the performance (Z2911: FIG. 481), if the detection sensor 324 detects the origin (Z2971: Yes), the tilt motion status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), the tilt motion goes into standby, and this processing ends.

If the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2971: No) and the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 4 and the tilt operation becomes a retry operation.

In the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 482), if the detection sensor 324 detects the origin (Z2989: Yes) after the special pattern starts to change (Z2981: No), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972) and the tilt operation goes into a standby state; if the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2989: No) and the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: Yes), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 5 (Z2994) and the tilt operation goes into an error state.

The tilt operation timer 223db is a timer for counting the operation of the tilt device 310. When the power is turned on, the initial operation time is set (Z2061) in the tilt operation timer 223db, and is repeatedly updated by incrementing by 1 each time the main process (Fig. 473) is executed.

In the standby state when the tilt operation status value is "0", the operation time is set (Z2923) according to the tilt operation scenario table. In the state during the operation presentation when the tilt operation status value is "2", the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No), and if the tilt operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes), the time of the origin detection operation is set based on the origin detection operation table. In the state during the retry operation when the tilt operation status value is "4", the retry operation time is set (Z2985) based on the contents of the retry operation table 222dc.

The detection change counter 223dc is a counter that counts the number of changes while the tilt device 310 executes a retry operation when the origin is not detected during a return operation after a scenario operation. The detection change counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2976) when the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No) during the post-performance return operation process (Z2911) that is executed when the tilt operation status value 223da is "3" and the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2971: No), and the tilt operation becomes a retry operation.

During the retry operation, if the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2982: Yes) at the timing when the special pattern starts to change (Z2981: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation remains, and the following judgment process is performed. First, the detection change counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983), and if the decrement result is 0 (Z2984: No), it is determined that the change is one that will cause a retry operation. After the tilt operation timer is set based on the contents of the retry operation table (Z2985), the detection check counter 223dd is decremented by 1 (Z2986). If the result is not 0 (Z2987: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation has not reached the specified number of times (maximum 4 times), and the detection change counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2988).

The detection check counter 223dd is a counter that counts the number of retry operations performed when the tilt device 310 does not detect the origin during a return operation after a scenario operation. During the post-performance return operation process (Z2911) that is executed when the value of the tilt operation status 223da is "3", if the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2971: No) and the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), the detection check counter 223dd is set to 4 (Z2976), and the tilt operation becomes a retry operation. Therefore, if there is no origin detection, the retry operation is performed a maximum of four times.

The tilt operation flag 223de is a flag indicating that when tilt operation scenario A or tilt operation scenario B is being executed, the tilt device 320 is pressed by the player during the valid operation period, moved to the origin position, and locked by the rotating claw member 347. This tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON when the tilt device 320 is pressed during the valid operation period and detected by the detection switch 324 by the processing of Z2956 in the operation presentation processing (Z2909) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. On the other hand, after it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is ON by the processing of Z2957, the tilt operation status is set to 3, and is set to OFF after the origin return operation is executed (see Z2960).

The push-down notice validity timer 223df is a timer for determining the validity period for validly determining the detection of the detection switch 324 by the tilting device 320 being pushed down as a switch for performance when the tilting device 320 is not raised (i.e., when it is held by the rotating claw member 347 at the origin position). When a fluctuation pattern is determined, and a notice performance in which the tilting device 320 is used as a switch for performance is determined as a notice performance, the push-down notice validity timer 223df stores data corresponding to the validity period that is determined based on the start timing of the validity period. Note that when data corresponding to the validity period is set in the push-down notice validity timer 223df (Z2877: see FIG. 474), the cam removal operation is executed. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation that the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 will be executed due to the sound of the cam removal being executed and the vibration transmitted to the player from the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the press notification validity timer 223df is updated by subtracting one each time a press Z2873 (see FIG. 474) is made.

<Regarding control process by the main control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to Figures 472 to 345, the control processing by the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, the first control example is different in that some processes of the start-up process (Fig. 472) and the main process (Fig. 473) have been added, the frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z2107: Fig. 409) has been changed to the frame button input monitoring and performance process 3 (Z2161: Fig. 474), the sensor input process (Z2813: Fig. 410) has been changed to the sensor input process 2 (Z2890: Fig. 475), and the touch input retry process (Z2860: Fig. 476), the tilt device control process (Z2891: Fig. 477), the operation performance setting process (Fig. 478), the tilt initial operation process (Z2907: Fig. 479), the operation performance process (Z2909: Fig. 480), the performance back movement process (Z2911: Fig. 481), and the retry operation process (Z2913: Fig. 482) have been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The start-up process (FIG. 472) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 472. The start-up process (FIG. 472) in this fifth control example differs from the start-up process (FIG. 394) in the first control example in that the processes Z2061 to Z2062 have been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the start-up process (Fig. 472) in this fifth control example, after executing the process Z2012 or the process Z2013, the tilt action timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is set (Z2061) based on the tilt initial action table 222de (see Fig. 471(d)) provided in the ROM 222. Next, the value of the tilt action status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is set to 1 (Z2062), and the main process (Fig. 473) described later is executed.

In this way, the tilt operation status is set to 1 when the power is turned on, and the initial operation of the tilt device 320 is executed by the tilt initial operation process (Z2907: Fig. 479) described below when the power is turned on. Therefore, the initial operation is executed when the power is turned on, and the game can be started in the state where it has been moved to the origin position. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the disc cam 344 is operated by the initial operation, and based on the left detection sensor 353L being turned on, the step counter and the like are set to initial values, so that the drive motor 342 can be stably controlled.

Referring to FIG. 473, the main processing (FIG. 473) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be described. The main processing (FIG. 473) in this fifth control example differs from the main processing (FIG. 395) in the first control example in that the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107) is changed to frame button input monitoring and performance processing 3 (Z2161). The other processing is the same as in the first control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 474, we will explain frame button input monitoring and performance processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 474), which is one process of the main processing (FIG. 473) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example. FIG. 474 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and performance processing 3 (Z2161).

In the frame button input monitoring/performance process 3 (Z2161: FIG. 474), first, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is currently changing the special pattern for which the execution of the press notice has been decided (press notice is being set) (Z2881). That is, it is determined whether the execution of the press notice has been decided. If it is determined that the press notice is being set (Z2881: Yes), it is determined whether the press notice is in the valid period (Z2882). In other words, it is determined whether the press notice is being executed, and whether the press notice valid timer 223df is a value greater than 0. If it is determined that the press notice is in the valid period (Z2882: Yes), the press notice valid timer 223df provided in the RAM 223 is updated by subtracting 1 (Z2883). Next, it is determined whether the tilt device 320 is pressed by the player, and whether the detection switch 324 is on (Z2884). If it is determined that the tilt device 320 has been pressed (Z2884: Yes), a display press preview mode command is set (Z2885), and processing proceeds to Z2890. Note that if the press preview is not being executed in processing Z2881 (Z2881: No), or if it is determined in processing Z2884 that the player has not pressed the button (Z2884: No), other processing is skipped and processing proceeds to Z2890.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2882 that the press notification is not in the valid period (Z2882: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the press notification valid period, which is the start timing for executing the press notification (Z2886). Note that the start timing of the press notification is determined by a start timer (not shown) that is set when the special pattern starts to change, and the value of that start timer (when it is updated to a specific value of "0").

If it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period (Z2886: Yes), the valid period (e.g., 5 seconds) determined as the value of the press notification valid timer 223df is set, and the backward rotation operation of the drive motor 342 is set for 2100 ms as the cam removal operation (Z2887). By configuring it in this way, the cam removal operation is always performed even if the press notification does not cause the tilt device 320 to rise, so the player can expect the rise performance to be executed.

If it is not the start timing of the press notice valid period (Z2886: No), the process skips Z2887 and executes Z2888. Next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the press notice valid period (Z2888). Here, it is determined whether the value of the press notice valid period timer 223df is 0. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the press notice valid period (Z2888: Yes), the value of the press notice valid timer 223df is reset and a backward rotation operation of 1500 ms is set as the origin return operation (Z2889). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2888 that it is not the end timing of the valid period (Z2888: No), the process skips Z2889 and executes the process of sensor input process 2 (Z2890).

Details of this sensor input process 2 (Z2890) will be described later with reference to FIG. 475. Next, the tilting device control process (Z2891) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described later with reference to FIG. 477.

Sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 475) in this fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 475. Sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 475) in this fifth control example differs from the sensor input processing (Z2813: FIG. 410) in the first control example in that Z2826 to Z2829 are not executed, and a retry process during touch input (Z2860) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 476, the touch input retry process (Z2860) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing the contents of the touch input retry process (Z2860).

In the touch input retry process (Z2860: FIG. 476), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilt operation status 223da stored in the RAM 223 is 4 (Z2861). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2861: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the tilt operation status 223da is 4 (Z2861: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilt operation timer 223db stored in the RAM 223 is greater than 0 (Z2862). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2862: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2862: Yes), it is determined whether the detection sensor is detecting the origin (Z2863). If it is determined that the detection sensor is not detecting the origin (Z2863: No), the drive motor is set to rotate backward one step (Z2864) and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection sensor is detecting the origin (Z2863: Yes), the value of the tilt operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2865) and this process ends.

The tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described with reference to FIG. 477. FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilting device control process (Z2891).

In the tilt device control process (Z2891: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilt action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2901). If it is determined that the value of the tilt action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2901: Yes), the value of the tilt action timer 223db is decremented by 1. Note that, if it is determined in the process of Z2901 that the value of the tilt action timer 223db is 0 (Z2901: No), the process of Z2902 is skipped and the process of Z2904 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the tilt action status 223da is 0 (Z2904). If it is determined that the value of the tilt action status 223da is 0 (Z2904), the operation performance setting process (Z2905) is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, if the tilt operation status, which indicates an abnormality in the return to origin of the tilt device 320, is "4" at the time the touch sensor 290 is turned on, a retry operation of returning to the origin is executed. Therefore, by performing the retry operation of returning to the origin at a time when there is a high probability that the player is using both hands (one hand on the launch handle, the other operating the touch sensor 290), it is possible to make it easier to return the tilt device 320 to the origin.

Now, referring to FIG. 478, we will explain the operation performance setting process (Z2905), which is one process of the tilt device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477). FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation performance setting process (Z2905).

In the operation performance setting process (Z2905), it is determined whether the operation performance start time has been reached (Z2921). If it is determined that the operation performance start time has not been reached (Z2921: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the operation performance start time has been reached (Z2921: Yes), the value of the tilt action status 223da is set to 2 (Z2922). Next, based on the tilt action scenario table 222db provided in the ROM 222, the value of the tilt action timer 223db is set (Z2923), the tilt action flag 223de is set to off (Z2924), and this process is terminated.

Returning to Figure 477, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of Z2904 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 0 (Z2904: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906: Yes), the tilt initial operation processing (Z2907) is executed, and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 479, we will explain the tilt initial movement processing (Z2907), which is one process of the tilt device control processing (Z2891: FIG. 477). FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilt initial movement processing (Z2907).

In the tilt initial operation process (Z2907), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2931). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2391: Yes), the operation content of the tilt initial operation table 222de is read (Z2932: Yes), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2931, if it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933). If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933: Yes), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2934), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2933: No), the tilt operation status is set to 5 (Z2935). Next, the tilt error A command is set as the error command to display (Z2936), and this process ends.

In this way, if an abnormality occurs during the initial operation of returning to the origin when the power is turned on, an error message (abnormality processing) is displayed immediately, unlike during gameplay, allowing for early detection of a malfunction in the tilting device 320.

Returning to FIG. 477, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2906, if it is determined that the value of the tilt motion status 223da is not 1 (Z2906: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilt motion status 223da is 2 (Z2908). If it is determined that the value of the tilt motion status 223da is 2 (Z2908: Yes), processing during operation presentation (Z2909) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 480, we will explain the operation performance processing (Z2909), which is one process of the tilt device control processing (Z2891: FIG. 477). FIG. 480 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation performance processing (Z2909).

In the operation performance process (Z2909), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilt action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2951). If it is determined that the value of the tilt action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2951: Yes), it is determined whether the tilt action flag 223de provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2952). If it is determined that it is set to on (Z2952: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the tilt action flag 223de is not set to on (Z2952: No), the operation content corresponding to the tilt action scenario table 222db is read (Z2953). Next, it is determined whether the operation is valid (Z2945). If it is determined that the operation is not valid (Z2954: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the operation is valid (Z2954: Yes), it is determined whether a press is detected (Z2955). If it is determined that no pressing is detected (Z2955), this process ends. If it is determined that a pressing is detected (Z2955: Yes), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to on (Z2956), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2951, if it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No), it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223de is set to on (Z2957). If it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is set to on (Z2957: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the origin detection operation B table 222dd provided in the ROM 222 (Z2958). Next, the value of the tilt operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to off (Z2960), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2957, if it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to on (Z2957: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2961). If the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2961: No), the above-mentioned processing of Z2958 to Z2960 is executed, and this processing ends. If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2861: Yes), the value of the tilt operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 477, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2908, if it is determined that the value of the tilt motion status 223da is not 2 (Z2908: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilt motion status 223da is 3 (Z2910). If it is determined that the value of the tilt motion status 223da is 3 (Z2910: Yes), a performance backtracking motion processing (Z2911) is executed, and this processing ends.

Now, with reference to FIG. 481, we will explain the performance return motion processing (Z2911), which is one process of the tilt device control processing (Z2891: FIG. 477). FIG. 481 is a flowchart showing the contents of the performance return motion processing (Z2911).

In the performance return operation processing (Z2911), first, it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971). If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971: Yes), the value of the tilt operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2971 that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2971: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2973). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2973: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation B table 222dd is read (Z2974), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2973 that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2973: No), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 4 (Z2975). Next, the detection fluctuation counter 223dc in RAM 223 is set to 3 (Z2976), the detection check counter 223dd is set to 4 (Z2977), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 477, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2910, if it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is not 3 (Z2910: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting motion status 223da is 4 (Z2912). If it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is 4 (Z2912: Yes), a retry operation process (Z2913) is executed and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2912, if it is determined that the value of the tilting motion status 223da is not 4 (Z2912), this process ends as it is.

Referring to FIG. 482, we will explain the retry operation process (Z2913), which is one process of the tilt device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477). FIG. 482 is a flowchart showing the contents of the retry operation process (Z2913).

In the retry operation process (Z2913), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start fluctuation (Z2981). If it is determined that it is the timing to start fluctuation (Z2981: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2982). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2982: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2982: Yes), the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2984). If it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is greater than 0 (Z2984: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the detection variation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222dc provided in the ROM 222 (Z2985), and the value of the detection check counter 223dd is decremented by 1 (Z2986). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2987). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2987: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2987, the value of the detection check counter 223dd is set to 3, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2981, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start fluctuation (Z2981: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989). If it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2989: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2990). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2990: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation A table 222dc is read (Z2991), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in Z2990 that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2990: No), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2992). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2992: Yes), this process ends. If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: No), a tilt error B command is set as the display error command (Z2993). Next, the value of the tilt operation status 223da is set to 5 (Z2994), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2989 that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989: Yes), the value of the tilt operation status 223da is cleared (Z2995), and this process ends.

In the operation based on the tilting operation scenario A table in this control example, if the player presses or holds down the tilting device 320 at the start of the operation, even if the unlocking operation is performed, the tilting device 320 will be locked by the rotating claw member 347 immediately, causing a problem that it will not rise. To deal with this, the number of movable steps can be set to 10 (forward rotation; required time 100 ms) as the operation data for the operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 470(a)), which is the unlocking operation, so that the unlocking operation is maintained in the position shown in FIG. 168, and by configuring it so that no tilting operation is performed, the tilting device 320 can be configured to rise when the hand is released.

As another method, when tilt operation status A is being executed or when an unlocking operation is being executed, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the detection switch 324 or a touch sensor is placed on the top surface of the tilting device 320 to determine whether the touch sensor is on, and if it is on (pressed), the unlocking operation is not performed and the device waits until it is turned off, at which point the unlocking operation is executed. Also, when it is determined that the tilting device 320 is pressed or touched by the player, a notification may be issued by a display or sound to notify the player to release the hand from the tilting device 320 (to release the player's obstruction of the upward movement).

<Sixth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 483 to Fig. 507, the sixth control example in the present pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the first control example, when the jackpot A, in which the probability of winning or losing is set to a low probability (electric support is given up to 100 times) after the jackpot game is played, is displayed as a set of even numbers to notify that it is a jackpot A, but in the present 23rd embodiment, when the jackpot A is played, if a reserved ball that will be a jackpot is stored in the reserved balls, the stopped pattern of the jackpot A that is played first and the performance during the jackpot are displayed as if they were jackpot B1 or jackpot B2, and the performance is performed as if a high probability game state (probability game state) is set even after the jackpot game, which is different from the first control example. In the sixth control example, even if the third symbol of the even-numbered symbols indicating the jackpot A is displayed, multiple promotion effects are set to notify the player that the jackpot type is actually a jackpot type that sets the jackpot B1 or B2 probability variable game state during the jackpot game, and the type of promotion effect is determined by lottery at the start of the jackpot game, and the type of promotion effect to be executed thereafter is switched and set depending on the execution content of the promotion effect (for example, whether or not there is a promotion, etc.), which is different from the first control example. Note that detailed explanations of the same points as the first control example will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 483, an example of the display mode of the special symbol of the hit/miss judgment result that becomes the jackpot A in this control example will be described. FIG. 483(a) is an example showing a case where the pre-read result (pre-judgment result) of the reserved symbol h1 stored as the first reserved ball is the jackpot A, and the pre-read result of the reserved symbol h2 of the reserved ball displayed in the third ball is also the jackpot A. In this case, when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h1 is executed, it is usually displayed as a set of even symbols, but at the start of the variation, it is switched to display a set of odd symbols so that they are stopped. That is, the same stop symbol as when the variation of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot B1 is executed is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 483(b), a notification is executed as if it is a jackpot with a probability variable game state set, suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed in a short period of time, such as "Super jackpot! Look forward to the next one!," and an announcement is executed as if it is a jackpot with a probability variable game state set. In this way, the reserved ball that will actually result in jackpot A is stored even when jackpot A is executed, and by executing an effect that makes it appear as if jackpot B1 has been executed even when jackpot A is executed, the player feels that the probability of jackpot B1 being executed is higher than the design value, which increases the interest of the game.

Referring to FIG. 484(a), the presentation mode when the special symbol variation is executed in the time-saving game state (low-probability electric support game state) after the jackpot game in the example shown in FIG. 483 will be described. FIG. 484(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed in a state where the reserved ball that will be the jackpot A is stored (reserved symbol h2).

As shown in FIG. 484(a), even though the time-saving game state is in effect, the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 displays the words "Super Time in progress", which are displayed when the game is in a sure-win state, and further displays the words "Expectation of big win increased", suggesting that the probability of winning or losing is not actually set high, but that the expectation is high. This is configured to prevent malfunctions that significantly damage the player's trust by providing the player with false notifications that are different from reality. In this way, notifications that roughly approximate the sure-win state can also be referred to as pseudo notification modes.

Figure 484 (b) is an example showing the display mode of the special symbol corresponding to reserved symbol h2 reserved in Figure 484 (a). Reserved symbol h2 is the result of judging whether or not a jackpot A has been won, and since there are no reserved balls that will result in a jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, or jackpot C) stored among the reserved balls, a notification is made that a jackpot A has been won by displaying a set of even-numbered symbols as in normal times.

Figure 485 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game of jackpot A in the example shown in Figure 484 (b) is executed. As a display mode indicating the time-saving game state, as shown in Figure 485 (a), the word "Chance (100 times)" is displayed to notify that time-saving game is set until the special symbol changes 100 times and stops. In addition, each time the special symbol changes once, the number (number of times) is subtracted by one and displayed.

Figure 485 (b) shows a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a jackpot game is executed in jackpot B1 or jackpot B2. The words "Super Time (Probability Change)" are displayed as a display mode suggesting that a probability change game state has been set, and the player is notified that the game state is a probability change game state.

In this embodiment, the display mode is only partially different between when a time-saving game state is set with a reserved ball that will be a jackpot stored and when a special probability game state is set, but this is not limited to the above, and the same text (for example, only during Super Time) may be displayed. Alternatively, the game state may be notified by background color without displaying text, and similar colors (for example, a red background color (special probability game state), a pink background color (time-saving game state when a reserved ball that will be a jackpot is stored)) may be displayed for the special probability game state and when a time-saving game state is set with a reserved ball that will be a jackpot stored. This configuration makes the player believe that the time-saving game state is a special probability game state.

Next, referring to Fig. 486 and Fig. 487, a description will be given of the promotion effect executed during a jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in this control example. Fig. 486(a) is an example of the display mode of the opening effect executed when a jackpot game starts. When a jackpot game starts, the words "Jackpot!! Start!!" are displayed until the specific winning port 65a is opened, to notify the player that the jackpot game has started.

Figure 486 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the over-winning promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. The over-winning promotion effect is an effect in which the end condition of one round is 10 balls entering the specific winning port 65a in one round, and based on the entry of 10 game balls into the specific winning port 65a, a promotion effect is executed in which information regarding the type of jackpot is announced based on further game balls entering the specific winning port 65a during the period until the opening and closing door 65b is changed to the closed state.

In the over-winning promotion effect, the third symbol display device 81 displays the words "Put the ball in the attacker and get the key!!", suggesting that the key symbol will be displayed (awarded to the player) by putting a game ball into the specific winning port 65a (corresponding to the attacker). Furthermore, the words "When you collect 11 keys, it's a treasure chest chance!!" are displayed to inform the player that when 11 keys are collected, the promotion effect (over-winning promotion effect) indicated by "treasure chest chance!!" will be executed. Since the device is configured so that one key is displayed for each winning in the specific winning port 65a, when 11 keys are displayed, one over-winning has occurred. Therefore, when an over-winning occurs, "treasure chest chance!!" is executed. Here, when the "Treasure Chest Chance!!" is displayed as an open treasure chest with treasure inside, it notifies the player that the type of jackpot game being played is jackpot B2 or jackpot A in a state in which a reserved ball that will result in a jackpot as described above is stored (the player has been promoted). Also, if treasure is not displayed in the treasure chest, the type of jackpot game being played is not notified. If a reserved ball that will result in a jackpot is not stored and the type of jackpot game being played is jackpot A, no presentation is executed to notify the player of the promotion. However, it may be configured so that a display mode (presentation in which treasure is displayed in the treasure chest) is displayed to notify the player of the promotion based on the reserved ball that will result in a jackpot being stored during the jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 487, an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the promotion during round performance, which is one of the promotion performances, will be described. In FIG. 487(a), when the promotion during round performance is selected, a comment "Promotion chance! If you press the button and a school of fish appears, you're lucky!" is displayed during the round play at a specific round (the fifth round in this control example), suggesting (informing) that the promotion during round performance will be executed and that information regarding the jackpot game type will be notified by pressing the frame button 22. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 487(b), if the type of jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2 or jackpot A in a state in which the reserved ball that will be the jackpot is stored as described above, a display mode in which a school of fish swims from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and it is notified that a high probability game state of "probable change GET!!" will be set after the jackpot game. In addition, in the case of jackpot A when the reserved ball that will result in the jackpot described above is stored, the words "GET jackpot!!" are displayed to inform the player that a jackpot state has been set.

Next, referring to FIG. 488, an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in an ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. FIG. 487(a) is an example of a display mode in a normal ending effect that indicates the end of a jackpot game that is executed after the end of a jackpot game (after the end of a 16-round jackpot round (when the closing condition of the specific winning port 65a in the 16th round (10 balls winning or 30 seconds have passed) is met)).

On the other hand, FIG. 488(b) is an example of a display mode in an ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. When an ending promotion effect is selected, during the period in which an ending effect indicating the end of a jackpot game is being executed after the end of a jackpot game (after the end of the 16th jackpot round (the closing condition of the specific winning port 65a in the 16th round (10 balls winning or 30 seconds have passed) is met)), the words "LUCY!! Super Chance Time!!" are displayed, and a special display mode (a display mode different from normal) in which a school of fish (fish school) swims from the left to the right of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed, and a display mode is displayed suggesting that a time-saving game state will be set after the jackpot game, or a guaranteed game state in which the reserved balls that will result in the jackpot described above are stored is displayed.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to Figures 489 to 490, the control processing by main control unit 110 in this sixth control example will be described.

Referring to FIG. 489(a), the ROM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. This sixth control example differs from the first control example in that a promotion lottery table 222df has been added to the first control example. The rest of the configuration is the same as the first control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the promotion lottery table 222df will be described with reference to FIG. 489(b). FIG. 489(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this promotion lottery table 222df. The promotion lottery table 222df is a lottery table for determining whether or not to notify the player of promotion as an over-winning promotion effect based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired based on the occurrence of an over-winning into a specific winning port 65a during a round. Specifically, when the type of jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2 or the pseudo-probability-change flag 223dm indicating that the execution of a jackpot A is suggested to the player as if a jackpot B2 had been executed is on, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 59", a promotion effect indicating promotion (in this control example, an effect in which treasure is displayed in a treasure chest) is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 490, the contents of the RAM of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 490 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that a winning fluctuation flag 223dg, a stopped pattern replacement flag 223dh, a big win counter 223di, a promoted flag 223dj, a promotion performance type storage area 223dk, and a pseudo-probability change flag 223dm have been added. Detailed explanations of the same configuration as the first control example will be omitted.

The winning change flag 223dg is a flag for determining whether the change of the special symbol that will result in a jackpot A is being executed in a state in which no reserved balls that will result in a jackpot are stored. When this winning change flag 223dg is on, if it is a period in which the display of the special symbol change can be replaced when a new reserved ball that will result in a jackpot is stored by a winning command, a process for switching to a repeating odd number symbol is executed. This makes it possible to make the player believe that even if the change of the special symbol that will result in a jackpot A is a jackpot B1.

The stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is a flag that indicates that the stop symbols should be switched to odd-numbered patterns when the special symbol that will be the jackpot A starts to change and a reserved ball that will be the jackpot is already stored, by winning a replacement lottery that is executed with a predetermined probability. When the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is on, the stop symbols are switched to odd-numbered patterns and set when the special symbol starts to change.

The big win counter 223dj is a counter for counting the number of winning balls that are won in a specific winning slot 65a during one round of big win play.

The promoted flag 223dj is a flag that indicates that a promoted effect (an effect in which treasure is displayed from a treasure chest) has been executed in the over-winning promotion effect executed during a jackpot game. This flag can prevent a malfunction in which a promoted effect is executed again after a promoted effect has been executed.

The promotion effect type memory area 223dk is a memory area in which the type of promotion effect to be executed during a jackpot game is determined when the jackpot game is executed, and the type data of the determined promotion effect is stored.

The pseudo probability change flag 223dm is a flag that indicates that the player has lost the replacement lottery that controls the special symbols to stop and display odd numbers when the special symbols that will result in a jackpot A begin to change and the reserved balls that will result in a jackpot are already stored. During a jackpot game, a promotion effect is executed, and an effect is executed that makes it seem as if the time-saving game state that is set after the jackpot game is set to a probability change game state (see FIG. 484(a)).

<Regarding control process by the main control device in the sixth control example>
With reference to Fig. 491, the control process by the main control device in this sixth control example will be described. In this sixth control example, the difference from the first control example is that the big win control process (Z1004: Fig. 393) is changed to the big win control process 2 (Z1004: Fig. 491). The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations are omitted.

With reference to FIG. 491, the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 491) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this sixth control example will be described. The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004) in this sixth control example differs from the jackpot control process (Z1006: FIG. 393) in the first control example in that Z1120 and Z1121 processes are added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions are omitted.

In the process of Z1110, if it is not the end of the jackpot (Z1110: No), it is determined whether a ball has entered the jackpot opening (Z1120). If a ball has entered (Z1120: Yes), a ball entry command is set (Z1121) and this process ends. Note that, if the process of Z1120 determines that no ball has entered (Z1120: No), this process ends as is. This ball entry command also allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the number of game balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a during the round, and also makes it possible to determine whether an over-winning has occurred.

<Regarding control process by the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example>
With reference to Fig. 491 to Fig. 503, the control processing by the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described. In this sixth control example, in comparison with the first control example, the command judgment processing (Z2113: Fig. 396) is changed to command judgment processing 3 (Z2113: Fig. 493), the fluctuation pattern receiving processing (Z2202: Fig. 397) is changed to fluctuation pattern receiving processing 2 (Z2240: Fig. 492), the winning command receiving processing (Z2209: Fig. 403) is changed to winning command receiving processing 2 (Z2270: Fig. 495), the fluctuation display setting processing (Z2114: Fig. 406) is changed to fluctuation display setting processing 2 (Z2114: Fig. 502), the frame button input monitoring and performance processing The difference is that the process (Z2107: FIG. 409) has been changed to the frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 (Z2107: FIG. 503), and that the stop pattern switching process (Z2450: FIG. 494), the stop pattern change process (Z2460: FIG. 496), the big win related command receiving process (Z2280: FIG. 496), the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 497), the big win ball entry process (Z2284: FIG. 499), the round process (Z2286: FIG. 500), and the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 501) have been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 492, command determination process 3 (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described. FIG. 491 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 3 (Z2113). Command determination process 3 (Z2113) in this sixth control example differs from command determination process (Z2113) in the first control example in that Z2279 and Z2280 have been added and that Z2240 and Z2270 have been modified.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2208 that a special symbol winning command has not been received from the main control unit 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control unit 110 (Z2279). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 497. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2279 that a jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: No), a process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

Referring to FIG. 492, we will explain the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 492), which is one process within the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 491) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240). The variation pattern reception process 2 in this sixth control example differs from the variation pattern reception process in the first control example in that the processes Z2430, Z2431, and Z2450 have been added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

After executing the processing of Z2226, it is determined whether there is a change in the game state (Z2430). Here, the game state is configured to be attached to a variable pattern command and output from the main control device 110. As the game state, a low-probability game state without electric support (normal game state), a sure-change game state (with electric support), or a time-saving game state (with low-probability electric support) is set. If it is determined that there is a change in the game state (Z2430: Yes), the corresponding game state is set in the background mode memory area 223i, a display state command is set (Z2431), and the processing of Z2227 is executed. On the other hand, if there is no change in the game state in the processing of Z2430 (Z2430: No), the above-mentioned processing of Z2431 is not executed, and the process proceeds directly to the processing of Z2227.

With reference to FIG. 494, the stopped symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 494), which is one process in the variable pattern receiving process 2 (FIG. 493) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example, will be described. FIG. 494 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stopped symbol switching process (Z2450).

In the stopped symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 494), first, it is determined whether the current change is a change to a jackpot A (Z2451). If it is determined that the current change is not a change to a jackpot A (Z2451: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current change is a change to a jackpot A (Z2451: Yes), it is determined whether there are other wins in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452). If it is determined that there are other wins (Z2452: Yes), the value of the performance counter 223h is obtained and a replacement lottery is executed (Z2453).

After executing the processing of Z2453, it is determined whether the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454). If it is determined that the replacement lottery has not been won (Z2454: No), the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm provided in RAM 223 is set to on (Z2455), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454: Yes), the stop pattern switching flag is set to on (Z2456), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2452 that there are no other wins in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452: No), the win change flag 223dg is set to on (Z2457), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, if a reserved ball that will result in a jackpot is stored at the time when the variation of the special symbol that will result in jackpot A is started, a lottery (determination) is made as to whether to replace the stopped symbol, and if it is determined that the symbol will be replaced, the stopped symbol replacement flag 223dh, which indicates that the symbol will be replaced, is set to ON. On the other hand, if the replacement lottery is unsuccessful, the ball is displayed as an even number, a jackpot game is started, and a promotion effect is performed during the jackpot game, or a special notification is made after the jackpot game as if the player is in a special probability game state.

With reference to FIG. 495, the winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 495) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described. The winning command reception process 2 (Z2270) in this sixth control example differs from the winning command reception process (Z2209: FIG. 403) in the first control example in that a stopped symbol change process (Z2460) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 496, we will explain the stopped symbol change process (Z2470), which is one process within the winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 494) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. FIG. 496 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stopped symbol change process (Z2470).

In the stop pattern change process (Z2460: FIG. 496), first, it is determined whether the winning fluctuation flag 223dg provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (Z2461). If it is determined that the winning fluctuation flag 223dg is not on (i.e., it is off) (Z2461: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning fluctuation flag 223dg is set to on (Z2461: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a jackpot (Z2462). If it is determined that the received winning information command is not a jackpot (Z2642: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received winning information command is a jackpot (Z2462: Yes), the pseudo-certainty change flag 223dm is set to on (Z2463). After executing the process of Z2463, it is determined whether it is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464). If it is determined that the period is fast changing (Z2464: Yes), a display pattern replacement command is set (Z2465) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is not fast changing in the process of Z2464 (Z2464: No), the process of Z2465 is not executed and this process is terminated.

In this way, even if there are no reserved balls that will result in a jackpot stored when the special symbol that will result in jackpot A starts to change, if a new reserved ball that will result in a jackpot is stored during the subsequent change (during that change), the stopped symbols will be replaced (with matching odd symbols) if it is during the high-speed change period of the special symbols. In this way, because it is limited to the high-speed change period, the replacement can be performed without any sense of incongruity.

Even if the high-speed fluctuation period has ended, the stopping symbols may be changed by performing an effect such as sliding.

With reference to FIG. 497, we will explain the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497), which is one process within the command determination process 3 (Z2113: FIG. 493) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280).

In the jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280: FIG. 497), it is first determined whether an opening command has been received (Z2281). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (Z2281: Yes), the opening process (Z2282) is executed and this process is terminated. Details of the opening process (Z2282) will be described later with reference to FIG. 497.

Now, referring to FIG. 498, we will explain the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 498), which is one process within the jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. FIG. 498 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process (Z2282).

In the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 498), first, the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained (Z2291). Next, based on the value of the effect counter 223h obtained in the process of Z2291, a promotion effect type is selected from the promotion lottery table 222df provided in the ROM 222 (Z2292). Next, an opening effect corresponding to the promotion effect type selected in the process of Z2292 is set by lottery (Z2293). Next, an opening command for display corresponding to the opening effect set in the process of Z2293 is set (Z2294), and the process proceeds to Z2295.

After executing the processing of Z2294, it is determined whether the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set to on (Z2295). If it is determined that the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set to on (Z2295: Yes), it is determined whether there is a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296). If it is determined that there is a jackpot (Z2296: Yes), the game status is set to jackpot (Z2297), a display status command is set (Z2300), and this processing is terminated. If it is determined that Z2295 is off in the processing of Z2295 (Z2295: No), the processing of Z2296 is skipped and processing proceeds to Z2297. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2296, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296: No), the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set to OFF (Z2298), the game state is set to during jackpot play in which the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is OFF (Z2299), the processing of Z2300 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 497, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2281, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (Z2281: No), it is determined whether a ball-entering command has been received (Z2283). If it is determined that a ball-entering command has been received (Z2283: Yes), the big prize ball-entering processing (Z2284) is executed, and this processing ends.

Now, referring to FIG. 499, we will explain the big prize ball entry process (Z2284), which is one process within the big prize related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. FIG. 499 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big prize ball entry process (Z2284).

In the big prize winning ball processing (Z2284: FIG. 499), first, the value of the big prize winning counter 223di provided in the RAM 223 is incremented by 1 (Z2311). Next, it is determined whether the promotion performance type is an over prize winning (Z2312). If it is determined that the promotion performance type is not an over prize winning (Z2312: No), a big prize winning command for display indicating the value of the big prize winning counter 223di is set (Z2313), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion performance type is an over prize winning (Z2312: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the big prize winning counter 223di is greater than 10 (Z2314). If it is determined that the value of the big prize winning counter 223di is less than 10 (Z2314: No), a big prize winning command for display indicating the value of the big prize winning counter 223di corresponding to the over prize winning performance is set (Z2315), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the big prize counter 223di is greater than 10 (Z2314: Yes), the value of the performance counter 223h is obtained, and a promotion lottery is executed from the promotion lottery table 222df based on the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm or the type of big win (Z2316).

After executing the process of Z2316, it is determined whether the promotion effect has been won (Z2317). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z2317: Yes), a large prize command for display indicating the value of the large prize counter 223di and the win of the promotion effect is set (Z2318), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z2317: No), a large prize command for display indicating the value of the large prize counter 223di and the miss with the promotion effect is set (Z2319), and this process is terminated.

Returning to Figure 497, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2283, if it is determined that a ball entry command has not been received (Z2283: No), it is then determined whether a round count command has been received (Z2285). If it is determined that a round count command has been received (Z2285: Yes), round processing (Z2286) is executed.

Now, referring to FIG. 500, we will explain the round process (Z2286), which is one process within the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process (Z2286).

In the round process (Z2286: Diagram 500), first, it is determined whether the promotion performance type is over-winning (Z2331). If it is determined that the promotion performance type is not over-winning (Z2331: No), it is determined whether the promotion performance type is ending (Z2332). If it is determined that the promotion performance type is not ending (Z2332: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333). If it is determined that the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333: Yes), a display round command corresponding to the jackpot type or pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set (Z2334), a value corresponding to the SW effective time counter 223k corresponding to the round performance is set (Z2335), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the processing of Z2331 determines that the promotion performance type is over winning (Z2331: Yes), or if the processing of Z2332 determines that the promotion performance type is ending (Z2332: Yes), or if the processing of Z2333 determines that the number of rounds is not 12R (Z2333: No), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (Z2336), and this processing is terminated.

Returning to Figure 497, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of Z2285 that the number of rounds command has not been received (Z2285: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (Z2287). If an ending command has been received (Z2288: Yes), ending processing (Z2288) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the ending processing (Z2288) will be described later with reference to Figure 501. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2287 that the ending command has not been received (Z2287: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2289), and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 501, we will explain the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 501), which is one process within the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2288).

In the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 501), first, it is determined whether the type of the promotion performance is an ending (Z2371). If it is determined that the promotion performance type is not an ending (Z2371: No), it is determined whether the promoted flag 223dj provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (Z2372). If it is determined that the promoted flag 223dj is set to off (Z2372: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot B2 (Z2373). If the current jackpot type is jackpot B2 (Z2373: Yes), a display ending command indicating promotion is set (Z2375). On the other hand, in the process of Z2373, if it is determined that the jackpot type is other than jackpot B2 (Z2373: No), it is determined whether the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set to on (Z2374). If the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set to off (Z2374: No), a display ending command corresponding to the current jackpot type is set (Z2376). If it is determined in the processing of Z2372 that the promoted flag 223dj is set to on (Z2372: Yes), the above-mentioned processing of Z2376 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2374 that the pseudo-high probability flag 223dm is set to on (Z2374: Yes), the above-mentioned processing of Z2375 is executed. After executing the processing of Z2375 or the processing of Z2376, the game state is set to the end of the jackpot (Z2377), a display state command is set (Z2378), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in this control example, the type of promotion effect is determined at the timing of execution of the jackpot game. Then, when the over-winning promotion effect is determined, a determination is made during the jackpot game as to whether the promotion content has been notified by the over-winning promotion effect, and if not, a process is executed to switch to an ending promotion effect or a promotion effect during a round.

As a result, even if an over-winning promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect can be executed by switching to a different promotion effect even if the frequency of balls entering the specific winning port 65a is low.

Referring to FIG. 502, the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described. FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114). The variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) in this sixth control example differs from the variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 406) in the first control example in that the processes Z2508 and Z2509 are not executed, and processes Z2511 to Z2515 are added. The other processes are the same, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processing of Z2507, it is determined whether the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to on (Z2511). If it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to off (Z2511: No), the extracted stop type is set as is (Z2512), a stop type command for display is set (Z2513), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2511 that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to on (Z2511: Yes), a stop type in which the odd jackpot symbol is the stop pattern is set (Z2514). Next, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to off (Z2515), the processing of Z2513 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 503, frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 (Z2107: FIG. 503) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be described. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 (Z2107). Frame button input monitoring and performance process 4 (Z2107) in this sixth control example differs from frame button input monitoring and performance process (Z2107: FIG. 409) in the first control example in that processes Z2808 to Z2810 are not executed, and processes Z2830, Z2831, and Z2840 are added. The other processes are the same, so detailed explanations are omitted.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2807 that the frame button has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect is being set (Z2830). If it is determined that the effect is being set (Z2830: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the set effect is set (Z2831), and sensor input processing is executed (Z2813). After executing the sensor input processing, other SW processing is executed (Z2840), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2830 that the effect is not being set (Z2830: No), the above-mentioned Z2803 to 2804 are executed, and sensor input processing (Z2813) and other SW processing (Z2840) are executed, and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding control process by the display control device in the sixth control example>
Next, the control process by the display control device 114 in this sixth control example will be described with reference to Figs. 504 to 507. This sixth control example differs from the first control example in that the command judgment process (Z3302: Fig. 414) has been changed to command judgment process 2 (Z3302: Fig. 504). The other processes are the same, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Command determination process 2 (Z3302: Fig. 504) will be described with reference to Fig. 504. Fig. 504 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 2 (Z3302). Command determination process 2 (Z3302) in this sixth control example differs from command determination process (Z3302: Fig. 414) in the first control example in that processes Z3430 to Z3435 have been added. The other processes are the same, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the processing of Z3408 that there is no display preview command (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a display pattern replacement command (Z3430). If it is determined that there is a display pattern replacement command (Z3430: Yes), the pattern replacement setting process (Z3431) is executed.

Here, the design replacement setting process (Z3431) will be described with reference to FIG. 505(a). FIG. 505(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the design replacement setting process (Z3431).

In the pattern replacement setting process (Z3431), first, the odd jackpot pattern is replaced and set in the stop type table (Z3441). Next, the stop type table is compared with the stop pattern counter to set the stop pattern (Z3442). Next, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the set stop pattern is set to on (Z3443), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 504, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z3430, if it is determined that there is no display pattern replacement command (Z3430: No), it is determined whether there is a display status command (Z3432). If it is determined that there is a display status command (Z3432: Yes), the game status setting process (Z3433) is executed.

Here, the game status setting process (Z3433) will be explained with reference to FIG. 505(b). FIG. 505(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the game status setting process (Z3433).

In the game state setting process (Z3433), first, the game state indicated by the command is set in the background mode memory area 223i (Z3451). Next, in the process of Z3451, the background color corresponding to the game state set in the background mode memory area 223i is set in the display data table (Z3452), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 504, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z3432, if it is determined that there is no display status command (Z3432: No), it is determined whether there is a jackpot-related command to display (Z3434). If it is determined that there is a jackpot-related command to display (Z3434: Yes), jackpot-related display processing (Z3435) is executed.

Now, referring to FIG. 506, we will explain the jackpot related display process (Z3435). FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related display process (Z3435).

In the big win related display process (Z3435), it is first determined whether an opening command for display has been received (Z3461). If it is determined that an opening command for display has been received (Z3461: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the opening corresponding to the command is set (Z3462), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a big win command for display has not been received (Z3461: No), it is determined whether a big win command for display has been received (Z3463). If it is determined that a big win command for display has been received (Z3463: Yes), the big win process (Z3464) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of the big win process (Z3464) will be described later with reference to FIG. 506.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3463 that the big prize command for display has not been received (Z3463: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (Z3465). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (Z3465: Yes), a display data table for round display corresponding to the round number of the command is set, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received in the processing of Z3465 (Z3465: No), it is determined whether a promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467). If it is determined that a promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467: Yes), a display data table for the promotion round performance of the type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3468), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3467 that a promotion round command for display has not been received (Z3467: No), it is determined whether an ending command for display has been received (Z3469). If it is determined that an ending command for display has been received (Z3469: Yes), a display data table for the ending type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3470), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3469 that an ending command for display has not been received (Z3469: No), processing corresponding to other commands is executed (Z3471), and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 507, we will explain the big prize processing (Z3464: FIG. 507), which is one process within the big prize related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 506). FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big prize processing (Z3464).

In the big prize processing (Z3464), first, in the processing of Z3463 of the big win related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 506), it is determined whether the received big prize command for display has won the promotion effect (Z3480). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z3480: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the number of wins and the winning effect indicated by the received command is set (Z3481), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z3480: No), it is determined whether the received command is a miss for the promotion effect (Z3482). If it is determined that the received command is a miss for the promotion effect (Z3482: Yes), a display data table for over win corresponding to the number of wins and the missing effect indicated by the command is set (Z3483), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3482, if it is determined that the received command is not a promotion miss (Z3482: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command corresponding to the over prize presentation (Z3484). If it is determined that the received command is a command corresponding to the over prize presentation (Z3484: Yes), a display data table for over prize presentation corresponding to the number of prizes indicated by the command is set (Z3485), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z3484, if it is determined that the received command is not a command corresponding to the over prize presentation (Z3484: No), it is determined whether the number of prizes indicated by the number of received commands is greater than 10 (Z3486: No). If it is determined that the number of prizes is greater than 10 (Z3486: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the normal over prize presentation is set (Z3487), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z3486, if it is determined that the number of prizes indicated by the number of received commands is less than 10 (Z3486), this process is terminated as it is.

<Seventh control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 508 to Fig. 516, a seventh control example in the present pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the first control example, in addition to the distribution device 700 which alternately causes balls to enter the winning hole which is the trigger of the lottery (variation) based on the first special symbol and the winning hole which is the trigger of the lottery (variation) based on the second special symbol which is more likely to result in a lottery result favorable to the player than the first special symbol, the electric role 640a is opened for a long period (2 seconds) when the long-time hit is won as a result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol normal symbol, so that the ball is easily allowed to enter the second winning hole 640. And, when the long-time hit of the normal symbol is won, the effect is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is motivated to play the game of winning the ball into the second winning hole 640 (see Fig. 344).

In the second control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the electric device 640a is controlled so that it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning hole 640, and when the variation of the second special symbol starts during the normal state, a special effect (see FIG. 428(b)) is executed to provide the player with a sense of specialness. Furthermore, in the second control example, the special effect is not executed for a predetermined period (5 variations of the special symbol) after the time-saving state ends, even if the normal state is set as the game state. As a result, in a state where a predetermined number (maximum 4) of reserved balls of the second special symbol are secured (with the reserved balls of the second special symbol secured during the time-saving state remaining), the above-mentioned special effect is not executed in the variation of the second special symbol executed when the time-saving state ends. This makes it possible to maintain the special feeling of the special effect.

In contrast, the seventh control example differs from the first control example in that, when a long-time win is won as a result of the lottery for the normal pattern, the normal pattern variable time (dynamic display period) corresponding to the lottery result is used to execute an effect (long-time opening effect) that suggests to the player that the long-time win has been won in the lottery for the normal pattern.

It also differs from the first control example in that it is configured to change the presentation style of the long-time opening presentation depending on the timing of the long-time winning result as a result of the lottery for the normal pattern. Note that detailed explanations of the same points as the above-mentioned control examples will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 508, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 508 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 508, in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example, in comparison with the first control example described above, when playing a game (left-handed game) to make the ball flow down to the left area (left area) of the variable display unit 80, a character resembling a "fish" is decorated (disposed) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 if the member forming the surface of the game board 13 is a highly transparent acrylic resin) as the guide display mode ZR1 that serves as a guide for the position to launch the ball, and is configured so that the player can easily see the guide display mode ZR1.

In addition, when playing a game (right-hand play) in which the ball is made to flow down to the right area (right-side area) of the variable display unit 80, a character resembling a "turtle" is decorated (disposed) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 if the material forming the surface of the game board 13 is a highly transparent acrylic resin) as a guide display mode ZR2 that serves as a guide for the position from which the ball is to be launched, and is configured so that the player can easily see the guide display mode ZR1.

With this configuration, the player can easily understand where on the game board 13 to aim the ball to play right-hand or left-hand. In addition, by decorating the surface of the game board 13 with characters (fish, turtles) to guide the player to right-hand or left-hand play, when a performance (guidance performance) is performed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 to guide the player to the play direction (right-hand or left-hand play), a performance that is easy for the player to visually understand can be performed.

In addition, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example is different from the first control example described above in that, when playing left-handed, the regulating nails ZK1 are planted so that the rate at which the ball flows down the area where the ball can win the second winning hole 640 (the area where the ball wins the second winning hole 640 if the electric device 640a is in the opening operation) is low. On the other hand, when playing right-handed, the nails are planted so that the rate at which the ball passes through the opening 710 of the sorting device 700 is low. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a left-handed game (first game) in which the player aims at the sorting device 700 and changes (draws) the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and a right-handed game (second game) in which the player aims at the second winning hole 640 and changes (draws) only the second special symbol.

As with the first control example described above, when the normal state is set as the game state, the electric device 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is difficult to open, so the player will inevitably play with a left hand, and when the time-saving state is set, the electric device 640a is in a state where it is easy to open, so the player will inevitably play with a right hand. In addition, for example, even if the time-saving state is set as the game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern has reached the upper limit (4 balls), even if further right-hand play is performed, the reserved special pattern (the right to draw (change) the special pattern) cannot be acquired, so it is also possible to play with a left hand and acquire reserved balls of the first special pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 509(a), the presentation mode displayed during normal pattern variation when a long-time hit of a normal pattern is won in this seventh control example will be explained. FIG. 509(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode (long opening presentation) of the third pattern display device 81 during normal pattern variation when a long-time hit is won. Note that the same elements as those in the first control example described above are given the same symbols, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 509(a), the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays the words "Will open soon" as a long-time hit on a normal symbol (long-open effect), and displays an opening target mode Za2 that resembles the electric device 640a that is about to open, and a guide display mode Za1 that resembles a "turtle" that indicates the playing direction to the player. This allows the player to visually and easily understand that the electric device 640a will open and that right-hand play should be performed.

Also, when the long opening effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. In the seventh control example, when the long opening effect is executed, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. However, instead of this configuration, for example, a discrimination means for discriminating whether the lottery result of the currently executed special symbol variation is a lottery result advantageous to the player (big win, small win, etc.), a priority display discrimination means for discriminating whether to prioritize display of the long opening effect or the third symbol variation effect based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a display control means for controlling the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on the discrimination result of the priority display discrimination means may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prioritize display of the effect display to show the game result advantageous to the player, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

In the above example, the effect that is determined to be given priority for display (priority effect) is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the effect that is determined not to be given priority for display (non-priority effect) is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. However, it is also possible to prepare multiple reduced display areas with different areas, and to vary the size of the area displaying the non-priority effect depending on the game result indicated by the effect determined to be a non-priority effect. It is also possible to configure the effect display determined to be a non-priority effect not to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was shown in which the display area of each effect (variable effect, long opening effect) is changed based on the lottery results of the special pattern being changed and the lottery results of the normal pattern being changed. In addition, for example, a reserved ball number discrimination means may be provided to determine whether the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is a predetermined number (e.g., 3 balls) or more, and the display area of the long opening effect may be changed based on the discrimination result of the reserved ball number discrimination means.

Next, referring to FIG. 509(b), the presentation mode during a long-time hit game (long opening) of a normal pattern will be explained. FIG. 509(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode (long opening presentation) of the third pattern display device 81 during a long-time hit. Note that the same elements as those in the first control example described above are given the same symbols, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Fig. 509(b), the word "OPEN" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the long opening is currently in progress, and the opening target mode Za2, which imitates the electric role 640a in the opening operation, is displayed in a display mode indicating the open state. Also, as in Fig. 509(a), a guide display mode Za1 imitating a "turtle" is displayed, indicating the playing direction to be instructed to the player, and the third pattern is displayed in the reduced display area Za3.

Next, referring to FIG. 510, the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when the long opening effect is restricted will be described. FIG. 510 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 during a long-time win, when the long opening effect is restricted. Note that the same elements as those in the first control example described above are given the same symbols, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Here, in this seventh control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the long opening effect described above with reference to FIG. 509(a) is executed, and when it becomes easier for a ball to enter the second winning port 640 in the normal state (a state in which it is difficult to get a ball to enter the second winning port 640) (when a long-time hit with a normal pattern is won), the player is reliably notified of a state advantageous to the player (a state in which it becomes easier to make a variation (draw) of the second special pattern which is more likely to result in a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern).

When configured in this way, the above-mentioned long opening effect will be executed even if a long-time hit with a normal pattern is won in the normal state immediately after the time-saving state ends, for example, when the number of reserved balls with the second special pattern has reached the upper limit (four balls). In this way, when the number of reserved balls with the second special pattern is at the upper limit, even if the electric device 640a performs a long opening and multiple balls enter the second ball entrance 640, no new reserved balls can be obtained, and the special feeling of the long opening effect cannot be provided to the player.

Therefore, in this seventh control example, during the specified period after the time-saving state ends (the period until the special symbol changes five times), even if a long-time hit with a normal symbol is won, the above-mentioned long opening effect is not executed (the effect during the long opening effect restriction is executed). This can increase the player's anticipation for the execution of the long opening effect.

As shown in FIG. 510, when the long opening effect is restricted, the long opening effect shown in FIG. 509(a) is not executed, and the third pattern variation effect is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. Then, a guide display mode Za1 imitating a "fish" indicating right-hand play is displayed as the play direction to instruct the player. In this way, even if a long-time hit of a normal pattern is won in a state where the normal state is set as the play state, if the timing is within a predetermined period (the period from the end of the time-saving state to the execution of five special pattern variations), the long opening effect is not executed, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the player from being provided with a meaningless long opening effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent excessive drawing (variation) of the second special pattern by acquiring a large number of reserved balls of the second special pattern immediately after the end of the time-saving state in which the variation of the second special pattern is the main.

In this control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is at the upper limit (4 balls), the period during which the long opening effect is restricted (restriction period) is set to the period from the end of the time-saving state until the special pattern changes five times, but it may also be set to a period from the end of the time-saving state until a predetermined time has elapsed, that is, until the time required for the special pattern to change five times in a row. Also, if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern falls below a predetermined number (for example, 2 balls or less) during the above-mentioned restriction period, the above-mentioned restriction period may be cleared and the long opening effect may be executed.

In addition, in this control example, the long opening effect is restricted for a specified period of time after the time-saving feature has ended, but it may be configured to restrict the long opening effect based on other conditions. For example, the long opening effect may be restricted when it is determined that the currently running special pattern change has resulted in a jackpot, that a continuous effect is set to span multiple special pattern changes, or that the reserved ball for the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) contains winning information for a jackpot.

<Electrical configuration in the seventh control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 511, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this seventh control example will be described. This seventh control example differs from the second control example in that a long opening performance flag 223e1 is added. The other configurations are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In addition, since the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in this seventh control example are the same, the various control processes related to the ball output of the pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example are the same as those in the first control example described above. On the other hand, the various control processes related to the presentation in this seventh control example (the control example of the voice lamp control device 113) are the same as those in the second control example except for the points described above. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same parts of the various control processes related to the ball output as in the first control example, and their explanations are omitted, and the same reference numerals are used for the same parts of the various control processes related to the presentation as in the second control example, and their explanations are omitted.

The change count counter 223aj has been described above in the second control example, so a detailed description will be omitted, but it is a counter that is set to a predetermined value (5) when the time-saving state ends, and is decremented by 1 when the third pattern change display is set (when a special pattern change occurs). In this seventh control example, the long opening effect is not executed until the value of this change count counter 223aj becomes 0.

The long opening effect flag 223e1 is a flag to indicate that a long opening effect is being executed, and is set to on to indicate that a long opening effect is being executed. This long opening effect flag 223e1 is set on (see Z2907 in FIG. 514) when a long time win opening command sent from the main control device 110 is received and it is determined that the fluctuation count counter 223aj is not 0 (Z2904: No in FIG. 514), and is set off when a long time win end command for a normal pattern is received (Z2911 in FIG. 514).

<Regarding control process by the main control device in the seventh control example>
Next, the control process by the main control device in this seventh control example will be described. In this seventh control example, the difference between the first control example and the normal pattern variation process (Z106: see FIG. 387) is changed to the normal pattern variation process 2 (Z171: see FIG. 512). As for the other processes, they are the same as the first control example, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 512, we will explain normal pattern change processing 2 (Z171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this seventh control example. Normal pattern change processing 2 (Z171) in this seventh control example differs from the normal pattern change processing (Z106: see FIG. 387) in the first control example in that it adds processing Z451 to Z453. The other processing is the same as in the first control example, so the same symbols are used and detailed descriptions are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 512, when normal symbol change process 2 (Z171) is executed, the same Z401 and Z402 processes as in the first control example are executed, and if it is determined in the Z402 process that the normal symbol is not changing (Z402: No), it is determined whether the long-time release flag 203i is set to on (Z451). This long-time release flag 203i is a flag that is set to on (Z428) when it is determined in the normal symbol change start process (Z408: FIG. 388) that the normal symbol has won a long-time hit (Z426: Yes), as described above in the first control example.

If it is determined in the processing of Z451 that the long-time open flag 203i is set to on (Z451: Yes), the long-time open flag 203i is set to off (Z403), a long-time end command is set (Z452), and processing proceeds to Z404. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z451 that the long-time open flag 203i is not on (off) (Z451: No), the processing of Z403 and Z452 described above is skipped and processing proceeds to Z404. Then, the processing of Z404 to Z409 is executed, which is the same as the first control example described above, and this processing ends.

In other words, as described above, the long-time open flag 203i is a flag that is set to ON from the time when the normal symbol that was won in the long-time win starts to change until the long-time win ends.

If it is determined in the process of Z402 that the normal pattern is currently fluctuating (Z402: Yes), the process of Z410 to Z413 is executed in the same position as the first control example described above, then a command for a long time win is set (Z453), and this process is terminated. The command for a long time win set in Z453 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (Fig. 392) of the main control device 110. The voice lamp control device 113 that receives the command for a long time win creates a display command to indicate to the player that the long time win (long opening) is currently in progress, and transmits it to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 displays a display indicating that a long opening is in progress on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see Fig. 509 (b)).

<Regarding control process by the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example>
The control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in this seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 513 and Fig. 514. This seventh control example differs from the second control example in that the command determination process 2 (Z2152: Fig. 436) is changed to the command determination process 4 (Z2181: Fig. 513) and the long opening performance process (Z2272) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 513, command determination process 4 (Z2181) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this seventh control example will be described. FIG. 513 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 4 (Z2181). Command determination process 4 (Z2181) in this seventh control example differs from command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 436) in the second control example in that processes Z2271 to Z2277 have been added.

When command determination process 4 (Z2181) is executed, first, the same processes Z2201 to Z2209 as command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 436) of the second control example described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of Z2208 that a special symbol winning command has not been received (Z2208: No), it is then determined whether a long-time win-related command has been received (Z2271). If it is determined that a long-time win-related command has been received (Z2208: Yes), the long-time opening effect process described below is executed (Z2272), and this process is terminated. In this long-time opening effect process (Z2272), a process is executed to set the display mode of the effect to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a normal symbol wins a long-time win.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2271 that a long-time hit-related command has not been received (Z2271: No), the processing of Z2273 to Z2277 is executed, which is similar to Z2256 to Z2260 in command determination processing 2 (Z2152: Fig. 436) of the second control example described above, and this processing ends. In other words, in this control example, the main control device 110 is configured to receive a command set based on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern, and when a specified command (a command indicating that a long-time hit has been won in the lottery for the normal pattern) is received, a presentation can be set to notify the player of this fact. Therefore, a presentation that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Next, the contents of the long opening effect processing (Z2272) will be explained with reference to FIG. 514. FIG. 514 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long opening effect processing (Z2272). This long opening effect processing (Z2272) executes processing to set the effect mode of the long opening effect when a long-time hit of a normal pattern is won, and the effect mode is set according to the current game state (normal state, time-saving state, or within a specified period after the end of the time-saving state) and the operation state of the normal pattern (changing, during a winning game).

When the long opening effect process (Z2272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the long-time win-related command received this time is a long-time win opening command (Z2901). This long-time win opening command is a command that is set when a long-time win of a normal pattern is won in the normal pattern change start process (Z408: Fig. 388) of the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of Z2901 that it is a long-time win opening command (Z2901: Yes), then the current game state is extracted from the state storage area 223az (Z2902). Then, it is determined whether the extracted game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state is set) (Z2903), and if it is determined that it is in the time-saving state (Z2903: Yes), this process is terminated as it is not the target period for executing the long opening effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2903 that the time-saving mode is not in effect (the normal mode is in effect) (Z2903: No), then it is determined whether the variation count counter 223aj is greater than 0 (1 or greater) (Z2904). A detailed explanation has been given in the second control example above, so we will only give a brief explanation. This variation count counter 223aj is set to a predetermined number (5) when the final variation for which the time-saving mode is set is stopped and displayed, and its value is subtracted by 1 each time the variation display setting process is executed. This counter is referenced to determine the period from when the time-saving mode ends until the variation of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times).

In the processing of Z2904, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223aj is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2904: No), that is, if it is determined that at least five variations of the special pattern have been performed since the time-saving state ended, then since it is a period in which the long opening effect can be executed while the normal state is set as the gaming state, a display long effect command is set (Z2906), the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to on (Z2907), and this processing is terminated.

The set display long effect command is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: Fig. 395) of the main process (see Fig. 395) of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display long effect command, it displays a display mode indicating a long opening effect on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see Fig. 509 (a)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2904 that the value of the variation counter 223aj is greater than 0 (Z2904: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the special pattern has not varied five times since the time-saving state ended, then since the normal state is set as the game state and it is a period during which the long opening effect cannot be executed, a display left-hit long effect command is set (Z2905) and this processing is terminated.

The set left-hit long display command is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: Fig. 395) of the main process (see Fig. 395) of the sound lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display long display command, it displays a display mode indicating that the long open display restriction is in effect on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see Fig. 510).

If it is determined in the process of Z2901 that the long-time win-related command received this time is not a long-time win opening command (Z2901: No), it is then determined whether a long-time win command has been received (Z2908). This long-time win command is set after the start of the opening and closing control of the electric role is set in the normal pattern change process 2 (Z171: Fig. 512) of the main control unit 110, and is a command that indicates that a long-time win is being played.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2908 that a long time hit command has been received (Z2908: Yes), it is then determined whether the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to on (Z2909), and if it is determined that the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to on (Z2909: Yes), a long opening command for display is set (Z2910) and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2909 that the long opening effect flag 223e1 is not set to on (it is set to off) (Z2909: No), the processing of Z2910 is skipped and this processing is terminated.

Here, the processing of Z2909 will be explained. In this seventh control example, as in the first control example described above, the winning lottery and the operation mode (long release or not) of the electric role device 640a at the time of winning are determined at the timing when the normal pattern starts to change (the timing when the normal pattern change start process is executed), and the long-time winning release command is set at that timing. Then, after the normal pattern change time (minimum 3 seconds, maximum 30 seconds) has elapsed after the long-time winning release command is set, the stop display of the normal pattern (second pattern) is set, and then the operation control of the electric role device 640a is started.

Therefore, there is a time lag of at least 3 seconds and at most 30 seconds between receiving the long-time hit open command and the long-time hit middle command, so there is a risk that when the time-saving state is set or the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is greater than 0, the long-time hit open command will be set and then the long-time hit middle command will be received when the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is 0.

In this seventh control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed in conjunction with the long opening operation of the electric role 640a in such a state, if the long opening effect flag 223e1 is not set to on in the processing when a long winning opening command is received, the display long opening command is not set even if a long winning command is received. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent, for example, the display mode effect based on the display left hit long effect command (see FIG. 510) from suddenly switching to the display mode effect based on the display long opening command (see FIG. 509(b)), which would give the player a sense of discomfort.

Returning to FIG. 514, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2908, if it is determined that the long time hit command has not been received (Z2908: No), it is then determined whether the long time hit end command has been received (Z2911). If it is determined that the long time hit end command has been received (Z2911: Yes), the long opening performance flag 223e1 is set to off (Z1912), the long opening end command for display is set (Z1913), and this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2208 that a special symbol winning command has not been received from the main control unit 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main control unit 110 (Z2279). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 497. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2279 that a jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: No), a process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

<Regarding control process by the display control device in the seventh control example>
Next, the control process by the display control device 114 in this seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 515 and Fig. 516. This seventh control example differs from the sixth control example in that command judgment process 2 (Z3302: Fig. 504) is changed to command judgment process 3 (Z3321: Fig. 515). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination process 3 (Z3321: Fig. 515) will be described with reference to Fig. 515. Fig. 515 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 3 (Z3321). Command determination process 3 (Z3321) in this seventh control example differs from command determination process 2 (Z3302: Fig. 504) in the sixth control example in that it adds processes Z3441 to Z3442. The other processes are the same, so detailed descriptions are omitted.

If it is determined in the processing of Z3408 that there is no preview display command for display (Z3408: No), the processing of Z3441 is executed. If it is determined in the processing of Z3441 that there is no long release related command for display (Z3441: No), it is determined whether there is a status command for display (Z3432). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a long release related command for display (Z3441: Yes), the long release related processing (Z3442) is executed.

In the long opening related processing (Fig. 516, Z3442), first, a display data table for the long opening effect corresponding to the received display long opening effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z6201). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the long opening effect is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z6202).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to on (Z6203), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (Z6204), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z6205).

As explained above, in this seventh control example, when the normal state (a state in which the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is unlikely to be executed) is set as the game state, if a long-time hit of the normal symbol is won, a long opening effect is executed during the variation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, the electric device 640a is opened for a long time for the player, and the player can reliably play a game in which the ball enters the second winning hole 640.

Furthermore, in this seventh control example, even if the normal state is set as the game state, the execution of the above-mentioned long opening effect is restricted if it is within a specified period after the end of the time-saving feature when there is a high possibility that many reserved balls of the second special pattern have been acquired in the normal state. This makes it possible to improve the quality of the benefit given to the player when the long opening effect is executed (the benefit of easily securing reserved balls of the second special pattern).

In this control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is at the upper limit (4 balls), the period during which the long opening effect is restricted (restriction period) is set to the period from the end of the time-saving state until the special pattern changes five times, but it may also be set to a period from the end of the time-saving state until a predetermined time has elapsed, that is, until the time required for the special pattern to change five times in a row. Also, if the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern falls below a predetermined number (for example, 2 balls or less) during the above-mentioned restriction period, the above-mentioned restriction period may be cleared and the long opening effect may be executed.

In addition, in this control example, the long opening effect is restricted for a specified period of time after the time-saving feature has ended, but it may be configured to restrict the long opening effect based on other conditions. For example, the long opening effect may be restricted when it is determined that the currently running special pattern change has resulted in a jackpot, that a continuous effect is set to span multiple special pattern changes, or that the reserved ball for the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) contains winning information for a jackpot.

Specifically, for example, in the processing of Z2903 in the long opening effect processing (see FIG. 514), after determining Z2903: No, a process can be provided to determine whether the continuous effect in progress flag 223ac is set on, and if it is determined that the continuous effect in progress flag 223ac is set on, this process can be terminated as is so that the long opening effect is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect without disrupting the priority with other effects being executed.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the display screen is configured to display different game methods depending on whether the long opening performance is restricted or executed. Specifically, when the long opening performance is executed, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is set to perform right-hand hit play to make the ball enter the second winning device 640, and when the long opening performance is restricted, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is set to perform left-hand hit play to make the ball enter the distribution device 700. As a result, when the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is at the upper limit (high), the first winning hole 64 and the right second winning hole 640 are targeted by left-hand hit play, and when the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is low, the game can be performed by targeting the second winning hole 640 by right-hand hit play.

In the seventh control example, the game board 13 is configured to make the ease with which the ball flows down to the distribution device 700 and the second winning port 640 different depending on whether the ball is being played from the right or left. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the game board 13 may be configured so that a weaker ball launch in a left-handed game makes it easier for the ball to reach the second winning port 640, and a stronger left-handed game makes it easier for the ball to reach the distribution device 700. This makes it possible to greatly vary the game results by making slight changes to the operation of the launch device, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, this seventh control example describes a configuration based on the control content of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above, but it is not limited to the control content of the main control device 110 used in the first control example described above, and may also be used in the control content of the main control device 110 in the second control example, that is, in a gaming machine of a type that executes the drawing (variation) of the second special pattern in priority over the first special pattern.

In addition, if a predetermined number or more (e.g., three or more) reserved balls are stored for the second special symbol at the end of the electric support game state (low probability electric support game state (time-saving game state) or high probability electric support game state (high probability variable game state)), the long-time win effect for the normal symbol may be prohibited (not executed), or may be switched to an effect that prompts the player to insert a game ball into the first ball entrance 64. By configuring in this way, even if the game state can be switched to the normal game state, if there are few reserved balls for the second special symbol, the long-time win effect for the normal symbol can be executed, and a malfunction that deprives the player of the opportunity to win with the second special symbol can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, when switching to the normal game state, the long-time hit effect of the normal pattern is not performed or the effect is switched to a different effect from the normal state until the special pattern changes a predetermined number of times (five times in this embodiment). However, it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to not perform the long-time hit effect of the normal pattern or to switch to a different effect from the normal state when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more), regardless of the game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to play advantageously according to the game state. Furthermore, the condition for not performing the long-time hit effect of the normal pattern or switching to a different effect from the normal state may be set to a case where a specific change pattern is being executed (for example, a change pattern of a jackpot or a change pattern of a super reach) regardless of the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern. In addition, time information from the RTC may be obtained and set as a condition for switching if it is a specific time near closing time (for example, five minutes before closing). The switching condition may be set by combining the conditions given in this control example.

<Eighth control example>
Next, the eighth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 517 to Fig. 557. In this eighth control example, the control of the sound lamp control device 113 executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (see Fig. 376), the control of the sound lamp control device 113 executed when the background mode is changed based on the operation of the frame button 22a, and the performance content executed when the reserved ball number of the special pattern becomes a specific number (the upper limit number is 8), are different from the first control example described above, and a detailed description is added about the control content of the sound lamp control device 113 related to the frame button 22 and the function of adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 517, but since the pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example has multiple operating means (frame button 22a, left button 22b, right button 22c) that can be operated by the player, the configuration shown as frame button 22 in the first control example described above is called frame button 22a, but since the meaning is the same, a detailed explanation of frame button 22a in this control example will be omitted. Therefore, the various technical ideas explained using frame button 22 in each of the control examples described above also apply to frame button 22a in this control example.

In the first control example described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 391) and the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 394) are executed, and during the period when each start-up process is being executed (power-on period), as described above with reference to FIG. 376, a dedicated display screen (power-on screen) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and an announcement (power-on period announcement) to indicate that the power is currently being turned on (each start-up process based on power-on is being executed) is executed using the voice output device 226.

In the first control example configured in this manner, for example, if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut (turned off) while the special pattern is being displayed, and then the power is turned on (turned on), the special pattern change will resume from the state it was in immediately before the power was turned off, based on the information stored (backed up) in the RAM 202 of the main control device 110. However, since the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the notification sound output from the audio output device 226 are configured to emphasize and notify the player that the power is on, it is difficult for the player to notice that the special pattern is being displayed, leading to the problem that the special pattern change that was being performed before the power was turned off has been erased.

In contrast, in the eighth control example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is being executed at the time the power is turned off, that is, if the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) that was executed at the time the power was turned off is resumed after the power is turned on, BGM (special symbol variation sound effect) indicating that the special symbol is varying during the power-on period is output. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the special symbol variation that was executed at the time of power off has resumed. In addition, since the amount of data processing is smaller when creating the audio data output from the audio output device 226 than when creating the data of the display image (third symbol variation image) corresponding to the special symbol variation to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to immediately inform the player that the special symbol is varying immediately after the power is turned on. Note that details of the audio output control when the power is turned on will be described later with reference to FIG. 520.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22a even during the change of the special symbol. In addition, the timing of changing the background mode is configured to be variable according to the change speed of the special symbol (third symbol) at the time when the player operates the frame button 22a to change the background mode. To be more specific, in this control example, in order to show the lottery result of the special symbol, the change display speed of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed in accordance with the change display period of the special symbol. If the frame button 22a is operated during the high-speed change in which the change display speed of the third symbol is fast, the background mode is changed immediately, and if the frame button 22a is operated during the low-speed change in which the change speed of the third symbol is slower than the high-speed change, the background mode is changed after the change of the special symbol has ended (after the special symbol has stopped being displayed, or when the next special symbol starts changing).

Generally, the third symbol variable display executed in the pachinko machine 10 is configured to fluctuate at high speed for a predetermined period (first half period) after the start of the fluctuation, and then fluctuate at a slower speed (second half period), and the period during which the third symbol is displayed at a slower speed is used to execute a suggestive effect to show the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, by configuring the background mode not to change even if the frame button 22a is operated during the slow fluctuation of the third symbol as in this eighth control example, it is possible to prevent the background mode from being changed while a special effect corresponding to the currently set background mode (a suggestive effect based on the result of the special symbol lottery) is being executed, and to prevent the player from being able to see the content (result) of the suggestive effect.

In addition, since it has a fluctuation notification means for notifying the player whether the currently executing fluctuation display of the third pattern is a fast or slow fluctuation, if an operation to change the background mode is performed at the current stage, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the timing at which the background mode will change. Note that, although this control example is configured to be able to notify the player of the fluctuation speed of the third pattern, this is not limited thereto, and for example, it may be configured to notify the player of whether or not the current period allows for an immediate change of background mode.

Furthermore, the change notification means for notifying the player whether the changing display of the third pattern being executed is a fast change or a slow change is also configured to execute a notification to allow the player to know whether or not the execution period of a presentation using the operation means (operation presentation) is in progress. In this way, when an operation effective period during which the operation means can be operated is set, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner whether the operation effective period is an operation effective period set by the execution of an operation presentation or an operation effective period during which an operation for switching the background mode is in progress. This makes it possible to prevent an unintended display mode from appearing when the player operates the operation means.

In this eighth control example, the above-mentioned change notification means is provided on the operation means (frame button 22a) that the player operates when switching background modes (the change notification means is provided in the vicinity of the operation means). Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22a to switch background modes, the notification state of the change notification means can be easily confirmed.

In addition, in this eighth control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern reaches a specific number (for example, the upper limit of eight), a specific period effect (eight reserved effect) is executed using the change time of the special pattern corresponding to the specific number of winning information (reserved patterns) stored in reserve. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a period effect using a longer period than the effect executed corresponding to one special pattern change display period, making it possible to execute a variety of effects and improving the effect of the effect. Therefore, by setting the number of reserved balls of the special pattern to a specific number, it is possible to motivate the player to play so that a specific period effect is executed.

Here, in the case where the periodic effect is configured to be executed within a predetermined range (within the time for changing the special pattern corresponding to a specific number of winning information stored in reserve) as in the eighth control example, as explained in the above first control example with reference to FIG. 346(b), in order to inform the player of the current number of reserved balls of the special pattern (maximum number 8 balls), the first reserved pattern base m1 to the eighth reserved pattern base m8 are formed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81, and the reserved patterns are displayed in order from the first reserved pattern base m1 according to the number of reserved balls of the special pattern (see FIG. 347(a)). In this case, if a configuration is used in which the reserved pattern corresponding to the newly acquired winning information during the execution of the periodic effect is displayed in the small area Ds2, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp which reserved patterns are the target of the periodic effect, and a performance that is difficult for the player to understand is provided.

In contrast to this, in the eighth control example, when the periodic performance is not being performed, a reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is displayed in the small area Ds2 as in the first control example described above, and when the periodic performance is performed, only the number of reserved balls that are the subject of the periodic performance are displayed in the small area Ds2 as the performance reserved pattern. By configuring it in this way, even if new winning information is obtained during the periodic performance, the number of performance reserved patterns displayed in the small area Ds2 does not increase, so the player can be notified of the reserved patterns that are the subject of the periodic performance in an easy-to-understand manner. The detailed content of the periodic performance in this eighth control example will be described later with reference to Figures 526 to 528.

Furthermore, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to notify the player of the current number of reserved balls for the special pattern using a display area (light-emitting area) separate from the display screen. This allows the player to know the current number of reserved balls even while the period performance is being executed.

In addition, this eighth control example is configured so that when a player operates (presses) the frame button 22a, the operated (pressed) frame button 22a vibrates, and the amount of vibration can be varied. By configuring the frame button 22a to vibrate in this way, when a player presses the frame button 22a, the vibration can be transmitted to the player who pressed the frame button 22a, enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, it is configured to execute a presentation that suggests the amount of vibration (vibration level) executed when the frame button 22a is pressed.

Here, conventionally, there are pachinko machines 10 that can provide a surprising effect to a player by vibrating the frame button 22a when the player presses the frame button 22a. However, with such conventional pachinko machines 10, the player cannot predict whether or not vibration will be imparted when the frame button 22a is pressed until the player presses the frame button 22a, and there is a problem in that the player cannot proactively operate (press) the frame button 22a.

In contrast to this, the eighth control example is configured to suggest to the player before operating (pressing) the frame button 22a whether or not vibration will be applied when the frame button 22a is operated (pressed), and the vibration level when vibration occurs. By configuring in this way, the player can operate the frame button 22a while predicting the vibration mode when the frame button 22a is operated (pressed), and therefore the player can be encouraged to actively operate (press) the frame button 22a.

Furthermore, because the vibration level of the frame button 22a is variable, even if a predetermined level of vibration is applied when the player presses the frame button 22a, it is possible to vibrate the frame button 22a at a vibration level equal to or higher than the predetermined level by subsequently operating (pressing) the frame button 22a. This makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22a multiple times, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, like the first control example described above, this eighth control example is configured to be capable of displaying multiple background modes, and is configured to change the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when a predetermined transition condition (e.g., pressing the frame button 22a) is met. And, when the player operates the touch sensor 2900 (holding his/her hand within the detection area of the touch sensor 2900), the currently set background mode is notified.

Here, conventionally, there are pachinko machines 10 that change the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when a predetermined transition condition is met (for example, pressing the frame button 22a). In this case, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the background mode has changed, but there is a problem in that it is difficult to clearly inform the player of which background mode (the background mode after the transition) has been set by the change in the background displayed on the display screen.

To solve this problem, for example, a technique could be considered in which the currently set background mode is always displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81; however, in this case, part of the limited area of the display screen of the third pattern display device would be used only to notify the background mode, reducing the area available for the various effects executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and reducing the effect of the effect. In addition, there was a problem in that the background mode would be displayed while a specific effect (for example, an effect suggesting that the lottery result for a special pattern is highly likely to be a jackpot) was being executed using the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81, reducing the effect of the effect.

In contrast to this, in the eighth control example, the operating means (touch sensor 2900) is operated so that the background mode can be notified only for any period of time desired by the player, thereby preventing a situation in which the presentation effect of various presentations executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is reduced. Also, in the eighth control example, the current background mode is notified using a display means (light-emitting means) different from the third pattern display device 81, so that the limited area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be effectively utilized for various presentations.

In addition, in the eighth control example, a performance (operation performance) using the operation of the touch sensor 2900 can be executed, and the touch sensor 2900 is configured to play both the role of an operation means for notifying the background mode and the role of an operation means for executing the operation performance (participating in the operation performance). In other words, the role of the touch sensor 2900 is configured to be variable depending on the situation. And, for example, even while an operation performance using the touch sensor 2900 is being executed, by performing a special operation (operating the touch sensor 2900 while holding down the left button 22b and the right button 22c), the background mode can be notified without operating the touch sensor 2900 for the operation performance. Therefore, even if a configuration is used in which the operation means (touch sensor 2900) is used for multiple purposes, the player can be made to operate the operation means in an operation mode that matches the purpose desired by the player.

<Regarding the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 517. Fig. 517 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example. As shown in Fig. 517, the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example (see Fig. 138) in that the operation means that the player can operate is changed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above is provided with the frame button 22 as an operation means that can be operated by the player, but the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example is provided with the frame button 22a, the left button 22b, and the right button 22c as operation means, as shown in FIG. 517. The frame button 22a is an operation means used for the same purpose as the frame button 22 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, and is used, for example, to change the presentation mode of the operation presentation to show the lottery result of the special pattern, or to switch the background mode. Note that the specific content of the frame button 22a is the same as that of the frame button 22 in the first control example described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Therefore, the frame button 22a is also configured so that its form can be changed by driving the tilt device 310, like the frame button 22 in the first control example described above, but since it has the same content as the frame button 22 described above, a detailed description thereof and illustration thereof will be omitted.

The left button 22b and the right button 22c are operating means provided to the left of the frame button 22a, and are mainly used as adjustment means for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 450 of the pachinko machine 10. In this eighth control example, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by operating the left button 22b and the right button 22c during the period when the third pattern is not being displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 and during the period when the third pattern is fluctuating at a high speed. Note that the details regarding volume adjustment are the same as those in the fourth control example (see FIG. 313) described above, and therefore will not be described here.

In addition, in this control example, the left button 22b and the right button 22c are operated while the third symbol is fluctuating at a slow speed, thereby partially disabling operations on other operation means (touch sensor 2900). In this way, among the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 10, an operation means for which control based on operation (volume adjustment) is executed only when a specific condition is met (when the third symbol is not fluctuating, or when the third symbol is fluctuating at a high speed) is configured to be used for a different purpose when operated when the specific condition is not met. This allows one operation means to be used for multiple purposes, thereby reducing the number of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 10 and reducing manufacturing costs.

Next, referring to FIG. 518, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 518 is a front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 518, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example differs from the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in that a reserve LED 900 is provided below the third pattern display device 81, that mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are provided on the variable display device unit 80, and that a touch sensor 2900 is provided at a position facing the display screen of the third pattern display device, but otherwise is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The reserved LED 900 is used to indicate the number of reserved balls of special patterns, and is composed of eight LEDs. These eight LEDs are configured to light up in order from the left, and are controlled to light up in accordance with the increased or decreased number of reserved balls of special patterns based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110 received by the audio lamp control device 113 indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of special patterns, or a reserved ball number command indicating a decrease.

By providing an area outside the display area of the third pattern display device 81 for reporting the number of reserved balls of the special pattern in this way, the number of reserved balls of the current special pattern can be reliably reported even if the reserved pattern display (see FIG. 519(b)) displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is temporarily erased or used for another purpose. Although detailed explanation is omitted, this reserved LED 900 uses a full-color LED and is configured to be able to produce light emission in at least three or more colors, and is controlled to light up so that the reserved balls of special pattern 1 and the reserved balls of special pattern 2 can be distinguished. This allows the player to recognize the number of reserved balls corresponding to each pattern type, even if multiple special pattern types are provided.

In addition, as a pre-reading effect that is executed based on the results of advance judgment (pre-reading) performed on the reserved winning information stored in advance, when the color of the reserved pattern is changed, the reserved LED 900 is controlled to emit a color different from normal at the corresponding position. Furthermore, the display mode (light emission mode) of this reserved LED 900 is configured to be less noticeable than the reserved pattern display displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

In the eighth control example, a display area (illuminated area) showing the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is provided below the third pattern display device 81, outside the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but this illuminated area may be provided anywhere that is visible to the player, for example, it may be provided in the lower right area of the game board 13. In addition, in the eighth control example, since it is configured to be able to store a maximum of eight reserved balls of the special pattern, eight LEDs, the same as the upper limit of reserved memory, are used for the reserved LEDs 900, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to notify the number of reserved balls of the special pattern using four LEDs. Furthermore, in this eighth control example, the reserved LED 900 is controlled to always display the reserved number of balls with the special pattern, but other than that, for example, when the reserved pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is erased or used for another performance, that is, when the player cannot easily grasp the reserved number of balls with the special pattern from the display content displayed on the third pattern display device 81 alone, the reserved LED 900 may be controlled to light up.

The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are light-emitting means consisting of four LEDs, and are used as notification means for notifying the player of the currently set background mode. In this control example, the background mode for executing the variable performance (variable performance of the third pattern) for showing the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to be set from a plurality of modes. Specifically, the player can select one of the background modes: a "sea mode" in which a display mode imitating the sea (e.g., a display mode imitating coral) is displayed as the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device, and a "mountain mode" in which a display mode imitating a mountain (e.g., a display mode imitating a tree) is displayed as the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are configured to emit light in a manner that can notify the player of the currently set background mode. This allows the player to easily ascertain the current background mode based on the emission manner of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d, even if, for example, a third pattern variation presentation using the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is executed and the player is unable to ascertain the current background mode even after ascertaining the display content displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, in the first half of the special pattern change (when the third pattern is changing at high speed), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are configured to emit light in an illumination manner that notifies the current background mode, and in the second half of the special pattern change (the period from when the high speed change of the third pattern ends until it is displayed as stopped), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are configured to emit light in an indication manner that indicates the lottery result, rather than the current background mode. And, even in the second half of the special pattern change, the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are configured to emit light in an indication manner that notifies the current background mode, by the player performing a specific operation on the operating means (frame button 22).

By configuring it in this way, the illumination of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d can be controlled in accordance with the information desired by the player (current background mode, special drawing results), making it possible to provide useful information to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that the illumination of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d is controlled based on the processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

The touch sensor 2900 is a non-contact type detection means (operation means) that has a predetermined detection range, and when it detects that the player's hand has entered (been placed) within the predetermined detection range for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that the player has operated it. Although the player cannot directly see the detection range of this touch sensor 2900, a frame line indicating the detection range of the touch sensor 2900 is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 located on the rear side of the touch sensor 2900, making it easier for the player to operate the touch sensor 2900 (easier for the player to enter the detection range of the touch sensor 2900).

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the touch sensor 2900 in this control example is configured to be able to determine the movement (direction) of a hand that has entered (placed) within the detection range, and is configured so that, for example, by moving the hand from right to left or bottom to top, a presentation display corresponding to the hand movement is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to execute a presentation operation corresponding to the operation of the player on the operating means (touch sensor 2900), thereby keeping the player interested while playing the game.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 519. FIGS. 519(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this eighth control example differ from the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example described above in that the scroll direction of the third symbol (the decorative symbol that is displayed variably in synchronization with the special symbol) is changed from vertical to horizontal (right to left), the number of effective lines for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is changed from one (see FIG. 346(a)) to five (see FIG. 519(a)), and the notification mode of information related to the game is changed. In addition, some elements are the same (similar) as those in the first control example, but are given different symbols for convenience of explanation. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed explanation is omitted.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three rows of patterns (Z1 to Z3) are displayed: top, middle, and bottom (see FIG. 519 (a)). The third patterns (decorative patterns that change in response to the changing display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) or the second special pattern (special pattern 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 are each composed of 10 main patterns each with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each identification information that resembles a number. In this way, by using characters that correspond to each identification information, the player can be visually notified of the lottery result of the special symbol, allowing the player to play in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described below is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are lined up (for example, "777"), and the jackpot occurs after the variable display ends. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

The main display area Dm displays three pattern rows, Z1, Z2, and Z3, at the top, middle, and bottom. The above-mentioned third patterns are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the display changes by scrolling left and right periodically for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

Specifically, the upper pattern row Z1 and the middle pattern row Z2 are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are configured to scroll from right to left as they change, while the lower pattern row Z3 is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and are configured to scroll from right to left as they change. Furthermore, in each pattern row, sub-patterns (blank patterns) that do not indicate the results of the special pattern lottery are formed between the main patterns.

As shown in FIG. 519(a), the main display area Dm has three active lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction, and two active lines L4 and L5 formed in the diagonal direction. When each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed stopped, if the third pattern stops on the active line in a combination of jackpot patterns (in this control example, a combination of the same main patterns), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 519(a), in this control example, each pay line (L1-L5) is formed to include the pattern display positions of each of the pattern columns Z1-Z3, so that the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern can be difficult to understand until all of the pattern columns V1-V3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the changing display of the third pattern executed in the main display area Dm can be interesting until the last pattern column (the middle pattern column V2 in this control example) is stopped and displayed.

The manner of displaying the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. The patterns displayed in the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a pattern combining an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third pattern. Furthermore, the area in which the third pattern is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific performance is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the variable display area of the third pattern may be made smaller or moved to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), so that it is difficult for the player to know whether the third pattern is changing or not. In addition, the change of the third pattern may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) during the period in which the special pattern is changing, and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special pattern and the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special pattern are configured to be the same (including differences to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing between them), but the display mode or display area of the third pattern may be made different to correspond to the type of special pattern that is varying.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 519(b). As shown in FIG. 519(b), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. These small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is being drawn (changing), and the lottery result), and the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 1) to indicate the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 2) to indicate the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, the selection status of the special symbol can be notified to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode imitating figures such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 519(b)) to indicate the status in which the special symbol is changing, and the fourth symbol is displayed stationarily in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see the small display area Dm2 in FIG. 519(b)) to indicate the result of the selection of the special symbol. However, without being limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol or a display mode showing multiple colors may be used to indicate that the special symbol is changing by a display mode that changes numbers or colors, and a display mode showing a specific symbol or color may be displayed stationarily to indicate the result of the selection of the special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the selection status of the special symbol (whether or not it is being selected (changing), and the selection result), but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to only notify whether or not the special symbol is being selected (changing). Also, as shown in FIG. 519(b), this control example shows an example in which the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the selection status of the special symbol is displayed is formed on the upper left and upper right sides of the main display area Dm, but the position and size of this fourth symbol display area may be changed depending on the presentation mode of the changing presentation executed in the center part of the main display area Dm.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth pattern display area from limiting the area in which the variable performance is performed, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect. In this case, it is preferable to remove the fourth pattern display area from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and configure it so that the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using a light-emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80.

The display content displayed in the sub-display area Ds is substantially the same as in the first control example, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, in the first control example, as shown in FIG. 346(b), the sub-display area Ds is divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction, but in this eighth control example, the display area of the sub-display area Ds is limited to only the small area Ds1, and within that small area Ds1, an in-progress area Ds1a and a waiting area Ds1b are formed. The display content of the in-progress area Ds1a is the same as the small area Ds1 in the first control example described above, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the display contents of the standby area Ds1b will be explained. In this control example, eight pedestals m1 to m8 are displayed in the standby area Ds1b, and in normal times, a reserved pattern for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is displayed as in the first control example described above. On the other hand, in this eighth control example, when a reserved pattern is displayed on pedestal m8, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern reaches the upper limit (8), a dedicated performance (period performance) using the eight reserved patterns stored in the reserved memory is executed (see FIG. 526). While this period performance is executed, the standby area Ds1b is configured to display a reserved pattern for performance that indicates only the period during which the period performance is executed (reserved pattern that is the target of the period performance), rather than a reserved pattern for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern.

By configuring it in this way, even if a new reserved ball is acquired during the period performance, a new reserved pattern will not be displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so the player can be easily informed of how long the period performance will last.

Although not shown in FIG. 519, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 also displays display modes showing the following display contents. Specifically, it is configured to display a guidance display mode that guides the player on the direction to shoot the ball (play direction). By configuring it in this way, the player can easily understand which area of the game board the ball should be shot towards just by visually checking the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

This guidance display area is configured to display a "right hit" display mode to guide the player to play right-handed games, and a "left hit" display mode to guide the player to play left-handed games. The "right hit" display mode is displayed during game states in which right-handed games are advantageous to the player, i.e., during a special bonus state, a time-saving state, and during a jackpot game, and the "left hit" display mode is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) after right-handed games have ended. Also, when right-handed games are detected to be being played during a game state in which left-handed games are advantageous to the player, i.e., during a normal state, the "left hit" display mode is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds).

<About the performance content in the eighth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 520 to Fig. 529, among various effects executed in this eighth control example, characteristic effects will be described. First, referring to Fig. 520 and Fig. 521, effects when the power is turned on will be described. Fig. 520 is a timing chart showing the flow of sound effects when the power is turned on after the power is turned off while the special symbol is fluctuating in the fluctuating pattern A.

In this control example, if a power outage occurs during a special pattern change (special pattern change) and the power is then turned on, a display mode indicating that the power is on is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 521 (a)) while the start-up process of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed (during the return processing period). Then, if a special pattern change is being executed during the return processing period, the sound output device 226 is configured to output background music during the special pattern change. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily inform the player that a special pattern change is being executed during the return processing period.

In more detail, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a memory area (backup area) that temporarily stores various setting information even if the power is interrupted, and is configured to execute a power interruption process in which the game information before the power interruption (variation patterns for performance, BGM information, background mode, remaining variation time, etc.) is stored in the memory area when the power interruption occurs. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example has sufficient internal power (capacitor) to store various information in the above-mentioned memory area after the external power supply is cut off, so it is configured to store game information in the memory area only when a power interruption occurs. It is configured to store the part of the BGM that was output when the power interruption occurred ("B" in Figure 520) and output sound from the part of the BGM that was output when the power interruption occurred ("B") during the recovery process period after the power is turned on.

In the example shown in FIG. 520, the progress of the BGM that was being output when the power was interrupted is stored, and the BGM is played from the point where it stopped when the power was interrupted. However, this is not limited to this, and the BGM may be configured to be played from the start position of the part of the BGM that was being output when the power was interrupted. By configuring in this way, the process of storing in the memory area when a power interruption occurs can be simplified.

Furthermore, in this control example, the return command indicating that the start-up process of the main control device 110 has ended (initial settings have been completed) is configured to include game information (selected change pattern, remaining change time, lottery results) regarding the special pattern change that was being performed before the power outage and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. This makes it possible to transition the display mode of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 from the initial screen (see FIG. 521(a)) to the normal screen (see FIG. 521(b)) when the start-up process is completed (when the command indicating the initial settings have been completed is output). This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that the special pattern change that was being performed before the power outage has resumed.

Now, referring to FIG. 521, the display contents of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on will be explained. FIG. 521(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents immediately after power is turned on, and FIG. 521(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents after the initial settings are completed. Note that the contents shown in FIG. 521(a) are the same as the display contents shown in FIG. 376(b) of the above-mentioned control example, so a detailed explanation is omitted. However, in this eighth control example, when a special pattern change is being executed while this screen during initial settings is displayed, the BGM (changing sound) corresponding to that change pattern is output from the continuation at the time of power outage (see FIG. 520).

When the initial settings are complete, as shown in FIG. 520(b), a return-only variation pattern is executed based on the remaining period of the ongoing special chart variation. In this control example, the system is configured to execute a first judgment to determine whether the remaining variation time at the time the initial settings are completed is less than 2 seconds, a second judgment to determine whether it is 2 seconds or more but less than 5 seconds, and a third judgment to determine whether it is 5 seconds or more.

If the first judgment determines that the time is less than 2 seconds, the initial setting screen (see FIG. 521(a)) continues to be displayed until the remaining variation time has elapsed (until the ongoing special chart variation ends), without setting a variation pattern exclusively for return. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a short-time variation display that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

In addition, if the remaining fluctuation time is between 2 and 5 seconds, a return-only reach effect is executed in which the fluctuation display is executed from the reach state (a state in which the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 stop on the active line with the same pattern, and only the pattern row Z2 is displayed in a fluctuation state). This return-only reach effect is an effect that uses the fluctuation data of the normal reach, that is, the fluctuation pattern that is set to have the lowest probability of winning a jackpot among the normal fluctuation patterns, among the fluctuation patterns that result in a reach state.

Then, the variation data for a period of time corresponding to the length of the remaining variation time is played. By configuring it in this way, if the special chart variation being executed when the power is turned on is a jackpot, the jackpot winning can be notified with a variation pattern that is difficult to encounter under normal circumstances, providing added value to the player. Also, by using image data that is rarely actually used among the pre-stored image data (image data that shows a variation pattern that results in a jackpot in a normal reach), the image data can be used effectively.

Next, the operation for changing the background mode during special pattern change will be described with reference to Fig. 522 and Fig. 523. Fig. 522 is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of background change (background change) according to the timing of the background change operation during special pattern change.

As shown in FIG. 522, in this eighth control example, the speed of change of the third symbol, which is displayed in synchronization with the special symbol change, is variable. Specifically, the speed of change of the third symbol is gradually decreased in the order of "fast, medium, slow". This allows the player to play while predicting the timing at which the third symbol will stop. As with the first control example described above, this eighth control example is configured so that if the lottery result for the special symbol is a jackpot, a longer change time is more likely to be selected than if the lottery result is a miss, so that the lottery result for the current special symbol (length of change time) can be predicted based on the progress of the change speed of the third symbol.

In this control example, the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be changed (background changeable) by the player operating the frame button 22a while the special pattern is being displayed in a changing state, and the timing of the background change varies depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22a.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 522, when the special symbol's changing state (the changing speed of the third symbol) is high speed and a background change operation (pressing frame button 22) is performed, a background change is executed immediately after the background change operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 522(a), when the current background mode is "sea" and the special symbol's changing state is high speed changing, if a background change operation is performed, a background change is executed immediately thereafter and the background mode transitions to "mountain mode" (see FIG. 523(b)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 522(b), when the special pattern is not changing at high speed (medium speed, low speed, stopped), if a background change operation is performed, the background change is not performed until the special pattern change ends, and the background change is performed when the next special pattern change starts. In this case, as shown in FIG. 523(a), the mode display area Dm1a provided in the information of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 displays "sea mode" indicating the current background mode, and the comment display area Dm2a provided to the right of the mode display area Dm1a displays the text "Background change at next change" to indicate that a background change operation has been performed. This allows the player to be notified that a background change operation has been performed during the special pattern change (that the pachinko machine 10 has officially accepted the background change operation), and the background change is not performed immediately after the operation, which prevents the background change operation from being repeatedly performed.

As explained above, in this eighth control example, the timing of the background change when a background change operation is performed while the special symbol is changing is varied depending on the state of change of the special symbol (the speed of change of the third symbol). This prevents the background from being changed while a presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) is being performed that indicates a high probability that the current special symbol will be selected as a winning symbol, while allowing the background to be changed immediately during a period when a presentation suggesting the current special symbol will be selected as a winning symbol (high-speed change period) is unlikely to be performed, allowing the player to experience a variety of presentations (backgrounds).

In the flow of background change explained with reference to FIG. 522, an example is shown in which a background change is performed at the timing when the next special chart change starts when a background change operation is performed during special chart change at a time other than when the special chart is changing at high speed, but this is not limited to this, and the background change may be configured to be performed, for example, at the timing when the third pattern is displayed in a stopped display mode (combination of three third patterns) for indicating the special chart lottery result (the timing when the performance suggesting the special chart lottery result ends).

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, if a background change operation is performed during special chart fluctuation other than during high-speed special chart fluctuation, the background change is not executed at least until after the result of the current special chart lottery is frozen and displayed; however, it is only necessary to configure the background change so as to prevent the performance suggesting the result of the special chart lottery from becoming difficult to understand when it is executed, and the background change may be delayed until a predetermined timing in the special chart fluctuation. Specifically, if a background change operation is executed when the special chart fluctuation state is a medium-speed fluctuation, it is preferable to configure the background change to be executed at the timing when the special chart fluctuation state switches to a low-speed fluctuation.

In addition, if a background change operation is performed during a special chart change other than during high-speed special chart change, the timing at which the background change is performed may be configured to switch based on the results of the current special chart lottery. For example, if the special chart change during change is a jackpot change, it may be configured to make it easier to perform a background change at a predetermined timing during the change period (for example, the timing at which it switches to low-speed change) than if the special chart change is a miss change. Furthermore, even if a background change operation is performed during high-speed special chart change, the timing at which the background change is performed may be configured to switch based on the results of the current special chart lottery.

This allows the player to experience new effects (backgrounds) by performing background change operations, and also motivates the player to perform background change operations.

In FIG. 522, the speed at which the third pattern (special pattern) is changing is used as the element for determining the timing of the background change when a background change operation is performed, but this is not limited to this. For example, the process of the performance display executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 during the special pattern change may be divided into multiple stages (e.g., five stages), and the timing of the background change may be determined according to the process of the performance display during the background change operation.

Specifically, the performance displays executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided into "fluctuation start period", "reach establishment period", "reach performance period", "developing performance period", and "performance result notification period", and for example, the "fluctuation start period" and "reach establishment period" can be configured to correspond to the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation state of the special pattern in this eighth control example, and the "reach performance period", "developing performance period", and "performance result notification period" can be configured to correspond to the "medium-speed fluctuation", "low-speed fluctuation", and "stop" fluctuation states of the special pattern in this eighth control example.

In this way, even if the timing of the background change that is executed after the background change operation is varied according to the progress of the performance display, rather than the speed at which the third pattern (special pattern) changes, the same effect as this control example can be achieved.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, if a background change operation is performed during a special chart change other than during a rapid special chart change, the background change is performed after the result of the current special chart lottery is frozen and displayed. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to vary whether or not to perform a background change and the destination of the background change (background mode) based on the lottery result of the next special chart change (the special chart change following the special chart change for which the background change operation was performed) or the lottery result of the next or subsequent special chart changes (the result of advance judgment (pre-reading) of the winning information that is reserved and stored).

By configuring it in this way, players can be motivated to perform background change operations in order to know the results of the special chart lottery in advance. By encouraging players to perform background change operations enthusiastically, a variety of effects can be provided to players, and players can be prevented from becoming bored with the game too early.

Next, with reference to Fig. 524 and Fig. 525, the content of the variable effect (touch effect) that varies the high-speed fluctuation period of the third pattern will be explained. Fig. 524 is a timing chart showing the fluctuation speed of the third pattern and the flow of the touch effect. As shown in Fig. 524, in this control example, the third pattern is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 while varying its fluctuation speed in accordance with the fluctuation period of the special pattern. Then, during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third pattern, a touch effect (see Fig. 525(a)) is executed.

When the player operates the touch sensor 2900 (when the player places his/her hand within the detection area of the touch sensor 2900 for a predetermined period of time) during the period in which this touch effect is being executed (period in which the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed), a fluctuating effect (reach effect) in which the third symbol fluctuates at a slower speed is executed (see FIG. 525(b)).

In other words, in this control example, the player can forcibly switch the third symbol's fluctuation speed to a slow fluctuation by operating the touch sensor 2900 during the touch effect. By configuring it in this way, the execution period of the fluctuation effect (the effect to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol) executed during the slow fluctuation can be extended, so that the player can become more interested in the fluctuation effect.

In addition, since the touch effect is configured to be executed during the high speed fluctuation period of the third pattern, for example, it is possible to operate frame button 22a and change the background mode while the touch effect is being executed. Since this touch effect is configured to continue to be executed even if the background mode is changed, it is possible to execute the touch effect after changing the background mode.

Therefore, for example, when a touch effect is executed during the rapid fluctuation of the third symbol, and the player understands that the fluctuation will result in a reach effect, the player can operate the frame button 22a to enter the background mode desired by the player, and then operate the touch sensor 2900, thereby easily experiencing the reach effect in the background mode desired by the player.

Here, an example of the display content displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 during the above-mentioned touch performance will be described with reference to FIG. 525. FIG. 525(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen immediately after the touch performance is executed (timing of FIG. 524(a)), and FIG. 525(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen after the touch sensor 2900 is operated in the touch performance (timing of FIG. 524(b)).

As shown in FIG. 525(a), when the touch effect is being executed, the third symbol is displayed changing at high speed on the display screen of the third symbol display device (represented by an arrow pointing to the left in the figure), and in a small area Dm3 to the left of the changing display area during the high speed change (approximately 1/3 of the left side of the main display area Dm), a touch display is executed to cover the changing display of the third symbol, indicating that the touch effect is being executed. Specifically, a touch location guide display mode Dm31 to guide the player to the location where he or she should place their hand, and a period display mode Dm32 to show the effect period (operation valid period) of the touch effect are displayed, and the comment "touch" is displayed to encourage the player to operate (touch) the touch sensor 2900.

As shown in FIG. 525, during the rapid fluctuation of the third symbols, the individual third symbols fluctuate at a speed that makes it difficult for the player to see them, so even if a touch display is executed to cover part of the variable display area, it does not result in an effect that is difficult for the player to understand (an effect that makes it impossible to grasp the third symbols being displayed variable).

When the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the touch effect period indicated by the period display mode Dm32, the touch effect ends as shown in FIG. 525(b), and a reach effect (slow-speed fluctuation display of the third pattern) is executed using the entire main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

As explained above, in this eighth control example, the player can operate the operating means (touch sensor 2900) while the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, forcing the fluctuating speed of the third symbol to be forcibly switched to slow fluctuating. By configuring it in this way, the execution period of the fluctuating effect (the effect to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol) executed during the slow fluctuating can be extended, so that the fluctuating effect can be made more interesting to the player.

In addition, since the touch effect is configured to be executed during the high speed fluctuation period of the third pattern, for example, it is possible to operate frame button 22a and change the background mode while the touch effect is being executed. Since this touch effect is configured to continue to be executed even if the background mode is changed, it is possible to execute the touch effect after changing the background mode.

Therefore, for example, when a touch effect is executed during the rapid fluctuation of the third symbol, and the player understands that a reach effect can be executed with this fluctuation, the player can operate the frame button 22a to enter the background mode desired by the player, and then operate the touch sensor 2900, allowing the player to easily experience the reach effect in the background mode desired, and preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

Next, the contents of the treasure chest effect (8 reserved ball effect) will be explained with reference to Fig. 526 to Fig. 528. In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern reaches the upper limit of 8, the 8 reserved ball effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using 8 reserved balls, is executed. This 8 reserved ball effect is a dedicated effect using 8 reserved patterns, and reserved patterns for effect, which have a display mode imitating a treasure chest, are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b as reserved patterns for effect corresponding to each reserved pattern (see Fig. 526 (a)).

When a special pattern change corresponding to the reserved pattern that is the target of the 8 reserved performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 526(b), the first reserved pattern for performance tb0 is displayed in the execution area Ds1a, and from within that, the contents of the treasure chest tb10, which indicate the lottery result of that change, are displayed. Details will be described later, but these contents tb10 are configured to display different colors depending on the lottery result of the special pattern.

If new winning information is subsequently stored on hold while the eight-reserved effect is being executed, as shown in Figures 527(a) and (b), the reserved pattern corresponding to the new winning information is not displayed in the standby area Ds1b of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the new reserved pattern 900z is displayed only by the reserved lamp 900. This makes it possible to easily inform the player of the period (effect period) during which the eight-reserved effect will continue to be executed up to which reserved pattern.

When the last special pattern change that is the subject of the 8-ball reserved effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 528, the reserved pattern for effect tb7 is displayed in the active area Ds1a, and the reserved pattern corresponding to the current number of reserved balls is displayed in the standby area Ds1b. In other words, when there are no more reserved patterns that are the subject of the 8-ball reserved effect, a reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls currently stored is displayed. This prevents players from becoming confused when they finish the 8-ball reserved effect because they do not know how many reserved balls they have currently acquired.

In this control example, the 8 reserved ball presentation shown in FIG. 526 to FIG. 528 is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even during the 8 reserved ball presentation and the reserved pattern for presentation is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, if the player performs a specific operation on the operation means, the reserved pattern indicating the current number of reserved balls may be displayed in the waiting area Ds1b instead of the reserved pattern for presentation. Also, if it is determined in the advance determination process executed during the 8 reserved ball presentation that there is winning information for a jackpot, the 8 reserved ball presentation may be continued until the special pattern change corresponding to the winning information is executed.

In addition, in this control example, in the period performance (8 reserved performance) in which a series of variable performances are performed across multiple special pattern changes (reserved patterns), the performance mode (tb10 of the treasure chest contents) is set based on the lottery result corresponding to the special pattern change to be performed. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to determine (pre-read) in advance whether or not the reserved pattern that is the subject of the period performance contains winning information that will be a jackpot win before the special pattern lottery based on the reserved pattern is performed, and to set the performance mode of the period performance based on the result of the pre-determination (pre-read result). In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the expectation of winning a jackpot to be set in multiple stages, and set a performance mode that gradually increases the expectation of winning a jackpot during the period performance so that it does not decrease. This makes it possible to increase the expectation of a jackpot as the period performance progresses, and to keep the player's attention on the period performance until the end.

Next, referring to FIG. 529, the display contents during the performance using the touch sensor 2900 in this eighth control example will be described. FIG. 529(a) is a display screen showing an example of the display when the touch sensor 2900 is operated during a touch performance executed during the slow fluctuation of the third pattern (during reach display), and FIG. 529(b) is a display screen showing an example of the display when a special operation is performed during a touch performance executed during the slow fluctuation of the third pattern (during reach display).

As shown in FIG. 529(a), when a touch effect is executed while the third symbol is slowly varying (during reach display), a small area Dm3 is formed in approximately 1/3 of the left side of the main display area Dm, and a touch display is executed, similar to the touch effect described in FIG. 525(a). In the state of FIG. 529(a), since the third symbol is slowly varying (during reach display), the reach display mode is displayed in a reduced form visible to the player only in the display area of the main display area Dm that is not covered by the small area Dm3, and the touch location guide display mode Dm31 is displayed in a manner indicating that the touch sensor 2900 has been operated (shown by diagonal lines in the figure).

Then, in the comment display area Dm2a, the comment "Big Chance" which is the result of the touch effect is displayed. This control example is configured so that the touch effect can be executed while the third symbol is in a reach display, and by operating the touch sensor 2900 during the touch effect, an effect (comment display) is executed which suggests whether the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot or not. Therefore, the touch sensor 2900 can be operated while hoping for a comment (for example, a big chance) which indicates a high possibility of a jackpot to be displayed, which can increase the player's motivation to participate in the operation effect.

Note that a player who wants to know the results of the special symbol lottery as soon as possible will actively operate the touch sensor 2900 when the above-mentioned touch effect is executed, and will actively try to display a comment, which is the result of the touch effect, in the comment display area Dm2a. On the other hand, a player who wants to enjoy the presentation mode of the variable presentation of the third symbol (and does not want other presentations suggesting the results of the special symbol lottery to be executed until the third symbol is stopped and displayed) can play in a way that prevents a comment suggesting the results of the special symbol lottery from being displayed in the comment display area Dm2a without operating the touch sensor 2900, even if a touch effect is executed.

In this case, there is a problem that while the touch effect is being performed (during the effective operation period of the operation means (touch sensor 2900) set during the touch effect), it becomes impossible to know the current background mode by operating the touch sensor 2900. Therefore, in this eighth control example, it is configured so that the current background mode can be notified even during the touch effect by operating the touch sensor 2900 while pressing the left button 22b and right button 22c (see FIG. 517) located to the left of the frame button 22a. By configuring it in this way, even if operation control using one operation means (touch sensor 2900) overlaps, the player can easily execute only the operation he or she desires.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 529(b), when the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed while the touch effect is being executed during the slow fluctuation of the third symbol (during reach display), the comment "Pay attention to the mode lamp" is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a (represented by filling in the display form imitating the left button 22b and the right button 22c within the lower frame of FIG. 529(b)). This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that the current background mode is being notified, rather than the result of the touch effect being displayed, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated at this stage. Then, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated in this state, the mode lamp 1910a corresponding to the currently set background mode is lit up, instead of a suggestion effect suggesting the lottery result of the currently executed special symbol fluctuation.

In this control example, when the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed while a touch effect is being executed during the slow fluctuation of the third pattern (during reach display), the result of the touch effect is not displayed even if the touch sensor 2900 is operated during the pressing period. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the touch effect may be forcibly terminated by pressing the left button 22b and the right button 22c during the touch effect. In other words, the operation effect being executed may be canceled by executing a special operation on the operation means.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 530. FIG. 530(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example, and FIG. 530(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example. This eighth control example differs from the first control example described above in that an eight-reserved lottery table 222fa, a special performance selection table 222fb, and vibration pattern data 222fc are added to the ROM 222, and a next background change flag 223fa, a reserved performance execution flag 223fb, and a reserved performance counter 2223fc are added to the RAM 223. The other elements are the same as those in the first control example, and the same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

The 8-piece reserved ball selection table 222fa is a data table used when making a selection (determination) as to whether or not to execute the 8-piece reserved ball effect (treasure chest effect), and is referenced in the reserved ball number control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 540) to determine whether or not to execute the 8-piece reserved ball effect when the sum of the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b (hereinafter referred to as the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter) is the upper limit value of "8" (Z2473 in FIG. 540: Yes). When it is decided to execute the 8-piece reserved ball effect, the 8-piece reserved ball effect described above is executed with reference to FIG. 526 to FIG. 528.

Now, with reference to FIG. 531(c), the contents of the 8-piece reserved lottery table 222fa will be explained. FIG. 531(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the 8-piece reserved lottery table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 531(c), the 8-piece reserved lottery table 222fa is configured to determine whether the reserved special chart (the reserved chart used for the 8-piece reserved presentation) contains winning information indicating a lottery result (a winning prize) that is advantageous to the player, and to vary the probability of the 8-piece reserved presentation based on the result of this determination.

Specifically, if there is winning information indicating a win in the reserved special chart (if the reserved judgment result is "win"), it is stipulated that if the acquired reserved performance counter 223fc value is "0 to 140", the 8 reserved performance will be executed, and if it is "141 to 198", the 8 reserved performance will not be executed. On the other hand, if the reserved judgment result is "miss only", it is stipulated that if the acquired reserved performance counter 223fc value is "0 to 90", the 8 reserved performance will be executed, and if it is "91 to 198", the 8 reserved performance will not be executed.

In other words, in this control example, the eight-reserved effect is configured to be executed more easily when the reserved balls that are the target of the eight-reserved effect contain winning information indicating a lottery result (a winning prize) that is advantageous to the player than when they do not. In this way, by executing the eight-reserved effect, it is possible to make the player believe that they are about to win a jackpot, enhancing the effect of the presentation.

In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of a special symbol reaches the upper limit of eight, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute an eight reserved ball effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using eight reserved balls. However, it may also be configured to hold a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a continuous effect (period effect) when the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, seven balls) rather than when the upper limit is reached. In this case, for example, the probability of executing the eight reserved ball effect may be varied depending on whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to one of the special symbol types is three or four out of the seven reserved balls.

In addition, in a pachinko machine 10 having multiple special symbol types, the results of pre-determining the special symbol type (advantageous special symbol) that is more likely to result in a jackpot game in which a large bonus (number of winning balls, game state set after the jackpot game) is given to the player in the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and the other special symbol type (unfavorable special symbol) may be separated to set the probability of the 8-piece reserved effect being executed differently. In this case, it is preferable to configure the 8-piece reserved effect to be executed more easily when there is winning information indicating a jackpot win in the reserve of the advantageous special symbol than under other conditions. This can further increase the player's expectations for the 8-piece reserved effect.

The special effect selection table 222fb is a data table that is referenced when setting the vibration amount of the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is operated, depending on the lottery result of the special pattern, and a different vibration amount is set based on the lottery result (pre-determination result) in the reserve.

Here, the contents of the special effect selection table 222fb will be explained with reference to FIG. 531(a). FIG. 531(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special effect selection table 222fb, and FIG. 531(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the vibration pattern data 222fc having the vibration amount scenario (vibe type) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb.

In this eighth control example, the frame button 22 is configured to vibrate when the player operates the frame button 22, and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 can be varied in three stages. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special pattern or the pre-determination result of the special pattern is favorable to the player, the frame button 22 is configured to vibrate with a larger vibration amount. In addition, the vibration means (SW motor) for vibrating the frame button 22 is configured to be controlled by the vibration control means (SW motor control device) so as to be driven when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed.

As a result, the player cannot know whether the frame button 22 will vibrate or the amount of vibration if it does vibrate unless he or she presses the frame button 22, which makes it possible to motivate the player to press the frame button 22. Furthermore, this control example is configured so that a vibration amount corresponding to multiple presses of the frame button is specified as a single vibration amount scenario (vibration type), and the more times the frame button 22 is pressed, the more likely it is that the frame button 22 will vibrate with a larger vibration amount. This makes it possible to motivate the player to press the frame button 22 multiple times.

In this eighth control example, when the voice lamp control device 113 sets a variation pattern for the variation display based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 543), it is configured to also set whether or not to have an effect (operation effect) that causes the frame button 22 to be operated, and the type of operation effect. Then, when a special effect (part of the operation effect) that causes the frame button 22 to vibrate is set, a vibration amount scenario (vibration type) is set based on the special effect selection table 222fb when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the vibration operation of the frame button 22 according to the set vibration type is executed.

As shown in FIG. 531(a), the special effect selection table 222fb is for the case where a winning combination is included in the reserved special chart, and when the effect counter value is in the range of "0 to 79", "Vibe A" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type), when the effect counter value is in the range of "80 to 139", "Vibe B" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type), when the effect counter value is in the range of "140 to 175", "Vibe C" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type), and when the effect counter value is in the range of "176 to 198", "Vibe D" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type).

In addition, when there are no winnings (only misses) in the reserved special chart, and the performance counter value is in the range of "0 to 49", "Vibe B" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type), when it is in the range of "50 to 90", "Vibe C" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type), and when it is in the range of "91 to 198", "Vibe D" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type).

Next, referring to FIG. 531(b), the detailed contents of each vibration type (vibration amount scenario) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb will be explained. As shown in FIG. 531(b), in this eighth control example, four vibration types (vibration A to vibration D) can be set, and a vibration amount corresponding to the number of operations (number of pushes) of the frame button 22 is defined for each vibration type.

Specifically, for the vibration type "Vibe A," "none (no vibration)" is specified for the first push and "strong" for the second to fourth pushes; for "Vibe B," "weak" is specified for the first push, "medium" for the second push, and "strong" for the third and fourth pushes; for "Vibe C," "none (no vibration)" is specified for the first push, "weak" for the second push, "medium" for the third push, and "strong" for the fourth push; and for "Vibe D," "weak" is specified for the first push, and "medium" for the second to fourth pushes.

In this way, the amount of vibration when the frame button 22 is operated varies depending on the vibration type that has been set, and the amount of vibration can be varied depending on the number of pushes, allowing the player to enjoy wondering at what amount the frame button 22 will vibrate the next time he or she presses the frame button 22. This allows the player to actively participate in the operation presentation, enhancing the presentation effect.

In the eighth control example, the vibration amount specified for each vibration type is configured to increase (not decrease) as the number of pushes increases, but this is not limited to the above and the vibration amount may be configured to decrease. In this case, if the special chart change being executed is a jackpot change, or if there is winning information indicating a jackpot win in the reserved special chart, it is preferable to configure the vibration amount of the frame button 22 to tend to decrease midway through the special performance. This makes it possible to provide the player with a special feeling when the vibration amount decreases.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, regardless of which vibration type is set, the vibration amount is set for a specific number of pushes (4 pushes), but this is not limited to this, and the number of pushes for which the vibration amount is set may be different depending on the vibration type.

Although detailed explanation will be omitted, in this eighth control example, the same operation presentation as the normal operation presentation (a presentation that has the player operate the frame button 22 multiple times according to the course of the changing display (reach change)) is configured to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the frame button operation a prescribed number of times (four times) simply by operating the frame button 22 in accordance with the presentation (operation presentation) of the changing display executed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, this eighth control example also has a display effect dedicated to special effects. This display effect dedicated to special effects executes an effect in which the display mode can be stepped up in stages (up to four stages) during a specific period within the special chart change period (for example, 10 seconds from 2 to 12 seconds after the special chart change begins). This effect is configured with an effect that can suggest that the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 is variable (increased) when the frame button 22 is pressed.

By using such a special effect, the player can be made to actively operate the frame button 22 while expecting the vibration of the frame button 22 to become even greater. In addition, even if a vibration amount scenario (vibration type) that causes the vibration of the frame button 22 to become even greater is set, it is possible to prevent the special effect from ending without vibrating the frame button 22 at the maximum vibration amount specified for the set vibration type.

In this case, the presentation mode of the display effect dedicated to the above-mentioned special effects may be configured to be set based on the lottery results of the variation, rather than just the vibration type that has been set, and a presentation pattern may be set in which the display mode steps up even though the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is not changed.

Here, the definition of the vibration amount of the frame button 22 will be explained. In this control example, the vibration amount is defined based on the magnitude of the amplitude of the "frequency (number of vibrations per unit time)," "amplitude (amplitude)," and "period (period)," which are definitions indicating the strength of the vibration. Therefore, the amplitude of the vibration felt when pressing the frame button 22 varies depending on the magnitude of the vibration amount, allowing the player to easily identify the variable state of the vibration amount.

The special effects described above may be configured so that the player can feel different vibrations when the frame button 22 is pressed multiple times, and any method that changes the vibration mode (amplitude, frequency, duration of vibration, period from pressing the frame button 22 until vibration starts, etc.) may be used, or a combination of each may be used. Also, multiple vibration means (motors, etc.) that can impart vibration to one operating means (frame button 22) may be provided, and the position of the vibration source that vibrates the frame button 22 may be changed by controlling the drive of the multiple vibration means, or the drive start timing of each vibration means may be made different to change the vibration mode felt by the player. Also, the player may be able to select the variable content of the vibration mode.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, the frame button 22 is configured not to vibrate unless the player presses the frame button 22 when a special effect is set, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the frame button 22 may be configured to vibrate with an amount of vibration that is smaller than the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 set for the special effect. By lightly vibrating the frame button 22 in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player that a special effect is currently being performed.

The vibration pattern data 222fc is a data table that stores the contents of each vibration type (Vibe A to Vibe D) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb. The contents have been described above in the explanation of the special effect selection table 222fb, so they will be omitted here.

Next, referring to FIG. 530(b), the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first control example described above. As described above, the RAM 223 in this eighth control example differs from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that it adds a next background change flag 223fa, a pending performance execution flag 223fb, a pending performance counter 2223fc, and a SW special performance counter 223fd.

The next background change flag 223fa is a flag for indicating that the background change condition for changing the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is satisfied, and is set to ON when the background change condition is satisfied. In this control example, even when a background change operation is performed to change the background mode, the timing of the background change is configured to differ depending on the timing of the background change operation. In such a case, a time lag occurs between the timing when the background change condition is satisfied by performing the background change operation and the timing when the background (background mode) actually changes (transitions). Therefore, the next background change flag 223fa is configured to be set to ON in order to temporarily store that the background change condition has been satisfied.

Specifically, in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 548), if it is determined that the state of change of the special pattern (the speed of the change display of the third pattern) at the time when the background change operation (operation on the frame button 22) is executed is not changing at high speed (Z2964: No in FIG. 548), it is set to on (see Z2965 in FIG. 548). Then, in the change stop process 8 (see Z2242 in FIG. 539), which is executed when a stop command indicating the stop of the special pattern change is received, if it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2266: Yes in FIG. 539), it is then determined whether or not there is a reserved memory of the special pattern (Z2267 in FIG. 539), and if it is determined that there is no reserved memory (Z2267 in FIG. 539: No), the background change is executed at the timing when the special pattern change is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined that a special chart is reserved (Z2267 in Figure 539: Yes), a background change will be performed when the next special chart change begins (see Z2258 in Figure 538).

The reserved performance in progress flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that the 8 reserved performance (see FIG. 526) is being executed, and is set to ON when the 8 reserved performance is executed. Then, when the 8 reserved performance ends, it is set to OFF (see Z2534 in FIG. 543). Although detailed illustration is omitted, while this reserved performance in progress flag 223fb is set to ON, even if the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter (the sum of the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) reaches the upper limit number (8), a lottery is not executed to determine whether to execute a new 8 reserved performance.

Specifically, in the reserved ball count control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 540), if it is determined that the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter is 8 (Z2473 in FIG. 540: Yes), it is then determined whether the reserved performance execution flag 223fb is set to on, and if it is determined that it is not set to on (off), the processes Z2474 and Z2475 in FIG. 540 are executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the 8 reserved performance from continuing for an unnecessarily long time, and therefore the value of the 8 reserved performance can be increased. In addition, it is also possible to configure it so that, different from the configuration of this control example, when the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter reaches the upper limit number (8) again during the 8 reserved performance, a lottery is performed to determine whether to execute a new 8 reserved performance. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that the lottery to determine whether to execute a new 8 reserved performance is different from the lottery to determine whether to execute the initial 8 reserved performance. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the new 8 reserved performance so that it is more likely to be executed when a jackpot is included in the target reserved performance than the initial 8 reserved performance. This can further increase the expectation of a jackpot when the 8 reserved performance is executed for a special pattern variation that is more than 8. In addition, it is possible to make the player eager to play again to save reserved balls up to the upper limit number even during the 8 reserved performance.

The reserved effect counter 223fc is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated to a different value each time the main processing (see FIG. 536) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (every millisecond). The value of this reserved effect counter 223fc is obtained when the reserved number control processing (see Z3343 in FIG. 540) is performed by referring to the 8 reserved effect selection table 222fa to determine whether or not to execute an 8 reserved effect (see Z2474 in FIG. 540).

The SW special effect counter 223fd is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which a special effect is set, and when a special effect is set (see Z2944) in the SW effect processing (see Z2841 in FIG. 547), a value corresponding to the set special effect is set (see Z2945 in FIG. 547). Here, in this control example, regardless of the type of special effect set, a special effect equivalent to four frame button operations is set, so the SW special effect counter 223fd is set to a value of 4.

Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during a special effect, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is decremented by 1 (see Z2948 in FIG. 547), and the SW motor data is set to execute an effect corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after the decrement (see Z2947 in FIG. 547).

The recovery state storage area 223fe is a memory area for storing the remaining time information of the recovery fluctuation (the special fluctuation in which the power was cut off during execution) contained in the recovery command received from the main control unit 110 when recovering from a power outage state. Specifically, it is used in the process (Z2281 in FIG. 541) for storing the remaining fluctuation time information contained in the received recovery command in the fluctuation recovery process (Z2252 in FIG. 541).

In this control example, the display mode (variation display mode) after the end of the recovery process is set based on the remaining variation time of the special pattern variation stored in the recovery state storage area 223fe after the power is restored. A detailed explanation will be given later, but if the remaining variation time after the end of the recovery process is longer than a predetermined time (2 seconds), the variation display of the third pattern corresponding to that remaining variation time is executed, and if it is less than the predetermined time (2 seconds), the recovery process screen is configured to continue to be displayed. This allows the special pattern variation after the power is restored to be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

The recovery fluctuation in progress flag 223ff is a flag for indicating that the special chart fluctuation that was interrupted when the power was turned off is fluctuating (recovery fluctuation) after the power is restored, and is set to on when recovery fluctuation is in progress. This recovery fluctuation in progress flag 223ff is set on (Z2284 in FIG. 541) when a value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is set in the fluctuation recovery process (see FIG. 541) (see Z2283 in FIG. 541), and is set to off (Z2296 in FIG. 542) after a display command corresponding to the recovery fluctuation is set.

The remaining change time counter 223fg is a counter for counting the remaining time of the change of the third pattern. The value of this remaining change time counter 223fg is set to a value corresponding to the change time of the change pattern acquired in the change display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) (Z2511 in FIG. 543), and is decremented by 1 when it is determined that the value set in the counter update process (see FIG. 552) is 0 or greater (Z2861: Yes).

The high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is a flag for indicating whether the fluctuation of the third symbol is in a high-speed fluctuation period, and is set to on when the fluctuation is in a high-speed fluctuation period. In the counter update process (see Z2176 in FIG. 552), this high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is set to on when the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg indicates a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2863 in FIG. 552), and is set to off when it does not indicate a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2865 in FIG. 552). In addition, in the sensor input process 8 (see Z2842 in FIG. 549) executed in the frame button input monitoring/performance process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545), the touch sensor 2900 is operated (determined to be on) (Z2825 in FIG. 549: Yes) and the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is switched to a low speed, and is also set to off (Z2833 in Z549). In addition, the setting status of the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is referenced when determining the timing to switch background modes during the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 548) (see Z2964 in FIG. 549).

The special operation flag 223fi is a flag for indicating that the player has performed a special operation using the operating means (left button 22b, right button 22c), and is set to on when the player has performed a special operation. Specifically, when the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed (Z2851 in FIG. 546: Yes) during the left and right button input process (see Z2843 in FIG. 546) executed in the frame button input monitoring/performance process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545), and the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is off during the fluctuation of the special pattern (Z2853 in FIG. 546: No), the special operation flag 223fi is set to on (Z2855 in FIG. 546).

Then, in the sensor input process 8 (see Z2842 in FIG. 549), the setting status is determined (see Z2831 in FIG. 549), and if it is set to on (Z2831 in FIG. 549: Yes), the mode identification process (Z2968 in FIG. 549) is executed without executing the process related to the touch effect. In this control example, while the player continues to operate (press) the left button 22b and the right button 22c, the special operation flag 223fi is set to on, and when the operation of the left button 22b and the right button 22c is stopped, the special operation flag 223fi is set to off (see Z2857 in FIG. 546). In other words, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated while the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed, the currently set background mode is notified without changing the presentation mode of the touch effect based on the operation result.

As explained with reference to FIG. 517, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the left button 22b and the right button 22c are arranged at a distance (approximately 3 cm) that allows the player to operate them simultaneously with one hand. Therefore, while operating the left button 22b and the right button 22c with one hand, the touch sensor 2900 can be operated with the other hand. Note that the layout relationship of each operation means is not limited to the layout relationship of this control example, and for example, the left button 22b, the right button 22c, and the touch sensor 2900 may be configured to be operable simultaneously with one hand, or the left button 22b and the right button 22c may be configured to be operable with the hand that is operating the operation handle, and the touch sensor 2900 may be operated with the other hand.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the eighth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this eighth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 532 and Fig. 533. In this eighth control example, the contents defined in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 and the contents defined in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 are different from those in the above-mentioned first control example, but the rest is the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 532 is a schematic diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this eighth control example. As shown in Figure 532, the work RAM 233 in this eighth control example differs from the first control example described above in that an 8-item display setting flag 233fa, a display 8-item effect counter 233fb, a display pending ball count storage area 233fc, and a display effect counter 233fd have been added to the work RAM 233 in this eighth control example.

The 8-piece display setting flag 233fa is a flag to indicate that the 8-piece reserved effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the 8-piece reserved effect is being executed. While this 8-piece display setting flag 233fa is set to ON, the remaining number of reserved patterns (reserved patterns for effect) that are the target of the 8-piece reserved effect, rather than the number of reserved balls of the special pattern, is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 521(b)) of the secondary display area Ds of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 528). This makes it possible to easily notify the player of the execution period of the 8-piece reserved effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) that is executed across multiple special pattern changes.

In the eighth control example, the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the subject of the eight reserved effect and the number of reserved symbols for effect are displayed in a synchronized manner, but it is sufficient to display the number of reserved symbols for effect so that the execution period of the eight reserved effect can be clearly notified to the player. For example, the number of reserved symbols for effect can be set according to the number of times the third symbol stops or temporarily stops during the eight reserved effect, or one reserved symbol for effect can be set for two or more special symbol variations. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the progress of the eight reserved effect (which reserved symbol is currently being displayed as a variation).

The display 8-piece effect counter 233fb is a counter for measuring the number of reserved symbols for effect displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 521(b)) of the secondary display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the 8-piece reserved effect. In this control example, the number of reserved symbols for effect is variable in accordance with the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the subject of the 8-piece reserved effect, so the counter value is set to 8 (see Z5707 in FIG. 555) in the 8-piece display setting process (see Z3493 in FIG. 555), which is executed when a display 8-piece effect reserved command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

Then, in the variation pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 554), which is executed when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the counter value is subtracted (Z3522 in FIG. 554), and it is determined whether the counter value after subtraction is 0 (Z3524 in FIG. 554). When the value of the display 8-piece performance counter 233fb becomes 0, all reserved patterns that are the subject of the 8-piece reserved performance have been used, so the 8-piece display setting flag 233fa is set to off to end the display of the reserved patterns for the performance (see Z3525 in FIG. 554), and the reserved patterns are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b in the reserved display process (see Z3495 in FIG. 556) (see FIG. 528). As a result, when the last special pattern variation that is the subject of the 8-piece reserved performance is executed, the reserved pattern indicating the reserved ball number of the special pattern is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so that when the 8-piece reserved performance ends, the player can be easily informed of how many reserved balls of the special pattern have been accumulated.

The display reserved ball count storage area 233fc is a storage area for storing the current number of reserved balls for the special chart on the display control device 114 side, and when a display reserved ball count command output from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the received command is stored.

The display effect counter 233fd is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated to a different value each time the display control device 114 command judgment process (see Z3302 in FIG. 553) is executed. The value of this display effect counter 233fd is obtained when the hold number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 540) is used to determine whether or not to execute an 8-reserve effect by referring to the 8-reserve selection table 222fa (see Z2474 in FIG. 540).

Next, the contents of the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 in this eighth control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 532, the NAND type flash memory 234a in this eighth control example differs from the NAND type flash memory 234a in the first control example described above in that an eight-stage performance scenario selection table 234a3 has been added.

The 8-piece presentation scenario selection table 234a3 is a data table for selecting the presentation result of the 8-piece reserved presentation, and is referenced when selecting the presentation mode of the 8-piece reserved presentation based on the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the subject of the 8-piece reserved presentation and the lottery result of the special symbol.

Here, the detailed contents of the 8-piece performance scenario selection table 234a3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 533. FIG. 533 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the 8-piece performance scenario selection table 234a3. As described above with reference to FIG. 526 to FIG. 528, in this 8th control example, when the 8-piece reserved performance is executed and the special chart change starts, the displayed treasure chest in the execution area Ds1a is opened and a suggestion state for showing the lottery result of the change is displayed, and the suggestion state is selected with reference to the 8-piece performance scenario selection table 234a3.

In this 8-piece performance scenario selection table 234a3, when the corresponding variation result (the result of the lottery for the currently executed special pattern variation) is a win (jackpot) and the value of the displayed 8-piece performance counter 233fb is "7 to 4," i.e., when 4 to 7 reserve patterns for performance imitating treasure chests are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the suggested mode "rainbow" is defined for the value of the displayed performance counter 233fd in the range of "0 to 50," the suggested mode "red" is defined for the range of "51 to 90," the suggested mode "blue" is defined for the range of "91 to 150," and "white" is defined for the range of "151 to 198."

In addition, when the value of the display 8-piece effect counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 treasure chest-like reserved effect symbols are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the suggested mode "rainbow" is defined in the range of the value of the display effect counter 233fd "0 to 89", the suggested mode "red" is defined in the range of "90 to 149", the suggested mode "blue" is defined in the range of "150 to 179", and "white" is defined in the range of "180 to 198".

On the other hand, if the variation result (the lottery result of the special pattern variation executed this time) is a miss and the value of the display 8-piece performance counter 233fb is "7 to 4", that is, if 4 to 7 reserved symbols for performance imitating treasure chests are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the suggested mode "red" is specified in the range of the display performance counter 233fd from "0 to 39", the suggested mode "blue" is specified in the range of "40 to 149", and "white" is specified in the range of "150 to 198". Also, if the value of the display 8-piece performance counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, if 0 to 3 reserved symbols for performance imitating treasure chests are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the suggested mode "red" is specified in the range of the display performance counter 233fd from "0 to 59", the suggested mode "blue" is specified in the range of "60 to 159", and "white" is specified in the range of "160 to 198".

As explained above, in this eighth control example, the suggestion mode displayed as the 8-reservation performance has a win suggestion mode "rainbow" that can be selected when the lottery result is a win, so when the suggestion mode "rainbow" is displayed, the player is notified of the lottery result that is favorable to him/her at the timing when the special chart fluctuation begins, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In addition, the lower the value of the display 8-piece effect counter 233fb, i.e., the more the 8-piece reserved effect progresses, the more likely it is that various colors will be displayed as indications of the 8-piece reserved effect. This allows you to enjoy the 8-piece reserved effect, which is a continuous effect that is executed across multiple special chart changes, all the way to the end without getting bored.

In the eighth control example, when an eight-reserved effect is executed, a reserved pattern (treasure chest) for the effect is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b to indicate the target special pattern change, and when the target special pattern change for the effect is executed, the treasure chest displayed in the execution area Ds1a opens and displays a suggestive pattern to suggest the lottery result of the change. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the reserved pattern (treasure chest) for the effect is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the color of the displayed treasure chest may be set based on the results of a pre-determination for each reserved pattern.

Specifically, it is preferable to configure the system so that multiple treasure chest colors can be set so that they are more likely to be selected when the winning information corresponding to each reserved symbol contains information indicating a jackpot, compared to when the information indicating a jackpot is not included. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the special symbol change that is executed during the eight reserved symbols performance, even before the special symbol change is executed.

In addition, when a combination of an effect (pre-reading effect) that changes the state of the reserved pattern for the effect (color of the treasure chest) displayed in the waiting area Ds1b and an effect (the relevant variable effect) that changes the display state of the contents of the treasure chest displayed in the active area Ds1a is executed, it is preferable to set the variable state so that the player focuses on the relevant variable effect executed after the pre-reading effect that is executed first. In this case, when setting the performance state (color of the treasure chest) of the pre-reading effect, the performance state of the relevant variable effect corresponding to the reserved pattern for which the performance state is set may also be configured to be set in advance, or when selecting the relevant variable effect, the relevant variable effect may be selected based on the performance state of the pre-reading effect set for the reserved pattern corresponding to the current relevant variable effect. This allows the performance states of multiple effects (pre-reading effect, the relevant variable effect) executed at different times for one reserved pattern (winning information) to be related, and consecutive effects can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

<Regarding control process by main control device in eighth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 534, the start-up process 8 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 in the eighth control example is powered on will be described. FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing this start-up process 8. The start-up process 8 in this eighth control example differs from the start-up process in the first control example in that a process of setting a fluctuation return command indicating the remaining time of the special pattern fluctuation being executed (Z951) is added after executing the process of Z910. In this eighth control example, a command indicating the remaining remaining time of the return fluctuation is set. The other processes are the same as the start-up process in the first control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control process by the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 535 to Fig. 552, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described. In this eighth control example, in comparison with the above-mentioned first control example, the start-up processing (see Fig. 394) is changed to start-up processing 8 (see Fig. 534), the main processing (see Fig. 395) is changed to main processing 8 (see Fig. 536), the command judgment processing (2113 in Fig. 396) is changed to command judgment processing 8 (Z2174 in Fig. 537), the fluctuation pattern reception processing (Z2202 in Fig. 397) is changed to fluctuation pattern reception processing 8 (Z2241 in Fig. 538), the fluctuation display setting processing (Z2114 in Fig. 406) is changed to fluctuation display setting processing 8 (Z2175 in Fig. 543), the reserved number display update processing (Z2106 in Fig. 395) is changed to reserved number display update processing 8 (Z2106 in Fig. 543), and the like are changed to the above-mentioned first control example. The main difference is that the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2171 in Fig. 44), and the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107 in Fig. 409) have been changed to frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 (Z2172 in Fig. 545), and the following new processes have been added: variable return processing (Z2252 in Fig. 541), display start processing (Z2245 in Fig. 542), left and right button input processing (Z2843 in Fig. 546), SW performance processing (Z2841 in Fig. 547), background change processing (Z2949 in Fig. 548), mode identification processing (Z2968 in Fig. 550), lamp setting processing (Z2173 in Fig. 551), and counter update processing (Z2176 in Fig. 552). All other processes are the same, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 535, the start-up process (see FIG. 535) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described. This start-up process differs from the start-up process (see FIG. 394) of the first control example described above in that the process when a status command is received (Z2012, Z2013 in FIG. 394) has been deleted. It also differs in that the content of the process executed in the initial setting (Z2001) has been changed. As the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the start-up process (see FIG. 535) is executed, the processes Z2001 to Z2011 are executed as in the first control example described above, and this process ends. Here, the initial setting (see Z2001) in the eighth control example will be explained with respect to the differences from the first control example described above. In this eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 520, if a special chart change is being executed during the period in which the initial setting is being executed, the BGM for the special chart change is output. In other words, in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 535), a process is executed to read the game information at the time of power off, and if it is determined that the game information at the time of power off read by this process is during a special chart change, an audio change command is set to output the BGM for the special chart change from the audio output device 226.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this eighth control example, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko machine 10, power is supplied from an internal power source provided inside the sound lamp control device 113, and the game information at the time of the power outage (whether or not there is a special chart change, the lottery results for that change, the background music for the change, the remaining change time, etc.) is temporarily stored in the display memory area. This makes it possible to read out the game information stored in the display memory area during the initial settings (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 535).

Next, the contents of main processing 8 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 536. FIG. 536 is a schematic diagram showing main processing 8 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example.

In the main processing 8 of this eighth control example, compared to the main processing of the first control example described above (see FIG. 395), the pending item display update processing (Z2106 in FIG. 395) is replaced with pending item number update processing 8 (Z2171 in FIG. 544), the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107 in FIG. 395) is replaced with frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 (Z2172 in FIG. 544), and the command judgment processing (Z211 in FIG. 395) is replaced with command judgment processing (Z212 in FIG. 544). 3) in place of command judgment process 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 537), and in place of variable display setting process 8 (Z2175 in FIG. 543) in place of variable display setting process (Z2114 in FIG. 395), and in that the short-term winning management process (Z2111 in FIG. 395) and the pending effect management process during reach (Z2112 in FIG. 394) have been deleted and a lamp setting process (see Z2173 in FIG. 536) has been added. All other processes are the same, and the same elements will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When main processing 8 (see FIG. 536) is executed, first, the processes Z2101 to Z2105 are executed, which are the same as the main processing of the first control example described above (see FIG. 395). Then, when processing Z2105 is completed, next, pending number display update processing 8 is executed (Z2171). The details of this pending number display update processing 8 (Z2171) will be described later with reference to FIG. 544. When processing Z2171 is completed, next, frame button input monitoring/performance processing 8 is executed (Z2172). The details of this frame button input monitoring/performance processing 8 (Z2172) will be described later with reference to FIG. 545.

After completing the Z2172 process, the processes Z2108 to Z2110 are executed, which are the same as the main process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 395), and then the lamp setting process is executed (Z2173). This lamp setting process (Z2173) is a process for setting the light emission state of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d provided on the upper side of the variable display unit 80. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 551. After completing the Z2173 process, the counter update process (Z2176) is executed. The details of this counter update process (Z2176) will be described later with reference to FIG. 552.

When processing Z2176 is completed, or when it is determined that one millisecond or more has not elapsed in processing Z2101 (Z2101: No), command determination process 8 is executed (Z2174), and then variable display setting process 8 is executed (Z2175). Then, the same processes Z2115 to Z2119 as in the first control example described above are executed. Note that the details of command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described later with reference to FIG. 537, and the details of variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described later with reference to FIG. 543.

Next, referring to FIG. 537, the contents of command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described. FIG. 537 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 8 (Z2174). This command determination process 8 (Z2174) differs from the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 396) in that the contents of the process executed when a fluctuation pattern command and a reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110 are different, a process (fluctuation stop process 8) executed when a stop command output from the main control device 110 is received is added, a process executed when a display rise command output from the display control device 114 is received is added, and a process executed when a fluctuation return command is received is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

Note that in the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 396), the process executed when the stop type command shown in the figure is received (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 396) is the same process executed in this eighth control example, but for ease of explanation, it will be assumed that the process is executed in response to other commands (Z2261 in FIG. 537).

When command determination process 8 (Z2174) is executed, it is first determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201: Yes), variation pattern reception process 8 is then executed (Z2241), and this process is terminated. The details of this variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described later with reference to FIG. 538, but it differs from the variation pattern reception process of the first control example described above (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) in that it is configured to execute processing for a background change at the start of the variation.

Returning to FIG. 537, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of Z2201 that the variation pattern command has not been received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (Z2203). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes), variation stop processing 8 is executed (Z2242), and this processing is terminated. This variation stop processing 8 (Z2242) is a process for setting the stop display of the third pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and a process for executing a background change when the special pattern is stopped, and the details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 539.

If it is determined in the process of Z2203 that a stop command has not been received (Z2203: No), it is then determined whether a reserved ball count command has been received (Z2205). If it is determined that a reserved ball count command has been received (Z2205: Yes), the reserved number control process is executed (Z2243) and this process is terminated. The details of this reserved number control process (Z2243) will be described later with reference to FIG. 540.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 2205 that the reserved ball count command has not been received (Z2205: No), the process executes the processes Z2207 and Z2208, which are the same as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 396), and then it is determined whether a fluctuation return command has been received (Z2251). If it is determined that a fluctuation return command has been received (Z2251: Yes), the fluctuation return process is executed (Z2252) and this process is terminated. The details of this fluctuation return process (Z2252) will be described later with reference to FIG. 541.

On the other hand, if the process of Z2251 determines that the variable return command has not been received (Z2251: No), then it is determined whether a display start command has been received (Z2244). This display start command is set when the display control device 114 completes the initial setting process after power-on, and is output from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a command output process (not shown) executed by the display control device 114.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2244 that a display start-up command has been received, i.e., the initial setting processing of the display control device 114 has been completed and it is possible to display any image data on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 based on the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 (Z2244: Yes), the display start-up processing is executed (Z2245) and this processing is terminated. The details of this display start-up processing (Z2245) will be described later with reference to FIG. 542.

In this Z2245 process, a process is executed to read out the game information (audio data) stored in the display memory area when the power is turned off, and output the audio data to the audio output device 226. This allows the audio output device 226 to output audio based on the audio data stored in the display memory area in accordance with the timing at which the display content displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 switches from the initial screen to the normal screen, as described above with reference to FIG. 520.

In this control example, the game information stored in the display memory area when the power is turned off can include information indicating whether or not the special chart is changing (special chart changing information) and information indicating the type of sound (BGM) being played while the special chart is changing (BGM type information).When setting sound data in the processing of Z2245, the special chart changing information and BGM type information are read, and the start-up sound data is set based on the read information.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2244 that a display start command has not been received (Z2244: No), processing according to other commands (including processing when a stop type command is received) is executed (Z2261), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be explained with reference to FIG. 538. FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing the contents of fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241). This fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) differs from the fluctuation pattern reception process of the first control example described above (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) in that the processes Z2225 to Z2231 have been deleted and a background change process at the start of the fluctuation has been added. As the other processing contents are the same, the same reference symbols are used for the same processing contents and detailed explanations are omitted.

When the variation pattern receiving process 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 538) is executed, the same processes Z2221 to Z2224 as the variation pattern receiving process of the first control example described above (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) are executed, and then it is determined whether the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2256). If it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2256: Yes), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode memory area 223i (Z2257), a display switch command to the variation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2258), the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2259), and this process is terminated.

In other words, when a background change operation is performed outside the third pattern high speed change period during special pattern change, and the change pattern reception process 8 (see Z2241 in FIG. 538) is executed with the next background change flag 223fa set to on, the background mode is switched based on the background change operation performed during the previous special pattern change. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2256 that the next background change flag 223fa is not set to on (is set to off) (Z2256: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) will be explained with reference to FIG. 539. FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242). When the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) is executed, first, the stop display of the third pattern is set (Z2265).

Next, it is determined whether the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2266), and if it is determined that it is set to on (Z2266: Yes), it is determined whether there is a special pattern reserved (Z2267). In this process, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a and the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b are read out to make the determination. In the process of Z2267, if it is determined that there is no special pattern reserved (Z2267: No), even though the condition for executing a background change with the next special pattern change is met, the next special pattern change is not executed. Therefore, in order to execute a background change when the current special pattern change is stopped, the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode memory area 223i (Z2268), a display switching command for the change pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2269), the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2270), and the process proceeds to Z2271.

On the other hand, if the process of Z2266 determines that the next background change flag 223fa is not set to on (Z2266: No), or if the process of Z2267 determines that a special chart is reserved (Z2267: Yes), the process of Z2268 to Z2270 is skipped and the process moves to Z2271, since a background change is not performed at the timing of executing this process (timing when the special chart stops changing).

In the processing of Z2271, it is determined whether the return fluctuation flag 223ff is on (Z2271), i.e., whether the current fluctuation is a return fluctuation. If it is determined that the return fluctuation flag is on (Z2271: Yes), the return fluctuation flag 223ff is set to off (Z2272), the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is cleared to 0 (Z2273), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223ff is not on (Z2271: No), the current fluctuation is not a return fluctuation, so the processing of Z2272 and Z2273 is skipped and this processing ends.

As described above, in this control example, if the next background change flag 223fa is on and the conditions for executing the next special chart change are not met (if there is no special chart reserved at the time the current special chart change stops), the background change is executed at the time the current special chart change stops, so that the new background mode can be provided quickly to players who wish to change the background.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the above-described control example, for example, the next background change flag 223fa may be kept on until the next special chart change is executed. In this case, a predetermined effective period (for example, one minute) may be set as the period until the next special chart change is started, and if the next special chart change is not executed within the predetermined effective period, the next background change flag 223fa may be set to off.

By configuring it in this way, for example, even if the previous player performed a background change operation and ended play with the next background change flag 223fa set to ON, it is possible to prevent a background change from being performed immediately after the next player starts playing.

Next, the contents of the reserved number control process (Z2243) will be explained with reference to FIG. 540. FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved number control process (Z2243). In this reserved number control process (Z2243), the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for managing the number of reserved balls for the special chart based on the information contained in the reserved ball number command received from the main control device 110, and executes an effect (8 reserved balls effect) whose execution condition is that the number of reserved balls for the special chart reaches a specified number.

In the reserved number control process (Z2243), first, the reserved ball number of the special pattern is extracted from the received reserved ball number command and stored in the corresponding special pattern reserved number counter (special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) (Z2471), and a reserved ball number command for display corresponding to the value of the special pattern reserved number counter stored in the process of Z2471 is set (Z2472). Then, it is determined whether the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter (the sum of the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) is the upper limit value of 8 (Z2473).

If the processing of Z2473 determines that the counter value (number of reserved special balls) is 8 (Z2473: Yes), the value of the performance counter 223h is obtained (Z2474), and the lottery result is obtained from the 8-reserved lottery table 222fa based on the obtained value of the performance counter 223h (Z2475), and it is determined whether the lottery result indicates that an 8-reserved performance will be executed (Z2476).

If it is determined that the lottery result indicates that an 8-item reserved performance will be executed (Z2476: Yes), the corresponding 8-item reserved performance is set (Z2477), an 8-item reserved performance command for display is set (Z2478), the reserved performance execution flag 223fb is set to on (Z2479), the reserved performance counter 223fc is set to 8, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2476 that the lottery result indicates that an 8-item reserved performance will not be executed (Z2476: No), the 8-item reserved performance will not be executed, so the processing of Z2477 to Z2480 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation return process (Z2252) will be explained with reference to FIG. 541. FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation return process (Z2252). This fluctuation return process (Z2252) executes a process to update the remaining time of the return fluctuation based on the return fluctuation command received from the main control unit 110.

In the change return process (Z2252), first, the remaining change time information included in the change return command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the return status storage area 223fe (Z2281). Next, it is determined whether the remaining change time is 0, that is, whether the change is in the recovery state (Z2282). If it is determined that the remaining change time is not 0 (Z2282: No), a value corresponding to the remaining change time counter 223fg is set (Z2283), and the recovery change flag 223ff is set to on (Z2284). Next, BGM information indicating the playback position of the BGM of the special chart change at the time when the power failure occurred is read from the backup area of the RAM 223 (Z2285), and the BGM of the special chart change is set to start from the playback position indicated by the read BGM information (Z2286), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, the remaining change time is 0 in the process of Z2282. In other words, if it is determined that it is time to end the return fluctuation (Z2282: Yes), this process ends.

By executing this change return process (see FIG. 541), if the change display is in progress when the power is restored, the BGM for the special chart change can be resumed from the playback position of the BGM at the time the power was cut off. As a result, if the power is cut off momentarily while the special chart change is in progress (such as when a so-called momentary power outage occurs), the BGM after the power is restored can be output from the continuation of the BGM at the time the power was cut off. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the lottery situation at the time of the power cut is maintained as it was even after the power is cut off. Therefore, even if the power is cut off momentarily (temporarily) during the special chart change, it is possible to prevent the player from having doubts that the special chart change being executed has been discarded, etc., and the player can play with peace of mind.

In the eighth control example, the progress of the BGM output at the time of the power outage is backed up in the voice lamp control device 113, but this is not limited to this. For example, the main control device 110 may be configured to include at least information on the type of variation (variation time) in addition to the remaining variation time information of the special pattern variation being executed in the variation return command. Then, the period during which the BGM has been played (the variation time that has elapsed before the power outage occurred) is calculated from the variation time of the special pattern variation being executed and the remaining variation time information, and the playback position of the BGM at the time the power outage occurred is calculated from the difference with the total playback time of the BGM, thereby specifying the playback position of the BGM when the power is restored. By configuring in this way, it is no longer necessary to provide a backup means in the voice lamp control device 113, so the configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified. Therefore, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the display start-up process (Z2245) will be described with reference to FIG. 542. FIG. 542 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display start-up process (Z2245). In this display start-up process (Z2245), when a display start-up command is received from the display control device 114, that is, when the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed, a process is executed to set a display variation pattern command corresponding to the remaining variation time based on the value of the remaining variation time counter.

In the display start-up process (Z2245), it is first determined whether the return fluctuation flag 223ff is on, i.e., whether the return fluctuation is in progress (Z2291). If it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223ff is not on (Z2291: No), the return fluctuation is not in progress, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223ff is on (Z2291: Yes), the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is read (Z2292), and processing proceeds to Z2293.

After executing the process of Z2292, it is then determined whether the remaining fluctuation time read in the process of Z2292 is 5 seconds or more (Z2293). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 5 seconds or more (Z2293: Yes), a display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set using various display fluctuation patterns contained in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (Z2294), and the set audio data is set to start (Z2295). Next, the return fluctuation flag 223ff is set to off (Z2296), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2293, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not 5 seconds or more (Z2293: No), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is 2 seconds or more (Z2297). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 2 seconds or more (Z2297: Yes), the display fluctuation pattern for normal reach is made to correspond to the remaining fluctuation time, a display fluctuation pattern command is set (Z2298), the processing of Z2295 and Z2296 described above is executed, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2297 that the remaining change time is not 2 seconds or more (Z2297: No), a display command is set to display the recovery screen until the remaining change time has elapsed (Z2299), processing of Z2296 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this eighth control example, the display variation pattern command for the return variation is set in accordance with the remaining variation time, and the audio data is set, so that the result of the return variation can be notified to the player without causing a sense of discomfort. Note that in this eighth control example, the display variation pattern command is set using a variation pattern table that is also specified during return variation, but it is also possible to provide a variation pattern table for return variation, and set the display variation pattern command during return variation using that return variation pattern table. By configuring in this way, more variation patterns can be provided to the player, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be explained with reference to FIG. 543. FIG. 543 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable display setting process 8 (Z2175). This variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) differs from the variable display setting process of the first control example described above (see Z2114 in FIG. 406) in that it adds a control process related to the reserved performance (8 reserved performances) and a process for setting the remaining variation time counter 223fg, but is otherwise the same. Identical elements are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

When the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) is executed, first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223d is set to on (Z2501), and if it is determined that the variable start flag 223d is not set to on (Z2501: No), it skips to the process of Z2505 as in the first control example. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable start flag 223d is set to on (Z2501: Yes), it is next determined whether the value of the reserved performance counter 223fc is greater than 0 (Z2531), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (Z2531: Yes), the value of the reserved performance counter 223fc is decremented by 1 (Z2532), and it is determined whether the value of the reserved performance counter 223fc after the decrement is 0 (Z2533).

If it is determined in the processing of Z2533 that the value of the reserved performance counter 223fc is 0 (Z2533: Yes), this means that the timing for the end of the eight reserved performances has arrived, so the reserved performance execution flag 223fb is set to off (Z2534), and the process proceeds to Z2502, which is the same as the first control example described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2531 that the value of the reserved effect counter 223fc is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2531: No), this means that there are not currently 8 reserved effects, so the processing of Z2532 to Z2534 is skipped and processing proceeds to Z2502.

In addition, in the process of Z2533, if it is determined that the value of the reserved performance counter 223fc is not 0 (Z2533: No), since the 8 reserved performance is being executed and it is not the timing to end the 8 reserved performance, the process of Z2534 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2502. When the process proceeds to Z2502, the process of Z2502 to Z2504, which is the same as the variable display setting process of the first control example described above (see Z2114 in FIG. 406), is executed, and a value corresponding to the variable time of the acquired variable pattern is set to the remaining variable time counter 223ff (Z2511). Then, the process of Z2502 to Z2504, which is the same as the variable display setting process of the first control example described above (see Z2114 in FIG. 406), is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the variable display setting process 8 in this eighth control example (see FIG. 543), when the process of Z2511 is completed, the start of the special chart variable BGM is set (Z2535), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of reserved ball count display update process 8 (Z2171) will be explained with reference to FIG. 544. FIG. 544 is a flowchart showing the contents of reserved ball count display update process 8 (Z2171). In this reserved ball count display update process 8 (Z2171), processing is performed to control the lighting of the reserved LED 900 provided on the game board 13 in a lighting mode that indicates the number of reserved balls with a special pattern.

When the reserved ball count display update process 8 (Z2171) is executed, first, the reserved ball count LEDs 900 corresponding to the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter (special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b) are set to light (Z2631), then a reserved ball count command for display corresponding to the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter (special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b) is set (Z2632), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, in the processing of Z2631, the reserved LED 900 is configured to light up in the same manner in response to the combined value of the reserved ball count for special chart 1 and the reserved ball count for special chart 2. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the reserved LED 900 may be configured to light up in a manner that allows the player to distinguish the reserved ball count for special chart 1 and the reserved ball count for special chart 2. Alternatively, the reserved LED 900 may be configured to light up in response to only the reserved ball count for one of the special charts depending on the current game state.

In addition, in this control example, the reserved LED 900 is configured to always be lit to indicate the reserved balls of the special pattern, but without being limited to this, the reserved LED 900 may be configured to be lit only during periods when certain game conditions are met (for example, periods during which it is difficult to visually confirm the number of reserved balls of the special pattern on the third pattern display device 81, such as periods during which an 8-ball reserved performance is being performed, periods during which a movable part (gimmick) for the performance is moving so that the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 becomes difficult to see, and periods during which a variable display is being performed using the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81).

Next, the contents of frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 (Z2172) will be described with reference to FIG. 545. FIG. 545 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 (Z2172). This frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 (Z2172) differs from the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example described above in that the processing contents executed when the frame button 22 is pressed have been changed, the processing contents executed when the touch sensor 2900 is operated have been changed, and processing executed when the left and right buttons are input has been added, but otherwise it is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

When frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172) is executed, the same processing Z2801 to Z2805 as the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example described above is executed, and if it is determined in the processing Z2805 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2805: No), the processing related to the various effects that are executed when the frame button 22 is pressed is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2843. In the processing Z2843, processing is executed in response to the operation of the left button 22b or the right button 22c (hereinafter referred to as the left and right buttons 22).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2805 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2805: Yes), SW performance processing is executed (Z2841), and then the process proceeds to Z2842. Here, in Z2805, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed if the switch that the frame button 22 comes into contact with when it is pressed continues to output ON for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds). In other words, in this control example, it is configured so that a return period of at least 0.2 seconds is required for the frame button 22 to return to its initial position after the frame button 22 is physically pressed and the switch is turned ON (after the frame button 22 moves to the pressed position), and the frame button 22 is configured to be located in a position where the switch is turned ON for 0.15 seconds of the return operation.

By configuring it in this way, when the switch is turned on based on the physical movement of the frame button 22, the switch remains on for at least 0.15 seconds, so if the on state is detected to continue for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds), it can be determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. Therefore, for example, when an output indicating an on state for a short period (e.g., 0.01 seconds) is generated due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being mistakenly determined to have been pressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 546, the contents of the left and right button input process (Z2843), which is one process within the frame button input monitoring and performance process 8 (Z2172), will be explained. FIG. 546 is a flowchart showing the contents of the left and right button input process (Z2843). In this left and right button input process (Z2843), a process is executed to determine whether the special pattern is changing at a high speed or a low speed, and to switch the operation mode of the left and right buttons 22.

In the left/right button input process (Z2843), first, it is determined whether the left button 22b or the right button 22c has been operated (Z2851). If it is determined that the left/right button 22 has been operated (Z2851: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining change time counter 223fg is 0 or greater, i.e., whether the special pattern is changing (Z2852). If it is determined that the special pattern is changing (Z2852: Yes), it is determined whether the high-speed change flag 223fh is on (Z2853). If it is determined that the high-speed change flag 223fh is on (Z2853: Yes), the volume level is set according to the result of the operation of the left/right button 22 (Z2854), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2853 that the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is off (Z2853: No), the special operation flag 223fi is set to on (Z2855), and this processing ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to change the operation mode of the left and right buttons 22 according to the fluctuation state of the special pattern.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2851 that the left or right button 22 has not been operated (Z2851: No), it is determined whether the special operation flag 223fi is on (Z2856). If it is determined that the special operation flag 223fi is on (Z2856: Yes), the special operation flag 223fi is set to off (Z2857), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2856 that the special operation flag 223fi is off (Z2856: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841) executed in the processing of Z2841 in FIG. 545 will be explained with reference to FIG. 547. FIG. 547 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841). In this SW effect processing (Z2841), control processing related to a special effect in which the frame button 22 vibrates when the frame button 22 is pressed, background change processing in which the background mode is changed by pressing the frame button 22, and processing identical to a portion of the processing in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example described above are executed. Note that processing identical to a portion of the processing in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example described above will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the SW effect processing (Z2841) is executed, it is first determined whether a special effect is set as the SW effect (Z2941). Here, it is determined whether the current timing is one in which a variable pattern including a special effect is set as the SW effect when setting the display variable pattern command in the Z2504 processing of the variable display setting processing (see Z2175 in FIG. 543), and also in which the SW effective time corresponding to the special effect is set in the Z2804 processing of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545).

If it is determined in the processing of Z2941 that it is a special effect (Z2941: Yes), the current operation of the frame button 22 is an operation of the frame button 22 during a special effect, so the control processing for the special effect (Z2942 to Z2947) is executed. First, in Z2942, it is determined whether the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is greater than 0 (Z2942).

The value of this SW special effect counter 223fd is set when a special effect is executed, and the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 0 at the time of the first frame button operation after the special effect is set. If the processing of Z2942 determines that the counter value is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2942: No), the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained (Z2943), and a special effect is set from the special effect selection table 222fb based on the obtained value of the effect counter 223h (Z2944). Then, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set based on the set special effect (Z2945).

In this control example, no matter which special effect is selected, the frame button 22 corresponding to the special effect is operated four times, so in the processing of Z2945, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set to 4.

Next, a special effect command for display corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2946), SW motor data corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2947), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2942 that the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is greater than 0, i.e., that a special effect has already been executed (Z2942: Yes), the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is decremented by 1 (Z2948), and the process is terminated by executing the processes of Z2946 and Z2947 corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after the decrement.

Now, the above-mentioned special effect processing will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 531(b) in the case where a special effect type (vibration type C) is selected. First, when the current variation pattern includes a special effect, the first frame button 22 operation is performed, and the type of special effect (vibration type C) is selected by processing Z2944. Then, by processing Z2945, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set to 4, and by processing Z2447, the amount of vibration (none) corresponding to the first frame button operation for vibration type C is set (see FIG. 531(b)).

In addition, in the processing of Z2946, an operation suggestion display mode (for example, a button display mode imitating the frame button 22 on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and a press suggestion display mode for executing the action of pressing the button display mode) is displayed to encourage the player to operate the next frame button. Here, the above-mentioned operation suggestion display mode is configured to be variably set according to the lottery result corresponding to the current special pattern change and the type of special effect selected, and is configured so that, for example, when a vibration greater than the amount of vibration generated when the current frame button is operated is applied when the next frame button is operated, a display mode emphasizing the operation suggestion is more likely to be displayed than when a large vibration is not applied.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to operate the next frame button. Also, it is configured so that if the result of the current special drawing is a jackpot, a display mode that emphasizes the operation suggestion is more likely to be displayed than if the drawing result is not a jackpot (a miss), and if a vibration greater than the amount of vibration generated when the next frame button is operated is imparted, and if the result of the special drawing is a jackpot, a display mode that most emphasizes the next frame button operation is more likely to be displayed.

This makes it possible to predict the outcome of the current special drawing based on both the operation suggestion displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the amount of vibration generated when the frame button 22 is pressed. Furthermore, because the operation suggestion is emphasized when the amount of vibration generated when the next frame button is operated is greater than the amount of vibration generated when the current frame button is operated, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to press the frame button 22, allowing the player to fully enjoy the set presentation.

Next, when the frame button is operated a second time during a special effect, in the processing of Z2942, it is determined that the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is greater than 0 (is 3) (Z2942; Yes), and the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is decremented by 1. Then, the vibration amount (weak) when the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 2 is set to the SW motor data. Thereafter, the same processing is repeated until the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd becomes 0. Then, when the processing of Z2946 and Z2947 is completed with the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd being 0, the special effect setting is cleared.

In other words, in this control example, when the special effect is set, the special effect is executed until the frame button is operated a predetermined number of times (the value set in the SW special effect counter 223fd). In this control example, since the special effect can be set as a SW effect by corresponding the change pattern to the setting, the execution period of the special effect is configured to fit within one special chart change period, but the special effect may be set regardless of the change pattern setting (regardless of the special chart change period). For example, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a special effect at the start or end of a jackpot game, and the special effect is set based on the determination result. Also, a special effect may be set when the player performs a special operation on the operation means (frame button 22).

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to execute special effects regardless of the set time for the special chart to change. In addition, the vibration amount of the frame button 22 in this case can be configured to vary depending on the result of the special chart lottery during the change, the winning information in the reserve, and the set game status.

Returning to Figure 547, we will continue with the explanation. In the processing of Z2941, if it is determined that the set SW effect is not a special effect (SW effect is not set) (Z2941: No), then the same processing as Z2806, Z2809, Z2810, and Z2811 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see Z2107 in Figure 409) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2806, if it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is not greater than 0 (is 0), that is, if it is determined that the current timing is one in which no SW performance is set (Z2806: No), the current frame button 22 is a background change operation for changing the background mode, so the background change process is executed (Z2949) and this process is terminated.

Now, the contents of the background change process (Z2949) will be explained with reference to FIG. 548. FIG. 548 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background change process (Z2949). This background change process (Z2949) is executed when a background change operation (operation on frame button 22 to change the background mode) is performed, and processing is executed to vary the timing of executing the background change based on the operation timing of the background change operation.

In the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 548), first, it is determined whether the timing when the background change operation is performed is a value of the remaining change time counter 223fg that is greater than 0, i.e., whether it is during the special pattern change period (when the special pattern is changing) (Z2963). If it is determined that the remaining change time counter 223fg is greater than 0 (Z2963: Yes), it is next determined whether the high-speed change flag 223fh is on, i.e., whether it is during the high-speed change period (the period when the change display speed of the third pattern is high speed) (Z2964). Here, if it is determined that it is not during the high-speed change period (medium speed, low speed period, or stopped period) (Z2964: No), since the background mode cannot be changed immediately, the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2965), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2963, if the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter is not 0 or greater (Z2963: No), if it is determined that the current period is not a period of fluctuation of the special chart (for example, a period of waiting for customers) (Z2963: No), or if it is determined in the process of Z2964 that the current period is a period of high speed fluctuation (Z2964: Yes), the background mode can be changed immediately, so the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode memory area 223i (Z2966), a display switch command to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2967), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of sensor input process 8 (Z2842) executed in frame button input monitoring/performance process 8 (Z2172) in FIG. 545 will be explained with reference to FIG. 549. FIG. 549 is a flowchart showing the contents of sensor input process 8 (Z2842). In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), various control processes are executed when the player operates the touch sensor 2900.

This sensor input process 8 (Z2842) differs from the sensor input process (Z2813 in FIG. 410) of the first control example described above in that the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed when the special operation flag 223fi is off, the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0, and the preview performance display is not set, and is otherwise the same. The same parts are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted. In the first control example described above, the operation on the touch sensor 2900 was configured to be effectively determined only when the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is greater than 0, but in this control example, the sensor effective time counter 223s is used to measure the effective period corresponding to the performance set based on the fluctuation pattern among the period during which the operation on the touch sensor 2900 can be effectively determined. Therefore, even if the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0, the operation on the touch sensor 2900 can be effectively determined. In addition, in this eighth control example, a period counter (not shown) is provided, and a period is set during which operations on the touch sensor 2900 are not effectively determined, as in the first control example described above, but a description of this is omitted.

When the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special operation flag 223fi is on (Z2831). If it is determined that the special operation flag 223fi is not on (Z2831: Yes), the same processes Z2821 to Z2829 as the sensor input process of the first control example described above (Z2813 in FIG. 410) are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the special operation flag 223fi is on in the process of Z2831 (Z2831: Yes), or if it is determined that the preview performance display is not set in the process of Z2822 (Z2822: No), a mode identification process is executed (Z2968), and this process is terminated. In this mode identification process (Z2968), as will be described later with reference to FIG. 550, a process is executed to display the current background mode on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2821, if it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0, the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is subtracted (Z2824), and it is determined whether the touch sensor is on (Z2825). If it is determined that the touch sensor is not on (Z2825: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the touch sensor is on (Z2825: Yes), a command is set to cause the third pattern to fluctuate at a slow speed (Z2832), and the high-speed fluctuating flag 223fh is set to off (Z2833). Next, the touch sensor effective time is reset (Z2829), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968) will be described with reference to FIG. 550. FIG. 550 is a flowchart showing the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968). When the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed, it is first determined whether the touch sensor 2900 is on (Z2969). If it is determined that the touch sensor 2900 is on (Z2969: Yes), a mode display command corresponding to the current background mode is set (Z2970), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2969 that the touch sensor 2900 has not been operated (Z2969: No), the processing of Z2970 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In other words, in this eighth control example, the current background mode can be notified to the player simply by operating the touch sensor 2900. By configuring it in this way, it is no longer necessary to constantly display the current background mode within the limited space of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, so a large area can be secured within the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 for use in producing the variable display.

In this eighth control example, when the current background mode is displayed based on an operation on the touch sensor 2900, the background mode is displayed in the mode display area Dm1a (see FIG. 523(a)). However, without being limited to this, it is possible to determine the presentation mode of the variable display presentation being executed at the timing when the current background mode is displayed based on an operation on the touch sensor 2900, and based on the determination result, determine a display area in which the display mode of the presentation is not displayed, and display the background mode in that display area. This allows the background mode to be displayed without interfering with the variable display presentation being executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173) will be explained with reference to FIG. 551. FIG. 551 is a flowchart showing the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173). In this lamp setting process (Z2173), control is executed to change the lighting state of the frame lamp (the lamp that lights up the frame button 22) and the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d (see FIG. 518) according to the game situation.

When the lamp setting process (Z2173) is executed, it is first determined whether the special chart is currently changing (Z2131). If it is determined that the special chart is not currently changing (Z2131: No), a frame lighting command is set to turn on the frame lamp in green (Z2135), and then a mode lighting command is set to turn on the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d to indicate the currently set background mode (Z2134), and this process is terminated.

Here, we will explain what the frame lamp lights up. In this control example, a frame lamp (LED) that is a light-emitting means is embedded in the frame button 22, and by lighting up this light-emitting means, the surface of the frame button 22 can be made to emit light of any color. The frame lamp is then configured to notify the player of various information depending on the color it is lit.

Specifically, green is specified as the lighting state indicating that the special symbol is not changing, blue is specified as the lighting state indicating that the special symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and red is specified as the lighting state indicating that the special symbol (third symbol) is changing at a rate other than high speed. By configuring it in this way, the player can easily grasp the current state of the special symbol change (the speed at which the third symbol changes) by visually checking the lighting state of the frame lamp.

In addition, the surface of the frame button 22 (the surface that the player touches) that is operated when performing the background change operation is illuminated by the frame lamp, so that the player who is about to perform the background change operation can easily understand the current special symbol change state (the speed at which the third symbol changes). This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the timing of the background change is controlled to differ depending on the special symbol change state when the background change operation is performed.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the timing of the background change is varied depending on the speed at which the third symbol changes, which can cause a problem that it is difficult for the player to distinguish the speed at which the third symbol is changing as it is being displayed on the display screen; however, the above-mentioned problem can be solved by varying the lighting state of the frame lamp depending on the special symbol change state (the speed at which the third symbol changes).

In this control example, the frame lamp is configured to directly illuminate the surface of the frame button 22, but the location of the frame lamp is not limited to this and may be any location that is within the field of view of the player performing the background change operation. For example, the frame lamp may be provided near the frame button 22.

Returning to FIG. 551, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Z2131, if it is determined that the special chart is fluctuating (Z2131: Yes), it is then determined whether the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is on (Z2132). If it is determined that the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is on (Z2132: Yes), the frame lamp is lit in blue (Z2133), and the processing proceeds to Z2134, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2132 that the special chart is not changing at high speed (Z2131: No), the frame lamp is set to red (Z2136), and then a lighting command is set to light all mode lamps, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 552, we will explain the counter update process (Z2176), which is one process within the main process (see FIG. 536). FIG. 552 is a flowchart showing the contents of the counter update process (Z2176). This counter update process (Z2176) executes a process to update the values of various counters.

In the counter update process (Z2176), it is first determined whether the value of the remaining variation time counter 223fg is 0 or greater (Z2861). If the value of the remaining variation time counter 223fg is 0 or greater (Z2861: Yes), the value of the remaining variation time counter 223fg is decremented by 1 (Z2862) and processing proceeds to Z2863. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining variation time counter 223fg is not 0 or greater, i.e., is 0 (Z2861: No), processing Z2862 is skipped and processing proceeds to Z2863.

In the process of Z2863, it is determined whether the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg read in the process of Z2861 is a value indicating the high-speed fluctuation period of the special pattern (third pattern) (Z2863). If it is determined that it is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2863: Yes), the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is set to on (Z2864), the values of other counters are updated (Z2866), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is not a high-speed fluctuation period of the special pattern (third pattern) (Z2863: No), the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is set to off (Z2865), the process of Z2866 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding control process of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 of this eighth control example will be described with reference to Figs. 553 to 557. This eighth control example differs from the first control example described above in that it executes command judgment process 8 (see Z3302 in Fig. 553) instead of command judgment process (see Z2302 in Fig. 414), executes variable pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in Fig. 554) instead of variable pattern command process (see Z3405 in Fig. 415), executes resident image transfer setting process 8 (see Z4631 in Fig. 557) instead of resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in Fig. 422(b)), and adds 8-item display setting process (see Z3493 in Fig. 555) and reserved display setting process (see Z3495 in Fig. 556). The other control contents are the same, and the same control contents are assigned the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, the contents of command determination process 8 (Z3302) will be explained with reference to FIG. 553. FIG. 553 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 8 (Z3302). This command determination process 8 (Z3302) differs from the command determination process described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 414) in that it adds a process executed when a display 8-piece effect hold command is received and a process for updating the value of the display effect counter when this process is looped, and changes the contents of the process executed when a display variation pattern command is received and the contents of the process executed when a hold ball count command is received. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed explanations are omitted.

When command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed, the same processes Z3401 to Z3404 as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 414) are executed, and if it is determined in the process of Z3404 that a display variation pattern command has been received (Z3404: Yes), variation pattern command process 8 is executed (Z3491), and then processing proceeds to Z3496. The details of this variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described later with reference to FIG. 554.

In the processing of Z3496, a process is executed to update the value of the display effect counter. In this eighth control example, the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is configured to update the value of the display effect counter each time it is executed once. This command determination process 8 (Z3302) is configured to execute various processes depending on the type of command (display command) received by the display control device 114. This makes it possible to always make the timing of execution of the processing of Z3496 irregular. This makes it difficult for the player to predict when the value of the display effect counter will be updated. After the processing of Z3496 is completed, the process moves to the processing of Z3401, and command determination process 8 is executed repeatedly.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3404 that the display variation pattern command has not been received (Z3404: No), the processing of Z3406 to Z3411 is executed, which is the same as the command determination processing described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 414), and the processing proceeds to the processing of Z3496 described above. If it is determined in the processing of Z3410 that the display switching command has not been received (Z3410: No), it is then determined whether the display 8-item performance hold command has been received (Z3492), and if it is determined that it has been received (Z3492: Yes), the 8-item display setting processing is executed (Z3493), and then the processing proceeds to the processing of Z3496.

This 8-item display setting process (Z3493) is a process for creating image data for the 8-item reserved performance (see FIG. 526), and its detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 555. In the process of Z3492, if it is determined that the display 8-item reserved performance command has not been received (Z3492: No), it is then determined whether a reserved ball count command has been received (Z3414). If it is determined that a reserved ball count command has been received (Z3414: Yes), the reserved display process is executed (Z3495), and processing proceeds to Z3496. This reserved display process (Z3495) executes a process for setting the display mode to be displayed in the standby area Ds1b of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and its detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 556.

If it is determined in the processing of Z3414 that the reserved ball count command has not been received (Z3414: No), the processing of Z3418 to Z3420 is executed, which is the same as the command determination processing of the first control example described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 414), and then the processing proceeds to Z3496.

Next, the contents of variable pattern command processing 8 (Z3491) will be explained with reference to FIG. 554. FIG. 554 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable pattern command processing 8 (Z3491). This variable pattern command processing 8 (Z3491) differs from the variable pattern command processing described above (see Z3405 in FIG. 415) in that it adds control processing for when eight reserved effects are being executed, but all other elements are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

When the variable pattern command process 8 (Z3491) is executed, first, the process Z3501 to Z3506, which is the same as the variable pattern command process described above (see Z3405 in FIG. 415), is executed, and then it is determined whether the 8-item display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z3521). If it is determined that it is not set to on, that is, if it is determined that the 8-item reserved performance is not being executed (Z3521: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the 8-piece display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z3521: Yes), the value of the display 8-piece effect counter 233fb is subtracted by 1 (Z3522), and the effect mode (contents of the treasure chest) is selected using the 8-piece effect scenario selection table 234a3 by referring to the display 8-piece effect counter after subtraction (Z3524). Then, it is determined whether the value of the display 8-piece effect counter 233fb is 0 (Z3525), and if it is determined to be 0 (Z3525: Yes), the 8-piece display setting flag 233fa is set to off (Z3526), and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of Z3525, if the value of the display 8-piece effect counter 233fb is not 0, that is, if the 8-piece reserved effect continues even in the next or subsequent special chart changes (Z3525: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the 8-item display setting process (Z3493) will be explained with reference to FIG. 555. FIG. 555 is a flowchart showing the contents of the 8-item display setting process (Z3493). When the 8-item display setting process (Z3493) is executed, the 8-item display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z5701), and the 8-item performance display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z5702).

Then, the data table for the set 8-item effect display is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (Z5703). Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to on (Z5704), the time counter is set to time data based on the data table (Z5705), the pointer is initialized (Z5706), the 8-item display effect counter is set to 8, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the reserved ball display process (Z3495) will be explained with reference to FIG. 556. FIG. 556 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball display process (Z3495). When the reserved ball display process (Z3495) is executed, first, the number of reserved balls is set in the display reserved ball number storage area 233fc based on the information contained in the reserved ball number command received this time (Z5801).

Then, it is determined whether the 8-item display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z5802), and if it is determined that it is set to on (Z5802: Yes), since the 8-item reserved effect is currently being performed, a pointer corresponding to the value of the display 8-item effect counter 233fb is set (Z5803), and this process is terminated. In other words, while the 8-item reserved effect is being performed, the reserved patterns for the effect (treasure chests) are displayed in the standby area Ds1b of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 in a number corresponding to the value of the display 8-item effect counter 233fb.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5802 that the 8-ball display setting flag 233fa is not set to on (Z5802: No), a pointer corresponding to the value of the display reserved ball count storage area 233fc is set (Z5804), and this processing is terminated. In other words, while the 8-ball reserved performance is not being executed, a reserved pattern (circle) corresponding to the reserved ball count of the special pattern is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the contents of resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) will be explained with reference to FIG. 557. FIG. 557 is a flowchart showing the contents of resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631). This resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) differs from the resident image transfer setting process of the first control example described above in that a command (display start command) is set to indicate that all resident target image data has been transferred. All other aspects are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted.

When resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) is executed, the same processes Z4701 to Z4705 as the resident image transfer setting process described above (see Z4602 in FIG. 422(b)) are executed, and when Z4705 is completed, a display start command is set (Z4721) and this process is terminated. In this way, by configuring the main processing (see FIG. 411) of the display control device 114 to output a command (display start command) to the voice lamp control device 113 to indicate that the transfer processing of various image data executed after the initial setting processing (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) has been completed, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the timing when the display control device 114 becomes able to operate normally.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the display control device 114 is configured to take the longest time to initialize among the various other devices (main control device 110, audio lamp control device 113, audio output device 226), so that a display start-up command is output from the display control device 114, and an instruction to display the normal screen after power-on and an instruction to output various sounds (BGM) can be executed synchronously.

In the eighth control example, while a dedicated performance (period performance) using eight reserved patterns stored in the reserved memory is being executed, the reserved pattern for the performance, which indicates only the period during which the period performance is executed (reserved pattern that is the target of the period performance), is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b. In other words, even if a new start winning is detected during the execution of the period performance, a new reserved pattern is not displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the pre-reading result based on the new start winning is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result that develops into a super reach or a lottery result of a jackpot), the display range of the reserved pattern for the performance may be expanded (or the rate at which the display range is expanded may be increased) to the reserved pattern indicating the start winning corresponding to the specific lottery result. By configuring in this way, when the display range of the reserved pattern for the performance is expanded, the player can be made to recognize that a reserved ball corresponding to a specific lottery result is included, so that the player's expectation of a jackpot can be further improved. Alternatively or additionally, for example, when the reserved patterns that are the subject of the period performance include a reserved pattern that corresponds to a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result that develops into a super reach or a lottery result of a jackpot, etc.), and a new start winning is detected, the display range of the reserved patterns for the performance may be expanded (or the rate at which the display range is expanded may be increased) to the reserved pattern that corresponds to the new start winning. By configuring in this way, even if the display range is expanded, it is possible to configure it so that a specific lottery result can occur within the range at the beginning of the period performance, thereby realizing a gameplay that does not know when a variable display corresponding to a specific lottery result will be executed. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the eighth control example, even if a special operation (operating the touch sensor 2900 while holding down the left button 22b and the right button 22c) is performed while an operation performance using the touch sensor 2900 is being performed, it is not treated as an operation of the touch sensor 2900 for the operation performance, but is treated as an operation for notifying the background mode. In addition, if a special operation is performed incorrectly, it may be configured not to be treated as an operation of the touch sensor 2900 for the operation performance (to be difficult to treat). More specifically, for example, if an operation on the touch sensor 2900 is detected while either the left button 22b or the right button 22c is pressed during the execution period of the operation performance, it may be configured not to be treated as an operation on the touch sensor 2900 (not to be treated as a touch operation in the touch performance). In this configuration, even if the player mistakenly operates only the left button 22b and the touch sensor 2900, or only the right button 22c and the touch sensor 2900 in an attempt to perform a special operation, it is possible to prevent the player from developing into a reach effect (a slow-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol) using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 against his will (the operation of the touch sensor 2900 is determined to be an operation for the touch effect). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when an effect mode against his will is executed. In addition, the lighting mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d does not change, so that the player who has made an erroneous operation while intending to perform a special operation can easily notice the erroneous operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player. Furthermore, even if a player who is attempting to operate the touch sensor 2900 as an operation for a touch performance mistakenly operates either the left button 22b or the right button 22c together with the touch sensor 2900, it is possible to avoid the background mode being displayed by the lighting state of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d against the player's will. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who mistakenly operates the left button 22b or the right button 22c together with the touch sensor 2900 while attempting to participate in a touch performance from feeling uncomfortable due to the display content being displayed against his or her will. In addition, since no change in the display state occurs due to the mistaken operation, the player can easily notice the mistaken operation. This improves the convenience for the player.

In the eighth control example, in the special performance involving the vibration of the frame button 22a, the vibration type (vibe type) that occurs each time the frame button 22a is pressed is determined by lottery, and a mode (vibe type) that confirms that a jackpot is present in the reserve and a mode that increases the expectation of a jackpot may be provided, but the vibration type in the special performance may be notified to the player by something other than vibration. That is, for example, if a player operates the frame button 22a continuously at short intervals in a special performance, it may be difficult for the player to sense the correspondence between the number of presses and the vibration mode. In this case, for example, even if a special performance in a mode (vibe C) that is relatively unlikely to result in a jackpot is executed, the player may mistakenly think that a special performance in a mode (vibe A) in which a jackpot is confirmed has been executed, which may cause the player to feel distrustful. This problem can be solved by providing a means for notifying the player of the vibration type executed in the special performance in addition to the mode of vibration transmitted to the player's finger who pressed the frame button 22a. More specifically, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display the correspondence between the number of times the frame button 22a is pressed in one special effect and the type of vibration executed based on the press (vibration history). By configuring in this way, even if the player cannot identify the vibration mode or misidentifies it, the current vibration type can be easily identified by checking the vibration history displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a performance that is easier for the player to understand can be realized. In addition, instead of displaying the history, for example, a configuration may be used in which the change over time in vibration intensity is displayed by a graph. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand the transition of the vibration intensity, so that a more understandable performance mode can be realized. Note that the display of the history or graph on the third symbol display device 81 may be performed every time a special effect is executed, or may be configured to be executed only when the operation interval of the player is less than a predetermined interval (for example, less than 0.5 seconds, at which it is difficult to identify the vibration intensity). Furthermore, for example, even after the specified number of presses (four times) in the special effect is completed, the vibration pattern may be set from the beginning again each time the frame button 22a is pressed (the vibration pattern is repeated every four presses), or after the specified number of presses (four times) is completed, the frame button 22a may be kept pressed (i.e., pressed and held) so that the vibration pattern is repeated while the button is held down. In other words, even after the execution of the vibration mode (vibration type) corresponding to the operation on the frame button 22a is completed, the vibration mode (vibration type) may be reconfirmed by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22a. By configuring in this way, a player who was unable to identify the vibration type can easily reconfirm the vibration type, thereby improving the convenience of the player.

In the eighth control example, when a background change operation is performed during a high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode is changed immediately, whereas when a background change operation is performed during a medium-speed fluctuation period or a low-speed fluctuation period, the background mode is changed at the start of the next fluctuation display, but this is not limited to this. For example, under certain conditions, a configuration may be adopted in which a background mode change is immediately performed when a background change operation is performed during a medium-speed fluctuation period or a low-speed fluctuation period. Specifically, for example, when a fluctuation display mode in which high-speed fluctuation is performed again is performed after a medium-speed fluctuation period or a low-speed fluctuation period (for example, after a normal reach occurs and becomes a medium-speed fluctuation period, it develops into a super reach and returns to high-speed fluctuation again), a configuration may be adopted in which the background mode is immediately changed in response to a background change operation until the high-speed fluctuation period when it develops into a super reach. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which it is possible to know in advance whether or not a super reach performance will develop by checking whether a background change operation during a medium-speed fluctuation period or a low-speed fluctuation period immediately changes the background mode. This allows players to actively perform background change operations during medium-speed and low-speed fluctuation periods, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the eighth control example, when a background change operation is performed during a medium-speed fluctuation period or a low-speed fluctuation period, the background mode is changed only at the start of the next variable display, but this is not limited to this. For example, when a background change operation is performed during a medium-speed fluctuation period or a low-speed fluctuation period, instead of carrying over the change of the background mode until the start of the next variable display, a predetermined notification may be performed at a predetermined rate. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the stress on the player caused by the background mode change being carried over until the next fluctuation and taking time to change to the background mode in which the player wants to play. In this case, the notification content may be, for example, the expectation of a jackpot in the variable display being executed, the expectation of developing into a super reach, the expectation of a jackpot (or a variable display corresponding to a super reach) being included in the reserve, the expectation of a so-called latent probability change state, etc. By configuring in this way, a different gameplay than usual can be realized by deliberately performing a background change operation during a medium-speed fluctuation period or a low-speed fluctuation period, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth control example, three different periods are provided with different speeds for the variable display of the third symbol, but the speed of the variable display of the first symbol may be synchronized with the speed of the variable display of the third symbol. Conversely, the speed of the variable display of the first symbol may be configured to have at least a high-speed variable period, a medium-speed variable period, and a low-speed variable period, and the speed of the variable display of the third symbol may be synchronized with the speed of the variable display of the first symbol.

In the eighth control example, a specific period effect is executed when the number of reserved balls of a special pattern reaches the upper limit (8 balls), but the execution condition of the period effect is not necessarily limited to the upper limit of reserved balls and can be set arbitrarily. The fewer the number of reserved balls that is the execution condition, the more opportunities there are to execute the period effect, which can further increase the interest of the player. Also, the more the number of reserved balls that is the execution condition, the longer the execution period of the period effect is likely to be, which can further increase the interest of the player in one period effect. Similarly, the end condition of the period effect is not limited to when all reserved balls at the start of the period effect have been consumed, and can be set arbitrarily.

<Ninth control example>
Next, the ninth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 558 to Fig. 566. The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example differs from the eighth control example described above in that it is provided with the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example described above (see Fig. 451), in the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113, and in part of the control content, but the other configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The eighth control example described above is configured so that when the player operates the frame button 22 to change the background mode (background change operation), the timing of changing the background mode (timing of executing the background change) is varied according to the timing of the operation, thereby making it possible to prevent, for example, a situation in which the background mode is switched while a performance exclusive to a specific background mode is being executed. This allows the player to carry out the background change operation with peace of mind, and encourages the player to actively carry out the background change operation.

However, the technology of the eighth control example described above only changes the timing of the background change that is performed based on the background change operation, and the presentation style that is performed is the same, so there is a problem in that the player becomes bored with the presentation that is performed by the background change operation (background change presentation).

In response to this, the ninth control example is configured to execute a background preview effect that suggests the background mode after the transition between when the background change operation is executed and when the background change is actually executed, and to vary the presentation style of the background preview effect depending on the timing of executing the background change operation (e.g., when the special chart is not changing, when the special chart is changing). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with different presentation styles depending on the timing of executing the background change operation, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the presentation that is executed.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, the presentation mode of the background preview performance is changed based on the results of the lottery for the special symbol. This makes it possible to motivate the player to perform a background change operation in order to see the background preview performance.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, similar to the fourth control example described above, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be adjustable during the period when the special symbol change is not being performed (the waiting period for customers). Here, conventional pachinko machines are configured to be able to set a game state in which the special symbol change is likely to be performed (for example, a time-saving state (a state with a low probability of a special symbol, a state with a high probability of a normal symbol)) and a game state in which the special symbol change is unlikely to be performed (for example, a normal state (a state with a low probability of a special symbol, a state with a low probability of a normal symbol)), and further, when the time-saving state is set, it is easier to set a shorter change time as the special symbol change time than when the normal state is set.

In other words, in conventional pachinko machines, even if a period occurs during the time-saving state during which special pattern changes are not being performed, a new special pattern change is likely to be initiated immediately, and if a period occurs during the normal state during which special pattern changes are not being performed, it is more difficult to initiate a new special pattern change than during the time-saving state.

In a conventional pachinko machine configured in this way, if a customer waiting display (for example, a title display showing the name of the game machine) or a customer waiting period function (for example, a volume adjustment function, a light intensity adjustment function) is executed during a period when special pattern variation is not being performed (a customer waiting period) without taking into consideration the set game state, the display content on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is switched unnecessarily during the time-saving state, providing a display that is difficult for the player to understand. In addition, there is a problem that the processing for creating each image data to be displayed on the display screen is performed in a complicated manner, which increases the control load of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, since the time-saving state is a state in which special pattern variation can be performed efficiently by continuously firing balls, even if a customer waiting period function (a volume adjustment function, a light intensity adjustment function) is temporarily enabled, a new special pattern variation will start before the adjustment operation using that function is completed, causing discomfort to the player.

To address this issue, for example, the problem above could be solved by configuring the system to activate the customer waiting period function described above when a certain period (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed since the special pattern fluctuations stopped and no new special pattern fluctuations are executed. However, this creates a new problem in that a player playing in the normal mode needs to stop playing for a certain period of time when they want to adjust the volume or light level, which is annoying for the player and reduces game activity.

In order to solve the various problems described above, in this ninth control example, the period from when the special chart change is no longer being executed until the customer waiting period function can be executed is configured to differ depending on the set game state. This allows, for example, during a high probability state (time-saving state, probability-changing state) of a normal pattern in which a special chart change is likely to be executed, the customer waiting period function to be executed a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) after the special chart change is no longer being executed, and during a low probability state (normal state) of a normal pattern in which a special chart change is unlikely to be executed, the customer waiting period function to be executed immediately after the special chart change is no longer being executed.

<About the performance content of the 9th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 560, the background notice performance among the performances executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described. Fig. 560(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the background mode is changed to the sea mode, and Fig. 560(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen in a state in which the background mode is changed in the next change. Note that, among the elements of the display screen, the same elements as those in the above-mentioned eighth control example are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In this ninth control example, when a background change operation is performed, a preview effect suggesting the destination background mode is executed before the background mode is switched. To specifically explain the display form of this preview effect, it is configured to be able to display a "mode display", which is a display form that shows the destination background mode with a comment just before the background mode is switched, and a "silhouette display", which is a display form that suggests the destination background mode with a character silhouette just before the background mode is switched.

If the timing of the background change operation is outside the special chart change period (for example, during a waiting period), only "mode display" is selected, and if it is during the special chart change period, either "mode display" or "silhouette display" is selected. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the performance (background preview performance) executed depending on the timing of the background change operation, allowing the player to perform the background change operation at various times.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, when a background change operation is performed during the special chart change period, the selection ratio between "mode display" and "silhouette display" is varied depending on the lottery result of that special chart change. In addition, when a display mode in which the background mode suggested in the background preview performance differs from the background mode to which the player will actually transition is selected, the possibility of winning the jackpot is increased (higher than the display modes of other background preview performances). Thus, the player can be made to actively perform background change operations in an attempt to predict the lottery result of the special chart. Also, by making the player actively perform background change operations, it is possible to provide the player with performances that correspond to various background modes, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 560(a), the background mode is changed to sea mode by a background change operation, and a fish-like silhouette K100, which suggests sea mode, is displayed as a background preview effect. In this way, in this control example, the display mode displayed in the background preview effect continues to be displayed on the display screen even after the background mode is changed, so that the player can visually compare the display mode displayed in the background preview effect with the background mode to which it has actually been changed.

Next, on the display screen shown in FIG. 560(b), a comment "Background change in next change" is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a, indicating that the background change operation has been performed and the background mode will change when the next special chart change begins. A silhouette K100 resembling a tree is displayed as a background preview effect, suggesting mountain mode. In other words, the state shown in FIG. 560(b) is a state in which the current state is "mountain mode" and the background mode will change (to sea mode) in the next change, and the silhouette K100 suggesting mountain mode is displayed as a background preview effect suggesting the background mode after the change. When a discrepancy occurs between the actual background mode change destination and the suggested display mode of the background preview effect in this way, it is highly likely that the change will result in a jackpot.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ninth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 558 and Fig. 559. Fig. 558(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example, and Fig. 558(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example.

As shown in FIG. 558(a), the ROM 222 of this ninth control example differs from the ROM 222 of the eighth control example described above in that the vibration pattern data 222fc has been deleted and a background preview selection table 222ga has been added, but the other elements are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The background preview selection table 222ga is referenced when selecting the presentation mode of the background preview presentation when a background change operation is performed. Here, the contents of the background preview selection table 222ga will be explained with reference to FIG. 559. FIG. 559 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the background preview selection table 222ga.

As shown in FIG. 559, the background preview selection table 222ga is configured to allow selection of background previews with different display modes depending on the result of the win/loss determination (the result of the lottery for the special chart change being performed at the time the background change operation is performed), the acquired value of the performance counter 223h, and the background mode after the transition.

Specifically, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit and the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is set to a range of "0 to 69" for "Silhouette A", a range of "70 to 159" for "Silhouette B", a range of "160 to 169" for "Mountain mode display", and a range of "170 to 198" for "Sea mode display". If the background mode after the transition is "Mountain mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is set to a range of "0 to 69" for "Silhouette B", a range of "70 to 159" for "Silhouette A", a range of "160 to 169" for "Sea mode display", and a range of "170 to 198" for "Mountain mode display".

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment is a miss and the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", "Silhouette B" is set to a value in the range of "0 to 119" for the effect counter 223h, and "Sea mode display" is set to a value in the range of "120 to 198" for the effect counter 223h. If the background mode after the transition is "mountain mode", "Silhouette A" is set to a value in the range of "0 to 119" for the effect counter 223h, and "Mountain mode display" is set to a value in the range of "120 to 198" for the effect counter 223h. Furthermore, if the timing of the background change operation is during the waiting period, if the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", "Sea mode display" is set to a value in the range of "0 to 198" for the effect counter 223h, and if the background mode after the transition is "mountain mode", "Mountain mode display" is set to a value in the range of "0 to 198" for the effect counter 223h.

Here, we will explain each display mode that can be selected as the display mode for the background preview performance. In this control example, the display mode for the background preview performance can be set to "silhouette display," which displays a silhouette of a character that suggests the background mode to be transitioned to, and "mode display," which displays text indicating the background mode to be transitioned to.

Among the "silhouette display", "Silhouette A" is a silhouette of a character imitating a tree suggesting the mountain mode shown in FIG. 560(b), and "Silhouette B" is a silhouette of a character imitating a fish suggesting the sea mode shown in FIG. 560(a). In this control example, the display mode formed by a still image is displayed as the silhouette display, but a dynamically changing display mode may be used as long as it suggests the background mode after the transition to the player. For example, the display mode may be configured to make it difficult for the player to understand which background mode is being suggested immediately after the suggestion display mode is displayed, and to gradually change to a display mode that makes it easier to understand the background mode to be transitioned to based on the passage of time or the operation of the player on the operation means (frame button 22 or touch sensor 2900). By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance in order to quickly determine the performance result of the background preview performance.

As explained above, in this control example, the display modes for the background preview performance are configured to be able to display "silhouette display" and "mode display", and if a background change operation is performed during a period when the special chart is not changing, only "mode display" is selected, and if a background change operation is performed during a period when the special chart is changing, "silhouette display" can be selected. As a result, by performing a background change operation while the special chart is changing, a special performance mode (silhouette display) can be displayed, enhancing the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this control example, the background preview effect can be set to a display mode that suggests a background mode different from the background mode to which the player will transition, and this display mode is configured to be selected only if the result of the win/loss determination is a win. Therefore, by creating a sense of incongruity between the content of the background preview effect and the actual background mode transition situation, it is possible to notify (suggest) a lottery result that is favorable to the player in advance, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In this control example, two background modes (sea mode, mountain mode) are used, but there may be three or more types of background modes, and the background mode to which a transition occurs as a result of a background change operation may be set randomly. Also, a configuration may be made in which a transition occurs to the same background mode as before the transition as a result of a background change operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether the display mode of the current background preview performance will match the post-transition background mode, based on the pre-transition background mode and the suggested content of the post-transition background mode displayed in the background preview performance.

In addition, in this ninth control example, similar to the eighth control example described above, the period from when the background change operation is performed until the background mode is changed is configured to vary depending on the timing of the background change operation. The above-mentioned background preview performance is configured to be displayed based on the execution of the background change operation. Therefore, the display period during which only the background preview performance is displayed can be varied depending on the timing of the background change operation.

In this ninth control example, when selecting the display mode of the background preview performance, the display mode is selected based on the lottery result of the special chart change currently being performed. However, without being limited to this, for example, the display mode may be selected based on the result of pre-determining the winning information included in the special chart reserve. In this case, for example, if the background mode can be shifted (changed) during the special chart change in which the background change operation was performed, the display mode of the background preview performance is selected based on the lottery result of that change, and if the background mode is shifted (changed) in the special chart change next to the special chart change in which the background change operation was performed, the display mode of the background preview performance is selected based on the lottery result (pre-determined result) of the next special chart change.

Returning to FIG. 558(b), the explanation will continue. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth control example differs from the RAM 223 in the eighth control example described above in that a customer waiting flag 223ga and a delay counter 223gb have been added, but otherwise it is the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

The customer waiting flag 223ga is a flag for indicating that the current time is a customer waiting period, and is set to ON when the customer waiting period is reached. When the game state is normal (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), this customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (see Z2734 in FIG. 565) in the customer waiting setting process executed in the variation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 564). Also, when the game state is a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) or a probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), the customer waiting performance process 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 566) is set to ON when the value of the delay counter 223gb becomes 0 (see Z2761 in FIG. 566). And, when the special symbol variation starts, it is set to OFF.

In this ninth control example, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is adjustable during the period when the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on, and a notification display that notifies the player that the volume is adjustable is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. In other words, the customer waiting flag 223ga is also a flag for indicating the period during which the volume can be adjusted. Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on is varied depending on the set game state, and the customer waiting flag 223ga is configured to be less likely to be set to on when the game state is in a time-saving state or a special probability state than when it is in a normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a notification display that notifies the player that the volume has become adjustable during the probability change state or the time-saving state to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. In other words, the time-saving state and probability change state are configured to be set with a shorter special pattern change time than the normal state, and a period in which special pattern changes are not executed temporarily may be set. However, since the time-saving state and probability change state are also game states in which new special pattern changes are more likely to be executed than the normal state, the period in which special pattern changes are not executed tends to end in a short period of time. In such a state, if the customer waiting flag 223ga is frequently set to on, there is a risk that the display content of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 will be switched cumbersomely, making the player feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, in the ninth control example, the customer waiting flag 223ga is not set to ON unless a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) during the time-saving state or the probability of winning state in which the special pattern change is not performed has elapsed, thereby solving the above-mentioned problem. Note that the predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) required to set the customer waiting flag 223ga ON during the time-saving state or the probability of winning state may be set to a period longer than the normal pattern change time (the period from when the electric role 640a opens until the ball enters the second ball entrance 640) that is executed in the high probability state of the normal pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the customer waiting flag 223ga from being set to ON simply by continuing to play during the probability of winning state or the time-saving state.

The delay counter 223gb is a counter for measuring the period from the end of the special chart change to when the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on, and is used to delay the timing of setting the customer waiting flag 223ga to on during the special chart change state and the time-saving state.

This delay counter 223gb is set to a predetermined period (5 seconds) as a delay period when the game state is a high probability state or a time-saving state in the customer waiting setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 565) executed in the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 564) executed when the special chart fluctuation stops (Z2733 in FIG. 565). Then, it is subtracted each time the customer waiting performance process 9 (Z2181 in FIG. 566) is executed (Z2759 in FIG. 566), and when the counter value becomes 0, the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (Z2761 in FIG. 566). This makes it possible to delay the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON in the high probability state or the time-saving state from the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON in the normal state.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 561 to Fig. 566, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth control example will be described. This ninth control example differs from the eighth control example described above in that the customer waiting performance process executed in the main process 9 (see Fig. 561) is replaced by a customer waiting performance process 9 (see Z2181 in Fig. 566), the frame button input monitoring and performance process 8 is replaced by a frame button input monitoring and performance process 9, and the command judgment process 8 is replaced by a command judgment process 9 (Z2174 in Fig. 562), but otherwise is the same. The same control contents are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, main process 9 of this ninth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 561. Fig. 561 is a flowchart showing the contents of main process 9. As shown in Fig. 561, main process 9 differs from main process 8 (see Fig. 536) in that it executes customer waiting performance process 9 (Z2181), frame button input monitoring/performance process 9 (Z2182), and command judgment process 9 (Z2183), but is otherwise identical.

The contents of frame button input monitoring/performance processing 9 (Z2182) differ from frame button input monitoring/performance processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545) of the above-mentioned eighth control example only in that background change processing 9 (see Z2541 in FIG. 563) is executed instead of background change processing (see Z2949 in FIG. 548). Therefore, only background change processing 9, which is a subroutine of frame button input monitoring/performance processing 9 (Z2182), will be explained with reference to FIG. 563, and other control contents (the same control contents as in the eighth control example) will not be illustrated.

Next, the contents of command determination process 9 (Z2174) will be explained with reference to FIG. 562. FIG. 562 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 9 (Z2174). This command determination process 9 (Z2174) differs from the command determination process of the eighth control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 396) in that it adds a process for setting the customer waiting flag off when a fluctuation pattern command is received, and in that it changes fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242 in FIG. 539) to fluctuation stop process 9 (Z2651 in FIG. 562). All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed explanations are omitted.

Note that in the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 396), the process executed when the stop type command shown in the figure is received (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 396) is the same process executed in this eighth control example, but for ease of explanation, it will be assumed to be executed as the process corresponding to other commands (Z2261 in FIG. 562).

When command determination process 9 (Z2174) is executed, it is first determined whether a fluctuation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that it has been received (Z2201: Yes), it is determined whether the customer waiting flag 223ga is on (Z2253). If it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223ga is on (Z2254: Yes), the fluctuation pattern command is received and it is time for the customer waiting performance to end, so the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to off (Z2254), the value of the delay counter 223gb is set to 0 (Z2255), and the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern receiving process 8 (Z2241) is executed to end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2253 that the customer waiting flag 223ga is not on (Z2253: No), the processing of Z2254 is skipped and the processing proceeds to Z2255.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2201 that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (Z2203). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes), fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) is executed and this processing is terminated. Details of fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) will be described later with reference to FIG. 564.

Returning to FIG. 562, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of Z2201 that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (Z2203). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes), fluctuation stop processing 8 is executed (Z2242) and this processing is terminated. This fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242) performs processing to set the stop display of the third pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, processing to execute a background change when the special pattern stops, and processing to set the customer waiting performance, the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG. 564.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2203 that a stop command has not been received (Z2203: No), Z2207 to Z2261 are executed, which are the same as the command determination processing (Z2174 in FIG. 537) of the eighth control example described above, and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of background change process 9 (Z2541) will be explained with reference to FIG. 563. FIG. 563 is a flowchart showing the contents of background change process 9 (Z2541). This background change process 9 (Z2541) differs from the background change process of the eighth control example described above (Z2949 in FIG. 548) in that a process for setting the display mode of the background preview performance has been added.

When background change process 9 (Z2541) is executed, the same processes Z2963 to Z2967 as the background change process described above (see Z2949 in FIG. 548) are executed, and then the value of the performance counter 223h is obtained (Z2978), and the performance mode of the background preview performance is selected using the background preview selection table 222ga based on the obtained value of the performance counter 223h (Z2979). Then, a display background preview command indicating the performance mode selected in the Z2979 process is set, and this process is terminated.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the display switching command set in the processing of Z2967 and the display background preview command set in the processing of Z2980 are set within the same process and are output to the display control device 114 at the same timing, but the display control device 114 is configured to first execute a display using image data based on the display background preview command, and then execute a display using image data based on the display switching command after an interval of 0.5 seconds. This allows the background preview performance to be executed before the background transition.

Next, the contents of fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) will be explained with reference to FIG. 564. FIG. 564 is a flowchart showing the contents of fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651). This fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) differs from the fluctuation stop processing of the eighth control example described above (see Z2242 in FIG. 539) in that it executes a customer waiting setting processing (Z2652) after completing the processing of Z2266, Z2264, and Z2270, but the rest of the contents are the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

Here, the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) will be explained with reference to FIG. 565. FIG. 565 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652). In this customer waiting setting process (Z2652), a process is executed to set the customer waiting period after the special chart fluctuation has stopped.

When the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) is executed, it is first determined whether a special symbol is reserved (Z2731). In this Z2731 process, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b are both 0.

In the process of Z2731, if it is determined that a special chart is reserved (Z2731: Yes), the next special chart change will be executed immediately, so the process for setting the customer waiting period is skipped and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2731, if it is determined that a special chart is not reserved (Z2731: No), it is next determined whether the current game state is a time-saving state or a high probability state (Z2732), and if it is determined that it is not a time-saving state or a high probability state (it is a normal state) (Z2732: No), the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on (Z2734), a customer waiting command for display is set (Z2735), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the process of Z2732 determines that the current state is the time-saving state or the guaranteed bonus state (Z2732: Yes), then the delay counter 223gb is set to a value corresponding to 5 seconds (Z2733), and this process ends. The value of the delay counter 223gb set here is subtracted by the main process, which is executed every 1 millisecond.

Next, the contents of customer waiting performance process 9 (Z2181) will be explained with reference to FIG. 566. FIG. 566 is a flowchart showing the contents of customer waiting performance process 9 (Z2181). In this customer waiting performance process 9 (Z2181), the value of the delay counter 223gb set in the customer waiting setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 565) is subtracted, and when the value of the delay counter 223gb becomes 0, a process of setting the customer waiting flag 223ga to on and a volume adjustment process are executed when the volume button is operated while the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on.

In customer waiting performance process 9 (Z2181), first, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on (Z2751), and if it is determined that it is set to on (Z2751: Yes), it is determined whether the right button (up button) of the volume buttons that increases the volume has been operated (pressed) (Z2764). If it is determined that the right button has been pressed (Z2764: Yes), the volume level is then set so that the volume level is increased by 1 (Z2753), a display command indicating the volume after the setting is set (Z2754), and this process is terminated.

Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of Z2764 that the right button has not been pressed (Z2764: No), it is determined whether the left button (down button) for lowering the volume has been operated (pressed) (Z2765). If it is determined that the left button has been pressed (Z2765: Yes), the volume level is then set so that the volume level is lowered by 1 (Z2756), a display command showing the volume after the setting is set (Z2757), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2751, if it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223ga is not set to on (Z2751: No), it is determined whether the value of the delay counter 223gb is greater than 0 (1 or more) (Z2758), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2758: No), the special chart change is not currently stopped, so this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of Z2758 that the value of the delay counter 223gb is greater than 0 (Z2758: Yes), then 1 is subtracted from the value of the delay counter 223gb (Z2759), and it is determined whether the value of the delay counter 223gb after the subtraction is 0 (Z2760). If it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223gb after the subtraction is not 0, that is, if the game state is a special bonus state or a time-saving state and 5 seconds have not yet elapsed since the previous special chart fluctuation stopped (Z2760: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of Z2760, if it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223gb is 0 (Z2760: Yes), the game state is a probability change state or a time-saving state, and 5 seconds have passed since the last special chart change stopped, so the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on (Z2761), a customer waiting command for display is set (Z2762), and then it is determined whether the left or right button has been pressed (Z2763). If it is determined that the left or right button has been pressed (Z2763: Yes), the process of Z2764 described above is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the left or right button has not been pressed in the process of Z2763 (Z2763: No), this process is terminated as it is.

<Tenth control example>
Next, the tenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 567 to Fig. 578. The tenth control example differs from the above-mentioned ninth control example in that it executes an operation effect (crack effect) that changes the effect mode based on the operation contents of the frame button 22 by the player, and executes an effect (background change effect) that shifts (changes) the background mode based on the stop display mode of the third pattern (a decorative pattern that is displayed variably in synchronization with the variation of the special pattern (special pattern) and whose stop display mode makes it easy for the player to understand the lottery result of the special pattern) that is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but is otherwise the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

<About the performance content of the 10th control example>
Here, we will explain the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this tenth control example. Unlike the above-mentioned control examples, the pachinko machine 10 of this tenth control example executes a crack effect and a background change effect based on the display mode of the stopped pattern.

First, the crack effect will be explained with reference to Fig. 567 to Fig. 569. The crack effect is an operation effect in which the display mode on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is changed stepwise by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22a) multiple times within a specified effect period. In this tenth control example, the effect mode after the effect period is set based on the display mode on the display screen at the end of the effect period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means to execute effects in various effect modes.

Now, referring to FIG. 567, the flow of the crack presentation in this tenth control example will be explained. FIG. 567 is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the crack presentation. In this control example, a variable display mode of cracks 820 is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 based on the operation of the operating means during a specified presentation period, and a crack presentation is executed in which the number of cracks 820 varies (increases) based on the operation content (number of operations) of the operating means during that presentation period. The variable display mode can be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) during the presentation period and the number of operations.

Specifically, within the 60-second fluctuation pattern, a valid operation period (button presentation period) is set for 15 seconds starting 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, during which operation of the frame button 22a, which is the operating means, is judged to be valid. Then, when the button presentation period is reached, a crack presentation is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 568(a)).

The button performance period during which the cracking effect is executed is set to a first period, which is the first half of the period, and a second period, which is the second half of the period after the first period. By operating the frame button 22a during the first period of the button performance period, a single crack 820 is displayed on the display screen (see FIG. 568(b)), and the remaining period of the first period is variably set to the second period. With this configuration, the period during which the second period is set can be lengthened by operating the frame button 22a immediately after the first period is set.

In addition, by pressing the frame button 22a during the first period, the conditions for displaying the second crack 820 during the second period, i.e., the number of times the frame button 22a is operated to vary the number of cracks 820 displayed as a variable display mode, are changed based on the timing of pressing the frame button 22a during the first period.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an effect based on both the timing of operation of the operating means and the number of operations, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. Furthermore, even if the second period is set longer by operating the frame button 22a immediately after the first period is set, a condition for a large number of operations may be set as the condition for displaying the second and subsequent cracks 820 based on the operation timing (number of operations on the frame button 22a), so operating the frame button 22a immediately after the first period is set does not directly lead to the display of more cracks 820.

This allows the player to participate in the operation presentation while having fun deciding when during the first period to operate the frame button 22a. Note that in this tenth control example, the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected according to the timing of the first frame button operation executed during the cracked presentation, but this is not limited to this, and the variable pattern of the subsequent variable display mode may be selected according to the timing of the second or subsequent frame button operations. Also, in this control example, the timing of one frame button operation (first frame button operation) is used to select all variable patterns (variable scenarios) of the variable display mode during the presentation period, but it may also be configured to select only a portion of them.

When the second period is set, a display screen is displayed to prompt the player to operate the frame button 22a multiple times (see FIG. 568(b)), and if the display condition set at the end of the first period (the condition for displaying the second and subsequent cracks 820) is met, the number of cracks 820 displayed on the display screen is variably displayed, and an effect based on the number of cracks 820 displayed after the second period has elapsed (20 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation) is displayed (see FIG. 569(a)).

In addition, in the crack effect of this control example, when the first frame button operation is performed, which is a factor in selecting a display condition (variable scenario) that increases (varies) the number of cracks 820 (variable display mode), one crack 820 (the same variable display mode) is displayed regardless of when the frame button operation is performed. In other words, in the crack effect of this control example, the first frame button operation clearly notifies the player that a crack effect has been performed, and is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp the variable scenario of the variable display mode selected based on the first frame button operation.

This allows the player to play while paying close attention to how the cracking effect progresses. In addition, the cracking effect of this control example varies the rate at which variable scenarios of the variable display mode are selected based on the results of the lottery for the special symbol. This allows the player to pay close attention to the cracking effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, in the cracked effect of this control example, the button effect period during which the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22a) (operation of the operation means is judged to be valid) is formed of a first period (5 seconds) and a second period (10 seconds) after the first period has elapsed, and the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected by performing an operation (first frame button operation) to select a variable scenario of the variable display mode (number of cracks 820) during the first period. Therefore, if the frame button operation is not performed during the first period, the cracked effect is ended at that point (the setting of the operation valid period during the second period is cleared and the effect is switched to a non-operation effect) (see FIG. 567 (b)). This makes it possible to prevent a player who does not want to operate the frame button 22a from being notified of the effect that encourages the operation of the frame button 22a for a long period of time.

Here, referring to FIG. 567(b), the flow of the presentation when the frame button 22a is not operated during the first period of the button presentation period will be specifically explained. A display screen (see FIG. 568(a)) prompting the user to operate the frame button 22a is displayed until the predetermined first period (5 seconds) has elapsed, and the operation valid period is cleared at the end of the first period. After the first period has elapsed, a display mode (unfortunate display) indicating that the frame button 22a has not been pressed even once is displayed until the predetermined second period (10 seconds) has elapsed (see FIG. 569(b)). After that, a presentation corresponding to the case where the crack 820 is not displayed (0 cracks) is executed.

In this control example, the display mode (disappointment display) indicating that the frame button 22a has not been pressed even once is displayed until the second period (10 seconds) has elapsed, but this is not limited thereto. For example, the display mode (disappointment display) indicating that the frame button 22a has not been pressed even once may be displayed for only the first two seconds of the predetermined second period (10 seconds), and then a presentation corresponding to the case where no cracks 820 are displayed (zero cracks) may be executed. By configuring in this way, the period during which the disappointment display is displayed can be shortened, making it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable if he or she does not intentionally operate the frame button 22a during the first period.

In addition, if a frame button operation (first frame button operation) is performed during the first period, the second and subsequent frame button operations are accepted immediately thereafter (for the remainder of the first performance period). This allows continuity to be imparted to the multiple frame button operations performed during the cracking performance, enhancing the performance effect.

Next, referring to Figures 568 and 569, an example of the display content displayed during the cracking effect will be described. Figure 568(a) is a display screen showing an example of the display content displayed immediately after the cracking effect starts, and Figure 568(b) is a display screen showing an example of the display content displayed when the frame button 22a is operated during the first period of the cracking effect. Also, Figure 569(a) is a display screen showing an example of the display content executed after the button effect period ends with three cracks 820 displayed, and Figure 569(b) is a display screen showing an example of the display content displayed when the first period ends without operating the frame button 22a during the first period of the cracking effect.

When the crack effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 568(a), to inform the player that the effect being executed is an operation effect (an effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operating means (frame button 22a)), a button display mode Dm5a imitating the frame button 22a and a remaining period display mode Dm5b informing the player of the remaining period (4 seconds) of the first period (5 seconds) of the button effect period are displayed on the right side of the main display area Dm.

Here, the button display mode Dm5a is displayed in a display mode (represented by two arrows in the figure) that encourages the user to press the frame button 22a multiple times (continuous tapping) rather than pressing it only once. In addition, the remaining period display mode Dm5b dynamically displays the remaining period (represented by diagonal lines in the figure) against an indicator that shows the length of the first period (5 seconds).

Then, the comment display area Dm2a displays the comment "Smash the screen by repeatedly pressing the button." This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that by operating the frame button 22a multiple times during the current operation effect, an effect in which the display screen will be destroyed will be executed. In addition, a small display area Dm4 is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, and is configured to clearly display the progress of the current cracking effect (the number of cracks) to the player. Note that in FIG. 568(a), it is immediately after the cracking effect has been executed and the frame button 22a has not been operated even once, so "0" is displayed as the progress display state Dm4a in the small display area Dm4.

When the frame button 22a is operated during the first period of the cracking effect, as shown in FIG. 568(b), a single crack 820 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "1" is displayed as the progress display mode Dm4a in the small display area Dm4. Furthermore, because the frame button 22a was operated during the first period, the first period ends and the second period is set, and therefore the remaining period display mode Dm5c for indicating the remaining period of the second period is displayed instead of the remaining period display mode Dm5b for indicating the remaining period of the first period. Furthermore, the comment "Tap more" is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a.

When the display screen of FIG. 568(b) is displayed, if the frame button 22a is operated (continuously tapped) multiple times and a display condition for increasing the number of cracks 820 is met, the number of cracks 820 corresponding to the display condition is displayed on the display screen. If the number of cracks 820 is three at the end of the second period of the button performance period, as shown in FIG. 569(a), a performance is executed in which the center of the main display area Dm is destroyed and a large number of fish-like characters 822 appear from the back, and the "fish school reach" indicating the performance mode executed this time is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a. Note that in this control example, even after the button performance period ends, the progress status display mode Dm4a is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm4, and the value "3" indicating that the button performance period has ended with three cracks 820 displayed is displayed. This makes it easy for the player to understand what the performance result of the crack breaking performance corresponding to the "fish school reach" executed this time was.

As described above, when the configuration is used in which the performance mode of the second performance executed after the first performance (cracked performance) can be set based on the performance result of the first performance, and the performance result of the first performance is displayed when the second performance is executed, for example, the display of the performance result of the first performance may be configured to display a performance result different from the actual performance result of the first performance. In this case, it is preferable to configure the display to display a performance result different from the actual performance result of the first performance when the lottery result of the special chart variation is a jackpot. This makes it possible to provide an unnatural performance to the player, and also makes it easier to win a jackpot when the unnatural performance is executed, thereby providing a novel performance.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22a is not operated during the first period of the button effect of the cracked effect, at the end of the first period, as shown in FIG. 569(b), the progress display mode Dm4a in the small display area Dm4 displays "0", a button display mode Dm5a that does not prompt the player to operate the frame button 22a is displayed, and a remaining period display mode Dm5b displays a display mode in which the remaining period is 0 is displayed. Then, the comment display area Dm2a displays the comment "Sorry, it's over," and a display screen is displayed informing the player that the cracked effect has ended with the end of the first period.

In this control example, in order to avoid discomfort even if a player who does not like to operate the frame button 22a is playing the game when the frame button 22a is not operated during the first period, the display screen shown in FIG. 569(b) is displayed at the end of the first period and the button effect period (operation valid period) is ended. However, without being limited to this, for example, the number of cracks 820 may be determined by lottery at the end of the first period, and the determined number of cracks 820 may be displayed on the display screen. This makes it possible to provide effects corresponding to various numbers of cracks 820 even for players who do not operate the frame button 22a. In addition, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that a number of cracks 820 (for example, 0.5) that is difficult to display when the player operates the operation means multiple times during the first period can be displayed. This makes it possible to make the player think about whether or not to operate the frame button 22a during the first period in order to experience various effects, and prevents the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Next, the background change effect is an effect that changes the background mode when the combination of third patterns stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is a specific combination. In this control example, when the display control device 114 receives a stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, it is configured to determine the stopping mode (combination of stopped patterns) of the third patterns displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to receive a background change pattern type command for indicating the stop mode determined by the display control device 114, and when the background change pattern type command is received, a determination is made as to whether or not to change the background mode based on the stop pattern information contained in the command. By configuring it in this way, even if the lottery result for the special pattern is a miss, the player can be made interested in which stop mode will display the miss, and the player can enjoy the performance executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 until the very end.

Furthermore, unlike conventional pachinko machines that determine in advance whether or not to change the background mode, and based on the determination result that the background mode will be changed, freeze-display the third symbol to notify the player that the background will be changed (freeze-display the background change notification symbol), this machine is configured to determine whether to execute a background change depending on the stopping mode of the third symbol that is actually frozen and displayed; in other words, it is configured so that the stopping mode of the third symbol is the trigger for the background change lottery. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily control the ease of changing the background or the destination of the background change based on the stopping mode of the third symbol and the set game state.

In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to determine the stop mode of the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the special symbol lottery is unsuccessful, the player may operate the operation means to variably select the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, the stop mode can be varied based on the player's operation result, which can increase the player's motivation to participate in the game. In addition, in this case, it is preferable to make it easier to change the background when the player operates the operation means than when the player does not operate the operation means at all. For example, it is preferable to configure the stop mode of the third symbol, which will result in a background change, to be displayed only when the operation means is operated. This can make the player more motivated to participate in the performance.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the tenth control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the tenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 570 and Fig. 572. Fig. 570(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example, and Fig. 570(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example.

As shown in FIG. 570(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the ninth control example described above in that it adds a crack effect selection table 222ha that is used when selecting the presentation mode of the crack effect, but the other elements are the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions are omitted.

The crack effect selection table 222ha is a data table referenced when selecting the effect mode (display conditions for displaying the second and subsequent cracks) of the crack effect, which is one of the operation effects performed by operating the operating means (frame button 22a), and is referenced (Z7105 in FIG. 577) when it is determined that the SW (switch) effect being executed is a crack effect (Z7101 in FIG. 577: Yes) in the SW effect processing 10 (see Z2897 in FIG. 577) executed when the frame button 22a is pressed.

Now, referring to FIG. 572, the contents of the cracked effect selection table 222ha will be explained. FIG. 572 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the cracked effect selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 572, the cracked effect selection table 222ha defines different cracked effect presentation modes (number of frame button operations that increase the number of cracks) depending on the lottery result (win/lose determination result) of the special chart change that will result in the cracked effect being executed, the timing of the first frame button operation (press) during the SW effective period of the cracked effect, and the acquired value of the SW special effect counter 223ha.

Specifically, if the result of the hit/miss determination is a hit (jackpot) and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value that corresponds to 0-1 second or 3-4 seconds, effect type A is specified when the value of the SW special effect counterha is in the range of "0-39", effect B is specified when the value is in the range of "40-89", and effect C is specified when the value is in the range of "90-99".

Here, we will explain the specific contents of each effect type defined in the crack effect selection table 222ha. Effect type A is a scenario in which the number of frame button operations required for the second crack to appear is set to "5", and the number of frame button operations required for the third crack to appear (MAX) is set to "10". Effect type B is a scenario in which the number of frame button operations required for the second crack to appear is set to "7", and the number of frame button operations required for the third crack to appear (MAX) is set to "15", and effect type C is a scenario in which the number of frame button operations required for the second crack to appear is set to "10", and the number of frame button operations required for the third crack to appear (MAX) is set to "25".

In other words, the number of times the number of cracks is changed by the second and subsequent frame button operations will vary depending on the presentation mode of the cracking presentation, which is set based on the timing of the first frame button operation. This makes it difficult for the player to understand how many frame button operations are required to change the cracks, enhancing the presentation effect.

The crack effect selection table 222ha shown in FIG. 572 only shows effect types in which the third crack is always displayed when the player operates the frame button 22 the required number of times, but in reality, effect types in which the second crack is not displayed no matter how many times the frame button 22 is operated and effect types in which the third crack is not displayed are also specified. In this way, by specifying effect types in which the cracks are difficult to change and effect types in which the cracks are not variable, it is possible to keep the player excited until the end and have them operate the frame button, even if an effect type in which the cracks are not variable is set.

Let's go back to Figure 572 for further explanation. If the result of the win/loss determination is a win (jackpot) and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value other than 0-1 seconds or 3-4 seconds (1-3 seconds, 4-5 seconds), then effect type A is specified when the value of the SW special effect counterha is in the range of "0-19", effect B is specified when the value is in the range of "20-79", and effect C is specified when the value is in the range of "80-99".

In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value corresponding to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, then effect type A is specified when the value of the SW special effect counter ha is in the range of "0 to 29", effect B is specified when the value is in the range of "30 to 89", and effect D is specified when the value is in the range of "90 to 99". In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (ranges of 1 to 3 seconds, 4 to 5 seconds), then effect type A is specified when the value of the SW special effect counter ha is in the range of "0 to 4", effect B is specified when the value is in the range of "5 to 79", and effect D is specified when the value is in the range of "80 to 99".

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 571. As shown in FIG. 571, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this tenth control example differs from the RAM 223 of the above-mentioned ninth control example in that it adds a SW performance counter 223ha, a button press counter 223hb, and a crack information storage area 223hc, but the other elements are the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The SW effect counter 223ha is a counter used to select the crack effect, and is repeatedly updated by incrementing by 1 within the range of 0 to 198 each time the audio lamp control device 113 main processing (see FIG. 573) is executed. Note that the detailed contents are the same as those of the effect counter 223h described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The button press counter 223hb is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and its value is incremented by one each time the frame button 22 is operated. In the crack effect executed in this tenth control example, the effect mode (display of a variable number of cracks) corresponding to the effect type that has been set is executed based on the value of this button press counter 223hb.

The crack information storage area 223hc is a storage area for temporarily storing the type of effect selected using the crack effect selection table 222ha.

<Regarding the control contents of the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example>
Next, the control contents of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to Figs. 573 to 577. Note that the same control contents as those in the above-mentioned control examples are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 573, the main processing 10 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 573 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 10. As shown in FIG. 573, main processing 10 differs from main processing 8 of the eighth control example described above in that frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 has been changed to frame button input monitoring and performance processing 10, and command determination processing 8 has been changed to command determination processing 10, but otherwise is the same.

Next, the contents of command determination process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 574. FIG. 574 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 10. This command determination process 10 differs from command determination process 8 described above in that it adds a control process for when a display background change pattern command is received, but is otherwise the same. The details of this display background change pattern command will be described later, but this command is a command output from the display control device 114 and contains information for indicating the stopping mode of the third patterns to be stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (the combination position of each third pattern when stopped).

When command determination process 10 is executed, the same processes Z2201 to Z2208 as command determination process 8 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether a display background change pattern command has been received (Z7201). If it is determined in the process of Z7201 that a display background change pattern command has been received (Z7201: Yes), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode memory area 223i (Z7202), a display switch command to the variable pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z7203), and this process is terminated.

In other words, in this tenth control example, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a process to change the background mode based on the stopping mode of the third symbol set by the display control device 114. In this way, by determining whether or not to switch the background mode depending on the stopping mode of the third symbol that is actually stopped and displayed, the player can be made to pay attention to the stopping mode in which the third symbol will be stopped and displayed, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss.

Next, the contents of frame button input monitoring and performance processing 10 will be explained with reference to FIG. 575. FIG. 575 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and performance processing 10. This frame button input monitoring and performance processing 10 differs from the above-mentioned frame button input monitoring and performance processing 8 in that the SW special processing executed has been changed to SW performance processing 10, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, the cracked effect end process (Z2896) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 10 will be explained with reference to FIG. 576. FIG. 576 is a flowchart showing the contents of the cracked effect end process (Z2896). In this cracked effect end process (Z2896), when a specific period has elapsed in the cracked effect, processing is executed to set the subsequent effect mode.

When the crack effect end process (Z2896) is executed, first the value of the SW effective time counter is obtained and it is determined whether 5 seconds have passed since the start of the crack effect (whether the elapsed time has reached 5 seconds) (Z7002). If it is determined that it has not passed 5 seconds (Z7002: No), it is then determined whether 15 seconds have passed (whether the elapsed time has reached 15 seconds) (Z7006). If it is determined that 15 seconds have not passed (Z7006: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the process of Z7002 determines that the elapsed time is 5 seconds (Z7002: Yes), it determines whether the value of the button press counter 223hb is greater than 0 (Z7003), and if it determines that it is not greater than 0 (Z7003: No), it sets a display effect command indicating the end of the crack effect (Z7004), clears the values of the SW valid time counter 223k and the button press counter 223hb (sets them to 0), and terminates this process.

If it is determined in the process of Z7003 that the value of the button press counter 223b is greater than 0 (Z7003: Yes), this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of Z7006 that 15 seconds have elapsed (Z7006: Yes), a display switching command corresponding to the value of the button press counter 223hb is set (Z7007), the value of the button press counter 223hb is cleared (Z7008), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of SW performance processing 10 will be explained with reference to FIG. 577. FIG. 577 is a flowchart showing the contents of SW performance processing 10. This SW performance processing 10 differs from the SW performance processing described above in that processing related to cracking effects has been added. As the rest of the process is the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

When SW effect processing 10 is executed, it is first determined whether the currently set SW effect is a crack effect (Z7101), and if it is determined that it is not a crack effect (Z7101: No), the same control as the SW effect processing of the eighth control example described above is executed. On the other hand, if the processing of Z7101 determines that the set SW effect is a crack effect (Z7101: Yes), it is then determined whether information (data) indicating the effect mode of the crack effect is stored in the crack information memory area 223hc (Z7102).

If it is determined in the processing of Z7102 that information (data) indicating the presentation mode of the crack effect is already stored in the crack information storage area 223hc (Z7102: Yes), the value of the button press counter 223hb is incremented by 1 (Z7106), the crack effect type set in the crack information storage area 223hc is read (Z7107), a display presentation command is set to indicate the presentation mode (variable number of cracks presentation, teasing presentation) corresponding to the read presentation type and the value of the button press counter 223hb, and this processing is terminated.

Also, if it is determined in the processing of Z7102 that there is no data (Z7102: No), then the value of the SW effect counter 223ha is obtained, the crack effect selection table 222ha is read (Z7104), the corresponding crack effect type is determined based on the value of the SW effective time counter at the time the button was pressed and the obtained value of the SW effect counter 223ha, and set in the crack information storage area (Z7105), the corresponding display effect command is set (Z7108), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control process of the display control device in the tenth control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 in this tenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 578. The control contents of the display control device 114 in this control example are the same as those in the eighth control example described above, except that stop type command process 8 has been changed to stop type command process 10. The same control contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 578 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop type command processing 10 (Z3496). In this stop type command processing 10 (Z3496), a command (display background change pattern command) is set to output information about the stop pattern set in the voice lamp control device 113.

When stop type command processing 10 (Z3496) is executed, first, the same Z3601 and Z3602 processes as those of stop type command processing 8 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether the stop pattern set in the Z3602 process is a stop pattern that indicates a background change (Z8001). If it is determined in the Z8001 process that the stop pattern is not a stop pattern that executes a background change, the stop pattern determination flag is set to on, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the process of Z8001 determines that the stopped pattern indicates a background change, the display background change pattern command is set (Z8002), the stopped pattern determination flag is set to on (Z3603), and this process is terminated.

<Eleventh control example>
Next, an eleventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 579 to Fig. 592. In each of the above control examples, the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested to the player by using the liquid crystal presentation using the third symbol display device 81 and the role presentation using the movable role (for example, the tilt device 310) that moves the frame button 22.

Specifically, the main control device 110 sets a variation pattern command that includes information indicating the result of the lottery for the special symbol, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the presentation mode of the liquid crystal presentation and the presentation mode of the gimmick presentation based on the information indicating the result of the lottery for the special symbol included in the received variation pattern command.

The liquid crystal display set here is output to the display control device 114 as a display command, and various image data is created by the display control device 114 to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, for the reel display, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a drive scenario for driving the movable reel in a predetermined manner, and drive control is performed on the drive means (e.g., voice coil motor 352) for moving the movable reel (e.g., tilt device 310) based on the set drive scenario.

In this way, when data for liquid crystal performance and data for gimmick performance are created based on one piece of information (variable pattern command), and performances are performed for multiple performance devices (third pattern display device 81, movable gimmicks) based on the created data, it is possible to perform more interesting performances by synchronizing the performances performed by each performance device. However, in each of the control examples described above, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs data related to the performance to each performance device (display control device 114 and tilt device 310), which makes it difficult to synchronize the performance content performed by each performance device.

In particular, in a reel performance that moves a movable reel that is configured to be movable between an initial position and a movable position, such as the tilting device 310, in order to execute a specific reel performance, it is necessary to carry out a preparatory operation to move the movable reel from the initial position to the performance start position, and a finishing operation to move the movable reel back to the initial position after the reel performance has ended. Therefore, when a performance is executed for multiple performance devices based on one piece of information (a variation pattern command), if the performance is executed without taking into account the position of the movable reel at the time the performance corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed, there is a problem that the LCD performance and the reel performance will be misaligned.

Therefore, in this eleventh control example, the content (performance mode) of a composite performance that combines a liquid crystal performance (display performance) and a gadget performance (driving performance) is set based on the operating status of the movable gadget at the timing of execution of the composite performance. Specifically, the composite performance is executed only when the movable gadget is in a specified position (initial position) at the timing of execution of the composite performance. By configuring it in this way, even if control instructions for the liquid crystal performance (display performance) and control instructions for the gadget performance (moving performance) are executed separately, it is possible to prevent the display performance and the gadget performance from becoming misaligned as a composite performance, thereby improving the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this eleventh control example, if the timing to execute a composite performance arrives when the movable role is not in its initial position, i.e., when the movable role actuated by the previously executed role performance has not returned to its initial position, a display performance is executed that shows a performance result equivalent to that of the composite performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the player continues playing without being able to recognize the performance result that should be notified to the player using the composite performance.

Here, in this eleventh control example, the above-mentioned composite effect is configured to be executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. The detailed contents of the effect will be described later, but the composite effect (last effect) is executed during the ending period, so that the player is immediately suggested (informed) that he or she will win the next jackpot (that there is a high possibility of winning) after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned composite performance (last performance) during a jackpot game, a role performance that drives the movable role (tilting device 310) is executed. For example, a role performance (probability change promotion performance) is executed to notify whether the game state set after the jackpot game is a probability change state that is advantageous to the player, or a normal state (time-saving state) that is a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability change state. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to be operable as a decorative performance to liven up the period during the jackpot game. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to move in various operation patterns (operation scenarios). In this way, by driving one movable role (tilting device 310) in various operation modes for multiple purposes during a jackpot game, one movable role can be used for multiple purposes, and the performance effect can be efficiently improved.

However, as described above, the more efficiently the effect of the performance is enhanced, the easier it becomes for other role effects to be set during the period when the movable role is in operation (the easier it becomes for the execution periods of the role effects to overlap), resulting in a problem that the performance is difficult for the player to understand. In addition, if the execution periods of multiple role effects using movable roles are fixed in advance to prevent overlapping execution of the role effects using movable roles, the role effects become monotonous and the performance effect is reduced. In contrast, in this control example, if the execution periods of the role effects overlap, one role effect is switched to another (for example, a display effect using a liquid crystal display device). This makes it possible to provide a performance that is easy for the player to understand even if the performance content can be set so that the execution periods of the role effects can overlap, and furthermore, since a variety of role effects can be executed, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, referring to FIG. 579, the flow for setting the composite effects in this eleventh control example will be explained. FIG. 579 is a timing chart showing the flow of display effects and role effects (operation effects) during jackpot play. Of the effects shown in FIG. 579, the contents of the OP effects displayed during the opening period of jackpot play, the round effects displayed during normal round play, and the interval effects displayed during interval periods are the same as those explained in the control examples described above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 579, in this control example, multiple role effects (operation effects) are executed during a jackpot game. Specifically, during a specific round (one of rounds 1, 8, or 16) of a jackpot game, the tilt device 310 (see FIG. 142) associated with the frame button 22a is opened (raised) and when the tilt device 310 is completely opened (raised), a first operation effect is executed in which the frame button 22 is pressed down, and during the ending period of the jackpot game, the tilt device 310 (see FIG. 142) associated with the frame button 22a is opened (raised) and when the tilt device 310 is completely opened (raised), a second operation effect is executed in which the frame button 22 is pressed down.

The first operation presentation is a sure-variable promotion presentation in which a presentation result is given to inform the player whether the game state set after the end of a jackpot game is a sure-variable state or not, and the second operation presentation is a reserved consecutive presentation in which a presentation result is given to inform the player whether there is winning information in the reserved memory of the special pattern indicating that the lottery result is a sure-variable jackpot (jackpot B1 or jackpot B2 (see Figure 359)).

For example, according to the flow shown in FIG. 579(a), the first operation presentation (promise promotion presentation) is executed in the 16th round (final round) of the jackpot game. Here, the first operation presentation (promise promotion presentation) is formed of a first presentation period (about 6 seconds) during which the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) is aroused as to whether it will be fully opened (risen), a second presentation period (about 2 seconds) during which the tilting device 310 is fully opened (risen) during the first presentation period and the player can press the frame button 22, and a third presentation period (about 2 seconds) during which the tilting device 310 is moved to its initial position when the player presses the frame button 22 during the second presentation period or when the second presentation period has elapsed.

On the other hand, the round game during the big win game is configured to end when 30 seconds have passed or when 10 balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, depending on the winning status during the round game, as shown in FIG. 579(a), the first operation presentation (promise promotion presentation) may not have ended (the tilting device 310 is not in the initial position) at the end of the 16th round (final round). Also, for example, even if the first operation presentation is configured to be forcibly ended at the time when the end condition of the 16th round (final round) is met, even if it is in the middle stage, a period is required to move the tilting device 310 in the forcibly ended state to the initial position, so the tilting device 310 cannot be positioned at the initial position at the end of the 16th round (final round).

In this way, if the movable part (tilting device 310) that is the subject of the operation presentation is not located in the initial position at the end of the 16th round (final round) or the start of the ending period, even if the conditions for executing the second operation presentation, which is the reserved consecutive presentation (last presentation), are met during the ending period, the operation presentation using the tilting device 310 is not executed, and the last presentation is executed only with the display presentation using the third pattern display device 81.

As a result, even if the timing for executing the reserved consecutive performance (last performance) arrives when the operation performance corresponding to the first operation performance (promotion to special chance performance) has not completely ended (the movable role (tilting device 310) driven by the first operation performance is not in its initial position), the last performance can be executed using only the display performance, allowing the player to experience the reserved consecutive performance.

In addition, this control example is configured to execute a second operation presentation that is executed later and is more likely to result in a presentation that grants a more advantageous benefit to the player than the first operation presentation that is executed first. Therefore, by configuring it as in this control example, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring such as the second operation presentation that is more likely to result in a more advantageous presentation to the player than the first operation presentation not being executed depending on the execution status of the first operation presentation that is executed first, or the operation presentation and display presentation in the second operation presentation being misaligned, reducing the presentation effect.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, in this control example, the execution conditions for each effect are set so that the reserved consecutive effects are more difficult to execute than the special rate promotion effects during a jackpot game. Therefore, by configuring it as in this control example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems in which the execution of effects that are difficult to execute is hindered by effects that are easy to execute.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 579(b), when the first operation effect (probability promotion effect) is executed in the first round of a jackpot game, the probability promotion effect is carried out using a predetermined period from the first round, and then the 16th round (final round) can be completed with the tilting device 310 positioned in the initial position, so that the reserved consecutive effect (last effect) executed during the ending period can be executed by synchronizing the second operation effect using the movable role (tilting device 310) and the display effect using the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to Fig. 580 to Fig. 582, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the operation effects (first operation effect, second operation effect) during the jackpot game described above are executed will be described. In one example described using Fig. 580 to Fig. 582, a display example during a jackpot game based on jackpot B2 (a jackpot of even symbols (666) in a 16-round probability change) is shown. Note that Fig. 580 to Fig. 582 show an example of a display screen during a jackpot game, and only the characteristic display mode in this control example is described. Each element displayed on the display screen during a jackpot game described in each of the above control examples (for example, elements showing the number of prize balls during a jackpot, the probability change state, or the cumulative number of jackpots won during the time-saving state (number of consecutive wins)) is the same, so its description is omitted.

Figure 580 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of what is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 during the first performance period of the high probability promotion performance, and Figure 580 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of what is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 during the second performance period of the high probability promotion performance. And Figure 581 is a schematic diagram showing an example of what is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when the player presses the frame button 22a during the second performance period of the high probability promotion performance.

First, when the probability promotion effect (first operation effect) is executed, the comment "If the button pops out, it's your chance" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown within the box, the tilt device 310 is swung in small increments in the opening direction (upward) and closing direction (downward) (for ease of explanation, within the box in Figure 580 (a), the state in which the frame button 22a swung in small increments up and down is shown).

When the tilting device 310 is fully opened (raised) from the state shown in FIG. 580(a), as shown in FIG. 580(b), a button display mode showing the raised frame button 22a is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, along with a "press" comment encouraging the player to press the frame button 22a, as shown in FIG. 580(b). Note that within the framed lines in FIG. 580(b), for ease of explanation, the frame button 22a is shown to be fully protruding, indicating that the tilting device 310 is fully opened (raised) and the player is able to press the frame button 22a.

When the player presses the frame button 22a in the state shown in FIG. 580(b), the word "Super" is displayed near the third symbol display "666" at the time of the jackpot as a special probability promotion mode to indicate that the current jackpot was a special probability jackpot until the end of the jackpot game. Then, the word "Lucky" is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 581). Then, when the protruding frame button 22a is pressed, the frame button 22a is positioned in the initial state (downward state) as shown within the frame line in FIG. 581. In this way, by constantly displaying the special probability promotion mode ("Super") on the display screen, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that a special probability state will be set after the current jackpot game ends, even after the special probability promotion performance has ended.

In this control example, a display mode with the character "Super" is used as the probability variable promotion mode, but this is not limited to this. For example, the display color of the third pattern "666" may be changed to a display color (e.g., rainbow) indicating that the probability variable state will be set after the end of the jackpot game, or a display mode (e.g., a character) of a display color (e.g., rainbow) indicating that the probability variable state will be set after the end of the jackpot game may be displayed on the display screen. Also, in this control example, the third pattern "666" at the time of the jackpot win is not changed, but is configured to be added to the probability variable promotion mode, making it easier for the player to understand which display mode of the third pattern has won the jackpot. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the third pattern "666" at the time of the jackpot win may be changed to a display mode (e.g., "777") indicating that it is a probability variable jackpot.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this control example, even if the current jackpot is jackpot A (16 rounds, 100 times time reduction), the above-mentioned high probability promotion effect is executed. In this case, since the high probability state is not set after the jackpot game ends, when the player presses the frame button 22a in the state of FIG. 580(b), the display screen shown in FIG. 581 is replaced with the display screen shown in FIG. 581, and the word "unfortunate" is displayed to indicate that the high probability promotion effect has failed. In addition, in some cases of jackpot B2 (16 rounds of high probability and jackpot with even number pattern (666)), the word "unfortunate" may be displayed to indicate that the high probability promotion effect has failed. This allows the player to play with anticipation until the jackpot game ends, since the high probability state may be set after the jackpot game ends even if the high probability promotion effect fails.

In addition, in this control example, as a failure pattern of the high probability promotion effect, only the effect executed during the first effect period (about 6 seconds) which prompts whether the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) will fully open (rise) is executed, and then a prompting effect is executed in which the tilting device 310 is moved (evacuated) to its initial position. This prompting effect is also configured to be executed when a performance condition other than the execution condition of the high probability promotion effect (for example, a condition that is met when a performance lottery executed at the start timing of a round game is won, when a predetermined number or more balls enter a specific winning hole 65a during a round game, or when a player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during a jackpot game) is met.

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to know whether or not a high probability promotion performance has been executed, and the player can have hope that the tilting device 310 will be completely opened (risen) when the provocative performance is executed. In addition, the frequency with which the provocative performance is executed can be increased, thereby improving the performance effect. In this case, it is preferable to configure the device to be able to execute a performance fusion pattern that executes the display mode (provocative performance display) shown in FIG. 580(a) during the first performance period of the high probability promotion performance, i.e., during the provocative performance, and a role performance pattern that executes the provocative performance only with the movable role (tilting device 310). This makes it difficult for the player to tell whether the current teasing effect is part of the high probability promotion effect, or whether it is a teasing effect that is executed when a performance condition other than the execution condition of the high probability promotion effect is met (for example, a condition that is met when a performance lottery executed at the start of a round of play is won, when a predetermined number or more balls enter a specific winning slot 65a during a round of play, or when a player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during a jackpot game) is met, thereby enhancing the effect of the presentation.

Next, referring to FIG. 582, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the hold consecutive performance will be described. FIG. 582(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the tilt device 310 is in a completely open (raised) state during the hold consecutive performance, and FIG. 582(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the frame button 22a is pressed in the state of FIG. 582(a).

In this control example, when the ending period of the jackpot begins, the reserved winning information is analyzed (discriminated), and if the analysis (discrimination) results show that the reserved winning information contains information indicating that a certain jackpot will be won, a reserved consecutive performance is executed. When this reserved consecutive performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 582(a), the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) is fully opened (risen) during the ending period (see the framed area in FIG. 582), and the display screen displays a button display mode showing the fully raised frame button 22a and the word "press" to encourage the player to press the frame button 22a. In FIG. 582(a), the word "ending" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, indicating that the jackpot game is in the ending period.

When frame button 22a is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 582(a), the word "Super Lucky" is displayed, indicating that the consecutive reserved play performance was successful, and a video of many fish-like characters moving across the screen is played on the display screen. In addition, the edge of the third pattern "666" when a jackpot is won is changed to a success display mode indicating the success of the consecutive reserved play performance. This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the consecutive reserved play performance was successful (that there is a guaranteed jackpot in the reserved memory).

In this control example, the execution condition for the reserved consecutive performance is set to be that a probability variable jackpot is found in the reserved memory, and the reserved consecutive performance can be executed regardless of whether the jackpot game being played is a probability variable jackpot or not. This means that, for example, even if the probability variable promotion performance is executed and fails during a jackpot game (even if there is a high possibility that the current jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot), the possibility of the reserved consecutive performance being executed can be left open, allowing the player to play with anticipation until the end. Also, if the probability variable promotion performance executed during a jackpot game is successful, a probability variable state in which the probability of a jackpot is high is set after the jackpot game ends, making it easier for winning information for a probability variable jackpot to be included in the reserved memory. Therefore, a player who succeeds in the probability variable promotion performance during a jackpot game can play until the end of the jackpot game while increasing their anticipation for the reserved consecutive performance being executed.

In this control example, the execution condition for the reserved consecutive performance is that there is a guaranteed jackpot in the reserved memory at the time the ending period begins, but this is not limited to this. For example, the execution condition for the reserved consecutive performance may be set to the presence of a guaranteed jackpot in the reserved memory that is reserved at a specified timing during the jackpot game, such as the start of the jackpot game, the start or end of a specific round game, or the timing when the special chart variation that won the jackpot stops. Also, if there are multiple winning information indicating a jackpot in the reserved memory, the reserved consecutive performance may be configured to be executed even if the jackpot is not a guaranteed jackpot, or the presentation mode of the reserved consecutive performance may be variably set depending on the number of winning information indicating a jackpot contained in the reserved memory.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eleventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 583 to Fig. 587. In this eleventh control example, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above is different in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed, but otherwise the same. The same symbols are used for the same elements, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 583, the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 211 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 583 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 583, the ROM 222 of this eleventh control example differs from the ROM 222 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 467) in that a special prize operation performance selection table 222ia, a special prize tilting action scenario table 222ib, and an operation performance execution timing selection table 222ic have been added. Since the rest of the elements are the same, the same symbols are used for the same elements and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The special prize operation effect selection table 222ia is a data table used when selecting whether or not to execute an operation effect (probability change promotion effect) during a jackpot game, and the presentation mode of the operation effect to be executed. In this control example, it is referenced when selecting whether or not to execute a probability change promotion effect during a jackpot game, and the presentation mode of the probability change promotion effect (a presentation mode that progresses to a state where the frame button 22a can be pressed, or a teasing presentation mode that ends without the frame button 22a being pressed).

Here, the contents of the special prize operation effect selection table 222ia will be explained with reference to FIG. 585(a). FIG. 585(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special prize operation effect selection table 222ia. As shown in FIG. 585(a), the special prize operation effect selection table 222ia defines different tilting action scenarios based on the type of jackpot that was won and the acquired value of the effect counter 223h.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A (16 rounds, time-saving hit)," "tilt action scenario B" is defined for the range of "0 to 9" for the acquired performance counter 223h value, and "tilt action scenario C" is defined for the range of "10 to 99." And, for the range of "100 to 199," it is defined that no tilt action scenario is set.

Here, a brief explanation of the tilting operation scenario defined in the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia is given. This tilting operation scenario defines the operation scenario for driving the tilting device 310, which is a movable part, and sets the operation performance start time (operation performance start period) T1, which is the timer value that determines the timing at which the tilting device 310 starts to be driven after the tilting operation scenario is set, and the timer value T2 of the tilting operation timer 223db, which sets the operation time (operation period) of the tilting device 310. In other words, the operation data (scenario) selected from the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia sets whether or not a performance using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if so, the start timing and content of the operation performance using the tilting device 310.

As will be described in detail later, each tilting operation scenario contains information that changes the operating mode of the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 is configured to be able to operate in various operating modes based on the progress of the timer value T2 described above.

Returning to FIG. 585, we will continue the explanation. It is stipulated that the tilting operation scenario is not set when the jackpot type is "jackpot B1 (16 rounds, probability variable, odd pattern jackpot)" and the acquired value of the performance counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 199". In other words, in this control example, the probability variable promotion performance (see FIG. 580 and FIG. 581) is configured to be executable as an operation performance executed during a jackpot game, and this probability variable promotion performance is a performance to suggest (notify) the player that a jackpot has been reached in which a probability variable state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, in "jackpot B1" where the third symbol is stopped as an odd number symbol, which is a display mode indicating a jackpot, when a jackpot occurs (when a special symbol is stopped in a display mode indicating a jackpot), even if a special promotion effect is executed during a jackpot game, it would only provide a meaningless effect to the player, which could reduce their motivation to play, so the special prize operation effect selection table 222ia is configured to prevent the selection of an operation effect (tilting movement scenario). This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play caused by the execution of an effect that is meaningless to the player.

Next, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B2 (16 rounds, probability variable, even number jackpot)," "tilt action scenario B" is specified for the range of "0 to 49" of the acquired performance counter 223h value, and "tilt action scenario C" is specified for the range of "50 to 149." The range of "150 to 199" is specified so that the tilt action scenario is not set. Also, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (2 rounds, probability variable)," the acquired performance counter 223h value is specified to be in the range of "0 to 199," that is, "no tilt action scenario setting" is specified for the entire range. This "jackpot C" is set to have fewer rounds (2 rounds) executed during the jackpot game than other jackpot games, and in this control example, the probability variable state is always set after that number of rounds (2 rounds) of jackpot games are executed.

As such, since "Jackpot C", like the above-mentioned "Jackpot B1", is a jackpot that clearly sets a high probability state after the jackpot play ends by understanding the game mode of the jackpot play, it is configured so that no operation performance (tilting movement scenario) is selected using the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to the execution of meaningless performances. Also, by executing operation performances within a small number of rounds, it is possible to prevent the performance mode during the jackpot play from becoming complicated.

Here, we will briefly explain the contents of the tilting operation scenario type defined in the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia. Note that detailed explanations of the tilting operation scenarios that are the same as those in the fifth control example described above will be omitted. In this control example, the tilting operation scenario types defined in the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia include tilting operation scenario B and tilting operation scenario C. The tilting operation scenario B moves the tilting device 310 with the same operation as the tilting operation scenario B used in the fifth control example described above, and the scenario for moving the tilting device 310 is defined so that a preparation period for performing a preparatory drive to move the tilting device 310, a promotion performance period for performing a promotion drive to move the tilting device 310 in the up and down direction (opening and closing direction) three times repeatedly, and a pressing performance period for waiting for a predetermined period in a state where the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised) are set.

On the other hand, tilting operation scenario C specifies an operation scenario that executes only a part of the tilting operation scenario B described above, and specifies a scenario in which the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position after a preparatory period in which a preparatory drive is executed to move the tilting device 310 and a provocative performance period in which a provocative drive is executed to move the tilting device 310 in the up and down direction (opening and closing direction) three times are set. In other words, when tilting operation scenario B is set, a sure-win promotion performance (see FIG. 580(b)) is executed in which the player is made to press the frame button 22a during a jackpot game, and when tilting operation scenario C is set, a provocative performance (see FIG. 580(a)) in which the player is not made to press the frame button 22a during a jackpot game is executed.

As described above, the preparatory drive (preparatory period) and the titling drive (titting performance period) for the tilting device 310 that are executed when tilting operation scenario C is set are specified to have the same content as tilting operation scenario B, so when the titling drive (titting performance) of the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not he or she can press the frame button 22a afterwards. This makes it possible to create a sense of anticipation for the probability bonus promotion performance on the journey where the titling performance is executed.

In addition, in the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia, similar to the operation performance selection table 222da of the fifth control example described above, for each tilting operation scenario, the operation performance start time (operation performance start period) T1 and the timer value T2 of the tilting operation timer 223db for setting the operation time (operation period) of the tilting device 310 are specified. In the tilting operation scenario B, the operation performance start time TI is specified as 1000 milliseconds (1 second) and the timer value T2 is specified as 7900 milliseconds (7.9 seconds), and in the tilting operation scenario C, the operation performance start time TI is specified as 1000 milliseconds (1 second) and the timer value T2 is specified as 5200 milliseconds (5.2 seconds). In other words, the period set as the operation performance start time TI is specified to be shorter than that of each tilting operation scenario specified in the operation performance selection table 222da of the fifth control example described above.

In other words, the performance using the movable role based on the tilting operation scenario selected by referring to the above-mentioned operation performance selection table 222ia is executed during the special pattern change, and since it is necessary to move the movable role in accordance with the change display executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, it was necessary to provide a predetermined grace period for the operation performance start time TI, but since the performance using the movable role based on the tilting operation scenario selected by referring to the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia is executed during the jackpot game (during the round game), even if it is executed immediately after the round game starts, it does not give the player a sense of incongruity. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the performance that moves the movable role immediately after the round game starts, so the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, by executing the performance that moves the movable role early, it is possible to easily end the performance using the movable role within a specific period (round game period).

As explained above, in this control example, the tilt action scenario selected using the special prize operation presentation selection table 222ia is designed to have a higher selection rate for tilt action scenario B when the jackpot type is "jackpot B2" than when it is "jackpot A". Specifically, the selection rate is configured to be five times higher. By configuring in this way, when tilt action scenario B is set and a state in which the frame button 22a can be pressed is provided, it is possible to increase the possibility that the current jackpot will be a guaranteed jackpot.

Therefore, when a promotional effect is executed during a jackpot game, the promotional effect (see FIG. 580(a)) progresses, and the player can play the jackpot while anticipating a transition to a state in which the frame button 22a can be pressed (see FIG. 580(b)). Furthermore, when the frame button 22a is in a state in which it can be pressed, there is a high probability that the promotion effect to the special mode will be successful, which makes the player more eager to press the frame button 22a, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the effect.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, in addition to selecting the tilting operation scenario C by referring to the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia described above, the tilting operation scenario C can be set when a specific performance condition is met (for example, when the performance lottery executed at the start timing of the round game is won, when a predetermined number or more balls enter the specific winning hole 65a during the round game, when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during the jackpot game, etc.). As a result, it is possible to execute a provocative performance other than when a high probability promotion performance is set (when a tilting operation scenario is selected by the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia), so that it is difficult for the player to know whether the high probability promotion performance has ended with a provocative performance or a provocative performance other than the high probability promotion performance has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to play while expecting that a performance in which the high probability promotion performance is successful will be executed until the end of the jackpot game.

The special prize tilt operation scenario table 222ib is a data table that stores the operation contents for the tilt device 310 executed during a big win game. A detailed explanation of the specific contents that are the same as those in the fifth control example described above will be omitted, but a data table is set for setting the type of tilt operation scenario selected in the special prize tilt operation scenario table 222ib and the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia, and the origin detection operation table B for returning the tilt device 320 to the origin after executing the tilt operation scenario.

Here, the contents of the special prize tilting action scenario table 222ib will be explained with reference to FIG. 585(b). FIG. 585(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special prize tilting action scenario table 222ib. As shown in FIG. 585(b), the special prize tilting action scenario table 222ib has a tilting action scenario B table 222db2, a tilting action scenario C table 222ib1, an origin detection action B table 222db4, and an ending scenario table 222ib2. Of these, the special prize tilting action scenario table 222ib and the origin detection action B table 222db4 have the same contents as those in the fifth control example described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The tilt operation scenario C table 222ib1 specifies an operation scenario in which the tilt device 310 (frame button 22a) performs a provocative effect in which it swings up and down in small increments, and then moves to the initial position, and is a partial adaptation of the operation scenario specified in the tilt operation scenario B table 222db2 of the fifth control example described above.

The contents stipulated in the tilting action scenario C table 222ib1 will now be described with reference to FIG. 586(a). FIG. 586(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the tilting action scenario C table 222ib1. This tilting action scenario C table 222ib1 is set by lottery on the special prize operation presentation selection table 222ia at the start of the big win game. Then, when the operation presentation start time set in the special prize operation presentation selection table 222ia has elapsed after the tilting action scenario C is set, the operation of the tilting action scenario C table 222ib1 will start.

The tilt action scenario C table 222ib1 reads out the action contents corresponding to the action pointer (see Z2953 in FIG. 480) for the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilt action timer 223db, starting from the action pointer "1", and performs the defined action until the action pointer becomes "10" (tilt action timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation performance start time (1000 milliseconds) has elapsed, the action pointer executes the action data of "1" (moves 50 steps forward for 500 ms) and is released, the action pointer executes the action data of "2" (stops for 3000 ms) and waits, the action pointer executes the action data of "3" (moves 20 steps forward for 200 ms), the action pointer executes the action data of "4" (moves 20 steps backward for 200 ms), the action pointer executes the action data of "5" (moves 20 steps forward for 200 ms), and the action pointer executes the action data of "6" (moves 20 steps forward for 60 ms). The action pointer executes the action data of "6" (moves 20 steps backward in 200 ms), then the action pointer executes the action data of "7" (moves 20 steps forward in 200 ms), then the action pointer executes the action data of "8" (moves 20 steps backward in 200 ms), and the action pointer repeats the action three times from "3" to "8" as a tilt action (tilt performance), and the action pointer executes the action data of "9" (moves 50 steps backward in 500 ms), moving the tilt device 310 to the initial position, and the action pointer becomes "10", completing the action.

By configuring it in this way, the tilting device 310 performs a tilting action (tilting effect) during a jackpot game (a round of play) (see FIG. 580(a)), suggesting to the player that the tilting device 310 will be fully opened (risen) after this, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this control example, only a specific teasing action (the action of the action pointer "3" to "8") is specified as the teasing effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to execute multiple teasing effects with different numbers of repeated actions or positions where the repeated actions are performed (open state of the tilting device 310). In this case, by configuring to set a teasing effect performance mode (success performance mode) that is likely to be executed as a high probability promotion performance in which a success performance (see FIG. 581) is executed among the high probability promotion performances, for example, a teasing effect performance mode with the number of repeated actions being 7, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance mode of the teasing effect that is executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

As described above, the contents defined in the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 are the same as those defined in the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 up to the first half (where the tilting performance ends), but the definition contents thereafter are different. Specifically, it is defined that after the tilting performance ends, the tilting device 310 is positioned to the initial position.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the current teasing effect is a high-expectation special promotion effect (a special promotion effect in which the frame button 22a can be pressed) or a low-expectation special promotion effect (a special promotion effect in which the frame button 22a cannot be pressed) until the teasing effect is being executed. This prevents the player from understanding the results of the performance in advance, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect.

Also, unlike the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, there is no need to keep the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) waiting at a specific position (the most open (highest) position) corresponding to the period for the player to press the frame button 22a, so the operation for returning the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) to the initial position can also be defined in the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1. Therefore, the operation of the movable role (tilting device 310) can be performed based on a series of operation scenarios from the start to the end of the operation, and the role operation can be performed smoothly. In this control example, the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 is configured to return the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) to the initial position, but this is not limited to this, and a separate operation scenario for returning to the initial position (origin position) may be provided, similar to the role operation using the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2.

Returning to FIG. 585(b), we continue the explanation. The ending scenario table 222ib2 is a scenario table that defines the operation contents for the tilting device 310 in response to the operational effects executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, and is set when a predetermined effect condition is met at the start of the ending period of the jackpot game (when the reserved memory contains winning information indicating a guaranteed jackpot, and the movable role (tilting device 310) is located in the initial position).

Unlike the various tilt action scenario tables described above, this ending scenario table 222ib2 does not have an operation performance start time T1 set, so when the ending scenario table is set (Z8514 in FIG. 592), a value corresponding to the tilt action timer 223db is set and the operation of the tilt action scenario C table 222ib1 is started (see Z2992 in FIG. 589).

The ending scenario table 222ib2 reads out the action content corresponding to the action pointer (see Z2953 in FIG. 480) for the required time corresponding to the passage of time on the tilt action timer 223db, starting from the action pointer "1", and performs the defined action until the action pointer becomes "6" (tilt action timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the same contents as some of the operation contents of the tilt operation scenario A222db1 of the fifth control example described above are defined, and when the ending scenario is set, the drive motor 342 rotates 210 steps in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 159), causing the disk cam 344 to rotate 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position in FIG. 159) and move to the cam release position shown in FIG. 167 (operation pointer 1 (see FIG. 586 (b))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds (500 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 586 (a))). After the 0.5 second stop period, the drive motor 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 167), causing the disk cam 344 to rotate 20 degrees counterclockwise and move to the engagement release position (see FIG. 169) (operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 586 (b))).

When moving from the cam release position to the engagement release position, as shown in FIG. 168 above, the release member 346 is rotated downward (counterclockwise), causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate clockwise, releasing the engagement (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotating claw member 347, and the tilting device 310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. In this case, the voice coil motor 352 is also driven, providing the tilting device 310 with a forward/rearward assist, increasing the lifting force and improving the lifting speed. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and a period is waited until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 586(b))).

Then, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 586(a))) and the tilt device 310 waits in the uppermost position. Then, for 1.9 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates 190 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 167), transmitting a drive force in the direction in which the tilt device 310 moves (descends) to the initial position (origin position).

In this way, in this control example, similar to the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 of the fifth control example described above, the rising speed of the tilting device 310 can be improved, so that the reel performance using the movable reel (tilting device 310) executed during the ending period can be made to have a powerful effect. Also, since the movable reel (tilting device 310) can be moved (raised) to the highest position as quickly as possible within the limited period of the ending period, the period of the performance executed after moving it to the highest position can be extended, and a variety of performances can be executed.

In this control example, the ending scenario is set after the ending period starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ending scenario may be set before the ending period is set, and the operation of the action pointer 2 for the ending scenario may be completed at the start of the ending period. By configuring in this way, the period from the start of the ending period until the movable prop (tilting device 310) moves to the highest position can be further shortened.

In addition, in this eleventh control example, the ending scenario table 222ib2 is set to execute a series of operations from the start of the tilting device 310 (operation from the initial position (origin position)) to the end of the operation (operation to the initial position (origin position)), but this is not limited to this, and for example, a scenario table for the start of the operation and a scenario table for the end of the operation may be provided separately, as in the various scenario tables in the fifth control example described above.

Furthermore, in this eleventh control example, the three seconds during which the tilt device 310 waits at the highest position is set as the effective operation period during which the player can press the frame button 22a, and if the player presses the frame button 22a during that effective operation period, the effective operation period is cleared, and the value of the tilt operation timer 223db corresponding to the ending scenario table 222ib2 is subtracted to the value at which the three-second waiting state ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the ending operation of the movable role using a common scenario in cases where the effective operation period ends by pressing the frame button 22a during the effective operation period, and cases where the effective operation period ends due to the passage of time without pressing the frame button 22a during the effective operation period.

Returning to FIG. 583 for further explanation, the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic is a data table for determining at what timing (round play) during jackpot play the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed, and is referenced at the start of jackpot play (see Z8301 in FIG. 590) to select the execution timing of the probability change promotion effect. The execution timing selected here is stored in the special prize operation information storage area 223ib, and as the jackpot play progresses, the probability change promotion effect is executed when the round play set as the execution timing is reached.

Here, the contents of the operation performance execution timing selection table 222ic will be explained with reference to FIG. 587. FIG. 587 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the operation performance execution timing selection table 222ic. As shown in FIG. 587, the operation performance execution timing selection table 222ic defines different execution timings corresponding to the jackpot type and the value of the performance timing counter 223ia.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the value of the performance timing counter 223ia is in the range of "0 to 39", the execution timing is set to "1st round", when it is in the range of "40 to 109", the execution timing is set to "8th round", and when it is in the range of "110 to 199", the execution timing is set to "16th round". In other words, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", if an operation performance (probability promotion performance) is executed, it is specified that the operation performance (probability promotion performance) is executed in the 1st round with a probability of 20%, in the 8th round with a probability of 35%, and in the 16th round with a probability of 45%.

By configuring it in this way, it is made easier for the high probability promotion effect to be executed at the end of the jackpot game (16th round), so it is possible to prevent a failed high probability promotion effect from being executed in the first half of the jackpot game, which would reduce the player's motivation to play for the remainder of the jackpot game. In addition, because the timing at which the high probability promotion effect is executed can be set throughout the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the high probability promotion effect will be executed.

In this control example, the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia is configured to execute the special prize promotion effect only once during a jackpot play, but it is not limited to this and may be configured to specify multiple execution timings so that the special prize promotion effect can be executed multiple times. In this case, for example, the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia may be configured to allow multiple selections of the performance modes of the special prize promotion effect executed during a jackpot play, and the performance modes of the special prize promotion effect executed during a jackpot play may be configured to be different. This allows a wider variety of special prize promotion effects to be executed at various times, preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on during a jackpot play.

In addition, in this control example, the start timing of any one of the round games is set as the execution timing of the high probability promotion effect, but without being limited thereto, for example, the start timing of the interval period set between round games, when a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 5 balls) have entered the specific winning port 65a during a round game, when a player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during a jackpot game, or when a ball enters the general ball entry port 63 during a jackpot game may be set as one of the start timings. By configuring in this way, the high probability promotion effect can be executed at a timing that is less predictable to the player, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Returning to FIG. 587, we will continue the explanation. When the jackpot type is "jackpot B1", the acquired value of the performance timing counter 223ia is set to a range of "0 to 199", i.e., the entire range, so that the execution timing is not set. In other words, in this control example, the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia is configured so that the operation performance (probability change promotion performance) is not selected when the jackpot type is "jackpot B1", so the operation performance execution timing selection table 222ic is also configured so that the execution timing is not selected. By configuring it in this way, even if the probability change promotion performance is selected despite the fact that it is "jackpot B1", it is possible to reliably prevent the probability change promotion performance from being executed.

Next, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B2" and the value of the performance timing counter 223ia is in the range of "0 to 19", the execution timing is set to "1st round", when it is in the range of "20 to 99", the execution timing is set to "8th round", and when it is in the range of "100 to 199", the execution timing is set to "16th round". In other words, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B2", if an operation performance (probability promotion performance) is executed, it is specified that the operation performance (probability promotion performance) is executed in the 1st round with a probability of 10%, in the 8th round with a probability of 40%, and in the 16th round with a probability of 50%.

In other words, in "jackpot B2", where a success effect is executed in the probability variable promotion effect, the probability variable promotion effect is more likely to be executed as the jackpot game progresses than in the above-mentioned "jackpot A". Therefore, the later the timing of the execution of the probability variable promotion effect, the more hopeful the player can be that the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot ("jackpot B2").

In this control example, the execution timing of the special chance promotion effect based on "jackpot A" (1, 8, 16 rounds) and the execution timing of the special chance promotion effect based on "jackpot B2" (1, 8, 16 rounds) are selected from the same number of rounds, but this is not limited to the above, and it may be configured to set the number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) in which only the special chance promotion effect based on "jackpot B2" can be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the timing at which the special chance promotion effect will be executed. Furthermore, when "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, the execution timing is configured not to be set, as with the above-mentioned "jackpot B1".

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 584. FIG. 584 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 584, the RAM 223 in this eleventh control example differs from the RAM 223 in the fifth control example (FIG. 468) described above in that a performance timing counter 223ia and a special prize operation information storage area 223ib have been added, but otherwise they are the same. Identical elements are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The effect timing counter 223ia is formed of a loop counter similar to the effect counter 223h described above, and its value is updated each time the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (every millisecond). The value of the effect timing counter 223ia is obtained (Z8314 in FIG. 590) in the opening processing 11 (Z8301 in FIG. 590) executed at the start of the jackpot game, and the execution timing of the operation effect during the jackpot game is selected based on the operation effect execution timing selection table according to the obtained value.

Note that the effect timing counter 223ia and the effect counter 223h are both loop counters that update the range of "0 to 199" every millisecond, but the update contents are made different so that it is difficult to obtain the same value. Specifically, they are configured so that the value added by one update is a different prime number. This makes it possible to prevent the value of the effect timing counter 223ia and the value of the effect counter 223h from being updated synchronously.

The special prize action information storage area 223ib is a storage area for temporarily storing the presentation mode of the high probability promotion presentation set at the start of the jackpot game as the operation presentation (high probability promotion presentation) executed during the jackpot game, and the execution timing of the high probability promotion presentation. Specifically, the tilt action scenario (see Z8312 in FIG. 590) selected by the opening process 11 (see Z8301 in FIG. 590) and the execution timing of the selected tilt action (see Z8315 in FIG. 590) are stored (see Z8316 in FIG. 590).

Then, it is read out (see Z8411 in FIG. 591) during round processing 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591) executed during jackpot play, and is referenced when determining whether the current round of play is the timing to execute a special bonus promotion effect (see Z8412 in FIG. 591), and if it is determined that it is the timing to execute it, an operation based on the effect mode (operation scenario) stored in the special prize operation information storage area 223ib is started.

<Regarding control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example>
Next, the contents of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to Fig. 588 to Fig. 592. In this eleventh control example, the difference is that the contents of the operation performance process (see Z2905 in Fig. 478) of the tilt device control process (see Z2891 in Fig. 477) executed in the frame button input monitoring/performance process 3 (Z2161 in Fig. 474) have been changed from the fifth control example described above, and the contents of the process executed when a big win-related command is received in the command determination process (Z2113 in Fig. 472) have been changed. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, the contents of operation presentation processing 11 (Z2989) will be explained with reference to FIG. 588. FIG. 588 is a flowchart showing the contents of operation presentation processing 11 (Z2989). This operation presentation processing 11 (Z2989) is executed when the tilting action status is set to 2. It differs from the operation presentation processing (Z2905) of the fifth control example described above in that an ending processing is added that is executed when the jackpot ending is in progress.

When operation performance processing 11 (Z2989) is executed, first it is determined whether the value of the tilt action timer 223db is greater than 0 (1 or greater) (Z2951), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (Z2951: Yes), it is then determined whether it is currently in the ending period of the jackpot game (Z2991), and if it is determined that it is in the ending period (Z2991: Yes), the ending processing is executed (Z2992) and processing transitions to Z2952. On the other hand, if it is determined in processing Z2991 that it is not in the ending period (Z2991: No), processing Z2992 is skipped and processing transitions to Z2952.

Details of the ending process executed in the processing of Z2992 will be described later with reference to FIG. 589, but this ending process executes the process that is executed when the frame button 22a is pressed during the operation of the tilt device 310 executed during the ending period.

Returning to FIG. 588, the explanation will be continued. After completing the processing of Z2991 and Z2992, the same processing of Z2952 to Z2956 as the processing during the operation performance (Z2905) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and then a display command corresponding to the operation to be executed this time is set (Z2993), and this processing is terminated. In the processing of Z2993, for example, when the tilting device 310 moves to the highest position (most open position) by an operation based on the tilting operation scenario table set, a display command is set to display a display mode (see FIG. 580 (b)) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 to indicate that the frame button 22a is in a state where it can be pressed, or when the tilting device 310 is performing a tilting operation, a display command is set to display a button display mode on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the operation content.

In this way, by setting the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 based on the actual operation content of the tilting device 310 (setting a display command), it is easier to synchronize the operation mode of the movable role (tilting device 310) and the display mode of the performance display, making it possible to execute a performance with a high performance effect.

On the other hand, if the processing of Z2951 determines that the value of the tilt action timer 223db is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2951: No), the processing of Z2957 to Z2961 is executed, which is the same as the processing during operation performance (Z2905) of the fifth control example described above, and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the ending processing (Z2992) will be explained with reference to FIG. 589. FIG. 589 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending processing (Z2992). When the ending processing (Z2992) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the tilt motion timer 223db is 3190 (Z8201), and if it is determined that the value of the tilt motion timer 223db is 3190 (Z8201: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is set to 3000 (Z8202), and processing proceeds to Z8202.

In other words, when the value of the tilt operation timer 223db reaches "3190" while an ending scenario (see FIG. 586(b)) is set, the tilt device 310 enters a three-second high-level state, during which an effective operation period is set during which operation of the frame button 22a is effective. In this way, by setting the effective operation period of the frame button 22a in accordance with the progress of the operation scenario of the tilt device 310, the effective operation period can be easily set to match the timing when the tilt device 310 is positioned at the highest position.

In this control example, the operating status of the tilting device 310 is managed based on the progress of the operation scenario (although it is configured to be determined based on the value of the tilting operation timer 223db), but without being limited to this, when the value of the tilting operation timer 223db becomes a value that transitions to the next operation pointer, a detection means (for example, a movable role position detection sensor) that can detect whether the operation content based on this operation pointer was executed normally may be provided, and the operating status of the tilting device 310 may be managed based on the detection of normal operation of the movable role by the detection means.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if it is determined that the tilt device 310 has not completed moving to the highest position after the period required for the tilt device 310 to move to the highest position (0.5 seconds, corresponding to the motion pointer 4 in the ending scenario of this control example) has elapsed, it is possible to stop updating the value of the tilt action timer 223db and set a retry period of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). Then, if the tilt device 310 completes moving to the highest position during that retry period, it is possible to resume updating the value of the tilt action timer 223db and set the operation valid period for the frame button 22a.

As a result, for example, even if the tilting device 310 fails to move to the highest position within a specific period (0.5 seconds) because the player exerts a force against the tilting device 310's upward movement (opening movement using an elastic member) (e.g., by placing a hand on the tilting device 310), if the tilting device 310 moves to the highest position within a subsequent predetermined period (1 second), the operation valid period can be set according to that timing, and an appropriate presentation can be executed for the player. In addition, if the tilting device 310 does not move to the highest position even after the above-mentioned predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed, it is also possible to switch to another presentation (a presentation in which the frame button 22a is not pressed) without setting the operation valid period.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8201 that the current value of the tilt motion timer 223db is not 3190 (Z8201: No), the processing of Z8202 is skipped and the processing proceeds to Z8203.

Next, in the processing of Z8203, it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223de is set to on (Z8203), and if it is determined that it is set to on (Z8203: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is reset to "190" (Z8204), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is set to "0" (Z8205), and this processing is terminated.

In other words, if the frame button 22a is pressed during the operation valid period (the period during which the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is greater than 0) set in the current operation presentation, and the tilt operation flag 223de is turned on, the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is changed to a value that immediately transitions from the waiting state of the ending scenario, that is, the state of the motion pointer 5 (see FIG. 586 (b)), to the state of the motion pointer 6, and the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is changed to "0" to end the operation valid period. This allows the player to skip the period (3 seconds) during which the tilt device 310 waits at the highest position, regardless of when the player presses the frame button 22a during the operation valid period. In addition, whether the operation valid period ends by pressing the frame button 22a or due to the passage of time, the ending scenario can be executed to the end without any problems.

In this control example, when the frame button 22a is pressed during the valid operation period, the value of the tilt action timer 223db is changed so that the action pointer of the ending scenario is shifted from "5" to "6", and an action is executed to move the tilt device 310 to the initial position (origin position) after the frame button 22a is pressed. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when using a configuration in which the tilt device 310 moves to the initial position (origin position) by pressing the frame button 22a, the value of the tilt action timer 223db may be changed to "0". This makes it possible to omit unnecessary action processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z8203, if it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to on (Z8203: No), then the operation content corresponding to the currently set operation scenario setting table (ending scenario table 222ib2) is read (Z8206), and then it is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is greater than 0 (Z8207). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (Z8207: Yes), then it is determined whether the frame button 22a has been pressed (Z8208).

If it is determined in the processing of Z8208 that the frame button 22a has been pressed (Z8208: Yes), this means that the frame button 22a was pressed during the operation valid period in which the ending scenario is set, so a display command indicating a super lucky display (see FIG. 582(b)) is set (Z8209), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to on (Z8210), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8207 that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z8207: No), or if it is determined in the processing of Z8208 that the frame button 22a has not been pressed (Z8208: No), this processing is terminated as is.

Next, referring to FIG. 590, the opening process 11 (Z8301) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 590 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process 11 (Z8301). This opening process 11 (Z8301) is executed when an opening command for a jackpot game is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 336). In this control example, in addition to the process of setting a display opening command indicating the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 during the opening period, a process is executed to determine whether or not to execute an operation effect (probability change promotion effect) during this jackpot game, and if a probability change promotion effect is executed, the effect mode.

When opening process 11 (Z8301) is executed, first, the value of the performance counter 223h is obtained (Z8311), and a tilt action scenario is selected from the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia based on the obtained value of the performance counter 223h and the current jackpot type (select whether to execute and the scenario type) (Z8312). Then, it is determined whether the tilt action scenario was selected in the processing of Z8312 (Z8313), and if it is determined that it was selected (Z8313: Yes), the value of the performance timing counter 223ia is obtained (Z8314), and the execution timing of the tilt action (probability change promotion performance) is selected from the operation performance execution timing selection table 222ic based on the obtained value of the performance timing counter 223ia and the current jackpot type (Z8315).

After completing the processing of Z8315, next, information indicating the type of tilt action scenario selected in the processing of Z8312 and information indicating the execution timing of the tilt action (probability change promotion effect) selected in the processing of Z8315 are stored in the special prize action information storage area 223ib (Z8316), an opening command for display is set (Z8317), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z8313, if it is determined that a tilt action scenario has not been selected as a result of the processing of Z8312 (Z8313: No), this processing ends as it is.

Next, the contents of round processing 11 will be explained with reference to FIG. 591. FIG. 591 is a flowchart showing the contents of round processing 11. This round processing 11 is a process that is executed when a round command indicating that a new round of jackpot play is to start is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 336), and in this control example, in addition to the process of setting a display command corresponding to the number of rounds, a process of determining whether or not to execute a tilting action (probability change promotion effect) is executed.

When round process 11 (Z8302) is executed, first, the information stored in the special prize action information storage area 223ib (information indicating the type of tilt action scenario and information indicating the execution timing) is read (Z8411), and it is determined whether the current round of play is a round in which a tilt action (probability promotion effect) is executed (Z8412). If it is determined that it is the execution timing (Z8412: Yes), a tilt action scenario corresponding to the stored type of tilt action scenario is set (Z8413), a display command corresponding to the current round number is set (Z8414), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8412 that the current round of play is not the execution timing of a tilt action (probability promotion effect) (Z8412: No), processing of Z8413 is skipped and processing of Z8414 is started.

Next, the contents of ending process 11 (Z8303) will be explained with reference to FIG. 592. FIG. 592 is a flowchart showing the contents of ending process 11 (Z8303). This ending process 11 (Z8303) is a process executed when an ending command for a big win game is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 336). In this control example, in addition to the process of setting a display ending command indicating the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 during the ending period, a process is executed to determine whether or not to execute an operation presentation (continuous pending presentation) during the ending period.

When ending process 11 (Z8303) is executed, first, the winning information (winning information stored in reserve) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read (Z8511), and then it is determined whether the winning information that has been read includes winning information indicating a guaranteed jackpot (Z8512). If it is determined that winning information indicating a guaranteed jackpot is included (Z8512: Yes), it is then determined whether the tilting device 310 is located in the initial position (origin position) (Z8513), and if it is determined that it is located in the origin position (Z8513: Yes), an ending scenario for moving the tilting device 310 is set (Z8514).

Then, the tilt operation status is set to "2" (Z8515), a display command corresponding to the current determination result is set (processing 8516 of Z2952), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in processing Z8513 that the tilt device 310 is not located at the origin position (Z8513: No), a display ending command indicating that there is a special jackpot in the reserve is set (Z8517), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in processing Z8512 that there is no winning information indicating a special jackpot in the winning information (Z8512: No), this process ends as it is.

As explained above, in this control example, the content (performance mode) of the composite performance that is executed by combining the LCD performance (display performance) and the prop performance (driving performance) is set based on the operating status of the movable prop at the timing of execution of the composite performance. Specifically, the composite performance is executed only when the movable prop is in a specified position (initial position) at the timing of execution of the composite performance. By configuring it in this way, even if the control instructions for the LCD performance (display performance) and the control instructions for the prop performance (moving performance) are executed separately, it is possible to prevent the display performance and the prop performance from becoming misaligned as a composite performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, if the timing for executing a composite effect arrives when the movable role is not in its initial position, i.e., when the movable role actuated by the previously executed role effect has not returned to its initial position, a display effect is executed that shows the same performance result as the composite effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the player continues playing without being able to recognize the performance result that should be notified to the player using the composite effect.

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned composite performance (last performance) during the jackpot game, a role performance that drives the movable role (tilting device 310) is executed. For example, a role performance (probability change promotion performance) is executed to notify whether the game state set after the jackpot game is a probability change state that is advantageous to the player, or a normal state (time-saving state) that is a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability change state. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to be operable as a decorative performance to liven up the period during the jackpot game. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to move in various operation patterns (operation scenarios). In this way, by driving one movable role (tilting device 310) in various operation modes for multiple purposes during the jackpot game, one movable role can be used for multiple purposes, and the performance effect can be efficiently improved.

However, as described above, the more efficiently the effect of the performance is enhanced, the easier it becomes for other role effects to be set during the period when the movable role is in operation (the easier it becomes for the execution periods of the role effects to overlap), resulting in a problem that the performance is difficult for the player to understand. In addition, if the execution periods of multiple role effects using movable roles are fixed in advance to prevent overlapping execution of the role effects using movable roles, the role effects become monotonous and the performance effect is reduced. In contrast, in this control example, if the execution periods of the role effects overlap, one role effect is switched to another (for example, a display effect using a liquid crystal display device). As a result, even if the performance content can be set so that the execution periods of the role effects can overlap, it is possible to provide a performance that is easy for the player to understand, and furthermore, since a variety of role effects can be executed, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia is configured to execute the special prize promotion effect only once during a jackpot play, but it may be configured to execute the special prize promotion effect multiple times. In this case, for example, the special prize operation performance selection table 222ia may be configured to allow multiple selections of the special prize promotion effect executed during a jackpot play, and the special prize promotion effect executed during a jackpot play may be configured to differ in its performance mode. This allows a wider variety of special prize promotion effects to be executed at various times, preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on during a jackpot play.

In addition, in this control example, the start timing of any one of the round games is set as the execution timing of the high probability promotion effect, but without being limited thereto, for example, the start timing of the interval period set between round games, when a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 5 balls) have entered the specific winning port 65a during a round game, when a player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during a jackpot game, or when a ball enters the general ball entry port 63 during a jackpot game may be set as one of the start timings. By configuring in this way, the high probability promotion effect can be executed at a timing that is less predictable for the player, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, in this control example, the start timing of any one of the round games is set as the execution timing of the high probability promotion effect, but without being limited thereto, for example, the start timing of the interval period set between round games, when a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 5 balls) have entered the specific winning port 65a during a round game, when a player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during a jackpot game, or when a ball enters the general ball entry port 63 during a jackpot game may be set as one of the start timings. By configuring in this way, the high probability promotion effect can be executed at a timing that is less predictable for the player, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

When the content of the effect (composite effect) that combines the liquid crystal effect and the role effect is set to be different depending on the position of the movable role, for example, if it is determined that the movable role is in the initial position, a predetermined composite effect (for example, a composite effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special chart fluctuation) is executed, if it is determined that the movable role is in a position (state) where it can be moved to the initial position within one second, the predetermined composite effect (a composite effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special chart fluctuation) is executed with a delay of one second, and if it is determined that the movable role is in a position (state) where it can be moved to the initial position within one second, the movable role is not moved and a suggestive effect of only the liquid crystal effect is executed. This allows various effects to be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, if a pachinko machine is capable of executing at least a first reel performance in which a predetermined first position is set as an initial position and a second position different from the first position is set as an end position as a reel performance that moves a movable reel, and a second reel performance in which a third position different from the first position and the second position described above is set as an initial position and the second position described above is set as an end position as a reel performance that moves a movable reel, the machine may be configured to determine whether to execute the first reel performance or the second reel performance based on the position of the movable reel at the timing for setting the content of the composite performance.

In this case, it is also preferable to configure the system so that a provocative effect can be executed in which the movable part approaches the first position or the third position based on the operation of the frame button 22, regardless of the change in the special chart. This allows the player to select the position of the movable part when the composite effect is executed. This makes it easier for the player to execute the composite effect he or she desires, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

In this control example, an example of setting the contents of the suggestive performance to suggest the type of jackpot won during jackpot play has been given, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the technical concept used in this control example may be applied to a performance to suggest the result of a special symbol lottery (variable performance) or a performance to suggest the result of a normal symbol lottery (normal symbol variable performance). In addition, in this control example, the tilting device 310 arranged near the frame button 22a is used as an example of a movable role, but any movable role (movable member) that can move at least between a predetermined first position (initial position) and a second position (movable position) different from the first position may be used. For example, it may be a decorative movable role (movable member) arranged in the variable display unit 80 or a decorative movable role (movable member) attached to the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this control example, the first operating condition that can be established during a jackpot game and the second operating condition that can be established based on the result of a lottery for a special pattern are set as conditions for operating the movable member (tilting device 310). However, without being limited to this, for example, a third operating condition that is established when a predetermined time is reached, a fourth operating condition that is established when the player presses the frame button 22a, or a fifth operating condition that is established when the number of reserved memories reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 8), etc. may be set as conditions for operating the movable member (tilting device 310). In this way, by setting multiple operating conditions for the movable member (tilting device 310), the movable member can be moved at various times, enhancing the presentation effect.

Even if the opportunities for moving the movable member (tilting device 310) independently of the performance display are increased in order to enhance the performance effect in this way, this control example makes it possible to provide the player with a combined performance that combines a role-play performance using the movable member and a display performance using the third pattern display device 81 without any sense of incongruity.

In addition to the configuration of this control example, a configuration may be provided in which the movable part moves when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) during a specific period (for example, during a jackpot game) regardless of the lottery result of the special pattern, thereby encouraging the player to operate the operation means (teasing effect). In this case, when the suggestive effect described above is executed, the position of the movable part becomes indefinite, which makes it easy for the movable part to be in a state where it is not in its initial position (origin position) at the start of the ending period. However, by using the technical concept of this control example, a composite effect (retained consecutive effect) can be executed during the ending period without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, during the period from the start of a jackpot game to the execution of a promotion effect in which whether or not the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed is a guaranteed jackpot by operating the operation means, it may be determined whether or not a reserved consecutive performance (last performance) will be executed, and if it is determined that a reserved consecutive performance (last performance) will be executed, a reserved consecutive performance suggesting that fact may be executed. In this way, even if a promotion effect is executed during a jackpot game when a reserved consecutive performance suggestion is executed, it is possible to make it easier to execute a reserved consecutive performance using a movable member without operating the operation means (by preventing the movable member from moving). In this way, by executing a reserved consecutive performance suggestion, it is possible to intentionally prevent the movable member from moving in one performance (promotion performance) and make it easier to move the movable member in another performance (reserved consecutive performance). Therefore, by giving the player the option of not moving the movable member, the performances executed can be made more diverse, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the twelfth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 593 to Fig. 603. In the above-mentioned eleventh control example, when a performance (composite performance) in which a liquid crystal performance (display performance) and a role-play performance are performed together is performed, it is determined whether the movable member (tilt device 310) used for the role-play performance is located at the initial position at the start timing of the composite performance, and if it is determined that it is located at the initial position, the composite performance is performed, and if it is determined that it is not located at the initial position, the composite performance is not performed. As a result, even if the control means (audio lamp control device 113) that controls the performance outputs a command (command) related to the composite performance independently to the control means (display control device 114) that controls the display performance and the drive means (drive motor) that operates the movable role-play (hereinafter referred to as each device) when the composite performance is performed, the performances performed by each device can be easily synchronized, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

However, in the technology used in the eleventh control example described above, a command is output to each device simultaneously to execute a composite performance, so that, for example, an operation (preparatory operation) for moving a movable member to an initial position corresponding to the composite performance is executed after a command (command) for executing the composite performance is received. In other words, when a composite performance is executed using multiple devices (movable members, liquid crystal devices, etc.), it is necessary to configure the first half of the composite performance to include a period (preparatory period) for each device to complete the preparatory operation to make the composite performance executable.

When using this technical concept, it is possible to execute a composite performance that synchronizes the LCD performance (display performance) and the gadget performance, but a long preparation period is required, and when executing a composite performance within a limited time, the performance period in which the actual composite performance (the performance executed after the preparation period has elapsed) can be set becomes shorter. There is also the problem that the content of the composite performance executed based on the movement status of the movable gadgets (preparatory action) during the preparation period, which is the stage before the composite performance is executed, can be noticed by the player.

In particular, in a pachinko machine that has a first composite effect in which a reel effect is executed with a movable reel in a first position, and a second composite effect in which a reel effect is executed with a movable reel in a second position, and that is configured to vary the selection ratio between the first composite effect and the second composite effect depending on the results of the special symbol lottery, the player can easily tell whether the movable reel will move to the first position or the second position during the preparation period, which makes it easy for the player to tell even the results of the special symbol lottery, resulting in a problem that the presentation effect (the presentation effect of the composite effect) is reduced.

To solve this problem, this control example is configured to execute control to execute a preparatory operation to move the movable prop to the first or second position before the composite performance is set (before a determination is made as to whether or not the composite performance will be executed).

In this way, by configuring the preparatory operation to be set separately from the composite performance setting, it is possible to make the player believe that the composite performance (gimmick performance) will be executed after the preparatory operation of the movable role is executed. Also, because the preparatory operation is executed regardless of whether the composite performance (gimmick performance) is executed or not, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the composite performance will be executed or the lottery result of the special pattern depending on the movement status of the movable role during the preparation period.

In addition, in the above-mentioned eleventh control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to control the display control device 114 and the movable member (tilting device 310). Therefore, for example, for a display performance in which a performance is continuously executed during a predetermined performance period (a round period of a jackpot, a period during which a special pattern changes), a display command (e.g., a display round command, a display change pattern command) indicating the performance mode of the display performance to be executed within the performance period is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start of the performance period, and for a role-play performance in which a performance is executed only during a specific period (e.g., a period of 5 to 10 seconds from the start of the performance period) within the predetermined performance period (a round period of a jackpot, a period during which a special pattern changes), a command (command) must be output to the movable member (tilting device 310) three seconds after the start of the performance period to cause it to perform a preparatory operation (e.g., a preparation period of 2 seconds). In this case, a measuring means (such as a timer) is provided on the audio lamp control device 113 side to measure the timing of outputting a command to the movable member, but if the device is configured to be able to execute a gimmick performance using the movable member at multiple times during the performance period in order to enhance the performance effect, it is necessary to design the measuring means so that multiple periods can be measured, which creates the problem of increased processing load on the audio lamp control device 113.

In contrast to this, in the present twelfth control example, a prop control device 229 is provided for executing operation control of the movable member, and a command for moving the movable member (e.g., tilt device 310) is output from the display control device 114 to the prop control device 229. The display command output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the performance period is configured to include information indicating the timing for outputting a command (prop command) from the display control device 114 to the prop control device 229 for executing a preparatory operation.

By configuring it in this way, the audio lamp control device 113 can perform the preparatory operation of the movable member at the appropriate timing simply by outputting a display command corresponding to a specified performance period to the display control device 114 at the start of the performance period. Furthermore, even if the execution timing of the composite performance can be set in multiple ways and the timing of executing the preparatory operation is varied to match the execution timing of the set composite performance, it is only necessary to variably set the timing of outputting the reel command to be included in the display command output to the display control device 114, eliminating the need to provide the audio lamp control device 113 with a measuring means (timer) for measuring multiple periods. This reduces the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the 12th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 593. FIG. 593 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 593, the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example described above in that a role control device 229 that executes the operation control of the movable role is added, and that an operation command (command) can be output from the display control device 114 to the role control device 229 and the audio output device 226, but otherwise is the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted. Also, in the block diagram of FIG. 593, for convenience of explanation, only the characteristic configuration of this control example is described among the electrical configuration of the entire pachinko machine 10, but the same configuration as the eleventh control example described above is applied to the electrical configuration not described (for example, the power supply device 115, the payout control device 111, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 593, in this twelfth control example, a command (information) for displaying an image based on image data is output from the output port 239 of the display control device 114 to the third pattern display device 81, and a command (command) for operating the movable role is output to the role control device 229. Here, as shown in FIG. 593, the role control device 229 is connected so as to be able to receive data (various commands) output from the display control device 114, and is equipped with an input port y304 for inputting data (various commands) output from the display control device 114, an MPU y301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device, and an output port y306 for outputting data related to operation to various movable roles (tilting device 310, other devices 228). The MPUy301 has built-in ROMy302, which stores predetermined program information (operation scenarios (preparatory operation scenarios, etc.) for operating movable props) when various control programs are executed by the MPUy301, and RAMy303, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc.

The MPUy301 of the prop control device 229 is electrically connected to the input porty305 and the output porty306. When the prop control device 229 receives a command from the display control device 114 specifying movement data for moving a movable prop, the command is input to the MPUy301 via the input porty305 and the bus line. In addition, the operation pattern (operation scenario) specified by the display control device 114 is read from the ROMy302, and operation instructions corresponding to the read operation pattern are output to the various movable props via the output porty306.

Furthermore, this control example is configured so that the prop control device 229 can determine the operating status of the tilting device 310. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether the drive means (motor) that drives the tilting device 310 is operating by detecting the current applied to the motor. Then, upon receiving an operation instruction from the audio lamp control device 113, it can determine the operating status of the tilting device 310, and output operation data to the tilting device 310 if it determines that the tilting device 310 is not moving.

In this control example, both the audio lamp control device 113 and the prop control device 229 are configured to output operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and step number for driving the various motors specified in the operation scenario) for moving the movable prop to the movable prop, but without being limited to this, the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to set only the operation scenario for the movable prop, output the set operation scenario to the prop control device 229, and only the prop control device 229 may output operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and step number for driving the various motors specified in the operation scenario) to the movable prop. By configuring in this way, operation data is not output from multiple control devices to the movable prop, so that the operation control of the movable prop can be prevented from becoming complicated.

In addition, in this control example, the output port 239 of the display control device 114 is configured to be able to output data (commands) related to audio output to the audio output device 226. Here, the audio output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive data (various commands) output from the display control device 114. Although detailed explanation and illustrations are omitted, this audio output device 226 is configured so as to be able to receive data (commands) related to audio output from the audio lamp control device 113, similar to the above-mentioned control examples.

As shown in FIG. 593, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPUm301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPUm301 has built-in ROMm302 that stores predetermined program information (operation scenarios (preparatory operation scenarios, etc.) for operating movable props) when various control programs are executed by the MPUm301, and RAMm303, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when various control programs are executed by the MPUm301.

The MPU m301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port m305 and the amplifier unit m306. When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 to the audio output device 226, the command is input to the MPU m301 via the input port m305 and the bus line m304. In addition, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM m302 and output to the channel of the amplifier unit m306 corresponding to the audio type. For example, audio data corresponding to BGM is output to CN1, audio data corresponding to a stop sound is output to CN2, and audio data corresponding to a warning sound is output to CN3. Then, the audio data is amplified by the amplifier unit m306 and input to the speaker unit 450. As a result, various sounds specified by the display control device 114 can be output from the speaker unit 450.

Here, the configuration of the ROMm302 provided in the MPUm301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROMm302 of the MPUm301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area (not shown).

The audio file storage area is a storage area that stores audio files (audio data) used to output music, sound effects, etc. When the display control device 114 instructs the output of various audio data, an audio file corresponding to the performance is read from this audio file storage area and output to the corresponding channel of the amplifier unit m306.

Specifically, the sound file storage area (not shown) stores music data related to music (BGM), stop sound data related to stop sounds, and pseudo sound data related to pseudo sounds that simulate sounds generated during preparatory driving of the reel operation. In this control example, the system is configured to be able to output the above-mentioned pseudo sounds during the preparatory period when the movable reel can perform preparatory driving.

By configuring in this way, whether or not the preparatory drive is actually executed during the preparation period, the same pseudo sound is output, making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparatory drive is executed. Specifically, in this control example, similar to the eleventh control example described above, a role effect is executed in which the tilting device 310 is moved as a movable role effect. For example, if the role effect is executed during the ending period of a big win game, the operation contents of the action pointers "1" and "2" specified in the ending scenario table 222ib2 (see FIG. 586(b)) correspond to the preparatory drive.

The action contents of the action pointers "1" and "2" defined in the ending scenario table 222ib2 (see FIG. 586(b)) are actions that move the mechanism (cam, etc.) inside the tilting device 310, and therefore the player cannot see this action. However, since the drive motor is driven when the preparatory drive is performed, the drive sound and the sound generated when the cam is released may reach the player.

As such, as in this control example, by outputting a sound that is generated during a preparatory drive in accordance with the timing at which the preparatory drive of the movable device may be executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparatory drive has been executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from determining the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed for the player at the stage at which the preparatory drive is being executed when a device performance that requires a preparatory drive is executed, and to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the presentation effect of the operation presentation is reduced.

In this control example, by outputting the sound that is generated when a preparatory drive is executed, even when a preparatory drive is not actually being executed, it is made to seem as if the preparatory drive is being executed, making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparatory drive is being executed. However, any configuration that makes it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparatory drive is being executed will suffice, and for example, the configuration may be such that a sound that is generated when a preparatory drive is actually being executed and that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, a decorative sound effect) is output. Even with this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that a preparatory drive is (has) been executed, and a similar effect can be achieved.

As described above, this control example uses a configuration that makes it difficult to visually confirm that the preparatory drive is being executed, so a pseudo sound is output to make it difficult to tell whether the preparatory drive is being executed or not. However, if a configuration that allows visual confirmation that the preparatory drive is being executed is used, in addition to outputting the pseudo sound, measures must be taken to prevent visual discrimination that the preparatory drive is being executed. In this case, for example, when a preparatory period during which the preparatory drive may be executed is set, a covering movable member may be provided that covers the member that is moved by the preparatory drive so that it is difficult for the player to visually discern whether the preparatory drive is being executed or not. This makes it possible to prevent the player from visually and audibly discerning that the preparatory drive is being executed.

<Flow of presentation during big win game in 12th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 594 to Fig. 596, the flow of the presentation during the big win game executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. This control example is different from the above-mentioned eleventh control example in that the display control device 114 is configured to output a performance execution command to the accessory control device 229 and the sound output device 226, and the control contents for the presentation executed during the final round (16th round) of the big win game and the control contents for the presentation executed during the ending period are different, but otherwise it is the same. Detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 594, the flow when a composite effect, a consecutive reserved effect (last effect), is executed during the ending period of a jackpot game will be described. FIG. 594 is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow when a composite effect, a consecutive reserved effect (last effect), is executed during the ending period of a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 594, when a jackpot game (jackpot game period) starts, at the timing when the specific periods (opening period, round game period, interval period, ending period) that make up the jackpot game period start, a display command indicating the display mode of the effect content (liquid crystal display) during the specific period is output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives a display command from the audio lamp control device 113, it creates image data based on the received display command and causes the third pattern display device 81 to perform liquid crystal display (opening display, round display, interval display, etc.). Note that the detailed control content by which the display control device 114 causes the third pattern display device 81 to perform various displays is the same as the control examples described above, so a detailed explanation of this is omitted.

The audio lamp control device 113 sets a display command (final round command for display) corresponding to the final round (16th round) by including designation information for designating a specific timing (for example, 6 seconds after the start of a round of play). When the display control device 114 receives the final round command for display, it executes the LCD display during the final round, and outputs a command (operation command) to the gadget control device 229 and the audio output device 226 at the specific timing designated by the designation information included in the final round command for display.

When the reel control device 229 receives an operation command (command for reel) output from the display control device 114, it executes a preparatory drive for the movable reel (tilting device 310). In addition, when the audio output device 226 receives an operation command (command for audio) output from the display control device 114, it executes the output of a pseudo audio. In other words, based on the specification information included in the final round command for display, a preparatory drive (preparation period of 2 seconds) is executed for a composite performance (last performance) that may be executed during the ending period.

The specific timing specified by the designation information included in the display final round command is set to be 2 seconds before the final round is likely to end. In other words, like the pachinko machines 10 used in the above-mentioned control examples, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to end one round of play when either the first condition that 10 balls enter the specific winning hole 65a or the second condition that 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round of play is met. Therefore, in this control example, the timing specified by the designation information is set to be the timing that is 2 seconds less than the timing that the first condition is likely to be met (10 seconds have passed since the start of the round of play) (8 seconds have passed since the start of the round of play).

During this preparation period, the role control device 229 executes a preparatory drive for the tilt device 310, and the sound output device 226 outputs a pseudo sound to the speaker 450 during the preparation period. Then, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the round of the final round (standby state) so that the player cannot tell that the preparation period is currently in progress. After that, when the final round play ends and the ending period begins, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute a composite performance (last performance) during the ending period, and if it determines that the last performance (reserved continuous performance) will be executed, a display ending command including an instruction to execute the last performance is output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives an ending command for display including an instruction to execute the last performance, it causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute the liquid crystal display corresponding to the last performance, and outputs a reel command to the reel control device 229 to execute the operation performance corresponding to the last performance. Then, when the reel control device 229 receives the reel command to execute the operation performance corresponding to the last performance, it outputs operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) to execute the reel performance corresponding to the last performance to the tilt device 310, whose preparatory drive has been completed.

In this way, in this control example, the preparatory drive for the movable role (tilting device 310) role performance (performance drive) executed as a composite performance during the ending period is configured to be executed during the final round of the jackpot game. As a result, the tilting device 310 can be in a state where the preparatory drive has been completed at the start of the ending period, that is, the operation pointer "2" of the ending scenario table 222ib2 has been completed (see FIG. 586 (b)). Therefore, the operation performance period can be set longer during the ending period, which has a predetermined period, compared to when the preparatory drive is executed from the start of the ending period.

In addition, the display command output by the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes timing information for preparatory driving of the movable props, and the display control device 114 is configured to output the prop command to the prop control device 229. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 does not need to measure the timing for the movable prop to perform preparatory driving, and output the prop command for performing preparatory driving of the movable prop when the execution timing arrives. This reduces the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113.

Furthermore, the display control device 114 is configured to output a reel command to the reel control device 229 and at the same time output a voice command to the voice output device 226, and a pseudo sound is output from the speaker 450 in accordance with the execution period of the preparatory drive of the movable reel, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the sound generated during the preparatory drive of the movable reel.

In addition, in this control example, as in the eleventh control example described above, it is configured so that whether or not a composite performance (last performance) will be executed during the ending period is determined at the start of the ending period. Therefore, at the start of the final round (16th round), which is a timing before the start of the ending period, it has not been determined whether or not a composite performance (last performance) will be executed. In such a state, that is, in a state in which it has not been determined whether or not a composite performance (last performance) will be executed during the ending period, by specifying the timing to execute a preparatory drive for the movable role, the preparatory drive will be executed whether or not the composite performance (last performance) will be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not a composite performance (last performance) will be executed during the ending period based on the presence or absence of a preparatory drive.

Next, referring to FIG. 595, we will explain the flow when the composite effect of the consecutive reserved effects (last effect) is not executed during the ending period of a jackpot game. FIG. 595 is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow when the composite effect of the consecutive reserved effects (last effect) is not executed during the ending period of a jackpot game. Note that FIG. 595 differs from the above-mentioned FIG. 594 only in that the composite effect (last effect) is not executed during the ending period, and is otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 595, when the ending period starts, if the result of the judgment performed by the audio lamp control device 113 is that the last performance (reserved consecutive performance) will not be executed, a display ending command that does not include the last performance is output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In this case, for example, as in the 11th control example described above, if the execution conditions for the last performance (reserved consecutive performance) are not met (there is no winning information indicating a guaranteed jackpot in the reserved pattern), a normal ending display is executed, and if the execution conditions for the last performance (reserved consecutive performance) are met but the composite performance cannot be executed due to the operating status of the movable role, a special performance display in which the same performance result as the reserved consecutive performance is displayed is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 596, the flow when the preparatory drive of the movable role (tilting device 310) is not executed in the preparation period set during the final round (16 rounds) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 596 is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow when the preparatory drive of the movable role (tilting device 310) is not executed in the preparation period set during the final round (16 rounds) of the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 596 differs from the above-mentioned FIG. 595 only in that the preparatory drive of the movable role (tilting device 310) is not executed in the preparation period set during the final round (16 rounds), and is otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 596, in the final round (16th round), an operation performance is executed to move the movable role (tilting device 310) (round performance drive is executed), and then during the operation (return operation) of moving the tilting device 310 to its initial position, if the role control device 229 receives a role command output from the display control device 114, it determines that a preparatory drive based on the received role command cannot be executed for the movable role (tilting device 310), and is configured not to execute the preparatory drive. Even in this case, the audio output device 226 outputs a pseudo sound.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing that the preparatory drive was not executed during the preparation period. Also, since the preparatory drive was not executed during the final round (16th round), the composite performance (last performance) is not executed during the ending period. In this case, as in the pattern described with reference to FIG. 595, when the ending period starts, as a result of the judgment performed by the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the last performance (reserved consecutive performance) is not to be executed, a display ending command not including the last performance is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In this case, for example, as in the above-mentioned 11th control example, if the execution conditions for the last performance (reserved consecutive performance) are not met (there is no winning information indicating a sure-win in the reserved pattern), a normal ending display is executed, and if the execution conditions for the last performance (reserved consecutive performance) are met but the composite performance cannot be executed due to the operating status of the movable role, a special performance display in which the same performance result as the reserved consecutive performance is displayed is executed.

As explained above, in this control example, the preparatory drive for a specific operation presentation that can be executed during a specific presentation period (ending period) is configured to be executed even if it has not been determined whether or not the specific operation presentation will be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the specific operation presentation will be executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparatory drive before the specific operation presentation is executed.

In addition, a preparatory period during which the preparatory drive is executed is set in advance, and during that preparatory period, a pseudo sound output means is provided that outputs a pseudo sound that is generated when the preparatory drive is executed as a disruptive means for making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparatory drive is being executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not a specific operation presentation will be executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparatory drive before the specific operation presentation is executed.

Furthermore, in this control example, if a predetermined non-executable condition is met during the preparation period, the preparatory drive is not executed, and even if the preparatory drive is not executed during the preparation period, a pseudo sound is output by the pseudo sound output means. This makes it possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not a specific operation presentation will be executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparatory drive before the specific operation presentation is executed.

<Regarding control process in the voice lamp control device of the 12th control example>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to Fig. 597. This 12th control example differs from the above-mentioned 11th control example in that round process 12 (see Z8352 in Fig. 597) is executed instead of round process 11 (see Z8302 in Fig. 591). The other processing contents are the same, and detailed explanations of the same processing contents will be omitted.

Figure 597 is a flowchart showing the contents of round process 12 (Z8352). This round process 12 (Z8352) differs from round process 11 (see Z8302 in Figure 591) of the above-mentioned 11th control example in that it adds a process to determine whether the newly executed round is the final round (16th round) and a process to set a display command specifically for the final round (16th round) if it is determined that it is the final round (16th round).

Specifically, when round process 12 (Z8352) is executed, Z8411 to Z8413 are executed, which are the same as round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591) in the eleventh control example described above, and then it is determined whether the newly executed round is the final round (16th round) (Z8451). If it is determined in the Z8451 process that it is the final round (16th round) (Z8451: Yes), then a final round command for display is set (Z8452), and the same Z8414 process as round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591) in the eleventh control example described above is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the Z8451 process that it is not the final round (16th round), this process is terminated.

Here, in the processing of Z8452, a final round command for display is set, which includes information for indicating the round display corresponding to the final round (16th round) and information for indicating the timing for executing the preparatory drive of the movable role (tilting device 310). In this way, by including information for indicating the timing for executing the preparatory drive in the final round command for display that is set at the start timing of a new round, it becomes unnecessary to provide the audio lamp control device 113 with a measuring means (timer) for measuring the timing for executing the preparatory drive of the movable role (tilting device 310).

In addition, when the display control device 114 receives a final round command for display, a display data table for the final round corresponding to the received command is set, time data corresponding to the presentation time of the display data table is set in the timing counter 233h, and a presentation display corresponding to the updated value of the timing counter 233h is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by including information indicating the timing to execute the preparatory drive in the final round command for display, the timing information of the timing counter 233h used to display an image on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be used to determine the timing to execute the preparatory drive. Therefore, there is no need to provide a new measuring means (timer) to determine the timing to execute the preparatory drive, which reduces manufacturing costs.

<Regarding control process of the display control device in the twelfth control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 598 and Fig. 599. This twelfth control example differs from the control process executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned eleventh control example in that command judgment process 12 (see Z3392 in Fig. 598) is executed instead of command judgment process 2 (see Z3302 in Fig. 367).

The contents of command determination process 12 (see Z3392) will now be described with reference to FIG. 598. FIG. 598 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 12 (see Z3392). When command determination process 12 (see Z3392) is executed, the same processes Z3401 to Z3419 as those of command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 367) described above are executed, and if it is determined in the processing of Z3418 that there is no error command (Z3418: No), it is then determined whether there is a final round command to display (Z3491).

In the processing of Z3491, if it is determined that there is a final round command for display (Z3491: Yes), the final round processing is executed (Z3492) and processing proceeds to Z3401. If it is determined that there is no final round command for display (Z3491: No), processing proceeds to Z3420, which is the same as the command determination processing 2 described above (see Z3302 in FIG. 367).

Next, referring to FIG. 599, the contents of the final round process (Z3492) executed in the command judgment process 12 (see Z3392 in FIG. 598) will be explained. In this final round process (Z3492), a process for setting a display data table based on the received final round command for display and a process for outputting a command to the role control device 229 and the audio output device 226 are executed.

When command determination process 12 (see Z3392) is executed, first a display data table for the final round corresponding to the received final round command is set (Z3495), then a process is set to output a reel command for causing the reel control device 229 to execute a preparatory drive in accordance with the standby display timing set in the display data table, and an audio command for causing the audio output device 226 to output a pseudo audio (Z3496), and this process is terminated.

As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233h reaches a value indicating the standby display timing (timing for the start of the preparation period), the reel command and the voice command can be output in sync.

<Regarding control processing in the audio output device of the twelfth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226 in this twelfth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 600 and Fig. 601. In this twelfth control example, an audio command set by the audio lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 is output to the audio output device 226 by the command output process of the audio lamp control device 113 or the command output process of the display control device 114, and the audio output device 226 is configured to output audio data corresponding to the received audio command.

In this way, by setting various display commands to be output to the display control device 114 and various audio commands to be output to the audio output device 226 in the audio lamp control device 113, which can receive commands to indicate the results of the special pattern lottery executed by the main control device 110, it is possible to centrally set multiple presentation modes (presentation display modes (visual display modes) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and presentation audio modes (auditory audio modes) output from the speaker 450 via the audio output device 226) to indicate the results of the special pattern lottery. Therefore, when multiple presentation modes are executed to indicate the results of the special pattern lottery, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the execution timing of each presentation mode, thereby improving the presentation effect.

In this control example, the above-mentioned visual display mode and auditory sound mode are used as multiple performance modes for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, but the present invention is not limited to these and any performance may be executed to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern to the player. For example, the lottery result of the special pattern may be suggested or notified to the player using a tactile pressure mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, the hand operating the operating handle) or an olfactory performance mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell. In this way, by configuring a single performance to be executed by appropriately combining multiple types of performance modes, it is possible to set a variety of performance modes to be executed to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern.

In addition, in this control example, the display control device 114 is also configured to set a voice command (a command for outputting a pseudo voice) to be output to the voice output device 226. By configuring it in this way, the display control device 114 can output voice in accordance with the timing at which the display data is actually created, so that it is possible to execute a performance in which the display content displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the voice output from the speaker 450 are more synchronized.

In addition, for example, if the display effect is not executed properly due to a control processing abnormality in the display control device 114, a voice command is not output to the audio output device 226, which prevents only audio from being output even though the display effect is not being executed, or prevents a discrepancy in the timing of the display effect and the audio.

First, referring to FIG. 600(a), the main processing executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 600(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main processing.

When the main processing of this audio output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process is executed (Z8501) in which processing is performed according to the command received from the audio lamp control device 113. Details of this command determination process (Z8501) will be described later with reference to FIG. 601, but when various audio commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 are received, processing is executed to output audio corresponding to the received audio command. After processing Z8501, other processing is executed (Z8502). In this Z8502 processing, processing is executed to play audio data and update the value of the music pointer.

When the processing of Z8502 ends, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in RAMm303 (Z8503). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Z8503 (Z8503: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in progress flag are turned on (Z8505), and power-off processing is executed (Z8506). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (Z8507), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if no information about a power outage has been stored in the process of Z8503 (Z8503: No), a determination is made as to whether or not RAMm303 has been corrupted based on the keyword stored in RAMm303 (Z8504), and if RAMm303 has not been corrupted (Z8504: No), the process returns to the process of Z8501 and the main process is executed repeatedly. On the other hand, if RAMm303 has been corrupted (Z8504: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Next, referring to FIG. 600(b), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 600(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 600(b)) is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in the command buffer area provided in RAMm303 (Z8601), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process described below, and processing according to the read command is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 601, we will explain the command determination process (Z8501), which is one process within the main process (see FIG. 600(a)) executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226. FIG. 601 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z8501). In this command determination process (Z8501), control is performed according to the type of various commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114.

In the command determination process (Z8501), it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z8701), and if it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command (Z8701: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (Z8701: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to on (Z8702), and then the type of command is analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (Z8703).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a voice command output from the display control device 114, i.e., a voice command for outputting a pseudo voice (Z8704). If it is determined that there is a voice command for outputting a pseudo voice (Z8704: Yes), an audio file (pseudo voice data) indicating the pseudo voice notified by the command is read from the audio file storage area of ROMm302. Next, a value corresponding to the timing at which the pseudo voice is played is set to the value of the music pointer, a timer value corresponding to the playback time of the pseudo voice data is set, playback of the pseudo voice data is set (Z8706), and processing proceeds to Z8707.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8704 that no voice command has been output from the display control device 114 (Z8704: No), or if the processing of Z8706 described above has been executed, it is then determined whether or not there are other voice commands, i.e., voice commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 (Z8707).

In the process of Z8707, for example, it is determined whether a voice command for indicating a music background music corresponding to a special symbol change effect or a big win game effect during a big win game, a stop sound sound corresponding to the timing of the stop display of a special symbol (third symbol), a press sound sound corresponding to the timing of pressing the frame button 22a, an error sound corresponding to an error notification, etc., has been output from the voice lamp control device 113. Here, if it is determined that there are various voice commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 (Z8707: Yes), a voice file (a group of music data) corresponding to the voice (music) indicated by the various voice commands received is read from the voice file storage area, and the read voice file (a group of music data) is stored in a predetermined storage area. Then, a timer value corresponding to the playback time of the voice data indicated by the various voice commands received is set in a predetermined timing means (timer), playback of the various voice data is set (Z8708), and the process proceeds to Z8701.

If it is determined in the processing of Z8707 that there is no other audio data (Z8707: No), other command processing is executed (Z8709), and the process proceeds to Z8701, where the above-mentioned control is executed repeatedly.

<Regarding the control process of the role control device 229 in the 12th control example>
Next, the control process contents of the role control device 229 in this twelfth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 602 and Fig. 603. In this twelfth control example, the role command set by the display control device 114 is output to the role control device 229 by the command output process of the display control device 114, and the role control device 229 is configured to output operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and step number for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) corresponding to the received role command to the corresponding movable role.

In this way, the display control device 114 receives the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113, which has received a command to show the result of the special pattern lottery executed by the main control device 110, and sets various role commands that the display control device 114 outputs to the role control device 229, making it possible to operate the movable role in synchronization with multiple performance display modes (performance display modes (visual display modes) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81) for showing the lottery result of the special pattern. Therefore, when a composite performance that combines various devices (third pattern display device 81, movable role, speaker 450) is executed as a performance executed based on the lottery result of the special pattern, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the execution timing of each performance mode set by each of the various devices, thereby improving the performance effect.

In this control example, the above-mentioned visual display mode and auditory sound mode are used as multiple performance modes for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, but the present invention is not limited to these and any performance may be executed to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern to the player. For example, the lottery result of the special pattern may be suggested and notified to the player using a tactile pressure mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, the hand operating the operating handle) or an olfactory performance mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell. In this way, by configuring a single performance to be executed by appropriately combining multiple types of performance modes, it is possible to set a variety of performance modes to be executed to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern.

First, referring to FIG. 602(a), the main processing executed by the MPUy 301 of the gadget control device 229 will be described. FIG. 602(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main processing.

When the main processing of this reel control device 229 is executed, first, a command determination process is executed (Z9001) which performs processing according to the command received from the display control device 114. Details of this command determination process (Z9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 603, but when various reel commands output from the display control device 114 are received, a process is executed to output operation data corresponding to the received reel command. After the processing of Z9001, other processes are executed to play back the operation data and update the value of the operation timer to update the operation scenario (Z9002).

When processing Z9002 ends, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in RAMy303 (Z9003). If power-off occurrence information is stored in processing Z9003 (Z9003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in progress flag are turned on (Z9005), and power-off processing is executed (Z9006). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (Z9007), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if no information about a power outage has been stored in the process of Z9003 (Z9003: No), a determination is made as to whether or not RAMy303 has been corrupted based on the keyword stored in RAMy303 (Z9004), and if RAMy303 has not been corrupted (Z9004: No), the process returns to Z9001 and the main process is executed repeatedly. On the other hand, if RAMy303 has been corrupted (Z9004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Next, referring to FIG. 602(b), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPUy 301 of the role control device 229 will be described. FIG. 602(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 602(b)) is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the display control device 114.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in the command buffer area provided in RAMy303 (Z9101), and then the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process described below, and processing according to the read command is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 603, we will explain the command determination process (Z9001), which is one process within the main process (see FIG. 602(a)) executed by the MPUy 301 of the role control device 229. FIG. 603 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z9001). In this command determination process (Z9001), control is executed according to the type of various commands received from the display control device 114.

In the command determination process (Z9001), it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z9201). If it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command (Z9201: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (Z9201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to on (Z9202), and then the type of command is analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (Z9203).

Then, first, it is determined whether there is a reel command among the unprocessed commands (S9204), and if it is determined that there is a reel command (Z9204: Yes), it is next determined whether the movable reel that is the target of the currently received reel command is in operation (Z9205). Here, in the processing of Z9205, it is first determined which movable reel the currently received reel command indicates an operation scenario for, and if it is a command indicating an operation scenario for moving the tilting device 310, for example, the displacement of the amount of current applied to the drive motor that moves the tilting device 310 is determined. If this amount of current is sufficient to drive the drive motor, the drive motor is driven, and it is determined that the tilting device 310 is in operation.

In this way, by configuring it to directly grasp the drive status of the drive motor, it is possible to reliably grasp the movement status of the movable props even when using a configuration in which operation data is output from multiple control devices.

In the processing of Z9205, if it is determined that the target movable role is in operation (Z9205: Yes), since it is not possible to execute the operation based on the currently received role command, the currently received role command is discarded without outputting the operation data (Z9206), and processing proceeds to Z9201. On the other hand, if it is determined that the target movable role is not in operation (Z9205: No), operation data (operation data corresponding to the operation pointers "1" and "2" (see FIG. 586 (b)) in the ending scenario table 222ib2) for executing a preparatory operation for the movable role (tilting device 310) is output (Z9207), and processing proceeds to Z9201.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of Z9204 that there is no reel command (Z9204: No), other command processing is executed (Z9207) and the process proceeds to Z9201.

As explained above, in this twelfth control example, a prop control device 229 is provided for executing operation control of the movable member, and a command for moving the movable member (e.g., tilt device 310) is output from the display control device 114 to the prop control device 229. The display command output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start of the performance period is configured to include information indicating the timing for outputting a command (prop command) from the display control device 114 to the prop control device 229 for executing a preparatory operation.

By configuring it in this way, the audio lamp control device 113 can perform the preparatory operation of the movable member at the appropriate timing simply by outputting a display command corresponding to a specified performance period to the display control device 114 at the start of the performance period. Furthermore, even if the execution timing of the composite performance can be set in multiple ways and the timing of executing the preparatory operation is varied to match the execution timing of the set composite performance, it is only necessary to variably set the timing of outputting the reel command to be included in the display command output to the display control device 114, eliminating the need to provide the audio lamp control device 113 with a measuring means (timer) for measuring multiple periods. This reduces the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113.

In addition, this control example is configured so that the prop control device 229 can determine the operating status of the tilting device 310. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether the drive means (motor) that drives the tilting device 310 is operating by detecting the current applied to the motor. Then, upon receiving an operation instruction from the audio lamp control device 113, it can determine the operating status of the tilting device 310, and output operation data to the tilting device 310 if it determines that the tilting device 310 is not moving.

In this control example, both the audio lamp control device 113 and the prop control device 229 are configured to output operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and step number for driving the various motors specified in the operation scenario) for moving the movable prop to the movable prop, but without being limited to this, the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to set only the operation scenario for the movable prop, output the set operation scenario to the prop control device 229, and only the prop control device 229 may output operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and step number for driving the various motors specified in the operation scenario) to the movable prop. By configuring in this way, operation data is not output from multiple control devices to the movable prop, so that the operation control of the movable prop can be prevented from becoming complicated.

In addition, as in this control example, by outputting a sound that is generated during a preparatory drive in accordance with the timing when the preparatory drive of the movable device may be executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparatory drive has been executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from determining the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed for the player at the stage when the preparatory drive is being executed when a device performance that requires a preparatory drive is executed, and to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the presentation effect of the operation presentation is reduced.

In this control example, by outputting the sound that is generated when a preparatory drive is executed, even when a preparatory drive is not actually being executed, it is made to seem as if the preparatory drive is being executed, making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparatory drive is being executed. However, any configuration that makes it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparatory drive is being executed will suffice, and for example, the configuration may be such that a sound that is generated when a preparatory drive is actually being executed and that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, a decorative sound effect) is output. Even with this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that a preparatory drive is (has) been executed, and a similar effect can be achieved.

As described above, this control example uses a configuration that makes it difficult to visually confirm that the preparatory drive is being executed, so a pseudo sound is output to make it difficult to tell whether the preparatory drive is being executed or not. However, if a configuration that allows visual confirmation that the preparatory drive is being executed is used, in addition to outputting the pseudo sound, measures must be taken to prevent visual discrimination that the preparatory drive is being executed. In this case, for example, when a preparatory period during which the preparatory drive may be executed is set, a covering movable member may be provided that covers the member that is moved by the preparatory drive so that it is difficult for the player to visually discern whether the preparatory drive is being executed or not. This makes it possible to prevent the player from visually and audibly discerning that the preparatory drive is being executed.

In this way, in this control example, the preparatory drive for the movable role (tilting device 310) role performance (performance drive) executed as a composite performance during the ending period is configured to be executed during the final round of the jackpot game. As a result, the tilting device 310 can be in a state where the preparatory drive has been completed at the start of the ending period, that is, the operation pointer "2" of the ending scenario table 222ib2 has been completed (see FIG. 586 (b)). Therefore, the operation performance period can be set longer during the ending period, which has a predetermined period, compared to when the preparatory drive is executed from the start of the ending period.

In addition, the display command output by the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes timing information for preparatory driving of the movable props, and the display control device 114 is configured to output a prop command to the prop control device 229. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 does not need to measure the timing for the movable prop to perform preparatory driving, and when the execution timing arrives, it does not need to output a prop command for performing preparatory driving of the movable props. This reduces the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113.

Furthermore, the display control device 114 is configured to output a reel command to the reel control device 229 and at the same time output a voice command to the voice output device 226, and a pseudo sound is output from the speaker 450 in accordance with the execution period of the preparatory drive of the movable reel, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the sound generated during the preparatory drive of the movable reel.

In this control example, a composite effect executed during a jackpot game is given as an example, but the timing of the composite effect is not limited to during a jackpot game, and may be during a special pattern change to show the result of a special pattern lottery. In this case, when using a technical idea of setting different roles and preparatory operations as a change effect executed during a special pattern change, for example, based on the result of the determination by the pre-determination means that pre-determines the winning information stored in reserve, for example, in some cases where it is determined that a composite effect will be executed in a special pattern change executed after two changes, or in some cases where it is determined that a composite effect will not be executed in a special pattern change executed at two changes, the preparatory operation may be set so that the preparatory operation is executed before the special pattern change after two changes.

In addition, a decision means for deciding whether or not to execute a preparatory operation when a specific operation is performed on the operation means (frame button 22) may be provided, and the preparatory operation may be executed when the decision means decides to execute the preparatory operation. In this case, it is preferable to configure the operation performance to be executable only when the movable role is located at the initial position of the operation performance at the timing of setting the operation performance. This makes it possible to vary the probability of a composite performance being executed depending on whether or not the player operates the operation means, so that the player can operate the operation means more proactively. Furthermore, it is preferable to combine the operation timing of the operation means using the above-mentioned decision means with a performance that operates the operation means as a suggestion performance that suggests the lottery result of the previous special chart variation that is executed before the special chart variation that executes the operation performance, and to configure the decision means to decide to execute the preparatory operation when a performance that suggests the lottery result of the previous special chart variation is a miss is executed as a result of operating the operation means.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible for the player to operate the operating means to perform the preparatory operation without feeling unnatural. Also, since it is possible to perform the preparatory operation of the movable role while a suggestive performance is being performed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, which suggests the lottery result of the previous special pattern variation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the movable role is moving.

<Thirteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 604 to Fig. 615. In the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example) described above, when the power is cut off during the execution of the special pattern variation, the playback position of the BGM that was being played along with the special pattern variation at the time of the power cut is backed up, and when the power is then turned on again and the special pattern variation is resumed, the playback of the BGM is started from the playback position that was backed up. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the special pattern variation that was being executed before the power was cut off has been resumed as it was after the power was turned on again.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 13th control example, when the power is cut off during the execution of the special pattern change and the power is then turned on again to resume the special pattern change, the variable display performance corresponding to the special pattern change that was interrupted due to the power cut is started in a pseudo manner after the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed (i.e., after the normal display performance can be executed in the third pattern display device 81). This pseudo variable display performance is also executed when the special pattern change that was resumed based on the power being turned on again ends before the completion of the initial setting. In other words, for a predetermined period from the end of the initial setting, the variable display performance that is pseudo-executed in the third pattern display device 81 is executed without synchronizing with the start and stop timing of the actual special pattern change (the variable display of the first pattern displayed in the first pattern display device 37). With this configuration, the player can easily understand the result of the variable display that was executed when the power was cut off by checking the pseudo variable display executed in the third pattern display device 81 after the initial setting is completed. In addition, in accordance with this, in this thirteenth control example, the playback start position of the BGM when the power is turned on is set so that the last part of the melody of the special chart fluctuation BGM ends when the initial settings are completed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to play the first part of the special chart fluctuation BGM at the timing when the pseudo fluctuation starts. Therefore, since the pseudo fluctuation can be made to look like a normal fluctuation display, the result of the fluctuation display that was being executed before the power failure can be notified to the player without causing any discomfort.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned ninth control example, when a background change operation (pressing the frame button 22a) is performed during the execution of the special chart change, the "silhouette display" can be selected at a predetermined rate. This silhouette display is basically configured to be set more easily when the change is a jackpot change than when it is a miss change, realizing a novel gameplay in which a player who wants to predict the expected probability of a jackpot based on the presence or absence of a silhouette display can actively change the background mode during the execution of the special chart change. In other words, since the configuration allows the player to actively change the background mode, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous as a result of the frequent changes in the presentation mode (presentation mode corresponding to the background mode) executed during the special chart change.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example is the same as the ninth control example in that a silhouette display can be set by executing a background change operation, but the content suggested by this silhouette display is different from that in the ninth control example. More specifically, in the thirteenth control example, silhouettes of multiple shapes (display modes) are provided, and it is configured to be possible to suggest (notify) the type of advance notice performance (type of reach performance) to be executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable display according to the shape (display mode) of the silhouette displayed during the execution of the variable display performance. By configuring in this way, the type of advance notice performance can be known in advance before the start of the advance notice performance, so that the player can be made to actively execute the background change operation. In addition, since it is determined that the performance will develop into a reach performance at the time the silhouette display is set, a player who wants to know early whether or not a reach performance (a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot) will be executed can be made to actively execute the background change operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to participate in the game. In the thirteenth control example, the performance using the silhouette display is called a "silhouette advance notice performance".

The pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and in that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the ninth control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 604, the transition of the BGM and the display mode in the third pattern display device 81 in the case where the power is turned on again after the power is cut off during the special pattern change in this 13th control example will be described. FIG. 604(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the BGM and the display mode in the case where the change time of the special pattern change resumed after the power is turned on elapses after the initial setting period of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. 604(a), in this 13th control example, the playback start position of the special pattern change BGM is set so that the end timing of the C melody of the special pattern change BGM composed of the A melody, the B melody, and the C melody coincides with the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114. FIG. 604 illustrates a case where the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 coincides with the end timing of the C melody of the special pattern change BGM by starting the special pattern change BGM from the middle of the B melody. By setting the playback start position of the BGM so that the end timing of the initial setting coincides with the end timing of the C melody of the BGM, it is possible to start the BGM from the beginning of the special pattern change BGM at the timing when the display control device 114 returns, simply by looping the special pattern change BGM until the change ends, as in normal times. In other words, the timing when the initial setting ends and the third pattern display device 81 starts displaying the third pattern change can be matched with the timing when the BGM is played from the beginning of the special pattern change BGM. Therefore, the BGM in the special pattern change performance executed with the remaining change time at the end of the initial setting can be played in a natural sound mode. Therefore, a more suitable sound mode can be realized. In addition, since there is no need to set playback from the beginning position of the BGM at the end of the initial setting, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the initial setting of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

The timing of the end of the initial setting of the display control device 114 mainly changes depending on the progress of the special chart change. The display control device 114 executes control to transfer images used for various performances to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 while performing the initial setting. Here, if the special chart change is not being performed, only the transfer of the resident image is required, and the time for the initial setting is relatively short, but if the special chart change is being performed, it is necessary to prepare image data to be used for the change display performance at the end of the initial setting. Therefore, the more image data used for the special chart change, the longer the period required for the initial setting. In this thirteenth control example, the time required for the initial setting varies depending on whether the display mode of the special chart change is before the reach development, which uses relatively little image data, after the normal reach development, which uses relatively much image data, or after the super reach development, which uses the most image data. Specifically, if it is before the reach development, the initial setting is completed in one second, whereas after the development to the normal reach, the initial setting takes two seconds, and after the super reach development, the initial setting takes four seconds. For this reason, in this thirteenth control example, the development status of the variable display when the power is turned on is determined from the remaining variable time and the variable type, the period required for the initial settings is predicted, and the start timing of the special chart variable BGM is set according to the predicted initial setting period. This ensures that the end timing of the initial settings and the end timing of the special chart variable BGM are consistent.

Figure 604(b) is a diagram showing the transition of the BGM and display mode when a special chart change that was interrupted when the power was turned off and resumed after the power was turned on ends before the initial settings are completed. Figure 604(b) illustrates a case where a special chart change was being executed in a situation where there was at least one reserved ball when the power was turned off. As shown in Figure 604(b), when the power is turned back on and the special chart change resumes, the end timing of the initial settings is predicted, and the playback start position of the BGM is set so that the BGM ends in accordance with the predicted end timing. In other words, similar to Figure 604(a), playback starts halfway through the B melody, so that the end timing of the initial settings matches the end timing of the C melody.

Also, as shown in FIG. 604(b), when the special pattern variation ends during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114, the special pattern variation (display of the first pattern variation in the first display device 37) based on the reserved ball (reserved ball 1) that was reserved at the time of the power cut is started. FIG. 604(b) illustrates a case where the timing of the change stop of the display based on reserved ball 1 (reserved 1) is later than the timing of the end of the initial setting of the display control device 114. The display of the first pattern variation in the first pattern display device 37 corresponding to reserved ball 1 at the time of the power cut continues across the timing of the end of the initial setting of the display control device 114, as shown in FIG. 604(b). On the other hand, as for the display mode of the third pattern display device 81, as shown in FIG. 604(b), the screen during the initial setting (image at the time of power-on) continues to be displayed until the initial setting is completed, and based on the fact that the initial setting is completed (it is now possible to display a normal image), a pseudo miss variation display is first performed for one second. This is a variable display effect for showing the result of the variable display that was interrupted when the power was turned off (the result was shown on the first pattern display device 37 during the initial setting) in a pseudo manner on the third pattern display device 81. By executing this pseudo variable display effect, the result of the variable display can be notified in a more easily visible manner to a player who missed the result of the variable display on the first pattern display device 37 that ended during the initial setting and the result of the simple variable display by the variable image at the time of power-on on the third pattern display device 81 (the result of the variable display in a relatively difficult manner to confirm). Therefore, the player can easily understand the result of the special pattern variation that was being executed when the power was turned off. In addition, if the lottery result of the special pattern variation that was being executed when the power was turned off is a jackpot, the jackpot will start as the period of the special pattern variation that was resumed after the power was turned on has elapsed (i.e., during the execution of the initial setting) (there is no room for executing the pseudo variation), so even if the pseudo variation is not executed, the player will not have any doubts that the lottery result was discarded due to the power outage.

As shown in FIG. 604(b), after the one-second pseudo variable display is completed, the variable display of the third symbol is executed in the remaining variable time. By configuring in this manner, the player can easily understand both the result of the variable display that was completed during the execution of the initial settings in the display control device 114 and the result of the variable display that was started during the execution of the initial settings.

If the remaining change time of the change display started during execution of the initial settings is less than 1 second (the change time passes while the pseudo-change is being executed), then the pseudo-change for 1 second corresponding to the change display that was being executed when the power was cut is executed, and then the pseudo-change for 1 second corresponding to hold 1 at the time of the power cut is executed. Also, if the remaining change time of the change display started during execution of the initial settings is less than 2 seconds, then the pseudo-change corresponding to the change display that was being executed when the power was cut is executed for the remaining change time, and then the pseudo-change for 1 second corresponding to hold 1 at the time of the power cut is executed. By configuring in this way, the pseudo-change can be executed more optimally.

<Electrical configuration in 13th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 605(a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 605(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 605(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in this thirteenth control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth control example (see FIG. 558(a)) in that the background notice selection table 222ga is deleted and a silhouette notice selection table 222ja is provided instead. The other configurations are the same as the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth control example described above, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The silhouette notice selection table 222ja is a data table that is referenced when selecting the performance mode of the silhouette notice performance in this thirteenth control example. Here, the silhouette notice performance in this thirteenth control example is a performance that suggests (notifies) the type of notice performance (type of reach performance) to be executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable display according to the shape (display mode) of the silhouette displayed in conjunction with the background change operation during the execution of the variable display performance, as described above. More specifically, as the modes (shapes) of the silhouette that can be displayed in the silhouette notice performance in this thirteenth control example, at least four types of silhouettes are provided: a bubble-shaped silhouette that imitates the shape of a bubble, a fish-shaped silhouette that imitates the shape of a fish (see FIG. 560(a)), a tree-shaped silhouette that imitates the shape of a tree (see FIG. 560(b)), and a volcano-shaped silhouette that imitates the shape of a volcano. Each of these silhouettes suggests the type (notice type) of the notice performance to be executed in the latter half of the variable display. That is, the bubble-shaped silhouette suggests that when it develops into a Super Reach, a bubble preview effect will be executed in which numerous bubbles will appear on the display screen; the fish-shaped silhouette suggests that when it develops into a Super Reach, a school of fish preview effect will be executed in which a school of fish will cross the display screen; the tree-shaped silhouette suggests that when it develops into a Super Reach, a wind preview effect will be executed in which a display of trees swaying in a strong wind will be displayed; and the volcano-shaped silhouette suggests that when it develops into a Super Reach, an eruption preview effect will be executed in which a display of a mountain erupting will be displayed.

The bubble preview effect and the school of fish preview effect are preview effects exclusive to when the background mode is set to the sea mode, and the wind preview effect and the eruption preview effect are preview effects exclusive to when the background mode is set to the mountain mode. The school of fish preview effect is a preview effect with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the bubble preview effect (it is less likely to be selected in the case of a miss fluctuation), and the eruption preview effect is a preview effect with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the wind preview effect. The bubble preview effect and the wind preview are configured to have the same expectation of a jackpot when executed, and the school of fish preview effect and the eruption preview effect are also configured to have the same expectation of a jackpot. For this reason, if a background change operation is performed to change to a mountain background during a high-speed fluctuation period in a variable display effect in which a bubble preview effect is set, the display will switch to a variable display effect accompanied by a wind preview effect, and if a background change operation is performed to change to a sea background during a high-speed fluctuation period in a variable display effect in which a wind preview effect is set, the display will switch to a variable display effect accompanied by a bubble preview effect. In addition, if a background change operation is performed to change to a mountain background during a high-speed changing period in a changing display performance in which a school of fish preview performance is set, the display will switch to a changing display performance accompanied by an eruption preview performance, and if a background change operation is performed to change to a sea background during a high-speed changing period in a changing display performance in which an eruption preview performance is set, the display will switch to a changing display performance accompanied by a school of fish preview performance. Details of the silhouette preview selection table 222ja for selecting the performance mode of the silhouette preview performance will be described with reference to FIG. 606.

Figure 606 is a diagram showing the contents of the silhouette notice selection table 222ja in this thirteenth control example. As shown in Figure 606, the silhouette notice selection table 222ja in this thirteenth control example specifies the type of silhouette notice performance to be selected for each range of the value of the performance counter 223h. Specifically, as shown in Figure 606, for a variable display performance for which a notice type that does not progress to a super reach is set, "none" silhouette notice is specified in association with the entire range of the performance counter 223h, regardless of the background mode after being changed by the background change operation. Therefore, if the player performs a background change operation while a variable display performance that does not progress to a super reach is being executed, the silhouette notice performance will not be executed.

As shown in FIG. 606, in a situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the sea mode and the variable display being executed is a variable display accompanied by a bubble notice super reach, the value of the effect counter 223h is specified to correspond to "none" of the silhouette notice in the range of "0 to 149", and the silhouette notice effect of "bubble-shaped silhouette" is specified to correspond to the range of "150 to 198". Therefore, when the background is changed to the sea mode by the background change operation and the variable display is accompanied by a bubble notice super reach, a silhouette notice effect in which a bubble-shaped silhouette is displayed is executed at a rate of about 24.6% (49/199). By executing the silhouette notice effect, the player can understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by a bubble notice, and the player's expectations for a big win can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to proactively change the background mode for players who wish to check the silhouette notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 606, in a situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the sea mode and the variable display being executed is a variable display accompanied by a super reach with a school of fish notice, the value of the effect counter 223h is specified to correspond to "none" of the silhouette notice in the range of "0 to 179", and the silhouette notice effect of "fish-shaped silhouette" is specified to correspond to the range of "180 to 198". Therefore, when the background is changed to the sea mode by the background change operation and the variable display is accompanied by a super reach with a school of fish notice, a silhouette notice effect in which a fish-shaped silhouette is displayed is executed at a rate of about 9.5% (19/199). By executing the silhouette notice effect, the player can understand that it will develop into a super reach with a school of fish notice, so that the player's expectation of a big win can be improved. In addition, by configuring the execution rate of the silhouette notice effect to be lower for the super reach effect accompanied by the school of fish notice effect, which has a relatively high expectation of a big win, than for the super reach effect accompanied by the bubble notice effect, the player can expect that the school of fish notice effect will be executed when the silhouette notice effect does not occur. This allows players to focus on whether or not a silhouette effect is being performed and the type of silhouette as they play, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 606, in a situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the mountain mode and the variable display being executed is a variable display accompanied by a wind notice super reach, the value of the effect counter 223h is specified to correspond to "none" of the silhouette notice in the range of "0 to 99", and the silhouette notice effect of "wooden silhouette" is specified to correspond to the range of "100 to 198". Therefore, when the background change operation changes to the mountain mode and the variable display is accompanied by a wind notice super reach, a silhouette notice effect in which a wooden silhouette is displayed is executed at a rate of about 50.2% (100/199). By executing the silhouette notice effect, the player can understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by a wind notice, so that the player's expectation for a big win can be improved. In addition, since the occurrence rate of the silhouette notice effect for the wind notice super reach is configured to be higher than the occurrence rate of the silhouette notice effect for the bubble notice super reach in the sea mode, a player who wants to see more silhouette notice effects can be actively made to perform the background change operation to the mountain mode. This can increase players' motivation to participate in the game.

As shown in FIG. 606, in a situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the mountain mode and the variable display being executed is a variable display accompanied by the eruption notice super reach, the value of the effect counter 223h is specified to correspond to "none" of the silhouette notice in the range of "0 to 149", and the silhouette notice effect of "volcano type silhouette" is specified to correspond to the range of "150 to 198". Therefore, when the background change operation changes to the mountain mode and the variable display is accompanied by the eruption notice super reach, the silhouette notice effect in which the volcano type silhouette is displayed is executed at a rate of about 24.6% (49/199). By executing the silhouette notice effect, the player can understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by an eruption notice, so that the player's expectation for a big win can be improved. In addition, since the occurrence rate of the silhouette notice effect for the eruption notice super reach is configured to be higher than the occurrence rate of the silhouette notice effect for the school of fish notice super reach in the sea mode, players who wish to see more silhouette notice effects can be actively made to perform the background change operation to the mountain mode. This can increase players' motivation to participate in the game.

In this way, in the present thirteenth control example, when a player performs a background change operation during the execution of a variable display performance in which a specific type of preview performance is executed, a silhouette preview performance that suggests the execution of the preview performance is executed at a ratio predetermined for each type of preview performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to know whether or not the preview performance is executed and the type of preview performance before the preview performance starts, so that a player who wants to know these can actively perform a background change operation. Also, in the present thirteenth control example, when the silhouette preview performance occurs, it is determined that the game will develop to a super reach, which has a relatively high expectation of a big win, so the occurrence of the silhouette preview performance can increase the player's expectation of a big win. Also, in the present thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette preview performance is made different only depending on the type of preview performance. In other words, the configuration is such that the silhouette preview performance is selected regardless of whether the change is a big win or a miss. By configuring in this way, even if the silhouette preview performance is not executed, it is difficult to damage the player's expectation of a big win. Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, the execution rate of the silhouette preview performance is higher when the background mode is changed to the mountain mode than when the background mode is changed to the sea mode. This allows the player to select the execution rate of the silhouette preview performance that he/she prefers and play the game. In addition, the silhouette preview performance is configured to notify the type of the preview performance of the super reach that will be executed thereafter in advance, so that after learning the type of preview performance from the silhouette preview performance, the player can select whether to maintain the background mode to execute the preview performance notified by the silhouette preview performance as it is, or to perform a background change operation again (during the high-speed change period) to execute a preview performance corresponding to the changed background that corresponds to the preview performance notified by the silhouette preview performance, thereby providing a novel gameplay. This allows the player's interest in the game to be improved.

In the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette preview performance is different between the sea mode and the mountain mode, but the execution ratio of the silhouette preview performance may be common. By configuring it in this way, the contents of the silhouette preview selection table 222ja can be simplified, and the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

In this thirteenth control example, the configuration is such that whether or not to execute a silhouette preview performance and the type of silhouette are selected depending only on whether or not a specific type of preview performance is executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, the execution rate of the silhouette preview performance may also be varied depending on whether or not there is a jackpot. By configuring it in this way, the silhouette preview performance can also suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, making it possible to encourage the player to more proactively perform background change operations. This can increase the player's motivation to participate in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 605(b), details of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 605(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 605(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in this thirteenth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the ninth control example (see FIG. 558(b)) only in that a pseudo-fluctuation counter 223ja, a pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223jb, and a silhouette lottery completed flag 223jc have been added.

The pseudo-fluctuation counter 223ja is a counter for counting the number of times (number of pseudo-fluctuations) that the third pattern display device 81 has not yet executed the third pattern variable display (excluding the variable image at power-on) among the variable displays executed after the power is turned back on. This pseudo-fluctuation counter 223ja is incremented by 1 each time a stop command is received (the timing for stopping the variable) during the execution of the initial settings of the display control device 114 (see Z2277 in FIG. 607), and decremented by 1 each time a pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed (see Z2316 in FIG. 610 and Z2560 in FIG. 612). If the value of this pseudo-fluctuation counter 223j is 1 or more, a new pseudo-fluctuation is executed each time a variable or pseudo-fluctuation ends.

The pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223jb is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the pseudo-fluctuation performance. This pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223jb is set to a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the pseudo-fluctuation at the start of the pseudo-fluctuation (Z2315, Z2321 in FIG. 610, Z2257, Z2259 in FIG. 612). When the value of this pseudo-fluctuation counter 223jb becomes 0, if the value of the pseudo-fluctuation counter 223ja described above is 1 or more, the execution of the pseudo-fluctuation is set. On the other hand, if the value of the pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223jb becomes 0 while the fluctuation display is being executed, a normal fluctuation display is executed for the remaining fluctuation time, and if the value of the pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223jb becomes 0 in the fluctuation stop state (reservation end state), the fluctuation stop state continues.

The silhouette drawn flag 223jc is a flag for indicating whether or not a drawing using the silhouette preview selection table 222ja has been performed in a variable display of 1. If this silhouette drawn flag 223jc is on, it means that a drawing using the silhouette preview selection table 222ja has already been performed in the variable display being executed, and if it is off, it means that it has not been executed yet. The silhouette drawn flag 223jc is initially set to off, and is set to on when the background change operation is first performed while the variable display is being executed (see Z2986 in FIG. 613). It is also set to off when the variation stops (see Z2280 in FIG. 607).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the thirteenth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 607 to Fig. 615, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 13th control example will be described. First, referring to Fig. 607, the fluctuation stop process 13 (Z2246) in the 13th control example will be described. This fluctuation stop process 13 (Z2246) is a process executed in place of the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Fig. 564) in the 9th control example, and is a process for setting the stop display of the third pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, similar to the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Fig. 564).

In the fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 607) in this 13th control example, the processing from Z2265 to Z2269 is the same as the processing from Z2265 to Z2269 in the fluctuation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 564) in the 9th control example. In the fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 607) in this 13th control example, first, the stop display of the third pattern is set (Z2265), and the processing moves to Z2266. In addition, when the processing of Z2269 is completed, the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2270), and the processing moves to Z2273.

In the processing of Z2273, the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is cleared to 0 (Z2273), and then it is determined whether or not the return fluctuation flag 223ff is on (Z2275). In the processing of Z2275, if it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223ff is off (Z2275: No), the processing proceeds to Z2280. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2275, if it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223ff is on (Z2275: Yes), it is determined whether or not a jackpot stopping pattern has been set (Z2276). In the processing of Z2276, if it is determined that a jackpot stopping pattern has been set (Z2276: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is cleared to 0 (Z2278), the return fluctuation flag 223ff is set to off (Z2279), and the processing proceeds to Z2280.

In contrast, if it is determined in the processing of Z2276 that the winning stop pattern has not been set (Z2276: No), this means that the first losing pattern was stopped and displayed during the initial setting of the display control device 114, so 1 is added to the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja (Z2277) and processing proceeds to Z2280. In the processing of Z2280, the silhouette lottery flag 223jc is set to OFF (Z2280), and this processing ends.

By executing this variation stop process 13 (see FIG. 607), the pseudo variation counter 223ja can be incremented by one each time a losing first symbol is stopped and displayed during the initial setting of the display control device 114, so that the pseudo variation presentation for the number of losing variations executed during the initial setting can be executed accurately after the initial setting is completed. Therefore, after the initial setting is completed, the third symbol display device 81 can execute the variation display that was being executed when the power was turned off, and the variation display of the third symbol the same number of times as the variation display based on the reserved balls at the time of the power being turned off. This prevents the player from having doubts that the lottery results have been discarded due to the power outage, so the player can play with peace of mind.

Next, referring to FIG. 608, the fluctuation return process 13 (Z2262) in this thirteenth control example will be described. This fluctuation return process 13 (Z2262) is a process executed in place of the fluctuation return process (see FIG. 541) in the ninth control example (and eighth control example), and, like the fluctuation return process (see FIG. 541) in the ninth control example (and eighth control example), is a process for executing control in response to a return fluctuation command received from the main control device 110.

In the fluctuation return process 13 (see FIG. 608) in this 13th control example, the same process as each of Z2281 to Z2284 in the fluctuation return process (see FIG. 541) in the 9th control example (and the 8th control example) is executed in each of the processes Z2281 to Z2284. In addition, in the fluctuation return process 13 (see FIG. 608) in this 13th control example, when the process Z2284 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time corresponds to the normal reach performance based on the difference between the remaining fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation return command and the fluctuation type (fluctuation time) (Z2331), and if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time corresponds to the execution of the normal reach performance (Z2231: Yes), the background music of the special chart fluctuation is set to be played from the playback position equivalent to 2 seconds before the end of the music (Z2332), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2331 that the remaining change time does not correspond to the time when a normal reach performance is being executed (Z2331: No), then it is determined whether or not the remaining change time corresponds to the time when a super reach performance is being executed (Z2333), and if it is determined that a super reach performance is being executed (Z2333: Yes), the background music for the special chart change is set to be played from a playback position equivalent to 4 seconds before the end of the music (Z2334), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2333 that a super reach performance is not being executed (Z2333: No), the background music for the special chart change is set to be played from a playback position equivalent to 1 second before the end of the music (Z2335), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this change return process 13 (see FIG. 608), the BGM for the special chart change can be ended in accordance with the end timing of the initial settings of the display control device 114. In other words, by varying the start timing of the special chart change BGM depending on whether the display mode of the special chart change is before the development of a reach, which uses relatively little image data, after the development of a normal reach, which uses relatively more image data, or after the development of a super reach, which uses the most image data, it is possible to reliably match the end timing of the initial settings and the end timing of the special chart change BGM.

Next, referring to FIG. 609, the display rise process 13 (Z2247) in this thirteenth control example will be described. This display rise process 13 (Z2247) is a process executed in place of the display rise process (see FIG. 542) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), and like the display rise process (see FIG. 542) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), it is a process for setting the variable display of the third pattern according to the value of the remaining variation time counter when the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed.

In the display rise processing 13 (see FIG. 609) in this 13th control example, the processing of Z2291 to Z2294 and Z2296 to Z2299 is identical to the processing of Z2291 to Z2294 and Z2296 to Z2299 in the display rise processing (see FIG. 542) in the 9th control example (and the 8th control example). In addition, in the display start processing 13 (see FIG. 609) in this 13th control example, if it is determined in the processing of S2291 that the return fluctuation flag 223ff is on (Z2291: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Z2301). If it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is greater than 0 (Z2301: Yes), this means that the special chart fluctuation has been completed at least once during the initial setting of the display control device 114, so a pseudo fluctuation start processing is executed to start a pseudo fluctuation performance showing the result of the special chart fluctuation that was completed during the initial setting (Z2302), and this processing is terminated. Details of this pseudo fluctuation start processing (Z2302) will be described later with reference to FIG. 610. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2301 that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is 0 (Z2301: No), the processing is shifted to Z2292.

Next, the details of the pseudo-fluctuation start process (Z2302) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 610. As described above, this pseudo-fluctuation start process (Z2302) is a process for starting a pseudo-fluctuation presentation that shows the results of the special chart fluctuation that ended during the initial setting. As shown in FIG. 610, when the pseudo-fluctuation start process (Z2302) is executed, first, the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is read (Z2311), and it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time specified from the read value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is 0 or not (Z2312).

If it is determined in the processing of Z2312 that the remaining fluctuation time is not 0 (Z2312: No), then it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2313). Then, if it is determined in the processing of Z2313 that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2313: Yes), and if it is determined in the processing of Z2312 that the remaining fluctuation time is 0 (Z2312: Yes), the start of a 1-second pseudo-fluctuation performance is set (Z2314), and the value of the pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223jb is set to a counter value corresponding to 1 second (Z2315). Next, the value of the pseudo-fluctuation counter 223ja is updated by subtracting 1 from it (Z2316), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2313, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is 2 seconds or less (Z2313: No), then it is determined whether the remaining variation time is longer than 1 second (Z2317). If it is determined that the remaining variation time is 1 second or less (Z2317: No), this means that the remaining variation time is not sufficient to perform the pseudo variation, so the display of the power recovery screen (image at power on) is set to continue (Z2318), the value of the pseudo variation counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (Z2319), and the process proceeds to Z2321. On the other hand, in the process of Z2317, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is longer than 1 second (Z2317: Yes), if a pseudo variation of 1 second is set, the remaining variation time at the end of the pseudo variation will be 1 second or less, and there will be insufficient time left to perform the special variation, so the start of the pseudo variation over the remaining variation time is set (Z2320), and the process proceeds to Z2321. In the process of Z2321, which is executed after the process of Z2319 or Z2320, a counter value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set in the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2321), and this process is terminated.

By executing this pseudo-variation start process (see FIG. 610), the results of the special pattern variation that was completed during the execution of the initial setting can be clearly notified in the form of a pseudo-variation presentation using the third pattern after the initial setting is completed. This makes it possible to realize a presentation that is easier for players to understand.

Next, referring to FIG. 611, the details of the variable display setting process 13 (Z2185) in this thirteenth control example will be described. This variable display setting process 13 (Z2185) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), and, like the variable display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), is a process for executing control in response to the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110.

Of the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 611) in this 13th control example, the processes Z2501 to Z2503, Z2505 to Z2509, and Z2531 to Z2534 are identical to the processes Z2501 to Z2503, Z2505 to Z2509, and Z2531 to Z2534 in the variable display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) in the 9th control example (and the 8th control example).

In addition, in the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 611) in this 13th control example, when the process of Z2503 is completed, a detailed variation display mode corresponding to the variation pattern command is then determined, and a variation pattern command setting process is executed (Z2521) to set a display variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation display mode, and the process proceeds to Z2535. Details of this variation pattern command setting process (Z2521) will be described with reference to FIG. 612.

Figure 612 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern command setting process (Z2521). In this fluctuation pattern command setting process (Z2521), first, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation type extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is set in the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg (Z2551), then it is determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is greater than 0 (1 or greater) (Z2552), and if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is 0 (Z2552: Yes), a fluctuation display mode corresponding to the extracted fluctuation pattern is selected (Z2553), a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected fluctuation display mode is set (Z2554), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2552, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-fluctuation counter 223ja is greater than 0 (1 or greater) (Z2552: Yes), it is then determined whether the remaining fluctuation time indicated by the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is longer than 2 seconds (Z2555). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 2 seconds or less (Z2555: No), if a pseudo-fluctuation performance of 1 second is set, the remaining fluctuation time after the pseudo-fluctuation ends will be insufficient to perform a fluctuation display performance, so a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the start of a pseudo-fluctuation performance of the fluctuation time spanning the remaining fluctuation time is set (Z2556). Next, a counter value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set for the pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2557), and this process is terminated.

In contrast, if the remaining fluctuation time is determined to be longer than 2 seconds in the processing of Z2555 (Z2555: Yes), even if a pseudo-fluctuation performance of 1 second is executed, a sufficient amount of time (at least longer than 1 second) can be secured as the fluctuation time after the end of the pseudo-fluctuation, so a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the start of the 1-second pseudo-fluctuation is set (Z2558). Next, a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2559), and the value of the pseudo-fluctuation counter 223ja is updated by subtracting 1 from the value (Z2560), and this processing ends.

By executing this variation pattern command setting process (see FIG. 612), the variation display mode can be appropriately set, taking into account the remaining number of pseudo-variations at the start of the variation.

Next, background change process 13 (see FIG. 613) in this thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 613. This background change process 13 (Z2541) is a process executed in place of background change process 9 (see FIG. 563) in the ninth control example, and, like background change process 9 (see FIG. 563) in the ninth control example, is a process for setting a background change according to the timing of a background change operation when that operation is performed.

In the background change process 13 in the thirteenth control example (see FIG. 613), the processes Z2963 to Z2967 are the same as the processes Z2963 to Z2967 in the background change process 9 in the ninth control example (see FIG. 563). In the background change process 13 in the thirteenth control example (see FIG. 613), when the process Z2967 or the process Z2968 is completed, it is then determined whether the silhouette selection flag 223jc is on (Z2981), and if it is determined that the silhouette selection flag 223jc is off (Z2981: No), this means that the selection of the silhouette preview performance has not been performed in the variable display currently being executed, so the processes (the processes Z2982 to Z2986) for selecting and setting the silhouette preview performance are executed. More specifically, the value of the performance counter 223h is obtained (Z2982), and the preview mode of the silhouette preview corresponding to the obtained value of the performance counter 223h is selected from the silhouette preview selection table 222ja (Z2983).

When the processing of Z2983 is completed, the silhouette selection flag 223jc is then set to on (Z2984), and it is determined whether the result of the selection of the silhouette preview performance by the processing of Z2983 indicates the execution of a silhouette preview performance (Z2985). If it is determined in the processing of Z2985 that the selection result indicates the execution of a silhouette preview performance (Z2986: Yes), a display silhouette preview command indicating the execution of the selected silhouette preview performance is set (Z2986), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2985 that the selection result indicates "no silhouette preview performance" (Z2985: No), the processing of Z2986 is skipped and this processing is terminated.

By executing this background change process 13 (see FIG. 613), a lottery for a silhouette preview effect can be executed based on the first background change operation while the variable display is being executed. This can create a sense of anticipation for a big win for players who have confirmed the silhouette preview effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of counter update process 13 (Z2177) in this thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 614. This counter update process 13 (Z2177) is a process executed in place of the counter update process (see FIG. 552) in the ninth control example (and eighth control example), and is a process for updating various counters, similar to the counter update process (see FIG. 552) in the ninth control example (and eighth control example).

In the counter update process 13 (see FIG. 614) in this 13th control example, each of the processes Z2861 to Z2866 is the same as each of the processes Z2861 to Z2866 in the counter update process (see FIG. 552) in the 9th control example (and the 8th control example). In addition, in the counter update process 13 (see FIG. 614) in this 13th control example, when the process Z2864 or Z2865 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is greater than 0 (1 or greater) (Z2871), and if the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is 0 (Z2871: No), the process proceeds to Z2866.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2871, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223jb is greater than 0 (1 or more) (Z2871: Yes), the value of the pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223jb is subtracted by 1 (Z2872), and it is determined whether the value of the pseudo-fluctuation counter 223jb after the subtraction is 0 (Z2873). In the process of Z2873, if it is determined that the counter value after the subtraction is 0 (Z2873: Yes), a pseudo-fluctuation setting process is executed to determine whether to execute a pseudo-fluctuation or to execute a normal fluctuation display according to the value of the pseudo-fluctuation counter 223ja (Z2874), and the process proceeds to Z2875. Details of this pseudo-fluctuation setting process (Z2873) will be described later with reference to FIG. 615. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2873 that the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb after subtraction is not 0 (Z2873: No), the processing of Z2874 is skipped and the processing proceeds to Z2875.

Next, referring to FIG. 615, the details of the pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z2874) described above will be explained. As described above, this pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z2874) is a process for determining whether to execute a pseudo fluctuation or execute a normal fluctuation display depending on the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja. In this pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z2874), first, the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is read (Z2881), and then it is determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is 0 or not (Z2882).

In the process of Z2882, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja read out is 0 (Z2882: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time indicated by the counter value read out in the process of Z2881 is 0 (Z2883). In the process of Z2883, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not 0 (Z2883: No), the execution of the fluctuation display for the remaining fluctuation time is set (Z2884), the start of the special chart fluctuation BGM is set (Z2885), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2883, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 0, this means that the actual game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a fluctuation stop state, so the execution of the fluctuation display is not set and this process is terminated as it is.

In contrast, in the processing of Z2882, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is not 0 (is 1 or more) (Z2882: No), it is then determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2886), and if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 2 seconds or less (Z2886: No), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is 0 (Z2887). In the processing of Z2887, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not 0 (Z2887: No), the start of pseudo fluctuation over the remaining fluctuation time is set (Z2888), a counter value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set for the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2889), and the processing proceeds to Z2893.

In contrast, if the processing of Z2886 determines that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2886: Yes), and if the processing of Z2887 determines that the remaining fluctuation time is 0 (Z2887: Yes), the start of a 1-second pseudo-fluctuation performance is set (Z2890), and a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set for the value of the pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2891). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pseudo-fluctuation counter 223ja (Z2892), and the processing proceeds to Z2893. In the processing of Z2893, the start of the special chart fluctuation BGM is set (Z2893), and this processing ends.

By executing this pseudo-fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 615), when the pseudo-fluctuation time has elapsed, it is possible to accurately determine whether to set the pseudo-fluctuation again or to execute normal fluctuation display depending on the value of the pseudo-fluctuation counter 223ja.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 13th control example, when the power is cut off during the execution of the special pattern variation and then the power is turned on again to resume the special pattern variation (the variation display of the first pattern in the first pattern display device 37), the third pattern display device 81 is configured to execute a pseudo-variation display performance showing the result of the special pattern variation resumed when the power is turned on after the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed (i.e., after the normal display performance can be executed in the third pattern display device 81). In other words, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to execute a pseudo-variation performance that is asynchronous with the variation period of the variation display of the first pattern resumed based on the power being turned on. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand the result of the variation display that was being executed when the power was turned off by checking the pseudo-variation display executed in the third pattern display device 81 after the initial setting is completed. In addition, in accordance with this, in this 13th control example, the playback start position of the BGM at the time of powering on is set so that the last part of the melody of the special pattern variation BGM ends when the initial setting is completed. By configuring it in this way, the first part of the special chart change BGM can be played exactly at the timing when the pseudo-change starts. Therefore, the pseudo-change can be made to look like a normal change display, so the result of the change display that was being performed before the power outage can be notified to the player without making the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be given the impression that the special chart change that was interrupted when the power was cut off was not discarded but was performed after the power was turned back on, so the player can play with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, when a background change operation is performed during the execution of the variable display, if a specific condition is established, a silhouette notice performance that can suggest the establishment of the specific condition can be executed at a predetermined rate. More specifically, the execution of a silhouette notice performance that suggests (informs) the type of notice performance (type of reach performance) to be executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable display by the display mode of the silhouette display is determined by lottery based on the execution of the background change operation. By configuring in this way, when the silhouette notice performance is executed, the type of notice performance can be known in advance before the notice performance starts, so that the player can be made to actively execute the background change operation. Also, since it is determined that the performance will develop into a reach performance at the time the silhouette display is set, a player who wants to know early whether or not a reach performance (a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot) will be executed can be made to more actively execute the background change operation. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be improved. In addition, in this thirteenth control example, the execution rate of the silhouette notice performance is made different only depending on the type of notice performance. In other words, the configuration is such that the silhouette preview performance is selected regardless of whether the change is a big win or a miss. By configuring in this way, even if the silhouette preview performance is not executed, it is difficult to damage the player's expectation of a big win. Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, the execution rate of the silhouette preview performance is higher when the background mode is changed to the mountain mode than when the background mode is changed to the sea mode. This makes it possible to realize a game that allows the player to select the execution rate of the silhouette preview performance that the player prefers and play the game. In addition, since the silhouette preview performance is configured to notify the type of the preview performance of the super reach that will be executed thereafter in advance, after knowing the type of preview performance by the silhouette preview performance, it is possible to provide a novel game that allows the player to select whether to execute the preview performance notified by the silhouette preview performance as it is by maintaining the background mode, or to execute the preview performance corresponding to the changed background that corresponds to the preview performance notified by the silhouette preview performance by performing the background change operation again (during the high-speed fluctuation period). Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette preview performance is different between the sea mode and the mountain mode, but the execution ratio of the silhouette preview performance may be common. By configuring it in this way, the contents of the silhouette preview selection table 222ja can be simplified, and the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

In this thirteenth control example, the configuration is such that whether or not to execute a silhouette preview performance and the type of silhouette are selected depending only on whether or not a specific type of preview performance is executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, the execution rate of the silhouette preview performance may also be varied depending on whether or not there is a jackpot. By configuring it in this way, the silhouette preview performance can also suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, making it possible to encourage the player to more proactively perform background change operations. This can increase the player's motivation to participate in the game.

In the present thirteenth control example, when the power is cut off while the special chart variation is being performed and then turned back on, the timing at which the initial settings of the display control device 114 end is determined when the power is turned on so that the timing at which the initial settings end and the timing at which the end of the special chart variation BGM is played match, and the playback start position of the special chart variation BGM is adjusted (varied) according to the determination result, but this is not limited to this. For example, the playback start position may be adjusted so that the special chart variation BGM ends in accordance with the end timing of the special chart variation that was resumed when the power was turned on.

In the thirteenth control example, the number of times the special pattern changes have been completed during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114 is counted, and after the initial setting is completed, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to sequentially execute the pseudo-change display performance for the counted number, but this is not limited to this. For example, after the initial setting is completed, the results of the special pattern changes for the counted number may be notified collectively by one pseudo-change display performance. More specifically, for example, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 may be divided at least by the count number, and a pseudo-change display showing the results of the special pattern changes that have been completed during the execution of the initial setting may be executed in each of the divided display areas. By configuring in this way, the performance time of the pseudo-change performance for notifying the results of the special pattern changes that have been completed during the execution of the initial setting can be shortened, so that the normal state in which the third pattern change display can be executed can be restored more quickly.

In the thirteenth control example, the silhouette preview performance is configured to be executed as a performance to notify in advance that the ongoing variable display will develop into a specific type of reach performance (bubble preview super reach, fish school preview super reach, wind preview super reach, eruption preview super reach), but the target to be notified by the silhouette preview performance is not limited to this. For example, the silhouette preview performance may be executed not only for the ongoing variable display, but also when there is a reserved ball that will develop into the target reach performance among the reserved variable displays. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation not only for the ongoing variable display at the time the silhouette preview performance is executed, but also for the reserved ball at the time the silhouette preview performance is executed, so that the player's sense of anticipation for a big win can be maintained for a longer period of time. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In this thirteenth control example, when the special chart change is resumed based on power-on, the period required for the initial settings of the display control device 114 is predicted, and the start position of the special chart change BGM at power-on is set so that the special chart change BGM ends within that predicted period. In addition to this, if the actual end timing of the initial settings deviates from the predicted result, the initial screen (the display period of the image at power-on) may be extended to match the end timing of the special chart change BGM. By configuring in this way, the end timing of the special chart change BGM can be more reliably matched with the end timing of the initial screen.

<14th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 616 to Fig. 625. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 12th control example described above, a command for moving a movable member (for example, the tilting device 310) is output from the display control device 114 to the role control device 229 for executing the operation control for the movable member. Then, the display command output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the performance period is configured to include information indicating the timing of outputting a command (role command) for executing a preparatory operation from the display control device 114 to the role control device 229, and the display control device 114 is configured to determine whether or not it is time to execute the preparatory operation.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example, the timing for outputting a command to execute a preparatory operation is predefined in the display data table, and when the drawing content is read from the display data table, information indicating the output of the command is read, thereby outputting the command for the reel. This eliminates the need to provide a separate timer means or the like for timing the output of the command for the reel, thereby simplifying the configuration of the display control device 114.

In addition, in this fourteenth control example, a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed as a type of entertainment effect. This reach line suggestion effect is an effect that suggests to the player whether or not a reach will occur and the line of the reach line before the reach effect occurs. The occurrence of a reach effect increases the expectation of a jackpot, and the more reach lines there are, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player can play the game while paying attention to the content of the reach line suggestion effect.

First, the contents of the reach line suggestion performance will be described with reference to FIG. 616 and FIG. 617. This reach line suggestion performance is a performance that can be executed during a high-speed fluctuation period. As shown in FIG. 616(a), when the reach line suggestion performance is executed, first, a character 810 imitating a dinosaur is displayed on the back side of the third pattern during high-speed fluctuation on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and a speech bubble image 810a imitating a speech bubble is displayed on the right side of the character 810. The words "The more the same numbers are lined up, the higher the expectation!" are displayed in this speech bubble image 810a. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that a notice performance in which numbers are lined up will be executed, and that the expectation level changes depending on the arrangement of the numbers. In this reach line suggestion performance, a performance is executed in which nine numbers are displayed inside the speech bubble image 810a in three parts, three at a time. Of the nine numbers displayed inside the balloon image 810a, when two numbers are aligned vertically, it is confirmed that the effect will develop into a double-line reach effect (an effect with a higher expectation than a single-line reach effect) or that a jackpot will be obtained. Also, of the nine numbers displayed inside the balloon image 810a, when three numbers are aligned vertically, it is confirmed that the effect will develop into a triple-line reach effect (an effect with a higher expectation than a double-line reach effect) or that a jackpot will be obtained. Furthermore, when three numbers are aligned horizontally, it is confirmed that a jackpot will be obtained. In this way, the reach line suggestion effect can suggest the reach line of the reach effect that will develop afterwards, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the content of the reach line suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game. In the following figures, the image showing the third pattern during high-speed fluctuation (a dashed arrow pointing to the left) is omitted in order to make the content of the effect easier to understand.

Figure 616(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the first three numbers out of nine numbers are displayed in a reach line suggestion performance. As shown in Figure 616(b), the first three numbers are displayed horizontally toward the top of the speech bubble image 810a. Figure 616(b) illustrates a state in which an image imitating the number "7", an image imitating the number "6", and an image imitating the number "5" are displayed.

Figure 617(a) shows a state where all nine numbers are displayed and three identical numbers are lined up vertically. As shown in Figure 617(a), when the same numbers are lined up, an effect image 810b is displayed surrounding the identical numbers. This allows the player to easily understand that the numbers are lined up and the number of numbers that are lined up. In addition, when two or more numbers are lined up in the reach line suggestion performance, the mode changes to a dedicated background mode according to the number of numbers that are lined up. Specifically, when two identical numbers are lined up vertically, the mode changes to "Super Sea Mode" (when the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion performance is sea mode) or "Super Mountain Mode" (when the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion performance is mountain mode), which corresponds to a performance with a higher expectation level than the double line reach performance. Also, when three identical numbers are lined up vertically or horizontally, the game transitions to "Premium Sea Mode" (when the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion effect is Sea Mode) or "Premium Mountain Mode" (when the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion effect is Mountain Mode), which corresponds to an effect with a higher expectation level than the triple line reach effect. In addition, in the "Super Sea Mode" or "Super Mountain Mode", there is a low probability of the game developing into a single line reach effect, which has a lower expectation level than the double line reach effect, but a pattern in which this background mode and the type of reach that occurs are inconsistent is selected only in the case of a jackpot. Similarly, even if the game does not develop into a triple reach (developing into a single reach or double reach) despite transitioning to the "Premium Sea Mode" or "Premium Mountain Mode", a jackpot is confirmed. In this way, since the single reach effect or double reach effect, which normally has a relatively low expectation level of a jackpot, is confirmed as soon as it occurs under certain conditions, the game can be played while paying attention to the number of reach lines after the background mode is upgraded in the reach line suggestion effect. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

617(b) shows the display state when three numbers are lined up vertically in the reach line suggestion effect executed in the sea mode, and the mode is switched to the premium sea mode. In this premium sea mode, as shown in FIG. 617(b), the words "Premium Sea Mode" are displayed in the mode display area Dm1a. Also, as shown in FIG. 617(b), when the mode is switched to the "Premium Sea Mode", the mode develops into a triple reach effect in which the three effective lines, the vertical effective line L1 in the center of the screen, the effective line L2 ascending to the right, and the effective line L3 descending to the right, are in reach. As described above, the triple reach effect is an effect that has a higher expectation of a jackpot (a lower rate of selection in the case of a miss) than the single reach effect or double reach effect, and therefore can increase the player's expectation of a jackpot. In this way, the reach line suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the number of reach lines, and is also an effect that suggests an upgrade to the back mode (mode upgrade effect).

<Electrical configuration in 14th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 618, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th control example will be described. FIG. 618 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 14th control example. As shown in FIG. 618, the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 14th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 12th control example (see FIG. 584) only in that a mode promotion performance selection table 222ka is added. This mode promotion performance selection table 222ka is a data table referenced to select the performance mode (the number of identical numbers that are aligned in the balloon image 810a) of the mode promotion performance (reach line suggestion performance). Details of this mode promotion performance selection table 222ka will be described with reference to FIG. 619 and FIG. 620.

Figure 619 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka in this fourteenth control example. As shown in Figure 619 (a), the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka is composed of at least a win table 222ka1 for selecting whether or not a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed and the effect type in the variable display of a big win, and a loss table 222ka2 for selecting whether or not a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed and the effect type in the variable display of a loss.

First, the contents of the winning table 222ka1 will be described with reference to FIG. 619(b). As shown in FIG. 619(b), the winning table 222ka1 specifies the correspondence between the range of the value of the performance counter 223h and the performance mode (the mode of the numbers aligned in the balloon image 810a) for each number of reach lines when the reach performance is developed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 619(b), in a winning variation in which a single-line reach occurs, the value of the performance counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 149", and the mode promotion performance "none" is specified as the performance mode. In other words, in a jackpot variation in which a single-line reach performance occurs, if the value of the performance lottery counter 223h is "0 to 149", the mode promotion performance (reach line suggestion performance) will not be executed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, 150 counter values (random numbers) are associated with the "none" effect mode, so the percentage of times that a mode promotion effect is not executed during a jackpot fluctuation with a single-line reach effect is approximately 75.4% (150/199).

As shown in FIG. 619(b), in a winning variation where a single-line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "150 to 192", and the "variable" effect is associated with the range. In other words, in a jackpot variation where a single-line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "150 to 192", a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and an effect in which the same numbers are not lined up vertically or horizontally (variable) is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the "variable" effect is 43, so in a jackpot variation where a single-line reach effect is set, the rate at which the variable mode promotion effect is executed is approximately 21.6% (43/199).

Also, as shown in FIG. 619(b), in a winning variation in which a single-line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "193, 194" and the effect mode is specified as "two vertically aligned". In other words, in a jackpot variation in which a single-line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "193, 194", a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and an effect in which two identical numbers are aligned vertically is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, there are two counter values (random number values) associated with the effect mode "two vertically aligned", so in a jackpot variation in which a single-line reach effect is set, the rate at which a mode promotion effect with two vertically aligned is executed is approximately 1% (2/199).

Also, as shown in FIG. 619(b), in a winning variation in which a single-line reach effect occurs, a "vertical three-digit line-up" is associated with the value "195" of the effect counter 223h as the effect mode. In other words, in a jackpot variation in which a single-line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "195", a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and an effect in which three identical numbers are lined up vertically is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, there is only one counter value (random number value) associated with the effect mode "vertical three-digit line-up", so in a jackpot variation in which a single-line reach effect is set, the rate at which a vertical three-digit line-up mode promotion effect is executed is approximately 0.5% (1/199).

Also, as shown in FIG. 619(b), in a winning variation where a single-line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h, "196 to 198", is associated with the effect mode of "three horizontally aligned". In other words, in a jackpot variation where a single-line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "196 to 198", a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and an effect where three of the same numbers are aligned horizontally is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, the number of counter values (random number values) associated with the effect mode of "three horizontally aligned" is four, so in a jackpot variation where a single-line reach effect is set, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three horizontally aligned is executed is approximately 2% (4/199).

In this way, in reach effects where a single line reach occurs, the mode promotion effect is not executed in about 3/4 of cases (mode promotion effects are difficult to execute). Therefore, when a mode promotion effect is executed, the player can expect a double line or triple line reach effect, which has a high probability of winning, to occur.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 619(b), in a winning variation where a double line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is set to a range of "0 to 99" and a mode promotion effect of "none" is associated with it. In other words, in a jackpot variation where a double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "0 to 99", a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) will not be executed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, the number of counter values (random number values) associated with the effect mode of "none" is 100, so in a jackpot variation where a double line reach effect is set, the rate at which a mode promotion effect is not executed is approximately 50.2% (100/199).

In addition, in a winning variation where a double line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is set in the range of "100 to 119" and a "variable eye" is associated with the effect mode. In other words, in a jackpot variation where a double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "100 to 119", a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and a variable eye is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, the number of counter values (random number values) associated with the effect mode "variable eye" is 20, so in a jackpot variation where a double line reach effect is set, the rate at which a variable eye mode promotion effect is executed is approximately 10% (20/199).

In addition, in a winning variation where a double line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "120 to 189", and the effect mode is specified as "two vertically aligned". In other words, in a jackpot variation where a double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "120 to 189", a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and an effect in which two of the same numbers are aligned vertically is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, the number of counter values (random number values) associated with the effect mode "two vertically" is 70, so in a jackpot variation where a double line reach effect is set, the rate at which a mode promotion effect with two vertically aligned is executed is approximately 35.2% (70/199).

In addition, in a winning variation in which a double line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is set to "190" and the effect mode is set to "three vertically aligned." In other words, in a jackpot variation in which a double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "190," a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and an effect in which three of the same numbers are aligned vertically is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, there is one counter value (random number value) associated with the effect mode "three vertically aligned." Therefore, in a jackpot variation in which a double line reach effect is set, the rate at which a mode promotion effect with three vertically aligned is executed is approximately 0.5% (1/199).

In addition, in a winning variation where a double line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "191 to 198", and the effect mode of "three horizontally aligned" is specified to correspond to this range. In other words, in a jackpot variation where a double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "191 to 198", a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and an effect of three identical numbers aligned horizontally is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, the number of counter values (random number values) associated with the effect mode of "three horizontally aligned" is eight, so in a jackpot variation where a double line reach effect is set, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three horizontally aligned is executed is approximately 4% (8/199).

In this way, in a winning fluctuation that results in a double-line reach effect, the execution rate of the mode promotion effect is higher (from about 25% to about 50%) than in a winning fluctuation that results in a single-line reach effect. Also, when a mode promotion effect is executed, the two vertical effect patterns are selected at a high rate, but the scattered pattern pattern is also selected about 10% of the time. Therefore, even when scattered patterns are displayed, the player can expect an effect with a higher expectation level than the double-line reach effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 619(b), in a winning variation in which a triple line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is set to a range of "0 to 49" and a mode promotion effect of "none" is associated with it. In other words, in a jackpot variation in which a triple line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "0 to 99", a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) will not be executed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, 50 counter values (random number values) are associated with the effect mode of "none", so in a jackpot variation in which a triple line reach effect is set, the rate at which a mode promotion effect is not executed is approximately 25.1% (50/199).

In addition, in a winning variation where a triple line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is set to a range of "50 to 69" and a "variable eye" effect is associated with the range. In other words, in a jackpot variation where a double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "50 to 69", a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and a variable eye is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, the number of counter values (random number values) associated with the "variable eye" effect is 20, so in a jackpot variation where a double line reach effect is set, the rate at which a variable eye mode promotion effect is executed is approximately 10% (20/199).

In addition, in a winning variation where a triple line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "70 to 99", and the effect mode is specified as "two vertically aligned". In other words, in a jackpot variation where a triple line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "70 to 99", a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and an effect in which two of the same numbers are aligned vertically is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, the number of counter values (random number values) associated with the effect mode "two vertically" is 30, so in a jackpot variation where a triple line reach effect is set, the rate at which a mode promotion effect with two vertically aligned is executed is approximately 15.1% (30/199).

In addition, in a winning variation where a triple line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "100 to 189", and the effect mode is specified as "three vertically aligned". In other words, in a jackpot variation where a triple line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "100 to 189", a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and an effect in which three of the same numbers are aligned vertically is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, the number of counter values (random number values) associated with the effect mode "three vertically aligned" is 90, so in a jackpot variation where a triple line reach effect is set, the rate at which a mode promotion effect with three vertically aligned is executed is approximately 45.2% (90/199).

In addition, in a winning variation where a triple line reach effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "190 to 198", and the effect mode is specified as "three horizontally aligned". In other words, in a jackpot variation where a double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect selection counter 223h is "190 to 198", a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and an effect in which three of the same numbers are aligned horizontally is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect selection counter 223h, the number of counter values (random number values) associated with the effect mode "three horizontally" is nine, so in a jackpot variation where a triple line reach effect is set, the rate at which a mode promotion effect of three horizontally aligned is executed is approximately 4.5% (9/199).

In this way, in a winning fluctuation that produces a triple line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is executed more frequently (approximately 75%) than in a winning fluctuation that produces a single line or double line reach effect. Also, when a mode promotion effect is executed, the vertical three-dot effect is selected at a high rate, but the scattered eyes and vertical two-dot effect are also selected about 25% of the time. Therefore, even when a scattered eyes or vertical two-dot effect is displayed as a mode promotion effect, the player can expect a triple line reach effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 620, the details of the loss table 222ka2 constituting the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka will be described. As described above, this loss table 222ka is a data table that is referenced to determine whether or not a mode promotion effect can be executed, and the effect mode if it is executed, in the event of a loss variation. Like the winning table 222ka, this loss table 222ka specifies the correspondence between the value range of the effect counter 223h and the effect mode for each number of lines in the reach.

As shown in FIG. 620, for non-reach variable display effects where no reach occurs, the entire range (0 to 198) of the effect counter 223h is associated with "none" mode promotion effects. For this reason, for variable display effects where no reach occurs, mode promotion effects will not be executed.

As shown in FIG. 620, for single-line reach effects, the value of the effect counter 223h in the range of "0 to 155" is associated with "none" mode promotion effects, and the value of the effect counter 223h in the range of "156 to 198" is associated with the "varied" mode promotion effect. That is, in single-line reach effects, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 78.4% (156/199), and the "varied" mode promotion effect is executed at a rate of about 21.6% (43/199). In other words, the rate at which "varied" is selected is the same (21.6%) whether in the case of a win or a miss. Also, the execution rate of the mode promotion effect is lower in single-line reach effects that fail by the rate at which a winning pattern (a performance pattern that develops into a single reach with two or three vertically aligned, or a performance pattern with three horizontally aligned) is selected (about 3.5%). In other words, when the "variable" presentation mode is set and develops into a single-line reach presentation, it becomes difficult to guess the likelihood of a big win from the mode promotion presentation mode, so the player can be drawn to the outcome of the reach presentation until the very end. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 620, for double-line reach effects, the value of the effect counter 223h is set to the range of "0 to 108" in correspondence with "none" mode promotion effect, the value of the effect counter 223h is set to the range of "109 to 128" in correspondence with the effect mode of "varied eyes", and the value of "vertical two-piece line" in correspondence with the range of "129 to 198". In other words, in double-line reach effects, the mode promotion effect is not executed about 54.8% (109/199), the mode promotion effect of "varied eyes" is executed about 10% (20/199), and the effect mode of "vertical two-piece line" is executed about 35.2% (70/199). In other words, in double-line reach effects, the selection rates of "varied eyes" and "vertical two-piece line" are the same in both hit and miss cases. Therefore, when the "Barakeme" or "2 Vertical Lines" mode promotion effect is executed and develops into a double line reach effect, it becomes difficult to guess the likelihood of a big win from the state of the mode promotion effect itself, so the player can focus on the suggested content of the reach effect while playing the game. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 620, for triple line reach effects, the value of the effect counter 223h is set to a range of "0 to 58" and a mode promotion effect of "none", a "varied eyes" effect is set to a range of "59 to 78", a "vertical two-piece line" effect is set to a range of "79 to 108", and a "vertical three-piece line" effect is set to a range of "109 to 198". In other words, for triple line reach effects, the mode promotion effect is not executed about 29.6% (59/199), the "varied eyes" mode promotion effect is executed about 10% (20/199), the "vertical two-piece line" effect is executed about 15.1% (30/199), and the "vertical three-piece line" effect is executed about 45.2% (90/199). In other words, whether it is a win or a miss, the ratios at which "Scattered Eyes," "2 Vertical Lines," and "3 Vertical Lines" are selected are the same. Therefore, when the mode promotion effects of "Scattered Eyes," "2 Vertical Lines," and "3 Vertical Lines" are executed and develop into a triple line reach effect, it becomes difficult to guess the likelihood of a jackpot from the state of the mode promotion effect itself, so the player can focus on the suggested content of the reach effect while playing the game. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In this way, in this fourteenth control example, the mode promotion effect is configured to be able to suggest the presentation mode (reach line of the reach effect) that will be executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable effect. Here, in a reach effect, the greater the number of reach lines, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player can check the result of the mode promotion effect in the hope of a presentation mode that suggests more reach lines. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 621, the contents of the display data table in the 14th control example will be described. FIG. 621 is a diagram showing an example of a round number display data table set in a round involving a preparatory drive of a role in the 14th control example. As shown in FIG. 621, in addition to the drawing contents, the display data table in the 14th control example specifies commands to be output to other control devices (for example, the role control device 229). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 621, a preparatory drive command is specified as a role command at the end of the drawing contents stored in address "00FAH". For this reason, when the value of the pointer 233f, which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)) is executed (every 20 milliseconds), becomes the pointer value corresponding to address "00FAH", the preparatory drive command is read out in addition to the drawing contents specified in address "00FAH". When the preparatory drive command is read out, the preparatory drive command is output from the display control device 114 to the role control device 229. With this configuration, the control process for acquiring the drawing contents and the process for outputting the command can be performed together, simplifying the control process. This reduces the processing load on the display control device 114. In addition, since the command can be output using the value of the pointer 233f that was provided for acquiring the drawing contents, there is no need to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the timing of command output. This simplifies the configuration of the display control device 114, reducing the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 622 and Fig. 623, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 14th control example will be described. First, referring to Fig. 622, the variable display setting process 14 (Z2187) in the 14th control example will be described. The variable display setting process 14 (Z2187) in this 14th control example is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see Fig. 406) in the 12th control example (and the 1st control example), and is a process for determining the mode of the variable display performance according to the variable type (variable time) notified by the variable pattern, similar to the variable display setting process (Z2114) in the 12th control example (and the 1st control example).

In the variable display setting process 14 (see FIG. 622) in this 14th control example, each of the processes Z2501 to Z2513 executes the same process as each of the processes Z2501 to Z2509 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 406) in the 12th control example (and the 1st control example). In addition, in the variable display setting process 14 (see FIG. 622) in this 14th control example, when the process Z2503 is completed, a mode promotion effect lottery process is then executed (Z2571) to select whether or not a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed and the performance mode, and the process proceeds to Z2504. Details of this mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571) will be described with reference to FIG. 623.

Figure 623 is a flowchart showing the mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571). In this mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571), first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z2771), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z2771: Yes), then the winning table 222ka1 (see Figure 619 (b)) of the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka is read (Z2772), and the process proceeds to Z2774. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not a jackpot fluctuation pattern (i.e., it is a loss fluctuation pattern) in the process of Z2771 (Z2771: No), the losing table 222ka2 (see Figure 620) of the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka is read (Z2773), and the process proceeds to Z2774. In the processing of Z2774, the presentation mode corresponding to the presentation mode (number of reach lines) set for the current fluctuation pattern and the value of the presentation counter 223h is determined from the table read by processing of Z2772 or Z2773 (Z2774), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this mode promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 623), it is possible to suitably select whether or not to execute a mode promotion effect and the presentation style depending on the result of the lottery for the special pattern and the number of reach lines of the reach effect executed in the variable display effect.

<Regarding control process of the display control device in the fourteenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 624 and FIG. 625, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this 14th control example will be described. First, referring to FIG. 624, the details of the display setting process 14 (Z3303) in this 14th control example will be described. This display setting process 14 (Z3303) is a process executed in place of the display setting process (see FIG. 420) in the 12th control example (and the 1st control example), and is a process for specifically specifying the contents of one frame of the image to be displayed next in the third pattern display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, similar to the display setting process (see FIG. 420) in the 12th control example (and the 1st control example).

In the display setting process 14 (see FIG. 624) in this 14th control example, the same processes as those in Z4301 to Z4305 and Z4307 to Z4321 in the display setting process (see FIG. 420) in the 12th control example (and the first control example) are executed in the display setting process 14 (see FIG. 624) as those in Z4301 to Z4305 and Z4307 to Z4321 in the display setting process (see FIG. 420). In addition, in the display setting process 14 (see FIG. 624) in this 14th control example, when the process in Z4305 is completed, a drawing content acquisition process is executed (Z4331) to acquire one frame's worth of drawing content from the contents of the display data table, and the process proceeds to Z4307. Details of this drawing content acquisition process (Z4331) will be described with reference to FIG. 625.

Figure 625 is a flowchart showing the drawing content acquisition process (Z4331). In this drawing content acquisition process (Z4331), first, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4351). Next, it is determined whether the acquired drawing content includes a prescribed content indicating a reel command (Z4352), and if it is determined that a content indicating a reel command has been acquired (Z4352: Yes), the reel command of the acquired content is set to be output to the reel control device 229 (Z4353), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z4352 that a content indicating a reel command has not been acquired from the display data table (Z4352: No), the processing of Z4353 is skipped and this process is terminated as it is.

By executing this drawing content acquisition process (see FIG. 625), the control process for acquiring the drawing content and the process for outputting the command can be performed together, simplifying the control process. This reduces the processing load on the display control device 114. In addition, since the command can be output using the value of the pointer 233f that was provided for acquiring the drawing content, there is no need to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the timing of command output. This simplifies the configuration of the display control device 114, thereby reducing the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in this fourteenth control example is configured to be able to execute a mode advancement effect as a type of entertainment effect. In this mode advancement effect, an effect is executed before the reach effect occurs that suggests to the player whether or not a reach will occur, the number of reach lines, etc., so that the anticipation of a big win can be increased before the actual reach effect is executed.

In addition, in this 14th control example, the configuration is such that the contents of the display data table that specifies the drawing contents for each frame in various performances also include an instruction to output a command to the gadget control device 229. When the drawing contents are obtained from the display data table, if a command type and a force instruction are obtained, the display control device 114 outputs the command in addition to obtaining the drawing contents. By configuring in this way, the control process of the display control device 114 can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. In addition, since the command can be output using the value of the pointer 233f that was provided to obtain the drawing contents, there is no need to provide a dedicated timer stage for determining the timing of outputting the command. Therefore, the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, and the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 have been used as examples of the various effects that can be executed, but any other effect that can achieve the same desired effect can be used, such as a display effect displayed on a display device other than the third pattern display device 81, an audio effect that notifies the player by sound, or a light-emitting effect that notifies the player using various light-emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10.

The various effects executed in each of the above control examples include notification effects that ensure the player understands the content, and suggestive effects that subtly inform the player of the content, but suggestive effects may be executed instead of notification effects, or the system may be configured to execute notification effects instead of suggestive effects.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 have been used as examples of the various effects that can be executed, but any other effect that can achieve the same desired effect can be used, such as a display effect displayed on a display device other than the third pattern display device 81, an audio effect that notifies the player by sound, or a light-emitting effect that notifies the player using various light-emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10.

The various effects executed in each of the above control examples include notification effects that ensure the player understands the content, and suggestive effects that subtly inform the player of the content, but suggestive effects may be executed instead of notification effects, or the system may be configured to execute notification effects instead of suggestive effects.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 is used that has two types of probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols (jackpot probability), high and low (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for special symbols). However, without being limited to this, for example, a setting means (e.g., a setting switch) that can set one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values may be provided, and the main control unit 110 may be configured to execute control in which a different jackpot probability is set for each setting value set by the setting means.

In this case, for example, six setting values from 1 to 6 can be prepared, and the probability of a jackpot can be set for each setting value in order so that when setting value "1" is set, the probability of a jackpot is the highest, and when setting value "6" is set, the probability of a jackpot is the lowest.

In addition, the jackpot probability set for each setting value may be configured so that only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special pattern differs depending on the setting value, or only the jackpot probability corresponding to the high probability state of the special pattern differs depending on the setting value.

In addition to the jackpot probability, the selection rate for each jackpot type, the probability of winning a small jackpot, the selection rate for the special symbol variation pattern, and the variation time may be varied depending on the setting value described above. In this case, for example, a variation pattern or jackpot type that is likely to be selected only when a specific setting value is set may be provided, and the player may determine the currently set setting value by paying attention to whether or not a special symbol variation based on that variation pattern or a jackpot game based on that jackpot type has been executed.

Furthermore, it may be configured to set a setting command to indicate the set value that has been set, and execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, or to determine the currently set setting value from the content of the received command when a command indicating the type of jackpot (a command to indicate the lottery result) or a command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern (a command to indicate the fluctuation time) output from the main control device 110 is received, and execute a setting suggestion effect based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, the number of commands output from the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Also, unlike the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 may be used that can simultaneously draw (change) the first special symbol and draw (change) the second special symbol. In this case, when using a configuration that can set the above-mentioned setting values, various parameters may be specified for each setting value so that the ease of variation (drawing) of each special symbol varies depending on the set value, or various parameters may be specified for each setting value so that a specific game state in which the drawing of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific setting value, and a specific game state in which the drawing of the other special symbol different from the one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific setting value different from the specific setting value. In this case, the drawing of the special symbol being advantageous to the player is a concept that includes a state in which the drawing of the special symbol is easier to be performed, and a privilege (jackpot game content, small jackpot game content, game state set after the end of the jackpot game) that is granted when the drawing result of the special symbol is a specific drawing result is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the game state transition destination and allocation rate are unified according to the type of special chart regardless of the game state, but without being limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition allocation rate may be changed according to the game state. This has the effect of making it possible to provide more complex gameplay and preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on.

Furthermore, the special chance state may continue until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (e.g. 100 times), or a lottery may be held to transition to the normal game state each time the special symbol changes, and a transition from the special chance state to the normal game state may occur if the lottery is won. In this case, the special chance state that is favorable to the player and the special chance state that is unfavorable to the player may be determined, for example, by setting a difference in the number of times the special symbol changes before the special chance state ends, or by varying the probability of transitioning from the special chance state to the normal game state.

In addition, multiple time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern, may be set, and among the multiple time-saving end conditions, when the time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a specific number of times, i.e., when the change count end condition is met, and when the time-saving end condition is met when a small jackpot is won by the lottery for the special pattern, i.e., when the win count end condition is met, it may be configured so that the high probability state of the normal pattern can be transitioned to a low probability state at different times.

Using this configuration, for example, a gaming machine can be provided that is controlled so that when the variable count end condition is met, the gaming state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state based on the start of the special pattern variation, and when the winning count end condition is met, the gaming state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small win game.

As a result, even if the time-saving state ends based on the variation of the same special symbol depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be made different within the combined range of the variation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small win game is executed. Therefore, the player can also be interested in the type of time-saving end condition that is established. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, even during the small win game that gives the player a small bonus, it is possible to make the small win game a more advantageous game state for the player by operating the electric device 640a to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entrance.

In addition, it is a good idea to provide multiple types of small wins with different periods during which the small win game is played, and to vary the bonus given to the player depending on the type of small win for which the winning count ending condition is met, even if the winning count ending condition is met. This makes it possible to interest the player not only in the type of time-saving ending condition that has been met, but also in the more detailed content of the time-saving ending condition.

In this case, even if the winning count end condition is met, it is preferable to configure the time-saving state to end when the small win game starts and when the small win game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand when the time-saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a configuration is used in which the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times the special pattern changes and the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is met based on winning a small win are separately executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which the time-saving information updated according to the lottery (change) of the special pattern is centrally managed and the timing to end the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving end condition that has been met.

In each of the above control examples, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control unit 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 only when the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control unit 110. In addition, the voice lamp control unit 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110. This reduces the number of times the main control unit 110 transmits reserved number commands to the voice lamp control unit 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control unit 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113.

In each of the above control examples, the entry into the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37 to notify the number of reserved balls.

As shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern moves vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

In each of the above control examples, the third pattern display for showing the player the lottery results for each pattern is performed by one display means (third pattern display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main pattern that is highlighted to the player among the third patterns, and for displaying the secondary patterns. In addition, the display means may be configured as a configuration other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above control examples, a right-hand hit game is executed to target the right area of the game board 13 in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and a left-hand hit game is executed to target the left area of the game board 13 in a normal game state; however, it is sufficient to vary the area of the game board 13 targeted depending on the game state, and a left-hand hit game may be executed during a time-saving state and a right-hand hit game may be executed during a normal state. In addition, a game may be configured to be executable in different game states while targeting the same area.

In each of the above control examples, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that the player can operate, which is determined by the player pressing it, but other configurations may be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by the player tilting it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it, or a wireless operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by emitting a predetermined radio wave. In addition, some or all of the operation controls of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c may be configured to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above control examples, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the process for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is executed by a main control device 110 different from the voice lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, the process for executing the game (lottery) and the process for displaying the result of the game (lottery) as a performance may be executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute multiple different processes with one control device.

In addition, in each of the above control examples, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 have been used as examples of the various effects that can be executed, but any other effect that can achieve the same desired effect can be used, such as a display effect displayed on a display device other than the third pattern display device 81, an audio effect that notifies the player by sound, or a light-emitting effect that notifies the player using various light-emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10.

The various effects executed in each of the above control examples include notification effects that ensure the player understands the content, and suggestive effects that subtly inform the player of the content, but suggestive effects may be executed instead of notification effects, or the system may be configured to execute notification effects instead of suggestive effects.

In addition, in each of the above control examples, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 have been used as examples of the various effects that can be executed, but any other effect that can achieve the same desired effect can be used, such as a display effect displayed on a display device other than the third pattern display device 81, an audio effect that notifies the player by sound, or a light-emitting effect that notifies the player using various light-emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10.

The various effects executed in each of the above control examples include notification effects that ensure the player understands the content, and suggestive effects that subtly inform the player of the content, but suggestive effects may be executed instead of notification effects, or the system may be configured to execute notification effects instead of suggestive effects.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 is used that has two types of probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols (jackpot probability), high and low (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for special symbols). However, without being limited to this, for example, a setting means (e.g., a setting switch) that can set one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values may be provided, and the main control unit 110 may be configured to execute control in which a different jackpot probability is set for each setting value set by the setting means.

In this case, for example, six setting values from 1 to 6 can be prepared, and the probability of a jackpot can be set for each setting value in order so that when setting value "1" is set, the probability of a jackpot is the highest, and when setting value "6" is set, the probability of a jackpot is the lowest.

In addition, the jackpot probability set for each setting value may be configured so that only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special pattern differs depending on the setting value, or only the jackpot probability corresponding to the high probability state of the special pattern differs depending on the setting value.

In addition to the jackpot probability, the selection rate for each jackpot type, the probability of winning a small jackpot, the selection rate for the special symbol variation pattern, and the variation time may be varied depending on the setting value described above. In this case, for example, a variation pattern or jackpot type that is likely to be selected only when a specific setting value is set may be provided, and the player may determine the currently set setting value by paying attention to whether or not a special symbol variation based on that variation pattern or a jackpot game based on that jackpot type has been executed.

Furthermore, it may be configured to set a setting command to indicate the set value that has been set, and execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, or to determine the currently set setting value from the content of the received command when a command indicating the type of jackpot (a command to indicate the lottery result) or a command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern (a command to indicate the fluctuation time) output from the main control device 110 is received, and execute a setting suggestion effect based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, the number of commands output from the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Also, unlike the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 may be used that can simultaneously draw (change) the first special symbol and draw (change) the second special symbol. In this case, when using a configuration that can set the above-mentioned setting values, various parameters may be specified for each setting value so that the ease of variation (drawing) of each special symbol varies depending on the set value, or various parameters may be specified for each setting value so that a specific game state in which the drawing of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific setting value, and a specific game state in which the drawing of the other special symbol different from the one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific setting value different from the specific setting value. In this case, the drawing of the special symbol being advantageous to the player is a concept that includes a state in which the drawing of the special symbol is easier to be performed, and a privilege (jackpot game content, small jackpot game content, game state set after the end of the jackpot game) that is granted when the drawing result of the special symbol is a specific drawing result is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the game state transition destination and allocation rate are unified according to the type of special chart regardless of the game state, but without being limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition allocation rate may be changed according to the game state. This has the effect of making it possible to provide more complex gameplay and preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on.

Furthermore, the special chance state may continue until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (e.g. 100 times), or a lottery may be held to transition to the normal game state each time the special symbol changes, and a transition from the special chance state to the normal game state may occur if the lottery is won. In this case, the special chance state that is favorable to the player and the special chance state that is unfavorable to the player may be determined, for example, by setting a difference in the number of times the special symbol changes before the special chance state ends, or by varying the probability of transitioning from the special chance state to the normal game state.

In addition, multiple time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern, may be set, and among the multiple time-saving end conditions, when the time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a specific number of times, i.e., when the change count end condition is met, and when the time-saving end condition is met when a small jackpot is won by the lottery for the special pattern, i.e., when the win count end condition is met, it may be configured so that the high probability state of the normal pattern can be transitioned to a low probability state at different times.

Using this configuration, for example, a gaming machine can be provided that is controlled so that when the variable count end condition is met, the gaming state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state based on the start of the special pattern variation, and when the winning count end condition is met, the gaming state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small win game.

As a result, even if the time-saving state ends based on the variation of the same special symbol depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be made different within the combined range of the variation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small win game is executed. Therefore, the player can also be interested in the type of time-saving end condition that is established. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, even during the small win game that gives the player a small bonus, it is possible to make the small win game a more advantageous game state for the player by operating the electric device 640a to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entrance.

In addition, it is a good idea to provide multiple types of small wins with different periods during which the small win game is played, and to vary the bonus given to the player depending on the type of small win for which the winning count ending condition is met, even if the winning count ending condition is met. This makes it possible to get the player interested not only in the type of time-saving ending condition that has been met, but also in the more detailed content of the time-saving ending condition.

In this case, even if the winning count end condition is met, it is preferable to configure the time-saving state to end when the small win game starts and when the small win game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand when the time-saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a configuration is used in which the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times the special pattern changes and the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is met based on winning a small win are separately executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which the time-saving information updated according to the lottery (change) of the special pattern is centrally managed and the timing to end the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving end condition that has been met.

In each of the above control examples, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control unit 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 only when the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control unit 110. In addition, the voice lamp control unit 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110. This reduces the number of times the main control unit 110 transmits reserved number commands to the voice lamp control unit 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control unit 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113.

In each of the above control examples, the entry into the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

Also, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern moves vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

In each of the above control examples, the third pattern display for showing the player the lottery results for each pattern is performed by one display means (third pattern display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main pattern that is highlighted to the player among the third patterns, and for displaying the secondary patterns. In addition, the display means may be configured as a configuration other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above control examples, a right-hand hit game is executed to target the right area of the game board 13 in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and a left-hand hit game is executed to target the left area of the game board 13 in a normal game state. However, it is sufficient to change the area of the game board 13 targeted depending on the game state, and a left-hand hit game may be executed during a time-saving state and a right-hand hit game may be executed during a normal state. In addition, a game may be configured to be executable in different game states while targeting the same area.

In each of the above control examples, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that the player can operate, which is determined by the player pressing it, but other configurations may be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by the player tilting it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it, or a wireless operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by emitting a predetermined radio wave. In addition, some or all of the operation controls of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c may be configured to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above control examples, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the process for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is executed by the main control device 110, which is different from the voice lamp control device 113. However, without being limited to this, the process for executing the game (lottery) and the process for displaying the result of the game (lottery) as a performance may be executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute multiple different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine that is different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value by making the ball enter a predetermined area as a necessary condition after the jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered as a necessary condition by making the ball enter the special area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a combination of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) related to the jackpot lottery in multiple stages, and is configured so that the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that combine a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

A representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings is one that allows the combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of the jackpot probability in a low probability state and the jackpot probability in a high probability state) to be set to one of multiple levels (e.g., six levels), but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine may be implemented that allows the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined in the event of a jackpot to be changed according to the setting. That is, the ratio of a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player to be determined according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player to be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. Also, for example, the rate at which a jackpot that gives a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that gives a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to a favorable game state (e.g., a probability change state) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal state) may be determined may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type that is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (almost never determined in other settings) is provided. Specifically, for example, the setting may be configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most favorable setting may be set to setting 6. Then, in setting 6, a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot occurs, while a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% in other settings. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being the most likely to occur when the jackpot ends after six rounds is extremely high, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot entry port (or the role inside the jackpot entry port) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be more likely to be determined in a specific setting (the ratio of being determined is higher). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in a probability variable state, the more disadvantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability may be. This configuration is particularly effective in gaming machines of a type in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability variable state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the more prize balls are paid out than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won, and by applying this to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability variable state has a high probability of resulting in a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability variable state, the number of draws until the next jackpot tends to be large, and there are also more opportunities to win small jackpots and win prize balls. Therefore, when the probability variable state is reached, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as the multiple special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Also, in each of the above embodiments, a game feature in which multiple special symbols are drawn (varied) according to predetermined rules and a game feature in which the symbols are drawn (varied) independently of one another are described, but the game features described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Prevents solenoids from crashing. Uses a cushion>
a displacement means configured to be displaceable, a drive means arranged on a predetermined direction side of the displacement means and configured to be capable of generating a drive force for driving the displacement means in the predetermined direction, and a resistance means configured to be capable of generating resistance to the displacement of the displacement means in the predetermined direction,
The resistance means is configured to reduce the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are configured to displace a displacement member by an electromagnetic solenoid (see, for example, JP 2015-231434 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the part that receives the load from the displacement member is limited to the electromagnetic solenoid, and the electromagnetic solenoid is subjected to an excessive load, which causes a problem that the electromagnetic solenoid is prone to early failure. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the durability of the gaming machine.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine a1, the resistance means is disposed on the predetermined direction side (the drive means side) of the displacement means.
Since the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means can be reduced by generating resistance to the displacement of the displacement means, it is possible to prevent the drive means from receiving an excessive load, thereby improving the durability of the game machine.

The manner in which the load applied to the driving means is reduced is not limited in any way. For example, the load may be suppressed by dispersing it by increasing the number of points receiving the load, the transmission of the load may be blocked by providing a gap between the displacement means and the driving means using the resistance means, or the surface area over which the resistance means acts on the displacement means may be increased to reduce the load per unit area.

A gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A1, a support means for supporting the displacement means is provided, and the drive means is disposed on the support means side compared to the resistance means.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, by keeping the arm length (arm length of the force moment) between the support means and the drive means short, it is possible to avoid excessive load being applied to the resistance means.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A2, the support means supports the displacement means rotatably about a predetermined axis, and the predetermined axis is positioned on the predetermined direction side relative to the resistance means.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the load generated between the predetermined axis and the displacement means from being reversed in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction (left and right direction),
Since the side on which friction occurs in the portion covering the rotating shaft can be limited to one side (avoiding slight displacement to the left and right), the portion that needs to be formed thick can be limited.

In the gaming machine a3, a first resistance means for generating a load against the displacement in the predetermined direction;
a second resistance means for generating a load against displacement in the opposite direction to the specified direction, the first resistance means and the second resistance means having a position shift portion that is positioned at different positions when viewed in the specified direction, and the first resistance means is positioned farther from the specified axis than the second resistance means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the gaming machine A4 can reduce the load applied from the first resistance means to the displacement means. In other words, the magnitude of the load can be reduced by lengthening the arm length of the force moment generated in the displacement means by the load from the first resistance means.

In addition, by separating the location where the load occurs between the first resistance means and the displacement means from the location where the load occurs between the second resistance means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid concentration of the load, thereby improving the durability of the displacement means.

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, in gaming machines A3 or A4, the displacement means comprises a transmission section for transmitting a driving force to a predetermined displacement means and an attached section extending radially outward from the transmission section, and the first resistance means is arranged so as to be able to abut against the attached section.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A3 and A4, even if the attached part is damaged, it is possible to transmit the driving force to the displacement means, so that the displacement of the displacement means can be continued by drive control until maintenance is required.

The form of the transmission part is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be configured in a position close to the driving means, or may be configured on the axially opposite side to the side where the driving means is disposed, with respect to a shaft member disposed along a predetermined axis.

In addition, the aspect of the axially opposite side on which the driving means is disposed is not limited in any way with respect to the shaft member as a reference, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the driving means and the transmission part may be configured at positions opposite to each other with respect to a plane perpendicular to a predetermined part of the shaft member, or even if the positions with respect to the plane are not opposite to each other, the transmission part may be configured on the opposite side of the driving means across the shaft member in the transmission path of the driving force via the shaft member.

A gaming machine A6 is any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, further comprising a load applying means for applying a load to the displacement means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine a6, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines a1 to a5, the displacement means can be quickly displaced back from the drive displacement side.

Gaming machine A7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A6, the load application means are arranged on both sides of the drive means along a direction intersecting the specified direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A6, gaming machine A7 can prevent imbalance in the attitude of the load applying means and in the load generated due to the influence of the driving force.

Gaming machine A8 is any one of gaming machines A1 to A7, characterized in that the resistance means is configured to be able to apply a reaction force when in contact with the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine a8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines a1 to a7, a frictional force can be generated at the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means, thereby making it possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced in a direction other than the predetermined direction.

A gaming machine A9, characterized in that, in the gaming machine A8, the displacement means is configured to be able to receive an external force, and the abutment surface between the displacement means and the resistance means is arranged parallel to at least one directional component of the external force.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A8, the displacement means can be prevented from being displaced by an external force by frictional resistance.

<Rack, pinion, gear arm (irregular double rack)>
Gaming machine b1 comprises a base means, an intermediate means supported on the base means so as to be slidably displaceable, a tip end means supported on the intermediate means so as to be displaceable, and a displacement configuration means supported on the intermediate means and configured so that the tip end means can be displaced relative to the intermediate means as the intermediate means displaces relative to the base means, characterized in that the base means is configured so as to be displaceable in a manner that does not correspond to the displacement mode of the intermediate means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that have a structure in which a pinion is sandwiched between multiple racks (for example, see JP 2016-153095 A). With this structure, the racks are displaced in the opposite direction as the pinion rotates, so the displacement speed of one rack relative to the other rack can be increased, making it possible to configure a performance body that displaces at high speed.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, a separate shielding member had to be provided to hide the fixed rack, which posed a problem in that there was a risk of reducing the design freedom of the presentation.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine b1, the base means is configured to be displaceable, so that the base means can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the tip side means and the intermediate means, thereby making it possible to hide the base means with the tip side means and the intermediate means. This makes it unnecessary to prepare a separate shielding member, and improves the design freedom of the tip side means.

A gaming machine b2, in which the base means in the gaming machine b1 is configured to be rotatable.

Here, when both components sandwiching the pinion (the base means and the tip side means) are racks that slide in parallel, if the pinion and rack are arranged on the same plane, the pinion cannot be arranged in a position that overlaps with the rack when viewed in the direction of rack displacement in order to avoid interference between the components. As a result, the space required to arrange the rack increases in a direction intersecting the rotation axis of the pinion, making it difficult to design it compact.

In addition, since it is necessary to provide support parts at multiple points to maintain the rack position and optimize the meshing with the pinion, there is a risk that the component structure will become complicated and the number of assembly steps will increase. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoints of saving space and simplifying the structure.

In the retracted position, the protruding portion on the base means side and the recessed portion of the tip end side means overlap in the sliding displacement direction, so the shielding width in the retracted position is bulky.

In contrast, according to gaming machine b2, the base means is configured to rotate and displace, so that the base means and the displacement configuration means can be positioned so that they overlap when viewed in the sliding displacement direction of the intermediate means, thereby saving space, and since it is sufficient for the base means to be provided with a configuration for axial support, the structure can be simplified.

Furthermore, since the protruding portion on the foundation means side can be positioned toward the rear side by utilizing the curvature, the shielding width in the retracted position can be narrowed.

A gaming machine b3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine b2, a portion of the base means is rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and by rotating around the other portion as a fulcrum, the posture of the base means is inverted along the sliding displacement direction of the intermediate means, and the other portion is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the sliding displacement direction.

According to gaming machine b3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine b2, since a portion of the foundation means and the displacement component means are both supported by the intermediate means, the load transmission between the portion of the foundation means and the displacement component means can be stabilized.

In addition, by displacing the other part of the foundation means in a direction intersecting the sliding displacement direction, the displacement can be balanced by the displacement of the part of the foundation means and the other part, and the displacement amount of the entire foundation means can be (
It is possible to suppress the movement of the actuators (both up, down, left and right).

In any one of the gaming machines b1 to b3, the tip side means is one side (extending side) of the displacement range.
A gaming machine b4 characterized in that, when placed at the terminal position, the base means receives a load for maintaining posture from a direction intersecting the direction of the sliding displacement.

According to the gaming machine b4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines b1 to b3, the load required for the sliding displacement can be reduced compared to the case where the load for maintaining the position is applied in the direction of the sliding displacement. Furthermore, by utilizing the fact that the position of the base means is maintained with the tip side means disposed at one end position, the arrangement of the intermediate means and the tip side means can be stabilized.

In any one of the gaming machines b1 to b4, the tip side means is on the other side (retraction side) of the displacement range.
A gaming machine b5 characterized in that, when placed at the terminal position, the base means assumes a posture in which the load applied from the intermediate means faces the direction in which the base means can be displaced.

According to the gaming machine b5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines b1 to b4, the basic means,
The actuation of the intermediate means and the displaceable means can be smoothed.

In any one of the gaming machines b1 to b5, the tip side means is on the other side (retraction side) of the displacement range.
A gaming machine b6, characterized in that when placed at the terminal position, the base means has a protruding portion that protrudes further toward the retracted position than the intermediate means.

According to gaming machine b6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines b1 to b5, by adopting a configuration in which the protruding portion protrudes from the intermediate means at the other side (retreat side) terminal position which is difficult for the player to see, it is possible to configure the intermediate means to conceal the foundation means at one side (protruding side) terminal position while keeping the vertical dimensions of the intermediate means less than the dimensions of the foundation means.

Gaming machine b7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines b1 to b6, a portion of the base means is rotatably supported on the intermediate means, and at least one of the intermediate means and the tip side means is connected to electrical wiring that is guided to the base means.

According to gaming machine b7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines b1 to b6, the displacement of one side of the base means is suppressed, making it possible to easily ensure a path for electrical wiring to pass through and to suppress the load applied to the electrical wiring.

A gaming machine b8, characterized in that in the gaming machine b7, the tip side means is configured to be slidably displaceable, and the electrical wiring is arranged outside the tip side means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine b7, gaming machine b8 can reduce the load on the electrical wiring compared to when the electrical wiring is connected to a tip-side means that is displaced by a sliding displacement, which tends to place a load on the electrical wiring.

This makes it possible to increase the amount of deviation (positional deviation, speed difference, etc.) that occurs in the operation of the tip side means and the intermediate means while keeping the load applied to the electric wiring small. For example,
While keeping the load on the electrical wiring small, the drive means for driving the intermediate means with respect to the base means and the drive means for driving the tip side means with respect to the intermediate means can be constructed separately.

A gaming machine b9, in any one of the gaming machines b1 to b8, characterized in that the displacement configuration means is configured to be able to displace the tip side means relative to the intermediate means by a predetermined amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the intermediate means.

According to the gaming machine b9, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines b1 to b8, the tip side means can be stably displaced at high speed (higher speed than the intermediate means).

<A pair of left and right members are configured asymmetrically>
a plurality of displacement means configured to be capable of displacing a first relative position and a second relative position disposed farther away from the first relative position, the plurality of displacement means configured to be visually recognized as a series of predetermined shapes at at least one of the first relative position and the second relative position;
The gaming machine c1 is characterized in that the multiple displacement means include a first displacement means and a second displacement means smaller than the first displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which multiple operating units of approximately the same shape are arranged in close proximity to form a continuous shape (see, for example, JP 2016-153095 A).
This structure makes it possible to easily construct a large performance object by combining small operating parts, and since the operating parts themselves are roughly the same in structure, the difficulty of assembly work can be reduced.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the shapes of the operating parts are configured to be approximately the same, and therefore the space required to realize the displacement of each operating part is common to each operating part, meaning that there is room for improvement in terms of increasing design freedom so as to utilize limited space.

For example, when the operating part displaces the right side of a display device, such as a liquid crystal display device placed in the center of the play area, the side closer to the display device attracts more attention from the player, but the space required for the operating part to displace is symmetrical about the operating part, so there is a problem in that the amount of displacement possible on the left side of the operating part (the side that attracts more attention from the player) is limited by the amount of displacement allowable on the right side of the operating part.

In contrast, according to gaming machine c1, the first displacement means and the second displacement means, which are visually perceived as a series of shapes, are configured to be different sizes. Therefore, even if the displacement amounts of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, the space required to realize the displacement can be made different, making it possible to make good use of limited space and improving design freedom.

A gaming machine c2, in which the first displacement means and the second displacement means in the gaming machine c1 have their outer shapes set according to the arrangement possible area at the second relative position.

According to gaming machine c2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine c1, it is possible to improve the design freedom of the shape that is visually recognized by the first displacement means and the second displacement means at the first relative position, regardless of the difference in size of the arrangement area at the second relative position.

In addition, decorativeness can be improved when the decoration of the area at the second relative position is substituted by the first displacement means and the second displacement means, such as when the game board is formed from a light-transmitting resin.

Gaming machine c3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine c1 or c2, it is provided with a guide means arranged on the rear side of the multiple displacement means and guiding the displacement of the multiple displacement means, and the guide means and the position between the displacement means are configured to be misaligned when viewed in a specified direction.

According to the gaming machine c3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines c1 and c2, it is possible to prevent the guide means from being seen through the gaps between the multiple displacement means. As a result, it is possible to configure the gaps to be effectively utilized, such as by making decorative parts other than the guide means visible through the gaps.

Gaming machine c4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine c3, the guiding means is configured to be displaceable in a predetermined direction, and the position between the multiple displacement means is positioned at a position shifted from a reference line that passes through the center of the guiding means and runs along the predetermined direction, when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to gaming machine c4, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine c3, by taking into consideration load balance, etc., the portion where the player expects the guide means for guiding the multiple displacement means to be located (corresponding to the reference line) is hidden by the multiple displacement means so as to be difficult for the player to see, thereby avoiding a decrease in design.

Gaming machine c5 is any of gaming machines c1 to c4, and is equipped with a driving means for generating a driving force, the first displacement means being arranged at a predetermined position in the driving force transmission path of the driving means, and the second displacement means being arranged downstream of the predetermined position in the driving force transmission path.

According to gaming machine c5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines c1 to c4, by configuring the components to become smaller the further downstream in the driving force transmission path, it is possible to prevent excessive load from being placed locally in the driving force transmission path.

Gaming machine c6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine c5, the driving means and the transmission means for transmitting the driving force are arranged in the upper left part of the rear case, and the first displacement means and the second displacement means are configured such that the first displacement means arranged in the upper left part is larger than the second displacement means arranged in a position different from the upper left part.

According to the gaming machine c6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine c5, from the configuration and arrangement of the payout device,
The drive means and transmission means, which are located in the upper left corner where it is easy to secure a larger area as the internal area of the rear case compared to the upper right corner, can be easily hidden by the first displacement means, which is also located in the upper left corner, making it difficult for the player to see the drive means and transmission means. This makes it unnecessary to construct a separate cover to hide the drive means and transmission means.

Gaming machine c7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine c5 or c6, the first displacement means is in a position where gravity acts in a tilting direction on the first relative position side, and is configured to come close to the second displacement means by tilting displacement.

According to gaming machine c7, in addition to the effects of gaming machines c5 or c6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are set with a dimensional relationship that allows them to abut, but in the event that they do not abut due to a positional misalignment that falls within the clearance required to enable displacement (such as play between interlocking gear teeth, or a gap between the guide rail and the guided portion), the gap can be easily filled by the tilting displacement of the first displacement means due to gravity.

This makes it possible to avoid maintaining a gap between the first displacement means and the second displacement means, thereby improving the design when the first displacement means and the second displacement means abut to form a continuous shape.

Gaming machine c8 is any one of gaming machines c5 to c7, characterized in that electrical wiring passes on the second displacement means side between the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

According to gaming machine c8, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines c5 to c7, by passing the electrical wiring through the second displacement means side where excessive displacement is less likely to occur, it is possible to reduce the load on the electrical wiring when the first displacement means and the second displacement means cause excessive displacement.

Gaming machine c9 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines c1 to c8, the specified shape is configured as a symmetrical shape, and a surface component that configures a surface that separates the first displacement means and the second displacement means is positioned on the side farther from the central position of the gaming area.

According to gaming machine c9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines c1 to c8, by arranging an asymmetrically shaped dividing surface on the side farthest from the field of view (the side difficult for the player to see), it is possible to avoid a decrease in the appearance of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

Furthermore, by making the shape of the opposite side, the central position side of the game area (the side closer to the field of vision, the side that is easy for the player to see), symmetrical, the appearance of the multiple displacement means can be improved.

Gaming machine c10, in any one of gaming machines c1 to c9, is characterized in that the multiple displacement means are arranged such that the sides that limit the dimensions of the arrangement area in the second relative position are opposed to each other in the first relative position.

According to gaming machine c10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines c1 to c9, it is easy to visually recognize a plurality of displacement means consisting of asymmetric shapes as a series of symmetric shapes at the first relative position.

Gaming machine c11, in any one of gaming machines c1 to c10, is characterized in that the multiple displacement means are configured so that the displacement from the second relative position to the first relative position is composed of a first displacement consisting of a downward displacement and a second displacement different from the first displacement, and the second displacement does not occur for a predetermined period from the start of the displacement.

According to the gaming machine c11, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines c1 to c10, the displacement modes of the multiple displacement means are made complex, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the player.

Furthermore, in cases where the upper inner surface of the rear case is misaligned vertically and horizontally in relation to the shape of the dispensing device, the multiple displacement means are lowered an amount (corresponding to a specified range) that is not affected by the vertical misalignment of the rear case before starting the second displacement, thereby making it possible to form an area in which displacement of the multiple displacement means is permitted evenly without being affected by the vertical misalignment of the upper inner surface of the rear case, thereby making it easier to avoid the multiple displacement means colliding with the rear case even when the displacement modes of the multiple displacement means are the same.

<Movable props that change relative displacement depending on placement>
A gaming machine d1 comprising a first displacement means configured to be displaceable and a plurality of second displacement means supported to be displaceable by the first displacement means, wherein the first displacement means comprises a first support portion supporting one of the second displacement means and a second support portion supporting the other of the second displacement means, and wherein a displacement pattern relative to the first displacement means that occurs in the second displacement means supported by the first support portion as a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means is different from a displacement pattern relative to the first displacement means that occurs in the second displacement means supported by the second support portion as a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are configured so that a second displacement means (353) is displaced in accordance with the displacement of a predetermined first displacement means (351 and 352) (see, for example, JP 2015-231434 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the displacement between the first displacement means and the second displacement means is monotonous, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of presentation effects.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine d1, the second displacement means is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the first displacement means.
Since the displacement mode with respect to the first displacement means can be made different depending on whether the displacement means is supported by the first support part or the second support part, the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be made more complex, thereby improving the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine d1, a gap between the one second displacement means and the first support portion is configured to be smaller than a gap between the other second displacement means and the second support portion, and the first displacement means is
Gaming machine d2 is characterized in that the first support portion side is configured to have a larger amount of displacement than the second support portion side.

According to gaming machine d2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine d1, the gap in the first support portion can be eliminated by the displacement of the first displacement means, so that the difference in the displacement mode can be made larger.

In the gaming machine d1 or d2, a load applying means configured to apply a load to the first displacement means is provided, the first displacement means is supported at one side in a predetermined direction, and is configured so that the displaceable amount of the one side is different from the displaceable amount of the other side, and the load applying means is configured to apply a load to the first displacement means.
Gaming machine d3 is configured to apply a load to the other side portion of the displacement means, and the second displacement means comprises a one-side second displacement means arranged on the one side and an other-side second displacement means arranged on the other side.

According to gaming machine d3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines d1 or d2, the displacement of the second displacement means can be made to differ depending on whether it is positioned on one side or the other, regardless of where the load-applying means applies a load to the first displacement means.

Gaming machine d4 is any one of gaming machines d1 to d3, and is equipped with a load applying means configured to apply a load to the first displacement means, the load applying means being arranged at multiple positions and each being configured to independently apply a load to the first displacement means.

According to gaming machine d4, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of gaming machines d1 to d3, it is possible to eliminate the need for an auxiliary drive means for displacing the load applying means.

Gaming machine d5 is any one of gaming machines d1 to d4, and is characterized in that it is equipped with a load-applying means configured to apply a load to the first displacement means, and is equipped with a light-emitting substrate having a light-emitting surface, and at least a portion of the load-applying means is obstructed by the light-emitting substrate when viewed in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine d5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines d1 to d4, the load applying means can be hidden by the light emitting board. That is, by using the light emitting board necessary for the light emitting performance,
It is possible to prevent the load applying means from being seen by the player. In this case, by irradiating a strong light from the light emitting surface of the light emitting board, it is possible to reduce the visibility near the light emitting board, so that it is also possible to make other parts of the load applying means that are not blocked by the light emitting board when viewed in the specified direction less visible to the player.

Furthermore, when the light-emitting substrate and the load-applying means are arranged in close proximity to each other, the electrical wiring that supplies electricity to a driving device (e.g., an electromagnetic solenoid) that drives the load-applying means can be passed through the path of the electrical wiring connected to the light-emitting substrate, eliminating the need to create a separate gap to pass the electrical wiring through.

Gaming machine d6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine d5, the light-emitting substrate is arranged on the back side of the gaming board, and the gaming board has a recessed portion whose opposing side is recessed at a position facing the light-emitting substrate.

According to gaming machine d6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine d5, an area for arranging an illuminating substrate can be secured between the gaming board and the gaming machine, and the load from the load applying means can be prevented from being transmitted to the gaming board.

Gaming machine d7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine d6, the recessed portion is arranged outward relative to the outer shape of the gaming area when viewed from the front.

According to gaming machine d7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine d6, even if the membrane member formed on the front side of the recessed portion is displaced, the displacement can be prevented from affecting the playing area.

Gaming machine d8 is any one of gaming machines d1 to d7, further comprising a guide means for guiding the displacement of the second displacement means, the guide means being disposed on said one side of the first displacement means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines d1 to d7, gaming machine d8 can regulate the displacement of the second displacement means with the guide means, and can reduce the amount of displacement of the first displacement means near the guide means compared to when the guide means is disposed closer to the other side, thereby suppressing friction between the first displacement means and the guide means.

Gaming machine d9 comprises a support plate supporting the guiding means, a thin film member fixed to a predetermined area of the support plate, and a light-emitting substrate having a light-emitting portion arranged on the opposite side of the support plate from the thin film member, wherein the thin film member is configured to separate the guiding means and the light-emitting substrate without any gaps.

According to gaming machine d9, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine d8, by separating the guiding means and the light-emitting substrate with a thin film member, it is possible to prevent abrasive powder from the guiding means from entering the light-emitting substrate.

Gaming machine d10 is characterized in that, in gaming machine d9, the thin film member is configured with dimensions that enable contact with other displacement means to be avoided.

According to gaming machine d10, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine d9, it is not necessary to ensure the rigidity of the thin film member, and therefore by forming it as thin as possible, the degree to which the light from the light-emitting substrate is weakened by the thin film member can be minimized.

<Utilizing deflection. The key is in transmission>
A gaming machine e1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable, a driving means for generating a driving force that displaces the displacement means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement means, the transmission means being configured to be able to change its state so as to change the transmission manner of the driving force.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a transmission means for transmitting a driving force is inserted into a deformation groove of a displacement means, and the transmission means displaces the deformation groove to displace the displacement means (see, for example, JP 2010-234152 A). According to this gaming machine, the deformation groove is formed to extend along the displacement trajectory of the transmission means, so that it is possible to absorb some excess displacement of the transmission means. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the deformation groove is configured to absorb the excess displacement of the transmission means, an extra thickness and dimensional length are required to constitute the deformation groove, which places a large restriction on the shape of the displacement means. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the configuration of the displacement means.

In contrast, the gaming machine e1 is configured so that the transmission mode of the driving force can be changed by changing the state of the transmission means, so that the excessive displacement of the transmission means can be absorbed by changing the state of the transmission means. Therefore, it is not necessary to add extra components to the displacement means, and the configuration of the displacement means can be improved.

The change in the transmission mode is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the transmission efficiency of the driving force may be changed by changing the rigidity of the transmission means or by adjusting the direction of the load applied to the transmission means, or the change may occur by increasing or decreasing the transmission means.

A gaming machine e2, in which, in the gaming machine e1, the change in state of the transmission means occurs during the displacement of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine e2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine e1, a load for changing the state of the transmission means can be generated from the displacement means, which makes it possible to eliminate the need for a separate load generating source for changing the state of the transmission means.

The manner in which the state of the transmission means changes is not limited in any way, and may be due to, for example, deformation of the transmission means or a change in the rigidity (strength) of the transmission means.

Examples of deformation of the transmission means include elastic (continuous) deformation such as bending, flexure, and twisting, and deformation that generates boundaries such as bending and displacement, etc. Examples of changes in rigidity (strength) include changes in the thickness of the transmission means, and the core inserted in the transmission means coming out.

In the gaming machine e2, the transmission means is configured with a shape that has different flexibility depending on the direction,
A gaming machine e3 characterized in that the angle between the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means and the direction in which the deformation is likely to occur changes before and after the displacement means passes a predetermined reference position as it is displaced.

According to the gaming machine e3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine e2, the change in the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means during the displacement of the displacement means can be utilized to change the shape of the transmission means.
The predetermined reference position can be used as a boundary to divide a range in which the driving force mainly displaces the displacement means and a range in which the driving force mainly causes the transmission means to bend and deform.

In gaming machine e3, the displacement means is driven to stop at a predetermined intermediate position, and the transmission means is configured so that when the displacement means is brought to the intermediate position, the direction of the reaction force from the displacement means is along the direction that is most likely to bend.

According to gaming machine e4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine e3, the deflection of the transmission means makes it easier to keep the displacement means in an intermediate position, so that even if the amount of driving force generated by the driving means and the period of generation are roughly set, it is possible to make it easier to keep the displacement means in an intermediate position.

Gaming machine e5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine e4, the driving means is controlled to generate a driving force so that the pushing portion of the transmission means that pushes the displacement means passes through the abutment position in the intermediate position of the displacement means before it is deflected.

According to gaming machine e5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine e4, driving energy can be retained even after the displacement means has reached an intermediate position, and this can be used to vibrate the displacement means.

In other words, since the transmission means is in a position that makes it easy to bend, it is possible to generate vibration in the transmission means by utilizing the bending, without generating the driving force of the drive means in a manner that generates vibration. This makes it possible to generate vibration with a simple mechanism.

A gaming machine e6 is any one of the gaming machines e1 to e5, characterized in that it is provided with a range setting means configured to be able to set the range within which the state of the transmission means changes.

According to gaming machine e6, in addition to the effect produced by any of gaming machines e1 to e5, the range within which the state of the transmission means changes can be set by the range setting means, so that the degree of change in the state of the transmission means can be adjusted depending on the situation.

Gaming machine e7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine e6, the range setting means is configured to limit the range in which the state of the transmission means changes to the downstream side of the driving force transmission path based on a predetermined position.

According to gaming machine e7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine e6, the range in which the state of the transmission path changes can be limited to the range opposite the driving means, thereby suppressing a decrease in transmission efficiency upstream of the transmission path of the driving force.

Furthermore, by narrowing the range in which the state changes, the degree of state change occurring in the transmission means can be reduced, and therefore the effect on the displacement mode of the displacement means can be reduced.
Therefore, even if the driving means cannot be controlled precisely, deviations in the displacement mode of the displacement means (for example, deviations in the stop position) can be kept small.

<Wiring route for movable parts>
A gaming machine f1 comprising a rotational displacement means configured to be rotationally displaceable, and an electrical supply means arranged along a line connecting the rotational axis and the radial outside of the rotational displacement means and configured to supply electricity, characterized in that the electrical supply means comprises a mounted portion that is positioned on the rotational axis portion of the rotational displacement means.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, electrical wiring is fixed to a rotatably supported arm-shaped member, and the electrical wiring is connected to a displacement member that is connected to the arm-shaped member (for example,
(See JP 2012-157474 A.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the electrical wiring is merely held loosely in place when the arm-shaped member is rotated and displaced, and there is a risk that the electrical wiring may expand and contract as the arm-shaped member is rotated and displaced. This poses a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of reducing the load on the electrical wiring.

In contrast, according to gaming machine f1, the placed portion of the electrical supply means (electrical wiring) is placed on the rotational shaft portion of the rotational displacement means, so that the relative displacement of the placed portion that occurs with respect to the rotational displacement means when a rotational displacement of the rotational displacement means occurs can be suppressed, and the load applied to the electrical wiring can be suppressed.

A gaming machine f2, characterized in that it is provided with a mounting displacement means that is displaceably arranged near the electricity supply means in the gaming machine f1, and a suppression means that suppresses the displacement of the electricity supply means in a direction approaching the mounting displacement means.

According to the gaming machine f2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine f1, the degree of freedom in arranging the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electric wiring can be shortened.

The gaming machine f3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine f2, the mounting displacement means is configured to easily move away from the electricity supply means when an unexpected displacement occurs.

According to the gaming machine f3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine f2, the degree of freedom in arranging the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electric wiring can be shortened.

In the gaming machine f3, the arrangement displacement means comprises a first arrangement displacement means which is displaced toward the electricity supply means and stops, and a second arrangement displacement means which is displaced toward the electricity supply means and stops at a position farther from the electricity supply means than the stopping position of the first arrangement displacement means, and the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means come into contact with each other by being displaced toward the electricity supply means, and are configured to apply a load to each other in a direction away from the electricity supply means.

According to gaming machine f4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine f3, it is possible to avoid placing a load on the electricity supply means even if the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means are displaced excessively.

The gaming machine f5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine f4, the first arrangement displacement means is configured to have smaller inertia than the second arrangement displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine f4, gaming machine f5 can reduce the load on the electricity supply means when the first arrangement means unintentionally comes into contact with the electricity supply means.

The manner in which the magnitude of inertia is determined is not limited in any way. For example, the magnitude of inertia may be determined by configuring the first displacing means to be lighter and smaller than the second displacing means, or the magnitude of inertia may be determined by varying the manner of the support portion to generate a difference in displacement resistance.

Gaming machine f6 is any one of gaming machines f1 to f5, and is characterized in that it comprises a support means for supporting the rotational displacement means, the support means having an opening portion that opens along the circumferential direction of a predetermined rotation axis of the rotational displacement means, and the electrical supply means passes through the opening portion.

According to gaming machine f6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines f1 to f5, the axial width occupied by the rotational displacement means can be reduced compared to the case where the electrical supply means is passed inside a specified rotating shaft.

A gaming machine f7, among the gaming machines f1 to f6, further comprising: a displacing means disposed in a displaceable manner near the power supply means; and a driving means for generating a driving force for driving the displacing means, the driving means being disposed on the side where the rotational displacement means is not disposed.
.

According to the gaming machine f7, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines f2 to f6, it is possible to improve the layout efficiency.

A gaming machine f8, in any one of the gaming machines f1 to f7, characterized in that the rotational displacement means is configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the arrangement displacement means.

According to gaming machine f8, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines f1 to f7, the means for guiding electrical wiring is given the function of transmitting driving force, thereby enabling the sharing of components and reducing the number of components.

<Concept of the invention using the drive unit 600 as an example>
A gaming machine g1 comprising an entry port formed to allow a gaming ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported on either side of the entry port to open or close the entry port, a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, wherein the transmission mechanism comprises a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member which is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and wherein a protrusion protrudes from the sliding member or one of the pair of wing members, and a sliding groove through which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed into the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes an entrance opening formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions sandwiching the entrance opening and open or close the entrance opening, a driving means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members (for example, JP 2010-234009 A). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a protruding portion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of wing members. In detail, one end side of the rotating member is formed with opposing portions that face each other at a predetermined interval above and below, and the protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the opposing opposing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the opposing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the gap between the facing portion and the protruding portion must be set large, which causes a problem that the opening and closing operation of the feather member is unstable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated to open and close the feather member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined relative to the protruding portion. If the facing distance between the facing portions is equal to the external shape (thickness) of the protruding portion, the protruding portion will interfere with the facing portion between the facing portions, and the rotating member will not be able to rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing portions to a size that does not cause the protruding portion to interfere, and the gap between the facing portion and the protruding portion will be large accordingly. As a result, the feather member is prone to rattling, which causes the opening and closing operation of the feather member to be unstable.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine g1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a sliding member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and a protruding portion is protruded from the sliding member or one of the pair of wing members, and a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed into the other of the pair of wing members, so that the groove width of the sliding groove can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the sliding member is a sliding displacement and the attitude of the sliding groove is not inclined with respect to the protruding portion, there is no need to avoid interference with the protruding portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, for example, the groove width of the sliding groove can be set to be equal to the size (thickness) of the protruding portion, and therefore the gap between the sliding groove and the protruding portion can be reduced.
As a result, rattling of the blade members can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operation of the blade members can be stabilized.

The sliding groove may be a concave groove (recess) or a through groove (opening). That is, the sliding groove may be formed so that the inserted protrusion can slide along the extension direction of the sliding groove (direction perpendicular to the groove width direction).

A gaming machine g2, characterized in that in the gaming machine g1, the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is a direction approximately perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine g2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine g1, the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the sliding member can be disposed substantially parallel to the wing members. As a result, the space required for disposing the wing members and the sliding member can be reduced, and the space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly.

Gaming machine g3 is characterized in that, in gaming machines g1 or g2, the protrusion portion protrudes from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed into the slide member and extends linearly along a direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member.

According to the gaming machine g3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines g1 and g2, the protruding portion protrudes from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extends linearly, so that the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the protruding portion during the opening and closing operation of the wing member can always be kept constant. Therefore, the rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.
Since the sliding groove extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide member, the extension length of the sliding groove can be minimized, thereby suppressing the amount of weight reduction required for forming the sliding groove and improving the rigidity of the slide member.

Gaming machine g4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines g1 to g3, the protrusion protrudes from the feather member and the sliding groove is recessed into the slide member, and the position of the protrusion when the slide member begins to slide upward in the direction of gravity is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the feather member.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, a sliding member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, so when the sliding member is moved in the direction of sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the weight of the sliding member is added, the inertial force becomes large, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member from a stopped state to open or close it.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine g4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines g1 to g3, a protrusion is protruded from the wing member, a sliding groove is recessed into the slide member, and the position of the protrusion when the slide member starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member, so that the displacement component of the protrusion pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove can be made large in the horizontal direction and small (minimized) in the direction of gravity. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the drive of the wing member in a stopped state can be started and the initial operation when opening or closing can be performed smoothly.

In the gaming machine g4, when the slide member starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the direction to be opened.

According to the gaming machine g5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine g4, when the sliding member starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the direction to be opened, so that the wing member can be rotated by its weight (own weight). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the sliding member is added, the drive of the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) can be started, and the initial operation when opening can be performed smoothly.

Gaming machine g6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine g4 or g5, an inclined surface is formed on the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the protrusion abuts when the sliding member begins to slide upward in the direction of gravity, the inclined surface including the rotation axis of the wing member and inclined with respect to a plane perpendicular to the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine g6, in either the gaming machine g4 or g5, when the sliding member starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity, an inclined surface is formed on the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the protruding portion abuts, the inclined surface being inclined with respect to a plane that includes the rotation axis of the wing member and is perpendicular to the direction of gravity.
Even if the position of the protrusion is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the feather member, the protruding portion can be guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface, allowing the sliding displacement of the sliding member to smoothly begin upward in the direction of gravity.

In addition, by forming an inclined surface on the inner wall of the sliding groove, not only can the gap between the inner wall and the protruding portion be reduced, but also the horizontal displacement of the protruding portion can be restricted by the abutment of the protruding portion against the inclined surface. This makes it easier to suppress the rattling of the feather member when the feather member is in the open or closed stopped state. In other words, even if the feather member is affected by the vibration caused by the game ball flowing down, the feather member can be easily maintained in the open or closed position.

Gaming machine g7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines g1 to g6, a receiving portion is recessed on the inner wall of the sliding groove to receive the protrusion when the slide member is slid to a position where the feather member is closed, and when the protrusion is received in the receiving portion, rotation of the feather member is restricted.

According to gaming machine g7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines g1 to g6, a receiving portion is recessed on the inner wall of the sliding groove to receive the protrusion when the slide member is slid to a position where the feather member is closed, and when the protrusion is received in the receiving portion, the rotation of the feather member is restricted, thereby preventing the feather member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

A gaming machine g8, characterized in that, in the gaming machine g7, the slide member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, thereby causing the protrusion portion to be received in the receiving portion.

According to gaming machine g8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine g7, the sliding member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, thereby allowing the protrusion portion to be received in the receiving portion, and therefore the weight (own weight) of the sliding member can be utilized to easily maintain the state in which the protrusion portion is received in the receiving portion.

Gaming machine g9, in any of gaming machines g1 to g8, wherein the rotating member has an abutment portion and a protruding portion protruding from the tip of the abutment portion, and the sliding member has a one-side abutted portion against which one side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and an other-side abutted portion that is arranged opposite the one-side abutted portion at a predetermined distance in the direction of the sliding displacement and against which the other side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member, and when the wing member is in a closed state, one side of the abutment portion abuts against the one-side abutted portion and the protruding portion is engaged with the sliding member, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side at least to a position where the other side of the abutment portion abuts against the other-side abutted portion, the engagement of the protruding portion with the sliding member is released.

According to gaming machine g9, in addition to the effects of any one of gaming machines g1 to g8, the rotating member has an abutment portion and a protruding portion protruding from the tip of the abutment portion, and the sliding member has a one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the feather member, and an other-side abutted portion that is arranged opposite the one-side abutted portion at a predetermined distance in the direction of sliding displacement and with which the other side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the feather member, so that when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, the one-side abutted portion is pushed by one side of the abutment portion as the rotation proceeds, and the sliding member is slidably displaced toward one side, thereby closing the feather member, while when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side, the other-side abutted portion is pushed by the other side of the abutment portion as the rotation proceeds, and the sliding member is slidably displaced toward the other side, thereby opening the feather member.

In this case, when the wing members are closed, one side of the abutting portion abuts against the one-side abutted portion and the protruding portion engages with the sliding member, so that the sliding member is restricted from sliding to the other side without rotating the rotating member, thereby preventing the wing members from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side at least to a position where the other side of the abutting portion abuts against the other-side abutted portion, the engagement between the protrusion portion and the sliding member is released, and therefore, by rotating the rotating member further toward the other side, the sliding member can be slid toward the other side and the wing member can be released.

In the game machines g1 to g8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member slidably displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member,
a protruding portion is provided protruding from one of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and a slide groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is provided recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members; the rotating member includes an abutment portion and an overhanging portion that overhangs from a tip of the abutment portion;
the sliding member includes a one-side contacted portion against which one side of the contact portion comes into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and an other-side contacted portion that is disposed opposite the one-side contacted portion at a predetermined interval in the direction of the sliding displacement and against which the other side of the contact portion comes into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member,
A gaming machine g10 characterized in that when the wing member is closed, the protrusion is disengaged from the slide member, and when the slide member is slid from the closed state of the wing member to a position where the one-side abutment portion abuts against one side of the abutment portion, the protrusion is engaged with the slide member.

According to gaming machine g10, in addition to the effects of any one of gaming machines g1 to g8, the rotating member has an abutment portion and a protruding portion protruding from the tip of the abutment portion, and the sliding member has a one-side abutted portion against which one side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing members, and an other-side abutted portion that is disposed opposite the one-side abutted portion at a predetermined distance in the direction of sliding displacement and against which the other side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing members. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, as the rotating member rotates,
The one-side abutted portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is slidably displaced toward one side, thereby closing the wing member, while when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side, as the rotating member rotates, the other-side abutted portion is pushed by the other side of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is slidably displaced toward the other side, thereby opening the wing member.

In this case, when the sliding member is slid from a closed state of the wing member to a position where one side of the abutment portion abuts against one side of the abutment portion, the protrusion portion engages with the sliding member, thereby restricting the sliding member from being slid to the other side without rotating the rotating member.
Therefore, the blade member can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing members are in a closed state, the protruding portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the slide member is slidably displaced toward the other side by further rotating the rotating member toward the other side.
The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhanging portion and the one-side abutting portion needs to be formed into a shape that allows the rotation of the rotating member to the other side, which makes the shape complicated. Therefore, not only does the strength decrease, but there is also a risk that the engagement may be easily released. In contrast, as in the present invention, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so there is no need to form the shape of the overhanging portion and the one-side abutting portion into a shape that allows the rotation of the rotating member to the other side.
Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified and strength ensured, but a shape that makes it easy to maintain the engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

Gaming machine g11 is any one of gaming machines g1 to g10, and is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for a gaming ball entered into the ball entrance, and when the protrusion portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, a part of the slide member is positioned within the passage of the passage member.

According to gaming machine g11, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines g1 to g10, it is equipped with a passage member that forms a passage for gaming balls entered into the ball entry port, and when the protrusion portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, a part of the slide member is positioned within the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the protrusion portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the flow down of the gaming balls entered from the ball entry port can be restricted by the slide member.

Gaming machine g12 is any one of gaming machines g1 to g11, and is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for a gaming ball entered into the ball entrance, and the slide member is provided with a frictional contact portion that crosses the passage of the passage member and rubs against the edge of the passage member when the slide member is slidably displaced from a position that opens the wing member to a position that closes the wing member.

According to the gaming machine g12, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines g1 to g11, the sliding member has a frictional contact portion that crosses the passage of the passage member and rubs against the edge of the passage member when the sliding member is slid from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed.
Any illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance can be cut off.

For example, there is a fraudulent act in which the tip of a thread is attached to a game ball, the game ball is inserted through a ball entrance and passed through a passage of a passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the thread is operated (reeled out and retracted) to move the game ball back and forth, causing the detection sensor to detect it multiple times. In response to such a fraudulent act, according to the present invention, even if the game ball is inserted with the blade member open, the slide member is slid from the position that opens the blade member to the position that closes it, and when the frictional contact portion crosses the passage of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is attached to the game ball is displaced together with the frictional contact portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the frictional contact portion is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the thread can be cut between the frictional contact portion and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent act can be suppressed.

The frictional contact portion of the slide member is preferably made of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be made of a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (the frictional contact portion) may be made of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be made of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the part where the frictional contact portion rubs against) may be made of a metal material. In addition, the frictional contact portion and the part where the frictional contact portion rubs against (the edge of the passage member) are preferably formed as a blade (cutting blade).

Gaming machine g13 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines g1 to g11, it is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for a gaming ball entered into the ball entry port, and the transmission mechanism is provided with a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub against each other's edges when the wing members are displaced from an open position to a closed position.

According to gaming machine g13, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines g1 to g11, the transmission mechanism is provided with a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub against each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, so that it is possible to cut off any illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entry port.

For example, there is a fraudulent act of gluing the tip of a string to a game ball, causing the game ball to enter through a ball entrance and pass through the passage of a passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, operating (releasing and pulling) the other end of the string to move the game ball back and forth, thereby causing the detection sensor to detect it multiple times. In response to such a fraudulent act, according to the present invention, even if the game ball enters the game ball with the feather member open, the feather member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position, and when the pair of cutting members cross the passage of the passage member, the middle part of the string whose tip is glued to the game ball can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent act can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members are preferably made of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be made of a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (the edges that rub against each other) may be made of a metal material. In addition, the parts of the pair of cutting members that rub against each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine g12 or g13, the drive means is formed as a solenoid actuator in which the displacement of the drive shaft in a first direction is performed by electromagnetic force and the displacement of the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction is performed by elastic recovery force of a biasing means, and the displacement of the wing member from the opening position to the closing position is performed by the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction.
A gaming machine g14 characterized in that the game is played by displacing the ball in a direction.

According to the gaming machine g14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines g12 and g13, the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction, that is, by utilizing electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut off illegal objects (e.g., thread) between the frictional contact portion of the slide member and the edge of the passage member.

Gaming machine G15 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines G1 to G14, the rotating member has an abutment portion, and the sliding member has a one-side abutted portion against which one side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and an other-side abutted portion arranged opposite the one-side abutted portion against which the other side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member, and the one-side abutted portion and the other-side abutted portion are formed approximately in the center in the width direction.

According to the gaming machine g15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines g1 to g14, the rotating member has an abutment portion, the sliding member has a one-side abutment portion that abuts one side of the abutment portion when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing members, and an other-side abutment portion that is disposed opposite the one-side abutment portion and abuts the other side of the abutment portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing members, and the one-side abutment portion and the other-side abutment portion are formed at approximately the center in the width direction, so that it is easy to allow the posture change of the sliding member between the pair of wing members and the rotating member. Therefore, the sliding member can be smoothly slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, the wing members can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when the slide member is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member and the pair of wing members is opened or closed, if a load from a game ball acts on only one of the pair of wing members, the posture of the slide member is changed. However, if the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two points and also to the rotating member at two points, it is difficult to allow the posture of the slide member to change between the pair of wing members and the rotating member, and resistance occurs when the slide member is slidably displaced (i.e., the rotating member is rotated), which inhibits the opening or closing of the wing members. In contrast, according to the present invention, since the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two points and to the rotating member at one point, even if a load from a game ball acts on only one of the pair of wing members, it is easy to allow the posture of the slide member to change between the pair of wing members and the rotating member.

In addition, the approximate center in the width direction where the one-side abutment portion and the other-side abutment portion are formed means a position on a virtual line that passes through approximately the center between a pair of protrusions when the pair of wing members are in an open or closed state and that runs along the direction of sliding displacement.

A gaming machine g16, characterized in that in the gaming machine g15, the width dimensions on one and the other sides of the abutment portion are set to be at least three times or less the maximum outer dimension of the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine g16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine g15, the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the abutment are set to at least three times the maximum outer dimension of the protruding portion, so that the attitude change of the sliding member between the pair of wing members and the rotating member can be easily tolerated. Note that it is preferable that the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the abutment are set to twice the maximum outer dimension of the protruding portion or less. This is because it is easier to achieve the tolerance of the above-mentioned attitude change.

<Concept of the invention using the prize-winning port unit 930 as an example>
A first ball inlet, a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball inlet, a first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, a second ball inlet, and a second driving means for opening or closing the second ball inlet.
A gaming machine h1 comprising an opening/closing member and a second drive means for driving the second opening/closing member, characterized in that the first drive means and the second drive means are arranged on the rear side of the second opening/closing member.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a first ball inlet, a first opening/closing member that opens or closes the first ball inlet, a first drive means that drives the first opening/closing member, a second ball inlet, a second opening/closing member that opens or closes the second ball inlet, and a second drive means that drives the second opening/closing member (for example, JP 2011-177416 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the first drive means and the second drive means are arranged on the back side of the first opening/closing member and the second opening/closing member, respectively, so that it is difficult to arrange other members or devices on the back side of these first opening/closing member and second opening/closing member, and there is a problem that it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine h1, the first drive means and the second drive means are disposed on the back side of the second opening/closing member, so that a space can be formed on the back side of the first opening/closing member (first ball entrance). In other words, by concentrating the arrangement space of the first drive means and the second drive means on the back side of the second opening/closing member, the space for arranging other members and devices can be reduced by concentrating the arrangement space of the first opening/closing member (first
This allows the space to be secured behind the stadium entrance, allowing for more effective use of the space.

A gaming machine h2, characterized in that in the gaming machine h1, the front projection area of the second opening/closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening/closing member.

A gaming machine h3, in which the front projection area of the second opening/closing member is larger than the total front projection area of the first driving means and the second driving means in the gaming machine h1 or h2.
.

According to the gaming machine h2 or h3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine h1 or h2, the front projection area of the second opening/closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening/closing member, or is made larger than the total front projection area of the first drive means and the second drive means, so that the second ball entrance (the second
This allows the dead space at the back of the opening and closing member to be effectively utilized.

In the gaming machine h3, the second opening/closing member is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front with one direction as a longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second ball entrance.
A gaming machine h4 characterized in that it is arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the opening and closing member.

According to gaming machine h4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine h3, the second opening and closing member is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second opening and closing member on the rear side of the second ball inlet, so that the dead space on the rear side of the second ball inlet (second opening and closing member) can be effectively utilized.

Gaming machine h5, in any of gaming machines h1 to h4, is characterized in that the first drive means and the second drive means comprise a main body, a drive shaft arranged on one side of the main body, a drive unit that drives the drive shaft and is housed in the main body, and wiring that supplies power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main body, and the first drive means and second drive means are arranged in an orientation in which the drive shaft is directed toward the second opening and closing member.

According to gaming machine h5, in any of gaming machines h1 to h4, the first drive means and the second drive means comprise a main body, a drive shaft arranged on one side of the main body, a drive unit that drives the drive shaft and is housed in the main body, and wiring that supplies power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main body, and since the first drive means and the second drive means are arranged in an orientation in which the drive shaft faces the second opening and closing member, it is easy to bundle the wiring of the first drive means and the wiring of the second drive means.

A gaming machine h6, characterized in that, in the gaming machine h5, the main body of the first drive means and the main body of the second drive means are each formed in an approximately rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the first drive means and the second drive means are arranged at a position where one of the outer surfaces of the main body parts, except for the outer surface on which the drive shaft and wiring are arranged, is approximately flush with each other.

According to gaming machine h6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine h5, the main body of the first drive means and the main body of the second drive means are each formed in an approximately rectangular shape, and the first drive means and the second drive means are arranged at a position where one of the outer surfaces of the main body parts, except for the outer surface on which the drive shaft and wiring are arranged, is approximately flush with each other. Therefore, for example, even if the first drive means and the second drive means have different outputs and the main body parts of the two are different sizes, the shape of the shield plate for separating the first drive means and the second drive means from other areas can be simplified.

That is, when the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are formed to have different sizes, a step is formed between the outer surfaces of one main body and the other main body, and it becomes necessary to form a shield plate by bending it along the step, and the shape of such a shield plate becomes complicated.
Since the driving means and the second driving means are provided and there is no step between the outer surfaces, the shield plate can be made flat, which simplifies the shape of the shield plate.

The shield plate is a conductive barrier that separates the area in which the first drive means and the second drive means are located from other areas (e.g., areas in which the detection sensor and control board are located) and restricts (suppresses) the flow of electromagnetic fields between the two areas, and is formed, for example, as a metal plate.

A gaming machine h7, comprising any one of gaming machines h1 to h6, a first passage member forming a passage for a gaming ball entered into the first ball inlet, a second passage member forming a passage for a gaming ball entered into the second ball inlet, and a first transmission mechanism transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the first opening/closing member, the first opening/closing member comprising a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the ball inlet and opening or closing the ball inlet, the first transmission mechanism comprising a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the first driving means and disposed between the first passage member and the second passage member, and a sliding member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members.

According to gaming machine h7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines h1 to h6, the first transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the first drive means and is disposed between the first passage member and the second passage member, and a sliding member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members, so that space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the first passage member at the rear side of the first ball entrance, compared to conventional products in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by the rotating member. Also, in order to avoid interference with the rotating member as in conventional products, the first passage member is disposed between the second passage member and the first ball entrance.
Since there is no need to bend it toward the aisle, the first ball inlet can be placed closer to the second ball inlet.

In the gaming machine h7, the rotating member has a first part extending from the rotation axis and connected to the slide member, and a second part extending from the rotation axis and driven by the first drive means, and the first part is formed by being bent in an approximately L-shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis.

According to gaming machine h8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine h7, the rotating member has a first portion extending from the rotation axis and connected to the sliding member, and a second portion extending from the rotation axis and driven by a first driving means, and the first portion is formed by being bent in an approximately L-shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the distance between the first driving means and the sliding member can be reduced while ensuring the sliding amount of the sliding member.

That is, if the first portion is formed linearly and the length dimension of the first portion (the distance from the rotation shaft to the portion connected to the slide member) is set to be equal to the linear distance from the rotation shaft to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, the amount of sliding of the slide member can be made equal to that of the present invention, but the distance between the first driving means and the slide member increases, resulting in a larger overall size. On the other hand, if the first portion is formed linearly and the length dimension of the first portion is set shorter than the linear distance from the rotation shaft to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, the distance between the first driving means and the slide member can be made equal to that of the present invention, but the amount of sliding of the slide member decreases.

In contrast, according to the present invention, the first portion is formed by being bent in an approximately L-shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, thereby making it possible to reduce the distance between the first driving means and the sliding member while ensuring the sliding amount of the sliding member.

A gaming machine h9, characterized in that in the gaming machine h8, the second part of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first part, which is opposite to the sliding member.

According to the gaming machine h9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h8, since the second part of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first part opposite to the slide member, the space created by bending the first part can be effectively utilized to reduce the size of the rotating member. That is, the rotating member can be efficiently disposed in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member, thereby achieving an overall reduction in size.

A gaming machine h10, in any of the gaming machines h1 to h9, is characterized in that it is equipped with a detection sensor for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the second ball entrance, and at least a portion of the detection sensor is arranged between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means.

According to the gaming machine h10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines h1 to h9, a detection sensor is provided for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the second ball entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor is disposed between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means.
When tampering with the first drive means through the ball entrance, the first drive means can be hidden by part of the detection sensor, making such tampering more difficult to carry out.

In this case, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole in order to secure a path from the second ball inlet to the first drive means, the detection sensor can be destroyed, and the state of the detection sensor can be monitored to discover any fraudulent activity.
Even if the opening/closing member is opened and tampering is performed on the first drive means through the second ball entry port, by closing the second opening/closing member, the first drive means is blocked by the second opening/closing member, making the area where tampering has occurred invisible, making it particularly effective to detect tampering by monitoring the status of the detection sensor described above.

A gaming machine h10, comprising a case member for accommodating the detection sensor and a screw member fastened to the case member, the detection sensor being arranged in pairs, at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors being arranged between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member being positioned between the pair of sensor devices.
11.

According to the gaming machine h11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine h10, at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors is disposed between the second opening/closing member and the first drive means, and the screw member fastened to the case member is positioned between the opposing parts of the pair of sensor devices, so that when the second opening/closing member is opened and fraud is committed on the first drive means through the second ball entrance, the first drive means can be hidden by the screw member, making such fraudulent acts more difficult to commit. That is, it is difficult to cover the entire front surface of the first drive means with the pair of detection sensors, and a gap is likely to be formed between the opposing pairs of detection sensors, so that such a gap (the area between the opposing pairs of detection sensors is set as the fastening position of the screw member, and the uncovered area on the front surface of the first drive means can be supplemented by the screw member, making it more difficult to commit fraud.

The screw member may be used to fasten two members of the case member together, or may be used to fasten another member to the case member. The screw member is preferably made of metal.

A gaming machine h12, characterized in that in the gaming machine h11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is positioned between the opposing ends of the pair of detection sensors.

According to gaming machine h12, in addition to the effects of gaming machine h11, the wiring of a pair of detection sensors is positioned between the opposing detection sensors, so that, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened and fraud is committed on the first drive means through the second ball inlet, it becomes more difficult to commit such fraudulent acts.

That is, the wiring is relatively easy to damage. Therefore, when a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole in order to secure a path from the second ball inlet to the first drive means, the wiring can be easily damaged (broken) as a result of such fraudulent acts.
This makes it apparent that it is difficult to commit fraud without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring, making it easier to deter fraudulent acts.

A gaming machine h13, characterized in that in the gaming machine h12, the case member has a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion.

According to the gaming machine h13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine h12, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion, so that the wiring can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the first drive means. In other words, a wider area in front of the first drive means can be shielded by the wiring. Therefore, for example,
If the second opening/closing member is opened and tampering is attempted with the first driving means through the second ball inlet, this makes it more difficult to commit such tampering.

In the gaming machine h12 or h13, the case member has a seat portion into which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion is formed into a conical shape whose diameter increases as it moves away from the second opening/closing member.

According to gaming machine h14, in addition to the effects of gaming machines h12 or h13, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion is formed in a conical shape that expands in diameter the further it is away from the second opening/closing member. Therefore, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling or the like to secure a path from the second ball inlet to the first driving means, the direction of the drill can be shifted laterally (slid sideways) on the outer circumferential surface of the seat portion, making it easier to damage (sever) the wiring.

A gaming machine h15, in any one of the gaming machines h12 to h14, characterized in that the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite the fastening position of the screw member.

According to gaming machine h15, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines h12 to h14, the wiring of a pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the opposite side to the fastening position of the screw member, so that such wiring can be pulled (positioned) over a wider range in front of the first driving means.
In other words, a wider area in front of the first drive means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened and a tampering is performed on the first drive means through the second ball inlet, it becomes more difficult to perform such a tampering.

<Concept of the invention using the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 as examples>
In a gaming machine including a gaming board, a first member disposed on the front side of the gaming board and having a first passage through which a gaming ball passes, and a second member disposed on the rear side of the gaming board and having a second passage connected to the first passage of the first member,
A gaming machine i1, characterized in that it comprises a third member having an engagement portion and a second engagement portion that engages with the second member.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a gaming board, a first member that is disposed on the front side of the gaming board and has a first passage through which a gaming ball passes, and a second member that has a second passage that is connected to the first passage of the first member and is disposed on the rear side of the gaming board (for example, see JP-A-2003-133635).
The game ball flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member, passes through the first passage, and then flows into the second passage of the second member, and on the back side of the game board,
The ball passes through the second passage. This changes the path of the ball in the forward and backward directions, which can provide an interesting experience to the player.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) at the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so it is required to ensure the positional accuracy of the second member relative to the first member. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to position the second member relative to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front side of the gaming board, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can be formed in the process of forming a positioning hole for positioning each of those members on the gaming board, while a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back side of the gaming board requires a separate process of turning the gaming board over and forming a positioning hole only for the second member, which is not realistic.

In contrast, gaming machine i1 is provided with a third member having a first engagement portion that engages with the first member and a second engagement portion that engages with the second member, so that the third member can be used to position the second member relative to the first member.

Gaming machine i2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine i1, the gaming board has an opening formed therein, and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in an internal space of the opening, and the third member is disposed in the internal space of the opening.

According to the gaming machine i2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine i1, the gaming board is formed with an opening, and the first
Since the connecting portion between the first passage of the member and the second passage of the second member has an opening disposed in the internal space, and the third member is disposed in the internal space of the opening, there is no need to provide a separate opening for disposing the third member. In other words, the opening for disposing the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as the disposing space for the third member, which reduces the number of processing steps and reduces the product cost.

In the gaming machine i1 or i2, the third member is such that the first engagement portion is engaged with the first member.
The gaming machine i3 is characterized in that the second engagement portion is engaged with the passage of the second member, and the second engagement portion is engaged with the second passage of the second member.

According to the gaming machine i3, in the gaming machine i1 or i2, the third member has a first engaging portion engaged with the first passage of the first member and a second engaging portion engaged with the second passage of the second member, so that the second member can be effectively positioned relative to the first member. That is, the purpose of positioning the second member relative to the first member is to prevent the occurrence of positional deviation (step) at the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, and since the target portion (the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage) can be directly positioned by the third member, the occurrence of positional deviation (step) can be effectively prevented compared to the case where other portions are positioned by the third portion. As a result, the gaming balls can be smoothly flowed down.

A gaming machine i4, characterized in that in the gaming machine i3, a part of an inner wall of at least one of the first passage or the second passage is formed by the third member.

According to gaming machine i4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine i3, a portion of the inner wall of at least one of the first passage or the second passage is formed by the third member, making it easier to tolerate dimensional tolerances or installation tolerances of the first passage and the second passage.

A gaming machine i5, in any one of the gaming machines i1 to i4, characterized in that the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member.

According to the gaming machine i5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines i1 to i4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member, so that when the first member and the second member are attached to the front and back of the gaming board, respectively, it is not necessary to attach the third member separately, and the attachment of the first member can be performed at the same time as the attachment of the third member. Therefore, the workability of the attachment work can be improved accordingly.

A gaming machine i6, characterized in that in a state in which the third member is held by the first member, a first engagement portion of the third member is engaged with the first member.

According to the gaming machine i6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine i5, when the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member, so that after the first member and the third member are attached to the gaming board, it is not necessary to perform a separate operation of engaging the first engaging portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the attachment operation can be improved accordingly.

Gaming machine i7 is characterized in that, in a state in which the third member is held by the first member, the second engagement portion of the third member is formed so as to be able to engage with the second member from the side opposite the first member.

According to the gaming machine i7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine i6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engagement portion of the third member is formed so as to be able to engage with the second member from the side opposite to the first member. Therefore, by attaching the second member to the rear surface of the gaming board after simultaneously attaching the first member and the third member to the gaming board, the second engagement portion of the third member can be engaged with the second member from the side opposite to the first member.
Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

In any one of the gaming machines i5 to i7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is disposed, and a fixing member fastened to the main body member, and the third member is fastened to the fixing member.
A gaming machine i8 characterized in that the components are fixed or integrally formed.

According to gaming machine i8, in addition to the effects of any one of gaming machines i5 to i7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is disposed, and a fixing member fastened to the main body member;
Since the third member is fixed to or formed integrally with the fixing member, the third member can be held (disposed) on the first member at the same time as the fixing member is fastened to the main body member, which makes it possible to prevent forgetting to attach the third member when attaching the first and second members to the game board.

Gaming machine i9, in any of gaming machines i1 to i8, is characterized in that the first member comprises an entrance opening formed to allow a gaming ball to enter and connected to the first passage, a pair of wing members rotatably supported on either side of the entrance opening to open or close the entrance opening, a drive means for generating a drive force for rotating the pair of wing members, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the pair of wing members, the transmission mechanism comprising a rotating member rotated by the drive force of the drive means, and a slide member that slides as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members, and the third member is formed to be able to guide the slide displacement of the slide member.

According to the gaming machine i9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines i1 to i8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that slides with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members. Therefore, compared to a conventional product in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by the rotating member, the gaming machine i9 has a feature that the game machine i9 can open and close the pair of wing members on both sides (sides) of the first passage on the rear side of the ball entrance.
In this case, since the third member is formed to be able to guide the sliding displacement of the slide member, it is not necessary to provide a separate member for guiding the sliding displacement of the slide member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine i9, the pair of wing members are provided with protruding portions protruding toward the slide member, and the slide member is provided with a slide groove through which the protruding portions are slidably inserted,
The gaming machine i10 is characterized in that the third member has a covering surface portion that faces the opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member.

According to the gaming machine i10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine i9, the pair of wing members have protruding portions protruding toward the slide member, the slide member has a sliding groove through which the protruding portions are slidably inserted, and the third member has a covering surface portion facing the opening of the sliding groove of the slide member on the opposite side to the wing members, so that the covering surface portion of the third member can shield the opening of the sliding groove of the slide member from the outside, thereby preventing dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, the sliding of the protruding portions is prevented from being hindered by dust and foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove, and the pair of wing members can be stably opened or closed.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning port unit 950 as an example>
A gaming machine j1 is provided with an entrance opening formed to allow a gaming ball to enter, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the entrance opening, a rolling surface along which the gaming ball entered the entrance opening rolls, and a passage member through which the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface flows, characterized in that a plurality of the passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

Here, a ball entrance opening formed so that a game ball can enter, and an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance opening,
and a passage member that forms a passage for a gaming ball that has entered the ball entrance.
For example, see JP 2015-3092 A. The ball entrance is formed to a size that allows multiple game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that enter the ball entrance are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and flow into the passage member one by one. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the ball entrance is made larger, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entrance to the passage member becomes longer accordingly. Therefore, it takes time for the game ball to reach the passage member, and another game ball enters from the ball entrance before the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, which is a problem in that over-entry is likely to occur.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine j1, since the passage members are arranged at a predetermined interval, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the gaming ball to the passage member can be shortened even if the ball entrance is enlarged. Therefore, the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the passage member can be shortened, and the gaming ball can flow into the passage member quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent another gaming ball from entering the ball entrance before the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, and to prevent over-entry.

A gaming machine j2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine j1, a detection sensor is provided for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the ball entrance, and the detection sensor is disposed at the connection portion between the rolling surface and the passage member.

According to the gaming machine j2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine j1, a detection sensor is provided to detect a gaming ball that has entered the ball entrance, and the detection sensor is disposed at the connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member, so that the gaming ball that has entered the ball entrance can be detected more quickly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another gaming ball from entering the ball entrance before the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, and it is possible to prevent over-entry.

A gaming machine j3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine j1 or j2, a first guide means is provided having a first inclined surface that is inclined from the ball inlet toward the passage member and is capable of contacting a gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface, the ball inlet is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball inlet, and the first guide means is disposed between one longitudinal side end of the rolling surface and the passage member.

According to gaming machine j3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines j1 or j2, it is provided with a first guide means having a first inclined surface that is inclined from the ball entry port toward the passage member and is formed so as to be able to abut against the game ball rolling on the rolling surface, the ball entry port is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guide means is disposed between one longitudinal end of the rolling surface and the passage member, so that when a game ball enters near the longitudinal end of the ball entry port, the game ball is guided to the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means, making it less likely to become stuck at the longitudinal end of the rolling surface.
Therefore, the game balls entering through the ball inlet can be made to flow into the passage member quickly, and as a result,
By preventing another game ball from entering the ball hole before the opening and closing member closes the ball hole, over-entry can be prevented.

Gaming machine j4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines j1 to j3, it is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed into the rolling surface and sloping downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member.

According to the gaming machine j4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines j1 to j3, a guide groove is provided on the rolling surface and formed as a concave groove that slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member, so that the rolling surface can receive the game ball rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide it to the passage member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the passage member when rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that entered from the ball entrance can be made to flow into the passage member quickly, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entrance is closed by the opening and closing member, and to prevent over-entry.

A gaming machine j5, characterized in that, in the gaming machine j4, the guide groove extends linearly in a direction approximately perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

According to the gaming machine j5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j4, the guide groove extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface can easily receive the gaming ball rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface into the guide groove, and the received gaming ball can be quickly guided (made to flow) into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another gaming ball from entering before the ball entrance is closed by the opening and closing member, and to prevent over-entry.

Gaming machine j5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine j4 or j5, the groove width of the guide groove is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine j5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines j4 and j5, the groove width of the guide groove is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the gaming ball, so that when multiple gaming balls are received in the guide groove, the gaming balls can be guided to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each gaming ball can be quickly introduced into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another gaming ball from entering before the ball entrance is closed by the opening and closing member, and to prevent over-entry.

Gaming machine j7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines j3 to j6, the rolling surface has a second region that is opposite the first region in which the first guide means is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, across the passage member, and is formed so as to slope downwardly toward the first region.

According to the gaming machine j7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines j3 to j6, the rolling surface is
Since the second area, which is opposite to the first area in which the first guide means is disposed across the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, is formed with a downward incline toward the first area, a game ball that has entered the second area or a game ball that has rolled from the first area to the second area can be made to roll quickly toward the passage member by utilizing the downward incline of the second area. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball entrance before the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby preventing over-entry.

A gaming machine j8 is characterized in that it is provided with a second guide means protruding from the second area of the rolling surface in the gaming machine j7.

According to the gaming machine j8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine j7, the second guide means protruding from the second region of the rolling surface is provided, so that the gaming ball, whose rolling speed has been increased by the downward inclination of the second region, can be decelerated in front of the passage member. In other words, the rolling speed is increased up to the passage member, and the speed is decelerated in front of (just before) the passage member, so that the gaming ball passes through the passage member from the second region and reaches the first speed.
The ball can be prevented from rolling into the ball entry area. This allows the ball to flow into the passage member more quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent another ball from entering the ball entry area before the ball entry area is closed by the opening/closing member, thereby preventing over-entry.

Gaming machine j9 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second guide means arranged in the second area of the rolling surface and configured to guide the gaming ball rolling along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface along the second area of the rolling surface toward the passage member, toward the ball inlet side.

According to the gaming machine j9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine j7 or j8, the gaming machine j9 is provided with a second guide means arranged in the second region of the rolling surface and formed to be able to guide the gaming ball rolling along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member toward the ball entrance, so that the gaming ball whose rolling speed has been increased by the downward inclination of the second region can be decelerated in front of the passage member. That is, the rolling speed is increased up to the passage member, and the speed is decelerated in front of (just before) the passage member, so that the gaming ball can be prevented from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. Therefore, the gaming ball can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another gaming ball from entering the passage member before the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, and to prevent over-entry.

In a gaming machine j9, the opening and closing member is arranged in a position where it can be contacted by a gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface when the ball entrance is open.

According to the gaming machine j10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j9, when the ball entrance is open, the opening and closing member is disposed at a position where the ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the opening and closing member, so that the ball guided to the ball entrance side by the second guide means can come into contact with the opening and closing member and bounce back toward the passage member. Therefore, the ball can flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another ball from entering the ball entrance before the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, and to prevent over-entry.

Gaming machine j11, in which the second guide means, in the gaming machine j9 or j10, is inclined in a direction away from the ball entrance as the side edge opposite the first guide means moves away from the first guide means, and the upper surface is inclined downward toward the side edge opposite the first guide means.

According to the gaming machine j11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines j9 and j10, the second guidance means:
The side edge portion opposite the first guiding means is inclined in a direction away from the ball inlet as it moves away from the first guiding means, and the upper surface is inclined downward toward the side edge portion opposite the first guiding means, so that the game balls can flow quickly into the passage member while being prevented from flying out of the ball inlet.

That is, for game balls that roll in the second region along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member, those with a relatively low (slow) rolling speed are unlikely to fly out of the ball entrance, so by abutting the side edge of the second guide means and guiding the ball to the ball entrance side, it is possible to suppress the ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region, and therefore allow the ball to flow into the passage member faster. On the other hand, for game balls with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, it is possible to make the ball go over the upper surface of the second guide means and guide it to the first region (first guide means). Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by going over the second guide means and colliding with the first guide member, and it is possible to reliably decelerate. Therefore, it is possible to make the ball flow into the passage member faster while suppressing the ball from flying out of the ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the ball entrance until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, and to suppress over-entry.

In the gaming machine j11, the second guide means has a side edge portion on the side facing the first guide means extending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and the dimension of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is larger than the dimension of the side edge portion of the second guide means in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.
2.

According to the gaming machine j12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine j11, the dimension of the side edge of the first guiding means in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is made larger than the dimension of the side edge of the second guiding means in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the gaming ball that has climbed over the upper surface of the second guiding means can be brought into contact (collided) with the first guiding means, and can be decelerated reliably, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the gaming ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly.

A gaming machine j13, in which, in the gaming machine j11 or j12, a position spaced from the rolling surface by the radius of the gaming ball is included in the side edge portion of the second guide means.

According to the gaming machine j13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines j11 and j12, the side edge of the second guiding means includes a position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball that has climbed over the upper surface of the second guiding means can be brought into contact (collided) with the side edge of the first guiding means, and can be decelerated reliably, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the gaming ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly.

Gaming machine j14 is any one of gaming machines j8 to j13, characterized in that the second guide means is located on an extension of the inclined direction of the first inclined surface of the first guide means.

According to the gaming machine j14, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines j8 to j13, since the second guide means is located on an extension of the inclination direction of the first inclined surface of the first guide means, even if the rolling speed of the gaming ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is relatively high (fast), the gaming ball can be decelerated by abutting (colliding) against the second guide means and can be easily positioned near the passage member. Therefore, the gaming ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

A gaming machine j14 is characterized in that a guide groove is provided in the rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove that is inclined downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member, and the height dimension from the bottom surface of the guide groove to the top of the second guide means is made larger than the radius of the gaming ball.
5.

According to the gaming machine j15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine j14, a guide groove is provided in the rolling surface and formed as a concave groove that slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member, and the height dimension from the bottom surface of the guide groove to the top of the second guide means is made larger than the radius of the gaming ball, so that when the rolling speed of the gaming ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is relatively high (fast), the gaming ball can be easily brought into contact (collided) with the second guide means. Therefore, the gaming ball can be decelerated and can be easily positioned near the passage member.
This allows the air to flow into the passage member quickly.

Gaming machine j16 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines j1 to j15, it is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member, and the groove width of the guide groove becomes smaller as it approaches the passage member.

According to the gaming machine j16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines j1 to j15, a guide groove is provided on the rolling surface and formed as a concave groove that slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member, and the groove width of the guide groove is narrowed toward the passage member, so that the game ball rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface abuts (collides with) the side wall of the guide groove, and the rolling direction of the game ball can be easily changed to the direction toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

<Concept of the invention using the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 as examples>
A gaming machine comprising an entrance unit having an entrance opening formed so that a gaming ball can enter and a passage connected to the entrance opening, and a gaming board on which the entrance unit is arranged, the gaming board has an opening formed in the board thickness direction, the entrance unit comprises a first unit having the entrance opening and a first passage connected to the entrance opening and arranged on the front side of the gaming board, and a second unit arranged on the back side of the first unit through the opening of the gaming board and having a second passage connected to the first passage.
1.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a ball entry unit having a ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter and a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged (for example, JP 2015-131046 A). According to such a gaming machine, the ball entry unit can be replaced with another ball entry unit (for example, one with a different number of passages) to reuse (share) the game board while changing the specifications of the gaming machine. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged in front of the game board, it was necessary to reserve a space in front of the game board in advance according to the maximum number of passages, for example. Therefore, when a ball entry unit with a small number of passages is used, there was a problem that the space on the front side of the game board was wasted.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine k1, the ball entry unit includes a first unit having a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port and disposed on the front side of the gaming board, and a second unit having a second passage disposed on the back side of the first unit through an opening of the gaming board and connected to the first passage, so that it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit on the front side of the gaming board, and it is not necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passages) on the front side of the gaming board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one with a different number of second passages), the space on the front side of the gaming board can be effectively utilized when changing the specifications of the gaming board while reusing (combining) the gaming board.

Gaming machine k2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine k1, at least a portion of the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed with an outer shape smaller than that of the first unit and is arranged in a position overlapping the first unit when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine k2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine k1, the first unit is made of a light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed to have an outer shape smaller than the first unit and is disposed in a position overlapping the first unit when viewed from the front, so that the player can see the second unit through the first unit, which can increase the interest of the game. Also, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential to form the gaming board from a light-transmitting material, and for example, the gaming board can be formed from plywood or a sticker can be attached to the gaming board.
Alternatively, the game board may be painted, which allows for greater freedom in design.

Gaming machine k3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine k2, at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is made of a light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine k3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine k2, at least the second unit
Since the front side of the passage is formed from a light-transmitting material, the player can see the game balls flowing down the second passage of the second unit through the first unit, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The first unit may be entirely made of a light-transmitting material. In addition, when only a part of the first unit is made of a light-transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a part of the second unit that overlaps with the second passage in a front view is made of a light-transmitting material. This is because the flow of the game balls can be visually observed, which enhances the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine k3, the first unit is made of a colorless light-transmitting material, and the second unit is made of a colorless light-transmitting material.
A gaming machine k4, characterized in that the units are formed from a colored light-transmitting material.

According to gaming machine k4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine k3, the first unit is made of a colorless light-transmitting material, and the second unit is made of a colored light-transmitting material, so that when the player sees the second unit through the first unit, the player can easily grasp the positional relationship between the first unit and the second unit in the front-rear direction. In other words, the player can easily see the manner in which the gaming ball changes position in the front-rear direction and flows down, which can increase the interest of the game.

Gaming machine k5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine k4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the front side of the second passage of the second unit.

According to gaming machine k5, in addition to the effect of gaming machine k4, information consisting of letters or figures is displayed on the front of the second passage of the second unit, so that even when the second unit is viewed through the first unit, the display can be used as a landmark (reference position) to allow the player to easily recognize the position of the second passage (front-rear position). Examples of the display include printing with ink, attaching a sticker, and two-color molding.

Gaming machine k6, in any of gaming machines k1 to k5, is characterized in that the second passage comprises a second upstream passage connected to the first passage, a plurality of second branch passages branching off from the second upstream passage, and a plurality of second connecting passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, and the second unit comprises a second upstream unit disposed on the back side of the first unit and in which the second upstream passage and the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connecting passages are formed, and detection sensors for detecting the passage of gaming balls are disposed in the plurality of second branch passages.

According to the gaming machine k6, in any one of the gaming machines k1 to k5, the second unit
The machine is equipped with a second upstream unit that is arranged on the rear side of the unit and in which a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit that is arranged in the second upstream unit and in which a plurality of second connecting passages are formed, and detection sensors that detect the passage of game balls are arranged in the plurality of second branch passages.Therefore, for example, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit having fewer second branch passages to manufacture a gaming machine of different specifications, it is possible to prevent an operator from making a mistake in the number of detection sensors that are arranged.

That is, in a structure in which the detection sensors are provided in the second connecting passage, the same number of detection sensors as the number of second connecting passages can be provided, but when, for example, a second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed is changed to another unit in which only one passage connects the first passage and the second connecting passage, it is possible that the same number of detection sensors as the number of second connecting passages are provided, even though one detection sensor is sufficient. In contrast, in a structure in which the detection sensors are provided in the second branch passage, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit, the number of detection sensors corresponding to the unit is provided, which makes it possible to prevent an operator from making a mistake in the number of sensors to be provided.

In the gaming machine k6, the first unit has a second ball inlet formed so that the gaming ball can enter, and a third passage through which the gaming ball entered the second ball inlet passes is provided between the first unit,
A gaming machine k7, characterized in that a detection sensor for detecting gaming balls is disposed in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit, the portion being formed across the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit.

According to the gaming machine k7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine k6, the first unit has a second ball entrance formed so that the gaming ball can enter, and a third ball entrance through which the gaming ball entered the second ball entrance passes.
Since a passage is formed through each of the first unit, the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit, and a detection sensor for detecting game balls is disposed in the portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit, the detection sensor disposed in the second unit can be dispersed, thereby increasing the freedom in arranging the passages.

Gaming machine k8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine k7, the second unit is positioned relative to the first unit by directly or indirectly engaging the second passage with the first passage, or by directly or indirectly engaging the third passages of the first unit and the second unit with each other.

According to gaming machine k8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine k7, the second unit is positioned relative to the first unit by directly or indirectly engaging the second passage with the first passage, or by directly or indirectly engaging the third passages of the first unit and the second unit, so positioning is possible even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of the other unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passages are connected is the same, so even if it is a different unit, it can be positioned relative to the first unit by directly or indirectly engaging the second passage with the first passage or the third passages with each other.

In addition, the purpose of positioning the second unit relative to the first unit is to prevent misalignment (step) at the connecting portion between the first and second passages or the connecting portion between the third passages, and since the target portion (the connecting portion between the first and second passages or the connecting portion between the third passages) can be positioned, the occurrence of misalignment (step) can be effectively prevented compared to when other portions are positioned. As a result, the game balls can flow down smoothly.

Gaming machine k9 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines k6 to k8, a portion of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit, and a receiving portion for receiving a portion of the protruded detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

According to gaming machine k9, in addition to the effects of any one of gaming machines k6 to k8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage is protruded toward the second downstream unit, and a receiving portion for receiving the protruding part of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream passage. Therefore, the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit can be positioned by the engagement between the detection sensor and the receiving portion, while the part of the detection sensor is prevented from protruding outward.
The second unit as a whole can be made smaller.

Gaming machine k10 is characterized in that, among gaming machines k1 to k6, the first unit has a second ball inlet formed to allow a gaming ball to enter, and a third passage through which a gaming ball entered into the second ball inlet passes is formed in the second unit at least between the second branch passages.

According to gaming machine k10, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines k1 to k9, a third passage through which a gaming ball entered into the second ball entrance passes is formed in the second unit at least between the second branch passages, thereby making it possible to reduce the size of the second unit.

Gaming machine k11, in any one of gaming machines k1 to k10, is characterized in that a bent portion is formed in the second passage that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit, and an erect portion is erected from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outside of the bend in the bent portion, and the wall portion on the outside of the bend is inclined so as to be positioned on the back side of the second unit as it proceeds in the direction in which the gaming ball flows downstream.

According to the gaming machine k11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines k1 to k10, a bent portion is formed in the second passage, which is bent from the front side to the back side of the second unit,
The standing portion is erected from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bend in the bent portion, and the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it moves toward the flow direction of the game ball, so that the game ball flowing down the bent portion of the second passage can be easily seen by the player. That is, the standing portion is erected from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bend in the bent portion, so that the rigidity of the passage is increased to improve durability, and the game ball can be guided along the erected tip of the standing portion to smoothly flow down the bent portion, while the standing portion is located in front of the game ball in a front view, so that the game ball is hidden by the standing portion and the visibility of the game ball is reduced. On the other hand, the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it moves toward the flow direction of the game ball, so that the rigidity and the guide of the game ball can be ensured, and the thickness of the standing portion in the front-to-rear direction can be thinned, so that the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<Concept of the invention using the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 as examples>
A gaming machine including a first passage member through which game balls pass, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which game balls flowing down from the first passage member pass,
A gaming machine l1, characterized in that at least the bottom upstream end on the bottom side and the side upstream end on the side side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the gaming ball.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a first passage member through which the gaming balls pass, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which the gaming balls flowing down from the first passage member pass (for example, JP 2012-5783 A).
In the structure connecting the passage member and the second passage member, misalignment between the two is unavoidable, so a step is formed at the connecting portion between the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member, which may hinder the smooth flow of game balls.

In contrast, in the gaming machine l1, at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream end of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the gaming ball,
The timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom side (bottom upstream end) can be made different from the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side side (side upstream end). This prevents the game ball from being simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side, and disperses the effects, allowing the game ball to flow down (pass) more smoothly.

A gaming machine l2, in which the upstream end of the side surface includes a position spaced from the upstream end of the bottom surface by the radius of the gaming ball in the gaming machine l1.

According to gaming machine l2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine l1, the upstream end of the side surface includes a position spaced from the upstream end of the bottom surface by the radius of the gaming ball, so that when the gaming ball rolls (flows down) from the first passage member to the second passage member, the gaming ball can be inscribed in the upstream end of the side surface. In other words, the position of the step on the bottom surface side that affects the gaming ball and the position of the step on the side surface side can be reliably made different in the passing direction of the gaming ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the gaming ball from being affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and it is easy to disperse their effects, so that
This allows the game balls to flow down (pass through) more smoothly.

Gaming machine l3, characterized in that, in gaming machine l1 or l2, the bottom downstream end on the bottom side and the side downstream end on the side side of the downstream ends of the first passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, the first passage member has a protruding piece that protrudes from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member and whose protruding tip is the side downstream end, and the second passage member has a recessed portion recessed into its upstream end to receive the protruding piece and whose portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the side wall upstream end.

According to the gaming machine l3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines l1 or l2, the first passage member has a protruding piece that protrudes from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member and the protruding tip is the side downstream end, and the second passage member has a recess that is recessed in its upstream end to receive the protruding piece and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the side wall upstream end.
The downstream end of the side surface and the downstream end of the bottom surface of the passage member can be brought close to the upstream end of the side surface and the downstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. That is, when the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed at a different position downstream in the passing direction of the game ball from the upstream end of the bottom surface, the game ball can be guided by the protruding piece of the first passage member until the game ball reaches the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the protruding piece has a relatively low rigidity and may break, but according to the gaming machine I3, since the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (i.e., the upstream side in the passing direction of the gaming ball), even if the protruding piece breaks, the bottom upstream end and the side upstream end of the second passage member can be maintained in different positions in the passing direction of the gaming ball, and the timing at which the gaming ball passes through the step on the bottom side (bottom upstream end) can be made different from the timing at which the gaming ball passes through the step on the side side (side upstream end). This prevents the gaming ball from being simultaneously affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side, and distributes the effects, so that the gaming ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.
It can be done.

In addition, according to the gaming machine l3, the gaming machine protruding piece is attached to the first passage member, and the recess is attached to the second passage member,
Since each of them is formed, the side of the recess abuts against the protruding piece, and thus the upward positional deviation of the second passage member relative to the first passage member can be restricted. That is, in a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to bounce up when it runs up, and therefore, compared to the reverse step (a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is lower than the downstream end of the first passage member), it is more likely to hinder the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, as in the gaming machine l3, being able to restrict the upward positional deviation of the second passage member relative to the first passage member can suppress the formation of a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, and is particularly effective in the smooth flow down of the game ball.

A gaming machine l4, characterized in that in the gaming machine l3, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed at an angle with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine l4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine l3, since the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed at an incline with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball, the gaming ball that hits the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can slide along the incline and is less likely to be bounced back, compared to the case where the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the gaming ball to pass (flow down) smoothly.

A gaming machine l5, in which at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member in the gaming machine l1 or l2 is formed at an angle with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine l5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines l1 or l2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the upstream end of the side surface of the upstream end of the second passage member can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball.
Compared to a case where the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed perpendicular to the passage direction of the game machine, the game ball that hits the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can slide along the slope and is less likely to be bounced back. As a result, the game ball can be made to pass (flow down) smoothly.

In this case, according to the gaming machine l5, the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined, so that the occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the passage member can be ensured, compared to, for example, a case where the second passage member is formed to have a shape (step-like) with a protruding piece or a recess. Also, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape change of the cavity (hollow part) of the injection molding die can be made gentle, so that air bubble trapping (air entrapment) and filling failure can be suppressed, and moldability can be improved.

A gaming machine 16, in which the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member in the gaming machine 14 or 15 is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine l6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines l4 and l5, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine, so that the gaming ball that hits the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member can be pushed toward the bottom surface. That is, the gaming ball can be prevented from being bounced up and bounding at the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the gaming ball to pass (flow down) smoothly.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning port unit 550 as an example>
A gaming machine m1 is characterized in that it comprises an entry port formed to allow a gaming ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported on either side of the entry port to open or close the entry port, a driving means for generating a driving force to rotate the pair of wing members, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, and that when the pair of wing members are displaced in the opening direction from the outside, the transmission mechanism is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction.

The ball entrance opening is formed so that the game ball can enter the ball entrance opening, and a pair of blade members are disposed on either side of the ball entrance opening. A driving means applies a driving force to the pair of blade members to open or close the pair of blade members.
A gaming machine is known that is equipped with a regulating means that, when a pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, is positioned at an allowable position that allows the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry opening, and, when the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, is positioned at a restricting position that restricts the entry of the gaming ball into the ball entry opening (for example, JP 2011-172833 A).

According to this gaming machine, when the pair of blade members are opened by the driving force of the drive means, the restricting means is disposed in a permissive position, so that a gaming ball that has passed between the pair of blade members can be allowed to enter the ball entrance. On the other hand, when the pair of blade members are closed by the driving force of the drive means, the restricting means is disposed in a restricting position, so that if the pair of blade members are forcibly opened from the outside, the gaming ball can be restricted from entering the ball entrance.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted.
For example, since the pair of wing members can be forcibly opened from the outside and the regulating means can be displaced from the regulating position to the permissible position, there was a problem in that the effect of preventing game balls from being illegally inserted into the ball entry port was insufficient.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine m1, when the pair of wing members are displaced in the opening direction from the outside, the transmission mechanism is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction, so that the wing members can be prevented from being forcibly opened. Therefore, it is easy to regulate the illegal entry of game balls into the ball entry port.

In gaming machine m1, the transmission mechanism comprises a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, a protrusion is protruded from the slide member or one of the pair of wing members, and a sliding groove into which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed into the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members, a receiving portion is recessed into the inner wall of the sliding groove for receiving the protrusion when the slide member is slidably displaced to a position where the wing member is closed, and when the protrusion is received in the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted.

According to gaming machine m2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine m1, a receiving portion is recessed on the inner wall of the sliding groove to receive the protrusion when the slide member is slid to a position where the feather member is closed, and when the protrusion is received in the receiving portion, the rotation of the feather member is restricted, thereby preventing the feather member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

A gaming machine m3, characterized in that in the gaming machine m2, the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is a direction approximately perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine m3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine m2, the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that even if the wing members are displaced in the opening direction from the outside and the external force is transmitted to the sliding member via the protruding portion and the receiving portion, the sliding displacement component of the sliding member is unlikely to occur. As a result, the wing members can be prevented from being forcibly opened.

Furthermore, the slide member can be disposed approximately parallel to the wing member, which reduces the space required for disposing the wing member and the slide member, thereby ensuring space for disposing other members.

A gaming machine m4, characterized in that in the gaming machine m2 or m3, the slide member is slidably displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the protrusion is received in the receiving portion.

According to gaming machine m4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines m2 or m3, the sliding member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, thereby allowing the protrusion portion to be received in the receiving portion, and therefore the weight (own weight) of the sliding member can be utilized to easily maintain the state in which the protrusion portion is received in the receiving portion.

In the gaming machine m1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, a protruding portion is protruding from the slide member or one of the pair of wing members, and a slide groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members, the rotating member includes an abutment portion and a protruding portion protruding from a tip of the abutment portion, and the slide member is a first portion against which one side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing members. a side abutment portion and an other-side abutment portion arranged opposite the one-side abutment portion at a predetermined distance in the direction of the sliding displacement and abutting the other side of the abutment portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member, and when the wing member is in a closed state, one side of the abutment portion abuts against the one-side abutment portion and the protrusion portion is engaged with the sliding member, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side at least to a position where the other side of the abutment portion abuts against the other-side abutment portion, the engagement of the protrusion portion with the sliding member is released.

According to gaming machine m5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine m1, the rotating member has an abutment portion and a protruding portion protruding from the tip of the abutment portion, and the sliding member has a one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and an other-side abutted portion that is arranged opposite the one-side abutted portion at a predetermined interval in the direction of sliding displacement and with which the other side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member, so that when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, the one-side abutted portion is pushed by one side of the abutment portion as the rotating member rotates, and the sliding member is slidably displaced toward one side, thereby closing the wing member, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side, the other-side abutted portion is pushed by the other side of the abutment portion as the rotating member rotates, and the sliding member is slidably displaced toward the other side, thereby
The vanes are released.

In this case, when the wing members are closed, one side of the abutting portion abuts against the one-side abutted portion and the protruding portion engages with the sliding member, so that the sliding member is restricted from sliding to the other side without rotating the rotating member, thereby preventing the wing members from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side at least to a position where the other side of the abutting portion abuts against the other-side abutted portion, the engagement between the protrusion portion and the sliding member is released, and therefore, by rotating the rotating member further toward the other side, the sliding member can be slid toward the other side and the wing member can be released.

In the gaming machine m1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, a protruding portion is protruded from the slide member or one of the pair of wing members, and a slide groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members, the rotating member includes an abutment portion and an overhanging portion that overhangs from the tip of the abutment portion, and the slide member is configured to move in a direction perpendicular to the abutment portion when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing members. and an other-side abutment portion disposed opposite the one-side abutment portion at a predetermined distance in the direction of the sliding displacement and against which the other side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member, wherein when the wing member is in a closed state, the protrusion portion is disengaged from the sliding member, and when the sliding member is slidably displaced from the closed state of the wing member to a position where the one-side abutment portion abuts against one side of the abutment portion, the protrusion portion engages with the sliding member.

According to gaming machine m6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine m1, the rotating member has an abutment portion and a protruding portion protruding from the tip of the abutment portion, and the sliding member has a one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and an other-side abutted portion that is arranged opposite the one-side abutted portion at a predetermined interval in the direction of sliding displacement and with which the other side of the abutment portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member, so that when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, the one-side abutted portion is pushed by one side of the abutment portion as the rotating member rotates, and the sliding member is slidably displaced toward one side, thereby closing the wing member, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side, the other-side abutted portion is pushed by the other side of the abutment portion as the rotating member rotates, and the sliding member is slidably displaced toward the other side, thereby
The vanes are released.

In this case, when the sliding member is slid from a closed state of the wing member to a position where one side of the abutment portion abuts against one side of the abutment portion, the protrusion portion engages with the sliding member, thereby restricting the sliding member from being slid to the other side without rotating the rotating member.
Therefore, the blade member can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing members are in a closed state, the protruding portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the slide member is slidably displaced toward the other side by further rotating the rotating member toward the other side.
The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhanging portion and the one-side abutting portion needs to be formed into a shape that allows the rotation of the rotating member to the other side, which makes the shape complicated. Therefore, not only does the strength decrease, but there is also a risk that the engagement may be easily released. In contrast, as in the present invention, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so there is no need to form the shape of the overhanging portion and the one-side abutting portion into a shape that allows the rotation of the rotating member to the other side.
Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified and strength ensured, but a shape that makes it easy to maintain the engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

Gaming machine m7 is any one of gaming machines m2 to m6, and is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for a gaming ball entered into the ball entrance, and when the protrusion portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, a part of the slide member is positioned within the passage of the passage member.

According to gaming machine m7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines m2 to m6, it is equipped with a passage member which forms a passage for gaming balls entered into the ball entry port, and when the protrusion portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, a part of the slide member is positioned within the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the protrusion portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the flow down of the gaming balls entered from the ball entry port can be restricted by the slide member.

<Concept of the invention using the prize-winning port unit 930 as an example>
A gaming machine n1 is provided with an entry port formed to allow a gaming ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported on either side of the entry port to open or close the entry port, a driving means for generating a driving force to rotate the pair of wing members, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the gaming machine being characterized in that it further comprises a passage member which forms a passage for a gaming ball entered into the entry port, and a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a ball entrance opening formed to allow a gaming ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported on either side of the ball entrance opening to open or close the ball entrance opening, a drive means that generates a drive force for rotating the pair of wing members, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive means to the pair of wing members (for example, JP 2010-234009 A). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the drive force of the drive means, and the wing members are opened or closed as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other.

In this case, for example, a fraudulent act may be performed by gluing the tip of a thread to a gaming ball, causing the gaming ball to enter through a ball entrance and pass through a passage of a passage member, and when the gaming ball reaches a detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the thread is operated (reeled out and reeled in) to move the gaming ball back and forth, thereby causing the detection sensor to detect the gaming ball multiple times. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that it is difficult to effectively suppress the fraudulent act of gluing the tip of a thread to a gaming ball and causing the detection sensor to detect the gaming ball multiple times.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine n1, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the vane member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, so that the transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the middle part of the string whose tip is attached to the gaming ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that cause the detection sensor to detect the game ball multiple times by moving the game ball back and forth.

In the gaming machine n1, the transmission mechanism is characterized in that the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and the slide member is provided with a frictional contact portion that rubs against the edge of the passage member.

According to gaming machine n2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine n1, the transmission mechanism has a sliding member that crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and the sliding member is provided with a frictional contact portion that rubs against the edge of the passage member, so that it is possible to cut off any illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entry port.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball enters the game ball while the wing member is in an open state, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the frictional contact portion of the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member,
The middle part of the thread, the tip of which is attached to the game ball, is displaced together with the friction part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the friction part is brought into friction contact with the edge of the passage member, the thread can be cut between the friction part and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

The frictional contact portion of the slide member is preferably made of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be made of a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (the frictional contact portion) may be made of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be made of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the part where the frictional contact portion rubs against) may be made of a metal material. In addition, the frictional contact portion and the part where the frictional contact portion rubs against (the edge of the passage member) are preferably formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In gaming machine n1, the transmission mechanism is characterized by having a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub against each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position.

According to gaming machine n3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine n1, the transmission mechanism is provided with a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub against each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, so that it is possible to cut off any illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entry port.

That is, even if the game ball enters the game machine with the vane members open, the vane members are displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the pair of cutting members cross the passage of the passage member, the middle part of the string whose tip is attached to the game ball is pinched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members are preferably made of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be made of a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (the edges that rub against each other) may be made of a metal material. In addition, the parts of the pair of cutting members that rub against each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

Gaming machine n4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine n2 or n3, the driving means is formed as a solenoid actuator in which the displacement of the driving shaft in a first direction is performed by electromagnetic force and the displacement of the driving shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction is performed by the elastic recovery force of a biasing means, and the displacement of the wing member from the opening position to the closing position is performed by displacing the driving shaft of the driving means in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine n4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines n2 and n3, the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction, that is, by utilizing electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased, and therefore, it is possible to easily cut off the illegal object (e.g., a thread) between the friction part of the slide member and the edge of the passage member.

<Feature A Group> (Points where the player pushes in from the back to the front)
A gaming machine A1, characterized in that the operating device has an operating means that is pressed by a player, the operating device is capable of being configured into a first state under normal circumstances and a second state in which the operating means is positioned in a position that protrudes further from the player than in the first state, the operating device is equipped with a biasing means that biases the operating means from the first state toward the second state, and the direction in which the operating means is pressed in the second state is from the back to the front as viewed by the player.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured with an operating means that can be operated by the player that moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (see, for example, JP 2014-144218 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the performance is performed in a manner that heightens the player's sense of anticipation of a big win at the advanced position, so the player is likely to operate the operating means at the advanced position with high acceleration, and so the operating means needed to be designed with high strength. In this case, there was a problem that the operating means became heavy overall, and the drive means that drives the operating means became larger.

In contrast, with gaming machine A1, when performing a push operation in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is from the back to the front as viewed by the player, so the part that cannot be operated with a simple up and down linear movement is made to slip between the player's hand and the operating means, allowing the momentum of the push to be released.

In addition, when a player's playing posture requires pushing and operating the operating means with their shoulders or elbows as the main force, it becomes difficult to apply force toward the player, allowing the player to naturally apply less force to the operating means.

Gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the operating device in gaming machine A1 is rotatable around an axis located at the back side of the player, is configured to be tiltable up and down around the axis, and has a tilting means having the operating means, and the tilting means positions the operating means facing away from the player in the second state.

According to gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and the operating means is positioned facing away from the player in the second state, thereby preventing the player from slamming the operating means when in the second state.

In addition, by placing a hand near the shaft and tilting the hand using that position as a fulcrum, the operating means can be easily pushed in, providing a new method of pushing that is less likely to accelerate, and preventing damage to the operating device due to the player's pushing operation.

Examples of new pressing operation methods include a method in which the outer side of the left little finger is placed near the axis rod, the hand is positioned near the operating means with the palm raised up and down, and the thumb is tilted down toward the operating means, or a method in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the axis rod, the palm is positioned facing the operating means, and the palm is dropped toward the operating means.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that in the first state of gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the up and down direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A1 and A2, gaming machine A3 allows the operating means to be pushed in the up and down direction in the first state, ensuring operability in the first state while preventing damage caused by the pushing operation in the second state.

A gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the operating device in the gaming machine A3 is configured so that the operating means can operate automatically, and is equipped with a driving means that generates a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device acts in the direction in which the player pushes in and does not act in the opposite direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 has the advantage that the driving force of the driving means that automatically operates the operating device acts only in the direction of the pushing operation, preventing the driving force from acting in a direction opposite to the player's operation. This makes it possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operation.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pressed down, it is possible to prevent the drive means from being subjected to a high load caused by the player pulling the button in the opposite direction when retracting it.

A gaming machine A5 is provided with a maintaining means that is operated by the drive means and that can form a maintaining state that maintains the operating device in a first state or a second state in the gaming machine A4, the drive means having a rotating means that transmits a driving force to the operating means via an eccentric portion, the rotating means can change phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while the maintaining means is in the maintaining state, the range in which the operating means can move when the maintaining state is released is changed between the first phase and the second phase, and the maintaining state can be released by the same rotation in both the first phase and the second phase.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A4, the phase of the drive means can be changed while the maintenance means is in the maintenance state, and in the changed phase, the rotation means is caused to perform a movement that releases the maintenance state, thereby changing the movement width of the operation device moved by the biasing means. Therefore, multiple operating modes can be configured by the biasing means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the biasing direction of the biasing means in the maintaining state, the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases corresponding to the rotational speed of the rotating means, and the operating means moves in accordance with the movement of the maintaining means.A gaming machine A6 is configured in such a manner that the maintaining means is movable in the biasing direction of the biasing means in the maintaining state, the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases corresponding to the rotational speed of the rotating means, and the operating means moves in accordance with the movement of the maintaining means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the gaming machine A6 adds a movement mode of the operating means that moves in the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means, which is caused only by the biasing force, and thus the movement mode of the operating means is limited to one, so that the operating means can be moved in a different manner following the maintaining means, thereby increasing the variety of the movement modes of the operating means. This can increase the attention of the operating device.

A gaming machine A7 is any one of gaming machines A1 to A6, which is provided with a light-emitting means disposed inside the operating device and which emits light toward a player, and which is characterized in that, compared to the first state, in the second state, the area of the operating means is reduced from the player's viewpoint and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light-emitting means is expanded.

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines A1 to A6, it is equipped with a light-emitting means, and compared to the first state, in the second state, from the player's viewpoint, the range of light emitted by the light-emitting means is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, so that the player can focus his/her attention on the light and the presentation effect is improved, and by making it difficult to press the operating means unless aimed, the force required by the player to operate it can be reduced.

Gaming machine A8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light-emitting means changes as the operating means moves toward or away from the display means between the operating means and the display means.

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and as the operating means moves towards or away from the display means between the operating means and the display means, the area of the exposed portion of the light-emitting means changes, thereby preventing the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image on the display means difficult to see.

<Feature B> (Points that allow for rapid succession of hits while still providing small repulsive force under normal conditions)
In an operating device having an operating means that allows a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, the device has a first state and a second state in which the range of operation up to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state.
a first driving means for generating a driving force to move the operating means from the second state to the first state, and a biasing means for generating a biasing force to move the operating means from the first state to the second state, the gaming machine being characterized in that it further comprises a second driving means for generating a driving force to move the operating means from the first state to the second state in response to the operation of a player.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP 2014-14421 A).
(See Publication No. 8.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the force for returning the operating means to its initial position is generated by a spring, and the automatic operation of the operating means is performed by a drive motor. In this case, however, the return of the operating means becomes slower, and when the player operates the operating means quickly, the operating means does not keep up with the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to perform repeated tapping operations.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the biasing force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the first driving means is used to move the operating means, while the second driving means can be used when it is desired to return the operating means quickly.
The operating means can be pushed back by the driving means to make the return faster, allowing the player to enjoy repeated tapping operations.

In the gaming machine B1, a rapid-fire determination means is provided for determining whether or not a rapid-fire operation is being performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke of the operating means within a specified time, and the detection value of the rapid-fire determination means is used to determine whether or not to drive the second driving means.

According to gaming machine B2, whether or not to drive the second drive means is determined based on the detection value of the rapid-fire determination means, so that the second drive means operates even when the player is not performing a rapid-fire operation (for example, performing a single push operation or a long push operation), thereby preventing the player from feeling the strain of having his hand pushed back.

A gaming machine B3 is provided with an end detection means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether the operating means has been placed at the end position, a position difference detection means for detecting whether the operating means has been placed at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position, and a movement direction determination means for determining the direction of movement of the operating means from the time relationship between the detection values of the end detection means and the detection values of the position difference detection means, and is characterized in that the second drive means is driven when the movement direction determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction of returning from the push-in end to the first state.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction returning from the end of the push-in to the first state, that is, at the timing when the player's hand moves in the direction away from the button, a load pushing back against the operating means can be generated in synchronization with the player's movement.

Therefore, the second drive device operates in a direction opposite to the direction of movement of the player's hand, thereby preventing a high load from being placed on the player's hand.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, it is possible to effectively utilize the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

Gaming machine B5 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B3, and is provided with a support frame supporting the operating means, the second drive means comprising a drive motor which rotates an eccentric weight, and support means which elastically supports the drive motor on the support frame, the support means being configured such that the drive force which moves the operating means from the first state position to the second state position becomes greater as the operating means approaches the terminal position, and the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame when the operating means is positioned at the terminal position, generating a drive force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force of the second driving means is generated separately as a driving force generated by the support means and a driving force generated by the abutment of the eccentric weight with the support frame, so that the driving force applied to the operating means can be adjusted while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor. At this time, it is not necessary to control the start or stop of the rotation of the drive motor, and it can be adjusted while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

In gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves toward the support frame in the movement direction of the operating means and abuts against the support frame based on the operating means being placed at the terminal position.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight approaches the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and abuts against the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the abutment can be used to move the drive motor in the moving direction of the operating means away from the support frame. As a result, the support means supporting the drive motor moves in the direction away from the support frame (direction approaching the operating means), so that the drive force pushing back the operating means can be further increased.

<Feature C Group> (Points on using the VCM as a braking device and a vibration production device)
A gaming machine C1 is provided with a detection sensor that detects a position near the end position of an operating means, the detection sensor being composed of a plurality of sensors, and is provided with a measurement means that measures the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detection sensor, a threshold determination means that determines whether the measurement value measured by the measurement means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and a repulsion means that generates a driving force in the opposite direction to the pushing direction of the operating means, wherein the driving force generated by the repulsion means is greater when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold, compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP 2014-14421 A).
(See Publication No. 8.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if emphasis is placed on light operation by the player, the operating resistance is low, and there is a risk that the operating means may be damaged by the player's operation, whereas if the operating means is supported more firmly, the movement of the operating means itself can be slowed down, and the possibility of the operating means being damaged can be reduced, but the force required for the player to operate the operating means increases, and there is a problem that operating the operating means is a burden for players with little strength.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold determination means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or greater than a threshold, and if it is equal to or greater than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased, so that the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold is reduced, and the operating means is decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsion means can improve operability and prevent damage.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and when a threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, a control is executed to push the voice coil motor to an extended position, and before the operating means is placed in a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor,
A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and by driving the voice coil motor before the operating means is positioned so that it can come into contact with the voice coil motor, the impact that occurs between the operating means and the voice coil motor can be suppressed.

A gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, a control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 or C2, by controlling the current flowing through the voice coil motor to be increased after the operating means and voice coil motor come into contact with each other, it is possible to gradually increase the degree to which the operating means is braked while preventing a large load from occurring at the moment the operating means and voice coil motor come into contact with each other, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player when operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the operating means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operating means by using spring elasticity.

According to gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that a driving force can be generated without time delay even when the movement speed of the operating means is high.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means opposite the side that comes into contact with the operating means is narrowed when the value measured by the threshold determination means is above a predetermined threshold, compared to when the value measured by the threshold determination means is below the predetermined threshold.

According to gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means opposite the end that abuts the operating means is narrowed, so that the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased when the operating speed of the operating means is faster.

<Feature D group> (The clutch cuts off the transmission of driving force, preventing damage to the driving means)
A gaming machine D1 having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device comprising: a driving means for generating a driving force to operate the operating means; a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means; and a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the release means releasing the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmission means reaches or exceeds a predetermined amount.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP 2014-14421 A).
(See Publication No. 8.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the operating means is automatically operated for a performance, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk of a large load being generated in the drive system.

In contrast, according to gaming machine D1, the release means is configured to release the transmission of the drive force when the load generated between the drive means and the operating means via the transmission means reaches or exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if a player operates the operating means when the operating means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is released (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed.

Gaming machine D2 is characterized in that in gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and in a second direction which is opposite to the first direction, and the release means functions to release the drive regardless of whether the drive is in the first direction or the second direction.

Here, in the case where whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be released depends on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the player operates the operating means to drive the driving means in a direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released, a large load may be placed on the driving means, which reduces the freedom of presentation when operating the operating means.

When the button is driven between the first and second positions, the locking member that locks the button is moved in the release direction or in the direction opposite to the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates forward or backward. In this case, the button can be operated in two ways (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the drive force must be cut off in both cases.

In contrast, gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine D1, can release (disconnect) the transmission of driving force in both driving directions, regardless of the driving direction of the driving means, thereby improving the freedom of operation in the presentation in which the operating means is automatically operated.

In addition, as a method of releasing the transmission, for example, the clutch may move in a direction intersecting with the operating direction of the drive means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the direction of the rotation axis or in the radial direction.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D1 or D2, it is provided with a biasing means for biasing the driving means and the transmission means into a state in which a driving force can be transmitted, and the release means is a convex portion formed at the abutment portion between the driving means and the transmission means, and is provided with engaging teeth that transmit the driving force when they are in an engaged state, and the engaging teeth are configured with a shape that is inclined relative to the abutment surface so that both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means become tapered as they move away from the abutment surface.

According to gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 or D2, the biasing means presses the drive means and the transmission means together, and at the contact surface against which they are pressed, the release means transmits the drive force in an engaged state, while both sides facing the operating direction of the drive means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined in a tapered manner as they move away from the contact surface, so that the engagement of the engaging teeth allows the transmission means to be separated from the drive means, thereby releasing the transmission of the drive force.

In addition, a biasing force is constantly applied between the drive means and the transmission means by the biasing means, and when the transmission means separates from the drive means, a load is applied by the biasing force in the direction of movement of the drive means via the engagement teeth, so that a sudden change in the load applied to the drive means between a state in which the drive force is transmitted and a state in which the transmission is released can be suppressed.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging teeth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmission means as the transmission means becomes farther away from the drive means, so that it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large.

Additionally, in the released state, resistance periodically returns, rather than being completely removed upon release, allowing the player to begin operating the button within a short period of time after releasing it.

That is, as a "performance," when the button is activated and the player is holding the button,
If the player releases the button midway through the action, the button will stop moving for a long period of time, and the action will start from the end of that phase.
This reduces the sense that "things are starting to move now that players are no longer burdened."

In contrast, with the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his/her hand and the load is released, which creates the feeling that the player has started moving because the load on the player has been released.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is:
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is formed from interlocking sawtooth shapes.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, it is possible to facilitate early return of the release means to the engagement position with the transmission means when the load from the player is released.
In other words, if there is a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means move toward and away from each other at the tip of the engagement surface, it is possible to prevent the transmission means and the release means from butting against each other at that plane, thereby preventing the release means from stopping its movement along the direction in which it moves toward and away from the transmission means. Therefore, it is possible to start operating the operating means early after the load from the player is released.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines D1 to D4, the operating mode of the operating means is different when the drive means is operated continuously in the forward direction and when the drive means is operated continuously in the reverse direction.

According to gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D4, while multiple operating modes of the operating means are provided, the transmission of driving force can be released without being limited to any one of the operating modes.

In gaming machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is such that when the drive means operates in a forward direction or a reverse direction, the operating mode for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the drive means is similar, but the operation after the predetermined period has elapsed is different.

According to gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D5, when the operating mode of the operating means is such that the operating mode of the driving means has a different operating direction, the operating mode for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the driving means is similar, but the operation after the predetermined period has elapsed is different, thereby improving the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by linking the difference in the operation mode of the operating means with information that benefits the player, such as the probability of winning a big win, the player can be made to watch the operation of the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operation mode of the operating means changes.

Furthermore, since the difference in the operating mode is caused by the difference in the operating direction of the drive means, if the operating direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the likelihood of winning a jackpot, etc., without watching the operation of the operating means. However, since the drive means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from vibration sounds, etc., it is not possible to confirm the operating direction of the drive means in advance, and the player can watch the operation of the operating means.

<Feature E Group> (The position of the cam protrusion is changed based on the rotation of the cam)
A gaming machine having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device comprising: a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means; a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means; a first means for suppressing a change in position of the operating means from the first position, configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position; a biasing means for biasing the operating means in a direction from the first position toward the second position; and a terminal means for forming a changeable end of movement of the operating means moving from the first position toward the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means. The first means suppresses the change in position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means, and comprises a release load means for applying a load to the first means for releasing the engagement of the first means with the operating means, and the release of the engagement by the release load means and the change in the end of movement of the operating means at the terminal means are performed by a single driving means.
1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a movable operating means operated by a cam is fixed at a first position, and the fixed state is released by a release load means, so that the operating means is extended by the biasing force of the biasing means, and the displacement amount of the extended operation can be changed by a terminal means (for example, see JP 2014-144218 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement amount of the extended operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam at the time of release of the fixation, so that the phase of the cam at the time of release of the fixation is changed in various ways, and therefore the cam that moves the operating means and the release load means that releases the fixation are operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that multiple driving means are required, and the arrangement space for the driving means is large.

In contrast, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixed operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. This allows the drive means for changing the terminal position of the operation means by the terminal means and the drive means for moving the release load means to be used together, so that the number of drive means can be reduced.

A gaming machine E2, in which the change in position of the release load means is effected based on the operation of the transmission means in the gaming machine E1.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the change in the position of the releasing load means can be caused based on the operation of the transmission means, so that the state of the releasing load means can be determined by detecting the amount of operation of the transmission means. This makes it possible to reduce the number of detection means such as position sensors that detect the state of the releasing load means, and therefore the number of parts.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, there is a method of shifting the rotational periods of the cam and the protrusion, or a method of desynchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion when the cam is placed at a predetermined phase and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion at other phases.
Illustrated.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means, by the load applied from the first means,
A gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is arranged operatively relative to the transmission means, and the operation of the release load means switches whether the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously or not.

According to gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine E2, a release load means is arranged so as to be operable relative to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the operation of the release load means switches whether the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously or not, so that the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding any components.

In gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means includes a rotating second rotating member, and the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation periods.

According to gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but have different rotation periods, so that multiple types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by the second rotating means abutting against the first means at a predetermined phase.

According to this configuration, when the operation means is maintained in the first position, the action of the first means is released and the operation means moves toward the second position, and multiple types of end positions can be prepared.
For example, a similar configuration can be used to realize a performance in which the terminal position is gradually moved away from the first position, or a performance in which the terminal position is gradually moved closer to the first position.

<Feature F Group> (Vibration device supported by a soft case)
A gaming machine F1 is provided with an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating means being configured so that the operating means can move between a first position and a second position reached by the player operating the operating means from the first position, a vibration means having a vibrating vibration unit, and a receiving means arranged so that it can come into contact with the vibration unit, wherein when the operating means is arranged at the first position, the vibration unit is in a separated state so that it cannot come into contact with the receiving means, and when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibration unit is in an abutting state so that it can come into contact with the receiving means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player and a vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,
(See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the vibration means vibrates, regardless of whether the operating means is being operated or not, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine, and is then transmitted to the player who touches the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Therefore, when performing an effect in which vibration is transmitted immediately after the operating means is operated,
The vibration means must be operated after the operation of the operating means is detected. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, the vibration means must be operated before the player releases his/her hand from the operating means. Depending on the manner of operation of the player (for example, the manner of operation in which the operating means is pressed in and then released), the start of vibration may not occur in time before the player releases his/her hand, which causes a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine F1, whether the vibration unit abuts against the receiving means changes depending on whether the operating means is placed in the first position or is operated by the player to place it in the second position, so even if the vibration unit is vibrated continuously, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operating means. Also, since the vibration of the vibration unit occurs before the player presses it, the vibration unit can be vibrated before the player releases his/her hand regardless of the manner of the player's operation, and the vibration can be transmitted to the player.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibration means is arranged in the separated state to extend into the occupied area that the operating means occupies when the operating means is arranged in the second position, and when the operating means moves to the second position, the vibration means is moved out of the occupied area, thereby changing to the abutting state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, and thus the state changes from the separated state to the contact state. Therefore, the contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibration unit can be changed depending on the degree of movement of the operating means.
The strength of the vibration transmitted can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the vibration transmitted in response to the strength of the player's operation can be achieved by vibrating the vibration means in the same manner, without any particular change in the drive mode.

Gaming machine F3 is the gaming machine F1 or F2, characterized in that the vibration means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 and F2, the support means can be used to position the receiving means while suppressing the transmission of vibrations from the vibration means to the receiving means. This allows the receiving means and the vibration means to be spaced apart, preventing the transmission of vibrations and suppressing the displacement of the vibration means caused by vibrations.

Gaming machine F4 is characterized in that, in the abutting state of gaming machine F3, the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibration section.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be utilized to increase the load generated when the vibration part and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the support means can provide momentum to the vibration part when it moves in the direction approaching the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the support means has a deformation resistance along the movement direction of the operating means,
The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means is lower than that in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction.

According to gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine F3, the direction in which the support means deforms can be finely set when the operating means is operated and interferes with the support means, due to differences in the deformation resistance of the support means.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is small, the amount of expansion and contraction of the support means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibration part and the receiving means can be made different.

Examples of methods for varying the deformation resistance include, when the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, extending rubber feet along the direction of movement of the operating means; when the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, manufacturing the rubber member by two-color molding to vary the deformation resistance for each direction; and, when the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, forming the support means from a rail that guides the operating means to move in a direction along the direction of movement and a coil spring that biases the vibration means along the direction of movement of the operating means.

Gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the portion with which the vibration portion abuts in gaming machine F3 is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means separate from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player via the operating means, but via a receiving means which is a means separate from the operating means, so that the vibration of the vibration means can be prevented from being transmitted to the drive means via the operating means and the transmission means, and therefore the drive means can be prevented from being placed under a load, thereby improving the durability of the drive means.

In addition, since vibrations can be prevented from being transmitted to the hands of the player operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from being startled by the vibrations and stopping the operation.

Examples of receiving means include parts of the frame of the gaming machine near the upper tray where the gaming balls are supplied, the edge of the glass frame, and other parts that a player may touch unconsciously while playing, as well as storage parts that partially surround the operating means.

<Feature G group> (One-touch attachment of cam and shaft. Shape (elastic deformation) possible at attachment part)
A gaming machine G1 has an operating means operated by a player, the operating means being configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, the operating device comprising: a driving means for generating a driving force to drive the operating means; and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, the transmission means comprising a deformation section that elastically deforms when overloaded.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force to drive the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means (see, for example, JP 2014-144218 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the player holds the operating means in a fixed position, the driving force generated by the driving means to drive the operating means may cause damage to the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operating means,
There has been a problem in that a load accumulates at the connection between the transmission means and the drive means, and this connection may be damaged.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine G1, when an overload is applied to the operating device, the deformation part of the transmission means elastically deforms, thereby reducing the load applied to the connection part between the operating means and the transmission means and the connection part between the drive means and the transmission means.

A gaming machine G2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine G1, the transmission means comprises a rotatably supported cam member, the deformation portion forms a connecting portion with the rotation shaft of the cam member, and a fixing force to the rotation shaft is generated by the elasticity of the deformation portion.

According to the gaming machine G2, the deformation portion serves as a portion that elastically deforms the cam member relative to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and serves as a portion that generates a support force for the cam member relative to the rotation shaft.
Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by sharing the same function. For example, a separate fixing member such as an e-ring can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member has a convex portion that is convexly arranged parallel to the rotation axis, the convex portion is connected to the operating means, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotation axis tilts relative to the cam member.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can be achieved, for example, by displacing the protruding portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. In this case, however, it becomes difficult to configure the cam member and the protruding portion as one member, and there is a risk of the number of parts increasing.

In contrast, according to gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotation axis tilts relative to the cam member, so that the cam member can be easily constructed from a single component, and the components can be simplified, compared to when the convex portion is slidably moved relative to the cam member.

In the gaming machine G3, the resistance to elastic deformation of the deformation portion is greater in a second rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated around a straight line perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the convex portion and the extension direction of the rotation shaft, compared to a first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated around an axis that is a straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the convex portion.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformation part different for each direction, the state after the deformation part is elastically deformed can displace the protruding tip of the protruding part in a direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member compared to the state before the elastic deformation when viewed in the rotation axis direction. As a result, the protruding part of the cam member can be displaced along the direction in which the protruding part is about to move, and the load generated between the protruding part and the operating means can be alleviated by the elastic deformation of the deformation part.

A gaming machine G5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machines G3 or G4, it is provided with a friction member that is arranged a predetermined distance apart along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and when the deformation portion elastically deforms, the posture of the cam member changes and the cam member and the friction member abut.

According to gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformation portion elastically deforms, causing the cam member to change posture and bring the cam member into contact with the friction member, thereby increasing the operating resistance of the cam member itself and thereby reducing the load applied to the connection portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 is any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, characterized in that it is provided with a detection means for detecting an inclination displacement of at least a portion of the cam member relative to the axis.

Here, in a situation where an overload is applied to the operating device and the operating means is not operating while the driving means is operating, for example, when detecting the occurrence of an overload based on the deviation between the displacement predicted by the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period of time before detecting the occurrence of an overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means that detects the deviation in displacement is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complex and expensive the configuration of the detection means becomes. Therefore, there was a problem in that it was difficult to configure the detection means to detect the occurrence of an overload at low cost and at an early stage.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member has been inclined relative to the axis, so that it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred as soon as the detection means detects at least a part of the cam member without the need to drive the drive means for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detection means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Feature H group> (Structure to prevent balls from rattling)
This game machine H1 is provided with a foul ball passage through which foul balls that flow back down toward the launching device among game balls launched into a game area can pass, and is characterized in that the foul ball passage is provided with a one-way obstruction means that allows the game balls flowing down to pass through and obstructs the progress of objects flowing backward.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a thread cutter is provided inside the guide path that guides the gaming ball from the upper tray to the launching device, and is equipped with a function to prevent fraudulent acts (cutting the thread) performed by shooting the gaming ball connected to the thread into the playing area (for example, JP 2015-02
(See Patent Publication No. 4179.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the string is pressed against the thread cutting teeth when the ball is released, and the string is cut by the tension generated at that time. If the strength of the game ball released is weak, the game ball may be returned to the player as a foul ball without the string being completely cut.
Therefore, for example, a cheating tool can be prepared with game balls connected to both ends of a string, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the string can be fired with a weak firing strength to send it into the foul ball passage, and while holding the one game ball that has been returned to the player, the other game ball connected to the other end of the string can be shot into the play area.This can remove the string from the guide path and create a state in which the one game ball and the other game ball are connected by the string through the foul ball passage, which can cause the problem that an external load can be applied to the thread connected to the other game ball, allowing the other game ball placed in the play area to be manipulated and an illegal advantage to be obtained.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act is committed by using a thread guided into the gaming area through the foul ball passage to put a load on the other gaming ball, the one-way obstruction means obstructs the movement of the thread in the reverse direction of the gaming ball, making it difficult to generate an illegal advantage.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bending portion that bends the flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut early.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion is provided with a load means on the inner corner side of the bend that does not apply a load to the game ball flowing down and applies a load to the object flowing backward.
.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to the object (for example, a thread-like member) flowing backward by the load means.

Gaming machine H4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H3, the load means is disposed in a recessed portion recessed with a width less than the diameter of a gaming ball.

According to gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine H3, by preventing the gaming ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, it is possible to avoid a collision between the load means and the gaming ball, and prevent damage to the load means.

Gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H3 or H4, it is provided with a restricting means for restricting movement of said load means outwardly of said foul ball passage.

According to gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines H3 or H4, the regulating means regulates the movement of the load means outwardly of the foul ball passage, so that when a load is generated between the thread-like member and the load means, the load means deforms outwardly of the foul ball passage, thereby preventing the load applied to the member on the thread from weakening.

Gaming machine H6 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines H1 to H5, it is provided with a receiving tray which is the tray where the foul ball first arrives at the front side of the front door, and the payout ball discharge section which discharges the gaming balls paid out from the payout device into the receiving tray is located above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball paid out from the payout device passes just before the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, so that in the event of a fraudulent act of applying load to another gaming ball by using a thread guided into the playing area through the foul ball passage, the paid out gaming ball can be intentionally hit to apply load and reduce the durability of the thread.

Gaming machine H7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball discharge section, which discharges gaming balls paid out from the payout device into a receiving tray, which is the tray that the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is lower than the lower end of the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines H1 to H6, when a fraudulent act is committed in which a thread guided into the gaming area through a foul ball passage is used to put a load on another gaming ball, the gaming ball that is paid out can more easily damage the thread.

<Feature I> (Board surface holding structure)
A gaming machine I1 comprising: a gaming means used during play; and a receiving means that is open on one side facing the gaming means and can receive the gaming means from that side, the receiving means comprising a state change means that can change the gaming means from an unusable state in which the gaming means cannot be used to a usable state in which the gaming means can be used, the state change means comprising an approach means that approaches the gaming means from the one side when the gaming means is put into the usable state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a fixing means that is rotatable in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game board and changes state between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame (see, for example, JP 2005-230420 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the fixing means is configured to change state only after the game board is pushed into the position for use, so if the game board is only half-pushed in, it becomes necessary to repeat the work of pushing it in again, which may reduce work efficiency.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is provided with an approaching means that approaches the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is put into a usable state. Therefore, even if the pushing of the gaming board is halfway, the approaching means abuts against the gaming board and applies a pushing force,
This has the effect of enabling the game board to be pushed into a position for use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state change means displaces the gaming means to one side when the state change means changes to an unusable state in which the gaming means is unusable.

According to gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine I1, when the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side), thereby improving the work efficiency of the operation of removing the gaming means.

Gaming machine I3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state change means causes the approach means to retreat to the outside of the gaming means when the state change means renders the gaming means unusable.

According to gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines I1 or I2, the approaching means is retracted outside the gaming means, thereby improving the work efficiency of the work of removing the gaming means, and since this is done in conjunction with making the gaming means unusable, the work efficiency can be further improved.

Gaming machine I4, in any one of gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the state change means is provided with abutment means that receives a load from the playing means when the state is changed to the usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, the state-changing means changes to a usable state when the contact means receives a load from the gaming means, so that the state of the state-changing means can be changed to a usable state in a series of steps by pressing the gaming means against the state-changing means.

Gaming machine I5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported on one side of the receiving means by an axis and is configured to be received by the receiving means by bringing the other side close to it, and the state change means is arranged on the other side of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the width dimension of the gaming means is utilized to
A load can be efficiently applied to the contact means via the play means.

Gaming machine I6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines I1 to I5, it is provided with a blocking means for blocking the opening on one side of the receiving means, and the blocking means is provided with a blocking regulation section that makes the opening on one side of the gaming means unblockable when the state change means maintains an unusable state in which the gaming means is unusable.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can determine whether the gaming means is in a usable state or not depending on whether the blocking means can block one opening of the gaming means. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the blocking means blocks one opening of the gaming means even though the gaming means maintains an unusable state.

<Feature J group> (The inverted cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from rattling.)
A gaming machine J1 comprising: a gaming means used during play; and a receiving means that is open on one side facing the gaming means and can receive the gaming means from that side, the receiving means comprising a positioning means that is disposed in a path that connects the gaming means to the outside, the positioning means being configured to be able to prevent the entry of objects from the outside at multiple locations.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a fraud prevention unit to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a piano wire into the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, JP 2016-
(See, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 26573.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the fraud prevention unit is located in only one place, and this causes a problem that the fraud prevention effect is insufficient.

In contrast, in gaming machine J1, a placement means is provided in a path into which the piano wire may be inserted, and the placement means is configured to be able to prevent the piano wire from entering at multiple locations, thereby improving the effectiveness of fraud prevention.

In the gaming machine J1, the placement means includes a first means for suppressing entry of an external member at a first location, and a second means for suppressing entry of an external member at a second location.
A gaming machine J2 characterized by suppressing the intrusion of external components in different ways.

According to gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine J1, the method of preventing the intrusion of external components is different between the first location and the second location of the placement means, so that the intrusion of external components can be further prevented compared to the case where the number of placement means is simply increased.

The method of preventing intrusion from the outside is not limited in any way. For example, a method of preventing intrusion by blocking a path or a method of preventing fraudulent acts by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

A gaming machine J3, in which the placement means in the gaming machine J1 or J2 is provided with an intrusion prevention portion formed from a cup shape that opens outward from the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J1 and J2, the intrusion prevention portion is formed in a cup shape, so that the intruding member can be prevented from intruding further.

In gaming machine J3, the placement means is provided with a support means for supporting electrical wiring, and the support means is positioned downstream of the entry restriction section on the path from the outside to the gaming means.

According to gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine J3, when fraud occurs in which high heat penetrates the entry restriction section, changes that occur in the wiring due to the high heat (such as a break in the wiring due to heat) can be detected, making it easier to achieve the effect of suppressing the entry of external components.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the placement means is configured to place a member inserted from the outside into the game machine.
A gaming machine J5 characterized by having a resolution means that guides a ball to a resolution area far from the gaming means.

According to gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines J1 to J4, the positioning means guides a member that has entered from the outside to a resolution area far from the gaming means, so that even if the degree of entry of the member that has entered from the outside increases, the member that has entered from the outside can be prevented from reaching the gaming means.

<Feature K Group> (The structure of the five-piece decorative plate. Also includes fraud prevention measures)
Gaming machine K1 comprises a first means and a second means arranged opposite each other along a first direction and having at least one side connected, and a third means disposed between the first means and the second means along the first direction, characterized in that the gaming machine K1 further comprises a connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting the first direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with first and second means that are arranged opposite each other and connected by at least one side, and third means that is disposed between the first and second means along a first direction (see, for example, JP 2016-26573 A).
However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the various components are connected using existing methods such as gluing or screwing, and when the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied to the third means, which may cause damage to the third means.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine K1, the connecting direction of the connecting part connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, so that the load applied to the third means from the first direction can be reduced, thereby preventing the third means from being damaged.

A gaming machine (K2) characterized in that, in the gaming machine (K1), the connecting portion is disposed at a distance from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

Gaming machine K3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K1 or K2, it is provided with a connecting means which is connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected by displacing the second means relative to the first means in a third direction close to the connecting means and fitting them together.

According to gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines K1 or K2, it is provided with a connecting means that is connected to other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means is connected and fixed by engagement caused by displacing the second means relative to the first means in a third direction approaching the connecting means, thereby improving resistance to disassembly of the first means and the second means in a direction intersecting the third direction.

Gaming machine K4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K3, the one sides of the first means and the second means are arranged so as to be exposed outward.

According to gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and one side of the second means are exposed to the outside, so that the state of the mating portion can be easily confirmed.
This makes it possible to quickly detect fraudulent acts even if the mating portion is destroyed and the first means and the second means are disassembled.

Gaming machine K5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of the fastening and fixing is the same as the third direction.

According to gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of gaming machines K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction, so that the fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength due to the fastening.

Gaming machine K6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a light irradiating means that irradiates light toward the first means or second means and is fixed to the connected means, and a light guiding means that is fixed to one of the members of the first means or second means and is configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the interior, in any one of gaming machines K3 to K5.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent misalignment between the first means and the second means and the light guiding means.

A gaming machine K7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine K6, a contact means is provided that comes into face-to-face contact with the other member of the first means or the second means in an area facing the light guiding means.

According to gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine K6, a gap of the dimension of the abutment means can be maintained in the opposing area between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means.
This makes it possible to prevent the gap between the other member of the first means or second means and the light-guiding means from changing when the first means or second means is subjected to a load in the opposing direction and displaced.

This makes it possible to prevent the positional relationship between the first means, the second means and the light-guiding means from changing even if the first means or the second means is subjected to a load in the opposing direction when an attempt is made to illegally disassemble the first means or the second means.

<Feature L group> (Point L that utilizes a curved light guiding means. Points not yet achieved)
Gaming machine L1 comprises a light-guiding means that is formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in the direction of irradiation of light passing through the inside, and a projection means that is arranged opposite the light-guiding means and onto which the light that has passed through the light-guiding means is projected, wherein the projection means comprises a concave surface opposing portion that is arranged opposite the concave surface portion of the light-guiding means, and a convex surface opposing portion that is arranged opposite the convex surface portion of the light-guiding means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines equipped with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light incident from an end face (see, for example, JP 2016-26573 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, and therefore there is a problem in that in order to partially change the intensity of the light emitted from the surface, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine L1, the projection means includes a concave surface facing portion and a convex surface facing portion. Therefore, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guiding means is constant, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion have the following characteristics:
The emission intensity of the projection target device can be changed.

In the gaming machine L1, the projection means is characterized in that the concave surface facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex surface facing portion is made of a material that is less light-transmitting than the concave surface facing portion.

According to gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of light passing through the convex opposing portion, it is possible to improve the effect of the light presentation at the concave opposing portion where the light emitted from the light-guiding means is concentrated.

Gaming machine L3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine L2, it is provided with a counter projection means which is arranged on the opposite side of the projected means across the light guiding means and onto which light which has passed through the light guiding means is projected, and that the counter projection means has a portion which is arranged opposite the concave portion of the light guiding means and a portion which is arranged opposite the convex portion of the light guiding means which are formed from a material having approximately the same light transmittance.

According to gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter projection means that is arranged opposite the concave portion of the light guiding means and the portion that is arranged opposite the convex portion of the light guiding means are formed from materials having approximately the same light transmittance, so that by making the same light incident on the light guiding means, the presentation of the light viewed through the projected means and the presentation of the light viewed through the counter projection means can be made different.

<Feature M Group> (Bass reflex speaker layout)
A gaming machine M1 comprising first and second means arranged opposite each other and fixed to each other to form an internal space in a fixed state, an acoustic means disposed with at least a portion thereof inserted into the internal space, and a bending means for forming a bending path in the internal space.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers are arranged on both the left and right ends of the front frame, and effects are produced by sounds output from the speakers (for example, JP 2016-1
In such a gaming machine, the vibration waves traveling toward the rear side of the speaker body are caused to travel to the center position of the gaming machine, and then sent out to the outside of the gaming machine.
While it is easy to create effects that produce low-pitched sounds, there was a problem in that the path length of the vibration waves was determined by the left-right width of the gaming machine.

In contrast, according to gaming machine M1, a bending path is formed in the internal space of the first means and the second means by the bending means, so that by forming a path longer than the length of one side, the restrictions on the left and right width of the gaming machine can be lifted and the vibration wave can travel any distance.

In a gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in a manner in which a load is applied in opposing directions, and the bending means has a protruding portion that protrudes in a rib-like manner from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other, and the protruding tip of the protruding portion abuts against the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion comes into contact with the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, thereby preventing the occurrence of a gap between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means when fastening and fixing, and therefore preventing a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap in the bent path.

Gaming machine M3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine M1 or M2, it has an opening that connects the internal space with the outside, and the opening is blocked by a passing member that connects the internal space with the outside through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means.

According to gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines M1 or M2, the opening is blocked by a passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that the wall constituting the internal space can be properly blocked by passing the passing member from the internal space to the outside, without the need to prepare an additional blocking member.

Gaming machine M4 is characterized in that in gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed on a side closer to the acoustic means than the protruding portion.

According to gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, it is possible to prevent the wiring of the acoustic means from being pinched by the protruding portion and becoming disconnected.

Gaming machine M5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines M1 to M4, it is equipped with a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a performance means that is arranged below the support fastening means and performs performance associated with the game, and that the performance means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines M1 to M4, the support and fastening means is supported from below by the presentation means, so that a heavy object can be used for the support and fastening means without compressing the space used for the presentation.

<Feature N> (movable unit, flowers that rotate in the opposite direction, petals that stop midway)
a base member, a first displacement means supported displaceably on the base member, a driving means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a second displacement means switchable between a following state in which the first displacement means displaces in a displacement direction and a non-following state in which the first displacement means displaces in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means.
Gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it has a third displacement means which is displaced in the opposite direction to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the driving means, at least when the second displacement means is in a following state.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the first displacement means' extension and contraction movement as the first displacement means extends and contracts, while the second displacement means displaces in a direction different from the direction of the first displacement means' extension and contraction movement when the first displacement means operates near the extension end (see, for example, JP 2011-229580 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the first displacement means and the second displacement means have the same displacement direction when the first displacement means extends and contracts, resulting in a slow presentation and a problem in that the presentation effect is insufficient.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means,
Since the displacement means is displaced in the opposite direction to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means, so that the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be made greater than the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

A gaming machine N2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine N1, a resistance means is provided for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change the switching point between the following state and the non-following state.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the action of the resistance means makes it possible to change the switching point between the following state in which the second displacement means operates to follow the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state, thereby increasing the types of the displacement modes of the second displacement means relative to the first displacement means, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Gaming machine N3 is characterized in that in gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by utilizing the driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state.

According to gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means that drives the first displacement means, so that the driving means can be used for both purposes.

Gaming machine N4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means can serve both as a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and as a presentation device that is visible to the player.

Gaming machine N5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine N4, it is provided with a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means so that they can rotate coaxially.

According to gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine N4, the axis means which functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that as the attitude of any one of the first displacement means, the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the attitude of the other members or means also changes accordingly, thereby preventing an excessive increase in displacement resistance.

<Feature O> (use of shell buttons and holes. Points not achieved)
A gaming machine O1 is provided with a first means and a storage means configured to store the first means, the storage means comprising a first opening which is an opening for receiving the first means when storing the first means, and a second opening which is opened with a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player and an upper tray that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down relative to the upper tray (see, for example, JP 2012-048970 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, the foreign object may remain inside and cause a malfunction.

In contrast, the gaming machine O1 has a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the storage means and the first means, so that foreign objects can be easily removed to the outside of the storage means through the second opening, thereby preventing the foreign objects from remaining inside.

A gaming machine O2, characterized in that in the gaming machine O1, the storage means has a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is located on the opposite side of the support portion across the first means.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O1, it is possible to form the second opening while maintaining the support strength of the support portion.

A gaming machine O3, in which the storage means in the gaming machine O1 or O2 has a low water resistance portion, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistance portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines O1 and O2, water can be discharged to the outside along the second opening before the water reaches the less water-resistant portion. In other words, the second opening can be used both to allow a predetermined solid object to pass through and to discharge liquids such as water.

A gaming machine O4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are configured to have shapes based on shapes projected in different directions of the solid object.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
Since the opening is configured with a shape based on the shape of the misaligned solid object, it can be made easier to remove the solid object through the second opening.

A gaming machine O5, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, characterized in that the second opening is disposed closer to the player than the first means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 allows the player to see the shadow of the solid object when the solid object is blocking a part of the second opening. This allows the player to notice that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the containing means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object will remain.

<Feature P group> (G2 advance notice control)
A gaming machine P1 having a judgment means for executing a judgment, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the judgment result by the judgment means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when identification information showing a specific judgment result is statically displayed on the display means, characterized in having an effect execution means for executing an effect during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, a decision means for deciding to have the effect execution means execute a specific effect for each of multiple consecutive dynamic displays of the identification information, and an interruption means for, when it has been decided by the decision means to execute the specific effect, interrupting the execution of the specific effect based on the establishment of a specific condition until a return condition is established.

Pachinko machines have been known in the past that draw a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole, and display a variable performance or a big win performance on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such performances, various patterns of performances are executed, such as performances to make the player feel a sense of expectation and performances to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the like, in order to improve the interest of the game. Among these types of pachinko machines, a gaming machine has been proposed that can improve the interest of the game by providing the player with a series of performances using multiple variable performances by executing a special performance for multiple consecutive variable performances (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of pachinko machine, etc., if a notification performance that should be executed during the execution of multiple consecutive variable performances occurs irregularly, there is a risk of a problem occurring in which the execution is delayed, making it difficult for the player to understand the content of the game. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can make the content of the game easy for the player to understand.

According to the gaming machine P1, even if the determination means has determined that a specific effect will be executed for each of multiple dynamic displays of identification information, the execution of the specific effect is suspended based on the satisfaction of a specific condition until the return condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when the execution of a specific effect has been determined, the execution can be suspended and necessary control can be performed, providing the player with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, since the execution of the specific effect is resumed when the return condition is satisfied, the player can be informed that the specific effect has not ended midway, which has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

A gaming machine P2 is characterized in that it has an operating means operable by a player in the gaming machine P1, a switching means capable of switching and setting a setting when the operating means is operated, and a dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information when dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the setting set by the switching means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine P1, gaming machine P2 allows the player to change settings by operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. This makes it possible to vary the dynamic display mode through the player's operation, and provides a wide variety of dynamic display modes that can be executed, preventing players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

Gaming machine P3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine P2, the specific condition is met when the setting is switched by the switching means when the execution of the specific performance has been decided by the decision means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine P2, gaming machine P3 can interrupt a specific presentation and start a dynamic display mode based on the settings switched by the player when the settings are switched by the player. This has the effect of preventing a malfunction that makes it difficult to notice that the settings have been switched, since the specific presentation is executed in the same way even if the player switches the settings.

A gaming machine P4 is any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, and is characterized in that it has a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means, and a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the judgment means executes the judgment based on the information stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, gaming machine P4 has the effect of increasing the interest in getting a gaming ball, about which information is obtained when the gaming ball enters the ball entry means, into the ball entry means.

In the gaming machine P4, the ball entry means is at least provided with a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the acquisition means is configured to acquire first information when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and acquire second information when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means, the dynamic display means dynamically displays first identification information to indicate the judgment result when the first information is judged by the judgment means, and dynamically displays second identification information to indicate the judgment result when the second information is judged by the judgment means, the judgment means performs the judgment with priority on the second information stored in the storage means over the first information, and the specific condition is met when the second identification information is dynamically displayed in a state where the execution of the specific performance has been determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information executed multiple times in succession.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine P4, gaming machine P6 has the effect that when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is executed multiple times in succession, even if a ball enters the second ball entry means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed preferentially, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so that the player can easily recognize that the dynamic display of the second identification information has started preferentially.

Gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the first ball entry means is configured to allow a game ball to enter the machine more easily than the second ball entry means when the machine is in a first gaming state, and the second ball entry means is configured to allow a game ball to enter the machine more easily than the first ball entry means when the machine is in a second gaming state different from the first gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine P7, gaming machine P8 has the effect of increasing the interest in the game because, in the first gaming state, the gaming ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry means, making it easier for the first identification information to be dynamically displayed continuously and for a specific performance to be executed multiple times.

<Feature Q Group> (G Production)
Gaming machine Q1 has a judgment means for making a judgment, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the judgment result by the judgment means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when identification information showing a specific judgment result is statically displayed on the display means, and is characterized in having a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in response to multiple consecutive dynamic displays of the identification information.

Conventionally, pachinko machines are known that hold a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display variable effects and big win effects on an LCD screen according to the lottery results. In these effects, various patterns of effects are implemented, such as effects that create a sense of expectation in the player and effects that increase the player's desire to participate in the game, in order to increase the interest of the game. (Patent document: JP 2010-075741 A). There has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game in this type of pachinko machine. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has the purpose of providing a game machine that can increase the interest of the game.

With gaming machine B1, even if the dynamic display of identification information does not result in a specific judgment result, multiple identification information can be displayed as one dynamic display, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that it has an interruption means for interrupting the execution of the specific performance, based on the establishment of a specific condition, when the specific performance is being executed by the specific performance execution means, until a return condition is established, in accordance with the establishment of the specific condition.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Q1, gaming machine Q2 has the effect of suspending the execution of a specific effect based on the establishment of a specific condition until a return condition is established, thereby making it possible to clearly indicate to the player that a specific condition has been established. Furthermore, when a return condition is established, execution of the specific effect is resumed, which has the effect of preventing a malfunction in which the specific effect ends midway, leaving the content of the effect incomplete and confusing the player.

Gaming machine Q3 is characterized in that it has, in gaming machine Q1 or Q2, an operating means operable by a player, a switching means capable of switching and setting a setting when the operating means is operated, and a dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the setting set by the switching means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines Q1 and Q2, gaming machine Q3 allows the player to switch settings by operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by that setting. This makes it possible to change the dynamic display mode through the player's operation, and provides a wide variety of dynamic display modes to be executed, preventing players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

Gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that in gaming machine Q3, the specific condition is met when the setting is switched by the switching means while the specific performance is being executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Q3, gaming machine Q4 can interrupt a specific presentation and start a dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player when the player switches the setting. This has the effect of preventing a malfunction that makes it difficult to notice that the setting has been switched, since the specific presentation is executed in the same way even if the player switches the setting.

Gaming machine Q5 is any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q4, characterized in that it has a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means.

Gaming machine B5 has the effect of increasing the interest in getting a gaming ball, about which information is obtained when the gaming ball enters the ball entry means, into the ball entry means, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines B1 to B4.

Gaming machine Q6 is characterized in that it has a pre-judgment means for executing a judgment before the judgment means based on the information stored in the storage means in the gaming machine Q5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Q5, gaming machine Q6 has the effect that a pre-determination is performed by the pre-determination means, making it possible to identify the determination result before the identification information is dynamically displayed.

In the gaming machine Q5 or Q6, the ball entry means is at least provided with a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the acquisition means is configured to acquire first information when a gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and to acquire second information when a gaming ball enters the second ball entry means, the dynamic display means dynamically displays first identification information to indicate the determination result when the first information is determined by the determination means, and dynamically displays second identification information to indicate the determination result when the second information is determined by the determination means, and the specific condition is met when the second identification information is dynamically displayed after the first identification information has been dynamically displayed.

Gaming machine B7 has the effect of, in addition to the effect of gaming machines B5 or B6, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is executed multiple times in succession, even if a ball enters the second ball entry means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed preferentially, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so that the player can easily recognize that the dynamic display of the second identification information has started preferentially.

A gaming machine Q8 is provided with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls by varying the launching force based on the player's operation, a first flow path configured to allow gaming balls launched by the launching means with a first launching force to flow down, and a second flow path configured to allow gaming balls launched with a second launching force different from the first launching force to flow down, the second flow path being configured to make it difficult for gaming balls that have flowed down the first flow path to flow down, the first ball entry means being arranged at a position where gaming balls that have flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the second ball entry means being arranged at a position where gaming balls that have flowed down the second flow path can enter.

In addition to the effects of game machine Q7, game machine Q8 has the effect that the player can adjust the launch force of the game ball to intentionally make it easier for a specific condition to be fulfilled.

<Feature R group> (If special chart 2 remains after the time limit ends, the charge effect will not be activated until 5 changes)
The present invention relates to a first ball entry means for allowing a game ball to always enter the ball, a second ball entry means which is variable between a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a second state which is more difficult to enter than the first state, an acquisition means which is capable of acquiring first information when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and of acquiring second information when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, a storage means which stores the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means which makes a judgment based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means which dynamically displays identification information for indicating a judgment result by the judgment means on a display means, and an identification information for indicating a specific judgment result on the display means. A gaming machine R1 having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when different information is stopped and displayed, characterized in that it has a discrimination means for discriminating the establishment of a specific condition that changes the second ball entry means from the second state to the first state, a presentation means for executing a presentation to indicate the result of the discrimination made by the discrimination means, a presentation determination means for determining a specific presentation as the presentation to be executed by the presentation means when the discrimination means discriminates that the specific condition is established, and a prohibition means for prohibiting the execution of the specific presentation by the presentation determination means when a prohibition condition is established.

Conventionally, pachinko machines are known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display a variable effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to make the player feel a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, to improve the interest of the game. In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed that executes an effect to notify the player that the special period will be executed before or during the period when a special period is set in which it is easier to enter the starting hole than usual (Patent Document: JP 2011-229733 A). When it is highly likely that a large number of reserved balls have been generated, such as immediately after the end of the state in which it is easy to enter the starting hole, a notification is executed, which is not advantageous to the player, and there is a risk of a malfunction in which the interest of the game is reduced. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

According to gaming machine R1, when the prohibition condition is met, a specific effect that indicates that the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entry means will not be executed. Therefore, when the prohibition condition is met, an effect that meets the needs of the player can be executed, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

A gaming machine R2, which is characterized in that it has a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means is set to be more likely to change from the second state to the first state than the normal state in the gaming machine R1, and the prohibited condition is set as at least one first condition that is established when the normal state is set from a state in which the special state is set by the state setting means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine R1, gaming machine R2 has a first condition based on the end of a special state in which a gaming ball is likely to enter the second ball entry means as a prohibited condition, and therefore has the effect of suppressing defects that reduce the interest of the game by executing a specific presentation during a period in which the player is unlikely to benefit from the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means, since a large amount of second information is stored.

A gaming machine R3, characterized in that the prohibited condition in the gaming machine R2 is set as at least one condition in which a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored in the storage means when the state setting means sets the normal state from the state in which the special state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine R2, gaming machine R3 requires that a predetermined number or more of the second information be stored when the special state ends, so that the prohibited condition is met only when a large amount of second information is stored. This has the effect of preventing malfunctions in which a specific effect is not executed and the player's profits are lost even when the number of stored second information is small.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the discrimination means is configured to be able to distinguish between a specific first discrimination result that changes the second ball entry means to the first state for a first period and a specific second discrimination result that changes the second ball entry means to the first state for a second period longer than the first period, and the effect determination means determines the specific effect based on the discrimination of the specific second discrimination result. Gaming machine R4.

According to gaming machine R4, a specific effect can be executed on any of gaming machines R1 to R3 to notify the player that a more advantageous period is in progress, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature Group S> (Volume Control)
a sound output means for outputting sound as part of the effect executed by the effect execution means; a volume setting means for setting the volume of the sound output by the sound output means based on an operation from outside the gaming machine; an output control means for switching between a first state in which sound is output from the sound output means based on the volume set by the volume setting means and a second state in which sound is output from the sound output means at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means; and an initial setting means for setting the second state when the gaming machine goes from a power-off state in which the power supply for operating the gaming machine is cut off to a restored state in which power supply to the gaming machine is started.

Conventionally, pachinko machines are known that hold a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display variable effects and big win effects on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery results. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects that give the player a sense of expectation and effects that increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, to increase the interest of the game. In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed that allows the volume of sound effects and voices output as effects to be variably set according to the player's operation or the settings of the gaming parlor (Patent Document: JP 2011-200511 A). There has been a demand for this type of gaming machine that allows more suitable volume control. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows suitable volume control.

When the gaming machine S1 is powered on, the second state is set in which a predetermined volume is output regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means, so that the fact that the power has been turned on can be recognized by the volume, and suitable volume control can be implemented.

A gaming machine S2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine S1, the second state is a state in which the volume is set to a volume lower than the lowest volume setting set by the volume setting means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, the gaming machine S2 has the effect of reducing noise in the gaming establishment when all the players are turned on at the same time, since in the second state the volume is set to a volume lower than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means. In the gaming machine S1 or S2, the output control means continues to set the second state until the performance execution means finishes the execution of one performance. In the gaming machine S3, the output control means continues to set the second state until the performance execution means finishes the execution of one performance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine S1 or S2, gaming machine S3 has the effect that the second state is continuously set until the execution of effect 1 is completed, so that even if the power is turned on during a period when no effect is being executed, the volume of effect 1 that is executed later makes it possible to recognize that the effect was executed after the power was turned on.

Gaming machine S4 is characterized in that it has an initial state setting means for setting the state of the gaming machine to an initial state when the power is turned on to the gaming machine in any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, provided that a predetermined external operation has been performed, and the sound output means outputs a predetermined notification sound at maximum volume when the gaming machine is set to the initial state.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the gaming machine S4 has the effect of allowing the player to confirm that the machine has been reset to its initial state by an alarm sound, making it possible to quickly discover fraudulent attempts to initialize the gaming machine.

<Feature T group> (Reserved pattern display area variable control)
a game machine having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means for making a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means for a predetermined period of time, an identification information indicating a judgment result by the judgment means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific judgment result is statically displayed on the display means, the game machine T1 having a pattern display means for displaying a corresponding pattern for each of the information stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means, and a pattern display area varying means for varying the display mode of the area in which the patterns are displayed on the pattern display means in accordance with the number of the information stored in the storage means.

Pachinko machines have been known in which a lottery is drawn when a game ball enters the starting hole, and a variable effect or a big win effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to make the player feel a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information when a game ball enters the starting hole during the period in which a variable effect is executed, and the number of reserved ball information is displayed on a display means (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of gaming machine, the display area in which reserved ball information is displayed is difficult to understand when the reserved ball information is not displayed, and a gaming machine that displays reserved ball information in an easy-to-understand manner has been demanded. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand.

According to gaming machine T1, the display mode of the area in which the patterns are displayed is changed depending on the amount of information stored in the storage means, so that the display mode of the display area in which the patterns are displayed makes it easy to recognize the amount of information stored, providing an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

Gaming machine T2 is characterized in that in gaming machine T1, the pattern display means displays area information indicating that the area is where the pattern is to be displayed even when the pattern is not displayed, and the pattern display area varying means varies and displays the area information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine T1, gaming machine T2 has the effect of displaying variable area information depending on the number of stored pieces of information, making it easier to understand by displaying area information that matches the number of patterns to be displayed.

Gaming machine T3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine T1 or T2, the symbol display means displays identification information that can identify the upper limit number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines T1 and T2, gaming machine T3 has the effect of being able to recognize the upper limit number using the identification information, and being able to prevent playing in a way that would exceed the upper limit number and thus satisfy the acquisition condition.

Gaming machine T4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine T3, the identification information is set to not be displayed when the symbols that are the upper limit number are displayed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine T3, gaming machine T4 has the effect of making the patterns easier to identify by suppressing interference with the display of the patterns, since the identification information is hidden when the upper limit number of patterns is displayed.

A gaming machine T5 is characterized in that it has a period determination means for determining a period during which a predetermined number of the acquisition conditions are met, and a rule change means for changing a display rule that changes the display mode of the area in which the pattern is displayed, depending on the period determined by the period determination means, in any one of the gaming machines T1 to T4.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines T1 to T4, gaming machine T5 changes the display rules for changing the display mode of the area in which the patterns are displayed depending on the period until a predetermined number of acquisition conditions are met, so that the period until the acquisition conditions are met can be recognized by the way in which the display mode is changed, and this has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine T6 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines T1 to T5, the symbol display area changing means displays a first display mode until a first number of symbols are displayed, and when the first number is exceeded, changes the display mode to a second display mode different from the first display mode.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines T1 to T5, gaming machine T6 displays the first display mode until the first number is displayed, which increases the player's motivation to achieve the acquisition conditions until the first number is exceeded, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature U group> (Remove reserved number display)
a game machine having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means for making a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means for a predetermined period of time, an identification information indicating a judgment result by the judgment means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific judgment result is displayed statically on the display means, the game machine U1 being characterized in having a pattern display means for displaying a corresponding pattern for each of the information stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means, and a display mode changing means for changing the display mode displayed on the pattern display means based on the period during which a predetermined number of the information is acquired by the acquisition means.

Pachinko machines have been known in the past that perform a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display a variable effect or a big win effect on the liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to make the player feel a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the interest of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information when a game ball enters the starting hole during the period when a variable effect is being executed, and the number of reserved ball information is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine U1, the display mode displayed on the symbol display means is changed depending on the time it takes for the predetermined amount of information to be acquired, which has the effect of making the player interested in the time it takes for the predetermined amount of information to be acquired, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine U2 is characterized in that in gaming machine U1, the display mode changing means changes the display mode in the display area in which the pattern is displayed based on the period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine U1, gaming machine U2 has the effect of changing the display mode of the display area in which the patterns are displayed based on the period, allowing the player to recognize the period while checking the display of the patterns.

A gaming machine U3 is characterized in that in the display area in which the pattern is displayed in the pattern display means, a suggestive mode that suggests that the pattern is to be displayed in the area is displayed even during periods when the pattern is not displayed in the display area of the gaming machine U1 or U2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines U1 and U2, gaming machine U3 has the effect of allowing players to quickly confirm that information has been acquired by displaying suggestive patterns even during periods when no symbols are displayed.

Gaming machine U4 is characterized in that in gaming machine U3, the display mode changing means changes the suggestion mode in response to the period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine U3, gaming machine U4 has the effect of being able to check the frequency at which information is stored by the suggested mode, since the suggested mode is variable in response to the period required to store a predetermined amount of information.

Gaming machine U5 is characterized in that in gaming machine U3 or U4, the suggestion mode is displayed by regularly varying based on the number of the symbols displayed, and the display mode varying means varies and displays the suggestion mode to a special suggestion mode different from the suggestion mode corresponding to the number of the symbols displayed based on the period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines U3 and U4, gaming machine U5 has the effect of allowing players to check the frequency of information acquisition through a special suggestion mode, and allowing them to enjoy playing games while experiencing both regular and irregular changes in the suggestion mode.

<Feature Group V> (Hold Navi)
A gaming machine having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the fulfillment of an acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means for making a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means for a predetermined period of time, an identification information indicating a judgment result by the judgment means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific judgment result is displayed statically on the display means, wherein the gaming machine V1 is characterized in that the storage means has an effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the information before being judged by the judgment means being stored a predetermined number of times or more.

Pachinko machines have been known in the past that perform a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display a variable effect or a big win effect on the liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to make the player feel a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the interest of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information when a game ball enters the starting hole during the period when a variable effect is being executed, and the number of reserved ball information is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to gaming machine V1, a specific effect is executed when a predetermined number of pieces of information are stored in the storage means, so it is possible to make the player interested not only in the judgment result but also in the number of pieces of information stored, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine V2, characterized in that in the gaming machine V1, a pre-determination means executes a determination on the information stored in the storage means before the determination is made by the determination means, and the performance execution means includes a performance determination means capable of determining the type of the specific performance based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine V1, gaming machine V2 determines the type of specific effect based on the results of a preliminary judgment, making it possible to suggest the judgment results of information stored before the identification information is dynamically displayed by the specific effect, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine V3 characterized in that in the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on period information corresponding to the period until a predetermined number of the information is stored by the storage means.

According to gaming machine V3, in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine V2, the type of specific effect is determined based on period information corresponding to the period until a predetermined number of pieces of information are stored in the storage means, so there is an advantage in that it is possible to identify the frequency at which information is stored by the specific effect.

A gaming machine V4 is characterized in that it has a history information storage means for storing game history information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in any one of the gaming machines V1 to V3, and the type of the specific performance is determined based on the history information stored in the history information storage means.

With gaming machine V4, the type of specific effect is determined based on the effect of any of gaming machines V1 to V3, as well as on game history information, so it is possible to change the type of specific effect as the game continues, which has the effect of preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine V5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific performance continues to be executed until the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means falls below a specific number.

According to gaming machine V5, in any of gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific presentation continues until the number of stored information falls below the specific number, which has the effect of motivating the player to play so that the number of stored information does not fall below the specific number.

A gaming machine V6 is characterized in that it is any one of gaming machines V1 to V5, and has a pattern display means for displaying a corresponding pattern for each piece of information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means, and a pattern display area changing means for changing the display mode of the area in which the pattern is displayed on the pattern display means in accordance with the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines V1 to V5, gaming machine V6 has the effect of making it easy to identify the number of pieces of stored information, since the display mode of the area in which the patterns are displayed is variable according to the number of pieces of stored information.

<Characteristic W Group> (Lucky Number)
a game machine having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means for making a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means for a predetermined period of time, an identification information indicating a judgment result by the judgment means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific judgment result is statically displayed on the display means, the game machine having: a pattern display means for displaying a corresponding pattern for each of the information stored in the storage means before the judgment by the judgment means; a number information storage means for storing, when the information is stored in the storage means, number information corresponding to the number of pieces of the information before the judgment by the judgment means that was stored in the storage means at the time the information was stored, and an effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on the number information stored in the number information storage means.

Pachinko machines have been known in the past that perform a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display a variable effect or a big win effect on the liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to make the player feel a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the interest of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information when a game ball enters the starting hole during the period when a variable effect is being executed, and the number of reserved ball information is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

When information is stored with gaming machine W1, quantity information corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored at the time the information is stored is stored for the stored information, and a specific performance based on the quantity information is executed, which has the effect of further increasing interest when information is stored.

Gaming machine W2 is characterized in that in gaming machine W1, the specific performance is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific judgment result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine W1, gaming machine W2 performs a specific effect based on the number information stored for the information determined to be a specific judgment result, which has the effect of making the player interested in the number information at the time the information determined to be a specific judgment result is stored, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine W3 is characterized in that the specific performance is executed in a manner that indicates an area in which the pattern corresponding to the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific judgment result is displayed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine W2, gaming machine W3 has the effect that when a pattern is displayed, the number information stored for the information previously determined to be a specific judgment result can be confirmed by a specific presentation, and the player can play the game in the hope that a pattern will be displayed in the area indicated by the specific presentation.

Gaming machine W4 is any one of gaming machines W1 to W3, characterized in that the symbols are provided with suggestive features corresponding to the number information.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines W1 to W3, gaming machine W4 has the effect that the symbols are given a suggestive pattern corresponding to the number information, so that even if the number of pieces of information before the judgment increases or decreases, the number information at the time of storage can be recognized by the suggestive pattern.

Gaming machine W5 is characterized in that it is any one of gaming machines W1 to W4, and has a type determination means for determining the type of the bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means, and a notification means for notifying suggestive information suggesting type information corresponding to the type of the bonus game being executed based on the information being stored in the memory number corresponding to the quantity information of the specific effect when the bonus game is being executed.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines W1 to W4, gaming machine W5 stores information up to a memory number corresponding to a specific presentation, and provides suggestive information that suggests the type of bonus game being played. This allows the player to store information even during bonus play, which has the effect of increasing the efficiency of play.

Gaming machine W6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine W5, the identification information for indicating the specific judgment result is configured to make it difficult to identify the type of bonus game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine W5, gaming machine W6 has the effect of increasing the value of the indication information by making it difficult to identify the type of bonus game from the identification information.

<X group> (Charge performance derivative)
a first ball entry means through which a game ball can always enter the ball; a second ball entry means which can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a second state which is more difficult to enter than the first state; an acquisition means which can acquire first information when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and can acquire second information when the game ball enters the second ball entry means; a storage means which stores the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means; a judgment means which makes a judgment based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means; and a dynamic display means which dynamically displays on a display means an identification information showing the judgment result by the judgment means. and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when identification information showing a specific judgment result is stopped and displayed on the display means. The gaming machine X1 is characterized in having a discrimination means for discriminating the establishment of a specific condition that changes the second ball entry means from the second state to the second state, a presentation means for executing a presentation to show the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a presentation determination means for determining a specific presentation as the presentation to be executed by the presentation means when the discrimination means discriminates that the specific condition is established.

Conventionally, pachinko machines are known that perform a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole, and display variable effects and big win effects on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery results. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to make the player feel a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, a game machine has been proposed in which a movable member such as a wing shape is arranged in association with the starting hole, which restricts the entry of balls into the starting hole and releases the restriction when the opening condition is met to make it easier for the game ball to enter (Patent Document: JP 2011-229733 A). In the above-mentioned pachinko machine, even if the opening condition is simply met and the movable member is movable, there is a risk of a problem that the player will get bored with the game. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a game machine that can suppress the problem of the player getting bored with the game early on.

The gaming machine X1 allows the player to easily determine that a specific condition has been met by a specific effect, and allows the player to play in anticipation of not only a specific judgment result but also the execution of a specific effect, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine X2 is characterized in that it has a prohibition means for prohibiting the effect determination means from determining a specific effect when an avoidance condition is met in gaming machine X1.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine X1, gaming machine X2 has the effect of preventing the specific performance from being determined when the avoidance condition is met, thereby preventing the specific performance from being executed indiscriminately.

Gaming machine X3, which is a gaming machine X1 or X2, has a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means is set to be more likely to change from the second state to the first state than the normal state, and the avoidance condition is set as at least one condition based on the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means and the normal state being set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine X1 or X2, gaming machine X3 has the effect of suppressing the malfunction of excessive balls entering the second ball entry means by making it easier to establish the avoidance condition, since there is a high possibility that a large amount of second information is stored in the storage means at the time when the special state is set to the normal state.

Gaming machine X4, characterized in that in gaming machine X3, the avoidance condition is set as at least one condition that when the state setting means sets the normal state from the state in which the special state is set, the second information is stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine X3, gaming machine X4 has the effect of suppressing the problem of excessive storage of second information.

Any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, the gaming machine X5 is provided with a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball by varying the launching force based on the operation of the player, a first flow path configured to allow a gaming ball launched by the launching means with a first launching force to flow down, and a second flow path configured to allow a gaming ball launched with a second launching force different from the first launching force to flow down, the first ball entry means being arranged at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the second ball entry means being arranged at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and when the avoidance condition is established, the gaming machine X5 is characterized in that it notifies the player of suggestion information suggesting that the gaming ball should be allowed to flow down the first flow path.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, the gaming machine X5 has the effect of suppressing the malfunction of the player causing the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means that has been changed to the first state, because suggestion information is provided to cause the gaming ball to flow down the first flow path when the avoidance condition is met.

<Y group> (Button pop-out control)
A gaming machine Y1 has an operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by a player, a movement means for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and an action control means for controlling the operation of the movement means, wherein the movement means is configured to be capable of executing a first action of moving the operation surface of the operation means in a first movement manner and a second action of moving the operation surface of the operation means in a second movement manner different from the first movement manner, and the action control means controls the operation of the movement means so as to execute the first action when a first condition is satisfied, and to execute the second action when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied.

Pachinko machines have been known in the past that hold a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display a variable effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects that give the player a sense of expectation and effects that increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the interest of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., a gaming machine has been proposed that is equipped with an operating means such as a switch that can be operated by the player, and is configured so that the content of the variable effect being executed can be changed or the type of background can be changed by the player operating the operating means (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game if he or she simply operates the operating means. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Y1, the operation surface of the operation means can be moved in different movement patterns by the motion control means, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the operation means. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect using the operation means, and increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that in gaming machine Y1, the moving means moves the operating surface of the operating means from a predetermined initial position to a specific operating position.

According to gaming machine Y2, the movement pattern of the operation surface of the operation means until it is moved to a specific operation position can be varied by the operation control means, so that the player can be interested in the process in which the operation surface of the operation means moves.

Gaming machine Y3 is characterized in that in gaming machine Y2, the moving means moves the operation surface of the operation means so that the movement period in the second action is longer than the movement period in the first action.

With gaming machine Y3, the movement period can be varied depending on the control content of the operation control means, making it possible to make the player more interested in the process in which the operating surface of the operating means moves.

In gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the moving means is composed of a driving means that generates a driving force to move the operation surface of the operation means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, and the operation control means executes a plurality of drive controls on the driving means and differs the operation content of the moving means depending on the content of the drive control executed. Gaming machine Y4 is characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine Y4, the operation of the moving means can be varied by varying the drive control of the drive means. This simplifies the control of the operation control means.

In the gaming machine Y4, the driving means generates the driving force by a rotational motion, the motion control means is capable of executing a first drive control that rotates the driving means in a first direction and a second drive control that rotates the driving means in a second direction different from the first direction as the multiple drive controls, and the moving means executes the first motion when the first drive control is executed by the control means, and executes the second motion when the second drive control is executed. Gaming machine Y5.

According to the gaming machine Y5, the moving means performs different operations by rotating the drive means in different directions, so the movement pattern for moving the operating surface of the operating means can be easily changed.

Gaming machine Y6 is characterized in that it has a speed varying means that can vary the rotation speed of the drive means in the gaming machine Y5.

According to the gaming machine Y6, the rotation speed can be varied by the speed varying means, so that the manner in which the operating surface of the operating means is moved can be easily diversified, and the presentation effect of the presentation using the operating means can be enhanced.

In gaming machine Y6, gaming machine Y7 is characterized in that the second movement mode is to move the operation surface of the operation means to the specific operation position in accordance with the rotation speed of the drive means varied by the speed variation means.

Gaming machine Y8 has a discrimination means for executing a discrimination when a discrimination condition is established among the gaming machines Y1 to Y7, a bonus granting means for granting a beneficial bonus to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, and a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect to suggest that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the predetermined discrimination result, the movement means operates as the suggestive effect, and the operation control means determines the content of the operation control according to the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

According to gaming machine Y8, the movement of the operation surface of the operating means executed can suggest the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, so the player will pay close attention to the movement of the operation surface of the operating means. This can enhance the presentation effect of the presentation using the operating means.

<Feature Z> (Prevents the button from jumping out)
A gaming machine having an operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by a player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied, a condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined movement condition is satisfied, a movement means capable of moving the operation surface of the operation means from a stored position to a protruding position when the predetermined movement condition is satisfied by the condition determination means, a movement control means for controlling the movement means, and an effect execution means for executing an effect based on a predetermined operation being performed on the operation means, wherein the movement means is configured to be capable of executing a first action for moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position and a second action for moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position, and the movement control means executes the first action when the predetermined operation is performed by the operation means and the effect can be executed by the effect execution means.

Pachinko machines have been known in the past that hold a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display a variable effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects that give the player a sense of expectation and effects that increase the player's motivation to participate in the game, and the interest of the game is improved. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., a gaming machine has been proposed that is equipped with an operating means such as a switch that can be operated by the player, and is configured so that the content of the variable effect being executed can be changed or the type of background can be changed by the player operating the operating means (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game if he or she simply operates the operating means. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to gaming machine Z1, the motion control means causes the moving means to perform the first motion regardless of whether the operation surface of the operating means is moved or not, so it is possible to prevent the player from noticing in advance that the operation surface of the operating means will move by knowing whether the moving means will operate or not, and this has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, performing the first action can have the effect of making the player expect that the second action will be executed.

In the gaming machine Z1, the moving means is composed of a driving means that generates a driving force for moving the operation surface of the operation means by a rotational operation, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, the movement control means is capable of executing a first drive control that rotates the drive means in a first direction and a second drive control that rotates the drive means in a second direction different from the first direction as the multiple movement controls, and the moving means executes the first operation when the first drive control is executed by the movement control means, and executes the second operation when the second drive control is executed. In the gaming machine Z2,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Z1, gaming machine Z2 can be configured so that the operating surface of the operating means does not move even when the driving means is driven, and has the effect of being able to change the position of the driving means according to the situation without the operating surface moving.

A gaming machine Z3 has a restricting means that can be changed between a restricting state that restricts the movement of the operation surface of the operation means by the moving means and a release state that releases the restriction, and the first action that the moving means executes in response to the control content of the movement control means is an action for changing the restricting means to the release state, and the second action is an action for moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position.

According to gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine Z2, the operation of the moving means is restricted by the restricting means. The moving means is operated so as to vary the state of the restricting means according to the control contents executed by the operation control means. Therefore, even if the moving means is operated, it is possible to reliably control whether or not the operating surface of the operating means moves.

In gaming machine Z3, the transmission means has a rotating member that can rotate in synchronization with the rotational movement of the drive means, and an action member that is connected to the operation means and on which the rotational movement of the rotating member acts, the rotating member has a protruding portion that can abut against the action member, and the regulating means is a gaming machine Z4 that is characterized in that it changes to the released state by rotating the drive means in the first direction to abut the protruding portion against the action member.

Gaming machine Z5 is characterized in that in gaming machine Z4, the regulating means does not change to the released state when the drive means is rotated in the second direction and the protrusion is brought into contact with the action member.

A gaming machine Z6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine Z5, the position at which the protrusion stops is the same when the first drive control is executed by the operation control means and when the second drive control is executed.

A gaming machine Z7 is characterized in that it has a discrimination means for making a discrimination when a discrimination condition is established among the gaming machines Z1 to Z6, a bonus granting means for granting a beneficial bonus to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, and a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect to suggest that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the predetermined discrimination result, and the predetermined movement condition is established according to the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

<Feature α group> (Over-winning during big wins)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a result of the determination by the reversal means; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the identification information indicating a specific result of the determination is displayed on the display means; and a determination means for determining, as the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, either a first bonus game in which a first bonus that is advantageous to the player is awarded, or a second bonus game in which a second bonus that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus is awarded; and wherein the gaming machine α1 is characterized in that, when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, it has a type determination means for determining from a plurality of types a notification type for notifying the player of notification information that notifies the player of type information of the bonus game being executed.

Conventionally, pachinko machines are known that hold a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display variable effects and big win effects on an LCD screen according to the lottery results. In these effects, various patterns of effects are implemented, such as effects that create a sense of expectation in the player and effects that increase the player's desire to participate in the game, in order to increase the interest of the game (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). There has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of this type of gaming machine. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has the purpose of providing a gaming machine that increases the interest of the game.

When a bonus game is being played with the gaming machine α1, the notification type for suggesting the type of bonus game is determined from a number of types, so that a variety of notification types can be implemented, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine α2 has a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the open state, and a variable control means that changes the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means as the bonus game, and the notification types include at least a first notification type that notifies the notification information based on the fact that more than the predetermined number of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine α1, gaming machine α2 can increase the value of having more than a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine α3 is characterized in that the bonus game in the gaming machine α2 involves executing the opening game multiple times, and has a notification type switching means that switches to another notification type when the first notification type has been determined based on the opening game being executed a predetermined number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine α2, gaming machine α3 has the effect of being able to switch to another notification type during bonus play even when the first notification type has been determined, making it possible to switch to notifying notification information even when it is difficult to score more than the predetermined number of game balls.

Gaming machine α4 is characterized in that in gaming machine α3, the notification type switching means switches to the other notification type on the condition that the specific notification information is not notified in the first notification type.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine α3, gaming machine α4 has the effect of suppressing the problem of duplicate notifications because the notification type can be switched on the condition that specific notification information has not been notified.

<Feature β group> (Normal hits are transformed into special hits)
a game machine β1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a judgment means for executing a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a judgment result by the judgment means on a display means for a predetermined period of time, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific judgment result is displayed statically on the display means, characterized in that the game machine β1 also has a pre-judgment execution means for executing a judgment before the judgment means based on the information stored in the storage means, and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means if the information stored in the storage means is determined to be the specific judgment result.

Conventionally, pachinko machines are known that hold a lottery when a game ball enters the starting hole, and display variable effects and big win effects on an LCD screen according to the lottery results. In these effects, various patterns of effects are implemented, such as effects that create a sense of expectation in the player and effects that increase the player's desire to participate in the game, in order to increase the interest of the game (Patent Document: JP 2010-075741 A). There has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of this type of gaming machine. This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has the purpose of providing a gaming machine that increases the interest of the game.

With gaming machine β1, when a bonus game is executed, if it is further determined that a bonus game will be executed after that, a special effect is executed, so that the player can look forward to the special effect being executed, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine β2 is characterized in that the bonus games in the gaming machine β1 include at least a first bonus game in which a normal gaming state is set after execution, and a second bonus game in which a special gaming state is set in which the player has a higher probability of being judged as having the specific judgment result than in the normal gaming state after execution, and the specific presentation is configured in a manner that suggests that the special gaming state has been set.

In the gaming machine β2, the identification information is displayed in a specific stop display mode as a stop display mode indicating that the second bonus game will be executed, and when the identification information for which the first bonus game will be executed is dynamically displayed, if the information determined to be the specific judgment result is stored, the gaming machine β3 is characterized in having a stop display switching means that can display the identification information in the specific stop display mode.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine β2, gaming machine β has the effect of making the player feel as if the second bonus game is being played, since the game is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode even when the first bonus game is being played.

In the gaming machine β3, the stop display switching means switches to the specific stop display mode when the identification information for which the first bonus game is to be executed is dynamically displayed, based on the information determined to be the specific judgment result not being stored, and the information determined to be the specific judgment result being stored during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. Gaming machine β4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine β3, gaming machine β4 has the effect of increasing the opportunities for a specific stop mode to be displayed, since the stop mode can be switched even after dynamic display has begun.

<Feature AA group> (Reset BGM when power recovery state ends)
Gaming machine AA1 having a power supply means capable of supplying a predetermined power, an alarm means capable of executing an alarm to indicate that the power has been supplied by the power supply means, an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect after the alarm executed by the alarm means is completed, and an audio output means capable of outputting audio based on audio data for a predetermined period of time, characterized in that the audio output means outputs the audio from the start position of the audio data during the alarm period in which the alarm is executed by the alarm means, and outputs the audio from the predetermined position of the audio data when the effect is executed by the effect execution means.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a game ball in a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success after a predetermined variable time, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, there are some gaming machines that stop subtracting the variable time if the power goes out during the predetermined variable time, and when the power is turned on, a return screen is displayed and the subtraction of the stopped variable time is resumed (for example, JP 2016-005505 A). In such gaming machines, the return screen is displayed to clearly inform the player that the power has been turned on, but there is a problem in that the return of the power is emphasized, and therefore it is not possible to clearly inform the player that the subtraction of the variable time has resumed. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can inform the player of the game situation when the power is restored in a more clear manner.

The gaming machine AA1 is configured so that the sound that is output during the period when a specified effect is being executed can be output even while the notification to indicate that power has been supplied is being executed, which has the effect of making it possible to correlate the period in which the notification to indicate that power has been supplied with the period thereafter. In addition, since the machine is configured so that when the notification to indicate that power has been supplied ends and the specified effect begins, sound based on the sound data for the specified period is output from a specific position in the sound data, it is possible to output sound with content that corresponds to the effect that is executed after the period in which the notification to indicate that power has been supplied ends. This has the effect of making it possible to output sound without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When using the gaming machine AA1 described above, it is preferable to further provide a discrimination means for discriminating whether or not a special pattern change is being performed at the time the power is cut off, and a storage means capable of storing the discrimination result for a predetermined period during which the power is cut off, and configure the device to output the background music that is output during the special pattern change during the notification period that notifies the player that power has been supplied if it is determined that the power has been cut off during the special pattern change when power is supplied. This makes it possible to notify the player by voice that a special pattern change is being performed while the notification to indicate that power has been supplied is being executed. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

It is also preferable to configure the period for notifying that power has been supplied to the various control devices of the pachinko machine 10 so that it continues until the start-up process is completed. By configuring in this way, the period for notifying that power has been supplied can be shortened. If the power is cut off during the special chart change, or if the special chart change starts during the period for notifying that power has been supplied, the special chart change may cross over the timing when the period for notifying that power has been supplied ends and the normal display screen appears. In this case, it is preferable to determine the period from the time the normal display screen is displayed to the end of the ongoing special chart change, and set a change effect (a remaining change time corresponding effect) based on the determination result. This makes it possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the special chart change in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

If the result of the remaining variation time determination is within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it is advisable to configure the timing of the end of the presentation that notifies the player that power has been supplied to be delayed by a predetermined time (1 second). This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a presentation that corresponds to the remaining variation time for only a short period of time, which would be difficult for the player to distinguish, and therefore provides a presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

<Features Group AB> (The timing of the background change is varied according to the speed of the pattern change when the button is pressed)
a game machine AB1 comprising: a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination; a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information showing a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means for a predetermined period of time; a bonus granting means for granting a bonus on the basis that the identification state dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; an operation means operable by a player; an operation discrimination means for discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means; a presentation mode varying means for varying a presentation mode on the basis of a discrimination result of the operation discrimination means; a presentation execution means for executing a presentation corresponding to the presentation mode changed by the presentation mode varying means; and a variable timing setting means for setting the timing at which the presentation mode is changed, based on the dynamic display speed of the identification information when it is determined by the operation discrimination means that the predetermined operation has been performed.

In the past, when a game ball entered a starting hole on the game board of a pachinko machine or other gaming machine, a lottery was held to determine whether the game would be a win or a loss, and if the lottery result was a win after a predetermined time period, a bonus game that was advantageous to the player was executed. In addition, some gaming machines were provided with an operation means that the player could operate, and various effects were set based on the operation of the player on the operation means (for example, JP 2016-18274 A). In such gaming machines, by executing the operation effect, the effect mode can be changed depending on the operation result of whether the player operates the operation means, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means, that is, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. However, when the player participates in the game (when the player operates the operation means in the operation effect), the effect modes executed are limited, so it was desired to be able to set a wider variety of effect modes and to enhance the effect of the effect.

According to the gaming machine AB, the presentation mode can be varied according to the speed at which the identification information changes at the timing when the player operates the operating means, so that a variety of presentations can be provided. In the gaming machine AB described above, the presentation mode that can be varied by the presentation mode varying means can be, for example, the display mode of the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to vary the timing at which the background mode is variably set according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the background mode from being variably set when the dynamic display speed of the identification information is slow, i.e., immediately before the lottery result of the special pattern is stopped and displayed.

It is also advisable to provide a notification means for notifying the player of the dynamic display speed of the current identification information. This allows the player to determine whether or not the presentation mode will change immediately after operating the operation means to change the presentation mode. Furthermore, if the period from when the player operates the operation means to change the presentation mode until the presentation mode changes is longer than a predetermined period, it is advisable to configure the device to display a comment informing the player that the presentation mode will change after the predetermined period has elapsed. This allows the gaming company to easily know whether or not the gaming machine has accepted an operation to change the presentation mode when that operation is performed.

Furthermore, if an interval of at least a predetermined period is provided between the operation of the operating means and the change of the presentation mode, it is preferable to configure it so that the above-mentioned predetermined period is the time until the next special chart change is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to change the presentation mode in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the result of the special chart lottery is not being executed.

<Feature AC Group> (The performance changes depending on the timing and number of button presses)
a game machine AC1 having an operation means operable by a player, an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, an operation timing determination means capable of determining the timing at which the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed, an operation count measurement means capable of measuring the number of times that the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed, a presentation mode setting means for setting a presentation mode based on the determination result of the operation timing determination means and the measurement result of the operation count measurement means, and a presentation execution means for executing a presentation according to the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means.

In the past, when a gaming ball entered a starting hole on the game board of a pachinko machine or other gaming machine, a lottery was held to determine whether the game would be a win or a loss, and if the lottery result was a win after a specified variable time, a bonus game that was advantageous to the player was executed. Furthermore, some gaming machines were provided with an operating means that the player could operate, and various effects were set based on the operation content of the player on the operating means (for example, JP 2016-18274 A). In such gaming machines, the performance mode is set based on the operation content or the number of operations on the operating means. In gaming machines configured in this way, it was difficult to set a variety of performance modes according to the operation content of the operating means, and although it was possible to enhance the performance effect, a gaming machine that could set a wider variety of performance modes was desired.

The gaming machine AC1 can vary the presentation style based on both the operation timing and the number of operations on the operating means, allowing for a wider variety of presentations to be set, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, in a gaming machine having the configuration of gaming machine AC1, it is preferable to configure it so that a continuous operation presentation in which the presentation mode is variable in response to multiple operations on the operating means can be executed, and the timing for varying the presentation mode of subsequent continuous operation presentations can be set according to the timing of a predetermined number of operations during the period in which the continuous operation presentation is being executed. Specifically, it is preferable to configure it so that the ease with which the presentation mode is changed in response to second and subsequent operations on the operating means is varied based on the timing of the first operation on the operating means during the period in which the continuous operation presentation is being executed. By configuring it in this way, various presentation modes can be set without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, in this case, it is advisable to set the presentation mode for the first operation of the operating means to be the same regardless of the timing of the first operation of the operating means. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the difference in the timing of the first operation of the operating means.

In addition, the presentation mode executed after the continuous operation presentation may be changed according to the presentation mode of the continuous operation presentation displayed when the continuous operation presentation has ended. This allows players to participate in the continuous operation presentation with enthusiasm. Also, the continuous operation presentation may be configured to be executable based on the special chart change, and the presentation mode executed after the continuous operation presentation may be set based on the presentation result of the continuous operation presentation and the lottery result of the special chart change, or the presentation mode change conditions of the continuous operation presentation (number of times the operating means is operated, operation method, etc.) may be set based on the lottery result of the special chart change and the operation timing of a predetermined number of times (for example, the first time) during the continuous operation presentation period.

<Feature AD group> (The reserved number display on the LCD can be synchronized with the actual reserved number of balls, or not synchronized)
a display mode display means for displaying a display mode indicating the predetermined number, the display mode display means being configured to display, on a display means, a first mode indicating the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means when a first condition is satisfied, and a second mode indicating the number of times the effect is executed by the effect execution means when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a game ball in a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, the right to execute the lottery is configured to be able to be stored in a plurality of units, so that the game can be played efficiently. In addition, in a gaming machine configured to be able to store a plurality of units (reservations) to execute the lottery, there is a machine that displays a reserved pattern to show the player the number of reserved units stored. (For example, JP 2016-18274 A). In such a gaming machine, the player can easily grasp the current number of reserved units, so that the game content can be determined based on the number of reserved units, and an efficient game can be played. In addition, there is a machine that has a function of determining the lottery result in advance for the reserved units stored before the actual lottery is executed, and when the number of reserved units stored reaches a specific number, a series of effects (continuous effects) is executed using the period during which the lottery corresponding to the specific number of reserved units is executed. In such a continuous performance, the results of the advance determination for multiple reserved balls can be executed using a series of performances, so that the possibility of a winning ball being included in the target lottery is higher than in a performance based on the result of a single lottery, and the player can pay attention to the performance. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a new reserved ball is acquired during the period in which the continuous performance is being executed, the reserved pattern corresponding to the new reserved ball is additionally displayed in addition to the reserved pattern indicating the reserved ball that is the target of the continuous performance, so that it becomes difficult for the player to determine which reserved patterns are the target of the continuous performance, and the performance effect is reduced. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can easily notify the player of the reserved patterns that are the target of the performance in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to gaming machine AD1, the display mode showing the number of memories displayed on the display means can be variably set to either show the number of memories stored in the storage means or show information showing the number of effects depending on the conditions that are met, providing players with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine having the configuration of gaming machine AD1, it is preferable to provide a second display means capable of constantly displaying the number of memories stored in the memory means, separate from the display means. This makes it possible to reliably notify the player of the number of memories in the memory means that affects the outcome of the game. In this case, the second display means may be provided in the vicinity of the above-mentioned display means (for example, in the same liquid crystal display device), or may be configured to notify by the light emission mode of a light-emitting means such as an LED.

The second display means may be configured to display the number of times stored in the storage means during the period when the information indicating the number of effects is displayed on the display means. Furthermore, the second display means may be configured to be less noticeable than the display means. This configuration allows the player to focus on the display mode displayed on the display means, thereby enhancing the effect of the effects.

In addition, when the display means displays information indicating the number of times the effect is performed, it may be configured to display the number of times stored in the storage means corresponding to the number of determinations performed during the effect period, or it may be configured to display based on the length of the effect period (for example, displaying one every 30 seconds). Also, a display showing the number of times the third symbol stops (including temporary stops) during the effect period may be used.

<Feature AE group> (Preview effect executed only when the background is changed)
The gaming machine AE1 has an operation means operable by a player, an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating that a prescribed operation has been performed on the operation means, a presentation mode varying means for varying a presentation mode based on a discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, a presentation execution means for executing a presentation according to the presentation mode varied by the presentation mode varying means, and a special presentation execution means for executing a special presentation when a variable timing at which the presentation mode is varied by the presentation mode varying means satisfies a specific condition.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball in a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, some machines execute suggestive effects to make the player play while expecting that the lottery result will be a success. In order to increase the variety of the suggestive effects, some machines are configured to change the mode in which the suggestive effects are executed (for example, JP 2010-213999 A). Furthermore, some machines change the mode (background) in which the suggestive effects are executed based on the player's operation of the operating means. In such gaming machines, a dedicated suggestive effect is executed according to the set mode, providing the player with a variety of effects and enhancing the effect of the effects. However, there is a problem in that after seeing the dedicated effects corresponding to each mode, the player's willingness to operate the operating means and change the mode decreases. The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows players to voluntarily change modes.

The gaming machine AE1 is configured to be able to execute special effects when the presentation mode is changed, so that it is possible to execute effects at the mode switching timing that would not be experienced even if the player played for a long period of time during the period in which each mode is set. This makes it possible to motivate players who wish to experience various presentations to operate the operating means.

<Feature AF group> (A period during which the current mode is notified and a period during which the current mode is not notified are provided, and even during the non-notification periods, the current mode can be known by button operation.)
A gaming machine AF1 has a mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of presentation modes, a presentation execution means capable of executing a presentation corresponding to the presentation mode set by the mode setting means, a presentation mode notification means capable of notifying the presentation mode set by the mode setting means, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the presentation mode notification means notifies information indicating the presentation mode set by the mode setting means when the operation determination means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means during a predetermined first period or a second period different from the first period. According to the gaming machine AF1, a period during which the presentation mode is notified and a period during which the presentation mode is not notified are set, and the presentation mode can be notified based on the operation on the operation means even during the period during which the presentation mode is not notified. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means in order to understand the presentation mode. In this case, when the second period is not being operated on the operation means, it is preferable to configure the display device to notify other information related to the game, for example, to notify the dynamic display speed of the identification information or suggestive information suggesting the discrimination result of the discrimination means. In this way, during the second period, the player can select the game information he or she desires based on the player's operation on the operation means.

<Feature AG group> (Step up the button vibration)
The gaming machine AG1 is characterized by having an operating means operable by a player, an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, a vibration means capable of vibrating the operating means, a vibration amount varying means capable of varying the amount of vibration with which the operating means is vibrated to different vibration amounts, a period setting means for setting a variable period during which the vibration amount varying means can vary the amount of vibration based on the determination result of the operation determination means, and a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect that suggests that the variable period has been set by the period setting means. According to the gaming machine AG1, a suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the amount of vibration of the operating means is variable, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

<Feature AH Group> (The color of the button indicates the speed of the pattern change)
A gaming machine AH1 comprising: a determining means for performing a predetermined determination, a dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the determination result by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period of time, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means operable by a player, an operation determining means for determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, an operation performance executing means for executing a predetermined performance based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and a mode changing means for changing the mode of the operating means, wherein the mode changing means changes the mode when the dynamic display speed of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means changes from a first speed to a second speed slower than the first speed. According to the gaming machine AH1, the dynamic display speed of the identification information can be grasped from the mode of the operating means.

<Feature AI Group> (The background changes depending on the combination of the stopping symbols)
A gaming machine AI1 having a discrimination means for performing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying an identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means for a predetermined period of time, a stop display means for displaying the identification information in a specific display mode when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific display mode by the stop display means, the stop display means being capable of displaying a plurality of display modes as the predetermined display mode, a performance mode changing means for changing a performance mode based on the predetermined display mode stopped and displayed by the stop display means, and a performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode changed by the performance mode changing means. According to the gaming machine A11, even if the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined identification information, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode. In this case, it is preferable to configure the stop display mode so that the player can select the stop display mode when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined stop display mode. Specifically, it is preferable that the player can select one of a plurality of stop display modes by operating an operating means that the player can operate.

<Feature AJ group> (Prevention of early detection during preparatory drive of role action)
A gaming machine AJ1 comprising a display means for executing a predetermined presentation display, a presentation display control means for making the display means execute the presentation display based on a predetermined presentation scenario, a moving means for executing a predetermined presentation operation, a presentation operation control means for making the moving means execute the presentation operation based on the predetermined presentation scenario, and a presentation scenario setting means for setting one presentation scenario from a plurality of presentation scenarios as the presentation scenario, the moving means being configured to be movable at least from a first position to a second position different from the first position, a preparation movement control means for executing a preparation movement for moving the moving means to an initial position of the presentation operation, and the preparation movement control means executing the preparation movement before the presentation display is executed by the presentation display control means based on the presentation scenario. According to the gaming machine AJ1, by performing the preparation movement in advance, a presentation based on the presentation scenario can be reliably executed. Furthermore, since the preparation movement control is configured to be performed separately from the presentation operation based on the presentation scenario, the preparation movement can be performed in either case of the presentation operation being executed or not executed, so that even if the moving means is made to perform the preparation movement, it is difficult for the player to know whether the presentation operation will be executed or not.

<Feature AK group> (Replace the look-ahead results according to the operation status of the reels)
a display means for displaying identification information showing a result of the determination made by the determination means; and a bonus being awarded when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, the gaming machine comprising: an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a determination means for executing a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means; a display means for displaying identification information showing a result of the determination made by the determination means; and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a first predetermined number until the determination is made on the information; a pre-determination means for pre-determining the information stored in the storage means before dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started; a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode of a specific performance based on a result of the pre-determination made by the pre-determination means; a specific performance execution means for executing the specific performance corresponding to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means at a specific timing; and a performance mode replacement means for setting a replacement performance mode different from the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means as the performance mode of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means when a specific condition is established at a timing when the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance. According to the gaming machine AK1, the performance mode set based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means can be replaced with a replacement performance mode, so that a performance according to the situation can be executed and the performance effect can be improved. In this case, it is preferable to use the movable mode of the movable means that can move within a predetermined range as the performance mode that can be set by the performance mode setting means, and to replace the performance mode by the performance mode replacement means based on the position information of the movable means. Specifically, when the position information of the movable means is obtained as a position where it is difficult to execute the movable mode, for example, position information indicating a position different from the initial position of the movable mode, it is preferable to configure the performance mode replacement means to set a performance mode that does not use the movable means, for example, a performance mode that uses only the display means, as the replacement performance mode. In addition, by providing a movement control means that moves the above-mentioned movable means based on the operation of the operation means that the player can operate, and using the above-mentioned technical idea in a gaming machine with improved performance effect, the effect of the performance mode replacement means is more prominent.

<Feature AL group> (Setting the timing of the demo operation valid period varies depending on the game state)
a game state setting means for setting a first game state in which a first period is likely to be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and a second game state in which a second period is likely to be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, the game state setting means being capable of setting a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is established in a state in which the dynamic display execution means is not executing dynamic display of the identification information; The gaming machine AL1 has an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on a stage, an operation performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, and a valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period during which the operation discrimination means can effectively discriminate that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the valid period setting means sets a start timing of the valid period so that the period from when the standby state is set to when the valid period is set is longer when the second period is set by the game state setting means than when the first period is set. According to the gaming machine AL1, the setting timing of the operation valid period for effectively discriminating an operation on the operation means can be made different depending on the set game state, so that it is possible to prevent an operation from being carelessly performed. In addition, when a notification means for notifying a player that the operation valid period has been set is provided, it is possible to prevent the notification means from being frequently notified. In addition, it is preferable to configure the discrimination means so that it is easier to execute the discrimination while the second game state is set. This makes it possible to make the second game state a more advantageous game state than the first game state. In this case, even if a standby state is set during the second gaming state, the standby state can be ended in a short period of time.

<Features AM group>
A gaming machine AM1 having a power supply means capable of supplying power to a gaming machine, an alarm means capable of executing a predetermined alarm based on the power supply by the power supply means being started, an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the end of the alarm executed by the alarm means, a playback means capable of playing predetermined audio data based on the power supply by the power supply means being started, and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data played by the playback means, characterized in that it further comprises a playback start position setting means for setting a playback start position of the audio data played by the playback means in accordance with the mode of the alarm by the alarm means.

Conventionally, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, display an initial screen when the power is turned on to notify the player that the power has been turned on (for example, JP 2016-005505 A). For such gaming machines, there has been a demand for the gaming situation when the power is turned on to be easier to understand. The objective of this invention is to provide the above gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

The gaming machine AM1 has a power supply means capable of supplying power to the gaming machine, a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of the supply of power by the power supply means, a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the end of the notification executed by the notification means, a playback means capable of playing predetermined audio data based on the start of the supply of power by the power supply means, and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data played by the playback means, and is provided with a playback start position setting means for setting a playback start position according to the mode of the notification by the notification means as the playback start position of the audio data played by the playback means. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

A gaming machine AM2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AM1, the playback start position setting means sets the playback start position so that the playback position at the end of the audio data is played in accordance with the end timing of the notification.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AM1, gaming machine AM2 has the effect of being able to output sound more appropriately.

A gaming machine AM3, which is a gaming machine AM1 or AM2, is characterized in that the playback means repeatedly plays the audio data at least until the specified performance ends.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AM1 and AM2, gaming machine AM3 has the effect of being able to output the sound more optimally because the playback means repeatedly plays back the sound data at least until the specified performance ends.

A gaming machine AM4 is characterized in that it is provided with an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution conditions for the predetermined performance are met based on the start of the supply of power by the power supply means in any one of the gaming machines AM1 to AM3, and the playback means plays the audio data based on the execution determination means determining that the execution conditions are met.

Amusement machine AM4 has, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AM1 to AM3, an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution conditions for the predetermined performance are met based on the start of the supply of power by the power supply means, and the playback means plays the audio data based on the execution determination means determining that the execution conditions are met, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

<Characteristic AN group>
a game machine having a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing a display means to dynamically display identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means for a predetermined period of time, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus based on the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means being statically displayed in a specific display mode, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation discrimination means for discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the game machine AN1 being characterized in having a speed setting means for setting at least a first speed and a second speed slower than the first speed as the dynamic display speed of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, and a period shortening means for shortening a first period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed at the first speed when the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means is a specific discrimination result.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives an advantage to the player is executed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). There has been a demand for such gaming machines to further increase the entertainment value of the game. The objective of this invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game among the above-mentioned gaming machines.

The gaming machine AN1 has a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means for a predetermined period of time, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation discrimination means for discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, a performance mode changing means for changing the performance mode based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, a performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode changed by the performance mode changing means, and a variable timing setting means for setting the timing for changing the performance mode based on the dynamic display speed of the identification information when it is determined by the operation discrimination means that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine AN2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AN1, it has a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and the performance execution means executes different performances depending on the dynamic display speed of the identification information set by the speed setting means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AN1, the gaming machine AN2 provides different effects depending on the dynamic display speed of the identification information, which encourages the player to actively operate the operating means. This has the effect of preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine AN3 is characterized in that it has a second operating means different from the operating means, a second operation discrimination means capable of discriminating that a predetermined second operation has been performed on the second operating means, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when the second operation is performed while the first period is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AN2, gaming machine AN3 allows the player to select whether to operate the operating means or the second operating means during the first period, which increases the player's motivation to participate in the game. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic AO group>
a game machine AO1 comprising: an operation means operable by a player; an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means; an operation timing discrimination means capable of discriminating the operation timing at which the operation discrimination means discriminates that the predetermined operation has been performed within a predetermined first period; a presentation mode setting means for setting a presentation mode for a second period which is set after the first period based on a discrimination result of the operation timing discrimination means; and a presentation execution means for executing a presentation according to the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means, wherein the presentation execution means executes, during the first period, a suggestion presentation which suggests the presentation mode for the second period set by the presentation mode setting means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives an advantage to the player is executed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). There has been a demand for such gaming machines to further increase the entertainment value of the game. The objective of this invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game among the above-mentioned gaming machines.

The gaming machine AO1 has an operation means operable by a player, an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, an operation timing discrimination means capable of discriminating the operation timing at which the operation discrimination means discriminates that the predetermined operation has been performed within a predetermined first period, a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode for a second period set after the first period based on the discrimination result of the operation timing discrimination means, and a performance execution means for executing a performance according to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means, and the performance execution means executes a suggestive performance during the first period that suggests the performance mode for the second period set by the performance mode setting means. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine AO2 has a measuring means for measuring the number of times that it is determined that the specified operation has been performed within the first period, and the presentation mode setting means sets the presentation mode during the second period based on the operation timing at which the number of times that the predetermined operation has been performed measured by the measuring means becomes a specific number.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AO1, the gaming machine AO2 provides different effects depending on the dynamic display speed of the identification information, which encourages the player to actively operate the operating means. This has the effect of preventing players from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine AO3, characterized in that in the gaming machine AO2, the performance execution means executes a unified performance that does not suggest the performance mode during the second period set by the performance mode setting means when the number of discriminations measured by the measurement means is a predetermined number that is less than the specific number.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AO2, gaming machine AO3 can prevent players from quickly grasping the presentation mode set in the second period. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

<Feature AP group>
a display control means for controlling a display mode to be displayed on the display means when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means reaches a second predetermined number not greater than the first predetermined number; and a mode ending means for ending the display of the specific display mode when at least a third predetermined number not greater than the second predetermined number of pieces of information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means has been used for the determination by the determination means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives an advantage to the player is executed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). There has been a demand for such gaming machines to further increase the entertainment value of the game. The objective of this invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game among the above-mentioned gaming machines.

According to the gaming machine AP1, the gaming machine is provided with: an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a discrimination means for executing a discrimination triggered by the establishment of a discrimination condition based on the information acquired by the acquisition means; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result; a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect to show the discrimination result of the discrimination means; a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a first predetermined number at least until the discrimination condition for the information is established; a display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode; a display control means capable of displaying a specific display mode as a display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means becoming a second predetermined number not greater than the first predetermined number; and a mode termination means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on at least a third predetermined number not greater than the second predetermined number of pieces of information stored in the storage means at the time the specific display mode was displayed by the display control means being used for discrimination by the discrimination means. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine AP2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AP1, a second display control means is provided that causes the display means to display a number suggestion mode that suggests the number of remaining judgments to be executed by the judgment means until the end of the specific display mode.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AP1, gaming machine AP2 is equipped with a second display control means for causing the display means to display a count suggestion mode indicating the number of remaining determinations to be made by the determination means until the end of the specific display mode, thereby realizing a display mode that is easier for players to understand.

A gaming machine AP3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AP2, a third display control means is provided for displaying an information number indication mode, which indicates the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means, in a manner that is difficult to distinguish from the number indication mode when the specific display mode is not displayed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AP2, gaming machine AP3 has a third display control means for displaying an information number suggesting mode, which suggests the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means, in a manner that is difficult to distinguish from the number suggesting mode when the specific display mode is not displayed, thereby providing the effect of allowing the player to easily understand the meaning of the number suggesting mode.

A gaming machine AP4, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine AP2 or AP3, the second display control means increases the number of times suggested by the number suggestion mode if a predetermined specific condition is met when new information is stored in the storage means while the specific display mode is being displayed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AP2 and AP3, gaming machine AP4 has the effect of increasing the number of times suggested by the number suggesting mode if a predetermined specific condition is met when new information is stored in the storage means while the specific display mode is being displayed, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic AQ group>
The gaming machine AQ1 is characterized by comprising: a discrimination means which makes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means which executes a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; a specific effect execution means which executes a specific effect to indicate the discrimination result of the discrimination means; and a suggestion effect execution means which executes a suggestion effect capable of suggesting the type of the specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during the execution of the specific effect.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives an advantage to the player is executed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). There has been a demand for such gaming machines to further increase the entertainment value of the game. The objective of this invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game among the above-mentioned gaming machines.

The gaming machine AQ1 is provided with a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined specific discrimination result, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect to indicate the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting the type of the specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during the execution of the specific effect. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine AQ1 is provided with a type determination means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect in which a first performance pattern is executed at least a specific period of time after the start of the specific effect, and a second specific effect in which a second performance pattern different from the first performance pattern is executed at least a specific period of time after the start of the specific effect, as the type of specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, and the suggested effect execution means executes the suggested effect based on the fact that the specific condition is established before the specific period of time has elapsed.

According to gaming machine AQ2, in addition to the effect of gaming machine AQ1, the type of specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means is provided with a type determination means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect in which a first performance mode is executed at least a specific period of time after the start of the specific effect, and a second specific effect in which a second performance mode different from the first performance mode is executed at least the specific period of time after the start of the specific effect, and the suggested effect execution means executes the suggested effect based on the specific condition being established before the specific period of time has elapsed. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine AQ3 is characterized in that it is equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player in the gaming machine AQ1 or AQ2, and the specific condition is established based on an operation being performed on the operating means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AQ1 and AQ2, gaming machine AQ3 is equipped with an operating means that can be operated by the player, and the specific condition is established based on an operation being performed on the operating means, so that a player who wishes to execute a suggestive presentation can be made to actively operate the operating means. This has the effect of realizing a presentation style that suits the player's preferences.

<Feature AR group>
A gaming machine AR1 comprising: a mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of presentation modes; a presentation execution means capable of executing a presentation corresponding to the presentation mode set by the mode setting means; a presentation mode notification means capable of notifying the presentation mode set by the mode setting means; a suppression period setting means for setting a suppression period during which notification of the presentation mode by the presentation mode notification means is suppressed based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition; and a notification control means for causing the presentation mode notification means to notify the presentation mode based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition during the suppression period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives an advantage to the player is executed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). There has been a demand for such gaming machines to further increase the entertainment value of the game. The objective of this invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game.

The gaming machine AR1 is equipped with a mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of presentation modes, a presentation execution means capable of executing a presentation corresponding to the presentation mode set by the mode setting means, a presentation mode notification means capable of notifying the presentation mode set by the mode setting means, a suppression period setting means for setting a suppression period during which notification of the presentation mode by the presentation mode notification means is suppressed based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, and a notification control means for causing the presentation mode notification means to notify the presentation mode based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition during the suppression period. This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AR2, comprising an operating means operable by a player, and an effect type determination means for determining, as the type of effect to be executed by the effect execution means, one type from among a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on detection of a first operation on the operating means during a specific period included in the effect period, the suppression period setting means for setting the suppression period for at least the specific period, and the effect mode notification means for notifying the effect mode based on detection of the first operation on the operating means during a period different from the suppression period.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AR1, the gaming machine AR2 is provided with an operation means operable by a player, and an effect type determination means for determining, as the type of effect to be executed by the effect execution means, one type from among a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on detection of a first operation on the operation means during a specific period included in the effect period, the suppression period setting means sets the suppression period for at least the specific period, and the effect mode notification means notifies the effect mode based on detection of the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. This has the effect of improving convenience for the player.

A gaming machine AQ3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AQ2, the second condition is met when a second operation different from the first operation is executed on the operating means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AQ2, gaming machine AQ3 has the effect of further improving convenience for the player because the second condition is met when a second operation different from the first operation is executed on the operating means.

<Characteristic AS group>
a specific control execution means for executing a specific effect during one effect period, during which an operation on the operation means is treated as valid; a specific control execution means for executing a specific control based on an operation on the operation means during the valid period; a control type determination means for determining, as the type of specific control executed by the specific control execution means, one type from a plurality of types including at least a first control and a second control; and a specific effect type determination means for determining, as the type of specific effect, one type from a plurality of types including at least a first type in which the first control is more likely to be executed when a specific number of operations are performed on the operation means during one valid period, and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the specific number of operations are performed than the first type.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives an advantage to the player is executed (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). There has been a demand for such gaming machines to further increase the entertainment value of the game. The objective of this invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game among the above-mentioned gaming machines.

The gaming machine AS1 includes an operating means operable by a player, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect during one effect period, during which an effective period is set for treating operations on the operating means as effective, a specific control execution means for executing a specific control based on an operation on the operating means during the effective period, a control type determination means for determining one type of specific control executed by the specific control execution means from a plurality of types including at least a first control and a second control, and a specific effect type determination means for determining one type of specific effect from a plurality of types including at least a first type in which the first control is more likely to be executed when a specific number of operations are performed on the operating means during one effective period, and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the specific number of operations are performed than the first type. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine AS2 in which the specific effects in the gaming machine AS1 are characterized in that the correspondence between the number of operations on the operating means during the valid period and the type of control that is likely to be determined by the control type determination means is predetermined for each type of specific effects.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AS1, the gaming machine AS2 has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game, since the correspondence between the number of operations on the operating means during the effective period and the type of control that is likely to be determined by the control type determination means is predetermined for each type of specific effect.

A gaming machine AS3, in which the first control is a control for vibrating the operating means with a first vibration intensity in the gaming machine AS1 or AS2, and the second control is a control for vibrating the operating means with a second vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity.

According to gaming machine AS3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine AS1 or AS2, the first control is a control for vibrating the operating means at a first vibration intensity, and the second control is a control for vibrating the operating means at a second vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity, so that by checking the vibration intensity of the operating means, the type of specific presentation can be easily understood.

A gaming machine AS4, which is one of the gaming machines AS1 to AS3, is characterized in that the correspondence between the number of operations on the operating means during the valid period and the type of control that is likely to be determined by the control type determination means is predetermined for each type of specific effect.

The gaming machine AS4 is equipped with a display means capable of displaying the display mode in addition to the effect of any one of AS1 to AS3, and a display control means for causing the display means to display the history of the control executed by the specific control execution means during the execution period of one specific effect. This has the effect of making it easy for the player to understand the type of specific effect that has been executed, thereby improving convenience for the player.

<Characteristic AT group>
A gaming machine AT1 having an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation discrimination means that can discern that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and an operation presentation execution means that can execute a predetermined operation presentation based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, further comprising an operation presentation setting means that sets one of a plurality of operation presentations as the operation presentation executed by the operation presentation execution means, and a mode changing means that can change the mode of the operation means, wherein the mode changing means changes the mode of the operation means to a mode that suggests the one operation presentation set by the operation presentation setting means.

Here, conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed. (For example, JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game. The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the game.

The gaming machine AT1 has an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation discrimination means that can discriminate whether a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and an operation performance execution means that can execute a predetermined operation performance based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means. The gaming machine also has an operation performance setting means that sets one of a plurality of operation performances as the operation performance executed by the operation performance execution means, and a mode changing means that can change the mode of the operation means, and the mode changing means changes the mode of the operation means to a mode that suggests the one operation performance set by the operation performance setting means. This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AT2 is characterized in that the gaming machine AT1 has a light-emitting means for illuminating an area of the operating means that is visible to the player, and the mode-changing means changes the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AT1, the gaming machine AT2 has the following effects. That is, it has a light-emitting means for illuminating an area of the operating means that is visible to the player, and the mode-changing means changes the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means. This has the effect of making it possible to easily notify the player who is about to operate the operating means of the current situation.

A gaming machine AT3, which is an AT1 or AT2 gaming machine, has a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means on a display means for a predetermined period of time, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means being displayed stationary in a specific display mode, and the operation presentation setting means is capable of setting different operation presentations during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

The gaming machine AT3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AT1 or AT2. That is, it has a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means on the display means for a predetermined period of time, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means being displayed stationary in a specific display mode, and the operation performance setting means is capable of setting different operation performances during the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

As a result, different operational effects can be set during one dynamic display period, allowing the player to enjoy the timing of operating the operating means. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic AU group>
a first dynamic display type in which a first mode is displayed at least a specific period of time after the dynamic display is started, and a second dynamic display type in which a second mode different from the first mode is displayed at least a specific period of time after the dynamic display is started, the second dynamic display type being a ... dynamic display type being a type in which a first dynamic display type is displayed at least a specific dynamic display type being a type in which a second dynamic display type is displayed at least a specific dynamic display type being a type in which a second dynamic display type is displayed at least a specific dynamic display type being a type in which a second dynamic display type is displayed at least a specific dynamic display type being a type in which a

Here, conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed. (For example, JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game. The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine AU1, the gaming machine is provided with a display means capable of displaying identification information, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information to indicate the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means, a mode selection means for selecting one mode from a plurality of types including at least a first dynamic display type in which a first mode is displayed at least after a specific period has elapsed since the dynamic display was started, and a second dynamic display type in which a second mode different from the first mode is displayed after the specific period has elapsed, as the type of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means, a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information until the specific period has elapsed, and a specific performance type determination means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a first specific performance that can suggest that the first mode will be displayed and a second specific performance that can suggest that the second mode will be displayed, as the type of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AU1, the specific performance execution means is configured to be capable of displaying a miss performance pattern that indicates a miss judgment result different from the specific judgment result multiple times during the execution period of one of the specific performances, and the first specific performance is a first combination of the miss performance patterns displayed during the execution period of one of the specific performances, and the second specific performance is a second combination of the miss performance patterns displayed during the execution period of one of the specific performances that is different from the first combination.

Gaming machine AU2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine AU1. That is, the specific effect execution means is configured to be able to display a miss effect pattern that indicates a miss judgment result different from the specific judgment result multiple times during the execution period of one of the specific effects, and the first specific effect is a first combination of the miss effect patterns displayed during the execution period of one of the specific effects, and the second specific effect is a second combination of the miss effect patterns displayed during the execution period of one of the specific effects that is different from the first combination. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature AV group>
A gaming machine AV1 having a presentation control means capable of executing presentation control to execute a predetermined presentation, the presentation control means having a presentation mode setting means for setting the presentation mode of the presentation, and an output means capable of outputting presentation information indicating the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means, the gaming machine AV1 having a first presentation control means for causing a first presentation means to execute a predetermined first presentation operation based on the presentation information output by the output means, and a second presentation control means for causing a second presentation means different from the first presentation means to execute a predetermined second presentation operation based on the presentation information output by the output means, the first presentation control means having a specific information output means for outputting specific information included in the presentation information output by the output means to the second presentation control means.

Here, conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed. (For example, JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game. The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine AV1, in a gaming machine having a presentation control means capable of executing presentation control to execute a predetermined presentation, the presentation control means has a presentation mode setting means for setting the presentation mode of the presentation, and an output means capable of outputting presentation information indicating the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means, and has a first presentation control means for causing a first presentation means to execute a predetermined first presentation operation based on the presentation information output by the output means, and a second presentation control means for causing a second presentation means different from the first presentation means to execute a predetermined second presentation operation based on the presentation information output by the output means, and the first presentation control means has a specific information output means for outputting specific information included in the presentation information output by the output means to the second presentation control means. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine AV2, characterized in that in the gaming machine AV1, the presentation mode setting means is capable of setting an overlapping presentation mode using at least the first presentation action and the second presentation action, the output means outputs the presentation information indicating the overlapping presentation mode to the first presentation control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second presentation action from among the overlapping presentation modes as the specific information to the second presentation control means.

The gaming machine AV2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AV1. That is, the presentation mode setting means is capable of setting an overlapping presentation mode using at least the first presentation action and the second presentation action, the output means outputs the presentation information indicating the overlapping presentation mode to the first presentation control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second presentation action from among the overlapping presentation modes as the specific information to the second presentation control means. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine AV3, characterized in that in the gaming machine AV2, the presentation mode setting means sets the overlapping presentation mode so that the start timing of the first presentation action is earlier than the start timing of the second presentation action.

According to the gaming machine AV3, the presentation mode setting means sets the overlapping presentation mode so that the start timing of the first presentation action is earlier than the start timing of the second presentation action. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature AW group>
a first performance execution means for executing a first performance using a performance member that is movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position when a first performance condition is established while a first performance period is set by the performance period setting means; and a second performance execution means for executing a second performance different from the first performance using a display means when a second performance condition different from the first performance condition is established while the first performance period is set, wherein the gaming machine AW1 has: a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance using the performance member and the display means during a specific performance period within the first performance period; a movable status determination means for determining a movable status of the performance member; and a special performance execution means for executing a special performance different from the specific performance during the specific performance period when the determination result of the movable status determination means is a specific determination result.

Here, conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed. (For example, JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game. The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine AW1, in a gaming machine having a performance period setting means capable of setting a predetermined performance period, a first performance execution means capable of executing a first performance using a performance member that can move from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position when a first performance condition is established while a first performance period is set by the performance period setting means, and a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance using a display means when a second performance condition different from the first performance condition is established while the first performance period is set, the gaming machine has a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance using the performance member and the display means during a specific performance period within the first performance period, a movable state discrimination means for discriminating the movable state of the performance member, and a special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance different from the specific performance during the specific performance period when the discrimination result of the movable state discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine AW2, characterized in that in the gaming machine AW1, the movable state determination means determines that the specific determination result is true when the performance member is not located in the first position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AW1, gaming machine AW2 has the following effect. That is, the movable state determination means determines that the specific determination result is true when the performance member is not located in the first position. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine AW3, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine AW1 or AW2, the special effect execution means executes the special effect using the display means.

According to the gaming machine AW3, the special effect execution means executes the special effect using the display means. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Any of the gaming machines AW1 to AW3 has an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first presentation condition is established when the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed.

Gaming machine AW4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines AW1 to AW3. That is, it has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first presentation condition is met when the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine AW4 has a validity period setting means capable of setting an operation validity period during which the operation determination means can effectively determine that the specified operation has been performed on the operation means, and a period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation validity period has been set by the validity period setting means.

Gaming machine AW5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine AW4. That is, it has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first presentation condition is met when the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine AW4 has a validity period setting means capable of setting an operation validity period during which the operation determination means effectively determines that the specified operation has been performed on the operation means, and a period display means for displaying on the display means that the operation validity period has been set by the validity period setting means. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Features AX group>
a game state setting means for setting a first game state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and a second game state in which a second period which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period can be set; a standby state setting means for setting a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is established; an operation means that can be operated by a player; an operation determination means for determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means; and an operation presentation execution means for executing a predetermined presentation based on a determination result of the operation determination means, wherein the operation determination means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed when the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, and the game machine AX1 has a standby condition variable setting means for variably setting the standby condition based on the game state set by the game state setting means.

Here, conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed. (For example, JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game. The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine AX1, there are a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means on a display means for a predetermined period, a game state setting means for setting a first game state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and a second game state in which a second period that is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period can be set, a standby state setting means for setting a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is established, an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation discrimination means for discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and an operation performance execution means for discriminating that a predetermined performance is executed based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, and the operation discrimination means effectively discriminates that the predetermined operation has been performed when the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, and has a standby condition variable setting means for variably setting the standby condition based on the game state set by the game state setting means. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AX1, the waiting condition is established when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means reaches a predetermined period, and the waiting condition variable setting means variably sets the waiting condition so that the waiting condition is less likely to be established when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. In the gaming machine AX2,

Gaming machine AX2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine AX1. That is, the waiting condition is met when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means reaches a predetermined period, and the waiting condition variable setting means variably sets the waiting condition so that the waiting condition is less likely to be met when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine AX3, which is a gaming machine AX1 or AX2, is characterized in that the second gaming state is easier to determine by the determination means than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine AX3, the second gaming state is easier to be determined by the determination means than the first gaming state. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Among the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the necessary condition being that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the gaming medium include coins, medals, etc.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which is operated to launch a ball into a predetermined gaming area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) according to the number of winning balls is given.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as a gaming medium, and a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
Conventionally, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, display an initial screen when the power is turned on to notify the player that the power has been turned on (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2016-005505 A).
However, there has been a demand for making the gaming situation easier to understand when the power is turned on.
This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 has a power supply means capable of supplying power to the gaming machine, an alarm means capable of executing a predetermined alarm based on the power supply by the power supply means being started, an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the end of the alarm executed by the alarm means, a playback means capable of playing back predetermined audio data based on the power supply by the power supply means being started, and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data played by the playback means, and is provided with a playback start position setting means for setting a playback start position according to the manner of the alarm by the alarm means as the playback start position of the audio data played by the playback means.
A gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, in which the playback start position setting means sets the playback start position so that the playback position of the end of the audio data is played in accordance with the end timing of the notification.
A gaming machine according to a third technical concept is the gaming machine according to the first or second technical concept, wherein the reproducing means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined performance is completed.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is a gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, which is provided with an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution conditions for the specified presentation are met based on the start of the supply of power by the power supply means, and the playback means plays the audio data based on the execution determination means determining that the execution conditions are met.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the gaming machine has a power supply means capable of supplying power to the gaming machine, an alarm means capable of executing a predetermined alarm based on the power supply by the power supply means being started, a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the end of the alarm executed by the alarm means, a playback means capable of playing predetermined audio data based on the power supply by the power supply means being started, and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data played by the playback means, and is provided with a playback start position setting means for setting a playback start position according to the mode of the alarm by the alarm means as the playback start position of the audio data played by the playback means.
This has the effect of providing a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the playback start position setting means sets the playback start position so that the playback position at the end of the audio data is played in accordance with the end timing of the notification.
This has the effect of enabling the sound to be output more appropriately.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines described in Technical Idea 1 or 2, the playback means repeatedly plays back the audio data at least until the specified presentation ends, thereby providing the effect of more optimal audio output.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, the gaming machine is provided with an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution conditions for the specified presentation are met based on the start of the supply of power by the power supply means, and the playback means plays the audio data based on the determination by the execution determination means that the execution conditions are met.
This has the effect of providing a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

10 Pachinko machines (amusement machines)

Claims (1)

A launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area;
A first ball entry means through which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the ball;
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means is satisfied;
a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
a determination means for determining whether a game has been completed based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied,
a means for generating a specific game state based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result;
A second ball entry means, which is different from the first ball entry means, and which allows the game balls launched by the launching means to enter the ball entry means;
a displacement means capable of displacing between a first position where it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the first position;
a displacement control means capable of at least executing a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the second position to the first position, and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the first position to the second position;
the displacement control means is configured to execute the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation in which the displacement means is located at the first position by the first displacement control;
The gaming machine includes:
When a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, a predetermined value is awarded to a player,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be capable of generating at least a first mode based on the judgment being executed by the judgment means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a third mode based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means.

Images